CopyriglitW. 
 

o^^ ;^^z^;?2^ ^^W^-^^^W '^^^^^^^^ (^f/^. 
 
 
 ^-/S. 
 
XHK 
 
 CONSTRUCTOR 
 
 A HAND-BOOK 
 
 MACHINE DESIGN 
 
 F. REULEAUX 
 
 Professor at the Royal Technical High School at Berlin, Royal Privy Cotincillor, 
 
 Member of the Royal Technical Deputation, 
 
 Corresponding Member of the Institute of Lombardy and of the Swedish Technical Society, 
 
 Foreign Member of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Stockholm, 
 
 Honorary Member of the Technical Societies of Riga and Erfurt, 
 
 of the Technical Society of Frankfurt a M., of the Society of Arts of Geneva, 
 
 of the Flora Society of Cologne, of the American Philosophical Society 
 
 and of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
 
 With Portrait and over 1200 Illustrations 
 
 AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION 
 
 COMPLETE AND UNABRIDGED 
 FROM THE Fourth Enlarged German Edition 
 
 HENRY HARRISON SUPLEE, B. Sc, 
 
 Member of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers 
 Member of thg Franklin Institute 
 
 H. H. SUPLEE 
 
 WEST CHELTEN AVENUE 
 1893 
 
Copyright, 1890, by John M. Davis. 
 
 Copyright, 1893, by Henry Harrison Suplee. 
 
 Entered at Stationers Hall. 
 
 l(r 
 
 Si^l^ 
 
Translator's Preface. 
 
 In presenting to the engineering profession of England and America this translation of 
 Reuleaux's Constructor, a few prefatory remarks may be permitted. Although the first edition 
 of the German work appeared as long ago as 1861, and translations have been made into French, 
 Swedish and Russian, no English translation has hitherto been made, notwithstanding the fact 
 that repeated editions and enlargements of the original German work have appeared. 
 
 The translation here given, therefore, is the first presentation to English speaking engi- 
 neers of a work which during the past thirty years has acquired the highest reputation over all 
 Europe, and is so well known to German reading engineers and students in this country that no 
 excuse is needed for its present appearance. 
 
 The freedom with which the author has drawn from English and American sources as well 
 as from Continental practice gives the work a value not found in other treatises upon machine de- 
 sign, while the vast improvement which has been made by the introduction of the kinematic 
 analysis and the resulting classification of the details of the subject, cannot fail to appeal to the 
 instructor as well as to the practising engineer. 
 
 The translation has been made from the Fourth Enlarged German Edition of 1889, the 
 last which has appeared in the original, and is complete and unabridged in every respect. The 
 introduction to this edition is especially worthy of note, as it contains the author's summary of the 
 principles set forth in his larger work on Theoretical Kinematics,* and the more so as it includes 
 a brief glance at the still wider subject included in his work on Applied Kinematics, as yet 
 unpublished in Germany, and embodying a mass of manuscript which it is trusted will at no 
 distant day be given to the public. 
 
 The work of translation has been done with the especial sanction and exclusive authoriza- 
 tion of Prof. Reuleaux, by whom also the portrait and special introduction to the American 
 edition have been furnished. 
 
 The transformation of the notation of the work from the metric system to the English 
 values has involved much labor and while it is too much to expect entire freedom from errors, not- 
 withstanding the care which has been given to this portion of the work, it is trusted that but few 
 errors will be found. It is especially requested that any corrections which may be found neces- 
 sary will kindly be sent to the translator for future use. 
 
 HENRY HARRISON SUPLEE. 
 Philadelphia, September, 1893. 
 
 * It is to be regretted that Prof. Kennedy's translation of this valuable work is now out of print, and it is hoped that a 
 7 edition may be Jssued. 
 
Author's Introduction to the American Edition. 
 
 The present translation of the Constructor places my book before a large circle of 
 readers who have been practically active and energetic in the development of machine design, 
 for no one of the technical professions has been followed by the English-speaking race with 
 more activity and success than that of the construction of machinery. I therefore take pleasure 
 in prefacing this book with a few words of special introduction. 
 
 During the series of years in which my Constructor has grown from a small beginning 
 to a large volume, the practice of machine construction has also been continuously developing, 
 so that in every new edition changes and additions have been necessary. Much new matter has 
 been added in this edition to the theoretical portion ; first, in the section on Graphical Statics, 
 cenabling many numerical calculations to be dispensed with, using in their places graphical meth- 
 <ods ; second, by the introduction of the methods of Kinematics, or the science of controlled 
 movements, a science which reduces the apparently inexhaustible complexity of machine forms 
 :to a few simple and fundamental principles, the command of which may be of extraordinary 
 -value to the engineer. I am still constantly engaged with the subject of Kinematics, especially 
 Tivith its practical applications, but on account of the pressure of other occupations I have not as 
 yet been able to carry out my intention of treating this portion of the subject in a separate work, 
 -■corresponding to my work on Theoretical Kinematics. The work already published on this 
 subject I have therefore characterized as an " outline " of a theory of machines." * 
 
 The simplification of the conceptions concerning machines to which these kinematical 
 ^studies led me, was of such importance that I have introduced the kinematical treatment into 
 ihe Constructor in various places, especially in the latter portion of the book. Even where no 
 special reference has been made to it, the theory has been followed, although the proof has been 
 omitted in order to avoid burdening the non-theoretical reader with details not absolutely neces- 
 sary for the practical application. It is in this manner that kinematical axioms have been intro- 
 duced into Chapter XVIII., where the subject of ratchets is treated. These were formerly 
 considered as devices of only minor importance, but the application of kinematical investigation 
 reveals the fact that they are of the very greatest importance, occupying a position in machine 
 construction superior to that of any other element or combination, and this notwithstanding the 
 apparent simplicity and almost insignificant appearance of the original contrivance. A similar 
 treatment has been given to the subject of Pressure organs. Chapter XXIII. Hitherto fluids, 
 such as water, steam, gas, etc., have been considered as something apart from the machine, not 
 belonging to it, but rather introduced from the outside. The idea that fluids, broadly considered, 
 are but the exact opposites of tension organs, such as ropes, chains, belts, wire cables, etc., is 
 wholly contrary to earlier conceptions, and yet it is just this introduction of the kinematic method 
 which has led to an unexpected insight and very great simplification. An illustration of this is 
 seen in the manner in which valves for pressure organs are treated as ratchets. In Chapter 
 XVIII. ratchets formed of rigid elements only are considered, but the principles there deduced 
 are applied in Chapters XXIII. to XXVI. to fluid elements with most satisfactory results. Since 
 
 * F. Reuleaux, The Kinematics of Machinery. Outlines of a Theory of Machines. Translated and edited by Alex. 
 B. W. Kennedy, C. E., London. Macmillan & Co., 1876. 
 
INTRODUCTION. v 
 
 the kinematic analysis has shown that such devices as pneumatic tubes, canal locks, and the like, 
 both ancient and modern, belong to precisely the same class of constrained combinations as 
 steam engines and water wheels, the whole subject has been condensed and simplified in a man- 
 ner not possible under the earlier conceptions. The value of the kinematic method is evident in 
 in Section 333, where fifty different combinations of pressure organs are gathered together under 
 a few and simple fundamental principles. Another instance* is shown near the end of the book 
 in the discussion of what I have called " Fluid valves." From the time of Hero of Alexandria 
 down to the present day, these fluid valves have been used in what is now seen to be a continu- 
 ous series of applications of a simple kinematical principle. These important simplifications will 
 both excuse and justify the wide departure from previous conceptions which characterizes the 
 latter part of the volume. 
 
 In regard to the other and principal object of the work, namely, the treatment of the 
 practical construction of machine details, this has not been as consistently and fully revised as I 
 had intended and desired ; chiefly owing to the long delay in the completion of the last edition. 
 In my lectures I have been able to follow the the technical advances which have been made in 
 the detailed construction of bearings, levers, cranks, connecting rods, etc., and discuss them 
 accordingly, but in the book itself many of these subjects still appear in the older dress. For 
 these imperfections the kind indulgence of the reader is requested, and in the next edition an 
 earnest endeavor will be made to bring these subjects up to ^ate. 
 
 To Mr. Henry Harrison Suplee, to whom I have given the exclusive right of translation, 
 I take this opportunity to express my particular appreciation of the great care and extraordinary 
 accuracy which he has displayed in the production of this English version, and also my gratifica- 
 tion at the care which has been given to the printing and the reproduction of the illustrations. 
 Mr. Suplee has recalculated and transformed all the'";formuIae and numerous tables into the 
 English system of measurements, and also reworked all the examples, and has shown in this 
 portion of the work a patience that deserves especial recognition. It is a matter of regret that 
 the time has not yet arrived for the general acceptance of the metric system in England and 
 America, and until such time comes tedious transformations of this sort will often be necessary 
 and will merit our gratitude, 
 
 I can only add that it is my earnest desire that the friendly acceptance of my book by 
 English speaking engineers may correspond to the magnitude of the labor which has been 
 . expended in the preparation of this translation. 
 
 F. REULEAUX, 
 Honorary Member, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 
 Berlin, February, 1803. 
 
Introduction to the Fourth German Edition. 
 
 The fourth enlarged edition of the Constructor is 
 presented to its readers much later than I had hoped. 
 As some excuse for the delay I plead the great labor 
 involved in the re-arrangement of more than half the 
 book. As already explained, it has been my intention 
 to re-arrange the matter upon a kinematical basis. 
 It was not, however, entirely due to this re-arrange- 
 ment that the work was delayed, but also to the fact 
 that nearly one-half of the work had to be re-written. 
 In many places I found almost everything lacking to 
 make what I had previously determined upon, namely, 
 a complete and consistent whole, and much more was 
 needed than I had imagined. In addition to these 
 shortcomings the spirit of invention has been more ac- 
 tive than ever during the past few years and advanced 
 at such a rapid rate that I could by no means overtake 
 it. It is hoped that these conditions may be accepted 
 as at least a partial excuse for the delay and for the 
 shortcomings of the work. 
 
 The first point to which I desire to call attention in 
 the new matter is the subject of Ratchets, which upon 
 closer examination will be found to be the most im- 
 portant of all forms of driving mechanism. This sub- 
 ject has not until now been treated as an element of 
 construction, it having been apparently overlooked that 
 those forms of driving mechanism in which pawls and 
 ratchet wheels form a part, are in reality a most 
 important and prolific class. Special forms have in- 
 deed been treated mainly as checking devices but 
 without any aitempt to indicate the general principles, 
 or wide extent of the construction. Locks, in spite of 
 their universal use and of the high order of inventive 
 talent devoted to them, have had no analytical treat- 
 ment, but have been relegated to the domain of tech- 
 nology rather by accident than otherwise, and from 
 Prechtl to Karmarsch and his followers, have been giv- 
 en an intelligent but by no means fundamental treat- 
 ment. Gun locks, although having a similar name to 
 door locks, have a very different construction, but have 
 found no resting place in technical literature. It has 
 often been observed that while we place in the hands 
 of our soldiers the modern rifles and cannon, there is 
 no place in the head for them, either in machine shop 
 training, in machine design, in applied mechanics or 
 in technology, or indeed anywhere. In §252 I have 
 placed them in that class which I have termed Locking 
 Ratchets where they fall into their proper place as 
 members of the great division of ratchet gearing. 
 The safety devices for elevators and hoisting machines, 
 — Checking Ratchets, I have termed them — have been 
 
 entirely overlooked; books have been written about 
 them, catalogues and price lists issued, but the funda- 
 mental principle of their construction quite overlooked. 
 As for escapements of clocks and watches, these have 
 been sent hither and thither, now in mechanical text 
 books, now in kinematics, now in applied mechanics, 
 again in encyclopaedias, where their fundamental prin- 
 ciple has been entirely lost, their intimate relation to 
 ratchet mechanism being hardly noticed. They will 
 here be found classified in their proper place in §258. 
 Many of the readers of previous editions may shake 
 their heads at this statement, but an examination of 
 the fourth edition will show how the action of the pis- 
 ton engine is similar in principle to a watch escape- 
 ment, the action of the slide valve being practically 
 identical with the anchor of the escapement, see §§324, 
 325, pp. 228-232. It has only been by more recent in- 
 vestigations that I have become convinced of the 
 relations of these various forms of escapements. The 
 correctness of this position will be confirmed by 
 comparing the the pneumatic postal tubes, canal locks, 
 sluices, hydraulic cranes and numerous other hydraulic 
 devices, hydraulic riveting machines, and all the many 
 kinds of direct-acting steam pumps ; these and many 
 others, when considered from the present point of view, 
 arrange themselves in a complete and orderly manner 
 as true escapements. The similarity is especially well 
 marked in the case of a deep mine pump, of which 
 the successive puffs of the exhaust are not infrequently 
 used by neighboring dwellers to indicate intervals of 
 time ; the steam end practically as well as theoretically 
 becoming a time-piece. Nay, more ; I am convinced 
 that it is not a pure accident that throughout the cen- 
 turies in which the delicate clock escapement has been 
 known, the steam engine has so slowly developed ; 
 for although both the clock and the engine are in prin- 
 ciple escapements, yet in the clock there is an escape- 
 ment of precision, and in the steam engine an 
 escapement of force,* but both devices are theoretically 
 a solution of the same problem. Closely allied to the 
 steam engine are the various water pressure engines, 
 and water pumps, which as I have shown in § 319, are 
 truly continuous ratchet trains. From the ratchet to 
 the escapement, however, what a long, long gap ! 
 The water pump and hydraulic pressure engine differ 
 from each other only in the different motion and 
 action of the valves — and yet the inventive genius of 
 
 *In my Theoretical Kinematics, I have considered the steam engine as a 
 reciprocating running ratchet train, but I have since perceived this classifica- 
 tion to be incorrect, and therefore desire toemphas=— -' ' — ='=—'-• — 
 
 ts proper classification 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 mankind required over two thousand years to make 
 that little step, (see § 325). How important, then, to 
 make this fundamental connection clear 1 
 
 Another important, and hitherto neglected subject, 
 is that of the more recent steering devices, which move 
 in either direction, or remain at rest, as required. This 
 principle has found many applications in power steer- 
 ing gear for vessels, and has even made possible the 
 solution of the difficult problem of guiding the auto- 
 matic fish-torpedo at a determinate depth. It is not 
 surprising that uncertainty should exist as to the theo- 
 retical classification of these devices. I have, how- 
 ever, shown that they are properly considered as 
 escapements, and, in fact, as escapements of a special 
 kind, which I have termed "adjustable" escapements. 
 Such adjustable escapements of rigid construction are 
 shown in § 259, and those constructed with pistons 
 and fluids, in § 329. 
 
 The chapter upon Ratchet Gearing is not only en- 
 tirely new, but it has also involved a new and more 
 elaborate treatment of many subjects discussed in 
 earlier chapters of the book. These I here only name : 
 Screw thread systems in Chapter IV. ; Thrust-bearings 
 for screw propeller shafts ; Columns ; Long distance 
 shafting transmission, etc., in § 351 ; Couplings, Fric- 
 tion gearing ; Transmission of motion by toothed gear- 
 ing (p. 128); Spiral gears (p. 141); Globoid gearing 
 (p. 142), Proportions of gearing, (§ ■226-§ 228). Rat- 
 chet wheels are treated in a similar manner to spur 
 gear wheels, to which they bear a close relation, 
 (§ 246). 
 
 From this point the book takes a fresh start, with 
 the discussion of another species of machine elements, 
 namely, Tension organs, as I have termed them, 
 (Chapters XIX. to XXII). While the elements pre- 
 viously considered approximate so closely to rigidity 
 that they may properly be termed rigid elements, those 
 which follow possess the peculiarity that they are only 
 adapted to resist tension ; these elements include 
 cords, ropes, wire, bands, belts, chains, etc. In § 262 
 it is shown how these are used in connection with 
 other elements in three distinct ways, as for "guiding," 
 for "winding," and for "driving." An examination 
 of pages 182 to 176 will make the importance of this 
 subject evident, and shows its scope to be far greater 
 than might at first have been expected. The important 
 distinction between the functions of "driving" and 
 "guiding" is shown in the discission of the differen- 
 tial tackle and the ordinary system in connection with 
 Fig 813, (p. 176). 
 
 In discussing Cord Friction (§ 264) I have attempt- 
 ed to show by a graphical representation relations not 
 otherwise easy to make clear. In § 268 I have called 
 attention to some points which should be considered 
 in connection with stiffness of ropes. The subject of 
 pocketed sheaves has been treated in connection with 
 chains, and also the chain system of boat propulsion. 
 
 In the chapter upon Belt Transmission, is intro- 
 duced a new subject and one which appears to me o^ 
 great importance, and which I have called "Specific 
 Capacity." By its use it is possible to facilitate very 
 greatly the calculations of Belting, Rope Transmission, 
 Water Transmission and even Shafting, and bring them 
 to a comparable basis, (see § 349 and § 351). 
 
 The discussions of Hemp and Cotton Rope trans- 
 mission are both new, and that of Wire Rope greatly 
 enlarged over previous editions. By the introduction 
 of the subject of the "mean deflection" (p. 198) and 
 the diagram (Fig. 884) the question of the deflection is 
 greatly simplified, and a graphical solution is also 
 given. Transmission with inclined cables, which in 
 previous editions was only given an approximate 
 solution, unsuited for long spans, is here accurately 
 discussed (assuming the catenary as a parabola) and 
 extended to long stretches of cable. This has been 
 done in view of the use of rope transmissions and 
 telegraph cables over valleys, etc. 
 
 Next follows my system of " Ring Transmission" 
 by wire rope. This offers great advantages over the 
 previous system of line" transmission, and has met 
 with much success in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
 land, as well as in America ; and further discussion of 
 it will be given hereafter. The use of chain transmis- 
 sion in mines, both in Germany and elsewhere, is dis- 
 cussed. The subject of brakes brings the book to 
 another point where a fresh start must be made. 
 
 The third group of machine elements includes 
 those called "Pressure Organs," and those are treated 
 in Chapters XXIII. to XXVI. These are directly opposed 
 to tension organs, since they are only capable of resist- 
 ing compression, and include not only fluids, both 
 liquid and gaseous, but also granular materials, etc. ■ 
 (§308). 
 
 Although these elements have been prim.arily ar- 
 ranged in a manner adapted for a practical hand book, 
 I believe that my theoretical treatment of the subject 
 will also find acceptance, and hence have here included 
 the essentials of the theory also (see § 319). Pressure 
 organs are serviceable not only in machines, but also 
 for the transmission of force and motion ; by them we 
 can control the motion of a force in a determinate 
 path and with a determinate velocity quite as well as 
 with rigid elements, and indeed upon closer inspection 
 we perceive that pressure organs are used in nearly all 
 the most important prime movers, (steam engines and 
 hydraulic motors), and hence they are surely entitled 
 to be classed among machine elements. The extent 
 to which this conception facilitates the subject of ma- 
 chine construction will be seen by an examination of 
 the latter part of this volume. 
 
 I have thought it advisable to give also at this time 
 a general review of the result of my labors in the 
 field of Kinematics. These have been fully and thor- 
 oughly given in my lectures for the past twenty-five 
 years, and are therefore not new to my immediate 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 pupils, while the publication of my Theoretical Kine- 
 matics has placed the the theory before a larger circle 
 of scientific readers. I cannot assume, however, that 
 the readers of this practical hand book are all familiar 
 with the above mentioned work, and I therefore give 
 the following abstract, covering the most important 
 portions of my treatment of the subject. 
 
 Motion and the effects which are dependent upon 
 motion form the subject, of the study of Scientific Me- 
 chanics ; and hence to it belongs properly the problems 
 of motion in machinery. The motions in a machine, 
 however, may be distinguished from others in that 
 they can be treated independently of the material 
 parts of the machine, and of the forces acting upon 
 them. The important bearing which this separation 
 gives to the subject of machine construction was per- 
 ceived about one hundred years ago, but has made 
 small progress during the century and has only re- 
 cently been taken up [10-23].* 
 
 I took up this subject in 1862, laying down the 
 principles in my lectures; in 1864 first propounded 
 them publicly before the convention of the Swiss 
 " Na/ur/orscher" and their German guests ; first pub- 
 lished them serially in the Berliner Verhandlungen in 
 1865, and finally in 1872-75 published my book en- 
 titled " Theoreiische Kinematik." 
 
 The modern discussion of these principles begins 
 with the publication, by the celebrated physicist Am- 
 pere, in 1830, of his Essai stir la Philosophie des Sci- 
 ences, in which he gave the subject the distinctive 
 name Kinematics (Cinematic que) , which name is well 
 derived from the Greek kineo, to drive, to constrain, 
 since it treats of constrained or controlled motions. 
 
 I have defined the term Kinematics [40] as "the 
 study of those arrangements of the machine by which 
 the mutual motions of its parts, considered as changes 
 of position are determined." This I have divided into 
 to parts: "Theoretical" and "Applied" Kinematics, 
 the former treating of the general and fundamental 
 principles, and the latter of their practical applications. 
 
 a. Theoretical Kinematics. 
 
 It is this branch of the subject which is treated in 
 my well-known book "The Kinematics of Machinery/' 
 The following is a condensed analysis of the treatment 
 there expanded at greater length : 
 
 1. A material system having motion within itself, 
 I call a machinal system, as may be determined ac- 
 cording as the motion is constrained or not [32]. 
 
 2. Motions can only be constrained by forces. 
 These forces differ in the two systems, since in the pure 
 machinal system sensible and latent forces enter into 
 equilibrium with each other, while in the pure cosmi- 
 cal system sensible forces enter into equilibrium with 
 sensible forces, [33]. It therefore follows that the 
 
 two systems can not always be accurately determined 
 .[34].* The terms "latent" and " sensible " are here 
 used in a similar sense as in thermal physics. Latent 
 forces are those which exert internal resistance to de- 
 formation of a body under the action of external 
 forces ; sensible forces are those which act upon the 
 body from without \;il\. 
 
 3. The motions of the machine can be logically 
 controlled according to a predetermined conception, 
 since the action of all external forces which do not 
 tend to produce the desired end can be opposed and 
 neutralized by latent forces [35]. 
 
 4. From the preceding follows the definition of a 
 machine : — 
 
 A machine is a combination of resistent bodies so 
 arranged that by their means the mechanical forces of 
 nature can be compelled to do work accompanied by cer- 
 tain determinate motions [35, 50, 203]. 
 
 5. If we consider the machine to be made of rigid 
 materials and neglect its mass, we need only take into 
 account geometrical considerations [42]. If a body 
 A, by means of latent forces, is to be prevented from 
 being put in motion by any external forces (case 3), it 
 must be held in a stationary position by at least one 
 body B. The body B, then acts as the envelope of A, 
 and conversely A is the envelope of B, the relation 
 being a reciprocal one. There are also reciprocal 
 envelope forms possible between the bodies A and B 
 tor a relative motion, which shall exclude all other 
 relative motions [43]. Such a pair of bodies, I have 
 called a kinematic pair of elements and a machine 
 consists solely of bodies which thus correspond, pair- 
 wise, reciprocally [43 J. 
 
 6. In order to obtain a determinate motion in a 
 given space by means of a kinematic pair of elements, 
 one of the elements of the pair must be held at rest 
 with regard to the given portion of space under con- 
 sideration. The relative motion of the moving ele- 
 ment to the fixed one will then be that of absolute 
 motion, so far as the given portion of space is con- 
 cerned [43]- 
 
 7. The choice between the two elements as to 
 which shall be stationary and which movable is not 
 limited ; the substitution of the fixed for the moving 
 element I have called the inversion of the pair [93]. 
 
 8. The control which can be exercised over a de- 
 terminate motion in this manner is not mathematically 
 exact but only approximate (case 5) because the latent 
 forces of bodies can only be brought into action by 
 their deformation. If, however, the elements are 
 made of materials which possess a high degree of 
 resistance and are given proper dimensions (machine 
 construction) the deformation can be kept within such 
 small limits as to be practically insignificant, and the 
 result considered as determinate [33]. (Compare cases 
 46 to 49, below). 
 
 ing system form the subject of d' Alem- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 9. Each element of a kinematic pair may be rig- 
 idly combined with an element of another similar pair 
 without interfering with the relative motion of the 
 separate pairs. In this manner a large number of pairs 
 of elements may be arranged in a series, so that each 
 element of a pair is firmly connected with an element 
 of another pair. Such a series of pairs of elements re- 
 turns upon itself, resembling a chain [46], consisting 
 of links connected together. I have called such a 
 series a kinematic chain, and the body which is formed 
 by the junction of the elements of two different pairs 
 is a link of the kinematic chain [46]. There are 
 therefore as many links as there are pairs of kinematic 
 elements. 
 
 10. A kinematic chain may close or return upon 
 itself in various ways; among these is one in which 
 every alteration in the position of a link relatively to 
 the one next to it is accompanied by an alteration in 
 the position of every other link relatively to the first 
 [46]. In such a chain each link has only a single 
 relative motion with regard to every other link. Such 
 a kinematic chain I call a constrained closed — or sim- 
 ply a closed chain [46]. 
 
 11. A constrained closed kinematic chain compels 
 a definite determinate motion in a given portion of 
 space when one link of the chain is fixed, with regard 
 to this. given portion of space. A closed kinematic 
 chain of which one link is thus made stationary, is 
 called a mechanism [47]. 
 
 12. A constrained closed kinematic chain, there- 
 fore, can be formed into a mechanism in as many 
 ways as it has links [47]. The substitution of the 
 stationary link of a kinematic chain for another link I 
 have called its inversion. 
 
 13. A kinematic chain may have so few members 
 and be closed in such a manner that the links can have 
 no motion relative to each other, and that the pairs 
 themselves do not have their own motion. This I 
 have termed fixed closure [485]. 
 
 14. The manner of closure of the chain can be 
 chosen so that adjoining links can have more than one 
 relative motion. This I have called unconstrained 
 closure [485]. 
 
 15. A kinematic chain in which a series of pairs of 
 elements are arranged in the stated manner, but of 
 which the first and last elements are not connected, I 
 have called an open chain. 
 
 16. Kinematic chains of the kinds above men- 
 tioned can be combined with each other, forming con- 
 structions which may be called compound chains. 
 These may have constrained, unconstrained, or fixed 
 closure or may be open chains. The same conditions 
 exist for these as for the previously described chains, 
 which may for sake of distinction, be called simple 
 chains. 
 
 17. From the preceding we rhay give the follow- 
 ing general definition of a mechanism, as follows : 
 
 A mechanism is a closed kinematic chain of which 
 one link is fixed : this chain is compound or simple 
 and consists of kinematic pairs of elements ; these 
 carry the envelopes required for the motion which the 
 bodies in contact must have, and by these all motions 
 other than those desired in the mechanism are pre- 
 vented [50]. 
 
 18. From all that has preceded, it is apparent that 
 the investigation of the motions in machinery is a 
 subject which is based in great part upon geometry. 
 This has been treated as a separate subject of Phoron- 
 omy, or the study of geometrical motion. The most 
 important principles of this subject I have treated in 
 Chapter II. of my "Theoretical Kinematics," with 
 applications to constrained as well as cosmical mo- 
 tions [56 to 85]. It is there shown that all relative 
 motion can be considered as that of a pair of ruled 
 surfaces, so that the motion is reduced to a rolling of 
 the two ruled surfaces upon each other, and under cer- 
 tain circumstances with a simultaneous endlong slid- 
 ing upon each other of the generators which are in 
 contact. These rolling surfaces, for which previously 
 no special name had been used, I have called axoids, 
 the combined sliding and rolling motion being termed 
 twisting. When rolling motion is absent only sliding 
 remains, when on the contrary, the sliding is omitted 
 only the motion of rolling remains. In the latter case 
 certain sections through the axoids give curves which 
 twist upon each other, or roll with a cross sliding 
 action. The combined points of these curves form 
 centres of rotation or poles about which, as instanta- 
 neous centres, both bodies turn. These centres or 
 poles travel in the paths of the aforesaid curves 
 whence the latter maybe CBWed pole-paths (Polbahnen) 
 or centroids. * The study of axoids and centroids will 
 greatly extend the range of phoronomic researches. 
 
 19. In order to pass from the general principles to 
 the special applications of kinematics, further consid- 
 eration must be given to the elementary pairs. The 
 simplest form must necessarily be that in which the 
 corresponding envelopes actually surround, one the 
 other, and such I have called a closed pair. Of this 
 there are but three forms : i, the twisting pair (screw 
 and nut); 2, the turning pair (pin and collar); 3, the 
 sliding pair (full and open prism, or prism pair [91]. 
 The two latter may be considered as particular cases 
 of the first. In all three no change in the character of 
 the motion is caused by inversion (case 7). 
 
 20. In a pair of elements it is not always neces- 
 sary to use all of both envelope forms. The question 
 of the minimum number of points necessary to insure 
 resistence to disturning forces, I have discussed in § 17 
 of my Kinematics, under the title: "The Necessary 
 and Sufficient Restraint of Elements." 
 
 * The term "centroid," due to Prof. Clifford, and used by Prof. Kennedy 
 his translation of the "Kinematics," will be hereafter used as the transla- 
 n of Polbahn.— Trans. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 2 1. We have thus far omitted from consideration 
 such elementary pairs as are not closed. These pos- 
 sess the general property of givii:ig a change in the 
 character of the motion when they are inverted. I 
 have called them "higher"' pairs of elements [115], 
 and conversely the closed pairs may be termed " lovir- 
 er '' pairs. It is only in special cases that no change 
 occurs in the character of the motion by inversion of 
 higher pairs. A series of higher pairs, for the most 
 part entirely new, has been discussed in § 21 of my 
 Kinematics. 
 
 22. I have given (§ 30 to § 39) seven geometric 
 methods of determining the restraining bodies for 
 higher pairs, many of which were already known, 
 but which were then for the first time grouped into one 
 general system. 
 
 23. Incomplete pairs [169] are those which are 
 not entirely closed by the latent forces,^ but are partly 
 closed in some other manner. Examples of these are 
 half-journal bearings, in which the weight of the parts 
 is used to keep the journal down in its bearing ; knife- 
 bearings for scale beams, the V bearings for the beds 
 of planing machines, etc. Pairs may also be closed 
 hy the action of springs or other external forces. The 
 closure of a pair of elements in this manne-r I have 
 termed "force closure." This form of closure can 
 only be used when the disturbing forces are not suffi- 
 ciently great to overcome the closing force. 
 
 24. Force closure also finds application in higher 
 pairs of elements. An important example is found in 
 the driving wheels of locomotive engines, and another 
 still more important, in the axoid rolling action of 
 friction wheels. (See Chapter XVI. of this volume.) 
 
 25. The application of force closure can be car- 
 ried still further. By its application we are enabled to 
 utilize two classes of elements which are only capa- 
 ble of opposing resistance in one direction (case 8). 
 These are what I have called "tension organs" and 
 "pressure organs," (see § 261 and § 308 of this vol- 
 ume). These I have grouped together as " flectional ' 
 kinematic elements [173]. They include a long series 
 of most useful machines, such as belt and rope trans- 
 mission systems, pumps, water-wheels, etc., all in- 
 volving the principles of force closure. 
 
 26. Force closure may be used in a dynamical 
 as well as in a statical manner, as in the case of an 
 engine crank which is carried over the dead centre by 
 the action of the fly wheel [186]. 
 
 27. In such cases the closure may also be effected 
 by means of another kinematic chain used in combi- 
 nation with the first [178]. This I have called chain 
 closure. An example is found in a double engine with 
 cranks at right angles. 
 
 28. The preferable form of chain-closure is that in 
 which similar elements are employed. This occurs 
 (case 25) when one force-closing chain is used in con- 
 nection with another of the same kind, the two being 
 so combined that each supplies the necessary closing 
 
 force for the other ; whence it follows that the sensible 
 and latent forces in the two chains counteract each 
 other in the same manner as if they were composed of 
 rigid elements. [§44, "Complete Kinematic Closure 
 of the Flectional Elements."] Examples of this are 
 found in the ordinary belt transmission, and in the so- 
 called "water rod." By means of this method of 
 closure, which is destined to be much more widely 
 us^d than heretofore, the applications of flectional 
 elements have been greatly extended for purposes to 
 which rigid elements are not adapted, such as the 
 transmission of force in a path of constantly changing 
 direction, as in the use of high pressure water trans- 
 mission systems through pipe conductors. 
 
 29. Finally a kinematic chain may be closed by 
 the application of springs [176]. These may be so 
 constructed as to oppose resistance in a number of 
 chosen directions, but not in all directions ; e. g., both 
 tension and compression, also bending in one plane, but 
 not in a second plane at right angles to the first. This 
 latter condition is seen in the case of fiat or plate 
 springs, also in the plate link shown in Fig. 507 of this 
 book, where the spring acts as a substitute for a pin 
 connection. In the plate link the force closure and 
 complete kinematic closure are replaced by chain 
 closure. Another example is found in the Emery 
 Scale, Fig. 789c. 
 
 30. The pairing of flectional with rigid elements 
 may be assumed, a priori, to be practicable in the same 
 manner as that of rigid elements [544]- 
 
 31. If the principles of investigation, however 
 they may be set forth, are correctly based, they should 
 when applied to the historical development of ma- 
 chines, shed a light upon the whole subject from the 
 rude attempt at invention to the highest attainments of 
 mechanical ingenuity. This subject I have discussed 
 as a "Sketch of the History of Machine Develop- 
 ment, [201 to 246], in which the substitution of pair 
 closure for force closure is made most apparent. 
 
 32. In order to facilitate the elucidation of the 
 action of machinery, and to abridge the labor of 
 the application of the preceding methods, it became 
 necessary to devise a system of kinematic notation. 
 This is given in Chapter VII., pages 247-273, of 
 my Kinematics of Machinery. The elements are 
 designated by capital letters, of which twelve are 
 required, and the relations of these are indicated by 
 auxiliary symbols derived for the most part from 
 those already used in mathematical notation. For 
 the symbolical representation of the kinematic chain 
 I have also introduced the conception of an order 
 in which each pair in the chain is numbered from 
 I upwards, and the links represented by the small let- 
 ters from a onwards [270-273]. The pair and the hnk 
 at which the numbering and lettering is to begin may 
 be agreed upon previously, as well as the direction in 
 which they are to proceed. The link between the 
 pairs I and 2 will then be indicated by « / that between 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 2 and 3, by b, etc. For instance, the connecting rod 
 and crank device, shown in Fig. 1022 of this book, is 
 
 indicated by the formula (C3" Y-^) 7- Translated, this 
 means that the kinematic chain of the mechanism con- 
 sists of three parallel, closed cylinder pairs, and one 
 closed prism pair at right angles to them ; that it con- 
 tains four links, which I have called the crank, the 
 coupler, the slide and the link, and designated by a, 
 b, c, and d ; that this chain is converted into a mech- 
 anism by the link d being held fast ; that the right line 
 from the centre of the bearing 2 to the end of the 
 coupler b (the connecting rod) moves around the axis 
 I of the crank shaft, and that the crank a is driven, by 
 means of the coupler b, by the slide (cross-head) c. 
 This is certainly expressing very much by means of 
 very few symbols, dispensing with long and compre- 
 hensive definition. According to case 12, this chain 
 can be converted into three other kinds of machines, 
 symbolically indicated by : (C3" P-^)^ (C^" P^)^, etc. 
 These symbols have as yet been used but little by 
 practical designers, but those who have made use of 
 them have found them brief and accurate both for 
 writing and for descrintion otherwise requiring much 
 longer explanation. 
 
 33. The application of the system of symbols 
 leads to what I have termed "Kinematic Analysis," 
 [Chapter VIII.] The application of this analysis to 
 the so-called " mechanical powers," [275-283] leads to 
 interesting conclusions, this is also the case with the 
 cylindric crank chain [283-341], which taken in con- 
 nection with Chapter V., yields a wealth of valuable 
 results. 
 
 34. This is followed by an analysis of "chamber- 
 crank " trains, Chapter IX. In this, it is shown that 
 upwards of a hundred pressure organ machines, 
 hitherto considered as separate inventions, have a sys- 
 tematic relationship dependent largely upon kinematic 
 inversion ; and a number of difficulties are cleared up. 
 
 35. In Chapter X. the subject of the so-called 
 " chamber-wheel '' trains is analyzed ; the principles of 
 which I had previously investigated in 1868. 
 
 36. Finally, in Chapter XL, is given the Analysis 
 of the Constructive Elements of Machinery, including 
 a brief investigation of ratchet mechanisms. At the 
 time this portion was written my investigation of that 
 subject, however, had not been carried to any great 
 extent, and in the present volume for the first time have 
 I set forth the extraordinary and varied importance of 
 ratchet mechanism. 
 
 37. To this subject is added an analysis of the 
 complete machine [486-526], in which the strict limits 
 of theoretical kinematics are frequently overstepped and 
 encroachments made upon the domain of applied kine- 
 matics. The older ideas of the "receptor" the "com- 
 municator," and the " tool " are examined and rejected 
 and machines classified as "place-changing" and 
 "form-changing" machines. This classification will 
 
 be found to possess a decided value and will be referred 
 to again. (Cases 42 to 49.) 
 
 38. Kinematic Anal)'^sis has as a necessary coun- 
 terpart Kinematic Syntjiesis. This has been already 
 seen (cases 19, 21, 30) in the application of pairs, 
 chains and mechanisms to given machinal purposes. 
 Kinematic synthesis may also be called a theory of the 
 invention of mechanisms. This it can only be, how- 
 ever, in a limited sense. It can in no case enable the 
 genius of the inventor to be dispensed with, but by the 
 aid of this theory his scope can be greatly extended. 
 The application of synthesis to problems which have 
 already been solved may also point the way to the so- 
 lution of others as yet undetermined. 
 
 In discussing this synthesis, I have grouped the 
 pairs of kinematic elements into 21 orders [538-544] by 
 means of which the determination of the greater num- 
 ber of kinematic chains and dependent mechanisms 
 may be made ; also eight classes of simple chains. 
 The application of synthesis may be made in two 
 forms, the direct and the indirect, and these again into 
 general and special synthesis. Of these the indirect 
 synthesis is the most useful [529]. It is my expecta- 
 tion that this theoretical exposition of the subject, 
 which I cannot expect to extend further, but by means 
 of which I have been able to devise a number of new 
 mechanisms, may find many successful applications 
 by others. 
 
 h. Applied Kinematics. 
 
 39. Applied Kinematics is not so much to be con- 
 sidered as standing in opposition to theoretical kine- 
 matics as it is included in it. In fact, applied kinematics 
 has existed as a study for a long time, as in the treatise 
 of Monge, without the existence of any theoretic 
 foundation. That such a treatment of kinematics may 
 be very useful for a time is readily admissible, but an 
 ex post f ado theoretical discussion may seem of little 
 value to the practical man. Indeed my highly es- 
 teemed former preceptor, Redtenbacher, considered an 
 actual theoretical treatment of the movements of ma- 
 chinery to be an impossibility. 
 
 Under these circumstances I did not feel inclined 
 to follow the ' ' Theoretical Kinematics " hastily with a 
 treatise on the applied science. For this purpose it 
 was not possible to arrange all the various forms of 
 machines under the new classification hurriedly and 
 properly in permanent form. Notwithstanding the 
 simplicity of the preceding system, its application de- 
 veloped many difficulties and required a succession of 
 researches with which even my immediate pupils are 
 not fully acquainted. A not inexcusable impatience 
 on their part has led me to have my investigations in 
 applied kinematics multiplied for a limited circulation 
 although the matter was incomplete. I gave this per- 
 mission reluctantly and with the condition that only 
 a limited number of impressions, to be considered as 
 " manuscript," should be circulated. In this manner 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 four parts of the work have appeared, the last consist- 
 ing entirely of the application of the symbols to lecture 
 room models. The result of such premature publica- 
 tion cannot always be foreseen by those who have 
 urged it, but for the misunderstandings which have 
 arisen from this source I can only express my regret. 
 In the meantime I have since 1882 been engaged 
 in the partial application of the principles of kinemat- 
 ics to this book in such a manner as to avoid burden- 
 ing the reader with theoretical matter, which would be 
 contrary to the purpose of the work. The most im- 
 portant subjects to which the kinematic method has 
 been applied are here briefly noted. 
 
 40. With the great extension of modern mechani- 
 cal engineering we find that the various mechanisms, 
 (the number of which as we have seen is not great), 
 are given a great variety of applications. It is the 
 object of applied kinematics to furnish a clear distinc- 
 tion between the various methods of practical applica- 
 tion. It is apparent that the preceding analysis does 
 not extend to this point, since it does not include the 
 subject of the method of constraint, but only treats of 
 the combination of the elementary parts which are 
 involved. We may therefore properly term it the 
 Elementary Kinematic Analysis . As a counterpart for 
 this in applied kinematics we may place the subject of 
 another analysis which relates to the conditions of 
 motion in a given train, and which may be called 
 Train Analysis, or the Analysis of Trains. This anal- 
 ysis is not intended to solve anew the construction of 
 the various trains, but rather to elucidate clearly their 
 method of action ; a train consisting of a closed group 
 of elements and bearing the same relation to a machine 
 as an atom does to a molecule. 
 
 41. Train analysis does not admit of an arrange- 
 ment logically similar to the elementary analysis, but 
 possesses a new and different order. This is due to the 
 fact that the elements of which trains are composed 
 occur only in pairs, while the trains of which machines 
 are composed are considered singly. In Vose's pump, 
 for example. Fig. 979% there are two ratchet trains 
 combined in one machine, while in Downton's pump, 
 Fig. 979S there are three trains. 
 
 42. The various methods of tain action may be 
 divided into four principal kinematic divisions, viz. : 
 Guiding, Storing, Driving, and Forming, §333.* The 
 first three divisions are "Place-changing" and the last 
 is "Form-changing." 
 
 43. Various forms of guiding devices may be 
 mentioned ; linkages by means of which curved paths 
 are obtained, parallel and straight line motions, also 
 "position motions," as I have termed those by means 
 of which a system of points may be transferred to 
 another position parallel to the first. Guiding devices 
 can be constructed from kinematic chains of every 
 
 * In § 333, th3 second of these has been translated "Supporting," and the 
 English language lacks a suitable equivalent for " Haltung," but in a corres- 
 pondence with the author, the above has been adopted Trans. 
 
 kind. It was by means of examples with chains for 
 this purpose that the general conditions of motion in 
 theoretical kinematics were illustrated, and the same 
 conditions belong also to applied kinematics. 
 
 34. Storing includes those especial machine organs 
 by means of which work can be accumulated and the 
 supply drawn upon for later use. This, until now has 
 not been considered as a special mechanical concep- 
 tion, although it has had numerous applications. Stor- 
 age of power may be accomplished in three quite 
 different ways. 
 
 a. By means of rigid elements, this being statical 
 or dynamical. Examples of statical storage are found 
 in elevated weights, compressed springs, etc., and of 
 dynamical storage in fly wheels, or pendulums. One 
 of the oldest forms of dynamical storage is the old- 
 fashioned spindle [216]. 
 
 b. By means of tension organs, acting by winding 
 the tension organ upon a drum or pulley. Examples 
 are seen in tower clocks, etc . 
 
 c. By means of pressure organs. These are the 
 most frequently used, and examples include tanks for 
 water, oil, gas, air, steam, also hydraulic accumulators. 
 
 45. Driving. In this term I include the transmis- 
 sion of motion within a single train and also from one 
 system to another. As "guiding " includes the control 
 of the path of a point, "driving" considers the control 
 of the velocities of various points in their paths. Ex- 
 amples in this branch of applied kinematics are those 
 which take into consideration the velocity of the var- 
 ious parts of a mechanism. (See the close of Case 38). 
 
 46. Forming, includes the working of materials by 
 means of machine tools. This fourth division is the 
 richest of all, and offers the widest range to the genius 
 of invention. This operation takes place by the action 
 of the tool upon the material, or as I have called it, 
 the " work piece " [495]- In form changing machines, 
 the work-piece is a part or the whole of a kinematic 
 link, and is paired or chained with the tool by so ar- 
 ranging the latter that it itself changes the original 
 form of the work-piece into that of the envelope cor- 
 responding to the motion in the pair or linkage em- 
 ployed [495]. We can distinguish between three forms 
 in which this action can occur. 
 
 a. The tool is hard and operates by cutting the 
 material from the work-piece which lies without the 
 envelope of the desired form. Examples are found in 
 lathes, planers, grinding machines, etc. 
 
 b. The tool is of high resistance so as to be able 
 to maintain its form, but does not act by cutting, but 
 by pressure upon the yielding work-piece. It follows 
 that the material which lies outside of the desired form 
 is forced into another part of the work-piece without 
 being removed from it. Examples are found in coin- 
 ing presses, rolling mills, wire drawing benches, etc. 
 
 c. The tool and the work-piece are both alike 
 yielding, and act each upon the other, each being the 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 tool for the other piece. Examples are the various 
 kinds of spinning, weaving, and other textile machin- 
 ery. All three forms are described in this volume, 
 many examples being given among the pressure 
 organs. 
 
 47. It may appear from the preceding as if the 
 theory of the action of the tool breaks through the 
 logical arrangement given in the theoretical kinematics, 
 since in Case a, one of the elements, the tool, cuts 
 away and destroys its partner because it is enough 
 harder to cut it. We must here distinguish between 
 yielding and unyielding elements. This looks like a 
 return to empiricism. The defect in the logic, how- 
 is only apparent. All elementary pairs without excep- 
 tion involve the idea that both of the partners evoke 
 the latent forces by the action of deformation ; and at 
 the same time the friction between the moving parts 
 induces wear. Applied mechanics takes friction into 
 account in considering elementary pairs and investi- 
 gates and provides for the consequent wear. The 
 machine constructor endeavors by all means within 
 his power to reduce the alteration of form at points 
 where it is not desired, but where it is the end to be 
 accomplished he takes every opportunity to increase it. 
 The form.-changing action which occurs between the 
 tool and the work-piece differs in degree only and not in 
 kind, from the action taking place between the elements 
 of every other pair in the machine [503]. 
 
 48. A similar idea may arise in connection with 
 the method of form-changing given above under (h), 
 in which an alteration of form takes place without an 
 actual removal of any of the particles. In this case the 
 the correspondence of the kinematic to the mechanical 
 action is evident. In case 8, as already noted, the de- 
 formation which takes place in non-rigid bodies makes 
 it only practicable to obtain approximate solutions. 
 This only involves a quantitative, and not a qualita- 
 tive distinction [502]. 
 
 Examples of this occur in the construction of in- 
 struments of precision. It is not possible to construct 
 even a simple cylindrical pair (case 19) such as a cen- 
 tre for a theodolite, or for an astronomical telescope, 
 entirely free from error. By the use of a variety of 
 methods the errors are kept as small as possible, and 
 then by other methods, nearly always kinematic, the 
 residual errors are determined and the proper correc- 
 tions made. 
 
 49. In other instances the designer may utilize the 
 elastic yielding of the members of a kinematic chain, 
 as for instance in the method of Adolph Him, by 
 which the springing of the beam of a steam engine is 
 used to produce the indicator diagram of the steam 
 pressure ; or the torsional deflection of a large shaft to 
 measure the power transmitted.* 
 
 This method is also found in Gidding's device for 
 measuring valve friction (p. 285), and also in the 
 
 Emery scale, in which a very small deflection of a 
 diaphragm measures accurately weights of many tons. 
 
 Although in many instances the deformations of 
 material may be neglected, yet we should never per- 
 mit ourselves to forget that they have been neglected. 
 Otherwise important errors may creep into theoretical 
 deductions, as well as in practical construction. This 
 subject of the yielding of materials is receiving more 
 attention at present than formerly. 
 
 50. The "order" of a system of transmission is 
 a subject of importance since there are several meth- 
 ods by which the various parts may be kinematically 
 arranged. I have applied the term "order" to the 
 method of arrangement, and distinguish between three 
 different methods. 
 
 a. "Series. Order. " This " order " exists when a 
 number of transmissions are arranged in series, so 
 that each acts upon the following one. If in a single 
 machine, two, three, four or " n " transmissions are 
 thus arranged in series, I call the whole a system of 
 the second, third, fourth or n"^ order. Examples are 
 found in Figs. 766, 767. 
 
 A transmission can return upon itself. This I have 
 called a "ring" system of transmission. (See p. 208). 
 This return to the original must always occur in the 
 kinematic chain of any mechanism since the elements 
 exist only in the relation of pairing (Case 5). In the 
 system under consideration (Case 41), the groups of 
 elements follow each other in a series, or line as it may 
 be termed, whence I have termed such a series a 
 " line " transmission (p. 257). Ring transmission may 
 also be combined with line transmission, the line being 
 divided into two or more parts. An example of the 
 first kind is seen on page 229, in which the pump 
 mechanism is combined with the steam mechanism, as 
 a line with a ring system. An intermediate form be- 
 tween ring and line transmission is referred to on page 
 208. 
 
 h. Combined Order. By this title is meant a com- 
 bination of transmissions in which each transmission 
 is connected to the next, but in which any one can be 
 stopped without stopping the others. An example of 
 this is shown in the ring transmission in Fig. 9 1 7. 
 
 Under certain circumstances a number of the driven 
 pulleys Tj, T^, T3 - - Tn, may be allowed to run 
 empty, in which case they become merely supporting 
 sheaves (Case 43) ; as soon, however, as any load is 
 thrown on any of them, the entire system is influenced 
 by the increased stress upon the rope. 
 
 Another example of "compo.md" order, is the 
 multiple expansion steam engine. Here each engine 
 of the compound, triple, or multiple expansion engine 
 may be considered singly as a separate chain, and the 
 entire machine as a series of transmissions. Each en- 
 gine, T^, T^, Tg, etc., exerts an influence upon the 
 action of the others, but is not indispensable to their 
 action, as would be the case if arranged in "series" 
 order. Compound, Triple, Quadruple expansion en- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 gines are therefore, respectively of the second, third, 
 and fourth order, but should also be considered to be- 
 long to the class of "Compound order. " 
 
 c. "Parallel Order." This arrangement is the 
 oldest and the one which occurs most frequently. It 
 occurs when a number of different machines are all 
 driven from one and the same transmission, this being 
 the usual arrangement in manufacturing establish- 
 ments. Any of the machines can be stopped or 
 started independently of the others without affecting 
 the motion, a suitable regulator being assumed. This 
 principle may also be applied to the motors by which 
 the transmission is driven, automatic couplings, such 
 as shown on page loi, being used. A "parallel" 
 order occurs in rope transmission when a number of 
 ropes are used on the same pulley ; another instance 
 is that of a train which is pulled by two locomotive 
 engines. 
 
 The three different ' ' orders " are not always sharply 
 defined, but the distinction will be found of material 
 assistance in the study of transmissions. An example 
 in which all three "orders" are used is found in the 
 engine shown in diagram in Fig. 1023. Here the cyl- 
 inder, piston, valve and steam form an escapement : 
 the connection c 1 r being driven, and in turn operating 
 a second r^, 1^ b, and thence the valve. These three 
 transmissions therefore form a "series" order, this 
 also returning to itself and being thus a ring system, 
 and of the third order. The fly-wheel and its bearings 
 form a dynamical power storage system, absorbing 
 and giving out power in response to the irregularities 
 of the action of the piston, this being of the "com- 
 pound " order. Frequently such an engine is made 
 with an additional cut-off valve gear, with governor, 
 also of " compound" order, also possibly a feed pump, 
 ("parallel" order) and the engine usually drives an 
 extensive transmission system by which a number of 
 machines are operated (" parallel " order). 
 
 In § 260 is shown the manner in which physical 
 and chemical trains are arranged in series, the action 
 of heat, of gases and electricity being considered ; 
 the steam engine being the most notable example. 
 
 51. The magnitude of the exponent of the order 
 of any train has an important influence upon the hurt- 
 ful resistance of a machine, especially in a series order 
 of a high degree. In such cases the injurious resist- 
 ance increases at least directly as the exponent, and 
 frequently more rapidly. It is therefore important in 
 machine design to keep the degree of the order as low 
 as practicable. In the system of pneumatic clocks of 
 Mayrhofer (p. 171) the mechanism for several years 
 was as high as the 17th order, but the degree subse- 
 quently reduced to the 8th order. It may safely be 
 affirmed that the simplicity of a machine may be 
 measured by the closeness which the exponent of its 
 order approaches unity. Examples are found in the 
 Giffard injector, in which the guiding and driving 
 mechanisms are united in one, and exponent becomes 
 
 = 1 ; the same is true of Siemens Geyser pump, 
 Fig. 971a. The apparatus of Morrison & Ingram, 
 Fig. 1 181, is a device of the 2nd order, which acts by 
 a combination of guiding and driving. 
 
 52. The preceding pages have shown that applied 
 kinematics, by means of the separation of the con- 
 trolled motion into the forms of Guiding, Storing, 
 Driving and Forming, and by means of the division of 
 the various "orders," has enabled the machine prob- 
 lem to be solved as a whole. Theoretical kinematics 
 has assisted in this solution by enabling the various 
 problems to be investigated in a purely scientific man- 
 ner. Without such a theoretical investigation, a sys- 
 tem of applied kinematics would be an impossibility. 
 At the same time practical instruction must be given 
 by actual daily work as well. A clear understanding 
 of the principles of the applied science cannot but be 
 useful to the practical man, and as I believe, welcome 
 also. 
 
 The fundamental principles of machine construc- 
 tion as I have sought to lay them down in the preced- 
 ing pages, coincide in many points with the practical 
 methods already in use. The practical mechanic is 
 well acquainted with crank trains, gear trains, and 
 the like, or if he is not familiar with them he is readily 
 taught, but in combining these and arranging them so 
 as to act upon each other the theory comes into play 
 and shows clearly the best arrangement for the end in 
 view. This is well shown in the case of the various 
 valve gears, which have been in fact developed inde- 
 pendently, instead of being the result of a theoretical 
 analysis of various combinations of kinematic chains. 
 The application of the kinematic analysis will facilitate 
 work of this sort, making it clearer and simpler the 
 more fully the fundamental principles are understood. 
 For this reason I have introduced the kinematic princi- 
 ples into this work, not to reduce invention to an art to 
 be taught, but rather to bring the principles of science 
 to its assistance. 
 
 I am ready to admit that the general view of theo- 
 retical kinematics which I have placed before the prac- 
 tical man, may not be accepted without further proof 
 being demanded. It may be considered only as an 
 ingenious form of theorizing, of but little practical 
 value. For the present I must ask my readers to prove 
 by the test of practical application how far the princi- 
 ples of kinematics may be made of genuine practical 
 value. 
 
 The principles included in cases 40 to 51 are 
 practically applied in the latter half of this volume. 
 The application of the analysis to the subject of ratchet 
 gearing has produced an extensive series of results. 
 Storage is clearly shown to be a form of ratchet gear; 
 the discussion of the degree of "order" of ratchet 
 trains will also, I believe, be found very useful. In 
 the discussion of pressure organs (Chapter XXIII. and 
 following) the subject of storage is highly developed. 
 The notion of the two divisions of guiding, and driv- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 ing will also be found most useful. In like manner 
 the methods of analysis as applied to ratchet trains, are 
 found capable of equally prolific results when applied 
 to pressure organ trains, not, to my knowledge, oth- 
 erwise attainable. The great number of applications in 
 this direction will be seen in § 333, these being the re- 
 sult of the application of the theory sketched under 
 Case 46, above. 
 
 Since the subject of friction was considered in con- 
 nection with rigid elements, it was also necessary to 
 to take into account this resistance to the motion of 
 fluids (§ 340), as also the loss of heat in steam pipes 
 (briefly discussed in § 338). In § 362 the very import- 
 ant subject of boiler design is only generally consid- 
 ered. 
 
 The closing chapter relates to valves. These are 
 treated as ratchets, not oniy from the theoretical 
 
 standpoint, but also practically, and much more fully 
 than in previous editions. The section on "fluid 
 valves " will, I trust, be found of use to the practical 
 man, as a subject worthy of further investigation. 
 
 In closing, I may refer to the increasing size of this 
 volume. In spite of my earnest efforts, it has not 
 been possible to reduce its bulk. In mariy places 
 evidence will be found of attempts at condensation, but 
 nevertheless the work can hardly be called properly a 
 "hand book" any longer. When discussing purely 
 technical matters I can be brief, but in a practical work, 
 it is above all things necessary to be clear and intelli- 
 gible. In this I have endeavored to be guided by the 
 dictum of Boileau : " Un ouvrage ne doit point para'tre 
 trop iravaille, niais il ne saurait etre irop travaille.'' 
 FuNCHAL, February, i88g. 
 
 F. REULEAUX. 
 
T^BLE OF COISTTEISTTS. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 STRENGTH OK MATERIALS. 
 
 Introductory i 
 
 Co-efficients of Resistance i 
 
 Resistance to Tension and Compres- 
 sion 2 
 
 Bodies of Uniform Strength 2 
 
 Resistance to Shearing 2 
 
 Resistance to Bending 2 
 
 Table of Sections 5 
 
 Value of the Quantity S 8 
 
 Sections of Uniform Resistance.... 8 
 Bodies of Uniform Resistance to 
 
 Bending 8 
 
 Resistance to Shearing in the Neu- 
 tral Plane 10 
 
 Beams with a Common Load 11 
 
 Resistance to Torsion 11 
 
 Polar Moment of Inertia and Section 
 
 Modulus II 
 
 Bodies of Uniform Resistance to 
 
 Torsion 13 
 
 Resistance to Buckling 13 
 
 Columns of Uniform Resistance. ... 13 
 
 Compound Stresses 13 
 
 Resistance of Walls of Vessels 15 
 
 Calculation of Springs 18 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 THE ELEMENTS OF GRAPHOSTATICS. 
 
 Introductory 22 
 
 Multiplication by Lines 22 
 
 Division by Lines 23 
 
 Multiplication and Division Com- 
 bined 23 
 
 Area of Triangles 23 
 
 Area of Quadrilateral Figures 23 
 
 Area of Polygons 24 
 
 Graphical Calculation of Powers 24 
 
 Powers of Trigonometrical Func- 
 tions 25 
 
 Extraction of Roots 26 
 
 Addition and Subtraction of Forces. 26 
 Isolated forces in One Plane— Cord 
 
 Polygon 26 
 
 Equilibrium of External Forces of 
 
 Cord Polygon 27 
 
 Equilibrium of Internal Forces of 
 
 Cord Polygon 28 
 
 Resultant of Isolated Forces in One 
 
 Plane 29 
 
 Conditions of Equilibrium of Isolat- 
 ed Forces 29 
 
 Force Couples 29 
 
 Equilibrium between Three Parallel 
 
 Forces 30 
 
 Resultant of Several Parallel Forces 31 
 
 Decomposition of Forces 31 
 
 Uniformly Distributed Parallel 
 
 Forces 32 
 
 Twisting and Bending Movements. - 33 
 
 Determination of Centre of Gravity 33 
 
 Resultant of Load on Water Wheel. 34 
 
 Force Plans for Framed Structures. 35 
 
 Force Plans for Roof Trusses 36 
 
 Graphical Determination of Wind 
 
 Stresses 37 
 
 Force Plans for Framed Beams. ... 38 
 
 Remarks 38 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OF MACHINE 
 ELEMENTS. 
 
 Introductory 39 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 RIVETING. 
 
 Rivets 39 
 
 Strength of Riveted Joints 40 
 
 Table and Proportional Scale 40 
 
 Riveting disposed in Groups 40 
 
 Steam Boiler Riveting 42 
 
 Table for Boiler Riveting 42 
 
 Table of Weights of Sheet Metal. . . 43 
 
 Especial Forms of Riveted Joints... 43 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 HOOPING. 
 
 Hooping by Shrinkage 45 
 
 Cold Hooping 45 
 
 Examples of Forced Connections. . - 46 
 Dimensions of Rings for Cold Forc- 
 ing 47 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 KEYING. 
 
 Keyed Connections 47 
 
 Cross Keyed Connections 48 
 
 Longitudinal Keys 48 
 
 Edge Keys 49 
 
 Methods of Keying Screw Propel- 
 lers 49 
 
 Unloaded Keys 49 
 
 Methods of Securing Keys 50 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS. 
 
 Geometrical Construction of Screw 
 
 Thread 50 
 
 Whitworth Screw System 51 
 
 Sellers' Screw Thread System 52 
 
 Metrical Screw Systems. 52 
 
 New Systems 53 
 
 Nuts, Washers and Bolt Heads 54 
 
 Table for Metrical Bolts and Nuts.. 55 
 
 Weight of Round Iron 55 
 
 Special Forms of Bolts 55 
 
 Wrenches 56 
 
 Nut Locks 56 
 
 Special Forms of Screw Threads. . . 58 
 
 Screw Connections, Flange Joints- . 59 
 
 Unloaded Bolt Connections 60 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 JOURNALS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Journals 60 
 
 A. — LATERAL JOURNALS. 
 
 Overhung Journals 61 
 
 Example of Table of Journals 62 
 
 Neck Journals 62 
 
 Fork Journals 63 
 
 Multiple Journals 63 
 
 Half Journal 64 
 
 Friction of Journals 64 
 
 B. — THRUST BEARINGS. 
 
 Proportions of Pivots 65 
 
 Friction of Flat Pivot Bearings 66 
 
 Collar Thread Bearings 66 
 
 Multiple Collar Thread Bearings ... 66 
 
 Compound Link as Thrust Bearing. 67 
 
 Attachment of Journals 67 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 BEARINGS. 
 
 Design and Proportion 68 
 
 A. — LATERAL BEARINGS. 
 
 Pillow Blocks •■■ 68 
 
 Proportional Scale for Pillow Blocks 68 
 
 Various Forms of Journal Boxes ... 69 
 
 Narrow Bases— Large Pillow Blocks 69 
 
 Adjustable Pillow Blocks 70 
 
 Bearings with Three Part Boxes 70 
 
 Wall Bearings 71 
 
 Yoke Bearings 72 
 
 Wall Brackets 72 
 
 Hangers 73 
 
 Adjustable Hangers 74 
 
 Special Forms of Bearings 74 
 
 B. — THRUST BEARINGS. 
 
 Step Bearings 75 
 
 Wall Step Bearings 75 
 
 Independent Step Bearings 76 
 
 Thrust Bearings with Wooden Sur- 
 faces 76 
 
 Multiple Collar Bearings 77 
 
 Examples of Thrust Bearings 78 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 SUPPORTS FOR BEARINGS. 
 
 General Considerations 79 
 
 Simple Supports 79 
 
 Multiple Supports for Bearings 80 
 
 Calculation for Iron Columns 82 
 
 Forms for Iron Columns 84 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 AXLES. 
 
 Various Kinds of Axles 85 
 
 A. — AXLES WITH CIRCULAR SECTION. 
 
 Simple Symetrical Axles 85 
 
 Non-Symmetrical Simple Axles 86 
 
 Graphical Calculation of Simple 
 
 Loaded Axles 86 
 
 Proof Diagrams 87 
 
 Axles Loaded at Two Points 78 
 
 Railway Axles, Crane Pillars 88 
 
 Axles with Three or More Bearings. 89 
 
 Axles with Inclined Loads go 
 
 B. — AXLES WITH COMBINED SECTION, 
 
 Annular Section 90 
 
 Axles with Cruciform Section 90 
 
 Modified Ribbed Axle 91 
 
 Compound Axles for Water Wheels. 91 
 
 Construction of Rib Profiles 91 
 
 Wooden Axles 92 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 SHAFTING. 
 
 Calculations for Cylindrical Shafting 92 
 
 Wrought Iron Shafting 93 
 
 Line Shafting 93 
 
 Determination of the Angle of Tor- 
 sion 93 
 
 Journals for Shafting— Round Rolled 
 
 Shafting 94 
 
 Combined Sections — Wooden Shaft- 
 ing 94 
 
 Shafting Subjected to Deflection... 94 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 COUPLINGS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Couplings 95 
 
 I. Rigid Couplings 95 
 
 II. Flexible Couplings 96 
 
 Various Kinds of Flexible Couplings 96 
 Couplings for Lengthwise and Par- 
 allel Motion 96 
 
 Jointed Couplings 97 
 
 III. Clutch Couplings 98 
 
 Toothed Clutch Couplings 98 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Friction Clutches 99 
 
 Automatic Couplings loi 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 SIMPLE LEVERS. 
 
 Journals for Levers , loi 
 
 Cast Iron Rock Arms 102 
 
 Rock Arm Shafts 102 
 
 Lever Arms for Rectangular Sec- 
 tion 103 
 
 Lever Arms for Combined Section . . 103 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 CRANKS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Cranks 104 
 
 Single Wrought Iron Cranks 104 
 
 Graphostatic Calculation of Single 
 
 Crank 104 
 
 Cast Iron Cranks 105 
 
 Return Cranks 105 
 
 Graphostatic Calculation of Return 
 
 Crank 105 
 
 Simple Crank Axle 106 
 
 Multiple Crank Shafts 107 
 
 Locomotive Axles 107 
 
 Hand Cranks 109 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 Various Kinds of Combined Levers, no 
 
 Walking Beams no 
 
 Scale Beams m 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 CONNECTING RODS. 
 
 Various Parts of Connecting Rods. 112 
 Connections for Overhung Crank 
 
 Pins 112 
 
 Stub Ends for Fork Journals 114 
 
 Connections for Neck Journals 314 
 
 Round Connecting Rods 116 
 
 Rods for Rectangular Section 116 
 
 Channeled and Ribbed Connecting 
 
 Rods 117 
 
 Cast and Wrought lion Rods 118 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 CROSS HEADS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Cross Heads 118 
 
 Free Cross Heads 119 
 
 Cross Heads for Link Connections. . 119 
 
 Cross Heads for Guides 119 
 
 Guides and Guide Bars 121 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 FRICTION WHEELS. 
 
 Classification of Wheels 122 
 
 The Two Applications of Friction 
 
 Wheels 123 
 
 Friction Wheels for Parallel Axes . . 123 
 Friction Wheels for Inclined Axes- • 124 
 
 Wedge Friction Wheels 125 
 
 Special Applications of Friction 
 
 Wheels 126 
 
 Roller Bearings 126 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 TOOTHED GEARING. 
 
 Classification of Gear Wheels 127 
 
 A. The Construction of Spur 
 
 Teeth 
 
 General Considerations 128 
 
 Pitch Radius, Circumferential Divis- 
 ion 128 
 
 Table of Radii of Pitch Circles.... 128 
 General Solution of Tooth Outlines 129 
 
 The Action of Gear Teeth 129 
 
 The Cycloidal Curves 130 
 
 The Generation of Cycloidal Curves 130 
 
 Tooth Outlines of Circular Arcs 131 
 
 Evolute Teeth for Interchangeable 
 
 Gears 131 
 
 Pin Teeth 132 
 
 Disc Wheels with Pin Teeth 133 
 
 Mixed Tooth Outlines, Thumb Teeth 133 
 
 Tooth Friction in Spur Gearing 134 
 
 General Remarks , 135 
 
 B. Conical Gear Wheels 
 
 General Considerations 135 
 
 Construction Circles for Bevel Gears 135 
 The Plane Gear Wheel 136 
 
 C. Hyperboloidal Gear Wheels 
 Base Figures for Hyperboloidal 
 Teeth for Hyperboloidal Gears 138 
 
 D. Spiral Gears 
 
 Cylindrical Spiral Gears 138 
 
 Approximately Cylindrical Spiral 
 
 Gears i39 
 
 Spiral Gear Teeth and their Friction 140 
 
 Spiral Bevel Gears 141 
 
 Globoid Spiral Gears 142 
 
 E. Calculation of Pitch and 
 
 Force of Gearing 
 
 Pitch of Gear Wheels, Tooth Sec- 
 tion • 144 
 
 Pitch and Face of Hoisting Gears. . 144 
 Table of Cast Iron Hoisting Gears. 145 
 Pitch and Face of Gearing for Trans 
 
 mission i45 
 
 Examples and Comments 147 
 
 F. Dimensions of Gear Wheels 
 
 The Rim i47 
 
 The Arms of Gear Wheels 149 
 
 Table of Gear Wheel Arms 149 
 
 Gear Wheel Hubs 150 
 
 Weight of Gear Wheels 150 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 RATCHET GEARING. 
 
 Classification of Ratchet Gearing. . . 150 
 Toothed Running Ratchet Gears. . • 150 
 
 The Thrust upon the Pawl 152 
 
 The Sliding Flanks 153 
 
 Spring Ratchets, Quadrants 153 
 
 Methods of Securing Pawls, Silent 
 
 Ratchets 153 
 
 Special Forms of Ratchet Wheels. . 154 
 
 Multiple Ratchets 154 
 
 Step Ratchets 155 
 
 Stationary Ratchets 156 
 
 Ratchets of Precision 157 
 
 General Form of Toothed Ratchets. 158 
 Dimensions of Parts of Ratchet 
 
 Gearing 158 
 
 Running Friction Ratchets 158 
 
 Release of Friction Pawls 161 
 
 Stationary Friction Ratchets 161 
 
 Releasing Ratchets 162 
 
 Checking Ratchets 163 
 
 Continuous Running Ratchets 164 
 
 Continuous Ratchets with Locking 
 
 Teeth 165 
 
 Locking Ratchets 166 
 
 Escapements, Their Varieties 167 
 
 Uniform Escapements 167 
 
 Periodical Escapements 169 
 
 Adjustable Escapements 170 
 
 General Remarks upon Ratchet 
 
 Mechanism 171 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 TENSION ORGANS CONSIDERED AS MACHINE 
 ELEMENTS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Tension Organs. . 172 
 
 Methods of Application 172 
 
 Technological Applications of Ten- 
 sion Organs 177 
 
 Cord Friction 177 
 
 Ropes of Organic Fibres 178 
 
 Wire Rope 179 
 
 Weight of Wire Rope and its Influ- 
 ence 180 
 
 Stiffness of Ropes 181 
 
 Rope Connections and Buffers 181 
 
 Stationary Chains 182 
 
 Running Chains 182 
 
 Calculations for Chains 183 
 
 Weight of Chain 183 
 
 Chain Couplings 184 
 
 Chain Drums and Sheaves 185 
 
 Ratchet Tension Organs 185 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 BELTING. 
 
 Self-Guiding Belting 186 
 
 Guide Pulleys for Belting 186 
 
 Fast and Loose Pulleys 188 
 
 Cone Pulleys 189 
 
 Cross Section and Capacity of Belts. 190 
 
 Examples of Belt Transmission.... 191 
 
 Belt Connections 191 
 
 Proportions of Pulleys 193 
 
 Efficiency of Belting 194 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 ROPE TRANSMISSION. 
 
 Various Kinds of Rope Transmis- 
 sion 194 
 
 A. Hemp Rope Transmission. 194 
 Specific Capacity, Cross Section of 
 
 Rope 195 
 
 Sources of Loss in Hemp Rope 
 
 Transmission 195 
 
 Pressure and Wear on Hemp Rope. 196 
 
 B. Cotton Rope Transmission. 196 
 
 C. Wire Rope Transmission.... 196 
 Specific Capacity, Cross Section of 
 
 Rope ig6 
 
 Influence of Pulley Diameter 197 
 
 Deflection of Wire Ropes 198 
 
 Tightening Driving Ropes 200 
 
 Short Span Cable Transmission. ... 200 
 
 Transmission with Inclined Cable . . 200 
 
 Construction of the Rope Curve .... 202 
 
 Arrangement of Pulleys 202 
 
 Construction of Rope Pulleys 202 
 
 Construction of Pulley Stations. .. . 204 
 Efficiency of Rope Transmission . . . 205 
 Reuleaux's System of Rope Trans- 
 mission 206 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 CHAIN TRANSMISSION. STRAP BRAKES. 
 
 Specific Capacity of Driving Chains 211 
 Efficiency of Chain Transmission. . . 213 
 Intermediate Stations for Transmis- 
 sion 213 
 
 Strap Brakes 214 
 
 Internal Strap Brakes 316 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 PRESSURE ORGANS CONSIDERED AS MA- 
 
 Various Kinds of Pressure Organs. 216 
 Methods of Using Pressure Organs. 216 
 
 Guiding by Pressure Organs 216 
 
 Guide Mechanism for Pressure Or- 
 gans 217 
 
 Reservoirs for Pressure Organs -.•. 2r^ 
 Motors for Pressure Organs iv) 
 
 A. Running Mechanism for 
 
 Pressure Organs 
 
 Running Mechanism operated by 
 
 Weight 219 
 
 Running Mechanism Operated by 
 
 Impact 219 
 
 Running Mechanism Operated 
 
 against Gravity 221 
 
 Running Mechanism in which the 
 
 Motor is Propelled 222 
 
 B. Ratchet Mechanism for Pres- 
 
 sure Organs 
 
 Fluid Running Ratchet Trains 223 
 
 Fluid Trains with Stationary Rat- 
 chets 225 
 
 Escapements for Pressure Organs . . 226 
 
 A. Unperiodic Escapements for 
 
 Pressure Organs 
 
 Fluid Escapements for Transporta- 
 tion 227 
 
 Hydraulic Tools 228 
 
 Pressure Escapements for Moving 
 
 Liquids 228 
 
 B. Periodical Pressure Escape- 
 
 ments 
 
 Pumping Machinery 229 
 
 Fluid Transmission at Long Dis- 
 tance 233 
 
 ' Rotative Pressure Engines 233 
 
 Valve Gears for Rotative Engines. . 234 
 
 C. Adjustable Power Escape- 
 
 ments 
 
 Adjustable Pump Gears 236 
 
Adjustable Gears for Rotative Mo- 
 tors 237 
 
 D. Escapements for Measure- 
 ment of Volume 
 
 Running Measuring Devices 239 
 
 Escapements for Measurement of 
 
 Fluids 239 
 
 Technological Applications of Pres- 
 sure Organs 240 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 CONDUCTORS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 Formulae for Cast Iron Pipes 242 
 
 Weights of Cast Iron Pipes 242 
 
 Pipes for High Pressures 242 
 
 Wrought Iron and Steel Pipes 243 
 
 Steam Pipes 245 
 
 Pipes of Copper and other Metals.. 246 
 
 Resistance to Flow in Pipes 246 
 
 Methods of Connecting Cast Iron 
 
 Pipes 248 
 
 Connections for Wrought Iron and 
 
 Steel Pipes 249 
 
 Connections for Pipes of Lead and 
 
 other Metals 251 
 
 Flexible Pipes 252 
 
 Pistons 252 
 
 Plungers and Stuffing Boxes 253 
 
 TABLE UF CONTENTS. 
 
 Pistons with Valves 255 
 
 Piston Rods 255 
 
 Specific Capacity of Pressure Trans- 
 mission systems 255 
 
 Ring System of Distribution, with 
 
 Pipe Conductors 256 
 
 Specific Capacity of Shafting 257 
 
 Specific Value of Long Distance 
 
 Transmissions 259 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 RESERVOIRS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 Various Kinds of Reservoirs 260 
 
 Cast Iron Tanks 260 
 
 Riveted Tanks 260 
 
 Tanks with Concave Bottoms 262 
 
 Combination Forms for Tanks 264 
 
 High Pressure Reservoirs, or Ac- 
 cumulators 264 
 
 Steam Boilers 265 
 
 Boiler Details subjected to Internal 
 
 Pressure 266 
 
 Boiler Flues subjected to External 
 
 Pressure • • ■ 269 
 
 Future Possibilities in Steam Boiler 
 
 Construction 270 
 
 Reservoirs for Air and Gas 272 
 
 Other forms of Storage Reservoirs. 273 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 RATCHETS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS, OR 
 VALVES. 
 
 The two Divisions of Valves 273 
 
 A. Lift Valves 274 
 
 Hinged or Flap Valves 274 
 
 Round Self -Acting Valves 275 
 
 Unbalanced Pressure on Lift Valves 277 
 Closing Pressure of Self-Acting 
 
 Valves • • ■ • , . 278 
 
 Mechanically Actuated Pump Valves 278 
 
 Valves with Spiral Movement 279 
 
 Balanced Valves 279 
 
 B. Sliding Valves 
 
 Rotary Valves and Cocks 281 
 
 Gate Valves for Open and Closed 
 
 Conductors 282 
 
 Slide Valves 282 
 
 Balanced Slide Valves 285 
 
 Fluid Valves 287 
 
 Stationary Valves 289 
 
 Stationary Machine Elements in 
 
 General 289 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 Mathematical Tables 291-301 
 
 EREA^T^. 
 
 Page 14, Case IV., first panel of table should read P=4 it^ ~ 
 
 Page 15, line 13 from bottom, second column, omit words " %" thick." 
 
 Page 53, line 31 from bottom, second column, read "interpolated diameter," instead of "interpolated meter." 
 
 Page 61, formula (89) substitute P, instead of p. 
 
 Page 61, line 11 from top, second column, after "Proportions of Journals," insert the formula number (93). 
 
 Page 63, line 39 from top, first column, after "Formula for Fork Journals" insert the formula number (98). 
 
 Page 64, the formulae on lines 12 and 14, of § 96, should be numbered respectively (99) and (100). 
 
 Page 64, line 33 from top, second column, for "Prowny " read "Prony." 
 
 Page 89, line 17 from bottom, first column, for 85 mm.^8%" read 85 mm.=3%". 
 
 Page 89, illustration at the bottom of second column, the diagram to the left should be Fig. 409, and that to 
 the right, Fig. 410. 
 
 Page 97, line 16 from bottom, second column, for "drawn '" read "driven." 
 
 Page 103, the last formula on first column should be numbered (154) instead of (155). 
 
 Page 144, formula at bottom of first column, the cube root sign applies to the whole of the second member 
 and not to the numerator only, as printed. 
 
 Page 175, line 17 from bottom, second column, for Harturcn, read Hartwich. 
 
 Page 195, line 29 from top, second column, for " can only be given by indeterminate results," read " can 
 only give approximate results." 
 
 Page 206, title of § 301 read Reuleaux's instead of Reuleux's. 
 
 Page 255, example in second column, for 4 in. stroke, read 40 in. stroke. 
 
 Page 263, The following revisions of formulae (385) and (386) have been communicated by Prof. Reuleaux 
 and should be inserted : 
 
 -tI [KD>7[-1-Kiy] } ■ - 
 
 [(D-0^-7[-^.O'] 
 
 ,.(386) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR: 
 
 A hand=book: ok ivtachink design. 
 
 BY K. REUIvEAUX. 
 
 Section L— STRENGTH OF MATERIAI.S. 
 
 Introductory. 
 
 The study of the strength of materials ultimately depends upon 
 the question of the resistance which rigid bodies oppose to the 
 operation of forces, and the following definitions are to be 
 noted : 
 
 SuPERPiciAi< Pressure is the pressure upon a unit of surface. 
 
 Tensile Strength is the resistance per unit of surface, 
 which the molecular fibres oppose to separation. 
 
 Modulus of Resistance is the strain which corresponds to 
 the limit of elasticity, compression and extension, each hav- 
 ing a corresponding modulus. 
 
 Modulus of Rupture is the strain at which the molecular 
 fibres cease to hold together. 
 
 Modulus of Elasticity is the measure of the elastic exten- 
 sion of a material, and is the force by which a prismatic body 
 would be extended to its own length, supposing such extension 
 were possible. 
 
 Theoretical Resistance is the force which, when applied to 
 any body, either as tension, compression, torsion or flexure, 
 will produce in those fibres which are strained to the greatest 
 extent a tension equal to the modiilus of resistance ; or, in 
 other words, it is the load which strains a body to its limit of 
 elasticity. 
 
 The Practical Resistance often improperly termed merely 
 Resistance, is a definite but arbitrary working strain to which a 
 body may be subjected within the limits of elasticity. 
 
 The Coefficient of Safety is the ratio between the theo- 
 retical resistance and the actual load, or, what amounts to the 
 same thing, the ratio between the elastic limit and the actual 
 tension of the fibres. 
 
 The Breaking Load is that load which causes in those fibres 
 which are subjected to the greatest strain, a tension equal to 
 the modulus of rupture ; in every case this is equal to the force 
 necessary to tear, crush, shear, twist, break, or otherwise de- 
 form a body. 
 * The Factor of Safety is the ratio between the breaking load 
 and the actual load. 
 
 As a general rule, for machine construction, the Coefficient 
 of Safety may be taken as double that which is used for con- 
 struction subjected to statical forces. Circumstances may also 
 require it to be taken as either greater or less than the custom- 
 ary value, sometimes even narrower than is permitted for stati- 
 cal forces. Care must be taken never to permit a material to be 
 strained in use to its theoretical resistance ; although, indeed, 
 there are some materials, such as wrought iron, v.-hich have 
 been strained slightl)'- beyond the limit of elasticity, without re- 
 ducing the breaking load, or causing any apparent injury. (See 
 
 The determiuatiou of the breaking load, and consequently 
 the use of the modulus of rupture, is limited to those cases in 
 which the actual breaking of the structure must be considered ; 
 but for the actual calculations of working machinery the modu- 
 lus of resistance, or limit of elasticity is of primary importance. 
 
 Coefficients of Resistance.* 
 The coefficients given in the following table are selected as the 
 mean of many experiments upon the various materials named. 
 Under the title "Wood " is given an average value from ex- 
 periments made with oak, beech, fir and ash. Those materials 
 which show the greatest difference between the modulus of 
 rupture and the limit of elasticity also possess in the highest 
 degree the property of toughness. 
 
 Experiments upon wrought iron show that a strain beyond 
 the limit of elasticity, if not carried too far, although it will 
 cause a permanent deformation, will not lower the modulus of 
 elasticity, but will raise the modulus of resistance. 
 
 For example, a rod of wrought iron, subjected to a tensile 
 strain of 28,400 lbs. per square inch, was subsequently found to 
 have its limit of elasticity raised from 21,300 lbs. to 28,400 lbs. 
 (This property is utilized in drawing wire). 
 
 Tenacity is a particularly desirable property for a material 
 of construction, and it may generally be approximately meas- 
 ured by the ratios K : T and Ki : Tj. 
 
 If the rod above referred to be subject to compression it 
 will return to its former limit of elasticity. 
 
 Table of Coefficients.* 
 
 n Wire 
 
 Sheet Iron 
 
 Spring Steel (hardened) 
 Cast Steel (not hardened) 
 Cast Steel (spring temper) 
 Copper (hammered) 
 Copper Wire .... 
 
 Brass Wire 
 
 Bell Metal (bronze) . 
 Phosphor Bronze . . 
 
 Aich Metal 
 
 Lead 
 
 Hemp Rope (new) 
 Hemp Rope (old) . 
 Belting 
 
 Modulu 
 
 of 
 Elasticit 
 
 Quartz 
 
 
 Brick 
 
 Limestone Mas 
 
 onry . . 
 
 Sandstone Mas 
 
 onrj' . . 
 
 
 
 nthen 
 
 ^hout the original w 
 h readers, except in 
 
 ; all dimensions and quantities are gi 
 ive been transformed into English "u 
 e following table, where both are gb 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Resistance to Tension and Compression, 
 
 A body is said to be uuder tensiou when the action of a force 
 P, tends to extend it in the direction of its length. V/hen the 
 force acts iu the opposite direction the body is said to be under 
 compression ; but when the length is great in proportion to the 
 cross section, a combined action occurs. (See ? i6.) 
 
 Let q be the cross section of the member : S, the strain due to 
 the action of the force P; then if we neglect the weight of the 
 material we have : 
 
 P=Sq 
 
 (I) 
 
 must be t 
 pounds we 
 
 A rafter exerts a horizontal thrust of 22,000 pounds, which 
 : by a rod of circular cross section. If we make 5 = 7100 
 e for the diameter of the rod d. 
 
 from which d = 1.9S" say 2". 
 
 The principal action which the application of a force to a 
 member produces is the consequent elongation or compression. 
 A prismatical body subjected to the action of a force P, will 
 have its original length / increased by in amount A, determined 
 by the formula 
 
 A _^ (2) 
 
 and this holds good as long as 5 is not greater than the modu- 
 lus of Resistance for tension T. This relation is also true for 
 compression, in which case the limit depends upon the modu- 
 lus of resistance 7i for compression. 
 
 Example. Suppose the rod, whose diam 
 ceding example, to have a length of 114 ft 
 lion under those conditions would be 
 
 The preceding formula (2) is a fundamental one, and upon it 
 is constructed the whole systematical study of the strength of 
 materials. 
 
 Formula (i) is of use when a section is strained beyond the 
 limit of elasticity, as by it we may detertnine the force required 
 to rend or crush a material, using the proper Modulus of Rup- 
 ture. 
 
 Example. The force necessary to pull the above given rod 
 asunder is 
 
 P=K q 
 
 or /'=56,Soo X (2)'^ — = 178,442 lbs. 
 
 Bodies op Uniform Strength. 
 
 By bodies of uniform strength are meant those in which the 
 shape is so made that the cross sections at various points are 
 subjected to the same strain S, and consequently a proportion- 
 ally economical distribution of material secured. 
 
 Such forms are not often employed in practice, although ap- 
 proximate shapes may often be adopted, but they serve in many 
 cases to determine the general style of a structure, and give it 
 the effect of proportional strength without adhering too closely 
 to the exact form. These forms will be found of value to the 
 designer for both reasons : principally as a guide to the style of 
 his work rather than for close determinations of economy. 
 
 If a designer has become thoroughly familiar with the resist- 
 ing capacity of various shapes, and can keep them so clearly in 
 his mind that he can perceive the general form of the proper 
 curve to be used in any particular case, he will be able to pro- 
 duce, with an artistic freedom, designs which will approach the 
 shapes indicated by mathematical analysis. 
 
 The following forms are alike suitable for tension and com- 
 pression. As examples of their practical use, the first two are 
 applicable to cast columns, and .the third is suitable for chim- 
 ney's of masonry as well as for high piers of bridges and via- 
 ducts. 
 
 7 = V? 
 
 ^-v/i-£ 
 
 ^^ 2.718 = Base of 
 natural logarithms. 
 
 log $■ = log -^ -f 
 
 o.434^-a^ 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 P, is distributed un- 
 iformly throughout 
 the whole length of 
 the figure. Cross sec- 
 tion circular. Profile 
 parabolic. Approxi- 
 mate form, a trun- 
 cated cone with end 
 
 diameter = — 
 
 P, is uniformly de- 
 creased from above 
 downward. Cross 
 section circular. 
 Form conical. 
 
 The body is strain- 
 ed by its own weight, 
 y being the weight 
 of a unit of volume. 
 The cross section in- 
 creases with the in- 
 creasing load in the 
 logarithmic propor- 
 tion given. 
 
 \ the quantities given in the original i 
 their English equivalents, which will 
 ;s chosen. {Trans.). 
 
 mples 
 
 RESISTANCE TO SHEARING. 
 
 A body is said to be subjected to a shearing strain in any 
 cross section when the distorting force acts in the plane of that 
 cross section. 
 
 Let q, be the sectional area, and S, the force acting upon it, 
 so that we have as in the case of tensile and compressive 
 strains 
 
 P=Sq (3) 
 
 The limit of elasticity will be reached when S=% of the lesser 
 of the two Moduli of Resistance of the material, in the case of 
 wrought iron, where T = Ti = 21,300, S = 17,040 lbs. while for 
 cast iron T<Ti and= 10,650 and S = 8,520. In this case the 
 maximum strain is not in the plane of the cross section but at an 
 angle of 45° with it, and is f the value of S. The deformation 
 which two surfaces suffer under a shearing strain is very slight 
 within the limits of elasticity, but it is noticeable in the case of 
 torsional distortion where numerous sections uuder shearing 
 strain adjoin each other. 
 
 Equation (3) holds good for cases in which the division of 
 the adjoining surfaces occurs, such as shearing, planing, bor- 
 ing, in fact, the work of the entire class of machines which act 
 by the removal of a portion of the material upon which they 
 are working. 
 
 The strain of separation S, in this case is somewhat less 
 than the modulus of rupture for tension (K). This is due to 
 the fact that in the case of shearing forces both K, and K, 
 come ,into action. For the calculation of such machines a 
 coefficient of rupture equal to lii K may be taken. 
 
 ?6. 
 
 Resistance to Bending. 
 
 Elasticity and Strength of Flexure. 
 
 A prismatic body upon which the external forces act in a 
 
 direction at right angles to the axis of the prism, is said to be 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 subject to strains of flexure. As long as the elastic limit is not 
 overstepped there -will exist an equilibrium in each normal 
 section of the prism between the moments of the external 
 forces on the one hand and the moments of the opposing 
 internal forces on the other hand, both acting about the neu- 
 tral axis of the given section. This may be considered as a 
 sort of equator of each section since it passes through its cen- 
 tre of gravity at right angles to the plane in which the bending 
 takes place. It thus divides the section into two portions, in 
 one of which all the fibres which are parallel to the axis of the 
 prism are subiected to a tension proportional to their distance 
 from the neutral axis (the tension side of the section), while in 
 the other portion the corresponding fibres are subjected to 
 compression in a like proportion (the compression side of the 
 section). It follows that fibres which are at equal distances 
 from the neutral axis will be deformed to the same extent. 
 The resistance to bending is therefore a combination of the 
 resistances to tension and to compression, both acting iu a 
 peculiar manner, that is, in rotation about an axis. 
 Let: 
 
 7jf=the statical moment of a cross section subjected to a 
 
 bending force, taken with reference to the neutral axis 
 
 of the section, that is, the so-called moment offeree. 
 y=the moment of inertia of the section with regard to 
 
 the neutral axis. 
 a=the distance from the neutral axis of the fibres which 
 
 are subjected to greatest tension or compression ; 
 
 /. e., those which are farthest from the neutral axis. 
 5'=the corresponding strain in these fibres, then : 
 
 M=S 
 
 J 
 
 .1 
 
 The product 5" — is the statical moment of the entire collec- 
 tion of fibres of the cross section with reference to the neutral 
 axis and is the strain moment of the section under considera- 
 tion. For any prismatic shape subjected to a bending force P, 
 whose lever arm is jt, we may put M=P.v for each cross sec- 
 tion, and for each section this will have a different value. The 
 section at which the product Px has its greatest value is the 
 section of danger, and the bending force P, which produces in 
 it the strain S, is the resisting strength of the shape for the 
 strain .S, so that in this case we have 
 
 in which Xm, is that value of x, which makes Px a maxi- 
 
 The axis passing through the centres of gravity of succes- 
 sive cross sections of a figure is not subject to any change 
 of length under flexure, but is only curved, and to find its 
 radius of curvature under any load we have the formula 
 
 _/^ 
 
 M (6) 
 
 This curve is called the elastic curve, and is determined by 
 the general equation 
 
 dx^ 
 
 JE 
 
 (7) 
 
 In the following tables are given the values of the quan- 
 tities for calculations of flexure under the various conditions 
 shown in the figures, being : 
 
 The Bending Moment M, for any point x, 
 
 The Bending Load P, according to formula (5), 
 
 The Co-ordinates x, y, for the elastic curve. 
 
 The value, y, of the abscissa _)', at the point of application of 
 the force as shown in Figures I to VI, and the value of the 
 greatest deflection f, in the cases shown in Figures VII to 
 XIII. 
 
 In all the examples the weight of the beam itself has been 
 neglected, as this may usually be done in machine construc- 
 tion, although not iu bridge work. 
 
 Figures VII to X are suitable for the latter purpose, as 
 in them the weight of the beam may readily be taken into 
 account. 
 
 In Figures XI and XII may be seen how unequal distri- 
 bution of the load affects the sustaining power, as a beam 
 loaded like Fig. XI or XII has I }i times the sustaining power 
 of one loaded like VII or VIII, or for the same load a corres- 
 pondingly reduced deflection. These are important considera- 
 tions in connection with the distribution of weights in buildings. 
 The distribution in XIII is also unfavorable, as it has only ^ 
 the sustaining power of VIII, with a greater deflection. 
 
 It is to be noticed that the deflection/, increases as the third 
 power of the length, and that it varies greatly under the v 
 conditions given. 
 
 ;i of the Elastic Curve. 
 
 / - 3 l'\ 
 
 Weakest Sec- 
 
 Weakest Sec- 
 tion in the 
 Middle. 
 
 
 JE 3 
 
 Weakest Sec- 
 tion at C 
 Reactions 
 
 JE 766 
 
 48 /£ 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Bending Moment M. ^Po^we'"'p5 Equation of Elastic Curve. 
 
 --?(f-7) 
 
 v/,-.. + ,(,_i) 
 
 
 ^I^SwjgJiigli 
 
 JE (> Vl 4 /4J 
 
 /3 r^ ;r3 xn 
 
 
 •"-"^a-f+fl 
 
 "— (:-f + i^) 
 
 ■'--a-iS) 
 
 
 Weakest Section at an in- 
 determinate point be- 
 tween A and B. 
 
 Weakest Section at B. 
 
 -fA'-^-'} 
 
 Weakest Section at 3. 
 Point of reversal at 
 
 Weakest Section at S. 
 
 XIV. In the case of a beam supported upon two symmetrically placed supports A and B, and carrying a - 
 
 iiiiiiormly distributed load P, we have for the bending moment M = [-. X -{ j. 
 
 The supporting power varies according to the position of the supports, and also with the relation of c to /; [_ 
 U will become a maximum when c = 0.207 / I that is, / ( */ j j 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The supporting power will tneii approximate to 
 
 la 
 or nearly six times as great as in case VIII, showing 'the ad- 
 vantage of this method of support. The weakest sections are 
 at A, B and C. 
 
 .Z.„ 
 
 Tabi,e 
 
 ?7. 
 3F Sections. 
 
 The value of^ in equation (4) depends almost entirely upon 
 the shape of the cross section of the beam, and this we shall 
 hereafter call the Section Modulus. 
 
 The following table shows a large number of sections in use 
 for various purposes, and gives the corresponding values of the 
 following quantities : 
 
 The equatorial moment of inertia J, for the neutral axis, 
 shown in the figures by the dotted line. 
 
 The greatest distance a, of the fibres under tension and com- 
 pression, or their separate values a', and c^','when the section 
 is not symmetrical about both axes. 
 
 The equatorial section modulus Z = — -, for which two values 
 
 are given, when a' , and a" , are different ; and 
 
 The sectional area of the figure, which will be found of 
 service in calculating weights. 
 
 To determine the value of a, experimentally or graphically, 
 a model of the section may be cut out of cardboard, and its 
 centre of gravity found by balancing on knife edges, or else the 
 graphostatic method given in \ 46 may be employed. _ 
 
 The following example will serve to show the application of 
 the table : 
 
 /-= — rf* = 0.049J d^ = 0.0491 X 256= 12.5706 
 
 By making various combinations of the forms given in the 
 tables other sections may be obtained to which the same 
 formulae will apply. As an example, the Section No. VIII may 
 also be used for a rectangular tube, and No. XI for an E shaped 
 section. 
 
 It is a matter of some importance for the designer to keep in 
 mind some general conclusions, which may be drawn from the 
 tables as to the influence of various shapes upon the strength. 
 It will be plainly seen that the depth of a section is the dimen- 
 sion which has the greatest influence upon the strength, and 
 also that those portions of the section which are furthest re- 
 moved from the neutral axis are of the most service. 
 
 It is upon this point that the peculiar strengthening effect of 
 ribs depends, and which makes their use so advantageous in 
 cast iron constructions. These ribs do not act so much by the 
 mere strength of their own cross section as by the fact that 
 they strengthen those portions which are furthest from the 
 neutral axis. This is a feature to be carefully watched, and its 
 importance may be made clear by an example. 
 
 If we take a section of the form given in No. XV., and 
 make its dimensions as follows : b =^ Z b\ , h = \2 b\ , h\. , ■= \i 
 b^ (Fig. I, ? 9) and then divide it into two rectangular parts by 
 a horizontal section, we have for the modulus of each section : 
 
 Ii2 X V 
 
 = 2054 b^ and 
 
 8 6' 
 
 which, together, give 21.5 ^i'. 
 
 The same material, when taken as a whole, in a single sec- 
 tion (see § 9) would have a modulus ^■=34.861', so that it 
 has more than \}i times the resistance of its separated por- , 
 tions, and as a matter of fact the right angle rib or T head is 
 about ten times the value in that connection than if taken by 
 itself This is also found in a still higher degree in sections of 
 other shapes. 
 
 SECTION TABLE. 
 
 No. 
 
 Section. 
 
 Moment of Inertia/. 
 
 Distance a. 
 
 Section Modulus Z. 
 
 Area, F. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 ■H 
 
 hhi 
 
 h 
 
 im 
 
 bh 
 
 
 tH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 -t 
 
 i 
 
 ■ 
 
 h 
 
 h{Jfi-h^^-) 
 
 h 
 
 b {Jfi - /»l3) 
 
 i{h-k{) 
 
 
 »* 
 
 
 
 , , 
 
 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 ■■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 b 
 
 ^3 
 
 6- 
 
 b'i 
 
 IV. 
 
 fMk. 
 
 i.* 
 
 b 
 
 ^^^...^b^ 
 
 6i 
 
 V. 
 
 ^^* = o.54.3^« 
 
 b y/l. = oM6i 
 
 I- 
 
 3^3.. 
 
 
 KU 
 
 
 
 
 
 .VI. 
 
 "■f? 
 
 y^: 
 
 
 ^r 
 
 i 
 
 'i^^ 
 
 3^1^ 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 SECTION TkSVE.— {^Continued). 
 
 No. Sectioi 
 
 Moment of Inertia y. 
 
 Section Modulus Z. 
 
 
 Bv 
 
 
 B{jfi-h^)j^l,^{j,^z-hi ) 
 
 bj^—{fi — bi)hl^rhh 
 
 iB^rJM-^)hlMh-h^ 
 
 36(3 + ^1) 
 
 b {m - h^^) + b-, {h^ - h.fi) 
 
 b{h-h{)+i^[h^-h^ 
 
 b m — [b — b«) hi^ + bi h 
 
 bh — {b — bi)h-^-^b^hi 
 
 J, A3 + (7,^ - i) ;,^3 + (/, _ ;,^) ^; 
 
 bh-^{h^-b)h^-\-{h-h{^h 
 
 7J> = ^J^ 
 
 12 (3 + 2^1) '' 
 ■" 12 (2 3 + ^i) ^'- 
 
 |[^(«'=-/=)+^l (/= + «"=)] 
 
 ,[/, A-(3-3i)/'i] 
 
 L [3 (<,'3_/3) + 3i (/3 +^) + ^,(«"3__^3)j 
 
 Lj 
 
 1 [3 (a'3 _/3) + 3j (/8 + ^ _ ^-3 _^) + l^ (a"3 _^3)] 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 SECTION TK&\.Y^{Conthii,ed). 
 
 * — - 0— ">i 
 
 iMoment of Inertia/. 
 
 \ [i/+«^o^""'^-^'' "^ * («''-/=) + ^2 (y^ + «"=>)] 
 
 7/^^-/^) + ^ {ci'^-/^) + ^2 (/^ + ?"■) + ' 
 
 
 Distan 
 
 z.a. 
 
 
 Sec 
 
 tion Modulu 
 
 z. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z'- / 
 
 
 Deter 
 
 mined gr 
 byexper 
 
 aphk 
 
 ally or 
 
 
 ^"^i 
 
 
 (« "3 -.?<')] 
 
 Determined graphically ( 
 
 - (<;4_^j4) = 0.049. (or* -^4) 
 
 ^ [ il" '^' + ^ ^^'' "'^'^ + ^' ^^' ~'^^ 
 
 
 Z'-=o.26?- 
 
 Z' = ± b]fi = o.^i±bIfi 
 35 
 
 2" = -^ b Ifi = 0.076 b Ifi 
 
 JL (0.589 rf^ + b (A3_rf3) + 33 (/,_^) Z ^2 + 2 ^ (A _^) 
 
 i ^ (a'3 _/3) + ^j (/3 __j.3 + ^3 _ /3) + ^2 (^'/3 _ ^)^ 
 
 - [6 (a'3-/3) + 3j (/3-^3) + l„ (^3 _ £3 + /3 _ „3) 
 
 + ^3(^_/3)+^^(^"3_^.3)^ 
 
 (.'_/)+£Li^V+«") 
 
 
 ^(a'-y)+^iC/-^+A-/) 
 
 ^b^(k-l) + bi{a-k) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Value of the Quantity S. 
 _ The limit of elasticity iu a deflected beam, both on the ten- 
 sion and compression sides, will be reached when their respec- 
 tive strains 5" become equal to the modulus of resistance. It is 
 therefore of great importance to select such a value for 5', that 
 the modulus of resistance may not be reached on either side. 
 These conditions will be met for sections which are symmet- 
 rical about two axes, by taking the lesser of the two values of 
 ^, as in the case of cast iron, the modulus for tension should be 
 used. 
 
 In those sections in which a' , differs from a" , the first thing 
 to be determraed is the position of the tension and compres- 
 sion sides. Let 
 
 a = the greatest distance from the neutral axis on the tension 
 side. 
 
 a\ = the greatest distance on the compression side, 
 T= the modulus for tension. 
 T\ = the modulus for compression, 
 yJ/= the statical moment of the bending force, 
 m = the coefi&cieut of safety, so that for double, triple, 
 safety, etc., in = 2, or 3, 
 Then we may take : 
 
 a T T J 
 
 When— > — then M= 
 
 a^ n ma 
 
 a T Tx J 
 
 When -< — then M= 
 
 to be taken as - 
 
 F is the area of the section, and ^ is the 
 
 When-- = then M = 
 
 ^/or ^^ / 
 
 Taking the parabolic section No. XXIV. a=\ h, a^ % h. 
 
 
 This gives -^ = §, so that -^ > -^, and for S, w 
 
 e ha-e 
 
 ^°and;^=^-^o.xx4M2. 
 
 
 With wrought iron, in which T = Ti no investigation isne 
 
 cessa-y 
 
 Sections of Uniform Resistance. 
 
 In order to use the material to the greatest advantage to re- 
 sist bending strains, it is necessarj' to pay especial attention to 
 its distribution, particularlj' in those portions which are furthest 
 from the neutral axis. The best economy is attained in this 
 matter when the section is shaped so that the strains on both 
 tension and compression sides shall reach the elastic limit 
 simultaneously. 
 
 For this purpose it is necessary to make 
 
 a, "~ 7; 
 Sections which are thus proportioned are known as Sections of 
 Uniform Resistance. Wrought iron sections which are sym- 
 metrical about two axes fulfi" these conditions, since T-= T^. 
 For cast iron, when the bendmg strain is exerted constantly in 
 one direction, it is best to make a^ ^ 2 a, for T^ -^ 1 T. 
 
 Taking these conditions into consideration, the following 
 sections (Figs, i, 2, 3) have been drawn, in which b and ^1 may 
 have any desired proportion to each other : 
 
 For these sections, when b^ = b, we have : 
 
 / = 278^-* 440(5* 9925* 
 
 Z = 34-86' 556' 02.46' 
 
 F = 19b'' 2sb'' 40.86^ 
 
 ^ = I 0.97 .04 
 
 The tension side is nearest to the neutral axis. Since the 
 section modulus is determined from the value of -^, 6"is always 
 
 proportional economy of material, the cross section of Fig. I 
 being taken as unity. 
 
 The value of <p may be determined thus : 
 
 = 
 
 fe) (I)' 
 
 (8) 
 
 in which the sub-numbered letters belong to the required sec- 
 tion and the un-numbered letters to the given section whose 
 economy is to be taken as unity. In this equation F = fib'', 
 Z= ab'^ and 6" is taken equal to 5'j except when the ratio of a 
 to «! is not the same for both sections. It will be seen from 
 an examination of (8) that a slight variation from the exact 
 proportions is not very material. When the bending force acts 
 alternately in opposite directions, so that the strains are re- 
 versed, the sections which are symmetrical about two axes are 
 the best for cast iron as wcli as for other materials, and the 
 smaller value for 5i should always be taken under such circum- 
 stances. If the force is constantlj' changing its direction, so 
 that the neutral axi passes through the centre of gravity, the 
 most economical section is that of a circular ring, its resistance 
 being greater than the cruciform or star-shaped sections, such 
 as X., XII. and XX 7 , Table ? 7, since there is in the former 
 case a constant prop jrtion of the section and the greatest dis- 
 tance from the plane of the bending. 
 
 :in2' beam of cast iron loi —,(,-, 
 
 s length being 7S. 75 inches. 
 
 Taking the cross 
 M=SZ: 
 
 ection of the shape Fig 2, we have by equ 
 Af= 5,500 X 78.75, ^=554' 
 
 To obtain double se 
 
 curity we take 5 = ^-^^ = 10,650. This gives 
 
 
 5,500 X 78.75 = i°.65o X 55*^ 
 
 
 i - 75.500 X 78.75 _„,, 
 V 10,650X55 
 
 The sectional area will then be 25 (0.9)^ = 20.25 sq. in., as de- 
 termined by the constant given for the section Fig. 2. If the 
 security be taken at ij, 
 
 2I^300_ 
 
 1-5 
 
 = I4,2( 
 
 This gives a lighter beam, and according to equation (8) its 
 weight would be (-~- j = 0.825 of the preceding. 
 
 Bodies of Uniform Resistance to Bending. 
 A body is said to offer uniform resistance to bending when its 
 shape is so chosen that in all sections of its length the maxi- 
 mum strain, 6', for tension or compression has the same value, 
 and the general form of equation (4) for such bodies is 
 
 ^ = Constant. (9) 
 
 Bodies shaped so as to oppose a uniform resistance to bending 
 are frequently used in machine construction, approximations to 
 the exact forms being often adopted, examples having already 
 been shown in ? 4. A variety of such shapes are given in the 
 following table. 
 
 The deflection in bodies of uniform resistance is of necessity 
 greater than in prismatic bodies of the same strength. In many 
 of the examples of the following table the deflection, /, is 
 given, and in I. it is double, and in V. i^- times what it would 
 be in prismatic bodies similarly loaded. 
 
 The elastic line for the following bodies, when exactly formed, 
 is determined from the following equation : 
 
 d^y ^ Mo_ oo (10) 
 
 dx'- EJo ax 
 iu which 
 
 Mo = the moment of the bending force for any given sec- 
 tion, 
 Jo := its moment of inertia, 
 «o = its greatest fibre distance, 
 
 ax = the greatest fibre distance on the same side as ao for 
 any other section at a point x. 
 For the radius of curvature, p, of the elastic curve at a point 
 whose co-ordinates are x, y, we have : 
 
 3fo ao 
 which value is constant, and represents a circular arc when 
 ax = ao ; that is, when the section is of uniform height at all 
 points, as in V., X., XIV. 
 
777^ CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Deflection of the free end ; 
 
 In Cases I. and II., 
 
 Parabolic truncated wedge. 
 
 The elastic curve is a parabola. 
 
 Approximation to Form I., 
 Truncated wedge. 
 
 Weakest section at the base. 
 
 Approximation to Form II., 
 Truncated wedge. 
 
 ■^JoE' 
 
 i^;fj 
 
 :at.on-=^-.s 
 
 Cubic parabolic truncated pyra 
 
 e when all the 
 
 Approximation to Form VI., 
 Truncated Pyramid. 
 
 Weakest section at the base. 
 
 
 
 in Forms I. to VII., mak 
 
 
 Parabolic-sided wedge. 
 
 y _ 3/" -^ 
 
 Applicable to stone bracket! 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 No. 
 
 Form. 
 
 Application 
 
 of 
 
 Load. 
 
 Equation. 
 
 Power. ^ 
 
 Volume. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 XII. 
 
 
 i 
 
 >< 
 J 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 Approximation to Form XI. 
 
 ^ 
 
 27 
 
 Weakest section at the base. 
 
 
 
 ^/ 
 
 For rectangular section 
 Wedge, on semi-cubic parabola. 
 
 p_S i Jfi 
 
 l-bhl 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 H 'y'^^i^::^!^.3 
 
 t 
 i 
 
 Fundamental" shape for archi- 
 
 
 7% 
 
 Sides on cubic parabola. 
 
 p_ S b A" 
 
 ^kl 
 
 Elastic curve a circular arc. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 m^^^^^^^^^"^^^ 
 
 XV. 
 
 7 = r 
 
 ^ = i- 
 
 Pyramid. 
 
 ^_ 5 3 7^2 
 
 L bhi 
 
 3 
 
 Value depends upon the sim- 
 plicity of the form. 
 
 The preceding are only a few of the simpler forms which 
 may be used, and it would be easy to multiply examples. 
 
 By altering the breadth, or height, the relations become 
 more or less complicated, as the case may be. 
 
 For instance, in Case I., which is based on the parabola 
 
 T-= |/ f;, it may be made the biquadratic parabola, -=^ ^i 
 
 etc. Combination sections give rise to new forms, and a great 
 number of combinations may be made. Examples will be 
 found in the chapter on axles and shafts. 
 
 The following discussion of springs will also give some in- 
 stances of special forms, in which the neutral surface is irregular. 
 
 Resistance to Shearing in the Neutral Pi,ane. 
 
 Since in a deflected beam there is on the tension side a con- 
 tinual tension, and on the compression side a continual com- 
 pression of the respective fibres, it follows that the neutral 
 plane is subjected to a shearing action, and this must not be 
 neglected in determining the width of the beam. 
 
 The lower limit permissible is indeed a matter not likely to 
 be reached, but at the same time it should be investigated. 
 
 Calling the least permissible width Zo, and the mean force on 
 either side of a given section R, then in order that the shearing 
 strain at the neutral plane shall not exceed a value So, we must 
 have : 
 
 _ >^ U (14) 
 
 ^"-So 2/ 
 in which So should in no case exceed | of the lesser modulus 
 of resistance of the material under consideration (see § 5). J, 
 as before, is the moment of inertia of the section, i.e., the 
 summation of the products of the elements of the section by 
 the square of their distances from the neutral plane, while U is 
 the statical moment of the section, i.e., the summation of the 
 products of the elements of the section by their distances from 
 the neutral plane. 
 
 For the rectangular section No. L, Table (? 7), 
 
 4 
 and for the double T section, No. VIII., 
 
 Equation (14) is not so much used to determine a value for 
 Zo, as to find out in any case whether the breadth of the neu- 
 tral plane has been taken too small. As a matter of fatt, this 
 is a question which very seldom arises in ordinary construc- 
 tions, especially in machine construction. 
 
 4 
 
 If in (14) we give zo any desired value, and make So = — S 
 
 we obtain 
 
 4 Zo 2/ 
 and substituting this in equation (4) we get : 
 
 M 
 
 A ^ 
 
 —^ is the lever arm of the force R ; this we may call A. 
 
 U : Zo a contains one of the height dimensions of the section ; 
 hence equation (15) expresses a relation between two dimen- 
 sions of the body under consideration. For a simple rectangu- 
 lar cross section, taking the value of U, given above, in which 
 
 0^ b, and a = - 
 
 i5 
 
 A greater value for /' must not be taken if we do not wish the 
 shearing strain to exceed the extension or compression in the 
 tension and compression sides of the beam. These considera- 
 tions are often of importance for the danger section, as, for ex- 
 ample, in No. II., Table (? 6) for the point B. In this case 
 
 i we make - 
 
 <- 
 
 This limit of height, however. 
 
 is so great that it is very rarely reached in practice. 
 
 The most important application of this principle is found in 
 the case of notched beams of wood, such as often occur in 
 building construction. In such cases the resistance of the neu- 
 tral plane is often very much reduced by the cutting of the 
 notches, sometimes to one-half what it would be in the solid 
 
 beam, and making a corresponding reduction in the value of 7- 
 
 For the double T section we have : 
 
 R is to be chosen according to the case under consideration, 
 as, for example, in No. II. Table (? 6) for all sections between B 
 and C, it is equal to the reaction — , etc. 
 
 ^[i-(i-oay] 
 
 If the brackets in the denominator contain an improper 
 fraction the value of -^ will approach the upper limit, but tor 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 all ordinary cases this value is very great. The nearest ap- 
 proach to this shearing action probably occurs in T beams 
 where the flange joins the web, but examples are very rare. 
 
 Beams with a Common Load. 
 When two prismatic beams are united in the middle, and at 
 that point subjected to a force P, the beams being supported at 
 the ends, they will both be deflected, and the sum of their re- 
 actions P', and P", enter into the support of P. 
 
 The double reactions are found from the formula in Table 
 (2 6j, No. II., column 2, as follows : 
 
 P' _ J' E' l"^ 
 
 P" — J"E" l'^ ' 
 
 and since 
 
 
 and P"' ^ 4 
 
 S"J" 
 
 Example. 
 
 weight, P, a 
 
 as 3 : 2. In order to obtain equal se( 
 prismatic shape, we hai-e from {16) 
 
 7-(fr=(tr-f 
 
 a = the distance of the farthest elements of the section 
 
 from the centre of gravity, 
 6" = the shearing strain in the elements at a distance a, then 
 
 '^-'-^ (.7) 
 
 If the body is of a uniform section, then ^ is constant. Now 
 
 if .^ be the lever arm of the rotating force P, for a moment Jlf, 
 the weakest or danger section will be that for which /,/ is a 
 maximum, and for it we have 
 
 ^^^a^n^Y (16) 
 If the two beams are of the same material {E^ = E^^), to ob- 
 tain equal securitj', the product^;- ( ^ 
 
 If the beams are not the same length then a' = a", i.e., the 
 heights must be the same unless the breadths are equal to each 
 
 Hence the cross section of the short arms must be to that of the long arms 
 as 4 : 9, and if the arms -n-ere of the same section the supporting power of 
 the short arms would be to that of the long arms as 9 : 4. 
 
 It also follows from the preceding, that rectangular sheet 
 metal plates carrying a uniformly distributed load are stronger 
 parallel to their shorter axis than parallel to the longer axis. 
 
 For given loads and materials formula (16) may be used to 
 govern the choice of dimensions and the relations of length to 
 breadth. 
 
 For beams of cast or wrought iron resting upon each other, 
 a suitable proportion may be secured by taking the sum of their 
 several supporting powers as the supporting power of the 
 combination. This is often a matter for consideration in 
 strengthening existing structures. 
 
 §13. 
 Resistance to Torsion. 
 Resisting Power and Angle of Rotation. 
 A prismatic body which is subjected to the action of a force 
 couple tending to rotate it about its geometric axis, opposes to 
 such action its Resistance to Torsion. Under these conditions 
 the elements in a normal section are subjected to a shearing 
 Strain, and until the elastic limit is reached there exists an 
 equilibrium between the external rotating forces on the one 
 hand and the strain moments of the various elements of the 
 section on the other hand ; both being taken with regard to the 
 polar axis of the centre of gravity of the section, i. e., the axis 
 passing through the centre of gravity of the section and at 
 right angles to it. Resistance to torsion may properly be con- 
 sidered a higher species of resistance to shearing, to which it 
 bears the same relation that resistance to bending holds to ten- 
 sile and compressive strength. 
 Let: 
 
 M^ the statical moment for any given section of the 
 
 rotating force, 
 Jp ^=. the polar moment of inertia of the section, /. e., its 
 moment of inertia taken with regard to its polar 
 axis (see ^ 14), 
 
 in which Am, is that value of A, which gives 3/, a 
 
 The limit of elasticity is reached, as in the case of shearing 
 action, when S = ~ oi the lesser of the moduli of resistance 
 
 5 
 for tension or compression (see I 5). This is plainly visible by 
 a comparison between the action of bending and twisting. 
 
 The relative rotation which two sections of a prism at a given 
 distance apart make with each other is called the angle of tor- 
 sion. It is represented by the letter 1? ; and for two sections 
 separated by a distance x, we have in general terms : 
 
 ? = 7^ (19) 
 
 dx Jp G 
 
 in which G is the modulus of torsion for the material used, and 
 is equal to — of the modulus of elasticity E. 
 
 In the following table will be found the values for : 
 The moment 3/, at a given point x, of the prism. 
 The force P, according to formula (18), and 
 The torsional deflection in terras of angular measure, or in 
 other words, the angle of torsion 1?. 
 These quantities are given for a variety of cases, as shown in 
 the cuts, and from them total moment, PR, of the twisting 
 force may be determined. In case IV., 5" is the point of appli- 
 cation at which the collected forces, with a lever arm R, would 
 act, if concentrated to produce an equivalent result to the sum 
 of the separate efforts, to being the distance of the point ^ from 
 the immovable end of the prism. 
 
 Questions relating to torsion are of varjdng importance in 
 machine construction, and come especially into consideration in 
 calculations relating to springs. Case IV. illustrates the condi- 
 tions which occur in determination of mill shafting. Cases V> 
 and VI. occur in machine framing. 
 
 §14. 
 Polar Moment of Inertia and Section Modulus. 
 The polar moment of inertia, Jp, is easily determined, since 
 we have 
 
 fp=A + A (20) 
 
 in which _/j and J„ are the equatorial moments of inertia taken 
 with regard to two axes at right angles to each other, and whose 
 values are given for a variety of sections in the table of {I 7). 
 
 From this may be obtained the polar section modulus — = Zp 
 for use in the preceding cases. An exception must be made for 
 those sections in which we have not yi = Ji, as in cases III., 
 VII., XII., XX., XXV., etc., I 7. For these it will be necessary 
 
 to make a special correction in the values of y^j and — ■ = Z/, to 
 provide for the warped surface which is assumed by the section 
 under a heavy torsional strain. 
 
 For a rectangle, which is a section of frequent occurrence in 
 
 machine design, the corrected value oi Jp and Zp^= — is given 
 
 in the following table, while for the circle and the square no- 
 corrections are necessary for the values obtained from equa- 
 tion 20. 
 
 A cylindrical prism of wrought iron is subjected to a torsional 
 
 '^ '-■- I. of the following table. The force P— 1,000 lbs., 
 
 ;" ; while the bar is 4" in diameter and 48" long. 
 These quantities give for 5, the strain at the circumference 
 
 
 ind to get the angle of tors 
 
 which corresponds I 
 
 value in the formula : 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 If we wish to reduce d, so that 5 shall be equal to one-half the modulus of 
 resistance for torsion, ;'. e., = — ^ • 21,300 = 8,520 lbs., we make 
 
 = ^Jl.^.= ^'6^ 
 
 which gives an angle of about 1° 39". 
 
 SECTION TABLE. 
 
 No. 
 
 .„,., 
 
 Polar Section Modulus, 
 Polar Moment of r 
 Inertia/,,. Z^ = ^ 
 
 1 
 
 I. 
 
 * 
 
 ^' ' ^- 
 
 No. 
 
 Section. 
 
 Polar IMoment of 
 Inertia/^. 
 
 Polar Section Modulus, 
 
 II. 
 
 m 
 
 '— --Ir— ' 
 
 34 
 
 6 
 
 33 
 
 
 I 33^3 
 
 i"- Ifi 
 
 III. 
 
 3 v/ ^= + /'^ 
 Appicximately 
 
 
 3 (0.43 + 0.96A) . 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 13 
 
 ? 15- 
 
 Bodies of Uniform Resistance to Torsion. 
 lu order to make a body of uniform resistance to torsion it is 
 necessary to take such sectional areas at various points as shall 
 make in equation (17), S & constant, and also to take 
 
 // 
 
 (21) 
 
 In case I. of the table in ? 13, for all sections M= PR, and 
 hence in this case the bodj' should be prismatic in shape. For 
 cases II. and III. the necessary formulas are given in the follow- 
 ing table. For such bodies the angle of torsion is greater than 
 for those of prismatic shape. The angle for each is given in 
 the table, and is derived from the following : 
 d^ _ M 
 
 J.G 
 
 (22) 
 
 in which _/r is the polar moment of inertia for the section taken 
 at the point x. 
 
 
 Form. 
 
 
 Applica- 
 
 Equation and Angle of Torsion. 
 
 
 ■• 
 
 
 
 Circular section 
 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 ^•"' 
 
 i: 
 
 ^=^ f^; PR^S— cP; 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 Approximate form = a trun- 
 cated cone, with extremity 
 
 
 *— i 
 
 
 
 
 
 n. 
 
 
 
 Circular section 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 ^^^^■.PR^Sl.,^; 
 
 Appro.timate form = a trun- 
 cated cone, with extremity 
 
 1 
 
 
 does not detract from the value of the latter, since these are only 
 strictly correct for perfectly elastic bodies, but at the same 
 time they will be found practically reliable if the force P is not 
 permitted to exceed a definite proportion of the breaking load. 
 Different materials demand a diiferent factor of safety. For 
 cast iron, % to Ye the breaking load, or less, and for wrought 
 iron the same, and for wood i to y^, or yV, should be the limit. 
 These inequalities often arise from the fact that it is not 
 always easy to determine which of the applications of the 
 table really meets the case in question. In order to determine 
 the actual security from rupture, it is often necessary to make a 
 comparison with other existing strains. From this standpoint 
 the ratios of diameter to length in the following table have 
 been determined in order that the resistance to compres.sion and 
 to buckling may be as nearly alike as possible. 
 
 In Hodgkinson's experiments it was shown that columns 
 standing upon flat bases were nearly as strong as those which 
 were firmly fixed at one end. 
 
 In the third section many applications of these formulse will 
 be given. 
 
 ? 17. 
 Coi<UMNS OF Uniform Resistance. 
 Columns subjected to combined compressive and buckling 
 stresses are said to be of uniform resistance when its various 
 sections are so proportioned that a very small degree of buck- 
 ling will produce the same strain in each section. 
 
 For case II. of the preceding table, when the section is circu- 
 lar, the following formula (by Redtenbacher) may be used : 
 
 It may be remarked that the valuable experimental researches 
 of Hodgkinson, as given in his rules, show a somewhat smaller 
 breakmg load than the formulse " 
 
 r+(- 
 
 -(+)■) 
 
 This may be separated into a double equation by making : 
 
 = sin 
 
 which gives : 
 
 For other bodies of uniform resistance to torsion, see Torsion 
 Springs (?^ 20). 
 
 §16. 
 
 Resistance to Buckling. 
 
 Combined Bending and Compressive Strains. 
 
 A prismatic body is subjected to combined bending and com- 
 pressive _ stresses, to which it yields by buckling, when its di- 
 ameter is comparatively small in comparison with its length- 
 Under these conditions a compression applied in the direction 
 of the axis is opposed, both by the resistance of the body to 
 compression and also to bending, with this difference, that in 
 this case the lever arm of the bending force is not the abscissa, 
 but the ordinate of the elastic curve. From this it follows that 
 (neglecting some very small elements) any compressive force 
 P, capable of producing a bending, would do so even up to the 
 breakmg point, provided that the laws of perfect elasticity held 
 good until rupture occurred. This would only be true if the 
 theoretical resistance and the breaking load were the same and 
 the elasticity of the prism held them in equilibrium until the 
 final yieldnig of the pomt of application of the force P oc- 
 curred. 
 
 In the following table (p. 14) the principal formulis are given 
 for a number of the mosr important applications of these buck- 
 hng stresses. In the table 
 
 E = the modulus of elasticity of the material assumed to be 
 of prismatic shape ; 
 
 J = the least moment of inertia of its section taken with ref- 
 erence to a line of gravity, for example, in a rectangle of 
 •which the greater side is d and the lesser side /i, according to ? 7, 
 
 — {2 (p — sin 2 <p) 
 
 (23) 
 
 From these equations a limiting 
 curve may readily be found, whose 
 abscissas are those of a cycloid, and 
 whose ordinates are those of a 
 sinoide, and which may be called a 
 cycloidal sinoide. A method of 
 drawing this curve is given here- 
 after, in the discussion of connect- 
 ing rods, and the approximate shape 
 is also shown in the second form of 
 Fig. 5, in which the outline is a 
 circular curve, or at least a line of 
 very slight curvature. The strength 
 of these columns ma}' be taken as 
 ^ that of a cylindrical column of a 
 diameter /i and length I. 
 
 ? 18. 
 Compound Stresses. 
 
 FIG. 5. 
 
 It very often occurs that a variety 
 of forces act upon a body at the 
 same time and in a variety of ways, so that, for instance, a sec- 
 tion is subjected at the same time to tension and bending, or to 
 torsion and bending, etc. 
 
 The resistance and the maximum strains are then to be de- 
 termined in a different manner, according to circumstances. 
 
 In the following table ip. 15) are given the principal formulci 
 for some of the more commonly occurring cases. 
 
 L,et: 
 
 S = the greatest strain at the weakest section ; 
 
 Z = the section modulus at the weakest section, which 
 
 latter is indicated at P in the figures ; 
 i^ = the area of the section ; 
 J= its moment of inertia (? 7) ; 
 Jl/d = a betiding moment ; 
 Jffd = a twisting moment ; 
 M/ = an ideal moment, so that 
 (A/i)i = an ideal bending moment, and 
 {Md)i = an ideal twisting moment. 
 
 An examination of these formulae will show that in many 
 the table ; this, however, cases the combination of strains is a matter of importance. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 BUCKLING STRAINS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tlieoretical Support- 
 ing Power. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 The column i 
 
 to be considered under c 
 
 mpression, when: 
 
 No. 
 
 Application. 
 
 For circular section 
 
 For rectangular section 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ is less than 
 
 -^ (^ = lesser side). 
 
 Material. 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 ■S 
 
 5K 
 
 Cast iron. 
 
 1. 
 
 
 p 
 
 "'=^4^ 
 
 Fretly loaded post. The 
 lower end fixed. Weak- 
 est section at the point ' 
 of attachment. 
 
 
 14 
 8 
 
 Wrought iron. 
 Wood. 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 "K 
 
 Cast iron 
 
 11 
 
 
 ;) 
 
 P^.^1^ 
 
 Post free at both ends, 
 but kept in the line of 
 the axis. Weakest sec- 
 tion in the middle. 
 
 24 
 
 - 
 
 Wrought iron. 
 
 
 V y 
 
 
 
 iiK 
 
 13K 
 
 Wood. 
 
 
 ^;*<« 
 
 
 
 ,t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 16 
 
 Cast iron. 
 
 III. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 P=^2n^ZA 
 
 Post fixed below, and 
 held in the line of the 
 axis above. 
 
 33 
 
 38 
 
 Wrought iron. 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 -\^^ 
 
 
 
 i6 
 
 '9 
 
 Wood. 
 
 
 g 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 .o 
 
 23 
 
 Cast iron. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ,.^IA 
 
 Post fixed at both ends 
 in the line of the axis. 
 Weak points at the 
 ends and in the mid- 
 dle. 
 
 48 
 
 56 
 
 Wrought iron. 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i / 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 27 
 
 Wood. 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 i 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 For example, in case I., if 7? = — , i. e., if the load is hung at 
 
 the edge of the section, P = , and hence is only one-fourth as 
 
 4 
 great as it would be if applied centrally. If the section is circular 
 
 [d), we have P = 
 
 making R = 
 
 and the sustaining power is still less than with a rectangular 
 section. Case III. is derived from I. and II., and may be 
 changed into either by making a, or R ^ o. 
 
 The so-called ideal moments are especially useful in these 
 calculations. It will be noticed that in the case of elliptical 
 and rectangular sections, h is taken in the plane of bending. 
 These dimensions being known in advance, since the choice of 
 profile is frequently permitted, it is possible by the use of the 
 ideal moments to consider the question of combined strains, 
 since the quantity in the parenthesis to the right is the expres- 
 
 sion for the lever arm of the force P for each case. This can 
 generally be readily determined graphically, and so determined 
 just like any case of ordinary bending. 
 
 For example, in case II., if a = 45°, we have cos a = sin a = 
 0.707 for the value of /?, and the section at B is to be calculated 
 as if acted upon by a force P, with a lever arm o. 707 / (the pro- 
 
 jection of / on the plane of attachment) + 0.707 _. 
 
 In case I., making R = o, for a circular section (Mi)i := P ~ 
 and substituting 5 — d^, we get P= S — d'^,as we should since 
 
 the stress is now purely tensile. In this case — is the lever arm 
 
 which, if acting with a bending force P, would produce a strain 
 of the same amount as that in the line of the axis. This is 
 only rigidly exact when the shearing action which occurs in 
 bending is neglected. Many useful applications of cases IV. 
 and V. are found in discussing axles and shafts. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 COMPOUND STRAINS. 
 
 Sustaining Pow« 
 
 cos.^^ilsina^Rcos.) 
 
 __(,^„+ ,,,.; 
 
 - ^ + -|- V^ /2 + if2 
 
 v/ M-C- + M.^ + 2 ATi M«, cc 
 
 Ideal Moments. 
 
 ig moment for stress 5: (^f/, ); = p (^R + ^^ 
 
 iptical section (M) ; I For rectangular section (ih) : 
 (^Miy =p(^R +-|-) I (m )i =p(yj +-^) I (^Mi ),: =/'(;? +-^) , 
 
 Ideal bending : 
 ular section {d) : 
 
 Ideal bending moment for 
 
 ,(«)-p(.„-,...^„..). 
 
 (jifb )i =-P (-?"■ 
 
 (yift); =/'(/«•« a + 
 
 For rectangular section (M): 
 
 bending moment : ( 7)/6 ) i = P (t? «^ a + / «•« a + -^ ^^^ a) . 
 
 (^/i )t =P(^ cos a + 
 
 '"-—4"-). 
 
 For elliptical section (i/i) : 
 
 (ats )i = p(;j«^ a + 
 
 Ideal bending moment for the stress 6- : 
 Ideal twisting moment ; 
 
 -/' 
 
 iMi \i ^ ^- Ml + J M^ + 71// 
 
 (^0*= {■ 
 
 M{- -t- M.{- + 2 My M« a 
 
 I 19- 
 
 Resistance; op "Wai,i<s of Vessei.s. 
 
 Boilers, Cylinders, Etc. 
 
 The following table will serve to determine the resistance of 
 
 the walls of cylindrical vessels subjected to pressure for the 
 
 cases which usually occur in practice. 
 
 The theory of resistance under these conditions is not fully 
 settled, especially in the case of comparatively thin shells sub- 
 jected to external pressure, for which the corresponding formulae 
 do not give satisfactory results. 
 In the following cases, let : 
 /> = the unbalanced pressure upon the walls of the vessel ; 
 5" =: the maximum stress for the material used ; 
 E = the modulus of elasticity of the material : 
 r = the radius of the vessel ; 
 6 = the thickness of the walls. 
 Although only approximate, the formulae for cases I. and II. 
 hold good up to the limit of rupture. 
 
 Examples: i. Given a wrought i 
 thick, with a stress upon the mater 
 case I., the internal pre '-- 
 
 -^T^i 
 
 or about z''^ inches. 
 
 The deflection^ , . „ , . 
 
 may be determined, according to Grashof, by the formula for 
 case III. : 
 
 E~ 
 
 md for case IV. 
 
 "= 11,500 X 0.0185 = 212 lbs. 
 
 6 6 \ 6 J . 
 
 f Example 3 preceding;, 
 
 (24) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 RESISTANCE TO PRESSURE. 
 
 H'/-^-) 
 
 <V)- 
 
 -f-(^r 
 
 If r' is the external radius of the vessel, so that r' = r-\- S, 
 we have : 
 
 f = ^(-+-f) 
 
 ^'<^ 
 
 '-r-r^p^ 
 
 For vessels -whose walls are required to be made very thick, 
 as in the case of the cylinders and pumps of h5'draulic presses 
 or for cannon, etc., the preceding formulae do not apply. Under 
 these conditions the relative radial distances of the various por- 
 tions of the thickness of the metal vary greatly, and their 
 relation has an important influence upon the resistance. It 
 is the relation which exists between the various stresses at 
 different points which governs the various formulae for the 
 thickness of the walls, which are given below. Bris calculates 
 the stresses at different points on the radius upon the supposi- 
 tion that the internal diameter is not altered by the pressure ; 
 Barlow admits such an alteration by pressure that the area of the 
 annular section of metal is not reduced ; Lame makes neither 
 of these assumptions, but calculates very closely the changes 
 in the various stresses which are caused by the internal pressure 
 at each point, and in this way has obtained the most reliable data 
 as to the real behavior of the particles of the material, accord- 
 ing to the modern theory. The results of the three theories are 
 given in the following table : 
 
 Quantities. 
 
 Brix. 
 
 Barlow. 
 
 I,ame. 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 ^loguat^-S'— I 
 
 S 
 
 (r+Sy-r^ 
 {r i- ^r + r' 
 
 }S-p' 
 
 .5 
 o 
 
 s-P 
 
 1 '- 
 
 r 
 I p 
 
 2S 
 
 ^l2{S+P) 
 } 2S—P 
 
 w [ ,, 
 
 2S-P 
 
 rif weput (i-f 4-)=/^ 
 
 
 (26) 
 
 Example : If 5 = >-, that is 
 
 All three theories admit that the inner portion of the wall is 
 strained the most, and hence it is for the inner wall that 5" 
 should be chosen. The formulae of Lame, as well as those of 
 Barlow, show that beyond certain limits an increase in the 
 thickness is not attended with any increase of strength. With 
 a given resisting power 5',-this limit will be reached when p = S; 
 the theoretical resistance will be attained when p = the modu- 
 lus of resistance of the material. At this point the internal 
 pressure begins to stretch the inner fibres of the walls, and any 
 increase in strain will cause rupture. The theoretical limit in 
 this case is reached when p = T, which is 
 
 For Cast Iron = 10,650 lbs. 
 
 " Wrought Iron = 21,300 " 
 " Cast Steel = 36,000 " 
 
 Lack of homogeneity in the material may cause the danger 
 pressure to be reached far within these limits, the material 
 breaking without previously stretching. 
 
 Since stresses exceeding 36,000 pounds are reached in guns of 
 large calibre, it is evident that ordinary bronze is unsuitable for 
 such conditions, and even homogeneous steel is often unequal 
 to the pressure. The erosion of the chamber in the case of 
 ordinary bronze cannon also acts to weaken the inner ring of 
 material, and must be considered as a chemical deteriorating 
 action. 
 
 Various methods have been devised for strengthening guns 
 by giving the various layers different tensions. Of these 
 methods the principal is that of hooping. The principal result 
 of this construction is to produce a compression in the inner 
 layer. The pressure of the gases of explosion must then first 
 overcome this compression and restore the normal condition 
 before it can produce any extension of the fibres, and as a result 
 a much higher degree of resistance is secured than when the 
 metal is left in its normal condition. 
 
 The calculations of the resistance of hooped guns offer many 
 difficulties. If we have not only the inner pressure, but also 
 the outer pressure, p', to consider, we may take the following 
 formula, after Lame : 
 
 i'+^y^ 
 
 s+p 
 
 (27) 
 
 -P+2P' 
 
 Putting I -| — ^ fi, as before, and solving with regard to ^, 
 
 ^ = ^^^^+^^',^1 (28) 
 
 in which 5" will become less with regard to p, the greater/' be- 
 comes. 
 
 In the case of hooped guns 
 /' is not constant and invari- 
 ble, but depends upon the 
 effect which the internal pres- 
 sure p has through the walls 
 upon the hoops. 
 
 Referring to Fig. 6, let it 
 first be considered that under 
 normal conditions the inner 
 ring is under no strain, that 
 is, / = <3, and also S\ = S^'2 
 
 For the stress S' in an annular ring lying between the radii 
 ^' and r, Lame gives 
 
 Now 
 
 vhen the i 
 
 mer pres- 
 sure/ becomes sensible while 
 the external pressure/'' = o, 
 or at least may be neglected, 
 then the layer at r' will be- 
 come extended, and the ten- 
 sions will be 5/. = 67. The 
 stress S^' in the inner side of 
 the hoop reacts with a pres- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 T-7 
 
 svLTGp', and substituting this in Lame's formula, making i -\ j- 
 
 = n', will give 
 
 Making 5'^ = S^^ = 5/ and substituting this value of/' in (28), 
 gives 
 
 ^ /i2 + I "^ fi''-{- 1 fi'' + I 
 
 According to (26), S^ is dependent upon p and S, and by sub- 
 stituting and transforming, we get 
 
 
 (30) 
 
 In this case the stress 6" upon the inner ring is always greater 
 than p, but the ratio approaches much nearer to unity than 
 before, as the following table shows : 
 
 -Whet 
 
 We have 
 
 
 And also 
 
 
 6 
 r 
 
 6^ 
 r' 
 
 ^ 
 
 /"^ 
 
 i 
 
 6- 
 
 P 
 
 S' 
 P 
 
 S' 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 0.600 
 
 1.667 
 
 0.667 
 
 0.400 
 
 I 
 
 0.5 
 
 2 
 
 1-5 
 
 0.800 
 
 1.250 
 
 0.406 
 
 0.325 
 
 2 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 0.905 
 
 1.057 
 
 0.143 
 
 0.135 
 
 It will be seen that the mere hooping of a gun with a ring of 
 the same material as the inner tube adds very materially to its 
 strength. If, however, the ring is forced on in any manner so 
 as to produce an initial strain /' upon the tube, a still greater 
 advantage will be the result. 
 
 If we insert the value oip' from (29) into formula (28), we have 
 
 : 4- 2 5,' 
 
 ,P_ 
 
 (31) 
 
 ^ /./^ + I /.^ + : 
 
 , In this formula 5/ is partially a function of p, and also de- 
 pends partly upon the extent to which the tube reacts. This 
 latter condition exerts a most important influence upon the 
 strength, as we shall see hereafter. 
 
 If we assume that the hoop is under such an initial strain 
 that, for the maximum value oip, the value of S^ = S (which 
 is doubtless the most desirable condition), we shall then obtain 
 from (31) 
 
 If (5 = r, 
 this gives 
 
 13 
 
 79 
 65 
 
 mula (27). If we assume the internal pressure/), to be =0, or 
 at least so small as to be neglected, we get : 
 
 from which : ^ Si — /"^ 
 
 " 2 fi'^ 
 
 ^=-1'' „xi 
 
 c+^y- 
 
 The minus sign indicates the change from tension to com- 
 pression. When the internal pressure = c>, the stress in the ex- 
 ternal fibres is : 
 
 2 ix' 
 
 which g'ves : 
 
 /^^-f I 
 
 S'=-P'-, 
 
 .k^^ 
 
 (34) 
 
 This value J 
 tain tlie ratio 
 
 / \3 
 
 {- + r)-\ 
 3 less than the preceding ; for by division we ob- 
 
 
 which can only = i, when 
 the greatest stress is always 
 
 If, for example, (5 = r, and hence /" 
 
 7. Hence for external pressure 
 the innermost fibres. 
 
 then the stress in the 
 
 inner wall of the tube will be 5= — — p' and S' ^ — ~T^'' ^'^ 
 
 that S' =-^ S. This is a greater proportion than when the 
 
 pressure is from within, as under these circumstances according 
 
 to formula (30) 5 = — p, only. 
 
 It is not uncommon in machine construction to strengthen 
 hubs and other parts of machinery by forcing on hoops or rings, 
 and the calculations relating to such construction are closely 
 allied to the preceding. The following case will serve to illus- 
 trate. 
 
 (32) 
 
 - r' , then we have m = 2, //' = — , and 
 
 This shows 5" to be less in value than p, or in other words, it 
 is possible to psrmit the internal pressure/) to exceed the mod- 
 ulus of resistance without overstraining the material. It is also 
 evident that by encircling the hoops with additional hoops, this 
 principle may be extended still further, and the ratio between 
 p and 5" still further increased. 
 
 If the material of the gun be taken as ordinary cast steel, 
 with a modulus of resistance of 36,000 lbs., the pressure of the 
 gases of explosion could not be permitted to exceed 43,000 lbs., 
 without causing a permanent deformation of the bore. Recent 
 experiments, however, have shown somewhat greater figures 
 than the above. 
 
 Some of the later tests in England 
 have shown pressures of 25.8 tons on 
 the square inch, although this pres- 
 sure is considered by some engineers 
 to be rather too high to be safe. It 
 is quite possible that in this case the 
 modulus of resistance of the material 
 exceeded that given above ; or the 
 interior tube may have been hard- 
 ened, which, if properly done, is de- 
 cidedly advantageous. 
 
 The compression exerted upon a 
 cylindrical tube by an external pres- 
 sure, as in Fig. 7, may be determined by a 
 
 In Fig. 8 is a ring B, which is to be forced on to the cylindri- 
 cal shaft A. The following applies either to shrinking, or to 
 cold forcing. Before the operation the radius of the shaft is r^, 
 and the radius of the hole in the ring r.^, while afterwards they 
 both have the same radius r. 
 
 Under these conditions the shaft B will be subjected to a uni- 
 formly distributed compression S^, while the inner surface of the 
 ring will be under a similar tension S,,. Taking the correspond- 
 ing moduli of elasticity E^, and E^, we have from formula (2) : 
 
 Adding these together, we get : 
 S, , S, 
 '--E.^^'^'Er' 
 It is most important for the designei 
 for r, and r„. 
 
 If we call V = 
 
 FIG. 7. 
 I application of for- 
 
 e have 
 
 ; + != 
 
 to know the best values 
 
 (36) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 S^ and 5'o are dependent upon each other, and their relation 
 is expressed by Lame's formula : 
 
 ■which may be abbre^•iated by putting 
 5j = S^ ,> 
 
 ^1 " 
 
 S,p 
 
 (37) 
 
 The difference between the value of the denominator and 
 ■unity is so slight that in practice it may be neglected, and for a 
 practical and useful formula we have 
 
 In this formula we have for the following : 
 
 —- = 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 i.o 1.5 2.0 3.0 
 p = 0.3S5 0.438 0.4S6 0.528 G.600 0.724 0.800 0.882 
 We also have from equation (38): 
 
 S, = z^ and S^ = ==— . ^ 
 
 , , ^1 I T I -^2 '^ (39) 
 
 This value of -J' is generally so small that great care is neces- 
 sary, in turning and boring, to secure the correct sizes for i\ 
 
 Exampl 
 
 If 6 =' 
 ress. S... 
 This giv 
 
 : With a wrought iron shaft a 
 
 r, then p = 0.8 by the table a 
 n the interior of the ring due t 
 es from equation (38) 
 
 7200 720c 
 
 nd a cast iron hub we 
 E, = 14,200,000. 
 bove ; and we may a 
 the forcing should n 
 
 have 
 
 Iso assume that the 
 ot exceed 7200 lbs.; 
 
 r, in othe 
 
 ■^ 14,200,000 28,4 
 r words, the increased diamete 
 
 00,000 1408 ■" 
 of the shaft over tha 
 
 of the hole must be 
 
 ? 20. 
 
 The CALctXATioN of vSprings. 
 
 The materials used in machine construction are all more or 
 less elastic and yielding, so that it is only by a judicious dis- • 
 position and proportioning that we are able to avoid an injuri- 
 ous deformation of their parts when subjected to the action of 
 external forces. Indeed, it is the principal aim of the construc- 
 tive engineer to keep the various forms of distortion, such as 
 extension, compression, bending and twisting, within as narrow 
 limits as possible. In the case of springs, however, it is sought 
 to utilize this property of elasticity for a variety of purposes ; 
 such as to modifj' shocks, as in the case of buffers and car 
 springs, or as a source of motive power in clocks and watches ; 
 or in cushions, mattresses, etc. 
 
 All bodies which will permit great alterations of form within 
 the elastic limit may properly come under the designation of 
 springs. 
 
 The only substances which are of service for springs under 
 the action of tension and compression are those which are soft 
 and readily compressible, such as rubber ; while the more rigid 
 materials, such as wood and the metals, are used in flexure, or 
 in torsion. 
 
 In the following table is given a number of forms of the most 
 usual springs, both for bending and torsion, with their respec- 
 tive properties. 
 
 Next to elasticity, the property of a spring to be considered 
 is the economy of material, both on account of cost and space 
 occupied. In oi'der to make it possible to compare different 
 springs in this respect, the relative volume is given in the last 
 column of the table, for the same load and application in the 
 different cases, the volume of the triangular spring being taken 
 as unit}-. 
 
 In all the formulae of the table we have 
 
 = the modulus of elasticity, 
 = the modulus of torsion =^ 
 
 \ (see I 13). 
 
 The coefficients for the resistance of the materials used in 
 springs will be found in ^ 2. It must not be forgotten that for 
 materials used in torsion, to obtain the same security as when 
 used in flexure, the permissible stress 5' should be f its usual 
 value (see ? 5). The formulae are intended only to be used 
 when the force i'is applied as shown in the figures. 
 
 The volume V of any form of spring is according to the 
 formula ; 
 
 V=C. [P.f)- 
 
 (40) 
 
 would be too great for the ring to stand. 
 
 in which Cis a constant depending upon the form of the spring; 
 while Pf is the product of the load into the deflection, or the 
 so-called work of the spring. This shows the interesting fact 
 that springs of the same general form and same material are 
 alwaj-s of the same weight for the same work, without regard to 
 the actual length or proportion of dimensions. 
 
 I._ _ ^P 
 
 Simple 
 Triangula 
 Spring. 
 
 -=/i 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Cases VII. to 
 ■C. are bodies of 
 
 Approximately wh 
 
 Springs of the 
 form of VII. and 
 VIII. may also 
 
 " R 3(0.4^+0.96/0 
 
 R G d 
 
 cimatelywhe. 
 
 rial whether the 
 breadth of the 
 plate is parallel, 
 
 " R 3(0,4^+0,96/0 
 
 P-s-.-~ 
 
 R G d 
 
 The weakest 
 
 ' R 3(0.43 + 0.96/0 
 
 Rrac 
 
 ual 
 
 
 
 
 
 ot h 
 
 trom 
 
 H to 
 
 the 
 
 enH 
 
 this 
 
 
 be m 
 
 ade a 
 
 
 
 itorm 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The quotient -=5 shows that a small modulus of elasticity, 
 when combined with a high modulus of resistance, indicates 
 the best material for the construction of springs. According to 
 the table in \, 2, we have : 
 
 Hardened and tempered steel - 
 
 le branch A C, of S'jch a spring, let us tak*- 
 1, R, which is the horizontal projection oj 
 A a, a-s 4". ihe load on the spring is one-fourth the load on the car, 22,000 lbs. -f- 
 one-fourth the weight of the car itself, 18,000, and one-half of this is borne by each 
 branch 9f the spring, making the load at the end of the lever R in this case to be 
 5,000 lbs. 
 In the preceding table, under case VII., column 4, 
 
 Ordinary steel (not hardened) = 
 
 Wood 
 
 (90,000)^ 
 
 28,400,000 
 
 ■- (35-500)'^ ' 
 
 9,230,000 
 
 (6,8i6.'2 
 1,562,000 
 
 (2,S4o)'^ 
 
 = .019S6 
 = -01936 
 
 -..{- 
 
 / 
 
 (41) 
 
 in which ^ is the acceleration of gravity = 32.2 ft. 
 
 Examples on the theory of springs : i. Given a simple triangular spring, as in 
 II., for a load /'= no lbs., and a deflection/= 0.78". Taking the material as 
 steel, with E = 42,600,000, and making 5, the greatest permissible stress, = 5 
 lbs., and also taking the length / = 15.75", we then have 
 
 Substituting this in the formula' 
 
 
 
 
 - 42,600,000 X c 
 
 .78 X (0. 
 
 24)3 
 
 
 
 
 Th 
 
 
 me V ^^'^ - ^■ 
 
 18 X 0.4 
 
 4 X 15.75 ^ 
 
 . 
 
 
 Ex 
 
 have 
 
 If we 
 
 keep the same con 
 
 iitions, b 
 
 t make the 
 
 engthrr.8 
 
 , we shall 
 
 
 
 
 ,, 56,800X1 
 
 
 - = 0.238" 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,600,000 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 6Xno 
 
 X (11.8)3 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 42,600,000 X 
 
 0.78 X (0 
 
 238)3 ^-4= 
 
 
 The 
 
 firm 
 load 
 
 E.N 
 
 sprin 
 
 volume ir 
 
 "nd*thed 
 ample '3: 
 g such a 
 
 thisc 
 narks 
 
 Let 
 
 5 No. 
 
 ase=F=^ = 
 on formula (40) by 
 
 ly'ralsTmade 'of 
 
 
 238 XI 1.8 
 
 
 thuscon- 
 
 a helical 
 spring, in 
 
 showing that the volu 
 nt of the proportional 
 
 'cast steel SincI this 
 
 beappliLT 
 
 crde 
 
 to obta 
 
 nthe 
 
 ame security wen, 
 
 ust make 
 
 S=-^of 
 
 its precedir 
 
 g value, or 
 
 ^-~- . 56,800 = 45,440; and the wire may be taken as 
 We then have from the table 
 
 The length / is obtained from ci 
 
 in which G ^ - 
 
 This would make the ni 
 
 ^ = 31-3 X 0.7854 X (0.24)2 = I. 
 
 Example 4: Torsion springs have recently been applied to railway cars in the 
 orm shown in Fig. 9, which is the design of an American, Mr, Dudley. The M 
 haped spring is bent at the ends into two elbows, A B, which are attached hv hn\A 
 o a block which rests on the axle box. A saddle, A, transmits the bad of the car 
 o the spring, while the other end is supported at Cby a hook. 
 
 If this spring is Biaae of Sheffield steel wh': 
 24,140,000, then tneDnodulusof toiaion G = - 
 
 as a modulus ol elasticity .E = 
 
 = 9>656,ooo. 
 
 to column 6 in the table, will be 
 
 about j-Jv, of its gro^ 
 
 This shows that hardened and tempered steel is theoretically 
 the best material of springs. It is also worthy of note that in 
 all the examples given, the deflection is proportioned to the 
 load. It follows from this fact that the time of vibration which 
 any of these loaded springs possesses, is of the so-called "sim- 
 ple" character, of the same nature as that of a pendulum. 
 Neglecting the weight of the spring itself, we have for the vibra- 
 tion of a loaded spring the same rate as that of a simple 
 mathematical pendulum of a length equal to the deflection of 
 the spring/", which is 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 A double armed plate spring of the form No. III., to have the same supporting- 
 power would weigh about a hundred pounds, or j^^ its gross load and^'sits net load. 
 
 As long ago as 1857 I called attention to the superior economy of torsion springs 
 over plate springs for railway use. The principal reason for the tardiness of railway- 
 men in appreciating this fact may have been partly due to the difficulty of securing 
 
 come in the case of the Dudley Spring. 
 
 In the little pamphlet on " The Construction and Calculations of Springs," which, 
 I published at that date the comparative weight of the torsion springs VII. and IX , 
 and the trianeular plate spnngs 11 and III is given as -^^ instead of -f^ as in the 
 preceding table, but the latter is snown to De more nearly correct in practice 
 
 rhVfon 
 
 Dring may be applied to the 
 The box is guided in the 
 sill A of the wagon and the 
 with the lower end flattened 
 the cap E of the box. The 
 ' imped by the screw 
 
 bearing of a go( 
 
 frame X 5, and die 
 
 journal box C. 
 
 for about K of „ , „ . 
 
 upper end screws for about i>^ turns into the cap F, where it is elai . 
 
 G after the load has been equaUzed, and in this way any desired adjustme 
 
 ivill probably be the best method of showing the manner 
 
 ^ gon weighs about 11,000 
 
 o pounds load. This gives about 8,250 pounds to be s 
 each spring. We will assume a deflection of i^", with a permissible fi 
 of 68,000 lbs., and take G = 9,656.000, as before. 
 
 Since it is desirable to use such diameters of spring steel as correspond 
 cial sizes, it is better to select a diameter d for the steel, and deduce a cc 
 radius R for the helix, according to the formula for case IX., col. 4, page 64, 
 
 culat- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Now for these respective valu 
 ■♦vith a load P= 8,250 lbs., we si 
 
 We have for n the fact that 271-. 
 tuting this in the formula for_/, c. 
 
 X d oi the steel is i", ij'j" 
 a number of coils, k, tha 
 e uncoiled spring. Substi 
 
 Now the least possible 
 -and we must also provide 
 
 distance bet\reen the cap F and the socket E is nd + J, 
 for a space a between the coils, sav 0.3". This gives the 
 entre of coils of the unloadea spring 
 
 
 ««'-l-/+«<7 
 
 The tot..l height of the 
 :i^ coils enter into the ca 
 must be added both top a 
 the socket, as i4".weobt 
 Of course this height is 
 in this case it n-ay be tak 
 
 spring, however, \\ill be greater than ns by 1.5J + d, since 
 p F, and one-half the diamater of the steel in the last coil 
 nd bottom. Adding to this the thickness S of the cap and 
 in the entire height occupied by the spring and its fittings, 
 limited by the space at our disposal between A and C, and 
 en at 14 inches, and in any case it will generally be depen- 
 
 When tlie elastic limit is reached, the middle section E Fof 
 the ring is double its original area, while the periphery is 
 I the original periphery A B C D. 
 
 The compressibility within the elastic limit is dependent upon 
 the quality of the rubber, and may be approximately determined 
 by the following empirical formula : 
 
 in which' : A = the extent to which the spring is compressed by 
 a load /"; /= the original thickness of the spring; ^ = the 
 original cross section in a plane normal to the axis ; and y = the 
 specific gravity of the material. 
 
 </ = 
 
 
 Ii'e" 
 
 i/s" 
 
 iiV 
 
 i? = 
 
 1.619 
 
 
 
 271 
 
 or say = 
 
 lis 
 
 
 "\ 
 
 =K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iid = 
 
 
 5?^ 
 
 4.70 
 
 3.78 
 
 
 2.25 
 
 
 
 0.96 
 
 f = 
 
 1-75 
 
 1-75 
 
 
 1-75 
 
 « (<f -(- .7) -f/= 
 
 
 9-38 
 
 7.70 
 
 6.49 
 
 
 
 1.67 
 
 
 
 
 
 1.^8 
 
 I If 
 
 
 ?/ " 
 
 =K 
 
 ^h 
 
 2K 
 
 3.00 
 
 Total height = 
 
 1575 
 
 j-ifi 
 
 12-45 
 
 11.49 
 
 
 I5K 
 
 13^8 
 
 12/2 
 
 11K2 
 
 ' dictate, all four springs havii.j 
 The simplicity of this constru 
 
 The use of vulcanized rubber for springs and buffers is now 
 -quite general, usually in the shape of rings or collars between 
 plates of iron. The resistance of rubber to distortion has not 
 yet been fully investigated in an experimental manner, but the 
 following examination of buffer springs may be of service ; the 
 •data being from the valuable researches of Chief Engineer 
 "Werder, of the establishment of Klett & Co., of Nuremberg. 
 
 The usual sections of buffer rings are shown in Figs. 11 and 
 12, in which one of the plates carries an annular projection, and 
 -the other a corresponding depression, between which the springs 
 are held, and lateral motion in the buffer case prevented. 
 
 When the ring of rubber is under compression its volume is 
 unchanged ; the cross section is reduced, but the diameter of the 
 -ring is increased proportionally. The elements which are sub- 
 jected to the greatest strain lie at the circumference E, and are 
 under tension, as is proved by the cracks which appear when 
 -the limit of elasticit}' is exceeded. 
 
 The limit of elasticity will be reached by a load of about 700 
 pounds to the square inch of original cross section normal to 
 -the axis ; or, in other words, a modulus of compression 7"= 700 
 inay be taken. This modulus is slightly higher for rubber of 
 the lightest specific gravity (about 7S0 lbs. ], and less for a heavier 
 Specific gravity (about 640 lbs. ) . The specific gravity y, which 
 depends upon the proportion of sulphur, varies from I for the 
 lightest, to 1. 15, or even 1.32, for the heaviest. 
 
 Example : A buffer spring similar in shape 
 r5X" ,„H ,„ i„=,M» ^;o,-„.fer of 2-J-|", which gi' 
 
 = 305 pounds, • 
 
 According to (42) the c 
 
 '5 \/ 305 = 
 
 pounds, 
 
 Is well within the elastic 
 
 24, say J/g". 
 
 nd"ifs°specific 
 
 The Belgian engineer, Stevart, has also made extensive re- 
 searches upon the subject of the resistance of rubber. These 
 experiments appear to confirm the opinion that any change of 
 shape is unaccompanied by any change of volume, and that 
 rubber is practically as incompressible as water. The experi- 
 ments on tension gave a modulus of elasticity of 119.28 lbs. In 
 regard to compression Stevart deduced a formula similar to the 
 preceding 
 
 -^^ f'c 
 
 l—X I' ^ 
 
 P+i; 
 
 in which <z is a coefiicient dependent upon the form of the 
 spring, and determined experimentallj'. In the case of locomo- 
 tive buffers, which are composed of several rings, the compres- 
 sion of each ring should be computed separately, and their sum 
 taken. 
 
 Rubber springs are used very extensivel}', but the principal 
 objection to them is that the material gradually loses its elas- 
 ticity and becomes a hard, unyielding mass. It has been found 
 that this is largely due to friction between the rings and their 
 cases, and great care should be taken that boxes for rubber 
 springs should have ample allowance made for the increased 
 diameter of the spring when compressed. 
 
 It is a matter of importance to choose such a shape for a 
 rubber spring that it shall not have a tendency to form puckers 
 in the edge when it is under pressure. This is shown in Fig. 
 12, where the slight concavity in the edge would soon develop 
 a crack when compressed, as at F^ F^, while the shape in Fig. ii 
 has no such tendency. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 SECTION 11. 
 
 THE ELEMENTS OF GRAPHOSTATICS. 
 
 Introductory. 
 
 The equilibrium of forces may be very clearly shown by the 
 graphical method, since it is possible to show the direction, ex- 
 tent and position of any force by a right line. The direction 
 of a force is determined by the angle which its representative 
 line makes with the horizontal axis of co-ordinates ; the length 
 of the line gives the absolute amount of force exerted, the alge- 
 braic character of the force (plus or minus) being indicated by 
 arrow-heads ; while the position of the line in the system of co- 
 ordinates, makes it possible to show any constants which 
 may occur in the equation of any right line. This repre- 
 sentation of forces by means of geometric magnitudes makes it 
 possible to solve problems in statics entirely by means of 
 geometrical constructions, and in many cases this will be found 
 simpler and more convenient than the use of algebraic analysis, 
 especially in those cases in which the values to be determined 
 are themselves geometrical quantities, and therefore are to be 
 drawn when found. The various details of the method have 
 been arranged and collected into a system which has been called 
 Graphical Statics, or, as we have here termed it, Graphostatics.* 
 This method is of especial value in the study of Machine De- 
 sign, and in the following sections of this work many applica- 
 tions of it will be found. It is for this reason that the following 
 brief exposition of the leading principles of the method have 
 been here grouped together. 
 
 There is a distinction to be made between Graphostatics, 
 properly so-called, and the mere graphical calculations of simple 
 values, considered merely as magnitudes. This is more properly 
 to be considered as graphical arithmetic, or Arithmography.f 
 
 In the following pages this branch of the subject is not very 
 fully discussed, only an outline of its application to pure arith- 
 metic being given. It will be found, however, to be a subject 
 of much use to the mechanic, as many examples of its applica- 
 tion in future pages will show. 
 
 Mu£tipi,ica.tion by Lines. 
 
 In graphical calculations dimensions are taken with the 
 dividers and scale, and any convenient unit may be selected, 
 such as the inch, millimetre, decimeter, square foot, cubic foot, 
 unit of velocity, unit of money, etc , etc. It is readily apparent 
 that the operations of addition and subtraction may be per- 
 formed by simply marking off the various values upon any line. 
 The operation of multiplication is not quite so simple, and a 
 brief explanation may be necessary. 
 
 In all cases it is of course necessary that the same unit must 
 be chosen for all the quantities involved, and this holds good for 
 multiplication as well, and the same unit must be used to meas- 
 ure the result as has been chosen to express the original quanti- 
 ties. If, now, we wish to multiply two lines, a and b, together, 
 or, more correctly, to multiply a line of the length a by a line of 
 the length b, we must find a line x, which will contain our 
 chosen unit, a X b times. This is a simple operation, and may 
 be performed in several ways by means of similar triangles. 
 
 I. Draw O E, Fig. 13, horizontal, making its length equal to 
 unity ; erect a.iE & perpendicular, and intersect this from O with 
 O B=b. hay off OA = a, and from A draw a parallel to E B, 
 intersecting O B produced at C. Then O C will be the desired 
 
 product X. That is to say, -^^j-^ = 7=;-^, and since (9 .£" = i, we 
 
 This solution requires that one factor, b, shalt 
 
 . ab 
 
 have X = . 
 
 I 
 be greater than unity. 
 
 II. Fig. 14. A modification of the preceding may be made 
 by drawing E B inclined, instead of perpendicular to O E, in 
 which case both factors may be less than unity. 
 
 III. We may make, as in Fig. 15, OE and O B as before^ 
 produce OA=a, and draw A C, so that the angle OA <r= 
 OEB,so that A Cwill be the anti-parallel to E B. Then O C 
 
 ' AO~ 
 
 OE' 
 
 * See Culn 
 
 ann," Graphical Statics. 
 
 ' Zurich, 1866. 
 
 tSee "Pr 
 
 nciples of Grapliical Ari 
 
 hmetic," by Dr. Eggers, Schaffhausen, 1865; 
 
 also Schlesin 
 
 
 Journal of the Austrian Society of Engineers 
 , " Graphical Calculus," Proc. Royal Inst., 
 
 and Archile 
 
 cts, 1S66; also E. Stamir 
 
 
 ■•ol. VI. 
 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 will be the desired product x, since the triangles O E B and 
 6* ^ C are similar. This anti-parallelism is shown by the fact 
 that 0E'=0 E, O B' = OB, and AC\s parallel to E' B' . 
 If the triangle B E' B' is rotated to the right about an axis, 
 passing through B B' , the two triangles, B B' E' and B B' E, 
 will form a parallelogram ; hence the term anti-parallel. This 
 construction is most convenient when E B is perpendicular to 
 O E, which can only occur when b is greater than i. 
 
 IV. We may make, as in Fig. 16, (9 .£"=: unity, layout on 
 O E the factor O A = a, and erect a perpendicular or inclined 
 line at E, in which E B=b; then draw through A a parallel 
 to E B, and this latter line will intersect O B, prolonged so that 
 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 Fig. 18. 
 
 A C=^, since CA:OA = BE: OE, or x :a= b :i; a and 5- 
 being either greater or less than i. Now make E B^=. b-^, and 
 draw O Byto intersect CA, prolonged at Ci, then A C-^ = x^, 
 the product of a and b-^, and C Q will be the product of a into 
 B B,, or : 
 
 x + x, = a{b^ b,). 
 Of course, the factor b, which is to be multiplied by a, may- 
 extend on both sides of the base line O E, and the desired pro- 
 duct, ab = X, will then be the distance on the parallel to b, 
 which is included between the two lines drawn from O through, 
 the extremities of b. 
 
 V. In Fig. 17 O E = unity, ^ .5" = the factor b, and O B any 
 value, so that OB <COE -[- E B. Lay out O A on O B. making 
 it = the factor a, and draw from A an anti-parallel to E B (see 
 III.), then A C will = x. Vor A C : O A = B E : O E, or 
 X •.a=-b:i, and a and b may both be less than i- 
 
 VI. Again, we mav make Fig. 18 OE=j, erect a perpen- 
 dicular at E, make E A = a, E B = b, ]o\u O with B, draw^ 
 B B' normal to OB, and draw from A a parallel to BB', then 
 will EC= th.e. desired product x. Tor we h^ve E C : E A = 
 BE -.OE or x:a=b:i. 
 
 It often occurs in designing that we have already a diagram 
 drawn which may serve for a portion of the construction, and 
 in such cases the following methods may be found convenient. 
 
 VII. Fig. 19. O A = a and B' B = b are either at right 
 angles or inclined to each other, so that B' falls between O and 
 A. Layout on O A the unit CjS", join i? with E, and draw 
 from A a parallel to B E, and from the point C, where it inter- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 23 
 
 sects C, draw CC parallel to BB^, then CC^ will = x, for 
 we have CC : O A = B B' -.0 E or x ■.a = b w. 
 
 VIII. Fig. 20. Given as before, O A = a and B B' = b, either 
 perpendicular or inclined to O A. Draw O E parallel to B B' , 
 and equal in length to unity ; join E to A, and draw from B a 
 
 of a and b, —7- times. From the previous examples we may de- 
 rive the following methods of division. 
 
 I. Fig. 26. Make O E = unity, erect oX E 3. perpendicular 
 or inclined line, intersect it with the divisor O B = b, prolong 
 
 Fig. 19. 
 
 Fig. 20. 
 
 Fig. 2: 
 
 parallel to E A. This will cut ofiF on C .^ prolonged the dis- 
 tance^C=;f, for B' C : B' B = O A : O E or x : b = a -.i. 
 
 IX. Fig. 21. Given A A' = a and B B' ^ b perpendicular. 
 Draw A B, and prolong it until it intersects at ii a line drawn 
 parallel to ^ ^^ at a distance O E = i. Join E A', and draw 
 from B a parallel to it, cutting A A' at C, then will A C=: x\ 
 iox A C : C B = A A' : A' E, s.nA A C : B' B = A A' -.E O, 
 otx:b = a:\. 
 
 X. Fig. 22. Given A A' =.a and B O =^b, perpendicular 
 to A A'. Open the dividers to C .£" = i, and intersect A A' at 
 E. Draw from A' a parallel to OE, and from A a normal, the 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
 two lines intersecting at (T, then A C= the desired product x. 
 For, since the angle CA A' = B O E,we have A C : A A' = 
 O B : O E, or X : a = b : I. The line A A' is in this case pro- 
 jected upon a perpendicular to O E, or is what is called the 
 anti-projection of A A' to O E* 
 
 XI. Fig. 23. When a and b intersect each other at right 
 angles, as in the figure where A A^ = a and B O = b, then 
 
 O B, and make O A = the dividend a. Draw from A a paral- 
 lel to B E, and its intersection with O E prolonged will give 
 the quotient x. For we have O C : O E = O A -.OB, that is, 
 
 X : 1 = a : b, or jr = —=—• 
 o 
 
 II. Fig. 27. Make OE = unity, also lay oS on. O E the dis- 
 tance O B ^= the divisor b, erect at ^ a perpendicular, and in- 
 tersect it from O with O A = the dividend a. A perpendicular, 
 erected from ^, will then intersect O A a.t C, and O C^=x, for 
 we have again OC: OE^OA : O B or x : i = a : b. 
 
 III. Fig. 28. Make C ^= the divisor 5 ; on (9 .9 lay off (9 .£" 
 = I ; a.t B erect a perpendicular A B = the dividend a ; join 
 O A. Erect at i? a perpendicular, and it will intersect O A &\. 
 C. Then E C= a-, for EC: OE = AB: OB, or .a^ : i = 
 a : (5. 
 
 ?24. 
 
 MULTIPWCATION AND DIVISION COMBINED. 
 
 When it is desired to multiply a number a into a fraction , 
 
 the operation really consists in multiplying a by b, and dividing 
 the product a X 6 by c, in order to obtain the result x. If we 
 
 recollect that for x = , we may write x : a =: b : c, we will 
 
 see at once how the combined operation may be performed by 
 making the distance O E equal to the denominator c, instead 
 of unity, as heretofore. We will then be multiplying the line a 
 
 by the ratio — .instead of— 
 
 make the operation clear. , 
 
 I. In order to multiply a quantity a by a fraction , we make, 
 
 in Fig. 29, (9 y^ = a, lay o^ on O A, O E = c, erect at ^ a 
 perpendicular, and intersect it at B, with a distance from O 
 
 The following illustrations will 
 
 Fig. 24. 
 
 Fig. 25. 
 
 draw from B a parallel to A A', and mark off with the dividers 
 from O, O E = 1. Draw A' C parallel to O E, and A (T normal 
 to A' C, then A C=x, for since the angles at E and A^ are 
 equal, we have A C : A A' = O B : O E, or x : a = b : 1. 
 
 The continuous multiplication of several factors may be 
 accomplished by combining the preceding methods in various 
 ways. 
 
 Suppose we desire to obtain the product of three lines, a, b, c, 
 we may first find, according to I, the product x^ = a b (Fig. 24), 
 transfer O C=ab down to O C upon O A, draw from O the 
 line O D = c, erect from C a perpendicular, and prolong O D 
 to F, and O F will be the desired product, x = a b c. 
 
 Or we may make, as in Fig. 25, after having found O O ^ a b, 
 draw E D = c (Case IV.), and prolong (9 Z> until it intersects at 
 F2. perpendicular from C', when C F= x. 
 
 i 23. 
 
 Division by IvInes. 
 
 Division may readily be accomplished by reversing the 
 methods employed for multiplication. To divide a line a by a 
 line b, we must find a third line x, which must contain the unit 
 
 equal to b ; then prolong O B until it intersects at C a line 
 drawn from A, parallel to E B. Then O C will equal x, for 
 
 we have O C : O B = O A : O E, or x : b = a : c, or x = "^-. 
 
 II. If we wish to find the product , we make. Fig. 30, OA 
 
 = a, and make the distance O E =^ twice the unit of measure- 
 ment, draw E B =^b perpendicular to O E ; draw a line from A 
 parallel to E B, and prolong O B until it intersects this last 
 line at C. Then A C will be the desired product x, for 
 
 AC: O A =B E:OE,or x: a = b: 2, or x=:—. 
 
 These methods, which may be extended much in the same 
 manner as the various methods of multiplication given in § 22, 
 will be found of great service in the graphical calculations of 
 areas, as we shall see. 
 
 ? 25. 
 Area of Triangi,es. 
 
 Since the area of a triangle is equal to the half-product of its 
 base and altitude, it is readily calculated by the method given 
 in the preceding section. 
 
 I. Fig. 31. Selecting the side O B ^ b c( the given triangle 
 <9^ i? as a base, which gives the perpendicular A A' = tls.^ 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 height h, although this liue need not be drawn, we mark off the 
 distance OE = 2 units (inches, decimeters, etc.), and draw 
 
 III. Fig. 37. The diagonal A C= b divides the figure ABCO 
 into two triangles, the sum of whose heignts = O O', which is 
 
 from B a line B C, parallel to an imaginary line A E. This 
 line B (Twill intersect the side O A prolonged at C, and a per- 
 pendicular dropped from (T to OB, will give CG = = the 
 
 desired area/ (see VII., ^ 22, and II., | 24). ^ 
 
 II. Fig. 32. From the end of the base line O B draw the 
 perpendicular O E=i tinits, draw the altitude A A' ; also draw 
 from A the line A C parallel to E B. This will cut off on the 
 
 base line the distance A' C, which is the product / = . 
 
 (? 22, VIIL, and I 24, II.) ^ 
 
 III. Fig. 33. Prolong the base line B (Tand the side B A 
 trntil the vertical distance between them O E = 2 units. Join 
 
 the anti-projection which O B makes on A C. The multiplica- 
 tion of O O' by — may be made according to XI., \ 22, and 
 
 II., I 24. Draw O' B E parallel to A C, making O E = 2, also 
 draw A D parallel to E O, and C D normal to A D, then C D 
 =/= the area oi A B C O. 
 
 IV. Fig. 38. The figure ABCO may be converted into a 
 triangle whose altitude = 2, when the base will be equal to the 
 
 Fig. 35. 
 
 rif / 
 
 be separated into triangles, which are measured separately ; or 
 the figure may be reduced to its equivalent triangle. 
 
 I. Required the area of the parallelogram ABCO, Fig. 35. 
 Taking the side O A Sl.s a base line, lay o'H O E = unity, and 
 erect the perpendicular E E' = h. Prolong O E until it inter- 
 sects a perpendicular from A at D, and the distance A D will 
 be the areaof/=d/i. (^ 22, IV.) 
 
 II. The quadrilateral figure ABCO, Fig. 36, may readily 
 be replaced by a triangle of equal area by drawing the line O A' 
 parallel to the diagonal O B, for since the triangle O A' B is 
 equal in area \o O B C, we have the area of the triangle O A' A 
 is equal to the area of the figure ABCO. Now, according to 
 
 IV., \ 25, we make O E =^ 2, and draw A D, the anti-projection 
 of A A' and A D =f, the desired area. 
 
 product 
 
 hb 
 
 From O describe an arc with a radius O E = 
 
 E to C, and draw from A a line parallel to E C, intersecting 
 the base at Z?, and ^ Z? = — =/. (? 22, IX., and ^ 24, II.) 
 
 IV. Fig. 34. From the vertex O, with the dividers open a 
 distance equal to 2 units, intersect the base at E, and make the 
 anti-projection of the base A B by drawing B C parallel to OE, 
 and A C normal to B C. Then A (r= the product of the base 
 b, and one-half the altitude O O' = h, and hence is the desired 
 area/ of the triangle. (? 22, X., and ? 24, II.) 
 
 If the unit is taken as one inch, the value of the area /will 
 be given in square inches, or if a decimeter is taken as the unit, 
 the area will be in square decimeters, etc. 
 
 If we find/^ \", the area of the triangle is seven-eighths of 
 a square inch ; or if it measures 72 millimeters, the area would 
 be 0.72 square decimeters, or 0.70 x 10,000 = 7200 sq. mm. 
 
 ? 26. 
 
 Area of Quadrilaterai, Figures. 
 
 In determining the area of a quadrilateral figure, it is either 
 
 obtained directly, as in the case of a parallelogram ; or it may 
 
 and dfaw a tangent passing through an angle of the figure at .5", 
 opposite the angle O. From the other two angles, A and C, 
 draw lines parallel to the diagonal O B, intersecting the tangent 
 at A' and C . A' C will then be the base of a triangle whose 
 altitude = 2, and whose area is the same as the figure ABCO, 
 and the area/ = A' C . Many similar methods may be deduced 
 from the preceding examples. 
 
 ?27. 
 
 Area of Polygons. 
 
 The area of a polygon is measured by reducing it to its 
 equivalent triangle. This may be done in the following manner : 
 From the angle O of the polygon O A B C D E, Fig. 39, draw 
 a diagc / ext angle but one, and then from the 
 
 1 o9 
 
 Fig. 40. 
 
 intermediate angle A draw A B' parallel to O B, prolonging 
 the third side B Cio B' . If we join B' , we have the triangle 
 O B B' = O B A, and hence the figure O B' C D E will have 
 the same area as the original figure, but will have one less side. 
 Then join O C, and draw B' C parallel to O C, and so we may 
 proceed until we have obtained a triangle O C D' of equivalent 
 area to the original figure, and whose area may be determined 
 by any of the preceding methods. 
 
 Regular polygons, such as the hexagon. Fig. 40, only require 
 half the operation to be performed, and then the area measured 
 as a parallelogram. 
 
 §28. 
 
 Graphical Calculation of Powers. 
 
 A line a, raised to the nt^ power, really means the determina- 
 tion of a line x whose length shall contain the unit of measure- 
 ment rt« times. The following methods are applicable when a 
 is a positive or negative whole number, and the process is really 
 a repeated application of the multiplication of a by a. As in 
 the previous cases, this operation may be performed in various 
 
 I. (See ? 22, I.) In Fig. 41 make O E ^= unity, erect at E 
 a perpendicular, and intersect it at A^^ with the distance OA^^=a, 
 the original factor. Carrying this distance O A^ down to B-^, 
 and erecting a perpendicular at B-^, we get O A2 = a'^ (see I., 
 § 22). This again carried down to B.„ and a perpendicular 
 erected at B.^, gives OAs= a^ and so O A^ = a*, O A^ = a^, etc. 
 
 If we lay off O Bm, equal to any power of a, say a'", and erect 
 perpendicular at Bm, the intersection with O ^1 prolonged will 
 give the value of a'" + 1. Again, if we drop a perpendicular 
 from the end point Am + i of any power of a to the axis O E, 
 it will cut off a distance O Bm, which will be the next lesser 
 power of a (see I., \ 23). 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The perpendicular A^ E, from A^ upon O E, gives the first 
 power a\ If we now make O Ao= O E, and drop the perpen- 
 
 we have : C 3 : C i = C 4 : (9 2 ; or, C 3 : a = a* : a^ that is, 
 C 3 = a'. 
 
 In this way we may prove that each line drawn from O to the 
 upper extremity of the successive perpendiculars on O E, inter- 
 sects the following perpendicular at a distance from O equal to 
 the next less power of a. This provides a method of obtaining 
 the intermediate powers of a by merely drawing radii and per- 
 
 which = — , which is 
 the reciprocal oi O A^\ in the same manner we get (9 ^ —2 = 
 
 II. By combining the methods of multiplication I. and III. 
 of § 22, the following method for powers is derived. In Fig. 42, 
 make OE ^ 1, O Ay^a, E A^ perpendicular to O E, and draw 
 
 also 0E = 
 
 ,E—x=a- 
 
 T' etc. 
 
 
 
 6 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 <Mi/. 
 
 '^^V^ 
 
 
 
 /. 
 
 /K 
 
 K 
 
 aC'^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 / /y/y(^ 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 "'V 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 \\ 
 
 M 
 
 )^— 1 
 
 
 
 
 7 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 2 fi 
 
 Fig. 45- 
 
 pendiculars. Each newly-found power gives a radius for a suc- 
 ceeding one, and the operation may be continued indefinitely, 
 as shown in the diagram. 
 
 VI. The following method is suitable for any given value of 
 a, whether greater or less than i. In Fig. 46 make O E ^ 1 
 on the axis X O X, erect a perpendicular at O, V O V, and 
 mark off O A = a. Join A E, and draw A 2 normal to E A, 
 and it will cut ofi' on the axis of ^, a distance O 2 = a^ ; then 
 draw 2 3 at right angles to A 2, and we get oh the axis of Y, 
 
 Fig. 42. 
 
 from A^ a perpendicular to O A^, cutting OE at A^; then O A^ 
 = a\ From A, a perpendicular to the base will give A3 and 
 OA^ = fl'-; another perpendicular to OA^ gives A^ and OAi^ 
 a*, and this maybe continued indefinitely for positive powers of 
 a. By working backward from E, we get OA — i as the recipro- 
 cal of a, OA—2 = -\, and so on for negative powers of .a. 
 
 Both the preceding methods assume that a is greater than i ; 
 the following may be used when a is less than i : 
 
 III. In Fig. 43 make OE ^1, and draw O A ^ a at such an 
 angle that A E is perpendicular toOA. Erect the perpendicu- 
 \ 
 
 Fig. 46. 
 
 C 3 = rt', and on the axis of A', (9 4 = «*, thus getting the even, 
 positive powers of a on the axis of X, and the odd powers on 
 the axis of V. By carrying the spiral in the other direction we 
 get the negative powers in a similar manner. Joining A E, we 
 
 have O E = a" ^ I ; from that we get O — i = — , and in a 
 
 similar manner ^, — j-, etc. (See ? 22, "VI. ) This method is 
 
 very suitable for showing a succession of powers in a single dia- 
 
 lar E 1, and continue with the alternate perpendiculars i 2, 2 3, 
 3 4, etc., and we have : O 1 ^ — , C 2 = — ^, O t, = — ^, etc. 
 
 "Working to the left from .£" in a similar manner, we get 
 O — 2 = a'^, O — 3 = a', O — 4 = a*, etc. , the positive powers 
 "being to the left, and the negative powers to the right. 
 
 The zigzag lines which are thus drawn back and forth between 
 the two axes have a relation to the powers of a which may be 
 utilized in the following manner : 
 
 IV. Make, in Fig. 44, (9 .£ = i, O A = a, and the angle 
 OA E = yoo\ also OB at right angles to OE, and prolong EA 
 to B. Now draw the alternate perpendiculars as before, and we 
 liave the following values : O A = a, A 2 = a'-, 23^0:', etc., 
 
 §29. 
 Powers of the Trigonometricai, Functions. 
 
 The methods already given for the determination of the 
 powers of numbers are also applicable to the powers of the trigo- 
 nometrical functions with but slight modifications. 
 
 I. Powers of Sines and Cosines. Fig. 47. Make O E =\\ 
 the angle E O A ^ <p, the angle the powers of whose functions 
 are to be determined, E A being at right angles to O A. Draw 
 also the alternate perpendiculars ^ 2, 2 3, 3 4, etc., and E — 
 — I — 2, etc. Then (9 ^ = cos ^, C 2 = cos ^ (5, (9 3 = cos' ^, 
 
 (?4 = 
 
 <^; (9 - 
 
 r. etc. 
 
 V. Fig. 45. Make O E = i, and describe upon it as a diam- 
 eter a semicircle, make C i = «, and from i drop a perpendicu- 
 lar I 2 upon O E, then 2^a- (see Problem III. of this section). 
 With C 2 as a radius from O, describe an arc, and from its inter- 
 section with the circumference drop the perpendicular 2 4, and 
 (9 4 = a*, and by continuing in the same manner, we get 8 = 
 a^, O 16 = a^^, etc The intersection 3 of the radius O i with 
 the perpendicular 2 4 is, at a distance from O, equal to a^. For 
 
 By drawing the alternate perpendiculars A II. , II III, III. IV. 
 O — /, — /, — //, etc., we also get A E = sinf, A II = sin^ </>, 
 
 II, 111= sin'' <t>, III, IV = 
 etc. 
 
 ■ sin* 0, O — / = 
 
 sin ^ 
 
 . —1—11 = 
 
 sin'-* (^' 
 
 II. Powers of Tangents and Cotangents. Fig. 48. Make 
 E O = 1, and O E A ^ ip. Draw from A the spiral of perpen- 
 diculars as in v., § 28, and we get the following values : O A ^ 
 tan <p, 1= tan^ (J, ^ 3 = tan' 0, etc. C .£" = i = tan " 0, 
 
26 
 
 THE CONSTR L -CTGR. 
 
 Extraction c 
 
 ' Roots. 
 
 The extraction of the square root is readily performed by the 
 graphical method, as will be seeu at once when it is remembered 
 that v/^ is a mean proportional between « and i. The previ- 
 ously described methods for powers also suggest methods fo" 
 
 FiG. 49. 
 
 Fig. 50. 
 
 Fig. 51. 
 the extraction of roots, and the three following cases will suffice : 
 
 I. In Fig. 49 make O E = i,0 A ^ a, describe a semicircle 
 on O A, erect a perpendicular at E, intersecting the circumfer- 
 ence at C and join O C, then O 1^= jr = \/« (see I 28). In 
 this case « > i, but in the following case « < i. 
 
 II. Fig. 50. Make O E ^j, O A = a, describe a semicircle 
 ou E, erect a perpendicular at A, and join O C, then will 
 O C=x = \/a. 
 
 III. Fig. 51. Make O E = i, and mark oS on O E prolonged 
 £ A = a, draw on O A a. semicircle, and erect a perpendicular 
 at E, intersecting the circumference at C ; then will E C = 
 X = ^a. 
 
 The extraction of the fourth root may be performed by re- 
 peating the method for square root. The graphical extraction 
 of the cube root, fifth root, etc., is not so simple. Culmann uses 
 for this purpose the logarithmic spiral, and Schlesiuger con- 
 structs a curve according to the method in l 28, but the advan- 
 tages are not sufficient to warrant a further examination. of the 
 subject at this point. 
 
 ? si- 
 Addition AND Subtraction of Forces. 
 
 In all the preceding operations we have only considered the 
 lines -to represent absolute quantities, and paid little or no atten- 
 tion to their direction or position in the plane of the diagram. 
 The principal advantages of the graphical method are those 
 •which are connected with problems relating to the equilibrium 
 of forces, and it is the application of the preceding methods of 
 graphical arithmetic to the calculation of forces which really 
 constitutes the method of graphostatics. 
 
 When several forces are acting upon the same point, their 
 resultant maj^ be obtained by the addition of the lines repre- 
 senting the forces when projected upon the co-ordinate axes. 
 This addition of the projection of forces is known as graphical 
 addition. This addition is performed by placing the lines repre- 
 senting the forces end to end, forming a polygon, care being 
 taken to avoid repeating any of the lines. If the forces, 
 I, 2, 3,_ 4, 5, 6, Fig. 52, acting at O are in equilibrium, the sum 
 of their projections will equal zero, and the polygon formed by 
 the lines, as shown in Fig. 56, will close. The figure thus con- 
 structed is called a force polygon. It is immaterial as to the 
 order in which the lines are taken, as in Fig. 53 the result is the 
 same whether taken in the order, i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or i, 3, 4, 6, 5, 2, 
 although the shape of the polygon will be different. As in 
 arithmetic, the graphical subtraction of forces is the reverse of 
 addition, and practically amounts to a separation of the sides of 
 the force polygon into their respective forces. In graphostatics 
 the forces are all taken in one plane, by projecting upon the 
 plane of the diagram those forces which may be without it. The 
 
 Fig. 47- Fig. 
 
 O — I = cot <!>, 0-^2= cot2 <p, etc. This method shows very 
 clearly the convergence and divergence according to the sign of 
 the power under consideration. 
 
 Fig. 52. 
 
 preceding method of addition and subtraction of lines, Avhicb 
 here represent forces, but which may be taken to represent any- 
 thing, is called geometrical addition and subtraction. They 
 bear the same relation to geometrical multiplication and divi- 
 sion as the corresponding arithmographical methods do to each, 
 other. These little used methods, which are of the greatest in- 
 terest to geometers, we cannot discuss here. 
 
 Resultant of Severai, Forces. 
 In the preceding section we assumed that the given forces 
 held each other in equilibrium, from which it followed that the 
 diagram formed by the lines representing the forces returned to 
 the starting-point and formed a closed polygon. If, however, 
 the force polygon for a group of forces, such, for example, as 
 the forces i to 5, Fig. 54, does not close, it follows that equi- 
 librium does not exist at the point O. In order to obtain equi- 
 librium it is necessary to apply a force 6 to the same point, 
 whose direction and extent correspond to the line 5 6 of the 
 polygon. This is the force necessary to bring the other forces 
 into a state of equilibrium, and from it we also obtain a result- 
 ant force R, which is given in direction and absolute extent by 
 the closing line of the polygon, but acts as an expression of the 
 algebraic sum of the other forces, as shown by the arrow-head. 
 From this it follows that in every closed force poWgou each 
 single force represents the resultant of all the others in absolute 
 extent and direction, except that the resultant tends to produce 
 motion in an opposite direction from the corresponding force irt 
 
 the polygon. In an unclosed polygon the line necessary to close 
 the figure gives the direction and exteut of the resultant of the 
 other forces, always tending to produce motion opposed to the 
 closing force. 
 
 For example, in Fig. 54, A'^ is the resultant for i and 2, and in 
 a similar manner the resultant for any of the other forces in 
 combination may be found. 
 
 The method of representing the properties of forces by lines 
 is also applicable to other quantities which possess the attributes 
 of magnitude and direction, such as velocities ; also to the deter- 
 mination of the path of the line which passes through the cen- 
 tres of gravity of the stones of a vault, for instance ; and in a 
 figurative sense it may be applied to scientific discussions, in 
 which the final result acts as a closing line to the force polygon, 
 of argument. 
 
 Isolated Forces in One Plane. Cord Polygon. 
 
 If lines which represent forces, and hold a body in equilibrium,. 
 
 do not intersect in one point, a condition which frequently 
 
 occurs, but have a number of intersections from 71 to — (;/ — i) 
 
 in number, the foregoing solution can no longer be used ; but at 
 the same time this more complicated case may readily be re- 
 duced to the simpler form. 
 
 For this purpose we assume the existence of a system of rigid, 
 straight lines which, extending from each force to the next, 
 form a polygon capable of resisting both tension and compres- 
 sion in the direction of its sides, and in which each single force 
 is in equilibrium with the two forces which act along the sides 
 intersecting it. A polygon formed in this manner is called a 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Cord Polygon, or in arch construction a thrust line, because all 
 the sides are in compression, and in general such a figure may 
 be called a link polygon. 
 
 The angles of the cord polygon are called "knots." The 
 link polygon mey be used for the investigation of forces accor- 
 ding to the preceding methods, when at each knot there exists 
 
 sections give two solutions of the problem, as in cases I. and II. 
 If the arc failed to intersect the line at all, it would prove the 
 case to be impossible. 
 
 Fig. 55- 
 
 an equilibrium between the external forces and the stresses in 
 the sides of the polygon ; for example, when the forces Sp, and 
 ^2-3. at the knot K.,, have a resultant equal and opposed to P.,_, 
 in extent and direction. The forces in the sides of the polygon 
 may be called the internal forces of the link polygon . We have, 
 then, for any given case two sets of forces to investigate : 
 (i) the external forces, (2) the internal forces. 
 
 since for each set there exists an equilibrium. 
 
 I 34. 
 
 If we take the forces P^ and P.,, find their resultant, combine 
 this with Pg, find a second resultant, combine it with P^, etc., 
 we will find that in order to obtain equilibrium, the resultant 
 with the next to the last force Pn — i, of the polygon, will be 
 equal and opposed to the closing force Pn. This holds good so 
 long as the direction and extent of the forces remains unchanged. 
 From this it follows that the co-ordinate distances of the point 
 of application of any force may be made equal to zero, without 
 affecting the equilibrium of the external forces. The combina- 
 tion of these latter forces may then be effected in the same 
 manner as if they acted at a single point. In this way the force 
 
 'Fig. 59. Fig. 60. 
 
 The following examples will show the practical applications 
 of the preceding principles : 
 
 Example I. A crane ABC, Fig. 59, carries a load LsXA; it is of a cylindrical 
 shape at B, and held in position by a roller bearing, and at C there is also a pivot 
 step. Required the forces />! and A at 5 and C. The centre of gravity of the crane 
 itself is at S, and its weight is equal to G* 
 
 Both L and G act in a vertical direction, and the force at /'j, if the bearing is 
 smooth and we neglect its friction, acts in a horizontal direction. Combining G and 
 L into one force O = G + i^, the position of whose resultant is T Q, we have the 
 intersection (9 of a vertical through T Q, with a horizontal through F^ as a point in 
 the direction of the line of the force P«. This force must also act through the centre 
 of the pivot C, since this is restrained from lateral motion by its bearing. This gives 
 C O for the direction of the force P„. We can now draw the force polygon, Fig. 60, 
 drawing i + G vertical, G Pi parallel to O P^, and P. Pi parallel to O C. This 
 determines the extent of both Pi Po_, and by further analysis the entire load on the 
 pivot C may be found. 
 
 Fig. 61. 
 
 Fig. 62. 
 
 Example II. A crane constructed as shown in Fig. 61 carries a similar load to the 
 preceding. It is arranged with a cylindrical bearing at B, and at C there is a conical 
 roller bearing upon a conical surface on the base of the column, the axes of both 
 cones intersecting in the middle of the bearing B. 
 
 We have, as before, the mean load Q = L + G;vf& also have the direction of the 
 pressure Pi, as it must be normal to the surface of the cone at the point of contact. 
 The intersection of />, and Q determines O, and a line from O through the centre 
 of the bearing B gives the direction of P«. The force polygon can now be drawn, as 
 shown in Fig. 62, and by making the verti ' • - • • ., . 
 
 calcc 
 
 of the t 
 
 ;r fore 
 
 Fig. 56. Fig. 57. Fig. 58. 
 
 polygon can be used to determine the equilibrium of several 
 independently-acting forces. If equilibrium exists, the polygon 
 closes, and if it does not close, it shows the extent and direction 
 of the force necessary to maintain equilibrium. It is practica- 
 ble in this way to determine two unknown quantities in a force 
 polygon. These may also refer to two forces, and may be either 
 direction or extent, or, as sometimes occurs in practice, the 
 direction of one force and the extent of the other. 
 The following cases will serve to illustrate : 
 
 I. Both directions given. In Fig. 56 we have the directions 
 of the force lines 4 5' and A 6', and by their intersection at 5, we 
 determine at once their length 4 5 and A 5. If their directions 
 are interchangeable we have two solutions possible, the second 
 giving the directions yi VI\ and 4 V, and hence the forces 
 A F/and4F. 
 
 II. The extent of both forces given. Fig. 57. With the dis- 
 tances equal to the extent of the two forces, we describe circular 
 arcs from A and 4, and the intersection of these arcs determines 
 the direction of the forces. Since the arcs intersect at two points, 
 two solutions follow, giving the lines ^ 5, 4 5, and A V, i, V. 
 
 III. The direction of one force and the extent of the other 
 given. In Fig. 58 let the line 4 5 be the given direction of one 
 force. With a radius A 5, equal to the extent of the other force, 
 describe the arc shown by the dotted curve, and the two inter- 
 
 FiG. 63. 
 
 Example III. Th. 
 ceding one, except tl 
 the bearing B. If w 
 point O, and construe 
 tion oi the apex of the cone D car 
 above, as in the previous case. It wi 
 B with a collar to oppose the upward 
 
 lown in Fig. 63 is 
 es of the conical 1 
 iw C O normal to 
 polygon, Fig. 64. 
 
 the surface of o 
 
 provide the bearing 
 
 * In ordinary wharf cranes the value of G, which mainly depends upon the capa- 
 city and overhang of the crane, may be taken at \ to \ the load, 
 t This defect may be seen in numerous existing examples of crane construction. 
 
 capacity of thirty tons gave way under a load of only about twenty tons, because the 
 proper provision was not made for the direction of a force upon a bearing. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 » act, as shown in Fig. 65, upon 
 ses through the point A. Two 
 oint A, and hold the preceding 
 the latter forces make with the 
 
 Lay out the forces of 70, 50 and 8 
 heavy Hues, then describe from Ca 
 lively, and thus obtain the interse 
 and D, complete the force polygon. 
 
 nitude and direction ; so that when the external forces are 
 known, and also the direction of two of the internal forces, 
 the direction and magnitude of the others can be determined. 
 This assists greatly in the construction of the link polygon, for 
 by selecting one knot and determining the pole O, the sides of 
 the link polygon can be drawn parallel to the respective rays. 
 
 Fig. 65. 
 
 Fig. 66. 
 
 Example V. An obelisk is to be raised upon its base, Fig. 69, by turning it ab 
 the angle A, the lifting force to be applied in a given direction at the apex B. 
 
 Required the direction to be given to a force P^ of given extent, applied to 
 point A, in order that the base shall only be subjected to vertical pressure. Dra' 
 vertical line through the centre of gravity 5 of the obelisk, intersecting the direct 
 of the force P•^ at O. A line from O through A will then give the direction of 
 resultant of the two forces. This resultant is now to be resolved into a vertical cc 
 ponent A, and a force P3 of given extent but undetermined direction. To del 
 mine the direction we draw, as in Fie;. 68, C ^ and ^ P^, and erect a ijerpendici. 
 
 „-_ , „ ,. jne giving /'2 tne 
 
 value Pi D and P3, the direction DC; the other giving P« the value P-^ A and P^, 
 the direction AC. s s . 
 
 If jPg should ju^t equal the perpendicular distance from Cto /", Pn,, then but one 
 ""' ■ . ^ . .mple given are shown in Fig. 67 at .^ /"j 
 
 suits for tl: 
 
 Examples of this character seldom occur in actual practice. 
 
 BQUiiriBRitrM OF Internal Forces in the Cord Poi,ygon. 
 As already stated, we mean by the internal forces of the cord 
 or link polygon the tension or compression which may exist in 
 the different sides of the figure, as shown at ^j.j, S.^.^, etc., Fig. 
 69. These forces are of such an extent 
 that they hold each other in equilibrium at 
 the knots K^ A', A'g, etc. Any two of these, 
 for example, 5\.,, Sj.g, may be determined 
 from their resultant /^,, when either their 
 ^® direction, their magnitude, or one direction 
 and one magnitude are given (see § 34). 
 This is done in the following manner : 
 Construct the force polygon, Fig. 70, of the 
 external forces P^, A, P„ which, if equilib- 
 rium exists, will form a closed figure. From 
 the extremities of the sides corresponding to the force P^ 
 draw two lines parallel to the sides 5,. 2, S.,.^, intersecting 
 at O ; then the length of the lines Oy and O., will represent 
 the magnitude of the stresses in the sides .S'1.2, S^z- In a 
 like manner we may draw lines connecting the several cor- 
 ners of the polygon, Fig. 70, with the pole (9, and deter- 
 tnine all the internal forces of the link pol3'gon, both in mag- 
 
 FiG. 70. 
 
 Fig. 69. 
 
 The actual lengths of the sides of the link polygon are deter- 
 mined by the positions of the lines of the external forces, from 
 which the positions of the internal forces are also determined. 
 
 The cord polygon will var}' in its form according to the choice 
 of a starting-point from which it is drawn. In Fig. 69 two 
 forms are shown in dotted lines within the cross-hatched figure, 
 their sides being parallel to those of the first polygon. Another 
 solution of the same problem (the combination of the external 
 
 Fig. 74. 
 
 forces into a link polygon) may be obtained by an application 
 of the double solution of Case I., \ 34- 
 
 In Fig. 72 we have the directions S^.^ and S^.^ drawn from the 
 CKtremity of the force P^, giving a new cord polygon. Fig. 71, 
 of a very different form from the preceding one, which is also 
 included in Fig. 71 for purposes of comparison. With the ex- 
 ception of the first two sides, we have an entirely difierent 
 
 Fig. 71. 
 
 figure, showing the variety of polygons which may be c onstructed 
 from a given set of forces. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 29 
 
 The cord or link polygon, when taken in connection with the 
 force polygon, forms what has been termed the graphical plan 
 of forces. In most cases the entire subject can be discussed by 
 the construction of one figure which may then be called the 
 Force-pan, and of which examples are given in \ 48. 
 
 ?36. 
 Resui^tant of Isoi^axed Forces in One Plane. 
 
 If we assume two pf the sides of a cord polygon to be divided, 
 and insert at the points of division forces corresponding to the 
 stresses in the divided sides, the equilibrium will remain undis- 
 turbed, as, for instance, in Fig. 73, the sides A'j K^, and K^ K-^, 
 are cut and sustained. It will then be evident that the resultant 
 of the forces, 6"i.g and 54.5, either on the right or the left -will 
 hold the remainder of the forces of the polygon in equilibrium. 
 The position of this resultant force is determined by prolonging 
 the sides until they intersect at M . The direction and extent 
 of this resultant is determined in the force polygon. Fig. 74, by 
 the diagonal 4.6, which is the closing line of the forces S-^.^ =: 
 Cg, and 54,5 = O4, This force is also on the one side the 
 xesultant of the force? ^ and P^, and on the other side, of the 
 forces ^1, Pj, /'a and F^. 
 
 In general it tnay he staged that the point oj intersection of 
 any two prolonged sides of the polygon is a point of tlie resultant 
 of all the extsy^tal forces beyond these sides, from which the 
 direction and eoctent of said, resultant may be determined. 
 
 This principle is of great utility, as many examples will here- 
 after illustrate. By reversing the above rule, the cord and forc£ 
 
 one of the forces should Ije left to be determined in position a 
 the last. 
 
 I. Let this force be /"g. Fig. 75. Its magnitude is known, and 
 its direction is parallel to the given line Z Z. After construct- 
 ing the force polygon. Fig. 76, choose a pole O, and draw the 
 rays to the angles from I to 6, so that K^ K., is parallel to I O, 
 K^ K^ to 2 O, K^ K^ to 3 C, etc., until K-^ A'g is reached. Then 
 the closing line of the cord polygon must have the direction 
 6 O, and must also pass through A'j. This determines its posi- 
 tion entirely, and its intersection Kf, with K-^ K^ is a point of 
 the force P^, which is now drawn parallel to 5.6. 
 
 ^^<^- 76- Fig. 78. 
 
 If the fiflal fotce is not given either in direction or n ^ 
 it may be determined from the direction and position of the 
 other forces as follows : 
 
 II. I<et the yet indeterminate force be /'g. Fig. 77, while we 
 llave given the direction of the force P,, which is A'j Pj, and its 
 position K^. We can draw the force polygon from the points 
 T to 5, whUe from the point i we have only given the direction 
 A. I, The cord polygon may also be commenced by starting 
 firom K^, and continuing through the points iTj, K^, K^, K-^ and 
 
 Fig. 73. 
 polygons may also be used for the decomposition of forces, as 
 well as their resolution. For instance, if it is desired to decom- 
 pose the force 4.6 into two others, Pi and P^, of given direction, 
 draw one of them (for example, Pn ) in the cord polygon until 
 it intersects 4.6 in the point iV, and through this point draw /j, 
 jjarallel to the side 4.5 of the force polygon. The first chosen 
 line, K^ N, may be drawn either forwards or backwards on BI N, 
 ■without disturbing the equilibrium. 
 
 §37- 
 Conditions of Equilibrium for Isolated Forces in 
 
 One Plane. 
 
 In the preceding discussions it has been assumed that the 
 
 forces whose equilibrium has been investigated were so situated 
 
 that equilibrium really existed, so that according to the rule in 
 
 the preceding paragraph it would be possible to reduce them to 
 
 Fig. 77. 
 
 K'-^. We may then select any direction for its closing side K^ L, 
 
 and its intersection K^ with K^ K' -^ will be a point in the line of 
 
 the desired force Pg. In order to determine its magnitude and 
 
 direction, draw, in Fig. 78, O 6 parallel to K^ L, and join the 
 
 point 5 with the point 6, when the line 5.6 will give the desired 
 
 magnitude and direction of the force P^. 
 
 ?38. 
 
 Force Couples. 
 
 When a plane figure is subjected to the action of forces in 
 
 couples, acting in its plane in such a manner that, while equal 
 
 in magnitude and opposite in direction, they fall upon parallel 
 
 lines, and do not oppose each other in the same straight line, 
 
 Fig. 75- 
 two equal and opposing forces. This is, however, not neces- 
 sarily the case when the force polygon is a closed figure, but it 
 must follow when the cord polygon is also a closed figure, i.e., 
 the actual positions of the forces must also be taken into 
 account. If the positions are not correctly taken, the cord 
 polygon will show what modification must be made in order to 
 secure equilibrium and avoid the formation of rotating couples ; 
 which will be discussed in the next section. For this purpose 
 
 
 Fig. 79. Fig. 80. 
 
 the force polygon will close without necessarily proving the 
 existence of equilibrium in the figure. 
 
 The conditions which obtain under these circumstances may 
 be examined as follows : 
 
 . The forces P, P^ and P^ P^, Fig. 79, form a closed force poly- 
 gon I, 2, 3, 4, Fig. 80, but at the same time equilibrium does not 
 
30 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 exist in the figure, but instead, a tendencj' to rotate about a 
 common point with a statical moment which is equal to the sum 
 of the moments of the couples (/"j — P.^) aud (/^, — P^. In 
 order to secure equilibrium it is necessary to introduce an addi- 
 tioual couple (/'j — P^), whose tendeucy shall be to cause a 
 rotation in the opposite direction, aud whose moment shall be 
 equal to the combiued moments of the previous couples, and 
 whose direction shall be parallel to the lines V Fand VI VI, 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 Let us take, Fig. 8i, the force polygon A i, 2, 3, 4. This is 
 not yet complete, for we still lack the forces 5 and 6. We know 
 that they uuist act through A, in opposition to the other couples, 
 but their magnitude is not yet determined. 
 
 As already said, the two forces must be equal and parallel in 
 order to be iu equilibrium with the other couples, and only two 
 forces can fulfill the conditions. Their direction is given, and 
 can be laid off as at A Z. We choose anv pole O, aud join the 
 rays O A, O i, O 2, O z, O /^ {= O A), and can then proceed to 
 construct the cord polygon. Fig. 82. 
 
 For this we have lines of direction //, TI II, etc., up to VI 
 VI, given from Fig. 79. Starting from any point K^ on //, we 
 draw lines parallel to the rays O A and O 1 (their resultant 
 being the force P-^) until they intersect VI VI in K^, and //// 
 in A'., ; then draw K., A', parallel to O A, intersecting III III aX 
 A'j, A', h\ parallel to O 3 until it intersects IV IV, and K^ K^ 
 parallel to 6^4, intersecting V V at A'j. Only the closing line 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 vy^ 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 f 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 b. 
 
 n 
 
 x/ 
 
 n 
 
 ^x^ 
 
 
 >^. 
 
 
 
 tv 
 
 
 
 ^J^p^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 . . 
 
 •^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 a, 
 
 
 Fig. 81. 
 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 of the cord polygon is now lacking, as 't is the line joining A'j 
 ■with A'j. which latter point has already been determined. We 
 can now (see ? 37, II.) draw the ray O^ parallel to A'j A'^, com- 
 pleting the force polygon and the line A 5, will give the magni- 
 tudes of P^ and P^. The path arouud the force polygon may 
 be taken as A r, 2, 3, 4, 5 A, the sides 4.5 and 5 A being sup- 
 posed to make an infinitely small angle with each other. 
 
 The previous examples upon the force and cord polygon serve 
 to show how geometrical addition and subtraction may be used 
 to determine the equilibrium of diverging forces iu one plane. 
 Forces acting in intersecting or parallel planes may be examined 
 in the same manner, and in many cases without a great degree 
 of complication, as some following examples will illustrate. It 
 is not intended, however, to undertake a general discussion of 
 the subject here, but rather proceed at once to practical appli- 
 cations of the special case of parallel forces. 
 
 2 39- 
 
 Equii<ibrium Between Three Parallel Forces. 
 
 In discussing the equilibrium between parallel forces, we may 
 
 use purely arithmetical methods, or use geometrical addition 
 
 and subtraction (force aud cord polygons), as may be found 
 
 most convenient. 
 
 The present problem may be stated as that in which a force Q 
 acts upon a body, and is to be held in equilibrium by two un- 
 
 FiG. 83. 
 known forces. A", and P.^, acting parallel to it and to each other. 
 
 Drawing the line ABC, Fig. 83, normal to the given direc- 
 tion of the forces, we must have, in the existence of equilibrium, 
 7\ . AB = P., . BC, or P^ a^ = P., a^, and also P^+ P,= Q. 
 
 In order to determine /\ = P^ — - graphically, we may follow 
 the method iu ? 24, and iu Fig. 84 make O E = the divisor a^. 
 
 O A = the factor a^, and taking E B to represent temporarily 
 the force P^, draw A C parallel to E B, which gives the propor- 
 tional value of A"]. By placing the triangle C A in the dotted 
 position O' B yi', we have A^ E = P^-{- P„= Q. This gives 
 a figure iu a form well suited for application to Fig. S3, as will 
 be shown in the following examples : 
 
 I. In Fig. 85 draw A D equal in value to Q, join D with the 
 third point of application C, and prolong Q until it intersects 
 
 at A' a line drawn through D parallel to A C. Then will we 
 have the following relations, B E= P.^, E F= P.,. In Fig. 86 
 is shown a similar case, but with Q inclined to A B C, and in 
 Fig. 87 Q is beyond A C 
 
 II. By resolving the force Q into two components applied at 
 the points A and C, Figs. 88, 89, 90, we obtain inclined forces 
 
 Fig. 90. 
 
 whose components parallel to Q are the desired values for P^ 
 and P.,, while the components which are parallel to A B C neu- 
 tralize each other. In all three figures B E= A, aud E£> = P^. 
 III. By constructing the force polygon, making A D = Q, 
 and using any pole O, Figs. 91, 92, 93, and drawing the sides of 
 the link polygon, so that A b is parallel to A O, b c parallel to 
 
 Fig. 91. Fig. 92. Fig. 93. 
 
 D O, and joining the closing line c A, the parallel to the latter 
 in the force polygon O E will give E A = P^, 3.nA D E = P^. 
 
 If it is desired to make the closing line fall upon A B C, or 
 lie parallel to it, the cord polygon A b (Tmust be first drawn, 
 and the pole O, determined by the intersection with A B of a. 
 line £> O parallel to b C, D A having first been drawn equal to 
 Q, O E may then be drawu parallel to A b, and we have 
 E A = P^,andE D = P.,. 
 
 In these cases Q is equal in magnitude to the resultant of P^ 
 and P.,, and opposed to them in direction. If Q is to be deter- 
 mined when A\ and P^ are given, similar methods to the fore- 
 going are to be followed. 
 
 Returning to the diagram O E A CB, Fig. 94, which we have 
 already used in case P, we construct the triangles C A O and 
 
 ^r- -° I 
 
 Fig. 94. Fig. 95. Fig. 96. 
 
 B A' O', and draw B' C parallel to O A \ O' C and O B' par- 
 allel to A' B, giving B' B = a^, B C = a^, B' O — P.„ O' C 
 = Aj. 
 
 From this we obtain the following solutions : 
 
 IV. Transfer one of the forces to the opposite side of A C, 
 
 Figs. 95, 96, so that A D = P^i.n$i E C= P^, join D to E, and 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 31 
 
 the line D E will intersect A Csit B, which will be the point 
 ■of application of the resultant Q, whose magnitude = E D^ 
 — /'i + P2, since £> D' is drawn parallel to A C 
 
 In Fig. 96 P] and P.,_ act in opposite directions, and their alge- 
 braic sum D' E must be taken, and, as shown, the resultant Q 
 acts beyond A C. 
 
 V. The method shown in Fig. 97 follows from (II) : 
 
 From the extremity a oi a A ■= P^ draw a line A' a of any 
 length, making it parallel to /i C. In a similar manner draw 
 c C from the extremity oi c C = P.^. Draw A' A and O C, 
 prolonging them until they meet at F, which latter will be a 
 point in the line of the resultant F B, and the value of Q 
 will be /"i + P^, which is also the resultant oi D E = C (Tand 
 EF=A' A. 
 
 VI. Following the method in (III), we may proceed as fol- 
 lows. Fig. 98 : Make D E = P.,_, E A = P^, choose a pole O, 
 and join the dosing line O E of the force polygon. Draw A c 
 parallel \.o E O, c b parallel to O D, and A b parallel to (or, as 
 in this case, the prolongation of) A O, and the intersection b 
 will be a point in the line of the resultant O, whose magnitude 
 = D A. 
 
 §40. 
 
 Resui^tant of SeveraIv Parallel Forces. 
 
 When we have a number of parallel forces O^, O,, O-^, O^, 
 
 acting upon a bod)' in given positions in one plane, we can 
 
 determine their resultant by a combination of the preceding 
 
 methods, resolving them in pairs until all are combined. 
 
 
 "^--,.. 
 
 
 04 
 
 
 
 ,1' 
 
 
 Qi""- y\ 
 
 
 
 
 /" 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 Qi 
 
 Q2 
 
 - 
 
 
 Q4 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 ll 
 
 I) 
 
 
 #* 
 
 Fig. 100. 
 
 II. Fig. 100. Form the force polygon of the given forces O-^ 
 to (7c, by laying off lines successively from A, equal in length 
 to the magnitudes of the several forces A \, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, as 
 shown in the left of the figure. The magnitude of the resultant 
 will then be equal to the length of the closing line 6 A. 
 
 To determine its position, proceed as follows : Select any 
 point beside the line ^ 5, as a pole C, and join the rays O A, 
 <9 I, <9 2, (9 3, etc. Starting from a point b under C?i, draw b b' 
 parallel to A O, and b c parallel to i O, and continue by drawing 
 
 Cfl' parallel to 1 O, d e parallel to 3 O, etc., and finally reaching 
 the closing line of the polygon g g' parallel to O 6, intersecting 
 b b' at q, which determines the position of the resultant Q (see 
 I 35)- 
 
 The method shown in {\ 36) may also easily be applied to the 
 resolution of such forces, as in Fig. 100, the intersection of d c, 
 prolonged to c' , gives the jDosition of the resultant of O^ and Q^, 
 and its magnitude is shown at ^ . 2 in the force polygon, and in 
 a like manner e' is the position of the resultant of 0^ and Q^. 
 
 ?4i- 
 
 The methods of resolving forces by means of the cord polj'- 
 gon will also serve for their decomposition. 
 
 If, for example, in any portion of a cord polygon a q b c d, 
 Fig. loi, it is desired to substitute for a force Q, two forces Q^ 
 and Q^ passing through e and/] we have only to join the points 
 e and /to obtain the form of cord polygon for the new forces, 
 
 I I 
 
 J.__ 
 
 Fig. ioi. 
 
 Fig. 102. 
 
 and determine their relative magnitudes by drawing O i parallel 
 to ef'xn the force polygon below. If the required force 0^ and 
 O2 both lie on the same side of Q, Fig. 102, the solution is 
 similar. We now prolong rt ^ to its intersection e with Q^, and 
 join ef. Also mark the intersection of Q^ with q b, and On with 
 q a. In the force pol}-gon below we have 0,=^ A\, O., = 1.2, 
 or y^ i^ = Q.,_ and 1' .2=0,. 
 
 If we have a beam A G loaded with parallel forces Q^ to Q-^, 
 
 Fig. 99. 
 
 In order to combine the forces Q, to O^, intersecting a 
 mon normal A F, Fig. 99, we first combine O, and O2 by 
 transposition, as in Fig. 96, and obtain the resultant, O, ■+- Q-i 
 = bc. This may then be combined with (^g, giving^ of' = 
 Qi ~\~ Q2-\' Qit 3-ii<i this result with O^, which finally gives the 
 resultant, Q=Oy-{-Q.i-\- Qi 4-^ passing through 3T. This solu- 
 tion is one which is sometimes desirable in machine construc- 
 tion, as, for example, in the distribution of the weight of a loco- 
 motive engine upon the various axles. The method of deter- 
 "mining the resultant of several parallel forces in this way by 
 the successive combination of pairs is very tedious and of limited 
 application, and the method given below of using the force and 
 cord polygons is much simpler. 
 
 Fig. 103. 
 Fig. 103, whose load is to be opposed by reactions P^ and P, ^t 
 A and G, we may first determine a resultant Q of all the forces, 
 as in (fi 40^, and then decompose this into values for /\ and P^ 
 by the method just given. We also omit the determination of 
 Q altogether, and proceed to determine /\ and P.^ directly as 
 follows : 
 
 Choose any pole O, and form the force polygon Ki . 2 .... 5 (9, 
 and construct the cord polygon, making its sides parallel to 
 their respective rays, and draw 5 a parallel to K O and fg, par- 
 allel to (9_5, their intersections with the lines of the forces /*; 
 and /'j being a and ^. Join ag, which will be the closing line of 
 the polygon, and its parallel (96 in the force polygon gives P.^ = 
 5. 6 and /\ = 6 . 7. If the sides a b and/g of the cord polj-gon 
 are prolonged in the other direction we obtain «' andg^, giving, 
 however, the same result, since a^ g'' is parallel to ag. The 
 cord polygon would then be the figure a^ g^ m bdcefm a', and 
 m indicates the position of the resultant of the forces O, to (9^, 
 or of /\ and P,. 
 
 When a loaded beam is supported by three or more bearings 
 it is necessary to take into account the resistance of the beam 
 itself with some degree of accuracy, or else the problem be- 
 comes indeterminate. This indeterminate character may, how- 
 ever, be eliminated by the introduction of an equalizing lever. 
 
3^ 
 
 THE CONSTRCCTOR. 
 
 Suppose we have, Fig. 104, a beam BCD, the resultant Q of 
 ■whose entire load acts at M, and is opposed by the reactions of 
 three supports at P^, P.„ P.^, at right angles through, the points 
 J3, C and D. 
 
 We may now assume, temporarily, an approximate ratio be- 
 tween two of the forces, e.g., P^ and P.^, and permit them to act 
 at the extremities of an equalizing beam B^ C\, which in turn 
 supports the main beam at ii^i ; making the ratio of ^id :E^B^ 
 the same as has been chosen for P^ : P.^. Now decompose (^ into 
 the components acting at E and D by means of the cord and 
 
 \„ • 
 
 Fig. 104. 
 force polygons e m d and A O x i. This gives ^ i = g, i . 2 = 
 /"a, 2 ^ = /'i + Po,, which last sum may be then divided between 
 ^1 and Cj by any of the above methods. p 
 
 Each different approximation of the ratio -p-, will give a dif- 
 ferent value for Pg. If P^ and P.^ are made equal to each other, 
 E will be in the middle of B C, and the equalizing .lever will be 
 of equal arms. The distribution of the load of locomotives and 
 cars upon their spring is usually made with such equalizing 
 levers. 
 
 If the load is to be supported upon more than three or four 
 points it will be necessary to use several equalizing levers, and 
 
 Fig. 105. 
 examples of this will be found in some locomotives. If, for 
 example, we suppose M, Fig. 105, to be the point of application 
 of the total load 5 of a locomotive, supported upon three axles 
 B CD in such a manner that the weight shall be transmitted to 
 the axles through the springs as shown, and also that the 
 weights upon the wheels C and D shall bear a determinate rela- 
 tion to each other. This can be accomplished by the use of 
 three springs and one equalizing lever upon each frame ofthe 
 locomotive, the whole weight being thus supported upon eight 
 points. Taking the relation between the forces P., and Pi=^p : q, 
 we erect a perpendicular E e, whose distance from the axle C 
 and Z> is in the proportion q : p. From any point e' on this 
 
 Fig. 106. 
 
 line draw lines to the bearing points of the wheels upon the 
 rails, and any horizontal line will intersect these inclosed lines 
 in points which will give the proportional length of arms ce d 
 
 for the equalizing lever. The distances of the points c and d 
 from the verticals through C and D give the length of the arms 
 of the springs c^ c.^ and d-^ d^. These springs are made with 
 arms of equal stiffness, since they are to support equal loads at 
 both ends. For any chosen ratio p : q, and given distance be- 
 tween the axles, the actual length of the equalizing lever will 
 not affect the ratio of P^ to the sum P2 -\- P^, as an inspection 
 of the cord polygon b in c d will show. 
 
 The springs which are attached to the ends of the equalizing 
 lever must, of course, be made of sufficient stiffness to support 
 the load which is thrown upon them, and the length of the sup- 
 ports and their proportions chosen according to the previously 
 detei'mined distribution of the weight. 
 
 Many similar examples to the preceding might be given, as 
 they are of frequent occurrence in practice. The two springs 
 ■which are attached to the equalizing lever may be replaced by a 
 single spring, as in Fig. 106. In this case the axes C^are con- 
 nected rigidly to the lever bee, and the lever itself rests upon 
 a spring 61 ^1 c^, whose extremities are fastened to the frame 
 
 The arms b-^ e^ and c^ e^ of the spriag are of unequal lengtn, 
 and have the same relation p : q as that which exists be* ween 
 the arms of the lever bee. If the arms of the lever are not 
 properly proportioned, or if any error has been made in the dis- 
 tribution of the load, it will be made apparent by the iucliaed 
 position which will be assumed by the equalizing lever. 
 
 ?42. 
 
 Uniformly Distributbd Parallei, Forces. 
 
 When a beam is subjected to a uniformly distributed load, the 
 
 force and cord polygons cannot be determined by the preceding 
 
 methods, since in such cases the cord polygon becomes a figure 
 
 Fig. 107. 
 
 Fig. 108. 
 
 of curved outline. The character of the curve may be deter- 
 mined in the following manner : If we assume the load to be 
 
 concentrated at a number of equidistant points, as in i, 2, 9, 
 
 Fig. 107, and construct the cord polygon for these conditions, it 
 will be evident that the sides a M and b c will intersect midway 
 between i a and 2 b, and also midway between a b' , since the 
 forces I and 2 are equal to each other. In the same manner cd 
 and a iJf intersect midway between 3 c and i a, which is also in 
 the line of 2 b, that is, at b' , and likewise d e and a i^ intersect 
 midway between b' and e' . In this way it may be shown that 
 the intersections of the prolonged sides of the polygon from 
 a M to i M are at equal distances from each other. This indi- 
 cates a known property of the parabola whose vertex lies on 
 
 E RI 
 line E M, and whose abscissa e E =■ . This parabola is 
 
 the form assumed by the cord polygon when the load is uni- 
 formly distributed, as was previously assumed. If we note that 
 the triangle A M B represents the entire load collected at E, it 
 -will readily be seen how the curve may be drawn in any case. 
 If the chord A E B is inclined, as shown in Fig. 108, the divi- 
 sions of A M and M B will be equal in number, but the divi- 
 sions of A M will be of different size from those of RI B. The 
 point e lies in the middle of E I\T, but is not the vertex of the 
 
 Link polygons which assume the form of curves may also be 
 used to show the effect of moving loads, and are then the figures 
 which are contained within the successive sides of a regular 
 polygon. Many examples are to be found in the case of railway 
 bridges, traveling cranes, engine guide bars, etc. 
 
 U3- 
 
 The investigation of the action of parallel forces, such as Qy 
 to Qi and P^ jP^, Fig. 109, whose direction is normal to a beam, 
 requires a knowledge of the statical moments of the external 
 forces. These can best be obtained by use of the force and cord 
 polygons. After constructing the force polygon A O ^, and cord 
 polygon abcdef, let it be required to find the statical moment 
 for any point .Supon the beam. This moment is the product of 
 the resultant of all the forces upon one side or the other of the 
 line ^ ^i into the lever arm / of this resultant from 6" 5"i. _ 
 
 The magnitude of this resultant is obtained from the distance 
 A » = 1 , 5 in the force polygon, cut off by the rays i and O 5, 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 33 
 
 which are parallel io b c and/ a, and its point of application is 
 determined by prolonging these sides until they intersect at g. 
 By drawing the perpendicular g go.^'On^ lever arm / of the re- 
 sultant P^ h i is determined, for the force acting at the point 
 5, and hence we have IM = P I. 
 
 This multiplication may also be performed graphically. By 
 drawing the perpendicular O kin the force polygon, we obtain 
 the altitude of the triangle O li i from the base h i, and this tri- 
 angle is similar to the triangle g s So, whose altitude is /. Call 
 in O k=: //"and s So = t, we have 
 
 This proves that the statical moment at any point in a beam is 
 proportional to the corresponding ordinate of the cord polygon, 
 parallel to the direction o_f the /orces,_ since // is a constant. 
 By making H equal to unity the conditions become similar to 
 Case I., ^ 2 2, in graphical multiplication, and the moment M 
 becomes equal to the ordinate t. It is not necessary to deter- 
 m.ine the position of the point of application g of the resultant, 
 
 Fig. 109. 
 
 since it is the relation between the statical moments which is 
 most desirable, whether //be chosen as a unit or not. This 
 property of- the cord polygon for parallel forces is most useful, 
 and an example may be found in the case of axles. 
 
 For such cases as for many others, it is most useful, since no 
 modification of the diagram is necessary, the moments being 
 found by the same construction which is required for the deter- 
 mination of the forces. It is often, convenient in practice to 
 cover the figure containing the tno^ ent ordinates with section 
 lining or with a light tint of color. 
 
 ?44. 
 Composition and Decomposition of Staticai. Moments. 
 As shown in the preceding section, statical moments may be 
 shown by means of lines of definite length and position in the 
 same manner as simple forces. When two statical moments act 
 iu the same or in different directions, they may be combined by 
 means of graphical addition in the same manner as has already 
 
 
 L -O 
 
 
 
 'V^ 
 
 
 a' 
 
 / 
 
 A„.^ 
 
 ■ / 
 
 
 . iPlI! 
 
 / 
 
 
 \„ 
 
 Fig. iio. 
 
 been shown in \ 31. \i A B Cand ADC, Fig. no, represent 
 the cord polygons for two sets of parallel forces which act nor- 
 mal to the axis of a revolving body A C, in the directions A^ B' 
 and A' D' v/e have the following method : For a point 5 on the 
 axis of the body we have the triangle T -5" T^, in which the 
 angle 4> = B' A' D' and T T' = S T' = i for the desired 
 moment. The combination of the cord polygons ABC and 
 ADC, which may be called the moment surfaces, will give the 
 resultant moment surface A T U C. The sides A 7 and C U 
 are here straight lines, while T U' is 2, curve, in most cases a 
 hyperbola. In actual practice the straight line joining T^and U 
 may be used with but little error, and its detailed construction 
 is unnecessary. 
 
 By a reversal of the above construction it is possible to decom- 
 pose any given statical moment t into two others, t^ and 4> if 
 their directions be given. 
 
 ?45. 
 
 Twisting Moments and their Graphicai, Combination 
 WITH Bending Moments. 
 Next in importance to bending moments, and often acting in 
 combination with them, are twisting moments. In Fig. in let 
 A B C D be the axis of a rotating body, subjected to bending 
 forces at B C, and supported at A and D ; the force polygon 
 being represented aX A O z and the moment-surface at A b cD, 
 and let the portion between B and Cbe subjected to a twisting 
 moment P. R, and the moment-surface of the latter be required. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 According to \ 43, and the method of multiplication given in. 
 Rule I., § 22, we find a line corresponding in value to PT? by 
 laying off in the force polygon A p = P, joining the ray Op, 
 prolonging O A and Op, and drawing q r parallel to A p bX a. 
 distance equal to R, giving a length q r equal to P R upon the 
 same scale used for the polygon A b c D. The moment-surface 
 for the twisting between B and Cwill then be included in the 
 rectangle B Cv k, whose altitude B uz= Cv = qr. In common, 
 practice it is desirable to convert this torsion surface into one 
 representing equivalent bending moment. This may be done 
 by taking a proportional value which shall give the same 
 security as the bending moment. It has been shown in ^ iS 
 
 latter is equal to -~ the twisting 
 
 that the 
 
 them make B ni= Cv-^ = 
 
 moment. We 1 
 
 - B u,\ 
 
 order to obtain the 
 
 ment-surface of the bending moment between B and C, which 
 may be measured upon the same scale as, A b c d. 
 
 If we wish to combine this with the given bending moment 
 we may do so graphically by first using the formula IV. of the 
 table of I 18, p. 60, in which the ideal bending moment for the 
 
 combined action of a twisting 
 ment 3l6 is : 
 
 Mi = ^ Mb - 
 
 t Md and a bending mo- 
 
 ^ M 
 
 b" + Md' 
 
 In this case we make B b^=-\- B b, Cc-,= -^ C c, E e = 
 — E e, etc. , rotate B u^, C v^ and E w^, down upon A D, and 
 add the hypoteneuses b^ u^' , c^ v^\ e^ ze// to the lines b b^, c c^, e e^. 
 The combined length of these lines gives the length for the 
 ordinates atB, Cand D, from which the resulting ideal cord 
 polygon B b b' e' c' c D may be constructed. 
 ?46. 
 Determination of the Centre op Gravity by means 
 
 OF THE Force Pi,an. 
 The position of the centre of gravity of a plane figure may 
 
 Fig. 112. 
 often be very conveniently determined by means of the force 
 plan. This may be done by dividing the figure into a number 
 of strips of uniform width, such that their area may be con- 
 sidered as proportional to their middle ordinate, constructing 
 
34 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the force and cord polygons, and taking the line of the resultant 
 as a line of gravity. If the figure is not symmetrical, it will be 
 necessary to divide the figure again in another direction and 
 determine another line of gravity, when the position of the 
 centre of gravity will be found at the intersection of the two 
 lines. For figures of simple form larger determinate sections 
 may be taken instead of strips, their area determined in any 
 convenient manner, and the diagram constructed accordingly. 
 
 Suppose, for example, that it is required to determine the 
 position of the centre of gravity of the T-shaped section shown 
 in Fig. 112. The figure is S}mimetrical about the axis Y Y, so 
 that the centre of gravity must lie somewhere in that line. We 
 may divide the figure into the rectangular b Y, c, b-^y, c-^ and 
 i>i X g, which we will call respectively the areas i, 2 and 3. 
 
 We have also given c^ \ .^b.^ and c^ = b.^. This gives the 
 
 three forces as i . s , -^—, and -^, which are then laid off at 
 
 ^2*2' 2 ' 
 
 ^ I 2 3, a pole selected, and -/T/ /i'l drawn parallel to O A, 
 JCi K^ parallel to O i, K^ K.^ parallel to O 2, K^ K/ parallel to 
 O 3, when the intersection of the sides IC-^ A'/ and IC^ I\/ at M 
 
 f'ves a point on the line of gravity M M' , whose intersection 
 with the axis Y Y is, the centre of gravity of the figure. 
 
 ?47. 
 Resultant op the Load on a Water Wheel. 
 It is very important in designing a water wheel to be able to 
 determine the position of the resultant of the water acting upon 
 it, and the method of doing so will furnish an excellent illus- 
 tration of the application of the principles of the preceding 
 sections. 
 
 Fig. 113. 
 
 In the breast wheel, which is shown in Fig. 113, there are ten 
 buckets in the half section, the third from the top being the 
 first to receive a charge of water, the amount being estimated 
 from a previously determined coefficient. The level of the 
 water in the succeeding buckets may be considered as horizon- 
 tal, and the discharge from the buckets is prevented by the cul- 
 vert K L, so that if we neglect the leakage around the edges of 
 the culvert we may count that all the buckets from No. III. to 
 No. X. contain the same load of water, acting in each case as if 
 its weight were concentrated at the centre of gravity of each of 
 
 the respective prisms of water. Bucket No. XI. we may con- 
 sider as entirely empty. 
 
 I. Determination of the culvert arc A' Z. The contents of a 
 bucket section are determined by the cross section contained 
 between two adjoining bucket divisions prolonged, as governed 
 by the coefficient of charge, = 0.04. Now, in bucket I. lay off 
 ^ / = 0.4 of the bucket spacing, and draw / m radial ; then the 
 section k I m n will represent a bucket charge. In bucket II. 
 its figure assumes the shape rp u t, in which the angle t is the 
 beginning of the scoop of the bucket r t, and k tu will be equal 
 to the desired culvert angle K M L, and u t i\I will be equal to 
 the complement N M K. 
 
 The construction is as follows : In the right angled triangle 
 p q make o p = the middle breadth of the figure k I in n, and 
 also make p q = 2 . 1 rii \ then transform this triangle into one of 
 equal area, rp s (by drawing s parallel to 7'q, and joining rs, 
 see ^25. Join 5 }, and draw r u parallel to it, and join u and t, 
 and if we neglect the curvature of/ u, we may consider the 
 quadrilateral r p 11 t as the form of a filled bucket just at the 
 moment of discharge. This requires the angle K M N= u i 31, 
 but owing to the splashing of the water, the culvert is raised as 
 high as/. 
 
 II. Determination of the water level in the various buckets. 
 We will begin with bucket IV. Here the figure rp t uis again 
 drawn, and the line i' v, and its parallel w 11', determined ex- 
 perimentally, so that the diagonal w v shall be horizontal, which 
 may readily be done after a few trials. Proceed in the same 
 manner with buckets V., VI. and VII. 
 
 In bucket III. the figure r p u t is first converted into the 
 quadrilateral with the upper line p x, and this then into the 
 pentagonal figure, with the level upper line jF z. 
 
 In bucket VIII. we first get the figure with the upper line/i x-^, 
 and then from this the figure with the level upper line j'j z-^. 
 Proceed in the same manner for buckets IX. and X. 
 
 III. Force plan for the water load. Now determine the cen- 
 tre of gravity for each loaded bucket, and also lay off the force 
 polygon A O '& for these eight forces. From this constant the 
 link polygon db e afg h i, according to the methods previously 
 given, and i, will be a point in the resultant of all the forces. 
 It is to be noticed that the centres C and D fall so nearly in the 
 same line that their forces have been united, so that i d is par- 
 allel Xo A O, d b\.o O 1, and the intermediate parallel to i 
 omitted. 
 
 Suppose, now, that it is desired to determine completely the 
 position of the centre of gravity P, of all the prisms of water. 
 Draw through A, B, C, etc., horizontal lines, assume the force 
 polygon A OS, to be turned around 90°, and draw a second cord 
 polygon ; or, what is shorter, draw the second polygon with its 
 sides normal to the rays of the force polygon, giving the figure 
 a'b'c'd'e'f ^ - - - i'. A horizontal through i will then intersect 
 the vertical which was previously determined, and so fix the 
 position P, of the centre of gravity of the entire mass of water. 
 By taking the buckets in a different position, a slight difference 
 in the position of i P, may be found ; but in most cases the 
 deviation will be very slight. 
 
 §48. 
 Force Plans for Framed Structures. 
 
 Framed structures are of very general application wherever 
 loads are to be supported, and their discussion may be classified 
 as a system by itself, while their use extends from the simple 
 trussed beam to the bridge and roof truss ; also for walking 
 beams and many other uses. 
 
 The tensile and compressive stresses in these various forms 
 may readily be examined by means of the force plan, which 
 consists of both the force and cord polygons and their modifica- 
 tions. The subsequent examples will serve to illustrate the 
 principal cases. In all of these cases it is assumed that at the 
 knots - i. e., at the points where several members meet, — a joint 
 is supposed to exist ; or at least no account is taken of the re- 
 sistance to bending at the knots. 
 
 In order to form such a plan for any given construction, it is 
 necessary first to determine the division and direction of the 
 forces, and then, beginning at one of the external forces and 
 laying off its direction and magnitude to the next knot, com- 
 bining it there with the external forces at that point, laying off 
 the resultant to the next bend, etc. Upon such combinations 
 of force triangles or quadrangles the force plan is constructed. 
 
 If it is desired to determine the directions of the components 
 of a given or determined force, the principles laid down in I 32 
 must be borne in mind. These may be generally expressed in 
 the following rules : 
 
 If one force is to be separated into two or more forces, its di- 
 rection is to be reve7'sed and it is to be made the closing line 
 S' in the paths of the other forces. 
 
 If two or more given forces are to be conbined with two or 
 more other forces, the force polygon will consist of the given 
 forces and their closing line S. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Z^ 
 
 The first rule is only a special case under the second or 
 -general rule, since the single force may be considered as an uu- 
 iclosed force polygon whose closing line passes backward over 
 the same path to the starting point. 
 
 Fig. 114. 
 
 Fig. 115. 
 
 In the investigation of each member in a frame without error, 
 it is best to assume the member to be cut, and to determine the 
 external forces at each section which oppose the internal forces ; 
 the direction of the forces ma)' then also be determined with 
 precision. 
 
 ?49- 
 FoRCB Pi<ANS FOR Framed Structures. 
 
 I. Simple Trussed Beams. Fig. 116. The beam A B C \?. 
 supposed to carry a.t B a. load equal to 2 P, acting in a direction 
 normal to A C, and to be supported at A and C. Since A B 
 =. B C, the reaction at each support is equal to P. It is then 
 required to determine the stresses upon the various members 
 from I to 5, as marked in the figure. 
 
 Referring to the diagram marked «, let « (5 be the reaction P, 
 which acts upward at A. We now have to construct a diagram 
 
 Fig. 116. 
 
 ■of the internax lorces acting m. A B s^ndt. A D . To simplify mat- 
 ters, we will give these forces the same numbers as their corre- 
 sponding members ; drawing I parallel to A B, and 2 parallel 
 toAD. The direction of the force P, in the closing line of the 
 force-triangle, determines the direction in the other two sides, as 
 shown by the arrows, by the lines i and 2 . (See | 48. ) In this 
 case there will be compression in ^ -5" and tension in A D. 
 
 In order to show this clearly, in all the following strain dia- 
 grams the forces acting compressively in struts or posts will be 
 indicated by double lines, while all tension member^, links or 
 rods will be shown by single lines.* 
 
 Following out this idea, we shall, in the following illustrations, 
 show all struts or compression members in the construction 
 drawings as having a measurable thickness, as if made of wood, 
 ■while the tension members will be represented by simple lines, 
 although this is not intended to indicate any limit as to the 
 choice of materials. 
 
 For the knot at B we make a b c= 2 P, and, following in the 
 direction d a c (because the thrust is from A towards B), and 
 join the closing lines 3 and 4, both of which represent compres- 
 sion. The combination of 2 and 3 determines 5, which is ten- 
 sion. This gives an entirely symmetrical plan, which was to be 
 
 expected from the symmetrical form of the structure, and an 
 investigation of one-half is practically sufiicient. 
 
 If the load 2 P is taken as uniformly distributed over the 
 entire distance ABC, instead of being concentrated at B, the 
 
 P 
 reactions at^ and B will each be equal to — , and the load at 
 
 B = P, so that Yz of the load on A B and B Cis referred to the 
 knots A, B and C. From these conditions we obtain the force 
 plan b, which is geometrically similar to the other, but only half 
 
 II. Double-trussed Beam (much used for constructions of all 
 sizes). Fig. 117. In this case take vertical forces P, at B and 
 C, and corresponding vertical reactions at A and D. In the 
 first force plan, a is drawn equal to P, and I and 2 parallel re- 
 si^ectively to A B and A E, thus determining the forces i and 
 2 ; I, being compression and 2, tension. Lines now drawn par- 
 allel to B E and E F, determine the compression in 3, and the 
 tension in 5, while the compression at 4 is the closing line of 
 3, I, and /^; and the other halfof the diagram is similar. If the 
 vertical forces at A and B are not of the same magnitude, 
 which is often the case in practice, the structure should be 
 strengthened by the introduction of the diagonals E C and 
 B F. 
 
 The second diagram shows the construction in this case. Let 
 P^ = rtj (^j be the force acting at A, and P2 = ^2 ^2 ^t B. Draw 
 a vertical line from i to a horizontal through C^, which gives 
 the length 3, of the vertical force at B, and by drawing the 
 
 Fig. 118. 
 dotted diagonal line their resultant is found. If any of the ten- 
 sion members are omitted the framework will tend to take an in- 
 clined position until the various parts are at such an angle with 
 each other that both constructions will give the same value for 
 3. For this reason it is best in nearly every case to use the di- 
 agonal counterbraces. 
 
 III. Triple Trussed Beam. Fig. 118. The uniformly distrib- 
 uted load upon the framework gives the following distribution of 
 forces. The force 3 P =: a (^ <: is first decomposed in 2 and I, 
 or ^ ^ and e a ; then i, is connected to a b = 2 P, by the line b e, 
 and this latter decomposed into 3 and 4 or <? y^ and f b \ 2 
 and 3 are now joined by/ c, and the components at 5 and 6 
 or f g and^ c found. Since 6 and 10 are equal to each other, 
 we may draw c h parallel to G H, and equal to c g, which gives 
 g h^=']\ the rest of the force plan is similar to the first half. 
 
 n has been suggested by Culm 
 
 Fig. 119. 
 
 IV. " Another form of Triple Trussed Beam is shown in Fig. 
 119. The space between B and Cis twice as great as between A 
 and B, and the uniformly distributed load is equal to 12 P, act- 
 ing at the various knots as shown in the figure. 
 
 In the force plan, make a b c = s P, and draw parallel to i 
 and 2, the lines a e and e c ; then join i with 3/ (for the knot 
 at B), and decompose into 3 and 4, or e /and fb. Now com- 
 bine 2 with 3, giving c / and draw 5 and 6 parallel to /^ Cand 
 F G, respectively. This case differs from the preceding, in that 
 5 is now compression instead of tension. The equality of the 
 forces 6 and 10 gives g h ^j, and the similar half of the dia- 
 gram need not be drawn. 
 
 _V. Multiple Trussed Beam. Fig. 120. The beam A J is 
 divided into eight equal parts, which are represented as being 
 uniformly loaded, the load at each knot being shown in the 
 figure. In constructing the force plan we make « ^ = 7 P, and 
 by drawing the lines parallel to I and 2, we obtain a/and fe ; 
 then lay off a i^ = 2 P, and join the resultant bf. This decom- 
 poses into 3 and 4, orfg a,ndg b. The forces 2 and 3 combine 
 to give the resultant g e, which, by drawing lines parallel to 
 K C and K L, gives g h and h e for the values of 5 and 6. We 
 now find that to proceed further we have three forces of given 
 direction only, and since this is indeterminate, we must obtain 
 one magnitude as well. This, for example, may be done for 
 the force 7 as follows : The strut C L sustains the vertical com- 
 ponents of 5 and 9, as well as its own direct load 2 P. Now 5 
 and 9 are equal to each other, since they are placed symmetri- 
 cally, and carry equal loads from the struts ^5 /vT and KM. 
 Hence in the force plan we may make h i, which represents the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 force 7, equal to twice the projection of 5 upon the vertical 
 4- 2 P. This we can now combine with 6 = // c, giving i e, 
 which in turn decomposes into i 111 and ;« e, or 10 and 11. 
 Returning to the knot C, we may now take the line h i, and by- 
 drawing parallels to CL, CM and C-D, obtain the figure h i k c. 
 
 resultant into d e and e b respectively parallel to E Cand E B, 
 giving the forces 3 and 4, both being compression . By repeat- 
 ing 2 and 3, in drawing 7 and 8, we obtain the figure c d e f g, 
 in which eg gives 5. This latter force might also have been 
 
 which determines the forces 8 and 9. In the same manner pro- 
 ceed from 12 to 15, which will complete the half plan. It may 
 be noted that the principal beam .^^y is subjected to a uniform 
 compression throughout its entire length. 
 
 The force plan will, of course, be modified by various dis- 
 tributions of the load, as in the case of simple beams, as shown 
 in cases XII. and XIII., \ 6. 
 
 ?5o. 
 Force Pi,ans for Roof Trusses. 
 Roof trusses furnish many and varied examples of frame- 
 work.* In the following examples a uniformly distributed 
 
 found by combining 4 and 4 P, and decomposing the resultant 
 by lines parallel to B Cand B F, an illustration of the various 
 methods in which the force plan may be used. 
 
 III. Another form, with Single Trussed Principals. Fig. 123. 
 This roof is similar to the preceding except that the struts E 
 Cand C 7^ are placed horizontally. In this case A E = E B, 
 and the external forces at A and D are both equal to 3 P. 
 
 Fig. 121, 
 vertical load is assumed, so that the burden upon any portion 
 of a rafter may be considered as proportional to the length of 
 that portion. 
 
 I. Roof with Simple Principals. Fig. 121. A uniform load 
 2 P upon each half gives as the external forces P,i P and P at 
 A, B and C. Lay off in the force plan a b = P, and draw a c 
 and b c parallel to A B and A C, determining the forces i and 
 2; I being compression and 2 tension. Then draw the vertical 
 c e, and also draw b e parallel to CD, thus giving both 3 and 5, 
 and the diagram is completed by drawing d e. 
 
 Fig. 124. ( 
 
 The forces from a to c in the force plan are determined as be- 
 fore, giving d a and c d for the forces i and 2, and the com- 
 bination of I with 2 P gives the resultant d b, from which the 
 thrusts 3 and 4, or d e and e b, are obtained. The value of i 
 is the same as 3, and 8 is the same as 2 ; while 5 is the closing 
 line oi c d e df, or of c df. The force 5 must also be the com- 
 bination of the equal forces 4 and 6 with 2 P, which the dia- 
 gram shows to be the case. If the rod C B is omitted, as is 
 frequently done, the strut E C F, if there is no joint at C, will, 
 oppose its resistance to bending to the force 5 ; but there will 
 be a tendency to rise at the apex B, if the fastening be not made 
 sufficiently strong. 
 
 Fig. 122. 
 II. Roof with Single-Trussed Principals. Fig. 122. This 
 form is similar to the preceding, with the addition of the struts 
 C E and C F. The distance ^4 ^ is to ^ ^, as 3 is to 2 ; and 
 the loads upon the respective portions are 6 Pand 4 P, which 
 give the forces at the various knots as shown in the figure. 
 Make a c in the force plan equal to 7 P, and by drawing lines 
 parallel to A E and A C, obtain the forces i and 2, or a d and 
 d c\ then combine i with s P= a b, and decompose the dotted 
 
 * Many subjects for Graphical Analysis maybe found in Ritter's "Roof 
 and Bridge Construction," Hannover, 1863, in which the forces in the vari- 
 ous members will also be found carefully determined numerically, thus 
 affording convenient proof 
 
 Fig. 125. 
 
 IV. Third Roof with Single Trussed Principals. Fig. 124. 
 In this form of truss, frequently known as the Belgian or 
 French truss, the single vertical rod of the preceding form is 
 replaced by a triangle BCD. The struts are placed in the 
 middle of the rafters and the external forces are distributed as 
 shown in the figure. In the force plan a b c ^= t, P, and i, and 
 2 are determined as before. By the decomposition of the re- 
 sultant of I and 2 P, we obtain the forces 3 and 4, or d e and 
 b e, and from the resultant e c, of the forces 2 and 3, we get the 
 tensions 5 and 6, in c f and e f. The second half of the dia- 
 gram is the symmetrical counterpart of the first. 
 
 V. Roof Truss with Double Trussed Principals. Fig. 125. 
 This construction does not differ greatly from that shown in 
 Fig. 124, except that the struts employed to strengthen the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 37 
 
 rafters are divided into two. The spaces are equal to each 
 other and the load uniformly distributed. As shown in the 
 figure this gives a reaction of 5 P, or A and D. In the force 
 plan a d = 5 P, and lines parallel to A E and A C drawn, de- 
 termining the forces i and 2, or d ^and e a. We then combine 
 e a with a ,b = 2 P, and decompose the dotted resultant e b, 
 into the thrusts ^'y'aud f b, or 3 and 4, by drawing these lines 
 parallel to E C and E F. Again we take the resultant of the 
 forces 4 and 2 P, and decompose it into 5 and 6, or / g and 
 g c, which brings us to the middle of the symmetrical figure. 
 The force 7 is the resultant of 6, and its counterpart S, and the 
 load 2 P, and the half of this force is therefore equal to the pro- 
 jection of 6 upon the vertical, less P, or in the diagram, to d h. 
 
 Fig. 127. 
 
 VII. Polygonal or Sickel Shaped Roof Truss. Fig. 127. 
 This roof may be considered as a modification of the preceding 
 form, and is used for higher and wider spans. It is hardly 
 proper to assume that the load is here uniformly distributed 
 even if the spaces are equal, for in the case of snow, much less 
 weight would be carried by the steep portions A B or G H, 
 than by the flatter surfaces C D or D E. We must therefore 
 estimate the forces P-^, P^, P^, acting as B, C, D, E, E, G, and 
 make the reactions at A and B equal to Q = P^ + P^ + Py 
 
 In the force plan a b = P^, b c = P^. c d ^P.^, and a d = O, 
 which is first decomposed into i and 2, by drawing e a and d e 
 parallel to A B and A J. Then combining i with P^, and de- 
 composing the resultant, as before, we get 3 and 4, or ^ _/ and 
 / b. Having 2 and 3, we get in like manner 5 and 6, or g f 
 and d g ; then combining 4 and 5 with P.^, and decomposing 
 with parallels to C K anA CD, we obtain the forces 8 and 9, 
 and so proceed until we reach 12, which is the middle of the 
 symmetrical figure. The members K L, D L, E L, and M L 
 are all subject to tension. 
 
 ?5i- 
 
 The Graphicai, Determination of Wind Stresses. 
 
 In designing large and important roof trusses it is important 
 
 to investigate the stresses due to wind pressure, as well as those 
 
 due to the weight of the roof and of snow, and indeed, in some 
 cases, the resistance to wind is the most important of all. 
 
 As an illustration of the applicability of the graphical method 
 to the determination of wind stresses, we will take the Fnglish 
 roof truss, Fig. 126, whose conditions under a vertical load have 
 already been examined, and consider it as also subjected to a 
 wind stress W, as shown in Fig. 128. 
 
 We have first to determine the forces Q^ and Q.^, acting at the 
 points A and D. The wind pressure will be taken as acting on 
 the surface of the roof from A to B. Let J^be the resultant of 
 the entire wind pressure acting normal to AB, and let /^be the 
 total vertical load upon that half of the truss. By combining 
 these two forces we obtain the direction FS of their resultant, 
 and also its magnitude, which we then lay off on the force plan 
 at ccj. Upon the other half of the truss we have only the verti- 
 cal load, which may be considered as acting aty, and equal in 
 magnitude to P. By prolonging its direction until it intersects 
 the previously determined line at S, we have at 5' a point in the 
 resultant of the entire load upon the roof, including wind pres- 
 sure. By making c-^ a.^ in the force plan equal to P, we have a c 
 for the direction of this resultant, which may then be laid off at 
 5' 7" in the drawing. In order to determine the forces Q^ and Q.^ 
 we must recollect that, according to ^ 34, when we have two 
 
 Fig. 126. 
 
 VI. Fnglish Roof Truss, with Multiple Trussed Principals. 
 Fig. 126. Here we have inclined struts, with vertical tie rods. 
 The load is again uuiformlj' distributed, each space bearing the 
 load of 2 P. The reactions at A and D are each = 7 P. In 
 the force plan we have ab->^bc-\-cd-\-de^i X 2 P -\- P^=^ 
 7 P, which gives the length of a e. The forces i and 2 are 
 found by drawingy^a and e /, parallel to A E and A L. Now 
 consider i as combined witli a b = 2 P, and the resultant f b, 
 decomposed into f g and g b, giving the forces 3 and 4 ; again, 
 combine 2 and 3, and then decompose the resultant g e, into 5 
 and 6, or g h and h e, by drawing these latter parallel to L F 
 and L M. In this manner we continue until we reach 12, or 
 / d, which we then project upon the vertical. Now taking from 
 d m, one-half the load P= d e, we have m e for one-half the 
 stress on the middle rod B C. The remaining half of the force 
 plan is similar. 
 
 Fig. 128. 
 closing forces to determine, we must also have at least two con- 
 ditions given. In this case, then, we must first find the direc- 
 tion of Q^ and Q.^. 
 
 The wind pressure produces a horizontal thrust which must 
 be met by the stability of the walls or columns upon which the 
 roof rests. In each case it must be determined whether this 
 horizontal thrust is borne equally or unequall}' by both sup- 
 ports, and in what proportion it is divided. To this end we 
 first find (according to | 39) the proportion of the vertical com- 
 ponent of the force a c, which comes upon each support (as 
 found by the intersection of S T, prolonged with A E>), and 
 then combine these vertical forces with their respective hori- 
 zontal components. It often happens that all the horizontal 
 thrust is borne by one of the supports, which it must of course 
 be prepared to resist. This often occurs in the case of railway 
 stations, and under such circumstances the direction of each force 
 must be determined separatel}'. First prolong the vertical at 
 Z> downward until it intersects .S 7", and join the intersection 
 with A (the lines are only indicated in the figure). This gives 
 the direction of the force at A. We have now both the direc- 
 tion of the reaction at Z? and the direction of that at A. We 
 must also consider the distribution of the forces at the various 
 knots between A and B, and between B and D. We have for 
 the points between A and B the resultants between the propor- 
 tional parts of P and IV, while from B to D we have simply the 
 proportional parts of P This gives at A the force /\ ; at E, F 
 and G, the force P2 ; at the peak, the force jRj ; at H,J and K. 
 
 P P 
 
 the force P, = — , and at D, the vertical force P,, =-- . 
 
 "4 ^8 
 
 Returning now to the force plan, we make c d =^ /\, d e ^= 
 ef=fg = P2, gh= P.„ hi = ik = kl= P^, and I a = P^. 
 We now have finally the length b I, for the value of the reaction 
 Q2 at the point D, and a line (not shown) from b to d, gives the 
 rtiagnitude of the force Q-^ acting at A. 
 
 The determination of the stresses in the various members can 
 now readily be made. The decomposition oi bd hy drawing 
 b m and in d parallel respectively to A E and A L, gives the 
 forces I and 2. We thus proceed until we reach the rod B C, or 
 
3^ 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 No. 13, for which we get the tension r j = 13, by drawing the 
 vertical r s from /-, until it intersects the line n s, drawn parallel 
 to B D. We then continue to determine the forces from 15 to 
 25, as already shown. The force plan shows that under these 
 conditions similarly placed struts are subjected to dissimilar 
 stresses. The determination of the stresses might have been 
 made in the reverse order, beginning with the triangle x d I, 
 which should give the same results, and which may be used to 
 prove the accuracy of the work. A proof is also made by the 
 accuracy with which the line w x drawn from w, parallel to 
 K O, intersect.<i the point xr, which was first determined by the 
 intersection of .r and / xr. As a matter of fact, it will be found 
 to require careful drawing in order to insure the closing of the 
 diagram. 
 
 By comparing the last force plan with that found for the same 
 roof truss in Fig. 126 (the scale being the same), it will be seen 
 how greatly the wind stresses affect the structure. In order to 
 complete the calculation, a second plan should be drawn, as- 
 suming the wind to act also upon B D. 
 
 FoRCS Plans for Framed Beams. 
 Beams of various forms are often framed in various shapes 
 and made both of wrought and cast iron, and have many appli- 
 cations, such as walking beams for steam engines, for cranes, 
 arms, &c. A few examples will show the method of investiga- 
 tion for such cases. 
 
 Fig. 129. 
 
 I. Projecting Frames with straight members. Fig. 130. The 
 load Pacts at A in a direction normal to the axis of the frame, 
 ■which is supported at B and C. The force plan is constructed 
 as follows : Draw a b = P, and from its extremities draw a c 
 and b c parallel to i and 2, which gives the forces in those mem- 
 bers. Each of these is then decomposed into two other forces — 
 I into 3 and 4, 2 into 5 and 6, giving the triangles bee and ad e. 
 
 The forces 3 and 5 are then combined and the resultant de- 
 composed into 7 and 8. To do this we transfer ^ = d c tofe, 
 and join the resultant/^, which can readily be separated into 
 7 and S. We proceed in this manner for the remaining mem- 
 bers, and as the frame is symmetrical about the axis^ e, only 
 
 Fig. 130. 
 
 one-half of the diagram need be completed. The lines g a and 
 bg, which are the final resultants of 15 with 17, and 16 with 18, 
 are also the external forces at B and C, the points of attach- 
 ment, provided that their direction be permitted to remain the 
 same. 
 
 II. Double Loaded Frame, Fig. 132. In this case we have 
 the force P■^ acting downwards at A, and a force P., acting up- 
 wards at D, while the points of attachment remain at B and C 
 as before. The members A B and A (Tare polygonal formed. 
 The force plan is drawn just as before, until the force 13 is 
 reached. At D the members are attached to each other at their 
 intersection, so that the force /'j acts upon both 15 and 16. At 
 this same point we have the action of the forces 12 and 13. 
 Now join the extremities of 12 and 13 by the dotted line shown, 
 
 and mark off the length of the force P^, which is subtracted, 
 because its action is upward, thus obtaining the resultant of the 
 three forces. We can then draw 15 and 16 and proceed without 
 interruption to 20. Finally, we draw 6/and e a, the external 
 forces at Q^ and O.^, which hold the entire frame in equilibrium. 
 III. Framed Boom for a Crane, Fig. 133. This figure is por- 
 tion of a framed arch which may be used for the projecting 
 boom of a large crane. At A and D we have the forces P^ and 
 P.2, and at B and C, the external forces Q^ and Qo. The force 
 plan is now required to determine the internal forces acting on 
 the various members of the structure. Before this can be done^ 
 
 we must first determine the as yet unknown direction of the 
 force O^. Prolong P^ and P^ to their intersection at E, and by 
 drawing in the force plan, the triangle a b c, determine the di- 
 rection F E oi their resultant ; then prolong Q^ until it inter- 
 sects .£'7^ at G, and join CG, which will be the required di- 
 rection of the force C'j. Completing the figure in the force 
 plan, we have c d= Q^ and d a= Q^_. We now proceed from 
 P^ = a b and lay off the forces i and 2, decompose 2 into 3 
 and 4 ; combine 3 and i and decompose their resultant, obtain- 
 ing 5 and 6. We thus proceed until we reach 12, which we 
 obtain by combining 9 and 8 and decomposing the resultant 
 into II and 12. We now have to combine 10 and 11 with P^, 
 and decompose the resultant into 13 and 14. We first transfer 
 the force 11 to ^, making it equal to e/, in order to avoid the 
 confusion of lines, which would occur if the construction were 
 made at a. .Now drawing the path 11, 10, P,, we have the clos- 
 ing line ef, which decomposes into 13 and 14. We then have 
 15 and 16 from the resultant of 13 and 12, and finally, 17, as the 
 line joining 15 and 16 with d, since 16 and 17 must have the 
 resultant a d = Q.^. If the work is correctly done, we will find 
 17 falls parallel to B C, which affords a convenient and valuable 
 proof for the whole work 
 
 ?53- 
 Remarks. 
 
 The foregoing problems and methods will serve as general 
 examples of the various applications of Arithmography and 
 Graphostatics, and at the same time it must be noted that great 
 care and neatness are most essential in the use of the method. 
 
 It may be added that it is desirable to use as few letters and 
 figures as possible in designating the various lines ; a common 
 fault of beginners being the disfigurement of their work in this 
 respect. The necessary marks should be made quite small and 
 in faint pencil, so that they may be readily erased it so desired. 
 
 It is necessary also to be provided with the best grades of 
 pencils, well sharpened, a good drawing-board, reliable pro- 
 tractor scale, dividers, and flexible spline ; and it is the author's 
 experience that these cannot be used too carefully. In order to 
 acquire facility in the methods and confidence in the results, 
 the beginner is advised to begin with simple examples which 
 can be thoroughly understood, and practice upon these care- 
 fully. 
 
 By proceeding in this manner it will be possible to obtain a 
 skill and grasp of the graphical method which will enable the 
 student to use it freely for the solution of a great variety of 
 problems, and extend its scope far beyond the range of the ex- 
 amples which have been given. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OF MACHINE ELEMENTS. 
 
 Introductory. 
 
 Under the title of " Machine Elements" we may consider 
 those single or grouped parts which are employed to a greater 
 or less extent in all forms of machinery. It is not practicable 
 to determine their number, nor, indeed, is that a matter of im- 
 portance, since the selection of groups and details is not based 
 upon any positive or generally accepted system. The following 
 selection of the constructive elements of machinery may be 
 found useful and convenient, which is the principal end to be 
 attained. 
 
 In the previous sections a number of general formulae have 
 been given, while in the cases which follow detailed examples 
 are selected. The dimensions and weights are expressed in 
 inches and pounds, except where otherwise distinctly stated ; 
 velocities in feet per secona ; and rotations in turns per minute. 
 The measure of force is the pound ; that of work in foot pounds 
 per minute, or for larger quantities in horse-power — (33,000 foot 
 pounds).* 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 RIl'EriNC. 
 
 Rivets. 
 
 Rivets are principally used for joining sheet metals or other 
 flat shapes together for the construction of a variety of sheet 
 and framed structures. They may be considered as a funda- 
 mental machine element acting to transform detailed parts into 
 combinations. 
 
 In the illustrations various forms of rivets are shown. The 
 common wrought-iron rivet is shown in Fig. 132, with the 
 
 with hammers of 8 to 10 pounds weight ; but if the head is to 
 be formed in a swage or die, a heavier hammer, say 16 pounds 
 weight, is necessary. 
 
 The rate at which this work can be done by skilful riveters 
 per day, according to Molinos and Pronnier, is as follows ; 
 
 Diameter of Rivet. No. per Day 
 
 %'' 200 to 250 
 
 ^" 180 " 200 
 
 y&'^ ■ ' 100 " 125 
 
 I ^^ 90 " 100 
 
 These figures are for horizontal bridge work ; on vertical 
 members about three-fourths these numbers may be taken. 
 
 Fig. 132. Fig. 133. Fig. 134. Fig. 135. Fig. 136. 
 
 button head, while Fig. 133 shows the conical head generally 
 formed by hand riveting. The length of body required to form 
 the head varies from 1.3 to 1.7 times the diameter, according to 
 the completeness with which the rivet fills the hole. When the 
 head is formed by dies instead of the hand hammer, the shape 
 is usually conoidal or spherical, as in Figs. 134-135. 
 
 The slight bevel given to each end of the rivet, as shown in 
 Fig. 138, adds materially to its strength. The double conical 
 hole shown in Fig. 137 assists in uniting the plates, and this 
 shape may be produced by using in the punching machitie a die 
 slightly larger than the diameter of the punch. This difference 
 has been experimentally determined for wrought-iron plates, 
 and is secured by making the hole in the die equal to the diam- 
 eter of the punch plus }{ the thickness of the plate. 
 
 In Fig. 136 is shown a form of countersunk rivet used in 
 shipbuilding. _ , 
 
 For bridge construction great care should be taken in the 
 choice of proportions. Figs. 137-139 show the proportions 
 adopted for the Dirschauer Bridge after the careful researches 
 of the engineer Kriiger. Fig. 137 shows the normal rivet head, 
 and Figs. 138 and 139 the half and full countersunk heads. 
 
 Rivets up to I or I ^ inches in diameter may readily be closed 
 
 e all give 
 
 ._ .. „ .-ical units in the original, but have 
 
 been transformed in the text into English units. It must be remembered 
 it the metrical horse-power (75 kgm.) is slightly smaller than the English 
 rse-power.— Trans. 
 
 Much higher rates are shown upon boiler riveting, as may be 
 seen from the following table, based upon observation of eleven 
 days' work at the boiler works at Piedbceaf (Aachen) : 
 
 ItV 
 
 In cylindrical shells of more than three feet diameter these 
 rates may be increased ten per cent., while for awkward or diflB.- 
 cult work ten per cent, reduction should be made. Each man 
 had the assistance of two strikers, one holder and one boy, 
 sizes less than ^'' requiring but one striker. 
 
 Hand riveting is now being largely superseded by machine 
 work. These machines possess the advantage of performing 
 the work much more rapidly, thus insuring a stronger joint, be- 
 sides which they are much more economical. Since their first 
 introduction at the time of the building of the Conway Bridge, 
 they have been extensively used for bridge work, and with the 
 improvements which have been successively made they are 
 rapidly displacing hand riveting for boiler work.* 
 
 modern r 
 
 .g machines the hydraulic riveter of Tweddell 
 . ror a description the following references mav serve : 
 1874, p. 103 ; Engineering, Jan., 1875, P- 76 ; Sellers' Im- 
 Machine, Jour. Frank. Inst., 1876, p. 305 ; Tweddell's 
 :, Sci. American, 1S76, p. 226 ; Small Tweddell Machine, 
 
 ;ndust., 1S76, p. 349. 
 
 ■ forms of steam and hydraulic riveters well suited for boiler work 
 
 holds the fii 
 
 Polyt. Zentral b 
 proved TweddelV 
 
 Othe 
 
 Garforth's Machine, Kronauer's Zeich. III., Johnson's Imp. Cyc, PI. 42; 
 the excellent steam riveter of Gouin, see Molinos & Pronnier, Fonts Mecal- 
 liques, p. 180 ; also the hydraulic riveter at Creusot (giving a pressure of 20 
 to 80 tons on the rivet, and closing 2 to 25 heads per minute). Revue Indust., 
 1S75, p. 349 ; also the very heavy machine of Kay & George (giving a pres- 
 sure of 120 tons on the rivet). Engineering, 1875, p. 223. An apparently very 
 ingenious machine is that of .\Uen, used especially for boiler riveting. In 
 this machine the frame and post are temporarily held together by a rod 
 operating in a very ingenious manner through one of he open rivet holes. 
 At the Philadelphia Centennial Exhibition this machine closed three or 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 Strength of Riveted Joints. 
 Riveted joints are inteuded either to resist direct stresses (as 
 iu bridges and similar structures), or to secure a tight joint 
 against moderate internal pressure (as iu ships, gasholders, 
 etc.), or in most cases both these conditions are united (as in 
 the case of steam boilers). A distinction may then be made 
 between joints for strength and joints for tightness, the seams 
 of steam boilers standing midway between the two. 
 
 In both cases a good value of b, in practice, giving sufficient 
 room for rivet heads, will be secured by making : 
 
 Fig. 140. 
 
 Fig. 141. 
 
 Fig. 142. 
 
 Joints for strength are either simple lap joints, Fig. 140, or 
 butt joints, Fig. 142, the latter coming into general use for 
 bridge work. The joint shown in Fig. 141, called a flap joint, 
 is also somewhat used for vertical tubes, chimney stacks, etc., 
 the flap really being nothing but a narrow plate. 
 
 For any given thickness, f5, of plate it is impracticable to 
 make the riveted joint the same strength as the plate itself, but 
 the ratio between the strength of the plate and the strength of 
 the joint can be made a maximum. This will best be attained, 
 with the assumption of a sufficient margin, when the strength 
 of the rivets and the strength of the remainder of the metal 
 between the rivet holes are equal to each other, i. e. , when they 
 reach their limit of elasticity at the same time. If the rivets 
 and plate are of the same material, we have, according to \ 5, 
 the stress in the cross section of the rivets as 0.8 that of the 
 plate. From this we derive the following formulae, in which 
 the friction of the joint is neglected, as being of uncertain 
 value : 
 Let— 
 
 6 = the thickness of the plate, 
 
 d = the diameter of rivet, 
 
 a = the pitch of rivets, 7. e., the distance from centre to- 
 centre of adjacent rivets, 
 
 n = the number of rows of rivets, 
 
 = the modulus of resistance of the joint, being the ratio 
 of the resistance of the joint to that of the full plate ; 
 then the highest ratio of resistance will be attained when we 
 have for lap joint riveting : 
 
 --~r[^ +^ 
 
 which gives : 
 
 or for butt joint riveting : 
 which gives : 
 
 ^ + :;^^-^ 
 
 8 nS '^X'^'J 
 
 = (0.540.56^4) 
 
 For butt joint riveting : 
 
 
 d=i.5d, or -,- = 
 
 (47) 
 
 A point of interest is the superficial pressure p, which exists 
 between the body of the rivet and the cylindrical surface of the 
 rivet hole. If ^'^ is the stress in the punched plate we have — 
 
 For lap riveted joints : 
 
 -~- = 0.2 7T 
 
 (48) 
 
 For butt riveted joints : 
 
 ^ -o.- ^ 
 
 The following table and scale v 
 ical labor of these calculations : 
 
 Table and Proportionai, Scai,e. 
 
 d 
 s 
 
 
 1.5 
 
 ... 1 .., 
 
 3.0 
 
 4.0 
 
 »= 
 
 ^ 
 
 = 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 2 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 .S-2 
 
 1.63 
 
 °-39 
 1.06 
 0.39 
 0.63 
 
 0-39 
 0.63 
 
 1.78 
 0.94 
 
 0.65 
 0.94 
 
 1-57 
 2.58 
 0.56 
 1.26 
 
 7.04' 6.43 
 1-57, 2-54 
 2.58 3.46 
 
 10.37 
 
 3.46 
 0.76 
 1-57 
 
 8.67 
 3-53 
 
 ::; 
 
 14-33 
 
 3-53 
 
 4-31 
 0,79 
 
 14.07 
 
 6.48 
 
 
 6.2B 
 
 :: 
 
 2.51 
 
 if- 
 n: 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.56 
 1.26 
 
 3-52 
 0.79 
 
 1.29 
 0.72 
 1.26 
 
 4-33 
 0.96 
 
 0.65 
 1.S8 
 
 7-15 
 0.96 
 
 0.79 
 
 7.04 
 314 
 
 0.72 
 
 12.05 
 3-14 
 
 0.83 
 
 4.91 4-9^ 7-07 
 4.37 4-37 5-6° 
 
 -i - =-" 
 
 3.14 3 14 3-77 
 
 25-61 
 
 5.60 
 3-77 
 
 24.14 
 12.56 
 8.32 
 0.83 
 5-03 
 
 ::: 
 
 8.32 
 
 0-9': 
 
 In the proportional scale. Fig. 143, the principal values are 
 graphically shown. It will be seen that the higher ratios of 
 strength are not very practically obtained, for the large diameter 
 rivets are inconvenient to handle. The advantages of lap joint 
 riveting are also shown. The objection to butt joint riveting, 
 which overrules its advantages, lies in the rapid increase in the 
 
 value of p, as it will be seen that with a ratio-j-=3 the elas- 
 tic limit of -\'.Tought iron is exceeded, the stress reaching 30,000 
 lbs., while the stress upon the metal between the holes is only 
 8,600 lbs. This explains the failure of riveted joints under 
 
 variable tension loads. If the ratio of - 
 
 : 2 is used, the 
 
 The overlap of the plate is subjected both to shearing and 
 bending- For the former conditions, call the lap 6', and for the 
 latter d^\ measuring in both cases from the centre of the rivets 
 to the edge of the joint. To obtain the same resistance in the 
 lap as in the perforated portion of the plate we have — 
 
 For lap joint riveting : 
 
 excessive stress iu the rivet holes cannot occur. Fairbairn, 
 upon whose experimental researches these conclusions are 
 based, states that for riveted structures the diameter of rivet 
 
 may best be taken as equal to -r- X ^ ; but this conclusion is 
 not fully borne out by experience. The use of the value for the 
 lap d = i-S d is approximately correct at least for lap joint 
 riveting, as the diagram shows it to give a slight margin both 
 over the values of b, for shearing or for bending. 
 
 ?57- 
 Riveting Disposed in Groups. 
 If more than two rows of rivets are to be used the efficiency 
 of the joint may be decidedly increased without using incon- 
 veniently large rivets by disposing the rivets in groups on 
 either side of a central row, arranging them according td an 
 arithmetical series. 
 
 The numbers in adjacent rows may then be placed as follows ; 
 
 . . . Total 4 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 If now we assume that th-> force P, upon each 
 O.Si^ strip between the dotted lines, is equally divided 
 among the rivets, we have for the efficiency of 
 ■03 the first row: 
 
 5 \i )^ vi 
 
 If the stress in the punched plate in the lines 
 I, II, III, IV, etc., Fig. 146 be called S\ S^} 
 S^Y, S'J, etc., we have : 
 P=Sl[!im — d)d 
 
 = si 
 
 -5^0 
 
 • (52; 
 
 FIG. 143. 
 
 And from this when 5^ = -5"^ we have : 
 
 a ^ m' + I 
 
 d m 
 
 And upon the same supposition : 
 
 __^_ = "' ~ 3 . '^ 2 ^ w-' — 6 _ 
 51" „r^ - 2 ' 5I ni' — 3 ' 
 
 ■Si _;„^^-lo 
 
 that is, the stresses at the lines III, IV, V, are 
 ^ " smaller than S\ = 5". The useful application 
 of this fact may be readily seen. 
 L,et us introduce 'n (50) : 
 
 -^ = ■^- = 1. 5916, or say 1.6 . . (53) 
 
 that is, we make the ratio d : & constant and = 
 1.6. For the modulus of the efficiency of the 
 joint (/>, when the stress in the solid plate is S-^, 
 we have : 
 
 ^_S, d m^ 
 
 We also have for the pressure p, on the rivets : 
 
 ^ m'- & d ^ 
 
 (54) 
 
 The following illustrations show examples of this form of 
 riveting, which may be termed Group Riveting, and is espec- 
 ially adapted to lap joints. The dotted lines show the limit of ,- • 
 the area including each group, and the spaces between the Tabulating the results of the applications ot these equati 
 
 to various groups ■" 
 LIT iri iv: v: vj.vii. 
 
 (55) 
 
 s we have : 
 
 4'°- 
 
 0^0 
 
 1 -m- '* 
 1 o..^5o 
 
 060 
 6 
 
 9o 
 000 
 60 • 
 
 ^^1° 
 
 'badj'- 
 
 4> -^l^ 
 
 9 o Q 
 
 ,Tt 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 For jo 
 
 4 - -50 
 
 (p = 0.80 0.90 0.94 0.96 
 
 ing narrow plates the rivets may often be disposed in 
 
 rivets in each longitudinal row are uniform. If fn be the num- 
 ber of rivets in the m-'ddle row of each group, then the total 
 number of rivets in each group is m"^.* 
 
 (?>\°^)^ M 
 
 * This follows because, 
 
 H-*"]-^ 
 
 double groups, while for the union of several plates, as in the 
 construction of plate girders, a number of groups may be em- 
 
42 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ployed. lu Fig. 147 a triple row is shown, and in Fig. 148 a 
 quadruple row, the joint in each case being made with a flap. 
 
 Besides the advantage which results from the disposition of 
 the rivets in groups in such cases, there is also a gain in making 
 the flap somewhat thicker than the plates to be joined. The 
 calculation in this case may be derived from the preceding 
 methods ; also see the latter part of \ 59. 
 
 ?58. ' 
 
 Steam Boiler Riveting. 
 
 For the joints of steam boilers parallel riveting is generally 
 
 used. In this case the question of the tightness of the joint 
 
 The following table contains the collected results of the pre- 
 ceding formulae for the more commonly occurring proportions : 
 
 Fig. 149. 
 
 Fig. 150. 
 
 Fig. 151. 
 
 prevents a wide spacing of the rivets. For the same reason the 
 thinner plates require proportionally larger rivets than the 
 heavier plates, and the lap of the plates, and also of the rivet 
 heads, must be greater. The method of caulking is also to be 
 considered. The older method consisted in driving the caulk- 
 ing chisel into the perpendicular edge of the plate and forcing 
 the lower edge of the groove thus made down upon the lower 
 plate, as shown in Fig. 149. The modern method, shown in 
 Fig. 150, requires the plate to be planed on the edge to an angle, 
 which can then be caulked without grooving. The ^_ 
 angle of bevel should be about i8)4°, or about i in 3. 
 The method of the American, Couuery, consists in the 
 use of a round nosed caulking tool. Fig. 151, which is 
 much less liable to injure the lower plate than the ^^ 
 sharp chisels of the previous methods ; the action ex- 9; 
 tends farther into the plate also. 
 
 The consideration of the tightness of the joint com- fl 
 pels a modification of the theoretical treatment of the 
 proportions of boiler seams, based upon practical ex- 
 perience. 
 
 According to Lemaitre the following proportions 
 are suitable for single riveted joints : 
 
 Tabi^e and Proportionai, Scai,e for 
 
 Steam Boher 
 
 
 Riveting. 
 
 
 Round 
 Head. 
 
 Conical 
 Head. 
 
 
 'i 
 
 i 
 
 Modulus of Efficiency. 
 
 H 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 |o 
 
 1 
 ^ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 *" 
 
 *2" 
 
 /s 
 
 Vi 
 
 X 
 
 r^ 
 
 A 
 
 H 
 
 X 
 
 iX 
 
 IX 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.60 
 
 2 
 
 t\ 
 
 iV 
 
 X 
 
 H 
 
 Vi 
 
 n 
 
 I 
 
 iX 
 
 2y 
 
 
 66 
 
 
 51 
 
 0.60 
 
 4X 
 
 X 
 
 A^ 
 
 -h 
 
 1. 00 
 
 tV 
 
 iVs 
 
 iX 
 
 iX 
 
 2X 
 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 0.59 
 
 6X 
 
 t\ 
 
 % 
 
 Vi 
 
 iX 
 
 X 
 
 iX 
 
 iX 
 
 iX 
 
 2X 
 
 
 
 61 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 0.59 
 
 13X 
 
 ys 
 
 \l 
 
 tV 
 
 iX 
 
 t'^ 
 
 1% 
 
 2 
 
 iX 
 
 2% 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 0.59 
 
 20 
 
 tV 
 
 i! 
 
 X 
 
 iX 
 
 H 
 
 ly. 
 
 2X 
 
 2 
 
 3X 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 0.59 
 
 29 
 
 'A 
 
 if 
 
 -^ 
 
 r}i 
 
 H 
 
 iX 
 
 2X 
 
 2X 
 
 3X 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 0.59 
 
 36X 
 
 J% 
 
 I 
 
 Vi 
 
 1% 
 
 11 
 
 
 2X 
 
 2X 
 
 3X 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 0.59 
 
 50X 
 
 % 
 
 ItV 
 
 w 
 
 2.00 
 
 ^ 
 
 2% 
 
 3 
 
 2X 
 
 4X 
 
 ° 
 
 58 
 
 ° 
 
 47 
 
 0.59 
 
 66 
 
 d = 1.5(5 + 0.1 
 a = 2d -\- 0.4''' 
 b-= i.sd 
 
 (56) 
 
 Double riveted joints are also much used for steam 
 boilers, especially for the longitudinal seams, while 
 single riveting is used for the circumferential joints, 
 since the stress upon the longitudinal joints is much 
 greater than upon the circumferential joints. 
 
 For double riveted joints, that is, for riveting in two 
 parallel rows, we have for the pitch a.^ of the rivets in 
 each row : 
 
 a, = 3d+o.78'' (57) 
 
 while the space between the two rows may be taken 
 as equal to the previous value of a, or 2d + 0.4^''. 
 In some cases this value is used for the pitch of both 
 rows (see Fig. 153). 
 
 We have previously taken the modulus of efficiency 
 <i>, so that the rivets and the perforated plate have not 
 the same degree of security. The values of <p, for the 
 rivets and for the plate should therefore be determined 
 separately, and the smaller value taken for that of the 
 completed joint. Let : 
 
 (p' = the modulus for the perforated plate, 
 (p^^ = that of the rivets, 
 
 then according to the previous formulae we have : 
 
 For the pressure p upon the body of the rivet we 
 have finally, both for single and double joints. 
 
 i=f(^ + -)- 
 
 (59) 
 
 The stress ^j in the perforated plates of boiler shells 
 is not generally permitted to exceed 5000 to 6000 
 pounds per square inch of cross section. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 43 
 
 The rivet length is = 2t5 -|- \.-]d, upon the assumption that 
 both plates are of the thickness <5, and this length gives an 
 ample allowance for the full clearance of the rivet holes (see 
 ^ 54). The last column is of service in making estimates of 
 weights. 
 
 Fig. 152 is a graphical presentation of the principal results 
 of the preceding formulae. It will be noticed that for single 
 riveting the modulus Y' , for the rivets, is always less than the 
 modulus 1^' for the perforated plate, and is nearly always less 
 than Yz. It follows that for single riveted joints of steam 
 boilers we should never assume a greater strength than one-half 
 that of the solid plate. By the adoption of double riveting, 
 while retaining the same pitch, « = 2rf -|- 0.4'', we ought to 
 obtain, according to the formula of \ 58, a value of Y' , twice 
 as great, which in the case of very light plates would exceed 
 unity. In that case, however, the value of 9^ is the lesser, and 
 it determines the efficiency of the joint, so that the only gain 
 due to the double riveting in that case is the increase in the 
 value of <p' . If, however, we choose for double riveting the 
 pitch «2. as given from equation (57), both 0' and <^" will be in- 
 creased in value. The lesser of the two moduli is that for the 
 rivets, and its value is obtained from 
 
 • (60) 
 
 Fig. 153- 
 
 Fig. 154. 
 
 Fig. 155- 
 
 Example, fi = ^^' , d = f^", a ^ nd \ 0. 
 
 _««T A" 0-3 "•X 0-391 „, T(.^„ 
 
 .65", say lYz" ; <^' 
 aarked that 1 
 ider pitches than are generally used in Europe.f 
 
 * The two rivets which lie between any pair of rivets i 
 each bear a stress of J P, and the rivets of the main join 
 
 The flap does not transmit anv stress to the rivets of the ^ . 
 
 the stress on rivets P=iTTd- S'a, for the solid plate P= Si 2aS. The modi 
 lus <i>", taking S3 for shearing stress = ^ ' , is found from <|>" = ^-^*4— 
 _ °-3 ^d^- 
 
 r the n 
 
 aS, whence <^ = 
 
 3 (a 
 
 im we obtain </>', from i' = 
 which is greater than 
 
 t For example, in single riveting Ys" plate and J-|" rivets have 
 (the formula would give about i^") ; fi" plate and fs" 1 ivets have 
 2%" (the formula would give about 2^% ') ; in double riveting, for 
 with ^" rivets, the pitch would be 3%", while the formula v 
 
 Three rows of rivets are used in this form of joint, and the 
 outside rows of wide pitch make this method more trouble- 
 some of execution than the group riveting shown in Fig. 144, 
 which has a modulus of o.So. This is a point which should be 
 borne in mind. 
 
 The joints of gasometers exhibit but little variety in plates or 
 rivets. The rivets are usually about ^4^^' to y./'ii'' diameter and 
 i'^ pitch, with a lap at the joint of about >|", the rivets being 
 closed cold and the joints caulked with red lead. 
 
 t, Weight op Sheet Metal. 
 
 Its value lies between 0,75 and 0.59, and is shown in the table 
 "■ . • .. (,^ggg remains within prac- 
 
 In Fig. 153 is shown double riveting in which the pitch kept 
 equal to 2d -\- o.d," , while in Fig. 154 the pitch is made equal to 
 2,d -4- 0.78'^ for rivets in the same row, while the diagonal dis- 
 tance between rivets of the two rows is the same as for single 
 riveting. For a flap joint such as is shown in Fig. 155, we have 
 a combination of parallel and group riveting. This method is 
 "Used in Germany for steam boilers, but is little used in America, 
 if at all. The flap is placed on the inside of the boiler shell, 
 and the flap seams have only half as many rivets as the main 
 seam, but of the same diameter. The objection that the inner 
 edge of the main seam is made inaccessible is counterbalanced 
 by the increase in strength. We have 
 
 _ 0.3 ^ d'^ 
 
 the lesser of which will be found to exceed the value obtained 
 for ordinary double riveted joints.* 
 
 Weight in Pounds per Square Foot. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Wro-tlron 
 
 est Iron. 
 
 Brass. 
 
 Copper. 
 
 Lead. 
 
 Zinc. 
 
 tV 
 
 2-53 
 
 2.34 
 
 2.73 
 
 2.S9 
 
 3.71 
 
 2.34 
 
 V^ 
 
 5-05 
 
 4.69 
 
 5-47 
 
 5.78 
 
 7.42 
 
 4.69 
 
 h 
 
 7-58 
 
 7.03 
 
 8.20 
 
 8.67 
 
 11.13 
 
 7-03 
 
 X 
 
 10.10 
 
 9.38 
 
 10.94 
 
 11.56 
 
 14.83 
 
 9.38 
 
 A 
 
 12.63 
 
 11.72 
 
 13.67 
 
 14.45 
 
 18.54 
 
 11.72 
 
 /s 
 
 15.16 
 
 14.06 
 
 16.41 
 
 17.34 
 
 22.25 
 
 14.06 
 
 tV 
 
 17. 68 
 
 16.41 
 
 19.14 
 
 20.23 
 
 25.96 
 
 16.41 
 
 y^ 
 
 20.21 
 
 18.75 
 
 21.88 
 
 23.13 
 
 29.67 
 
 18.75 
 
 -h 
 
 22.73 
 
 21.09 
 
 24.61 
 
 26.02 
 
 33.38 
 
 21.09 
 
 H 
 
 25.27 
 
 23.44 
 
 27.34 
 
 28.91 
 
 37.08 
 
 23.44 
 
 \\ 
 
 27.79 
 
 25.78 
 
 3n.o8 
 
 3I.S0 
 
 40.79 
 
 25.78 
 
 H 
 
 30.31 
 
 28.13 
 
 32.SI 
 
 34.69 
 
 44.50 
 
 28.13 
 
 H 
 
 32.84 
 
 30.47 
 
 35.55 
 
 37.58 
 
 48.21 
 
 30.47 
 
 Vs 
 
 35-37 
 
 32.81 
 
 38.28 
 
 40.47 
 
 51.92 
 
 32.81 
 
 if 
 
 37.90 
 
 35.16 
 
 41.02 
 
 43.36 
 
 55.93 
 
 35.16 
 
 
 40.42 
 
 37.50 
 
 43-75 
 
 46.25 
 
 59.33 
 
 37.50 
 
 Special Forms oe Riveted Joints. 
 
 Junction of Several Plates.— \u Fig. 156 is shown the junction 
 of three plates. In this case the corner of sheet No. 2 is bev- 
 eled off and No. i worked down over the lap. 
 
 t^ i.v"r>ii «,r'i ta-^ijkNii! r'j;'?.(irtsa 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -ef©--^- 
 
 -e--0- 
 
 1 » 
 
 . 1? 
 
 2 
 
 9--0-h€)-i-4- 
 
 -e--0- 
 
 •f 1 ■ 
 
 Fig. 156. 
 
 Fig. 157. 
 
 In Fig. 157 the junction of four plates is shown- Here the 
 angles of sheets Nos. 2 and 3 are beveled and Nos. I and 4 are 
 left unaltered. In the construction of steam boilers the shell 
 may be formed either in cylindrical sections, as shown in Fig. 
 158, or in sections of a conical shape, the taper of all the sec- 
 
 
 
 FiG. 158. 
 
 Fig. 159. 
 
 tions bearing the same relation to the direction of the flame as 
 shown in Fig. 159. This latter method requires that a slight 
 curvature should be given to the sheets in order to secure the 
 required taper. The determination of the taper and curvature 
 of the sheets and lines for the rivet holes may be made in the 
 following manner : 
 
44 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Let— 
 
 D = the diameter of the shell, as in Fig. 159, 
 B = the breadth of the sheet, Fig. 160, on a circumferen- 
 tial seam, 
 /- = the length of the sheet between pitch lines of rivets, 
 /= the versed-sine of the arc B ; we then have : 
 
 4-xil (-) 
 
 I -k i 
 
 tected from corrosion by being incased in copper. Screw stay- 
 bolts are now often made of soft wrought iron or mild steel, 
 but copper bolts are still preferred by many. 
 
 Fig. 167. Fig. 16S. 
 
 Fig. 169. 
 
 Fig. 170. 
 
 Co7istruction of Angles (Figs. 167-170). — Angle junctions in 
 riveted work are made either by flanging the plate or by the 
 use of angle iron. In Fig. 167 the flange is turned inward, and 
 in Fig. 168 it is turned outward. In these cases h is made the 
 same as for angle iron of the same thickness. Figs. 169 and 
 170 show the use of internal and external angle iron. 
 
 -^ = 0.7854X2 
 
 o that / will be a little greater than i>^ ti 
 
 e length /., we have 
 
 s the thickness of the plate. 
 
 In arranging the junction of sheets when the flap joint is em- 
 ployed, care must be taken to avoid complicated intersections. 
 This is best accomplished by making the flaps on the longitud- 
 inal and circumferential seams come on opposite sides of the 
 plates. Where the flaps are both on the same side, they are 
 sometimes let into each other. 
 
 Reinforcement of Plates. — This may often be done very 
 readily by the use of angle and T iron. In Fig. 161 is shown 
 
 Fig. 17: 
 
 Constniction of Solid Angles. — Thebe die the most difiScult 
 forms of riveted work, and may be made in several manners, 
 the most important being shown in the illustrations. In Fig. 
 3 71 the vertical angle is made as in Fig. 167, and the horizontal 
 angles as in Fig. 169, sheet No. 2 being beveled under the angle 
 iron. In Fig. 172 all three angles are made as in Fig. 169, the 
 
 Fig. 161. 
 
 an internal angle iron, and in Fig. 162 an external, and in Fig. 
 163 a simple T iron. The proportions for angle iron given by 
 Redtenbacher are as follows : 
 
 A = 4.5 '5+1''- 
 
 For T iron h^ = the base = 8 tJ + 2", and the height of the 
 xib = }{h^. In practice a great variety of proportions are made 
 to suit all possible cases, examples of which may be found in 
 the illustrated catalogues of the mills where they are rolled. 
 
 vertical angle iron being cut and bent over the horizontal. In 
 Fig. 173 the angles are all made as in Fig. 169, but the angle 
 irons are welded together at their junction. This makes an ex- 
 cellent piece of work, but is difiScult and expensive, and re- 
 quires firm support for the work, and is only applicable for 
 important constructions. In Fig. 174 the vertical angle is made 
 like Fig. i6g, while the lower joint is made as in Fig. 170, mak- 
 ing simple and substantial corner. 
 
 Fig. 164. 
 
 Fig. 165. 
 
 Fig. 166. 
 
 The strengthening of parallel plates which are near together 
 is best done by the use of staybolts. In Figs. 164 and 165 is 
 shown a copper staybolt after and before riveting, this form 
 being used in locomotive fire boxes and marine boilers. The 
 central hole affords a warning of the corrosion or weakening of 
 the bolt by the escape of steam. It is best to remove the screw 
 thread from the projecting portions before riveting over the 
 heads. Fig. 166 shows a form of iron staybolt for the same 
 purpose. The short piece of tube between the plates prevents 
 them from being drawn out of shape while riveting, and the 
 opening permits a free circulation of water. The bolt is pro- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 45 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 HOOPING. 
 
 Hooping by Shrinkage. 
 
 The use of hoops or bauds is a ver)' efficient method of Tiuit- 
 ing some combinatious of machine elements, and also for 
 strengthening existing combinations. The hoops or bands are 
 arranged so as to encircle the portions to be united, and caused 
 to exert sufficient pressure upon them to create such friction 
 between the surfaces as to prevent any relative motion. It fol- 
 lows that the material in the band is subjected to tension while 
 the parts which are held together are under compression. The 
 bodies to be hooped are nearly always either cylindrical or 
 conical in shape. 
 
 The pressure required to secure the hoops may be obtained 
 either by shrinkage, a method formerly used very extensively, 
 or b}' cold pressure, a modification being described in the latter 
 part of \ 64. 
 
 The elongation which is produced by elevating the tempera- 
 ture to a red heat may be taken for steel and wrought iron at 
 about 5^„, while to keep within the limits of elasticity the re- 
 sistance to contraction should be, for 
 
 Castor wrought iron tww^ 
 
 Cast steel , . . -^\^ 
 
 Hence the allowance for shrinkage to be made in boring for a 
 cast iron hub to fit over an unyielding centre should not be 
 greater than xirVo' ^nd is best made from j-igo to xsV^- especi- 
 ally if the centre is very heavy. The ring can then be fitted to 
 its place when at a dull red Heat. For wrought iron or steel 
 rings, such as wheel centres, such precautions are not so essen- 
 tial, since these materials permit of a slight extension without 
 injury (see \.i). If the centre possesses but very slight yield- 
 ing elasticity, there may be danger, however, that the contrac- 
 tion due to excessive cold may overstrain the material. 
 
 After the last immersion the dimensions were found to be Z? = 
 ^\%" at the upper edge, and at the lower edge = 8,^. 
 
 A method of connecting two flat bars by shrinking on a hoop 
 is shown in Fig. 177, and has been used at Seraing with good 
 results. 
 
 The hubs of gear wheels or revolving cylinders are advanta- 
 geously strengthened by bands if they are cast in several parts, 
 as in this way they are firmly united into a compact whole.* 
 
 Fig. 175- 
 When wrought iron bands are to be used to secure iron jour- 
 nals to wooden shafting, as shown in Fig. 175, the end of the 
 shaft is made slightly conical, so that the bands, being raised 
 pnly to a dull red heat, may be driven on with the hammer. 
 The rings may be forged tapering, but the taper may be also 
 readily produced by Clerk's method by repeated heating and 
 cooling.* The red hot ring is immersed in the cooling tub for 
 .1 
 
 Fig. 176. 
 
 about half its axial height. The rapid contraction of one por- 
 tion of the ring deflects the warmer portion towards the centre, 
 and by repeating the process the taper may be produced to 
 almost any extent which may be required. 
 
 The following experiments, made in the Royal Technical 
 Academy, will serve to illustrate the process. The ring shown 
 in Fig. 176 had the following original dimensions : 
 n = ^%", & = i/^, D = %%". 
 After the first immersion the contraction was -/^ 
 " second " " /j 
 
 " third " " /jf 
 
 " fourth " " J^ 
 
 fifth " " if 
 
 " sixth " " i§ 
 
 Cold Hooping. 
 
 In the place of shrinking bands to their places, the more re- 
 cent method of forcing them on cold has come into use for 
 bands of moderate size, such as for hubs of wheels, cranks and 
 levers. In this case the ring and its seat are both made truly- 
 cylindrical, with merely a slight bevel for entrance, and then 
 by means of a press forced together.f The difference in diam- 
 eter between the ring and hub is very small, 'and may be calcu- 
 lated as described in ? 19. 
 
 An investigation of the forc^ required to push a ring on may- 
 be found desirable. The force which is necessary to press a 
 cylindrical pin into a hub by continuous motion may be taken 
 as nearly proportional to rate of progress, since it has to over- 
 come the resistance of sliding friction between the surfaces. 
 The pressure />, per unit of surface, is equal to the initial radial 
 stress ^i, which exists upon the pin. If we make r the r.adius 
 of the pin, I the length of the hole, /the co-efficient of friction, 
 we have for a maximum value of the forcing pressure Q : 
 
 Q=2r7T/S,/ (62) 
 
 Taking /=: 0.2, as indicated by experience shown in the fol- 
 lowing cases, we have 
 
 ^ = ^'=S (^3) 
 
 For the tangential stress S2, in the metal of the ring, we obtain 
 from formula 37, | 19 : 
 
 f=^ (64) 
 
 And taking the thickness of the metal of the ring as '5, we get 
 the value of p : 
 
 p = (65) 
 
 This gives for the following ratios of thickness to radius, cor- 
 responding numerical values : 
 
 S 
 
 — = 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 
 
 p = 0.385 0.415 0.438 0.463 0.486 0.508 
 
 s 
 
 — = 0.80 0.85 0.90 1. 00 1. 10 1.20 
 
 p = 0.528 0.548 0.566 0.600 0.630 0.658 ^ 
 
 = 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 
 = 0.682 0.704 0.724 0.744 0.759 
 
 774 
 
 1.90 2.00 
 .7S7 0.800 
 
 The following table shows examples of the practice of many 
 of the leading Continental railways. In the table, 2/- = diam- 
 eter, / = length, 6 = thickness of hub, Q = total forcing 
 pressure ; also, W. I. = wrought iron, C. I. = cast iron, S = 
 steel, C. S. = cast steel, B. S. = Bessemer steel. 
 
 * For an account of the strengthening of a piston head by shrinking o 
 bands, see the Berliner Verhandluiigen, 1876, Sheet XVI. 
 ingenieur, Vol. t Sometimes these surfaces are made slightly conical, such being the cas 
 
 in Nos. 15 to 17 of the following examples. 
 
46 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ExAMPi.ES OF Forced Connections. 
 
 DESCRIPTION. 
 
 EASTERN RAILWAY OF PRUSSIA. 
 
 Locomotive Driving aud Coupled Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Tender Wheels, 
 
 Car Wheels, with Spokes, 
 
 Steel Plate Wheels, for Cars, 
 
 Steel Plate Wheels, for Locomotives, . . 
 
 UPPER SILESIAN RAILWAY. 
 
 Locomotive Driving Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Tender Wheels, 
 
 Steel Plate Car Wheels 
 
 Wrought Iron Spoked Car Wheels, . . . 
 
 HANOVERIAN STATE RAILWAY. 
 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Standard Car Wheel, 
 
 MAGDEBURG-HALBERSTADT R. R. 
 
 Car Wheels, 
 
 Car Wheels 
 
 Locomotive Wheels, 
 
 SAARBRUCK RAILWAY. 
 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Tender Wheels 
 
 Tender Wheels 
 
 Tender Wheels 
 
 Standard Car Wheels, 
 
 Freight Car Wheels, 
 
 Coal Car Wheels, 
 
 Passenger Car Wheels, 
 
 RIGA-DUNABERG RAILWAY. 
 
 Driviug and Coupled Wheels (Stephenson), 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels " 
 
 Tender Wheels " 
 
 Driving, Coupled & Trailing Wheels (Borsig), 
 
 Tender Wheels (Borsig), 
 
 Passenger Car Wheels (Ashbury), .... 
 
 Freight Car Wheels (Zypen), 
 
 Freight Car Wheels (Zypen), 
 
 BORSIG LOCOMOTIVE WORKS. 
 
 Locomotive Trailing and Tender Wheels, 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 Cran-k Pins, 
 
 WOHLER LOCOMOTIVE WORKS. 
 
 Locomotive Driving and Coupled Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Tender Wheels, 
 
 NORTHERN RAILWAY OF FRAN^ 
 
 Locomotive Wheels (Stephenson), 
 Locomotive Wheels (Clapeyron), . 
 Tender Wheels, with strong hubs. 
 Crank Pins, 
 
 PARIS-LYONS-MEDITERRANEAN R. R. 
 
 Locomotive Driving Wheels, 
 
 Locomotive Trailing Wheels, 
 
 Tender Wheels 
 
 Car Wheels, . . . 
 
 Car Wheels, 
 
 Crank Pins, = 
 
 Dimensions. 
 Inches. 
 
 iy% 
 
 6^ 
 
 2i-3 
 3t04 
 
 2-2^ 
 
 zYa 
 
 C. L 
 W.I. 
 W.I. 
 W. I. 
 C. I. 
 W. I. 
 W.I. 
 W.I. 
 C. I. 
 W.I. 
 C. I. 
 
 W.I. 
 W.I. 
 W, L 
 VV. I. 
 W.I. 
 W. 1. 
 
 W. I. 
 W.I. 
 W. I. 
 
 W. I. 
 W. I. 
 
 W.I. 
 
 C.S. 
 
 c.s. 
 
 C.S. 
 
 c.s. 
 
 W.I. 
 W. I. 
 
 c.s. 
 c.s. 
 
 W. I. 
 W.I. 
 W. 1. 
 
 W. I. 
 
 W. I. 
 
 W. I. 
 W.l.orS 
 W.l.orS 
 
 c.s. 
 
 Q 
 
 Pounds. 
 
 160,600 
 160,600 
 118,800 
 
 With Key. Data as given. 
 No Key. -^ ■ - ' ' ^ 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key 
 
 220,000t0 330,000 
 
 165,000 to 220,000 
 1 10,000 to 132,000 
 110,000 to 132,000 
 132,000 to 154,000 
 
 165,000 to 176,000 
 143,000 to 154,000 
 88,000 to 110,000 
 
 1 10,000 to 132,000 
 110,000 to 132,000 
 1 76,000 to 198,000 
 
 137,940 
 247,588 
 247,588 
 
 198,000 
 
 136,840 
 
 168,080 
 
 198,000- 
 1 65,000 to 193,600 
 
 165,000 
 
 193,600 
 1 10,000 to 165,000 
 
 155,000 to 220,000 
 220,000 to 330,000 
 1 10,000 to 165,000 
 
 176,000 
 
 176,000 
 176,000 
 
 33,000 
 
 77,000 to 88, 000 
 55,000 to 66,000 
 55,000 to 66,000 
 39,600 to 48,400 
 
 66,000 
 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 
 With Kej^ Measured Dimensions. 
 With Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 
 With Key. Data furnished. 
 Without Key. Data furnished. 
 Without Key. Data furnished. 
 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 No Key. Measured Dimensions. 
 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 
 . Measured Dimensions. 
 
 Measured Dimensions. 
 
 Measured Dimensions. 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 With Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 
 . Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 Measured Dimensi 
 
 Measured Dimensions. 
 
 Measured Dimensions. 
 
 With Key. Measured. 
 With Key. Measured. 
 No Key. 
 
 With Key. Measured. 
 No Key. Measured. 
 No Key. Measured. 
 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 Data furnished. 
 
 With Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 No Key. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 Viora. example No. 12 we obtain in formula (63) the value 
 
 According to (65) p = 0.53, and substituting these values in (64) 
 gives S.^ = 10,679 lbs. 
 
 From example No. 10 we have : 
 „ _ 5 X 132,000 
 
 The actual thickness of the hub was 3-54"- 
 
 The ring form is not the only form of construction which 
 may be used for joining members by forcing, since other forms 
 may also be used. An example may be found in Erhardt's 
 flange joint. Fig. 178*. In this case clamps of hardened steel 
 
 = 5,603 lbs. 
 
 - = 6,970 lbs. 
 
 ^ 5.125 X 'T X 7-3125 
 
 also p = 0.44, and hence ^'2 = 12,734. lbs. 
 
 From example No. 37 we have : 
 
 _ 5 X 220,000 
 
 ^~ 7-5X-X6.7 
 
 also p = 0.526, giving S.^ = 13,250 lbs. 
 
 From example No. 16, taking 0= 132,000 lbs., we get S^ = 
 4S67 lbs.; ^=0.77; 6'2=:632o lbs.;and in No. 17, we have Si = 
 6617 lbs.; p ^ 0.569, and52= 11,629 lbs., neither of which are 
 excessive. 
 
 The force required to force a hub off an axle upon which it 
 has been pressed, is not materially different from the force with 
 which it was pushed on. The bore of such a hub may also be 
 reduced when necessary by forcing rings upon it. Such rings, 
 when used for car wheel hubs, are usually made of rectangular 
 cross sections, the diameter ranging from 2"%x", X.o\y%"% 
 1%", etc. 
 
 An inspection of the table will show that there is a tendency 
 towards increasing pressures. For car wheels, where until quite 
 recently, pressures of 60,000 to go,ooo pounds were used, we 
 now find 80,000 to 110,000 pouuds not infrequently; while for 
 locomotive wheels, over 200,000 pounds is the rule. 
 
 Midway between the methods of shrinkage, and of cold forc- 
 ing comes the lesser used method of expansion by use of boiling 
 water. This system secures a much more uniform action of the 
 temperature than is practicable with a red heat, and has been 
 used with excellent results upon the Russian railways for fitting 
 tires to plate wheels. The tires are suspended by a crane, in a 
 tank of water which is kept at the boiling temperature by a jet 
 of steam (the allowance for expansion being a little less than 
 jj-^ of an inch to the foot of diameter. An immersion of 10 to 
 15 minutes is required to obtain the desired expansion. Three 
 workmen can in this manner fit 12 to 14 tires per day of eleven 
 hours. This method may also be found applicable to the fitting 
 of hubs. 
 
 65. 
 Dimensions of Rings for Cold Forcing. 
 
 Since the forms of the various hubs may be taken as cylin- 
 tJrical in nearly every case, the stress may be calculated by the 
 formulae already given. Itis, however, desirable to present these 
 in such form that they may be used to determine the thickness 
 of hub which, when forced on cold, shall resist a determinate force. 
 In (62) instead of the radial stress S-^, substitute the tangential 
 stress ^2, giving Q = 2 it rl fS.^p, which combined with (65) 
 gives: 
 
 Y 2.'7TrlfS.^ — Q 
 
 ? r> PR. 
 
 PR 
 
 _6__ / 2 ,r X 3-8( 
 
 12 + 154,0c 
 
 
 Fig. 178. 
 
 are used to create the pressure. These clamps serve to press 
 the light flanges together, and they may be forced on by use of 
 a screw clamp or other suitable press. Tests of such joints 
 under steam, pneumatic and hydraulic pressure have shown the 
 joint to be tight and serviceable. 
 
 The system of forced connections has grown into extensive 
 use, and appears to be applicable to many forms of construc- 
 tion, and it is to be hoped that the forcing press, for which the 
 firm of Schaeffer & Budeuberg have made suitable pressure 
 gauges, may be found an indispensable tool in all large 
 workshops; 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ?66. 
 
 Keyed Connections. 
 
 The simplest form of keyed connection consists of three 
 
 parts, viz. : the two parts to be connected, and the key itself. 
 
 The key is made with a slight amount of bevel on both sides, 
 
 or a greater angle on one side, according to the manner in 
 
 .(66) 
 
 In this, Q\s, the maximum force which the hub can oppose to 
 turning, at the diameter of the fit. If we take the moment 
 of the force tending to rotate the wheel as PR, we must have 
 
 will then be the factor of resistance against 
 
 slipping in any such case. This mode of attachment is then 
 only practicable when 2 ■jt r I f S-i'y Q. By choosing different 
 values for S.,_, and Q, various thicknesses for the metal of the 
 hub may be obtained. 
 
 Example. The following- data are taken from Borsig's Express Locomo- 
 tive at the Vienna Exposition ; Two pairs of coupled driving wheels of 
 3S.19" radius, without keys ; bore of cylinders 17" ; steam pressure 147 
 pounds ; crank radius R = 10". If we suppose the entire force upon the 
 piston to act upon a single wheel, we have : 
 
 PR= ijir- X o 7S54 X 147 X 10 = 33,366 X 10 
 
 The bore of the wheel is 7.72" hence r= 3. 86'' while / = 7.87". This gives 
 
 P R 333,660 
 
 ~V ^ 3 86~ ^ ^^'^'•° ''^^■ 
 
 ' The moment 333,660 is that which the friction of the wheel upon the axle 
 
 should be able to resist without slipping. Hence it follows that Q must 
 
 neessarily be greater than 86,440. If we take a value of ^ = 154,000 lbs-, 
 
 thus giving ample margin against slipping, and also use a wrought iron 
 
 hub, making S, = 7120 lbs., taking _/= 0.2 as before : 
 
 Fig. 180. 
 
 which the connection is made. The trigonometrical tangent 
 of this angle is called the draft of the key. In Figs. 179 and 
 180 are shown both forms of keys. For the latter form we will 
 assume that both sides have the same angle. 
 
 Ivet: 
 t a = the angle of draft, 
 
 P=:the force to be transmitted, 
 Q = the driving force upon the key, normal to P, 
 Q'^ the opposing force, tending to drive out the key, 
 f=tg(^,t\iQ co-ei£cient of friction between the s 
 of the three parts. 
 For keys with draft upon one side, we have : 
 = P2tg(a-\-2<t>) \ 
 
 Q'=P2tg{2<p— a) / 
 
 In order that Q' should not be negative and the key come out 
 of itself, we must have a<.2<p. For/'= O. i, this gives t g a •< \. 
 
 * Royal Prussian^ Patent, May 23, 1S76. No. 159. Illustrated by drawing, 
 
 irfaces 
 
 • (67) 
 
48 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 For keys with draft on both sides we have approximate!)' : 
 Q = P2tg[a\.^) \ 
 
 \ (68). 
 
 In this case it is necessary to keep below the full value of/ for 
 each edge of the key in order that the connection may not force 
 itself apart. The total draft will be found to have approximate- 
 ly the same minimum value as in the previous case. 
 
 In practice it has been found that keys which have shown en- 
 durance and resistance under load, have been made with a total 
 draft of ^ip, J^, and even ^ J-^ or less, while others made with ^'^, 
 jV or sometimes ^ are less secure. 
 
 The load upon a key may act in three different manners each 
 of which may again be positive or negative. In the first, the 
 
 Fig. i8i. 
 
 load acts normal to the base of the wedge, as at QK, Fig. i8i, 
 or as P, in Fig, 179 and 180 ; and for this form, the term Cross 
 Key may be used. The second case occurs when the load acts 
 normal to the plane K H Q, as K L, in Fig. 181, which may be 
 called a Longitudinal Key. The third case is that in which the 
 force acts normal to the plane Q K L,a.s K H, Fig. 181, which 
 may be called a wedge key. 
 
 ^ 67. 
 Cross Keyed Connections. 
 In Fig. 182 we have an example of a cross keyed connection. 
 The rod and the key are both of wrought iron, the boss is cast 
 iron. The stresses for a given force P upon the rod are : the 
 bending stress upon the key, as in Case VIII. ^ (6) (Stress S^) ; 
 the shearing stress between the key and the inner edge of the 
 
 Fig. 18: 
 
 F:g. 383. 
 
 boss (Stress S,), and the tension upon the segment shaped sec- 
 tions of the rod on both sides of the mortise for the key (Stress 
 S^). If, according to g 2, we make S^ = 0.8 Sj^, and 6'i= .$"3, we 
 have : 
 
 5 = 0.267 ^> or say 
 
 If we make /;j=o.8 d, h.^ = d, 6=-- 0.5 d, we shall have good 
 practical proportions. In Fig. 1S3 we have two wrought iron 
 rods coupled by wrought iron keys. In this case a wrought 
 iron sleeve is used, whose thickness t5 ^ 0.25 d. Fig. 1S4 shows 
 a form similar to Fig. 182, except that the key passes below the 
 boss, instead of going through it, while in Fig. 185 the key is 
 let into the side of the rod. 
 
 The pressure upon the base surface of the key in the case of 
 Fig. 182 may be taken as : 
 
 _ P_^ (0.7854 d'^ — bd) 5*3 
 ^ ~' b d~ bd 
 
 which gives ^ = 2.14 6], (70) 
 
 quite a high enough value, especially if we take, in Fig. 183, 
 o^ 0.25 d. The pressure becomes yet higher for the method 
 
 shown in Fig. 185, for which case the value of So^ should not be 
 taken too great. If the connection is intended to be taken 
 apart frequently, the value of p should not be allowed to be too 
 great. This may be accomplished either by reducing the value 
 of S.,,, or by providing an increased cross section of metal about 
 the mortise for the key, or by extending the surface by means 
 of cotters or gibs, as shown in Fig. 186. The key may then be 
 made smaller than already given above. The forms of keyed 
 connection shown are use3 for example in the rod connections 
 of water wheels, and in similar cases. 
 
 Fig. 186. 
 
 Fig. 187. 
 
 In Fig. 1 87 is shown a method of ke3-ing a foundation bolt. 
 The gibs or cotters are used to increase the strength. Fol- 
 lowing the calculations of ^ 12, the depth of the three pieces 
 may be made alike in the middle. The anchor plate in the 
 foundation masonry should be arranged so as to give access to 
 a nut on the lower end of the bolt, and this can be tightened 
 by hand until the bearing is thrown upon the key, and the 
 driving in of the latter binds all the parts firmly together. 
 
 ?68. . 
 
 IfONGITUDINAI, KEYS. 
 
 Keys of this class are principally used to secure the hubs of 
 wheels to their shafts or axles. For this purpose they may be 
 considered as divided into three classes, as follows : 
 Concave, or hollowed keys. Fig. 188, i ; 
 Flat Surface keys. Fig. 188, 2, 4, 5, 
 and Recessed keys. Fig. 188, 3. 
 The Concave key is only suitable for constructions involving 
 small resistance, and acts merely by the friction due to the 
 pressure which it causes. The flat surface key is capable of 
 
 Fig 188. 
 
 resisting much greater force and vibration, and when used in 
 the multiple manner shown in 4 and 5, it makes a secure and 
 efficient fastening. The recessed key, shown in 3, affords a 
 very secure method of fastening hubs to shafts to which they 
 have been closely fitted, and is simply and readily made. Kej^s 
 of this kind are also used as an additional precautionary fasten- 
 ing for hubs which have been forced on. 
 
 In determining the dimensions of keys it will be found most 
 convenient to use empirical methods, except in cases of great 
 vibration ; the following formulae will be found to cover the 
 usual range of work. The material for the keyis taken as 
 steel, and distinction is also made between cases in which the 
 hub is subjected merely to endlong pressure, and those where 
 torsional stresses exist. The former may be called draft-keys, 
 the latter torsion keys. 
 
 If we call the diameter of the shaft D, the breadth of the 
 key S, and the middle depth of the key .Sj v 
 
 D 
 
 5. = o..6"+i^ 
 
 for Draft keys, S= 0.24'' 
 
 for Torsion keys, .5"= 0.16'' + ; S^ = 0.1 6'' -f - 
 
 The taper of such keys is made about ■^\-^ 
 
 (71) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 For the more commouly occurring diameters we have the 
 following proportions : 
 D = V' 2" i^ &," 5" 6" 7* 8" 9" 10'' 
 
 For Draft Keys : 
 
 V 
 
 hff 13// 
 
 For shafts of le 
 
 \" w 
 
 n" 
 
 , ^1= - 
 
 less diameter than \" , we ma}' make 
 If several keys are to be used, they may 
 
 be made the same dimensions as single keys. For hubs which 
 have been forced on, and hence would be secure without any 
 key, the dimensions for draft keys may be used. 
 
 When ihe pressure upon a key acts at right angles to the 
 plane of its height, the difference between the positive and 
 negative direction of the forces is readily distinguishable. 
 
 Fig. 189. 
 
 When the pressure acts as in Fig. 189, the combination is inse- 
 cure, since the only binding action of the key is that due to the 
 pressure, and consequent friction between the parts. If the 
 base of the key is rough, and the inclined face smooth, the 
 action of a force in the direction H' , tends to tighten the parts 
 together. An application of this action is shown in the curved 
 key of Kernaul, shown in Fig. 190. When the hub is rotated 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 f OKj 
 
 ] i 
 
 I 
 
 <^ 
 
 S 
 
 i ! 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 , ■ 
 
 ' [ 
 
 |w 
 
 k oH 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 192. 
 
 in the direction of the arrow, the action is the same as that of 
 the force H' , in the preceding case, and the shaft is firmly 
 grasped. A. countersunk screw at a, is used to tighten the key, 
 and a similar one at b, to loosen it. This principle will be dis- 
 cussed later, under the subject of couplings. 
 
 Methods of Keying Screw Propei^lers. 
 
 In securing the propellers of steamships the greatest care 
 must be observed in the methods employed, and in their appli- 
 cation. In Fig. 191 is shown Rennie's method of securing one 
 of the blades of a Griffith's double bladed propeller. In this 
 case a rectangular key is used, passing through a cylindrical pin 
 which is cast in one piece with the blade and which is in turn 
 held firmly by the four smaller keys shown. These latter keys 
 are held in their places by caps secured firmly by jam nuts. (See 
 ^71.) The blade and hub are both of bronze. 
 
 Example. In a propeller by Penn & Son, d = 15", h = 7^", i = 2]4". 
 
 Fig. 192. This shows a method used by Maudslay, Sons and 
 Field, Ravenhill & Hodgson, and others. Two rectangular 
 
 keys, passing through the hub of the propeller boss, and re- 
 cessed into the metal of the shaft, act at the same time to receive 
 the thrust of the screw and to prevent rotation upon the shaft. 
 In this case the hub is made of bronze. 
 
 Example. Inthe " Lord Warden," the middlediameter of (f= 19", 7 = 52", 
 /t = &%",d= 3I/8"; in the "Lord Clyde," d=2oys", 1=-^a", /i = io", b = s". 
 
 Fig. 193. This shows a method of using two longitudinal 
 keys. The hub is bored with a quick taper, and a heavy bronze 
 nut holds the hub upon the cone, while the longitudinal keys 
 resist the action of torsion. 
 
 The ordinary rectangular keys are also used to secure screw 
 propellers, as well as special forms of fastenings.* 
 
 UNLOADED Keys. 
 The force P, which under ordinary conditions bears upon a 
 key, may by various methods be supported by other means ; 
 the key in such a case may be said to be unloaded. Such con- 
 structions ofi^er a much greater security, and permit much 
 lighter keys, than the methods previously described. A few 
 examples will serve to illustrate. 
 
 * See N. P. Burgh, Modern Screw Propulsion, London, iS6g. 
 
50 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 194. This shows a form of connection used for mine 
 pump rods; the interlocked notches receive the load of tension 
 upon the rod, and the hollow key only serves to bind the parts 
 together without itself supporting any of the weight. Fig. 
 195 shows Wiedenbruck's rod connection.* The hub is made 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 BOLTS AND SCREWS. 
 
 ryjn 
 
 Fig. 197. Fig. 19S. 
 
 Fig. 199. Fig. 200. Fig. 201. 
 
 less than this, however, keys are very apt to become loose if 
 they are subjected to much vibration, and to sudden and irregu- 
 lar changes of load. In order to provide against such emer- 
 gencies, and also in order to permit the use of greater taper, 
 various methods of securing keys are employed. 
 
 The simplest method consists in splitting and spreading the 
 small end of the key, and for some purposes this is sufficient. 
 In order to prevent a key from flying back, or jumping out, the 
 projecting end may be drilled and fitted with a split pin. For 
 the keys used in connecting rod ends various methods are used, 
 examples of which will be found in the following figures. Figs. 
 197, 198, and 199 use screws under tension. When these are 
 
 ^^ . used in locomotives or marine en- 
 
 ^i "'n^ gines, the screw is again secured by 
 
 'I - — P the use of a jam-nut. Fig. 200 is 
 
 used with a set-screw, the point of 
 
 which bears in a shallow channel in 
 
 the side of the key, so that if the 
 
 pressure of the set-screw is unable 
 
 to hold the key, it will at least keep 
 
 it from flying out. The channel is 
 
 also of service in preventing the 
 
 point of the set-screw from marring 
 
 the finished surface of the key. Fig. 
 
 20I shows a form of screw-clamp. 
 
 This clamps the key by drawing the two blocks tightly against 
 
 its sides ; the screw passes through a slot in the key. 
 
 Fig. 202 shows the method employed in securing the key 
 used in the form of fastening for screw propellers, used by 
 Maudslay, and shown in Fig. 192. A small block is bolted fast 
 to the projecting end of the key, and a bronze cap is screwed 
 down over all. 
 
 Fig. 202. 
 
 Fig. 194. Fig. 195. 
 
 in halves and the reversed conical seats receive the load. In 
 Fig. 196 is shown a connection for two intersecting plates ; by 
 Bayliss.f 
 
 The method of keying shown in Fig. 192, H, may be made 
 quite secure by relieving the key from the load, and examples 
 of this form are often found. 
 
 ?72. 
 METHODS OP Securing Keys. 
 In order that a key may not back out under its load, the 
 angle of taper should be less than -j^^, or if it is symmetrical in 
 form, each side should be less than yV> providing the co-effi- 
 cient of friction is equal to y'^. Even when the taper is made 
 
 Geometrical Construction of, the Screw Thread. 
 Screws are used in machine construction to produce three 
 kinds of eff"ects, viz.: for clamping or joining parts together, 
 for producing pressure, and for the transmission of motion. We 
 shall now only consider the first two classes. Screws may be 
 classified with regard to the shape of the cross-section of their 
 threads into : 
 
 Triangular or V, 
 
 Square or Rectangular, 
 
 and Trapezoidal. 
 All these forms belong practically to the so-called axial screw 
 thread surfaces.* By this is meant the surface which is described 
 by a right line ABC, Fig. 203, when one of its points remains 
 upon a directrix, in this case the axis O D, of the screw, while 
 the generating line itself maintains a constant angle e, with the 
 axis, proportional to the advance which the directing point 
 makes u-jon the axis. The angle a is called the angle of 
 advance, and its complement B, is the base angle of the screw 
 thread. These are either V, or square, according as the angle a 
 
 Fig. 203. 
 
 is an acute or right angle. The normal cylinder upon the axis 
 O D, upon which the screw thread is described, is called the 
 pitch cylinder. This cylinder is supposed to pass through the 
 threads of the screw at such a point that two adjoining sections 
 bear the relation of screw and nut. 
 
 The space passed over by the directing point during one rota- 
 tion around the axis is called the pitch of the screw, and will 
 hereafter be designated by the letter .s ; and the angle which a 
 line tangent to the screw-thread at any point makes with the 
 base of tlie pitch cylinder, is called the pitch angle, called fi. 
 From this it will be seen that threads described upon concentric 
 cylinders may have the same pitch, but different pitch angles. 
 
 The area of a V screw thread may be taken as equal to the 
 sum of the surfaces the two halves of the thread, opened out to 
 an angle of 180°. For rectangular threads the area is simply 
 that of the corresponding simple surfaces. For trapezoidal 
 threads the area is equal to the sum of the inclined and parallel 
 surfaces (see \ 86). 
 
 I 74. 
 
 Dimensions of V Screw Threads. 
 
 For any given force P, acting parallel to the axis of a screw, 
 the resistance of the metal of the body of the screw may be 
 
 determined according to Case I., page , but the stress may 
 
 instead be taken as a simple case of tension if the value of S, 
 be not made too great. If we take for wrought iron, 6'^ 3600, 
 and let d-^ be the diameter at the base of the thread, we have : 
 
 •(72) 
 
 0'l = O.O2 s/ P'\ 
 
 P=2-jsod\ J 
 
 The nut is generally hexagonal, but is sometimes made sqiiare ; 
 we will here limit ourselves to the former shape. The thickness 
 of the nut is usually made equal to the outside diameter d, of 
 the screw. This makes it much stronger than the threads of the 
 screw ; f but the depth is desirable, as it distributes the pressure 
 over a greater area of screw thread. For the superficial pres- 
 
 * German Patent, No. 1507. See also patent No. 510 of H. Rademacher 
 mproved rod connections. 
 + See Pract. Mech. Journal, Vol. Ill, 3d Series. P. 342. 
 
 e Properties of Screw Threads. Berliner 
 
 made at the Stevens Institute at Hoboken, show 
 of the thread is reached when the thickness of the nut 
 ;. See Railroad Gazette, 1877, November, p. 483. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 SI 
 
 «nre p, we have for a depth of thread i and n threads iu the nut, 
 .both for V, and square threads : 
 
 /-f-^4['-3i+(4-y] to. 
 
 Introducing the pitch 3", and making ns = d, we have : 
 
 In both equations the third member may be neglected.* 
 The value of p should not be permitted to exceed 1440 lbs. 
 
 If « = 8, and —7- = 12, we have, taking 5", as above, 
 
 p = 3600 X I (i — i 4- tI?) or about = 1000 lbs. 
 In the consideration of this subject, the friction of a screw 
 should not be neglected. 
 Let: 
 
 Q = the force acting at the mean diameter of a screw, 
 
 normal to the plane of the axis ; 
 6' = the pitch angle of the thread at the mean diameter, 
 y= tg^, the coefficient of friction ; 
 we then have, in order to overcome the thread friction, due to 
 the force P, for square thread : 
 
 I —ftg &' 
 
 = Ptg{<^^&') 
 
 """' r>-4v'i 
 
 */>=/77i(^-0«, hence ;> = 5-^^i2:7r«-^^ ^—\ rf2 = _j?__i_, 
 
 -7- (^')* = ' ^. which, by neglecting (-^)' + (-^)' +, etc., 
 
 of the Whitworth system into Germany, while others, equally- 
 strong, have been advanced for the metric system. 
 
 The Whitworth system takes for the form of a section of a 
 screw thread an isosceles triangle whose base is equal to the 
 pitch s, and whose angle at the apex = 55°, from which the 
 height /"o = 0.96 .s. The thread is rounded at top and bottom to 
 an amount equal to \ t^, so that the working depth t=-'^ t^ =: 
 0.64 s. The values of the pitch s were given by Whitworth in 
 a table which extended to \" ■'■'' The use of this system developed 
 some deficiencies, among others the difficulty of originating the 
 cross-section of thread, and the gradation of diameters. The 
 original table of diameters was not altogether satisfactory to 
 Whitworth himself, and in 1857 he extended the old table by a 
 new one, which, since that time, has been known in England 
 as the standard system for bolts and nuts-t In Germany, how- 
 ever, the whole subject is yet under active discussion. 
 
 The following table gives the old and new scales, the values 
 of d and .? being in English inches. The values for ■{^" and 
 ^^" are only given approximately. 
 
 . (75) 
 
 or for the resistance : 
 
 while for V threads, we have : 
 
 in which f = ' jr > 
 
 In order to overcome the friction on the base of the nut also, 
 the value of Q must be more than twice as great. For tg &' , 
 we may take then tg 6. This value is usually so small that the 
 friction often cannot resist the load, and the value of Q' becomes 
 negative. 
 
 I 75- 
 Th:^ Whitworth Screw Systism. 
 
 By a system of screw threads is meant a collection of rules or 
 formulae by which the profile of thread, pitch, diameter, and 
 other details of screws and nuts may be determined. Such a 
 system was first formulated by Whitworth in 1841, and since 
 that time the subject has been more and more studied, until it 
 is now considered one of the greatest importance,! especially in 
 regard to the metric system. 
 
 Whitworth's Screw Thread 
 
 Scales. 
 
 
 New Scale. 
 
 Old Scale. 
 
 J 
 
 New Scale. 
 
 Old Scale. 
 
 J 
 
 d. 
 
 d. 
 
 s. 
 
 d. 
 
 d. 
 
 S. 
 
 O.IOO 
 
 
 48 
 
 1.125 
 
 ^y% 
 
 7 
 
 0.125 
 
 Vs 
 
 40 
 
 1.250 
 
 iX 
 
 7 
 
 0.150 
 
 
 32 
 
 1.375 
 
 1^8 
 
 6 
 
 0.175 
 
 
 24 
 
 1.500 
 
 IK 
 
 6 
 
 0.200 
 
 
 24 
 
 1.625 
 
 ^y, 
 
 5 
 
 0.225 
 
 
 24 
 
 1.750 
 
 ■ Il< 
 
 5 
 
 0.2SO 
 
 }i 
 
 
 
 1% 
 
 4X 
 
 0.275 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 AVz 
 
 0.300 
 
 A 
 
 18 
 
 2.125 
 
 ^y% 
 
 A% 
 
 0.325 
 
 
 IS 
 
 2.250 
 
 2X 
 
 A 
 
 0350 
 
 
 
 2.375 
 
 2^ 
 
 4 
 
 0.37s 
 
 fi 
 
 16 
 
 
 ^% 
 
 4 
 
 0.400 
 
 
 16 
 
 2.675 
 
 ^% 
 
 4 
 
 0.425 
 
 
 
 2.750 
 
 2^ 
 
 3K 
 
 0450 
 
 tV 
 
 
 2.875 
 
 27/s 
 
 3K 
 
 0.475 
 
 
 
 3.000 
 
 3 
 
 Z% 
 
 0.500 
 
 % 
 
 
 3250 
 
 3^ 
 
 . 3X 
 
 0.525 
 
 
 
 3-500 
 
 yA 
 
 3X 
 
 0.550 
 
 
 
 3.750 
 
 ?>H 
 
 3 
 
 0.575 
 
 
 
 4.000 
 
 A 
 
 
 0.600 
 
 
 
 4.250 
 
 4X 
 
 2^ 
 
 0.625 
 
 H 
 
 
 4.500 
 
 aA 
 
 2^ 
 
 0.650 
 
 
 
 4.750 
 
 aH 
 
 2^ 
 
 0.675 
 
 
 
 5.000 
 
 5 , 
 
 ^Va 
 
 0.700 
 
 
 
 5.250 
 
 5X 
 
 2% 
 
 0.750 
 
 H 
 
 
 5.500 
 
 5% 
 
 2% 
 
 0.800 
 
 
 10 
 
 5.750 
 
 SH 
 
 2y 
 
 0.875 
 
 Vs 
 
 9 
 
 6.000 
 
 
 2X 
 
 0.900 
 1. 000 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Whitworth's Pipe Ti 
 
 IREAl 
 
 3 SCAI.E. 
 
 
 d=y Ya y% y Ya i 
 
 iX 
 
 iX iX 
 
 2 
 
 « = 28 19 19 14 14 11 II II II II 
 
 The regularity of the progression might be improved upon. 
 This may be more clearly illustrated in the following diagrams. 
 The greatest irregularity lies between the sizes from ^" to 
 2Yz" ; and the gradation of diameters is also uneven. The 
 cause for this lies in the system of measurement used. Whit- 
 worth evidently perceived the desirability of introducing a 
 decimal notation, but also wished to retain the fractional divi- 
 sions in halves, quarters, eighths, &c. ; this has partly been 
 secured, neglecting sixteenths, by having the gradation based 
 upon fortieths, and their combinations as shown in Fig. 206. 
 
 For the pressure p, we have from (74), taking t = 0.64 .f : 
 
 4 X 0.64 
 
 -1.9- 
 
 • + 0.4 
 
 A united opinion on the subject has not yet been reached. 
 Many weighty reasons have been advanced for the introduction 
 
 (-)] 
 
 If we make 5"= 3555 lbs. we have for d.=- o.\", 3'^, and (/', 
 the values of /> = 938 lbs., 1152 lbs. and 1209 lbs. For tg 6, we 
 have, when d = o.x" , 2," , and (>", the values 0.0663, 0-0303, and 
 0.0212. 
 
 * Briggs stated the relation of pitch and diameter of the Whitworth system 
 to be approximately : — 
 
 ^ = 0.1075^-0.0075^2 + 0,024. 
 
 tSee Eng. atid Arch. Journal, 1857, p. 262 ; 1858, p. 48 ; also Shelly, Work- 
 shop Appliances. I<ondon, 1876, p. 102. 
 
52 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 I 76. 
 Sellers' Screw Thread System. 
 The confusion in the use of screw threads having become 
 very troublesome in the United States, Mr. William Sellers 
 brought before the Franklin Institute, in 1864, a system which 
 he proposed for general T\se.'^ A committee of the Institute 
 reported upon the system in December of the same year, and 
 recommended its general adoption, f This system is now 
 
 r — "— - 
 
 Fig, 207. 
 
 generally known as the Sellers System. The profile of this 
 thread is shown in Fig. 207. The thread angle 1 fi ■=■ 60° ; the 
 depth z! = 0.75 4 = 0.65 .?. T he pitch is determined by the 
 formula 6" = 0.24 y/ d -\- 0.625 — 0175, the result, as with Whit- 
 worth's system, being so modified that the number of threads 
 per inch shall be a whole number. 
 
 The following table gives the adopted number of threads per 
 inch for various diameters : 
 
 14 
 
 % Y^ y^ 
 II 10 9 
 
 rf=2X 
 
 d=^ 
 
 ^U 
 
 IX 
 
 T-Vs. 
 
 lA 
 
 T% 
 
 6 
 
 5)4 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 rA 
 
 zA 
 
 zA 
 
 yA 
 
 zA 
 
 2,A 
 
 3 
 
 SH 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 ^y% 
 
 2A 
 
 
 
 The Sellers System compares very favorably with the Whit- 
 worth System, and notwithstanding the difference in profile, it 
 gives almost the same depth of thread. The angle is very con- 
 venient, and the simplicity of the profile is such that a suitable 
 tool may easily be made and used in the shop. These facts 
 explain the rapid introduction of the system in America. The 
 progression of the pitch is also more uniform than in Whit- 
 worth's System ; and the uncertainty about the thread of the 
 yi^' screw, which was always a stumbling block ya the original 
 Whitworth Scale, is avoided. The values for -f^" and -^'^ are 
 retained as in the Whitworth Scale of 1857, and ■^■^" is also pro- 
 vided for, so that the requirements of the English system of 
 measurements are fully met, up to 2". 
 
 ?77- 
 Metrical Screw Systems. 
 
 Recognizing the advantages which have followed from the 
 introduction of the Whitworth System, various attempts have 
 been made to devise a system of screw-threads which shall be 
 adapted to the metric system of measurements. The following 
 fourteen systems have been suggested : 
 
 Armengaud, Redtenbacher, Paris-Lyons-Mediterranean R. R., 
 Northern Railway of France, J. F. Cail, the French Navy, 
 Bodmer, two systems proposed by Ducommun, of Mulhouse. 
 Alsace ; the Engineering Society of Mulhouse, Reishauer & 
 Bluntschli, of Zurich ; the Pfalz-Saarbruck Society of German 
 Engineers, and two systems of Delisle. 
 
 The formulaa and tables given in the previous editions of this 
 work have also been spoken of as systems, but they are not en- 
 titled to any such position, as they were merely adaptations of 
 the Whitworth system. The number of proposed systems may 
 be taken as an indication of the difiiculty of the task. Indeed, 
 it is only by very carefully weighing the respective merits of 
 the various plans, that it is possible to say which is the best. 
 The following requirements should be kept in mind as essentials 
 in considering any system : 
 
 1. The profile of the thread should l>e such as may be readily made wMk 
 requisite accuracy. In this respect Whitworth's system is deficient, and 
 the profile of the Sellers thread is to be preferred. 
 
 2. The pitch should be given, so far as possible, directly by the formula, 
 without requiring any modification of its results. Both Sellers and Whit- 
 worth are deficient in this point, since they both modify the results of their 
 formula.* 
 
 3. The gradation of, bolt diameters should be so disposed that fractions of 
 millimeters should not occur in diameters, aiid that their gradation should, 
 conflict as little as possible with the decimal system. 
 
 All three of these requirements should be attained within the 
 limits of generally used sizes, and should at least extend to 
 bolts of 80 mm. in diameter. The last three systems, viz. : the 
 Pfalz-Saarbriick system and the two of Delisle, are the only 
 ones which appear to have considered these points, and these 
 we shall examine somewhat in detail. 
 
 ?78. 
 
 Metrical Screw Thread Systems. 
 
 Delisle /, pfalz-Saarbruck and Delisle //. 
 
 The following three diagrams show the gradation of pitch and 
 diameter for the three systems, the ordinates representing the 
 pitch being shown on five times the scale of the bolt diameters, 
 and the values being also given for d and j in the annexed tables. 
 In the first two cases the profile of thread is exactly the same as 
 in Sellers' system, while in the third, the base angle is made 
 26° 34'. This has been chosen for the purpose of making the 
 theoretical height of the triangle of the thread equal to J. The 
 thread is flattened as in the Sellers system. 
 
 All three of these systems are marked by simplicity and in- 
 telligibility. These features have been attained by abandoning 
 the idea of representing the relation of .s to a^ by a single equa- 
 tion (such as that of a parabola), and using two or more equa- 
 tions of straight lines. A noticeable irregularity exists in t .• 
 Pfalz-Saarbriick system between the diameters of 26 and 28 mn 
 indicating that a somewhat finer pitch is used in proportion 
 the diameter below 26 mm. 
 
 The second system of Delisle is rather simpler than the first ; 
 there is also an important difference in the angle of thread, &s 
 will be seen subsequently. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Delisle /. Fig. 208. 
 
 %^(d-l) i-J 
 
 « 67S 1012UlClS202a211!G2S 32 3Q 40 
 
 Fig. 209. 
 
 ^= 4 
 
 5 j 6 j 7 1 8 JIOJI2JI4 
 
 16 
 
 18 20 
 
 ^ = 0.8 
 
 i.o 1.2 1.4 16 1.8 2.0J2.2 
 
 2.4 
 
 2.6 2.8 
 
 df ^ 24 
 
 28 32 36 40 48 56 64 72 80 
 
 ^ =^ ,3.^ 
 
 3 6 4.0 4.4 4-8 5-2 5-6 6.0 6.4 6.8 
 
 Diameter and pitch both in millimeters. 
 
 For any interpolated diameter the next lesser 
 So ordinate is to be taken, as for example d = 60. 
 
 Pfalz-Saarbruck System. Fig. 209. 
 
 I.OI.2 I.4'l.6l.8 2.o!2.2! 
 
 28_ 32_ 36 40 48 156 64 72 80 
 
 18 20 22 24 
 
 fiU^I-? 
 
 No interpolation to be made. 
 
 DelislE //. Fig. 210. 
 
 For any interpolated meter the next greater 
 ordinate is to be taken, as for example d ^= 60* 
 
 In all three systems the superficial pressure is quite satisfac- 
 tory. According to formula (74), taking 5 =: 3600 we obtain for 
 "values oip — 
 
 Delisle I 8600 to 11,500 lbs. 
 
 Pfalz-Saarbriick . . 8600 to 11,000 " 
 Delisle II ... . 7600 to 10,000 " 
 
 ?79- 
 New Systems. . 
 
 A thorough investigation of the proposed systems of the Ger- 
 man Society of Engineers failed to produce any definite results, 
 and the whole subject of a metrical screw thread system is still 
 unsettled. For this reason it has been thought advisable to of- 
 fer a further discussion of the problem.* 
 
 It might seem a shorter plan lo adopt some one of the three 
 preceding systems, yet they all seem capable of improvement. 
 
 *This is especially necessary for use in technical instruction, which will 
 aflFord the surest method of introducing a metric screw thread system into 
 practical use. The advocates of the Whitworth system urge the desirability 
 ■of an international standard, in view of the widespread use of the 
 American system, which is indeed already in use to some extent in Ger- 
 many. In this case the conflict between the two systems of measurement 
 "has been met bj' proposing to tak e for any dimension in English units the 
 next higher dimension in millimetres. Such a system would be impractic- 
 able for educational purposes and would lead to many errors in actual 
 practice. It also seems only to be practicable for the old Whitworth scale, 
 and for the new scale, with its close divisions, its application i ' ' ' 
 
 possible. Ac ■' — '-' "' j----_j-- :" 
 
 close adheren 
 ^mensions w 
 
 npariL _ 
 : to the V 
 
 a the precedin 
 
 The subject will bear further investigation in two main points 
 one being the gradation of diameters and the other the profile 
 of thread. The actual diameters and their gradation are of 
 more practical importance than the gradation of threads. This 
 is shown by the fact that the Whitworth profile has long been 
 in use with the bolt diameters taken in Prussian inches, and 
 more recently with dimensions in millimetres with Whitworth 
 profile. One of the first requisites of such a series is that the 
 diameters should follow the decimal divisions (see the third 
 condition of | 77). This point is not met by the preceding sys- 
 tems, since they lack the natural divisions 30, 50, 60 and 70. 
 The removal of this objection introduces a new difiiculty, but 
 not an insuperable one. 
 
 The critical feature of the screw thread system is really the 
 relation which the diameter bears to the profile. A thread should 
 not be said to be coarse or fine, implying the ratio s: d, but 
 rather should the depth of thread be considered, or the rati ot : d. 
 
 This can best be illustrated by an example : 
 
 If we select two equal sizes from the systems Delisle I and 1 1, 
 we shall find that for the same pitch the threads are not alike. 
 
 li d= 60 mm. we shall have (see the dotted lines in Fig. 208 
 and 210) in both cases .j = 5.6, hence the angle of thread is the 
 same. 
 
 The working depth /, however, is : 
 
 inl : t=}{to =o.b5 .^ = 3.64 mm. 
 in II: t=iXto =0.75 ,5 = 4.20 mm. 
 
 ^ diagra 
 mid result ii 
 
 :n both his systems Delisl 
 liate diameters, but ti- 
 les to avoid obscurity. 
 
54 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 This gives for the diameter of the bolt at the bottom of the 
 thread 
 
 in I : i5?i= 57.70 — cross section 2182 sq. mm. 
 in II : fl'j = 51.60 — " " 2091 " " 
 
 which shows a diifereuce in resistance of about 5 per cent, be- 
 tween the two bolts, the second having the coarser thread. We 
 see here that a choice of the relation of s \.o d affects the pro- 
 file of thread, and it is this which led Delisle to suggest two 
 systems. 
 
 Whether the angle of 53° 8' is preferable to the Sellers angle 
 of 60° is uncertain. Among the preceding systems may be 
 noted two for the latter, five for the former, and three for 
 
 still smaller angles ;'and if the choice be given, it seems rather 
 better to go below the Whitworth angle of 55° than above it. 
 We prefer the angle as shown in Pig. 211 : 
 
 ^} (77) 
 
 For sizes of d from 4 to 40 mm. the pitch may be 
 s^o.^-\- 0.1 d .... 
 
 and for sizes of d, from 40 to 80 mm. and over* 
 
 5= 2 -|- 0.06 d .... 
 
 with the following series of diameters : 
 
 12 14 16 iS 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 
 
 36 40 . 45 . 50 60 70 80 
 
 Formula (78) is the same as in Delisle II, from 6 to 40 mm. 
 
 Interpolation for intermediate diameters seems unnecessary ; 
 
 bottom of thread r\ and 1\, are almost identical, as are also 
 working depths, although the profiles differ, as shown by the 
 triangles ABC and D E F. Instead of numbering the sizes 
 arbitrarily, it seems preferable to use the bolt diameter for the 
 number. Screw No. 20 would then stand for if = 20 mm., No. 
 4forrf=4mm. Any establishment could omit numbers not 
 desired without impairing the system, while for fine work, 
 smaller numbers could readily be added. 
 
 Nuts, Washers and Bolt Heads. 
 
 The thickness of metal in a nut bears a close relation both to 
 
 the depth of thread t, and to the pitch 5. It is desirable that 
 
 the formula to be used should give the dimensions readily in 
 
 order to avoid the necessity of approximating. 
 
 •(78) 
 . (79) 
 
 Fig. 213. 
 
 For the diameter Z?, of the inscribed circle of the hexagon we 
 may take for finished nuts : 
 
 Z?=,.o4-f ar+o.5.j (81) 
 
 The maximum pressure upon the base of the nut in this case 
 (for (f ^ 3^') = about 2400 lbs. per square inch. Unfinished 
 nuts are made somewhat heavier, and for them we have 
 
 A = o.i4'^ + ^-f 5^ 
 
 •t82> 
 
 Fig. 212. 
 
 should it be done, however, the formula should not be departed 
 from, since the values in the second and third groups above 
 will give round numbers, and offer no difficulty for their pro- 
 duction on the screw cutting lathe. If it is still desired to use 
 the angle of 60°, and yet retain the other proportions, we may 
 take 
 
 for <f = 4 to 8, s' = 0.2 d (as in Delisle I) ■) 
 
 for a' = 8 to 40, s' = 0.8 \- 0.1 d (as in Delisle I h • ■ (80) 
 for rf = 40 to 80, y = 1.6 4- 0.08 d ) 
 
 in which arrangements the sizes 30, 45, 50, 60, 70 remain in the 
 series, which may also be extended above 80 mm. The two 
 plans may be compared to Fig. 212, in which the formulae are re- 
 spectively applied to a diameter of 80 mm. The radii to the 
 
 e of the washer insures a better bearing for the nut ia 
 surface is not true. Its dimensions may be taken as 
 
 •(83) 
 
 diameter^ U=d -{- \os 
 thickness = u^±= s 
 
 Bolt heads are often made square, but are preferable hexagon- 
 al, and for them we may take D and D^, the same as for nuts, 
 and the height h = 0.7 d. Fig. 213. 
 
 For finished nuts the upper surface may be finished with a 
 bevel of a frustum of a cone whose base =/?, and a base angle 
 of 30°, Fig. 214, or as a portion of a sphere with a radius of f 
 D, Fig. 215, while unfinished nuts have the corners beveled off 
 above and below, as shown in Fig. 216. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 217. 
 
 Bolts and Nuts. (Metric system). 
 
 Bolt 
 Dia. 
 
 Pitch. 
 
 Depth of 
 Thread. 
 
 Bottom 
 Dia. of 
 Bolt. 
 
 Nut. 
 
 Washer. 
 
 Bolt 
 Head 
 
 Load. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 d\ 
 
 D 
 
 A 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 n 
 
 kilos. 
 
 4 
 
 0.8 
 
 0.60 
 
 2.8q 
 
 9 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 5 
 
 0.9 
 
 0.68 
 
 3.65 
 
 10.5 
 
 — 
 
 14 
 
 
 ,3-5 
 
 27 
 
 6 
 
 
 075 
 
 450 
 
 12 
 
 — 
 
 16 
 
 
 4 
 
 41 
 
 
 I.I 
 
 083 
 
 5-35 
 
 13-5 
 
 
 18 
 
 1-5 
 
 .S 
 
 57 
 
 8 
 
 1.2 
 
 0.90 
 
 6.20 
 
 15 
 
 — 
 
 20 
 
 1-5 
 
 
 77 
 
 9 
 
 i.,3 
 
 0.98 
 
 7-05 
 
 16.5 
 
 — 
 
 
 1-5 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 10 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.05 
 
 7-90. 
 
 18 
 
 
 ■24 
 
 1-5 
 
 7 
 
 125 
 
 12 
 
 1.6 
 
 1.20 
 
 9.60 
 
 21 
 
 24 
 
 28 
 
 
 8 
 
 184 
 
 14 
 
 1.8 
 
 1-35 
 
 11.30 
 
 24 
 
 27 
 
 32 
 
 
 10 
 
 255 
 
 16 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.50 
 
 13.00 
 
 27 
 
 30 
 
 36 
 
 
 II 
 
 338 
 
 18 
 
 
 1.65 
 
 14.70 
 
 30 
 
 ^^ 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 432 
 
 20 
 
 2.4 
 
 1.80 
 
 16.40 
 
 33 
 
 36 
 
 44 
 
 
 14 
 
 538 
 
 22 
 
 2.6 
 
 1-95 
 
 18.10 
 
 36 
 
 39 
 
 48 
 
 3 
 
 15 
 
 655 
 
 24 
 
 2.8 
 
 2.10 
 
 19.80 
 
 39 
 
 42 
 
 52 
 
 
 17 
 
 784 
 
 26 
 
 30 
 
 2.25 
 
 21.50 
 
 42 
 
 45 
 
 56 
 
 
 
 841 
 
 28 
 
 .S.2 
 
 2.40 
 
 23.20 
 
 45 
 
 48 
 
 60 
 
 
 20 
 
 1076 
 
 30 
 
 3-4 
 
 2.55 
 
 24.90 
 
 48 
 
 51 
 
 64 
 
 
 21 
 
 1240 
 
 32 
 
 3.6 
 
 2.70 
 
 26.60 
 
 51 
 
 54 
 
 68 
 
 
 22 
 
 1415 
 
 ,36 
 
 4.0 
 
 3.00 
 
 30.00 
 
 57 
 
 60 
 
 76 
 
 5 
 
 
 1800 
 
 40 
 
 4.4 
 
 3.30 
 
 3340 
 
 63 
 
 66 
 
 84 
 
 
 28 
 
 ^T 
 
 45 
 
 4-7 
 
 3-53 
 
 37-95 
 
 70 
 
 73 
 
 92 
 
 
 32 
 
 2880 
 
 50 
 
 5-0 
 
 3-75 
 
 42.50 
 
 76 
 
 79 
 
 100 
 
 
 35 
 
 3613 
 
 60 
 
 5.6 
 
 4.20 
 
 51.60 
 
 89 
 
 92 
 
 116 
 
 7 
 
 42 
 
 5325 
 
 70 
 
 6.2 
 
 4-65 
 
 60.70 
 
 
 
 132 
 
 7 
 
 49 
 
 7369 
 
 80 
 
 6.8 
 
 510 
 
 69.80 
 
 115 
 
 118 
 
 148 8 
 
 56 
 
 9744 
 
 Table and Proportional Scale eor 
 Metrical Bolts and Nuts.''- 
 
 The preceding table contains a summary of 
 the preceding discussion, aud Fig. 217 is a dia- 
 gram in which the relations of the parts are 
 shown graphically. The value for 5 is shown on 
 a five-fold scale. The dotted line gives the value 
 for s^ of formula (80) . 
 
 The diagram Fig. 217 shows the pitch of 
 thread and the pressure upon a unit of area, for 
 the dimensions of nuts and bolt heads for the 
 preceding metric screw thread system for diam- 
 eters from 4 to 80 mm. 
 
 The pitch is shown five times full scale (line 
 £) and ten times full scale (line F); the bolt 
 diameter in its actual size (line/?), all measured 
 from the base line A. The line jS" is i mm. 
 from £>, and Cis 4 mm. from £> while the dis- 
 tance between A and G is 0.7 d. 
 
 The various details may be summed up as 
 
 Between A and £ = the fivefold pitch, 
 " .£■ and .5" = dia. of finished nut, 
 " £ and C^ dia. of rough nut, 
 " /^ and /? ^ dia. of washer, 
 " A and G = height of bolt head. 
 
 The tangent of the pitch angle ranges from 
 0.064 to 0.047, and the pressure per sq. mm. on. 
 the thread, from 0.46 to 0.67 kilogrammes. 
 
 Weight of Round Iron. 
 
 ng table are given 
 
 The weights in the folio's 
 by the Formula 
 
 G = 2.617 d\ 
 
 the bars being one foot long and d = diameter 
 in inches.. For cast iron, multiply the values 
 in the taole by 0.93 and for bronze by 1.092. A. 
 hexagonal rod whose inscribed diameter = of is 
 1. 103 time the weight of a bar of wrought iron 
 of the same diameter. 
 
 DF Wrought Iron Rods. One Foot Long. 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 d 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 % 
 
 .163 
 
 ;} 
 
 3.68 
 
 2% 
 
 11.82 
 
 h 
 
 
 4.09 
 
 7i 
 
 12.50 
 
 n 
 
 •368 
 
 IT% 
 
 4- 50 
 
 13.25 
 
 tV 
 
 .500 
 
 1^8 
 
 4.94 
 
 2fV 
 
 13-95 
 
 V. 
 
 .654 
 
 Vi 
 
 5.36 
 
 23/s 
 
 14.76 
 
 i 
 
 .826 
 
 5-89 
 
 2A 
 
 15-54 
 
 1.02 
 
 \i 
 
 6.39 
 
 2/2 
 
 16.36 
 
 -* 
 
 1.23 
 
 6.91 
 
 2tV 
 
 17.14 
 
 H 
 
 1.47 
 
 iH 
 
 7-43 
 
 ■2.y% 
 
 18.03 
 
 t 
 
 1.72 
 
 ''A 
 
 8.01 
 
 2H 
 
 19.11 
 
 2.0 
 
 iH 
 
 8.57 
 
 2^4 
 
 19.79 
 
 H 
 
 2.29 
 
 1^8 
 
 9.20 
 
 
 2061 
 
 I 
 
 2.61 
 
 i|* 
 
 9-79 
 
 2^ 
 
 21.63 
 
 ItV 
 
 2.94 
 
 
 10.47 
 
 2H 
 
 22.52 
 
 1/8 
 
 3.31 
 
 2tV 
 
 
 3 
 
 23.56 
 
 Special Forms of Bolts. 
 Instead of being made with square or hexagon heads, bolts 
 are sometimes fitted with special heads, instances of which are 
 shown in Figs. 21S to 222 ; the last being countersunk. These 
 are all furnished with means to prevent the bolt from turning 
 when the nut is operated. 
 
 *This table has been kept in the i 
 
 ic system for obvious reaso 
 
56 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 In Fig. 223 is shown an anchor bolt with cast iron plate for 
 brickwork, the bolt being inserted from above and locked by 
 being turned 90°. The area of the anchor plate should in no 
 case be less than 100 d^'' 
 
 In Fig. 224 is shown a form of anchor bolt for masonry with 
 a cast iron washer, secured by a key. The washer should be 
 not less than 25 d^ in area. Such plates are often made of 
 wrought i) — 
 
 Fig. 218. Fig. 219. Fig. 220. Fig. 221. Fig. 222. 
 
 In Figs. 225 and 226 are shown bolts secured by cross keys and 
 side keys. In these two figures the nuts are shown in different 
 positions, the latter being the more convenient to use the pro- 
 portions shown in Figs. 214 to 2x5. Figs. 227 and 228 are forms 
 
 of stud bolts. Fig. 229 is a cap screw. For small work these 
 cap screws are often made with cylindrical heads with slots for 
 use with a screw-driver. 
 
 Fig. 225. Fig. 226, Fig. 227. Fig. 228. Fig. 229. 
 
 ?84. 
 Wrenches. 
 A wrench is a lever adapted to tighten and loosen nuts and 
 bolt heads. The simple wrench, shown in Fig. 230, in two 
 forms, consists of a flat or round handle fitted to the shape of 
 the nut, the dimensions being based upon the unit D, which is 
 the diameter of the nut as given in formula (81). The double 
 wrench. Fig. 231, is arranged to receive nuts of different sizes at 
 the opposite ends of the handle. If the ends are inclined so as 
 
 to bring the corners of the hexagon at 15° and 45° with the 
 axis of the handle the wrench will be able to operate in con- 
 tracted spaces by j'j revolution of the nut.* 
 
 ?85. 
 Nut Locks. 
 For bolts made according to the preceding proportions, the 
 angles of pitch are not steep enough to allow the pressure in 
 the direction of the axis of the bolt to overcome the resistance 
 of friction and cause backward rotation. If, however, there is 
 much vibration, lost motion maj^ appear and gradually cause 
 the connection to work loose. This is true of foundation bolts 
 as well as of those in moving parts of machinery and in loco- 
 motive and marine engines. For these and similar cases it is 
 necessary to have some method of securing the bolt or nut 
 from coming loose, and a variety of such nut locks are here 
 shown. 
 
 Fig. 232. 
 
 Fig. 233. 
 
 Fig. 234. 
 
 One of the oldest and most useful forms is the jam nut. Fig. 
 232. Both nuts should be truly faced so that they will bear 
 fairly upon each other. The thin nut is frequently placed 
 under the thicker one, but this is immaterial since a nut of a 
 thickness of 0.45 to 0.4^ is as strong as the bolt thread. The 
 security obtained by the use of the jam nut is not very great, 
 and the form with right and left hand thread, as shown in Fig. 
 244, is to be preferred when greater security is essential. In 
 Fig. 233 is shown a split pin, often used in connection with a 
 jam nut. Fig. 234 shows an arrangement with a key upon the 
 nut, making a very convenient and secure combination. In 
 the three preceding cases the action is such as to tighten the 
 nut upon the thread. The three following methods are made 
 to hold by fastening the nut or bolt, or both, to the parts which 
 they are intended to hold together. Fig. 235 is used in the 
 spring hangers of Borsig's locomotives. Fig. 236 on an oil cup 
 lid, and Fig. 237 on a set screw for a connecting rod end, 
 arranged to lock at any 1-12 part of a turn. 
 
 In the following methods the nut is held from turning by be- 
 ing locked to one of the stationary pieces, the bolt itself being 
 secured in a similar manner. The form shown in Fig. 238 is 
 used for bearing cap bolts, the support at the middle of the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 57 
 
 split pin keeping it from bending. • The method shown in Fig. 
 
 239 is used for the bolts in a steam piston, while that in Fig. 
 
 240 is for a bearing cap. The latter form is arranged by means 
 of the sever notches, to lock at every jV of a turn, while the 
 other two require j/^ of a turn between successive positions. 
 
 EiG. 235. 
 
 Fig. 236. 
 
 Fig. 237. 
 
 Fig. 238. 
 
 Fig. 239. 
 
 Fig. 240. 
 
 A method of securing the bolts for locomotive springs, used 
 by Borsig, is shown in Fig. 242. The tension of the spring 
 keeps the bolt from turning, and the cap which secures the nut 
 is fitted to the end of the bolt as shown ; this locks for every 3/^ 
 of a turn. Fig. 243, shows a nut arranged to be locked by a 
 set screw. This method, used by Penn, is a very useful form 
 
 Fig. 242. 
 
 A different class of nut locks depends for its action upon the 
 introduction of an elastic resistance between the bolt and the 
 nut.* The elastic washer of Pagel "and similar devices have 
 found many applications. Parsons' bolts belong to this class. f 
 
 * See I^udewig Nut Locking Devices. Bavi 
 Journal, 1870, pp. 17, 144, 283 ; also Journ 
 Engineers. 
 
 t Engineer, July, 1867, p. 16; Nov., p. 391 ; Engin 
 Railroad Journal^ 1868, pp. 77, 117. 
 
 In this form the body of the bolt is fluted, so that the cross 
 section is reduced to about the same area as that of the bolt at 
 the base of the thread. This increases the elasticity of the bolt 
 and enables the nut to be tightened so that it is much less likely 
 to come loose. Fig. 244 shows a modification of this form 
 used by Gerber for bridge connections. The security is still 
 further increased by the use of a left hand jam nut. Instead of 
 being fluted, the body of the bolt may be flattened on four sides, 
 or the reduction of area may be obtained by drilling a hole 
 into the bolt from the head to the beginning of the thread. 
 
 Fig. 241 shows a device for securing the nuts of stufiing box 
 bolts as applied to locomotive engines. The ratchet wheels are 
 attached to the nuts, and similar notched nuts may be used to 
 advantage in many places. 
 
 Fig. 244. 
 
 Fig. 245. 
 
 One of the most important instances of screw fastenings may 
 be found in the construction of built-up screw propellers, in 
 which the blades of the screw are bolted fast to the hub, a con- 
 nection requiring the greatest strength and security. Fig. 245 
 shows the base of such a propeller blade, from the same 
 example as shown in Fig. 192. 'The flange of the blade issecur- 
 
 FiG. 241. 
 
 for bearings, spring hangers, and othei 
 
 mits any fraction of a turn to be made. 
 
 should be a little thicker than usual in 
 
 cylindrical portion may not be too weak. The diameter Z?i, i 
 
 in this case taken from formula (82). The small set screw 
 
 should be made of steel and hardened. This form of nut lock 
 
 is especially useful on marine engines. 
 
 r situations, since it per- 
 The nut, in this case, 
 order that the lower 
 
 ing, 1867, No%'., p. 4 
 
 Fig. 246. 
 
 ed to the hub by sixteen cap-screws. Four set screws serve to 
 provide a small adjustment of the blade within the range of 
 motion of the oval bolt holes. 
 
 All of the cap screws are secured. Fig. 246 shows the method 
 adopted by Penn. The bolts, which in the case of the Minotaur 
 are 3)4'' diameter, have a common ring washer under the 
 heads. When the bolts have been screwed up as tightly as pos- 
 sible, a ratchet washer with hexagonal hole is slipped over 
 each bolt head. These ratchet washers are prevented from 
 turning by the introduction of small locking pieces which are 
 bolted fast to the large ring washer, being held down by the 
 thin nuts shown. The ratchet washers have 11 teeth, and 
 hence each bolt ma}' be locked at ^^ part of a turn. Fig. 247 
 shows a method b}- Maudslay. Here each pair of bolts is held 
 by a flat key which permits locking at j\ part of a revolution. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 A continuous washer ring is not used with this method, but one 
 washer is put under each pair of bolt heads, to which the lock- 
 ing key is bolted. Another method b}' Maudslay is shown in 
 Fig. 248. A double washer is placed under two adjacent bolt 
 
 Fig. 248. 
 
 heads, and each bolt is locked by a small block held against 
 one of the faces of the bolt head by a small bolt. Three bolt 
 holes situated 40° apart are tapped in the washer for each block, 
 thus giving au adjastment of xV of a turn. The method by 
 Penn gives the best opportunity for adjustment. 
 
 I 86. 
 Spsciai, Forms op Screw Threads. 
 Screw threads of square or trapezoidal section may be used 
 for bolts, but in their use it is desirable to use a deeper nut in 
 order to secure a sufficient number of threads in the nut to keep 
 the pressure per square inch on the thread within the pre- 
 scribed limits. Trapezoidal threads are well suited for bolts, 
 since the relation between s and d permits the use of the same 
 proportions as those given for V threads in Fig. 211. In fact 
 the thread in Fig. 250 may be given the same proportions as 
 that in Fig. 211, for depth t, and pitch 5, making the angles 
 respectively equal to 0° on one side and 45° on the other. 
 These forms of screw-threads are principally used for screw- 
 presses and for similar uses. 
 
 In order that the nut may not wear or grind out, the working 
 pressure on the threads should not exceed say 700 lbs. per square 
 inch. These conditions will obtain, according to (73), when the 
 number of threads w, in the cast iron or bronze nut is not less 
 than 
 
 = 0.00035 -S"- 
 
 1-3- 
 
 40-3i) 
 
 If t=i — d, we have 
 
 w = 0.00245 '$'=0.0031; 
 
 (87) 
 
 ^1 = 0.0134 v//' = 0.0134 X 234.5 = 3.14^' 
 The depth of thread, from (85) = ^-— = 0.392'', which gives 
 ^ = 3.92^', or about 3— z"''- 
 
 From (87) we have, making j = 7710 lbs., the mimimum num- 
 ber of threads in the nut « •= 00245 '$"= 17.4 which gives for the 
 height of the nut for square thread h = ns = 17.4 X .785= 13.65''', 
 while for trapezoidal thread /i= 17.4 X. 523 = 9.1''. 
 
 In many cases the diameter of such screws is made greater 
 than the normal diameter indicated in the preceding discussion 
 
 Fig. 25 
 
 Fig. 252. 
 
 Fig. 249. Fig. 250. 
 
 For such screws the diameter d^, at the bottom of thread, 
 is generally determined from formula (72). If, however, it is 
 desired to make the diameter d^ a mimimum, we must consider 
 the pressure to act only on one side of the thread in the nut 
 and then take the pressure per square inch at double the previ- 
 ous allowance, or 1 = 7110 lbs. We then have. 
 
 for the given load. Such screws may be called enlarged S( 
 as compared with the normal dimensions as previously deter- 
 mined. For such screws the same cross section of thread and 
 the same height of nut may be given as for the normal screw 
 'of the same load, in which case the wear will practically be the 
 same for both examples. Enlarged screws are frequently used 
 for presses, where the diameter must be made greater than indi- 
 cated "by formula (84) in order to resist bending stresses. 
 
 I 87. 
 Screw Connections, Flange Joints. 
 In screwed connections a distinction may be made as to 
 whether the force acts parallel to the direction of the axis, or 
 at right angles to it. The latter condition, which produces 
 shearing stresses, is shown in the examples given in Figs. 251, 
 252 and 253. If we take d, as the diameter of the rod through 
 which the force acts, we may call d\ the bolt diameter, and 
 
 (84) 
 
 ^1 = 0.0134 v'^] 
 P= 5S68 dl J 
 The depth of thread, both for square and trapezoidal threads, is, 
 
 d 
 
 and for square threads— 
 
 and for trapezoidal threads — 
 
 s=^d=- 
 15 
 
 Formula (84) is applicable to screws of locomotive springs, 
 since in this case the conditions are well complied with. 
 
 Fig. 253. Fig. 254. Fig. 255. 
 
 then determine their relation for various cases. In Fig. 251, 
 d'=d ; in Fig. 252, d'= lA d ; in Fig. 253, d^=d ; the increased 
 diameter for Fig. 252, being given because it is possible in that 
 case for the load to act so unequally that the greater portion 
 may pass through one of the rods. Fig 254 shows a tumbuckle 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 59 
 
 ■with right and left hand thread. In this it is desirable to make 
 the nut somewhat deeper than d, as shown. A form of junc- 
 tion piece for a point where four members meet is shown in 
 I^'ig- 255. _ Such examples as the preceding are of frequent oc- 
 '1 bridge and roof construction. ■"■ 
 
 F'lG. 256. 
 
 Fig. 257. 
 
 Fig. 258. 
 
 made of plate T and angle iron. The diagonal rods and braces 
 to resist the action of the wind are connected to the upper 
 chord by means of a bolt passing entirely through the beams 
 and threaded at both ends. The nut on the left end is in the 
 form of a fork to receive the ends of the braces, while the right 
 hand end is fitted with a thin octagonal nut. The ends of the 
 braces are held by a bolt passing through the fork, with a nut 
 at each end. The pins are carefully turned and closely fitted ;t 
 after years of service they show no signs of looseness.J The 
 proportions are such that stress on the bolts does not exceed 
 
 * Other good examples of similar work in roof construction may be found 
 in %. Brandt's "Iron Constructions," Berlin, Ernst and Korn, 1871, 2d 
 Edition. 
 
 t It is well known that variations in tempei ature during- the boring of the 
 holes for the pins in the eye bars may make sufficient difference to mater- 
 ially affect the fit. This has been overcome by the iise of a double boring 
 machine which the author saw at work in the notable bridge works at 
 Phoenixville, whereby both ends are bored simultaneously, the distance 
 being gauged by a wrought iron jig bar, which varied in length to the same 
 extent as the eye-bars themselves. 
 
 X See H. Fontaine, " I'lndustrie des Etats Unis," Paris, Baudrj', 1878. Rol- 
 ler, Highway Bridge's New York, Wiley, 1878. 
 
 15,000. lbs, in most cases not more than 10,000 to 12,000 lbs. The 
 e connection of the posts to the chords (in the illustration the riv- 
 ets are omitted) is both simple and strong. The posts are provided 
 with cast iron ends, which are fitted with square projections en- 
 tering into the tops of the posts ; in these capitals are wrought 
 iron dowel pins which pass through the lower angle iron and 
 lower plates of the top chord. The diameter a', of the main 
 bolts varies from 4 to 5>^ or 6 inches or even heavier, according 
 to the load. Their dimensions are based upon as bearing stress 
 of 8000 lbs., while the diagonal braces and the lower chord are 
 proportioned upon a tensile stress of 10,000 lbs. (a ratio of 0.8, 
 see § 5). The compressive stress in the top chord is about 8,500 
 lbs., and in the posts, owing to the bending action, only about 
 5000 lbs. 
 
 Fig. 258 shows an intersection on the lower chord of the 
 Niagara railway bridge (9 spans over a total width of stream of 
 about 1900 feet). In this case the posts and top chord are 
 made of the ingetiious Phcenix column of quadrant iron. The 
 illustration especially shows the method by which the cross 
 beams are connected to the longitudinal members. In this 
 case the stress in the body of the screw bolts is about 8000 lbs., 
 rather more than given for press screws in \ 86. A cast iron 
 base, through which the large pin bolt passes receives the 
 thrust of the post, and to it the cross beams of I shape are 
 bolted. On these cross beams are wooden stringers to which 
 the roadway is secured. 
 
 It will be noticed that these examples of bolt work far ex- 
 ceed the limit of size set by the Society of German Fngineers 
 for bolt dimensions, viz., 80 mm. or Zii,"- Should such 
 sizes be necessary the formulae in \ 79 should be reconsidered. 
 Fig 259. Fig 260. Fjg. 261, 
 
 Bolt connections which bring shearing stresses upon the 
 bolts are of frequent occurrence in bridges built with pin-con- 
 nections, the general method in use in America. These designs 
 exhibit very fully the substitution of bolt or pin-connections 
 for riveting, and the method has been carried to great perfection. 
 Some examples are here given. Figs. 256 and 257 show an in- 
 tersection of several members of the bridge over the Ohio, at 
 Cincinnati. The top chord and the posts are double, and are 
 
 Fig. 262. ~ Fig 263. " Fig. 264. 
 
 In uniting the various parts of iron constructions, flange 
 joints are very frequently used. These are made in a great 
 variety of forms for various conditions. The following figures 
 show some examples of corner junctions with flanges. Fig. 
 259 shows three external flanges, with a dished base. Fig. 260, 
 also three external flanges, with an external plinth on the base. 
 Fig. 261 shows one external flange, and two which are half, 
 external and half internal. Fig. 262 has three half external 
 flanges and a base as in Fig. 260. Fig. 263 has also three half 
 external flanges, and Fig. 264 two external and one half- 
 external flange. The last three examples produce a more 
 pleasing external appearance than the preceding forms. If the 
 form shown in Fig. 262 is used, with the flanges all turned 
 inward, the bolts cannot be unscrewed from without. 
 
 Proportions for flange joints are shown in Fig. 265, the bolt 
 diameter d, being obtained from the thickness of metal rf. The 
 distance between bolts is usually 2>^ to 3 D, D being the 
 width of the nut across the flat dimension. The width of 
 flange is given in the illustration for metric sizes := 10 mm. -f- 
 2.8(5 r= y^" + 2.8(5. 
 
 If the flanges are finished on the planing machine, a ledge is 
 left for finishing, as shown on the left of Fig. 265, in order that 
 a fair bearing may be secured. Flange joints which are to 
 be bolted together without finishing are made as shown in Fig. 
 266, with a gasket of some form of elastic packing. Such 
 flanges are sometimes made for vessels with very thin walls, and 
 on the left of Fig. 266 is shown the method of assembling a 
 cylindrical vessel, such as a water tank. The base has internal 
 flanges for the bottom pieces, with an external flange for the 
 connection to the body. By turning the flanges of the bottom 
 inward a flat exterior base is obtained, well aciapted to sustain 
 the load of the water. The walls are very light, (5 = only about 
 %" , the bolts are y^" diameter, and their distance from centre 
 to centre, in the base, 13.5 d, and in the vertical joints of the 
 walls 15 d, and in the circumferential joints 20 d. 
 
IHE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Unloaded Bolt Connections. 
 
 Various methods have been adopted to relieve bolts, in a 
 connection, from the direct stresses due to the load, much in 
 the same manner as has been described in \. 'ji, for ke3ed 
 uectious. In Figs 267 and 26S are shown methods of notching 
 two plates together. The bolts are relieved from the action of 
 tensile or compressive stresses which act normal to the direction 
 of the tongue and groove. 
 
 Fig. 269 shows a method of constructing a prismatic intersec- 
 tion so as to relieve the bolts from transverse stresses ; while 
 
 through both plates, the diameter d at the thread being (>%", 
 and in the body sVi" ■ The shoe is tongued into the sole plate 
 
 Fig. 265. 
 
 Fig. 270 shows a very convenient and useful form in which the 
 projections on each piece lip over the other, greatly increasing 
 the security of the connection. The bar may be made of wrought 
 iron and the fitting should be made to conform carefully to the 
 position of the bolt holes. 
 
 If the parts are large they are often both made of cast iron, 
 and in some cases a turned dowel is let into both parts. The 
 
 Fig. 269. 
 
 and the latter is supported by the masonry of the pier. The 
 hi ' ' ' ■ ' )r the reception of the bolt by which 
 
 tl: e braced together. 
 
 Fig. 266. 
 
 constructions shown in Figs. 269, 270, are used in the frame- 
 work of large water-wheels, in which case the lower piece is 
 made flat, thickened wherever it may be found necessary. 
 
 In many cases the lateral stresses are not great, while at the 
 same time it is not desired that the bolts shall be made to fit 
 closely. In such positions dowel pins are frequently used, 
 being made of steel and fitted to reamed holes. 
 
 An example of bolt connection of large proportions, in which 
 the lateral stresses are relieved, is shown in Fig. 271. 
 
 This is taken from the bridge over the Mississippi at St. 
 Louis, and shows the bearing of the end of the lower member 
 of one of the arches, which are composed of steel tubes. There 
 are four such bearings at the end of each arch, or 24 bearings in 
 all. The shoe to which the end of the tube is fitted is made of 
 wrought iron, and the sole plate, of cast iron. Three bolts pass 
 
 Fig. 271. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 tournals. 
 
 Various Kinds of Journals. 
 
 'i 89. 
 
 Journals are made for the purpose of permitting parts of 
 
 machinery to rotate about a geometrical axis and hence they are 
 
 necessarily round, and their use involves some form of bearing 
 
 or box for a support. 
 
 A journal may be subjected to pressure upon its side, or rather, 
 normal to its axis ; or the pressure may act lengthwise, in the 
 direction of the axis. This gives us the two divisions ; 
 
 1, Lateral journals. 
 
 2, End, or thrust journals. 
 
 In the calculations relating to these, both the questions of 
 strength and of friction must be considered. In machine con- 
 struction many forms of journals are employed, the most 
 important of which will be here considered. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 A. LATERAL JOURNALS. 
 
 Overhung Journals. 
 I 90 
 A lateral journal which is counected on one side only to the 
 member to which it belongs is said to be overhung. Such jour- 
 nals are usually made cylindrical, as in Fig 272, with a collar 
 at the outer end, the height of the shoulder e above the diame- 
 ter d being — 
 
 e= yi'' -\- 0.07 d (88) 
 
 If the lateral pressure = P, the length of the journal = /, 
 
 ^=^^(t)/T 
 
 y 16 p 1 po 
 
 .(90) 
 
 Yi 
 
 in which a is a constant, dependent upon material and lubrica- 
 tion. By combining (91) with (89) we get : 
 
 -f-^T/" 
 
 occur, but while fair results are obtained with the smaller values, 
 the increased value of a secures greater durability. Good 
 lubrication is of the highest importance, and especially a good 
 distribution of the lubricant over the bearing surfaces. 
 
 For bronze bearings under favorable conditions when the 
 pressure is constantly in one direction, a may be taken ^ 75, 
 while if the direction of pressure is periodically reversed, a may 
 be taken = 150. 
 
 The following table will give the general proportions for 
 lateral journals : 
 
 and the permissible stress at the root of the journal = S, we 
 have for the diameter to resist the pressure 
 
 The ratio of /:fi^, determines the superficial pressure between 
 journal and bearing. In ordinary circumstances the pressure per 
 
 /> 
 unit of area on the lower half of the bearing is/ = j-j . When 
 
 the journal is revolving, this pressure is not the same at all 
 
 points,, but has at the base line a value = p" = — /, and at 
 
 any angle {3, from the base line, a value/' = — /cos/?.- Since 
 
 the relation between/" and/ is constant, we may use the lat- 
 ter value for all purposes of calculation. 
 
 For any given value of /, we have from the preceding : 
 
 In order that the wear may not be too great at high rotative 
 velocities, it is advisable to take/, somewhat less than the max- 
 imum value given above, and it may be made proportional to u, 
 the number of revolutions per minute, or : 
 
 ■(91) 
 
 These four equations should be applied and the greater values 
 / ^i 
 
 The maximum value of * = . 
 
 a 
 
 For the value of the constant, the following considerations 
 obtain. If the pressure on the journal acts constantly in the 
 same direction it produces a higher superficial pressure on the 
 lubricant than when, for example, the pressure is reversed 
 frequently, as in a steam-engine crank pin. In the latter case 
 there exists a kind of pumping action between the journal and 
 bearing, which constantly draws the oil into the bearing surfaces, 
 keeping them lubricated so that a higher value of / may be 
 taken than when the pressure is acting continuously in one 
 direction. Such bearings, however, are frequently subjected to 
 violent thrusts and shocks, so that a lower value of S should be 
 taken than with journals in which the directions of pressure is 
 constant. For journals which only make a partial revolution, 
 much higher pressure may be permitted, than for revolving 
 journals. The former may be classed as journals at rest, as dis- 
 tinguished from running journals. The constant a in equation 
 (91) must be determined ifrom practical considerations. It will 
 be found that in practice, wide variations in the value of a 
 
 )PORTIONS 
 
 DF JOURNALS. 
 
 
 brought Iron. ' 
 
 CoiistaKt Pressure. 
 Cast Iron. 
 
 Steel. 
 
 8500 
 
 4260 
 
 14,220 
 
 8500 
 
 4260 
 
 14,220 
 
 0.5 
 
 0.5 
 
 0.5 
 
 o.oi7v/p 
 
 0.0248^/^ 
 
 o.oi35v/> 
 
 / 
 
 tiermittent Pressure. 
 Cast Iron. 
 
 Steel. 
 
 8500 
 
 4260 
 
 14,220 
 
 8500 
 
 4260 
 
 14,220 
 
 0-5 
 
 o-S 
 
 0.5 
 
 o.oi7^P 
 
 o.o245.^P 
 
 o.oi35v/p 
 
 £ o 
 
 9vii 
 
 360 
 4260 
 
 
 
 Wrought Iron. 
 
 Cast Iron. 
 
 Steel. 
 
 p 
 
 = 
 
 1422 
 
 700 
 
 1422 
 
 s 
 
 = 
 
 7000 
 
 3500 • 
 
 11,840 
 
 ^ := 8500 14,220 
 
 [All 1 -J- = O.I3v^,T O.lJ^n 
 
 ' = 0.0244 y ~f^p 0-OI9 y ^v 
 
 \/i' 
 
 If « > 150, the ratio of I : d, is first approximated and the 
 value substituted in the last formulas of the table. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 For hollow journals the following proportions may be adopted. 
 Let d^ = the external and t/^ the internal diameter of the 
 
 equivalent solid journal, f = - '- , we have : 
 
 V' 
 
 the length of both solid and hollow journals being the 
 
 ■, the ratio of diameter to length is to be the s; 
 
 f 
 
 ■ (95) 
 
 (93) a 
 
 diameter of o. 
 
 We 
 
 : fro 
 
 do = I.02 X 0.043 s/ 309,210 = 24-38" 
 and a length /» = 24.38 X 1.5 = 36.57" 
 
 which gives a pressure of about 350 pounds per square inch of projected area. 
 
 The actual dimensions of these journals are a'o=i9^'', /q^iS", 
 which gives a stress at the base of the journal of a little over 
 4000 lbs., but the actual bearingis only isH" long, which gives 
 
 * Portfeuille de John Cockerill, I. p. 189. 
 
 a pressure of nearly 1000 lbs. per square inch, which appears to 
 be too great ; and in actual practice these journals are obliged 
 to be kept cool with water. 
 
 In actual practice there is very little uniformity in the pro- 
 portions of journals. Sometimes the distinction between con- 
 stant and alternate action of load is considered but often it is 
 neglected. In the case of locomotive crank pins, for example, 
 p is frequently as high as 1500 to 3000 pounds per square inch, 
 and on the cross head pin, as high as 4500 pounds. On the 
 other hand quite low values of p are sometimes found on the 
 crank pins of marine engines, f In all cases careful lubrication 
 is of the utmost importance. When the number of revolutions 
 is very great the length of the journal should be made greater 
 than is given above. 
 
 Table of Journals. 
 
 from which the following series is obtained. 
 
 d-^ : df, = Tp ^ 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.75 0.8 
 I : .^ 1 — -^i = i.oi 1.02 1.05 1. 10 1. 14 1. 19 
 I : V^ I _ ,/,4 = I.OI 1.03 1.06 1. 15 1. 21 1.30 
 
 In both cases there exists a smaller superficial pressure for 
 the hollow journal than for the solid one. A common ratio of 
 internal to external diameter is 0.6, and such journals were fre- 
 quentl}' used in cast iron work and are again being used in con- 
 nection with hollow steel shafting and axles. 
 
 Bronze boxes or their substitutes, such as white metal or 
 other combinations, belong more especially to the subject of 
 bearings (§ 96), and their use permits a higher superficial pres- 
 sure without creating an excessive increase in the coefficient of 
 friction. For moderate speeds, boxes of cast iron give results 
 which are as satisfactory as can be obtained with bronze. This 
 is especially the case with machines which are actuated by hand. 
 For heavier or continuous service cast iron boxes are only suit- 
 able when the pressure is not great, and examples of such 
 bearings will be given in a later chapter. Bearings of wood 
 maj' be operated satisfactorily at a pressure double that which is 
 used with bronze, if the journal runs in water, or is kept wet. 
 For heavy mill shafting making from 60 to 80 revolutions per 
 minute, wooden bearings lubricated with grease are often used. 
 For mill spindles, boxes with bearings of willow wood are 
 sometimes used with good results. In this case the speed some- 
 times exceeds 100 revolutions per minute, but the pressures are 
 light. 
 
 ? 91- 
 
 Examples and Tabi^es of Journai,s. 
 
 In the following tables are collected the results of the for- 
 
 mulse (93) in which the number of revolutions of the journal is 
 
 assumed to be not greater than 150. 
 
 1. E-Kample. a water wheel weighing 66,000 pounds carries a load of 212 
 cubic feet of water. The axis of the wheel is of cast iron, and the load is 
 equally distributed between the two journals, giving a load upon each 
 journal of 33,000 + 6605 = 39,605 lbs. The nearest value to this in the table 
 is 40,058 lbs., which would give a diameter of S>^ inches, and a length of 
 J2j^ inches. 
 
 2. Example. A wrought iron shaft for a similar load, but subjected to 
 alternating action, should have, according to the table, a diameter of about 
 5H". and the same length. 
 
 If in cast steel, with alternate action, diameter should be about 4^4 inches, 
 and length of 4.75 X 1-3 = 6.175". 
 
 3. Example.* The centres of the walking beam of the water engine at 
 Blevberg in Belgium each bear a load of 3c "-- *"' - '- '^ - ' " 
 
 Direc<^io 
 
 1 of Load Constant. 
 
 Direction 
 
 of Load 
 
 Varying. 
 
 Wrt. Iron 
 
 Castlron 
 
 Steel 
 
 Wrt. Iron 
 
 C'tlron 
 
 Steel 
 
 T = "= 
 
 ~d^^'^ 
 
 
 d 
 
 d ~' 
 
 ^^'■' 
 
 1121 
 
 554 
 
 1419 
 
 1419 
 
 724 
 
 1833 
 
 2523 
 
 866 
 ■ 1247 
 
 3193 
 
 2217 
 3193 
 
 1629 
 
 2188 
 
 
 1698 
 
 4346 
 
 4346 
 
 
 5163 
 
 4485 
 
 
 5677 
 
 5677 
 
 2896 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7009 
 
 3465 
 
 8871 
 
 8871 
 
 4526 
 
 
 8481 
 
 
 10734 
 
 
 5476 
 
 13861 
 
 10093 
 
 
 12774 
 
 12774 
 
 
 16495 
 
 11845 
 
 
 14992 
 
 14992 
 
 
 19359 
 
 13738 
 
 
 17.^87 
 
 17387 
 
 8870 
 
 
 
 
 22709 
 
 22709 
 
 
 29325 
 
 20256 
 
 
 25637 
 
 25637 
 
 
 33106 
 
 22709 
 
 11227 
 
 28742 
 
 
 
 37"5 
 
 25303 
 
 
 
 32025 
 
 
 41353 
 
 
 
 35484 
 
 . 35484 
 
 
 
 33924 
 
 
 42935 
 
 ' 42935 
 
 
 55443 
 
 
 19959 
 
 51096 
 
 51096 
 
 
 65982 
 
 
 23424 
 
 59967 
 
 59967 
 
 
 79260 
 
 5495 
 
 27167 
 
 69548 
 
 69548 
 
 
 89809 
 
 
 31187 
 
 
 
 
 103097 
 
 CL^^ 
 
 lt^% 
 
 
 102520 
 
 
 117301 
 
 90838 
 
 44909 
 
 "49^5 
 
 114915 
 
 
 148460 
 
 
 
 128097 
 
 128097 
 
 
 165413 
 
 
 
 
 141935 
 
 
 183284 
 
 
 
 156483 
 
 
 
 
 135696 
 
 670B7 
 
 171741 
 
 171741 
 
 
 221773 
 
 148313 
 
 73324 
 
 187709 
 
 187709 
 
 
 
 161489 
 
 79838 
 
 204386 
 
 2043B6 
 
 
 263934 
 
 ^. Example. An axle on a railway carriage makes from 2< 
 ns per minute ; n may taken = 270, and from'(93) we have 
 s made from 1 
 
 blowers made by 
 
 1 length. 
 
 revolutions'; hen 
 
 x/i2oo' =4.5, or for steel -— = 0.17 \/i2oo= 5 
 
 t, of Boston, have steel shafts, with the j( 
 
 ? 92. 
 
 Neck Journals. 
 When a journal is placed between two loaded parts of a 
 as shown in Fig. 274, it is called a Neck Journal. 
 
 ..i3s/270 
 s of fan 
 
 In such cases the diameter (/' is dependent upon other condi- 
 tions than those of mere pressure. In order that the wear 
 
 t See Marks, " Crank Pins and Journals," Philadelphia, Kildare, 
 where the following values of p are given ; Swatara, 400 ; Saco, 4" ; TS 
 anoag, 725 ; Wabash, 470. The third of these engines had a C5'linde; 
 diameter, and crank pin 16'' dia., 27" long, and the stress in the prec 
 cases was respectively, 4039, 3071, 10,537, and 2745 lbs. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 63 
 
 may not be greater than in the case of overhung journals, the 
 conditions of speed, lubrication, bearing metal, being the same, 
 the length should not be made less than the corresponding 
 end journal. If it is practicable to make the length greater, it 
 may be done to advantage, and the weai thereby greatly re- 
 duced * In many cases, however, the lack of space limits the 
 length, as for example, in the case of crank axles for inside 
 connected locomotives. Such journals are properly considered 
 merely as enlarged end journals. 
 
 For hollow journals of this type formula (94) may be used. 
 
 I. Example. Borsig's Express Locomotive at the Vienna" Exposition. f 
 The journal of the rear drawing axle of steel was loaded with 13,200 lbs. 
 d' = ^y%", I' = y{'^" According to the table the ^corresponding journal is 
 given asrf= 3^", /= 3-125 X 1.94 = 6.1", and/ = '^'^°° = 692.4 lbs. 
 
 In this case /' is much greater than /, and for the given values of/', and d' 
 
 ehave/= _ 
 
 -=253.3 lbs. 
 
 and if, as in the beginning of § 90, we put p 
 
 ngof §90, we put 
 
 d\Ap yi p. 
 
 .(96) 
 
 ■(97) 
 
 Proceeding as in \ 90 we obtain the following collection of 
 proportions. 
 
 FormulcE for Fork Journals. 
 
 Covstant Pressure. 
 WroughtJIron. Cast Iron. Steel. 
 
 = 8500 4250 14,220 
 
 5 = 
 
 4250 
 
 14,220 
 
 iV P 0.0095 v//" 
 
 Wrought Ir 
 8500 
 
 4250 
 4250 
 
 Steel. 
 14,220 
 
 = O.OI2I\//' 0.0\-]\V P 0.0095 v/P 
 
 Constant Pressure. 
 
 Wrought Iron. Cast Iron Steel. 
 
 = 711 355 711 
 
 = 8500 4250 14,220 
 
 = 3 3 4 
 
 = 0.0212 v//* 0.029 \//' 0.0185 \/p 
 
 ♦ See I 109. 
 
 tSee Berliner Verhandlung, 1874, p. 3 
 
 Wroi.ght Iron. 
 
 Steel. 
 1422 
 
 _ o.oiSSv//' 0.026 \//' 0.0158 n//' 
 ire seldom used, and need 
 ; noticed that these Fork 
 
 2. Example. In the same locomotive the forward axle carried the crank 
 pin journal upon which the entire force of the piston was exerted. The 
 total pressure on the piston was 32,120 lbs., and the dimensions of the pin 
 -were d' = ^Ys.", V = 4K"- 
 
 The corresponding values from the table of the preceding 
 section give a^ = 4X'^, '^ = 4,25 X 1.3 = 5>^''/' = about 1400 lbs. 
 
 The actual value oip, for the sizes used is — ^—- = 17^0 
 
 4.125 X 4-5 
 lbs. In this case I' is less than /, on account of lack of room, 
 which accounts for the increase in superficial pressure. 
 
 I 93- 
 Fork Journals. 
 A Neck Journal which is held at both ends in a yoke or fork, 
 as shown in Fig. 275, may be called a Fork Journal. Such 
 journals may safely be made of lesser diameter than those which 
 are overhung. If we let /'= the load, /:= length, andrf = 
 diameter, and s, the maximum permissible stress, we have from 
 case VIII. I 6, 
 
 Fig. 277. 
 
 Fig. 275. 
 
 Journals are comparatively small in diameter and of greater 
 length ratio than the preceding forms. 
 
 Example. A Fork Journal of wrought iron bears a load P= 4400 lbs., act- 
 ing constantly in one direction and revolves at a moderate speed. We have 
 then rf= 0.0212 •\/44oo = 1.4", / =" 1.4" X 3 = 4.2". For an overhung journal 
 under similar conditions we have, from the table of g 91, d = 2", / = 3". The 
 product of the length and diameter is approximately the same in both 
 cases. If the length 4.2" is found inconveniently long, it may be diminished, 
 providing d be proportionally increased. The strength will then be un- 
 necessarily increased and the resistance of friction somewhat greater. 
 These are only examples of the many variations which are to be met among 
 the many conditions of practice. 
 
 I 94- 
 
 Multiple Journals. 
 In some cases the resistance of friction becomes so great that 
 a modification of the fork journal is resorted to in order to re- 
 duce it within practical limits. Such an arrangement is shown 
 in Fig. 276, which may be called a multiple journal. If we as- 
 sume the load to be equally distributed among the plates, this 
 
 n 
 
 arrangement' may be considered as a series of fork journals. If the 
 number of members on each side be taken =: K, each pair will 
 
 support a K^ portion of the load P, and d will 
 
 be/^t 
 
 LS large as would be required for a simple fork journal. 
 I'iK -- 
 
 '^n- 
 
 0.7 0.57 0.5 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.35 
 
 Journals of this kind are generally of the slow-moving class, 
 with a length ratio = i. The total length of journal is the = 
 2 K d. Journals of this sort will be found is some varieties of 
 chain links, of which examples will be given later. * 
 
 * Joints of this kind may sometimes be subjected satisfactorily to a greater 
 pressure than the calculation would indicate. Engineer Vollhering has 
 used such a joint in a system of levers to operate a heavy drawbridge. In 
 this case the load was about 95,000 lbs. K = io, the thickness of each plate |", 
 d= i^^, both plates and journal being of steel. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Half Journai,. 
 lu those cases iu which the reduction of the moment of fric- 
 tion is of great importance, the length of a journal may be 
 somewhat increased, if the bearing surface is limited to one- 
 half the circumference, as shown iu Fig. 277, which shows such 
 a bearing, the load acting constantly in one direction and the 
 movement extending only through a small angle. In such 
 cases it is desirable to have a small supplementary journal as 
 shown in the figure, in order to meet unexpected lateral pres- 
 sures. In such half journals, provided the unused side of the 
 material is proportionally increased, d is independent of P, 
 and p only is to be considered. We have for 
 
 
 Wrought Iron. 
 
 Cast Iron. 
 
 Steel. 
 
 Po 
 
 = 8500 
 
 4250 
 
 14,220 
 
 p 
 
 = 6700 
 
 3340 
 
 11,160 
 
 nple: 
 
 ?or a pressure P— 220,0c 
 
 lbs., acting in a 
 
 constant di 
 
 upon a slow moving journal of wrought iron, we have from (93) rf = 0.017 
 ■v/220,000 = 7 .97'^ sa y S", and / = 4"; for a fork journal, according to (98) 
 d = 0.0121 ■v/220,000 = 5.67", and / is the same; for a multiple bearing with 
 eight parts on a side d = 0.35 X i-(>l = 1-98", say 2", and a total length 7^2 
 X 16 ^ 32". If now we take lor a half journal the same conditions and make 
 d = 2", we get /= 2 X 8= 16". We may, however, make d ■=.!.$", in which 
 case/ = T.\" X 16 = 2128". The journal friction will in this case be J that 
 of the overhung journal, ^fg that of the fork journal, | that of the multiple 
 bearing journal, which latter is nearly 60 per cent, longer. 
 
 An application of this form of journal will be seen in Fossey's 
 Coupling. Woolf has also used it on the cast iron crosshead of 
 a large pumping engine.* 
 
 The principle of the half journal may be seen carried to its 
 extreme limit in the knife edge bearings of weighing machine 
 in which the friction is reduced to a minimum. The superficial 
 pressure upon these very small surfaces is correspondingly 
 high, ranging from 15,000 to 150,000 lbs. per square inch. The 
 hardened steel edges and bearings seem to be able to stand these 
 pressures without injury, f 
 
 Rennie's experiments with cast iron journals in bronze bear 
 ings, with copious lubrications : 
 
 When p = 3.2 175 315 492 668 739 
 / = 0.157 0.225 0.215 0.222 0.234 0.234 
 
 no account being taken of v, in these experiments. 
 
 Hirn experimented with cast iron on bronze with full lubri- 
 cation, the value of v being equal to 335 feet per minute : 
 
 When/ = 3 5.26 7.54 9.71 12 
 
 /= 0.0376 0.021 1 0.0226 0.0199 0.0183 
 
 and these experiments showed that for small values of/, J 
 diminishes as/ increases. 
 
 Hirn also found that if/ remained constant, and equal to 12 
 lbs., that when 
 
 z; = 92 164 184 275 327 335 367 
 /"= 0.0086 0.0121 0.0128 0.0165 0.0181 0.0183 0.0191 
 
 thus being at all times quite small, but still constantly increas- 
 ing with the increase of velocity. 
 
 Morin's researches gave with pressures of 14 to 20 pounds 
 per square inch, values of y, from 0.05 to o.ii for journals lubri- 
 cated with oil, and from 0.08 to 0.16 when lubricated with 
 grease. 
 
 The following results were obtained at the Royal Technical 
 Academy from experiments after Morin, upon Clair's apparatus. 
 The journal was of wrought iron in brass bearings, freely lubri- 
 cated with oil. 
 
 First Test. Second Test. 
 
 Bearing Surface . ..... . 12.800 sq. mm. 128 sq. mm 
 
 Total pressure P 16.5 kilo 1 6. 5 kilo 
 
 Pressure pr. sq. mm. . . . . . 0.00129 kilo 0.129 " 
 
 Observed friction 1.25 kilo 2.65 " 
 
 Coefficient _/ 0.076 0.160 
 
 The author's experiments with an apparatus resembling a 
 Prowny brake with surfaces of wrought iron on bronze with 
 good lubrication and vel.ocities of 30 to 35 feet per minute, gave 
 the following results : 
 
 Friction of Journals. 
 
 New journals show greater frictional resistance than those 
 which have worn to a good bearing. 
 
 At first the journal only comes in contact with the metal of 
 the bearing in a limited number of spots until after a moderate 
 amount of wear the superficial pressure is distributed over the 
 projected area of the bearing, giving the value of/, as indicated 
 in I 90.$ 
 
 For a diameter d, and load P, for a cylindrical journal, whose 
 coefficient of friction =/, we have for the initial force F, which 
 the resistance of friction holds iu equilibrium, 
 for new, unworn journals 
 
 W 
 
 /■= 50 122 192 335 484 624 
 y^ 0.090 0.087 0.095 o. 1x8 0.171 0.184 o.: 
 
 711 
 
 Here the value of f was doubled, while/ increased 15 times. 
 If/ remained constant and equal to 470 lbs. we have 
 
 /= 
 
 34-64 
 o 191 
 
 0.167 
 
 and for smoothly worn journals 
 F^ ±fP 
 
 The reduction in frictional resistance is equal to ^ ; or about 
 
 o.Si times less in a smoothly worn bearing than in a new one. 
 The actual value of F is, however, greatly dependent on f. 
 This, however, is not only dependent on the lubrication and 
 condition of surfaces, as according to the theories of Morin and 
 Coulomb, but also upon the superficial pressure/, and speed of 
 rubbing surfaces v. | 
 
 Additional researches upon this subject are yet greatly to be 
 desired. 11 
 
 In this case the coefficient of friction diminishes for an increase 
 in the value of v, contrary to the results in Hirn's observations, 
 the value of/ being above 40 times greater than Hirn used. 
 
 These latter results appear to be more in accordance with 
 Morin's, in that the friction of rest is greater than the friction 
 of motion, and hence for small velocities the friction should be 
 greater than with higher velocities. This law appears to hold 
 good only between certain limits for v, either side of which / 
 increases for increasing velocit}'. Hirn's researches lay beyond 
 these limits. Those of the author are only preliminary to a 
 fuller series of observations. 
 
 The following table give some results of the wear on boxes 
 of various kinds in railway service : 
 
 * See Tredgold, " Cornish Pumping Engines." 
 
 ires as high as 425,000 lbs. per square inch 
 _ _ . „ an sV wide. The knife edges on the large 
 
 Werder Testing Machine at the Royal Technical Academy are 360 mm. long, 
 and sustain a maximum pressure of 100,000 kilograms, or 277.8 kg. per mm , 
 or at J mm., in width is equal to 556.6 kilograms per square millimetre, or 
 810,000 lbs. per square inch, and this pressure has been sustained without 
 apparent injury. 
 
 J Engineer, Nov., 1873, p. 312, co: 
 upon the action of railway axles i 
 The following abstract gives the res 
 
 The brasses were all .poured from the same crucible and consisted of a 
 
 
 Distance, Km. for 
 
 Wear on 4 boxes in 
 
 Kind of Alloy .11 
 
 a wear of i kilo- 
 
 grammes for 1000 
 
 
 gramme from 4 boxes. 
 
 Kilometres. 
 
 
 Kilometres. 
 
 Grammes. 
 
 I. Gun Metal 83 Cu. 17 Sn. . . 
 
 90,390 
 
 11.06 
 
 
 " 82 Cu. 18 Sn. . . 
 
 99,900 
 
 
 3 
 
 White Metal3Cu.9oSn. 7Sb. 
 
 
 13.83 
 
 
 " 5Cu.85Sn. loSb 
 
 S8;i45 
 
 
 i 
 
 Lead Composit'n 84 Pb. 16 Sb 
 
 81,280 
 
 12.30 
 
 Phosphorbronze 
 
 
 2.33 
 
 7 
 
 Parsons' White Brass . . . 
 
 385,'275 
 
 2.60 
 
 8. Dewrance's Babbit Metal . 
 
 637,679 
 
 1-57 
 
 mixture of 7 parts copper and i part tin. They all worked under the same 
 car and all had the same lubrication; In running 28000 miles the losses were 
 
 as follows ; 
 
 Journals. Boxes. 
 
 ^•^zf./r||' '°Pr^": ^^^=f^ 
 
 ^<=|;..=^i; - „^,l; ■■ _.\.. 
 
 Taking the journal load as 11,000 lbs., the value oip in :the three cases is 
 
 612, 554 and 427 lbs. 
 
 % Nos. I to 6 are from the work of Dr. Kunzel on Bronze bearings, Dresden, 
 
 1875. The others are from The Engineer, Vol. 41, 1876, pp. 4 and 31, all be- 
 
 ir 
 
 g given an metric quantities 
 
 as readily comparable. 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 B. THRUST BEARL\GS. 
 
 §97- 
 Proportions ok Pivots. 
 
 A thrust bearing which is formed on the eud of a shaft and 
 bears the pressure upon its sectional area, is termed a pivot. 
 For ordinary cases these are made in the form shown in Fig. 
 178. The pressure p is uniformly distributed over the area of 
 the end of the shaft, and the velocity is proportional to the dis- 
 tance p of auy given element from the centre. A small oil 
 chamber of a radius i\ is formed in the middle of the bearing. 
 
 If the outer radius is Tq, we have 
 
 and for the elements on the outside radius 
 
 A= '^^ 
 
 In the formulae for a uniformly distributed pressure p, we 
 have taken ^1 = ^ n and the two diametral oil channels are 
 made of a width = -^^ d. We then have for a given load P : 
 
 F=Si6pd^ (loi) 
 
 In order that there may not be too much wear for fast run. 
 
 Example i. A crane in the harbor of Cherbourg carries a load of 33,000 lbs. 
 on an end pivot 6J" diameter. Adding its own weight of 6600 lbs. gives a 
 value J°= 39,600 lbs. This is a slow moving pivot and we have from the 
 table for this load a diameter between 6a" and 7.00". A similar crane of 
 4000 pounds weight and 20,000 pounds load has ii = 6-f^", while the table 
 would give about 54". 
 
 E.N;ample 2. A driving shaft making 100 revolutions per minute, with a 
 load of 2200 lbs., should have, by the table, a diameter of about 2|". 
 
 Example 3. A turbine, making 200 revolutions per minute and 3080 Ibs^ 
 load, should have a step, according to (103), of 0.004 \/p>i = 0.004 v/soSo x 200 
 
 The length of journals in the case of such pivots is usually 
 made from i to 1.5 d, its value being suflSciently great to pro- 
 vide for the lateral pressure. 
 
 :nd have for high 
 . . . .(102) 
 
 ning bearings (see I 90) we may take ^ 
 speed pivots : 
 
 F=Si6d'^ 
 
 Alternating pressures do not occur in these bearings and 
 need not be considered. The value of a may be taken for 
 wrought iron on bronze as = 75. 
 
 Bearings of lignum vitse running in water may bear loads of 
 1500 pounds per square inch even at high speeds.* 
 
 The following formulae and tables will serve for the propor- 
 tions for end pivots : 
 
 Formui<jS for Pivots (103) 
 
 Wro't Iron or Steel Cast Iron Iron or Steel 
 
 Bronze. L,ignum Vitae. 
 700 
 
 0.05 ^/P 
 
 350 _ 1422 _ 
 
 0.07 v/p 0.035 v/p 
 
 /=I422 
 
 Slow moving Pivots 
 « =z or < 150 
 «> 150 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 1/^=1422 
 
 [«' = o.035v//> 
 
 \p = joo 
 
 ]^d = o.05^p 
 
 [«=75 
 
 I d= 0.004 y/pff 
 
 
 Fl,A 
 
 T Pivots. 
 
 
 d= 
 
 0.035 ^~P 
 
 0.05 v/^ 
 
 0.07 ^j^ 
 
 J 
 
 816 
 
 398 
 
 204 
 
 1-25 
 
 1275 
 
 622 
 
 319 
 
 1.50 
 
 1836 
 
 895 
 
 459 
 
 1-75 
 
 2500 
 
 1219 
 
 625 
 
 2.00 
 
 3265 
 
 1592 
 
 816 
 
 2.25 
 
 4132 
 
 2016 
 
 1033 
 
 2.50 
 
 5102 
 
 2488 
 
 1275 
 
 2.75 
 
 6173 
 
 3011 
 
 1543 
 
 3.00 
 
 7347 
 
 3494 
 
 1836 
 
 325 
 
 8622 
 
 4205 
 
 2155 
 
 3-50 
 
 1 0000 
 
 4877 
 
 2500 
 
 3-75 
 
 11479 
 
 5599 
 
 2869 
 
 4.00 
 
 13061 
 
 6370 
 
 3265 
 
 4.25 
 
 14745 
 
 7192 
 
 3686 
 
 4-50 
 
 16530 
 
 8063 
 
 4132 
 
 4-75 
 
 18418 
 
 8983 
 
 4604 
 
 5.00 
 
 20498 
 
 9954 
 
 5102 
 
 5-25 
 
 22140 
 
 10974 
 
 5535 
 
 5-50 
 
 24694 
 
 12044 
 
 6673 
 
 5-75 
 
 26990 
 
 13164 
 
 6747 
 
 6.00 
 
 29388 
 
 14334 
 
 7344 
 
 6.25 
 
 31890 
 
 15630 
 
 7972 
 
 6.50 
 
 34490 
 
 16900 
 
 8623 
 
 6.75 
 
 37190 
 
 18220 
 
 9298 
 
 7.00 
 
 41690 
 
 19600 
 
 lOOOO 
 
 Fig. 27; 
 
 There is a general tendency in machine practice to use 
 smaller diameters for pivot bearings,! in order to reduce the 
 resistance of friction. 
 
 In order to reduce the effect of higher speeds upon pivots 
 bearing heavy pressure a series of disks is often used. If, in 
 Fig. 279, the number of plates between the end of the spindle 
 and the step is i, 2, 3, 4, . . . 2, we have for the proportion of 
 
 turns between each pair of surfaces }i, }{, ]4> r times n. 
 
 This device has been used for steps of turbines, mill spindles, 
 etc., by Escher, Wyss & Co., Reiter and others. But few ex- 
 amples now remain of this firm for the thrust bearings of 
 screw propeller shafts ; the disks bound together and were 
 
 I . . 
 
 tniT 
 
 -a-|— , 
 
 Fig. 279. 
 
 overheated and injured. So far as experience indicates, such 
 thrust bearings are capable of standing pressures of 1400 pounds 
 per square inch or even more. The important point to be con- 
 sidered is, therefore, the reduction of the superficial pressure p. 
 The use of other materials than iron, wood or bronze, and 
 their substitutes, such as white metal, Babbitt metal, etc. , has 
 often been attempted. The subject of wooden bearings will be 
 considered hereafter. Besides the use of hardened steel, which 
 is of small value for great pressures, such bearings have also 
 been made of stone, glass,| or hard burned clay,^ but none of 
 
 1 Madgeburg, a boring mill is made 
 ;ast iron Dearings, with a superficial pressure of 
 more Lfiaii 20,000 pounus, without ill results. 
 
 t Bearings of glass have been used for more than twelve years at the works 
 of E. Acker & Co., at Graggenan, near Rastatt. These bearings are very- 
 durable and cheap and require but little lubrication. 
 § Shown at the Exposition of 1867, by Leoni, of I^ondon, with good results. 
 
66 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 these materials have come into general use. Girard used a 
 pump to keep a film of water between the friction surfaces, and 
 after deducting the power to operate the pump showed a very 
 light resistance* A similar device was shown by Girard at the 
 Exposition of I S67, in which the water jet was 'operated by a 
 blast of air. This apparatus was rather of the nature of a 
 scientific apparatus, than as a practical application. There 
 were also exhibited journals which ran in bearings in which 
 water was inclosed. f The experience of general practice, how- 
 ever, shows that the ordinary forms are sufficient, without re- 
 quiring the use of any of these complicated devices. 
 
 Friction of Flat Pivot Bearings. 
 If a flat pivot bearing with annular bearing surface, as in Fig 
 278, has an inner radius r^, aud an outer radius Tq with a load 
 P, we have for the tangential frictional resistance 
 
 
 in which / is the coefficient of friction. For rapidly 
 pivots we have 
 
 F = 
 
 2 V ''0 / 
 
 • (104) 
 
 what higher velocity . For this reason such bearings are not to 
 be recommended when high values of P must be carried. The 
 resistance of friction may be calculated by the formulae of the 
 preceding section. 
 
 Multiple Collar Thrust Bearings 
 
 Thrust bearings are frequently made with a row of collars on 
 the shaft as shown in Figs. 281-283. If the collars are similar 
 the pressure may be taken as distributed uniformly among 
 
 them, li f be a constant value we have for ;; 
 
 coUa 
 
 shut - 
 
 part of the value is given by (104) for each collar, although the 
 total frictional resistance will be the same, being the sum of 
 the resistances of all the collars. Nevertheless the results of 
 experience, especially with screw propeller shafts, shows the 
 necessity of making m large in order to keep the pressure p as 
 small as possible. This is due to the fact that heavily loaded 
 shafts give, according to (104), so great frictional resistance as 
 to case excessive heating and consequent injury, and experi- 
 mental researches have shown the value in reducing p, and 
 consequently/. The best values of p lie between 40 to 80 
 pounds per square inch. When bearing of this kind is placed 
 at the end of a shaft it may be reduced in diameter as shown in 
 Fig. 283, and in such cases p may be made somewhat greater, 
 even as high as 350 pounds, but in such a case there is a great 
 tendency to heat. 
 
 The second value is rather less than the first, since, from the 
 previous proportions r^ = i r^, which gives for running pivots 
 Jr^ l/P, and the ratio of the two values is as 7 to 6, while it 
 rj = O, it 'is as 4 to 3. For values of /see I 96. 
 
 Example. In thecraneof example i, §97, -P= 39.6°° Itis. ro-a/s". 7^ = 3, 
 /=o.i5. This gives in (104) 
 
 F= 0.075 - X 39.6°° = 39^° lbs . 
 
 1 shaft 39,6( 
 
 39^°° 
 
 The velocity v, at a radius ^0 = 275 ft. This gives in (104) taking/= 
 /"=^ 39600 (1 H — '—\ = 3465 lbs. 
 and4he friction horse power 
 
 i: P = M^lilfZS _ 2g H p. 
 33000 
 
 n the Rhine atSchaffhausen. /'=3o8oolbs. «=- 
 
 I 99- 
 Collar Thrust Bearings. 
 The use of collars to receive thrusts on hocizontal bearings 3S 
 similar to such use on vertical shafts, and a form is shown in 
 Fig. 280. In this case the inner diameter 2r^ cannot be less 
 than the diameter/? of the shaft. It is best to make it suffi- 
 ciently greater to permit a small oil channel to be used as 
 shown in the figure, and oil ways should also be cut m the 
 bearing surface. 
 
 H. P. = — '*— il? = 10.7 H. P. 
 
 Example 3. Girard Turbine at Geneva 
 P= 33,000 lbs. M = 16, 2 n = -O = 9-8" 
 
 y ^ 46.7 ft. From (104) we get .F= 2970 and the friction horse-power Is 
 
 H. P. =?2^— ^^= 4 H. r. 
 33.000 
 
 Example 4. Langdon lays down the rule that for collar thrust bearings 
 of screw propeller engines there should be 5< square inch of surface for 
 every indicated horse-power.? If N — the horse power and c the velocity of 
 the ship 
 
 **ExImpteT° A^\''rge centri?ugaVmachine by Langen & Sons, ]n Cologne, 
 as a collar step of the following proportions : 
 
 has a collar step 
 
 P= 4400 lbs. n 
 
 ! pressure, '' ' ' 
 
 If r __ r, is made ttae same as before, good proportions will 
 be obtained, although the rubbing surfaces will move at a some- 
 
 *See Armengand, " Vignole des Mecaniciens," p. 139- 
 t Exhibited by Jouffray. See Armengand " Progres de 1' 
 tiniverselle," Vol. I, PI. 8. 
 
 F= 260 and//'. P. = 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 67 
 
 In all these examples the co-efficient of friction _/ has been 
 iaken z= o.i, and for the moderate pressure of the first three ex- 
 amples a lower value might have been taken. The examples 
 ■will suffice to show the importance of the selection of a suitable 
 value for/>, and other cases will be examined in § 122. 
 
 The Compound Link as a Thrust Bearing. 
 
 In the previously examined cases it has been the object of 
 the various plans to reduce the journal friction to a minimum, 
 but there are sometimes occasions in which it is desired to give 
 a journal a definite amount of frictioual resistance, without 
 danger of its sticking fast, so that it ma}' be rotated with a 
 moderate force, and may also be readily clamped in any desired 
 position. This maj- be accomplished, for example, by a thrust 
 journal made in the form of a truncated cone. If the radii of 
 the large and small ends are respectively r,, and i\ and the half 
 angle a, we have for the force F, instead of (104), 
 
 ./ 
 
 ^i-:;)- 
 
 and by varying the angle a, may give any desired value to F.* 
 
 Very acute pivots sometimes bind in an injurious manner, 
 
 and hence the increase of /^cannot be carried to an extreme in 
 
 this way. Clamping of this sort may better be accomplished 
 
 In Fig. 2S5 is shown a form of attachment in which a cross 
 anchor piece is forged on the shank of the journal, and a slot 
 mortised in the end of the shaft to receive it. After the journal 
 
 Fig. 285. 
 
 is in place it is clamped by driving on the previously heated 
 metal bands (see § 62). The angle of taper is ^'j. Fig. 286 is a 
 very good form in which the shank of the journal is keyed in 
 
 Fig 288 
 
 place. In Fig. 2S7 is shown a cast iron journal with two wings, 
 arranged to be driven in, and Fig. 288 shows the proportions of 
 the same when four wings are used. If three wings are desired 
 their thickness may be made equal to ^^ d. 
 
 Fig. 284. 
 
 by the use 'of compound bearing surfaces, so arranged as to 
 press on each other, as shown in Fig. 284. Each plate then 
 transmits the axial pressure to the next, li-m is the number of 
 contact surfaces, the friction at the radius r^ of the bearing is 
 found by an analogous equation to (104), 
 
 Jr 
 
 (-^) 
 
 . (106) 
 
 Example. Let F^P, and let/= 
 ■« = whence, if i\ = yi 1% n 
 
 Fig. 289. 
 
 Fig. 289 shows a form in which the four wings are surrounded 
 by a conical shell, which is held in place by bolts and anchor 
 plates. The shell is sometimes made with key ways cast in it to 
 act as a centre for the hub of a gear wheel. 
 
 This arrangement has been used by the writer with S' 
 many parts of machines where a clamp was desired. Formerly 
 the joints of dividers were made with four plates at the pivot. 
 
 Attachment of Journals. 
 
 When a journal cannot be made in one piece with the rest of 
 the shaft, various methods of attachment may be used ; such 
 devices are mainly necessary in fitting iron iournals to wooden 
 shafts, as for water-wheels. 
 
 the friction of stop-cocks. 
 
 Fig. 2Q0. 
 
 Fig. 290 shows a very practical form. The journal is cast on a 
 plate strengthened by heavy cross arms, and a wrought iron 
 ring is shrunk on, while the whole is fastened to the shaft by 
 the four bolts, whose nuts are let into the wood, as shown. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 BEARINGS, 
 I 103. 
 
 Design and Proportion. 
 The mechanical devices bj' which the journals of shafts and 
 axles are carried are called bearings. A complete bearing 
 
 construction of bearings, and the following example will show 
 its use : * 
 
 The poles O, O^, 0^, Fig. 294, are used for the journal diam- 
 eter d ; the poles F, F^ and /^j. fo^ those dimensions which de- 
 pend on the modulus i/i= 1.15 fi?-f-o.4^'. This gives di:=0. 
 
 , the boxes ; 2, the body or 
 
 be divided into three portions 
 frame ; 3, the connecting parts. 
 
 The various forms may be divided according to their uses 
 into the two main classes : 
 
 A. Bearings for Lateral journals or Lateral Bearings. 
 B Bearings for end-long pressure or Thrust Bearings. 
 Under these classes the principal distinction is to be made as 
 to the side on which the bearing is to be supported 
 
 , Figs, 
 
 Fig. 
 
 suppose the journal to be inclosed m a cut 
 291, 292, we have for lateral bearings 
 
 A Pillow Block, when the base lies in i, 2, 3, 
 A Wall Bearing, " " " " 1-8 or 2-8, 
 A Front Bearing, " " " " T-6or4-7, 
 A Hanger, " " " " 5-7. 
 
 For Thrust Bearings we may have Foot Step Bearings, Wall 
 Step Bearings, or Hanging Step Bearings. 
 
 Especial care is to be taken for the equalization of wear and 
 for efficient lubrication, and these points affect mainly the 
 boxes. 
 
 The examples which follow have only been selected from the 
 vast number of forms to show typical cases. 
 
 The dimensions are based upon a proportional scale. As the 
 unit for the thickness of the brasses we have ^=0.07 d -\- Ys'^, 
 d being the bore of the boxes, and volues of e are given in the 
 second column of the table in ? 91. The modulus for the body 
 of the bearings is : 
 
 ^1 = 1.15^-1-0.4'' (107) 
 
 ^.—LATERAL BEARINGS 
 I 104. 
 
 Pii,i<ow Block 
 
 In Fig. 293 is shown a form of pillow biock suitable for jour- 
 nals from 1%" to W . The proportions of the body and cap 
 are based on the modulus d^ (see 107), with the exception of 
 the oil cup on the cap, which would then be rather too large for 
 small bearings, in which it is made in length equal to the 
 width of the cap, and in width equal to 0.7 a',. 
 
 The length of the boxes is dependent upon the length of the 
 journal, which, as discussed in § 90, may be 1.5 d, 2 d, etc. 
 For the form shown a good proportion is 1=^2 d, the projecting 
 portion of the boxes being governed by the proportion of 
 length to diameter adopted. 
 
 The bolts for the base plate are made somewhat heavier than 
 those for the cap, as they are screwed up much tighter, and 
 they are often made with special heads to fit a separate sole 
 plate as shown in Fig. 294. The ends of the base are given a 
 bevel in order to permit the use of side keys. The coring out 
 of the sole plate reduces its weigh and also simplifies the ma- 
 chine work. The spaces between the cap and the body of the 
 bearing are filled with slips of wood so that the cap bolts may 
 be tightened without binding the shaft. In cases where the 
 load is great, the pressure alternating, the joint is closely fitted 
 without spaces, and if wear in the journal is to be taken up the 
 surfaces are filed down. 
 
 when d = 
 
 (-z_° 
 
 = 0.34'', hence P must be placed when 
 
 the vertical space between the rays Oa and Ob is equal to 
 — 0.34''. The intersection of the rays from O and from P, by the 
 ordinates I, II, etc., give the dimensions of the corresponding 
 sizes. The dimensions of the boxes must be obtained from 
 another pole, as they depend upon another modulus. This 
 
 modulus is ^ = .07 ^-f- ^" and becomes = O, when d = 
 
 I 105. 
 
 Proportionai< Scale for Pillow Blocks. 
 
 The proportional scale may be used to great advantage ii 
 
 vertical line on which the distance a' b' equals i .']'&". For 
 
 the oil cup in the cap the width is : 
 
 0.25 di+ 0.4'' = 0.4'^ +0.25 (0.4'' -f- 1. 15 d) = 
 = 0.29 d -H 0.5'' 
 = 4.16 (.07 a'-|->^'0=4-i6^ 
 
 Hence E is also the pole for the oil cup. 
 
 * The firm of Escher, Wyss & Co , in Zurich, have used the proportional ■ 
 scale very well for. designing bearings, both in determining the geometrical 
 proportions throughout and also by the excellent method of a single pole. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 69 
 
 Various Forms op Journal Boxes. 
 
 It is often found convenient to give the boxes of a pillow- 
 ^lock other forms than those of the preceding illustrations, as 
 for example octagonal, as in Fig. 295, or cylindrical, as in Figs. 
 296 and 297. The last two forms are suitable for bearings in 
 lathe headstocks, and in such cases the boxes are kept from 
 
 XJX^XJ 
 
 Fig. 295. 
 
 Fig. 2 
 
 Fig. 297. 
 
 slipping out of place by the flanges whose width is le, as shown 
 in Fig. 296, or by projecting pins. Fig. 297, fitting into recesses 
 in the base and cap. Each of these forms has its advantages 
 and objections, and it is hardly possible to decide which form is 
 the most desirable, special conditions being generally present. 
 The modifications in the base and cap to admit the forms shown 
 in Figs. 296 and 297 are readily made without requiring detailed 
 instructions. 
 
 Boxes in which white metal or similar compositions are used 
 require special construction, since these materials are not strong 
 enough to resist the stresses with the same security as solid 
 bronze boxes ; for such bearings a cast-iron or bronze shell is 
 made, in which a lining of the softer metal can be poured, as in 
 Fig. 298. In such cases the shell should be cleaned with acid 
 and tinned before pouring the lining metal. 
 
 Boxes of lignum vitse (see W 97-117) must be made of 
 simple shape. A convenient shape is shown in Fig. 299, 
 which the general form of the bearing may be made. 
 
 In America examples are often found of bearings in which 
 
 Fig. 299. 
 
 Fig. 300. 
 
 the form shown in Fig. 294, ?. 105, so that the base may be re- 
 moved from the base plate when necessary without disturbing 
 
 the soliJity of the latter. The body of the pillow block is cored 
 out to a greater extent than in the previous form, and when 
 
 the journal is used for a crank shaft, or is subjected to jarring 
 strains, the cap bolts should be provided with jam nuts, or some 
 of the other forms of security, such as is shown in ^ 85. 
 
 PiLi^ov/ Bi,ocK with Adjustabi,e Bearing. 
 
 In many cases it is only necessary to adjust the height of 
 
 pillow blocks from time to time by inserting liners beneath the 
 
 the soft metal is run directly into recesses in the base and 
 cap. Fig. 300 shows such a bearing as made for the journals of 
 fan-blowers and shafting, by Sturtevant, of Boston. The base is 
 hollowed out to serve as an oil chamber, and the oil is fed to 
 the journal by a wick. The details are shown in Fig. 301. These 
 journals are made very long (I = 4^), and hence the superficial 
 pressure is small. 
 
 I 107. 
 
 Narrow Base Bearings. Large Pii<i<ow Bi<ocks. 
 
 It is often desirable, when space is limited, to make bearings 
 with narrow bases, and this may be done by making the cap- 
 bolts with collars as shown in Fig. 321, and also Fig. 312. This 
 permits the holding down bolts to be dispensed with, and space 
 saved. Such collared bolts are also used for pillow blocks, 
 which are subjected to both upward and downward stresses, 
 since the boxes are firmly bound together (see \ 88). Fig. 302 
 shows a form of pillow block for journals of 8 to 12 inches in 
 diameter. It is made with four cap bolts and four base bolts, 
 by which it is secured to the base plate. The base bolts are of 
 
 Fig. 303. 
 
 base, but in some situations it is desirable to provide a special 
 means of obtaining such an adjustment. In Fig. 303 is shown 
 such an adjustable bearing for use in screw propeller shafts. 
 
 The body of the bearing is not bolted down, but rests solely 
 by its weight upon the wedge system, by means of which it can 
 be raised or lowered as may be found necessary. The upper 
 box is provided with flanges through which the cap bolts (omit- 
 ted in the illustration) pass. The lower box is lined with white 
 metal, which is poured into the recessed bearing. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Adjustable Pillow Blocks. 
 
 Many attempts have been made to arrange the boxes in a 
 pillow block so that they may be self-adjusting and so adapt 
 themselves to various positions, which the journal may assume 
 and secure for it at all times a full bearing and support.* For 
 this purpose, among other methods, the plan has been adopted 
 of making the boxes with central spherical portion fitting into 
 corresponding recesses in the body of the pillow block. This 
 form of bearing has been widely introduced in America by 
 Messrs. Wm. Sellers & Co., and adapted to a great variety of 
 positions. 
 
 Sellers has always urged the desirability of the principle of 
 keeping the pressure between journal and bearing at a mini- 
 mum.! This practice permits the use of cast iron boxes, for 
 which a pressure of not more than 15 pounds per square inch is 
 used. J 
 
 The use of moderate superficial pressures is most practicable 
 in the case of bearings for line shafting in which the propor- 
 tions may be made such as to give but light pressure. This ad- 
 vantage will be seen on reference to § 92.^ 
 
 Fig. 304 shows Sellers' form of pillow block. The cast iron 
 boxes are made with a spherical enlargement in the middle, 
 which is held between corresponding recesses in the cap and 
 base. The boxes are prevented from revolving by the hollows 
 
 Another form of adjustable pillow block is shown in Fig. 
 305. This is used by Sturtevant in some of his fan blowers. In 
 this case the ratio of l to dis very great (see example 4, ^ 91). 
 The adjustability is obtained by pivoting the bearing A upon a 
 
 Fig. 304. 
 
 in the sides which receive the bodies of the cap bolts. Three 
 openings are made for oil or grease and two drip cups, which 
 are cast on the base plate, serve to receive the superfluous oil. j| 
 
 The modulus upon which the proportions of this bearing are 
 based, is not that given in (107), but the following :^ 
 
 D 
 
 = lAd- 
 
 . (108) 
 
 The length of the boxes = 4 d. The shape adopted by Sel- 
 lers shows the care in modelling which is characteristic of the 
 American designs of engineers. The Sellers' bearings have 
 been used to a considerable extent in Germany. 
 
 at 
 
 * Vari< 
 
 s designs 
 
 tTreatise on Machine tools, et< 
 phia, Lippincott, 1873, p. 161. 
 
 X As an example of the perfon 
 cites a bearing which had been in 
 lower box was not yet worn to a 
 made 50 revolutions per minute ; 
 the bearing a 72 in. pulley, of 20 
 
 been made by Bodmer at Manchester, Schonherr 
 
 rhann, and Zimmerman at Karlsruhe. 
 
 tools, etc., as made by W. Sellers & Co., Philadel- 
 
 ndw 
 
 e for sixteen years and ir 
 over its entire surface. 
 
 
 __ _ __ ^ _ own that after a year's use the tool 
 
 visible. The small superficial pressure does _ __ ._ 
 
 hence the journal is carried on a film of lubricant The 
 oil is very small, and Messrs. Sellers state that a shaft 
 tions per minute consumed but 2 14 ounces of oil in six i 
 
 § As au example of the impracticable 
 attempt to obtain such light pressures 
 Sellers' value of 15 pounds per square i 
 /"= 17,600 lbs., we have for a wrought ir 
 the pressure, from the table in §91, d 
 from formula (90) — =11.9 and froi 
 
 the 
 
 - . . ._.-iths. 
 
 lults which would follow from i 
 overhung journals, we may tal 
 h and apply it to an example. 
 
 shaft with a constant direction 
 4'', /= 6". If p = 15 lbs. we ha 
 ;89) we have d = it. 2"; hence 2 
 
 e of tallow and oil, which becomes i 
 mgen, i876,;p. 89. 
 
 Fig. 305. 
 
 cross bolt B, which passes through the cheeks of the pedestal 
 also ; the latter being adjustable about the axis BC. The bear- 
 ing is lined with white metal, and the end thrust is taken up by 
 a block of lignum vitse. If an adjustment in the direction A A 
 is required, the bolt (T may be loosened and the required move- 
 ment made. The provision for lubrication is especially note- 
 worthy both in the manner of supply and in the collection of 
 the overflow. 
 
 Bearings v 
 
 I Three-Part Boxes. 
 
 In horizontal steam engines and in similar service, the 
 pressure upon the journal is thrown first on one side and then 
 on the other, while at the same time there is a constant vertical 
 pressure, such for instance as is due to the weight of a fly 
 wheel. Attempts to remedy the tendency to overwear by mak- 
 ing the boxes inclined, have proved but a partial remedy, and the 
 best method of construction in such cases is to make the box 
 in three parts, one of which receives the constant vertical 
 pressure, while the other two provide for the backward and for- 
 ward thrust. Such a bearing is shown in Fig. 306. The modu- 
 lus di = i.i^ d -\- oa". The bottom box rests on two wedges 
 which are tapped with screw threads and can be adjusted and 
 locked at any desired point by the bolts shown. The side boxes 
 are each held up by two steel set screws ; a wrought iron plate 
 being interposed between the screws and the boxes. If it be- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 comes necessary to remove the side boxes the cap is first taken 
 ofiF, and the iron plates taken out, when the boxes can be sepa- 
 rated far enough from the shaft to permit their removal without 
 
 those cases in which an alternating up and down pressure is 
 combined with a constant lateral pressure. The latter would 
 not be provided for in an ordinary pillow block, but here it 
 
 is taken up by the small side box. This form is suited for 
 small vertical engines in which the pull of the belt is toward 
 one side. 
 
 I III. 
 
 Pedestal Bearings. 
 
 Bearings which are not placed directly upon a base plate, but 
 
 are raised upon feet or pedestal are called pedestal bearings 
 
 interference with the shaft. The body of the bearing is in 
 creased in width in order to provide for the ^increased lateral 
 pressure. 
 
 Another three-part bearing * is shown in Fig. 307. In this 
 case there is no vertical adjustment to the lower box— and if 
 necessary it must be raised by packing underneath. The side 
 boxes are set up by wedges which are adjusted by set screws 
 through the cap. Each wedge carries a screw on its upper end, 
 and the nuts for these screws are fitted so as to revolve in the 
 cap, being turned by a wrench on the hexagonal head, and 
 then clamped in position by the thin jam nut shown. The 
 heavy inclined ribs stiffen the body of the bearing to resist the 
 stock and thrust of the piston. It is often convenient (as in 
 the case of the original of the figure) to cast the body of the 
 bearing in one piece with the bed plate of the engine. 
 
 A third, and simple form of three-part bearing (by Schultz 
 Brothers in Mayence) is shown in Fig. 308. It is suitable for 
 
 * From a steam engine by the Soc. Fives- r.iUe in Paris. 
 
 Fig. 309. 
 
 That shown in Fig. 309 is similar to the one in Fig. 293, placed 
 upon a pedestal. Such pedestals vary greatly both in form and 
 height. The width of the foot is made equal to the height of 
 the journal in the form shown, which gives the base and the 
 legs a sufficiently slender appearance. 
 
 Wai,!, Bearings. 
 
 The wall bearing shown in Fig. 310 is the same as shown in 
 Fig. 293, with the addition of the bracket. The base here is 
 placed at right angles to the joint in the boxes and parallel to 
 the axis of the bearing, the whole being made in the bracket 
 form shown. 
 
 The cap and the boxes are of the same form and proportions 
 as for a pillow block for the same size journal. The bolts may 
 either be tapped into the body of the bearing, or made as stud 
 bolts, using the forms shown in Figs. 225 and 226 ^ 83, with 
 key. 
 
 For larger sizes the opening in the plate should be surrounded 
 with a rib of a thickness o.io'j and width = o.4(fj, the latter 
 being measured in the direction of the axis of the journal. . 
 
 Fig. 311 shows an adjustable wall bearing by Sellers. In this 
 case the cast iron boxes are somewhat lighter than for pillow 
 blocks and are made with a cylindrical cross piece in the 
 middle, in which the spherical seats are placed. The especial 
 feature is the method by which the vertical adjustment is made. 
 The two plugs which support the boxes have cast upon them a 
 very shallow screw thread, and the nuts in the sockets have 
 also their threads cast in them. The thread only extends along 
 
72 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 a portion of the length of the plugs as shown, in order to per- 
 mit securing them in position. This is done by the two self 
 screws which clamp them firmly in their places. 
 
 The opening through the upper plug gives access for the tube 
 of a lubricator. 
 
 Fig. 310. 
 
 The projection from the wall a is made constant for bear- 
 ings for journals 2" to 4" in diameter and equals b" . The ele- 
 gance of the form is noticeable in the principal elevation and 
 also in the horizontal section. 
 
 Yoke Bearings. 
 The bearings used on vertical shafts may be considered as a 
 variety of wall bearings. In situations where the space is lim- 
 ited the forms shown are not always convenient, the first, be- 
 cause it is not symmetrically disposed about the parting of the 
 
 By removing the cap, the wedge and the block can be easi- 
 ly removed and the shaft moved sideways to a sufficient extent 
 to permit the removal of the boxes. The cap bolts are provided 
 with collars forged upon them and serve also to fasten the bear- 
 ing in place. The modulus for the dimensions is the same as 
 (107), fl'i = i.\^d +0.4^'.* 
 
 Wall Brackets. ■ 
 
 In Fig. 313 is shown a form of bearing similar to Fig. 293, 
 
 which may be called a wall bracket bearing. The cap bolts 
 
 are inserted from below, which permits their ready removal and 
 
 replacement. If only two bolts are used in the wall plate, it is 
 
 Fig. 311. 
 
 boxes, and the second, because of the space it requires. For 
 this service a compact, symmetrical bearing, whose base is at 
 right angles to the parting of the boxes, is often very desirable. 
 Such a construction is shown in Fig. 312, and may be called a 
 Yoke Bearing. In this case the cap and body together form a 
 rectangular yoke, in which the bronze boxes are placed in a 
 transverse direction. In the illustration the wear can only be 
 taken up in one direction, but if it is desired in both directions 
 the cast iron block on the right may be replaced by a wedge as 
 shown on the left. 
 
 desirable that it should be held from lateral motion between 
 wedges, and should also be firmly secured against vertical mo- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 lions by some of the methods given in the following chapter. 
 Where 'it is not practicable to secure it in this manner, four 
 bolts should be used. 
 
 Fig. 314. 
 
 Another form of wall bracket is shown in Fig. 314. It is sim- 
 ilar to the Yoke Bearing, and can often be of service, as for 
 example in Fig. 350, I 126, although it is not of as general ap- 
 plication as the preceding form. The bolts for the cap are 
 made with heads, of the ordinary cap screw form. 
 
 Various other wall and bracket bearings may be inade by 
 combination of a wall plate and pillow block in different po- 
 sitions, and these may be grouped in the general class of Arm 
 Bearings, each form being governed by the conditions of the 
 special case under consideration. 
 
 US- 
 Hangers. 
 According to the definition in \ 103 a pillow block by inver- 
 sion becomes a hanger, the pressure of the journal falling upon 
 the cap box. If the journal is one of wrought iron proportioned 
 to bear the loads given in ^ 91, the bolts for the cap and base 
 plate will not be strong enough if determined from the same 
 
 This gives for the diameter of the cap bolts 7.4 x 0.2 = 1.48'^, 
 say I %". A neck journal of d^i" diameter to bear the same 
 load would have for its normal unit rf = 1.15 x 6.75 -f- 0.4 = 
 8.15'^, which is greater than the preceding value and hence may 
 be used safely, even should the full load be carried by the cap. 
 
 Sellers makes a short hanger which resembles in form and 
 dimensions the corresponding size pillow block, with the boxes 
 turned 180° and the drip cups cast on the cap instead of the 
 base. In most cases, however, a greater distance is required be- 
 tween the shaft and the base plate for hangers than is given in 
 pillow blocks, for which reason they are best considered as a 
 separate form of construction. 
 
 The hanger shown in Fig. 315 is called, from its form, a 
 Ribbed Hanger. The boxes are carried in the hook-shaped por- 
 tion below, their form bei ng the same as we have already 
 shown. The cap is secured with a key and clamped in the de- 
 sired position by the bolt shown. 
 
 For journals of less than 2 inches diameter, but one bolt need 
 be used in each foot, and in such case their diameter is = 0.3 d^, 
 the bosses on the plate be altered to correspond. 
 
 Fig. 315- 
 
 This is 
 
 D' = 
 
 .75 d -f 0.4' 
 
 If a pillow block is to be used as a hanger for a neck journal, 
 the cap bolts should be increased to such size as would be given 
 by the use of formula (109), in which (/is the diameter of the 
 neck journal corresponding to an equivalent end journal. 
 
 Example: A load of 17,600 lbs. would give, according to the 
 table in ^91 for a wrought iron journal a diameter of about 4 
 inches. If this load is carried on the cap of the bearing we use 
 the modulus, 
 
 Fig. 316. 
 
 In the Post Hanger, Fig. 316, the general arrangement is the 
 same as in the preceding form, the principal difference being in 
 the frame. The column is made hollow and its internal diam- 
 eter^ 0.55 dy For the larger sizes four bolt holes are made in 
 the base plate, as shown in Fig. 315. 
 
 Hangers are not generally bolted directly to the ceiling 
 beams, but to strong pieces, or intermediate timbers, and by 
 
 unit of proportion as already given for such bearing: 
 also true for the cap, and feet of the base. 
 
 For this service, good dimensions may be obtained by using 
 for the boxes the previous modulus o'j = 1.15 fi^ -f- 0.4'', and also 
 E as before, and for all other portions the special modulus, 
 
 • (109) 
 
 Fig. 317. 
 
 i 
 
 Fig. 318. 
 
 D 
 
 1.75 d + OA" = 1-75 s A" + OA" = 1A" 
 
 varying the thickness of these pieces any desired amount of 
 drop may be obtained. If the variation is too great to be se- 
 cured in this manner a different depth hanger must be used. 
 If the building is of so-called fire-proof construction, with 
 
74 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 ceilings of iron beams and brick arches, the form of the base 
 of the hanger must be correspondingly modified. A practical 
 method is shown in Fig. 317, in which hook bolts are used. The 
 bolts, which are four in number, pass through sockets cast in 
 the base of the hanger, and their method of attachment avoids 
 weakening the beam. The base of the hanger is made with 
 ledges which fit over the edge of the beam and permit the use 
 of wedges on each side. 
 
 The form shown in Fig. 318, which is due to Fairbairn is in- 
 tended to bring the shaft parallel to the beam, while the pre- 
 vious form carries the shaft at right angles to the beams. The 
 attachment of the hanger both to the beam and the arch makes 
 a very secure fastening, but the inaccessibility of the bolt head 
 is an objection. In this case also the beam is not weakened by 
 drilling, hook bolts and keys being used, as in the previous 
 
 Fig 319 
 
 I 116. 
 
 Adjustable Hangers. 
 
 {JThe most generally used of the Sellers' adjustable bearings is 
 
 tlie^hanger shown in Fig. 319. ^ The^ method of holding and 
 
 Fig. 320. 
 
 adjusting the boxes by means of screw plugs is the same as 
 shown in the wall bearings, Fig. 311. Especially to be noted is 
 the attachment of the drip cup, which may be easily removed 
 by withdrawing the small pin with enlarged ends. 
 
 The drop, or distance from base to centre of shaft, =: a = 
 3.5 «'/ in the illustration, but in some cases it must be made 
 greater. These hangers, like all of Sellers' bearings, show 
 very careful modeling and proportioning, which the small size 
 of the illustrations can only imperfectly show. 
 
 In Fig. 320 is shown Sellers' countershaft hanger. In this 
 form the shaft is put in place from the side, and the amount of 
 wear in the boxes is so slight that they are made solid, instead 
 of in halves. The cap — which is secured by a bolt, holds the 
 box in place, and the drip cup is cast i:i one piece with the 
 body of the hanger and provision is made for a drip cock to 
 remove the waste oil. 
 
 The illustration shows also the arm for carrying the belt 
 shifter. 
 
 Sturtevant uses ball aud socket hangers also for the counter- 
 shafts of his fan blowers. These are somewhat different from 
 the preceding. Fig. 321 shows the boxes in perspective and in 
 cross section. The section shows the white metal lining and 
 also the arrangement of double oil chambers, which, by means 
 
 Fig. 321. 
 
 Fig. 322. 
 
 of wicking, keep the journal lubricated." The outer ends of the 
 box casting are formed into drip channels, and also receive the 
 shoulders on the shaft. These shoulders, as shown in Fig. 
 322, run freely in the boxes without contact. The journal as 
 shown is on the end of the shaft, and the pressure is so small 
 that the wear is inappreciable. 
 
 \ 117. 
 Special Forms of Bearings. 
 In propeller shafts where the screw is arranged to be lifted it 
 is necessary to design bearings which are to be entirely im- 
 mersed in water. Penn's practice is to line such bearings with 
 wood, which has proved especially satisfactory. In Fig. 323, is 
 given an illustration of such a bearing as constructed by 
 Ravenhill & Hodgson, the diameter of the shaft being about 
 19 inches. The body of the bearing is of bronze, the boxes are 
 of cylindrical section fitted with strips of lignum vitae set in a 
 
 Fig. 323- 
 
 special lining metal. The pin, projecting from the bottom, 
 enters into a corresponding rece.ss in the stern frame, when the 
 screw is lowered into place. 
 
 On the Prussian State Railway there have recently been 
 adopted two standard forms of bearings for use under cars — one 
 form being for bronze, the other for white metal boxes. In 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 324 is shown details in partial section of the latter form, 
 with a few dimensions. The bearing is made in two principal 
 parts, the body and the lower portion, both being provided 
 with oil chambers having openings and covers to keep oat the 
 dust. The joint between the two parts is in the horizontal 
 plane passing through the axis of the journal, the parts being 
 
 body of the bearing is a filling block, somewhat similar to that 
 used in the bearing shown in Fig. 312, arranged so that its re- 
 moval facilitates the changing of boxes. 
 
 Fig. 324. 
 
 kept in position by three dowel pins. A wrought iron yoke 
 holds the lower portion up to the body of the bearing by means 
 of the bolt shown, the head being secured by the internal hex- 
 agonal socket shown. 
 
 The white metal lining is cast in the body of the box by be- 
 ing poured upon thejourual. The inner end of the journalis 
 provided with a wooden dust guard packed with a ring of felt. 
 
 As will be seen, lubrication is provided both above and be- 
 low. The upper chamber contains wicking and affords a means 
 of prompt and copious lubrication in case the journal grows 
 hot. The principal source of lubrication, however, is from be- 
 low, the oil being wiped upon the journal by a brush, which is 
 fed with oil by a wick reaching into the chamber below. The 
 oil brush is shown, with its spring holders in the lower right 
 hajid corner of the illustration. 
 
 In order to permit the boxes to adjust themselves to the • 
 journal when the axle assumes an inclined position with re- 
 gard to the bearing a certain amount of play is given, as is 
 shown in the plan view, where the ledges cast upon the 
 bearing are made parallel for a short distance and then diverge 
 from below upward from a width of 34 mm. to 42 mm . 
 
 All the dimensions in Fig. 324 are in millimeters, as this is a 
 standard Prussian railway journal box. 
 
 This construction is undoubtedly well adapted to meet the 
 requirements, but it is a question whether the results might not 
 be attained by simpler means.* 
 
 The second form of standard bearing of the Prussian Railways 
 differs from the first mainly in the boxes. These are cast of 
 bronze with semi-cylindrical projections on the track, which 
 enter into corresponding recesses in the bearing, and permit 
 the boxes to adjust themselves to the journal. 
 
 The guides for the bearings are given an amount of play 
 similar to the previous form, and there is no change in the de- 
 tails of the lower portion. 
 
 Fig. 325 shows a form of American axle bearing. This is sim- 
 ilar to the older pattern designed by Lightner f It is only ar- 
 ranged for lubrication from below and is designed so as to per- 
 mit a box to be removed and replaced in the shortest possible 
 time. The body is of very simple form and is cast in one piece 
 and a large opening and lid renders it readily accessible from 
 without. The box is made of bronze, and between it and the 
 
 This filling block, which is sometimes rounded on top to 
 provide adjustment, is held between two small projections, but 
 can easily be removed when the pressure is removed by use of 
 a liftingjack. The change of boxes can be effected in a few 
 minutes. 
 
 A brush or pad for distributing the oil is not used, but instead 
 the vacant space in the bearing is packed with waste, which 
 feeds the oil to the journal. This form of journal box has 
 proved very efficient in service.* 
 
 B. THRUST BEARINGS. 
 
 Step Bearings. 
 
 In Fig. 326 is shown a form of step bearing for vertical shaft. 
 
 The bearing piece or step proper is made with very obtuse 
 
 •'T^ 
 
 S^^z^S\v^c 
 
 boxes. The cost 
 
 Fig. 326. 
 
 point on the under side in order that it may be able to adjust 
 itself to the shaft. In order to provide for adjustment in the 
 position of the bearing the bolt holes in the baseplate are 
 elongated in a cross- wise direction, while those in the bearing 
 are elongated length-wise, thus permitting adjustment in any 
 direction. 
 
 I 119- 
 Wali, Step Bearings. 
 The following is a modified form of step bearings, and is in- 
 tended to be used with the wall plate supported on a key be- 
 neath its lower edge ; this key may be made = 0.8 d-^ deep, so 
 
 ; represents an investment upon which every 
 truction foots up an important total, 
 iervorrichtungen (Lubrication), Wiesbaden, 1864, 
 
 and at that ti 
 
76 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 that by its removal the bearing may be taken from under the 
 journal, without removing the shaft from its place. 
 
 Thrust Bearings ^ 
 
 [ Wooden Surfaces. 
 
 For bearings which are operated wet, the use of Lignum 
 Vitee has been found to give the best results. The wood is 
 inserted in a similar manner to that shown in § 117, the pieces 
 being made in the form of plugs. In Fig. 329 is shown the 
 step of a screw propeller shaft of this 
 type. The plugs are inserted in a 
 bronze plate, and the end of the*shaft 
 faced with bronze. 
 
 A bearing of this form on the 
 " Orontes " had 37 plugs each i^'"* 
 diameter, and on 50 H. P. nominal 
 English gunboats the thrust plates 
 have 7 plugs each 2." diameter. Both 
 these examples are by James Watt 
 &Co. 
 
 Collar bearings with surfaces of 
 wood are often made ; these should 
 be always worked under water. Penn, 
 to whom the introduction of such 
 wooden beariug surfaces is mainly due, 
 has especially used them in various 
 bearings in the length of a screw pro- 
 peller shaft, the lower half of the shaft 
 running in a water trough. The usual 
 thrust ring between the hub of the screw 
 shown in Fig. 330. A is the 
 
 Fig. 329. 
 
 construction of thi 
 
 propeller and the stern post 
 
 shaft with a bronze sleeve fitting into the woo'deu lining of thL 
 
 hole through the stern tube ; B is the hub of the screw pro- 
 
 The recess in the step plate serves an oil chamber ; end- 
 long wear may be taken up very conveniently by the adjust- 
 ment provided by the set screw. 
 
 ? 120. 
 Independent Step Bearings. 
 
 In many cases, as in examples by Belgian designers, the 
 lower bearing of a vertical shaft is divided into two independent 
 parts, a pure lateral bearing and a pure thrust bearing. For 
 the lateral bearing ma}' be used a pillow block or yoke bearing 
 of one of the forms alreadj' described, while the vertical thrust 
 is taken by a simple step quite close to the preceding bearing. 
 This makes the step bearing readily accessible and also readily 
 adjustable in the direction of wear. 
 
 The following example is selected from among a number of 
 such bearings. 
 
 Fig. 330. 
 
 peller ; C, the thrust ring with its wooden plugs ; D is the 
 nozzle on the end of the stern tube showing the stiffening ribs 
 which assist in receiving the thrust. The parts B, C, D and 
 E are of bronze. 
 
 The step itself is made of bronze. This is carried on the 
 bluntly coned head of the stout set screw, a steel plate being 
 interposed, while the prismatic form of the screw head pre- 
 vents rotation of the step. The screw itself is kept from mov- 
 ing bj' Penn's method within the bearing, and the whole is 
 bolted down to a base plate. The modulus for the dimensions 
 is the same as before. An application of this form is shown in 
 I 126. 
 
 
 ¥ 
 
 "R^l^^MilIll 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ■1 
 
 Fig. 331. 
 
 Fig. 331 shows a form of thrust ring used on the imperial 
 steamships "Kaiser," "Friedrich Karl," "Preussen," "Vineta," 
 "Freya," "Ariadne," "Nautilus" and "Cyklop." The ring 
 is made in halves, and can readily be removed and replaced. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 77 
 
 The two axial projections enter into recesses in the flange on 
 the end of the tube, and prevent the thrust ring from revolving. 
 The dimensions of the wooden bearing surfaces on the various 
 ships above named are approximately as given in the following 
 table : 
 
 6K- 
 4.078 
 
 Friedr. 
 
 0.740 2.629 
 
 Ariad- ! Nauti- 
 
 ■ ■■■■■ 1 
 
 ftftttJ 
 
 iP\. 
 
 Fig- 333- 
 
 take-up of the wear upon the rings. The cross section in upper 
 right hand portion of the illustration shows the construction 
 and application of the bronze rings. The arrangement provides 
 for a constant distribution of grease, thus preventing the rust- 
 ing of the journal by the application of water for cooling. 
 
 In the "Wasp-' the thrust ring is made with 6 sectors of 3 iS5 
 sq. ft. surface , in the " Iveipzig" there are 80 small sectors with 
 a total surface of 2.422 sq. ft. The use of such thrust rings filled 
 with blocks of lignum vitae has been most successful in vessels 
 of the German nav)', and the wear on the wood has been so 
 slight that renewal is rarely necessary. 
 
 §122. 
 MUI^TIPLE Coi.i:<AR BEARINGS. 
 
 For thrust bearings which are subjected to heavy service, the 
 multiple collar bearing is most valuable. These are very gen- 
 erally used to receive the thrust of screw propellers, but are 
 also used in other situations, as, for example, large turbines, 
 also centrifugal machines of great size and weight, such as are 
 used in sugar refineries. The forms which may be given to 
 these bearings are quite varied; but in every case the most 
 important consideration is the pressure to which the various 
 surfaces are subjected. 
 
 For pillow blocks in which the shaft is made with several 
 collars, the boxes may be cast in bronze with internal collars 
 
 In Figs. 336 and 337 is shown a thrust bearing by Penn, as 
 used on the "Kaiser." Here the bearing surfaces are made in 
 separate rings of still simpler form than the preceding. These 
 
 as shown in Fig. 332.* For larger dimensions, the boxes may 
 be strengthened by ring shaped ribs, let into recesses in the 
 cap and body of the bearing. 
 
 Example . — The thrust bearing on the " City of Richmond," built by Todd 
 STMacGregor, of Glasgow, from the designs of Jafifrey.t has 12 rings; inside 
 diameter, 19''; outside diameter, 23"; total length of the bearing, 43%". The 
 boxes are strengthened by three ribs of J^" depth by 4" wide. The engines 
 indicate 3340 H. P., and the speed of the vessel is about 1342 feet per minute 
 
 James Watt & Co. make the boxes free in the bearing, and 
 support them by set screws at the ends, as shown in Fig. 333. 
 On the "Medusa" and 
 "Triton" four set screws 
 are used in each flange, 
 the shaft being 7" diam- 
 eter, with six rings. In 
 the "Jason," by the same 
 firm, there are six set 
 screws in each flange, the 
 shaft being \2" diameter, 
 with eight riugs.j 
 
 Boxes of cast iron lined 
 with white metal are 
 sometimes used by various makers, as, for example, in the 
 "Mooltan" by Day & Co., in which the shaft is 13X" diameter, 
 and has twelve rings. The design shown in Fig. 334, which is 
 a French pattern, uses an adjustable bearing lined with white 
 
 In Fig. 335 is shown a form of thrust bearing in which the 
 rings are made of bronze separately, and fitted to the body and 
 cap. This form is the design of Ravenhill & Hodgson. Espe- 
 cially to be noted is the arrangement of bolts. These are in 
 two sets, the first securing the body of the bearing to the sole 
 plate, and the second being the cap bolts. The ledge or tongue 
 which is let into the sole plate is arranged with a space as 
 shown on the left, in which a key is fitted to provide for the 
 
 rings, which are made of bronze, are in halves for convenience 
 of construction. In the "Kaiser" d is equal to i8>^'^, and there 
 are eight rings on the shaft and in the bearing. The six bolts 
 
 are arranged so as to act both as cap bolts and fastenings for 
 the bearing. The adjustment for wear is similar to the pre- 
 ceding case. The dimensions are based on the same modulus 
 as already given, viz. : d-^^= 1.15 d-\- o.df'. 
 
 A most noticeable form of thrust bearing is that of Maudslay, 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 shown in Figs. 338 to 340, as used on the "Elizabeth." For 
 each collar ou the shaft there is provided a separate ring and 
 support, with means for ample 
 lubrication. The bearing rings 
 are made of horse shoe form, 
 and are of cast iron lined with 
 white metal. The collars on 
 the shaft dip into an oil 
 trough. They are also pro- 
 vided with oil cups above, so 
 that as in the case of the car 
 axle box previously described, 
 lubrication is supplied both 
 above and below. Each ring 
 may be adjusted by its own 
 set screws, or all can be ad- 
 justed together. The propor- 
 tions are all based upon the 
 previous modulus, fl'i^= 1.15 c? 
 -f-0.4", and the shape and 
 dimensions give an excellent 
 appearance. In the " Eliza- 
 
 ExAMPLES OF Thrust Bearings. 
 The following examples are taken from twelve of the most 
 important vessels of the German navy, the data being furnished 
 to the author with the approval and authority of the Chief 
 of Admiralty. The power and speed of the engines and the 
 velocity of the vessel are all most important data, and are 
 obtained from ofiELcial tests. From these may be obtained, as 
 
 in \ 100, the maximum pressure upon the thrust bearing sur- 
 faces. It is important to observe that in only two cases out of 
 the tw'elve was a thrust ring used between the stern post and 
 
 Fig. 338. 
 
 Fig. 340. 
 
 propeller hub. The elasticity of the hull of the ship may some- 
 times cause the entire force to be thrown on the thrust bearing, 
 and at other times much may be taken by the thrust ring. The 
 data given in the table will also be found valuable for other 
 purposes. 
 
 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THRUST BEARINGS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 No. 
 
 Name 
 Vessel 
 
 Engines. 
 
 =1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 h 
 
 s 
 
 •si 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 ft 
 
 °i2 
 
 Is 
 
 u 
 
 ll 
 
 i-r 
 
 11 
 ll 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oil 
 
 
 No 
 
 ' 
 
 Konig Wilhelm. 
 
 Mandslay Sons & Field, 
 London. 
 
 8325 
 
 I49I 
 
 18" 
 
 63.86 
 
 6 
 
 mony. 
 
 8.467 
 
 24K" 
 
 18" 
 
 Water. 
 
 Worked 
 well. 
 
 Ran warm 
 
 thrust 
 .ring 
 
 post. 
 Thrust 
 
 
 Armored Frigate 
 Kaiser. 
 
 JohnPenn & Sons, 
 Greenwich. 
 
 7803.3 
 
 1457 
 
 18" 
 
 77.00 
 
 8 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 7.104 
 
 23" 
 
 18IV' 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 before the 
 thrust ring 
 was applied 
 
 Made with- 
 out thrust 
 
 ring m 
 
 3 
 
 Friedrich Karl. 
 
 (Societe des Forges et ) 
 ^Chantiers de la Mediter- > 
 tranee, Marseilles. J 
 
 f Stettiner Maschinenbau ) 
 
 35°3 
 
 1328 
 
 X5" 
 
 61.82 
 
 iI = i8K" 
 1=20^3" 
 
 Metal. 
 
 8.004 
 
 18%" 
 
 ^iW' 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 ring and ran 
 
 its appHca- 
 
 tion, works 
 
 well. 
 
 Ditto, 
 
 4 
 
 Preussen. 
 
 \ AktiengesellschaftVulkan V 
 
 4386-7 
 
 1408 
 
 i654" 
 
 64.5 
 
 8 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 5-371 
 
 2o/8"j 16'/" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Worked well 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Leipzig. 
 
 
 ■35193 
 
 M37 
 
 16" 
 
 72.4 
 
 8 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 4.816 
 
 i9H"| 16" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Greenwich. 
 
 '359-3 
 
 1 120 
 
 loK" 
 
 67.9 
 
 6 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 1-489 
 
 12^8" 
 
 IO;^8" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 7 
 
 Decked Corvette 
 
 ^schinenbau. und Hiitten ^ 
 
 2598.8 
 
 IS';? 
 
 12K" 
 
 82.52 
 
 8 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 2,528 
 
 15" 
 
 12 M" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 tAktiengesellschaft. j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ran warmed 
 first, after- 
 
 
 p 
 
 Decked Corvette 
 
 Dilfo. 
 
 1726.9 
 
 1282 
 
 iiFs" 
 
 80.24 
 
 7 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 3.391 
 
 14K" 
 
 ii^r" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ed well. 
 
 
 
 Decked Corvette 
 
 Mazeline & Co., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hA" 
 
 11 K" 
 
 
 Worked 
 
 No 
 
 
 Augusta. 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 62.09 
 
 " 
 
 mony. 
 
 5-177 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 well. 
 
 thrust 
 ring. 
 
 
 Gunboat 
 
 Moller & Hollberg 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11. 
 
 Nautilus. 
 
 in Grabow. 
 
 504.2 
 
 
 7K" 
 
 109.30 
 
 
 mony. 
 
 1.159 
 
 93^" 
 
 1%" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 with 
 
 
 
 fStettiner Maschineubau "l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 thrust 
 
 n 
 
 Cyklop. 
 
 < Aktiengesellschaft Vulkan \ 
 (inBredow bei Stettin. J 
 
 245-4 
 
 .894 
 
 5K3" 
 
 143-89 
 
 4 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 0.496 
 
 7'X" 
 
 5^8" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 .a 
 
 ArmoredGuuboat 
 Wespe. 
 
 (Aktiengesellschaft, Weser"! 
 
 799-7 
 
 1054 
 
 kV." 
 
 13S.85 
 
 i=io%" 
 8=9^/8" 
 
 Bronze. 
 
 1.728 
 
 93/8" 
 
 7K" 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 SUPPORTS FOR BEARINGS. 
 
 Generai, Considerations. 
 
 The function of a support for one or more bearings is to hold 
 them iu a firm and definite position with regard to the frame 
 or other parts of a machine. Such supports are nearly always 
 made of cast iron, and iu the following treatment of the subject 
 this material is the only one considered. 
 
 Simple supports are those which are intended to hold but 
 one bearing, in distinction from those supports which are ar- 
 ranged to receive several. In both cases the following consid- 
 erations should be observed as closely as may be, when, as is 
 
 Simple Supports. 
 
 A simple support for a single pillow block is shown in Fig. 341. 
 It is intended lor a bearing such as is shown in \ 107 ; hence 
 the upper portion is made correspondingly narrow. The two legs 
 which form the main portions are reinforced by a cross girth, 
 D E. The position of the points D and E may always be well 
 ])laced by observing the following method: Taking the total 
 lieight A jB as a diameter, draw from the centre E a semi-circle 
 AGB; take the middle point of the arc A G B at C; join BG, 
 and prolong it, making GH=AE; then join H to A, and 
 draw GC parallel to HA, and A Cis the height from the base 
 to the cross girth. The dimensions of the various parts are 
 dependent upon the pressure on the bearing, and must usually 
 be governed by the dimensions of the pillow block and by the 
 judgment of the designer. In order to meet the requirements 
 of Rule 5 of the preceding section, there should be under the 
 pillow block a removable plate, which may be given a thick- 
 ness of 0.3 a'p 
 
 Fig. 342 is a similar form of support suitable for heavier di- 
 mensions. 
 
 Fig. 343 is a support for a wall bearing. This is arranged to 
 be built into the wall, and forms an opening through which 
 the shaft can pass, and resembling what a builder calls a bull's 
 eye window. The pressure of the journal is received by the 
 
 usually the case, the shafts which the bearings carry are fitted 
 with gear wheels which should be near the bearings. 
 
 1. The bearings should be as near to the hubs of the gear 
 wheels as practicable. 
 
 2. The pressure upon the journal should, in no case, act in 
 the direction of the joint between the boxes. 
 
 3. The support for the boxes should be so arranged as to 
 allow the easy removal of shafts and gear wheels. 
 
 bracket bearing, which is supported on the key beneath, and 
 can be removed without disturbing the shaft. One point which 
 should not be overlooked is the bearing plate in the wall, 
 shown in tangential dotted lines below the cylinder. The di- 
 mensions in the illustration are based on the modulus d^ of the 
 bearing. 
 
 FIG. 342. 
 
 4. The number of bearing surfaces should be made as few as 
 possible, and all finished surfaces should be capable of being 
 finished at one setting on the planing machine. 
 
 5. Whenever possible, and especially in situations of difficult 
 access, the bearings should be so disposed that the boxes may 
 be removed and renewed without involving the removal of the 
 shafts from their position. 
 
 A wall bracket support is shown in Fig. 344. This is intended 
 to carry a pillow block, and the T slot for the bolt heads e 
 bles the distance of the bearing from the wall to be adjusted. 
 This form may be used for bearings of various sizes. A simpler 
 and lighter form of bracket is shown in Fig. 345. This is 
 merely an arm attached to a wall and adapted for a horizontal 
 shaft. 
 
 Frequently the joint between the base of a bearing support 
 and its foundation is made with cement. When this is done, 
 the base is adjusted to its position, resting upon wedges, 'and the 
 joint being closed with clay, the liquid cement is run in ; this 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 vrill harden iu a few days so that the wedges may be driven out 
 and the bolts fully tightened. 
 
 Multiple: Supports for Bearings. 
 
 ^ Fig. 346 represents a bridge support. The vertical shaft A B 
 comes from below, as for example, from a turbine, and trans- 
 mits its motion to the horizontal shaft CD. The journal pres- 
 sure acts at E, at right angles to the plane of the two shafts, 
 
 Fig. 346. 
 
 and at F it acts in an inclined direction downward, both from 
 the pressure of the gear teeth, and also because of the weight 
 of the wheels and shafts. These pressures are best received at 
 E, by a yoke bearing as shown in | 1 13, and at F, by a bracket 
 bearing, 'i 114, supported on an adjusting key. 
 
 Fig. 347 shows a support for a step-beariug. Here the hori- 
 zontal shaft A B runs in a bracket bearing at C, and transmits 
 motion to a vertical shaft which is supported at D, by a step- 
 
 step at F'\s used similar to that shown in Fig. 328. The upper 
 part of the frame is made cir- 
 cular in shape, so that a cast- 
 iron cover may be placed over 
 the pinion, as shown in the 
 1 tted lines. The base plate 
 held down to the stone 
 indation by four bolts ; two 
 f the bolts pass through the 
 lumns, as shown in the illus- 
 tiations, and so bind the two 
 plates firmly together. The 
 plan view shows how the col- 
 ; ums are keyed into the entab- 
 lature. The base of the columns are let into the base plate as 
 shown in Fig. 349, and an iron cement is used. 
 
 Fig. 349- 
 
 bearing, \ 119. The latter, as the illustration partially shows, 
 is carried on an adjusting key in such a manner that it can 
 readily be removed from below. The bridge which carries the 
 step-bearing is bolted to the box-shaped base and the nuts for 
 the foundation bolts are placed inside the base. 
 
 Another form for similar service is shown in Fig. 348. The 
 shaft A C, for the large gear-wheel terminates in the support 
 and is provided with a small bracket bearing at C. On account 
 of the position of the wheel, this is not very accessible. The 
 bearings for the vertical shaft D E F, are intended to be of the 
 form described in \ 1 20, a yoke bearing being fitted into a space 
 cast in the upper part of the frame at E, while an independent 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 In Fig. 350 is shown a support for two vertical shafts, A and 
 B, the motion being transmitted from one to the other by 
 means of spur gears. The shaft A, for instance, may be that of 
 a turbine wheel, and B, the main driving shaft of the mill.* 
 At A there is a bracket bearing such as shown in Fi^. 314, and 
 at ^ a step bearing, with a removable block beneath it, so that 
 the bearing may be removed or examined without removing ther 
 wheel or shaft. 
 
 Fig. 351 shows a frame for a vertical shaft A B, which trans- 
 mits its motion to a horizontal shaft D E. At C is a yoke bear- 
 ing and a.t E a. bracket-bearing. The horizontal bevel gear is 
 
 Fig 351 
 
 mclosed in the semi circular frame, so that a cover may easily 
 be adapted, as in the previous case The removal of the vertical 
 shaft IS not quite so con\ enient in this form as in some others, 
 but presents no serious difficulty In some cases the lower part 
 of the frame is entirely closed and the shaft inclosed m a sort 
 of pilaster, to avoid accidents 
 
 For a shaft running parallel to a wall, as at A B Fig 352, 
 and tranbmittinTj itb motion to one D E, at light angles, the 
 frame shown m the illustration is suitable The bearing for the 
 
 Fig 352 
 
 main shaft at C may be a pillow block, while a bracket beaimg 
 is suitable at F The distance of the pillow block from the wall 
 IS adjustable (as m Fig 344) If the getirs are equal in size 
 tlje form may be as shown in plan in Fig 353 In this case the 
 journal at C ruub in a bracket bearmg If the coubtruction is 
 
 \ 
 
 Fig. 353- 
 
 Fig. 354. 
 
 intended to fit in the corner of a building, the frame is modi- 
 fied as shown in Fig. 354; the bearings at G and //are then 
 the same. Both these forms are shown in Fig. 355 and 356 in 
 pseudo-perspective. 
 
 Very often a main overhead driving shaft is required to trans- 
 mit motion both to horizontal and vertical shafts from one 
 point, and tbe combination of Fig. 357 is an example. Here 
 the frame-work is made a portion of one of the columns of the 
 building and is really simple in construction ; at A should be 
 
 *Such a frame is u-sed in a spinning-mill at Chur 
 
 used a bracket like Fig. 313 ; at E and F, wall brackets like 
 Fig. 31O, and at C, a step bearing like Fig. 327. 
 
 Fig 358 shows a wall frame for four bearings. A horizontal 
 shaft A B, IS to transmit motion to the vertical shaft C D, and 
 two horizontal shafts E and F, by means of bevel gears. At B 
 
 is a bracket, and at C a step bracket, as in Fig. 327, while th* 
 bearings at E and /"are wall-brackets, like Fig. 310. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Bj' a proper choice of journal diameters and clearances the 
 seats for the four bearings may be brought into one plane, 
 and the other conditions of ? 124 readily complied with. 
 
 An examination of the fundamental principles of construction 
 of supports for bearings will show that all forms may be repre- 
 sented by a rigid piece adapted to hold in fixed relation two or 
 more revolving bodies, in such manner as to permit the applica- 
 tion of the various details of coustructiou such as boxes, caps, 
 bolts, etc. It is often desirable to sketch out in the first place 
 a general scheme of the construction in order that the direction 
 and manner of resistances and arrangement of parts may be 
 examined more readily. The frame shown in Fig-. 350 is simi- 
 lar to the elementary shape of Fig. 359, which resembles a sim- 
 ple connecting rod ; which indeed the base plate really is, the 
 
 Fig. 359- 
 
 variations being due to the especial conditions and not to any 
 fundamental difference. The bridge frame, Fig. 346, is in ele- 
 mentary form Fig. 360. The step supports of Fig. 347 and 348 
 may be shown in principle either in Figs. 360 or 361, since in 
 these elementary schemes a bearing may be shown either by 
 
 E C 
 
 Fig. 360. 
 
 Fig. 361. 
 
 Fig. 362. 
 
 the journals or the reverse. The foTir-fold bearing support ju.<^t 
 described may be sketched in Fig. 362. 
 
 To show how these elementary sketches may serve, the fol- 
 lowing application to one of Lemielle's ventilators will indicate. 
 
 Fig. 363. 
 
 Here, Fig. 363, nine bearings are to be supported. Three of 
 these are for the drum, which is fast to the driving crank ; it is 
 carried by the two neck bearings at A and B, and the thrust 
 bearing at C. The six bearings at D, E, F, and G. H, I, are 
 for the rods of the buckets ; the supports for all of these are 
 then the beams A^ A^, the masonry, and the cranked rod 
 £, I, D, C. 
 
 Cai^culations for Iron Columns. 
 
 The calculation of the proportions of iron columns often be- 
 comes necessary in machine construction, for besides serving 
 merely as portions of building construction they are often com- 
 bined with machine details, and also enter into the design of 
 framework as supports and similar relations. Their considera- 
 tion in this place is therefore appropriate. 
 
 Iron columns are generally considered as being subjected to 
 stresses of compression, and, also within certain limits, to bend- 
 
 ing stresses ; it is therefore important to allow sufficient latitude 
 in the calculations to provide for variations in the manner of 
 application of the load. 
 
 The various methods of application may be treated as indi- 
 cated in the following illustrations, Fig. 364, which show the 
 three Cases II, III, and IV, of ^ 16. The first shows a column 
 
 hinged at both ends, the second is hinged at one end, while the 
 
 third is rigidly held at both « 
 respective forms a 
 
 n-^J-^ 
 
 r' 
 
 ids. The breaking loads of the 
 
 r' 
 
 the columns being of prismatic form and of a height // J being 
 the moment of inertia of the cross section and Ji the modulus 
 of elasticity of the material ; I being taken in inches. As al- 
 ready stated in ? 16, experiment has shown that columns whose 
 ends are faced off square and true fall under Case r, even though 
 not held at the ends. If, therefore, a load smaller than that in- 
 dicated for Case «, be chosen for all cases, security will be as- 
 sured, even should both ends of the column be jointed.* 
 
 We may therefore take for the greatest permissible load in the 
 direction of the axis : 
 
 = 0.477 
 
 . (ic 
 
 If d is the diameter for a solid circular cross section, we have 
 for cast iron, in which E = 14,200,000. 
 
 P= 2,750,000—, ^=0.0245 y / J p . .(no) 
 For Wrought Iron, E = 28,400,000. This gives 
 P = 5,500,000 ^, d = 0.0206 \ 
 
 ^\f I ^{P 
 
 Example I. For a load P = 33,222. l^^s. 
 high, the diameter </= 0.0245 V/ ^ 
 
 a solid cast iron column 157.5 in. 
 
 P —4.15", or about 45V'. Under 
 
 the same conditions a wrought iron colui 
 
 nn would be zYJ' diameter. 
 
 An inspection of the formula shows that the shorter / becomes, 
 the smaller is the value of d. The cross section must, however, 
 never be allowed to become so small that the limit of permis- 
 sible stress shall be passed. 
 
 In order that the stress upon the cross section shall not exceed 
 8500 lbs. for either cast or wrought iron (their modulus for com- 
 pression in either case being 21,300 lbs.), d should in no case be 
 taken as less than 
 
 sl' 
 
 or the load should not be greater than 
 P= 6397.^2 
 
 The following table for round solid cast iron posts is calculated 
 from formulas (no) and (112), and gives the loads which may 
 safely be put upon columns of the respective heights and diame- 
 ters given. 
 
 The quantities marked with an asterisk are calculated from 
 formula (112) and are a marked reduction upon the loads other- 
 wise obtained. 
 
 *Drewitz has tested cast iron columns with a load equal to ir^ — v^ithout 
 observing perceptible alteration. Frbkam's Banzeibuug, V., p. 534. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 83 
 
 STRENGTH OF SOLID CAST IRON COI^UMNS. 
 
 d 
 
 /=8ft. 
 
 10 ft. 
 
 12 ft. 
 
 14 ft. 
 
 16 ft. 
 
 18 ft. 
 
 I in 
 
 297 
 
 191 
 
 132 
 
 97 
 
 75 
 
 59 
 
 I'/. 
 
 1,504. 
 
 994 
 
 671 
 
 493 
 
 377 
 
 298 
 
 2 
 
 4,753 
 
 3,055 
 
 
 1,559 
 
 1,193 
 
 942 
 
 2^ 
 
 11,600 
 
 7,460 
 
 5,180 
 
 3,806 
 
 2,914 
 
 2,302 
 
 3 
 
 24,060 
 
 15,830 
 
 10,740 
 
 7,892 
 
 6,043 
 
 4,774 
 
 VA 
 
 44,470 
 
 28,660 
 
 19,900 
 
 14,620 
 
 11,200 
 
 8,845 
 
 A 
 
 76,040 
 
 48,890 
 
 33,950 
 
 24,950 
 
 19,100 
 
 15,090 
 
 A'A 
 
 121,800 
 
 78,310 
 
 54,380 
 
 39,950 
 
 30,590 
 
 24,170 
 
 5 
 
 154,400* 
 
 119,300 
 
 82,890 
 
 61,460 
 
 47,060 
 
 37,180 
 
 S54 
 
 186,900* 
 
 174,700 
 
 121,400 
 
 89,160 
 
 68,260 
 
 53,930 
 
 6 
 
 222,400* 
 
 222,400* 
 
 171,900 
 
 126,250 
 
 96,680 
 
 76,400 
 
 Hollozu Columns.— Cast iron columns are gen er- 
 erally made hollow. The dimensions in this case 
 may readily be determined from the formute for 
 solid columns. 
 
 If the external diameter is d^, the internal di- . 
 ameter d^, and the diameter of a solid column of i 
 equal strength, d, we have 
 
 Y^^- 
 
 0.0122 \r 
 
 We have for : 
 
 -1= 
 
 V 
 
 i—r 
 
 r the load greater than 
 P=6397^oMi-V'') 
 
 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.75 0.8 0.85 0,9 0.95 
 :o.75 0.64 0.51 0.44 0.36 0.28 0.19 O.IO 
 
 :I.I5 1-25 140 1.51 1-67 1-89 2.29 3.20 
 
 :Exainple 2. The solid column of the preceding- example to support a load 
 of 33,000 pounds was found to be 4.15'' diameter, and for a ratio of diameters 
 of 0.8 for a hollow column for the same load we have dfj = 1.14 X 415 = 
 4.73", say 4^", and the internal diameter d^ — 0.8 X 4-73 = 3-78" say 3^^", 
 giving a thickness of metal of J^ inch. Substituting these values in (114) we 
 have for the greatest safe load, P= 6397 X (4-73)^ X 0.36 = 51.53° lbs. This 
 shows the dimensions obtained above to be amply strong, if the ivalls of the 
 
 column a: 
 
 %t of nniforvi thicknt 
 
 If tl 
 
 ! ratio — - had been taken as 0.7 
 4", and rfi = 3.10, giving a thick- 
 
 In practice it is often necessary to work to a given external 
 diameter o'q, in which case, for cast iron, the internal diameter 
 d^, may be found from : 
 
 d, = d.S ^ — 0.000,000,36 — 
 
 and the load 
 
 P= 2,750,000 
 
 «'o* — d^^ 
 
 (115) 
 
 in which P is the difference in supporting capacity between two 
 solid columns of the diameters df, and d^ respectively. 
 
 It is necessary also in this case to observe that P should not 
 be greater than /> = 6397 {d^ — d^^) > 
 
 and d-^ not greater than 
 
 d,= do\ 1—0.00015^ 
 
 in order that satisfactory castings may be produced. 
 
 Example 3. In a barracks in ] 
 height, bearing loads of 37.1S0 lb 
 According to (115) this should give 
 
 According to (116) v» 
 
 The ratio of internal to external diameter ^=ip is conve- 
 aiently made 0.7 to 0.8. We have for : 
 
 The limits of stress fall within the formula for compression 
 and the above results are close approximations. It is to be ob- 
 served that do should in no case be taken less than : 
 
 ^n'— 'nfesi;^" 
 
 dl^ 
 
 6.187s y 1 - 
 
 - 0.OO3I5 
 
 37,180 
 
 
 
 Id give a 
 column 
 le4. Ac 
 has to be 
 of 6% in 
 
 thickness of 
 s about fi", a 
 ast iron colu: 
 ar a load of 
 =hes. Accord 
 
 netal of about T((". The 
 nd the actual internal d 
 m of 1S5 inches height a 
 
 ngto (115)! for direct re 
 
 empirica 
 ameter v 
 idgMinc 
 de with 
 .,istance t 
 
 1 thickness 
 ras 4^8". 
 hes outside 
 an interna) 
 thrust we 
 
 ^1=9 
 
 .. </.-. 
 
 0000036 
 
 275,000 X (185)'^ 
 (9.25)* 
 
 
 ding to ( 
 
 16): 
 
 
 
 
 
 di = S 
 
 .„v.--- 
 
 °°'^ ^.2 
 
 ~^-6.e,' 
 
 
 ear the actual dimensi 
 
 
 
 
 
 These examples show how important it is, to take all the 
 conditions into account, in order to avoid errors, and a careful 
 examination of the circumstances attending each case should 
 always be considered. 
 
 Fluted Columns. — The cruciform section may serve as an ex- 
 
 ~l"'m ample of such columns. The thickness and 
 
 I M . breadth, d and //, of the ribs may be determ- 
 
 ^'idfld^lllj ^^^^ ^y comparison with the diameter d, of an 
 
 tjj^^^^^^^^ equivalent round solid column by making : 
 
 !>' from which the approximate thickness b, for 
 
 Fig. 366. any breadth h, may be obtained. In order to 
 keep within safe limits the cross section should 
 not be less than : 
 
 bh = 
 
 '17000 ( (,jj 
 
 or the load more than . 
 
 P= jjooob h ) 
 
 pie 5. To substitute a cruciform column for the 
 
 The safe load according to (118) would be : 
 P= 17,000X6.228X0.72 = 
 
 For a direct calculation of b and h ^ 
 
 ; may use the following : ■ 
 
 Care should be taken that the load does not exceed the limit 
 given by (118). 
 
 Example 6' 
 
 in 1859-60, art 
 
 Tho.se m tl 
 
 X building of the sugar refinery of Waghilusel, built 
 
 X (14.1875P 
 (78.74)- 
 
 (116) 
 
 P=4 
 
 According to (118) 
 
 P= 17,000 X 2 X 14.1875 = 482,300 lbs. 
 which is much more than the actual load. 
 
 Columns of Angle and T Iron. — These are much used in 
 bridge trusses, especially in America. (See \ 87). The vertical 
 posts may be considered as columns with jointed ends. Case I, 
 Fig. 364, and the upper chord is in compression and may be con- 
 sidered as Case III, Fig. 364. The following figures show many 
 of the forms, in section, which may be used for this purpose. 
 
 nnHHr[[HH + 
 
 The first is the column of the Phoenix Bridge Works at Phoenix- 
 ville, Pennsylvania. This is shown made of four segments, but 
 six or more are used. This form may be strengthened by rivet- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ing Hat iron between the joints of the segments. The four fol- 
 lowing sections are from the Ive3'stone Bridge Works. 
 
 The sectional distribution of material should be chosen so 
 that the (equatorial) moment of inertia on both the principal 
 axes are the same (see \ 7). The fifth section shows a double 
 T iron, in the middle in dotted lines. This is used in bridge 
 chords, where two or more such shapes are sometimes intro- 
 duced. The last form is a combination of four pieces of angle 
 iron recentl}' used for pump rods in mine shafts. The resistance 
 to thrust is here dependent upon the distance between the 
 guides of the rod. 
 
 Gi'OHpcd Columns. — It is sometimes a question whether, in 
 the support of very important loads, as well as for economy of 
 material, it is not best to use two or three columns instead of 
 one. If we let m be the number used, instead of one, we have, 
 for the supposition that the columns are in compression, the re- 
 lation for similar sections. 
 
 F' = \/in V . 
 
 Borsig) is arranged with a short cylinder bolted to the faced sole 
 plate and made so as to give a space in which melted lead may 
 be poured after the column is set in its exact position. A hole 
 is left in the side of the column to admit the melted metal. The 
 portion of the base of the column which shows above the pave- 
 ment is made to conform to the general style of the building. 
 In Fig. 369 a simple moulding is used between the plinth and 
 shaft; in Fig. 370 a bead is added ; and in Fig. 371 a double 
 moulding of more elaborate outline is used. 
 
 ('20) 
 
 This shows that grouped columns use v ;« times as much 
 material as a single column. It is also economy of material to 
 use a small number of heavily loaded columns to sustain a given 
 load. 
 
 Example 7. This subject may also be treated by the aid of the preceding 
 table. If we have a load of 2800 lbs. upon a column 18 feet high, the diam- 
 eter for a solid round column would be 2)^", while for four columns of 2 
 inches diameter we have 4 X 74° = 2960, or about the same. The cross sec- 
 tions are to each other as 4 X (2)= : : (2.75)2, or as 16 : 756, or -s/V: i- 
 
 Variations in the heii^ht of columns affect the econoni}' of 
 material, other things being equal, to a marked degree, since 
 the resistance to compression varies directly as the height (/). 
 It is sometimes desirable to make a column in sev- 
 eral portions, when a proportional reduction in . 
 height can thereby be secured. The triple central 
 core of the column shown in Fig. 368, is an ex- 
 ample and is a form often used by architects in 
 connection with columns of brickwork.* This is 
 not as effective as a single column, since the volume 
 ratio is j^ Vw, /. e., }i v'7~= 0.866. 
 
 In conclusion it must be remarked that the col- 
 umns which are used in machine construction are 
 usually made much heavier than the preceding 
 calculations indicate. This is due to the fact that 
 such columns are often subjected to bending and 
 tensional stresses, as well as to much vibration and 
 the additional material is needed to meet these con- 
 ditions. Columns of cast iron which are subjected 
 to tension, as in the framing of vertical engines, 
 should be made at least double the section given by ( 
 (116), and (118). The security is also made greater i 
 of buildings, as the result in Example 6 shows. 
 
 ? 128. 
 Forms for Iron CoIvUmns. 
 The columns which are used in machine construction must be 
 held down to the iron base plates of the machines, or if used in 
 connection with building construction are secured to foundations 
 of masonry. Heavily loaded columns are often placed upon 
 foundation stones with only a sheet of lead beneath, and no 
 fasten'ng, but otherwise some form of anchorage must be used. 
 
 The capitals of such columns are made in many varied forms. 
 Fig- 372 shows, in section and elevation, a capital arranged to 
 carry a beam and also to support the base of the column of the 
 floor above. A recess in the top of the column receives the 
 main beam, and affords a good place for a joint. If iron beams 
 are used, this recess is made proportionately narrower. The base 
 of the upper column is securely bolted down as shown.* 
 
 Fig. 373. 
 
 Fig. 374- 
 
 Fig- 375- 
 
 The capitals of iron columns afford much opportunity for ef- 
 fective decoration, which in many cases is neglected, although 
 comparatively easy of execution. For the lower columns of 
 heavy buildings the simple cubic capital so often found in Ro- 
 manesque buildings is most suitable, and a good example is- 
 shown in Fig. 373-t 
 
 Fig. 369. 
 
 Fig. 37 
 
 The illustrations show three forms of fastening. In each case 
 the sole plate is placed beneath the pavement. In the first case 
 a special form of sole plate is held down to the masonry by an 
 anchor bolt ; in the second the flange which is cast on the 
 column is bolted to the keys shown ; the third construction (by 
 
 A somewhat lighter form is shown in Fig. 374, and for some 
 situations the various Gothic capitals are suitable, Fig. 375. In 
 
 * other forms will be tc 
 
 mple, the colum 
 
 u the vestibule of the theatre at Carlsruhe. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 all three examples the pattern making and moulding is not dif- 
 ficult. The form most used in machine construction is shown 
 in Fig. 376, being something between the Roman Doric and the 
 Tuscan orders, and having an echinus beneath the cap plate, 
 and an astragal bead around the column a short distance below. 
 By varying the distance of the latter from the former the effect 
 can be modified for taller or shorter columns. 
 
 The heavier form of the Grecian Doric is unsuitable for ma- 
 chine construction and is seldom used. More appropriate is 
 the modified Corinthian capital shown in Fig. 3>7. The top is 
 a cornice of overhanging leaves, terminating in an astragal on 
 the shaft. B}' omitting the ornament the same form maybe re- 
 tained, as shown in the right hand half of the illustration, and 
 also in Fig. 348. The fluting of the column is by no means ob- 
 jectionable, at least iu Germany. The fluted capital is readily 
 cast by being made in a core box. 
 
 Fig. 378 shows a capital of Renaissance form with octagonal 
 abacus, well suited for slender columns. 
 
 The support of beams, either iron or wooden, is best accom- 
 plished by the introduction of a plate between the column and 
 the beam, and this may be treated simply, yet in harmony with 
 the style of the rest of the work. Fig. 379 shows such a sup- 
 port on the cubic capital already shown, and is adapted for very 
 
 Fig. 382. 
 
 Fic. 381 
 
 teavy construction. Fig. 380 shows a lighter capital, in which 
 the support for the beam is made of a box form ; Fig. 381 is a 
 still lighter design. This illustration also shows the effect of a 
 high stylobate or base moulding, suitable for tall slender columns. 
 As shown in this example, such bases are usuallj^ made octagonal 
 in section, which approaches the Gothic style, but they are fre- 
 quently made round. As in architecture, the columns are usu- 
 ally made tapering from below upward, the upper diameter be- 
 ing 0.8 to 0.7 that at the base. Fig. 382 shows a more elaborate 
 form of capital and bearer. 
 
 Columns of cruciform section, alread}^ referred to, are often 
 used in the construction of industrial establishments. Thej^ are 
 sometimes to be preferred to hollow columns, since the latter 
 are often cast of such unequal thickness as to be unreliable. 
 Figs. 383 to 385 show such a column. Fig. 383 is from the Rail- 
 way of St. Germain. Here the flutings extend from top to bot- 
 tom and the column is swelled slightlj' in the middle. The form 
 shown in Fig. 384, from the Tobacco Factory at Strasburg, is 
 more elegant in its appearance. Here a rectangular base is used 
 for the lower floor, but is omitted above. The method of 
 connecting the base and column, as well as the connection 
 between capital, beam, and column above, is shown in Fig. 385 ; 
 
 in which the solidity and substantial character 
 construction is well shown. 
 
 of this form of 
 
 These examples will serve at least to show the variety of 
 forms of columns which may be used, and the manner in which 
 a little ornament may be introduced into machine construction. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 AXLES. 
 ?129. 
 
 Various Kinds op Axi<es. 
 
 Axles may be considered as beams which carry revolving or 
 oscillating loads, and hence are provided with journals at certain 
 portions of their lengths; they may be subjected to deflection 
 or to compression, as in the cases of journals already discussed, 
 according as the load act normal or parallel to the axis. Axles 
 which are subjected only to thrust, are not often found, the far 
 greater portion being those bearing deflecting loads, although 
 many are under combined stresses. 
 
 These may be divided into two classes : those which have the 
 load applied at but one place, and those in which several loads 
 are borne at various points. The first are called Simple-loaded 
 Axles ; the second, Multiple-loaded Axles. 
 
 The sections of axles of cast or wrought iron may be either 
 circular or varied, and this gives rise to another subdivision in 
 the calculations. The methods of graphostatics are especially 
 applicable to the subject of axles, and in the following pages 
 both numerical and graphical solutions will be discussed. 
 
 A. AXLES WITH CIRCULAR SECTION. 
 ?I30- 
 
 Simpi<e; Symmetricai< Axi,e;s. 
 
 & -aj- jc. .i..a3_ -> 
 
 Fig. 386. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The load Q is in this case applied normal to the direction of 
 the axis, midway between the two journals, upon a seat for a 
 hub, as shown in Fig. 3S6. The portion between the hub-seat 
 and journals is called the shank of the axle. The journals are 
 proportioned according to the methods given in Chapter V, 
 taking P= yi O, and the axle then proportioned so as to give 
 approximately the same strength as the journals throughout. 
 Let: 
 
 d = diameter, / = length of journals, 
 e = height of shoulder or collar, 
 £> = diameter of middle, or hub-seat, ^^=its breadth, 
 /?' = diameter of shank at the junction with 77, 
 e' = Yi {D — D') the shoulder at the latter junction, 
 a = the length of shank, 
 then we have : 
 
 (121) 
 
 This will give the axle the same security as the journal, so 
 that the approximate stress will be 5=8500 lbs. for wrought 
 iron, and 4260 lbs. for cast iron. If a higher or lower stress is 
 desired, the journal should be proportioned for the desired 
 stress, and the corresponding dimensions for the axle deduced. 
 
 Fig. 387. 
 
 The strongest form for the shank of an axle is that of a cubic 
 parabola (see \ 10, No. VI), and the student will find this a valu- 
 able subject for investigation. In practice it is made a portion 
 of a truncated cone whose larger diameter =/?', and the smaller 
 diameter ^ rf= 2 <?. The value of e' should only be made large 
 enough to provide sufficient depth for a keyway. 
 
 Non-Symmetrical Simple Axles. 
 If the two shank portions of a simple loaded axle are of un- 
 equal length, as in Fig. 387, the load on the two journals a^iand 
 d^ will be unequally divided, and we have the proportion 
 
 ■^^^+^' "^^^+V /^^^ ■ ■ ■ ■ ^'^^' 
 
 The hub-seat divides the axle into two parts, each of which 
 may be considered as the half of a symmetrical axle, and so the 
 
 ■whole proportioned. The value of D' is determined for each 
 shank, and the greater value taken for both sides. If a-^ = rtj 
 the axle becomes symmetrical. 
 
 If the seat for the load Q does not lie between the two jour- 
 nals, but projects, as in Fig. 389 [a.^ becoming negative), the load 
 is said to overhang, and the journal D becomes a neck journal 
 (see ? 92). 
 
 "We have for the relations of forces : 
 
 (123) 
 
 J\^a^ :?A = fi ± fi ^ = gj 
 Q- a,' Q a, ' P, a, + a. 
 
 The diameter of the journal di is first determined, then a 
 diameter for an assumed journal d.^ for the loaded point, and 
 then a value D for a neck journal, taking for D the greater of 
 the values for D' and Z?", as given for the two ends by formula 
 (121), the length of journal being made /, = ^l-^ -f- 1^-. 
 
 The cubic parabola is shown drawn in the shank a.^, being the 
 shape for uniform resistance in this case, and we have for the 
 diameter A, at the root of the hub-seat : 
 
 ir=^J- ('-4) 
 
 See (§ 10, Case VI, Remark). 
 
 D = 6.2s i/^«fL - 13.72, say -^0%". 
 
 X 4-6875 
 
 ^3 = \/(5.625}='-|- (9.375F — 10.93, say 11 
 
 S — 6.25 \! ^^ = 6.97, say 7". 
 ^ 9-375 
 
 Graphical Calculation of Simple-Loaded Axles. 
 
 The determination of the forces acting upon the journals may- 
 be made according to the methods given in Cases I to V, of § 39. 
 In a similar manner the cord polygon may be employed as in 
 'i 43 and | 44 to determine the statical moments of the parallel 
 forces at various points, and the polygon so constructed may be 
 called the surface of moments. The simple method about to- 
 be given will serve as a general graphical solution of the problem. 
 
 /. The Load Ads Normal to the Axis. 
 
 Fig. 389. 
 
 Fig. 390. 
 
 (a). Hub and Load between the Jouj-7ials.~'Dra.vf the line A C 
 equal in length to the distance between centres of journals, and 
 upon it construct any triangle ABC, whose apex lies on the 
 line of the load Q. Draw A 3 normal to A C, making A t, = Q; 
 draw 3 . O parallel to B C, and 2 . C parallel to ^ C; then A . 2 
 = P], 2 . 3 == P.,-' By dropping the perpendiculars from the ends ' 
 of the hub-seat we may divide Q into two forces Qi and Q.,, 
 shown in the force polygon by O b, parallel to Bj^ B., ; giving- 
 Ab=Oi, b . 3 =: C'o- The vertical ordinate /, at any point of the 
 surface of moments is proportional to the statical moment My 
 at its point of intersection with the axis, as for example the or- 
 dinate /i, at the base of the journal for P,^. We have in any case i 
 
 ,^ = -AZ^Mj, 
 
 32 
 
 M, 
 
 ^<1~4 
 
 (I24> 
 
 from which jK can readily be obtained.* 
 
 (b). The Hub-Seat between the Journals and the Load Over- 
 hung, Fig. 390. — Draw the line A C, parallel to the axis, con- 
 struct a triangle with the points A, B and C on the lines of the 
 directions of the forces, drop a perpendicular from the point D^ 
 where D d=0, make O . i parallel to A C, and equal to C D , 
 make ^.1.3 normal to A (T, also O . 3 parallel to C B, and I 
 . 3 will ^ Q, A 1 = P^, T, . A = P,. The force O is decomposed 
 into two forces at the ends of the hubs, and by dropping the 
 perpendiculars, the points Ci and C, are determined, and Oc 
 drawn parallel to Q G, giving the values c . 3 and I . C for the 
 
 *If it is desired to determine a series of values of i, beginning from ii, it 
 may readily be done by using a table of cube roots of numbers such as are 
 given at the end of this volume; if the greatest value of^ is the starting- 
 point, the table of cube roots of decimal numbers is useful, the space being 
 divided into ten parts and the outline laid off correspondingly. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 87 
 
 forces at C^ and C, respectively. The diagram shows that at a 
 point within the hub-seat the stresses are reversed and the bend- 
 ing moment is zero. 
 
 from the ends of the hub, join B^ with Bj^ and the surface of 
 moments is A B^ B^ C To find the forces, prolong Q from B 
 until it intersects Cb, join it to the middle of the other journal, 
 make q b= Q, and drop the perpendicular g a, which is equal to 
 
 Fig. 392. 
 
 (c). Overhung Axle with Load Outside the Journals, Fig. 391 
 — Construct the triangle A B C,&s in the preceding case {b), and 
 place D so that Dd=Q, draw A . 3 normal to A C, make O ■ 
 2= CD, and parallel to A C, and draw O . 3 parallel to CB, 
 and we have again A . 2 ^ B^, 3 . A ^ P.,- Divide O into Q 
 and Q and make Cr parallel to Q C,, giving c . 3 and 2 . c for 
 the forces at Cj and C. The journal at^5 being uniformly loaded, 
 its moment surface is outlined by a parabolic curve (see § 42). 
 
 Fig. 396. 
 
 P. Make A i=P, draw i . O parallel to A C, and O . 2 paral- 
 lel to B^ B^, then i . 2 is the force at d^ and 2 . i that at b^- If 
 the hub should overhang, as in the case of a screw propeller, 
 Fig- 396, the diagram takes the form A B Q C,. 
 
 If 
 
 Proof Diagrams. 
 
 lu order to calculate the resistance of a given axle to bending 
 
 it is necessary to know the section modulus at various points. 
 
 If all the sections are circular the moduli vary as the third power 
 
 of the diameter. Hence the various diameters are to be cubed. 
 
 Fig. 393. 
 
 Fig. 394- 
 
 (d). Overhung Axle, with Load betweeti Journals, Fig. 392. — 
 Construct the triangle ^ B C as in case (a\ divide Q into^j 
 and B,, which gives the polygon A C, B^ B., (which is equiva- 
 lent to" the other one A C, B^ B.^. In the force polygon, i . 3 
 = Q, z . 1 = P^, I . 1 = P.^, and by making C/ parallel to B, B^ 
 we get b . 3 and \ .bior the forces on B^^ B^ and B.^^ B^.* 
 
 II. The Load Acts Inclined to the Axis, Fig. 393. 
 
 The construction is similar to L, except that the force and cord 
 polygons are inclined according to the direction of O. The 
 vertical projections a A, and 3 . cgive the journal pressures /\ 
 and P.^ ; the horizontal component of O gives the axial thrust. 
 
 Another example is given the case of a rod worked from an 
 overhung arm, as in some forms of locomotive feed pumcs, Fig. 
 395. The directions are here periodically reversed, and the re- 
 lations of the points continually changing. 
 
 III. The Load Acts Parallel to the Axis, Fig. 394. 
 
 We here have two couples : one consisting of the two equal 
 journal pressures, and the other of the two pressures at the ends 
 of the hub-seat (see I 38). Draw the lines A B^ and C B.^ par- 
 allel to each other, and intersecting the perpendiculars dropped 
 
 spindles of the American Ring S 
 
 light stresse 
 
 Fig. 397- 
 
 This may readily be done graphically by the method given in: 
 ^ 28. In order to compare such a diagram with one of the sur- 
 face of moments as just discussed, it is necessary to construct 
 them to the same scale. For this purpose take the origin O of 
 the two axes JVTand Y, and make Oa equal to the diameter (or 
 semi-diameter) of the shank of the axle, and lay off, below the 
 corresponding value Ob oi its ordinate t^, draw on a / a semi- 
 circle a c b, draw a e normal to a c, and taking C ^ as unity we 
 have C(3= (Crt)^. Make O. i=y, C.2=j)/,, &c., and draw 
 the moments to the axes of Xand V, as i, i', I., 2, 2', II., &c., 
 and we have 01, O II, as the desired values of y,^, y^ . . . 
 which correspond to those of the principal diagram. 
 
 Such proof diagrams are very convenient to show what ap- 
 proximations may be made, and to detect possible errors in cal- 
 culation, and shows at once any deficiency in security, since the 
 relation of the actual stresses to the desired constant stress is 
 that of the ordinates of the proof diagram to those of the theo- 
 retical surface of moments. This numerical series may be plotted 
 in a curve, called the stress curve. By combining the theoreti- 
 cal diagram with the proof diagram on an exaggerated scale, as 
 shown iu the illustration, the unit can be chosen to a greater 
 advantage. 
 
 §134. 
 Axi,ES Loaded at Two Points. 
 
 In an axle loaded at two points, as in Fig. 398, the end por- 
 tions are called the shanks and the middle part the shaft. If 
 6*1 and 0-2 are the loads, s the length of shaft, we have for the 
 journal pressures 
 
 ■(- + &) . /^<- 
 
 s^a. 
 
 \^s+a. 
 If we take the diameters cc 
 
 
 ssponding to these pressures a 
 
S8 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 rfi aud </j, and also have the shauks «, and a., given, we may de- 
 termiue next the diatreters at D^ aud D., at the points of appli- 
 cation of the loads Qy^ and O.,. 
 
 To find the diameters of the shaft at various points we have, 
 taking y for the diameter at any point distant x from the load 
 point Qy : 
 
 :i26) 
 
 =^'+^(-^)- 
 
 A 
 
 an equation which gives the shaft the outline of a double cubic 
 parabola, which in practice may be replaced by two straight 
 lines, giving the shape a truncated cone. 
 
 L ._J-^^-% 
 
 Fig. 399. 
 
 Fig. 400. 
 
 The graphical solution of the preceding problem is as readil}^ 
 made as in the case of single loads. If we draw normals to the 
 axis A D, Fig. 399, corresponding to the given loads O^ and O2, 
 also draw A a, make a^ = Q■^ and 1.2 = Q,,, choose a pole O 
 and draw the rays Oa, O i, O2, prolong a O to its intersection 
 b with the Hue of the force O^, make b c parallel to i O, cd par- 
 allel to 2 C> and join d with a. Draw C 3 parallel Xo d a \n the 
 force polygon and we have 2 . 3=7?^, and 2t a = -Pi and abed 
 the surface of moments whose vertical ordinates i may be used 
 to determine their corresponding diameters of the axle as in I, 
 I 132- 
 
 The intersection e, of ab, and dc prolonged determines the 
 position E e oi the resultant of Q]^ and Q.^. li E e \^ desired at 
 
 Fig. 401. 
 
 Fig. 402. 
 
 once, as in the method given in ? 40, the previous case {\ 132, I) 
 is applicable since the direction of the Hue a d can be chosen at 
 win. 
 
 If one load acts beyond the bearings. Fig. 400, the reversal 
 point in the elastic line will appear as before ; this occurs when 
 the resultant of 0^ and a, falls between A and D (see I 132, I). 
 The above mentioned shearing stress is given by i . 3. 
 
 If \.\\<t resultant oi O^ and Q.-, falls outside both journals. Fig. 
 
 401, there will be no reversal, the force P^ having the same di- 
 rection as (Jiand {?, ; iu other respects the procedure is the same 
 as before. 
 
 Finally the resultant may just equal the force at D, as in Fig. 
 
 402. In this case there will be no beuding stress in portion A 
 
 B, which in the previous case was quite small ; the two lines of 
 the surface of moments fall together. The shank A B and the 
 journal at A may therefore be made very light, unless other 
 forces than those already considered act upon them. 
 
 The decomposition of the forces acting upon the hub-seat de- 
 pend upon its breadth and the treatment is similar to I 132. 
 Other variations may occur in the relations of the loads and 
 journals, but the preceding examples will suffice. 
 
 i 135- 
 Inclined Doublk Loaded Axles, Railway Axles, Crane 
 Pillars. 
 The previous methods are almost as easily applied when the 
 loads act in an inclined direction. The inclined action is caused 
 by various conditions, and as an example we will consider rail- 
 way axles. 
 
 Fig. 398. 
 
 The two seats for hubs are formed so as to give shoulders for 
 keyway, and have a determinate breadth b, governed by the 
 piece to be carried. In many cases such axles are symmetrical 
 and the two loads are equal to each other, hence rt, = a.„ Q^ = 
 Q._ We then have P^ = P,= Q^ = O, and y = D, the shaft 
 being cylindrical. This is also the case when /\ a^ = /'j '^2' 
 
 Fig. 404. 
 
 Besides the vertical load O at the centre of gravity S, of the 
 car, Fig. 403, there are forces due to centrifugal action and flexi- 
 bility, which produce a horizontal force which Scheffler, accord- 
 ing to Wohler's researches, places at 04 Q,^ so that there is an 
 inclined resultant J?, acting upon the axle. Since the value 
 0.4 Q was obtained by means of measurements on cars during 
 long runs, it includes the action of the elevation of the outer 
 rail in passing curves. This force J? is also acting on the wheel 
 flanges at isfi and A'', as well as at the journals A and D. It 
 must be noted that the wheel A', opposed to //' can only resist 
 forces acting normal to the coned face so that the angle L K^ S' 
 should be made ^= 90°. 
 
 The points of intersection B and (T of the wheel forces on the 
 axle give the positions for the verticals O^, Q.,, and the horizon- 
 tal pressure may be neglected in determining the axle loads, 
 these being P^ and P.,. From these the journal diameters are 
 found aud the greater taken for both. 
 
 Then from the point of application E of the resultant P let 
 fall a perpendicular E e and draw the triangle a d e, prolong the 
 directions of Qj^ and {?._, to b and c, and join b and ^ by a straight 
 line. Then drop perpendiculars from B' B" , C C" , to b' b", 
 c' c" and join these latter, and a b' b" c' c" d is the cord poly- 
 gon for the given conditions. The ordinate t serves to deter- 
 mine the diameter y for anj' journal diameter d-^, and the ordinate 
 t-i gives the root of the journal 
 
 The direction K^ B is readily determined as follows : Choose 
 any point on the line of R, as for example, E, join it with K^ 
 and K2 ai^'i decompose R = E r, Fig. 404, along the directions 
 iTATi and .£'A'^_jinto E k.^_z\\^ k.^r = Ek-^^, draw k.J., horizontal 
 and ^ / parallel to the given direction K^S' \ then /^ is the 
 force at K^, and rlthsit at A';, whose direction is sought, while 
 E k.2 and k^^ are the inner forces at the corner Afj of the cord 
 polygon E K^ ATj, and in equilibrium with the force of the known 
 direction K^ S' . 
 
 Since the horizontal force A^ acts either to the right or left, 
 the larger side of the polygon ass' b" b' must be used for both 
 halves of the axle, as shown in the dotted lines. The cord poly- 
 gon for the direct vertical load should also be drawn, and if it 
 gives a greater ordinate for the shaft than .? s' , it should be used, 
 the diameter of the shaft generally being smallest in the middle. 
 
 Axles of railway cars make from 250 to 300 revolutions' per 
 minute. For wrought iron the journals are generally made two 
 diameters in length. In passing around curves these journals 
 are subjected to considerable endlong pressure. The shoulder 
 e is generally made= \d\o\d, and heavier than usual in ordi- 
 nary cases. 
 
 * Ad. Scheffler, Railway Axles. Braunschweig. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 89 
 
 In many countries standard proportions for axles have been 
 adopted. Those of the Prussian railways are as follows, the di- 
 mensions depending upon the value of Q, which is the total 
 load on each axle.* 
 
 = 3800 kilogrammes. 
 
 D = 
 
 100 mm. 
 
 fl' = 6s mm 
 
 = 5500 
 
 
 115 " 
 
 " 75 " 
 
 = Sooo 
 
 
 130 " 
 
 « 85 " 
 
 The journal length / varies between i|^ to 2 i^f d, according to 
 judgment. These proportions are for wrought irpn ; if steel is 
 used Q may be increased by 20 per cent. For iron axles the 
 
 e . 2 the force O., at £. All three external loads act parallel to 
 the axis, so that "we can use the method shown in Fig. 394. In 
 the diagram to the right we make qi qi^=Q-, and ^^ q.^ parallel to 
 A qi normal to A B. These lines then represent the horizontal 
 forces /\ and P^ at .^ and B. 
 
 The bearing at A carries the entire vertical load, and hence 
 we have at A the inclined resultant /'/ of Q and P^. We now 
 draw C/i, normal to A CJ^f^ = O, draw /, D and also /j/, 
 parallel to C/^, then/2/, will give the magnitude of a force act- 
 ing right at D and left at C In a similar manner, draw (?, ^2 = 
 Q.,, and draw r, Z?, and make e., e.^ parallel to <", C, and ^2 ^3 will 
 be the magnitude of a force acting left at C and right at Z>. 
 
 We therefore have P3 =/,/a + e^ e., and P^ = e^ e-^ +/3/. The 
 vertical pressure of the pillar itself is all taken at D, hence we 
 get for its vertical component Q ^=f.^f^ — e^ e.,, which combined 
 with /*4 gives the resultant P^. This is proved by the intersection 
 of P/ and P/ at ^ must fall on the line of the resultant of P^ 
 and Py 
 
 If we neglect the copipression in the direction of the axis, 
 we may now draw the force polygon c 2 3 O of the forces Pj, 
 P.,, P^, P,, as shown at the left of Fig. 407, and thus obtain the 
 surface of moments abed. 
 
 Fig. 405. 
 
 pressure upon any one journal should not exceed '^ O. These 
 figures give a stress of 6.4 to 8.3 kilogrammes per square milli- 
 metre or 9000 to 12000 lbs., and the pressure/ from 0.30 to 0.41 
 kilo, or 326 to 593 lbs. 
 
 In Fig. 405 is shown a steel axle for the Royal Eastern Rail- 
 way, with its wheels, all dimensions being in millimetres. 
 
 In England a standard axle has been adopted as shown in 
 Fig. 4o6,t and the standard American axle is similar.^ The 
 
 6' 9' I ; 
 
 Fig. 406. 
 
 value of O in this case is about 22000 lbs. In France there has 
 been no general standard adopted, but the various roads have 
 adopted forms — for regular use. The Paris-L3'ons-Mediterranean 
 Railway has eight forms. The form Ko. S has a' = 85 mm. (S^s'^), 
 1=170 mm. {6^4'^), length between centres of journals = 1925 
 ^^i^-{7SH"\ diameter of hub-seat =: 125 mm. (4xf"), diameter 
 of the axle in the middle =^ 105 mm. (4^''). 
 
 
 
 r> 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 p. 
 
 ^ P; 
 
 A 
 -A 
 
 "---^L 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 p. -^^^0 
 
 U= 
 
 
 
 ^J-— ' 
 
 -r^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 '^-r- 
 
 
 
 
 
 * These dirai 
 
 nental practic 
 
 fSeeEngiiK 
 
 representing Cot 
 
 A crane with swivel column, to which the jib or boom is 
 rigidly attached, may be examined as shown in Fig. 408. The 
 position oi Q = L -\- G \s taken as before, making q-^ q^ repre- 
 sent O, draw A q^ normal to the axis, join q^ D and draw q<i q^ 
 parallel to A q^ till it intersects with q^ D. We then have q^ q^ 
 for the horizontal force P, at ^, and q., q^ the corresponding 
 horizontal P^ at £>. 
 
 The step bearing at D will be subjected to an inclined thrust, 
 the resultant of O and P^. 
 
 In a similar manner we obtain the horizontal forces P, and P^ 
 equal and opposite, and acting at B and C, and the.resultant of 
 the force at B with O gives the inclined force due to the rod B 
 E. The four horizontal forces have the same action as the load 
 on the axle in Fig. 394. We may thus obtain the surface of 
 moments abed, which shows a zero point for bending moments 
 between B and D , and also indicates a forward bending above 
 and a backward below. In the force polygon 2a = P.^^a 2^ P^, 
 2 I = P, and I 2 = /\. 
 
 Fig. 407. 
 
 Crane pillars maybe considered as axles subjected to inclined 
 stresses, as the following example will show. The crane shown 
 in Fig. 407 is subject to the load L. and also its own weight G, 
 and the resultant of these is at Q (see examples in § 34). 
 
 At A and B are bearings, and the pillar is held in a base plate 
 at C B>, the plate being secured at £ P. In order to determine 
 the forces at E and F, construct the cord polygon efg:, and force 
 polygon ^2 I 6>, in which 2 . i = {?, i ■ e=Qi the force at F, 
 
 , 1S73. The M. C. B. standard v: 
 
 Fig. 409. 
 
 I 136. 
 
 Axles with Three or jiore Be.^rings. 
 
 The number of bearings for an axle is often as great as four. 
 In such a case the forces and moments may be found as follows : 
 
90 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Starting at a. Fig. 409, mth the given forces i to 5, we form 
 the force polygon ff-, O, and, according to \. 40, the link poly- 
 gon abed efg, and join the closing line g a, parallel to O 6, 
 in the force pol_vgon ; giving 5.6= the force iPj at G,6 . a^=z 
 the force /\ at A. From P^ and iP, the journals o'l and d.^ may 
 be determined, and the ordinates of the cord polygon give the 
 means of obtaining the axle diameter as before. 
 
 The intersection g, of « 6 &nA.fe, prolonged, is a point of the 
 line of direction G g, of the resultant of the forces I to 4. If it 
 is desired to find the successive resultants of the various forces 
 as they are combined (see § 40), it will be found convenient to 
 choose O, so that a/ will be parallel to A F. The inclined link 
 polygon may also be transferred to a closing line parallel to 
 A F. 
 
 If the shanks of the axle overhang the journals, as in Fig. 
 410, the procedure is similar to the preceding. Beginning at 
 the point a, the force polygon a 5 (9 is constructed, and the first 
 side of the cord polygon b a, drawn to the line of the first force, 
 the second to the line C c, of the second force, and so on to the 
 closing line eb. The first and nth line of the cord polygon in- 
 tersect as before on the line H h of the resultant. Variations 
 on these examples may occur, as when the loads act in inclined 
 directions, or opposed to each other, the methods being similar 
 in all cases. 
 
 Axles with Inci<ined Loads. 
 
 The analytical investigation of axles becomes more difficult 
 ^vhen, as in Fig. 411, the loads act in different planes, but the 
 graphical method is readily applied. The force polygons A O^ 
 
 % 
 
 B. AXLES WITH COMBINED SECTION. 
 
 ?i38. 
 
 Annular Section. 
 
 If it is desired to make an axle with annular section, or in 
 other words, a tubular axle, the journals should first be calcu- 
 lated, according to the method given in ^ 90 for tubular journals, 
 and then, retaining the same proportional thickness, determine 
 the dimensions of the other parts in the same manner as for 
 solid axles. The most commonly used ratio of internal to ex- 
 ternal diameters is o . 6. Instead of doing this, all the dimen- 
 sions for a solid axle may be determined, and then having chosen 
 a ratio for diameters, increase all the sizes according to formula 
 (,95). See also \ 141. 
 
 I 139- 
 
 Axles with Cruciform Section. 
 
 In cases where axles are made of cast iron the cruciform sec- 
 tion, with circular centre and four ribs, is sometimes used. The 
 shanks are then usually made of the ordinary conoidal form. 
 Fig. 413, and in some cases the libs gradually swell into a junc- 
 tion at the ends with the central core, Fig. 414. 
 
 Fig. 41 ] 
 
 I, and D Cj 2, are constructed for the forces O^ and Q.^, re- 
 spectively, Fig. 412, the polar distances G O^ and H O.^ being 
 made equal to each other, sathat the closing lines of the two 
 cord polyjions A b' B, and A c" D, coincide in A D. Then 
 construct the second cord polygon with the inclined ordinates 
 B B" = B b", C C" = Cc", &c., making the angle u with the 
 force plane of the ordinates of the first polygon, and inclined 
 backwards as drawn. Then make B b = B" b' , C c=^ C" c' , 
 E e ^^ E" e' , &c., and draw the cord polygon A befcD, from 
 which can be obtained (according to ? 44) the bending moments 
 
 In designing such an axle, first proceed as if drawing a solid 
 circular section as shown by the dotted lines, of the diameter 
 corresponding to the 'portion A' when the ribs join the head. 
 Then for any point (jtr) of the shaft : 
 
 y ^= the diameter of the assumed round axle, or equivalent 
 
 conoid , 
 A = height of ribs ; 
 b = thickness of ribs ; 
 k = diameter of core ; 
 
 and the proportions are obtained from the following formula : 
 
 Fig. 412. 
 
 =^^^-um^ 
 
 'i J h\ h J ) 
 
 (127) 
 
 This formula serves for the pure cruciform section, without 
 core by making k ^=b. 
 
 The results vary so slightly when k = 0.2 k, that the follow- 
 ing table may be used for both sections : 
 
 for the axle. The line <5i ^/r is a curve (hyperbola), Ab and 
 c D are straight lines. Draw O^ (9/ parallel to A \, O^ 0/ par- 
 allel to D 2, and drop the perpendiculars C/ J and On' K, and 
 A I will be the force on the journal P„ and D A" that at F,„ 
 measured on the scale of the force polygon. Their directions 
 are determined by combining A G with /^ 2, and Z> // with G 
 I at the angle u. 
 
 h k \ 
 
 b 
 
 h \ 
 
 Values of — when — 
 
 0.800.750.700.65 
 
 x6o 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.5U 
 
 045 
 
 0.40 
 
 035 
 
 0-30 
 
 2 
 
 i5 
 
 0.20 
 
 0.05 j 1. 30, 1.40 I 
 
 50(i.6i 
 
 .72 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.94 
 
 2.04 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.18 
 
 2.22 
 
 2 
 
 26 
 
 2.27 
 
 0.06 1.30 1.39 I 
 
 48' I 
 
 S8 
 
 
 
 1.87 
 
 i.PS 
 
 
 2.07 
 
 2.11 
 
 
 ij 
 
 
 0.07 ;i.29 1.38 I 
 
 461 
 
 S6 
 
 .6S 
 
 1.74 
 
 I 82 
 
 1.89 
 
 ;« 
 
 1.98 
 
 2.00 
 
 2 
 
 02 
 
 2.02 
 
 0.08, 1.28 r.36 I 
 
 4S I 
 
 S^i 
 
 .62 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.7b 
 
 1.83 
 
 1.91 
 
 'Ai 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 0.09:11.27 I. ^Sil 
 
 43 I 
 
 SI 
 
 ■ SQ 
 
 1.66 
 
 
 1-77 
 
 1.81 
 
 1.84 
 
 
 «7 
 
 
 0.10 
 
 i-27ir.34i 
 
 42 I 
 
 49 : 
 
 .^6 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.72 
 
 I.7S 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.80 
 
 
 So 
 
 1.81 
 
 O.I I 
 
 1.261.331 
 
 401 
 
 47 
 
 M 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.74 
 
 
 75 
 
 i-VS 
 
 
 1.25 1.32 I 
 
 ^Qjl 
 
 4S 
 
 .SI 
 
 1-57 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.67 
 
 1.68 
 
 i.b9 
 
 
 70 
 
 i.70 
 
 0.13 
 
 1.25 i.3i!i 
 
 38! I 
 
 43 
 
 .49 
 
 1-54 
 
 i.,S« 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.65 
 
 
 bS 
 
 1.65 
 
 
 1.241.30JI 
 
 ^61 
 
 421 
 
 .47 
 
 LSI 
 
 i.SS 
 
 I-.S7 
 
 i.,W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o.is 
 
 l.23'i.29li 
 
 3sli 
 
 40' 
 
 .4S 
 
 1.48 
 
 I.S2 
 
 I -.54 
 
 1.5b 
 
 ••b7 
 
 1.58 
 
 
 58 
 
 1.58 
 
 
 341 
 
 3«, 
 
 .43 
 
 1.46 
 
 t.49 
 
 ..52 
 
 1-53 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.55 
 
 I 
 
 bS 
 
 1.5b 
 
 "•■1|--"i"t 
 
 33|..37| 
 
 .41 
 
 1-45 
 
 '•47 
 
 1.49 
 
 '■5" 
 
 1.51 
 
 l.b2 
 
 l.b2 
 
 1.52 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ■mpU I.— Simple Cruciform Section, 
 is made double the diameter y, of 
 line of the table, first and last colut 
 mple 2 —Suppose a core to be used 
 = 0.6 h, we have, according to line 
 t h at the same place. 
 
 Compound Axles for Water Wheels. 
 
 In Fig. 417 is cbown an axle for a water-wheel, made of cast 
 and wrought iron. This was made to replace a broken axle of 
 wrought iron, for a wheel 32. S feet (10 m.) diameter, 19.68 feet 
 (6 m.) in width.* The load is carried at four points, as shown, 
 
 Fig. 416. 
 
 giving a total of 82,104 Ibs.f The shaft consists of a drum of 
 sheet iron Y^" thick and 44^^ outside diameter, made in three 
 sections riveted to the central spiders of the wheel. The two 
 journals are fitted to the cast iron heads with a slight taper, the 
 ends being prolonged into the middle of the drum, where they 
 are drawn together by a right and left hand nut. The journals 
 
 We may make b, constant and determine k, or let k be con- 
 stant and 6 vary. The latter case is shown in Fig. 415. Here 
 the shanks are also cruciform in section, and the hub-seats are 
 made to receive keys, as shown in both sections, and the central 
 one is strengthened by transverse ribs. A small auxiliary jour- 
 nal is shown at the end of the main journal, and is very useful 
 in erection. 
 
 I 140. 
 
 Modified Ribbed Axle. 
 
 For hea-vily loaded axles the form shown in Fig. 416 is suit- 
 able, the ribs being provided with flanges along the edge. Fair- 
 bairn has used such axles for water-wheels, and Rieter & Co., of 
 Winterthur have made them for the same purpose. The pro- 
 portions are determined by taking the diameter y, of an ideal 
 shaft of circular section, and calculating /;, as before. We may 
 then make the flange thickness c=^b, the thickness of the ribs, 
 and then the flange breadth b-^ is obtained from the formula : 
 
 i6\ hi 
 
 -(',:)' 
 
 H^y-"& 
 
 ■ (128) 
 
 from which the following table has been calculated : 
 
 b 
 h 
 
 Value of -/ , when — 
 b y 
 
 1. 10 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.90 
 
 2.00 
 
 0.05 
 
 ~^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 7-94 
 
 6.17 
 
 4.81 
 
 3-64 
 
 2-75 
 
 0.06 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6.99 
 
 S.38 
 
 413 
 
 3-17 
 
 2.34 
 
 1.07 
 
 0.07 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 6.70 
 
 5.12 
 
 3-91 
 
 3-4S 
 
 2.24 
 
 1.61 
 
 I.OI 
 
 0.08 
 
 
 
 
 
 6.82 
 
 5-16 
 
 3-91 
 
 3-45 
 
 2.24 
 
 1.61 
 
 1. 17 
 
 
 
 0.09 
 
 
 
 6.00 
 
 5-45 
 4.48 
 
 4.11 
 3-37 
 
 2-53 
 
 2-33 
 1.89 
 
 1-73 
 1-39 
 
 I.OI 
 
 
 
 
 
 O.IO 
 
 O.II 
 
 
 
 S-oS 
 
 3-77 
 
 2.82 
 
 2.11 
 
 1-57 
 
 i.ii 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 0.12 
 
 6.56 
 
 4-34 
 
 3-23 
 
 2.42 
 
 1.80 
 
 '•34 
 
 
 
 0.13 
 
 5-73 
 S.06 
 
 3-78 
 
 2.81 
 2.48 
 
 1.85 
 
 I. .56 
 
 1. 15 
 
 E 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 0.14 
 
 3-34 
 
 Fig. 417. 
 
 are lYz" diameter and 1 1 " long. The circumferential joints in 
 the drum are strengthened by pieces of angle iron as shown. 
 The stress in the shell of the drum is only 3100 lbs., and on the 
 riveting about 6400 lbs. 
 
 I 14-". 
 Construction of Rib Profiles. 
 
 In drawing the curved outline of ribs such as shown in the 
 preceding designs, the following methods may be employed. In 
 the various diagrams A B is the geometric axis of the piece, 6" 
 the highest point of the curve, and A' the lowest point, these 
 both being already determined. 
 
 I. Circular Arc. — This can only be used to advantage when 
 on such a small scale that it can be drawn with compasses or 
 trammel. 
 
 The ratio between b-^ and b is never made greater than 6 to 7, 
 and as it does not fall below unity the table is only given be- 
 tween these limits. The profile is determined for a few points 
 and these are joined by a continuous line. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 I n m 
 
 IV V 
 
 V^r. 
 
 c- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^H 
 
 ^^:k 
 
 A- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 Fig. 418. 
 
 2. Parabola.— Draw S D and C K parallel to A B, divide 5" 
 D into any number of equal parts, as for example, six parts, 
 and divide Z? A' into the same number. Drop perpendiculars 
 from I, II, III, &c., join the lines ^ i, 5"2, ^3, &c., and the in- 
 tersections of these with the perpendiculars I, II, III, &c., will 
 be points in the parabola. 
 
 3. Sinoide.--T)ra.w S D and CA'parallel to A B ,■ with a radius 
 A S draw a circle about A ; divide the arc 5' E, cut off between 
 S D and C K inio six, or any number of parts ; draw from the 
 points of division, lines parallel to A B, and from I, II, III, &c., 
 perpendiculars to A B, and the intersections will give points in 
 the sinoide. 
 
 wheel belongs to the Societe des Fa 
 . du Genie Civil, 1866 and 1872. 
 tSee diagram in Pig. 409, where the loads ; 
 
 n this proportion. 
 
92 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 4. Elastic Line. — By bending an elastic rod of uniform pris- 
 matic cross section, keeping it upon the points K^, S, and K.^, 
 the elastic curve may be drawn directly from the rod, using it 
 as a ruler. For large sizes the rod may be }i" to \]/i" thick, and 
 kept under water : for smaller sizes, about %" thick is sufficient. 
 
 Fig. 419. 
 
 S. Cardiode- — The following method may be used for drawing 
 the curve directly in the pattern loft. A wooden template S' K 
 E C (Fig. 420) is made, in which E C ^.uA E S' are straight 
 edges, and C S"^CS, and CE^^CK. Guide points are 
 placed at Cand A' and the edge C E kept against the point C, 
 and the edge S' E against the point K. The point S' of the 
 
 Fig. 420. 
 
 template will then describe a cardiode curve and by attaching a 
 pencil point at S' it may be drawn directly for pattern makers' 
 
 The most convenient method in piactice is to obtain a few 
 points by (2) or (3), and then join them by a flexible spline or 
 ruler. 
 
 \ 143- 
 Wooden Axles. 
 
 For some water-wheels axles of oak are still used, and these 
 are made polygonal in section. Thej' are made prismatic, the 
 diameter being at all points equal to that necessary at the point 
 of greatest stress, and the methods of attaching journals are 
 shown in ^ 102. The diameter may be obtained by multiplying 
 the diameter for cast iron by 1.55 (the cube root of the ratio of 
 the modulus of cast iron and oak). 
 
 This must be the full actual diameter, as it is sometimes 
 weakened by mortises cut for the arms of the wheel. Should 
 this give a less diameter than required for the attachment of the 
 journals, the diameter at the latter point must be taken for the 
 whole axle. The choice between iron and wooden axles must 
 be governed entirely by local reasons of cost and convenience. 
 
 Example.— ^. water-wheel axle with shanks 106.25" long is loaded so that 
 the journals of cast iron require to be 354" diameter and sVi," long. Accord- 
 ing to the formula in g 130 we have 
 
 > 2.625 
 
 For corresponding strength ii 
 
 wood, the axle should be ai 
 Mi2 X 1.55 = 1S.6". 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 SHAFTIXC. 
 
 Calculations eor Cylindrical Shafting. 
 
 In machine construction those axles which are used to trans- 
 mit twisting moments are called shafting. 
 
 In order to fulfill this purpose two requirements must be met : 
 first, the ultimate strength must be sufficiently great, and se- 
 cond, the torsional spring jnust be kept within proper limits. 
 In actual practice, shafting is subjected, not only to torsional 
 stresses, but also to bending due to the weight and pressure of 
 gears, pulleys, levers, etc, which are carried. These latter in- 
 fluences will not be considered at first, and the calculations 
 made only for round, solid wrought- and cast-iron shafting. 
 
 Let: 
 P= the force acting to rotate the shaft ; 
 R = the lever arm at which it acts ; 
 TV = the horse power transmitted ; 
 n = the number of revolutions per minute ; 
 d = the diameter of the shaft ; 
 L = the length of shaft in feet ; 
 tJ = the angle of torsion in degrees; 
 6" = the fibre stress at the circumference; 
 G = the modulus of torsion of the material ^ f of the modu- 
 lus of elasticity. 
 "We then have for strength : 
 
 ^=<f: 
 
 r^^ (129) 
 
 and for stiffness : 
 
 ^ ^ /C ,» o ' 
 
 ^ : ^^ (130) 
 
 In order to have the same security for the shafting as already 
 given to journals the value of ^should be only f the fibre stress 
 (see I 5), but in actual practice the stress is taken the same as 
 for journ.als, viz.: for wrought iron 5"= 8500 lbs., and for cast 
 iron .5=4250 lbs. 
 
 This gives the following results for strength : 
 
 For wrought iron shafts. 
 
 = 0.091 ^ PR = 2,-33 ^ 
 
 N 
 
 (131) 
 
 For cast iron shafts, 
 
 d^o.ii^^'~PR = ^.2o'^ ^ (132) 
 
 In taking the torsion of shafting into consideration the great- 
 est allowable twist in degrees should not be over 0.075° per foot 
 
 • , ., r , r.- ., . ■ no . _ _ r , . , . fof ' ' " 
 
 N 
 
 d^o.3 >y FJ? = 4.7 \J. 
 
 and for cast iron shafts : 
 
 d = 0.357 ^^:r = 5.63 yj. 
 
 N 
 The quotient of effect — is obtained from the relation to the 
 
 statical moment P J? a.s follows : 
 
 33000 X 12 N _ 
 
 (133) 
 
 (134) 
 
 PP = 
 
 - = 6?. 020 - 
 
 • (135) 
 
 From these formulas the following table for round wrought 
 iron shafts has been calculated. An inspection of the table will 
 show that it is quite possible for a shaft to be strong enough to 
 resist permanent deformation and yet be so light as to be liable 
 to spring under its load. For example, a shaft 26 feet long, with 
 a twistiug force of 220 lbs. applied at one end, and acting with a 
 lever arm of 20'', gives a turning moment PP^=440o inch lbs., 
 which would require a shaft only iHnches diameter (see column 
 2). This, however, would permit far too much torsion, and in 
 order that the angular deflection should not exceed the limit of 
 0.075° per foot, a corresponding value of P P in column 4, must 
 be found, and against it in column i will be given the diameter, 
 in this case about 2|^''; which, by comparison with column 2, 
 gives about five-fold strength. 
 
 For short shafts this examination of angular deflection is un- 
 necessary, as for example, in the short lengths between two 
 gear wheels, for here the value of i!^ will be small enough in any 
 ca.se. With longer shafts, and in all special constructions, it is 
 important to consider the angular deflection and keep it within 
 the given limit. 
 
 For shafting of cast iron the same table may be used by tak- 
 
 ing dottble the values for P P, or for — 
 
 For steel shafts, whose modulus of resistance is f greater than 
 wrought iron, the diameters in both cases may be taken as 
 "v 0.6, that is, 0.84 times that of correspondingly loaded wrought 
 iron shafts. 
 
 Shafting which is subjected to sudden and violent shocks, as 
 in rolling mills, etc., must be made much stronger than the pre- 
 ceding formulas require, and these must be classed with the 
 special cases which occur in every branch of construction. 
 
 iS'o^li 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 93 
 
 diameter of the sh-jft to resist the ' 
 43,362, which by reiereiice to cohin 
 inches, say zYf. This would requ 
 stress, for wliich see § 150. 
 - mphri.h. 
 
 •sioti thus brought upon it. Here PR = 
 2 gives a diameter between 3 and 31^ 
 ; to be somewhat increased for bending 
 
 )Ught iron shaft, 
 
 — = 0.807, which, by column 2 in the table, would require about ; 
 iameter. If the deflection is not to exceed 0.075° per foot, we ha 
 mn 4, a value of — = 0.803, which gives a diameter of 4J4", and 
 
 :r the 1 
 
 X 0.075 = 
 h gives 
 
 0.65°. 
 
 Wrought Iron Shafting. 
 
 
 FOR STRENGTH. 
 
 FOR STIFFNESS (Torsional) 
 
 d 
 
 Pi? 
 
 N 
 
 P7? 
 
 .V 
 
 J 
 
 1,327 
 
 0.021 
 
 123 
 
 0.0019 
 0.0048 
 
 IX 
 
 2,591 
 
 0.052 
 
 301 
 
 IK 
 
 4,479 
 
 0.071 
 
 625 
 
 0.0099 
 
 I^ 
 
 7,112 
 
 0.114 
 
 1,357 
 
 0.0183 
 
 
 10,616 
 
 0.168 
 
 1,975 
 
 0.0313 
 
 2X 
 
 15,115 
 
 0.239 
 
 3,164 
 
 0.0502 
 
 2K 
 
 20,730 
 
 0.329 
 
 4,822 
 
 0.0765 
 
 2^ 
 
 27,600 
 
 0.43S 
 
 7,061 
 
 0.1120 
 
 3 
 
 35,830 
 
 0.568 
 
 10,000 
 
 0.1587 
 
 3/2 
 
 56,890 
 
 0.902 
 
 18,520 
 
 0.2941 
 
 4 
 
 84,930 
 
 1-347 
 
 31,600 
 
 0.5015 
 
 4'A 
 
 120,900 
 
 1.919 
 
 50,620 
 
 0.8032 
 
 5 
 
 165,800 
 
 2.632 
 
 77,160 
 
 1.2240 
 
 5/2 
 
 220,800 
 
 3-503 
 
 11,000 
 
 1.7920 
 
 6 
 
 286,600 
 
 4-548 
 
 160,000 
 
 2.5390 
 
 6y^ 
 
 364,400 
 
 5-784 
 
 220,300 
 
 3.4960 
 
 7 
 
 455,200 
 
 7.222 
 
 296,400 
 
 4.7040 
 
 7/2 
 
 559,800 
 
 8.883 
 
 390,600 
 
 6. 2000 
 
 8 
 
 679,400 
 
 10.780 
 
 505,700 
 
 8.0240 
 
 S/2 
 
 815,000 
 
 12.930 
 
 644,400 
 
 10.2300 
 
 9 
 
 967,400 
 
 15-350 
 
 810,000 
 
 12.8600 
 
 9/2 
 
 1,138,000 
 
 18.050 
 
 982,700 
 
 15.6000 
 
 10 
 
 1,327,000 
 
 21.050 
 
 1,230,000 
 
 19.5900 
 
 loK 
 
 1,536,000 
 
 24.380 
 
 1,501,000 
 
 23.8100 
 
 
 1,766,000 
 
 28.020 
 
 1,808,000 
 
 28.6800 
 
 "iH 
 
 2,018,000 
 
 32.020 
 
 2,159,000 
 
 34.2600 
 
 12 
 
 2,293,000 
 
 36-390 
 
 2,560,000 
 
 40.6200 
 
 Line Shafting. 
 
 In the previous discussion we have assumed that the bending 
 forces upon shafting might be neglected. As a matter of fact, 
 this is rarely the case, only occurring when the turning moments 
 are those due to a simple force couple. Nearly all the shafting 
 used for power transmission is subjected to bending stresses due 
 to belt pull, pressure of gear teeth, weight of gears and pulleys, 
 and to take all of these into consideration would make a very 
 complicated calculation. 
 
 In most cases ample strength will be given by taking the 
 diameters according to the formulas (133) or (134). As already 
 shown, these give ample strength, so that any ordinary bending 
 Stresses are provided for. These give reduced diameters for the 
 higher speeds, shafting for high speed machinery running at 
 120, 140 or even 200 revolutions per minute. 
 
 First movers run a lower speed and are proportionally heavier, 
 and the line shafting generally is gradually reduced in diameter 
 in the successive ascending floors of a building. iBuch line shaft- 
 ing is only occasionally made of cast iron, when moderate power 
 is to be transmitted. 
 
 The practice in the proportion of shaft diameters is not alto- 
 gether consistent. In many cases very high stresses are per- 
 mitted, as in the case of locomotives, in which stresses of 12,000 
 to 15,000 lbs. are borne by wrought iron cranked axles; shafts 
 of screw propeller enginesusually carry 7,000 to 8,500 lbs., while 
 in many instances the stresses upon line shafting are very light, 
 when the high rotative speed is taken into consideration. This 
 is particularly the case in England, the shafting running at 
 higher speeds with a proportional reduction in diameter. The 
 greatest difficulty to be encountered lies in the fact that the 
 forces are rarely given with suflScient accuracy, the so-called 
 "nominal" horse power which a shaft is supposed to transmit 
 
 bearing no definite relation to the actual power. In most cases, 
 however, the use of the formulas above given for stiffness, with 
 a slight increase for very long shafts, will give satisfactory re- 
 sults. 
 
 A few examples will serve to illustrate the manner in which 
 the methods given may be applied, and the remarks which have 
 been made should be borne in mind in connection with the ap- 
 plication. 
 
 n by two cylinders, 
 
 ks of 21.75" radius. 
 
 :» The shaft is .,f wrought iron, and 
 
 peller it is 72 feet long, by 15" diameter. 
 
 ula (131) we have : 
 
 md consequently 
 
 This is somewhat less than the previou 
 the deflection will be less than 72 X .075 = 5 
 
 Example 2. In the mills at Saltaire there is a cast iron driving shaft mak- 
 ing 92 revolutions per minute, and transmitting 300 horse power, the diame- 
 ter being 10 inches. According to formula (134) the diameter would be : 
 
 rf = 5.63 4^il°=7.56", 
 ^ 92 
 
 
 
 so that the actual shaft is % stronger, and the other shafts 
 proportionally heavy. 
 
 Example 3. In the rolling mill at Rheinfall is a line of wrc 
 ing, 223 feet long, transmitting 120 horse power. The speed 1 
 
 n the 
 
 Ughtl 
 
 mill are 
 
 ron shafts 
 volutions, 
 
 giving the ratio — = 1^^ = 1.263, The diameter for stre 
 
 ngth. 
 
 as given 
 
 7,397 lbs. in the journals, and 6,541 lbs. in the body of the shaft. Accordin 
 to the formula of Fairbairn, who designed the mills at Saltaire, this sha: 
 would have been made 
 
 •</?= 
 
 or nearly eight times stronger than was actually used. 
 
 Example 4. In the spinning mill at Logelbach there is a cast iron shaft 
 81^" diameter, making 27 revolutions per minute and transmitting 140 horse 
 power by actual measurement. The ratio — = -^ = 5.19. 
 
 Taking the double value- in the table, since 
 find in column 5, that d-= 8J4. The diamete! 
 found by column 3 to be about 7%". 
 
 Example 5. In the same mill is a line of c£ 
 
 a shafting, 84 feet long, 
 
 Thejc 
 
 ting 270 horse power, and 1 
 jrnals are 6%" diameter, a 
 
 nakmg 50 revolutions, hence — = 5.4- 
 
 nd the body of the shaft is the section 
 ^>nowIl m rig. 413, aim us secuon approximates to that of a cylindrical shaft 
 of zyj' diameter. For such conditions the table gives in column 3, taking 
 double the value of — , wegeti/ = 8". The diameter 6%" in the journals 
 
 gives a fibre stress of about 5,200 lbs. From the length of the shaft it is ad- 
 visable to take the diameter for stiflfness, which we get from the value cor- 
 responding to 2 = 10.8 in column 5, which gives a = 8J^", which is quite 
 
 close to the actual dim 
 
 ?I47- 
 Determination of the Angle of Torsion. 
 
 In a cylindrical shaft of a diameter d, which transmits a stati- 
 cal moment PR, throughout its length L, the modulus of tor- 
 sion of the material being G, we have from No. I, ^ 14, the angle 
 of torsion. 
 
 ^^_PR L _S_ A 
 G a 
 
 JpG 
 2. 2,60 PR . 
 
 iL 
 
 27r2 . rf*. G 
 which for wrought iron, in which G = 
 
 ' rr G 
 
 -^- . (136) 
 
 6,000 gives 
 
 For cast iron these values are doubled, giving 
 
 i9°= 0.00124 — -._ — = 0.0002436 5 -- .... (137) 
 d* d 
 
 Here L is taken in feet and 5 is the stress at the point of ap- 
 plication on the shaft. It will be noticed that the angle <? can 
 be determined very readily when 5 is known. It must be re- 
 membered that d and 5" are closely related, and that the value 
 of d depends upon the value taken for ^S. 
 
 Various applications of twisting moments may be reduced to 
 a single one for use in the formulas, by classification under some 
 one of the following heads, taking the value for L as follow 
 (see ? 13, ? 14) 5 
 
94 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 (a). L = the whole length of the shaft, in feet, when the force 
 is applied at one end and transmitted to the other. 
 
 (b). L = half the length of the shaft when the twisting forces 
 are applied over the entire length uniformly. 
 
 (c). L ^one-third the length of the shaft when the twisting 
 forces diminish uniformly from one end to the other 
 of the shaft, as in § 14, case III. 
 
 (d). In general, the distance of the point of application of a 
 collected number of twisting forces distributed in 
 any manner along the length of the shaft, may be 
 found by multiplying the power applied at each 
 point (in horse power), by its distance from the end 
 of the shaft, adding the several products together 
 and dividing by the total horse power transmitted. 
 
 The methods may be illustrated by the same examples which 
 ^'ere given in the preceding section. 
 
 5= 8,200 lbs., <f= 15", i = 72 feet. 
 According to (137) we have 
 
 This will be reduced to /o this value, or 31-^° when either of the cranks is 
 
 Example 2. The l'"e of shafting given in Example 3, of the preceding sec- 
 tion, is made of two diameters in the bearings and in the body, and these 
 must be combined. The bearings may be taken at 4 inches long each, and 
 are 32 in number. We have then 
 
 = 0.0001208 (20158 + 348310) = 44^" ! ! 
 a deflection which must be very marked, with variable loads, and entirely 
 inadmissible with fine machinery. 
 
 Example 3. If the preceding shaft had been made 8 inches diameter, as by 
 Fairbairn's formula, we have for =1.263. 
 
 
 (8)1 
 
 2.67°. 
 
 The absence of turning is also of advantage, and the increas- 
 ing use of this shafting is doubtless due to both causes. The 
 principal objection to it lies in the fact that the hard outer skin 
 canuot be disturbed without affecting the truth of its form. 
 Keyways cut in it invariably cause springing. 
 
 Some of the modern methods of securing pulleys without 
 cutting keyways may be used to avoid this difficulty. The jour- 
 nals and wheel seats on this kind of shafting do not require 
 turning. 
 
 I 149. 
 Combined Sections. Wooden Shafting. 
 
 The dimensions for shafting of various combined sections 
 (tubular, cruciform, fluted) are determined by finding the size 
 for round shafting of the same material, and then deducing the 
 dimensions of the desired section in the same manner as given 
 for axles in W 138 to 142. 
 
 Axles of wood (generally oak) are made of polygonal sectioii 
 described about a circle not less than 1.75 times the diameter of 
 a cast iron shaft for the same work, this being the fourth root 
 of the ratio of the moduli of elasticity of the two materials. 
 Wooden shafting is now seldom used. 
 
 \ 150. 
 
 Shafting subjected to Deflection. 
 
 Shafting is often loaded in such a manner as to be subjected 
 
 to bending stresses, and as already seen, this is the most general 
 
 condition in which it is used. Under these circumstances the 
 
 combined resistance must be taken into consideration. This is 
 
 most conveniently done by assuming an ideal bending moment 
 
 (see I 18). 
 
 I/Ct RI^ be the twisting moment for a given shaft section, 
 
 iJ/j, be the bending moment for the same section ; 
 
 then the ideal bending moment combining them both will be : 
 
 • (139) 
 
 Example 4. In the twine factory at Schaff hausen there is a shaft made of 
 Bessemer steel. The length is 4S9 feet, and it transmits 200 horse power 
 from the Rhine up the bank and an angle of 23°. The diameter is 4i|", 
 N= 200, n = I2J. This gives 5= 4756, and if we take the modulus of elasti- 
 city of the steel the same as wrought iron, we have 
 
 4756 X 4S9 ^ 
 
 58.34°. 
 
 Example 5. A shaft 164 feet long, and of a constant diameter, transmits 7c 
 horse power at 100 revolutions. The power is taken oflfby a number of ma 
 chines, ranged at uniform distances apart. According to the table for — = 
 0.7 the diameter should be about 4'^^". In determining the torsion the value 
 of L is taken at one-half the length of the line (case b) giving : 
 
 
 62500 
 
 X82 
 
 (4K)^ 
 
 about 6%°. 
 
 Since the formula is based on an angular deflection of 0.75° per foot, we 
 might have obtained direct, 82 K 0.75 = 6. J5°, or nearly the same value. 
 
 If in any case the calculated deflection appears too great, the diameter of 
 the shaft must be increased, and since the denominator of the equation is 
 the fourth power of the shaft diameter, a slight increase in its value effects 
 a marked reduction in the deflection. 
 
 Example 6. If the angle in the preceding example is desired to be reduced 
 to one half its value, the diameter must be multiplied by -v 2 or by 1.189, 
 hence ^ = 4.25 X 1-189 = 5 inches. 
 
 JOURNAX^S FOR SHAFTING. ROUND ROLLED SHAFTING. 
 
 The journals on shafting are either end journals, and treated 
 as already shown, or, as in most cases, necked journals, and the 
 length of bearing made as given in | 92. For line shafting the 
 special determination of journals is unnecessary. Unless there 
 is some apparent reason for a special determination of the jour- 
 nals (as in the case of locomotives), the journal length I is usu- 
 allj^aken quite large, as \d, 2d, /^d (see \ 109 et scq.), care be- 
 ing taken to insure proper support of the journals in the hangers. 
 
 The Kirkstall Forge Company, of Leeds, have produced shaft- 
 ing which is rolled round and requires no turning. The round 
 finish is given by- the action of plane discs whose geometric axes 
 are horizontal and parallel, about eight inches apart, and revolve 
 rapidly. (See ^ 195.) The discs are placed so as to act upon 
 the bar as it leaves the rolls, and are cooled with water, and 
 their action produces a true cylindrical form to the shafting, 
 and gives it a highly finished surface, so that it is at once ready 
 for use without being turned in a lalhe. By this process the 
 modulus of resistance is also iucreaped nearly 20 per cent, over 
 that of shafting rolled in the ordinary manner, as shown by tests 
 by Kirkaldy, and given in the catalogue of the Kirkstall Forge 
 Company, for the iMelbourne Exposition. This feature is not of 
 as much impoitance as at first appears, although it is of some 
 vaiue. 
 
 ( 31, ),=y^M,^%V M,^ + Mi 
 
 This formula may be simplified for numerical calculations by 
 Poncelet's theorem, approximately : 
 
 When Ml, > iJ/^take {M,). =0.975 ^/^ + 0.25 M^ . 
 and when M^ > M^ take {M^\. = 0.625 M^ -f 0.6 AI^ . 
 
 ■ (140) 
 • (HI) 
 
 An examination will be made, first by the analytical, and then 
 by the graphical method. 
 
 I. Analytical Method.— "Doi^ axle or shaft ABC, shown in 
 Fig. 421, carries a gear wheel R at C, which acts tangentially to 
 
 Fig. 42: 
 
 rotate the shaft with a moment Md ^=Q R, and also acts to bend 
 the shaft with a force whose reactions are parallel to Q, and are 
 
 /\ = -^-— at A, and P.^ = ^— at B. The greatest stress is 
 
 a + -s a-\- s 
 
 at C. for there both bending moments are at their maximum 
 
 P, P., 
 Mb =- — -^ — -, hence calculation should be made for this point. 
 
 Example.— \.ft\. Q = 5500 lbs. R = 1 ij^", a = 193^", j = 78%", then 
 /'i=~^i2=o.8i3 = 44oolbs. 
 
 P«.-- 
 
 Also 
 
 18.50-^ 
 
 
 ■5=64,6: 
 
 Hence Mi, "^M^ and formula (140) is used. 
 
 We have {Mb)i = 0.975 X 36,900 + 0.25 X 64.625 = 84,727 + 13,656 =98,383" lbs. 
 From this the diameter at Ccan be calculated. If the shaft is of cast iron 
 with cruciform section, we have for the diameter D, 
 
 have 
 
 3/^8,383 X 32~ 
 
 The journal at A is found in the table of §91, column 4, to be about 2%". 
 For the neck journal at B, we have from the table of g 145, taking the double 
 value for cast iron, d^^ 4%". 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 95 
 
 Graphical Method. — The same example may be solved graphi- 
 cally. In Fig. 422, with a horizontal closing line, construct the 
 link polygon a b c, for the bending moments, and the force 
 polygon a 10, giving the forces P^ and P.^, and also a c c' , the 
 surface of moments for the shank A C. 
 
 The moment 3Id is yet to be determined. In the force poly- 
 gon with a distance R from the pole O, draw a vertical ordinate ; 
 this will be Hfd. Lay its value oiT at c'Ti, andiJ/);, and Ys of 
 these values give c' c^ b^ b for the parallelogram of torsion for 
 the shank C^. 
 
 Fig. 422. 
 
 The combination of the bending and twisting moments may 
 then be made by formula (139). Make cC2-=y% c c' and join c. 
 b, then at any point of the polygon, as for example aty, the 
 distanceyXj = Viff- Now transfer c' c^ to a b, at c' c^' ; then 
 will the hypotenuse of the triangle c^ c' c^' divided by fj <^o = 
 ^/(l^TcO H^lj^T^T^ and the sum c c, + c, c^'=^ c c.^-\- c, r, the 
 desired moment {Mb)i for the point C. In the same manner we 
 oh\.a\-aff.^-\-f^f^'=ff^-\-f^f^ the moment {3Ib)i for the point 
 J^- The line c^/.^ b^ is a curve (hyperbola) which may be taken 
 approximately with sufficient accuracy as a straight line c^ b^o- 
 The various dimensions maj^ be obtained from the polj'gon a c 
 b ba C3 c' in a similar manner as shown in the discussion of axles. 
 
 pther discussions of this subject will be given when consid- 
 ering rock shafts and crank axles. 
 
 CHAPTER X, 
 
 COUPLINGS. 
 
 Various Kinds op Couplings. 
 
 The devices by means of which the different lengths of shaft- 
 ing are connected together so that the motion may be trans- 
 mitted from one piece to the next, are called couplings. 
 
 They may be classed as follows : 
 
 1. Rigid Couplings. 
 
 2. Flexible Couplings. 
 
 3. Releasing, or Clutch Couplings. 
 
 The first class includes the various forms of coupling for line 
 fihafting and the like, in which the coupling and the coupled 
 portions have the same geometric axis. Flexible couplings are 
 those which permit more or less change in the relative position 
 of the coupled shafts; while clutch couplings are constructed so 
 as to be thrown in and out of engagement, usually when the 
 parts are in motion. These three classes are all shown in vari- 
 ous forms in the following examples : 
 
 i 152. 
 
 /. Rigid Couplings. 
 
 Rigid couplings may be made either in a single piece, or in 
 
 several parts. Of the first sort is the so-called Muff Couplings, 
 
 Fig. 423. The muff is fitted over both pieces of shafting, and 
 
 a single key binds the parts all firm'.y together. 
 
 In giving the proportions of the various parts of the following 
 couplings, we may take for a unit or modulus the thickness 6 of 
 the hub, making its value equal to : 
 
 r + 1 
 
 • (142) 
 
 d being the diameter of the shaft, whether of wrought or cast 
 iron. The dimensions of the key may be taken as given in ^ 68, 
 Formula (71) for torsion keys. 
 
 More recently, in exposed situations, the projecting end of the 
 key is covered with a cap, in order to avoid accidents. 
 
 The form of coupling shown in Figs. 189 and 190, ^ 69, looks 
 very practical, but the test of prolonged use will be necessary to 
 demonstrate its merits. 
 
 Fig. 423. 
 
 The simplest two-part coupling is the well-known plate coup- 
 ling. Fig. 424, and its form permits the nuts and 2olt-heads to 
 be kept below the projecting flanges, and thus out of the way. 
 
 The number of bolts in a plate coupling i = 0.8 cf + 2. The 
 diameter d of the bolts should be 0.125 d -\- xV, which gives a 
 strength pioportional to that of a shaft calculated by formula 
 (133), or if d is determined from formula (133) the bolt will be 
 strong enough.* 
 
 Fig. 424. 
 
 Plate couplings are extensively used in England and Germany, 
 although the}^ are being superseded by later forms. Their 
 strength has caused them to be used for coupling the lengths 
 of screw propeller shafts, and in this case the plates are forged 
 
 Fig. 425. 
 on the shafts, thus dispensing with the use of a key. Fig. 425. 
 This form was introduced bj' Langdon in 1852, and is in general 
 use, 4 to 6 bolts being used. 
 
 Examples : The following cases will sers'e to give the proportion of such 
 plate couplings in executed designs. 
 
 Jason, James Watt & Co., d = 12", £> = 24", rfi = 3", b = 6", 2 = 4- 
 
 Warrior, John Penn & Son, ii= 17", D = 37'', di = 4", b = 10, j = 6. 
 
 Vessel by Ravenhill & Hodgson, d = 12", D = 25, di = 3", b = &', i = 4. 
 Fig. 426 shows a clamp coupling divided into two parts longi- 
 tudinally. This form is provided with two keys, and the man- 
 ner in which it is bolted together. If it is desired to clamp the 
 
 Fig. 426 
 
 shafts together endwise, the small circumferential grooves and 
 lips may be used as shown. Such grooves may be used in depth 
 equal to o.oi d + -^-^" , but may be omitted where endlong clamp- 
 ing' is unnecessary. If lock nuts are used on the bolts the main 
 
 side of flange, whi 
 
96 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 iiuts may be counter-sunk as shown in the iUustration. The 
 number of bolts is =: 2, 4 or 6, rarely more, and of diameter as 
 follows : 
 
 Example: For a shaft 2g" dial 
 the diameter rfj = 0.77", say Jg", 
 d\ = 0.67, say ^J". 
 
 This form of coupling has been made with bolts with differ- 
 ential thread passing through both parts and giving increased 
 clamping force.* 
 
 Fig. 427. 
 
 The cone coupling shown in Fig. 427 is the design of the 
 author, aud is a modification of the preceding form. The keys 
 are cast in one with the halves of the inner cone, and are planed 
 to fit the keyways in the shafts. The cone is made with a taper 
 of -^-^ on a side, which will hold the parts securely when driven 
 on, without any other fastening. If there is much vibration, 
 however, it is advisable to have a screw thread cut on the inner 
 cones as shown, and the outer shell tightened by a spanner. In 
 most ordinary cases the screw may be omitted, and a small steel 
 countersunk set screw tapped into each side of the shell to 
 clamp the inner cone. If endless motion need not be considered 
 the circumferential grooves may be omitted. 
 
 With couplings for shafts larger than 2^^^, the bearing sur- 
 faces should be recessed to reduce the amount of finishing. 
 
 Fig. 428. 
 
 In America Sellers has introduced a clamp coupling in which 
 two cones are opposed to each other and drawn together by 
 three bolts, the whole being inclosed in a cylindrical shell bored 
 out to fit the cones as shown in Fig. 428. The cones are cut 
 through on one side so that they are compressed by the action 
 
 In England Butler's cone coupling has been used, and was 
 designed for use with the cold rolled shafting described in \ 148. 
 It is similar in construction to Sellers', the three bolts being re- 
 placed by a single concentric screw thread and nut at each end. 
 The key which Sellers uses is omitted in Butler's coupling, the 
 shafts being held only by the clamping action of the cones. 
 
 In the United States Cresson's coupling is also much used. 
 Its construction is shown in Fig. 429. The clamping surfaces 
 are cast in one with the outer shell, aud forced upon the shafts 
 by means of the tapering screws. This coupling possesses the 
 same advantage as does Sellers', in being adapted to shafts of 
 slightly unequal diameters. 
 
 //. Flexible Couplings. 
 
 Various Kinds of Flexibi^e; Coupi<ings. 
 
 Couplings which permit the shafts to change their positions 
 may be required to meet three different conditions. The motion 
 of the shafts may be : 
 
 (a) I^engthwise, or in the direction of the axis. 
 
 {b) Crosswise. 
 
 {c) Angular, the shafts being inclined to each other. 
 
 In some cases two, or even all three, of these conditions may 
 be present. In the first place the axes of the two shafts coin- 
 cide ; in the second case they are parallel to each other ; in the 
 third case they intersect, while in the combination of {b) and (c) 
 the axes pass each other. All these cases occur in actual prac- 
 tice and meet with useful applications. 
 
 i 154. 
 
 COUPWNGS FOR I^FNGTHWISE AND PARAHEL MOTIONS. 
 
 Endlong motion of the coupled shafts may be provided for by 
 giving various prismatic forms to the parts of the couplings. 
 As an example, Sharp's Coupling, Fig. 430, may serve. This 
 permits but slight movement lengthwise, and also a little angu- 
 lar displacement, and is therefore suitable for positions where 
 
 Fig. 430. 
 
 the bearings cannot be accurately placed. In some recent ex- 
 amples of this form of coupling, one half is first made and the 
 second cast upon it, and in this case the outer recess is omitted. . 
 
 In some French screw steamships iji which the screw is 
 arranged to be lifted, one of the shaft couplings is arranged so 
 that sufficient endlong motion maybe obtained to permit the 
 end of the shaft to be withdrawn from the hub of the screw. J 
 
 f! 
 
 Fig. 429. 
 
 of the bolts. A key is let into the cones and shafts diametri- 
 cally opposite the cut in the cones. An especial advantage 
 which results from the double cone construction lies in the fact 
 that it is not necessary for the two shafts to be exactly the same 
 diameter.f 
 
 '^'fSr'fo' 
 
 In Fig. 426 there are 
 r 2.6 d, use I" + 2.6 d, 
 
 * Ruggles' Coupling, Frai 
 two dimensions whi 
 and for 10 -|- 1.3 d use j" + 1.3 <?• 
 
 t Among other tests the Sellers Coupling stood the following: Two shafts 
 loleet long were fitted in three hangers, the middle hanger next the coup- 
 ling being set iJi"out of line, and after several weeks' time, at 250 revolutions 
 per minute, the coupling remained intact. 
 
 Fig 431 
 
 For shafts in which the displacement is crosswise, the axes of 
 the shafts remaining parallel, Oldham's Coupling, Fig. 431, is 
 most applicable. This consists of two end pieces and one inter- 
 mediate piece. The latter has a prismatic tongue upon each 
 side, the two being placed at 90° with each other, and fitting 
 into corresponding grooves in the end plates, which latter are 
 keyed on to the shafts. If the two axes of the shafts coincide 
 
 t Among various interesting examples of such couplings may be 'men- 
 tioned those described in Armengaud's "Vignoledes Mecaniciens," Paris, 
 1863, Plate 9 ; also Ledieu, App. a vapeur de navigation, Paris, 1862, and Or- 
 tolan, Mach. ^ vapeur marines, Paris, 1859. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 97 
 
 at O, the tongues and grooves have no sliding action upon each 
 other. If one of the axes is moved parallel to itself, say to P, 
 the middle of the intermediate piece will describe a circle 
 O Q P Q' oi the diameter O P^ the distance between the axes, 
 making 'two revolutions for every revolution of the shafts, the 
 other points of the disc describe cardiode paths. The velocity 
 ratio remains constant. 
 
 Another form of coupling for the purpose consists of two 
 cranks connected by a short drag-link to permit the necessary 
 movement. This is frequently used in connecting engine shafts. 
 
 I 155- 
 Jointed Coupwngs. 
 
 The best known of all the flexible couplings is the Universal 
 joint, known also as Hooke's Coupling, and also as Cardan's 
 Coupling.* This form of coupling permits the connection of 
 inclined axes within certain limits. It consists broadly of two 
 end pieces, and a middle piece, the latter containing two pairs 
 of journals placed at right angles with each other in the form 
 of a cross, each pair fitting into journals on one and the other 
 of the end pieces respectively. 
 
 The rate of transmission of motion is not uniform, and is 
 dependent upon the angle of inclination a of the two shafts, 
 the angular rotations o and Wj of the driving and driven shafts 
 being expressed in the following ratio : 
 
 t-^ = ^°^"- • ' ^^^^^ 
 
 which gives a periodical variation whose period is i8o°. The 
 following table gives the values of w^ for successive values of u, 
 for various angles a : 
 
 should be made in the plane of the shafts, not at right angles 
 to them, in order to provide for the wear. 
 
 Universal joints are used to good advantage in screw propeller 
 shafts in order to provide for the flexure due to the elasticity of 
 the hull of the vessel. In such cases two universal joints are 
 used on a shaft. A coupling for such service is shown in Fig. 
 433. Here all these pieces are forgings, one end piece being 
 forged solid with the shaft. The middle piece is formed of a 
 double ring, the bearings being held between the two parts, 
 
 " 
 
 a =10° 
 
 20° 
 
 30° 
 
 40° 
 
 30° 
 
 29° 38' 
 
 28° 29' 
 
 26° 34' 
 
 23° 51' 
 
 45° 
 
 44° Z\' 
 
 43° 12' 
 
 40° 54' 
 
 37° 27' 
 
 60° 
 
 59° 34' 
 
 58° 26' 
 
 56° 22' 
 
 53° 04' 
 
 90° 
 
 ■ 90° 
 
 90° 
 
 90° 
 
 90° 
 
 120° 
 
 120° 26' 
 
 121° 34^ 
 
 123° 38' 
 
 126° 56^ 
 
 135° 
 
 135° 26^ 
 
 136° 48^ 
 
 139° 06' 
 
 142° 33' 
 
 150° 
 
 150° 22 
 
 151° 31^ 
 
 153° 26' 
 
 156° 01° 
 
 180° 
 
 180° 
 
 180° 
 
 180° 
 
 180° 
 
 variations in velocity may be neglected when the n 
 are inconsiderable and the angle a is small f 
 
 The detailed construction of the coupling admits of great 
 variations. Fig. 432 shows a form with cast-iron end pieces and 
 
 wrought iron middle piece. The relation --— is varied also. The 
 
 journal diameter (i.,_ is determined by the methods already given, 
 and frorri the moment of rotation {PR) the journal pressure P^ 
 
 may be taken with sufficient accuracy as = — -^ — -■ The dis- 
 tance a should be made greater as the angle a is increased, a 
 being made quite in the illustration. The joints in the boxes 
 
 nrira 
 
 while the journals are secured to the end pieces. No provision 
 is made for taking up the wear upon the journal boxes, as the 
 angle a is so small that the wear is very slight. The length /, 
 of the journals need not be great, about i to 1.25 d^, and since 
 R can be kept small, the dimensions of the entire coupling may- 
 be kept withni reasonable limits. 
 
 Another form of universal joint is shown in Fig. 434. Here 
 the cross journals are made in the form of through bolts, pass- 
 ing through both end and middle pieces. This requires a slight 
 modification in the form, since the axes of the two bolts cannot 
 intersect each other. A slight error in motion follows, causing- 
 
 p~'^~^ 
 
 * If not the original inventor of the Univers 
 ■was the first to describe it (1501-1576), and the Ei 
 first applied it for the transmission of rotary n 
 
 t In the table the values of u are so placed that when w = O, the c 
 journals of the coupling lie in the plane of the shafts. 
 
 Fig. 434» 
 
 a very small endlong motion with each revolution in the coupled 
 shafts, but this is generally insignificant. This form is suitable 
 for agricultural machinery, horsepowers, etc. In the illustra- 
 tion a proportional scale is given. The modulus is as before, 
 8 =\d -\- 1%''. The pole P is therefore taken, so that \d-\- 
 -l^" = 0, or so that d ■= — tb"- 
 
 The irregularity in motion shown in formula (144) is generally 
 of little consequence, and need not be considered except in 
 cases requiring geometrical exactness, as in the connections for 
 large tower clocks, or in cases where large masses are drawn at 
 high velocities, as in threshing machines. The variation can 
 be obviated by the use of a double universal joint, which con- 
 sists of two simple couplings. If, Fig. 435 a, the driving shaft 
 A is coupled to B by means of a short intermediate shaft C, 
 the connections being made by two similar couplings of the 
 same angles, then the motion of A will be transmitted to B 
 without variation. In this case the driven shaft may be given 
 several positions with regard to A, being placed at B, making 
 the angle 2 a, or at B' , parallel to A, or at B" on the surface 
 of acone of half the angle a, which is made with the inter- 
 mediate axis C. The two universal joints are similarly placed 
 when the cross axes belonging respectively to A and B lie in 
 the same plane as the shaft C at the same time. In the posi- 
 tions B and B' all three shafts lie in the same plane, but not ia 
 position B^'. In the last case A and B intersect. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Cj and C^ connected on both sides. Clemens has used this form 
 with the angle 2 a = 90°. The doubling of the parts has the 
 
 pfir. 
 
 Fig. 435. 
 
 If the cross axes are not placed similarly, but, for example, 
 at 90°, as in Fig. 435 b, the variations of motion are increased, 
 . and we have . 
 
 tan (Jj =^ tan w cos- a, in which u and Wj stand for A and B. 
 If a ^ 30°, we have for u = 45°, tan Wj = (i \/ 3 )- ^ 0.75, hence 
 ■Wj = 36° 5'v' instead of 40° 54', as in the table above. 
 
 ■A concealed form of universal joint is that used in rolling 
 mills, the cross being formed upon the end of the roller. 
 
 tan 6) 
 
 = tan 
 
 <' 
 
 'tan/?\] 
 3 "i ' )\ 
 
 In this case the transmission of motion is much more irregular 
 than with the universal joint, since the angular velocity ratio 
 between 
 
 cos a -)- sin a tan /3 
 
 I + sin^ a tan /3 
 
 fluctuates. This coupling is really only a modification of the 
 universal joint, inclined to such an extent that the fork of the 
 shaft A stands at right angles to the axis. (Compare formula 
 (144) with (145)). By combining two such couplings symmetri- 
 cally with each other, as in Fig. 437, the motion will be uni- 
 formly transmitted. The two sleeves at 3 and 4 are formed in 
 
 Fig. 437- 
 
 Fig. 438- 
 
 one piece, their axes making the angle 2 /? with each other. In 
 practice it is better to make these parts in the form of journals 
 and place the sleeves in the (T, and C,, Fig. 438. These parts 
 are also prolonged beyond the shafts in order to counterbalance 
 the weight. The pieces 3 and 4 can be bolted firmly together, 
 since their relative position to each other is constant. It must 
 be observed that a must not exceed 90 — /5, otherwise a dead 
 point will occur. 
 
 The parts 3 and 4 may also be connected by ball joints 3' 4', 
 Fig. 439, in which case the device becomes the coupling of 
 Clemens.* Here the counter-weights are omitted, and the parts 
 
 Fig. 439. 
 
 objection that it requires more accurate fitting of the parts than 
 where only one side is connected. If the axis B is placed par- 
 allel to A, as at B' in Fig. 437, the rate of motion will be very 
 irregular, for a=/3^3o° as in the illustration, the velocity 
 ratio will vary between Yz and 2. 
 
 Fig. 436. 
 
 Fig. 436 shows a form of link coupling designed by the 
 author. A is the driving, and B the driven shaft, the arm C 
 being jointed at 3 by journals at right angles to B, while at 2 it 
 slides in a bearing rigidly attached to A. The axis B makes 
 with A an angle a, and the piece 3 C2 makes with A the 
 angle 90° — /?. For the relation between the angular rotation 
 Uj and u^ of the shafts A and B, which are supposed to revolve 
 in fixed bearings, we have : 
 
 a tan /? > 
 
 Fig. 440. 
 
 In many screw vessels a simple form of flexible coupling is 
 used, suited for slight angular variations. In Fig. 440 this is 
 shown, and it will be seen to give slight flexibility similar to the 
 universal joint, and sufficient for many cases. A bearing should 
 be placed back of the coupling on each shaft. 
 
 ///. Clutch Couplings. 
 I 156. 
 Toothed Clutch Couplings. 
 Couplings of this form may be distinguished by their method 
 of engagement, the clutch surfaces entering in and out of en- 
 gagement axially, radially or inclined. 
 
 Fig. 441. 
 
 The oldest form of clutch coupling, and one of the most 
 widely used, is that shown in Fig. 441. Here the engagement is 
 axial. The modulus for the proportions is the same as before, 
 6 = \ d -\- jV' ; ^"d an approximation to the number of teeth 
 may be given by making z ^ i -\- o.b d. The clutch is thrown 
 in and out of gear by a lever which wox-ks in the groove in the 
 portion of the clutch on B- Examples of suitable lever forks 
 are shown in Fig. 442. 
 
 * Clemens' Angular Shaft Coupling, V. S. Patent, Nov. 1 
 
 Various forms of clutch teeth are used. The forms in general 
 use are given in Fig. 443. The first form is adapted for motion 
 in either direction, but can only be operated when moving 
 slowly. The second form is r"'->'-'^ roo^n,, 4-v.r,^^« ;«4^„ „„4-; — 
 
 ; readily thrown into action. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 99 
 
 but is adapted to transmit motion only in one direction. The 
 driving faces are inclined very slightly, from the normal to the 
 direction of motion, the angle not being enough to cause any 
 tendency to disengagement. In the third form the teeth are 
 
 Cone couplings are used also, in many forms. In the example 
 shown in Fig. 446 the driven portion A of the coupling carries 
 a gear wheel shown in the dotted lines, to which motion is to 
 be transmitted from the shaft. The two parts are forced into 
 engagement by the screw and hand wheel d. If the pans are 
 so arranged that the motion of the hand wheel d is in the same 
 direction as the rotation of the part B, when the latter is thrown 
 into engagement, it is only necessary to hold the wheel d sta- 
 tionary in order to throw the clutch out of gear. From the mean 
 radius J? of the cone surface, and the angle of taper o, we have 
 for an axial pressure Q, for any circumferential force P : 
 
 p/' sinf 
 
 + c 
 
 J ^ \ 
 
 (146) 
 
 in whichy is the coefficient of friction between the cone surfaces, 
 and [PJ?) is the statical moment tending to rotate the shaft. 
 
 Fig. 442. 
 
 more blunt in shape at the point, which adds to their strength 
 against breakage when subjected to shock. The last form is a 
 combination of the preceding varieties, and like the first, may 
 be driven backward. In spinning machinery, light couplings 
 with many fine teeth are used and operated at high speeds. In 
 some screw vessels in which there is no provision for raising the 
 
 Fig. 444. 
 
 screw, it is desirable to disconnect it when proceeding under 
 sail alone, and some form of clutch coupling is used. A very 
 simple form is the so-called " cheese coupling," used in English 
 vessels. Fig. 444. The hub of the propeller is provided with a 
 hearing on each side, and formed with a T projection fitting into 
 a corresponding recess in the heavy flange (or cheese) on 
 the shaft A. The propeller blades are secured to the hub as 
 already shown (Fig. 191). 
 
 Friction Clutches. 
 
 Couplings in which one portion transmits motion to the other 
 
 portion by means of friction, are often especially applicable, 
 
 since by the mere removal of the frictional contact the parts are 
 
 disconnected, and when they are thrown into contact the driven 
 
 Fig. 446. 
 
 The angle a should not be taken at less than 10°, in order tiikt . 
 the parts may not become wedged together; for iron on lion,/" 
 may be taken at 0.15. In order to keep both jPand Q as small 
 as possible, 7? should be made large, say between 3 and 6 d. 
 
 The relative motion of the screw and hand wheel is of course 
 dependent upon the radius of the wheel d, and upon the pitch s 
 of the thread. 
 
 n shaft of 
 
 - 2 inches, making 50 rev- 
 
 the table of g 145-0.0313 X 
 
 pounds. If the ra- 
 
 For the transmission of moderate force the cone coupling, or 
 some of its various modifications, has very generally been used.* 
 
 Fig. 445- 
 
 portion is put into motion gradually. By making friction coup- 
 lings of large diameter, they may be used to transmit propor- 
 tionally great rotative moments. In Fig. 445 is shown a friction 
 coupling used by Ramsbottom in rolling mill work.* The part 
 A is firmly clamped between the wood-lined surfaces of B ; but 
 the parts may be arranged so as to slip if undue resistance is 
 encountered, thus making it a safety coupling. The modulus 
 
 as before is (5 = — -I -. 
 
 3 16 
 
 Fig. 447. 
 
 Instead of a single pair of external and internal cones, a num- 
 ber of small elements may be employed. This form is shown 
 in Fig. 447. The general calculations are made as above, except 
 that the lever arm J? of the friction must be reduced, and may 
 be taken with sufficient accuracy at a point distant from the 
 outer circumference equal to one-third the width of the grooved 
 frictional surface. The operating lever in this case need make 
 but very little movement, and the arrangement of a fork mounted 
 on an eccentric bearing, as shown in the illustration, may be 
 conveniently adopted. f 
 
 When a cone coupling is intended to be used for the trans- 
 mission of large forces, the apparatus for pressing the parts to- 
 gether may sometimes be so arranged that it is mounted on 
 
 * Many such applications will be found in the description of the Suez Ca- 
 nal ; see Armengaud, Publ. Ind., Vol. 17, PI. 9. 
 t See Armengaud, Vignole des Mecaniciens, Plate II. 
 
lOO 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the shaft, revolving with it, without creating so much pressure 
 against the bearing. The fork and grooved collar shown in Fig. 
 447 is not suitable for heavy clutches on account of the excessive 
 collar friction, hence the pressure is better applied by means of 
 a screw mounted on one of the shafts, and this may be conve- 
 niently arranged so as to draw both shafts firmly together. Sup- 
 pose the shaft to be 4 inches in diameter, we have from the pre- 
 ceding, R=z^d— 24", and an axial pressure Q^- ( ' -f 
 
 24 V 015 
 
 0.9S4S J =: 2S1S lbs. This endlong pressure, instead of creating 
 
 hurtful collar resistance, may be utilized by arranging the parts 
 as shown in Fig. 448, which shows a friction clutch coupling of 
 
 fore, viz., 5 = 
 
 - + ^ 
 
 In Fig. 449 is shown the cylinder friction clutch of Koechlin. 
 In this case the clutch movement takes place radially. The part 
 ^ is a hollow C3'linder in which three internal clamp pieces are 
 
 ,i.... 
 
 the axial pressure O, upon the collar £^, can be transmitted so 
 that the screws need not have too quick a pitch. 
 
 If .y is the pitch, d the length of lever arm, /the coefficient of 
 friction of the clamping pieces, we have for the transmission of 
 a given moment [PJ?), neglecting the friction of the screws, 
 
 2S P ^ s PR , , 
 
 T^-b 7°'^^=ir^ -fR ('47> 
 
 which gives a very small value for O- 
 
 If the parts are so arranged that B is the driven part, there 
 will be no collar friction at B\ when the coupling is not iu ac- 
 tion. When the shaft is vertical, a weight may be used instead 
 of a collar and lever, and by gradually lowering it the apparatus 
 may be started with very little shock. The first clutch made by 
 Koechlin was designed for the transmission of 30 H. P.* The . 
 above value corresponds to a minimum value of A'. The modu- 
 
 s the same as before 
 
 A very excellent form of this coupling was designed by Bod- 
 mer, independently of Koechlin, f and a similar arrangement' 
 has been adapted to mill gearing with success, j 
 
 Fig. 448- 
 
 the author's design. As shown in the section, the part A ex- 
 tends over the part B, and both parts are drawn together by the 
 action of the screw and hand wheel. The only modification in 
 the screw gear is that the screw is made large enough to permit 
 the shaft to be passed through it, the thread being thus cut upon 
 the hub of the part A. This coupling runs very smoothly. The 
 concentric channels should be arranged with clearance at the 
 bottoms of the grooves, as shown in the section, to provide for 
 fitting and wear. The modulus for the parts is the same as be- 
 
 FiG. 450. 
 
 Cylinder couplings in which the clamping pieces are operated 
 by toggle joints are also made. An example is shown in Fig. 
 450, which is a clutch by Fossey, as applied to mint machinery. § 
 This is a very compact design and is arranged with four clamps, 
 which have no bronze shoes. The toggle links are as wide as 
 the clamps and are fitted with half-journals to transmit the pres- 
 sure outwards, while to draw the clamps back, light through 
 bolts are used (see ? 95). If the toggle links make with the axis 
 an angle 90° -)-. a, we have for the axial collar-pressure : 
 
 = ly^^=L^ ^"-^ (r48> 
 
 " f R f 
 
 The angle a may be taken very small, since there is no danger 
 of clamping. The value may be as small as o = 2°, or even 1°. 
 
 Fig. 449- 
 
 fitted, each being provided with a bronze shoe. These are thrown 
 in and out of action by means of a sliding collar B', which 
 operates right and left hand screws by means of the lever b. 
 The clamps slide in radial grooves and the details are fully shown 
 in the illustration. The nuts for the right and left hand screws 
 can be closely adjusted and clamped by set screws, so that a 
 radial movement of less than -^-r/' is sufficient. There is no 
 danger of wedging the parts fast in this form of clutch, as may 
 be the case in cone clutches, as the elastic reaction of the cylin- 
 der assists in the direction to release the parts. At the same 
 time the screws prevent the coupling from releasing itself and 
 
 
 itt 
 
 P^^ 
 
 ^j-7-Y—-- 
 
 E-^-- — ^ 
 
 ' Jo ^^^fjkll^ 
 
 
 ru^T^ 
 
 f-- - 
 
 j^yylyl 
 
 slg^ 
 
 
 For a = 1 3/° we have -^ =- — ^— = — 
 "^ P O.I5 s 
 
 Another form of cylinder coupling using toggle levers, has 
 
 * Bulletin von Mulhausen, 1854, p. 138. 
 
 t See Fairbairn, Mills and Millwork, Vol. II., p. 92. 
 
 I See Uhland's Prakt. Masch Konstrukteur, 1869, p. 97. 
 
 I See Armengaud's Pmbl. Industrielle, Vol. XVII, PI. 10. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 been designed by Garand.* Jackson uses hydraulic pressure to 
 force the clamps into contact. t Dohmeu-Leblanc uses springs to 
 throw the toggles out of action.l Schurmaun uses, instead of 
 the separate clamps, a ring, which is compressed externally ; § 
 Napier also uses a ring, expanded from within. |j Becker ar- 
 ranges the clamp blocks to be operated by centrifugal force.^ 
 These are only a few of various modifications of the cylinder 
 coupling. 
 
 A form of axial friction coupling which acts with very slight 
 pressure is the Weston clutch, made by Tangye.** This acts 
 upon the principle of multiple plate friction (see | loi), as is 
 shown in Fig. 4.51. 
 
 The wooden discs are engaged with the case, and the iron ones 
 with the shaft. In the form shown the plates are pressed to- 
 
 FiG. 452- 
 
 fther by the springs, and released by drawing back the collar 
 and releasing the spring pressure. A larger example of 
 Weston's clutch is shown in Fig. 452. .^ is a winding drum, B 
 the shaft driven b}^ the engine. The outer disc C and the inner 
 discs of the coupling are held apart by spiral springs, as shown 
 at a. A light pull on the cord c holds the drum stationary ; a 
 strong pull engages the clutch for winding ; if the cord is left 
 slack the load on the drum runs backward. 
 
 Automatic Couplings. 
 When power is transmitted to a shaft from two different 
 sources, as from two independent engines, it is desirable to have 
 one or both of them connected by a coupling which will auto- 
 tnatically release or engage with the shaft, according to the dis- 
 tribution of work. If one motor tends to overrun it will then 
 be given more of the work, and so the resistance will be equal- 
 ized. Such a device is the coupling of Pcuyer-Ouertier, gener- 
 ally known as Pouyer's Coiipling. 
 
 Fig. 453- 
 
 This is shown in Fig. 453. In this case the parts are so dis- 
 posed that the part A, which is driven by one source of motive 
 power, is loose on the shaft B. This part A may have gear 
 teeth upon its circumference, for example, or may have a gear 
 wheel mounted upoii its hub, as shown by the dotted lines ; the 
 hub being bushed with bronze. Upon the shaft B a ratchet 
 wheel is keyed ; the pawls a, a, being upon A, engage with the 
 
 teeth when A drives B, but if j5 gains upon A, or A stops while 
 B continues to move, the pawls are thrown out of action. The 
 direction of motion is shown by the arrow. The pawls are re- 
 leased by the action of th- friction bands b-^ and A,, which are 
 carried forward by friction upon B, whenever B gains upon A, 
 the levers b throwing the pawls a out of gear. As soon as the 
 limit of travel of the levers b, b, is reached, the friction bands 
 b^, b.^ slip upon B, being able to move no faster than A. When 
 the speed of A increases and gains upon B, the pawls are again 
 thrown into gear and A is automatically coupled to the shaft. 
 In order that the pawls may not bind upon the ratchet teeth in 
 releasing it is necessary that the angle y, which the pawl makes 
 with the face of the ratchet tooth, must be less than the com- 
 plement of the angle of friction ; in this case 7 = 60°. Pouyer 
 uses only one friction baud and makes both pawls engage at the 
 same time. In the illustration the ratchet wheel is made with an 
 odd number of teeth (13), and the pawls are placed so that a 
 movement of only % the pitch will cause the parts to become 
 engaged. The above proportion of the angle of the teeth is 
 of importance, as otherwise the points of the teeth are apt to be 
 broken. The pawls also should be of hardened steel. 
 
 \ 
 
 Fig. 454. 
 
 In Germany Uhlhom's Coupling is used for similar service, as 
 shown in Fig. 454. Here A is the part connected to the motor, 
 and B is fast to the driven shaft. A is an internal ratchet wheel 
 into which the pawls b enter. The springs a serve to insure the 
 entrance of the pawls into the teeth, which engagement continues 
 so long as a drives B. If the speed of A is retarded, the pawls 
 are retracted as shown in the lower part of the figure. In this 
 case the springs act to keep them out of gear, being the reverse 
 action to that of an ordinary ratchet gear. 
 
 The pawls are fitted with half-journals (see I 95), and are held 
 in place by a plate ring, as shown. Uhlhorn originally used 
 only two ratchet teeth in A, but increased the number afterv/ards 
 to four, so that the parts would engage in a movement of one- 
 fourth a revolution. It is better to use an odd number, as three, 
 and b}' proper spacing of the pawls the greatest pla}^ will be one- 
 half a space, or one-sixth a revolution with three teeth, as in 
 the case of Pouyer's Couplings. B may be the driving part in- 
 stead of the driven, but in that case the direction of the arrow 
 must be reversed. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 SIMPLE LEVERS. 
 ?I59- 
 
 Journals for Levers. 
 
 In machine design a simple lever, or rocker arm, is a lever 
 
 arm which is mounted upon an axle or shaft, at the end, about 
 
 which it moves, and carries a journal upon the other end. For 
 
 the proportion of the journal see Chapter V. The forms which 
 
 iZeitschr. d. Vereins d. Ina;., Vol. V, 1861, p. 301. 
 
 II Engineer, 1868, July, p. 64. 
 
 f German Patent, 7205. 
 
 **lu the U. S. by the Yale & Towne Mfg. Co.l 
 
 Fig. 455- 
 
 may be given to such journals are shown in Fig. 455, and are 
 single overhung, double, or forked. The manner of securing 
 the pin in the hub or the lever is most important. The pin 
 should not be driven in up to the shoulder on the taper, but 
 sufficient space left to insure that the fit is tight in the taper. 
 This clearance is shown plainly in the figure. The same result 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 may be attained by counter-sinking the collar into the hub on 
 the lever. In the case of double overhanging pins, care should 
 be taken that the load is equally divided between the two sides, 
 so that the pressure upon each pin shall be equal to yi P. In 
 the fork-ended lever the fit on both ends of the pin should be 
 portions of the same cone. 
 
 Example i. Vox P = 4400 lbs., we have from the table in §90 for alternating 
 pressure and wrought iron journal, the diameter ^ = 0.0 27 \/ 44°° = i-8", and 
 the length the same. For steel, we have d = 0.024 s/ 44°° =■ i-6", and the 
 length / = 1.3 X 1-6 = 2'OS". For a forked lever, a wrought iron pin with the 
 same load the diameter, according to (9S) would be <f = 0.0185 v^ 4400 = 1.2", 
 and the length /= 3-5 X 1.2" = 4.2". 
 
 All levers are not subjected to alternating pressure, but have 
 the pressure constantly in one direction, as for example, the 
 beams of single-acting pumping engines, etc. In such cases 
 larger journals are needed. 
 
 Example 2. A wrought iron journal for a forked lever, under constant 
 pressure of 4400 lbs., according to formula (98J, should have a diameter d = 
 0.0212 \/74°o = I4"i 3nd length 1= 2,d = 4.2''. If the material had been cast 
 iron we should have hjid^f — 0.29 v'4400 = 1.92", say 2", and /= 6". For steel 
 •we have 1^ = 0.0185 %/ 4400 = 1.2", /= 4(f = 4.8". 
 
 in the illustration. For its numerical determination v\ 
 ifi?>rt 
 
 a' = 0.62s a + 0.6 R ( , 
 audifi?<a j 
 
 «/ = 0.957 a -f 0.25 i? J 
 
 . OsO 
 
 The lever hub must be made strong enough when the shaft is 
 only subject to torsion, or when it is also subject to bending. 
 
 ( 
 
 For wrought iron shafts wrought iron levers should be used, and 
 for cast iron shafts cast iron levers. 
 Let; 
 
 w = thickness of metal of hub, 
 7u = length of hub, 
 
 D = the shaft diameter for the statical moment PR of a 
 lever of the same resistance, see (133) and (134). 
 
 n 
 
 = 0.45 0.42 0.4.0 
 
 • (1-52) 
 
 If a lever is to be fitted to a shaft of greater diameter than Z?, 
 we first determine the imaginary value of D, and insert it in 
 (152). The same method is adopted if a cast iron lever is to be 
 used with a wrought iron shaft, and vice versa. The shape for 
 cast iron levers is given above, in Fig. 456. 
 
 Exavtfile i. If the lever of Exar 
 is 24 inches long, its statical mon- 
 This gives, from (131) D = 0.091 -^105600 = 4.3", and if we take -^ = %, we 
 have from (152), zt/ = 0.45 X 4-3"= i-93"- ^ = i.93"X 2 = 3.86", say 3%". 
 
 The hub may also be calculated of such dimensions as to bv 
 strong enough to be forced on cold, and thus obtain sufficient 
 friction to hold without the use of a key (see ^ 65, formula 66), 
 
 The friction Q of the hub upon the shaft must then be ^( -^^ \ 
 
 in which D' is the diameter of the shaft at the point where the 
 hub is fitted. 
 
 he same levei^as the preceding'jexample 
 
 —In the;case;ot th. 
 
 Cast Iron Rock Arms. 
 Rock arms may be either of cast or wrought iron. The hubs 
 for wrought iron arms are given in the preceding illustrations, 
 and in Fig. 456 are given some proportions for the various parts 
 of cast iron arms. A fork-ended arm is shown below, among 
 the walking beams, or if the fork hub is on the main axle, see 
 the rules already given under Axles, Chapter VIII. 
 
 I 161. 
 Rock Arm Shafts. 
 
 The axle upon which a rock arm works is usually subject both 
 to bending and torsional stresses. The methods of calculation 
 for all important cases are given in Chapters VIII and IX. The 
 case which occurs most commonly is the overhung rock arm at 
 the end of a shaft, and this is here given a special examination. 
 
 If we have a, the distance between two planes normal to the 
 axis, and passing through the middle of the pin and the middle 
 of the bearing on the shaft, Fig. 457, there is an ideal bending 
 moment vi'ith a lever arm R, acting upon the bearing of the 
 shaft, for a load P on the pin equal to 
 
 (3fb)i=Pa^ = p(^-a + -^^-./R^-l^-^^'\. . . . (150) 
 
 The lever arm a^ is readily obtained graphically, as is shown 
 
 We may then take Q = sojooo and let / = X = 3I/5" and ^2 = 10,650, and sub. 
 stituting in formula (66), we get : 
 
 V^^rSt 
 
 ■875 X 
 
 : 10,65° + 
 
 :o,65o — 50,000 
 ^ = ^ \ ^^ - I = K X 0.63 = 31 
 
 The key is used as an extra precaution for security. 
 
 A special method of keying, especially adapted for the hubs 
 of levers and wheels, has been designed by engineer Peters. It 
 consists of two parallel systems of keys, as shown in Fig. 458. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The taper of the keys is ^V- Tlie arrangement shown at (a) is 
 preferable, as it weakens the hub less than (b). The angle a 
 may be taken = 135°, the thickness of keys b =^ ^^ D' , and mean 
 width h=^2b. 
 
 The form {a) is especially suited for hubs which are made in 
 two parts. 
 
 Those hubs which are ujjon shafts subjected to bending, are 
 considered under the heading of Combined Levers, in Chapter 
 XIII. 
 
 ?I62. 
 
 IvEvER Arms of Rectangui<ar Section. 
 
 The calculations of the dimensions of simple lever arms of 
 
 rectangular section are made upon the assumption that the force 
 
 P acts in a plane, passing through the middle of the a 
 459, and in a direction normal to the arm. 
 If we let 
 
 h = width of the arm at the axis, 
 b = thickness of the arm at the axis, 
 ■5"= the maximum permissible stress. 
 
 = 4250, 
 
 Example 2.— In the case of the lever of the precedin 
 I575"- This gives R > Caud we have from (154) ; 
 
 R' = °-975 X 24 + 0.25 X 15.75 = 
 
 .mple, let C= 
 
 Cast iron arms are sometimes made of cruciform section, see 
 Fig. 456, in which case the ribs may be neglected. 
 
 Lever Arms of Combined Section. 
 The sections shown in Fig. 461 are designed to secure an 
 economy of material. Their dimensions are readil}- determined 
 by first calculating a corresponding arm of rectangular section, 
 and then transforming it into an I section, or double II shape. 
 If ha be the depth and b^ the breadth of the equivalent rectan- 
 
 gular arm, and h and b the c 
 in Fig. 461, we have 
 
 5sponding terms to be found, as 
 
 «-(f-)[^T-<T)']J 
 
 • (155) 
 
 These formulas permit a choice of the ratios -r 
 may be left to the judgment of the designer. 
 
 and ~j-, which 
 (155) the angle 
 
 Fig. 460. 
 
 irons of the third example in Fig. 461 have been neglected, and 
 may be considered as making up for the weakening of the rivet 
 holes. The following table gives a series of values for (155) 
 which will simplify the calculations materially. The table will 
 also be found useful for other purposes, as all sorts of beams, 
 me booms, etc. 
 
 Taking 5" for wrought iron = 8500, and for cast iron = 
 we have 
 
 for wrought iron. for cast iron. 
 
 PR PR , , 
 
 6 = 0.00072--.— 0.00144-——. . (153) 
 
 li- h - 
 
 These formulae are adapted for the determination of b, when 
 h has been selected, the latter being most conveniently chosen 
 with regard to the other condition. 
 
 Example i.— Eet ^=4400 lbs., j?=24" for a lever arm of wrought iron, and 
 N=iyi" we have from (153) ; 
 
 *=°-°~^^ Sl?= ^^^" 
 
 If b is kept constant for the whole length of the arm, the 
 width at the small end may be 0.5/?, while if a constant ratio of 
 b : his kept, the small end^ -/ih (see § 10, Case III and VII). 
 
 If the force Pdoes not act in the middle plane, as often oc- 
 curs, then there must exist a combined bending and twisting 
 stress on the arm. We may then derive a combined stress whose 
 bending moment will give an ideal arm R'. 
 
 If the plane in which the force Pacts is distant from the mid- 
 dle of the arm by an amount c, we may make approximately, 
 (see i 150) : 
 
 R'=y^R+ys\/R^'+T^ 
 or i?'=o.97Si?+ 0.25 c 
 
 if R>c, Y (15s) 
 
 and R' ■= 0.62^ R -{- 0.6 c 
 is R^c. 
 
 R' may be determined readily by the graphical method. Fig. 
 460. The third case shows the method for inclined arms. 
 
 Table for Transforming Arm Sections. 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Values of 
 
 r 
 
 ir 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 ?-- 
 
 3 
 
 3-5 
 
 4 
 
 4-5 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.38 
 
 0.33 
 
 0.30 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.23 
 
 0.20 
 
 0.18 
 
 0.14 
 
 7 
 
 
 S2 
 
 0.4.S 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 3.S 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 IS 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 ,S4 
 
 0.47 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 S5 
 
 049 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 o.,Si 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 3^ 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 o 
 
 26 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 3' 
 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 ,s,s 
 
 
 
 ,SO 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 ^8 
 
 
 
 ,S2 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 by 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 ■^S 
 
 
 ■SO 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 38 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 25 
 
 IS 
 
 
 69 
 
 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 S7 
 
 
 
 S2 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 6,S 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 S,S 
 
 
 
 S2 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 67 
 
 
 
 b2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,=^3 
 
 
 
 ,SO 
 
 
 
 4S 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 7S 
 
 
 
 68 
 
 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 S9 
 
 
 
 S6 
 
 
 
 S2 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 ,^8 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 6b 
 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 ,S8 
 
 
 
 ,S,S 
 
 
 
 .SO 
 
 
 
 4,S 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 3S 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 78 
 
 
 
 1?> 
 
 
 
 b8 
 
 
 
 b4 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 
 
 SI 
 
 
 
 ,=52 
 
 
 47 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 79 
 
 
 7S 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 S4 
 
 
 .so 
 
 
 
 4,S 
 
 
 39 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 8i 
 
 
 76 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 
 
 68 
 
 
 
 6S 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 
 
 S6 
 
 
 S2 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 41 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 83 
 
 
 
 78 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 67 
 
 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 
 84 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 
 
 69 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 
 bl 
 
 
 
 S7 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 50 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.71 
 
 o.b8 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.49 
 
 a has a length R = 7S.7; 
 
 e have for a rectangu- 
 
 tion may be compared. Here v 
 get from the table — — — =^ 0.4^ 
 
 mpracticable, and hen 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 breadth B 
 
 = 0. 44^=1.71 X 
 
 0.44 = 0.752, the web th 
 
 icknes 
 
 = . = J, = /. = 
 
 
 ■^-x. 
 
 ^5", all of which 
 
 ire practical d 
 
 mensioi 
 
 s. It 
 
 naj'be found de- 
 
 sirabl 
 E.xa 
 
 ,°pU 
 
 2. A wrought ir 
 
 reasonable rat 
 n arm has bee 
 
 1 found 
 
 b, and 
 to reqi 
 
 c : /; be chosen. 
 
 I2?s". 
 
 It is 
 
 desired to make 
 
 -'^ = 0.25 and i 
 
 1 columi 
 
 10 we 
 
 find 025 opposite 
 
 h 
 
 = 16 
 
 Hence <5 = 0.57 
 
 and^=ioX 
 
 CHAPTER 
 
 CRANKS 
 
 XII. 
 
 0" and 
 
 = !^?i=o.S". 
 
 the pin diameter d, and ordinate i of the base of the pin, the 
 diameter of the shaft may be obtained according to formula 
 (124). 
 
 The Crank Arm. — Prolong ^ a to ao, and transfer the cord 
 polygon D a d to the base line B C, that is, make the angle 
 UoB C=^ the angle Dad, and then will B ao C be, with hori- 
 zontal ordinates, the surface of moments for the bending of the 
 
 Various Kinds of Cranks. 
 
 Cranks are these forms of simple levers which are so arranged 
 
 that the}' may, together with their various connections, make 
 
 entire and repeated revolutions about an axis. These may be 
 
 divided into the following four classes : 
 
 1. Single Overhung Cranks. 
 
 2. Return Cranks. 
 
 3. Double Cranks, or Cranked Axles. 
 
 4. Eccentrics. 
 
 These will be briefly treated in 
 
 I 166. 
 
 SiNGLB Wrought Iron Cranks. 
 
 These cranks may be proportioned according to the rules 
 
 given for simple levers and rocker arms [l i^()eiseq). Fig. 
 
 462 shows the usual form; the arm tapers to two- thirds its base 
 
 dimensions both ways, and is made slightly convex on the back. 
 
 Fig. 462. 
 
 Fig. 463. 
 
 The crank-pin is forced or driven in, and secured with a cap 
 bolt. Fig. 463 shows a crank forged in one piece. In this case 
 tne width of the arm at the base is determined by the necessary 
 amount of shoulder on the shaft. The proportions of the pin 
 are obtained from the rules in ^ 159. 
 
 ? 167. 
 
 §45), 
 
 Mi =lMi+i ^Mi^ + Mi (s 
 from which the polygon curve c' d' e' and surface of moments 
 Cd d' e^ E are obtained. From the latter, in combination with 
 
 crank arm due to the force P. Also make C Co=^ B bo= C C, 
 then will the horizontal ordiuates of the torsion rectangle 
 B b„Co C be the moments with which P acts to twist the crank 
 arm about the axis B C. This moment may again be combined 
 with the bending moment to give an ideal moment as before ; 
 (rt„ rt^ = I «„ C draw B a' , make at any point H, the space 
 H i = % B bo, and make H h = //„ h' + // i) which gives the 
 surface of moments B b' h F C for the crank arm. From this 
 and from the diameter d and ordinate t, we can construct the 
 conoidal form of the arm I K L 7?/, according to formula (124). 
 From this, again, the profile S T U V ol zxi arm of rectangular 
 section ma}' be derived, the width // being assumed for any 
 point and the corresponding thickness b obtained from the value 
 y of the conoid, according to the formula : 
 
 (156) 
 
 = -(0 
 
 in using which, the second table 01 numbers at the close of this 
 work will be found useful. If the position of the axis B Cdoes 
 not give satisfactory results, the operation must be repeated 
 with a better relation of parts. By proceeding in this manner 
 the dimensions of a crank and axle may be so determined that 
 they will be equal in strength to the pin upon which the power 
 is exerted. 
 
 In the preceding diagram the crank arm was taken as normal 
 to the axle. A slight inclination may be neglected, but if the 
 
 The crank is such an important detail of machine construc- 
 tion that it demands a most careful discussion, hence a grapho- 
 static investigation of the stresses in it is here given. 
 
 The Crank y^jr/^'.— Having calculated d and /, draw the 
 skeleton diagram of the crank, that is, the neutral axis 
 A B CD E, Fig. 464, in which B C represents the axis of the 
 crank arm, which in this case lies normal to the axis of the 
 shaft, and is placed in its proportional distance from the centre 
 of the crank-pin A, and from the bearing D. Then lay off the 
 force /"from a, normal to E a, choose the pole O of the force 
 polygon (this being best placed upon aline passing through 
 the. end of P and parallel to the axis E a), draw the ray a d O, 
 and line d E, also the ray O /", parallel to d E ; then ad E will 
 represent the cord polygon for the bending which /'produces 
 upon the axle a C E, and P P, represents the force upon the 
 journal E, and P-^ a the force upon the journal D. Also make 
 a /^ equal to the crank radius R, draw F G, and this latter will 
 be the twisting moment f? 140) which P exerts upon the axis. 
 This moment 3Td may be combined with the bending moment 
 Mh, to give for each point an ideal bending moment, 
 
 Fig. 46,5. 
 
 angle is greater, as shown in Fig. 460, it should be so considered 
 in the diagram. The procedure is then as follows (Fig. 465): 
 The diagram for the crank shape is constructed as before, the 
 portion under a b being used only for the shank A B of the 
 crank-pin, and the portion under CE being combined as before 
 with the torsion moment, to obtain the surface of moments 
 Cc'd'e'E. 
 
 The crank arm is again subjected to bending and twisting; 
 the lever arm is now B' C, A B' being made normal to the axis 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 105 
 
 B C oi the crank arm, the bending polygon being a portion of 
 the triangle C B' C, in which the angle at B' is equal to the 
 angle d a D. The twisting force acts with a lever arm A B' ; 
 its moment is obtained by drawing an ordinate at a' normal to 
 B C, B' a' being taken equal to B' A. The combination of 
 moments gives the surface of moments B b" c" C in same 
 manner, and of the same use as in the preceding case. 
 
 ?i6S. 
 
 Cast Iron Cranks. 
 
 The crank-pin is sometimes made spherical instead of cylin- 
 drical ; such a one is shown in Fig. 466 on a cast iron crank. 
 The sphere will be of suitable diameter if described from the 
 middle of a normally proportioned overhung crank-pin without 
 making allowance for shoulder. The crank-pin is secured by 
 cold rivetting the end in place, an excellent method and one 
 often used. The I formed section can be proportioned by the 
 use of the table in \ 164. When h is taken as equal to the hub 
 
 The line oto i, measured upward, represents the pressure on 
 the return crank-pin ; O is the pole chosen on a horizontal line 
 drawn through o, and the line i to 2 represents the pressure on 
 the main crank-pin, measured downwards. Draw the rays o O, 
 1 O, 2 O, also draw the line a d' parallel to i (9, until it inter- 
 sects at d' the line dropped from D (the line of direction of the 
 
 ;<l-^d>! 
 
 Fig. 466. 
 
 diameter, the cross section sometimes works out too light to be 
 suitable for casting, and in such cases it must be increased 
 according to judgment. Sometimes cast iron cranks are made 
 simply by laying out the proper hubs for the shaft and crank- 
 pin, and then joining them by an arm of rectangular section. 
 
 If it is desired to employ the graphostatic method, the dimen- 
 sions may first be determined for a wrought iron crank of rec- 
 tangular section, and then doubling the depth (see \. 162) for 
 cast iron, and obtaining the proportions for I formed section 
 according to \ 164. 
 
 The Return Crank. 
 
 A return crank is one which is formed upon the pin of an 
 ordinary overhung crank, returning back toward and having 
 rotation about the same crank shaft as the main crank. Fig. 
 467 shows a wrought iron return crank otherwise similar in con- 
 struction to the one shown in Fig. 463. Frequently the return 
 arm is on the same line as the main crank, as shown in the 
 illustration, but in many cases it is differently placed. The arm 
 and pin of the return crank are similar in shape and propor- 
 tions to an ordinary overhung crank. The arm of the main 
 crank demands no especial consideration, when, as is usually 
 the case, there is but little pressure on the pin of the return 
 crank. The main crank-pin must be determined separately. It 
 is subjected both to bending and to torsion. For this purpose 
 the formula (154) are to be used, remembering that when the 
 return crank is driven by the main crank the moment of the 
 return crank is greatest in the middle of the main crank-pin. 
 
 \ 170- 
 Graphostatic Cai<culation of the Return Crank. 
 
 The graphostatic diagram for a return crank, with both main 
 and return crank inclined to the axis of the crank shaft, is 
 shown in Fig. 468. The skeleton ABCDEFGHI is first 
 drawn, the dimensions A B C E and /^ C being taken to cor- 
 respond with those chosen to meet the requirements of the 
 cranks under consideration. The pressure i upon the return 
 crank-pin is here taken as opposed to the pressure 2 upon the 
 main crank-pin. 
 
 Force polygon. — After choosing a scale for the measurement 
 of the forces, the force polygon (on the right) can be drawn. 
 
 Fig. 467. 
 
 force 2) ; draw d' g parallel to 2 O until it intersects a perpen- 
 dicular through G, the line of the force 3, which we know acts 
 upward, but the magnitude of which is yet undetermined. In 
 order to determine it, as well as the fourth force which acts at 
 H, join g with H, giving H a as the closing line which is hori- 
 zontal because we have chosen the pole C on a horizontal 
 through o. Now draw in the force polygon O 3 parallel to J/g, 
 then the line 2 to 3 is the third force acting at G upward, and 
 the line 3 to o gives the downward force at //. Hence we have 
 the figure ad' kg H s,s the cord polygon of the system of forces. 
 At ,4 is a zero point (see \ 132) and for convenience in showing 
 the figure it is preferable to turn the triangle k g H over to the 
 position k g' H. The cord polygon thus found will be of ser- 
 vice in constructing the surface of moments, as will be seen 
 
 later. For the determination of the shank A B draw from A 
 on the pressure I the triangle a b b' , whose ordinates will serve 
 to determine its dimensions. 
 
 Crank-Pin C E D. — This is subject to bending, as shown by 
 the surface of moments c d' e, and to twisting by the force I 
 acting as a lever arm r =- C c — B b. In order to determine the 
 twisting moment, take a I ^^ r, and draw the ordinate 1 1', this 
 latter will then be the desired moment, and the corresponding 
 surface a rectangle on c e. Combining this, as before, with the 
 trapezoid c d' e gives the surface of moments c c' d" e' e. Should 
 it occur that the only pressure acting is that upon the return 
 
THE CONSTRUTOR. 
 
 crank-pin, the surface will be modified as follows : prolong the 
 line a d' to m' , and taking this bending polygon, obtain the 
 corresponding surface of moments c' d" e, from which the 
 crank pin C D E can be proportioned. The minimum length / 
 of the crank-pin must be that due to the pressure 2, as given 
 before, for overhung journals. 
 
 Axle F G H I. — This is subjected to bending according to 
 the polj'gon F f g' H, and also to torsion by the moment of the 
 force 2 less that of the force i. In order to find the first, we 
 choose in the force polygon a second pole O' , upon a horizontal 
 passing through the starting point of the force 2, returning the 
 same pole distance. Draw 2 O' and make d g" parallel to it, 
 make d n= C c =^ R, and we have in the ordinate n n' the de- 
 sired twisting moment. Make the abscissa of the ordinate at 
 a' = A a = R — ;-, and this ordinate will then be the moment 
 with which the force i twists the arm backward. Taking this 
 from It n' gives the height Ff of the torsion rectangle 
 F I i' f which we may combine with the bending surface in 
 the manner already given, and thus obtain the surface of mo- 
 ments Ff'g" h" i" I. Should the case occur in which the 
 force I becomes zero, as is the case at some points in steam 
 engines when the return crank operates the valve motion, we 
 have for a bending surface Ffo g" H, and for a torsion surface 
 F Fo i I, which gives a surface of greater ordinates to be used. 
 Such a case is given in unl ttered dotted outline shown upon 
 the base F I. It is assumed that the portion H I is subjected 
 only to the action of a torsion couple, hence the polygon there 
 becomes a rectangle. 
 
 Return Crank Arm B C— This is subjected to torsion by the 
 force I, with an arm A A„ perpendicular to C B prolonged (its 
 moment being equal to the ordinate at «„ ), and to bending by 
 the arm Ao C, whose polygon is a triangle on CAo and angle at 
 Ao equal to I a ao. The reduced surface is shown at C B Co c" . 
 
 Main Crank Ann E F. — This is subjected to bending for- 
 wards with a moment surface Do F F" , the angle at Do being 
 equal to e d g" , and to forward twisting with an arm D Do. 
 which is perpendicular to FE prolonged; it is also subjected 
 to backward bending by the force i, with a surface EoFF', 
 and backward twisting by the arm A Eo normal to F E. The 
 combined bending moments give the surface E do Co F'" F, and 
 the combined twisting moments the rectangular shown upon 
 E F, the combination of both resulting in the final surface 
 E e'" f" F. Should the force i become zero the figure will 
 be increased to that shown by the dotted lines. 
 
 Ths Simpi^e Crank Axle. 
 
 Crank axles may be divided into simple and multiple cranks. 
 A simple crank axle is shown in Fig. 469. 
 
 The analytical discussion of such a crank axle is such a com- 
 plicated matter, and the practical results are so readily obtained 
 with all needful accuracy by the graphostatic method, that the 
 latter is only given here. In Fig. 470 is shown a skeleton dia- 
 gram ABCDEFGHoi a crank axle with both arms in- 
 clined. 
 
 If we make the value of the force P, which acts upon the 
 crank pin, equal to Q when it acts in the direction K M, it will 
 
 be equal to — -— when the connecting rod is in any inclined 
 
 position K L \ oC being the angle of the rod with the axis 
 K M. For a constant force O the pressure P will be a maxi- 
 mum when K L acts normal to L M, and this is so nearly the 
 same as the value for the vertical position 3f L^ of the crank, or 
 
 — — — , that this latter may be taken for the graphical exami- 
 nation without a closer determination. The force at M is equal 
 
 to /'in magnitude and also parallel in direction, and at .A' is a 
 normal pressure, which is N ^^ O tan (X and is a maximum for 
 the position A'l L^ 3J. Hence we may safely assume that the 
 moments with which the crank arms and the axle are bent 
 attain the maximum at the same time, and are those due to the 
 force P. In the example the crank pin is at E, at B and H are 
 bearings, at y^ is a couple by which the shai^t is subjected to 
 torsion due to the force P acting with a lever arm R. This 
 problem is very similar to the preceding, the portion H G 
 taking the place of the return crank, with the difference that 
 the force- at H is variable and indeterminate, but is dependent 
 upon the pressure Pat E. 
 
 Force Polygon. — In order to make the closing line of the 
 polygon horizontal, draw the line B e' to any desired point e' 
 on the normal E e' , join c' with H ; then on any convenient 
 scale draw the force P, from O. in the diagram on the right, and 
 make O parallel to He', i O parallel to B e' and O 2 normal 
 to P. Then the distance i to 2 is the upward force P-i acting at 
 B, and 2 to o the force P.^ at H, O.^ being the pole distance. 
 
 Axle Shank H G. — This is subjected to bending by the force 
 P-^ at H. The triangle H G g is the surface of moments, and 
 the ordinates may be used to determine the dimensions of the 
 journal at H. 
 
 Axle Shank B C. — The surface of moments for bending is 
 the triangle B C c. In addition to the bending is the twisting 
 moment P R; in. order to determine this make O' i normal to 
 P and equal to 6*2, and also make EoCo parallel to Cj and 
 equal to R, then o Eo is the desired moment, which laid off at 
 C c' and A a' and combined with i? Cc in the manner already 
 described, gives the surface of moments A B C c" b" a". 
 
 Crank Pin D E F. — The surface for bending moments is the 
 figure dff e' d'. For twisting we have the force P^ at H, 
 with a lever arm oi E e = R. Make H g = E e =^ R and the 
 ordinate g g' is the desired moment, which transferred to 
 /-/// ^/// and combined with the preceding surface gives the 
 surface dff" e" d" . The greatest ordinate e e" should be 
 used if the pin is to be cylindrical. 
 
 Crank Arm G P.— Draw E Do parallel to H D' normal to 
 C D. We then have forward bending by the force P a.t Do', 
 backward bending by P, acting at D' . The cord polygons for 
 these are, the triangle Do C i (with C i ^ o Ho in the force 
 polygon, where //» ho =^ C Do), and D' C i\ which when 
 combined give the surface C i" i'" for the bending of the arm 
 D C We also have a forward twisting from the force Pwith 
 the arm E D =^ k koin the force polygon, and the moment o k 
 acting backward from the force P^ with a lever arm H D' =^ 
 H lin the cord polygon and a moment / /'. The difference be- 
 tween these moments laid off at D do and C Co and the resulting 
 torsion rectangle combined with the bending triangle gives the 
 surface C D 1 1', so that all five portions of the diagram now 
 have their moment surfaces determined. The method of using 
 these for the determination of dimensions is the same as 
 before. 
 
THE CONSTRCTOR. 
 
 The figures show clearly the various stresses at the respective 
 portions of the crank and throw light upon the manner in which 
 breakages occur. 
 
 If both crank arms are normal to the axis, the solution is 
 greatly simplified, and the diagram assumes the form given in 
 Fig. 471. In this we have again A B C D E F G H &s the skel- 
 eton, and at A a torsion couple whose moment is equal to J°J\. 
 
 Force Polygon. — In this case the altitude e e' of the triangle 
 Be' H is taken as the measure of the force P. B b" is made 
 equal to ee' ,b" O drawn parallel to e' H, and Ob made normal 
 to Bb'' , thus giving b" b as the force P-^ at //, b B that at B, 
 and O b \s the corresponding pole distance. 
 
 Axle Shank H G. — -This is only subjected to bending, a'ld the 
 surface of moments is HGg. 
 
 Fig. 471- 
 
 Axle Shank A B C. — This is subjected to bending, as indi- 
 cated by the triangle B C c, and also to torsion by a moment 
 PR. Make e' O' parallel to CB and equal to the pole distance 
 b O, diaw e"' p parallel to e' O' and equal in length to E e = R, 
 then ee'" is the desired twisting moment, giving for A C the 
 torsion rectangle whose altitude A' a' ^B b'" = e e'". The 
 combination of bending and torsion moments gives the moment 
 surface A B Co'" b' a. 
 
 Cj-ank Pin D E F. — This is subjected to bending according to 
 the surface of moments CG g c, and to torsion by the force P^ 
 at H, with a lever arm R = CD = Hf, and a moment //' = 
 Gf^Cf". By combining the twisting and bending mo- 
 ments the surface C G g' e" c' is obtained, and for cylindrical 
 crank pins the rectangle of a height G g" = Cc" = e e" is to 
 be substituted for the irregular outline. 
 
 Crank Arm F. G. — This is subjected to bending by the force 
 Pj acting at G. The surface of moments is G P'f(^, the angle at 
 G being equal to f Hf ; it is subject to torsion by the same 
 force acting with a lever arm H G, giving a moment Gg =G h 
 = Fi. The combination of twisting and bending moments 
 gives the surface FG h' i' . 
 
 Crank Arm CD. — Here we have bending with the force P, 
 and an already known moment ee"' ■= Ck at C. Twisting is 
 due to the moment Cr= C/ = £>/'. For the combined mo- 
 meuts these give the surface CD d k'. 
 
 Fig. 472. 
 
 For the same given distances of E from B and H the torsion 
 stresses on the crank arms are greater for arms normal to the 
 axis than for inclined arms, so that in the former case heavier 
 arms are required. The torsion in the crank arms grows less 
 and less the nearer the points C and G approach B and H, 
 which is a point to be considered in the interest of economy of 
 material. It is also to be noted that the total length of crank 
 axle FG H or D CB is less for inclined arms than for right- 
 angled cranks. 
 
 ny cases a crank axle is so situated that it is subjected 
 n at either one end or the other. In such cases the dia- 
 gram should be constructed for both sets of conditions, and laid 
 upon each other, the greater value in all cases being taken. Of 
 course, care must be taken to use the same pole distance and 
 same scale for mearuring forces in both cases. An example of 
 such a case is found in the paddle engines made by Penn, with 
 oscillating cylinders, the air pump being work^ed from the mid- 
 dle of the crank pin. The conditions in this case are somewhat 
 different from the preceding, and may be examined with the 
 help of the following diagram (Fig. 472) : 
 
 Here we have the skeleton ABCDEFGH, and not taking 
 into account the force at E, the force couple gives by means of 
 the cord and force polygon the moment values B b = Cc= Gg 
 = Hh, from which the following results are obtained: 
 
 Axle Shank A B C. — Pure torsion, which, converted into an 
 equivalent bending moment, gives B b' =^C c' =^ | B b (see IV., 
 I 16, when Mb =■ O). 
 
 Axle Shank G H. — This is the same as the preceding, and 
 Hh'=zGg'=Cc'. 
 
 Crank Pin D E F. — We have here the saine twisting moment 
 as in the axle shayks Dd = Ff= Bb and Ddf, = F/o = B b'. 
 
 Crank Ann CD. — We have in this portion a bending moment 
 of the magnitude Cc" ^Dd' = Cc, of which the plane stands 
 normal to the plane of the surface of the crank arm. The sur- 
 face of moments is in this case equal to a rectangle of the height 
 Bb=Cc. 
 
 Crank Arm FG. — In this case we have both torsion and 
 bending. The conple is decomposed at G into two parts, one 
 acting normal to the axis of the crank arm, and the other in the 
 direction of the arm. The first gives the torsion rectangle 
 G Ff" g", the latter the bending rectangle FGi i', which com- 
 bined give the moment surface F G g"'f"', in which we again 
 have pq = %Gi, pr=%G g", pt^ G g" =^qs-\- qr. 
 
 Thus far we have proceeded as though there were no force 
 acting at E. When such exists, however, first determine the 
 bending and twisting moments as shown in Fig. 472, add or 
 subtract, according to direction, the twisting moments, taking 
 into account the position of the planes of bending action, and 
 finally combine the bending and twisting moments so found, 
 according to the method of Case IV., g 16. The amount of 
 work which this investigation requires of the drawing-room of 
 any machine-shop is small compared with the importance of a 
 thorough determination of all the stresses which act upon such 
 a piece of work as a crank shaft forging. 
 
 MuwiPLE Crank Shafts, Locomotivb Axles. 
 
 One of the most important forms of crank axles made of 
 wrought iron or steel is that used for locomotive engines. As 
 an example of this subject, the crank axle for an inside con- 
 nected locomotive is given in Fig. 473. In drawing the diagram 
 of moments it is necessary to take into account tne diameter of 
 the driving-wheels, as will be shown in Fig. 474. Cj and C^ are 
 centres of the steam cylinders, A^ and A^ are the journals, and 
 B^ Z?i and B.^ D.^ are the hubs of the respective driving-wheels. 
 The cranks at C, and (T, are placed at right angles with each 
 other, taking the position which the axle shows in Fig. 473. An 
 inspection of the figure shows three distinct loads acting upon 
 the axle : i, the pressure in the vertical plane due to the weight 
 of the locomotive and to the lateral action upon the wheel 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 flanges ; 2, the horizontal pressure of the piston against the 
 crank. Q opposed by a corresponding adhesion at the circumfer- 
 ence of the driving-wheels; 3, the oblique pressure of the con- 
 necting rod acting upon the crank C,. Other small pressures, 
 such as those due to the eccentrics, etc., may be neglected. 
 
 Fig. 474. 
 
 Forces and IMoments in the Vertical Plane. — Fig. 474. From 
 the point S^ of the height of the centre of gravity of the loco- 
 motive lay off the force O, to represent that portion of the 
 •weight which is borne b}- the axle under consideration. The 
 oscillations and action of centrifugal force upon curves also 
 produces a horizontal force H, which may be taken as equal to 
 0.4 O. The resultant R of the two forces Q and H is the load 
 upon the axle- This may be decomposed into the pressures P-^^ 
 and Pj upon the journal at A-^^ and y?,. ai^d into the pressures 
 Q-^ and (?._, upon the wheels at E-^ and E.,, which pressures, with 
 their reactions, produce the stresses on the axle. The forces Qy 
 and Q-i can be decomposed into two others referred to tHe wheel 
 hubs i?i Z?i and B^ D^. This gives six vertical pressures acting 
 to bend the axle, viz. : i, 2, 3 and 4 acting downward at D^, Ay, 
 A2 and D.^, and 5 and 6 acting upward at B.^ and B-^. From 
 these forces, by choosing anj' desired pole distance, the force 
 polygon E, 4, O may be constructed, and also the cord poly- 
 gon or surface of moments d-^ a-^ a^ d.^ b.^ b^, and this surface gives 
 by its ordinates the proportional bending moments in the verti- 
 cal plane for each point in the axle ; this entire surface is desig- 
 nated by the letter F. 
 
 ! 
 
 ; 
 
 \i: 
 
 
 7--^,^ 0/^ 
 
 ^ ■■ --1 
 
 h,l B, 
 
 r 
 
 
 ?Uxx 
 
 
 
 •^J 
 
 Irt 
 
 i 1 
 
 Fig. 475- 
 
 Eorces and Moments in the Horizontal Plane. — Fig. 475. As 
 already shown in a preceding paragraph, the pressure P on the 
 crank pin for the position L M oi the crank is somewhat greater 
 than the pressure P^ on the piston ; its moment of rotation about 
 
 the shaft is — . R cos n, which = P^ R, so that upon the as- 
 sumption that the wheel on the left slips on the rail, the other 
 one must oppose a resistance whose moment equals /J, R and 
 
 the frictional resistance 3 at £2= Pa — Combining this force 
 
 3 at E2 and also the force 4 = /"(,, and the resistances i and 2 at 
 the journals, we are enabled to construct the force polygon 
 A-y 2 O and the corresponding cord pol3'gon H for the horizon- 
 tal forces, as shown in the light sectional portion of the diagram. 
 The forces i and 2 are found bv taking the position of the re- 
 sultant of the two forces 3 and 4, as shown in the figure, and 
 decomposing their sum into the portions which would go re- 
 spectively to y?i and A^, as shown by the construction given in 
 the dotted lines. 
 
 Forces and Moments in the Inclined Plane of the Connecting 
 Rod. — The force j2 = 5 acts at (Tj, making an anule with the 
 horizontal equal to M K L. As shown in the illustration, this 
 ma)? be decomposed into the two opposing forces 6 and 7 at ^j 
 and A2, and by taking the same pole distance as before to con- 
 struct the force polygon we obtain the cord polygon 6", shown 
 by the dark section lining, and giving the surface of moments 
 for bending in the inclined plane of the connecting rod. 
 
 Fig. 476. 
 
 Combination of the Three Preceding Cord Polygons for Bend- 
 ing of the Axle. — Fig. 476. Since the three preceding sets of 
 forces are acting at the same time to produce bending in the 
 axle, it is necessary to combine the diagrams in order to obtain 
 the final result. For this purpose we can treat the respective 
 ordinates in the same manner as if they were forces, as in ^ 44. 
 Taking the successive points upon the axle, we construct the 
 corresponding ordinate polygons, whose closing lines give the 
 resulting moment both in direction and magnitude. One of 
 these ordinate polygons is shown in the upper portion of Fi-g. 
 474, to the left : it belongs to the point C^. The vertical ordi- 
 nate Fin this case acts upward, the horizontal ordinate //"con- 
 tinues toward the left, and the inclined ordinate .S also continues 
 to the left, thus giving the resultant T as the line joining the 
 origin of V with the termination of 5". We thus obtain for the 
 entire axle the surface of moments D.^ D^ ffj c-^ c, a^ b.,, which 
 gives the proportion of bending stresses of the axle, as distin- 
 guished from those of the crank arms. 
 
 The Torsional Moments for the Axle. — The position of crank 
 described above and selected for this investigation gives a tor- 
 sional moment only upon the crank to the left, and also one of 
 the magnitude PR upon the axle extending to the point D.^- If 
 both cranks stand at an angle of 45° with the horizontal, there 
 will be produced in both end shanks Cj Z?i and C^D^ moments 
 equal to v/ 2 PR, or about 1.4 PR. Under these circumstances 
 the moments at the ends become Z^iO'/ = Z^.jfl'j', while in the 
 body of the shaft C^ C, we have the moment Q r/ ^ G <:^ = PR, 
 always keeping the scale of forces and the pole distance the 
 same in all of the diagrams. It must be remembered that in 
 this position of the cranks the bending moments are somewhat 
 different from those shown in the preceding diagrams. 
 
 Combination of Bending and- Twisting hloments. — The 
 bending and twisting moments can now be combined accor- 
 ding to the formula of ?45, and thus the surface of mom^ents 
 D., Dydyb^ . . . . d./' obtained, by the help of which the 
 shanks C-^ D^ and C^ Do and body of the axle G Q can be pro- 
 portioned, after the diameter for any one of the ordinates, as, 
 for example, that at B^ b^, has been determined. The half of 
 the diagram which gives the greatest ordinates should be used 
 for both halves of the axle. 
 
 Crank Pin at Cy — The two crank pins are treated separately 
 in Figs. 477 and 478, since the moments can be laid out more 
 conveniently in that way. For the pin EG at C^ we have, in 
 addition to the bending moments obtained from Fig. 476, and 
 shown by the surface EG c^, the combiued forces on the left, up 
 to the point E, acting to twist the pin. The resultant of these 
 forces is yet to be found. The vertical forces are those shown 
 at I, 2 and 6 of Fig. 474, their algebraic sum being shown at /, 
 in Fig. 477. The horizontal force acting backwards is //, repre- 
 sented as I, in Fig. 475. The inclined force acting downwards 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 109 
 
 and backwards, shown at ///, corresponds to the force 6, of 
 Fig- 475- llie closing line (not shown) from /// to Q would 
 give the resultant, and its horizontal component /Facts to twist 
 the crank pin /^ 6", with a lever arm E F^ R. In the force 
 polygon (above, on the left) we take « C to be the pole distance, 
 as before ; lay off IV downward from O, draw alV e, make 
 af= I\ ; then will fe, perpendicular from _/, be the twisting 
 moment Ff\ Combining this with the surface of bending mo- 
 ments F G Cj, we obtain the final surface FG c^' . 
 
 X. 
 
 Fro. 477- 
 
 Crank Arm E F. — The ordinate polygon V^ H^ S-^ T-^ (on the 
 left) is constructed for the point E. The horizontal component 
 h^ of the resultant- T^ acts to twist the arm E F, Fd = hi ; the 
 vertical component z\ acts to produce a bending of the arm in 
 the plane of the diagram, Fb=:v^ ; also the force /F acting at 
 E tends to bend the arm normal to the plane of the diagram, 
 with a moment b b^^ Fd^ at F. The combination of the bend- 
 ing moments gives the surface E Fb' b", which, with the tor- 
 sion rectangle E Fd, gives the final surface E Fb'". 
 
 Crank Arm G H. — The ordinate polygon V^H.^ S^ T^ is con- 
 structed for the point H. The horizontal component h^ acts to 
 twist the arm G H, H d,^^= h.^ ; the vertical component v.,_ shows 
 the bending in the plane of the diagram, Gb^^=v^\ also, the 
 force /'bends the arm normal to the plane of the diagram with 
 a moment P R ^=fh,oiXh^ force polygon above, on the left, in 
 which Og = P, af^= R. Again, make b.^' 63 =//?. The combi- 
 nation of the bending moments gives the surface G H b^' b.^" , 
 and the combined bending and twisting moments give the final 
 surface G Hb^'". 
 
 
 Fig. 478. 
 
 Crank Pin K L. — Fig. 478. This crank pin is subjected to 
 the bending moments which act between M and_/, and indicated 
 by the surface K L c^, obtained from Fig. 476. The collected 
 forces which act on the left of C^ tend to twist the pin. The 
 resultant of the forces 3, 4 and 5, Fig. 474, shown at J^in Fig. 
 476, acts downward, the resultant (difference) of the forces 2 
 and 3, Fig. 475, and shown at VI, acts horizontally backward, 
 and the force 7, of Fig. 475, shown at VII, acts inclined back- 
 wards. The vertical component of the force polygon V, VI, 
 VII, acts to produce twisting at M, remembering that the crauk 
 J K is taken in the horizontal position. The moment of this 
 vertical component has the magnitude kk'. Also we have act- 
 ing to twist the pin the couple shown on the left (as discussed 
 in connection with Fig. 472) with a moment already determined 
 and shown at Qit/ in Fig. 476, and here laid off at K k, from 
 which, since the previously determined twisting moment kk' 
 acts in the opposite direction, we must subtract kk', giving 
 finally for the crank pin K L the twisting moment K k' , which, 
 when combined with the bending moment, gives the surface 
 KLc^'. 
 
 Crank Arm J K. — This is subjected to twisting by the moment 
 A'(/=the vertical component v.-,_ of the ordinate polygon 
 V^H^S^T^. For bending in the vertical plane we have the 
 moment Kl-=-Kk, as already shown in Fig. 472 ; also in the 
 same manner and direction by the vertical component of the 
 forces V^ VI and VII with the moments b b^sX K (see the dia- 
 
 gram of these moments in the upper left portion of Fig. 477). 
 It is subject to bending in the horizontal plane by the horizon- 
 tal component h^ of the ordinate polygon, the moment being 
 bb^. The combination of bending moments gives the surface 
 JKbi' b./y and the final combination with the twisting moment 
 Kd gives the surface/ A' 62'^. 
 
 Crank Ar^n L 31. — The twisting moment is Z ^] = the verti- 
 cal component v^ of the ordinate polygon for the point M. The 
 bending moment Lb.^^= K k, also b/b^ due to the vertical force 
 at 31, and also the bending moment b-^br^ = the horizontal com- 
 ponent //4 of the oi'dinate polygon. The combination of bend- 
 ing moments gives the surface ML b/, and the final combina- 
 tion with the twisting moment gives the surface 31 L b/'. 
 
 Of the four crank arms, JK is subjected to the greatest stress 
 at the pin, and G H 3.1 the axle. In practice, therefore, the 
 surfaces /AT 6/' and G H b./'' should be drawn upon each other 
 and the greatest ordinate used. The resulting dimensions, with 
 possibly slight modifications, should then be used for all four 
 arms. 
 
 Although the construction of such a graphostat^c diagram of 
 moments involves some labor, the result is most satisfactory, 
 since by assuming a stress of say 5 the modulus of working 
 stress (about 17,500 lbs. for wrought iron, 25,000 lbs. for steel) 
 the design can be properly proportioned without further care. 
 
 _ The calculations for locomotive axles with outside cranks is 
 similar to the preceding, although the diagrams are necessarily 
 somewhat different, although laid out in the same general 
 
 Fig. 479. 
 
 ?i73. 
 Hand Cranks. 
 The chief peculiarity in a hand crank lies in the adaptation 
 of the crank pin to be operated by hand. In Fig. 479 is shown 
 a crank for two men, and in Fig. 480 for one man. The dimen- 
 sions for the parts indicated by the letters are as follows : 
 
 /? = 14'^ to I?." 
 I' = 16" to i^" 
 
 to W 
 
 The other dimensions figured in the illustrations are in milli- 
 metres. When placed at opposite ends of the same shaft, hand 
 cranks should be set at 1 20° with each other. 
 
 Eccentrics. 
 An eccentric is nothing more than a ciank in which (if the 
 crank arm is R and the shaft diameter /?) the crank pin diam- 
 eter d' is made so great that it exceeds /? 4- 2 /?, or is greater 
 than the shaft and twice the throw. The simpler forms of eccen- 
 tric construction are shown iu the illustrations. The most prac- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 tical of these is that shown in Fig. 483, the flanges on the strap, 
 as shown in the section, serving to retain the oil and insure good 
 lubrication. 
 
 The breadth of the eccentric (properh' the length of pin /) is 
 the same as that of the equivalent overhung journal subjected 
 to the same pressure ; for the depth of flange a we have 
 
 « = 1.5^ = 0.07/+ 0.2 (157) 
 
 from which the other dimensions can be determined as in the 
 illustrations. 
 
 For some forms of shafts with multiple cranks or other ob- 
 structions the eccentrics cannot be made as shown above, but 
 must be in halves, bolted together. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 COMBINED LEJ-ERS. 
 ?I75- 
 
 Various Kinds of Combined Levers. 
 
 Two simple levers with the same hub form what is termed a 
 
 Combined Lever. When both arms have a common centre line 
 
 they form a Beam, or so-called Walking Beam ; and when they 
 
 form an angle with each other they are called an Angle Beam, 
 
 pins combined, fitted on the turned end of the beam and secured 
 by the pinned collar shown. This construction requires careful 
 fitting, and is somewhat expensive. 
 
 Fig. 4S7 a. This is a fork journal ; the fit is made with a very 
 slight taper, secured by cap bolt and large washer at one end. 
 The pin is kept from turning by a projection under the head, 
 let into the boss on the beam. 
 
 Wai,king Beams. 
 
 One of the principal forms of combined levers is the walking 
 beam, for use in some forms of steam engine. These are usually 
 made of cast iron, with journals and pins similar to those given 
 in Fig. 456 ; and other forms of journals are also shown in the 
 following figures. 
 
 Fig. 486 a shows an ornamented beam-end, with the pin keyed 
 fast Fig. 486 b shows a beam-end with a bored cross-head and 
 
 Fig. 487 b. This is a spherical bearing with its shank driven 
 into the end of the beam and keyed fast, this form giving great 
 freedom of motion to the connecting rod. 
 
 The diameters of pins are determined as already given in ^ 90. 
 The load is to be considered as acting continuously or intermit- 
 tently, according as the engine is single or double acting. 
 
 Fig. 4S8 shows a form of beam which has been extensively 
 used. In order to secure lateral stiffness, the beam centre should 
 not be made too short. A good proportion is that given in the 
 figure, in which the distance between centres of bearings is 
 made equal \.o 6d -\- ^qA. The distance between centres of 
 journals for the ends of the beam is made from 4.60^2 to 5.5 ^2 ; 
 
 or frequently a Bell Crank. The pressure O, upon the axle of 
 an angle lever A O B, Fig. 485, is determined by the relatio- 
 
 Q = y/P^- -^ P} — 2 Py P^ cos a 
 
 if P^ is the force acting at A, and P^ that at B, both acting at 
 right angles to their respective arms \ a being the angle between 
 the arms. This may be shown graphically by making P^^ O B 
 and Pi=OA, when Q will = AB, the third side of the tri- 
 angle. If the forces P^ and P.,_ do not act at right angles to the 
 arms, the triangle must be constructed by drawing lines from 
 O, normal to the directions of the forces. 
 
 The variety of combined levers is very great, and only a few 
 of the principal forms are here given. 
 
 = 4^+^ . 
 
 • (158) 
 
 in which d is the diameter of the beam centre, and A the half 
 length of the beam. If the two arms are of unequal length 
 their mean should be taken.* 
 
 The curved outline of such beams is drawn according to the 
 methods given in § 142, starting from the crown of the beam to 
 the hub for the pins at the ends. The ribs in the middle of the 
 beam are given the same thickness, c, as the flange at the edges, 
 and the breadth of flange is shown in the plan at B (see I 163). 
 
 Another form of beam is shown in Fig. 489. This is made 
 double, and in such case each half is calculated separately. In 
 Fig. 490 is shown a section of such a double beam in which the 
 parts are somewhat widely separated. The two plates are firmly 
 bolted together, the bolts passing through tubular sti ts, as 
 shown, and the parallel motion rods are hung between the two 
 parts of the beam. 
 
 'In the United States i 
 
 ter depth is given to beams of this sort, 
 1 by the formula. Skeleton beams with 
 bands are also much used. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Abeam of somewhat unusual form is shown in Fig 491, being 
 a portion of the hydraulic riveting machine of INIackay & Mc- 
 George, built by Rigg.* The beam centre is at W, the rivet die 
 at B, the hydraulic pressure is exerted by small and large cylin- 
 ders at D and C respectively. The water pressure is taken from 
 an accumulator and discharged into an outlet pipe placed some- 
 what higher than D. By means of a suitablj- arranged valve 
 
 bolts. Fig. 494 shows the form used on American locomotives. 
 The example is from a passenger engine, and extends between 
 
 Fig. 493- 
 
 Another form of beam is the equalizing lever, used to distrib- 
 ute the weight among the springs (see Figs. 102 and 103, | 41). 
 In Fig. 493 is shown a lever of wrought iron for a heavy engin-^ 
 (the Prussian standard freight engine). The length A B is 1180 
 mm. = 465^', and the connections at A, 6* and B are made with 
 
 * Ste Engineering, Slarch, 1875, p. 2^3. 
 
 Fig. 494. 
 the springs of the driving-wheels, being 7} feet long. At O, A 
 and B are half journals, and the connections at A and B are 
 not rigid. The bearings are not on a straight line, as in the 
 German form, but the variation is trifling. 
 
 Fig 489. 
 
 gear the high pressure water is first exerted upon the small cjd- 
 inder, and water from the discharge pipe delivered to the large 
 cylinder, thus closing the die upon the rivet at B- Then the 
 high pressure water is also delivered to the large cylinder, 
 making a still greater pressure upon the rivet, with practically 
 
 ^3 
 
 Fig. 490- 
 
 no expenditure of water, as that cylinder is already filled. The 
 pressure upon the rivet is 60 tons. The beam is made of a sec- 
 tion of uniform resistance (see I9). Kt E is a short shear for 
 cutting beams, angle iron, etc. The distance B Cis 12 feet. 
 Wrought iron beams are not uncommon, and for moderate 
 
 Fig. 492. 
 
 loads and dimensions are conveniently made in the double form, 
 as shown in Fig. 492. The depth /i in the middle may be taken 
 at 0.8 times the value given by formula (15S). For larger beams 
 of wrought iron, the girder form shown in Fig. 491 is to be pre- 
 ferred. 
 
 Fig. 491. 
 
 ? '77- 
 Scale Beams. 
 In scale beams the bearings are usually made upon knife 
 edges (see ? 95), generally with an angle of 60°. A special form 
 is here given, Fig. 495, which may sers'e as an example, showing 
 the main supporting beam of a bridge-scale, in triangular form. 
 In the construction a, the main bearings are at O O; the bear- 
 
 s A A form a double 
 
 lalogous to Fig. 476 ; at i? i; 
 
 the end journal, here set in a cast-iron head. In the form shown 
 at d, we have two separate bearings at O O, the parts being held 
 together by a bolt C-" 
 
 * For .similar examples see E. Brauer's " Konstruktion derWaage" (Scale 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Scale beams should show very little deflection under their 
 load. They are therefore made very deep in proportion to their 
 total section, and the stresses taken at 4250, S500 and 14,220 lbs. 
 respectively for cast-iron, wrought-iron and steel. 
 
 being the same ; 
 
 ^ = 0.07^+0.118^/ (159) 
 
 s used or other bearings, d being the diameter 
 
 -""-1% 
 
 Fig. 497- 
 Fig- 497 shows two views of the brasses, the dimensions of the 
 other parts being based on the following modulus : 
 
 d^=^o.026'] \/P-\- 0.2" (i6o) 
 
 The breadth b may be made equal to 0.8 d^, or if the length of 
 the journal is made equal to its diameter b becomes = d — 2 <?. 
 
 Example : 11 P = 7920 pounds alternating load, we have from (93) d= ■2%", 
 I also = 2^3", and according to (166) 
 
 rfi = o 0267 v/7920 +02" 
 
 = (0,0267 X 8S.9) + 0,2" = 2.57", say 2iV 
 
 We also have e = (0.07 X -2.375) + o-iSi = 0.3". Also 5 = / — 2 ? = 2.375 — 
 
 0.6 = 1.77. Applying the value of rfi to Fig. 496, we have the thickness of 
 
 strap = 2.57 X 0.2 = 0.514 on the sides, and 2.57 x o 3 = 0.76 on the end ; also 
 
 the thickness of key = 2.57 X 0.22 = 0.56", and the other dimensions in a 
 
 The key must be given much less taper when it is used with- 
 out a set screw, as in the illustration, than when a set screw is 
 used. In the former case a total taper of ^<i is used, and in the 
 latter \ is safe. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 CONNECTING RODS. 
 
 Various Parts of Connecting Rods. 
 Connecting rods are used in various forms for transmitting 
 the motion of various reciprocating parts of machines to levers, 
 beams or cranks, or vice versa. It is necessary to consider sepa- 
 rately the ends or heads which contain the bearings for the 
 crank and cross-head pins, from the body of the rod. The 
 dimensions and proportions of the ends are governed, to a 
 greater or less extent, by the dimensions of the bearings, the 
 latter being either forked, overhung or necked, and their size 
 determined by the pressure to which they are subjected. 
 
 I 179- 
 
 Connections for Overhung Crank Pins. 
 
 The strap and key connection shown in Fig. 496 is widely 
 
 used. The boxes are surrounded and drawn together by the 
 
 Fig. 498. 
 
 The boxes are best made to bear closely together instead of 
 being set open, as shown in the figure, and better practice in 
 this respect is shown in Figs. 499 and 500. In this case the 
 boxes must be filed off to permit them to be closed up for wear. 
 
 An objection to the form of strap end just shown is that the 
 continual keying wp of the boxes tends to shorten the rod. The 
 reverse action takes place with Sharp's strap end, Fig. 498, the 
 action of keying up tending to lengthen the rod. 
 
 In Fig. 499 is shown a capped end of solid bronze, as made 
 by Penn. The two halves are fitted closely together, so that 
 the joint must be filed out to take up for wear, or else a num- 
 ber of thin slips of copper may be inserted in the joints and 
 removed one at a time, as may be found necessary. The diam- 
 eter d of the bolts must be made, so that they shall not be less, 
 measured at the base of the thread, than the value given by 
 formula (84). For V thread this is given by making 
 
 (5 =0.0142 y ^ 
 
 strap and key, and by driving up the latter they may be closed 
 together to take up wear. In determining the dimensions, the 
 bozes and their surrounding parts will be considered separately', 
 
 and if square thread bolts are used they should be made slightly- 
 larger. The stress on the material with these sizes will then be 
 between 7000 and 8000 pounds, which is not excessive. (Com- 
 pare Example 2, \ 182.) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 "3 
 
 The nuts of these bolts are fitted with Penn's locking device, 
 Fig. 243. For rods of large dimensions, such as are used on 
 heavy marine engines, the boxes 
 economy of material. 
 
 the length of the rod, and if the reverse is desired, the key may 
 be placed behind the other box. These rod ends are designed 
 cored out in order to secure so that as much of the work as possible may be performed by 
 the lathe, and sharp angles and corners have everywhere been 
 avoided, as they tend to weaken the material. 
 
 Fig. 499 
 
 In Fig. 500 is shown a rod with a solid end, and is a very ex- 
 cellent form, and with proper tools, not too expensive to con- 
 struct. The boxes are made of bronze, lined with white metal 
 and turned on the outside. The movable box is fitted with a 
 wrought iron pressure block, which receives and transmits the 
 pressure of the key. The boxes are provided with small pro- 
 jections, which engage with corresponding recesses and prevent 
 them from turning. 
 
 The key-slot in the rod is made with semi-circular ends, 
 partly because the machine which forms the slot leaves it in 
 that condition, and also because this shape weakens the section 
 
 A third form of solid end is shown in Fig. 502, and is designed 
 by Krauss, of Munich. It is intended to be made of steel, and 
 is very compact and simple. The key is made in two parts, and 
 
 is combined with its own locking device. The boxes are made 
 of wrought iron lined with white metal, and an oil chamber is 
 formed in the one shown on the left. 
 
 Fig. 500. 
 
 of the rod less. The key itself is made flat on the side which 
 bears on the pressure block, in order that liners may be intro- 
 duced when necessarj'. The key is secured by the method 
 shown in Fig. 201. It will be noticed that the nut is set so deep 
 in the recess that a socket wrench is required to turn it. This 
 is done in order that nothing may project beyond the dotted 
 clearance line. 
 
 In Fig. 501 is shown another solid rod end, much used on 
 locomotive engines. The boxes are made without flanges on 
 the back, so that they can readily be removed after taking out 
 the key._ In this case there is no pressure block, but the box 
 upon which the key acts is given instead a thickness af 3 ^in- 
 stead of 2 e. The method of securing the key is the same as 
 before. An oil box is formed on the upper side, and covered 
 with a brass lid attached by screws. The hole in the oil cup, 
 shown in the plan, is fitted with a tube and wick. 
 
 In both of these forms the tendency of the wear is to shorten 
 
 Fig. 503. 
 
 Fig- 503 shows an end of cast iron, also made solid, and with 
 the key acting to take up the wear from below, much as in the 
 design of Sharp, Fig. 498. Cast iron rods were formerly much 
 used on the parallel motion connections of beam engines. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 I I So. 
 Stub Ends for Fork Journals. 
 Fork journals desigued accordiug to the method previously 
 given, are made much smaller in diameter than the correspond- 
 ing overhung journals. On this account the breadth b' cannot 
 be determined in the same proportion to the diameter of pin d, 
 as with overhung pins, as the pioportion will vary somewhat 
 for various conditions. In order to take this difference into 
 account, we may take for such rod ends, instead of the modulus 
 given in (i6o), the following : 
 
 '^'- + \/ -r, t/ ^ ('6i) 
 
 in which b is the breadth corresponding to the length of the 
 normal pin, and «', its modulus, calculated according to (i6o). 
 This enables us to use the proportions of all the preceding ex- 
 amples for fork journals as readily as for overhung crank pins. 
 The thickness of metal c in the boxes may be made the same as 
 before, using in every case the actual diameter d' of the jour- 
 nal. The formula (i6i) assumes the same material to be used 
 
 V-I/l 
 
 Fig. 505. 
 
 For this reason the dimensions of the key should in no case be 
 made less than those given for stub ends for overhung pins. 
 
 Example. Given an alternating pressure of 7920 pounds, let it be required to de- 
 sign a strap end similar to Fig. .196. We have for an overhung pin according to (93), 
 d= 25/3", and for a fork journal, according to {98), d' = iij". and the length /' of 
 the latter = 2 d' = sYs". We then give the strap the proper breadth for the over- 
 hung pin, that is. (^— 2 <•, or 2.375 — 058 = 1.795- say if3". We then have, for the 
 moduli, respectively; for the overhung pm, accordmg to (16 0), di = 2.56 ", and for 
 
 the fork journal, according to {161), d,' = 2.56 ^|r X^ = =-56 \'^ = 
 
 .432", say xV', 
 may be made 
 •0.56", or iV', 
 
 In Fig. 504 is shown a solid wrought iron end, suitable for 
 forked journals as made at Seraing. In the plan shown in Fig. 
 505 the journal and fork are formed in the rod end, and the 
 bearing is made in the crosshead, as shown later in I'ig. 540, 
 § 189. Such rod ends have been used for locomotives by Polon- 
 ceau, and for marine engines by Humphrey. In these cases the 
 values of b' and /;, must be chosen to suit the space at the dis- 
 posal of the designer in each instance. 
 
 Fig. 506. 
 
 Fig. 507. 
 
 For fork bearings in which there is but little angular move- 
 ment, as, for example, in valve-rod connections, the form shown 
 in Fig. 506 may be used. In this case the key and block press 
 upon the half bearing of the outer part of the portion £, as 
 shown. Such connections are sometimes also made by using a 
 flexible steel plate, as shown in Fig, 507 ; and this form may be 
 called a plate link. This has been used in some forms of loco- 
 motives and in the old style Langen Gas Engine. 
 
 Fig. 504. 
 
 in both cases, and gives the rod end for the fork journal 
 approximately the same strength as one proportioned for a nor- 
 mal pin. It is not, however, possible to make an empirical 
 formula cover every case, and some examples will be found 
 much heavier, such as, for example, would give a modulus of 
 
 d, ~ \d' ' d ) 
 One of the portions whose dimensions will not bear much 
 reduction is the key, since it is subject to shearing action and 
 its limited surface must not be subjected to too great pressure. 
 
 Fig. 508. 
 
 5.16. From this we get for the thickn 
 
 ess of the s 
 
 rap 2 16X0 
 
 2 = 0. 
 
 on the sides; and at the end, 1.16 X 0. 
 
 3 = 0.648. 
 
 • nearly \l". 
 
 
 the same as for an overhung pm, givi 
 
 g a thickne 
 
 ss of 2.56 X 
 
 
 and a depth of 2.56 X 0.2 = 0.512 at t 
 
 
 
 
 In Fig. 508 is given an end for a fork journal, such as would 
 be a suitable one for the cross-head end of the rod shown in 
 Fig. 500. The boxes are made cylindrical and fitted with a 
 wrought-iron pressure block. The pressure of the key is trans- 
 mitted to the block b}' a bronze intermediate, but this arrange- 
 ment of key involves much clearance space. The method of 
 securing the key is that shown in Fig. 200, and the whole de- 
 sign is well worked out. 
 
 Another form for the cross-head end of a rod is shown in Fig. 
 509, and this is well suited to be used with the form given in 
 Fig. 501, on the crank end, for locomotive use. The key is set 
 up by turning the screw ; the latter can also be secured at every 
 sixth of a revolution, bj' means of the arrangement of pin aijd 
 washer as shown in Fig. 237. 
 
 ?i8i. 
 Connections for Enlarged or Neck Journals. 
 As shown in § 92, there is no definite relation between the 
 diameter d' of a neck journal and the diameter d of the corre- 
 sponding overhung journal ; hence it is impracticable to use the 
 rules dependent upon the length of the overhung journal, which 
 have been given in the discussions of return cranks, crank axles 
 and eccentrics. It is, however, necessary to devise some method 
 of proportioning the rod ends for such cranks, and for this pur- 
 pose we may use the figures given for overhung crank pins, by 
 making a modification in the modulus according to formula 
 (161). In such cases we must remember to use the value of d^ 
 in. determining the unit e for the proportions of the boxes. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 "5 
 
 Example.— ^M^^o^ft, instead of the fork journal of the preceding example, we 
 have a neck journal of a diameter d' = 434", and length /' = 3/8", with a stub end 
 like that shown in Fig. 496. We have rfj = 2.56", b = i .8125", rf = 2.375. We may 
 make the value of i' the same as for the corresponding overhung crank, or 6' = 6, 
 
 and we then obtain from (161) ^j' = rf j W ±11- = 2.56 X i.4H = 3-62", say 3^". 
 
 For the boxes we have e = 0.07 X 4-75 + "i^S = o-45", say /j". 
 
 In the following examples are given modern 
 
 Fig. 509. 
 
 ends for neck journals, and others may be obtained by modifi- 
 cations of the preceding forms. 
 
 Fig. 510 shows a solid end connection for a spherical journal. 
 The sphere in this case is made 1.5 times the diameter of the 
 
 Fig. 511. 
 
 Fig. 512. 
 
 Figs. 513 and 514 show two forms of eccentric straps, both 
 intended to be made of bronze. The breadth d^ is equal to /, 
 the length of the corresponding cast-iron journal (see ^ 92). 
 If (f = ij-\'', ^i = 1.8'', / = /J = 2.375'^, we have, if d^ = 15.75, 
 
 2-375'', ^'1 = 
 
 The diameter, ( 
 5 determined from th 
 
 of the bolts of these eccentric straps i 
 following : 
 
 (S = 0.33 o'j 4- 0.06 fl'/ (162) 
 
 in which d/ is the modulus for a neck journal and dj^ the mod- 
 
 corresponding cylindrical journal, and an example of this form 
 
 may be seen on the beam in Fig. 48 7^. This gives — = 1.5 ; 
 
 d 
 and if, as before, we make 5' = b, we have d\ = d^ v^i.5 =^ 
 1.225 ^j. If, again, d = 2.375'', we have d^ = 3.56'', d^ = 2.56'', 
 and d\ ^2.56 X 1-225 = 3:13'', say 3^''. The boxes are made 
 ■without side flanges, so that they can be removed by backing 
 out the key. The key may be arranged to be fitted above or 
 below the boxes, as may be desired. When used upon locomo- 
 tive engines, this form is sometimes strengthened as indicated 
 ■ by the dotted lines. 
 
 For the connections of crank axles, return cranks and similar 
 situations it is necessary to use a form of rod end which can 
 be opened. The following forms are designed for this purpose, 
 being made with blocks which are firmly bolted in place, but 
 readily removable. 
 
 Fig. 511 shows a form similar to Fig. 500. The block is fitted 
 between two shoulders and also secured by two through bolts. 
 Fig. 512 shows a design by Krauss, in the same style as Fig. 502, 
 and used with it on a locomotive connection. The block is here 
 made of bronze, and also forms one-half of the bearing ; it is 
 held in place by a through bolt, which is omitted in the draw- 
 ing. A cross-section is shown above, the offsets serving to keep 
 the block from twisting on the bolt. The gap between the boxes 
 is filled with slips of copper. The rod and bolt are both made 
 of steel. 
 
 Fig. 515- 
 
 Fig. 516. 
 
 ulus for the corresponding overhung pin. If we take the values 
 above given, ^/ = 5.71'' and a'j = 1.8'', we get 
 
 J = 0.33 X 1-8 + 0.06 X 5.71 = 0.9866'', say i". 
 If we make d^ = d and d/ = d^, we obtain from (162) the 
 same dimensions as on a capped and bolted rod end. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 In Fig. 515 is shown a design for a cast-iron strap, with bronze 
 lining, although this latter may be omitted. The eccentric rod 
 is secured by means of a key, and if two eccentrics are placed 
 close side by side, the keys should be placed at 45° from the 
 position shown. 
 
 Fig. 516. This is a wrought-iron strap, also lined with bronze. 
 In this, as in the preceding example, the joints between the two 
 halves of the bronze lining are close, and those of the strap are 
 open, and bj' filing the ends the halves may be closed together 
 to provide for wear. Instead of forging the rod in one piece 
 with the lower strap, it may be made with a T head and bolted 
 fast, as shown by the dotted lines. 
 
 Example The eccentric straps on the engines of the "Arizona," 6600 H. P., by 
 John Elder & Co., of Glasgow, are made as in Fig. 515, but with the rods attached 
 by T heads, as described above. The diameter of eccentrics d' = 54", the breadth 
 /= 5", and the shaft diameter = 22}^". 
 
 rod is made with a forked end, and two bearings, its lateral 
 stiffness is thereby increased, and ;w may be made as low as 4, 
 \im = 20 we have for wrought iron or steel, C"= 0.0346. 
 
 diameter D = 0.0346 
 
 .iv/3l68^= 5". 
 
 This gives the diameter in the middle ; it may be somewhat 
 reduced at the ends, these latter being made of a diameter 
 = 0.7 D, giving a cycloidal sinoide as in Fig. 5, formula (23). 
 The ends of the rod should be worked off into the body in such 
 a manner as not to make too abrupt a change of cross section. 
 This becomes more important in high speed engines. In the 
 case of locomotives there is sometimes a marked bending action 
 upon the rod, there being a so-called "whip action " at every 
 revolution of the crank, dependent upon the rotative velocity 
 
 Round Connecting Rods. 
 
 The body of a connecting rod may be made of wrought iron, 
 cast iron, steel, or even wood. In the latter case it is usually 
 only subject to tension. 
 
 If the rod is of circular cross section, of diameter D, and 
 the force of tension be P, we have the following relations : 
 
 Wrought Iron 
 
 VP 
 D 
 
 Vp' 
 
 s/p 
 
 = 0.0148 
 
 3.0578 
 
 These give stresses of 5600, 9500, 2800 and 400 pounds respec- 
 tively, or above two-thirds the value given for ordinary condi- 
 tions. 
 
 These formulae may also be used for short rods which are 
 subjected to compression, but if the length L, of the rod is so 
 great as to permit bending, the diameter must be made some- 
 what greater. From an examination of case II, I 16, and also 
 g 127, we should not permit P to be greater than ^ -^ — , in 
 
 which/ is the moment of inertia of the cross section of the 
 rod, and E the modulus of elasticity of the material employed. 
 In order to determine how small P must be, or rather how 
 large the co-efficient of safety in, must be taken so that we 
 
 shall have P = 
 
 , there are 
 
 conditions 
 
 to be considered ; the requirements being almost as varied as 
 in the case of columns. 
 
 Leaving then the value of m, to be subsequently determined, 
 
 we have_/= -^ D^ and E = 28,400,000, for wrought iron and 
 
 t>4 
 steel, 14,200,000 for cast iron, and 1,562,000 for oak, and hence 
 the following formula for the diameter of rod. 
 
 Wrought Iron or Steel D = 0.0164 ^^7« y Z, Vp 
 
 Cast Iron Z? = 0.0195 v/?« sj L Vp \ . . (164) 
 
 Wood D = 0.034 ^"^ >/^ "^P 
 
 We have for 
 
 m = 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 IS 20 25 30 40 50 60 
 
 1.78 1.97 2.II 2.24 2.34 2.51 
 
 If we represent th( 
 may write for the above formulse 
 
 entire co-efficient of /U L ^ P by C vi 
 
 Vp' 
 
 = C 
 
 s/p- 
 
 and may then determine values for C according to the degree 
 of security required. As already stated, there is a wide variety 
 of values of m to be deduced from practice. For stationary 
 engines of moderate size we find m, very high, often 50 to 60. 
 These however are not to be taken as standards because they 
 are rarely designed for economy of material, but rather for per- 
 fection of action. For medium and large stationary engines 
 we find m from 5 to 25, probably averaging about 20. If the 
 
 Fig. 517. 
 
 and the weight of the rod. This action also occurs in a lesser 
 degree in slower running engines, and is greatest at a point 
 between the middle and the crank end of the rod. For this 
 reason it is sometimes thought desirable to make the greatest 
 diameter of rod, not at the middle, but somewhat nearer the 
 crank end, as shown in Fig. 517. 
 _ For moderate piston speeds this point need hardly be con- 
 sidered as it is amply provided for in the co-efficient of security, 
 but for high speeds and heavy ends it should be given due con- 
 sideration. In the high speed type of engines ,such as the 
 Porter Allen, the greatest strength of rod will be found at the 
 crank pin end. At the same time, as will be seen, the value of 
 m, for high speed locomotive engines, is usually made small. 
 For marine engines, m is usually taken quite high, viz.: 30, 
 
 a,^, 
 
 In such engines the rod is generally made proportional to the 
 cylinder diameter, being about 0.085 to 0.095 times the bore. It 
 must be remembered that in marine engines the stresses due to 
 flexure of the hull, and general lack of rigidity, demand a 
 higher co-efficient of security than for stationary engines. 
 
 Fig 518. 
 
 In Fig. 518 is shown a rod for a screw propeller engine. The 
 body of this rod is truly cylindrical, and the ends are similar to 
 that shown in Fig. 500. 
 
 Examjile 2.— I<et P = 94,600 lbs. L = 60''. Taking-, as before, m = 20 we 
 
 = 0.0346 
 
 
 In a similar case, executed by Maudslay, the rod was made 6"' 
 in diameter, which corresponds to a value in = 54.7. The 
 diameter S, of the bolts in this case was y, and according to 
 the rule given for Fig. 499, they should be 2,J4,". 
 
 I 183. 
 
 Rods of Rectangular Section. 
 
 If it is desired to make the body of the rod rectangular in 
 
 cross section, it is first necessary to determine the diameter for 
 
 circular section by the methods of the preceding section, and 
 
 then determine the equivalent rectangular section. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 117 
 
 Let: 
 
 h, be the larger side of the rectangle, 
 b, be the shorter side, 
 
 6, the diameter of the equivalent circular section at the 
 same point ; then for a given value of h, we have ; 
 
 ('65) 
 
 and for a given value of b : 
 
 and for a given ratio -— ; 
 li 
 
 4-=x/^ = o.88^A... 
 o ^ 16 h ^ h 
 
 from which we deduce the following table : 
 
 h 
 
 b 
 
 // 
 
 b 
 
 h 
 
 b 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 6. 
 
 6 
 
 b 
 
 6 
 
 I.O 
 
 0.84 
 
 1.6 
 
 0.72 
 
 1.0 
 
 0.88 
 
 I.I 
 
 0.81 
 
 1-7 
 
 0.70 
 
 1.25 
 
 0.83 
 
 1.2 
 
 0.79 
 
 1.8 
 
 0.69 
 
 1.50 
 
 0.79 
 
 1-3 
 
 0.77 
 
 2.0 
 
 0.67 
 
 I-7S 
 
 0.76 
 
 1.4 
 
 0.75 
 
 2.2 
 
 0.65 
 
 2.00 
 
 0.74 
 
 1-5 
 
 0.73 
 
 2.4 
 
 0.63 
 
 2-5 
 
 0.74 
 
 The " whip " action before referred to, is much more powerful 
 in the parallel rods of locomotive engines than in the main 
 connecting rods. Such a parallel rod, or side coupling rod is 
 shown in Fig. 520. The keys for the boxes at each end of the 
 rod are placed on the same side of the boxes, so that their 
 action will not afifect the distance between centres, providing 
 
 Fig. 521. 
 
 the wear is alike upon both ends, and for this reason it is 
 desirable also that both pins should be of the same length. 
 (See I 92.) In determining the cross section of such rods, it is 
 to be assumed that the resistance offered is the same for both 
 wheels. This means, that for two coupled wheels, one-half 
 the total driving force is exerted upon each ; for three wheels, 
 two-thirds the total force is exerted upon the iirst rod, and one- 
 third upon the second. At the same time it must not be for- 
 gotten that under certain circumstances one of the wheels may- 
 slip. For this reason it is advisable to take a somewhat larger 
 value for m, than for the driving rods. It is, therefore, not 
 advisable to make in, less than 2, and if possible it should be 
 greater, at least for two coupled wheels. If this is done there 
 need be no fear that the rod will be excessively strained through 
 slippage of wheels. 
 
 aotive of the tirecedinar examole has two pairs ol 
 )ugh the 
 
 If it is desired to calculate the rectangular section directly, 
 without reference to the equivalent circular section, we proceed 
 
 coupling rod, P = 
 
 from (170) h = 0.0144 X i-i! 
 gives for *, 3.75 X 0.4 = i>^'' 
 used on Borsig's locomotiv< 
 
 Fig. 519. 
 
 as before, using the least moment of inertia of the section, 
 J = xV h b^, and thus obtain for wrought iron or steel : 
 for any given value of b : 
 
 h = 0.0000000425 m — ^ (168) 
 
 for any given value of // : 
 
 b = 0.0002 y^/ 111 J " ^ (169) 
 
 and for any given ratio of /i, to b : 
 
 h=o.oi^^m ^JJ^' ^TV=P (170) 
 
 For the last formula we have, when : 
 
 -^=1.5 16 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 
 
 ^ (-±-\ = 1.36 1.42 1.49 1-55 1-62 1.68 1.74 1.80 1.87 1.93 1.99 
 
 The most important application of flat connecting rods is upon 
 locomotive engines. In this case the co-efi&cient of security is 
 taken very low, i. e., the rod is made as light as possible, in 
 order that the " stored velocity " may be kept small, and the 
 "whip" action reduced. 
 
 An examination of practical examples shows values of m, 
 from 2 to 1.5, taken at the middle of the rod. At the cross 
 
 head end the depth is reduced to 0.8, to 0.7 that at the middle, 
 and the depth at the crank end is that due to the taper thus 
 indicated. An example of such a rod is shown in Fig. 519. 
 
 a locomotive P— 28,600 lbs. L = 
 
 have, if jn — 1.5, according to ? 182, \/ jn = i 
 
 -. 14,300 lbs. The length i '= 3 : 
 — V- = 2.5 as before. Taking « 
 
 9 -n/ 100 -y/ 14,300 = 3.73" say 3K"- This 
 s corresponds closelywith the proportions 
 ther examples in practice give values of 
 
 A rod of mixed section, passing from circular into rect- 
 angular, is shown in Fig. 521, being the very elegant connecting 
 rod of the Porter-Allen engine. In the illustration L ^ s feet. 
 
 Channelbd and Ribbed Connecting Rods. 
 
 Cast iron connecting rods are often made of cruciform or 
 
 ribbed section, much in the same manner as axles. In such 
 
 
 ._-— 
 
 
 s -j ->»...,.^___^ 
 
 F 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 J>j 
 
 \ "'"^-^ 
 
 
 
 ' hL! 
 
 
 
 
 -^-•- - - ■ - 
 
 
 C 
 
 j 
 
 ^ 1 [ ^-^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 " ~--~^ . 
 
 
 — ^-n^ 
 
 Fig. 522. 
 
 cases it is best to determine an ideal round rod, according to 
 Fig. 5, from which the desired section can be derived. 
 For any given case, let : 
 
 6 = the diameter of the ideal rod, 
 71, and b, the width, and thickness, respectively, 
 then for any selected value of b, 
 6 b 4/l6 ]( b\ . h ; . . 
 
 from which 
 
 we get the following table 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 h 
 
 & 
 
 b 
 
 <5 
 
 b 
 
 6 
 
 b 
 
 & 
 
 b 
 
 IT 
 
 h 
 
 IT 
 
 IT 
 
 T- 
 
 h 
 
 IT 
 
 h 
 
 h 
 
 h 
 
 0.643 
 
 o.io 
 
 0.700 
 
 0.14 
 
 0.748 
 
 0.18 
 
 0.816 
 
 0.2s 
 
 0.901 
 
 0.36 
 
 0.653 
 
 O.II 
 
 0,714 
 
 0.15 
 
 0.758 
 
 0.19 
 
 0.831 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.928 
 
 0.40 
 
 0.673 
 
 0.12 
 
 0.724 
 
 0.16 
 
 0.768 
 
 020 
 
 0.85s 
 
 0.30 
 
 0.958 
 
 0.45 
 
 0.690 
 
 0.13 
 
 0736 
 
 0.17 
 
 0,789 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.872 
 
 0.33 
 
 0.987 
 
 0.50 
 
 .ST 
 
 y/ 72 s/sB.ee 
 
 n Fig. 522, let A B C D,h^ the ideal round rod from which 
 ruciform section ; EFG H,\s the width selected for the ribs, 
 being, for example 1.5 We then have —^ = -^ = o . 667, 
 
 1 value in column i, of the table gives for , something between 
 
 12. This gives * = 0.12 A = o 12 5- r. If /> i? = 1.4/ ?, we have 
 
 :olui 
 
 PQ- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 For constructive reasons the / section is preferred for loco- 
 motive rods. Such a rod is shown in Fig. 523. This is made 
 with a slight swell in the middle, but the scale of the drawing 
 is too small to allow it to appear. 
 
 Such rods are either made with straight or rounded profile, 
 
 of calculation we may, as in \ 163, 
 T-\-, 
 
 Fig. 524. 
 rectangular section of a height h, and breadth b^, and then have 
 
 • (172) 
 
 =N/'+=x[(iy-] 
 
 from which, when the ratios , and 
 
 h 
 merical values can be readily deduced. 
 
 give: 
 
 , the nu- 
 
 mgine built by 
 1 i,q" « = i.a=c". 
 
 ExampleT.. — A coupling rod of /section, on a loconn _..„ -^ 
 
 Krauss & Co., has the following dimensions : h =• 3 i49"> b = 0.39", B = 1.85", 
 c = o 6, i = 96.45, and P = 10,890 lbs. To determine the degree of security 
 w/, we substitute these values in (172) and obtain : 
 
 :^r 
 
 The completed rod weighed^nly 125 pounds. 
 
 Forms of Cast and Wrought Iron Rods. 
 
 In Figures 525 and 526, are shown comparative forms for a 
 
 round connecting rod of wrought iron, and a cast iron rod of 
 
 cruciform section. In the case of the cast iron rod, the fluted 
 
 
 ^ .■-.-.i.._.^._ 
 
 ;^B 
 
 Fig. 527. 
 
 portion terminates in collars near each end, the lower part at 
 the crank end being made of flat rectangular section, enough 
 longer than the crank arm to insure the necessary clearance. 
 
 In Fig. 527 are shown some special forms for forked ends. 
 Fig. 527 a, is a very short fork. Fig. 527 b, is for a flat wrought 
 iron rod, and Fig. 527 c, is suitable for a long rod of cast iron. 
 The boxes on these rods may be well secured by strap and key 
 as in Sharp's pattern, Fig. 498. In some cases connecting rods 
 are made in the form of trussed frames, and the form of the 
 ends are governed by the form of cross head used. The latter 
 will be considered in the following chapter. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 CPOSS HEADS. 
 
 I 186. 
 
 Various Kinds of Cross Heads. 
 
 A cross head is that portion of a machine which makes the 
 
 connection between the vibrating rod and the piston rod or other 
 
 piece having a rectilinear motion. Cross heads are made with 
 
 various kinds of journals, either overhung, forked or double; 
 
 a b 
 
 and in this respect are similar to the ends of levers, the differ- 
 ence being that the path is curved in the one case and straight 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 in the other. The path of a cross head is generally determined 
 either by some form of parallel motion, or by guides, or in some 
 cases only by the piston or other rod to which it may be at- 
 tached. This gives the following classification : 
 
 1. Free Cross Heads, 
 
 2. Cross Heads for Link Guides, 
 
 3. Cross Heads for Sliding Guides ; 
 
 and this classification will be observed in the followibg discus- 
 
 l 1S7. 
 
 Free Cross Heads. 
 
 In Fig. 528, a and b, are shown two forms suitable for small 
 
 free cross heads. These are made with double journals of 
 
 wrought iron. The diameter of the piston rod in t 
 
 nit 
 
 apon which the dimensions are based is 
 f/j =r 0.026 \/ P ■\- o.z . 
 
 ■ ■ ■ (I7S) 
 
 in which /'is the total load on the cross head. The same mod- 
 ulus serves for the simple proportions of the following cross 
 heads. The load /"g upon the link journals can be determined 
 from the load P^ of the rod journals by the following relations : 
 ^3_ sin a 
 'P.^ ~cos(3 
 
 :i76) 
 
 in which a is the greatest angle which the connecting rod makes 
 with the axis of the piston rod, and j3 the angle which the link 
 
 head should not be less than d.,- A modification of this form is 
 shown in Fig. 529. Satisfactory proportions-will be obtained by 
 making the height /t in the middle equal to 
 
 • (173) 
 s b, which 
 
 makes with a normal to the axis of the piston rod when a is a. 
 maximum, the latter position being determined most readily 
 from the drawing. 
 Example. If the angle a. at its maximum is 20°, and the corresponding: 
 
 The curve of the profile -may be made as shown in I 142. 
 
 When the connect 
 
 i"thecon 
 
 rtsdi 
 
 
 
 ik the angle a. is us 
 
 ni!!? 
 
 
 e,butwhe 
 
 nectin 
 
 
 
 seldom greater tha 
 
 Another 
 
 form of w 
 
 rought 1 
 
 
 OSS head for link 
 
 
 
 Fig. 531. 
 
 Thisfoira 
 
 IS espe 
 
 -lallv 
 
 convenien: 
 
 when 
 
 occasion requires 
 
 that 
 
 the piston 
 
 rod be dis 
 
 connected readily, and 1 
 
 especially adapted for direct- 
 
 acting ste 
 
 im engine 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 key 
 
 3d from (174) 
 
 The other di 
 5 X 1.85" 
 ey = 0.2 
 
 E:camph 
 
 25", s 
 
 -= = 1.47", say iH". 
 le figure are: Hub tl 
 
 .87" = 
 
 engine of the steamship " La Plata " has ste 
 103 uiaiucLcr, wiLu a maximum steam pressure of 26 pounds per square 
 inch, giving a total jjressure of about 217,000 pounds on the piston rod. The 
 length A is 68", and in the executed engine the builder, Napier, has made 
 h = 28", b = 7", dn = 10", the length of journal = I's", these latter agreeing 
 closely with those obtained from g 91. The hub length was made = 30", and 
 hub thickness 5", with a bore of^io". According to the above formulae, 
 we get d^ = 8.75", h = 27", b = ^%■'. 
 
 Cross Heads for Guides. 
 
 Cross heads for use with guide bars are made in many variedl 
 
 ^ _ forms for steam engines and pumps. The form is modified to at 
 
 '; tMckriess" of great extent by the number and arrangement of the guide bars. 
 
 Fig. 532 shows a much used form of cross head for four guide 
 
 n cylinder bars. If the engine runs constantly in the saine direction, and 
 
 the pressure upon the piston acts always in the direction of its 
 
 tirely confined to c 
 
 the opposite direction, the pressure will be almost 
 
 uide surfaces, the 
 
 r pair 
 
 Fig. 530. 
 I 188. 
 Cross Heads for Link Connections. 
 _ Cross heads which are intended to be guided by a system of 
 linkages or parallel motions are made with a pair of link jour- 
 nals in addition to the journals for the connecting rod, and the 
 former are generally made as prolongations of the latter. 
 
 In Fig. 530 is shown a wrought irou cross head for use upon 
 a beam engine in connection with a Watt parallel motion. The 
 
 only coming into action in the case of extraneous forces. If 
 the pressure acts scmetimes with the direction of motion and 
 sometimes against it, the result will be to cause the pressure on 
 the slides to alternate. In most steam engines the pressure 
 changes not only in direction but in magnitude, especially near 
 the end of the stroke. The slides should be made of a softer 
 material than the guide bars in ordei that the greater wear may- 
 come upon those parts which are most easily replaced. In order 
 to reduce wear it is also desirable that the surface of each slide 
 should not be less than 2.5 P; /"being the total pressure on the 
 piston in kilogrammes, and the area thus obtained being in 
 square millimetres. This is about equivalent to o.ooiS P; P be- 
 ing the total pressure in pounds, and the area given in square 
 inches. Many use double this area, or 0.0036 P, with corre- 
 sponding reduced wear on the parts. The pressure on the sur- 
 
I20 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 face of the slides, witli the ordinary ratio of connecting rod to 
 crank arm, will then be about 120 pounds per square inch in the 
 first case and about 60 pounds in the second. 
 
 If we represent the superficial pressure, rubbing velocity and 
 coefficient of friction for slide and crank pin respectively by 
 /i, A. Z'l. '^■i^/vfii we have for the lineal wear per second : U^ = 
 f'lPi ^'\/i ^^^ ^2 "^ /'i/s^s/ji ill which /'j and fi^ are coefficients 
 due to the materials used. Some of these values vary at differ- 
 
 FiG. 534. 
 
 nous, p2 becomes only 710, making p^ about 60 pounds. If the 
 ratio of connecting rod to crank arm is unusually small, the 
 pressure Q on the slides at mid-stroke should be calculated, and 
 
 it may be taken as ^ = r 
 
 The cross head shown in Fig. 533 is arranged for a fork jour- 
 nal, the latter being also in this case made spherical. The fork, 
 which is keyed to the piston rod, is intended to be made of 
 wrought iron ; should it be made, instead, of cast iron, the 
 thickness of the metal about the hub should be increased to 
 0.28 a',, and its length to j.JSdy This form permits the slides 
 to be brought closer together than in the preceding design. 
 
 A very simple form of cross head for four-bar guides is used 
 on many American locomotives, as shown at a and ^, Fig. 534. 
 For constructive reasons, to obtain the necessary clearance, this 
 form is sometimes made as at d, with the middle plane of the 
 
 guides above the axis of the piston rod. The cross head is of 
 cast iron, with the pin cast in, and finished by special machin- 
 ery. A similar form of cross head to that shown at a is used 
 on the Porter-Allen engine, except that a steel pin is inserted as 
 shown at c. The flattening of the top and bottom of the pin 
 serves to assist in the distribution of the lubricant.* 
 
 The area of slides in America is about that given by the fore- 
 going rule. 
 
 Examjyle. A wo 
 measured 79 squar 
 
 The forms of cross head shown are generally fitted with slides 
 of white metal or bronze, and in some instances bearing surfaces 
 of glass have given good results. 
 
 There is one form of marine engine which requires a special 
 form of cross head. This is the so-called back-acting engine, 
 in which the crank shaft is placed between the cylinder and the 
 cross head, and there are two piston rods, passing above and 
 
 ig passenger engine has cj'linder 16" diameter, 
 ,.ing v"= 22,110 lbs. The surface of each slide 
 or about 22,110 X 0.0036 = 79.59 sq. in. 
 
 Fig. 533- 
 
 ent portions of the [stroke. If, however, we take them at the 
 same instant, we have the ratio of wear for that point. 
 
 The point of maximum wear upon guides is near the middle 
 
 of the stroke, where zk = 7 and z', = 7 
 
 1 60 X 12 ' 60 X 12 
 
 Taking the values of ji. and U the same in both cases, we ob- 
 tain, by substitution in the preceding equation, 
 
 A d_ 
 
 p,- 2R 
 which gives an average ratio of about -^^, and taking />2 at 1420 
 pounds gives about 120 pounds for/,. If we consider the pres- 
 sure on the pin to be alternating and that on the slides contiu- 
 
 FiG. 535- 
 
 below the shaft. There have been many varieties of this type 
 constructed. In Fig. 535 is shown a design by Maudslay. The 
 body of the cross head is formed like an axle, with two project- 
 ing bosses for the attachment of the piston rods. The distance 
 E is governed by the diameter of the crank shaft, and A by the 
 clearance space required for the crank arms. In this design the 
 slides are placed outside of the piston rods ; other builders, as 
 Ravenhill, place them between the rods and the journal d', 
 where, as will be seen, there is sufficient room. The lower por- 
 tion of the slides are made of bronze and fitted with adjusting 
 keys. The dimensions of the body are obtained by considering 
 it as an axle, remembering that the forces act to produce twist- 
 ing with the arm E as well as bending with the arm A. The 
 length i,' is to be taken in connection with the diameter d^ , so 
 as to keep the pressure on the journal within practical limits. 
 English practice in such construction gives pressures ranging 
 from 800 to 1800 pounds per square inch. The diameter 6 of the 
 threaded ends of the rods is the same as given for Fig. 499. 
 
 Fig. 536. 
 
 In Fig. 536 is shown vStephenson's cross head. Here the 
 guides are brought so close together that each pair merge into 
 one, and there are but two guide bars. The middle piece, ot 
 wrought iron, is made with two journals, for a forked connect- 
 ing rod. The slides are best made of bronze, the area being as 
 before = 0.0036 P, except in the case of locomotives, where the 
 limited space often causes it to be reduced to 0.0018/'. 
 
 Another design for double guide bars is that of Borsig, shown 
 in Fig. 537. This contains a fork journal, whose projected area 
 /' X d' should not be made too small. Sometimes this is made 
 so small that the pressure reaches 3000 to 4000 pounds, and hot 
 bearings and cut boxes are apt to follow. Judgment in this re- 
 spect is most important for all bearings. The slides are made 
 of cast iron, with bronze shoes, which are packed out with thin 
 slips of copper or zinc. 
 
 
 mtal engine built by B 
 
 i.ofWintherthur 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 121 
 
 Fig- 538 shows a noteworthy form of cross head used on thft 
 Western Railway of France. The body is of wrought iron, the 
 slides and piston rod connection are of steel. The manner in 
 
 white metal. The modulus for the dimensions is the same as in 
 formula (160), and the bolt diameter <!, as in Fig. 499, using fot 
 d the diameter of the equivalent normal wrought iron overhung 
 pin. 
 
 A somewhat similar cross head has been designed by Napier 
 for use with the horizontal back-acting marine engine, Fig. 541. 
 This is intended to be used with a forked connecting rod. The 
 
 Fig. 537. 
 which the reverse taper of the rod is secured, by means of a key 
 and conical ^hell of steel, is of peculiar interest. Since this is 
 a special construction a few dimensions are given in the figure 
 (in millimetres). The area of the slides does not appear to be 
 
 Fig. 540. 
 
 middle block is made of cast iron, and the distance B is kept as 
 small as possible, in order to reduce the size and weight. The 
 depth of arm h is determined as in Case I or II, \ 6. The bolts, 
 whose diameter 6 is calculated as for Fig. 499, are secured by 
 jam nuts. 
 
 In Fig. 542 is another excellent design by Maudslay for simi- 
 lar service. This is for an ordinary connecting rod, as in Fig. 
 5 1 8. The pin is formed in the crooked wrought iron piece which 
 also forms the arms. The thickness b' of the latter is deter- 
 mined from the corresponding moment after having selected 
 the depth h, which in this case is made equal to d' . The value 
 
 Fig, 538. 
 
 large. The rather complicated form of the head of the pin is 
 shown in the lower right hand corner of the illustration. 
 
 Fig. 539 shows a cross head of the so-called "slipper " type, 
 for single guide bar. This is well adapted for situations in 
 which the direction of rotation is constant and the pressure al- 
 ways downward. In order to provide for possible lifting forces, 
 and to meet the reverse action of compression and inertia, the 
 beveled shoes are used, although a square shoulder is to be pre- 
 ferred. The area of slide should not be less than 0.0036 P, pref- 
 erably more.* 
 
 Another form of cross head for single guide is given in Fig. 
 540. This is from a marine engine by Humphreys, Tennant & 
 Co., and is intended to serve for pressure in either direction. In 
 this case the bearing is in the cross head, and the pin is intended 
 
 Fig. 541- 
 
 of d' is calculated as in the case of an axle. The screw diam- 
 eter (5' is calculated as before, and should be made fully as large 
 as the formula gives. The small lug on the lower part of the 
 right arm is for the attachment of the pump rod. Such attach- 
 ments are frequently made to the cross heads of marine engines, 
 of which this is a good example. On the left the slide is shown 
 in section. This is cast of bronze, with the channels shown 
 
 Fig. 539- 
 
 to be fast in the connecting rod, being attached as in Fig. 537. 
 The wear on the bearing is taken up hy the removal of thin 
 slips of copper, originally placed in the vertical joint ; and wear 
 upon the guide, \>y the insertion of similar slips between the 
 cross head and slide. The whole construction is applicable to 
 many situations. The middle portion is in this case made of 
 bronze, but maj', be of cast iron, when the bearing is lined with 
 
 * For a similar cross head, designed by StroudIe5', for locomotive service, 
 
 Fig 542. 
 
 filled with white metal. The small shoe on the right, which is 
 secured by screws, can be removed, so that slips of thin copper 
 can be inserted to take up for wear. These last two cross heads, 
 although unusual in appearance, show how a difficult construc- 
 tive problem can be solved completely, and may be regarded as 
 types. 
 
 ? 190. 
 Guides axd Guide Bars. 
 Guides are made of wrought iron, cast iron or steel. If the 
 entire pressure comes upon one guide, as in the designs just de- 
 scribed, and the guide is supported only at the ends, vshich are 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 separated by a distance = ^j + Sp it must be calculated to resist 
 beuding. Takiug the crank at right angles to the guide, as the 
 most unfavorable position, and calling the pressure Q, and the 
 distances of the two points of support from the centre of the 
 
 Fig. 543- 
 cro3S head as Sy and s.^. Fig. 543, we have the bending moment 
 of the bar = Q — ^-5 — , and for the relation between the depth 
 and width of bar : 
 
 -/^ 
 
 5^ d .^1 + .^2 
 The permissible value of stress 5" for wrought iron or steel 
 should be small, say 7000 pounds, in order that but little deflec- 
 tion shall occur. Any springing is especially hurtful in this 
 case, since it prevents the entire surface of the slides from bear- 
 ing fairly, and thus causes greatly increased pressure upon the 
 
 Fig. 544. 
 
 points which are in contact. Deflections of -^/^ or more are 
 sometimes found, with corresponding irregular wear upon the 
 slides. This subject can be thoroughl}' investigated graphically 
 by taking the various positions of the load. 
 
 In Fig. 544 is shown a form of cast iron guides, intended to 
 receive pressure only upon the lower guide. This is only sub- 
 ject to compression, and hence very little deflection can occur. 
 
 Fig. 545. 
 
 The sectional view on the left shows the disposition of the ma- 
 terial, and it will be noticed that the flanges on the cross head 
 are arranged so as to retain the oil. The upper guide is bolted 
 to the lower, and should the motion be reversed, throwing the 
 pressure on the upper guide, the bolts must be made proportion- 
 ally stronger. 
 
 A form of guides which is coming more and more into use for 
 stationary engines is that shown in Fig. 545. Here the flat 
 
 "T 
 
 lilt f- 
 
 1 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 ^-fj 
 
 ^^^c 
 
 
 ,.._^^_^ 
 
 -^ J 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "f 
 
 
 -a- 
 
 
 Jc. 
 
 i— 
 
 
 \M 
 
 
 Fig. 546 
 
 guide surfaces are replaced by portions of a cylinder. An espe- 
 cial advantage of this construction lies in the possibility of bor- 
 ing the guide surfaces in exact alignment with the cylinder. 
 Any twisting of the cross head is prevented by the connecting 
 rod' and crank pin, or, if necessary, a tongue on the lower slide 
 may fit into a groove in the guide. 
 
 The cross head for such guides may be similar to Fig. 537, the 
 lower guide being adjusted by a key. 
 
 The single guide bar has been used in locomotive practice. 
 Fig. 546, which was shown both on American and Belgian en- 
 gines at the Paris Exposition of 1878. The guide is bolted tc> 
 the cylinder at C, and to the yoke at /. The cross head is a 
 simple modification of the form in Fig. 534 iJ. Engineer J.J. 
 Birckel has shown that there is a heavy lateral stress on such a 
 guide bar, due to the necessary end play in the driving axles, 
 and a wide bar is therefore necessary. He makes the widtk 
 d = 2 7^ /;, and makes 
 
 = Const 
 
 
 in which G is the weight of the parts subject to lateral vibra- 
 tion, Q the normal component of the piston pressure, L the 
 length of guide bar, and H the distance from centre of bar to 
 centre of rod. In the case of a cylinder 18'^ diameter at 100 
 lbs. steam pressure, G = SSoo lbs., L = 51.2 and //" = 7.5''^^ 
 the values obtained are : b ^ 8", A = 3''. 
 
 Fig. ... „ engine, 
 
 suitable for a cross head such as is shown in Fig. 540. This is- 
 especially arranged to retain the lubricating oil, and as the 
 cross head moves between the positions i' — i and 2 — 2'', 
 every stroke, it dips in the oil at each end and carries it over 
 the guide. 
 
 Example. The steam.ship " Arizona " is fitted with sing^le guide bars and 
 automatic lubrication. The pressure on one slide is 64,000 lbs., the area 
 being 47" X 27" = 1269 sq. in., or a pressure of about 50 pounds per inch. 
 
 .Classification of Whefls. 
 Wheels are used in many varied ways to transmit motion in 
 machine construction. They may be divided into two great 
 classes : 
 
 1. Friction wheels, 
 
 2. Gear wheels, 
 
 according as the}' transmit motion by frictional contact, or by 
 the engagement of gear teeth. 
 
 Each of these classes may again be divided into : 
 (rt) Direct acting, and 
 {b\ Indirect acting wheels, 
 according as the force is transmitted directly from one wheel to 
 another, or indirectly, by means of belt, cord, chain, or similar 
 device. This gives four divisions for consideration, as follows : 
 I. Direct Acting Friction Wheels, or friction gearing, pure 
 
 and '-■imple. 
 II. Direct Acting Tooth Gearing, otherwise -^alled simply, 
 gearing. 
 
 III. Indirect Acting Friction Wheels, such as Pulleys, Cora 
 
 Wheels, &c. 
 
 IV. Indirect Acting Tooth Gearing, such as Chain Wheels. 
 The first three forms exhibit the greatest variety, and will be 
 
 given the first consideration. 
 
 The relative position of the axes has a most important influ- 
 ence upon the form of a pair of wheels. The positions may be 
 grouped as follows : 
 
 1. The axes geometrically coincide, 
 
 2. They are parallel, 
 
 3. They intersect, at an angle, 
 
 4- They are at an angle, by pass without intersecting. 
 This gives four groups under each of the preceding main divi- 
 sions. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The Two Applications of Friction Wheels. 
 
 Direct acting friction wheels may be used to accomplish either 
 one of two different functions and their construction varies ac- 
 cording to the use to which they are put. 
 
 The first application is that in which the wheels are pressed 
 together with sufficient force to prevent the surfaces from slip- 
 ping upon each other, uuder which circumstances the motion 
 of one wheel will be transmitted to the other. 
 
 The second application is that in which the so-called rolling 
 friction is so small that the wheels, when interposed between 
 two surfaces which are relatively in motion, act to reduce the 
 otherwise injurious frictional resistance. 
 
 Hence we see that friction wheels may be used : 
 
 [a) To transmit motion, and 
 
 {ti) To reduce resistance. 
 
 The first application includes what may be called driving 
 friction wheels, or commonly simple friction wheels, and the 
 second application includes all the various forms of friction 
 rollers, roller bearings, ball bearings, and the like. The two 
 kinds have also been termed friction wheels and anti-friction 
 wheels. 
 
 i 193- 
 Friction Wheels for Parallel Axes. 
 
 The surfaces of a pair of friction wheels in contact are almost 
 always of circular curvature, and when a pair of such wheels 
 roll freely upon each other the uumber of revolutions will bear 
 an inverse relation to the radii of the respective circles. This 
 
 Fig. 548. 
 
 ratio is called the velocity ratio of the wheels. If we call the 
 revolutions per minute of each wheel n for the driver and n-y 
 for the driven wheel ; and the corresponding radii R and i?i, 
 we have for the velocity ratio : 
 
 _R 
 
 (178) 
 
 Friction wheels for parallel axes are made with cylindrical 
 surfaces. Fig. 548. In order that there shall be no slipping be- 
 tween the surfaces we must have a pressure Q, which, to transmit 
 a force P, at the periphery of the wheels, must not be less than 
 
 Q = J ('79) 
 
 f being the co-efficient of friction. 
 
 Ihe value of/ for various materials may be taken as follows : 
 
 For Iron on Iron o.io to 0.30 
 
 " Wood on Iron o.iotoo.6o 
 
 " Wood on Wood 0.40 to 0.60 
 
 Friction driving is often very simple and practically effective 
 It had been almost neglected for general uses, when it was very 
 successfully applied in various forms of saw mill machinery. 
 This was especially the case in the lumber regions of America. •• 
 
 The best results are obtained in practice from surfaces of 
 wood on iron, the wooden surface being preferably the driver, 
 so that any stoppage on starting shall not wear hollows in the 
 softer material. t The rim is built up in such a manner as to 
 place the grain of the wood as nearly as possible in the direc- 
 tion of the circumference. The best wood for the purpose is 
 maple, but linden, poplar and pine have been used with good 
 results. Great care must be taken to make the wheels truly 
 cylindrical, and they should be kej-ed upon their axles and fin- 
 ished while running in their own proper bearings. Under these 
 conditions a wheel of maple can transmit a circumferential force 
 
 * See Wicklin, " Frictional Gearing," Sci. Am., vol. 26, p. 227 ; also Apple- 
 ton's "Cyclopxdia of Mechanics," vol. 2, p. 36; also Cooper's " Use of Belt- 
 
 t Surfaces of compressed paper against iron are now in general use.— 
 
 of about 28 pounds per inch of face width, or from 15 to 20 
 pounds for the other woods above mentioned. 
 This gives for maple face : 
 
 
 {180) 
 
 and a width i)^ to 2 times greater for the other woods, HP 
 being the horsepower transmitted, and v the circumferential 
 velocity in feet per minute. Substituting for v its equivalent 
 value, i5 ^'1 we have 
 
 b = 
 
 HP 
 
 .... (181) 
 
 Such wheels are made in practice up to 6 feet in diffmeter and 
 30 inches face, transmitting upwards of 60 horse power. 
 
 According to the experiments of Wicklin, the coefficient of 
 friction is about 0.30 to 0.32, from which the pressure of contact 
 must be {? = y/^ P. The ease with which these wheels can be 
 thrown out of gear is a very convenient feature. 
 
 velocity of n8o feet per minute give 
 
 face, and from (iSi) R = --- — —rs — = 
 
 olutious per minute, the radius of it 
 
 Example 2. Required to transmil 
 
 nitted by frictio 
 We get from (180) b = ^ 
 >". If the driven shaft is ru 
 
 = 30 
 
 , R = 13.66". 
 
 [ H, P., the 
 
 If pine is used, this should be doubled, giving b = 4^^". 
 
 The method of construction of these wheels is as follows : 
 For large wheels, 4 to 10 feet in diameter, the rims are made 
 from 6 to 7 inches deep, built up of wooden segments i^in. 
 to 2 in. thick, forming )4 to yV 'he circumference, and so placed 
 that the direction of the fibre shall follow the circumference of 
 
 Fig. 549- 
 
 Fig. 550. 
 
 the wheel as nearly as possible. These segments are firmly- 
 clamped together and secured by bolts or nails. The actual 
 face is made about 2 in. narrower than the working face b. This 
 rim is then securely fastened to the arms, which are very strong 
 and made with feet or pads which are mortised into the rim and 
 both keyed and bolted fast. The number of arms varies from 6 
 to 8, and for very wide faces two sets are used ; see Fig. 549. 
 An additional ring of wood is then put on each side, bringing 
 the width up to the full value of 6, and these outer segments 
 are deeper than the others, so that the ends of the keys are en- 
 tirely covered ; the completed wheel is then turned and finished 
 in place, as before stated. 
 
 Smaller wheels are built upon iron drums, the segments being 
 screwed together and clamped between the outer rims, Fig. 550. 
 Projections on the iron rim, let into wood, prevent the latter 
 from turning. The total thickness of rim is about 4 in. Care 
 must be taken that the wood is thoroughly dry. 
 
 The driven wheel of iron is made similar to a belt pullej', but 
 with a much stronger rim and more and heavier arms ; when a 
 wider face than 16 in. to 18 in., double arms are used. Both 
 wooden and iron wheels shotild be carefully balanced, in order 
 to avoid vibration. 
 
 An important and ingenious use of friction wheels is in con- 
 nection with a drop hammer, the wheels being used to raise the 
 drop. Merrill's drop hammer, Fig. 551, is operated by twoiron 
 friction wheels A and (T, which together act upon the oak 
 plank B, to which the hammer drop is attached. The roller A 
 is the driven one, and its shaft runs in eccentric bearings on 
 each side, which are operated by levers D and press the parts to- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 gether. When the parts are in the position shown, the plank 
 and hammer are raised, and when the lever D is lifted, the 
 wheels separate and the hammer is allowed to drop. In some 
 
 and the linear velocity high, in order that the driving force may 
 be kept as small as practicable. The most convenient modifi- 
 cation of this form is that in which the angle B of the cone is 
 made i8o°, when we obtain a pair of friction disks, Fig. 555. 
 
 The velocity ratio, when A is the driver and B the driven, 
 and x\s the distance from the axis of a, is expressed by : 
 
 , which = — 1 =- _ 
 
 f sin /3 
 
 
 (182) 
 
 (183) 
 
 when /? = 180 ; n being the number of revolutions of B. These 
 are the equations of an equilateral hyperbola; see Fig. 555. 
 When the value of .ar approaches near zero, the driving of .^ by 
 B becomes impracticable.* 
 
 similar designs both rollers are driven, as in the hammer of 
 Hotchkiss and Stiles,* and also in the so-called " Precision 
 Hammer," of Hasse oi Co., of Berlin.! 
 
 Friction Wheei^s for Incwnsd Axes. 
 When the axes are inclined to each other, the surfaces of the 
 wheels, unless they are very narrow, become portions of cones, 
 with a common apex at the intersection of the axes. Fig. 552. 
 Each pair of circles in the surfaces then roll together as if cyl- 
 indrical. Wheels of this sort may be constructed in a similar 
 
 Fig. 554- 
 
 Fig. 552. 
 
 manner to those described in the preceding section. In Fig. 
 553 are shown, at a and b, two sizes of conical wooden friction 
 wheels. The outer disk is placed with the fibres in a radial 
 direction, but the others have the grain of the wood arranged as 
 nearly as possible circumferentially. These disks should be 
 most carefully fitted, glued and bolted together. Especially im- 
 portant is it that conical surfaces should be turned to the cor- 
 
 In Fig. 556 is shown a form of variable speed gear in 
 which one disk is placed between two others. The disks A-^^ 
 and A.^ revolve with the same velocity in opposite directions,- 
 and the driven disk B is placed between. The velocity ratio 
 
 can be varied from o to — proportional to jf.f The pressure 
 
 is applied at the ends of both horizontal shafts. This arrange- 
 
 FiG. 553- 
 
 rect angle. The pressure is applied from the end of one of the 
 two shafts in such a manner that the force may be applied or 
 removed at the thrust bearing. 
 
 The most extensive application of friction driving, both with 
 cylindrical and conical surfaces, is found in locomotive engines. 
 The high pressures necessarily used compel in this case the use 
 of iron or steel tires. The force Q here exceeds 6 tous.J 
 
 In some cases a combination of one conical wheel and one 
 narrow wheel with rounded edge, as in Fig. 554, may be used for 
 the transmission of small powers. In this case both wheels are 
 made of iron. The pressure is easily applied to the disk wheel 
 B, and the mechanism is so arranged that it can be shifted 
 along it-s axis, so that a variable speed motion is obtained. It 
 must be noted that in this form the surfaces in contact are ne- 
 cessarily very limited, and hence it is desirable, as in the case of 
 frictioD couplings, to have the diameters as large as possible, 
 
 Fig. 555- 
 
 Fig. 556. 
 
 ment has been used for driving centrifugal machines, and more 
 recently for potters' wheels, the control over the speed being 
 especially useful in the latter case, the position of the variable 
 disk being controlled by a treadle. 
 
 Another arrangement of disk friction wheels to produce a 
 variable speed is that of Rupp, shown in 557. A is the driver, 
 B the driven, and C the intermediate, the latter being ad- 
 justable on its axis. The variation is between the limits 
 
 R 
 
 -R 
 
 according to the relation 
 
 * See Appleton's "Cyclopaedia of Mechanics," vol. 2, p. 85. 
 
 t German Patent 2685. In this hammer the lower part of the plank is re- 
 duced, and the whole design very ingeniously worked out. 
 
 I The surfaces in contact are sensibly flattened. Krauss' experiments 
 showed that with a pressure of 12 000 pounds, a steel tire on an iron rail gave 
 a surface of contact of 0.309 sq. in., and with a pressure of 8250 pounds, a 
 surface of 0.2, sq. in. In the Fontaine locomotive the pressure of contact 
 ■was about 8 tons on each wheel. 
 
 which gives the equilateral hyperbola shown in Fig. 557, inter- 
 secting the axis of ordinates when x ^ o. Rupp recommends 
 especially that the intermediate wheel be made of a number of 
 
 inning- machinery. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 125 
 
 thin disks, all loose upon the shaft. This does not appear to be 
 advantageous in view of formula (184), since there is a different 
 ratio for each disk, and hence some of them must slip. 
 
 A similar device is that of Barnhurst, Fig. 558, in which the 
 disk is placed between two cones.* 
 
 I 
 
 inder B, the axis of which makes a small angle with that of A. 
 When the disk A is revolved, it rolls a helical path upon the 
 cylinder, and also moves in the direction of its axis. The angle 
 o corresponds to the angle of the screw thread. Robertson has 
 applied this device as a feed motion to a wood lathe. This ar- 
 
 FiG. 557- 
 
 By making two of the disks fast on one shaft, and placing 
 the driving wheel between them, with suiEcient clearance to 
 enable either to be brought in contact with the driver, the driven 
 shaft may be operated in either direction or allowed to remain 
 
 ? 195- 
 Friction Whbei<3 with Incwned Axes not Interskcting. 
 In the case of friction wheels whose axes are rigidly held, and, 
 while inclined, do not intersect each other, there is always more 
 or less lateral slipping. The figures which, under these condi- 
 tions, exert a maximum amount of rolling action and a mini- 
 mum of slipping are a pair of hyperboloids of revolution (see 
 §218). If, however, the axes are so arranged as to permit 
 longitudinal motion, either with the bearings or in them, the 
 wheels will be relieved from slipping. Such an arrangement, by 
 Robertson, is shown in Fig. 560.1 The disk A acts upon a cyl- 
 
 * See Engineei 
 t See Engineer 
 son are given. 
 
 Fig. 560. 
 
 rangement may also be reversed, A being held in its bearings, 
 and B, with its bearings, permitted to travel. 
 
 The same principle may be used with cones on disks, but 
 these devices appear to possess limited practical application. 
 
 Friction wheels, the axes of which coincide, are the same as 
 friction couplings. 
 
 ?i 196. 
 , Wedge- Frictiom Wheei^s. 
 
 Wedge friction wheels are those in which the cross section of 
 the rim is wedge-shaped. They were designed in Italy by Mi- 
 notto'and in England by Robertson, and hence are known by 
 both names ; in both cases being applied to wheels with parallel 
 axes. Two forms of rim section are given in Fig. 561. In this 
 case the radial pressure Q is much less than with cylindrical 
 wheels, and for any wedge angle d it is equal to 
 
 - 4- f cos - 
 
 Q = 
 
 f 
 
 (185) 
 
 A disadvantage of this form is the fact that true rolling action 
 only takes place in one cylindrical section through each rim, 
 and hence there is much hurtful friction from the slippage at 
 other points ; this defect becomes less as the ratio of the wedge 
 depths k, /^i to the radii R, R-^ diminishes.* In order that the 
 
 k k^ 
 
 ratio -77 and -5- may be kept as small as possible without re- 
 ducing the surface of contact, the rim is made with multiple 
 grooves, as in the form on the right. The angle Q is generally 
 made = 30°, although Robertson used much smaller angles. 
 
 Fig. 558. 
 
 at rest, Fig. 559. A^ A^ are the driven, and B the driver. This 
 is ingeniously applied in Cheret's Press, in which the screw of 
 the press_ is on the axis of B, and is turned in either direction 
 by the friction wheels. 
 
 Fig. 561. 
 
 These wheels grow warm and wear rapidly when operated con- 
 tinuously at high speeds. Minotto has also made especial ef- 
 forts to design bevel wedge friction wheels ; he uses only one 
 groove, and adjusts the position so that wedge profile shall al- 
 ways act at the same point. Robertson makes the grooves non- 
 adjustable, as in spur wheels. Wedge friction driving has been 
 proposed for locomotive driving, and models made on this plan 
 have ascended steep grades ; the wear in this case comes mainly 
 upon the track. 
 
 Wedge friction wheels have been used in America for many 
 years on winding engines ; and they are especially useful in 
 driving ship's windlasses, on account of the ease with which 
 they can be thrown in and out of gear.f More recently wedge 
 friction wheels have been used by Gwynne and also by Weber 
 in Berlin, at high speeds, and apparently with good endurance, 
 
 * Hansen, in Dingler^s Journal, vol. 137, 1855, p. i, shows that the actual 
 rolling circle is always on that portion of the wedge surface towards the 
 driving-wheel, and changes its position when the driver becomes the driven. 
 See also Ad. Ernst, in Zeitschr. d. V. deutscher Ingenieure, xxvi, p. 243. 
 
 t H. D. Andrews' steam windlasses are made with wedge gear of from 4 to 
 12 grooves. The diameters of the friction wheels are as follows: 
 H. P. Slow speed. Fast speed. Drum. 
 
 Diam. Length. 
 
 5 4-30" 8-26" 6" 27" 
 
 8 4-30" 8-26" 8" 27" 
 
 10 6-36" 12-30" 8" 30" 
 
 15 6—36" 12—30" 8" 30" 
 
 * 
 ^ 
 
 
126 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 driving centrifugal pumps at 700 revolutions per minute. These 
 wheels are with single groove and wedge, the wedge being of 
 curved profile, and hence acting somewhat like the adjustable 
 device of Minotto.* 
 
 * See Engineering, 1S68, pp. 502, 593, 
 assistant in the Royal Technical High 
 principle of the Weston Clutch f?!';?! t( 
 made of a number of thi 
 a slight axial pressure is 
 much friction. A description will be found in Berl; 
 
 I. P- 353- Enj 
 
 and in it act the rollers B^, B.^, and the width of face of the 
 rollers compels a sliding action, forward on the outer edge and 
 backward on the inner. The trough may be stationary and the 
 shaft a, carrying the rollers, revolve. Rollers with inclined 
 axes are also used for grinding, and a similar device has been 
 made for straightening round rods. 
 
 Fig. 562. 
 
 Single-groove friction wheels have also been used in America 
 for mill gearing. 
 
 Sellers has devised an ingenious form of wedge friction gear 
 for changing the rate of feed on engine lathes. This is com- 
 posed, Fig. 562, of two simple disks and a pair of very obtuse 
 cone plates, the latter being pressed together b}' springs. The 
 axis of the cone plates is movable, thus giving change of speeds. 
 The ratio of change is similar to Rupp's gearing, formula (184). 
 
 Speciai, Applications of Friction Wheels. 
 
 The previously stated condition of wedge friction wheels, that 
 there is but one line at which rolling action takes place, and that 
 slipping occurs at all other points of contact, is utilized in vari- 
 ous methods in machine design, as for example, in rolling mill 
 machinery. 
 
 In this case a third piece is driven, compressed and altered in 
 form between two friction rolling members. The rolls and the 
 metal may be considered as a train of friction gearing. In the 
 case of a plate mill, the plate may be considered as a pair of 
 friction wheels of infinitely great radii ; this is also the case in 
 rolling bars. In a tire mill one surface is an internal and one 
 an external wheel, of variable radius. The three-high mill may 
 be similarly compared to a train of friction gears. 
 
 I19S. 
 Roller Bearings. 
 
 Roller bearings, sometimes called anti-friction rollers, maybe 
 used in either of two forms : 
 
 (a), in such manner that the rollers are carried in their own 
 bearings, the latter receiving the load ; 
 
 [b), or in such a manner that the rollers are placed between 
 two moving surfaces and act with a rolling motion upon both of 
 them. 
 
 Roller bearings are used in connection with surfaces which are 
 flat, round, or even spiral. Examples of rollers upon cylindri- 
 cal surfaces are given in Fig. 565, in which a and b are forms 
 used on pillar cranes, and b^ is the more general form of b. Roll- 
 ers are also used in axle bearings, and in heavy pulley blocks, 
 where indeed the sheaves themselves are a form of friction roller. 
 
 Fig. 563. 
 
 A very interesting application is that referred to in I 148, as 
 in use at the Kirkstall Forge, and shown in Fig. 563. A and B 
 are plane friction disks. The round bar C passes between them, 
 slightly above the centre and partly rolling, partly sliding, re- 
 ceives both an endlong motion and a motion of revolution upon 
 its axis. The disks revolve in the same direction, and of the 
 opposed forces which tend to cause revolution of the bar those 
 which act in the portion of the disks between their axes, i. e., 
 between the vertical dotted lines in the figure, preponderate, 
 and determine the direction in which the round' bar revolves. 
 The horizontal components of the sliding forces at all portions 
 of the disks, act to carry the bar forward, so that it receives a 
 combined spiral motion and is at the same time rolled and 
 straightened. The earlier method of rolling round bars was by 
 means of semicircular grooves, but this does not give either as 
 round or as straight a product. Many similar examples in roll- 
 ing mill machinery will be found, resembling friction driving 
 
 In the same way, various forms of grinding mills are made 
 upon the principle of friction combinations, as in the case of the 
 Bogardus mills, with flat grinding disks, and also in the case of 
 grinding rollers, Fig. 564. Here the round trough A revolves. 
 
 Fig. 565. 
 
 A form of roller bearing which is subject to very heavy loads 
 is that used to carry the ends of bridge beams and trusses, to 
 provide for expansion and contraction. These are made either 
 with round rollers, as at a, Fig. 566, or with double segments, as 
 at b. 
 
 For round, solid rollers, the load may approximately be in- 
 vestigated as follows : — Let / be the length, r the radius of each 
 roller, and P the load. This load will be carried by a surface of 
 a width b, included in the angle (measured at the centre of the 
 roller) /3 = 2^. We have for the relation of these elements : 
 
 P = Elr^ and S=^P' 
 48 16 
 
 E being the modulus of elasticity, and 5" the fibre stress upon 
 the material. 
 Also: 
 
 
 It will be seen that for any given material the relation — 
 can be so made as to keep the stress within practicable limits. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 127 
 
 These may be choseu as follows, both surfaces being of the 
 lame material ; 
 
 
 Cast Iron. 
 
 IVrought Iron. 
 
 Steel (hardened) 
 
 E = 
 
 14,220,000 
 
 28,440,000 
 
 42,660,000 
 
 Ir 
 5 = 
 
 425 to 500 
 
 340 to 400 
 
 1 000 to 1400 
 
 1,000 to 12,000 
 
 11,000 to 13,500 
 
 25,000 to 32,000 
 
 Example i. The bridge over the Elbe at Hohnstorf has spans of 33° <ef 
 The bearings are made of cast iron of the form shown at b. The pressure 
 792,000 pounds on six rollers, the dimensions of the latter being, ('=5; 
 
 '3^,t 
 
 53X4- 
 
 "We have therefore 
 
 hence ^=^~41__ ^603,8 = 
 This gives for the breadth b of the contact surface unt 
 
 
 ind5- = 
 
 3er this load, 
 |32 = "'•''^"'""" (0.126)2 = 14,280 lbs. 
 
 or wagon wheels we have a combination of friction wheels, since 
 the wheels themselves are properly friction rollers and the intro- 
 fluction of rollers into the axle bearing makes the latter device 
 what may be termed friction wheels of the second order. 
 
 Another system of the higher order is the very ingenious ar- 
 rangement of planet rollers of Mechwart. In this apparatus^ 
 which seems to have been so completely conceived by the in- 
 ventor as to be incapable of further improvement, friction rollers 
 are utilized to the fullest possible extent. The system is indi- 
 cated in the diagram Fig. 568. R, 7?^, /?.,, are the rollers of a 
 roller-mill. The axis a, of the roller /?, is carried in a station- 
 ary bearing ; the axes d and c are carried upon links b, a, and d.^ 
 a-i, so that they may be moved to or from a, or may be pressed 
 against the latter. The length of these links is governed by a 
 screw adjustment. The rollers are pressed together by the ring- 
 roller y?3, acting upon the planet roller 7-3 and rollers r, and r^, 
 the latter being loose upon the axes of the main rolls i^i and iVj. 
 The planet roller ;-, acts against the roller r, which is fast on the 
 axis of A". If it is desired to exert greater pressure upon the 
 rollers, the roller 7?, is forced towards 7?;, by means of the lever 
 combination a, (5, c^ d^, the lever d^ c^ being held in position by 
 a ratchet section, the position being changed as the rollers wear. 
 The ring roller R^ reduces very greatly the wear upon the jour- 
 nals of the grinding rollers, as it converts the greater part of 
 their journal friction into rolling friction. In order to equalize 
 the effect of the weight of the upper roller, the lower roller /?, 
 is counterbalanced by a weight, which, acting through the sys- 
 tem of levers c, d., a.,_ exerts an upward pressure equal to the 
 combined weight of R^ and R^. 
 
 Example 3. Bridge over the Rhine at Wesel ; span 115.7 feet, rollers ai 
 t)earings of hardened steel. The load is 770,000 pounds on six rollers, ; 
 shown at a, and/ =27 75", r = 3.875". These values give ^ ^="93; ^ = °- 
 
 .and 3 = 0.43", and 5= 32,450 lbs. 
 
 Example 3 Clifton Bridge at Niagara. The load of — '^"" "^^ " "■"-"' 
 upon n steel rollers, on bearings of ' 
 
 ing/=6.3", t 
 
 material, thi 
 This gives a high value for -^ = 4127; 3 = 
 
 Ball bearings are frequently used instead of cylindrical bear- 
 ings, and for some forms of journals are most convenient, 
 although the bearing surfaces being only points, they are not so 
 well adapted for heavy pressures. 
 
 A form of roller bearing used in agricultural machinery is that 
 of Cambon, shown iu Fig. 567. The steel ring, with semicircu- 
 lar groove is secured to the shaft, and in the groove, or globoid 
 ring, the steel balls, 09 to 13 in number, are placed. These are 
 held in place by a corresponding external ring, made in halves. 
 The outer ring is held in the journal box. Cambon uses balls of 
 ^/i" \o \" in diameter, which are rolled in a mill of similar con- 
 struction to the bearing. 
 
 It may be remarked that when roller bearings are used for car 
 
 Fig. 568. 
 
 The above described apparatus is iitted to both ends of the 
 rollers. In order to provide for any slight inequality in diame- 
 ter between the opposite ends of the rollers, another adjustment 
 is provided. This consists of the lever a b c.,\.o which the planet 
 roller is suspended by the link b a-^. This permits the planet 
 roller to be forced into the narrower space between r and R^, by 
 means of the worm and worm sector shown at c. The ring R^ 
 is a continuous steel forging, and the rollers are chilled castings. 
 The rollers R, R^, R.^ are geared together, the gears having 
 double spiral teeth, as shown in ^222. 
 
 Friction rollers are sometimes used in connection with toothed 
 gearing, an example of which will be seen later in Fig. 589. 
 Whitworth used rollers in the place of a nut in his screw planing 
 machine, and they are used in worm gearing by Bourdon, and 
 the higher form of worm, the globoid (see ^ 224) by Jensen, and 
 by Hawkins. Many applications are also found among instru- 
 ments of precision, notably Atwood's Machine, and Amsler's 
 Plauimeter. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 TO 01 H ED GEARING. 
 
 Classification of Gear Wheels. 
 
 The relative position of the axes of gear wheels governs their 
 general form, although not to so great an extent as in the case 
 of friction wheels. This is due to the fact that the geometric 
 shapes, which in the case of friction wheels form the actual 
 surfaces, are only theoretically used in the case of gear wheels 
 as forms upon which to design the teeth. 
 
 Gear wheels for parallel axes are called spur gears ; their form 
 is based on the cylinder. Wheels for inclined intersecting axes 
 are based upon cones, and are termed conical gears, or more 
 commonly bevel gears. For inclined, non-intersecting axes, the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 base form is the hyperboloid, which name is also given to the 
 gears. For many applications of inclined axes the teeth are 
 made spiral, giving the various forms of spiral gears and worm 
 gears. 
 
 If the motion is to be transmitted at a uniform rate, the base 
 figures are solids of revolution (cylinders, cones, hyperboloids) ; 
 the wheels themselves being round, while if the motion is not 
 to be transmitted uniformly the outlines will be irregular. In 
 the following discussion onl}' round gear wheels will be con- 
 sidered. 
 
 A. THE CONSTRUCTION OF SPUR TEETH. 
 
 Fig. 569. 
 
 In spur gear teeth we also have, Fig. 569, the length /, the 
 breadth on face b, the tooth thickness d, the pitch being indi- 
 cated by t, the two latter being measured on the curve of the 
 pitch circle. 
 
 All the teeth in one and the same wheel are made of the same 
 thickness and same spjicing, so that any tooth will fit into any 
 space.' It follows from this that, the spaces being made of 
 suitable size to receive the teeth, that the inverse ratio of the 
 number of revolutions « and n-^ of a pair of wheels is equal to the 
 direct ratio of the respective numbers of teeth Z, and Z^, or : 
 
 ^-^ (186) 
 
 This statement is equally true for circular and non-circular 
 wheels. It also holds good if the thickness of the teeth is dif- 
 ferent at different portions of the circumference, providing only 
 that care is taken that the spaces in the smaller gear come 
 around to meet their proper teeth each revolution. If, there- 
 fore, under these conditions we have the number of teeth given 
 for any case, we may consider the above relation as tlie funda- 
 mental formula of the transuiission of motion by toothed gear- 
 ing. This is rather to be considered as an inevitable principle 
 of construction rather than a fine geometrical distinction. It 
 depends upon the primitive form of gear construction which has 
 been in use for centuries in the Orient, where no other care is 
 taken in the proportioning of gears except that they are large 
 enough and that the pin teeth are sufficiently strong. 
 
 No general principle can be laid down for the form of the 
 flanks of teeth. For round wheels, the ratio of the angular 
 velocities, i. e., that of the differentials of the simultaneous 
 
 Accuracy in spacing is of especial importance in the change 
 gears of a lathe, as any error in a gear produces a corresponding 
 defect in the screw which is being cut. Such defects are still 
 more apparent if the lathe is used for cutting spiral gears (see 
 ^221, below). The smooth motion which such spiral gears are 
 intended to produce may thus be p'-eventedby irregular cutting. 
 The choice of tooth outline to be adopted, either for the entire 
 product of an establishment, or for any class of work, can only 
 be made after a careful consideration of all the conditions upon 
 which so much depends. These considerations will be taken 
 up and discussed in the following sections : 
 
 General Considerations. 
 
 The form of gear teeth may be so chosen that all gears of the 
 same pitch will work together. Wheels of this sort are called 
 interchangeable, while wheels which are not so made will run 
 only in pairs. 
 
 In each pair of round wheels there are two circles, struck 
 from the centres of the wheels, which have at each moment the 
 same linear velocity, and are called in general the ratio circles. 
 The particular ratio circles for a pair of spur gear wheels are 
 called their pitch circles. Upon these circumferences are laid 
 out the pitch divisions, /. e., the spacings from centre to centre 
 of the teeth. 
 
 The teeth themselves are prismatic in shape, the base of the 
 prism being the outline of the tooth. The portion of the tooth 
 which projects be3'ond the pitch cylinder is called the point of 
 the tooth, and that portion within the pitch cylinder is the base. 
 The surfaces of the point are called the faces of the tooth, and 
 the surfaces of the base, the flanks. 
 
 Pitch Radius. Circumferentiai, Division. 
 For any pitch t, and number of teeth Z for a round wheel we 
 have for the radius R of the pitch circle : 
 
 -^ = — =o.i59i6Z (187) 
 
 which gives, according to formula (1S6) 
 
 f =1'^ • ■ • • • (188) 
 
 The radius obtained from formula (187) is never a whole num- 
 ber, because tt is an irrational number, so that R will always 
 contain a fraction if the pitch is a whole number. The follow- 
 ing table will facilitate the computation in such cases. If the 
 irrational feature is to be kept out of the value of R, the length 
 of the pitch divisions must not be made whole numbers, but 
 fractions or multiples of tt, and this method is used in many es- 
 tablishments. If we call the pitch = t, we have under this plan s 
 
 ^ = 1(1) (.8,) 
 
 This corresponds to the so-called " diametrical pitch " system 
 of England and America. 
 
 Example. Suppose a wheel of 24 teeth and a pitch of 6 X 3.14 millimetres, 
 we have according to (187), for the radius R, of its pitch circle, R = — X6= 
 72 mm, and if we have in English units a pitch of tV X 3-14 for a wheel of 30 
 teeth, we have according to (1S9), /? = -^ X 3 = ^ = 2^ 
 
 A convenient instrument in this connection is a circumfer- 
 ence scale. This consists of a prismatic rule of wood or metal 
 upon which, for the metric system, a length of 314 millimetres 
 is laid off, and on a parallel line the same distance is divided 
 into 100 equal parts. Corresponding points on the two scales 
 will then have to each other the ratio i : t. This scale is also 
 useful for the rectification of circles and circular arcs. Similar 
 scales may be prepared upon sixteenths, tenths or any subdivi- 
 sion of the inch. 
 
 In the following discussion both methods will be used, namely : 
 that in which the pitch is taken in rational numbers, thus mak- 
 ing the radius irrational ; and that in which the pitch is made 
 rational in units of the circumference scale, and hence the radius 
 becomes rational. The following table is not to be confouiided 
 with that of Donkin, * made according to the expression, 
 
 \^) 
 
 which gives the radius of the circumscribing circle of a regular 
 polygon of Z sides, each having a length equal to t. This latter 
 radius differs from the radius R above referred to for small 
 values of Z, and confusion in this respect has given rise to 
 
 ? 202. 
 
 Table c 
 
 - Pitch Circles. 
 
 depends. 
 
 The form of the teeth is of great importance. Especially ne- 
 cessary is it that the division of the pitch shall be accurately 
 made ; errors in the shape of the flanks are even less injurious 
 than errors in the dividing. Accurate spacing can only be ac- 
 complished by the use of suitable gear-cutting machinery, and 
 such machines are now in general use.* 
 
 * The machines most extensively in use in Germany are those of the Ber- 
 lin Anhalt Maschinenfabrik, in Berlin, and the Maschinenbauanstalt of 
 Briegleb, Hansen & Co., in Gotha. 
 
 Examples in the use of the following table. (Note. This 
 table was calculated for use with the metric system, in which 
 the pitch is generally taken in millimetres. It may, however, 
 be used equally well in English units, by taking the pitch in 
 sixteenths, in order to make the divisions sufficiently small.) 
 
 Example i A wheel of 63 teeth, and i|" pitch is to be made ; required, the 
 radius of the pitch circle. The pitch is here 30 sixteenths, and ws hav« at 
 the intersection of the columns for 60 and 3, the number 10.03, hence R = 
 10.03 X ^ = 10.03 X 30 = 300.9 sixteenths or 18.8" giving a diameter of 37.6''. 
 
 The table may ako be used to determine the number of teeth 
 when the pitch is chosen and the radius given. 
 
 ■ See Salzenburg's Vortage, p 93, and others. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 129 
 
 Example 2. Given a wheel of 40 inches radius and 1.6" pitch. This gives 
 • — = -°- =. 25. The nearest value to this in the table is 24.99I; at the inter- 
 section of 150, and 7, and hence 157 is the number of teeth. 
 
 Wlien fie radius and number of teeth are given the table 
 
 may be used to find the pitch. 
 
 Examj,le-i. Give: 
 tion of 50 and 4, the 
 
 We find in the table at the intersec- 
 We then have t = ~= 1.83". 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 0.318 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 0.637 
 
 S 
 0.796 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 1-273 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 0.00 
 
 0-159 
 
 0.477 
 
 0.955 
 
 1. 114 
 
 1-432 
 
 lO 
 
 1-59 
 
 1-75 
 
 1.91 
 
 2.07 
 
 2.23 
 
 2-39 
 
 2.55 
 
 2.71 
 
 2.86 
 
 3-02 
 
 20 
 
 3-i8 
 
 3-34 
 
 3-50 
 
 3-66 
 
 3-S2 
 
 3-98 
 
 4.14 
 
 4-30 
 
 4.46 
 
 4.62 
 
 30 
 
 4-77 
 
 4-93 
 
 5-09 
 
 5-25 
 
 5-41 
 
 5-57 
 
 5-73 
 
 5-89 
 
 6.05 
 
 6.21 
 
 40 
 
 6.37 
 
 6-53 
 
 6.68 
 
 6.84 
 
 7.00 
 
 7.16 
 
 7-32 
 
 7-48 
 
 7-64 
 
 7.80 
 
 50 
 
 7.96 
 
 8.12 
 
 8.28 
 
 8-44 
 
 8-59 
 
 8.75 
 
 8.91 
 
 9.07 
 
 9-23 
 
 9-39 
 
 60 
 
 9-55 
 
 .9-71 
 
 9.87 
 
 10.03 
 
 
 10.35 
 
 10.50 
 
 10.66 
 
 10.82 
 
 10.98 
 
 70 
 
 II. 14 
 
 11.30 
 
 11.46 
 
 11.62 
 
 1178 
 
 11.94 
 
 12.10 
 
 12.25 
 
 12.41 
 
 12-57 
 
 80 
 
 12.73 
 
 12.89 
 
 13.05 
 
 13.21 
 
 13-37 
 
 13.53 
 
 .3.69 
 
 13-85 
 
 14.01 
 
 14.16 
 
 90 
 
 14-32 
 
 14.48 
 
 14.64 
 
 14.S0 
 
 14.96 
 
 15.12 
 
 15.28 
 
 15-44 
 
 15-60 
 
 15-76 
 
 100 
 
 15.92 
 
 16.07 
 
 16.23 
 
 16.39 
 
 16.55 
 
 16.71 
 
 16.87 
 
 17.03 
 
 17.19 
 
 17-35 
 
 no 
 
 17-51 
 
 17.67 
 
 17.83 
 
 17.98 
 
 18.14 
 
 18.30 
 
 18.46 
 
 18.62 
 
 18.78 
 
 18.94 
 
 120 
 
 19.10 
 
 19.26 
 
 19.42 
 
 19.58 
 
 19.73 
 
 19.89 
 
 20.05 
 
 20.21 
 
 20.37 
 
 20.53 
 
 130 
 
 20.69 
 
 20.85 
 
 21.01 
 
 21.17 
 
 21-33 
 
 21.49 
 
 21.65 
 
 21.80 
 
 21.96 
 
 
 140 
 
 22.28 
 
 22.44 
 
 22.60 
 
 22.76 
 
 22.92 
 
 23.08 
 
 23.24 
 
 23.40 
 
 23-55 
 
 23.71 
 
 ISO 
 
 23-87 
 
 24.03 
 
 24.19 
 
 24-35 
 
 24-51 
 
 24.67 
 
 24.83 
 
 24.99 
 
 25-15 
 
 25.31 
 
 160 
 
 25-46 
 
 25.62 
 
 25.78 
 
 25-94 
 
 26.10 
 
 26.26 
 
 26.42 
 
 26.58 
 
 26.74 
 
 26.90 
 
 170 
 
 27.06 
 
 27.21 
 
 27.37 
 
 27-53 
 
 27.69 
 
 27-85 
 
 28.01 
 
 28.17 
 
 28-33 
 
 28.49 
 
 180 
 
 28.65 
 
 28.81 
 
 28.97 
 
 29.13 
 
 29.28 
 
 29-44 
 
 29.60 
 
 29.76 
 
 29.92 
 
 30.08 
 
 190 
 
 30.24 
 
 30.40 
 
 30.56 
 
 30.72 
 
 10.88 
 
 31.04 
 
 31-19 
 
 31.35 
 
 31-51 
 
 31.67 
 
 200 
 
 31-83 
 
 31-99 
 
 32.15 
 
 32-31 
 
 32-47 
 
 32-63 
 
 32-79 
 
 32.9s 
 
 33-10 
 
 33-26 
 
 210 
 
 33-42 
 
 33-58 
 
 33.74 
 
 33-90 
 
 34.06 
 
 34.22 
 
 34-38 
 
 34.54 
 
 34-70 
 
 34-85 
 
 220 
 
 35-OI 
 
 35-17 
 
 35.33 
 
 35-49 
 
 35-65 
 
 35-81 
 
 35-97 
 
 36.13 
 
 36.29 
 
 36-45 
 
 230 
 
 36.61 
 
 36.76 
 
 36.92 
 
 37-08 
 
 37-24 
 
 37-40 
 
 37-56 
 
 37-72 
 
 37.88 
 
 38.04 
 
 240 
 
 38.20 
 
 38-36 
 
 38.51 
 
 38-67 
 
 38.83 
 
 38.99 
 
 39-15 
 
 39-31 
 
 39-47 
 
 39-63 
 
 250 
 
 39-79 
 
 39,95 
 
 40.11 
 
 40.27 
 
 40.42 
 
 40.58 
 
 40.74 
 
 40.90 
 
 41.06 
 
 41.22 
 
 260 
 
 41-38 
 
 41-54 
 
 41.70 
 
 41.86 
 
 42.02 
 
 42.18 
 
 42-34 
 
 42.49 
 
 42.65 
 
 42.81 
 
 270 
 
 42.97 
 
 43-13 
 
 43.29 
 
 43.45 
 
 43.61 
 
 43.77 
 
 43-93 
 
 44.09 
 
 44-25 
 
 44.40 
 
 280 
 
 44-56 
 
 44.72 
 
 44.88 
 
 45.04 
 
 45.20 
 
 45.36 
 
 45-52 
 
 45-68 
 
 45.84 
 
 46.00 
 
 290 
 
 46,15 
 
 46-31 
 
 46.47 
 
 46.63 
 
 46-79 
 
 46.95 
 
 47-11 
 
 47-27 
 
 47-43 
 
 47-59 
 
 Genbrai, Solution of Tooth Outi<ines. 
 
 In a pair of gear wheels, the two tooth outlines which work 
 together lie in a section at right angles to the axes of the wheels 
 and in the plane of this section the construction and action of 
 the teeth is to be considered. The so-called general solution of 
 tooth outlines is that by which, if a form of tooth be given for 
 one wheel, the proper form of tooth for the other wheel may be 
 drawn so that the motion will be transmitted with a uniform 
 velocity ratio. Several such solutions will be given. 
 
 I. The Author's First Solution. Fig. 570. Given the tooth 
 
 profile a S b c, also the pitch circle T, of the wheel O, and the 
 pitch circle T^ of the wheel O^ ; required the tooth curve a^ S 
 for the wheel O-^. 
 
 Place the given curve so that the point S, where it crosses the 
 pitch circle, lies on the line joining the centres O O^, thus mak- 
 ing 5', a point common to both profiles. In order to find a 
 second point a^, which shall work in contact with a point a, 
 
 draw a i normal to the given curve at a, make the arc ^ i^ = 
 arc S I, and the distance i s^^ S i', and S Si = 1^ i. Then 
 with S as a centre strike an arc with a radius 5'i a, and from i', 
 an arc with a radius 1 a, and the intersection of these arcs will 
 be the desired point aj of the required curve. For such points 
 as <r, where the normal to the curve does not intersect the 
 pitch circle the given pitch circles cannot be used, therefore if 
 these points are required the pitch circles must be transposed 
 (exaggerated in the figure). The curve thus found sometimes 
 assumes an impracticable form without being geometrically 
 incorrect. 
 
 II. Abridged Solution. {Poncelei.) Fig. 571. Mark off oti 
 
 the pitch circle T-^, the points jj, i^, u^v^ , which 
 
 roll into contact with points s, t, u, v, . . . . of the given 
 
 circle T, draw from s^, /„ «,, &c., arcs with radii respectively 
 equal in length to the normals to the given tooth outline va, u 
 c, etc., then will a curve drawn tangent to these arcs be the re- 
 quired outline. The points s, i, u, v, should be taken close to- 
 gether. If the lengths of the normals va, icc, etc., are taken 
 backward from the points s^, /j, ?/,, &c., instead of forward, the 
 outline for an internal gear tooth will be obtained for the wheel 
 Ox T^. 
 
 Fig. 572. 
 
 Fig. 573. 
 
 III. The Author's Second Solution. Fig. 572. The tooth out- 
 line a b c S d e is given, and its pitch circle T, also the pitch 
 circle T. Draw the normals aj,b 2,cz, Si.c., also draw from O, 
 as a centre, arcs through a, b, c, &c., and make 6'I = ai, 6' 11 = 
 b2,S 111 = ^3, &c., and draw the curve I, II, III, 5, IV, V, &c. ; 
 this curve will be the path of the point of contact of the teeth, 
 and may be called the Line of Action. 
 
 IV. Theoretical Profile of the Flank. Fig. 573. In order to 
 obtain the necessary strength it is frequently desirable to make 
 the root of the tooth as thick as can be done without interfering 
 with the path of the face of the corresponding tooth of the other 
 gear. This path may be determined in the following manner. 
 'L&laSb be the profile of the tooth for the wheel T, ff , 5, b^ that 
 for the wheel T^, a^ a^ the prolongation of the flank outline for 
 the latter tooth, and I 5" II the line of action between the limits 
 of the outside diameter circles K and K^. I,ay off from S, on 
 both pitch circles the corresponding spaces S i, i 2, 2 3, &c., .S 
 x' , \' 2' , 2' 3', &c. Take in the dividers successively S a, 1 a, 2 
 a, 3 a, &c., and describe arcs from i', 2', 3', &c., and the envel- 
 ope of these arcs will give the path a a^ g, or so-called theoreti- 
 cal profile of the flank. The actual profile of the flank a^f is 
 drawn tangent to the theoretical curve, to the point where it 
 crosses the clearance circle F^. The theoretical curve is a pro- 
 longed or abridged cycloidal curve (see I 205). In the figure, in 
 which 7" is a straight line, or rack, the curve is an abridged 
 evolute. 
 
 § 204. 
 The Action oe Gear Teeth. 
 
 In solution III, of the preceding section, reference was made 
 to the line of action * of a pair of gear wheels, and this line 
 bears au important relation to the theory of the action of gear 
 wheels. 
 
 The line of action intersects the pitch circle at the same point 
 as the tooth profile and cuts the latter at right angles, so that 
 the tangent ^V^Vof the line of action (Fig. 572) is normal to the 
 tooth profile. Each point of action corresponds to a point of 
 contact of the teeth and also to a point of contact of each of the 
 pitch circles ; so that, for example, the point II of the line of ac- 
 tion corresponds to the point 2 on T, and 2' on T' . That por- 
 tion of the pitch circle between the pitch point of the line of 
 
 it discussed in Moll & Reuleaux's " Konstruktionslehre fiir den Ma- 
 
I30 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 actiou aud the iuitial poiut of contact is called the rolling arc 
 for the given poiut. For example 5 2 is the rolling arc on T, 
 for the poiut II, aud S 2' on. T^, for the same poiut. 
 
 The sum of the rolling arcs between the two extreme points 
 (arc I 5+ 55, or arc I' i-+ 55') is called the arc of actiou, 
 and its length indicates the duration of the actiou of the given 
 pair of teeth, which is easily determined graphicalh-. It depends 
 upon the length of that portion of the line of action which it is 
 •desired to use. This is usuall\- taken between the limits of the 
 circles of the outside and the base of the teeth, which gives in 
 Fig. 572 the line of actiou VI. 
 
 For au}^ wheel of given tooth outline and pitch diameter there 
 is but one line of actiou, aud for a given line of action but one 
 tooth profile. This latter can only be determined from the Hue 
 of actiou when the roUmg arcs for the pitch point of the Hue of 
 actiou are also given. 
 
 For c^-cloidal teeth the rolling arc is also the line of actiou 
 and for this reason the geometrical discussion is much simpli- 
 fied. In order that a pair of gear wheels should work properly 
 together, their lines of actiou should correspond and their roll- 
 ing arcs be of equal length for homologous points of actiou. 
 B\' conforming to these conditions an}- number of gear wheels 
 may be made to operate with a given wheel. Such wheels are 
 said to be interchangeable or series wheels, since the common 
 line of action is symmetrically disposed on each side of the pitch 
 circle, as well as on each side of a radial line passing through 
 its pitch point. 
 
 The ray drawn from the pitch point through any point on the 
 line of action (as SI, in Fig. 572) gives the direction of the 
 pressure between the teeth for that point. 
 
 The Cycloidal Curves. 
 
 For the generation of tooth outlines for gears to be used in- 
 terchangeably in series, the cj-cloidal curves or those produced 
 by rolling circles are the best. When one circle rolls upon 
 another in the same plane without sliding, each point in any 
 radius describes a curve which is called either a commou, ex- 
 tended or abridged cycloid, according as the point is situated 
 on the circumference of the circle, or on a radial line without or 
 within the circumference. 
 
 The stationary circle is the base circle of the curve, and its 
 radius will be here indicated by R ; and the radius of the rolling 
 circle by r. If we consider either radius negative when it lies 
 within the other circle, and negative when it lies without, we 
 may distinguish the five kinds of cycloidal curves whose radii 
 have the relation R, and r, in the following manner : 
 
 Base Circle. 
 
 Rolling Circle. Corresponding Cui 
 
 + i? 
 
 + r 
 
 Epicycloid. 
 
 + '-^^ 
 
 + r 
 
 OrthocTcloid.'' 
 
 -R 
 
 4- r 
 
 Hypocvcloid. 
 
 + R 
 
 
 Evolute of circle. 
 
 -\-R 
 
 — '' 
 
 Pericycloid. 
 
 The following properties are common to all five curves: 
 
 1. The normal to any element of the ctirve passes through the 
 corresponding point 0/ contact of the generating and base circles. 
 
 2. The centre of curvature of any element of the curve is at 
 the intersection of the normal with a right line ivhich joins the 
 starting point of the curve zvith the centre of the base circle. 
 For the extended, or abridged cycloidal curves the starting point 
 is taken on the radius prolonged of the curve element, at right 
 angles to a normal to the curve at the point of contact of the 
 rolling circles. 
 
 Upon the first property depends the suitability of the cycloidal 
 curves for use as tooth outlines, and in the second lies the prac- 
 ticabilitj- of approximating them by circular arcs. 
 
 §2C6. 
 
 The Gexeratiox of Cycloidai, Curves. 
 
 I. Exact Solution. Fig. 574. (7 is the base circle, [f'the roll- 
 ing circle, A the starting point of the curve. Lay off from A, 
 on G and W, small arcs of uniform spacing, and let a, and a-^ 
 be two of the corresponding points of division. From A, with 
 radius a, «„ strike an arc, and from a, with the chord A a^, 
 another arc, and the intersection of the two arcs at P, will be a 
 point in the curve. 
 
 This solution, which is shown iu Fig. 574, both for external 
 and internal rolling, holds good for all five curves. 
 
 Fig. 575. 
 
 IT. Abridged Solution. From the points i, 2, 3, . . . a, with 
 radii equal to the corresponding chords of the rolling circle, 
 strike arcs, which arcs will include the entire curve with sufii- 
 cient accuracy if the points of di\-ision be taken sufiiciently 
 close together. 
 
 In order to draw the extended or abridged cur\'e, starting saj' 
 at B, determine first a point/", on the ordinar}- cur^-e, then draw 
 from a, with a radius a^ B, an arc, and from T", another with 
 radius A B, and the two arcs will intersect in a point O, of the 
 curve. 
 
 Or, draw through a^ a radius a^ b in the rolling circle and 
 through b, an arc d C concentric with the base circle, and make 
 a, Oi = Ab, then will O^ be the point in the curve for the roll- 
 iiig'of the arc A a^ upon A a,. 
 
 The Gexeratiox of In: 
 
 axgeable Teeth. 
 
 The tooth profile for interchangeable gears is generated in a 
 similar manner, both for external and internal gears, bj^ using a 
 rolling circle of constant diameter for each pitch. 
 
 I. External Teeth, Fig. 575. Given the number of teeth ^, 
 
 t 
 
 Zt 
 
 cycloid because the lat 
 
 nd pitch /, or ratio — of the wheel. Make O S = R = — — - 
 
 = — zf — 1, and the radius ;-o of the rolling circle /f'= 0.875^ 
 2 \ - J 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 131 
 
 or =^ 2.75 — ; draw the outside circle of the teeth K, with a ra- 
 dius = i? + 0.3 /, and the inside circle F, with radius = R — 
 
 0.4 t, and make the thickness of tooth =~t. ArcSb = arc ab\ 
 
 40 
 arc S c= arc i c. S a, the face curve, is generated by the roll- 
 ing of IV upon 1 ; S i, the flank curve, by the rolling of W in 
 T. For pinions of eleven teeth, 5" i becomes a straight line and 
 radial. Pinions with as few as seven teeth can be made to work 
 on this system, for although the flanks are undercut, they are 
 still within the limits of the theoretical dank profile (see § 203, 
 and Fig. 573, where a seven tooth pinion is shown with a rack 
 tooth). The backlash is -jV /. 
 
 II. Internal Teeth. Fig. 576. The generation of internal 
 teeth is similar to the preceding. The radius of base circle is 
 — R, and the length of tooth above and below the pitch circle 
 
 is 0.3 t, and 0.4/, as before ; r^ = 0.S75 t=2.75 — , and the thick- 
 ness of tooth = 
 
 40 
 
 ^ t. The flank .S" « is generated by rolling JV 
 
 upon T, and the face Si, by rolling [F inside of 7. 
 
 In the case of a rack J?=cc, S a and 5" / then become similar 
 portions of the common orthocycloid (see Fig. 573)- 
 
 In teeth of this form the line of action coincides with the 
 roiling circles, the portion included being = arc b a -{- the cor- 
 responding arc bi «i of the opposing wheel, when both_ar£ ex- 
 ternal gears, and -}- the arc c i for an internal gear working with 
 a spur gear. The duration of action e, varies between i .22 and 
 1.60. 
 
 ?208. 
 
 Tooth Outlines of Circular Arcs. 
 Instead of using the exact tooth outlines as generated by the 
 rolling circles, two circular arcs may be used as a close approx- 
 imation (see § 205). 
 
 -V = °-45 - 
 
 . 2Zd 
 
 (0^ 
 
 The plus sign gives the radius C B, for the face {pa) and the 
 minus sign gives the flank radius Q B-^, {pi). The flank should 
 be joined to the bottom of the space by a small circular fillet. 
 
 Example 2.— Given Z = 
 
 hence the flanks are straight radial lines. 
 Example 3.— Given Z=i,t = 2". We have : 
 
 The negative sign indicates the undercut flank. This is shown in Fig. 373 
 
 It is better to use the exact method given in | 207, for wheels 
 with fewer than fifteen teeth, as the approximation becomes less 
 accurate for the lower numbers. 
 
 EvoLUTE Teeth for Interchangeable Gears. 
 Gear teeth may be given the evolute form, which curve is d 
 veloped by unwrapping a line from a base circle, which is co 
 centric with, and bears a definite relation to the pitch circle. 
 
 Fig. 578. 
 
 Exterjial and Internal Teeth. Fig. 578 and Fig. 579. Given 
 the number of teeth Z, and pitch t, or ratio — for the required 
 
 Fig. 577. 
 
 Fig. 577. Draw the pitch circle T, and outer and inner circles 
 A" and F, as before, also the centres 31 and 31^ of the rolling 
 circles fFand W-^, which latter are in contact with each other 
 and with the pitch circle at S. Draw the diameters B 31 D and 
 B^ 31^ Di in such manner that the angle B 31 S = angle Bj^ 31^ 
 Si= 30°, join B and B^ with the prolonged line Q B S B^, and 
 draw through £> and D^ the lines O D and O D^Q; then will 
 the intersections at C and (Tj with B^ C S C^ be the required 
 centres of curvature for the arcs a B b, and c B^ i. 
 
 Through Cand C^ draw circles with (^ as a centre, and on 
 these circles the centres for all the teeth will be found, the arc 
 a B b being struck from C, and c B^ i from C,. 
 
 The radii of curvature p may be calculated from the following 
 onnula : 
 
 wheel. Make O S = R ^ ~—=—Z [—\ and draw the 
 2^ 2 \^ ) 
 
 outer and inner circles, giving the distancesy^ 0.4 t, k = 0.3 t 
 above and below the pitch circle, also make the thickness of the 
 
 tooth = ^ A 
 40 
 Draw the line N S A\ at an angle of 75° with O S, and it will 
 
 be tangent to the base circle G, the radius of which = r = 0.966 
 
 R = 0. 154 Z t, ^ 0.483 Z( — J. If now we unwrap the line 3/ 
 
 S upon the circle G, from 5' outward to a, and inward to g; the 
 path a So- of the point S will be the required tooth outline, 
 which for wheels of fewer than 55 teeth may be prolonged by a 
 radial line to reach the bottom circle. 
 
 The line of action is the straight line iVTVj ; and extends from 
 S b to S bi on the other gear, or in the internal gear to 6" c. To 
 determine the duration of contact e the pitch t can be carried to 
 
132 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the base circle b}- drawing radii, and the length measured. 
 For two equal wheels of 14 teeth, e is only a little greater than 
 unity ; it varies between i and 2.5. 
 
 Rack Teeth. Fig. 5S0. The profile a .S ? is straight and makes 
 an angle of 75° with the pitch line T. The angle 75° can readily 
 be laid off by using the drawing triangles of 45° and 30° to- 
 gether. 
 
 For low numbered pinions the base circle closely approaches 
 the pitch circle. This sometimes introduces an error into the 
 
 Fig. 582. 
 
 Fig. 583. 
 
 faces to both gears, but wheels made on this system are not in- 
 terchangeable, and are therefore not practical for general ma- 
 chine construction. Such teeth are still much used by watch- 
 makers on account of the ease with which they may be fitted 
 by filing. 
 
 If the diameter of the rolling circle is made greater than the 
 radius of the pitch circle a form of tooth is obtained which is 
 practicable, but which is comparatively little used. 
 
 If, in a single pair of wheels, the rolling circle be taken for 
 one wheel equal to the pitch circle, of the other wheel, we obtain 
 for the teeth of the wheel upon which the rolling is done, an 
 outline of cycloidal form, while the teeth of the other wheel be- 
 come mere points. In practice these points are the centres 
 about which pins are described and such gears are called pin- 
 tooth gears. 
 
 External Pin-tooth Gearing. Fig. 582. The pins are circular 
 
 in section and in diameter equal to — t ; the tooth profile for 
 
 40 
 the wheel R^ is then a curve parallel to the path 5" a, described 
 by rolling the circle T'on T^ The arc S b = ab, and circles of 
 the diameter of the pin, struck from successive points of the 
 path 6" a, will outline the tooth profile c d, the flank d i being a 
 
 circular quadrant. The curve of action 5" / is limited by the 
 outer circle A'/ at /, and is in all cases greater than /, generally 
 not less than i.i A This gives the limit of tooth length k/ and 
 also determines /c^. If it is desired to construct the actual line 
 of action, the method of case III, ^ 203, may be employed. 
 Fig- 583 shows a pinion of six pins g(!aring into a wheel of 
 
 24 teeth. The diameter of the pins is here made = — The 
 
 3 
 flanks of the 24 tooth wheel are made radial with square cor- 
 ners in order to permit ready filing and finishing. 
 
 Fig. 581. 
 
 action. If the portion S B, of the line N N^, which lies be- 
 tween the pitch and base circles. Fig. 581, is shorter than the 
 length of face of the opposing tooth, the point a will interfere 
 •with the flank of the pinion tooth, as shown in the path afg. 
 (See also Fig. 573.) In order to avoid this, the tooth to which 
 the point a belongs must not extend above the line K' K' . 
 
 This exists for teeth made in the manner given, when Z^zS. 
 Another method of avoiding this difiiculty is to round off the 
 tooth at a, and this is more frequently adopted in practice. An 
 important application of evolute teeth is shown in \ 222. 
 
 §210. 
 Pin Teeth. 
 Teeth with radial flanks can always be generated by making 
 the inner rolling circle for each wheel equal in diameter to one- 
 half the pitch circle. This will give radial flanks and curved 
 
 Fig. 584. 
 
 Fig. 585.. 
 
 Internal Pin-tooth Gearing. Fig. 584. This is similar to the 
 preceding. The tooth profile c d\.sa. parallel to the curve ^ /, 
 generated by rolling 7" in T^, the arc S b = i b. S lis the line 
 of action and is made equal to, or greater than i.i t. The flank 
 d a is made radial. 
 
 In Fig. 5S5 the pinion is made with the pin teeth and the spur 
 teeth are on the internal gear. The profile c d is parallel to the 
 curve S a, generated by rolling T^upon T; the arc S b = a b, 
 S I is the line of action, as above, and is made equal to, or 
 greater than i.i t ; the flank d i is made radial. 
 
 If in Fig. 584 we make the radius A"; infinitely great, we ob- 
 tain a rack, and the tooth profile is a curve parallel to the com- 
 mon cycloid. If we make R, in Fig. 585, infinitely great, we 
 obtain a common form of rack, with pin teeth. 
 
 Pin teeth have the practical advantage that they may readily 
 be turned in the lathe. They are especially adapted for situa- 
 tions where they are exposed to the weather, as in sluices, swing 
 bridges, wind-mills, etc. In such cases the pins are often made 
 of round bar iron, without being turned. 
 
 Fig. 586. 
 
 Double Pin Gearing. Fig. 586. If two gears on this system 
 are run together, one gear may be made with very few teeth, 
 and hence a great difference in velocity ratio obtained, with a 
 minimum distance between centres. In this- case_ both pitch 
 circles become rolling circles. 5 a, the pinion face, is generated 
 by rolling 7^ on 7", the action extending on 5 / for the point 5 
 on the wheel T. S a^, the gear tooth face, is generated by roll- 
 ing 7"on Ti, the action extending on the line 5//. for the point 
 S, on the wheel Tj. 5 i, the flank profile, is made to conform 
 to the theoretical profile Saig^ (see case IV, § 203), and the 
 other flank is made in a similar manner from the theoretical 
 profile Sag. Such gears are sometimes used in hoisting ma- 
 chinery. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Disc Wheels with Pin Teeth. 
 It is not an essential requirement that the tooth profile shall 
 be in the immediate line of the pitch circles, as it can be placed 
 within or without to a greater or less extent. In such cases a 
 tooth sj^stem is obtained in which the teeth of one wheel pass 
 almost "or entirely around those of the other wheel, and hence 
 there can be no so-called bottom circle to the latter teeth. Such 
 wheels are so constructed that the teeth are placed upon the 
 side or face of a disc, or shield, and are called disc wheels, or 
 "shield gearing." * 
 
 Such gear wheels have been described more than once,* but 
 are rarely used ; they are well adapted to transmit motion to the 
 hands of large tower clocks. 
 
 Fig. 587. 
 
 Fig. 58S. 
 
 For such wheels pin teeth are well adapted. Fig. 587 shows 
 a pair of such wheels arranged for external action, and Fig. 588 
 for internal action. One wheel of each pair is fitted with round 
 pin teeth, and the other has, in the first case, a tooth profile 
 parallel to an extended epicycloid, and in the second case par- 
 allel to an extended hypocycloid. 
 
 A peculiar form of disc gearing is shown in Fig. 589. In this 
 case R = % J?^, Z = 2, Zj = 4. the round pins being on J?. The 
 flanks of J?^ are entirely within the pitch circle, and become 
 straight lines parallel to the straight line hypocycloid 5 /. The 
 arc of action is about 2 i, and the backlash can be reduced al- 
 most to zero, the teeth on J? being made as rollers. 
 
 Mixed Tooth Outlines. Thumb Teeth. 
 
 By combining the preceding forms of teeth, practical shapes 
 may often be made for special service. The two following ex- 
 amples will illustrate : 
 
 Mixed Outline. Fig. 593. For the low numbered pinions 
 sometimes used in hoisting machinery, it is important that the 
 
 If the distance between centres C Ci of a pair of wheels for 
 internal action remains constant, and the radius is increased, 
 they will overlap entirelj', and the pitch circles will cease to ap- 
 pear as an element in the construction. The wheels will have 
 equal angular velocitj' and revolve in the same direction. 
 
 ■ Such a pair of disc wheels is shown in Fig. 590." Both wheels 
 are made with pin roller teeth, the sum of the pin radii being 
 equal to the distance O (9,. The pins are shown of equal diam- 
 eters, although they may be unequal, as shown in the dotted 
 lines. Such wheels may be called Parallel Gears, as two radii 
 which are parallel in one position remain parallel at all times.f 
 A second form of parallel gears is shown in Fig. 591. The 
 curve a 6 f is a circular arc, of radius d a, which includes four 
 segments of the lenticular shaped pins for the wheel O^. 
 
 _ If the pair of parallel gears of Fig. 590 are placed on opposite 
 sides of an axis A A^ normal to two adjoining pins and parallel 
 to O Cj, the action of the wheels will be correct. In Fig. 592 is 
 shown such a pair of right angle wheels. 
 
 * Called Scudi Dentatixn Zonca's Teatro di Machine, Padua, 1621. 
 t This form of gearing was described and named by the author in Berlin 
 Verhaudlung, 1875, p. 294. 
 
 Fig. 592. 
 
 pinion teeth shall not be too mu.ch undercut, so as to avoid dif- 
 ficulty in making the gears. It is desirable that the flanks on 
 the pinion should be radial. In order to obtain sufiicient dura- 
 tion of action, which for a three tooth pinion should not be less 
 than 1. 15 t, the face curves of the teeth should be prolonged 
 
 Fig. 593- 
 
 until they intersect. The curve .5* « is an arc of an evolute 
 formed by unwrapping the pitch line Zi from the circle T; S i 
 is the radial flank, obtained by rolling the circle f^ of radius = 
 Yz R'wi. T ; S a^ gj^ is the theoretical profile for the tooth space 
 for the wheel T. 
 
 S a acts with the point 5" of the rack tooth over the path S//. 
 S a^is Si cycloidal curve generated by rolling JV on Zi, and acts 
 over the path 6* / with the flank 5 z of the wheel T. 
 
 3. 656. wii: 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The rack teeth are made straight ou the one side, as already 
 shown for rack teeth on the evolute S3-stetQ. Applications for 
 teeth of this form are given in \ 226. 
 
 Tooth Friction in Spur Gearing. 
 
 The friction of spur gear teeth is mainly dependent upon the 
 form of the tooth outline, and may be investigated by consider- 
 ing the form, extent and position of the line of action. In most 
 cases the friction is proportional to the duration of action t. A 
 coefficient, dependent upon the position of the line of action 
 may be determined from f, and may be taken = )/i, when the 
 arc of action is equally divided on both sides of the central po- 
 sition ; as in the case of epicycloidal teeth; and = i, when, as 
 in many cases, such as pin tooth gearing, the arc of action is 
 entirely on one side of the centre ; while for evolute teeth it 
 may be taken = %, that being about midway between the two 
 preceding forms. The tooth friction is also greatly dependent 
 upon the number of teeth in both wheels, being proportional to 
 their harmonic mean, and it diminishes rapidly as the number 
 of teeth is increased. 
 
 If we make the coefficient of friction =y"and take the num- 
 ber of teeth as Z, and Z^, we have for the percentage of loss/>»- 
 in tooth friction : 
 
 Fig. 594- 
 
 Thumb-shaped Teeth. By combining the evolute and epicy- 
 cloid, using the two curves for opposite sides of the same tooth 
 a profile of great strength is obtained. This form is of especial 
 service for heavy driving when the motion is constantly in the 
 same direction.* From the peculiar form these have been called 
 thumb-shaped teeth. The following proportions will be found 
 suitable for cases in ordinary practice. 
 
 Fig. 594. Spur Gearing with Thumb-shaped Teeth, a S i and 
 Ci 5 /i are profiles formed of epicycloidal curves, according to 
 
 the description in \ 207, in which r^ = 0.875 ^ or 2.75 
 
 a' S' i' and a/ 5/ i-^ are evolute curves developed from base 
 circles with radii r' = 0.8 R, and r/ ^= 0.8 7?j, giving an angle 
 of 53° (more accurately 53° 8'). For wheels of less than fifteen 
 teeth, as in the seven toothed pinion shown in Fig. 594, the 
 flanks must be modified as shown in \ 203, to avoid interference. 
 
 In Fig. 595 is shown a four-toothed pinion on this system, 
 •working with a rack. S a and 6" ?'i are made as before with r^ 
 = 0.875 t and 5 i and S a^ with r =z ^ R ; the evolute curves 
 being generated as before with an angle of 53°. 
 
 a, Epicycloidal Teeth, 
 b. Evolute Teeth, 
 c. Pin Teeth. '^ 
 
 Pr 
 
 lute Teeth. 
 Teeth. "^ 
 
 (19O 
 
 The value of the coefficient of friction y is in no case small, 
 even when the teeth are well lubricated, on account of the usual 
 high pressures ; a usual value may be taken, /^ 0.15, while for 
 new and dry wheels it reaches 0.20 to 0.25 and even higher. 
 
 The minus sign in the formula is to be used when one of the 
 wheels (ZJ is an internal gear. 
 
 -3.I4X0.IS 
 
 X 
 
 ^x- 
 
 T-"'=° 
 
 0824, 
 
 r about 814; per 
 
 . Epkyclo 
 
 da 
 
 Teeth. 
 
 z=z 
 
 1 = 40 
 
 e = i.44 and we 
 
 3.14X0.15 
 
 X 
 
 — X - 
 
 ii=o. 
 
 .169, 
 
 r about 1.7 per c 
 
 . Epkyclo 
 
 ■da 
 
 Teeth 
 
 Z=7 
 
 Zi = 
 
 - 60 (internal 
 
 A = 3i4> 
 
 0.1 
 
 sa-^y ^ 
 
 = 4.3 
 
 percent. 
 
 . Epkyclo 
 
 idal Teeth. 
 
 Z=7 
 
 ^1 = 
 
 «> (rack), e = I 
 
 tr = 
 
 3-1 
 
 4=01 
 
 (l-fo 
 
 1-37 
 
 = 4.6 per cent. 
 
 imple&. Evolute Teeth. Z^Z^^ 
 
 2. "We have from (191 b) : 
 ir double that in Examp. 2. 
 
 ♦This form of mixed outlin 
 revived by Gee in 1876 and us< 
 than here given, viz. 68°. 
 
 1851; 
 
 It will be seen that the tooth friction is least with epicycloidal 
 teeth and greatest for pin gearing ; evolute teeth being midway 
 between. 
 
 The wear upon gear teeth is affected by other considerations 
 besides that of the coefficient of friction, the pressure of the 
 teeth upon each other, and the relative rubbing movement of 
 various portions of the profile also entering into the problem. 
 The wear is therefore not constant for a constant pressure, and 
 it is an error to assume, as is sometimes done, that the form of 
 evolute teeth is unaltered by wear. These teeth usually show 
 the greatest proportional alteration by wear, since the flank of 
 the tooth below the pitch circle has a very much less rubbing 
 movement than the portion of the opposing tooth which rubs 
 against it and hence the wear is unequal. 
 
 * Approximately. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 135 
 
 The effect of this may frequently be observed in practice, 
 where the smaller of a pair oi evolute gear wheels will be no- 
 ticed to be worn into deep hollows below the pitch circle. 
 
 The conclusions given above about the percentage of loss may 
 also be determined geometrically in the following manner : 
 
 Take the two portions of the tooth profiles wh ich work together 
 and divide each by the chord of the corresponding portiofi of the 
 line of action, multiply each result by the ratio of the length of 
 its portion of the line of action to the entire length of the line 
 of action, and then multiply the sum of the two quotients by the 
 coefficient of friction. 
 
 The result will be the percentage of loss, pr. The chord re- 
 ferred to becomes the line of action itself in the case of evolute 
 teeth. This method serves also for pin teeth, and is very useful 
 for the designer, as the data can all be taken off the drawing 
 ■with the dividers. 
 
 Generai. Remarks on the Foregoing Methods. 
 
 Each of the preceding methods possesses its merits and dis- 
 advantages. 
 
 Epicycloidal Teeth. These possess the great advantage that 
 they will work together in any series with as few as seven teeth, 
 while for evolute teeth the lowest in series is 14 teeth, and in 
 no case fewer than 11. The loss from tooth friction is a mini- 
 mum with this form, and the wear less injurious to the shape of 
 the tooth. The minor objections which have been raised are 
 that the double curve increases the difficulty of construction, 
 and that any variation of the distance between centre causes im- 
 perfect action to follow. 
 
 Evolute Teeth. The advantages of this form are that the 
 simple shape is readily made and that any variation of the dis- 
 tance between centres does not affect the action. 
 
 Against these must be set the fact that for low numbered 
 pinions the flanks must be altered to avoid interference, or the 
 tops of the teeth must be taken off. The fact that the distance 
 between centres may vary is rather an objection in many cases, 
 as the arc of action is reduced, and in transmission of heavy 
 power the shocks upon the teeth are liable to be increased. 
 
 Evolute teeth are well suited for interchangeable gears, if low 
 numbered pinions are not required (30 teeth being the minimum), 
 and where but small power is to be transmitted they are excel- 
 lently adapted. For wheels which run only in pairs, and hence 
 for bevel gears, this form is excellent, since it is so readily made. 
 See I 222. 
 
 Pin tooth gearing and the mixed outlines are only used for 
 special work, such as in hoisting machinery and the like, and 
 in such cases the wheels are often made of wrought iron or steel. 
 
 Disc wheels have a very limited application, but in some spe- 
 cial forms of mechanism they are very useful, and will be dis- 
 cussed further. See Chapter XVIII. 
 
 If bevel gears are required to interchange (see \ ?oo) they 
 must not only be of the same pitch, but must also have the same 
 length of contact line, A S, Fig. 596. Since these conditions 
 are very infrequent, it follows that bevel gears are generally 
 only made to work in pairs. In practice it is found that a vari- 
 ation of less than 5 per cent, in the length of +he contact line 
 may be neglected. Gears of the same pitch and same angle of 
 
 Fig. 596. 
 
 axes, but with a small variation of contact line, are called 
 "bastard gears." A pair of right angled bevel gears of 80 and 
 45 teeth, might be altered in practice, if required, into bastard 
 gears of 80 (i ±0.05), i. e., 84 to 76 teeth, which would work 
 with the other gear of 45 teeth. 
 
 ? 216. 
 
 Construction Circles for BeveI/ Gears. 
 
 The geometrical figures which are formed by one cone rolling 
 upon another, require that both cones should have a common, 
 apex. The surface thus developed is called a spherical cycloid. 
 Of these there are five particular forms, as with the plane cy- 
 cloids, the latter being really those for a cone with an apex: 
 angle of 180°. The spherical cycloid is very similar in form to 
 the plane cycloid, as are also the corresponding evolutes ; the 
 branches of the curves assuming a zig-zag form.* 
 
 B. CONICAL GEAR WHEELS. 
 
 Generai, Considerations. 
 
 In the case of conical gear wheels, or as they are generally 
 termed, Bevel Gears, the working circles of a pair of gears which 
 run together, lie on the surfaces of a pair of cones, the apex of 
 each cone being at the intersection of the axes of rotation. In 
 such case the pitch circles are taken at the^ base circles of the 
 respective cones, as S D, and S E, Fig. 596. The length of the 
 teeth is measured on the supplementary cone, to each base cone, 
 SB being the supplementary cone for S D, and 5"Cthat for S 
 E, B C being at right angles to A S. The length of teeth is laid 
 off on SB and S C, and the width of face on S A ; the tooth 
 thickness being spaced off on the pitch circle and all the teeth 
 converging to the point A . 
 
 The respective radii S D and S E of the two cones are found 
 by dividing the angle a of the axes, in such a manner that the 
 perpendiculars S £> and SE let fall from S to the axes, bear the 
 same ratio to each other as do the numbers of teeth, or inverse- 
 ly as the number of revolutions ; thus S D : S E =: Z : Z^^ 
 7ij : n. There are, therefore, two solutions possible, according 
 as the pitch line S A is taken within the angle o, or in its sup- 
 plement ; or what is the same thing, according to which angle 
 is taken as the angle of the axes. The difference between the 
 two consists in the fact that for a constant direction of revolu- 
 tion of the driving shaft the driven gear revolves in one direc- 
 tion for the first solution and in the opposite direction for the 
 second solution. One of the solutions gives an internal gear, 
 when «i : « < cos a. 
 
 The use of the spherical cycloid for the formation of bevel gear 
 teeth would involve many difficulties. In order to construct 
 such teeth, it is therefore common to use the method (first de- 
 vised by Tredgold) of auxiliary circles, based upon the supple- 
 mentary cones, and enabling the teeth to be laid out in a simi- 
 lar manner to those of spur gears. The auxiliary circles for the 
 bevel gears J? and J?^, Fig. 597, are those of the spur gears hav- 
 ing the same pitch, their radii being respectively r and r-^, the 
 elements B S and CS of the supplementary cones. 
 
 For any given angle a between the axes, the radius r, and 
 number of teeth 3, for the auxiliary circle can be determined 
 
 21, 449, Reuleaux, Development of 
 
136 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 from the radii R aud R^, aud tooth numbers Z and Zj, by the 
 following formula : 
 
 s/R 
 
 + J? 
 
 ^4-2 
 
 ^7? 
 
 cos a 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 + ^ 
 
 cos a 
 
 
 _v'z 
 
 + ^1 
 
 ^ + 2 
 
 ZZ, 
 
 cos a 
 
 Z Zi + Z COS a 
 
 If the axes are at right angles, we have 
 
 r _\/R' + R{' s _\/ZM^' 
 
 ^KtT 
 
 Example.— P^ pair of bevel gears have 30 and 50 teeth, and an ar 
 axes a = 60° hence cos a = K, and we have for the auxiliary cit 
 tnnth ~nr • - 70 ^ ^°^ + 50= + 2 . 3° ■ 50 ■ 05 -v/ 49°° 
 
 gle between 
 cle of the 30 
 
 2.3, say 32. 
 
 ° ■ 50 + 30.0.5 13 
 For the 50 tooth gear we have also : ^i = 50 '^ — '^^ — - = 64. 
 
 From these numbers and the given pitch, the auxiliary circles 
 can be laid oflf and the teeth drawn. 
 
 Low tooth numbers are not available for bevel gears, since the 
 errors which are involved in the method of auxiliary circles be- 
 come disproportionately great. By using not fewer than 24 
 teeth for the bevel gear, a mininmm of 28 for the auxiliary cir- 
 cle is obtained, and the e volute system can be used to advant- 
 age. This form of tooth is best adapted for this purpose, on 
 account of its simplicity of form, notwithstanding the minor 
 defects which have already been noticed. 
 
 The loss from tooth friction in bevel gears is approximately 
 equal to that of their corresponding auxiliary gears. 
 
 The Plane Gear Wheel. 
 
 Internally toothed bevel gears are not used, on account of the 
 practical difficulties involved in their construction. There is, 
 however, an interesting form of gear wheel which lies interme- 
 diate between the external and internal forms. If the numeri- 
 cal ratio between a pair of bevel gears is ^ cos a, one of the so- 
 lutions for the base cone gives for the latter a plane surface, 6" 
 
 B, Fig. 598. 
 
 R^^ 
 R^~ 
 
 If the 
 
 from which, if for example a = 60°, we have 
 
 angular relation of the axes is given it follows that but one ve- 
 locity ratio can be obtained. This is determined from the angle 
 )'2, which is one-half the apex angle of the cone R^, and from 
 
 the ratio -— ? == sin y^- 
 
 It is sometimes very convenient to arrange a plane gear so 
 that it may work with both of a pair of bevel wheels. This is 
 shown in Fig. 599, in which the gears R^, R^ have the semi-apex 
 angles y.^, )'■>,, and have their axes at right angles. We then have : 
 
 -^ = tan 72 = cot 73, 
 
 from which we obtain the following values : 
 
 —'= tan 72=1: ^ i I I f 2 3 4 
 
 72 = 
 
 ^1 
 
 = 14° i8°3o' 26°4o' 36°5o' 45° 53°io' 63°2o^7i°3o 76° 
 
 = sin 72 = 0.242 0.317 0.449 0.600 0.707 0.800 0.894 0.9480.970 
 
 Either of the wheels i?2, R^, can beused with the plane gear 
 ^1 if the number of teeth have the ratio given by the value of 
 sin 72. Although this limits its application, yet the plane gear 
 is frequently found very useful for angular transmissions.* 
 
 C. HYPERBOLOIDAL GEAR WHEELS. 
 §218. 
 
 Base Figures for Hyperboloidae Wheels. 
 
 Hyperboloidal wheels are used to transmit motion between 
 
 inclined, non-intersecting axes. The figures upon which they 
 
 are based are hyperboloids of revolution having a common 
 
 generatrix. These may be determined in the following manner. 
 
 Fig. 600. 
 
 In Fig. 600 is given a projection normal to the line of shortest 
 distance between the two axes. The angle a is divided into two 
 parts ;3 aud /3i, in such a manner that the perpendiculars let fall 
 from any point A, of the line S A, upon the two axes, shall be 
 inversely proportional to the revolutions of the gears. S A \& 
 then the contact line of the hyperboloids ; A B = R' and A C 
 
 The so called "Universal Gears" of Prof. Beylich, introduced in 1866, 
 )uld be considered as a variety of conical gears in which the angle of the 
 ;s may be conveniently varied. These may be used for axes of angles 
 
 Fig. 599- 
 
 The supplementary cone in this case becomes a cylinder, and 
 the radius of the construction circle becomes infinitely great, 
 hence the tooth outlines are similar to those used for rack teeth. 
 If the evolute system is used the teeth are very simple, and the 
 plane ge^r in some cases becomes a very convenient form of 
 construction . 
 
 As already stated, the ratio is 
 
 (193) 
 
 varying from 0° to 180°. As shown in the illustration, these wheels are 
 formed of globoids of the III Class (see §224), the meridians forming the 
 teeth and spaces. They have found but limited application. A model of 
 these gears is in the kinematic cabinet of the Royal Technical High School. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ■= R\, are projections of the radii of the hyperboloids intersect- 
 ing at A. We have 
 
 _ sin^ _«, 
 sin ft n 
 
 (194) 
 
 . The actual radii R and R^ are 
 the radii SD = r, and 5 ^ = : 
 For the latter we have : 
 
 yet to be determined, £ 
 \ of the gorge circles. 
 
 _tan_^ 
 
 tan /37" 
 
 - + cos a 
 
 ' (195) 
 
 that is, r and rj have the same relation to each other as the por- 
 tions A /^and A G oi a. perpendicular to the line of contact. 
 If we call the shortest perpendicular distance between the axes 
 = a, we have : 
 
 'v--i^' 
 
 -(?)' 
 
 R == VR' ■' 
 
 (197) 
 
 R^ = \/R\' + r,' ) 
 
 R' and^/ being determined as above, when the distance S A 
 = / is given. For the angles /? and ^-^ we have the general ex- 
 pressions ; 
 
 tan ft = 
 
 As in the case of bevel gears, two solutions are possible ac- 
 cording as the angle «, or its supplement, is taken in determin- 
 ing the line of contact 6" A, Fig. 601. The choice of solution 
 
 Fig. 601. 
 
 governs the direction of rotation of the driven gear, and one of 
 the solutions renders it practicable to make an internal gear ; 
 although this construction has been little used, and has but little 
 practical value. 
 
 If the angle of the axes a = c)o" we have 
 
 — ==tan2/3=C^)' (199) 
 
 137 
 
 (200) 
 
 tan/?= -\ 
 
 In the construction of the wheels, corresponding zones are 
 chosen on the two hyperboloids. If the distance between the 
 axes is small, the zones lying in the gorge circles are generally 
 unsuitable, but when the distance is greater they may be used 
 and the figures approximated by truncated cones. 
 
 . (196) 
 
 The radii R and R^ are hypotenuses for the triangles whose 
 sides are R' and r, R/ and r^ (see the left of the figure) or : 
 
 , ^ = M, (see Example : 
 We have ^, = M, 
 
 Example 2. 
 
 ^^o-~ 
 
 .766 
 
 - = o. 
 
 32393 
 
 = tan 
 
 13° 5', and 
 
 = 40° - /3 
 we have R 
 
 = 26° 55'. 
 = /sini3 
 >< 0.452634 
 
 i=;i 
 
 3Xo. 
 ';fin 
 
 .26368=1.8 
 lly 
 
 V (i.si) 
 
 + ( 
 
 1.256)2 
 
 = 2.2' 
 
 and 
 
 
 \/ (3.62)2+( 
 
 •744)2 
 
 = 4.54 
 
 
 
 - -^ or 
 
 9 , 
 
 ave from ( 
 
 say 
 
 the number oft 
 
 eeth Z = 36 
 
 97): 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hf)- 
 
 
 - = 3 
 
 24, and from (200) 
 
 aX9= 
 
 52 -I-q2 
 
 = i 
 
 75 X 
 
 io5 
 
 5i=c 
 
 •573", 
 
 
 
 3.24 
 
 1 Fig. 602. According 
 
 For p, we have tan ;8 = -i- = 1.8, hence ^ = 6( 
 If we make R = 2", we have from (197) : 
 
 R' = s/ Rr--r-i = v/ 22-0.57 
 
 and hence R-^, according to (194) is = f R-^ = i.c 
 
 R^ = \/ 1.0632 + 0.1772 = 
 
 The appearance of such a pair of gears is sh 
 
 to the table in §202 the pitch for the larger gear is : i = = = 0.35", 
 
 and for the smaller gear /j = ' °^ = 0.339". 
 
 Example 3. a = 90°, -^ = i, j3 = 45°, »- = n. -^ = R\- In this case the hy. 
 perboloids become similar (see Example 4, I 221.) 
 
 Example 4. In the special case in which — = cos a., and the position ot 
 the contact Iftie, which is determined by jS, lies in the supplement to a, 'so 
 that -i = cos a, the base figures become, the one a normal cone and the 
 other a plane hyperboloid, see Fig. 603. This construction is similar to the 
 preceding forms of plane and bevel gears, and may be conveniently used to 
 work with a train of common bevel gears, although but few practical appli- 
 cations occur, partially owing to the fact that the prolonged axis of the bevel 
 
I3S 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 gear passes through the plane g* 
 obtain the plane gear. We have 
 
 n /3 = i v/ 3, 3 = 30°, tail 3i = «> . ^i = 9°°- 
 = ,t, A- -= R', R^ = >/ R\ + a^ = \/^'k^ +a2. 
 
 s a we obtain an hyperboloidal internal 
 
 If it is desired to approximate to the hyperboloidal zone by 
 the use of a conical surface, the apex must be determined. In 
 this case the generatrix S A \^ rotated about the axis ^5 until 
 A falls on the pointy of the circumference, when the new pro- 
 jection of the generatrix will pass through the apex M of the 
 
 The tooth friction of hyperboloidal gears is necessarily great. 
 This will be considered later, in connection with the speed of 
 the rubbing surfaces, which is similar to that of the spiral gears 
 which are tangent at the gorge circles (see ^ 220.) 
 
 D. SPIRAL GEARS. 
 I 220. 
 
 CylindricaIv Spirai, Gears. 
 Cylindrical spiral gears may be used in the same m?nner as 
 hyperboloidal gears for the transmission of motion between in- 
 clined axes, and in some cases possess advantages over the lat- 
 ter. There are a number of useful variations of spiral gears. 
 
 Fig. 603. 
 
 Rack teeth may also be constructed to work with hyperbo- 
 loidal gears. In this case the teeth of the rack are inclined 
 while the pinion becomes an ordinary cylindrical spur gear, 
 since in order to satisfy equation {195) with r-^= 00, the angle 
 /3 = c, and /3j ^ a, see Fig. 604. Applications of this construc- 
 tion may be found in various machine tools. 
 
 Teeth for HYPERBOi,oiDAt Gears. 
 The construction of the exact forms for the teeth of hyper- 
 boloidal gears is a very difficult operation, and in practice an 
 approximation is used similar to that employed for bevel gears. 
 The method adopted is to determine the supplementary cone to 
 the hyperboloid used, and as in the case of bevel gears, use the 
 corresponding construction circle. 
 
 Fig. 606. 
 
 In Fig. 606 is shown a pair of wheels, A and B, both with left 
 hand spirals and corresponding tooth profiles. The pitch angles 
 y and 7i are so chosen that at the point of contact the pitch cy- 
 linders have a common tangent, so that if a be the angle of in- 
 clination of the axes, /+ j-j + a^ 180°. If we indicate by v 
 and »i the circumferential velocity in the direction of the tan- 
 gent and normal. respectively, we have : 
 
 _sin}' ,„v,<^tnno "1 .ff sin y Z , 
 
 i = -_ — ~ = whence - 
 
 Fig. 605. 
 
 The apex H (V\g. 605) is determined by drawing A H per- 
 pendicular to the generatrix .5".^, which, as before, is taken 
 parallel to the plane of the drawing. The teeth will be formed 
 with sufficient accuracy if two construction hyperboloids are 
 taken with the same angle of contact as the base hyperboloids, 
 according to the conditions in (198) and (199), and the teeth are 
 formed on the surfaces, which are described by the edges of the 
 construction hyperboloids upon the base hyperboloids.* 
 
 * See Herrmann's Weisbach's Mechanics, II. ed., Ill, i, p. 418 et seg. 
 
 The normal pitches, l = t sin y, and Zj ^ if^ sin y^ must be equal 
 
 to each other, whence — ^- — ?. 
 
 A sm y 
 As indicated by the components of velocity v' and v-^', there 
 is an end long sliding action of the teeth upon each other, with 
 a velocity : 
 
 c''= z/-[- z/j' r=c (cot y + cot yj) (202) 
 
 This sliding consumes power and causes wear, and will be at 
 a minimum when v' and z/j ' aae equally great, that is when 
 
 with regard to the choice of y and y^ the conditions may be 
 so taken that the position of the coinciding tangents of the two 
 spirals shall be slightly before or slightly after the actual line of 
 contact, but as close as may be possible. This is similar to the 
 position of the line of contact of hyperboloidal gears {\ 218) 
 and may be stated as follows : 
 
 R 
 
 -f- cos a 
 
 cot y 
 
 
 cot y^ 
 
 -4- cos rt 
 
 sin a 
 
 
 (203) 
 
 (204) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 139 
 
 For a 
 
 = 90° -we have cot y = 
 
 Such spiral wheels, when 
 
 the teeth are well made, transmit motion very smoothly, but the 
 surface of working contact is very small. When the axes are 
 at right angles and the wheels the same size, it is often incon- 
 venient to use spiral gears on account of the large size required. 
 
 In many cases the worm is made a true spiral and the conse- 
 quent wear disregarded, but in more careful work the method 
 [b) is adopted and the worm wheel cut with a hob, which makes 
 the proper modification in the shape of the teeth. 
 
 The friction between the worm and teeth of the worm wheel 
 is very great, as the thread slides entirely across the teeth. We 
 have for the coefficient of friction _/, for the ratio between the 
 actual force P' and a force P acting at the same lever arm on 
 the screw, but free from frictioual resistance, approximately : 
 
 = 9 and from (204) 
 
 !+/• 
 
 T R 
 
 For/ = 
 
 .16 we have practically 
 
 (205) 
 
 R 
 
 It follows that to obtain the minimum of frictional loss, 
 
 must be made as small as practicable. 
 
 P' 
 Morin gives the rule R = ^ ^, which makes — ^ 4; Red- 
 
 P^ 
 tenbacher makes 7? = 1.6 /, whence --- = 2.6. If we mak« 
 
 objectionable features are of increasing importance and for example, — ^ 
 = 5, and -~ = 10, we get -^ = 25, and 100, and y about 114° and 5§°. The 
 difficulty of cutting the teeth on the lathe also increases, as may readily be 
 
 R = 
 
 
 can well be 
 
 Approximately Cyi^indricai, Spirai, Gears. 
 
 If, of the preceding conditions, only those of formulse (201) 
 and (203) are strictly observed, the difficulties of construction 
 are much reduced and at the same time satisfactory wheels ob- 
 tained. 
 
 Three methods may be employed : (a) a slight modification 
 from the correct spiral form may be given to both wheels, (d) 
 one gear may be made a true spiral, and the variation all thrown 
 
 made. In this case it will be seen that a higher efficiency than 
 50 per cent, cannot be obtained, and it is also apparent that the 
 worm must be the driver, since the resistance of friction would 
 just balance the reverse driving action. The ordinary tooth 
 friction and the journal friction must of course be added. 
 
 r^^.: '-E 
 
 Fig. 608. 
 
 into the other gear, or (c) the wear which is at first caused by 
 running the approximate forms together ma}' be disregarded 
 until the parts have worn themselves into smooth action. From 
 these reasons a widely varying practice in the construction of 
 spiral^ gears will be found. One of the most important applica 
 tions is that of the worm and worm wheel, Fig. 608. In this 
 case a = 90° and Z= i, the teeth of the wheel R^ being inclined 
 
 at an angle y, with the edge of ttie wheel, whence tan y = 
 
 Fig. 610. 
 
 Fig. 611. 
 
 Fig. 612. 
 
 The tooth outlines for both worm and wheel are the same as 
 for a rack and gear wheel, taken on a longitudinal section 
 through the axis of the worm. The evolute tooth is especially 
 applicable, and Z-^ must not be less than 28 (§ 209). The surface 
 of contact is theoretically only a mathematical point, but in 
 practice there is a small flattened surface of contact, and if a 
 larger surface is desired the wheel must be cut with a hob of the 
 same form as the worm which is to work with it. 
 
 Wheels which have a contact bearing of a point only, may be 
 called precision-gears, as distinguished from power-transmitting 
 gears. The difference, however, cannot be sharply maintained, 
 for as already shown, worm gearing is used for the transmission 
 of both large and small forces. 
 
 The possible variations of the pitch angle permit a great va- 
 riety of spiral gear combinations, as the following examples 
 show : 
 
 Example i. Given -^- = J, the perpendicular distance between axes a = 
 R -{- Ri, and the angle between axes a = 40°. If we make v = 60°, we have 
 frora(§22o)vi = i8o-4o-6o = 8o°(seeFig.6io),andfrom(2oi)^^ = ^'V]^"^ 
 = J. — : — ^g- = ^ --.^ = 0.5686, from which if and j?i may be readily 
 
 determined. Ifw 
 
 27tR 
 
 = 0.15916 -— . In the arrangement shown in Fig. 609, we have 
 
 a = 90 — 7 and the teeth on 7?i are made parallel to the axis. 
 
 The pitch of the screw is here made = — i — for a pitch t^ of the 
 
 cos y 
 wheel. The velocity ratio of transmission, according to the 
 fundamental formula (i86) is n^ : n ^= Z : Z^, or this case it 
 
 equals -1.* 
 
 The circumferential pitch t 
 
 he sliding velocity c', according to (20 
 
 ,.1763) = 0.7537. 
 
 '.xavtple 2. In order to make <:' a m 
 
 = r...,r= ^ X TT X r.333 X 0.9397 ^, 
 
 c (cot 60° -H cot 80°) = 
 lum, we may make v 
 >en have ^ = 4. A = 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 >,plej._ 
 
 If instead of a, the normal pitch r is given, as is generally the 
 case with hobbed worm wheels, we choose y and }'j and then 
 
 have R sin y = '—, whence : 
 
 sin }' =■ 
 
 277 J? 
 
 Fig. 613. 
 
 Fig. 614. 
 
 The following examples illustrate a variety of cases : 
 
 Example 4. a = 90°, Z = ^i- The sliding to be a minimum, hence 
 = ^ P ~ ^° = 450, The two -wheels are similar, both being left hand o 
 Fig. 613, both right hand. The sliding velocity is c' = 2 col 45° X <: = 
 
 Example 5. In the arrangement shown in Fig. 614 there is added 
 right angled pair A B.& third wheel C, also right angled, when the wheel; 
 A and Cwill revolve in opposite directions. The middle gear j5 
 
 the 
 
 Example 6. When a = o, the e 
 ■with spiral teeth is obtained, this lorm oemg ca 
 gearing, Fig. 615. y and yi together include 180°, and one gear is left, and 
 the other right hand. In this case the teeth are formed in true spirals. In 
 this case the sliding velocity c' = o. For the wear on this form of gear see 
 J222. When a. = o and y = o the wheels become spur gears. 
 
 ^mj:. 
 
 Fig. 616. If 71 = go° and the teeth normal, 
 of the rack correspond to the section of a 
 chine the rack teeth are placed at such an 
 just balances the opposing tooth friction. 
 
 E rample 8. 7? = 7?, = ». This ^ives tw< 
 
 Fig. 619. 
 
 00. This gives a rack and screw, 
 = 10° and a = 80°, and the teeth 
 jt. In the Sellers planing ma- 
 ingle that the lateral pressure 
 
 boring machinery for c; 
 
 cutting ma 
 
 similar 
 be transmitted from a revolving 
 
 Ex^ 
 Fig. 6 
 
 apparatus in which 
 piece. The velocity 
 
 Example 10. The worm, or endless screw, as already stated, is a form of 
 spiral gear wheel. These are two special forms of worm gear which although 
 seldom used, are of interest. There are the forms of internal gearing shown 
 in Figs 621 and 6'>2 In the former the \\orm wheel is the internal gear, 
 while the latter shows an internal worm with external or spur worm wheel. 
 
 R = — — — , ^1 = ^'- (206) 
 
 2 iT sin }' 2 TT siu Xi 
 
 Both J? and r may be given, when )' must be determined, and 
 we have : 
 
 ^207) 
 
 § 222. 
 
 Spirai< Gear Teeth and their Friction. 
 
 Spiral gears are cut in a similar manner to screws, the tool 
 
 being carried in the slide rest of an engine lathe, and set at the 
 
 proper angle. The pitch of the screw thread is : 
 
 s^=2Tr J? tan y, 
 
 and the travel of the rest is effected bj' proper change gears, 
 according to the selected values of >• and y^.* 
 
 The tooth outline to be used is determined according to the 
 radius of curvature of the supplementary spiral, that is, to that 
 at right angles to the spiral to be cut. The radii of curvature 
 r and r^ to be used are : 
 
 r=-^— r , ^1 = — r— ^ (208) 
 
 sin ^ y sin y^ 
 
 These give the radii for the construction circles to be used 
 with the pitch r ; the shape of the tool with which the teeth are 
 cut is then determined. 
 
 Example i. For the wheels of the first example in the preceding section , 
 
 If it is preferred to determine ;-, graphically from formula 
 (208) the method given in \. 29 maybe employed. 
 
 The frictional resistance of spiral gearing is often a matter of 
 much importance. If the frictional resistance is assumed to be 
 zero, we have for the relation of the force P applied to the driv- 
 ing wheel, to the force Q delivered by the driven wheel : 
 
 sin y 
 sin 7i 
 
 (209) 
 
 me forms of 
 
 The ordinary tooth friction, which is the same as that of the 
 construction gears (see \, 213) to which must be added the fric- 
 tion due to the sliding of the teeth, whenever a is greater than 
 zero. The value of the latter friction is governed by the sliding 
 velocity c' . For the calculation of the loss of useful effect we 
 may use the formula : 
 
 p;_sm^ ^"JL+il (.:o) 
 
 P siny sin (7,-0 ^ ^ 
 
 in which is the angle of friction for the coefficient y", whence 
 tan =■/■ For_/= 0.16 we have </> = 9°. 
 
 Example 2. For the wheels in the preceding example we have 
 /" _ sin 80° sin 69° _ 0.9848 X 0.9336 _ 
 'P " sin 60° sin 71° ■" 0.8660 X 0.9455 ~ ^■^^• 
 
 To this must be added the ordinary friction of the equivalent 
 spur gears. Another source of loss is that due to the lateral 
 forces K and A'j, acting in the direction of the axes. For these 
 we have 
 
 ^ears we have /r= P" cot 69° = 0.3839 j"', 
 :h values, in connection with the known 
 esponding resistances can be determined. 
 
 When a =<?, that is, for parallel axes, the sliding action of the 
 teeth is zero, and the value of P' in (210) is the same as P; 
 hence spiral gears for parallel axes work without the tooth fric- 
 tion due to lateral sliding, the ordinary tooth friction aL 
 maining, as well as the forces I\ and K^. 
 
 = cot (y + f), — = cot (yi — cp) . 
 
 (211) 
 
 Example 3. For the preceding 
 A'l = Q cot 71° = 0.3443 Q from wl 
 dimensions of thejournals the co 
 
 re- 
 
 ranging change gea 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 141 
 
 The tooth friction may be reduced to a very small amount by 
 reducing the bearing surface of the teeth of one gear to a point 
 of contact, or practically to a knife edge. Such gears (devised 
 by Hooke) are only of use for purposes of precision, but in some 
 cases are found serviceable.* 
 
 Fig. 623. 
 
 Fig. 624. 
 
 Instead of the edge bearing, a rounded surface may be used, 
 with its highest part corresponding to the lineal bearing as al- 
 ready shown by Hooke and by Willis. The tooth outlines for 
 both gears are determined as usual, and then one or both pro- 
 files are redrawn within the original curves. Fig. 623, and the 
 modified outlines used to form the tooth spiral ; teeth so con- 
 structed running nearly free from friction. In such cases the 
 length of flanky, and face k may be reduced as shown. Such 
 forms are more properly to be considered as screw thread pro- 
 files than as gear teeth. Willis has shown that in both gears 
 the flanks may be made radial and the crown of the teeth semi- 
 circular, Fig. 624. Since such teeth are weakest at the base, it 
 is preferable to use a modified form of the evolute tooth, Fig. 
 625. This may be approximated to by using a circular arc of 
 smaller radius than B S = R cos a, the centre B' being taken 
 on the normal N N, through the point of contact. 
 
 Fig. 625. 
 
 Fig. 626. 
 
 A similar form to the preceding gears is the so-called step- 
 gearing, Fig. 626, frequently used in planing machines (by 
 Shanks, Collier and others). The tooth profiles may be modi- 
 fied as above, to reduce friction, but the gradation s should be 
 as great or greater than the pitch i. Fewer than four sections 
 should not be used. 
 
 An objection to the use of spiral gears is the axial pressure 
 K, this, however, can be eliminated by the use of double gears 
 of opposite inclination. Such gears have been known for a 
 long time (White, 1808) and for moderate service, have been 
 frequently used, as in spinning machinery, tower clocks, etc., 
 and more recently they have been applied to heavy work, nota- 
 bly for rolling mill gearing, both in Germany and America. 
 
 The pinions used in rolling mill work are made with 9 to 16 
 teeth, with pitch diameters from 4.'' to 24'' and over. Evolute 
 teeth are used, with a base angle from 62 to 69°. The face length 
 of the teeth is made about 0.22 t. 
 
 If the evolute curve is accurately made, the tooth contact is 
 practically the same as with ordinary spur gears, and the surfa- 
 ces of contact can readily be discerned, extending diagonally 
 across the teeth. When such a surface of wear is visible, of 
 course the teeth are not free from friction. Fig. 627 shows a 
 cast steel pinion of ten teeth, for rolling mill service. This gear 
 is cast in one piece with its shaft and coupling ends, although in 
 many cases the shaft is made separately. 
 
 The space 5 between teeth at the middle of the gear, is called 
 in the Westphalian shops the "spring" of the teeth. If it is 
 desired to approximate to the frictionless action of the teeth, 
 this " spring " must be slightly greater than the pitch 
 
 Fig. 627. 
 
 For very large transmissions the gears may be made in two 
 parts. Fig. 628 shows a pair of such gears for a reversing roll- 
 ing mill by the Hagener Steel Works. The pitch diameter is 
 43.3'', the pitch 8^'', the face of each gear 20'', and the total 
 weight 24,200 pounds. The teeth are made with double reverse 
 angles on each gear, so that the conditions are the same when 
 running in either direction, and the whole is a masterpiece of 
 machine work in steel. 
 
 Spirai, Bevei, Gsars. 
 
 Spirally formed teeth are sometimes used on bevel gears, and 
 in this case the distance a, between the axes becomes zero, while 
 the angle a remains to be given. For the curvature of the teeth 
 it is best to use a conical spiral of constant pitch, the projection 
 of which on the base of the cone is an Archimedean spiral. 
 Frequent applications of such wheels are to be found in spinning 
 machinery, and they are operated successfully at quite high ve- 
 locities.* 
 
 * These gears have been used in physical apparatus by Breguet for speeds 
 xceeding 2000, or according to Haton, as high as 8000 revolutions per second 
 
 The same varieties may be made in bevel, as in spur gears, 
 and in Fig. 629 is shown a reverse spiral bevel gear of cast iron, 
 as made by Jackson & Co., at Manchester. Similar gears are 
 made of cast steel by AsthSver & Co., at Annen in Westphalia. 
 Stepped teeth are also used in bevel gears, and in Fig. 630 is 
 shown such a wheel by A. Fiat fils, of Paris. 
 
 truction of the teeth of spiral bevel 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The second class gives the iuclined globoid, Fig. 635, with 
 uns}-mmetrical couical sections, with regard to the equator, the 
 spiral being on the zone mantles. If (5 = £> we obtain a sym- 
 metrical, cylindrical hollow section of a sphere. Fig. 636. The 
 spiral, when a = o, becomes a spherical cycloid. If J = 90° the 
 figure becomes a plane cone, or plane ring, and the curve be- 
 comes a plane cycloid. 
 
 Globoid Spirai< Gears. 
 
 If a circle is revolved about an axis A A^ coinciding with one 
 of its diameters, and at the same time a radius C S Vs moved 
 about the centre C, with an angular velocity proportional to that 
 of the circle itself, the circle will generate a sphere and the 
 point of the radius which is at the surface of the sphere will 
 trace a form of spiral curve. This may be called a spherical 
 spiral,* and adjoining lines of the spiral on the same meridian 
 are equidistant. 
 
 Fig. 631. 
 
 Fig. 632. 
 
 If the radius C 6" passes the axis of rotation, the new spiral 
 will intersect the one previously traced, as at A^. Instead of a 
 mere radial line, may be substituted a point which at the same 
 time traces the outline of a tooth space, so that a spherical screw 
 thread is generated with which a spur gear will engage at any 
 point. Fig. 632. If the axes A and B are maintained in their 
 proper positions, the spiral when driven, will operate the gear 
 in the same manner as a worm and worm wheel, | 221. 
 
 The practical value of this especial form is extended by the 
 fact that the axis of rotation need not coincide with a diameter 
 of the circle. Under these conditions there may occur a num- 
 ber of forms of bodies of revolution bearing an affinity to the 
 sphere, and to which the writer has given the general name of 
 globoids. The corresponding spirals may be called globoid 
 spirals and the resulting gears, globoid spiral gear wheels. Many 
 of these may be made of practical use. (See Fig. 633.) 
 
 There are numerous forms of globoids according to the posi- 
 tion which the describing circle holds to the principal axis. The 
 axis about which the radius C S turns is called the counter-axis. 
 It stands at right angles to the starting position of the describ- 
 ing circle, and either intersects the principal axis, or is inclined 
 to it without cutting it. We have then r, for the radius of the 
 describing circle ; a the shortest distance between the axes A 
 and C, c the distance of the centre of the describing circle from 
 the plane of the principal axis, & the angle which the principal 
 axis makes with the plane of the describing circle, extending 
 from 0° to 90°. This gives four classes of globoids, as follows : 
 
 I. a =£7, c-=-o. 
 II. a = o, c chosen at will. 
 
 III. a chosen at will, c-=o. 
 
 IV. a and c chosen at will. 
 
 A right globoid is one in which d = o, and when ^ is an acute 
 angle we get an inclined globoid. 
 
 The first class is represented by the globoid Fig. 634, giving a 
 symmetrical conical section ; \i 6 = o we obtain the previously- 
 described sphere. 
 
 Fig. 633. 
 
 We have the third class when 6 = 0, and a~^r, giving a so- 
 called cylindrical ring, or right globoid ring. Fig. 637 a, and 
 when a < ;-, the apple shaped globoid. Fig. 637 b. 
 
 If (5 is an acute angle, the globoid is flattened. Fig. 638 ; the 
 globoid of Class I is the limiting case. The spiral curves are 
 globoidal cycloids, which become plane figures when & =^ 90°, 
 and the globoid becomes a plane ring or plane cone. 
 
 Fig. 634. 
 
 Fig. 635. 
 
 Fig. 636. 
 
 The fourth class gives the highest forms. Fig. 639, in which 
 & ^0, and we may have a'^ r, a = i\ or a < r. 
 
 The inclined globoids of this class have forms, the limits of 
 which are found in those of the second class. Fig. 635. If c5 =; 
 90° we have again the plane cone or plane ring.* 
 
 The practical applications of the globoid spiral gears are va- 
 ried, and are found mainly in right globoids of classes III and 
 
 * Two right globoid rings may unite to form a pair of machine elements 
 hen the thickness of one is made equal to the hole in the other, as in Fig. 
 The two parts then bear the relation to each other of journal and bear- 
 ig, and are similar to a ballpoint. Each of the two elements describes by 
 le relative motion of any point a corresponding path en the other member. 
 
 erl}' a spherical cjxloid, 1 
 
 :oids 
 
 is are approximately found in a pair of chain links. Such a 
 e considered as a contracted form of universal joint, ABC, 
 ; relative motion existing between A and C. The same thing 
 actional form in Fig. c, when some method of holding the 
 such as bands, etc., must be used. This latter resembles 
 and socket joints of the human skeleton. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 143 
 
 IV. In the valve geai' of Stephenson's locomotives, Fig. 640, is 
 found a globoid worm of class III, using the middle part of the 
 globoid apple, Fig. 637 b, [a <^ r). In this case the reversing 
 lever B is really a part of an internal gear with a radius A\ = 
 the radius r of the describing circle.* In this case the internal 
 gear has but a single tooth, although more might be used. 
 
 Fig. 637. 
 
 Fig. 638. 
 
 * The worm and internal worm-wheel, Fig. t 
 preceding case. 
 
 f This form is described b3' Smeaton as used 
 ley, see also Willis. Principles of INIechanisra, 
 
 An interesting modification is that of Hawkins, Fig. 642*, In 
 this case the wheel B is composed of friction rollers of quite 
 large size and the friction is thereby greatly reduced. Instead 
 of there being only four teeth, as would at first appear, there 
 is in reality an ideal number of teeth, a condition refeired to in 
 
 It will be seen that the globoid forms can be used as internal 
 gears. This is shown in Fig. 641, which represents a worm 
 formed as a globoid screw. Its form is practically the same as 
 that of the hole in the right globoid ring. Fig. 637 a. The sec- 
 tion shown in the figure is of such length that it includes one- 
 fourth of the entire circumference of the worm wheel B, al- 
 though it could be extended so as to include almost one-half. 
 
 Fig. 641. 
 
 the fundamental discussion in | 200. If for every revolution of 
 the globoid screw, one tooth of the wheel engages, there must 
 for each space formed between the rollers be 10 teeth to a quarter 
 revolution, so that instead of 4 teeth in B, there are 4 (i -{- 10) 
 = 44 teeth. 
 
 The most important point to be considered is the formation of 
 the teeth. J?-y is again made equal to r. Since the globoid is 
 used in the internal form, the two tooth profiles, on r and i?i , 
 fall together. The sliding is in the plane of a normal section 
 through B and A A^ and not endlong, and hence the shape of 
 the teeth is absolute. 
 
 \i / 
 
 Fig. 640. 
 
 (Internal gear tooth, with 7? = 7?i ). The teeth can be made 
 of straight profile in the worm wheel as well as in the worm.f 
 
 The production of the globoid worm iu the lathe is not diffi- 
 cult. This form has been frequeiitl3' used in recent work. The 
 advantages appear to be in the simple form of tooth and in the 
 completeness of the engagement. 
 
 Fig. 642. 
 
 The gearing used in Jensen's Winch, Fig. 643, belongs to the 
 globoid class IV, of the form shown in Fig. 639. Usually in 
 this form a = r, although sometimes a < r, as in Fig. 639 c. 
 R-^ is again made = ;', and the internal globoid form used. The 
 ratio is so chosen that a slow motion can be converted into a 
 
 fast one, as maj' also be done with the form shown in Fig. 641 
 if the pitch of the worm is made sufficiently great. The use of 
 rollers instead of teeth makes a verj' satisfactory construction.f 
 
144 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 If in the first two classes of globoids the supplementar}- axis 
 is removed au indefinite distance, the globoids become plane 
 surfaces, and the globoid screws thereby reach the limit. The 
 limiting case of Class III is the ordinary worm and worm -wheel, 
 and another form is Long's spiral gearing, which also belongs 
 to Class III ; a is chosen at will, c^^o, 6 = 0. The globoid be- 
 comes a plane cone and the globoid screw becomes an Archi- 
 median spiral. If R becomes indefinitely great we obtain a 
 disk with a spiral groove engaging with a rack, the middle sec- 
 tion having full tooth contact from top to bottom.* When this 
 is brought into Class IV, we obtain the Arch-imedian spiral in 
 its most general form, i.e., the evolute of a circle. 
 
 E. CALCULA riON OF FITCH AND FA CE OF GEARING. 
 
 Pitch ( 
 
 f Gear Wheels. Tooth Section. , 
 
 bt^ 
 
 (t) (4J 
 
 (212) 
 
 bt = 
 
 16.8-^ 
 
 This assumes that the resistance of the teeth is proportional 
 to their cross section, which is also equally true for those which 
 have the same ratio oi b to t to each other, a condition which is 
 often of much service in practice. 
 
 I 226. 
 Pitch and Face of Hoisting Gears. 
 For a hoisting gear of cast iron let : 
 
 {PR) = the statical moment of the driving force, 
 Z = the number of teeth, 
 
 R = its previously determined pitch radius, in inches, 
 i = the pitch, 
 we have for the given dimensions : 
 
 ,=„..3>/i-^/-L, 
 
 0.073 
 
 R 
 
 ^iPR)_ 
 ^ Z ' 
 
 — = 0.0145 V— ^^ 
 
 . (214) 
 . (215) 
 
 /== 0.045 V- 
 
 the face b being made 
 
 b^2t (216) 
 
 These are intended to give a fibre stress 5" of about 4200 
 pounds. The actual stress is properly somewhat less, because 
 the thickness of the tooth at the base is usually more than ^ t, 
 as assumed in (213). 
 
 Since the value of — -— is the same as the pressure P, we can 
 
 use (215) in cases in which /"only is given, as for rack teeth. 
 
 In discussing the preceding formulae, consideration must be 
 given to the elements which are usually given or selected in 
 practice. 
 
 Let t' and t be the pitch for two cases respectively, and Zand 
 Z/ the number of teeth. Also let 6* and .S"' be the stress at the 
 
 base of the teeth, and let the constant, 
 
 -(I) (4)' 
 
 in (213) is made equal to 16.8, be called C ox C \ we then have, 
 according to (214) : 
 
 t=: >J 2^C{PR) (~) 
 
 i ~ ^ C S'' Z' • • • • 
 
 and for the radii R and R^ : 
 
 R^ ^ ^il _ IfC^ 
 
 Zt 
 
 C S' 
 
 (217) 
 
 . (218) 
 
 The value of C depends upon the ratio of the teeth, and upon 
 the value of 6" for the material used. If we assume the latter to 
 be the same for both cases, the number of the teeth alone re- 
 mains to be considered. A reduction in the number of teeth 
 increases the pitch, accordi«g to (217) ; and according to (218) 
 reduces the radius. 
 
 The dimensions of gear wheels must, for the same pressure 
 on the teeth, be increased to meet shock in proportion to the 
 increase in initial velocity. For slow running gears this action 
 can be neglected. We may in this respect, therefore, divide 
 gears into two classes, viz. : 
 
 Hoisting Gears and Transmission Gears ; and includes under 
 the term hoisting gears all those having a linear velocity at the 
 pitch circle of not more than 100 feet per minute, and under 
 transmission gears all those running at a higher velocity. 
 
 For a pitch t, face b, length of teeth /, and base thickness of 
 tooth h, we have for a tooth pressure /"corresponding to a stress 
 S, the general formula : 
 
 2=11, Z' = 7, hence 
 y = 2/' =1.16 3. 
 
 -4 = \'S"=>/^ 
 
 ■ («3) " = ■ 
 
 Fig. 644. 
 
 The constant C, for a given series of gears, should be invari- 
 able, and for ordinary spur gears may be taken equal to 16.8, as 
 iu (213). For the so-called " thumb teeth," (^ 212), the constant 
 may be much smaller, and hence permit an important reduction 
 
 in dimensions. The value of -— for wheels of more than ten 
 
 teeth is not less than 0.7, and introducing this value we get C 
 = 8.4, that is G.s C; hence "thumb shaped " profiles are capable 
 of sustaining twice as great a load as the ordinary form. 
 
 If, for a giv( 
 _ _ _ . . _ ary form, wit 
 
 be reduced in the proporti 
 
 or about 0.8 times, with a proportional reduction in diameter and face. 
 
 If, however, the teeth are taken in the above ratio of 11 : 7, we would have 
 for the pitch. 
 
 and the radius J?' = 
 
 The influence of the stress .Sis always important, and it should 
 not be increased above the normal value for the given material, 
 which latter is usually cast iron. An increase of one-fourth in 
 the permissible stress would reduce the pitch and diameter only 
 ,which 7 per cent., but on the other hand it must be remembered that 
 too low a value of 5 causes an unnecessary increase in the size 
 and weight, not only of the gears but also of the bearings, frame 
 work and other parts of the machine. The value of .S" used 
 above, viz. : 4200 pounds, has been show in practice to give sat- 
 isfactory results, and there appears to be no good reason for any 
 great variation from it. 
 
 When the gears are made of wrought iron, as is sometimes 
 the case, S may be made much higher, and may indeed be taken 
 double, say 8400 pounds. This gives a reduction in /' in the 
 proportion of ^'^o.S = 0.79 /, 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Example 3. For comp: 
 thumb shaped outline, \v 
 we have : 
 
 ->/ 
 
 
 d^ = o.7^. 
 
 In Fig. 644 the five cases given iu the last three examples are 
 shown on the same scale, side by side. In order to indicate the 
 fact that the moment {PR) is the same iu all cases, the shaft 
 diameter has been shown. It will be apparent that there is no 
 definite relation between the diameter of the shaft and the ra- 
 dius of a gear. 
 
 The invariability of the moment, which has been maintained 
 in the preceding examples, does not exist of the tooth pressure 
 Pupon the driven gear is again transmitted through a second 
 so-called compound gear. If the pinion of a radius R, driving 
 a gear R' , compounds by a pinion R., on the same shaft into a 
 rack R2, for example, with a given pressure P, we have from 
 (214) 
 
 = Const. ■• 
 
 ]C_ PR^ 
 S' Z 
 
 
 {219) 
 
 This gives 
 
 ^ R, C S' \ Zl 
 But R^ = Z^t and R,^ = Z./ //, and from formula (215) : 
 
 Hence we get : 
 
 V _ ^^" 
 
 _ _z 
 
 s'' z; Z' 
 
 By selecting the number of teeth we may make 
 - and then obtain 
 
 z. 
 
 Jc s z/ 
 
 £th V 
 
 Z' 
 
 (220) 
 
 and for the radii : 
 
 Z ^ C' 5' ' 
 
 ■avtple i^. A rack with a tooth pressure .P, gearing with an 11 toothed 
 )n, is driven by a larger gear which again engages with an 11 toothed 
 )n. Fig. 645, the teeth being of the usual shape, and the material cast 
 
 n, and reducing 
 2, all teeth being 
 = 0.5 C, y = 2 5, 
 
 ight iron, thii 
 C 0.3 =0.387/ 
 
 , and K = 
 
 educe the dimen 
 a stress of 14,00 
 
 sions, steel is used 
 
 A if = 0.145 ^, 
 
 or about i J?. 
 
 This is to be replaced by making all parts of wrough 
 the number of teeth in the rack pinion to 4, as shown in 
 also altered to the thumb-shaped form. We then hav 
 and hence : i' = \/^ =%t, and R' = R fi \/'^ = 
 
 It will be noticed that in this case the ratio between the larger 
 gear and the pinion on the same shaft is such that in (217) and 
 (218) both are determined for the same moment {PR.) 
 
 _ Example 5. 
 f = t\/ 0.5: 
 
 The proportion of the results of the last two examples is 
 shown in Fig. 645. The force P on the teeth of the rack is the 
 same in all three cases. 
 
 The statical moment on the main shaft is, however, reduced 
 with the reduction in R', as is consequently that of the inter- 
 mediate shaft. 
 
 The advantages of steel as a material for gear wheels have al- 
 ready been referred to in I 222. Its greater strength enables 
 much lighter wheels to be used for the same service, than with 
 cast iron. For a gear of cast iron and of steel, to act against 
 the same moment, all other things being equal, we have, taking 
 
 5' = 14,000, and 5"= 4200 — , and also —^o.t, = about — in 
 
 favor of the steel. 
 
 This gives for the ratio of weight (%)', that is 0.3, the same as 
 the ratio of 5 to 5', or say three to one. This advantage also 
 exists for transmission gearing, although not to the same extent. 
 
 If the velocity ratio in a compound train is comparatively 
 great, it is interesting to note that the most advantageous ratio 
 
 : 9 and 1 
 
 : 10, this giving a mini- 
 
 Tabi^f; of Cast Iron Hoisting Gfars. 
 
 i 
 
 p {PR) 
 
 PR 
 Z 
 
 t 
 
 ^- R 
 
 {PR^ 
 Z 
 
 % 
 
 127 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 107 
 
 8.67 
 
 % 
 
 200 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 190 
 
 20.56 
 
 H 
 
 287 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 297 
 
 40.16 
 
 % 
 
 391 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 428 
 
 69.40 
 
 I 
 
 511 
 
 82 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 583 
 
 110.20 
 
 iX 
 
 798 
 
 160 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 761 
 
 164.50 
 
 ^% 
 
 H50 
 
 277 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 963 
 
 186.00 
 
 ^% 
 
 1564 
 
 440 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 1020 
 
 320.50 
 
 2 
 
 2044 
 
 658 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 1712 
 
 555.20 
 
 2K 
 
 3200 
 
 1284 
 
 ° 
 
 70 
 
 2330 
 
 881.70 
 
 Example i. A force of 100 pounds is exerted on a hand crank of 15 inches 
 radius ; what should be the pitch and face of a 10 toothed pinion for the fur- 
 ther transmission? 
 
 = 2 / = 214 inches. 
 )uld give a pitch of abc 
 
 = 150, and the 
 orresponds to ; 
 
 .'alue in the table 
 
 jnds on the teeth, 
 n the 4th and 5th 
 and the width of 
 
 Pitch and Face op Gearing for Transmission. 
 The fibre stress S, which is exert£d upon the teeth by the ac- 
 tion of a given force P, should be taken smaller for transmis- 
 sion gears as the circumferential velocity v increases, since the 
 
 *If(#> be the total ri 
 between each pair be 
 
 ind k the number of pairs of gcai 
 ~ we have <#> = x^ . The tc 
 
 id the ratio 
 of teeth 
 
 in the train, y = k{Z-\-Z') = kZ\\ + x). Now k -- 
 the number of teeth and the number of pairs givi 
 
 , and the product of 
 
 laking the differential coefficient equal to zero we 
 - which equation is satisfied by jc = 9.19 For example 
 , _ _iumber of teeth in smallest pinion = 7. We have the fol- 
 lowing combinations : 
 
 (a) (^ = 20 30, gives ^ = 7 (2 -f 20 -|- 30) = 364, yk = T2l>. 
 
 (3) ^ = 4.5.5.6, gives^ = 7(4-|-4 + 5H-S-t-6) = 168, yk = 672. 
 
 (c) .#> = 6.10. 10, gives >- = 7 (3 -t- 6 + 10 -I- 10) = 206,/^ = 609. 
 
 The last solution is the best, for although it requires more teeth than (5> 
 it has one less pair of gears, and for solution {a) the number of teeth, viz.: 
 210 is inconveniently great. 
 
146 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 dynamic action of shock and vibration also i 
 iron we may take : 
 
 9,600,000 
 
 in which v is the lineal velocity in feet per minute. For steel 
 ^may be taken y/i, times, and for wood {\ times the value thus 
 obtained. For cast iron we obtain, for : 
 
 5= - 
 
 (222) 
 
 5= 4240 I 406c 
 
 I 400 I 600 I 800 I 1000 I 1500 I 2000 I 2500 
 I 3744 I 3473 I 3238 I 3034 I 2620 | 2302 | 2068 
 
 5= 14, 1 12, 13, 520; 1 2, 467 1 1 1, 565 110,782, 10, 103 1 8725 1766516886 
 
 And for Wood : 
 
 5 = 2544 I 2436 I 2246 I 20S3 I 1943 i 1820 I 1572 I 1381 I 1240 
 
 Tlie velocitj' v may be obtained when n and R (the latter in 
 inches) are given, by the following formula : 
 
 -^ = ———— = °-5236 Rn (223) 
 
 The selection of a proper value for v will be discussed below. 
 
 It is also found that the breadth of face /5 should increase with 
 
 the increase of P. Tredgold states that the pressure per inch 
 
 P 
 
 of face, that is -7- should not exceed 400 pounds. This, how- 
 ever, is not to be followed implicitly, since pressures as high as 
 1400 pounds have been successfully used in practice. It is bet- 
 ter, however, to consider the question of wear from the product 
 
 P . . 
 
 of -r- into n, which should not exceed a predetermined maxi- 
 
 P 
 mum. It is found that if -;- x « exceeds 67,000 the wear be- 
 
 
 comes excessive. In a pair of wheels where the teeth of both 
 are made of iron, the greatest wear comes upon the teeth of the 
 smaller wheel. In this case we may make 
 
 = not more than 28,000 
 
 .... (224) 
 
 and if possible it should be taken at less than this value. For 
 smaller forces this constant, which we may call the co-efficient 
 of wear and designate as A, may readily be made as low as 
 12,000, and even 6,000, without obtaining inconvenient dimen- 
 sions. When the teeth are of wood and iron the wear upon the 
 iron may be neglected, as the wear comes almost entirely upon 
 the wooden teeth. For wooden teeth the value of ^ should not 
 exceed 28,000, and is better made about 15,000 to 20,000.* It is 
 impossible to give exact values in such constructions, and it 
 must be left to the judgment of the designer as to how far it 
 may be advisable to depart from the values obtained from exist- 
 ing examples. 
 
 It must be remembered that the different values of A do not 
 appreciably affect the strength, but rather control the rapidity 
 of wear. When sufficient space is available and a low value can 
 be given to the co-efficient of wear, it is advisable to do so ; if 
 this cannot be done, the coefficient which is selected will give 
 an indication of the proportional amount of wear which may be 
 expected. 
 
 In cases where a number of wheels gear into one other wheel, 
 it is better to take, instead of the number of revolutions of the 
 common wheel, the number of tooth contacts, that is the pro- 
 duct of the revolutions and number of wheels in the group. 
 
 If 7? is given , as is often the case with water-wheels, fly-wheels, 
 &c.. Pis also known, and since A can be chosen we have, tak- 
 ing iV to be the horse power transmitted : 
 
 63,000 iV 
 
 d^- 
 
 R 
 
 hence from (213) for ordinary teeth, 
 16.8 P _i6.^A_ 
 
 and for thumb shaped teeth, 
 
 8.4 P _ ?,.aA 
 
 If, however, as occurs in many cases, R is not previously de- 
 
 termined, the choice of the number of teeth Z is unrestricted. 
 In such cases we have for the width of face b : 
 
 * = ^r;^- <-) 
 
 If we give to A the successive values 30,000, 25,000, 20,000, 
 15,000, 10,000 and 5,000, we get the following numerical rela- 
 tions : 
 
 Common and Thumb Teeth. Common Teeth. Thumb Teeth. 
 
 2.1 ^ = 13.2 -„-,;/ = 
 
 ' R- 
 
 '54 
 
 11 S 
 420,000 
 
 ^ 210,000 I 
 
 Z/' 
 
 336^00 
 11 s 
 
 Pn N ^ N . 
 
 6 = - = 4-2 -F5- = 26.4— ; t 
 
 15,000 R Zt 
 
 ' R ■"'■ zr 
 
 Pn ^N N , 84,00c 42,c 
 
 For transmission gears the minimum number of teeth should 
 not be fewer than 20, in order that the unavoidable errors of 
 construction shall not cause excessive wear ; for quick-running 
 gears it is desirable to have still more teeth. The gear wheels 
 on high speed turbines seldom have fewer than 40, and often as 
 many as 80 teeth. When wood and iron, teeth are used, the 
 least wear is produced when the wooden teeth are on the driver, 
 because the action begins at the base of the tooth and passes 
 toward the point, while on the driven gear the action is reversed. 
 
 If desired a number of teeth Z can be calculated which will 
 give a desired ratio b : t. If we combine formulae (225) and (226) 
 we obtain the useful relation : 
 
 396^o_^ .l_S^N , ^^^g^ 
 
 .... ^^y 
 
 This shows the important influence of A upon Z, and the ef- 
 fect of the number of teeth upon the wear ; also the important 
 relation of the tooth profile, since the constant 16.8 (or for 
 thumb teeth 8.4) appears in the second power. It is also seen 
 that Z\s dependent on the square of w, and the square of S, 
 other things being constant. These points indicate the methods 
 of obtaining the least stress. 
 
 The value of- 
 
 s sometimes made a 
 
 faces and sometimes for narrower, the 
 of two adjoining parts. 
 
 great as 5 . For wider 
 1 of the gear is made 
 
 Example i.— A water wheel of 6. 
 Loving with a velocity at the cin 
 rovided with an internal gear i 
 idius than that of the water wh 
 lake 40 revolutions per minute. 
 
 horse power, 26 feet, 3 inches in diameter, 
 uraference of 256 feet per minute, is to be 
 'heel, the pitch circle being 16 inches less 
 
 on/ = 25^(15^5^^ = ,. 
 
 ■0 lbs. nearly. We will 
 
 = 8608 lbs. This gives a permissible strc 
 choose for the smaller wheel —j- = 25,' 
 
 ^"°'°°° = 2.56". We then have Z= ^~ 
 348 teeth the wheel may be divided into i: 
 the driven wheel we have -?i = — Z= — 
 
 Example 2.— A turbine water wheel of 100 horse power has a vertical shaft 
 making q6 revolutions per minute, and it is required to drive a horizontal 
 shaft at 144 revolutions, hence a pair of bevel gears are required. We will 
 select wooden and iron teeth, and let the wooden teeth be on the driver. We 
 will assume v to be between 1200 and 1400 feet per minute, which gives JS 
 io --- = 3. We then have from (228) Z = 
 = 70. We then have ^1 = -- .70 = 47; 
 
 segments of 29 teeth each. 
 X 348 = 27, whence /fj = ?^— ^ 
 
 >, and make A = 25,000, 
 962 X »6oo- X n 
 
 16. 82 X 25000^ 
 also I = ^!°'°°° = 2.73" say 25^", b = ■>, t = 81^", v = 1536 feet pei 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 147 
 
 gears ; 300 horse-power transmitted by each gear, makiug a 
 
 Pn 
 total of 600 horse-power. The value for — - — must therefore 
 
 be multiplied by 2 ; see last column of the table. 
 
 No. 3. This is from the air compressor for the atmospheric 
 
 railway of St. Gen 
 
 2 t, as intended. 
 Example 5.— Let 1 
 
 dlet4- 
 
 = 30, 
 
 n^ = 50 for 
 
 a pair 
 
 common 
 
 form, ar 
 
 = 2-- 
 
 . If we m 
 
 ake V = 
 
 ke^ = 
 
 5,000. This give 
 
 sfort 
 
 he driver g 
 
 ;ar: 
 
 
 Z 
 
 39^ 
 
 ,000 
 
 50" X 34 
 
 02x40 
 
 
 16.32 X 
 
 25,00 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 say 42 
 
 teeth, 
 
 and Zi = 
 
 |-^ = 7 
 
 e choose the thumb-.shaped teeth, and make — = 3-5 ■> 
 ^= o .-f^, ' o • r~. = "^ 
 
 say: 
 
 JO, and Z^ = 200. t' = 
 aller teeth, but large 
 
 50 X 3400 
 „ _ _ , „ ir radii than when the common form is 
 
 When steel is used for gear wheels, special proportions are obtained. It is 
 not too much to say that the value of the co-efficient of wear A should be 
 taken twice as great as for cast iron. The stress i', however, may be taken 
 354 times that permissible for cast iron. Taking these pointsi-' :j — 
 
 a (228) we see that A would reduce 
 and 5 would increase it by f \ , that is, about 
 
 . crease would be 
 laid down as a ru 
 
 umber of teeth by Yz, 
 times, so that the net in- 
 
 
 -g-, if the abo-v 
 e that steel gears 
 vice tnan cast iron gears. The ] 
 large, and in the case of double spi 
 times made as great as 7 or 8. If 1 
 stead of the usual shape, the 
 value obtained for the pitch is that for the no 
 width of face is the actual width, as b, in Fig. 
 Example 6. — Suppose the wheels given in 
 double spiral teeth of steel. We take A = 56, 
 We then get ; 
 
 accepted. It may therefore be 
 lould have more teeth for the same ser- 
 io of face to pitch may be made quite 
 I gears (as Fig. 627) the ratio ^ is some- 
 formula for thumb teeth be used, 
 satisfactory 
 
 -mal pitch t 
 
 11 Fig. 6 
 
 iults. The 
 ,t the 
 
 ny, t 
 
 mple 5 to be made 
 md— =6, also 5=] 
 
 with 
 
 8.42 X 56000 
 We have t 
 
 50- > 
 
 12,800! 
 
 If we take Zi = 84, we get Z = 140 and o = 4}i"- If 5- = 60" we have 
 
 i = '^ = 2:2± =o8-.i" 
 sin 60 0.866 ■ =* • 
 
 We may take / fe= 0.875", which gives t = 0.866 X 0.875 = 0.757" and 
 
 i 4.5 
 
 — • = -^^ = 5.93, or nearly 6. 
 
 We have then finally J?i = 11.6", R = 19.47". 
 
 1 (now abandoned.) — - — is evidently too 
 
 high, as would probably have become apparent had the gears 
 continued in operation. 
 
 keeps the value of — - — within reasonable limits. 
 
 Nos. 5 and 6. These are from the great water wheel at Green ock. 
 
 The pressure at the rim is great, but the teeth have worn well 
 
 in practice, as might have been predicted from the moderate 
 
 values of — 
 
 The value of the 
 
 latter is almost the same for 
 should be about the same for 
 
 ?229. 
 
 Examples and Comments. 
 The following examples taken from actual practice will be of 
 interest : (see Table on following page). 
 
 No. I. From the driving gear of the main steam engine of 
 Fleming's Spinning and Weaving Mill in Bombay. The toothed 
 fly-wheel is the driver, and the teeth are shrouded, as shown in 
 Fig. 651. The coeificient of wear for the driven gear seems high, 
 and does not indicate long endurance. 
 
 No. 2. A toothed fly wheel engaging with a pair of equal spur 
 
 No. 6 as for No. 5, hence the v 
 both gears. 
 
 No. 7. The teeth in the smaller gear are thinner than those of 
 the large fly-wheel, hence the two values for S. Probably the 
 larger wheel was originally made with wooden teeth. 
 
 Fn 
 No. 9. Notwithstanding the high pressure the value of - 
 
 is reasonably small. The stress upon the teeth is quite high, as 
 is also the case with No. 4, and lower stresses are to be recom- 
 mended. 
 
 No. 10. This is one of the most noteworthy examples of the 
 whole collection, on account of the very slight wear exhibited. 
 The wooden teeth on the large wheel, (the fly-wheel of the 
 steam engiue of the Kelvindale Paper Mill at Glasgow) ran for 
 26>^ years, for 20 hours per day, with a wear upon the teeth, 
 measured at the pitch circle, of only about % inch. For the 
 first half of this time the engine indicated 84 horse-power, at 38 
 revolutions. The teeth were lubricated twice a week with talc 
 and graphite. The long endurance is doubtless partially due to 
 the great care which the teeth received, they having been cut upon 
 the wheel in place, but also to the moderate co-efiicient of wear. 
 
 No. II. The teeth were found too small in practice, as is indi- 
 cated by the stress of 3000 pounds ; from formula (222) we ob- 
 tain 5"= 1734 pounds. 
 
 No. 12. Two gears with wooden teeth engage with a single 
 pinion on the screw propeller shaft. The teeth are in two sets 
 of 414^ width of face each. 
 
 No. 13. Very high pressure, which must appear in the wear 
 upon the teeth ; apparently it should be difficult to keep them 
 
 P 
 in good condition, owing to the high value of -—. 
 
 No. 15. These teeth appear weak, as has been shown by re- 
 peated breakages. The wear must be rapid, as indicated by the 
 
 P71 
 high value of — - — . 
 
 No. 17. These gears, (designed by Fairbairn) were intended 
 ultimately to transmit double the power at first given, in which 
 case the stress would reach over 4000 pounds, which is admissible 
 
 P7i 
 
 but the value of — 7 — would then become rather too high to in- 
 dicate very great endurance. 
 
 Pn 
 No. 20. The value of — , — seems too high for the wooden. 
 
 
 teeth ; it is almost too great also for the iron teeth, and it must 
 be remembered that with wooden and iron teeth, the wear comes 
 almost entirely upon the wooden teeth. 
 
 No. 22. These gears are from an establishment which has used 
 hyperboloidal gears with much success for power transmission. 
 The angle of the axes is 90°. The use of wooden teeth upon the 
 driver is to be criticised, as tending to increase the liability to 
 
 k the dimensions of gear wheels. 
 
 The Rim. 
 The ring of metal upon which the teeth of a gear wheel are 
 placed is called the rim. For cast iron spur gears, the thickness 
 of the rim is given by the formula 
 
 S=o.i,t -Y 0.12s" (229) 
 
148 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 EXAIVIPLES OF TKANSMISSIO^^T GEAKIKG. 
 
 No. 
 
 N 
 
 
 R 
 
 Z 
 
 t 
 
 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 p 
 
 s 
 
 p 
 
 b 
 
 Pn 
 b 
 
 ^,390 
 66,970 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1 
 
 lOOO 
 
 36.67 
 1 14.8 
 
 38.^ 
 
 144 
 46 
 
 5.25 
 
 24 
 
 2300 
 
 14,000 
 
 1877 
 
 583 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Steam Engine. 
 
 2 
 
 300 
 
 100 
 
 37 
 
 230 
 
 58 
 
 4.00 
 
 14 
 
 1900 
 
 5,100 
 
 I6I4 
 
 364 
 
 2 X9107 
 36,400 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 270 
 
 60 
 
 .9.6 
 98 
 
 19 
 95 
 
 6.25 
 
 20.6 
 
 616 
 
 14,300 
 
 1848 
 
 694 
 
 41,650 
 8,330 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 
 240 
 
 11^ 
 44 
 
 ~iT 
 
 208 
 68 
 
 3.125 
 
 16 
 
 766 
 
 10,200 
 
 3270 
 
 639 
 
 8,498 
 28,110 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Transmission for No. 8. 
 
 5 
 
 192 
 
 131. 
 15-14 
 
 400 
 
 35-25 
 
 704 
 62 
 
 3.6 
 
 15 
 
 280 
 
 22,240 
 
 7252 
 
 1483 
 
 1,972 
 22,450 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Water Wheel. 
 
 6 
 
 192 
 
 50 
 
 106 
 32 
 
 208 
 63 
 
 3-18 
 
 15 
 
 840 
 
 7,425 
 
 2275 
 
 495 
 
 7,494 
 24,750 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Transmission for No. 5. 
 
 7 
 
 140 
 
 30 
 
 55 
 
 58.4 
 32 
 
 _I32_ 
 
 72 
 
 2.8 
 
 8.6 
 
 900 
 
 5,000 
 
 4266 
 48.35 
 
 581 
 
 17,440 
 31,970 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Steam Engine. 
 
 8 
 
 140 
 
 30 
 
 54.5 
 
 66.5 
 35.75 
 
 138 
 76 
 
 3 
 
 13 
 
 1045 
 
 4,350 
 
 3700 
 
 335 
 
 10,040 
 18,230 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Steam Engine. 
 
 9 
 
 120 
 
 13-3 
 
 _29I_ 
 
 33 
 
 560 
 80 
 
 3.12s 
 
 15 
 
 240 
 
 16,230 
 
 5688 
 
 1082 
 
 1,634 
 14,390 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Water Wheel. 
 
 10 
 
 1 00 
 
 45 
 158.8 
 
 84.5 
 24 
 
 176 
 50 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 2CX30 
 
 1,635 
 
 924 
 
 163 
 
 7,357 
 8,175 
 
 Wood and IVon. 
 Steam Engine. 
 
 11 
 
 90 
 
 26 
 80 
 
 85.4 
 27-75 
 
 228 
 74 
 
 2-375 
 
 S-9 
 
 1 163 
 
 2,500 
 
 3000 
 
 424 
 
 11,010 
 33,900 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Steam Engine. 
 
 12 
 
 82.5 
 
 54 
 83 
 
 55-1 
 35.8 
 
 _ii4_ 
 74 
 
 3.1 
 
 2X4-7S 
 
 1558 
 
 3,440 
 
 1848 
 
 362 
 
 19.540 
 2x30,040 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Screw Steamship. 
 
 ".75 
 
 13 
 
 50 
 
 _4.o_ 
 7-32 
 
 50-4 
 27.5 
 
 96 
 52 
 
 3-25 
 
 10.6 
 
 104 
 
 15,500 
 
 7536 
 
 1463 
 
 5,849 
 10,700 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Water Wheel. 
 
 14 
 
 20 
 
 40 
 
 85.4 
 16.5 
 
 248 
 48 
 
 2.2 
 
 6-3 
 
 328 
 
 1,980 
 
 2420 
 
 314 
 
 12,570 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Water Wheel. 
 
 BEVEL GEARS. 
 
 15 
 
 300 
 
 _93_ 
 50 
 
 24.J7 
 45-7 
 
 _5^ 
 93 
 
 3-1 
 
 13 
 
 II87 
 
 8200 
 
 3270 
 3697 
 
 630 
 
 58,660 
 31,540 
 
 Iron and Iron, 
 Turbine. 
 
 16 
 
 300 
 
 100 
 
 29.7 
 26.7 
 
 _55_ 
 49 
 
 2.7 
 
 10 
 
 1576 
 
 6170 
 
 3840 
 
 617 
 
 61,700 
 68,980 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Transmission for No. i. 
 
 17 
 
 240 
 
 44 
 44 
 
 42 
 
 75 
 
 3-5 
 
 18 
 
 968 
 
 8050 
 
 2133 
 
 447 
 
 19,670 
 
 Iron and Iron. 
 Transmission foe No. 3. 
 
 18 
 
 200 
 
 41 
 80 
 
 50 
 30.1 
 
 98 
 50 
 
 3.3 
 
 11.8 
 
 1260 
 
 5157 
 
 2000 
 
 437 
 
 17,920 
 34,960 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Turbine. 
 
 19 
 
 130 
 
 _93_ 
 124 
 
 J13, 
 24.8 
 
 80 
 60 
 
 2.4 
 
 8 
 
 1523 
 
 2772 
 
 2276 
 2417 
 
 346 
 
 32,220 
 42,970 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Turbine. 
 
 20 
 
 .00 
 
 _93_ 
 144.7 
 
 23.4 
 15 
 
 _7o_ 
 4^ 
 
 2.1 
 
 6.3 
 
 1 140 
 
 2860 
 
 2985 
 3840 
 
 454 
 
 42,220 
 65,690 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Turbine. 
 
 21 
 
 50 
 
 93 
 218 
 
 2S^ 
 10.8 
 
 _75_ 
 32 
 
 2.1 
 
 6.3 
 
 1236 
 
 I3I3 
 
 1564 
 1848 
 
 208 
 
 39,380 
 45,430 
 
 Wood and Iron. 
 Turbine. 
 
 HYPERBOLOIDAL GEARS. 
 
 22 
 
 16 
 
 72 
 81.6 
 
 21.6 
 
 i9~ 
 
 68 
 60 
 
 1.996 
 
 5.9 
 
 812 
 
 640 
 
 924 
 1250 
 
 108 
 
 7,810 
 8,851 
 
 Iron and Wood. 
 Transmission. 
 
 1-993 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 149 
 
 See Fig. 647. The rim is thickened in the middle or at one 
 edge to — i, and also stiffened by a rib, and for gears of fine 
 
 Fig. 647. 
 
 pitch the section of the rim is curved, which harmonizes well 
 with arms of oval section. According to (229) a pitch of \" 
 would give a rim thickness 6 = 0.4'^ -[- 0.125'^ = 0.525'''' or a 
 little over yi", and for a pitch of yi." , 6 = 0.325^^. 
 
 For bevel gears of cast 
 outer edge, and of the 
 
 S thick at the 
 
 Fig. 648. 
 
 For wooden teeth it is necessary to have a deeper and stronger 
 rim, the dimensions being dependent somewhat upon the 
 method of inserting the teeth. The proportions for spur gears 
 
 ——i—JoCcJ 
 
 The; Arms of Gear Wheels. 
 The arms of gear wheels are made according to the follow 
 forms, dependent upon the kind of rim used. 
 
 Fig. 652. 
 
 Fig. 652. Ribbed sections, which are made sometimes as 
 shown in the dotted lines as may be most convenient in mould- 
 ing, and oval sections, in which the thickness of the arm is 
 generally made one-half the width /^. A good proportion for 
 the arms is obtained when their number A is made as follows : 
 
 A = 0.S5^Z^t 
 
 
 A = o.n/l'{2. 
 
 
 From these we obtain the following : 
 
 A =345678 10 
 
 Z \f ^ "= ^° 53 S3 119 162 211 330 
 
 Z ^ -L = II 23 36 52 71 
 
 93 146 
 
 209 
 
 Example. — For a gear wheel of 50 teeth and 2" pitch, we have Z \/ I = 
 50 ■v/a" = 50 X 1-414 = 70 and this lies between 53 and 83; being nearer the 
 latter we give the wheel_five arms.^f the pitch had been %", and the same 
 number of teeth Z \/ i =50 v/o-7S = 5° X 0.866 = 43.3 or between three 
 and four arms, the latter number being used in practice. 
 . The width of arm h, in the plane of the wheel is somewhat a 
 matter of judgment, but may suitably be made according to the 
 ratio /? = 2 to 2.5 t, when the thickness /3 may be obtained from 
 the following formula : 
 
 (x)' 
 
 • (231) 
 
 Should this formula give a thickness either too great o 
 
 small for 
 
 1 casting, 
 
 nother value for —- must be 
 
 are shown in Fig. 649, and for bevel gears in Fig. 650. For very 
 wide faces the wooden teeth are made in two pieces and a stay 
 bar cast in the mortise. 
 
 Small pinions are often cast solid, and when subjected to 
 heavy pressures are strengthened by shrouding, as shown in 
 Fig. 651, and sometimes this shrouding is turned down to the 
 pitch line. 
 
 taken and the calculation repeated. The following table will 
 assist in this operation. 
 
 The taper of the arms may be made as follows : the ribs at 
 the rim are made slightly narrower than the breadth of face b^ 
 and at the hub, equal to, or slightly greater than b. For arms 
 of oval section h, may be made equal 2 / at the centre of the 
 wheel, tapering to -/■>, this width at the rim. 
 
 \ 232. 
 Tabi,e of Gear \Vheei< Arms. 
 
 Fig. 651. 
 
 For double spiral gears of steel (see \ 223) shrouding is to be 
 recommended, and is ver}' generally used. The use of shroud- 
 ing especially assists in securing good steel castings, for the 
 great shrinkage of the steel, nearly two per cent., tends to pro- 
 duce warped and twisted castings. 
 
 Small pinions are sometimes cut from solid wrought iron, in 
 which case the shrouding must be omitted. 
 
 
 h 
 1 
 
 Value of 4-> -when 
 
 
 Z 
 
 A=' 
 
 9 
 
 " 
 
 16 
 
 
 25 
 
 30 
 
 35 
 
 40 
 
 1.50 
 
 0.20 
 
 0.28 
 
 0.37 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.93 
 
 1.08 1.24 
 
 1-75 
 
 0.16 
 
 0.21 
 
 0.27 
 
 0-37 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.69 
 
 o.So 1 0.91 
 
 2.00 
 
 0.12 
 
 0.16 
 
 0.21 
 
 0.28 
 
 0-35 
 
 0.44 
 
 0-53 
 
 0.61 1 0.70 
 
 2.25 
 
 O.IO 
 
 O.I3 
 
 0.17 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.28 
 
 0-35 
 
 0.41 
 
 0,48 j 0.55 
 
 2.50 
 
 0.08 
 
 0.10 
 
 0.13 
 
 0.18 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.28 
 
 0.34 
 
 0.39 0.45 
 
 2.75 
 
 0.06 
 
 0.08 
 
 Oil 
 
 0.15 
 
 0.18 
 
 0..3 
 
 0.28 
 
 0.32 0.37 
 
 3.00 
 
 0.05 
 
 0.07 
 
 0.09 
 
 O.X2 
 
 0.16 
 
 0.19 
 
 0.23 
 
 0.27 0.31 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 being 4 inches. 
 
 gives /3 = 
 
 lave 6 arms, and 120 teeth of 2 inch pitch, the face 
 lake A = 2 / at the centre of the wheel, we have 
 ;nce we get from the table -^ = 0.35, and ,3 = 4 X 
 sidered too thick, we may make /; = 2.25/, which 
 
 For gears with wooden teeth, and for the iron wheels gearing 
 with them, the dimensions of the arms may be made 0.8 times 
 that given by the preceding rules. If more accurate dimensions 
 are required, the best plan is to determine the pitch of the 
 equivalent iron teeth, and use this value in the calculations. 
 
 Gear WheeI/ Hubs. 
 The hub for a gear wheel generally tapers slightly each way 
 
 from the arms to the end, the length Z, = — b, or somewhat 
 
 4 
 more for wheels of very large diameter, and the thickness of 
 metal about the bore is made iv ^= 0,4 A -|- ^a" , in which h is 
 the same as in the preceding section. In cases of much im- 
 portance reference should be made to formula (66), ^ 65. 
 
 If the wheel is not to be secured by shrinkage the thickness of 
 metal at the ends of the hub may be made ^ ^i J<^- The key way 
 is cut the entire length of the hub, and for wheels which are 
 subjected to heavy service the metal should be reinforced over 
 the key way. Instead of this, the hub may be strengthened by 
 wrought iron rings, forced on one or both ends. Such rings are 
 usually of rectangular cross section, the thickness being ^ lu, 
 and add greatly to the strength of the hub. See Chapter III. 
 § 161 to the end. 
 
 \ 234. 
 Weight of Gear Wheels. 
 The approximate weight G of gear wheels proportioned ac- 
 cording to the preceding rules may be obtained from the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 G = 0.0357 b f (6.25 Z + 0.04 Z^) . . . . (233) 
 
 The following table will facilitate the application of the_ 
 formula as it gives the value of for the number of teeth 
 
 -which maybe given 
 
 and the \ 
 
 veight can 
 
 at once be found by 
 
 multiplying the value in the table by b f. 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 20 
 
 5>o4 
 
 560 
 
 6.18 
 
 677 
 
 7.38 
 
 30 
 
 7.99 
 
 8.61 
 
 9-24 
 
 9.S9 
 
 10.52 
 
 40 
 
 11.09 
 
 11.90 
 
 12.59 
 
 13.30 
 
 14.02 
 
 50 
 
 1474 
 
 15-48 
 
 16.23 
 
 17.00 
 
 17.77 
 
 60 
 
 iS.SS 
 
 1935 
 
 20.15 
 
 20.97 
 
 21.80 
 
 70 
 
 22.65 
 
 23.50 
 
 24.36 
 
 25.24 
 
 26.12 
 
 80 
 
 27.02 
 
 27-93 
 
 28.85 
 
 29.79 
 
 30.73 
 
 90 
 
 31.69 
 
 32-66 
 
 33-63 
 
 34.62 
 
 35.63 
 
 100 
 
 36.63 
 
 37.67 
 
 38.70 
 
 39-75 
 
 40.81 
 
 120 
 
 47.40 
 
 48.54 
 
 49-69 
 
 50.85 
 
 52.03 
 
 140 
 
 59-30 
 
 60.56 
 
 61.82 
 
 63.10 
 
 64.27 
 
 160 
 
 72-35 
 
 73-73 
 
 7S-IO 
 
 76.39 
 
 77.90 
 
 180 
 
 86.54 
 
 88.03 
 
 89.52 
 
 91.02 
 
 92.54 
 
 200 
 
 101.88 
 
 103.48 
 
 104.98 
 
 106.70 
 
 108.34 
 
 320 
 
 118.36 
 
 120.08 
 
 122.15 
 
 123.52 
 
 125.27 
 
 Example. — For a cast iron gear wheel, proportioned according to the fore- 
 going rules, with 50 teeth, 2'' pitch and 4" face, we have b fi = 16, and by the 
 table the multiplier for 50 teeth is 14.74, and the weight = 16 X 14.74 = 235-84 
 lbs., say 236 pounds. For a gear of 50 teeth, iV^" pitch and 2)^" face, we have 
 i t- = 3.90625, which multiplied by 14.74 gives 57.62 pounds. 
 
 For bevel gears or for gears with wooden teeth and lighter 
 arms (as given at the end of ^ 232) the weights will run slightly 
 less than given by the table. 
 
 CHAPTER .XVIII. 
 
 RATCHET GEARING. 
 I 235. 
 
 Classification OF Ratchet Gearing. 
 Ratchet gearing may be considered as a modification or ex- 
 tension of wheel gearing. The object of ratchets is to check the 
 action of certain portions of a machine or train of mechanism 
 and so modify au otherwise continuous motion into some inter- 
 mittent form. 
 
 Ratchet gearing may be divided into two main divisions 
 according to the nature of ihe checking action. When the 
 movement of the checked member is impeded in only one 
 direction we have what may be called a Running Ratchet ; and 
 when the movement is checked in both directions, a Stationary 
 Ratchet. 
 
 The distinction will be understood by reference to the accorn- 
 paaying illustrations, in which Fig. 653 shows a ratchet wheel 
 and pawl a b c, the shape of teeth and pawl permitting motion 
 of the wheel in one direction, and hence forming a Running 
 
 Fig. 653. 
 
 Fig. 654. 
 
 Ratchet Gearing, while in Fig. 654 the rectangular notches and 
 pawl for a Stationary Ratchet Gearing. The lifting of the pawl 
 is called the release, and the falling into gear Is called the en- 
 gagement of the ratchet gearing. 
 
 If the two members b and c are held, a becomes the intermit- 
 tent mover, while if a be held, the parts b and c possess the 
 intermittent action ; as for example, the sustaining pawl and 
 ratchet wheel of a common hoisting winch in the first case, and 
 the reverse lever and quadrant of a locomotive in the second 
 case. 
 
 Ratchet gearing is a portion of constructive mechanism which 
 will repaj' close investigation. For this purpose the following 
 six groups may be considered : 
 
 1. Ratchets pure and simple, such as a ratchet wheel and 
 pawl for the mere prevention of rotation. Examples : the 
 ratchets of a windlass, or of the beam of a loom. 
 
 2. Releasing Ratchets ; those which act to release members 
 which are under stress, and which by such release are permitted 
 to perform and determinate work. Examples : the pawls which 
 release the drop of a pile driver, the trigger of a gun, or the trip 
 valve gear of some steam engines. 
 
 3. Checking Ratchets ; those which arrest parts which are 
 already in continuous motion. Example ; the safety check 
 ratchets upon elevators, and upon mine hoists. 
 
 4. Continuous Ratchets; those in which a combination of 
 pawls acts to drive a member in a given direction with practi- 
 cally a continuous motion. Examples: a ratchet-driven wind- 
 lass ; some forms of counters. 
 
 5. Locking Ratchets ; those which act to detain certain mem- 
 bers '.f: a fixed relation against the action of external forces 
 until released. Examples : some forms of car couplings and of 
 releasing shaft couplings, also the mechanism of locks. 
 
 6. Escapements ; those forms which permit a member under 
 the action of an impelling force to make a regularly intermit- 
 tent motion in one direction. Example: the various forms of 
 clock and watch escapements. 
 
 By following this classification, the various principal funda- 
 mental forms may ^e briefly examined. 
 
 I 236. 
 Toothed Running Ratchet Gears. 
 
 In running ratchets, the direction of motion which is not 
 checked by the pawl is called the forward motion, and the re- 
 verse, the backward motion. The teeth on the ratchet wheel 
 must therefore be so shaped that when the pawl is in engage- 
 ment the backward motion only must be impeded. It is also 
 important that the form should be so chosen that the first ten- 
 dency toward a backward movement should act to produce an 
 engagement of the pawl with the teeth. 
 
 In determining the form of teeth. Fig. 655, we observe that 
 the most effective point upon the circumference of the wheel for 
 the action of the pawl is that at which the joining line 1.2 of 
 the centre of the wheel i, with the' point of the pawl 2, is at 
 right angles with the pawl radius 3.2, If we describe a circle 
 upon the diameter 1.3, or the distance between centres of wheel 
 and pawl, the intersections 2 and 2' with the pitch circle of the 
 ratchet wheel will give the two most advantageous points of 
 application. If the point 2 be selected, the attempted reverse 
 movement of the wheel will subject the pawl to compression, 
 while if 2' be chosen the pawl must be of the hook shape shown, 
 and will be subject to tension. If the teeth of the wheel are to 
 be of straight outline, the flanks should be radial. If a point of 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 151 
 
 action 2j or Sj, in front or behind 2 or 2^, be chosen, the 
 mechanism will be operative, but less advantageously than when 
 constructed as above, for the lever arm of the force-couple act- 
 
 The same result will be attained by giving this curve to the 
 end of the pawl, and making the point of the tooth the bearing, 
 as at b, or both pawl and tooth may be formed to the curve, as 
 
 we may call this form of tooth the "dead" ratchet tooth. 
 Other forms of teeth will be considered hereafter. 
 
 Internally-toothed ratchet wheels may also be made with the 
 pawls adapted to act either in tension or compression, as at 2 
 and 2', Fig. 657. The axis 3 may be within the wheel. Fig. 658, 
 in which case the above given conditions for the best position 
 of the point of action cannot be fulfilled. 
 
 If the radius of the ratchet wheel be made infinitely great we 
 have a ratchet rack. Fig. 659, in which « is a pawl acting in 
 compression, and b a form acting in tension. 
 
 An important application of the ratchet rack is shown in Fig. 
 660, which is the upper portion of the lifting frame for a screw 
 propeller.* 
 
 Fig. 655. 
 
 ing upon the wheel will be less, and hence the pressure greater. 
 The angle of the flank, which will cause the direction of the 
 force upon the pawl to pass through the axis 3, is found by 
 erecting a perpendicular from 2^ or 2^ upon 2i . 3 or 22 . 3. 
 
 Fig. 656. 
 
 It is not necessary to bevel the end of the pawl so that it shall 
 bear in but one point of the tooth, as it is not difficult to shape 
 the tooth profile so that the force /"shall pass through the axis 
 3, when the pawl engages with the tooth. This is accomplished 
 by making the profile of the flank of the tooth a circular arc 
 struck from 3 as a centre, as in Fig. 656 a. 
 
 Fig. 660. 
 
 The two ratchet racks a, which support the frame as it is grad- 
 ually lifted, are in the middle plane of the ship, being fast to the 
 walls of the propeller well. In order to insure the engagement 
 of the pawls b b, they are held in gear by the loop springs of 
 rubber. The frame is raised and lowered by a rope tackle, the 
 sheaves of which are shown, the so-called " cheese-cou-pXing" 
 (see I 156), permitting the propeller to be lifted, when its tongue 
 and groove are in the proper vertical position. The pawls are 
 held out of gear by means of lines, during the operation of 
 lowering. The frame and ratchet racks are both made of bronze. 
 The bent lever is another pawl which engages in a notch m a 
 blade of the propeller, and prevents it from revolving during 
 the operation of raising or lowering. There are two wooden 
 struts, the bronze shod ends of which can be seen on each side 
 just above the pawls b, their function being to hold the frame 
 firmly in its lowest position, when the propeller is revolving. 
 
 Fig. 6S9. 
 
 at c. Since the force which acts upon the pawl has no tendency 
 to cause it to lift out of gear, when constructed as thus described 
 
 Ratchet racks are also used extensively in connection with the 
 hoisting machinery in shafts of mines, etc. 
 
152 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Instead of giving the ratchet wheel au infinitely great radius, 
 the arm 2.3 of the pawl may be made infinitely long. This 
 simply means that the motion of the pawl is guided in a straight 
 line, in some form of slide. In Fig. 66i such an arrangement is 
 shown for a ratchet wheel, and in Fig. 662 for a ratchet rack, 
 such forms being not uncommon. 
 
 I 237. 
 The Thrust upon the Pawi<. 
 The condition that the thrust upon the pawl, in a ratchet gear- 
 ing, shall pass through the axis of the pawl, is not always ful- 
 filled, and in some cases it is impracticable to attain such a 
 relation of the parts. The mutual action of the pawl and ratchet 
 wheel upon each other must therefore always be considered. 
 If the flank of the tooth of a spur ratchet wheel (or a tangent 
 to the flank of the outline is curved) does not form a right angle 
 with the plane 2.3 of the pawl, there may exist, under some cir- 
 cumstances, a tendency to force the pawl into the tooth, or in 
 other cases to throw it out of gear. 
 
 For the so-called " dead " ratchet tooth a = 90°, case i, hence 
 there is tendency neither to inward or outward movement. 
 The variations above given are, however, more or less used in 
 practice, and the table will be of service in considering the 
 action in such cases. Some examples will be given here, and 
 numerous others may be found in subsequent illustrations. 
 
 In many cases it is desirable that the pawl should be held in 
 engagement with the tooth by the action of the impelling force, 
 as in Fig. 664, this falling under the fourth or sixth case. This 
 
 Fig. 663. 
 
 In Fig. 663 the various cases are examined. If at the point of 
 contact 2 a normal N A\\.o the plane of the tooth flank be 
 drawn, this normal may bear one of three relations to the tri- 
 angle 1.2.3. The "thrust-normal" N N^ may fall without 
 the triangle, or within the triangle, or it may fall upon one of 
 the sides of the triangle. 
 
 If it falls upon 2 . 3, the thrust is neutral ; if it falls upon 2 . r, 
 the thrust is zero ; that is, there will be no action of the pawl 
 upon the wheel, or I'ice versa,, barring the action of friction. 
 
 The angle 6 between the line 2. 3 of the pawl and the tangent 
 at 2, which is equal to the angle between the normal to 2 . 3, 
 and the "thrust-normal," is called the angle of thrust. By 
 considering this in connection with the angle of friction vari- 
 ous relations are obtained. 
 
 On the one part, the force applied will act to alter the posi- 
 tion of the pawl, either to or from the centre of the ratchet 
 wheel : on the other part, it will also act to move the ratchet 
 wheel forward and backward. 
 
 These relations are classified for various conditions in the fol- 
 lowing table, in which a force which acts to force the point 2 
 from I is called au " outward" action, and the reyerse, an " in- 
 ward" action. 
 
 Fig. 664. 
 
 form of tooth insures the retention of the pawl in place after it 
 has once entered the tooth, and is sometimes used in hoisting 
 machinery when heavy loads are to be sustained ; an applica- 
 tion is also found in Pouyer's Coupling, Fig. 453, in which the 
 secure engagement of the pawls is an important point. 
 Another secure form of pawl is shown in Fig. 655. 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 665. 
 
 In this case the wheel is made with pin-teeth. The pawl has 
 a forked end, the inner flank tending to produce an inward 
 movement, the outer flank, outward movement. 
 
 In this case, as in the preceding, the wheel must be turned 
 through a small angle before the pawl can be released. 
 
 
 ANGLE OF THRUST a = 90°. 
 
 The Thrust 
 Action is : 
 
 The Impelling Force : 
 
 Outward Movement: 
 
 Inward Movement: 
 
 i) neutral. 
 
 is without effect. 
 
 is without effect. 
 
 is without effect. 
 
 
 ANGLE OF THRUST a < 90° and > 90° — 0. 
 
 
 2) inward. 
 
 3) outward. 
 
 is without effect, 
 is without effect. 
 
 produces reverse motion, 
 produces forward motion. 
 
 produces forward motion, 
 produces reverse motion. 
 
 i 
 
 ANGLE OF THRUST c<^90° — -p and >f 
 
 
 4) inward. 
 
 5) outward. 
 
 produces inward movement, 
 produces outward movement. 
 
 produces reverse motion, 
 produced by impelling force. 
 
 produced by impelling force, 
 produces reverse motion. 
 
 
 ANGLE OF THRUST a<C,p. 
 
 
 6) inward 
 
 7) outward. 
 
 produces inward movement, 
 produces outward movement. 
 
 is without eff'ect. 
 
 produced by impelling force. 
 
 produced by impelling force, 
 is without effect. 
 
 ANGLE OF THRUST a = o. 
 
 8) uull. 
 
 produces inward movement. produces friction only. 
 
 produces friction only. 
 
 1 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ?238. 
 The Swding Fi,anks. 
 We have discussed the action of the flanks -of tooth and pawl 
 ■which work together during the thrust. It is obvious that 
 greater liberty is permitted in the form of the sliding flanks. It 
 is only necessary that the form shall be such that the forward 
 movement of the ratchet wheel shall lift the pawls properly out 
 of gear. The forms fall under cases 4 to 7. The usual form is 
 the common zig-zag ratchet, but others are also used, as in 
 Figs. 666 and 667, in both of which the teeth are symmetrical. 
 
 Instead of using an entire ratchet wheel, a portion only need 
 be made, if the required movement is but small, and in some 
 cases reduced only to a single tooth, as in Fig. 670. 
 
 If it is desired to have the end of the pawl symmetrical, as in 
 Fig. 667, this may be done, and the pawl may be reversed for a 
 reverse movement as shown in the dotted lines. This form is 
 used on the feed motion of some machine tools. 
 
 For some purposes it is desirable to form the thrust flank 
 upon which the impelling force acts, in the same manner as the 
 sliding flank, in which case the pawl must be held in gear by 
 some extraneous force capable of resisting the 
 pelling force which it is desired shall act. 
 
 Such a form is shown in Fig. 668, which is similar to the nut- 
 locking device shown previously in Fig. 241. 
 
 Fig. 669. 
 
 A modified form, Fig. 669, is used in Thomas' Calculating 
 Machine. In this case the spring itself acts as the pawl, being 
 attached directly to the arm without joint, forming a plate link. 
 (See §180.) 
 
 Fig. 670. 
 
 Fig. 671. 
 
 Sometimes the two members may oe made of similar form, 
 each working alternately upon the other, Fig, 671. _ Examples 
 of this are found in the valve gear of some Cornish engines. 
 These belong to the so-called "dead" ratchets, and are called, 
 more or less appropriately, quadrants, or sextants. 
 
 I 240. 
 Methods of Securing Pawi^s. Sii^ent Ratchets. 
 The engagement of the pawl with the ratchet wheel is usually- 
 secured by the weight of the pawl, sometimes assisted by addi- 
 tional weights, as in Fig. 659. This may also be accomplished 
 by means of a spring. It is desirable to give such springs but 
 little movement, and small frictional resistance. It should 
 therefore be placed near the axis 3, and is best placed in the 
 line I . 3, so that 3 . 4,5, shall line in the same straight line. 
 Fig. 672 a. If this cannot be conveniently done, it may at least 
 
 Fig. 672. 
 
 be made nearly so, as at b. A weak spring with much move- 
 ment may be seen below in Fig. 6S0, yet at the same time the 
 line 3 . 4 . 5, is only slightly varied from a straight line. In 
 spinning machinery spiral springs of steel are used, and rubber 
 springs have been used in propeller hoisting frames. Fig. 660. 
 
 In devices in which the pawls are sometimes above and some- 
 times below the wheel the springs are sometimes replaced by 
 using several pawls. This is shown in Fig. 673, which is Wil- 
 ber's ratchet for use in lawn mowers. 
 
 Spring Ratchets. Quadrants. 
 The form of ratchet last described possesses an especial prop- 
 erty, that is, the action of the spring tends to force the pawl 
 into the space as soon as the point is over the middle of the 
 tooth. This causes the pawl to spring into engagement, hence 
 the name spring ratchet, and this action causes an acceleration 
 of the motion either forwards or backwards as the pawl is forced 
 into the space. Applications of this form are found in repeating 
 watches, in which the wheel is star-shaped, and hence called 
 the star, while the pawl is called the star pin or springer.* 
 
 Fig. 673. 
 
 Fig. 674. 
 
 is shown later among the relea 
 
 Three pawls, with half journal, are here used, and as the axis 
 I, lies in a horizontal position some one of the pawls is always 
 in engagement by its weight. The movement of the teeth 
 under the pawl, and the dropping of the latter into the spaces 
 produces wear upon the parts, and to avoid this action various 
 devices have been made ; these being known as silent ratchets. 
 
 A very tiseful form of silent ratchet is shown in Fig. 674. 
 The pawl is made with a projection 5, which is connected to a 
 friction band d, which is carried upon a hub 4 on the ratchet 
 wheel. When the wheel begins to move forwards, the arm 4 . 5 
 lifts the pawl b out of gear. The lift of the pawl is limited by 
 the pins at 5. As the forward motion continues, the band slips 
 upon 4 ; if reverse movement begins the pawl is at once thrown , 
 into gear. This is used in spinning mules, also in Pouyer's 
 coupling. Fig. 453, in which two pawls, each with its own de- 
 vice are'used. The principle involved in this device is capable 
 of wide and useful application, as will be seen hereafter. 
 
 Another form of silent ratchet is shown in Uhlhorn's coupling, 
 Fig. 454. In this case the pawls b, lie close agaiust the flanks 
 of the teeth. They are thrown into gear again by auxiliary 
 ratchets, the spring pawls of which are not silent. These lift 
 the pawls b, through a small angle when the engagement is 
 
154 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 completed by the self-closing action of the tooth flanks, Case 
 4 or 6, \, 237. 
 
 Ratchet drills, etc., are often made with silent ratchets. Wil- 
 ber's ratchet, Fig. 673, may be used for this purpose. If it is 
 placed so that the axis, i, is vertical, the friction of the pawls 
 against the case will lead them into gear in the forward move- 
 ment and draw them out on the return movement, the friction 
 in this case taking the place of any operating gear for the 
 ratchets. Various other forms of silent ratchets are in use. 
 
 Speciai, Forms of Ratchet Wheei<s. 
 
 In spur ratchet gears the axes i and 3 of the wheel and pawl 
 lie parallel to each other. These axes, however, may be placed 
 in the same manner as with gear wheels so that they are 
 inclined or intersect each other. A great variety of forms of 
 ratchet gearing may thus be made. The variations do not at 
 first appear as important as they really are, but this will appear 
 in the further discussion. 
 
 A form of ratchet for inclined axes is the crown ratchet. Fig. 
 67s, which is used in capstans ; the wheel, a, is stationary, and 
 the arm and pawl, b and c, revolve. 
 
 Fig. 679 is a multiple ratchet of common form, with three 
 pawls, in which the pawls are set a distance, from each other 
 
 Fig. 679. 
 
 I 
 
 equal to | of the pitch. From this arrangement the wheel can 
 be moved spaces equal to 
 
 %, %, I. i^ iM, etc., 
 of the pitch, that is, through ^ the pitch and auy multiples of 
 the same. This is sometimes used in saw mill feed motion,, 
 where a fine feed is required with a coarse pitch ratchet. 
 
 The forms shown in Fig. 676 and Fig. 677 are for non-inter- 
 secting axes, and use crown wheels also, and hence are called 
 crown ratchets. 
 
 A double ratchet is used in Weston's Ratchet Brace, Fig. 680. 
 The pawls b^ and b^ are placed one above and one below the 
 arm C, and act on the two parts of the double ratchet wheel 
 
 Fig. 677. 
 
 Fig. 678. 
 
 By making the wheel, a, in the form of a plane wheel, and 
 substituting a bolt for the pawl, some useful modifications are 
 made. Fig. 678 shows a form of ratchet used on a wine press, 
 in which the bolt can readily be lifted out and placed in the 
 successive holes as the lever arm is moved backward and 
 forward. 
 
 The ordinary jaw clutch coupling, Fig. 441, is really only a 
 form of crown ratchet with bolt pawl. The portion on the shaft 
 A is the ratchet wheel, and the part fitted to slide on the shaft 
 £ corresponds to the bolt b. 
 
 I 242. 
 Multiple Ratchets. 
 It is frequently desired to construct ratchet gearing so that 
 the minimum limit of movement shall be less than the pitch of 
 the teeth on the wheel. This is accomplished by using two or 
 more pawls acting at corresponding sub-divisions of the teeth. 
 Such multiple ratchets exhibit a wide variety of forms and find 
 many useful applications, and in many cases their true nature 
 is not fully understood. 
 
 rti, «2. Another ratchet drill, also by Weston, with four pawls 
 is shown in Fig. 681. This has an internal ratchet wheel with 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 155 
 
 five teeth. Double ratchets are also found in Uhlhorn's coup- 
 ling, Fig. 454, and Pouyer's coupling, Fig. 453. 
 
 If it is desired, the pitch may be halved, or divided into any 
 two chosen portions, in which case the pawls may be made in 
 one piece, Figs. 682, 683. 
 
 Fig. 682. 
 
 In each of these there is one pushing and one pulling pawl 
 upon the axis 3, the pitch being halved and the pawls acting 
 alternately. One form shows a spur wheel, the other an in- 
 ternal wheel. The form of the double pawl has caused this to 
 be called an " anchor " ratchet. 
 
 If the wheel is a so-called " face " gear, that is, with the teeth 
 projecting from the face of a disc, two similar pawls may be 
 used, both pushing or both pulling, and forming the same 
 anchor, Figs. 684, 6S5. 
 
 a 2' is formed in the arc of a circle from the center 3, a farther 
 lifting of b will cause, without resistance, a fresh release of a, 
 again arrested at /3 1" , and a similar action again for the flank 
 y 2'" ; the points 2, n, /3, y all lying on a circle struck from the 
 centre i. Thus a continuous lifting of b will produce three suc- 
 cessive advances of a. The angle of each advance of a may be 
 called the angle of advance, and the corresponding angle of lift 
 of b the angle of release. In this case the angles of advance 
 are all made equal to each other, as are also the angles of re- 
 lease. When the position in wliich 2 is arrested by the flank 
 y 2'" is reached, the angle of thrust ff becomes so small that 
 further travel cannot well be obtained. If it is required to pro- 
 vide for still further movement it can be done by making addi- 
 tional teeth behind 2, as II, II', III'', etc., which will engage 
 successively with b at 2'". The construction of "dead" form 
 of teeth is clearly shown in the diagram. As before, the angles 
 of advance and release are made uniform. The mechanism as 
 constructed will give nine successive engagements. The 
 ratchet surfaces on b are struck from 2, and the sliding surfaces 
 on a from I ; the flanks on a with a radius 3.2"' ^ 3 >-, the flanks 
 on b with a radius 1.2. 
 
 It is to be noted that the two parts a and b are interchange- 
 able in their functions, so that when the extreme notch II»' of 
 a has been reached, a may be reversed in movement and b 
 follow step by step to its former position. 
 
 Such step-ratchets are seldom used in practice, but many use- 
 ful applications are possible. 
 
 In Fig. 688 is given a form of step ratchet arranged to give a 
 uniform angle of advance together with uniform drop of the 
 pawl. The pawl a is acted upon by the force indicated by the 
 arrow, and teeth are upon a cam-shaped disc. 
 
 Fig. 686. 
 
 If the teeth are set alternately in two concentric rings, the 
 two pawls may be merged into one, as in Fig. 686. This latter 
 form appears to be new. 
 
 I 243. 
 
 Stijp Ratchets. 
 
 A very instructive form of multiple ratchet gearing is obtained 
 
 by combining more than two pawls into one piece, and arranging 
 
 two such pawls to work together, and this form is capable of 
 
 Fig. 687. 
 
 very extended application. In the ratchet combination a b c, 
 Fig. 687, we have such a combination of two multiple pawls, 
 with " dead " engagement, released by lifting the pawl b. The 
 part a, which is impelled in the direction of the arrow is thus 
 released, but is arrested again by the shoulder 1'. If the flank 
 
 An arc with radius 1.2 passes through 3, the angles of release 
 on b are 30°, and the successive angles of drop of a are 5°. This 
 form of ratchet is used in the striking mechanism of repeating 
 watches, and is known as a "snail" movement. The arm a in 
 this case is frequently made of the form shown in dotted lines 
 at A. The construction of the snail is interesting. In order to 
 
 fulfill the given conditions the points 2.2', 2" must lie on 
 
 an abridged pericycloid ; in the given case, where 1.2 r= 1.3 it is 
 the form known as a homccentric pericycloid.* The points of 
 the re-entering angles lie on a similar curve. The circles rolling 
 together to describe these curves are shown in the figure T a 
 rolling about I, and Tb about 3 ; their radii are inversel}' as the 
 angles of drop and advance. If the parts b and a move con- 
 tinuously, these circles roll on each other ; for the ^ctual move- 
 ments which take place, the drops of the pawl occur as the suc- 
 cessive ringed points coincide. 
 
 * See Reuleaux's Theoretical 
 
156 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 In the preceding step ratchet (Fig. 687) the angle of drop and 
 of release were given the ratio 1:2. In this case the points of 
 the teeth were on cycloids, those on a being on a pericycloid, 
 those on ^ on a hypocycloid. The contact point of the gener- 
 ating circle falls without the figure on 3.1 prolonged. Since the 
 radii of the circles are as i : 2 with internal contact the hypo- 
 cycloid becomes an ellipse. A portion of the curve is given in 
 the figure ; 3 X , and 3 Fare the semi diameters. The sim- 
 plest form for the line of the teeth will be obtained by making 
 1.2 = 1.3, since for this case the ellipse for one diameter of the 
 base circle on b becomes the straight line 3 X. 
 
 Fig. 689. 
 
 If it is desired to combine in the same piece two step pawls, 
 Fig. 689, of which one set shall be in tension and the other in 
 compression, an anchor ratchet may be used. In this case a 
 back and forth motion of the anchor permits an intermittent 
 forward motion of the wheel. The anchor has ten steps and the 
 wheel four teeth. This ma}' be considered the general case of 
 which Figs. 682 to 686 were special examples. 
 
 Numerous interesting problems may be solved by such de- 
 vices, such as the conversion of continuous rotation of one 
 piece into intermittent rotation of the second. Applications are 
 found in clock and watch-making. 
 
 The various modifications which may be made in the relative 
 positions of the axes 2.1 and 2.3 permit a very great variety of 
 Step ratchets to be made. 
 
 Stationary Ratchets. 
 
 Fig. 690. 
 
 Fig. 691. 
 
 A stationary ratchet may be considered as a combination of a 
 pair of running ratchets with the teeth facing in opposite direc- 
 tions. The scheme of such a combination is shown in Fig. 690. 
 From the four possible positions of the parts 2.2', II and IF we 
 may make the following double combinations : 
 
 2 with II, 2' with II-*, 
 
 2 with II', 1' with II. 
 
 The first two combinations are practically identical with the 
 stationary ratchet, Fig. 69I. The flanks of the two wheels give 
 a notch for the space, while the teeth assume a dove-tail shape, 
 and this form of stationarj' ratchet may be called a notched 
 ratchet. The wheel will be firmly held by the so-called " dead " 
 tooth, or when (90° — ''') <^'i>,\ 237. Many forms of this kind 
 are used in practice. 
 
 Fig. 692. 
 
 1 
 
 592 and 693 show two modifications of the notched 
 The distinction between tension and compression 
 pawls disappears, since the pawl 
 is the same for either action. 
 If the distance between the axes 
 I and 3 is made infinitely great, 
 the pawl becomes a sliding 
 bolt. Such a form is shown in 
 Fig. 694, which is for non-inter- 
 secting axes. The wheel is a 
 crown wheel, and the pawl may 
 have more than one notch.* 
 
 Another form of notched 
 ratchet with axes i and 3 infi- 
 nitely separated is shown in 
 
 Fig. 69s, and is in- 
 tended to hold a shaft 
 from longitudinal 
 motion, being used Fjg. 695. 
 
 in connection with 
 
 the disengaging gear of hoisting machinery, lathes and other 
 similar machines. 
 
 In this case the radius a is infinitely great ; the wheel a be- 
 comes a shaft. 
 
 The combination 2 with II' and 2' with II of Fig. 690, if we 
 make 3.2:= III . II, gives a stationary ratchet of the form 
 shown in Fig. 696. 
 
 Fig. 696. 
 
 Fig. 697. 
 
 The pawl becomes a segment of a cylinder and works always 
 in compression, or in the modification given in Fig. 697, always 
 in tension. This form may be called a cylinder ratchet. The 
 form of Fig. 696 has many applicalions, as, for example, the 
 Thomas' Calculating Machine and similar work. 
 
 I, the bolt corresponds to 
 
 juphng b. The shal 
 
 s the part b, the (i 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The cylinder b may be entirely cut through as in Fig. 698, so 
 that the segment shall fall entirely within the surrounding 
 circle. When it is placed op- 
 posite the teeth the wheel may 
 be revolved in either direction 
 as far as desired. If this move- 
 ment is to be limited, as, for 
 example, to a given pitch, it 
 can be accomplished by cut- 
 ting a corresponding space in 
 the cylinder, such as is shown 
 in Fig. 699 a. 
 
 It is not necessary that the 
 spaces in the wheel a should 
 conform to the circular profile 
 of the cylinder b (see ? 237) ; 
 the thrust is at two points on 
 the right and left of i . 3, and 
 it may be formed as at b, or 
 pin teeth used as at c. This 
 last figure shows the modifi- 
 cation made in the notch of 
 Fig. 698 to reduce the back- 
 a the pitch circle of the pin 
 and the gap in the cylinder is 
 increased propor'iionally. When the wheel is impelled in the 
 direction of the arrow, the pin 2 slips into the space in the 
 
 lash of the wheel a. 
 gear a passes through the 
 
 cylinder as soon as the opening is turned towards it far enough, 
 but cannot pass out until the cylinder has turned back the same 
 distance in the opposite direction, thus forming an intermittent 
 pitch movement. 
 
 This idea is more fully carried out in Fig. 699 e. In this case 
 the inner profile of the space is concentric with the outside of 
 the cylinder, as was also the case with the form shown in Fig. 
 697. In this case the tension and compression pawls are practi- 
 cally combined in one. When the opening moves into the 
 proper position, the pin 2 moves to the point 2', and completes 
 the remainder of the pitch movement when the cylinder moves 
 to the left again. This form may be made free from backlash 
 by making the outside of the cylinder fill the space between two 
 teeth, as in Fig. 700. If it is required that the intermittent 
 movement should divide the pitch into two equal parts, the arc 
 of the pitch circle of a, which is the measure of the thickness 
 of the teeth, must be equal to the arc cut off by the space in the 
 cylinder. If backlash is permissible, the thickness of tooth 
 may be reduced.* 
 
 Fig. 700. 
 
 If we compare the various forms of cylinder ratchets with the 
 notched ratchets, as, for example, in Fig. 692, it will be seen 
 how the one may be derived from the other. If the pawl of 
 Fig. 692 is given a row of teeth similar to the tooth 2, placed in 
 a circle about a centre 3, and a space cut in a of the circular 
 profile indicated, we obtain the same general and important 
 form as is shown in Fig. 698. 
 
 In a .similar manner the notched ratchet can be derived from 
 the cylinder ratchet, and also inverted by transposing the parts, 
 
 e compared with Fig. 682, 
 
 _. t with pawls oi circular 
 
 here, in Fig. 699, replaced by a gap of small angle ; tl _ 
 at 2, the tension pawl at 2', the arc 2 — 2' is made very si 
 live diameters very different. 
 
 nilarity will be 
 
 and all the modified forms obtained. The interchangeability 
 of the two parts gives the midway form shown in Fig. 701, in 
 which both pieces are the same, each being wheel and pawl for 
 the other.* 
 
 Fig. 701. 
 
 For the varied positions which may be given to the axes, a 
 wide variety of cylinder ratchets can be made, many of these 
 possessing useful applications. If the axes are at right angles, 
 the cylinder may become a disc, as in Fig. 702 ; this form being 
 used in Thomas' Calculating Machine, in which case the wheel 
 a is made with but a single tooth. 
 
 Fig. 702. 
 
 Fig. 703- 
 
 Fig. 704. 
 
 The form shown in Fig. 703 is derived from the globoid gear- 
 ing of Class III, \ 224, the ratchet being a cylindrical notched 
 ring. Fig. 704 shows how a pitch ratchet can be made on this 
 principle. 
 
 An examination of the preceding forms of stationary ratchets, 
 in which the pawl consists of a revolving member with a gap 
 cut in it, will show one common property in all of them. This 
 is the fact that an intermittent motion produced by successive 
 release and engagement may be made either by a continuous 
 rotation of the cylinder or by an oscillating movement. If, 
 therefore, we have a continuously revolving shaft to deal with, 
 or a vibrating member, the desired release or intermittent ac- 
 tion of the part to be acted upon may in either case be ob- 
 tained. Both forms are found successfully applied in actual 
 practice. 
 
 ?245. 
 Ratchets of Precision. 
 
 If we imagine the running ratchet of Fig. 682 so modified 
 that upon the release of the pawl 2 that at 2.' shall enter at a 
 point nearer the tooth than the middle of the pitch, as there 
 shown, the principle will not 
 
 be changed. If this modification .--'" ] '■■•-, 
 
 is made to such ati extent that 
 the angle & in both cases be- 
 comes zero, i. e., the pawls so 
 made that one enters into e'l- 
 gagemeut at the instant of re- 
 lease of the other, we have the 
 form shown in Fig. 705. 
 
 In this case the wheel a, be- 
 ing impelled in the direction - 
 of the arrow, can pass the 
 points of both pawls at once. 
 The slightest movement of the 
 member b in either direction, 
 however, will bring either 2 or 
 2^ into engagement and hold 
 the wheel. This form is called 
 a Ratchet of Precision, the 
 especial one given being a 
 running ratchet. 
 
 The principle is capable of various applications, and is also 
 suitable for stationary ratchets, two forms of which are shown 
 
 Fig. 70S- 
 
 * This form is 
 
 o the running ratchet of Fig. 671. 
 
158 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 in Figs. 706 and 707. lu the latter case the pawl assumes the 
 form of a bolt, showu in the illustratiou with several notches. 
 
 The practical applications of ratchets of precision i 
 ous, and examples will be given hereafter. 
 
 I 246. 
 Generai. Form of Toothed Ratchets. 
 We have already seen that several forms of ratchet mechanism 
 which have been described possess numerous points of similar- 
 it)-, and may be reversed and derived from each other, and 
 hence it is not unreasonable to expect that some general foim 
 may exist from which the various special modifications can be 
 derived, and in which the distinction between ratchet wheel 
 and pawl, or checked and checking member, shall not exist, 
 but each shall appear in both. 
 
 Fig. 708. 
 
 This general form is actually found in the combination of two 
 disc face wheels (? 211), with their centres carried on the same 
 bar, Fig, 708, in such a manner that the teeth of both shall 
 engage and be engaged by the other. In the illustration is 
 shown such an arrangement made for a stationary notched 
 ratchet. The wheel b engages as a pawl with the wheel a at 2 
 and 2', and if it revolves a space of one-half a pitch, a is re- 
 leased- If a, however, revolves any given odd number of half- 
 pitch angles only, d will be checked, and a become the pawl. 
 In both cases we have a ratchet of precision of the same type 
 as in Fig. 706. 
 
 The pitch ratchet with anchor pawl may also be thus derived ; 
 it is true the anchor form cannot so readily be shown as a pair 
 of similar wheels, but it is clearly only another form of the 
 same problem. The zig-zag ratchet, notched ratchet, step 
 ratchet, or th'eir combinations are all reducible to this general 
 form, the only condition being that the direction of the force in 
 the position of engagement of the checking member shall be 
 such that the checked member cannot revolve. The intermedi- 
 ate forms show the "pawl lifting" action, ? 237. It is evident 
 that in some cases the checked member may have a forward 
 movement, and in others a reverse movement. Since here, as 
 in ^ 2?5, we may consider the link t as a checked member when 
 the wheel is held fast, we may, from the combination of these 
 parts, obtain four kinds of ratchets, viz. : 
 
 1. c, stationary ; a, checked ; d, checking. 
 
 2. c, " b, " a, " 
 
 3. a, " c, " b, 
 
 4. b, " c, " a, " 
 
 As a general statement of the fundamental principle we have : 
 A toothed ratchet consists of a combination of a pair of gear 
 wheels, or of portions of gear zuheels, in which the teeth are so 
 made that for certain positions of the wheels the resultant of the 
 pressures on the teeth of one of the ivheels either passes through 
 its axis, or differs from such direction by less than the angle of 
 friction. 
 
 Dimensions op Parts of Ratchet Gearing. 
 
 The great variety of ratchet gears in use makes it almost im- 
 practicable to prepare any compact rules for the determination 
 of the dimensions of the various parts. The general proportions 
 can be obtained for the various forms by comparison with simi- 
 lar preceding devices. For spur ratchet wheels similar Jjropor- 
 tions may be used as for spur gears with thumb-shaped teeth. 
 \ 212. The action of the pawl tends to produce shocks and this 
 must not be overlooked in determining the thickness of the 
 teeth. It is generally most convenient to give the pawl a curved 
 profile, in which case the discussion of combined resistance, \. i8, 
 is to be considered. Pawls which are subject to frequent vibra- 
 tion are best made of steel, as are also those in which the super- 
 ficial pressure is high. 
 
 I 248. 
 
 Running Friction Ratchets. 
 
 The mechanical devices which are constructed to modify the 
 relations between two moving bodies by means of friction, may 
 be called by the general term of friction clutches.* Such a de- 
 vice, when so arranged that one member opposes a positive 
 frictional resistance or check to the motion of the other in one 
 direction under the action of an impelling force, constitutes a 
 friction ratchet. Such de- ( 
 
 vices may be divided, as 
 before, into running and 
 stationary ratchets, ^ 235, 
 and the first form will now 
 be considered. 
 
 In Fig. 709 is shown a 
 friction ratchet for parallel 
 axes. In this case the fric- 
 tion block b is carried by g^-'" 
 the friction with the wheel \ 
 a, when the latter begins 
 to revolve in the direction \ 
 of the arrow, that the pawl \ 
 
 link c is crowded against 
 the axis 4. The radial com- \ ' 
 
 ponent Q, in the direction \ 
 
 4 . 3, exerts a pressure upon 
 the brake block b. We 
 also have the tangential 
 component S, which we 
 may consider as composed 
 of two forces S-^ and S.^, act- 
 ing in the same direction, 
 which hold the friction at 
 I and 2 in equilibrium. At 3 we have two opposite forces S^ 
 and S^ which are capable of resisting the friction at 3 and 4 res- 
 pectivel}^ 
 
 The moment M, of the four friction forces is : M= {S-^ -f ^2 
 — S^ — 5i) (« + b). If we give the angles the symbols shown in 
 the illustration, and make i . 2=r«, 2 . 3 = (5, 3 . 4 = c, 4 ■ i ="^, 
 and call the radii of the several journals «i, b-^, and c^, we have : 
 
 a + b' ' a+b' 
 
 •^t.- 
 
 Fig. 709. 
 
 5"i = 
 
 Qf 
 
 JIL'A 
 
 T^da^dy-) 
 
 , and Sg = — 
 
 But we, also have {a + b) sin a 
 From this we get 
 
 ' {a + b)c 
 This gives for i)/: 
 
 cos a c cos a 
 {a + d) cos a 
 
 M = 
 
 force P which acts at 2, to revolve the wneel in the direc- 
 f the arrow, may be considered as a couple. We then 
 or M= Pa : 
 
 'b — 8j\_a^b cos^a Vr(a + *)cosa"^ c y J 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 159 
 
 This gives : 
 
 : the angles a and a are small, and become smaller 
 sufficiently close approxima- 
 
 \c(a^b)^ c J _\ 
 
 ■ (233) 
 
 under the action of the pressure, ; 
 tion will be obtained by putting 
 
 The following conditions must be noted. If an independent 
 force outside of O exerts a normal pressure ^V upon the circum- 
 ference of the wheel, the friction TV/ will diminish the force 
 acting to turn the wheel backward. If this is to enter into the 
 resistance which is produced by O, the magnitude of ff as given 
 by equation (233) must be modified. If iV becomes sufficiently 
 great, Q may become zero ; in such a case we obtain a stationary 
 instead of a running ratchet. 
 
 The pressure R on the pawl may become very great. We 
 
 sin . </ vs-aa^- h. n 
 
 When «! is very small, release is difficult, and the arrange- 
 ment does not appear to be very practical. If the arm a is made 
 infinitely long, so must also ffj, and we get the case of Fig. 713. 
 The wheel becomes a sliding bar. The relations 
 
 iiave R^=^- 
 
 - which may be made approximately : 
 
 /"at all four points = o.io.f "^ 
 
 •whence sin o- £ 0.0834, which gives tr = 4° 47". To be on the safe side we will 
 make <j = 5!^°, or sin a = 0.0787, and then get .ff = P — — -~ — g- = 11. 17 P. 
 The exact length of d will be very slightly less than a -h 3 + c. 
 
 As will be seen the ratio comes out unfavorably. The method 
 of remedying this will be discussed hereafter. 
 
 The pawl c ma}' also extend within the circle of the wheel, as 
 in Fig. 710, in which a is an obtuse angle. The axis of the pawl 
 \ 
 
 Fig. 710. Fig. 711. 
 
 may be either at 4 or i/ , on 3 . 4 prolonged ; the pawl is in this 
 case a tension pawl. If a is made an internal wheel, we have 
 the arrangement shown in Fig. 711, the pawl being under com- 
 pression. 
 
 Especially noteworthy are those cases in which one or more 
 of the axes are infinitely distant. In Fig. 712 is shown the case 
 
 in which the length of pawl and also d and c^ are of infinite 
 length. We have for the angle of thrust, from (233) 
 
 * The moment of the frictions produced at 2 and i by the force Pis= P 
 J +a^) — Pai = Pa. 
 
 t If various coefficients of friction are to be used we have for Si, S^, S3 and 
 1, corresponding values /i, yi, 73 and 74. 
 
 give excellent action. 
 
 If with a and a^ we n 
 construction of Fig. 714. 
 
 ike c infinitely long, .we obtain the 
 
 (#...„ r 
 
 Fig. 715- 
 
 Fig. 716. 
 
 The conditions give : sin o ^ / (2 — i). The joint at 3 insures 
 full bearing for the surfaces at i, 2 and 4. This is also the case 
 with the joint at 4 in Fig. 715, in which a, a^, b^, f and d are in- 
 finitely great, while b is the difference between two infinitely 
 long but opposite distances, and hence is finite. We have the 
 relation o "^ f {2 — i). By omitting the joint we obtain the 
 simple construction shown in Fig. 716. The friction block is 
 in the form of a key or wedge, as in Fig. 715, and the number 
 of parts reduced to three (see also the following section). 
 
 The results as determined by calculation are not always prac- 
 ticable for the desired ratchet construction, which shows that 
 the selection of the relation between the parts must be made 
 with judgment, and care taken that those pieces which are sub- 
 jected to heavy pressure shall not readily be deformed. As the 
 preceding example indicates, the small size of the angle a ren- 
 ders it an important point for consideration. In this case the 
 actual length of d is only about ^-/' greater than a-\-b-\- c. The 
 pressures Q and 7? act to lengthen d and shorten a, b and c, and 
 a P^= loo pounds the difference may readily = i^", so that 
 with only -^^'' additional wear, a becomes zero, the parts b, c 
 pass the centre, and the ratchet action ceases. This will indi- 
 cate the conditions under which the ratchet becomes a useful 
 device. 
 
 The numerical magnitude of the parts a-^, c and d can be 
 chosen so as to render the unavoidable wear least hurtful. This 
 may be done with the sliding ratchet, Fig. 713, by making the 
 length c sufficiently great. It is also important to devise means 
 to prevent the block and pawl from being forced past the 
 centre. A method of accomplishing this is to substitute for the 
 pin joint between the block and pawl, a curve or cam bearing, 
 as in Fig. 717. 
 
 riG. 717- 
 
 If the block is given a circular profile from the centre i, and 
 the pawl an evolute outline developed from a circle about 4, 
 with radius d sin o, we shall have o nearly constant, notwith- 
 standing the elastic yielding of the parts and the unavoidable 
 wear. If the yielding between i . 4 is great, the radius of the 
 circle on which the evolute is generated may be made somewhat 
 greater than d sin a. This construction appears to be new. A 
 number of similar modifications may be made, for which see 
 the following section. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 It is desirable to examine the value of the coefficient of fric- 
 tion y", in order to increase it at the point 2. This cannot well 
 be done by choice of material, since wood can scarcely be used 
 " d lubrication of the rubbing surfaces is essen- 
 
 tial. The application of wedge profiles to 
 wheel and friction block enables greater fric- 
 tion to be obtained, Fig. 718, as in the case of 
 wedge friction wheels, \ 196. Instead of the 
 
 If 
 
 coefficient/, we have the value . - 
 
 the wedge angle 6 = 60° this gives 2/; for 6 
 = 30°, nearly 4/'. By combining tlais prin- 
 ciple with the preceding forms, some very 
 useful devices may be made. 
 
 It is desirable to arrange the application of 
 the force R so as to exert as small a distorting 
 action upon the parts as possible. This may 
 iw; sometimes be done by arranging two or more 
 
 f!] friction pawls of similar kind to act upon one 
 
 ! ! ; wheel. Some examples of such devices will 
 
 '•!/ be found in the following section. It must 
 
 'J: not be forgotten that the conditions for 6 are 
 
 I not changed by the repetition of parts, since 
 
 I the numerical value of /"does not enter into 
 
 Fig. 71S. its determination. 
 
 There is yet another form of friction ratchet 
 which is capable of being made very useful. By an examina- 
 tion of formula (223) it will be seen that the influence of the di- 
 mension a-^ is almost as great as that of a itself If we increase 
 fli to nearly the same magnitude as a, Fig. 719, we may approach 
 
 Fig. 719. 
 
 Fig. 720. 
 
 closely the minimum value of o. This carries with it the dis- 
 advantage that the frictional resistance to the backward and 
 forward movement at i, is greatly increased, but this effect may 
 be avoided by making a special bearing for the friction block 
 ^ axis and rearranging the 
 ^ parts somewhat as shown 
 
 in Fig. 720. The attempt 
 of a to move backward 
 causes the pieces b and d 
 to press upon the rim of 
 a from without and with- 
 in and gra'sp it firmly. 
 The angle a may now be 
 made twice as great as in 
 the previous forms with- 
 out danger, all other 
 things remaining the 
 same. A practical form 
 of this device is shown in 
 Fig. 7 2 1 , as applied to saw 
 mill feed motion. Here 
 the screw motion F G '\s 
 intended to permit of a 
 suitable degree of play 
 for the lever c* If we 
 make «i > rt, we have the 
 form shown in Fig. 722, which seems quite practical, and when 
 applied to a friction rack we obtain the form in Fig. 724. We 
 shall return to the consideration of these double friction ratchets 
 hereafter. 
 
 It must be remembered that these forms of friction ratchets 
 are also applicable to other positions of axes and some resulting 
 devices are in practical use. 
 
 Fig. 721. 
 
 Running Friction Ratchets. 
 
 If the force to be transmitted is not very great, the intermed- 
 iate friction block may be dispensed with and the curved con- 
 tact surface be made directly upon the pawl. This reduces the 
 mechanism to three parts ; the wheel a, pawl b, and arm or con- 
 necting bar c, Fig. 724. 
 
 Fig. 724. 
 
 This form may be called a clamp ratchet, or since the pawl 
 resembles the thumb-shaped teeth already described, the term 
 "thumb-ratchet " may be used. The determination of the angle 
 (T may readily be determined by what has preceded, and the fol- 
 lowing relations established : 
 
 -.</(^^.._^). 
 
 (235) 
 
 A suitable profile for the thumb pawl may be obtained as in 
 Fig. 717, by using the evolute upon a base circle of radius c sin 
 a, f bout 3 as a centre. This may be approximated by a circular 
 arc struck from M, in which 3 M and i M are at right angles ta 
 each other. 
 
 If a and c are made infinitely great we have a form similar to 
 Fig. 713, the straight profile 2 being an evolute of infinitely 
 long radius, and the profile 3 a portion of the circumference of 
 an infinitely great cylinder. 
 
 If the wheel be made a wedge friction wheel we have the 
 form shown in Fig. 725. The wheel may be made with several 
 grooves, by which means the pressurs on each surface can be 
 reduced (see \ 196). 
 
 Fig. 725. 
 
 Fig. 726. 
 
 A variety of modifications can be made in the arrangement of 
 the pawls. A clamp ratchet in which a repetition of pawls is 
 used to distribute the pressure, is Dobo's ratchet, Fig. 726, which 
 is very effectively used by A. Clair in his indicator. f 
 
 If we adapt the idea of Fig. 717 to a revolving journal using 
 the "thumb" pawl at 3, we obtain a very useful modification of 
 the clamp ratchet. The curve which is applied between 2 and 
 3 may be variously arranged. A very simple form is obtained 
 
 • See Goodeve. Elements of Mechanism, Loudon, 1 
 
 t See Morin, Notions geometriques sur les mouvements, Paris, 1 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 by making the curves at 2 aud 3 portions of the same circle, and 
 the corresponding curve at 3 so found as to produce the required 
 clamping action. 
 The clamping piece 
 b becomes a cylin- 
 der, Fig. 727. 
 
 If we make the 
 angle 23 = ^, 
 prolong the radius 
 3 C to N, then will 
 3 O iVbe the normal 
 to the curve at the 
 point of contact 
 with b at 3, since 
 the angle 3 . 3 (9 ^ 
 6. The curve for c 
 is an arc of a circle 
 struck from a centre 
 M, on3CiV,found 
 by making i il/per- 
 pendicular to 3 (9 ^V. This curve is practically correct for a 
 smaller clamping cylinder as at O' 3', since the angle of thrust 
 is very nearly the same as sX O \ . 2, or in other words the ef- 
 fectiveness of the clamping action is not impaired as the cylin- 
 der is reduced by wear. 
 
 O T 
 The pressures at 2 and 3, Fig. 728, are T= , R =- 
 
 Fig. 727. 
 
 ■GtW)- 
 
 Fig. 728. 
 
 Fig. 729. 
 
 A practical application of the preceding form is shown in the 
 checking device for sewing machines, Fig. 729. In this case a 
 ball of rubber is substituted for the cylinder. Another similar 
 device is the ratchet check used on the old Langen Gas Engine, 
 Fig- 730- I1 this case a number of roller checks are used in 
 order to distribute around the wheel a. 
 
 The whole forms a sort of continuous ratchet gearing in which 
 the backward and forward movement of c imparts a continuous 
 
 Fig. 730. 
 
 Fig. 731. 
 
 ets with double 
 clamps are also 
 used as in Fig 721 
 and the same 
 principle appears 
 in Fig. 732, which 
 shows Saladin's 
 "friction pawl " * 
 A similar de- 
 vice is shown m 
 Fig- 733, as ap- 
 plied to a rod 
 movement, and 
 upon inspection 
 the resemblance 
 to the action of 
 
 the 
 
 "thu 
 
 pawl will be seen.f FiG. 732. 
 
 As long ago as 
 1798 Hornblower applied this idea to a rotary engine as shown 
 in Fig. 734.t 
 
 forward movement to the wheel a. When c moves in the direc- 
 tion of the arrow II, a is clamped and driven, while the parts 
 are released when the motion is reversed in the direction I. The 
 action of the centrifugal force tends to keep the checking cylin- 
 ders in contact with the outer ring, and so insure prompt action 
 upon the reversal of motion. The piessure upon these roller 
 checks in the Langen Gas Engine was very great ; wrought iron 
 rollers wore out rapidly and phosphor bronze was substituted, 
 although even these gradually altered their form under the 
 pressure. 
 
 Another ratchet check used by Langen for the same purpose, 
 is shown in Fig. 731. Here again we have a repetition of the 
 parts, and also a return to the friction block, the rollers occu- 
 pying the place of pawls. Comparing this with Fig. 709, the 
 curved bearing surfaces correspond to the journals 3 and 4, and 
 the action is similar to Fig. 727. The block b is arranged so 
 that full clamping is obtained in a quarter turn. Friction ratch- 
 
 ?250. 
 
 The Release; op Friction Pawls. 
 
 The release of a friction pawl under pressure requires a cer- 
 tain degree of force, since there is always a friction between the 
 rubbing surfaces which is at least equal to P, which must be 
 overcome if the pawl is to be released under pressure. The 
 release is to be effected under 
 
 toothed ratchets in which, 
 for example, with "dead" 
 engagement, only the "/th " 
 part of P is exerted at the 
 pawl point. The force re- 
 quired for release may be 
 somewhat reduced by combi- 
 ning the action of two sets of 
 friction surfaces of opposite 
 direction of engagement. 
 Figs. 735 and 736. The mo- 
 tion in the direction of the 
 arrow tends to draw the pawl -p^^ „ - 
 2 into closer engagement, 
 and at the same time to release that at 2'. By altering the 
 relations of the distances 4-3 and 4-3', etc., any proportion of 
 the moment may be used to hold the parts in gear. These 
 forms appear to be new, and may be called "throttle ratchets." | 
 
 ^ 251. 
 
 Stationary Friction Ratchets. 
 
 A stationary friction ratchet may be defined as one in which 
 the clamping action is not dependent upon the direction of 
 
 Fig. 736. 
 
 * See B 
 
 details 
 
 lletin v< 
 
 1 Mulhausen,XlI. 183S, p. 296, also Salzenburg's Maschine 
 
 lilar arrangement will be found to exist in the ring spinning frame. 
 Here the pawl i, Fig. 732, is made of wire and held at 4 by the thread pass- 
 ing through an eye. Since the angle cr is made greater than we have taken 
 it above, a tension or brake is necessary. 
 
 t A similar device is used by Carter, both being found in Farey's Steam 
 Engine, PI. XV, Figs. 8 and 9, also in Se— --'" ' "-' 
 
 ?It may be noted that friction pawl 1 
 fishes have such connections to certair 
 thus elevate or depress. See O. Thick 
 Dorpat, 1879. 
 
 s Abhar „, . . 
 
 ictions are found in nature. Some 
 
 , Die Sperrgelenke einiger Welse, 
 
l62 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 rotation of the wheel 
 I aud 4 are parallel 
 
 -atchet is shown in Fi 
 
 'g- 737- 
 
 radial pressure 
 O, such that for the 
 circumferential force 
 ± Pthe following con- 
 ditions may exist : 
 
 )> Pa, or: 
 
 which journal 5 of the releasing CE 
 _ _ _--juldbe "dead," butthisisuottheca 
 i struck from the centre 3. The bearing; points on pawl a 
 ■e of steel, separately inserted. The force which closes the valve 
 
 ,i.> 
 
 Fig. 737. 
 
 If O is less than 
 the right hand expres- 
 sion, Pwill only be par- 
 tially opposed, there 
 ■will be motion from a 
 toward d, with slip- 
 ping at 2, or in other -words, we have a brake, see § 248. 
 This construction is frequently applied, although it requires a 
 relativeh- large force at 0' , acting through the lever c c' , giving 
 increased pressure on the axle and much wear on the block. 
 Various forms of lever connection are used to modify the ratio 
 0':0- By clearing the angle 
 which the axes i and 4 make 
 with each other, various con- 
 venient modifications may be 
 made. The general scheme 
 of such constructions is indi- 
 cated in Fig. 738, in which the 
 toggle connection gives a high 
 ratio of Q' X.o Q\ the block 
 being guided in slides. By 
 making a an internal wheel, 
 a very practical arrangement 
 is obtained as shown in Fos- 
 sey's coupling, Fig. 450. 
 Koechlin's coupling. Fig. 449, 
 is also another form of fric- 
 tion ratchet gearing, the pres- 
 sure in this case being applied 
 by the medium of a right and 
 left hand screw. The same is 
 true of other forms of friction 
 coupling, andthe various me- 
 thods of applying the pressure 
 and reducing the wear, given 
 in ? 248, may also be applied 
 Fig. 738. in the design of mechanism 
 
 for the purpose. 
 
 l 252. 
 Releasing Ratchets. 
 
 Following the classification given in \ 235, we have first dis- 
 cussed the various forms of ratchets for the general meaning of 
 the term, and the five special classes remain to be considered, 
 the next being the so-called Releasing Ratchets. Such ratchets 
 must be considered primarily with regard to the question of re- 
 lease. When the release is to be effected by hand, various 
 forms of handles or other connections to the pawls are readily 
 devised. In most cases, however, the release is automatically 
 effected, in which event, some mechanical tripping device is 
 required. 
 
 The resisting force in such gearing is practically the same as 
 the force required for release. It is applied usually by weights, 
 .springs, steam or air pressure, etc., and is variously intended to 
 cause the released member to act with a predetermined velocity, 
 either slow or rapid, as may be required. Many millions of releas- 
 ing ratchetshave been made for gun locks, and the various forms 
 of releasing valve gears for steam engines, introduced by Corliss, 
 but first invented by Sickles,* are of this class. In designing 
 releasing valve gears, it is important that the valves should be 
 closed quickly 3'et without sudden shock, and hence some form 
 of buffer is essential. It is in the various devices for applying the 
 force, for releasing, and for cushioning the released force that 
 the many gears differ from each other. The original form of 
 Corliss valve gear, and the modified form of Spencer & Inglis, 
 are but little used on the continent, but these are well known, 
 and hence examples will be given of some of the numerous 
 modified trip valve gears which have been put into practical use. 
 
 Example /.— A'alve gear by Cail & Co., Paris, Fig. 739. a is the driven 
 piece, a sector with one tooth, fast to the valve stem ; b is the pawl ; c the 
 arm, loose on the hub oi a;b' is the pawl spring; d the releasing cam. The 
 
 t his first patent for a "trip 
 
 exerted by a spiral spi 
 
 3y an air dash pot, s 
 s determined by the gt 
 Example ^.— Valve Ge 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ■ 163 
 
 closed by steam pressure acting upon small auxiliary steam cylinders on the 
 rods a, the cushion being provided by air buffers as in the preceding exam- 
 ple. There are double pawls <J, ^, with "dead" tooth profiles, faced with 
 steel ; c is the pawl carrier, moved back and forth by the rod c' ; b' b' are the 
 triggers, and d d the releasing stops, the latter shown in three successive 
 positions ; ^ is a guide rod. The rod c receives motion from an eccentric on 
 the engine shaft. 
 
 Example 3.— Valve Gear by Powel, of Rouen, Fig. 741.* This is a form of 
 rod ratchet gearing with bolt pawl. Here ^ ' " 
 
 ledHver 
 
 bolt b and its spring a: 
 
 ried. The rod a 
 
 loved up and down by ai 
 
 The use of releasing ratchets in valve gear of steam engines 
 is very old, being found in the old Newcomen pumping engines, 
 and in the Cornish engine a similar gear is used to-day, while 
 in recent times trip valve gearing of various designs have come 
 into extended use, and some of the forms are shown in Figs. 
 670 and 671, not only for closing the valves, but also for open- 
 ing them. These latter valve gears are intended to be operated 
 by direct connection with the piston movement, while those in 
 the preceding examples are operated from revolving crank 
 shafts. 
 
 Releasing gears which are to be operated by reciprocating 
 members, are sometimes constructed on quite a different prin- 
 ciple, viz. : that of a weighted lever in nearly unstable equi- 
 librium, so that it can be caused to fall to the right or left by 
 means of a slight thrust, and so operate a releasing member. A 
 form which was formerly much used, in which the lever is 
 carried on a horizontal axis, is shown in Fig. 742. 
 
 Fig. 742. 
 
 Fig. 743- 
 
 When the weight G is in the vertical position i . 2, the pres- 
 sure acts directly downward upon the axis, the journal friction 
 acting as a ratchet. The form is sometimes used on planing 
 machines, screw-cutting machines, etc. 
 
 Another form is shown in Fig. 743. Here the pressure is due 
 to a spring, acting through a link 3-2 upon 2.1. 
 
 * Further details of this and t 
 trian Report on the Expositio: 
 Riedler, Vienna, 1879. 
 
 A third form is that used in Shanks' planing machine, Fig. 744. 
 ' '■'--■- case the lever, with 
 
 I . 
 
 its axis a, is at right angles 
 to b, and the latter is pro- 
 vided with a roller. The 
 limit of measurement of « 
 is between 1' and 2". 
 
 The forms of tumbling 
 ratchets described in I 239, 
 may be adapted as releas- 
 ing gears, but it must not be 
 
 forgotten that in such me- .j_., -• 
 
 chanisms provision must 
 
 be made for the middle Fig. 744- 
 
 position of the ratchet. 
 
 A fourth form of tumbling gear, of which, indeed, there are 
 many varieties, is the so-called "loop" of Hofmann's valve 
 gear. Fig. 745. The loop a is made in the arc of a circle from a 
 
 Fig. 745- Fig. 746. 
 
 centre at 2, (?i is a heavy roller, with additional weight suspended 
 at d' . When the loop or curved link is in either of the positions, 
 3o or 2)', the weight acts to continue the motion in the direction 
 in which it started until the limit of travel is reached. 
 
 A swinging arm b may be substituted for the slot and roller, 
 Fig. 746, and it will be seen that during the movement from the 
 po«i;tion 2q 3q to 2' 3^ the tumbling action will take place and the 
 arm a be carried over. The similarity to the previous tumbling 
 gear will be apparent. If 2 . 3 be made infinitely long, the loop will 
 become straight and the two forms will coincide. Hofmann has 
 made the analogy to a ratchet train more complete by placing a 
 ratchet so as to engage with the point 3 in the positions 3o and 3'', 
 the release being made at the proper time by means of a cataract.* 
 
 In some cases it is desirable to make a gearing which shall be 
 released by the action of a very small force. For this purpose 
 a second releasing gear may be introduced, itself being readily 
 released, and by its action permitting a blow to fall upon the 
 trigger of the main gear. Such a device forms a releasing gear 
 
 " " , , „ , , Is shown in the hai 
 
 of the second order. Such an example 
 trigger of a rifle. t Relea.sing ratchet geari 
 
 ngs of higher orders 
 the Jacquard loom. 
 
 also found in textile machinery, a 
 also in the striking gear of tower clocks and of repeating watches 
 Another example is found in the relay of the Morse telegraph, be- 
 sides many other applications which will be considered hereafter. 
 
 ?2S3. 
 Checking Ratchets. 
 
 Checking ratchets are used in a great variety of machines, t 
 their principal applications are found 
 in machinery for hoisting and lower- 
 ing heavy loads, as in mine lifts, ele- 
 vators, and the like, to guard against 
 accidents in case of the breakage of 
 the 2 ropes. In the opinion of the 
 writer these devices have not been as 
 yet regarded as thej^ should be, 
 merely special cases of ratchet con- 
 struction, and as such capable of util- 
 izing all the various principles here- ■ 
 tofore considered. When examined 
 in this light their study will be greatly 
 facilitated. 
 
 As a scheme of a general system for 
 checking ratchets a rod friction ratchet 
 may serve. Fig. 747, in which the rod 
 a is held stationary, the loaded mem- 
 ber d carries the ratchet, and the pawl 
 c and friction block b are held out of 
 
 Fig. 747- 
 
164 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 engagement by the releasing lever /, and rod c as long as the 
 hoisting connections^ and //, are under stress. If the tension is 
 released, the ratchet is thrown into gear and the parts clamped. 
 If a toothed ratchet is used instead of a friction device, the 
 block b is omitted. According to the manner in which the 
 various constructive details from a to h are arranged, we obtain 
 the various systems of checking ratchets which have found 
 practical application. 
 
 A collection of such devices was exhibited by the Industrial 
 Association (Verein fur Gewerbfleiss) in 1879.* More than 80 
 designs were shown, of which only a few can be described. 
 Many of the devices were rather designs for improved construc- 
 tion as regards strength and rigidity, rather than examples of 
 mi ';hanical ingenuity. 
 
 _ 1 1 most cases the clamping action takes place upon the up- 
 right timbers of the shaft ; sometimes guide ropes are used. 
 The greater number of designs shown used friction clamps, 
 those of the type of Fig. 724 being shown, the thumb pawl 
 being roughened, however, or finely toothed. The one which 
 showed the most evidence of careful constructive design in 
 accordance with the principles previously laid down in I 248, 
 was that of Hoppe, shown, as attached to each side of the 
 hoisting car, in Fig. 748. 
 
 Fig. 748. 
 
 The form of friction pawl used is similar to that shown in 
 Fig- 713' there being four pawls on each side of the car, or eight 
 in all. The clamping action takes place upon the guide bars a, 
 made of T iron, as shown. At i are the guide rods between b 
 and a ; at 2, the double clamp blocks of hardened steel, which 
 are connected at 5 to the coupling rods e, e. The actuating 
 springy is a torsion spring (see Fig. VII, p. 19 ; also Fig. VIII, 
 p. 19), secured to the roof of the car at^, g, and operated by 
 the releasing gear 7^ at 8, and transmitting action from 6 to 5 by 
 the rods e, e, the connection being made by the links 9 to the 
 double chain in such a manner that the arm/" cannot be drawn 
 too far out of position. The proper adjustment of the pawl 
 arms is obtained by the keys on the rods c, c. Hoppe has taken 
 into consideration the fact that the angle a, see (233), must not 
 pass beyond certain limits, or too great pressure would be ex- 
 erted on the frame d, d, and hence has provided stops in the 
 frame for the tiavel of the pawls c, c. The parts are so propor- 
 tioned that a load of double that ever placed upon the car would 
 be supported by the friction clamps before there would be an 
 appreciable elastic yielding of the frame. The adjustments of 
 the rods c, c provide for the change of relations due to wear. 
 This apparatus does not bring the lowering car to a sudden 
 standstill in case of breakage of the hoisting gear, but the shock 
 is avoided by the gradual action of the friction brakes. 
 
 By using the author's device, shown in Fig. 717, at 3, the 
 value of a might be maintained constant, or by proper construc- 
 tion of the guides the wedge friction pawls, similar to Fig. 718, 
 may be used ; the blocks acting on both sides of the guide. 
 This would reduce the stress upon the frame very materially. 
 
 The system of brakes used upon railway trains are really 
 
 forms of friction checking ratchets. The shocks due to sudden 
 stoppage are also to be avoided, and if the wheels are braked 
 too firmly the sliding action is simply transferred to the rails. 
 
 Continuous Running Ratchets. 
 Continuous ratchets (? 235, No. 4) consist of such combina- 
 tions of pawl mechanism as act to drive a member iu a given 
 direction with practically a continuous determinate motion. 
 This may be effected by combining two single running ratchets 
 in such a manner that they both act upon the same wheel, one 
 pawl attached to the arm c, which is stationary, the other swing- 
 ing about the axis i, Fig. 749, this being a very common form. 
 
 Fig. 749- 
 
 In this case 3 . 2 is the checking pawl, and 3^ . 1' the driving 
 pawl. A movement of the driving pawl, if a little more than 
 one tooth space, moves the wheel one tooth ; a little more 
 movement than two spaces moves it two teeth ; and a regular 
 back and forth motion gives a forward movement at intervals of 
 a single pitch space. 
 
 If this device is made with step ratchets, as in \ 243, the pitch 
 may be subdivided into 2, 3, 4 or more parts, and for some pur- 
 poses, such as saw-mill feed motions, this is very desirable. 
 
 If the arm which carries the feed pawl swings about an axis 
 4, removed from i, Fig. 749 b, there will be a movement be- 
 tween the pawl and the point of application 2 on the wheel ; 
 while in the arrangement shown at a the motion of the two is 
 identical, and hence no wear occurs. 
 
 The two pawls may be connected so that both of them be- 
 come drivers. If they are arranged so that their movement is 
 alternate, as in Fig. 750 a, the wheel will be moved forward for 
 
 Fig. 750. 
 
 the movement of the lever in each direction, giving a double- 
 acting ratchet motion, the so-called Lagarousse Ratchet.* This 
 may be also accomplished in various ways, as in Fig. 750 b. 
 For any movement of the arm which is less than i and more 
 than % the pitch, the wheel will be moved i pitch for each 
 vibration, and hence for a half vibration a feed of a half tooth 
 may be obtained. Step pawls may also be used with these de- 
 vices to obtain further subdivisions. 
 
 If, in Fig. 750 a, we hold the lever c-^ c^. "gidly, and instead 
 permit the arm d to vibrate with the same angle about the axis 
 4, the wheel moving with it, we obtain the same relative feed 
 motion. t This has been used by Thomson in a telegraph 
 apparatus. 
 
 ♦Berliner Verhandlungen, 1879, 
 Safety Checking Devices for Min 
 Huttenmann, Z., 1879, p. 361. 
 
 * Named from th^ 
 Arch. Hydraulique 
 t This is the ordinary kinematic 
 
 -, M. de la Garousse, and used in 1737. Belidor, 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 165 
 
 A continuous ratchet gearing may be so arranged that back- 
 ward movement of the wheel is utilized to compel a uniform 
 division of motion. 
 
 This is the case with the feed motion used by Gebriider 
 Mauser, of Oberndorf, in their revolvers, Fig. 751. In this case 
 
 in and out of gear. A simple method of accomplishing this re- 
 sult is to use a single tooth wheel for the driver, and operate 
 the pawl in the same manner as in Fig. 753. 
 
 Before the single tooth 5 begins to drive the wheel a, the arm 
 6 lifts the pawl b and lowers it into the next sjjace just as the 
 tooth ceases to drive. In this case the usual gear tooth profiles 
 may be used. Still better is the "dead" tooth profile of Fig. 
 754, in which the entrance and withdrawal of the pin tooth 
 both lock the wheel while the pawl is being lowered. 
 
 This form may also be used for rack feed movement, Fig. 755. 
 In this case the profile of the pin tooth is formed in several 
 arcs ; 2' 2'" being struck from 3, and 2," 2'" and 2' a'v being 
 the paths of the corners of the space (see § 203). 
 
 By using the cylinder ratchet, as shown in Fig. 696, the num- 
 ber of parts can be reduced, since the driving gear and check- 
 ing pawl may be combined in the same member. The resulting 
 forms, Figs. 756 to 758, are variously called: Maltese Cross; 
 
 a crown wheel is used (see Figs. 677 and 678). The wheel is at 
 a ; b\& the feed pawl, jointed at 3 to the slide c, the whole being 
 carried in the frame d. The zig-zag profile is formed in the rim 
 of the crown wheel, one portion being parallel to the axis, the 
 other spirally inclined, so that the angle of thrust is (t < 90° — 
 <h and > ^ (? 237, cases 4 and 5). The movement of the pawl 
 produces a backward movement of the wheel. It should be 
 noted that at 2' and 2" steps are made in ends of the tooth pro- 
 files in order to guide the pawl into the proper path and keep it 
 from reversing. 
 
 The anchor ratchet of Fig. 682 may be used for a feed motion, 
 as in Fig. 752, in which there is also the reverse action of the 
 wheel, in accordance with the notation of § 237. Here the wheel 
 is at a and the anchor at b' b" . When the latter is moved into 
 the position shown by the dotted lines, the wheel is moved 
 backward Yz pitch, and the return vibration completes the pitch 
 movement In order that the anchor shall enter the teeth pro- 
 perly, the movement should be quick, especially at the entrance 
 of the pawl into the space. This is well obtained by electro- 
 magnetic action. 
 
 Fig. 756. 
 
 Fig. 757- 
 
 Fig. 758. 
 
 Geneva Stop, used in Swiss watches, in which case one of the 
 tooth sections is filled out ; or after Redtenbacher we may call 
 them single tooth gears, although this is hardly correct, for the 
 general form of Fig. 758 may have several teeth, and a second 
 tooth is dotted in Fig. 756. 
 
 A great number of variations may be made of these cylinder 
 ratchet motions. An interesting form is the intermittent gear- 
 ing of Brauer, Fig 759 * 
 
 Continuous Ratchets with Locking Teeth. 
 
 If it is desired to use ratchets according to the method given 
 
 Fig. 749, additional parts must be devised to move the pawl 
 
 Fig 760 
 
 The pinion a is the driver, and the wheel b is driven, and 
 between the passage of each tooth of the pinion the driven 
 gear remains stationary for a short space, about \ of the pitch. 
 The points of the teeth of the driven wheel here act as ratchet 
 teeth, in a similar manner to the arc of repose of the single 
 ratchet gearing of Fig. 756. 
 
 The cylinder ratchet gearing of Fig. 760 is similar to that 
 shown in Fig. 700, and is used in the counting mechanism of 
 English gas meters. In Fig. 761 is a modified spiral ratchet of 
 
 the same general type as Fig. 702, with only a portion of the 
 path of ($1 in a spiral, and a similar variation of Fig. 704 is shown 
 in Fig. 762. 
 
 * Royal German Patent, No. 5583, 1S78. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ?2S6. 
 Locking Ratchets. 
 
 l,ocking ratchets include all the numerous devices by which 
 the parts of a mechanism are firmly held against the action of 
 external forces, and yet readily and definitely released when 
 desired (see ^ 235, No- 5) ; thus the various clutch couplings are 
 inclvided, also car-couplers and similar devices. 
 
 Locking ratchets occur frequently in the mechanism of fire- 
 arms, especially to prevent the danger of premature discharge, 
 etc. The great refinements which have been introduced in such 
 ■weapons during the last ten years include especially the appli- 
 cation of various forms of ratchets. The following single in- 
 stance will serve to illustrate : 
 
 The mechanism of the well-known Mauser revolver may be 
 divided into two series ; one to effect the discharge and the 
 other to unload or remove the empty shell from the chamber. 
 The fir&t may be called the discharging mechanism, the second 
 the unloading mechanism. We then have the following details : 
 
 A. Discharging Mechanism. 
 This includes the revolving chamber, barrel, hammer, spring 
 and accompanying smaller parts, giving as combinations : 
 
 1. Hammer, spring-rod and trigger = ratchet rack, as Fig. 
 
 659- 
 
 2. Spring-rod and trigger, acting as locking ratchet for the 
 
 above, as Fig. 664. 
 
 3. Spring-rod, pawl and revolving chamber = continuous 
 
 ratchet with crown wheel and bolt pawl, as Fig. 751. 
 
 4. Securing pawl and revolving chamber = locking ratchet, 
 
 as Fig. 677. 
 
 5. Revolving chamber and pawl, forming a ratchet gearing 
 
 with limited travel. 
 
 6. Tumbling ratchet and securing pawl = ratchet gearing 
 
 for three positions. Fig. 669. 
 
 7. Catch on the axis of hammer = locking ratchet, as Fig. 
 
 69s. 
 
 8. Trigger guard and pin = locking ratchet and stationary 
 
 pawl. 
 
 9. Checking-plug and trigger = locking ratchet with sta- 
 
 tionary pawl. 
 
 10. Rifled barrel and bullet = screw and nut. 
 
 B. Unloading Mechanism. 
 
 This includes an axial slide which catches under the rim oi 
 
 the empty cartridge shell to withdraw it, actuated by a toothed 
 
 sector and revolving clamp and axis called the ring clamp. 
 
 These include the following combinations : 
 
 11. Unloading slide and sector = slide with rack and pi 
 
 ion, Fig. 381. 
 
 12. Axis of revolving chamber, with pawl to prevent end- 
 
 long motion, = locking ratchet gear, as Fig. 695. 
 
 13. Ring clamp, bariel and chamber bearing =^ locking rat- 
 
 chet gear with stationary pawl, as Fig. 654. 
 
 14. Ring clamp axis and axis of securing pawl = locking 
 
 ratchet, as Fig. 701, forming with (13) a locking ratchet 
 gear of the second order. 
 
 15. Ring clamp axis upon the reverse motion of the ring 
 
 clamp forms, with the axis of the securing pawl, a 
 locking ratchet gear, which combines with (4) to form 
 a similar gear of the second order. 
 
 16. Securing pawl acts as a catch for the axis of the ring 
 
 clamp in the axial direction to form a locking ratchet 
 gear, as Fig. 695, forming also with (4) a similar gear of 
 the second order. 
 
 17. Ring clamp hub and axis of securing pawl = locking 
 
 ratchet, as Fig. 695, and with (4) gives one of the 
 second order. 
 
 This analysis shows that in the Mauser revolver there are 17 
 mechanical combinations ; these are composed of 26 pieces. 
 Classified, these are as follows : i releasing ratchet, i continuous 
 ratchet, 2 driving ratchets, 11 locking ratchets, of which four 
 are of the second order, i screw motion and i slide motion. 
 
 A very important application of locking ratchet mechanism 
 is found in the signal apparatus of Saxby & Farmer for use on 
 railways, and made in Germany by Henning, Busing and others. 
 This includes manj' ratchets of higher orders, reaching to the 
 tenth, twelfth, or even higher. When this is used in combina- 
 tion with the electric systems of Siemens & Halske, as in the 
 block system, we have the further combination of two systems 
 of the higher order with each other. 
 
 A branch of locking ratchets which exhibits a great variety 
 of applications is found in the different kinds of locks, such as 
 are used for securing doors, gates, chests, etc. These extend 
 from the most primitive forms, made of wood, to the most re- 
 
 fined productions of exact mechanism, and their study possesses 
 an historic and ethnographic interest in addition to their me- 
 chanical value. 
 
 A door forms itself a ratchet combination ; the door being 
 the part b, the strike the part c, and the bolt or other piece 
 which keeps it from being opened is the part a ; doors with 
 latch bolts being running ratchets, and doors with dead bolts 
 being stationary ratch- 
 ets. A simple lift latch 
 and door, as the furnace 
 door shown in Fig. 763, 
 is really a section of 
 a crown ratchet wheel 
 with running ratchet 
 gearing. 
 
 A door with sliding 
 dead bolt, as used on 
 common room doors, is 
 a similar section of rat- 
 chet gear with station- 
 ary ratchet. 
 
 In key locks, the key 
 is the releasing member 
 of the ratchet train, and also serves to actuate the bolt after it 
 is released. The key and ratchet mechanism are arranged in 
 most ingenious manners, so that numerous permutations can be 
 made to effect the release. 
 
 Some of the most important systems of lock construction are 
 given as examples : 
 
 Fig. 763- 
 
 releasing- and actuating member. 
 
 Ejcam/ile2.—'t\\e Chubb lock. Fig. 765, which is always made with a dead 
 bolt, forms with the door and door frame a ratchet gearing similar to Fig. 
 691. The bolt is secured by means of several ratchets of precision, as in Fig. 
 706, and is moved by a ratchet as Fig. 755- The key, the axis 4, and the vari- 
 ous bittings of the key form a system of pawls. The whole is a ratchet sys- 
 tem of the second order with precision gear. 
 
 Examples.— The Bramah lock. Fig. 766a and Fig. 766 b, is 
 structed. In tl 
 
 ico 
 
 
 [lo 
 
 
 lo 
 
 -~T 
 
 ao 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 r.& 
 
 ?cL 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 pt 
 
 differently con- 
 lis case the dead 
 Dolt IS actuated through the 
 medium of a cylindrical driving 
 ratchet gear, which does not 
 contain the mechanism of se- 
 curity, the latter being in a 
 distinct portion of the lock, 
 Fig. 766 b. This consists of a 
 number of sliding precision 
 pawls, as Fig. 707, the number 
 
 5). The member a of Fig. 707 
 is here made in the form of a 
 ring with internal teeth, se- 
 cured to the escutcheon a by 
 screws. The key is a prismatic 
 adjuster of the slides, and the 
 whole is a locking mechanism 
 of the third order with ratchets 
 'ides to their 
 
 Example ^.— The Yale lock, Fig. 767 a and A, is also a system in which the 
 mechanism of security is separated from the bolt mechanism. This is 
 again a system of the third order, with ratchets of precision. The key is a 
 flat prism (corrugated in recent locks) and serves to place precision bolts, or 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 167 
 
 piu tumblers in proper line, and also operate the bolt. The figi 
 the method of connecting the cam h^ to the plug a. 
 
 The so called combination locks are locking ratchets with nrecis- 
 operated without a key by being placed successively in 
 release in accordance with a previously selected series of 
 
 
 ;he fourth order, 
 i, especially the 
 
 Escapements — Their Varieties. 
 
 Escapements may fairly be considered as among the most im- 
 portant mechanical devices, since it is by their means that the 
 elementary forces are used to regulate mechanical work. For 
 this purpose they are used in the greatest variety, all forming 
 ratchet devices in which the driven member is alternately re- 
 leased and checked. The arc, angle or path through which the 
 driven member passes between the interval of release and check 
 is called the "range" of the escapement. During the passage 
 over this range there elapses a definite amount of time, which 
 may be called the "period" of movement of the escapement. 
 This is followed by an amount of time when the driven member 
 is stationary, called the period of rest. The sum of the two 
 forms the "time of oscillation." The range and the period of 
 oscillation may be (a) constant, {b) periodically variable, or (r)' 
 variable at will. 
 
 We therefore have 
 
 a, Uniform escapements, 
 
 b, Periodical " 
 
 c, Variable " 
 and these will be briefly considered. 
 
 I 25S. 
 
 Uniform Escapements. 
 
 If, in ordinary running ratchet, Fig. 768, we have the wheel a. 
 
 The most general examples of uniform escapement are found 
 in watches. In these impulses are isochronous, and obtained 
 from the inertia of a vibrating body. The wheel a is called the 
 escape wheel. The vibrating member, or balance wheel, makes 
 its oscillatious in nearly equal times for great or small vibra- 
 tions. If, therefore, in a watch escapement, the time of the fall 
 of the pawl is less than the time of oscillation, the most impor- 
 tant requirement is fulfilled, namely, that for uniform periods 
 of time the same number of teeth of the escape wheel shall pass, 
 and the corresponding angle may then be used as a measure of 
 time. A given amount of work may aiso be abstracted from the 
 motive power and used to produce the impulse. These impor- 
 tant points have been fulfilled in the design of escapements, 
 and it has been made possible to measure time with a great 
 degree of accuracy. When the highest accuracy is demanded 
 the greatest care must be given to the construction and execu- 
 tion, and to the reduction of friction and compensation of the 
 balance. 
 
 In the case of watches the duty of the impelling force is 
 simply that of overcoming the resistance of the mechanism, 
 the function of the escapement being to provide against any 
 acceleration of the rate motion, and the impulse which is re- 
 quired to operate the escapement may be considered as a por- 
 tion of the resistance of the mechanism. 
 
 A systematic discrimination between the various kinds of 
 watch escapements will show that they vary as to the checking 
 ratchet device, the impelling device, the release and the accel- 
 erating device. We may have Simple or Compound escape- 
 ments of the lower or higher orders. Some examples are here 
 
 A. Simple Escapenienls. 
 
 
 pelling device is t 
 leasing device is a 
 impelled by the n: 
 
 
 
 I attached tc 
 
 Fig. 768. 
 
 impelled by a weight or other force, and suppose the pawl b, 
 lifted and dropped quickly, as by the arm (5„ the wheel will 
 move one space, and an escapement will have occurred. In 
 this case the range will be one pitch. If, after a definite time, 
 this operation is again and again repeated, we shall have a 
 uniforrn escapement. In mechanism the releasing and check- 
 ing action is produced mechanically and not by hand, the im- 
 pulse being obtained from the movement of the wheel. 
 
 a flat spring 3. The im- 
 I as a pendulum. The re- 
 when it swings to the left, 
 ' e pawl by means of a 
 scconu running raicnet -dt 5. iii c- is a stop for the pawl b. At 5' is the ac- 
 celerator which, for each tooth of the escape wheel a, swings from 5' to 5". 
 As it returns, the pawl b engages with the tooth which hasjust leftthe point 
 5". The spring b' permits the releasing tooth 5 to pass back during the 
 return oscillation. The balance wheel can swing freely beyond 5" and back 
 without engaging with the escape wheel, hence the name "free" escape- 
 
 * The ancient and modern Egyptian locks, also those of a: 
 Rome, India and China, contain the principle of runninp- rat 
 pawls, actuated by a key pushed directly into the k 
 with pin precision pawls, is quite similar to the Yale lock it 
 though very different in construction. Ancient Roman locks, louncl in 
 Pompeii, are similar in principle. Wooden locks are still in use in China, 
 Persia, Bulgaria, Russia and Southern Italy, also in the Faroe Islands and 
 Iceland. At the suggestion of the author. Professor Wagner, of Tokio, suc- 
 ceeded m inducing some Japanese lockmakers to make a very complete and 
 intelligible collection of native locks for the kinematic cabinet of the Royal 
 Technical High School at Berlin. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 r is at 4, acting upon the impelling pawl 
 
 'verge " escapement is sira 
 
 s longer and curved. The simp 
 with the preceding is due to the fact that th 
 are made in one member It will be noticed that the 
 of the escape wheel into the space, causes a slight re 
 due to the fact that * is really a tumbling ratchet gear, 
 been called duplex by its Knglish inventor, although ' 
 properly a double wheel escapement, although the t\ 
 
 ornately by the pendulum; for example, the arm 5), being 
 
 dotted position, lifts the pawl out of gear, and the weight of 
 
 (sometimes assisted by a spring), giv ' '- ■ ■' 
 
 a "dead"' pawl action for checking, and 
 ,n for impelling. (See Cases 5 and 7, I 237). 
 im d. The releasing arms 3' . 5' and 3" . 5" 
 
 * A watch escapement of the third order has recently been designed by A. 
 E. MUUer, of Passau. This is made with a cylindei ratchet, as Fig. 699*, 
 between the arm and the escape wheel. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Example 5.— Graham's Escapement, Fig. 775. The 
 similar to the preceding. The connection 5 between the 
 pendulum d, is different, and the arm 1^3 does not come f 
 and the pallets 2' and 2" slide upon the teeth while th 
 stopped. An earlier form of pallets for this escapement: 
 6', (called Clement's Anchor, from Clement, 1680 ; but desci 
 in 1666). This form produces a brief revi 
 
 Example 9.— The form of ratchet of Fig. 684 is used in Lepaute's escape- 
 ment, which was really invented by the watchmaker Caron, afterwards 
 Marquis Beauniarchais. 
 
 Example /o.— Cylinder Escapement, Fig. 776. This is made from the 
 cylinder ratchet of Fig. 700, the impelling surfaces being divided between 
 the anchor and the teeth of the escape wheel. The cylinder b is attached to 
 the axis of the balance wheel, and the wide spacing of the teeth of the escape 
 vpheel permits a correspondingl3' wide amplitude of oscillation. If we im- 
 agine the pallets of Graham's anchor to be formed betwc 
 
 Example 12. — Power Escapei 
 
 At a b\ q and a b-i c-i are ordinary . uim 
 which can be released and engaged by 
 mechanism is either a substitute for or 
 (balance wheel, pendulun, etc ) of a w£ 
 
 intended to control th '= ^ .^ - - 
 
 Ci and the desceudir 
 
 ircles (as, indeed, i 
 ntobr - -'-'■- 
 
 
 them), tl 
 
 :ylinder" 
 
 ratchets.* The form of the pallets causes a reverse movement, and in the 
 old watches using a balance with its centre of gravity in the axis of oscilla- 
 tion, without any assisting spring action, this reverse movement was a 
 necessity, which accounts for the long and extended use of this form of 
 escapement. Toward the end of the fifteenth century the hair spring was 
 introduced by Hele, in the form of a hog's bristle, and in 1665 Hayghens 
 made the steel hair spring, which made the construction of the modern 
 chronometer possible. The crown escapement is easily modified so as to 
 remove the reverse action, as was done by the author in 1864. We then have 
 s Fig. 699. The modified • • . 
 
 e practically hyperboloidal in form.t 
 
 C Power Escapements. 
 
 In the case of -watch escapements the impelling force is only 
 ■used to overcome the resistance of the -watch mechanism. 
 Escapements can also be used to regulate greater forces, such 
 .as are intended to perform useful -work, and these may be 
 
 ;nt for a Reciprocating,Movement, 
 :, , ;„„ „f^i,<.f., tiie pawls b^ 
 
 identical with the legulating devi 
 ,ch escapement. The escapement 
 zinging arm Cbymea '' 
 
 ratchet system rfi rfn 5 (a; 
 the arm Cj. 
 The action is as follow 
 
 ), by r 
 
 IS of t: 
 
 slide e 
 
 11 from 8 by 
 in the 
 
 o the position 5' (in the 
 if the trigger at 6", th 
 
 When the parts are in the position show 
 I'heel a to the right moves the arm q by means ot 
 ■- — " *'ips the pawl d« and shifts the engagement 
 small figure to the left). This action, by 
 11UW3 in the pawl b« and stops the wheel a. At 
 )ut of gear by the connections rfj, 6' and 7', and 
 
 r, to It 
 
 again 
 
 inal p 
 
 eel 
 
 The preceding escapement can be readily converted into a 
 double acting one by introducing a second ratchet-wheel toothed 
 in the opposite direction, with proper pawl on q and trigger 
 connections to (/., ; the other portions would remain the same. 
 This escapement appears to be new, and many important appli- 
 cations -will suggest themselves. 
 
 Periodicai, Escapements. 
 
 A great variety of periodical escapements are to be found in 
 the striking mechanism of clocks and repeating watches. The 
 entire period is the revolution of the hour hand, and if the half 
 hours are struck the order will be 
 
 making in all 90 strokes in the twelve hours. A fan regulator 
 is used to cause the strokes to follow each other uniformly. 
 There are two systems of escapement in use for this purpose, . 
 the German and the English, the latter also used for repeaters. 
 An essential piece of the latter, the so-called "snail," has been 
 shown in Fig. 688 ; its function is to control the number of 
 strokes. Further subdivisions cannot be here discussed, but it 
 must be remembered that the striking arm is itself a ratchet 
 mechanism.-^-' 
 
 Important applications of periodical escapements are found 
 in the self-acting spinning mule, and both these and the clock 
 striking mechanism are examples of power escapements. 
 
 The mechanism in Piatt's mule is here briefly shown. Fig. 
 780, a and 6. The shaft i is required to make rapid turns 
 
 called power escapements. Alarm and striking clocks are of 
 this class, and there are numerous other forms. The following 
 example will serve to illustrate : 
 
 g been invented by 
 ,jo ; also by Heinrich 
 n -Wyck about 1370, and applied to a pendulum bv Huyghens. The oldest 
 tower clock in Nuremberg, built about 1400, has such an escapement. 
 
 t In the Kinematic cabinet of the Royal Technical High School there is a 
 schematic series of models of clock and watch escapements. 
 
 through 90° at intervals of different lengths of time. The wheel 
 a is an escape wheel with teeth in four concentric rings, I, II, 
 III, IV (compare Fig. 686], each ring having one tooth. The 
 other side of the wheel a is shown in Fig. b, where is the rat- 
 chet chain a d e. When a is released, the pressure of d at 5' 
 moves it slightly and brings the running friction wheel e into 
 contact, thus driving a through a quarter revolution, toward the 
 close of which the pawl d again enters into engagement. 
 
 1 R^dtenbacher 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The recesses in a permit the friction wheel to run free when We have already intimated that the various forms of coup- 
 
 a is at rest. This is evidently a form of ratchet gearing in it- lings may be considered as varieties of ratchet gearing. The 
 self The order of escapements at 2 is as follows : , ; 
 
 I II, II III, III IV, IV I. 
 This is controlled by a second escapement, shown in Fig. 781. 
 
 Fig. 781. 
 
 The pawl b of Fig. 780 is connected by the rod/" to the beam a, 
 as shown. This mechanism is a step ratchet of four steps. The 
 steps are the pawls b^, b.,, b^, and the stop on the frame c ; giving 
 the positions 21, 211, 21", 2iv. The action takes place in the four 
 following periods : 
 
 1. Drawing and spinning — a checked at 21 
 
 2. Stretching and twisting " " 211 
 
 3. Holding and spun thread " " 2ni 
 
 4. Winding and returning " " 2iv 
 
 The succession of movements is as follows : At the termina- 
 tion of the first period a projection on the carriage strikes the 
 pawl b^ at 5'. The step lever, which is heavier on the right end 
 than on the left, moves from position I to position II, in which 
 it is held by the pawl b.,: this, by means of the rod/, places the 
 pawl b of Fig. 780 in the position 3 II, thus starting the second 
 period. 
 
 At the close of the second period the pawl b^ is released, the 
 lever falls to the position III, shifting the pawl 6 to 3 III, and is 
 held by the pawl b.^ at 2'^'. 
 
 The third period, which is very brief, is terminated by the 
 winder striking 5'", releasing the pawl b^, and the lever as- 
 sumes the position IV, and the rod / moves the pawl b into the 
 position 3 IV, and the fourth period begins. 
 
 During this period the carriage returns, and just before the 
 close of its motion a roller acts upon the portion 5°, bringing 
 the lever back into the first position. This returns the pawl b 
 to its original position 3 I, and the succession is repeated. 
 
 The entire mechanism forms a periodical escapement of the 
 second order, or, when the connections are included, the third 
 order, and when taken together with the ratchet gearing, of the 
 fifth order; while a sixth ratchet mechanism is used for the 
 primary control. 
 
 ?. 259- 
 Adjustable Escapements. 
 
 An escapement can be so arranged that the checked member, 
 after the release, will again be checked by the impulse of its 
 fresh start, thus forming what may be called a self-acting 
 escapement. In a mechanism of this kind, the amplitude of 
 the escapement is dependent upon the amount of displacement 
 which is permitted to the releasing member. This may be 
 made greater or less, and hence such devices ma)- be called 
 adjustable escapements. These devices are likely to play an 
 important part in modern machine design. 
 
 A simple form of adjustable escapement is shown in Fig. 782. 
 This apparatus, designed by the author, is based upon that of 
 Fig. 674. The ratchet wheel a is stationary, being fastened to 
 the frame a^ ; the pav.l is at b, and the link is in the form of a 
 disc c, driven by a force C, and checked by the escapement. At 
 3 . 5 is the guide for the pawl. This can be adjusted by the 
 wheel d, by turning the latter more or less in the direction in 
 which c is impelled. If d is turned so far that the pawl b is 
 lifted out of gear, the force at Cwill set the disc c in motion. 
 This latter carries with it the axis 3 of the pawl, which, by the 
 action of the guide 5, draws the pawl into engagement again, 
 entering the space 2 and checking the disc. In order to avoid 
 an uncertain or irregular action, a brake may be u«ed as at a'''. 
 If the wheel d be moved forward regularly through two, three, 
 or four arcs, the disc cwill be released and checked successively 
 in similar manner. 
 
 It will be evident from the foregoing that the ratchet gearings 
 which form the foundation of the various kinds of adjustable 
 escapements are so varied that the different constructions which 
 may be used are very numerous. Among them may be men- 
 tioned those in which friction ratchets are used, these posses- 
 sing the advantage that the arc of motion of the escapement 
 may be varied from the smallest to the greatest without being 
 dependent upon any especial pitch. 
 
 Fig. 7: 
 
 same is true of the present subject. If it is desired to use this 
 adjustable escapement as a disconnecting coupling, the follow- 
 ing arrangement may be adopted : 
 
 The disc c can be attached to the shaft which is to be set in 
 motion, and the wheel a to the driving shaft, which is supposed 
 to be in continuous revolution and is to be coupled to c. The 
 teeth are then to be so arranged that by the revolution of a the 
 pawl b, disc c and wheel d will be carried around together. 
 When the disconnection is to be made, it is only necessary to 
 hold the wheel d from revolving. The pawl-axis 3 will then 
 move on and cause disengagement of the pawl at 2, and the 
 disc c will come to rest. If the wheel d is then turned a short 
 distance in the direction of rotation the pawl will again be 
 thrown into gear and the parts once more connected. A coup- 
 ling thus formed from an adjustable escapement may be called 
 an adjustable coupling. 
 
 The suitability of the application of toothed ratchet gearing 
 for this purpose is open to question, and indeed toothed gearing 
 is onl}- to be recommended for the lightest service of this kind. 
 In most cases, if "indeed not all, friction couplings are much 
 better. An adjustable friction coupling is to be seen b}' refer- 
 ence to Fig. 448, in which A is the friction wheel, B is the pawl, 
 disguised in the form of a cone, and b is the adjusting member. 
 
 If a combination is made of an adjustable friction coupling 
 with some form of transmission to a machine, such as a rope 
 or belt gearing, so that it is thrown into action when any re- 
 verse motion is attempted, we have what may be termed an 
 automatic friction brake.* 
 
 Fig. 783. 
 
 *See German Patent, E. Laiigen, No. 2 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 171 
 
 Example. — Fig. 783 shows such an ai 
 the pontoou bridge at Cologne. At « is . 
 
 gearii', driven by the shall and pinion a" in the direction to wind up the 
 cord on the drum c'. The drum is fast to tlie chart c, but the cone a is loose 
 on the shaft. The wheel a is connected firmly to the .shaft c, when the cone 
 
 g'agement is effected by the'differential screw" rflind hand wheel d' . The use 
 of the differential screw enables the equisite pressure to be obtained, and 
 also causes the, motion of rf' to be in the same direction as c' when lifting. 
 The friction of the cones binds the parts firmly together, so that a is practi- 
 cally secured to the shai't until d' is revolved backwards, when c' follows by 
 
 pressure being automatically regulated, and the motion at once checked 
 when a' is stopped. 
 
 Other and most important applications of adjustable escape- 
 ments will be given hereafter. It may, however, be here noted 
 that by means of such mechanism the most powerful combina- 
 tions may be controlled with the exercise of a minimum effort. 
 
 I 260. 
 Genkral Rem.\rks upon Ratchet Mechanism. 
 
 Ratchet mechanism, as already discussed, is applicable to a 
 most extensive range of uses ; in this respect far excelling every 
 other form of mechanism. This is plainly due to the fact that 
 ratchets are suited either to produce the effect of relative motion 
 and relative rest. Considered in this light the six preceding 
 classes may be grouped as follows : Common ratchets, checking 
 ratchets, and locking ratchets are those which act to hinder 
 motion, while releasing and continuous ratchets, as well as 
 escapements, act to produce definite motion. The motion pro- 
 duced by ratchets is intermittent while that produced by the 
 forms of mechanism previously considered, such as cranks, 
 friction, or toothed gearing, etc., is continuous. Mechanism for 
 continuous motion may be called "running gearing,"* and 
 practically merges into ratchet gearing. The general province 
 of ratchet gearing has only been partially covered in the pre- 
 ceding pages, where such forms as may strictly be considered 
 machine elements have been included. An exception might be 
 made as to the allied forms of springs, some of which, indeed, 
 were referred to. There is, however, a large number of machine 
 elements of a different kind, which usually involve the continu- 
 ous action of the operative forces in one direction ; these in- 
 clude tension organs, such as ropes, belts, chains, etc., compres- 
 sion organs, fluid connections, and many others, all of which 
 are considered in the following chapters. It will be seen that 
 these may all be so arranged as to be fairly considered ratchet 
 devices also ; as belts or chains may become friction or toothed 
 ratchet gears, and even the valves of fluid connections are really 
 pawls. t 
 
 The pawl mechanism must also be extended to include these 
 classes of machine elements, and their limits thus greatly 
 widened, especially in the case of pressure organs. Examples 
 of this will be found in the pistons and valves of pumps, both 
 for liquids and gases, which may act as checking or locking 
 ratchets, or in hydraulic motors and steam engines as escape- 
 ments, and in gas engines, as escapements and continuous 
 ratchets combined. Similar comparisons may be made of the 
 ratchet principle in the use of accumulators for hydraulic cranes, 
 presses, riveting machines, and the like, and in the cataract for 
 single acting steam engines we find a complete analogy to the 
 ratchet. In these cases we have ratchet systems of the higher 
 orders. The history of the development of these machines is 
 really that of their pawl membeis. 
 
 A very interesting example is that of Fig. 779, in which, if we 
 substitute a flow of steam for the ratchet wheel, we have the 
 arrangement of the single acting high pressure steam engine 
 with Farcy's valve gear. The numerous modifications of escape- 
 ment gear, which are included in the steam engine, have occu- 
 pied the activity of designers down to the present time. A 
 number of the more recent valve gears have been shown in ^ 252, 
 and similar devices are used on engines for steam steering gear, 
 called by the French " moteurs asservis," and such gear also 
 plays an important part in themeihanism of some of the so- 
 called "fish " torpedoes. 
 
 In this manner the applications of pawl ratchets may be ex- 
 tended before our eyes and yet the limitations are not reached, 
 and the further researches are carried the broader and more 
 general does the scope of this division of mechanism become. 
 Not only does it include fluid pressure organs, both liquid and 
 gaseous in a strictly mechanical sense, as in the case of pumps, 
 etc., bwt also when these are considered in a physical sense with 
 regard to their internal stresses. This gives a branch which 
 may be called "physical" ratchet trains, of which the steam 
 boiler is the most important example. In this, when taken in 
 connection with a pipe full of steam, and suitable valves for 
 opening and closing, forming what has been termed a steam 
 
 column,* we have undoubtedly a physical ratchet train in which 
 the particles of vapor are considered as a physical aggregate, 
 which from the higher temperature, are under higher stress. 
 Another example of a physical ratchet train is the apparatus for 
 operation by liquid carbonic acid which has been recently used. 
 
 Electrical accumulators are also instances of physical ratchet 
 trains, as well as some applications of galvanic batteries, the 
 action taking place by make and break of electrical contact. 
 The dynamo-electric machine also becomes a physical running 
 ratchet and the electric motor a physical escapement, the whole 
 forming a physical running gear train. 
 
 Again we may consider a "chemical" ratchet train, such as 
 coal or any fuel, which, during combustion, releases the energy 
 which is stored in it. This may be utilized in numerous 'ways, 
 but for our present considerations, mainly in the production of 
 motion. Chemical action is also included in hot-air engines, 
 and in the operation of telegraph apparatus in a similar sense. 
 
 We may consider the principal factors in a steam motor plant 
 as portions of a ratchet chain, somewhat as follows : 
 
 Chemical ratchet = combustion of fuel, 
 
 Physical " = steam generator, etc., 
 
 Mechanical escapement = steam cylinder and attachments. 
 Mechanical running gear = crank shaft and wheel, 
 
 these four uniting to convert the released energy into mechani- 
 cal motion. If we consider a locomotive engine, we have added 
 to this another running gear in the shape of the driving wheels 
 and rails, while the train and wheels and journal bearings unite 
 to form a combination of the sixth order. 
 
 Another chemical train may be formed by the use of explo- 
 sives, which are released either mechanically, as by percussion 
 or friction, or chemically, by combustion of some auxiliary 
 material. Again, we may have releasing gear of the first, second, 
 or higher orders. 
 
 In the case of most firearms the release is of the second order, 
 since the mechanism of the lock acts upon a fulminate by per- 
 cussion, and the heat of the latter releases the powder. 
 
 If we examine and classify all mechanism of transmission in 
 the above manner, it will be apparent that all forms are included 
 in one or the other of the following classes, viz.: mechanical, 
 physical, or chemical ; these also entering into combinations of 
 the higher orders with each other. 
 
 The steam engine itself, as we have already seen, consists of a 
 driving train of the fourth order. Trains of still higher orders 
 are of frequent occurrence. 
 
 In the recording telegraph, with relay, we have a physical 
 ratchet train of the second order, releasing a mechanical run- 
 ning train and operating a recording train, both physical trains 
 actuated by chemical trains, the whole forming a combination 
 of the fifth order. The ordinary signal mechanism of a railway 
 station, when mechanically operated, is a system of the fourth 
 
 The Westinghouse air brake, not considering the boiler, is a 
 train of the fifth order, consisting of an escapement (steam 
 cylinder), driving ratchet (air cylinder), intermittent ratchet (air 
 vessel), escapement (piston and valve connections), friction 
 checking ratchet (brake gear). If we include furnace and 
 boiler, this becomes a train of the seventh order, and may be 
 still further extended. 
 
 A still more noteworthy example is found in the application 
 of compressed air for the purpose of operating pumping ma- 
 chinery at the bottom of deep mine shafts. In this case we 
 have: 
 
 1. Furnace = chemical ratchet train. 
 
 2. Boiler = physical " " 
 
 3. Steam engine = mechanical escapement train. 
 
 4. Shafting and transmission to " running 
 
 5. Air compressor, " driving ratchet. 
 
 6. Air chamber, " intermittent " 
 
 7. Air cylinder in mine, " escapement train. 
 fS. Water cylinder in mine, " driv'g ratchet " 
 
 The preceding discussion and illustrations of the relationship 
 existing between mechanical, ph}'sical and chemical trains shows 
 the necessity of combining mechanical and technical research, 
 and a complete mechanical training therefore includes these three 
 branches, and also the later science of electro-mechanics. 
 Modern methods of invention require research into all of these 
 lines of science, and the constantly widening field of mechani- 
 cal engineering is thus extending its work, while at the same 
 time gathering into systematic form the many branches of 
 applied mechanical science. 
 
 * See the author's Thee 
 tion was originally made, 
 t See Theoretical Kinematics, p. 458 et 
 
 * See Theoretical Kinematics, p. 4<)3. 
 
 t The system of clocks operated by pne 
 station, designed by Mayrhofer, at Vienna 
 tinct systems. 
 
172 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 TENSION ORGANS CONSIDERED AS MACHINE ELEMENTS. 
 
 arc of contact. This action, -which here opposes the motion of 
 the cord, is in other instances made of great utility. Cord- 
 
 Various Kinds of Tension Organs. 
 The various forms of machine elements which have already 
 been discussed, have been those which offered resistance to 
 forces acting in any given direction, forming more or less rigid 
 constructions. We now have a series of elements which are 
 only adapted to resist tension, and which are very yielding 
 under the action of bending, twisting or thrusting forces. These 
 include a great variety of rope, belt wire, chain belt and similar 
 transmission devices, all of which maj' be included under the 
 general term of Tension Organs. Their usefulness is limited 
 by reason of the fact that they have only the single method of 
 resisting force, but at the same time the element of flexibility 
 permits the use of one and the same organ to transmit power in 
 changing directions, and hence gives rise to many useful com- 
 binations. An especially valuable feature of tension organs in 
 practice lies in the fact that many materials are excellently 
 adapted for such use, and can be more economically applied. 
 
 Fig. 262. 
 Methods of Application. 
 
 A distinction is to be made between "standing and running" 
 tension organs. The first are those used to suspend weights' 
 support bridges, also in the construction of many machine de 
 tails. Examples of such use are found in suspension bridges- 
 pautoon bridges, hawsers, guy ropes, standing tackle, etc- 
 Running tension organs are used in machine design in connec- 
 tion with other machine elements principally for the transmis- 
 sion of motion. 
 
 Running tension organs may again be divided into three 
 classes according to their action in connection with other 
 machine elements. 
 
 According as they are used : 
 
 1. For guiding. 
 
 2. For winding (hoisting or lowering). 
 
 3. For driving, this also being possible by winding and un- 
 
 Combinations of these applications may be made, either with 
 or without the use of standing tension organs. In order to 
 understand the various applications it is desirable to consider 
 some oi the most important combinations, hence these will be 
 briefly examined. 
 
 A 
 
 HI 
 
 ■II / \ LJiJ :; 
 
 Fig. 784. 
 
 I. Guiding. — Fig. 784 shows s.veral combinations, adapted 
 solely for guiding. At a is the so-called stationary pulley, in 
 which a cord, led off at any angle, is used to raise and. lower a 
 load Q. The dotted lines show the position of guides, or in the 
 absence of these the direction of motion is governed by the 
 action of gravity. At b we have the so-called movable pulley, 
 the pulley being combined with the moving piece ; the weight Q 
 is here supported on two parts of rope. Form c is a combina- 
 tion of a and 6, and is the well known tackle block. Form d 
 consists of four sets of form a, and the action of the cords com- 
 pels the piece O to maintain a parallel motion. This is practi- 
 cally applied in Bergner's drawing board. 
 
 In like manner four pulleys of form b may be combined as in 
 form e. This is the old parallel motion for spinning mules, also 
 used as a squaring device for traveling cranes.* 
 
 The use of pulleys and bearings is to reduce friction at the 
 point of bending, and roller bearings, as Fig. 566, are also used, 
 but when the bending surface is well rounded the pulleys may 
 be dispensed with. Fig. 785, at a, b, c, shows such arrangements, 
 the action being the same as before, but with greater friction. 
 The arrangement at a' is a six-fold cord, aod in sail making eye- 
 lets are often used in similar manner, as at e. The friction is 
 great in all such devices, because the cord presses hard upon 
 the point of curvature ; its magnitude increases rapidly with the 
 
 * Form (/is a kinematic inversion of the older form e. 
 
 friction, which is to be considered as a particular case of sliding 
 friction, plays a very important part in constructions, involving 
 tension organs, and will be more fully considered hereafter. 
 
 Fig. 786. 
 
 In Fig. 786 is shown Riggenbach's rope haulage system for 
 ttse on inclined trackways, or so-called "ramps." In this 
 arrangement, the descending car is loaded at the top of the 
 ramp with sufficient water to enable it to draw up the ascending 
 car by the power of its descent. The speed can be controlled 
 by the descending weight, and also a weight acting upon wheels 
 gearing into a rack ^-.f 
 
 2. JVijiding-.— The most important forms of winding gear are 
 
 Fig. 787. 
 
 shown in Fig. 787. At a is the common windlass, also known 
 as a winding barrel or drum, extensively used in many forms of 
 hoisting machinery ; b isa drum for spiral winding of a flat belt, 
 the belt being wound upon itself, and side discs being provided 
 as guides for the belt ; <: is a spirally grooved drum for winding 
 chain ; d is a conical drum, with spiral groove, used in clocks 
 (there called a fusee), also for hoisting machinery with heavy 
 rope ; and ^ is a rope "snail " used on the self-acting mule, to 
 produce the varied speed of the carriage. Many combinations 
 of winding and guiding devices are made, also of winding de- 
 vices with each other. 
 
 Fig. 788. 
 
 Fig. 788 are shown several lowering devices. At a isa 
 ring drum for warehouse use ; the unwinding coil at TV^ 
 lowers the load O, while the cord of the upward moving coun- 
 terweight Q2 is wound on the drum at JK ; a brake can be ap- 
 plied at B, and when necessary, guide pulleys used as at L L. 
 Form b'\s a lowering apparatus for coal trucks, consisting of a 
 combination of two winding coils, with a brake at B. The 
 
 varying from 25 to 57 per ( 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^71 
 
 counterweight Q.^ is iu the form of Poucelet's chain, the action 
 being to vary the rate of descent of the load //'',. Tnis appa- 
 ratus, which is called a "Drop," is much used iu the coal 
 mining districts in England. Form c is Althan's furnace hoist, 
 and consists of two drums with steel bauds. The load of water 
 ^t Qi, by its descent, raises the charge Q.^ to the top of the fur- 
 nace, after which the water is drawn off, and the empty car de- 
 scends and the water vessel is raised to the top again. The 
 speed is controlled by a brake at B, 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 in parallel direction and uniform speed, trolley travel is effected, 
 hoisting or lowering by unequal wind motion. 
 
 In Fig. 792 rt, three drums and one guide sheave are used ; /; is 
 made with four drums and two guide sheaves, a combination 
 used in steering machinery for operating the tiller ; and c con- 
 sists of two drums and two guide sheaves so arrauged that one 
 load is raised as tue other is lowered, this being used in mine 
 hoists. This is also used for iuclines or "ramps." When the load 
 is always to be lowered, the descending load does away with the 
 necessity of auy motive power, and the speed is controlled by a 
 brake. Examples of this form are found in some mines and 
 stone quarries, and in apparatus for loadiug vessels, etc. (See 
 Chap. XXII.) Power-driven cable railways for passenger ser- 
 vice on inclines are sometimes made with two cables, one for 
 driving, and a second for guiding and as an additional security, 
 an example being the old road up the Kahlenberg at' Vienna. 
 When round ropes are used it is desirable to have the drums 
 made with spiral grooves, iu order to reduce the wear on the 
 
 Fig. 7S9. 
 
 Wrapping connections have been used from early times in 
 connection with beams and levers, as shown in Fig. 789 a, and 
 the form b is especially applicable to scroll-sawing machines. 
 Form cis a combination made with very fine steel bands, and 
 used in the Emery weighing machine. 
 
 Combination windlasses are frequently used for lifting weights, 
 some forms being shown in Fig. 790, and other combinations 
 also in complete machines for hoisting, as in Fig. 791. 
 
 In Fig. 790, a is the so-called Chinese, or Differential Wind- 
 lass, consisting of two windlasses and one sustaining combina- 
 tion ; b is another differential combination used in a traveling 
 crane designed by Brown, of Winterthur, the arrangement 
 being intended to obviate the lateral motion- of the load. 
 Another arrangement for the same purpose is shown at c (de- 
 vised by the author in 1862) ; it consists of two drums united in 
 one. The signal arms and automatic safety gates, now so much 
 used on railways, are operated by a combination of winding and 
 guiding members, chains being used on the winding barrels and 
 wire connections on the straight lines. 
 
 Winding and guiding members are much used in cranes and 
 hoisting machinerj^, several combinations being given iu Fig. 
 
 Fig. 792. 
 
 ing the load ; c is a form of bridge crane, using a trolley in 
 combination with two winches. If both winches are operated 
 
 Fig. 793- 
 
 rope. The travel on the drum causes the angle of the rope be- 
 tween W and L to vary, and to prevent this the device shown 
 in Fig. 793 has been used by Riggenbach on the cable incline at 
 Lucerne ; two forms being given. The guide sheaves are trav- 
 ersed by screw motion, the rope being led off in a plane parallel 
 to the axis of the drum, and in the second form two guide 
 sheaves are used for a double cable. 
 
 3. Driving. — This application of tension organs is most ex- 
 tensive. The principal forms are given in Fig. 794. The cap- 
 
 Fig. 794. 
 
 Stan a consists of a hollowed drum, the surface of which is 
 composed of numerous ribs and the rope is given several turns 
 about it. The axial travel produced by the spiral path causes 
 the rope to climb upon the larger diameter, from which it is 
 easily forced back to the middle from time to time by hand. 
 At 6 is a sprocket wheel with Y-shaped sprockets, much used in 
 many modifications ; c is Fowler's drum, a form of grip drum 
 which grasps the rope automatically, and which is discussed 
 more fully hereafter. At rf is a simple rope pulley, partly en- 
 circled by a tension organ under such load as will produce suf- 
 ficient friction to prevent slippage ; <? is a chain wheel with 
 teeth to prevent the slipping of the links. In all five cases the 
 wheel may drive or be driven by the tension organ. 
 
 By combination of driving and guiding devices many useful 
 transmissions are made. 
 
 791. A crane with boom of variable radius is .shown at a ; 6 is 
 a pair of shears operated by three windlasses, U\ and W^ for 
 moving and holding the shear legs, W^ for lioisting and lower- 
 
 FiG. 795. 
 
 _Several_ forms are given in Fig. 795 : a is David's Capstan, 
 with conical windlass, with a ring-shaped guide roller which 
 constantly leads the rope from its travel toward the base of the 
 cone. At i3 is a counter-sheave device, the main sheave 7" being 
 made with two grooves and the counter-sheave set at a corre- 
 sponding angle. _ This gives increased rope contact, which may 
 be multiplied still more by increasing the number of grooves. 
 The couiiter-sheave may also form the second pulley of the 
 combination, as at c ; this is used in rope transmission devices. 
 
 Driving tension devices are often capable of being used to 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 greater advantage than winding devices, since the direction of 
 motion need not be changed and is not limited. For these 
 reasons driving combinations are frequently used instead of 
 drums, as in hoisting machiner}-. Chain sheaves with pockets 
 to receive the ordinary oval link chain are here applied (see 
 l 275), or with flat link chain the sheave engages with the pins 
 of the chain. 
 
 rt^ 
 
 v^i 
 
 Fig. 796. 
 
 Other driving sj'stems are shown in Fig. 796. At a is a double 
 life with water counter-weight. T'is a pulley for round or flat 
 belt ; the weights O-^ and O., are nearly equal, so that a semi- 
 circle of contact is .sufficient to prevent slipping at T, and the 
 friction of contact is sufficient. 
 
 A reference to the Riggenbach cable road gear. Fig. 786, will 
 show a similarity to this device, but in Fig. 786 a braking de- 
 vice is provided at O^ and 0., to protect from accident in case of 
 breakage of the cable. A similar device, using strains at T, has 
 been applied by Green for operating the sluices of the Great 
 Western Canal. A* b Js shown the grip-wheel, which has also 
 been used for caKe driving. In this form the loads may be 
 quite unequal without apprehension of a deep groove cutting 
 in the drum. Koppen's system is shown at c; this uses a round 
 or flat belt with tightening pulleys L, Z,, so that sufficient fric- 
 tion can be obtained for any given difference of loads ; this 
 avoids the unequal action upon the heavily-loaded side of the 
 belt, by producing tension upon the otherwise slack side, and 
 might be applied with advantage to the driving S3'stem of Fig. 
 795 c, requiring but a single tightening pulley, and subjecting 
 the rope to only one kind of bending. 
 
 At d is shown a bucket gear, which combines driving and 
 guiding, and is much used for conveying in mills, grain eleva- 
 tors, etc. If the difference in weight between the sides is slight, 
 the tension organ may be a leather belt, but for heavj' service a 
 chain is used. This device has been in use from a very early 
 period for well buckets, and in modern times in mud dredging 
 machines. At e is the Weston differential pulley block, a modi- 
 fication of the Chinese windlass. Fig. 790,7. T^ and T^^are chain 
 sheaves fast to each other, producing a diff'erential action due 
 to their diff"erence in diameter, the whole forming a substitute 
 for the older tackle block gear, Fig. 784 c. 
 
 The form shown at Fig. 796 d demands further consideration, 
 as it can be given a series of most important applications. 
 
 If the tension organ is made a band and placed in a horizon- 
 tal or nearly horizontal position, it can be used to convey finely 
 divided material simply poured upon its upper surface. Exam- 
 ples of this are found in the transportation of grain, also in the 
 movement of paper pulp, and many other such purposes ; also 
 for conveying straw upon chain lattice conveyors, etc. In all of 
 these cases the material is kept on the conveyor simply by 
 gravity. This condition may be avoided and the capacity ex- 
 tended b}' using a pair of belts, the material to be conveyed 
 being carried between them. A very important application of this 
 principle is found in power printing presses, the delivery of the 
 sheets being eff'ected by systems of tapes and bands with great 
 speed and accuracj'. Band conveyors are also used in needle 
 machinery and in match making machines, and many similar 
 situations. 
 
 An important application of driving gear is found in the con- 
 struction of inclined haulage S's stems for mine ramps 
 
 cable on the other. At L' is a tension pulley to take up the 
 slack cable and maintain a proper tension. The trains Q-^ and 
 Q^, are connected to the brake cars B^ and i?.,, which are extra 
 heavy and control the rate of descent by proper brakes. 
 
 In the anthracite coal region of Pennsylvania haulage systems 
 are in extensive use for the transportation of coal, some being 
 constructed with iron bands, but most of them using ropes. 
 The arrangement will be understood from the diagrams in Fig. 
 798 and 799, which, with the accompanying data, have been ob- 
 tained by the author from their engineer and constructor, the 
 late Mr. W. Lorenz. 
 
 Fig 798 
 
 The car in which the coal is hauled is not attached directly to 
 the cable, but is driven by a dummy D, which is permanently 
 connected to the cable. This dummy runs on a narrow gauge 
 track, and at the foot of the incline the narrow track continues 
 on, so that the dummy D can go below the main track, as shown 
 in Fig. 799, and on the ascent it can thus be drawn up behind 
 
 Fig. 799- 
 
 the cars which have been placed by the shifting locomotive 
 The .steam engine and drawing gear is placed at the head of the 
 incline, as shown in Fig. 798, and the cable is led, as shown by 
 the arrows, that it passes twice over the driving wheel T, each 
 time covering about % of its circumference. The dummy cars 
 Dy and D.,^ are connected by a secondary cable passing over the 
 tension sheave L' ; this secondary cable maintains the proper 
 tension on the main cable, whether the load is at the head or 
 foot of the incline, or on the horizontal. The tension car is 
 given a play of 75 feet to provide for the necessary variation. 
 
 A different form of cable haulage is found in the system in 
 use between Liittich and Ans, and sketched in Fig. 800.* 
 
 In Fig. 797 is shown the inclined cable system of the Rhenish 
 Railway. The driving wind T L, operated by a steam engine, 
 works the descending cable on one track and the ascending 
 
 Fig. 800. 
 
 In this case the incline is divided into two sections, which 
 make an angle with each other as shown on the plan, and be- 
 tween which is a short level space. On this space is placed the 
 steam engine and driving wheels Zi, T_, T.^, T^, each wheel 
 having its own engine, two engines always diiving and two 
 being at rest ; L' are the tension sheaves. 
 
 In this, as in the preceding case, it wiil be noticed that the' 
 cable runs continuously in the same direction, differing in this 
 respect from the previously described winding and reversing 
 system. The cable is brought to rest in transferring the cars 
 from one plane to the other in order that this may be readily 
 and conveniently done, but should this be avoided by running 
 them over the connection, by momentum or otherwise, the ad- 
 vantage and usefulness of the system would be greatly increased. 
 
 This has been done in the cable tramways of Halliday and 
 Eppelsheimer, first used in San Francisco, and shown in dia- 
 
 oitfolio John Cockerill." 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 gram iu Fig. 80 1. This is most effectively applied on the trolley counter-sheave, as in Fig. 795*, to obtain increased tractive 
 streets of the city, for which it is admirably adapted. power. 
 
 Fig. 804 shows a plan view of a double system. 
 
 The endless cable runs in an iron way between and beneath 
 the tracks, the power being at T and guide sheaves at /.,/,, 
 with suitable driving and tension mechanism. The cars grasp 
 the cable by a gripping device through a narrow slot in the 
 trackway. The guide sheaves at the bases of the inclines and 
 sides of the curves permit the grip to pass, and when the foot 
 of the hill at the end of the road is reached, the grip is released 
 and the car transferred to the other track as at W^, and in sim- 
 ilar manner shifted at the other end, W.^. The weight of the 
 cars on the down grades counterbalances those on the up 
 grades, and so the motive power has only to overcome the fric- 
 tional resistance. The cable system £)f tramways has been ex- 
 tended to Chicago and many other American cities ; also in 
 Loudon, and a cable system of canal towage has been projected 
 by Schmick for the proposed Strasburg-Germersheim Canal. 
 
 When it is practicable to propel the cars by a suspended cable 
 from overhead a different arrangement may be adopted. 
 
 Fig. 804. 
 
 At /i'l is the motive power for systems /and //, and at A'j the 
 motor for system ///. The driving sheaves are at 7, the coun- 
 ter-sheaves at G, and the tension sheaves at L' . 
 
 The supporting columns for the stationary cable must be 
 stiif, and often quite high. 
 
 Fig. 802. 
 
 Fig. 802 is a diagram of a system operated by a suspended 
 chain. The descending cars Q^ are loaded and the ascending 
 ones Q^ are empty, and the speed is controlled by a brake at B. 
 If the action is in the reverse direction, a driving engine must 
 be applied at T. A similar arrangement is much used in coal 
 mines which are entered by inclines. The chain is attached to 
 a fork on the cars. 
 
 The system of overhead cable tramway, which has been 
 brought to a high state of efiSciency by Bleichert, is based on 
 the same principle as the preceding, but for much lighter loads. 
 The system consists of a cable tramway iu which a stationary 
 cable is substituted for the trackway. The running cable is 
 commonly called the pulling rope, and runs underneath the 
 stationary rope. The cars consist of a combination of grooved 
 sheaves, from which the bucket or other receptacle is suspended 
 by curved arms. The stationary cable is supported upon round 
 poles, and the arrangement of the stations is shown in the dia- 
 grams of Figs. 803a and 803^. 
 
 Fig. 8031J 
 
 cable, with a tension weight at Zj. The driving sheave is at T, 
 driven by connections to the engine at K, and at L' is the ten- 
 sion device for the pulling cable. If the service is heavy the 
 cable is carried twice around the driving sheave 7, using a 
 
 Fig. 805. 
 
 Fig. 805 shows the forms used by Bleichert, a being used up 
 to 24 feet high, b for heights between 24 and 80 feet."^ 
 
 In Fig. 806 is shown a combination of driving and guiding 
 systems in which the guiding and driving sheaves are combined 
 upon the car Q, and the tension organ is fastened at two points 
 So So on the path of the car Q. 
 
 i IG 806. 
 
 The motive power is on the car and operates the shea\e 7. 
 In the form shown at a, a Fowler grip sheave is used at T, this 
 form being suitable for a rope system, while the form shown at 
 b is better adapted to be used with chain. 
 
 The system shown in Fig. 806^ is also adapted for hauling 
 boats, and has been used by Harturcli for operating the railway 
 ferry across the Rhine at Rhinehausen. The ferry boat in this 
 case is guided by a stationary cable securely anchored, as in 
 Fig. 807, the anchorage being up the stream, and the force of 
 
 The stationary cable connects with the suspended tramway at 
 Sr Sli: and Sm S^K At So is the anchor of the stationary 
 
 ' 
 
 
 G 
 
 \ ' 
 
 Q ^ 
 
 
 1"! 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~1#^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Fig. ?o7. 
 
 the current keeping the cables taut. The equilibrium of these 
 forces enables this to act in the same manner as the stationary 
 cable of the Bleichert system, the difference only being that the 
 load, instead of being suspended from the cable, exerts a lateral 
 stress. The driving cable is similar to Fig. 806 d, and is beneath 
 the surface of the water. 
 
 If we imagine, in the combination of Fig. 806, that the 
 traveling vehicle O may be longer than the distance Sq S^, 
 which is the full length of the tension organ, the principle will 
 not be altered, but the action will be modified, since the rela- 
 tions of the traveling vehicle and the tension organ are now 
 inverted. The ends of the tension organ can now be joined 
 
 * On the 
 
 it Liker-Vashegy, poles of 140 feet high are used. 
 
176 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 together, or in other words it cau be made endless, and if heavy 
 enough, its weight can be caused to produce enough friction on 
 the bed of the stream to furnish the necessar}- resistance. This 
 is the construction of Heuberger's chain propeller, Fig. So8, as 
 improved by Zede 
 
 T is the driving sheave for the chain, Z, Z,, L are guide 
 sheaves, L-^ is a movable sheave to take up a portion of the 
 slack chain when passing into shallow water. The system is 
 made double, being placed on each side of the boat, and each 
 side is driven independently, so that sharp curves can be turned.* 
 If, in the case of a tension organ driven by a revolving pulley, 
 there is not sufficient tension given, the friction becomes insuffi- 
 cient to overcome the resistance of the load ; if the necessary 
 tension is externally supplied and removed periodical!}', a con- 
 tinuously revolving pulley can be caused to produce a lifting 
 and dropping action of a given load. This plan has been 
 3'^opted in some forms of drop-hammers, of which Fig. S09 is 
 the arrangement. 7" is a pul- 
 ley running continuously in 
 the direction of the arrow, O 
 is the drop weight, //"a handle 
 by which the operator applies 
 and releases the tension which 
 causes the pulley to drive or 
 slip. 
 
 The applications of running 
 tension organs which have been 
 thus far considered, are ■•"nose 
 in][which the device has been 
 used either to lift weights or to 
 transport the same from place 
 to place. One of the most 
 important applications, how- 
 ever, is that of transmitting 
 rotative motion from pulley to 
 pulley, an operation which can 
 be almost indefinitely repeated, 
 imerous forms of belt, rope and 
 The necessary tension for this 
 
 Fig. 809. 
 
 Fig. 810, 
 
 This combination includes all i 
 chain transmission. Fig. 810. 
 
 purpose is sustained by the journals and bearings of the pulleys, 
 also being modified by supporting or by tightening pulleys. 
 The two portions of the tension organ are distinguished as the 
 tight and slack sides respectively, and many modifications of 
 this form of transmission are discussed more fully hereafter, 
 (see Chap. XX to XXII ). 
 
 There is one application, however, which is appropriately 
 discussed in this place, namely, that in which rotative trans- 
 mission between pulleys upon stationary axes is combined with 
 pulleys upon a movable member, thus enabling motion to be 
 transmitted from a stationary source to a moving body, Fig. 811. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Fig. 8 
 
 In case a, one of the driven pulleys is mounted upon a car- 
 riage, saddle, trolley, or the like, and may be shifted in posi- 
 tion upon its ways or track ; the tension is sustained by the 
 three guide sheaves. Applications of this form, using belting, 
 are used upon planing machines by Sellers, Ducommun & Du- 
 bied and others. With rope driving gear it is used to operate 
 the spindles upon the carriage of the self-acting mule, also for 
 operating traveling cranes by Ramsbottom, by Tangye, and by 
 Towne ; being combined by the latter with the squaring device 
 
 as shown in Fig. 784 «?, and eflFecting all the functions of tiie 
 crane, including bridge and trolley travel, as well as the hoist- 
 ing and lowering of the load. 
 
 The form of Fig. Z\i b differs from a in that both sides of tlie 
 belt or rope are used to transmit power. The stationary pulleys 
 7\ and T^ here drive the movable pulleys T^_ and T^. These 
 driven axes can be utilized in various manners, as, for example, 
 to operate a windlass device for the propulsion of the carriage 
 O ; an example of which is found in Agudio's cable locomotive, t 
 In this device the pulleys T., and T^ drove a friction train which, 
 operated a drum connected with a stationary cable as in Fig. 806. 
 
 A more recent device is shown in a modification of Fig. 81 1 a, 
 as shown in Fig. 812. J 
 
 Fig. 812. 
 This construction, which is in use at the Soperga-Rampe at 
 Turin, consists of a double rack, placed between the rails as- 
 shown at b, which also shows the gearing by which car is 
 driven. The motive power is placed at the foot of the incline 
 at T, G, the 500-horse power engine running continuously in 
 one direction. The cable is carried upon the overhead guide 
 sheaves Z, and passes around the pulley Z^, and through the 
 sheave system T T' of the locomotive, and is supported also on 
 guide sheaves under the track, a tension pulley being placed at 
 L'. The velocity of the driving cable is four times that of the 
 cars, and the descent is effected by gravity alone under control 
 of a brake. During the descent the bevel gears on the shaft of 
 the driving pulley are released by friction clutches at K, thus 
 rendering the car independent of the cable. 
 
 The foregoing condensed description is nevertheless fully 
 sufficient to indicate the extreme service of which tension organs 
 arc capable in machine design. No less than seven systems 
 have been shown for railway use, and four for boats. This is 
 the more significant since it will be remembered that cable pro- 
 pulsion had been abandoned for railway use, but j'et appears to 
 now be revived with increasing success. 
 
 Our division into Guiding, Winding, and Driving S}'Stems 
 enables different devices to be placed in corresponding classes. 
 There yet remains to be considered the co-existing action of 
 many of the devices, such as pulleys, windlasses, cranes, etc., 
 in wiiich a negative motion may be given to the tension organ- 
 by the descent of the load Q under the action of gravity.? 
 This action can be fully determined by reversing the previously- 
 considered movement for the backward motion. In the com- 
 mon belt transmission. Fig. 810, the action is reversible, as is 
 also the case with the simple pulley, Fig. 794 d. 
 
 The case is different, however, with the rope tackle Fig. 784^ 
 and the differential block Fig. 796^, which_ are therefore here 
 considered in the more general form of Fig. 813. 
 
 .,_ If in these forms the 
 
 cord Z is pulled in either 
 direction the lower 
 sheave will be also- 
 moved up or down pro- 
 portionally. At the pre- 
 sent time systems using 
 endless cords are under 
 consideration, but fre- 
 2 quently choice is to be 
 made as to which por- 
 tion is best used. It will 
 be seen that the system 
 of Fig. 806, which is 
 made with both ends of 
 the cable secured, can 
 also be considered as a 
 portion of an endless 
 system similar to Fig. 
 808, and other endless 
 systems are found in 
 Fig. 784 d and e ; also 
 Fig. 813 i5, which differs 
 from a only in the run- 
 lited ends being marked by a cross. If 
 
 ning of the rope, the \ 
 
 * The following data of performance are given by Zede : Capacity, |oo tons ; 
 length overall, 230 ft. ; breadth, 21 J4 ft.; depth, 6^ ft, ; midship draught, 31^^ 
 in. The chains were of cast iron, weighing 275 pounds per yard- two en- 
 gines of 150 I. H. P. gave a speed of 3.72 miles (!) per hour. 
 
 jAgudio. Memoiresur la I^ocomotive funiculaire, Turin, 1863. 
 
 tSee Bulletin de la Soc. d'Bncouragement, Vol. XVI., 1869, p. 48. 
 I Kinematic force closure. First discussed in the Author's Theoreticat 
 Kinematics, p. 575. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 177 
 
 If we bring the applications of Figs. S06 and 81 1 into a general 
 orm in which the path of travel shall return upon itself, we 
 lave Fig. 814 a. If the guide sheaves are removed and the 
 
 Fig. 814. 
 
 cord crossed, the simpler form of Fig. S14 b is obtained. The 
 rotation of the pulley T^ causes travel around the stationary 
 pulley Ty The old form of Agudio's cable locomotive may be 
 represented by a similar diagram. Fig. 814 c. The shaded pulley 
 7^2 is held stationary, while the concentric pulley T-^ is assumed 
 to revolve ; this causes the system to revolve in a circular path, 
 the whole forming a differential or epicyclic system. 
 
 Finally it may be remarked that in electric transmission 
 systems a similar analogy exists to the above combinations of 
 tension organs of wire and cable in various forms, 
 
 I 263. 
 Technologicai, Applications of Tension Organs. 
 
 In addition to the preceding applications of tension organs, 
 they are also used in numerous forms of machine tools, i. e., as 
 organs for the alteration of the form of bodies. 
 
 A straight blade of steel furnished with teeth forms the well- 
 known frame or gang saw used in numerous wood-working 
 machines. When made without teeth, and used with sand and 
 water, it becomes a stone-cutting saw, or in the form of a wire 
 charged with oil and emery or diamond dust, a saw for the 
 hardest materials, in which case a high tension must be given 
 to the wire to prevent lateral displacement. The saw blade may 
 be given a vibrating motion in a device such as Fig. 789 b for 
 use as a scroll saw. In all these cases a reciprocating motion 
 is used. Tension organs are also used as running members for 
 sawing, the form of Fig. 810 becoming the well-known band 
 saw. Very fine band saws have been made, and also saws of 
 wire, these having been used as long ago as 1877 by the writer, 
 suggested by the saws used for precious stones. 
 
 An ingenious form of wire saw has been made by Zervas for 
 cutting blocks of lava or stone from the original bed, as shown 
 • -' - "• 1 Fig. 815. 
 
 Fig. 815. 
 
 Two small shafts are sunk in the stone, and the guide pulleys 
 inserted as shown, the endless wire being fed down by the 
 screws. The cutting is effected by using water and sand, and 
 the cord is formed of three twisted wires, although more re- 
 cently a single smooth wire, with twisted one wound above it, 
 has been used, the outside diameters being j^" to -f/^. 
 
 A patent was taken out in Germany by Paulin Gay in 1882 
 for an apparatus for cutting a block of stone into slabs by the 
 use of a number of wire saws. 
 
 Polishing belts are another example of tension organs used as 
 tools, the flat side of the belt being used, impregnated with 
 polishing material. Such belts, used in the nickel-plating 
 establishment of Neumann, Schwartz & Weil, at Freiberg in 
 Breisgau, are operated at a speed of over 6500 feet per minute. 
 
 Tension organs are of frequent use in many details of spin- 
 ning machinery, acting both for guiding and winding ; also in 
 numerous other forms of textile machinery. 
 
 Chains are especially useful for dredging machinery, working 
 in wet or dry material, also for handling coal. 
 
 In musical instruments we find tension organs of definite 
 dimension and stress, as sound producing machines. 
 
 ?264. 
 Cord Friction. 
 When a tension organ which is loaded at both ends is passed 
 over a curved surface, there is produced between the tension 
 organ and the surface a very consider;, ble sliding friction. 
 Since this friction will first be mathematically considered in 
 connection with the subject of cords, it will be given the gen- 
 eral name of cord friction. The curved surface over which the 
 cord is passed is the pulley, and the motioi. of the cord takes 
 place in the plane of the pulley. If the "ension T on the 
 driving side of the cord is to overcome the cord friction F, as 
 well as the tension t of the driven side, we have for the value 
 of the friction, F=i T— t. It is dependent upon the magni- 
 tude of the angle of contact a and upon the coefficient of fric- 
 tion _/, but is independent of the radius R of the pulley ; it is 
 also dependent upon the influence of centrifugal force. For 
 these conditions we have : 
 
 r=^^/a(i-z) (237) 
 
 i/=^(^/a(x -.)_,) (238) 
 
 In these e is the base of the natural system of logarithms = 
 
 organ in feet per second, .S the stress in its cross section, y the 
 weight of a cubic inch of the material, and g the acceleration 
 of gravity = 32.2. 
 
 Exajnple.-\n the capstan shown in Fig. 7g4a, let/= 0.21, a = 6 tt = 3 con- 
 volutions, z = 0. We then have f a = 0.21 X 6 X 314 = 3.958, say 4, and 
 F== t (2.7184 — i) = ;; (54.6 — 1) = 53.6 t. This shows the friction upon tl e 
 capstan drum to be nearly 54 times the pull upon the free end of the cord. 
 
 The influence of centrifugal force becomes important at high 
 speeds, and when the tension organ is under small stress. For 
 hemp or cotton rope, or for leather belting, we may take y ^ 
 0.035, and for wire rope about nine times so great. 
 
 The value of .S in the formula 2 
 
 ■ is properly con- 
 
 sidered a function of a, and we may therefore assume a con- 
 stant value for the arc a, and thus calculate the following table 
 for the values of i — z. 
 
 s. 
 
 Value of Coefficient i — zfor Centrifugal Force. 
 
 .9. 
 
 
 Velocity of Rope in Feet per Second. 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 Rope. 
 
 20 
 
 40 
 
 60 
 
 80 
 
 100 
 
 Rope. 
 
 400 lbs. 
 
 0.987 
 
 0.948 
 
 0.882 
 
 0.791 
 
 0.674 
 
 3,600 lbs. 
 
 600 " 
 
 0.991 
 
 0.965 
 
 0.922 
 
 0.861 
 
 0.783 
 
 5,400 " 
 
 800 " 
 
 0-993 
 
 0.974 
 
 0.941 
 
 0.896 
 
 0.837 
 
 7,200 " 
 
 1000 " 
 
 0.995 
 
 0.980 
 
 0.9.S3 
 
 0.916 
 
 0.870 
 
 9,000 " 
 
 
 0.996 
 
 0.982 
 
 0.961 
 
 0.930 
 
 0.892 
 
 10,800 " 
 
 1400 " 
 
 0.996 
 
 0.98s 
 
 0.966 
 
 0.940 
 
 0.907 
 
 12,600 " 
 
 This table serves both for hemp and for wire rope by taking 
 the ninefold value of S in the right hand column for wire rope. 
 It should be observed that the velocities are in feet per second. 
 It will be seen that for high speeds a high stress in the tension 
 organ is necessary in order to oppose the action of the centri- 
 fugal force. 
 
 In order to simplify practical calculations we may substitute 
 for the exponent_/a (i — £') in each case the formy"'' a ; that is, 
 instead of using the actual coefficient of friction f, taking an- 
 other one/', which is equal to (r — r)/ If it is a transmission 
 system, as Fig. 810, which is under consideration, the friction of 
 the cord, belt, chain, etc., must at least equal the transmitted 
 force P, hence also must the stress be that of a cord friction 
 ^ P, which gives for a minimum value of T: 
 
 P 
 
 whence 
 
 
 (239) 
 
 -J = p =€/'"■ (240) 
 
 Both 01 these values are absolute numbers. The ratio -g 
 indicates the amount of stress which must be given to the ten- 
 
178 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 siou organ, and hence maj' be called the stress modulus, and is 
 
 T 
 designated as r. The ratio — , we may, in like manner, call the 
 
 modulus of cord friction, and indicate as p. A series of values 
 for both are given in the following table. 
 
 Moduli for Coid Friction and Stress. 
 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 fa 
 
 "=T 
 
 ' ~'P 
 
 /'« 
 
 ^=T 
 
 '' ~'P 
 
 O.I 
 
 I. II 
 
 10.41 
 
 1.6 
 
 4..S 
 
 I.2S 
 
 
 1.22 
 
 5-52 
 
 1-7 
 
 5-47 
 
 
 0-3 
 
 1-35 
 
 3.86 
 
 1.8 
 
 6.05 
 
 1.20 
 
 0.4 
 
 1.49 
 
 3-03 
 
 . 1-9 
 
 6.69 
 
 1. 18 
 
 O.S 
 
 1. 65 
 
 2.54 
 
 2.0 
 
 7-39 
 
 1. 16 
 
 0.6 
 
 1.82 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.2 
 
 9-03 
 
 1-13 
 
 0.7 
 
 2.01 
 
 1.99 
 
 2.4 
 
 11.02 
 
 
 0.8 
 
 2.23 
 
 1.86 
 
 2.6 
 
 13.46 
 
 1.08 
 
 0.9 
 
 2.46 
 
 1.69 
 
 2.S 
 
 16.44 
 
 1.07 
 
 I.O 
 
 2.72 
 
 1.58 
 
 3.0 
 
 20.09 
 
 1-05 
 
 I.I 
 
 3.00 
 
 1.50 
 
 3.2 
 
 24.53 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.2 
 
 3.32 
 
 1-43 
 
 3-4 
 
 29.96 
 
 1.03 
 
 1-3 
 
 3.67 
 
 1-37 
 
 3-6 
 
 36.60 
 
 1.03 
 
 ?.4 
 
 4.06 
 
 1-33 
 
 
 44.70 
 
 1.02 
 
 1-5 
 
 4.48 
 
 1.29 
 
 4.0 
 
 54.60 
 
 1.02 
 
 Example. — .A.rc of contact = tt ; coefRcientoffrictiony= 0.16, velocity z/ = 80 
 
 -feet. The tension organ is aleather belt under stress of 400 lbs. per square inch. 
 
 0.791X0.1677=3.976, 
 
 nid f'o.= 
 
 le tension organ is a leather belt under stress ( 
 We have from the first table i — ^ = 0.791, hence/' 
 or nearly 0.4. From the second table this gives p = 1.49 arid t = : 
 over three times the above stress on the belt would be required t" 
 the frictional resistance. If & = 20 ft., the value x — z = 0.987, 
 0.496 or about 0.5, and the modulus of stress t = 2.54. 
 
 In order to make these relations more apparent, they are 
 shown graphically in the diagram, Fig. 816, in which the scale 
 upon the upper horizontal line gives the values for both moduli, 
 while the vertical scale on the left gives corresponding values 
 of the product/'' a. 
 
 The superficial pressure/ of the tension organ upon the cir- 
 cumference of the pulley increases as the belt or cord passes 
 
 from the slack to the tight side. It is equal to 7^——, in which 
 
 b' R da 
 b' is the breadth of the surface of contact of the belt. Now for 
 any cross section q, the force Q = q S. Hence we have : 
 
 A - 1 
 
 S 
 
 b' R 
 
 (241) 
 
 from which it will be seen that the pressure p c 
 with moderate limits. 
 
 Special applications of this formula, and of the diagram, Fig. 
 816, will be given hereafter. 
 
 ?265. 
 ROPE.S OF Organic Fibres. 
 
 Heii/p Rofic.—The form in most general use is a round hemp 
 rope twisted of three strands. This is twisted "loose" or 
 "tight," according as it is desired to be 
 more or less flexible. The cross section 
 of a three-strand round rope, in which (5 
 is the diameter of a single strand, is 
 
 3 — d-, whence (5 bears the following 
 relation to the diameter d of the circum- 
 scribing circle : d = 6 ( 1 -\ ) 
 
 V cos 307 
 = 2.15 cS, Fig. 817. This gives for the 
 
 1 easily be kept 
 
 rf . 
 
 cross section q = 
 
 - d'-. On account 
 
 of the spiral twisting of the strands, and 
 their compression upon each other, this 
 
 may be taken q 
 
 - d^, that is about 0.8 times the value of 
 
 the full cross section. Good hemp rope, when loosely twisted, 
 will bear a stress of 1700 pounds, and when tightly twisted, 
 about i>^ times as much. For convenience of calculation we 
 may assume the cross section to that of the full circle d, if, in- 
 stead of the full stress, we take only | as much, or 1400 lbs., 
 and 2100 lbs. We then have for the force P, for: 
 
 • (242) 
 
 loosely twisted rope^^ o.ot, \^ P; and P=^ 1111 d^\ 
 tightly " " d=- 0.024. \/~P; " P=i677d^i 
 
 The radius R of the pulley should never be less than 3 to 4 fif 
 for loosely twisted rope, and not less than 6 to 8 a' for tightly 
 twisted rope, the diameter being measured to the centre of the 
 rope. For heavy service, as for hoisting machines, R should be 
 not less than 25 d. 
 
 Flat hemp ropes are made by sewing 4 to 6 round ropes to- 
 gether, each, rope being then proportioned to bear j or ^ the 
 whole load. 
 
 The running weight G^ per foot is as follows : 
 For loosely twisted rope, G^ = 0.325 d'^ "| 
 For tightly " " Go = 0.467 d- > .... (243) 
 
 and approximately for both P:= 3400 G^ J 
 
 The latter assumption is based on the same number of fibres 
 in both cases. The following table gives values for three-strand 
 hemp rope. 
 
 Loose 
 
 Twist. 
 
 Hard Twist. 
 
 
 />. 
 
 Go- 
 
 P. 
 
 Go. 
 
 276 
 
 0.081 
 
 397 
 
 0.II6 
 
 621 
 
 0.183 
 
 893 
 
 
 
 2b^ 
 
 967 
 
 0.284 
 
 
 
 
 408 
 
 1 105 
 
 0.325 
 
 1,588 
 
 
 
 467 
 
 1726 
 
 0.508 
 
 2,481 
 
 
 
 729 
 
 2485 
 
 0.731 
 
 3,572 
 
 I 
 
 050 
 
 4420 
 
 1.300 
 
 6,351 
 
 I 
 
 868 
 
 6906 
 
 2.031 
 
 9.923 
 
 2 
 
 919 
 
 9945 
 
 2.925 
 
 14,290 
 
 4 
 
 203 
 
 According to (243) a rope L feet in length, hanging vertically. 
 
 is loaded L of its working strength already by its own 
 
 weight. If Z =^ 3400, the entire practical load would already 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^79 
 
 t)e applied, and this may be considered practical working 
 length of the rope. We have for the available practical work- 
 ing load : P' + — — L P= PorP'=zF (i ^— l) . 
 
 ^ 3400 V 3400 J 
 
 A vertically suspended rope will break by its own weight 
 •when its length reaches about 2000 feet, since the modulus of 
 jupture is about 8500 lbs. for loosely twisted rope, and about 
 14,000 lbs. for tightly twisted rope. The above length (2000 ft.) 
 ■may be called the length of rupture. For a cord suspended 
 in the water, as for deep sea sounding, the length of rupture is 
 •about twice as great. For very heavy stresses three simple 
 ■strands are insufficient, and the strands themselves are each 
 made of smaller strands, as in cable construction. Very heavy 
 cables are also made of more than three strands. 
 
 Cotton Rope. — Cotton rope has been used of late for purposes 
 ■of transmission, and is usually made with' three strands, very 
 loosely twisted. It opposes a resistance to rupture of about 
 •7500 pounds, reckoning the full sectional area, and is operated 
 tinder stresses ranging from 1000 to 2000 pounds. It is used for 
 driving spindles in spinning frames and mules, and in the snail 
 drum movement, as in Fig. 787,* and is also used for operating 
 traveling cranes on the Ramsbottom system. 
 
 Driving ropes are usually operated over grooved pulleys, the 
 radius of the semicircular groove being slightly greater than 
 that of the rope. In machine construction the sheaves are 
 usually of cast iron, and in ship's tackle they are made of 
 lignum vitae. 
 
 The sheaves revolve on cylindrical journals, and recently 
 roller bearings are being used, Fig. 818. t 
 
 of the rope. The strands of six wires may be combined to 
 make ropes of 48, 54, 60, 66, 72 wires, etc., and other combina- 
 tions are also used. 
 
 In Fig. 820 is shown at a a section of a rope of 36 wires, and 
 at 6 a different form of 60 wires, both being made with cores of 
 hemp for the strands as well as for the ropes. For the external 
 diameter of the wire ropes of the preceding form, when the 
 wires lie in close contact, we have : 
 
 I = 36 48 54 60 66 72 ■] 
 -^=8.00 10.25 11.33 12.S0 13.28 14.20 [ • • • ("447 
 
 in which / is the number of wires, 6 the diameter of a single 
 wire, an<l d the diameter of the rope. 
 
 In some later kinds of rope they do not lie in contact with 
 each other, but are separated slightly by the hemp, in which 
 case the diameter will exceed the previous figures by 10 to 75 
 per cent., but after a period of use the diameter becomes reduced 
 to the sizes given above. When the strands are made without 
 hemp cores they are arranged in the following manner : | 
 
 3 7 10 14 16 19 
 
 while with hemp cores the numbers are 
 
 5 6 7 8 9 10. 
 
 The number of strands runs from 3 up to 4, 5, 6, which latter 
 is most used, and on up to 7, 8, 12, 14, 16, 19. For cables which 
 are required to resist heavy stresses and also to possess great 
 flexibility, the same construction is employed as for hempen 
 cables, the strands themselves being composed of twisted ropes ; 
 ihe number of strands is 3, 4, 5 or 6. Flat cables are also made 
 of a number of parallel ropes. The number of ropes is 4, 6 or 
 8 ; the number of strands in each rope 4 to 6. 
 
 Example.— K heavy cable of steel wir. 
 strands, each strand containing 7 -ivir 
 6 X 19 X 7 = 798- Diameter of wire 6 = 0.055". 
 
 Well made rope is so wound that the load produces a 
 stress upon all the wires, so that, when i = the number of wires, 
 Pthe load, .S' the stress on the wire, we have 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. S19. 
 
 P=Si~- f!^ , 
 
 (245/ 
 
 When the pressure is moderate, the rollers may be made of 
 liard bronze, but for high pressures the rollers, ring and journal 
 ■should all be made of hardened steel. In case of extremely 
 high pressures bronze bearings with metaline may be used, the 
 tnetaline being a solid lubricant imbedded in recesses in the 
 box, Fig. 8 19. J Such bearings were used most successfully in 
 the construction of the East River Bridge at New York, oper- 
 .atiug for an entire year without requiring lubrication. 
 
 ?266. 
 Wire Rope. 
 Wire rope is usually round, and made with 36 wires, since six 
 «trands are used, each containing six wires. Each strand con- 
 tains a small hemp core, and the strands are twisted about a 
 central core of hemp. These hempen portions are of greatest 
 importance in the construction of wire rope for transmission 
 -(see \ 268), and should be made of the best material. For sta- 
 
 The diameter of wire varies from 0.04'^ to o.\\". If the rope 
 is required to be very flexible the wires should not be more than 
 o.\" in diameter. 
 
 In the passage of the rope over a sheave or pulley, of a radius 
 7?, the individual wires are subjected to bending, which, under 
 the action of tension and compression i^see ^ 8), produces a 
 
 E & 
 stress of a magnitude .f = — -^, in which E is the modulus of 
 
 2R' 
 
 elasticity of the material. For steel ( 
 taken at = 28,440,000. 
 
 This gives 5 = 14,220,000 -_- . 
 
 ; E may be 
 . . . (246) 
 
 The stress 5, which is produced on the tension side by bend- 
 ing, must be considered in connection with the stress 5" produced 
 by the load P, in order to arrive at the total stress. In order to 
 avoid a permanent set, it is necessary that the sum S-\- s should 
 not exceed the modulus of elasticity. The actual magnitude of 
 R becomes a minimum when s ^2 S\ that is, the stress due to 
 bending becomes double that due to the working tension. 
 
 Whatever may be the relation between the pulling stress S, 
 and the bending stress s, the total stress on the material will be 
 the sum 5+^. 
 
 If it is desired to consider the security against rupture as well 
 as the possible overstepping of the elastic limit, the value of 
 .S" + .y must be taken into account. The Prussian Government 
 rule places the modulus of rupture A' if steel wire at 163000 
 
 pounds, or with a factor of safety of 6, the stress 6" ^= — ^- — 
 
 = 27, 166. If we take the case of a rope of 42 wires, its diame- 
 ter d = lod, and making the. pulley diameter = 75 d, we get 
 R := 37.5 d. This gives the bending stress, according to (246), 
 
 ■tionary ropes the hempen strands may be replaced by wire, 
 giving 42 or 49 wires, and proportionally increasing the strength 
 
 taking the full cross section. 
 + Martini's design, used in the Italian navv. 
 IJvjhn Wallace & Co., London ; Selig in BeVlin. 
 
 37.S X IO(5 
 The sum 5"-!- .s = 27,166 -f 37,920 = 65,086. This give 
 
 actual factor of safety of — — -- = 2.5. 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The relation of the 
 stresses in the various 
 parts of the rope are 
 shown in Fig. 82 1. 
 
 On the right, the 
 tension side, there is 
 the tension stress (+ 5) 
 and the bending stress 
 (+ s), giving a total 
 oiS ^ s. On the left 
 the tension stress (+ 6") 
 is diminished by the 
 reverse bending stress 
 (,— s). The neutral 
 axis is therefore shifted 
 from the middle at 
 A', to a point toward 
 the concave side of 
 the bent rope at N'\ 
 
 Wire rope maj' be n 
 fabrication has greatly ad- 
 
 ?267. 
 Weight of Wire Rope and its Influence- 
 A rope of parallel iron or steel wires, exclusive of any band^ 
 will weigh, per foot, 0.2S f 12 — z t!^ j , in which i is the num- 
 ber of wires and (S the diameter of each wire. For twisted 
 rope, the twist and the hemp core increases this value from i>i 
 to I X as much, or an average of i^ times. This gives for the 
 running weighfper foot 
 
 ither of iron or steel wire, and its 
 .ced within recent years. The fol- 
 lowing data are applicable to the various grades : * 
 
 Material. Elastic Limi 
 
 Annealed Iron Wire . . 42,000 
 
 Bright Iron Wire . . . 56,000 
 
 Steel Wire 64,000 
 
 Steel Wire . '. 78,000 
 
 Steel Wire . 99,000 
 
 Steel Wire 113,000 
 
 Steel Wire 142,000 
 
 Modulus of Rupture 
 
 56,000 
 
 80,000 
 
 85,000 
 142,000 
 170,000 
 
 >[3,o( 
 
 256,0c 
 
 It will be evident that no general rule can be given as to 
 material, but that definite figures should be obtained for the 
 material to be used in each case. For high speed rope the wire 
 should be both smooth and strong, with a modulus of rupture 
 of about 170,000 lbs. If we then take a working stress S ^=- 
 28,000 lbs., and a bending stress s = 28,000 lbs., we have 6" + ■S 
 = 56,000 lbs., which gives about threefold security.! 
 
 e have R = —~~~ & = 500 &. If R is 
 
 For ^ 
 
 28,000 
 
 made less, the security will be reduced ; if greater, it increases. J 
 The durability of the rope for mining servtce is increased by 
 galvanizing the wire. 
 
 For standing rigging of vessels galvanized annealed iron wire, 
 with a value A'= 56,000 is used, while for running rigging steel 
 wire rope {K =■ 170,000) is being more extensively used, this 
 also being galvanized. The latter rope is also suitable for 
 cables. Hawsers are frequently made from iron wire, with a 
 modulus of rupture K = 56,000 to 70,000. The cables for steam 
 plowing machinery should be made of the strongest steel wire, 
 J^ = 256,000. 
 
 Wire Cables for power transmission are discussed in Chapter 
 XXI. 
 
 The cables for suspension bridges are not made from twisted 
 strands, but the wires are laid parallel and held in position by 
 bands of wire every two or three feet. ^ 
 
 * See the researches of J. W. Cloud on steel wire in connection with the 
 Emery Testing Machine at the Watertown Arsenal. Trans. Am. Soc. Mech 
 Eng'rs, Vol. V. 
 
 t The Prussian rule requires 5 = — A", which gives about 28,000, and Ji = 
 
 375 S, which gives i = 38,000, hence the security is only about 2]4, or less than 
 
 preservation of tl 
 
 so small that S + 
 a permanent set. 
 
 3 greater than the elastic 
 i 2 3'3 
 
 I Fig. i 
 
 '. the < 
 
 may produc . _ _ 
 
 concave side of the wires which, 
 when added to S, may not exceed 
 the elastic limit. If, however, a 
 
 3 . 3, there may result a set, as 
 3' . 3', and too frequent repetition 
 of this reversal may become dan- 
 gerous. This is shown in the case 
 of hoisting drums, such as Fig. 
 792 c, in which the rope IVr, i^, 
 which is subjected to reverse bend- 
 ing, has been found to last only 
 about % as long as the rope IV^ L^. 
 f; Among important suspension 
 bridges are those built by Roebling ii 
 the East River bridges. 
 
 America, notably the Niagara, 
 
 Go = 3-92 - 
 
 = 3.07 I 
 
 (247) 
 
 This is also true for flat ropes, the value of the coefficient for 
 cable ropes being increased as above from 1 's to iX, usually 
 about lye times. For deep mine hoists the weight Go exercises 
 a marked influence upon the section of the rope. If /, /fe is the 
 length in feet of the vertical hanging rope carrying a load P aX. 
 
 its end we have : P -{- L Go ^ S — / d', whence for ordinary- 
 round wire rope : 
 
 P=5^/.^(i_3.92f). 
 
 (248) 
 
 rope of steel, ^ = 
 
 which gives & = 0.075. If Z. = O we get S- = 0.0034, and S = 0.058. 
 
 The above discussion enables us to determine the length Lg of 
 rope which woitld produce by its own weight the stress 5" in the 
 uppermost cross section : 
 
 Li 
 
 = 0.255 
 
 (249) 
 
 This may be called the load-length for the stress S. Should 
 the shaft reach a depth equal to the load-length, no weight could 
 be suspended to the rope without exceeding the permissible 
 stress S". If 5 is equal to the modulus of rupture, the rope 
 would be broken by its own weight. This rupture-length may- 
 be designated by Lz, and is 
 
 \z = 0.25 A" . 
 
 (250 
 
 For very deep shafts it has been found advantageous to make 
 the rope a body of uniform resistance, which would make both 
 load-length and rupture-length unlimited. The formulae for 
 this purpose have been already given in § 4. The taper to the 
 rope may be given in two different ways. Either a constant 
 diameter 6 of wire, and varying number i, may be used ; or a 
 constant number i, and variable diameter 6. If the smaller 
 diameter of wire = 1^0, or the minimum number of wires =; z'ow 
 we have for any depth x : 
 
 Prschibram has used with best results, 5=23,000, 5 = 27,000; also 5 = 
 22.7^0. i = 36,000, but finds that a value i 27,000 to 28,000 lbs. is better for the 
 -^■- -'■■• :. (See g 268.) In considering the question of pulley 
 
 itio to tne diameter S of the wire should be taken, not that 
 ^of the rope. 
 
 ■ log ■ 
 
 J2 
 
 = 0.4342945 >^ - 
 
 In this 7 is the coefficient of weight which, for round rope, 
 ve have found to be = 3.92. Substituting this value we get : 
 
 log J- or log — =r- 1.68 ^ (251) 
 
 as 28,000, we have for the following 
 
 e to approximate the intermediate c; 
 
 mines taper ropes are in practical use. The rope in 
 s follows; />= 3850 lbs., of which 2200 is useful load, 
 e is mad«< in 7 sections of six part strands and eight 
 
777^ CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The great weight of the twistiug rope has led to the use of a 
 double lift, each half of the rope assisting to counterbalance 
 the other half, or another plan is to use a conical drum, to 
 equalize the power* The spiral winding of flat ropes also 
 serves to equalize the leverage of the drum, and by a judicious 
 selection of drum diameter, this may be very successfully done. 
 Flat ropes are little used in France, but are common in Bel- 
 :gium, and their use is increasing in England and America.f 
 Ropes of copper wire are used for lightning conductors, and 
 ■these are also made of iron wire rope with a core of copper. 
 I 268. 
 Stiffness of Ropes. 
 
 The resistance of stiffness of ropes must be considered both 
 in hoisting and in driving ropes. The measure of this resistance 
 is the force required to move a rope hanging over a very easy 
 running pulley, both ends of the rope bearing the given load Q. 
 It will be observed that the winding-up side of the rope does 
 not hang as closely to the pulley as does the other side, and that 
 the lever arm of the two sides is constantly changing. Eytel- 
 wein's formula gives for the stiffness ,5" of a hemp rope of diam- 
 t&r d: 
 
 S^^^^Q 
 
 lomb gives the very inconvenient formula 6" =- 
 
 ■ • (252) 
 
 which, when R and d are given in inches, 'J = 0.463. Cou- 
 __Cdll__ 
 
 ' R + c, a 
 
 Weisbach gives, from very limited data, for wire rope : 
 
 1.078 -|- 0.093 
 
 R 
 
 (253) 
 
 5=0.463 — = 101.8 lbs. 
 
 <which seems very high. Coulomb's formula gives 66 lbs. 
 
 Example 2. — K wire rope, composed of 36 wires, each 0.039" diameter, with 
 .a load of 550 lbs., is bent over a pulley 44 inches diameter. From Weisbach's 
 iormula weget: 
 
 5 = 1.078 + 0.093 ^°- = 3.403 lbs. 
 
 The utility of these formulas is doubtful, and a fuller investi- 
 -gation of the subject is much to be desired. It will be seen 
 from formula (253) that for wire rope the value of 7? should be 
 taken still greater than already considered for bending stresses 
 (formula 246) ; this subject is also discussed in Chapter XXI. 
 
 The above rules are deficient in that they do not take into 
 account the kind of mechanical work absorbed by the stiffness 
 of ropes. The angle embraced by the rope is, in the investiga- 
 tions of Amontons, Navier, Poncelet and Morris, assumed to be. 
 constant, while in practice it is constantly changing, and exerts 
 .a very material influence upon the result. 
 
 The author's consideration of the subject is here given : 
 Referring to Fig. S23, it will be seen that the fibres or wires 
 on the concave side of 
 the rope which passes 
 over a pulley R, are 
 compressed, produc- 
 ing a reduction in the 
 form of the convex 
 side, the compression 
 originating with the 
 load Q, being trans- 
 mitted along the 
 whole length of the 
 twisted strands. The 
 bent position of the 
 rope can no longer 
 retain its original sec- 
 tion, of diameter d, 
 but its volume must 
 _ „ be the same as that 
 
 Fig. 823. of a corresponding 
 
 length of the straight portion. The alteration in cross-section 
 
 The details are as foil 
 
 Depths. Dia. ofwire 
 
 3936 0.1043 
 
 23,130 
 
 ■9.550 
 
 The twisting of the rope 
 eter of wires increased eve 
 ft). These ropes are very 
 
 an Zeitschrift der Berg u. Hul 
 
 commenced at the small end, and the dia: 
 meters (16.4 ft) after the first 200 metres (( 
 __, _ _ jfactory, and last 3 to 4 years. 
 
 used iu the American anthracite coal Biines. 
 
 •Dery in Cuyper's Revue des Mines, 1874 ; also F. Kra 
 
 may be of two kinds ; first : uniform compressioi 
 when this has reached its limit, a flattening of cross 
 
 Both deformations are observed in practice. Ropes which are 
 very flexible are loosely twisted, and therefore readily com- 
 pressed as they pass over pulleys. The general compression 
 due to the tension nf the load in the straight portion causes the 
 twisted stranc^s to pre ^s firmly together towards the axis, so that 
 a heavily loaded rope is very hard. The compression is gener- 
 ally permanent, and not elastic, as may be deduced from the 
 permanent reduction in diameter of ropes after use, and is gen- 
 erally due, in the case of wire ropes, to the compression of the 
 hempen core ; as is shown by the observations of I,eloutre and 
 Zuber % 
 
 The preceding remarks have not considered those wire ropes 
 with metallic cores, used for running transmissions. Such ropes 
 are always very stiff, and permit little or no compression. 
 (According to Ziegler's experiments, only 0.22 to 1.2 per 
 cent.) 
 
 It is really almost as important, so far as flexibility is con- 
 cerned, that a rope should have a suitable soft core as that it 
 should be made of the best and most elastic and flexible mate- 
 rial. This is shown by the fact that even with ropes made en- 
 tirely of hemp or of cotton, and used for transmission over 
 pulleys, the inner fibres, which are never in contact with the 
 pulleys, show great wear. This wear is evidently due to the 
 friction of the fibres against each other, due to the flattening 
 and changes of cross section. For this reason the desirability, 
 or rather necessity, of lubricating the wires or fibres is evident, 
 and this reduces the friction of the inner-lying portions of the 
 rope. Rieten & Co. state that in the case of cotton ropes, "the 
 rope always wears out by the internal friction of the strands 
 upon each other, and that a load-twisted rope becomes useless 
 in a shorter time than a soft, loosely twisted one, althougb the 
 actual strength of the latter is the smaller." 
 
 In view of all these conditions the insufficiency of the exist- 
 ing rules for stiffness will be evident. It is apparent that the 
 angle of contact muse have a strong influence, and an entrance 
 is found in cable roads where, when the cable is deflected 
 through a small angle, small guide rollers are satisfactory, while 
 much larger ones are necessary for greater angles. At a certain 
 angle a, the deformation of the rope begins, and at another 
 angle a maximum is reached, beyond which the resistance of 
 stiffness is no longer dependent upon a. These points are of 
 greatest importance with wire rope. It must be expected that 
 the value of .S" will depend upon two functions of a, one for 
 compression, and one for flattening. The first may be unim- 
 portant with old and compressed ropes, the latter will be much 
 dependent upon the lubrication and upon the coefficient of 
 friction. 
 
 ? 269. 
 
 Rope Connections and Buffers. 
 
 The connection of one rope with another, when a smooth 
 junction is required, nmst be effected by splicing. This ma}' be 
 accomplished by the short or German splice ; or by the long, or 
 
 Spanish splice. The latter is the form to be used for wire rope. 
 From the middle point M oi the splice. Fig. 824, if, for exam- 
 ple, a six strand rope is in hand, strands i, 2 and 3 on the left 
 are unwound, and strands 6'', 5^, 4^, of the other rope wound in, 
 and the ends cut and worked in. The same is done on the 
 other side, the whole length i — 6 being 30 to 50 feet. 
 
 To connect the end of a rope to another portion of the con- 
 struction, the so-called hangers are used ; three forms being 
 shown in Fig. 825. At a is the so-called "swan neck," which 
 is secured to the rope by through rivets ; b is made with a coni- 
 cal socket, the wires being doubled up, and soft metal melted 
 and run in ; c is Kortum's hanger, the rope being held by two 
 toothed wedges driven in, and secured by pins. Numerous 
 tests have shown this fastening to be as strong as the rope 
 itself 
 
 In Fig. 826 rt is shown a buffer coupling used in the Zentruui 
 mine at Eschweiler, designed by the superintendent, Oster- 
 
 X See i:,eloutre. Transmissions et cou 
 1884. Ziegler, Erfahrungs-resultaut ii 
 Drahtseiltriebe, Winterthur, 1871. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 L block. Fig. 826 b s 
 
 Stationary Chains. 
 Chains may be considered as jointed rods. Running chains 
 are composed of very short members, in order that they niay- 
 the easier pass over sheaves, while stationary chains, which are 
 used in bridge, and other numerous constructions, are mader 
 with quite long links. 
 
 Fig. 827 shows the Admiralty form of stationary chain. Tha 
 links are made Yz fathom long, not including the thickness of 
 metal, and are divided into 10 fathom lengths, each length con- 
 
 " friction, 
 arranged 
 
 hanger," both this and the previous form being 
 to be built into the upper part of the hoist cage. 
 
 sisting of 20 links. The lengths are joined by a pin connec- 
 tion, shown on the left, and the pin is made of steel, galvanized- 
 Another form, known as the 
 Gemorsch chain, is shown in 
 Fig. 828, and is well known in 
 Germany. 
 
 Each long link is made 1.5 
 metres long, and these are con- 
 nected by short ovallinks. The 
 coupling link is secured by a 
 common, but heavy screw bolt. 
 The proportions in the illus- 
 trations are given in terms of 
 the diameter of the rod. 
 
 In order to enable such chains 
 to hang freely, the so-called 
 "swivel" is used. A heavy 
 swivel, for chains such as Fig. 
 827, is chosen in Fig. 829. 
 The swivel bolt has a ring 
 attached which can be readily 
 opened, and is large enough 
 to receive two chain links, 
 while the upper ring can re- 
 ceive three.. The limit of di- 
 mensions is the thickness of FiG. S29. 
 metal of the chain of Fig. 827. 
 
 Running Chains. 
 
 In Osterkamp's design the spring cage is built into the yoke of 
 the frame, thus economizing room. 
 
 
 
 The most important forms of running chains used in machine- 
 construction are those shown in Fig. 830 ; rt is an open link, and 
 b is a close link chain ; c is a stay link chain, and d a flat link 
 chain. This latter is especiallj' suitable for a pitch chain, on 
 account of the parallel pins which are at uniform distance from 
 each other. The other three forms are made with a higher 
 order of linkage, viz. : the globoid form already discussed in 
 Fig. 224. 
 
 In the wide open link chain a the globoid action can readily 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 183; 
 
 te disarranged ; less so iu the close links of b, and hardly at all 
 in the stay-link chain c, which latter closely resembles the 
 globoid link of Fig. a, p. 142. 
 
 The proportional dimensions of chain links are not very 
 closely determined. Those given in b and c are from the Ger- 
 man Admiralty. The British Admiralty gives both for open 
 and for stay-link chains, the pitch length 4 d, and width of link 
 3.6 d ; in France, for open chains the length is made 3.25 d, and 
 width 3. 4 d, and for stay-link chains, 3.85 d and 3.75 d respec- 
 
 In crane and hoisting machine construction, a very important 
 feature is the calibrating or adjusting of the linkj of chain.! 
 This is also a matter of much importance in connection with 
 the chain propulsion of boats used in France and Germany. 
 The chain used on the Sweetwater canal at Suez was made with 
 
 rf=-— , and a pitch of 3 d, and breadth 3,2 d. The Magde- 
 
 burg-Bodenbacher chain is very strong, d being given - - to 
 
 T.)i" , the links being proportioned as at b. 
 
 ' Flat link chains have been used by Neustadt, made of multi- 
 ple plates (see \. 94). The plates are made of the best quality 
 and the pins made to project a little, and riveted, over cold. 
 Chains of this sort are also used for driving where heavy resis- 
 tances are overcome, as in wire drawing, and iu some spinning 
 machinery. 
 
 ^272. 
 
 Calculations for Chains. 
 
 The chains which are made at the best establishments are 
 always thoroughly tested, every link being subjected to a stress 
 closely within the limit of elasticity, or in some cases, slightly 
 exceeding the elastic limit. A few links, usually three, are 
 taken at frequent intervals every few weeks, and broken in the 
 testing machine. The usual proof-load is such as to give the 
 following stresses : 
 
 D lbs. per sq. i 
 
 . for open link chain. 
 " stay " 
 
 5" = 25,000 
 The tests of chain for the German navj^ give for 6" 
 
 ' \ for open links ; 
 
 17,000 lbs. test of elasticity, \ 
 19,000 " highest test, 
 25,600 " proof load, 1 
 
 38,400 " breaking load for >- for sta}'ed links. 
 three links, J 
 
 For hoisting chain the elongation should be considered, and 
 the metal should show an elongation before rupture of upwards 
 of 20 per cent. J 
 
 The permissible working stress per square inch section in 
 Germany \ is : 
 
 For open link chain = 
 For stay link chain = 
 
 9,000 lbs. 
 13,000 lbs. II 
 
 From these we get for the proper total load P: • 
 
 For open links, P= 14,000 d- \ 
 For stay links, /■= 21,000 rf^ J ' 
 
 * The length of flat links in Fig. 830 a is given as 5 -f 2.8 a, and the projec- 
 tion of the ends as 2 -f 1.4 d. These are in millimetres, and for inches the 
 values o 1875 -i- 2.8 d, and 0.08 -f- 1.4 d should be used. 
 
 t Excellent pitch chain is made at the Guttehoffnungshiitte at Oberhauseu ; 
 also by Schlieper at Iserlohn, and by Doremieux at St. Arnaud, and Plinchon 
 Havez at Guerigny, and by Hawkes Crawshay at Gateshead on Tyne. 
 \ At the Guerigny Works the required elongation is : 
 
 For rods I ^" to i" 18 per cent. 
 
 For rods 1" to 34" 16 per cent. 
 
 For rods %" 14 per cent. 
 
 For rods -,V' 12 per cent. 
 
 For rods 14" 1° P^r cent. 
 
 \ At the GuteuhoflfnuDghutte. 
 Henry R. Towne, Treatise on Cranes, Stamford, Conn., gives a permissi- 
 
 (5 = 
 
 d = 0.0063 
 
 (2S5> 
 
 3 {i -f 2) 
 
 The thickness 6 is made the nearest convenient value, and i 
 must be a whole even number. For the latter we may take the 
 nearest whole number to the value given by the relation: 
 
 0.26 
 
 €' 
 
 (256) 
 
 The following table has been calculated from these formuke. 
 The metal for the plates should be especially tough. Neustadt's 
 chains had an ultimate resistance of four to five times the work- 
 ing load. 
 
 (254) 
 
 Flat link chains are subjected to the heaviest stress at the por- 
 tion which is in engagement with the toothed chain-wheel. 
 (See Fig. 837.) For this reason there should be not less than 
 five link pins in gear with the wheel at any time. If we assume 
 that the tooth pressure is in arithmetic progression as i : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 
 the pressure on the body of the last pin will be ]/^ P, and on 
 each journal also '.^ P, they being impelled forward by yi P. 
 If we put as a maximum stress in the bolts of 17,400 pounds,* 
 we have for the thickness of plates (5, pin diameter d, and num- 
 ber of plate i, for a given load P, the following values : 
 
 Example i. — An open link chain 
 working load P= 14,000 lbs., -b 
 )uld permit a working load /-" = 
 
 10 lbs. 
 
 Example 2. — Required to proportion 
 We have from (256I i = 0.26 -^ P= 0.2 
 
 ,_ 0.0x07 ^/ 
 
 length /= 0.1875 -f 2.8 XJ.04 
 the length of the body of thi 
 diameter = 1.2 X 104 = 1.25" 
 is o.oS + (0.9 X 1.04) = 1.02 sa; 
 
 nk chain to carry 22,000 pounds. 
 
 ^ooo = 7-32> say 8. Then iu i25s> 
 
 = 0.176" also d = 0.0063 \/ 22000 = 1.04". The pitch. 
 
 idth of plates = 2. 
 
 ■ -.67 X 1 - 
 
 ength of link beyond tl 
 
 Table of Flat Link Chains. 
 
 i.gS, say 2", the 
 " -. pin centre 
 
 Working 
 
 No. of 
 
 Thickness 
 
 Breadth of 
 
 Dia. of 
 
 Pitch 
 
 Load 
 
 Plates 
 
 of Plates 
 
 Plates 
 
 Pin 
 
 P. 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 d. 
 
 
 I 000 
 
 2 
 
 O.I2S 
 
 0.625 
 
 0.25 
 
 0.87s 
 
 1,500 
 
 4 
 
 0.093 
 
 0.7S 
 
 0.28 
 
 0.93 
 
 2,000 
 
 4 
 
 0.109 
 
 0.875 
 
 0.34 
 
 1. 14 
 
 3,000 
 
 4 
 
 O.I2S 
 
 1.0625 
 
 0.40 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 4 
 
 0.140 
 
 1-1875 
 
 0.46 
 
 I'45 
 
 6,000 
 
 6 
 
 0.109 
 
 i.,4375 
 
 0.56 
 
 1.625 
 
 8,000 
 
 6 
 
 0.140 
 
 1-6875 
 
 0.68 
 
 2.00 
 
 10,000 
 
 6 
 
 0.156 
 
 1-875 
 
 0-75 
 
 2.3125 
 
 12,000. 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 0.93 
 
 2-375 
 
 16,000 
 
 s 
 
 0.156 
 
 2.375 
 
 0.93 
 
 2.50 
 
 20,000 
 
 ' 
 
 O.I7I 
 
 2-625 
 
 1. 00 
 
 2.8125 
 
 I 273- 
 Weight of Chain. 
 The length 5 of rod required to make a chain of a given 
 length L bears the same relation to L as the length 5 for a sin- 
 gle link does to the pitch /. We have for the chains a, b, c of 
 Fig. 830: 
 
 Open Close Stay Stay Links, 
 
 Links. Links. Links. including stay. 
 
 1-33 
 
 2.39 
 
 3-25 
 
 2.65 
 
 From these relations the weight of iron rods required may be 
 determined (see \ 82). The greater the pitch of chain for a 
 given weight of iron, the more economical is the form of con- 
 struction. I" 
 
 The load length and rupture length for chains (see \ 267) have 
 been extended since that subject has been given practical con- 
 sideration, this being especially the case with anchor chains (see 
 next section). For this we may take the modulus of rupture 
 /if at 37,000 lbs. for open links and 38,000 lbs. for stay links, 
 with a modulus of safety 7"= 20,000 and 24,000 lbs. respectively. 
 We then have : 
 
 T 
 
 Li = -— and 
 
 , y being the weight of a 
 
 
 
 cubic inch of wrought iron 
 H The pitch for stay link chai: 
 
 0.27 lb., and hence : 
 
 a-vy was formerly^ 3 d. 
 
1 84 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 
 
 Open I,iiiks 
 
 Close Links 
 
 Stay Link 
 
 t 
 
 = 
 
 4672 
 
 4377 
 
 5458 
 
 z 
 
 = 
 
 8672 
 
 8127 
 
 8567 
 
 i 274- 
 Chain Couplings. 
 Chains whicli are used for transmission of motion (so called 
 " endless " chains) require devices for coupling, as do also those 
 constructions with which chains are to be connected, and hence 
 we have a variety of eyes, rings, coupling links, swivels, and 
 the like. 
 
 Fig. 832. 
 
 A piece whicli is sometimes used with anchor chains is the 
 so-called "twin" link. Fig. 831. This may be made of cast 
 steel, and because of limited space is formed with circular open- 
 ings. The ordinary coupling link is shown in Fig. 832 a. The 
 link is of wrought iron, the bolt and pin of steel, both galvanized. 
 The pin is shorter than the diameter of the eye, and is secured 
 on both sides by a plug of lead. The next link is made some- 
 what longer than the other links of the chain, so that the 
 coupling link may be more readily introduced. This form is 
 used for joining pieces of chain to form greater lengths. The 
 German Admiralty anchor chain is made with stay links, in 
 seven lengths of 25 metres (82 feet) each, joined with coupling 
 links, two of which are swivels. A bow anchor chain is given 
 two more lengths of chain and made of iron 3mm. (o.iiS^') 
 thicker.* 
 
 The chains for the system of boat propulsion are fitted with a 
 coupling Hnk with rounded edges, and two are used together, 
 as in Fig. 832 b, which shows the chain used on the Elbe. This 
 coupling might also be suitable for power transmission chain. 
 
 The swivel is used to permit the chain to have a rotation 
 about its axis of length without twisting the links together. 
 
 Fig. 833. 
 
 The form of swivel used in the German Navy is shown in Fig. 
 833 a, and at Fig. 833 b is shown the English swivel. 
 
 * The lengths in the English Navy are 12^ fathoms. 
 
 V- ,. 
 
 Fig. 834. 
 
 A single hook is given in Fig. 834 «, and a double hook at 
 Fig. 834 b. The construction of such hooks demands the great- 
 est care, and according to Glynn, more lives have been lost and 
 damage incurred by the breakage of hooks than by any other 
 part of a crane. The case is one of combined resistance and 
 leads to unexpectedly great dimensions. 
 
 The diameter d^ of the shank of the hook may be obtained 
 from formula (72), so that we have for a load /-": 
 
 2V P . 
 
 ■ (257) 
 
 This is based upon a stress of 3500 pounds, but an angular 
 pull may increase this five-fold. Taking d^ as the unit, we may 
 obtain the proportions given in the illustrations in the following 
 manner. Let zv be the width of the opening of the hook, and 
 h the width of the body of the hook, the thickness at the same 
 point is made ji /i, and for a stress of 12,800 lbs. upon the metal 
 of the hook we have : 
 
 ■■3o\'-J + ^ 
 
 x/p 
 
 ^v^ 
 
 5 
 
 The thickness at the point of the hook is made — , and hence 
 a circle of diameter D ^^ 7a -\- 1.5 //. 
 
 -r = 1-77 
 
 
 1.06 1.27 1.49 1.72 1.95 2.19 2.44 2.70 2.97 3.24 
 3.72 4.00 4.28 4.59 4.88 5.18 5.48 5.82 6.15 6.48 
 
 The most useful ratio ii 
 
 In 
 
 wharf cranes a weight 
 
 is often combined with the hook in order to facilitate the 
 lowering of the empty chain. This is shown in the dotted lines 
 in Fig. 834^. In the case of a double hook each portion is cal- 
 culated for its component P^ of the entire load P. From this a 
 special unit d/ is obtained only for the dimensions w, h, and D. 
 
 Example— -L,ei the load upon a hook be 4400 lbs. We have from (257) d\ 
 = 0.02 ■«//■= 0.02 s/ 4400 -= 1-326". If v/e take w = h we get from the above 
 A = 1.99 X I 326 = 2.638", and w is the same ; while D = 2.638 -f 3 957 = 6-6". 
 
 In the case of a double hook the angle between the components i.s 60° ; we 
 D, whence d'l = 0.02 v 2540 = 1.008 
 
 - A = 
 
 0.866 
 
 say 1 
 
 If w 
 
 
 1.92 -I- 2. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 whence we get, for 
 
 Chain Drums and Shsaves. 
 
 Chain drums and sheaves are usually made of a radius R = 
 10 to 12 d, measured to the middle of the chain. In some case 
 n rim is made on the chain sheave, as in Fig. 835 a. 
 
 7 
 
 185 
 
 1.3066 1.4619 1.618 1.932 2.247 2.563 2.879 3.106 
 
 Fig. 835. 
 
 This form of sheave brings a bending action upon the links as 
 ■shown in Fig. 835 6. Sometimes the flanges are omitted and the 
 •edges of the sheaves bevelled as in the dotted lines, and in other 
 cases the links have a bearing as shown at Fig. 835 c, in which 
 the bending action is somewhat reduced. The bending is en- 
 tirely avoided, however, by the use of a pocketed sheave, as in 
 :Fig- 836. 
 
 -:D'-- - 
 
 This form is useful both for~chain transmission, and as a sub- 
 stitute for winding drums in hoisting machinery, as it enables a 
 small pocketed sheave to serve instead of a large drum. When 
 such a sheave is made with only four pockets, they form a 
 ■square with a side I?' = I + d + 2{l—d) .^70.5=; 2.414 I— 
 -0.414^; while the side of the square of the alternate links is 
 D'^ = 1.414 i + 0.414 d. The first gives the minimum, and the 
 second the maximum, (double) lever arm with which the chain 
 .acts upon the sheave. If the pockets, instead of 4 and 4 are : 
 
 6 and 6, we have D = 
 8 and 8, " " /? = 
 
 : 3.732 /— 0.2640' 
 : 5.026 / — o.igSd. 
 
 Chain sheaves of this form require accurately made pitch 
 chain. 
 
 When the load is heavy, the friction causes the chain to cling 
 to the sheave, and a stripper S, Fig. 836, is required to lead the 
 chain off in the proper direction /% while the entrance is pro- 
 perly effected by a guide channel JS. 
 
 For flat link chain, a toothed chain wheel is used, Fig. 837. 
 
 ^..d 
 
 Fig. 837. 
 
 In this form a guide channel £, and stripper .S", should also be 
 tised. The tooth profile is a circular arc with its centre at the 
 link pin. If z, be the number of teeth, we have for the radius 
 J', of the pitch circle : 
 
 7 = 
 
 / 
 
 • (259) 
 
 The minimum number of teeth i 
 Neustadt uses the following : 
 
 z^ 8for/'= 500 to 6,000 pounds. 
 z= 9 for /'= 6000 to 50,000 pounds, 
 .ar ^^ 10 for /'= over 50,000 pounds. 
 
 Guide sheaves for either kind of chain are made with 16 to 
 30 teeth. 
 
 For chain propelling cables ordinar}' smooth drums with 
 parallel axes are used, with a groove for the chain. 
 
 In Fig. 838 a is shown a section 
 
 of the rim 01 the drum on the chain propelling gear on the 
 river Elbe. This is made with steel flanges and channels on a 
 wrought-iron rim. The last channel is made slightly larger ir 
 diameter in order to give a higher velocity to the driving sideoi' 
 the chain. The wear upon the chain is an important item. Fig. 
 838 b, shows a link of a chain as worn after long service. It 
 must not be overlooked that the winding around the drum pro- 
 duces a twist in the chain, givingasmany half twists in the chain 
 as there are half convolutions about the drums. This twisting 
 is not injurious if the chain is bent as frequently in one direc- 
 tion as in the opposite. In fact, however, the chain is /isually 
 bent into more concave than convex bends. This causes a twist- 
 ing motion to the chain and as it drags upon the boUom and 
 banks of the stream it produces much wear, and causes kinks to 
 be produced at the shallow places. The chain mus', therefore 
 frequently be raised at such points and a link opened and th^ 
 twist taken out. 
 
 This twisting may be 
 prevented by using the 
 drum arrangement 
 shown in Fig. 839. This 
 c o n s i s. t s of simple 
 drums all lying in one 
 plane driven by gear- 
 ing so that the proper 
 relative motion is com- 
 pelled. 
 
 Ratchet Tension Orc^^ns. 
 
 Tension organs may be combined witL pawls, which in the 
 case of cords are friction pawls, (| 248, 249), and for chains are 
 toothed pawls, acting upon the links in the same manner as 
 upon ratchet wheels and ratchet racks. 
 
 The establishment of Felten & Guilleaume, at Mulheim a. 
 Rhein, have devised a grip pawl for boat-cable driving, in which 
 the rope is clamped to and released from a driving drum by an 
 evolute shaped thumb clamp, the shock being reduced by a 
 spring buifer. 
 
 Pawls for chains may be found used in connection with the 
 heavy bow anchors of large vessels ; Bernier, of Paris, has also 
 used such devices upon chain hoisting machinery. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 BELTING. 
 \ 276. 
 
 SEI.F- Guiding Belting. 
 
 Belt pulleys are indirect acting friction wheels (? 191) and the 
 belt itself is a tension organ combining the functions of driving 
 and guiding (? 261). Those belts which act without requiring 
 the use of special guiding devices may be called self-guiding 
 belts. This action is attained by the use of cylindrical pulleys 
 when the edge of the prismatic belt runs in a plane at right . 
 angles to the axis of the pulley ; or in other words, when the 
 middle line of the advancing side of the belt lies in the plane of 
 the middle of its pulleys. 
 
 When a belt runs upon a conical pulley in a direction normal 
 to its axis, its tendency will be to describe a conical spiral path 
 upon the pulley, as will readily be seen upon the exami 
 cf the development of the surface of the cone, Fig. 840. 
 
 ; much as 25°, which 
 s is equal to twice the 
 
 Fig. 840. 
 
 Fig. S 
 
 If the pulley is made with a double cone face or a rounded 
 face, Fig. 841, the tendency will be for the belt to run at the 
 middle of the face even when the direction of the belt is not 
 exactly correct. 
 
 For leather belting, with a height of the crowning or curva- 
 ture of the face 5 = t/jj of the width of face, the belt may devi- 
 ate from the plane of the pulley by 21^° (tan = four per cent ), 
 while for cotton belting, on account of the lesser elasticity of 
 the material, the crowning j should not exceed ji^ of the face, 
 thus reducing very materially the permissible deviation. In 
 ordinary circumstances at least one of a pair of pulleys should 
 be made with rounded force. 
 
 diameter of the largest pulley. Another rule for the 
 
 distance between shafts for quarter-twist belts is to make the 
 
 distance never less than "^ b D. 
 
 Guide Pui<leys for Belting. 
 
 When a belt transmission is arranged with guide pulleys, the 
 proper guiding action is obtained when each guide pulley is 
 placed at the point of dep?,rture of its plane with that of the 
 next following pulley.f 
 
 Fig. 842. 
 
 The simplest arrangement of self guiding belting is that for 
 parallel axes, Fig. 842 a and b, a being for open belt and b for 
 crossed belt, e'ther arrangement being suitable to run in either 
 direction. 
 
 For inclined and intersecting axes self-guiding belts are not 
 suitable, except in the case of inclined axes in which the trace 
 J? 5", Fig. 843, of the intersection of the planes of the two pulleys 
 passes through the points at which the belt leaves the pulleys. 
 The leading line then falls in the middle plane of each pulley, 
 but the following side of the belt does not, hence such systems 
 can only be run in one direction. The leaving points in the 
 figures are at a and b^. The arrangement gives an open belt 
 when the angle /3 between the planes of the pulleys = 0°, and a 
 crossed belt when /? = 180°. In the intermediate positions a 
 partial crossing of the belt is produced. If /3 = 90°, the belt is 
 half crossed (or as commonly called, quarter twist) ; if /? = 45°, 
 it is quarter crossed.* 
 
 Fig. 844. 
 
 In Fig. 844 examples are given of guide pulleys for parallel 
 axes, all three pulleys lying in the same plane. 
 
 At a is shown a belt transmission with tightening pulley, b is 
 a device for transmitting motion when great difference of speed 
 is desired. In this case the guide pulley C\s as large as the 
 driver A, and if desired may also be arranged to act as a tight- 
 ener.J At c is Weaver's device for similar uses.? In this case 
 two belts are used, and the device has been used for driving 
 circular saws. The pulleys should be fitted to run very smoothly 
 in such devices. 
 
 The cases in Fig. 845-846 have parallel axes with two guide 
 pulleys. In the first case the guide pulleys are placed in planes 
 tangent to both operating pulleys, and hence driving may occur 
 in either direction. Usually, however, it is required to provide 
 
 * The above geometrical construction is only approximate ; for an exac 
 solution see a paper by Prof. T. B. Webb, Trans. Am. Soc. Mech. Eng'rs 
 Vol. IV., 1S83, p. 165. 
 
 t See also the paper of Prof. Webb, referred to in the preceding note. 
 I Eckerfs patent (German) for driving the drum of a threshing machin 
 \ See Cooper's Use of Belting. Phila., 1878, p. 171. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 i8r 
 
 Fig. S45. 
 
 Fig. 846. 
 
 Fig. 851 shows the general case for inclined axes. Two- 
 points c and Tj are chosen on the line of intersection S S of the 
 planes of the two pulleys, and the tangents c a, c b, c^ a^^, c^ b^ 
 
 for motion in but one direction, in which case the second form 
 
 is used as being simpler of installation. The pulley B may be 
 
 used as one of the guide pulleys, ', 
 
 in which case it may be placed 
 
 loose upon the same shaft as A, 
 
 and C or D be made drivers or 
 
 driven. 
 
 By placing the guide pulleys 
 between the axes of A and B, 
 instead of be}'ond them, they 
 will revolve in the same direc- 
 tion, and may be made fast 
 upon one shaft, as in Fig. 847 ; 
 this arrangement admitting of 
 motion in only one direction. 
 
 In Fig. 848 is an arrangement 
 for inclined axes, which is a 
 modification of Fig. S46, as will 
 be seen by the dotted lines. 
 The guide pulleys run in oppo- 
 site directions, but ma}' con- 
 veniently be placed upon the 
 same shaft. 
 
 In Fig. 849 is shown an arrange- 
 ment of quarter-twist belts with 
 guide pulleys. One side of the belt 
 
 Fig. 847. 
 
 5 placed i 
 
 nterscc- 
 
 tion S S oi the planes of the two pulleys. From any point e 
 
 drawn, and in the planes of these tangents the guide pulleys 
 C and Q are placed. Under these conditions the rotation may- 
 be in either direction. The arrangement shown in Fig. 852 
 occurs when the line 6* S passes through the middle of one of 
 the pulleys. 
 
 on 5" 6", the tangents c a and e b are drawn, and in the plane of 
 these the guide pulley Cis placed. This arrangement permits 
 of rotation in either direction. 
 
 Another arrangement for the same purpose is shown in 
 Fig. 850. The side of the belt leading off from A is inclined 
 towards B, the other side passing over the guide pulley C, 
 which is in the same plane as A and 6" S. This arrangement is 
 well adapted for driving a number of vertical spindles from one 
 horizontal shaft.* 
 
 Fig. 853. 
 
 A simplification of the general case occurs when, as in Fig, 
 853, the guide pulleys fall upon one and the same geometiical 
 axis which is parallel to the axes of both transmitting pulleys- 
 In this case the only inclination of the belt is that given to it 
 by the guide pulleys. The rotation can be in but one direction, 
 viz. : that shown by the arrows ; if the reverse is desired, the 
 guide pulleys must be placed as shown in the dotted lines. 
 If the inclination of the shafts is too great the belt will be 
 liable to drop off when the pulleys come to rest. The use of 
 guide pulleys involves special hangers, a practical form for 
 which is shown in Fig. 854.! 
 
 tischen Maschiiienbau-Aktita- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The vertical axis is provided with an oil hole, and is fitted 
 by a ball and socket bearing to the bracket D. The flange on 
 the lower edge of the pulley keeps the belt from falling off the 
 
 parallel shafts, one of which intersects its axis at right i 
 t'he other passing beneath. 
 
 Fig. 854. 
 
 Fig. 855. 
 
 pulley when at rest. The form in Fig. 855 was designed by the 
 author for the arrangement of Fig. 848, both pulleys being loose 
 upon the wrought iron shaft. 
 
 If the position of the shafts can be so chosen that the line 
 ^ 6" touches at least one of the pulleys, the very practical 
 arrangement shown in Fig. 856 can be applied. If the distance 
 
 Fig. 856. Fig. 857. 
 
 A Cis great in comparison with the width of bel:, the pulleys 
 C and Ci can be placed side by side instead of over each other, 
 Fig. 857, in which case round face pulleys should be used. 
 
 Fig. 85S. 
 
 By the use of a fifth pulley the preceding arrangement may 
 be so modified that two pulleys, B^ and B.^^, can be driven from 
 one driver, A. This is shown in Fig. 858 as applied in a spin- 
 ning mill, in which the pulle3's B^ and i?.^are on different floors 
 of the building, and are also provided with loose pulleys.* 
 
 Fig.! 
 
 In the arrangement of Fig. 859 the pulley A drives two 
 uid Millwork, II., London, 1863, p. 103. For the 
 
 Another arrangement, devised by the author, is given in Fig. 
 860. In this case the following side of the belt is passed over 
 an idler pulley, Q or C, and a second time around the driver 
 (see also Fig. 795) by which the angle of contact a is doubled, 
 and the modulus of friction efo- (^ 264) increased. This may be 
 called a double-acting transmission. The cross section of belt 
 may be made j% of a single acting transmission, so that in spite 
 of the increase of length an economy of belting is obtained. 
 One of the guide pulleys may also be used for a tightener. 
 These devices will also be considered in connection with rope 
 transmission (Chapter XXI.) to which they are especially appli- 
 cable. 
 
 Fast and Loose Pulleys. 
 
 Fast and loose, or tight and loose pulleys, as they are some- 
 times called, are generally used in connection with another belt 
 transmission in order to throw the latter in and out of action, 
 the belt being guided by a belt shifter, which by the means of 
 forks or finger-bars, enables the moviug belt to be shifted. 
 These shifting devices may properly be regarded as guide 
 pulleys, and are sometimes fitted with rollers, as shown dotted 
 in Fig. 861, at c and c^.-^ 
 
 Fig. 862. 
 
 It is preferable to have the loose pulley upon the driven shaft, 
 since the belt then can be shifted with a gradual spiral action 
 by the shifter F, Fig. 861. It is best for the driving pulley to 
 be made straight face, or if two fast pulleys are used side by 
 side on the driving shaft, these should have very slightly 
 rounded faces, if the belt is to be shifted promptly and readily, 
 and for the same object the shifter should be placed as close to 
 the driven pulleys as possible. The loose pulley should be kept 
 thoroughly lubricated, and for this purpose numerous oiling 
 devices have been made. The friction between the htib and 
 shaft acts as a driving force upon the loose pulley, and this has 
 been a source of numerous accidents. This action is avoided 
 in the arrangement in Fig. 862, in which the loose pulley is 
 carried on a consecutive and stationary sleeve D.X 
 
 A variety of mechanical belt shifting devices have been 
 made, \, the desire being to prevent the action of the belt 
 from moving the shifter. A useful form is Zimmermann's 
 Shifter, Fig. 863. 
 
 sary for shiftinj 
 
 :aldi 
 
 of thes 
 
 e I 301 
 
 J See Berliner Verhandlungen, 1S69, p. i 
 
 Society for Prevention of Accidents, of Mul 
 
 l See Berliner Verhandlungen, 1868, p. 171 
 
 !7. This has been used by the 
 Rittershaus, Belt Shifters. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The shifter bar F, to which the fork G can be clamped at any 
 desired point, is operated by the lever H, which turns upon an 
 
 Fig. 864. 
 
 Fig. 864 shows a shifter for quarter-twist belt. In this form, 
 devised by the author, the guide pulley, which is required to 
 support the belt, also serves as a shifter to move the belt to and 
 from the belt pulley B, and loose pulley B^. If these pulleys 
 are given greater width than that of the belt, as shown on the 
 right, a vertical adjustment can be given to the iipright shaft ; 
 a condition sometimes required in grinding mills and similar 
 machines. 
 
 \ 279. 
 
 Cone Pulleys. 
 
 When a number of pulleys are placed side by side in order to 
 enable varied speeds to be obtained with belt transmission, and 
 are united together in one member, we obtain what is called a 
 cone pulley, such pulley being used in pairs. This construction 
 involves the problem of determining the proper radii for the 
 various pulleys, so that the same belt shall serve for all the 
 changes, i. e., so that the length of the belt shall be the same 
 for each pair of pulleys in the set. The problem may be solved 
 as follows : 
 
 a. Crossed Belts, Fig. 865. The belt makes the angle /? with 
 the centre line of the pulleys R and R^ ; and the half length of 
 
 the belt, / = R T— + ,8 j + R^ f— -\. (i\ -\- a cos /?, a being 
 
 the distance from centre to centre of the pulley. We then have : 
 
 /=(^+^,) (-^4-^) +« ^^-^~^J-^ ■ ■ (-60) 
 
 This value is constant when R -^ R^ is constant ; that is, 
 ■when the increase to the radius of one pulley is equal to the 
 decrease in the radius of the other. Crossed belts are seldom 
 used for this service, however, because of the injurious friction 
 between the rubbing parts of the belt. 
 
 l>. Open Belts, Fig. 866. In this case we have : 
 
 l:^{R + R,) — +{R — R,)l3+a cos ft 
 
 and also a sin ft =: R — R^, which gives : 
 
 R^~ - — (/? sin ;8 + cos /3) 4- — sin /? I 
 
 - {P sin /3 + cos /?) — — sin /3 
 
 \ ■ • (261) 
 
 This function is transcendental, but may be graphically repre- 
 sented in the following manner, Fig. 867. In the rectangle 
 ABB' A', with a radius A B ^ a, strike the quadrant B M C 
 about the centre A. Within this arc will fall all the values of 
 
 axis at /, forming a ' ' dead ' ' ratchet mechanism. The similarity to 
 the ratchet devices of Figs. 754 and 755 will be observed. The 
 movement of the bar is effected by connection at K or K-^. 
 
 Fig. 867. 
 
 /? which can occur. For any value oi p ^^ C A M, draw M N 
 perpendicular to MA and make M N ^ the arc M C = a ji. 
 Drop the perpendicular M Pto A C, and draw N O perpendicu- 
 lar to 31 P. NO will then = a j8 sin /?. Through N draw 
 Q AA A' parallel to A B, and we have A Q = P Q ■\- A P= a 
 (/? sin p -\- cos /?). By taking successively all the values of /? 
 between 0° and 90° in this manner, we can determine the path 
 of the point N, which will be the evolute of a circle, C N D 
 
 B D being equal to the length of the arc B M C — ~ a. If we 
 
 now draw D E parallel to B A, and take i^s middle point F, we 
 
 have D F ^ E F^ — , and hence the proportion : 
 
 D F:D B = 
 
 T K= ~ QA =- 
 
 = a : TT, and by similar triangles : 
 
 3 sin /3 + cos /3). 
 
 I 
 
 This value is dependent upon — . If we prolong B F until it 
 intersects A C prolonged, the resulting length A A' ^= B B' 
 will bear to A' B' the ratio — . By then working B G ^=1, and 
 
 drawing G H parallel to A' B' , we have G H = ~. This 
 
 length being transferred to /iif gives I T= (/? sin /? 
 
 -(- cos /3). We then have only to use = 
 
 J to solve the 
 
 Make A R^ 
 
 — , and we have the perpendicular R S -^ — 
 
 sin p. By laying this length off above and below 7" on Q K, 
 we obtain the points f/and V, and this finally gives / (7 for the 
 radius R of the larger cone pulley and I V := R^, the radius of 
 the corresponding smaller cone pulley. 
 
 By solutions for successive values of /?, we obtain the curve 
 D U X V E, which can be used for the determination of the 
 radii of any desired pair of pulleys, each pair of ordinates 
 measured from H I belonging to corresponding pulley on each 
 cone. 
 
 In practice it is usual to find one of the cone pulleys given 
 and the dimensions of the other required. In this case V U 
 may be taken as the difference R — R^, between the radii, were 
 the steps uniform. By taking this difference R — R^ in the 
 dividers, and finding the equivalent ordinate U V on the curve, 
 and then adding VI^ R^, the axis H I is, found. 
 
 In order to use the curve conveniently, it may also be laid ofi" 
 left-handed, as shown in the dotted lines D' X E' . 
 
 The use of the diagram will be rendered still more convenient 
 if we omit the unnecessary value /. This enables us to distort 
 the curve in the direction of the abscissas to any desired extent. 
 
igo 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 off toward C, the corresponding radius X d and 
 prolong the axial line d d' to its intersection d' with 
 B E. Then Ky off the given geometric ratio on C X, 
 considering X rf as i (shown in the diagram by the 
 small circles for the ratios \, \, f, |, |), and draw rays 
 from d' through the points of division, and these rays 
 will intersect the curve at the correspouding points 
 for the pulley radii Ry We then have for the radii : 
 and « I' for the ratio i : 4 
 
 b2 
 
 e 5 
 
 b2' 
 
 c i' ' 
 dX' ' 
 
 e 5' ' 
 
 Cone pulleys may also be made continuous, thus 
 becoming conoids upon which the belt can be shifted 
 to any point by an adjustable guide or shifter. Such 
 conoids are used for driving the rollers in spinning 
 machinery. Such a pair of conoids are Shown in 
 Fig. 869, the proportions having been determined by 
 the graphical scale. The angular velocity varies in 
 an arithmetical ratio as shown. 
 
 The curve B VA in the scale shows the limit to 
 which the axial line may approach A E ; this dis- 
 tance must not be less than R-\- R]^-=. a, from which 
 V Y=^ \{AB — V U). 
 
 ?28o. 
 Cross Section and Capacity of Belts. 
 A belt of rectangular cross section of width b, and 
 thickness &, will be subjected to a tension 7"on the 
 tight side (see § 264), which it must be proportioned 
 to sustain. If 5' is the permissible stress for the unit 
 of cross section, we have, therefore. T^ b 6 S. 
 
 The minimum ratio which T bears to the trans- 
 mitted force /"is dependent upon the stress modulus 
 
 ; r=7/'(?^ 264). Butr = - 
 
 1 which p 
 
 Fig. 868. 
 
 This has been done in the proportional diagram for cone 
 pulleys. Fig. 868. 
 
 The method of using the diagram is as follows : 
 The sides A B and D E oi the rectangle represent the dis- 
 tance a between the centres of the pulleys ; all radii are given 
 in proportional parts of a, for which reason A Bis sub-divided, 
 the size of the diagram being selected so that ^ i? = 18 to 20 
 inches. If, then, i a and i' 
 a are two given radii for a 
 pair of pulleys on a pair of 
 cones, we take the vertical 
 chord of the curve which 
 ^ I' a — I a, prolong the 
 chord downward until its 
 length ^ 1 a, and draw the 
 axis abed parallel to A E. 
 Then for the other pairs of 
 pulleys on the cones, we 
 have b2 and 62', ^3 and 
 cy, etc., which can be 
 taken directly from the dia- 
 gram with the dividers. If 
 the given pair of radii to 
 which the cones are to be 
 made equal, the chord R — 
 y?i = o, and the axis will 
 pass through X at right 
 angles to C X. 
 
 If it is desired to construct 
 a pair of cone pulleys to any 
 given speed ratio, this can 
 readily be done. If, for example, the given ratio is i : i, we lay 
 
 represents the modulus of friction ^A. Hence, if X 
 is the horse power transmitted for a belt speed of v 
 
 feet per minute, we have : X = = . 
 
 33000 33000 r 
 
 This enables us to determine the cross section of the 
 belt, but in practice the width of the belt is the varia- 
 ble factor, the thickness usually being determined by' 
 commercial considerations, and limited to few defi- 
 nite sizes. 
 
 If we let g represent the cross section of the belt 
 in square inches, we have : 
 
 33000 r 
 This formula is very useful, since it may be used to determine 
 the capacity of a belt from its cross section and velocity. If we 
 
 X 
 put Xa = — we have : 
 
 ^0 = 
 
 33000 
 
 (262) 
 
 The value depends upon the material and stress modulus, the 
 latter including the arc of contact a, and upon _/, which itself 
 depends upon the material of both belt and pulley ; it may also 
 be considered as dependent upon a, independent of the material, 
 in the same manner as was the subject of specific weight. The 
 author has called this value A^^, the specific capacity o'" a belt. 
 It will be seen that when this specific capacity is determined 
 for any kind of belt, the proper cross section for the transmis- 
 sion of a given horse power X can readily be found, since the 
 velocity v can be chosen, and we have at once 
 
 1 = - 
 
 X 
 
 (263) 
 
 For the determination of the specific capacity of any kind of 
 belt it is necessary to find the constants 5 and r. 
 The materials used for belting are : 
 
 Tanned leather. 
 
 Cotton, woven and treated with oil, 
 
 Rubber, interlaid with linen or cotton webbing. 
 
 In practice the value of 5" to be used must depend much upon 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 judgment, the value being governed to a great extent by the 
 quality of the material. Customary values are for : 
 
 Leather ^ = 4000 to 6000 lbs. 
 
 Cotton 6" = 3000 to 4000 lbs. 
 
 Rubber .S" = 3500 to 5000 lbs. 
 
 The thickness & for single leather belts varies from -f^" to ~^^" ; 
 double, triple, quadruple, and even quintuple thicknesses being 
 sometimes used, the thicknesses being secured by cement, and 
 sewed or rivetted together. Cotton belts are usually from ■^.," 
 to \\" thick, while rubber belts are made of any desired thick- 
 ness, a web of canvas being interlaid between the successive 
 thicknesses of rubber. 
 
 The stress modulus r depends upon a andy^ and the latter co- 
 efficient varies with the age of the belt, being greater with belts 
 which have been used some time than with quite new belts. It 
 is advisable, however, to make all calculations as for new belts, 
 in which case we have for smooth iron pulleys, for : 
 
 Iveather and cotton, /"= 0.16 to 0.25*, p = 1.6 to 2.1 
 Rubber, /"= 0.20 to 0.25, /) = i.8to2.i 
 
 These give as approximate values for . 
 
 T 
 Leather and cotton, --■ or r = 2.5 to 1.9 
 
 1 for 5-, in (262) 
 
 By using these values together with those giv 
 -we get for the specific capacity for belting : 
 
 Leather, N^ = 0.0062 to 0.0098 ] 
 Cotton, Na = 0.0036 to o 0068 I (265) 
 Rubber, N^ = 0.0050 to 0.0082 j 
 
 These are based upon low and moderate speeds ; say up to 
 3000 feet per minute, and the variations between the Itmits given 
 are those due to the differences in strength of various kinds of 
 leather and canvas used. 
 
 The resistance to bending or stiffness of a belt must be taken 
 into account, and the ratio of thickness 6 to pulley radius R, 
 must not be too great. Practical experience has shown that 
 6 I 
 
 -^ = — - should not be exceeded to obtain best results.* 
 
 R 
 
 50 
 
 stress and the thickness of the belt the 
 /, between belt and pulley may be cal- 
 
 From the kno 
 superficial pressi 
 
 culated. We have only to substitute in (24r) for the width b' 
 -of '.he surface of contact, the width b of the belt itself, 
 «in e ^ = 3 (J, we get the simple relation : 
 
 = 343, or a mean of 45* lbs., which in (264) gi 
 = 2.5 lbs. on the large pulley, and/ = 1^ 
 
 e of Pas above. 
 
 Ixample 2.—\ 
 ie and 0.25" tl 
 
 j" thick, at a velocity of 2000 feet per minute ? Taking the speci- 
 fic capacity at 0.006, which has been found satisfactory in practice, we have 
 from (262) 7V=yt/7Vo = 4X 0.25 X 2000 X 0.006 = 12 H. P. 
 
 Example 3.-— h. rubber belt is required to drive a centrifugal pump (rubber 
 ■being especially adapted for damp locations). A^=2o, the pump vane to 
 make 300 revolutions, and the driving shaft 80 revolutions per minute, and 
 ■the belt speed 2000 feet. Taking the specific capacity at 0.007, we have 20 = 
 
 •width b = ; 
 
 )r the driven pulley we have Ri = 
 
 
 i2%", and for the drivf 
 lbs., whence p = 
 the small pulley. 
 
 47.8 
 
 n the large pulley and 
 
 For extraordinary cases the fundamental formula should 
 always be applied. Foi double-acting belts, as in Fig. 860, in 
 which a = 2 jr instead of tt, the value fa = I, and the modulus 
 of stress is only 06 of the preceding value, hence q is reduced 
 in the same proportion. If the belt velocity v is very high, it 
 is no longer permissible to neglect the influence of centrifugal 
 force. For a speed v = 5000 feet and a stress ^:= 568 pounds 
 (see ^ 264) the exponent in the friction modulus becomes 0.84/" a 
 instead of _/ a, which ior f = 0.16 and a = tt, givesy^ a = 084 
 X 0.16 TT = 0.42. This gives r := 2.91 or about | of the normal 
 value, which requires one-sixth greater cross section q for the 
 belt. The highest limit of belt speed in ordinary practice 
 appears to be about 6000 feet per miuute.f 
 
 ? 2S1. 
 Examples op Bei.t Transmission. 
 
 The table of existing examples of belt transmission on next 
 page will serve to furnish data for comparison with, calculated 
 results. 
 
 The great variations in the values of k9 and JV^, in the fol- 
 lowing table are not surprising when the differences in the 
 quality of material, and the various conditions are considered. 
 Many leather belts are working under high stresses which are 
 only practicable because of the excellence of the material. 
 Some such belting can be operated under stresses as high as 
 2000 pounds, which enables much lighter sections to be used. 
 Many belts which appear to have been excessively heavy have 
 simply been calculated to work at a moderate stress. 
 
 The plausible but erroneous idea that the pressure of the 
 atmosphere influences belt action cannot be admitted. It is 
 contradicted not oul}' by the fact that the same coefficient of 
 friction exists for ropes as for belts, but also by the recent 
 and careful experiment made in a vacuum by Leloutre which 
 confirmed the theory of the modulus of friction. 
 
 ? 282. 
 Belt Connections. 
 The various methods of connecting the ends of belts generally 
 give a greater stress at the point of connection than in the body 
 of the belt. The attempts to reduce this weakness and also 
 provide for the greatest facility in the making of the joint, has 
 caused a great variety of methods to be proposed ; some of the 
 best of these are here given : 
 
 
 P 
 
 s 
 
 = 
 
 ~R 
 
 
 
 • (264) 
 
 Example /.—Required a 
 of pulleys to be K = 80 hj = 
 
 leather 
 = 150 revc 
 
 belt to transmit 100 H 
 lutions. Taking the s 
 
 P. and 
 
 a'paatyaf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sq. in. cross section. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 000 
 
 
 
 If we ust a double belt 
 
 .4" thick 
 
 th 
 
 width should be 
 
 I'i 
 
 = 12 
 
 inches. 
 
 For the driving pulley \ 
 
 re have : 
 
 2 TT 
 
 ^" .and 7? 
 
 35 
 
 
 " = 7.-7 
 
 
 
 .say 72", or 154 inches. For 
 
 thedrive 
 
 np 
 
 illeywe have j^i = 
 
 Bo 
 
 i^'-'-*.-. \ 
 
 For the superficial pressu 
 
 e p, we hav 
 
 ,P= 33^2^X^00 
 
 = 
 
 
 bs. Also 
 
 r=2.5 i' = 2750, hence 5 
 
 _ _275c 
 0.4 X 
 
 - = 
 
 = 573- Wehaveals 
 
 
 = 3.5 
 
 />= 1650, 
 
 Fig. 870. 
 
 In Fig. 870, a is a lap joint sewed with hempen thread ; <5, a 
 lap joint secured with screw rivets ; c is a plate coupling, the 
 plate and prongs being made in one malleable casting and the 
 prongs bent over and clinched after insertion in the belt, several 
 clamps being used for belts more than 4 inches in width. At d 
 is shown belt lacings for use with single or double belts. The 
 upper one has the defect of giving intersections which make 
 the lacing cut itself, and the knot at the edge of the belt reduces 
 the strength of the joint. J These defects are both avoided in the 
 lower form, which is an American belt lacing.^ 
 
 :r belts from 0.25" to 0.4" are preferable. 
 
 1 of the Ariberg tunnel s 
 in which the belt had a velocity of 4700 feet pei 
 for fourteen months. 
 
 I Leloutre has used the Kpper form of lacing 
 thick with excellent performance and durability, 
 
 I See Cooper, Use of Belting, p. 189. 
 
 for a belt of 26" wide, o.65" 
 
i92 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 
 EXAMPLES OF BELT TRANSMISSION. 
 
 *0. 
 
 //orse 
 
 " 
 
 R 
 
 ^ 
 
 P 
 
 b 
 
 6 
 
 s 
 
 ^0 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1 
 
 624 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 271.8 
 108 
 
 2887 
 
 7114 
 
 105 
 
 0.67 
 
 512 
 
 .0062 ^^^^}^^> 2 belts side by 
 side. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 200 
 
 52 
 182 
 
 39.37 
 
 3749 
 
 1731 
 
 24 
 
 0.47 
 
 388 
 
 .0046 
 
 I^eather. 
 
 190 
 
 J5_ 
 223 
 
 71.8 
 T2X 
 
 2440 
 
 2528 
 
 2X 
 
 0.24 
 
 1222 
 
 .0147 
 
 Leather. 
 
 4 
 
 175 
 
 T2"8' 
 
 56.9 
 30 
 
 3561 
 
 1573 
 
 29 
 
 0.35 
 
 388 
 
 .0046 
 
 Leather. 
 
 5 
 
 153 
 
 120 
 
 TecT 
 
 _63_ 
 
 47.25 
 
 3955 
 
 1256 
 
 12.6 
 
 0.52 
 
 483 
 
 .0059 
 
 Leather. 
 
 6 
 
 130 
 
 36 
 
 94 
 
 128 
 
 T5T 
 
 2410 
 
 1544 
 
 zo- 
 
 0.40 
 
 981 
 
 .o:2x 
 
 Leather. 
 
 7 
 
 90 
 
 65 
 182 
 
 8^8 
 ~3^ 
 
 2833 
 
 1034 
 
 12 
 
 0.35 
 
 612 
 
 .0075 
 
 Leather. 
 
 8 
 
 81 
 
 55 
 
 137-5 
 
 39-37 
 
 2833 
 
 928 
 
 9.8 
 
 0.52 
 
 455 
 
 .0056 
 
 Leather. 
 
 , 9 
 
 60 
 
 100 
 
 12 
 59 
 
 1535 
 
 631 
 
 :2.2 
 
 0.47 
 
 270 
 
 .0033 
 
 Leather. 
 
 10 
 
 54 
 
 45 
 125 
 
 35-4 
 
 2318 
 
 660 
 
 17.3 
 
 0.24 
 
 400 
 
 .0092 
 
 Leather. 
 
 11 
 
 42 
 
 60 
 90 
 
 70.8 
 47.25 
 
 2224 
 
 614 
 
 ...8 
 
 0.20 
 
 654 
 
 .0082 
 
 Leather. 
 
 12 
 
 i 
 
 40 
 
 66 
 102 
 
 49.2 
 38.9 
 
 2066 
 
 630 
 
 13.8 
 
 0.24 
 
 483 
 
 -0059 
 
 Leather. 
 
 !X3 
 
 530 
 
 60 
 262 
 
 j[44_ 
 27 
 
 5156 
 
 3337 
 
 38 
 
 0.72 
 
 313 
 
 .0036 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 14 
 15 
 
 497 
 
 70 
 H44 
 
 99 
 
 48 
 
 3620 
 
 4457 
 
 30 
 
 0.72 
 
 526 
 
 .0065 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 470 
 
 _62^ 
 
 114 
 
 _9L 
 49-5 
 
 3130 
 
 4877 
 
 32 
 
 0.72 
 
 540 
 
 .0065 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 16 
 
 413 
 
 ^8_ 
 
 120 
 "48" 
 
 3000 
 
 4453 
 
 30 
 
 0.72 
 
 512 
 
 -0105 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 i 17 
 
 325 
 
 125 
 
 172.4 
 
 60 
 
 43-5 
 
 3915 
 
 2583 
 
 22 
 
 0.72 
 
 412 
 
 .0049 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 18 
 
 134 
 
 125 
 
 133-3 
 
 48 
 45 
 
 3130 
 
 1390 
 
 10 
 
 0.72 
 
 412 
 
 .0049 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 1 
 19 
 
 60 
 
 _7o_ 
 175 
 
 13^ 
 29.6 
 
 2706 
 
 722 
 
 16.5 
 
 0.47 
 
 228 
 
 .0049 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 20 
 
 35 
 
 8i-3 
 99-3 
 
 1! 
 31 
 
 1633 
 
 704 
 
 5 
 
 0.72 
 
 498 
 
 .0062 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 21 
 
 66 
 
 16S 
 243 
 
 55 
 37.5 
 
 4763 
 
 451 
 
 1 1.8 
 
 0.52 
 
 185 
 
 .0023 
 
 8-ply Rubber. 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^93 
 
 Fig. 871 a, shows Botter's belt fastening. This is a form of 
 belt hook which has been found very serviceable, reducing the 
 strength of the belt but little, and permitting easy renewal. 
 Another form is Moxon's belt fastening,* shown at b, is a piu 
 
 a. b, c. d. 
 
 Fig. 87 1. 
 
 point, the ends of the pin being riveted over, and from its con- 
 struction should be very strong. At c is a butt joint with a 
 reinforcement piece especially suited for cotton belts. When a 
 belt is made for special service it can be in several layers as at 
 d ; the joints overlapping, but thus giving no opportunity for 
 change of length. 
 
 The stretching and joining of heavy belts is a matter requir- 
 ing much care in order to secure the desired tension, = ^ 
 (7'+ t).^ Belts which are subjected only to light tensions may 
 be cemented by scarfing the ends and using a cement composed 
 of common glue mixed with fish glue, or of rubber dissolved in 
 bisulphide of carbon, 
 
 \ 283. 
 The Proportioxs c 
 
 Pulleys. 
 
 Pulleys are usually made of cast iron and of single width, i. e., 
 one set of arms. The arms, which formerly were made curved, 
 in order to resist the stresses due to contraction, are now made 
 straight, and for wide face iDulleys two or even three parallel 
 sets of arms are used. 
 
 Fig. 872. 
 
 Fig. 872 shows both single and double arms. The dimensions 
 of arms and rim have been determined b}^ experience, based 
 upon practical considerations. For the number A of arms for 
 a single set, we get serviceable values from : 
 
 <^-f) 
 
 . (266) 
 
 which gives, for : 
 
 The width h of the arm, if prolonged to the middle of the 
 hub, may be obtained from : 
 
 The width h^ of the arm at the rim is equal to 0.8 h, and the 
 corresponding thicknesses are e ^ % h, and e^ = yi h-^. 
 
 Pulleys with two or three sets of arms may be considered as 
 
 *See Chronique industrielle, 1882, Vol. 5, p. 97 ; also Mechanical World, 
 1882, Vol. 12, p. 56. 
 
 tLeloutre has used a dynamometric bell-stretcher for tensions of K 
 (r+t) = 8800 pounds. 
 
 two or three separate pulleys combined in one, except that the 
 proportions of the arms should be 0.8 or 0.7 times that of single 
 arm pulleys, or in the proportion of W/^ and a^'A 
 
 The thickness of the rim may be made : /^ = I to >( h, this 
 being frequently turned much thinner. The width of face 
 should be from f to J the width of the belt. 
 
 The thickness of metal in the hub may be made fF= /;, to 
 % h. The length of hub may =: b, for single arm pulleys and 
 2 b for double arm pulleys. Light pulleys are usually secured 
 to the shaft by means of set screws, as in Fig. 875 and 877 - 
 heavier ones are keyed as in Fig. 191, either with or without 
 set screws.* 
 
 For man}' purposes pulleys are made in two parts, such being: 
 I ly called "split pulleys. The forms of split pulleys 
 are shown in Figs. 873 to 875. 
 The arrangement of the two 
 halves is clearly shown, that 
 of Fig. 874 with hollow clamp- 
 ing section, being especially 
 good.f 
 
 The form in Fig. 875 is the 
 
 design of the Walker Mfg. Co. 
 
 of Cleveland, Ohio, the clamps 
 
 being made of malleable iron 
 
 or steel. In all three cases^ 
 
 there is no especial method of 
 
 fastening to the shaft. In 
 
 England and America pulleys 
 
 are frequently made with 
 
 wrought iron rims and cast 
 
 I iron hubs. This construction 
 
 Fig. 873 greatly simplifies the casting 
 
 of the arms, and at the same 
 
 time gives pulleys 25 to 60 per cent, lighter than those of cast 
 
 iron, which in large transmissions greatly reduces the friction 
 
 at the bearings of the shafting. Fig. S76 shows the Medart 
 
 pulley. The rim is curved in bending rolls, and also given a 
 rounding face, and is 
 countersunk for the 
 rivets at the attach- 
 ment of the arms. The 
 pads on the arms are 
 truly finished, as is 
 also the rim after it is 
 riveted on, thus giv- 
 ing an accurate and 
 useful pulley. J 
 
 A metal pulley by 
 the Hartford Engin- 
 eering Company %o" 
 diameter and 16" face 
 weighed 320 pounds. 
 A cast iron pulley of 
 the same dimensions 
 ^^ made by the Berlin- An - 
 pj„ g^ halt Works, weighed 
 
 '^' 700 potmds, and one 
 
 by Briegleb, Hansen & Co., a little narrower face weighed 52S 
 
 pounds. 
 
 * In order to determine the necessary friction to secure a 1 
 shaft, the force;* on the belt will serve. In ordinary' cases, ass 
 efficient ot friction on the key of one-half that on the belt, the 
 a pressure ;>' on the key of about 4001 times that on the belt, wl 
 ing to § 20 will not give more than 5000 to 7000 lbs. for/'. 
 
 t-This is the construction of the Berlin-Anhalt Machine Wor 
 I Made in England by George Richards & Co., Manchester. 
 
194 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 877 shows Good- 
 win's split pulley, with 
 wrought rim, the face of 
 the rim being rounded by 
 turning. 
 
 These constructions 
 naturally led to the use of 
 wrought iron arms also, 
 I although these are some- 
 what difficult to make ; 
 but for very large diame- 
 ters (say 16 to 25 feet) 
 they possess advantages.* 
 Pulleys made entirely of 
 steel are used by J. B. 
 Sturtevant of Boston, in 
 connection with fan blow- 
 FiG. 876. ers, Fig. 87S. The hub 
 
 with web, is screwed on the steel shaft of the fan wheel, and 
 the rim, which has a groove turned in it, is expanded by warm- 
 ing, and shrinks into place, 
 the whole being finally 
 turned in position, and care- 
 fully balanced. Sturtevant 
 uses these pulleys up to 10 
 in. in diameter, and 7 in. 
 face, the thickness of rim 
 being from 0.08 to 0.16, and 
 the velocity at the rim reach- 
 ing 5000 feet per minute. 
 
 By covering the rim with 
 leather the co-efiicient of fric- 
 tion, f, and can be increased 
 between the belt and pulley, 
 and the modulus of stress 
 r reduced, and the specific 
 capacity of the belt increased. 
 This is sometimes useful be- 
 cause a reduced modulus of «^^ o-- 
 stress r permits a smaller ^^^- ^"7- 
 cross section of belt and lighter pulley. In large transmissions 
 reduction of stress is important since it is accompanied with 
 
 , ^^^^^^1 ,j reduced journal friction 
 
 ^^S,..r„.> " irt and higher efficiency. 
 The observation of the 
 author leads him to be- 
 lieve the specific capa- 
 city of a belt is not 
 greater with leather 
 covered pulleys than 
 with uncovered ones, 
 and the cost of covering 
 is an important item. 
 
 The greater the angu- 
 lar velocity of a pulley 
 the more important it is 
 that its geometric axis 
 should be a so-called 
 "free axis." This re- 
 quires that the center of 
 Fig. 878. gravity of the pulley 
 
 should be on the axis of rotation and also that the various por- 
 tions of the mass should be so distributed that the axis of 
 inertia should coincide v.'ith the axis of rotation and the centri- 
 fugal moment equal zero.f This can be done empirically by so- 
 called balancing, the unequal distribution of material being 
 equalized by attaching pieces of lead or other metal, or more 
 accurately by balancing when revolving, for which purpose a 
 beautiful apparatus has been made by the Defiance Machine 
 Works, Defiance, Ohio. Careful balancing of pulleys is ot great 
 importance at high speeds, the rapidly increasing vibrations 
 will soon limit the speed. This is to be considered in connection 
 with the advantages to be gained by the use of high speed 
 shaft as discussed in I 146. 
 
 NoTB. — The recent investigations upon paper rim pulleys % 
 are. instructive. This construction gives a very high modulus 
 of friction, the modulus of stress r being only 1.2. This gives 
 T=J.2P as against 2.5 /", for iron pulleys. Hence follows a 
 great increase in the specific capacity of the belt, and increased 
 efficiency with smaller and lighter pulleys. This leads the way 
 to further investigations which prove of material value in the 
 science of belt transmission. 
 
 Maiuz; in England by Hudswell, Clark & Co., Leeds,' these latter with 
 arms of round bar iron. 
 
 fSee an article by the writer, " Ueber das Zentrifugal-Moment," in Ber- 
 liner Verhandlungf, 1876, p. 50. 
 
 I See Am. Machinist, May 23, 1885, p. 7- 
 
 Ffficiency of Belting. 
 
 Three causes of loss exist in belt transmissions, viz. : journal 
 friction, "belt stiffness, and belt creeping. For horizontal belt- 
 ing we have, according to formula (99) for the journal friction, 
 expressed at the circumference of the pulley a loss E. when 7 
 
 _T^ t 4 
 
 ^ \2R ^ 2R,J 
 
 
 . (2f 
 
 in which dandd^ arethe journal diameters, and/the coefficient 
 of journal friction. This loss is doubtless the greatest of the 
 three. For lack of better researches the loss of belt stiffness 
 may be deduced from Eytelwein's formula for ropes. For the 
 coefficient of stiffness s, for force S', which includes both pul- 
 leys ; 
 
 T + 
 
 \R^ rJ 
 
 --(^+0 
 
 0.009 — = 0.012. 
 
 . (269) 
 
 The loss from creep is due to the fact that the greater stress 
 on the driving pulley over that on the driven requires for a 
 given volume of belt, a longer arc of contact ; for the expendi- 
 ture of force G' for creep on both pulleys, we have for a stress 
 5"i on the leading side of the belt : 
 
 • (270) 
 
 In this E is the modulus of elasticity of the belt, which for 
 leather is 20,000 to 30,000 pounds. The losses from stiffness 
 and creep are small. 
 
 Example.— h^\. d and rfj = 4" ; j? = 7f = 20", 6 = 0.2, / = 0.08, .S = 0.012, 
 
 !8,440, Si = 425, % 
 
 ■HP; 
 
 also S"- = P (0.048 X 2) .^:±- = 0.0048 />, 
 
 and G^ = P °-^ ^ ''^^ ■ = O.OOS9 P. 
 28,440 -f 425 
 
 The total loss is therefore : o.oS -\- 0.0048 -(- 0.0059 = 9.1 per cent. 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 ROPE TRANSMISSION. 
 
 Various Kinds of Rope Transmission. 
 
 If in the tension driving gear, shown in Fig. 810, the rope be 
 used only for the transmission of power we have what is called 
 a Rope Transmission. Since the details of construction must 
 vary, according as fibrous or wire rope is used, we may distin- 
 guish between three kinds of rope transmission, viz. : those for 
 Hemp, Cotton or Wire Rope, and these will be considered in 
 this order. The oldest of all these is hemp rope transmission, 
 but this was gradually being superseded by belting until 
 Combes, of Belfast, revived it, about i860, since which time it 
 has been extensively used for heavy transmissions. The char- 
 acter of the material permits a wide variety of applications. 
 The same is true of cotton rope, which is extensively used for 
 driving spinning frames, travelling cranes and many other ma- 
 chines, the softness and flexibility of the material giving it ad- 
 vantages, but within limits. Wire rope transmissions, since its 
 introduction by the brothers Hirn, at Logelbach, in 1850, have 
 developed a high degree of efficiency and utility for long dis- 
 tance transmission. As will be seen hereafter, the applications 
 of rope transmission appear to be capable of still further ex- 
 tension. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR, 
 
 A. HEMP ROPE TRANSMISSION'. 
 I 286. 
 
 Specific Capacity. Cross Section of Rope. 
 It is important first to determine the specific capacity for 
 hemp rope [l 280). This is obtained from the general state- 
 ment according to (262) : 
 
 3 '• 
 
 in which S^ is the stress on the tight side of the rope, and r the 
 modulus of stress. The value for the co-efficient of friction f, 
 depends upon the form of the groove or channel in the sheave 
 over which the rope runs. 
 
 The cross section of the rim of a pulley for five ropes is 
 shown in Pig. 880. For large steam engines the grooves are 
 sometimes made on the 
 fly wheel, such con- 
 structions sometimes 
 being very large and 
 heavy .f 
 
 The application of 
 rope transmission in 
 manufacturing estab- 
 lishments simplifies the 
 mechanism very ma- 
 terially, since it enables 
 the jack shaft and gear- 
 
 FiG. 879. 
 
 If the groove is semicircular, as at b, Fig. 870, the iriction is 
 but little greater than it is upon an ordinary cylindrical pulley, 
 as at a ; if, however, the groove is made wedge-shaped, as at c 
 (see wedge friction wheels I 196), the driving power is increased 
 although the surface of contact is reduced. In determining the 
 value of r, from formula (239) the influence of the shape of the 
 groove can be included by using a corresponding co-efficient of 
 friction fK According to the recent investigations of Leloutre 
 and others, the value of/^for cylindrical pulleys and new hemp 
 rope is 0.075, for semicircular grooves, 0.088, and for wedge 
 grooves with an angle of 60°,/:= 0.15, which accords well with 
 the action of the wedge, doubling the pressure, see (185). For 
 yi == 0.08S and a contact of a half circumference, we have _/' a 
 = 0.3, and hence r = 3.86 ; with _/' = 0.15, /• o = 0.47, and r 
 = 2.67. The latter value, which is even reduced in actual 
 practice, may be adopted, since wedge grooves in general use. 
 The stress is usually taken while low, and may be put at 5 = 
 
 Z5^ _ 
 2.67 
 
 0.0039 ; see (262). In practice Nq is found even one-half this 
 value, and we may take as a practical rule in hemp rope trans- 
 mission for the specific capacity, i. e, the horse power trans- 
 mitted per square inch of cross section, for each foot of linear 
 velocity per minute ; 
 
 No = 0.004 to 0.002. 
 
 . . ■ .(271) 
 ; that due to the full 
 
 Example 2. In the jute mills a 
 for 30 ropes, of 2.36" diameter, e 
 being 3000 feet per minute. 
 
 a the fly wheel of the engine is grooved 
 ■ope transmitting 25 H. P. ; the velocity 
 .s gives a specific capacity of TVq = 
 
 ■mplei. The Berlin 
 
 ing to be dispensed 
 
 which five 
 
 the cross section being taken as in g 265, 
 outside diameter of the rope. 
 
 When great power is to be transmitted a number of ropes are 
 used side by side, the pulleys being made with a corresponding 
 number of grooves. For machine shop transmission such 
 ropes are conveniently made about two inches in diameter, 
 although they are used as small as i^, and as thick as 2^ 
 inches. 
 
 mitted through 
 
 of the rope 3.14 sq. inches. Hence N^ ■ 
 is taken from an existing installation.* 
 
 different lines of shafting are driven from one horizontal steam, 
 engine, sixteen hemp ropes being used in all. 
 
 Sources of Loss in Hemp Rope Transmission. 
 
 The use of hemp rope transmission reduces many losses 
 which exist in other methods and which materially reduce the 
 efficiency ; the principal ones which need to be considered are 
 the resistances due to journal friction, stiffness of ropes, and 
 creep of ropes. 
 
 a. Journal Friction. — In rope transmissions from steam en- 
 gines the journal friction is usually great, because the large fly 
 wheel requires journals of large diameter. The usual calcula- 
 tions can only be given by indeterminate results, because the 
 tension of the ropes sometimes acts with the weight of the 
 other parts, and sometimes against it. 
 
 If we consider the rope tensions T and t by themselves, as 
 acting horizontally, we have from formula (100) the friction F 
 
 = — / {T-\- /), which reduced to its corresponding resistance 
 
 to the rope, taking r 
 
 -, gives a loss due to one shaft - 
 
 v/('f-f)G^). 
 
 .lachine Works has design rope transmis" 
 JUS 111 w11n.11 iuiji:aui 1.10 , 1.5/", 1.97" diameter transmit forces, respec- 
 k-ely, of 92.4, 165 and264 pounds. The respective cross sections of the ropes 
 
 e 1.09, 1.93 and 3.04 square inches. Since = we have .A'o = 
 
 which gives in each of the three cases A'o = 0.0026. 
 
 take / :^ 0.09 J and 
 double the, result for both shafts, calling this combined loss Fz 
 we have : £z = — X 0.09 x 4-33 ( — ^ J which reduces to ; 
 
 ^^ = -'jr- (^7^) 
 
 Example i. In the first of the preceding examples we have also d = 6.3 
 inches, and 2R = i^s'A inches, hence — — = 0.046 or a little over 4 pet 
 
 * See Zeitschrift d. ^ 
 
 S ft. face, 30 ft. dia.. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 b. Stiffness of Ropes. — If we apply Eytelwein's formula (252) 
 we have ^ =z j4 ( T-{- 1) taking both pulleys iuto consideration, 
 and taking 7 = 27^ and introducing T-\- t, gives Q = ^\ P. 
 
 It must be considered that the ropes are usually quite slack, 
 and that the co-efficient stiffness 5, may be taken somewhat 
 less than Eytelwein's value. If we take % as a fair approxi- 
 mation, the ratio of loss is 
 
 S 2 ^ d'- I 
 
 -^ = y X 0.463 — X 4 _ 
 
 and calling this loss Es , we get : 
 
 £s - 1.33^^ (273) 
 
 in which d is the diameter of the rope. 
 
 „^/>le 2 
 
 e preceding e 
 
 mple, d = 2", J? = 67.75". 
 
 This give 
 
 ' 67-75 
 
 c. Creep of Ropes. — -The loss through creep is more important 
 in rope transmission than with belting (see ? 284) and should 
 not be neglected, although it cannot be so readily determined, 
 owing to the division of the power among a number of ropes. 
 It is practicall}' impossible to insure a uniform tension upon a 
 number of adjacent ropes, or to have them of exactly the same 
 diameter, besides which the "working " diameters of the vari- 
 ous grooves differ slightly, so that additional slippage must oc- 
 cur.^ The resulting frictional loss is estimated by some at 
 as much as 10 per cent., when the number of ropes is 20 to 30, 
 and it is at all times important enough to be given considera- 
 tion. The losses from stiffness and creep should be investi 
 gated whenever practicable, as the resulting information would 
 be of much technical value. 
 
 Assuming the loss from creep in the case previously consid- 
 ered to be 5 per cent., we have a total resistance of 4 -f- 7.8 -|- 5 
 ^ 16.8 per cent.; which, since small values were taken in all 
 cases, is not to be considered higher than the actual loss. 
 This explains the numerous objections which have been raised 
 (as in England) against the use of hemp rope transmission for 
 very large powers (see \ 301). 
 
 Pressure and We.\r on Hemp Rope. 
 
 As already seen, the surface of contact of the rope and pulley 
 may be one of three kinds : upon a cylindrical pulley, iu a 
 semicircular groove, or in a wedge-shaped groove (Fig. 879), 
 and to these formula (241) can be applied. In case a, we can 
 approximate b' as equal to ^ the circumference of the rope. 
 This gives for the superficial pressure 
 
 Even under these unfavorable conditions the superficial pres- 
 sure is not important, on account of the small value of S; 
 which, as already seen, is about 350 pounds. 
 
 Example. — If .S = 350 pounds, and ■ = we have for a cylindri- 
 cal pulley / = 350 X 2 X r = 28 lbs. for semicircular grooves, p = lb.s 
 
 and for wedge grooves, when 9 — 50°, ^ = 56 lbs. per square inch. 
 
 These low pressures cause but little wear upon the rope, 
 hence the great durability of hemp transmission ropes, some- 
 times extending to two or three years of use. 
 
 B. COTTON ROPE TRANSMISSION. 
 Cotton rope is not so extensively used for purposes of trans- 
 mission as hemp rope, although it possesses the advantages of 
 great strength and flexibility ; the impediment to its use being 
 its higher price. The application of cotton rope for driving 
 spinning mule spindles, referred to ^in I 265, is shown in Fig. 
 882, iu which Z"i is the driving pulley and Zlj the driven pulley 
 
 • (275) 
 
 S 2. R 
 
 In case c, the radial pressure Q, of the rope is divided into 
 two forces Q' acting normal to the wedge surfaces and equal 
 
 to .^ ~ in which Q is the angle of the groove, and taking the 
 
 contact surface on each side as J^ the circumference of the rope, 
 we have 
 
 which, for Q = 30°, gives approximately : 
 P d 
 
 ~S =4^ 
 
 . (274) , 
 
 on the carriage. This latter pulley is on the axis of a drum 7j 
 from which light cords drive the spindles 7^. At L, L, are 
 guide pulleys. The usual diameter of rope for 7^ T.;,is 0.86'^, 
 and for large machines with many spindles two such ropes are 
 used, the pulleys being made with double grooves, these always 
 being of semicircular section. 
 
 On the ring spinning frame cotton rope of 0.4^'' diameter is 
 used on cone pulleys of 12 steps, giving changes of speed from 
 3:1 to 2:3. The proportions of such pulley may be determined 
 as shown iu § 279, the grooves being semicircular. 
 
 As already shown in | 265 cotton ropes have been used by 
 Ramsbottom for driving traveling cranes. For this purpose 
 ropes of i to t inch diameter are used, running at speeds of 
 2500 to 3000 feet per minute, a weighted idler pulley keeping 
 the rope taut. 
 
 In view of the slow movement of the load, viz. : 20 to 40 feet 
 per minute, it is questionable whether cotton rope transmission 
 involving such a great transformation of speed, is advantageous, f 
 
 ' C. WIRE ROPE TRANSMISSION. 
 ? 290. 
 
 Specific C.4.pacity. Cross Section of Rope. 
 In considering the transmission of power by means of wire 
 rope the points to be determined are the cross section of the 
 rope, and the deflection of the two portions of rope due to its 
 weight. The cross section will first be considered by determin- 
 ing the specific capacity (See I 2S0). This we get from (262) 
 
 33000 r 
 
 in which S^ is the stress in driving half of the rope, considered 
 either in connection with the driving or the driven pulley. 
 The modulus of friction p is taken somewhat higher than for 
 belting, since the angle of contact a is greater, and also because 
 the co-efficient of friction /, for pulleys fitted with diagonal 
 leather strips (see below) is very high ; early and recent tests 
 giving/= 0.22 to 0.25 and higher. The first value gives r> = 
 
 (276) 
 
 2 (See Fig. 816), and a 
 (See 239). This gives, 
 
 3 the stress modulus r = =; 2 
 
 n (262) if we neglect centrifugal force : 
 
 \ S^ S^_ 
 
 13000 ' 2 66000 
 
 • (277) 
 
 coloring matter on the ropes a 
 
 J leather transrai: 
 
 twisted thongs, these being used for 
 light spindles. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 This gives high numerical values, which is also borue out in 
 practice, since large powers are successfully transmitted with 
 wire ropes of small -diameter. It is good practice to take S^ 
 for iron wire as high as 8500 pounds, and for steel wire up to 
 20,000 ponnds and even higher. This gives for the specific 
 capacity, when : 
 S-^ = 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 12,000, 14,000, 16,000, 18,000, 
 
 20,000. 
 TVo --- 0.03, 0.06, 0.09, 0.121, 0.151, 0.182, 0.212, o 242, 0.273, 0-303 
 or approximately : 
 
 For Wrought Iron Wire Nq = 0.03 to 0.121. 
 
 For Steel Wire . . . . A'^o = 0.03 to 0.303. 
 The cross section q is readily obtained, since N ^ q v N^ 
 hence : 
 
 Steel Wire. 
 
 q = 66,000 — — 
 
 We then have, if / is the number of v 
 
 (278) 
 
 1 the rope, a diam- 
 
 eter of work : (S = z — tP. The speed v, of the rope may be as 
 
 4 
 
 high as 6000 feet, but should not exceed this velocity on ac- 
 count of the great stress upon the rim of the cast iron pulleys. 
 
 ? 291. 
 
 Influence of Pulley Diameter. 
 
 The bending of a rope about a pulley of a radius R produces 
 a stress in each wire equal to 
 
 8532 
 ",376 
 14,220 
 17,064 
 
 19,908 
 22,752 
 25,596 
 28,440 
 31,284 
 34,128 
 36,972 
 39,816 
 42,660 
 45.504 
 48,348 
 
 49,770 
 
 286 
 
 48,348 
 
 294 
 
 45,504 
 
 313 
 
 42,660 
 
 334 
 
 39,816 
 
 357 
 
 36,972 
 
 385 
 
 34,128 
 
 417 
 
 31,284 
 
 455 
 
 28,440 
 
 500 
 
 25,596 
 
 551 
 
 22,752 
 
 
 19,798 
 
 718 
 
 17,064 
 
 834 
 
 14,220 
 
 1000 
 
 11,376 
 
 1250 
 
 8532 
 
 1667 
 
 5688 
 
 2500 
 
 2844 
 
 5000 
 
 If a still greater value of - 
 
 s used for any given value of S-^ 
 
 than in the above table, the durability of the cable will be in- 
 creased. The minimum pulley radius for any given sum of 
 
 stresses 5i + -^ is obtained when -— =: 2, which in the tables 
 
 which, if we take both for iron and steel wire E = 28,400,000, 
 gives : 
 
 s = 14,200,000 — (279) 
 
 The driving half of the rope is therefore subject to a tension 
 stress, both at the point of advancing and departing contact 
 equal' to 5, 4" -^ ii each wire. It is this sum which must be 
 considered in determining the stress upon the material, and it 
 must not be permitted to exceed the proper limits (See \ 266J. 
 A practical upper limit for wrought iron wire is 25,000 pounds, 
 while for steel it may be taken much higher ; for hard drawn 
 steel wire of good quality as high as 50,000 or even 60,000 
 pounds. 
 
 If we take as upper limits 25,000 lbs. for wrought iron and 
 50,000 lbs. for steel wire, we have for the given values of S, the 
 
 following values of 5 and of ~j: 
 
 gives for —r- = 833 and 417 respectively, as indicated by the 
 
 full-faced figures. Even in this advantageous proportion the 
 stress due to the bending of the wire around the pulley is double 
 that due to the tension of the driving force. 
 
 Wrought Iron Wire. 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 T 
 
 711 
 
 24,885 
 
 571 
 
 1422 
 
 24,174 
 
 588 
 
 2844 
 
 22,752 
 
 625 
 
 4266 
 
 21,330 
 
 667 
 
 5688 
 
 19,908 
 
 714 
 
 
 18,486 
 
 769 
 
 8532 
 
 17,064 
 
 833 
 
 9954 
 
 15,642 
 
 909 
 
 11,376 
 
 14,220 
 
 1000 
 
 12,798 
 
 12,798 
 
 iiii 
 
 14,220 
 
 11,376 
 
 1250 
 
 15,642 
 
 9954 
 
 1429 
 
 17,064 
 
 8532 
 
 1667 
 
 18,486 
 
 7110 
 
 2000 
 
 19,908 
 
 5688 
 
 2500 
 
 21,330 
 
 4266 
 
 3333 
 
 22,752 
 
 2844 
 
 5000 
 
 24,174 
 
 1422 
 
 10,000 
 
 -V^ 
 
 1 pulley radius is 
 
 o feet diameter. In order to obt! 
 equires about 93 revolutions. 
 If we take 5i = i = 12,798 we fin< 
 
 = 63.3" or appoxiraately 
 
 =v=? 
 
 The question here arises, to what extent should the effect of 
 centrifugal force be taken into account? If the velocity 
 V = 100 feet per second, with a stress 5" = 9000 lbs. we 
 have from the first table in g 264 the value i — 2' = 0.87, so 
 that instead of fa we have fa' = 0.87 fa. Ufa = 0.22 we 
 have fa = 0.87 x 0.22 x ^ = o-70, and if y =: 0.22 we have 
 fa = 0.87 X 0.22 X 1^ = 0.60. These give, by reference 
 to the second table, in ^ 264, for the first value, the modulus of 
 
 friction ^ = — 2.01, and for the second, p = 
 
 nd a modu- 
 
 lus of stress ^ 
 
 which makes the specific capacity = 
 
 =^ — as great as previously obtained. This may be com- 
 pensated for by making the cross section of the rope i.i times 
 that obtained by the previous calculation. For lesser velocities 
 up to 20C0 to 30CO feet per minute the effect of centrifugal 
 force is much less and may safely be neglected, especially in 
 the case of steel cables, in which much greater stresses are per- 
 missible. 
 
 Example 2.— How many horse power can 
 wires, each 0.078" diameter ; the velocity be 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Example 3.— What would the horse 
 (See §266). 5i = ■ ' " ' " 
 
 H. P. If we des 
 
 half, h^, and in the stationary rope ho. This gives for the tan- 
 gential force K at the point of suspension : 
 
 stead of 34,1: 
 
 re durability of the cable 
 id til us obtain R = ''*'^°°' °' 
 
 9 say only 4c 
 
 When the resistance P is directly given, which is rarely the 
 case, we have from the relation q S^^^ t P, taking - ^ 2. 
 
 ?-=2^^ (280) 
 
 The maximum statical moment which may have to be over- 
 come upon the driven shaft is sometimes given, as in the case 
 of pumping machinery, etc. Dividing the preceding equation 
 by (279) we have 
 
 and 
 
 14,2 
 since q = 
 
 ,00564 V-^ \- 
 
 .PP 
 
 0,000 6 S, 
 
 iJ-', this reduces to : 
 
 d = o.oos64 \^ \—PP (281) 
 
 and if we substitute for the moment P P the quotient of effect 
 = 63,020 — we get 
 
 from formula (13S) P P = 
 
 . = 0.251 N/I\f^ 
 
 iV 
 
 . (282) 
 
 355 sljs yj-^z 
 
 1 shaft driven by 
 rm of 14.2 inches. 
 ; 880 = 12,496 inch 
 i-e from (2S1) : 
 
 This gives from the table ./? = 833 X c 
 
 . 12,496 = o. 
 
 • (283). 
 
 -(--•)■■ 
 
 ■ {285) 
 
 in which the tangential, vertical, 
 and horizontal forces at a point 
 jrj/ may be designated as pjr, ps and 
 pc, p, being the weig ht for a unit of 
 length, and S = \/ x^ — A For 
 the point of suspension this gives : 
 
 K= p{h 4- c\ y/=/> \/lf-~- 
 
 H = pc . 
 
 .(28 
 
 11 rope transmission, the quotient -— 
 e converging. Stopping at the third ir 
 
 <^) = 
 
 All dimensions are to be taken in inches. For any cross sec- 
 tion q, we have K ^ q S, and p ^= q <p 12 )', in which y is the 
 weight of the rope per cubic inch, and a coefficient, dependent 
 upon the twist of the rope and upon the hemp core. The weight 
 per cubic inch is >- = 0.28 pounds, is not always constant, but 
 may be taken = |. These values give p = \ xo.28X(7 = 
 0.3266(7, and calling the coefficient 0.3266 = i/;, we have : 
 
 eget: 
 
 . (2S7). 
 
 Since — = 3.061 we have, taking the e 
 
 Y(^-53-^)-S. (^89). 
 
 If we neglect the first member 
 have for a close approximation : 
 
 Deflection op Wire Ropes. 
 
 In order that the desired tensions T and I shall be attained 
 in the two parts of a wire rope transmission, the deflections 
 must be of predetermined values. The centre line of the rope 
 will hang in a curve which lies between the catenary and the 
 elastic line and which approximates closely to a parabola.* 
 
 For the parameter c, of this parabola, we have for a deflection 
 k, in a horizontal rope. Fig. 883, 
 
 1 the parenthesis in (287) we 
 • • • •' (290). 
 
 Example. Let 
 3f pulley, be 262 l.._, __ ^_ „ . 
 DC 8500 pounds, and on the di 
 
 ^ take as the distance from centre to centre 
 3144 inches ; also let 5 in the driving side of the rope 
 ' ' 4250 pounds. We have from (289) 
 
 --/ (1.53X8500)2- 3- 
 - J (1.53X4250)2-^ 
 
 in which a is the distance between two points of suspension ; 
 the deflection in the driving half being called /?j, in the driven 
 
 e formula (290) give 
 
 3 pi = 47-45", and 
 
 The following method may be used to show the deflection h, 
 graphically. The positive and negative signs before the radical 
 sign in (2S8) indicate two values for //, as will be seen in Fig. 884. 
 
 The greater value is not of practical use, as it gives unstable 
 
 [labil) equilibrium. Between the two lies a value h = %. — , 
 which is obtained when the quantit}' under the radical sign = 
 O, i.e. when 5' = — --i^. This we will call the "mean " deflec- 
 
 V2 
 
 tion and designate by hm. This deflection is important because 
 with it the absolute minimum stress exists in the rope (see note 
 at the end of this section) ; and this stress, which occurs with 
 the deflection hm, will be designated Sm, and is : 
 
 je^ = X — <r = ~ — , which is the equation of a parabola. 
 
 Sm 
 
 or for the preceding value ^l> ■ 
 
 Sm 
 
 and since km= }^ . — ■. 
 
 V2 
 = 0.3266, 
 
 ■ (292). 
 
 have for the mean deflection 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Dividing (288) by (293) we have, after some reductions : 
 h S— \/5^ — 6V;7 
 
 Lay off this distance perpendicular to i . 2 at 2 . 4, and on any 
 scale (not too small) lay off from 2 to 5, the stress Sm, deter- 
 mined from (292). From 5 lay off, on the same scale, 5 . 6, equal 
 to the given stress S, and from 6 draw the arc 5 . 7. This gives 
 2 . Tj^jjj^ 6.2=6.5 — \/Jb~^Y~—(^^\ which is = ^^ — 
 "v S'^ — Sm. If we now draw 4 . 8 parallel to 5 . 7 we have 
 
 2-8 2.7 h ,, _ _ 
 
 = 1—, and hence 2 . 8 = A. 
 
 2.4 2.5 hm 
 
 The value ho of the stationary rope is that of a parabola of a 
 length midway between those for //j and h.^ and is equal to : 
 
 l±R- 
 
 = VS 
 
 0.67/22 + 0.28/^1 . 
 
 • (295) 
 
 It may readily be constructed graphically from the first expres- 
 sion. It is not essential that the driving part of the rope should be 
 the upper portion, as the lower part may drive, as in Fig. 886. The 
 
 Fig. SS6. 
 
 ropes will not touch, when stationary, if /;., — h^ < 2R. Owing 
 to the fluctuations due to the action of wind, or of sudden 
 changes of load, the minimum distance should not be too small, 
 and is best kept greater than 20 to 24 inches. 
 
 Note;.— We have from (287) : 
 
 dS = i' ydh ^y\o — ^\ dlT^ which g 
 
 '-[.-(hi;)]. 
 
 s the parameter, or C?«. 
 
 In Fig. 8S4 is shown graphically how for each value of//, the 
 parameter c can be found, by constructing the proportion 
 
 In the figure, 2.5^ = 
 
 From this we obtain the following geometrical construction 
 of Fig. 885. With a diameter = yia, describe the semi-circle 
 1.2.3, and join the point 3 of the quadrant 2 . 3 with 2, or I ; 
 
 ; . 4' = h' ; also 4^ . 6 
 
 — , and i>" . 1" perpendicular to d" . 5" gives the parameter 
 
 4" ■ 1" = c". 
 
 To determine the vertex i," of the lower parabola we have : 
 
 /.^-f^.=/.^^.f. 
 
 ^^'-'" = ^{}r^-id 
 
 - which as shown above 
 
 If, as before, we make. 2.8^ hm, and 2.5' = h' and 
 draw through 8 a normal to 8.5' the normal will intersect 
 2 . 4^' at \" which is the desired apex. The lines 5 . 6, 5' . 6', 
 j// _ 5// intersect each other at the middle of the half-chord of 
 the parabola at 9. This may be used in the construction by 
 drawing from 9, the line 9 . 6, 9 . 6', 9 . 6", and the correspond- 
 ing normals give the parameter points 7, 7', "1" . _ The directrix 
 of the parabola lies at a point distant yi c from the vertex. For 
 the mean parabola the directrix is Lm, midway between 4 and 7, 
 and the focus Fm is at the middle of hm, and is also the centre 
 of the circle 5.6.7.1. 
 
 In the figure is also shown another curve which indicates the 
 values of 5". The proportional value of h from formula (287) 
 taken from the line 2.11, shows that h is in inverse proportion 
 to the hyperbolic line 10' . 10 . \o" . The ordinates of the hyper- 
 bola, taken from the axis of abscissas 2 . 7 gives the values oi S 
 for the corresponding values of //. The ordinates 4' . 10' and 
 \" . \o" give the equal stresses S' and S" , and 4 . 10 the mini- 
 mum stress Sm The dotted hyperbola on the upper right, gives 
 the corresponding thrusts in a parabolic arch, and the curve in 
 an arch corresponding to the catenary is the line of thrust. In 
 this also we find the mean height the most economical, the 
 lower ones being stable, and the higher in an unstable equilib- 
 rium, dependent upon the thickness of arch ring and distribu- 
 tion of load for their stability. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 2 feet. According to (279) R= — 
 
 = 32.45, say 3214 inches, 
 
 TIGHTENED DRIVING ROPES. 
 
 The deflection of transmission cables often becomes incon- 
 veniently great. In man}^ cases, however, it is possible to 
 reduce its amount b}' increasing the tension to a greater extent 
 than is necessary to prevent slippage. This requires the cable 
 to be made correspondingly stronger in order to resist the in- 
 creased tension. The modification in the preceding discussion 
 offerees and dimensions is here given, the various terms being 
 given the subscript ? to distinguish them, (7"^, Z^, Ss, &s, instead 
 of T, t, S, 6). The tension T, as shown in g 290, should not be 
 
 •-l^ 2 R and the driving part of the cable must b& above. 
 iiows that the centre of the pulleys must be more than 
 85^" above the ground in order to clear. To reduce this 
 fhten the cable. Suppose we made the diameter of the 
 
 res = 0.04" instead of 0.024". This gi\ 
 ms 4 and 6, line 11, Sis = 0.89, S = 
 408 (^-2^ =x62", and A. -A, = 163- 
 
 .67, and from the table, col- 
 , and hence we have Ins — 
 
 - 50". These values give his - 
 
 less than 2P, and if this is increased by a given factor 1 
 have is = Ts — F, and also : 
 
 Ts = m T=^2mP, 
 
 is =[2111— I) P, 
 
 <^ 2R and we may tl 
 
 interference. The g 
 from (295) we have h, 
 
 the^dhr---=--°-~ "° 
 
 In order that the stress 5, in the driving part shall not be 
 changed we have for the stress in the driving part, instead of 
 
 = S^ 
 
 . (297). 
 
 The diameter o" of the wire, if calculated from (280) is modi- 
 fied to 
 
 6s = 6\/m (298). 
 
 or if taken from (281) or (282), we take 
 
 5.r ^(S^;77 (299). 
 
 from which the following table has been calculated. Tightened 
 cables are frequentl}' applicable where moderate powers are to 
 be transmitted. 
 
 TABLE FOR TIGHTENED CABLES. 
 
 2.8 
 
 ^.6 
 
 3-0 
 
 6.0 
 
 3-2 
 
 b.4 
 
 34 
 
 6.8 
 
 ^b 
 
 7.2 
 
 ^8 
 
 7.6 
 
 4.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 4-2 
 
 8.4 
 
 44 
 
 8.8 
 
 4.5 
 
 9.2 
 
 4.8 
 
 9.b 
 
 5.0 
 
 
 £xaw*fe— Given, A^= 5 . 
 to cover this distance with a 
 
 lbs., and i = 11,376 lbs., we have -^ X -^ = 7"^^ X ~^ = 0.044. If 
 z = 36 we have from (282) 6 = 0.251 vf ^ \ °'°t4 = 0.024 inches. We then 
 .get from (290) : h-^ = 0.0408 -°- — - = 144" = 12 feet, A^ = 24 feet, and h^ — Ai = 
 
 refore place the driving side below without danger of 
 atest deflection occurs when the cable is at rest, and 
 = 149 inches, and the total height for the pulley cen- 
 3r i6f' 7". This example is shown in Fig. 887, in which 
 
 I 294. 
 SHORT SPAN CABLE TRANSMISSIONS. 
 
 When the distance between pulleys is short the deflection 
 must not be too small if good results are to be expected. To 
 this end a small value should be taken for S^^, and hence the de- 
 flection is first to be chosen and the corresponding value deter- 
 mined from (287) which is readily done. For moderate powers 
 wire rope transmission may be used in this way for short spans 
 very successfully. 
 
 Example. — Let N=s horse power, to be transmitted over a span of 65.6 ft., 
 or 787 4 inches; the number of revolutions to be 150, and the deflection 40 
 
 inches. We have from (287) 51=0.3266(40 + -^^-^^ )= 645 lbs. Taking iron 
 
 \. We have J = 25,600 — 645 = 24,955. If 
 ■ we have from (282) 
 
 --N^i- ^^- 
 
 ^=0.083". 
 
 We then have from (279) 
 
 e quite practicable. 
 
 §295. 
 TRANSMISSION WITH INCLINED CABLE. 
 
 A transmission at which the pulleys are placed at different 
 heights is called an inclined transmission, and the curve in such 
 a case is uns3'mmetrical. For a given distance a, between the 
 verticals through the ends of the curve, and for a difference in 
 height H, we have for tJie deflections h'^x^ and h^' ^Xo, Fig. 
 888, and for the ordinates ji'i andj)'2 of the two branches of the 
 curve : ^2 ^ ^2 ^ ~ 
 
 x^ = h' =-g-^ + T ■;?""" ■ 
 
 (301) 
 
 1 which the parameter c is yet unknown.* 
 
 * Deduced as follow; 
 
 cxx,yT = 
 i. e. {y., -H 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 For the parameter c, we have from (286) K=p {h + c) or 'f^e deflection is 
 Sq=^ipq{h -{- c) and if we consider the lower pulley as bearing /, ,^ 3?i6i_ 
 
 .2,962 
 
 8.5 = 67.1", and h„" = hi' + J97=.264.i, 
 
 whence 
 
 The stress on the rope, instead of being exactly 8500 and 4250 pounds, will 
 be, according to {304) : 
 
 8500 + 0.3266 X 197 = 8564 lbs., and 
 
 4250 + 0.3266 X 197 = 4314 lbs. respectively. 
 
 the lighter load we have : S' = i> {c-\- x^) whence c=— x-^. 
 
 Substituting the value of x^, from (300) we obtain after reduc- 
 tion. 
 
 -I.+ 
 
 -+?- 
 
 2 + 
 
 ---— ^.— (302) 
 8(i + K-t) 
 
 The plus sign before the radical indicates that we have chosen 
 the "stabil" parabola (see Fig. 884), and hence obtain the 
 greater of the two values for the parameter. The parameter 
 thus being determined, we have x^ and y^ from (300) and (301). 
 For the upper branch of the curve the stress S" is to be de- 
 termined at the upper pulley. We then have S'' =^ip {c-\- x.^. 
 Subtracting from this S^ ^f {c -\- x^) we have 
 
 S^^ = S' + f{x, — x,)=S'+fn' (303) 
 
 and if i/' = 0.3266 we get : 
 
 S'' 
 
 Example i —Let a = 32S felt 
 (302) 
 
 = 5'' 4- 0.3266 //" . . . . 
 
 36", S' = 8500 lbs. If ^= O, -n 
 
 ^5°o , f /■ 8500 ^ 2 
 
 ^i^-- 
 
 
 
 --^ 
 
 ,- 
 
 
 3,43 -.- 
 
 
 "1" 
 
 
 
 
 ^-fi-'i|"" 
 
 
 
 
 "S^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 ■---, 
 
 
 ^^_^____^ 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 3> 
 
 
 
 - -" 
 
 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 889. the VI 
 
 , and all dime 
 Example 2.— Suppose the distance a = 3936 inches, and 5i = 8500, and Jo 
 
 4250, as before, but the vertical distance jV= 1968", or . We then have 
 
 (a) For the Driving Side : 
 
 2+0.52 + T V 2+o5^- J 8(1+0.125) 
 
 the pulleys, 
 the Driven Side : 
 
 • (304) 
 
 -ol^+^^V \/ -0^ + 984, 3936. 
 
 K^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 soim..^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " J 
 
 ^^^is^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 !S^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^-_ 
 
 4. 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 This value in (300) gives x 
 For the slack half of the : 
 
 We then have : 
 
 , 42 5° f /• 4250 X 2 
 
 = I50-5". 
 Suppose now that H~ 0.05 a = 197". We then 1 
 
 (a) For the Driving^Side : 
 
 2 + 0.05 + ▼ V 2 + 0.052 J 8(1+0.00125) 
 
 tiave also, from (300) h\ = ^^ 
 " = /!i' + 197" = 205.45". 
 distance j'l then becomes : 
 3936 _ 
 
 yi= 2 — o 05 
 (i) For the Di 
 
 C 26,018 = 667.1. 
 iSide: 
 
 2+0.052 ^ ▼ V- 2 + 0.052 y 8(1+0.00125) 
 
 The general arrangement is sho\ „ , 
 
 .•„ /., 1_; » — j^ gjj^ jjjg vertical and horizontal si 
 
 arked than in the previo 
 
 )unt of the increase in the value of //. We have Si' = 85 
 ., and ^'2' = 4250 + 0.3266 X 1968 = 4892 lbs. 
 
 Fig. 891. 
 The upper limit for this form of rope transmission i 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 which the parts of the rope are vertical, in which case the par- 
 ameter =: 00. In this arrangement the necessary tension must 
 be obtained by the use of weights, spring, or the like. By using 
 guide pulleys, a combination of horizontal and vertical trans- 
 missions may be made, as in Fig. 891, and the tension obtained 
 by the deflection in the horizontal part. 
 
 ?296. 
 
 Construction of thk Rope Curve. 
 
 We have considered the curve as an ordinary parabola. 
 
 Fig. 893. 
 
 Fach portion of rope between two pulleys may be called a 
 "stretch" of rope, so that in the above instance we have the 
 driving part in one stretch and the driven part in two stretches. 
 If it is necessary to support both parts it is often practicable to 
 use half as many supporting pulleys for the driving part of the 
 rope as for the driven part as in Fig. 894. 
 
 -^ 
 
 h-L 
 
 3^ 
 
 Fig. 894. 
 
 These pulleys are called guide pulleys to distinguish them 
 from the main transmitting pulleys and their supporting struc- 
 tures are called supporting stations. 
 
 Another arrangement has been used by Ziegler, as shown in 
 Fig.8-- 
 
 This consists of a number of shorter transmissions, using 
 double grooved pulleys, or two single grooved pulleys at each 
 station. In this arrangement it is advisable to make the 
 stretches of equal length so that a single reserve cable will 
 answer to replace any one which may give out. 
 
 It is always desirable to run a transmission in a straight line, 
 
 and especial care must be taken to have the successive pulleys 
 all in the same vertical plane. If it is impracticable to run the 
 entire distance in a straight line it is necessary to introduce 
 angle stations. These may be constructed as in Fig. 896 a, 
 
 When the apex C, Fig. 892, has been determined, bisect the 
 two parts B^ Cand Z?i Cof the horizontal tangent B^ D^, at Q 
 and Cp join B C^ and D Q, and these two lines will give the 
 direction of tangents to the curve at the points of suspension B 
 
 and D. Then divide C Q into equal parts C, i, 2, 3 and 
 
 Ci B into the same number of equal parts Ci I, II, III , 
 
 and by joining these points we obtain a number of tan- 
 gents which include the curve. The other^portion C Q D, of 
 the curve is constructed in a similar manner. When the apex 
 of the parabola falls beyond the lower pulley, only one portion 
 of the curve is used. 
 
 ?297. 
 
 Arrangement of Pulleys. 
 
 When the transmission pulleys are far apart, and not high 
 
 above ground, supporting pulleys must be used for the rope. 
 
 In some instances this is only necessary for the driven part of 
 
 the rope, the driving part being left unsupported, as in Fig. 893. 
 
 using vertical and horizontal guide pulleys, but this requires 
 six pulleys, three for each part of the rope. A simpler arrange- 
 ment is shown at Fig. 896 b, two pulleys and a pair of bevel 
 gears being used. 
 
 In many cases it is desirable to take off a portion of the power 
 at intermediate stations either by shafting or rope transmission, 
 and this may readily be done by a variety of arrangements of 
 gearing and shafting. 
 
 It is most important that the pulleys both for supj)orting and 
 transmission should be amply large in diameter. Many rope 
 transmissions have worn out rapidly, simply because the diam- 
 eter of the pulleys has been too small. The intermediate pulleys 
 for the driving side ought to be the same size as the main driv- 
 ing pulley in order that the total stress 5" -|- .? (see I 291) shall 
 not be greater in the former case than in the latter. The sup- 
 porting pulley for the driven side may be smaller because the 
 stress Sj is smaller generally, being }i S-^, or for tightened 
 transmissions (? 2S9) being equal to [2in — 1) 2m S^. The 
 smallest permissible pulleys may be determined from formula 
 (279) and the table of I 291. 
 
 e of wrought' 
 
 jve have for the 
 itid for the supporting pulleys 
 £j-a;«//(?2.— Let &= 0.04. Si = 
 
 wire rope transmission let i'l = 850 
 on, 6 being = 0.06". From the table 
 IS of pulley, .ff = 833 X 0.06 = 50" or 8" 
 
 s before, &n&.R^ = 
 
 I Si = 7080. /? = 
 
 = 46", a difference which is hardly great enough to be of practical ii 
 
 The Construction of Rope PuIvLEys. 
 The low value of the coefficient of friction of iron on iron 
 makes it impracticable to run the wire cables directly upon the 
 bare metal rim of the pulley, and hence various attempts were 
 early made to fit the groove of the pulley with some soft material. 
 After early experiments with wooden rims fitted with leather, 
 or rubber, it was practically shown that turned iron rims fitted 
 with leather filling placed edgewise in the bottom of the groove 
 gave the best results. * 
 
 In Fig. 897, is shown at a, a rim for a single pulley and at 6, 
 for a double one, both being of cast iron. The proportions are 
 given in terms of the diameter d, of the cable, and in the illus- 
 trations the constants in the various proportions are in milli- 
 meters. The sides of the grooves are made at an angle of 30"^ 
 with the plane of the pulley in the case of the single groove 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 203 
 
 pulley, but this gives an excessively heavy middle rib for the 
 double pulley, and hence the inner angles are made 15° as 
 shown. The smallest diameter of rope for practical use is 
 d = 0.04^^ The superficial pressure/, may be calculated from 
 
 d 
 (274). If, for example, / = 36, we have from (244) — — 8, and 
 
 : 1000 and S == 8500, we have : 
 
 p = 2S : = 136 lbs. per sq. in. 
 
 ^ IOOO(S ^ Jr M 
 
 a pressure readily borne by the leather filling. 
 
 The bottom grooves are made with a dovetail bevel in order 
 to keep the filling from being thrown out by centrifugal force. 
 The filling of leather may be made of pieces of old belting 
 placed on edge and forced by driving into the dovetail groove ; 
 if new leather is used it should be softened by soaking in train 
 oil. Rope sheaves for hoisting machiner}', which are only used 
 for guiding and supporting the rope, were formerly used with- 
 out any filling, the rope resting on the bare metal. It is be- 
 coming more and more the practice to use a filling in the bot- 
 tom of the grooves of such pulleys, vulcanized rubber giving 
 good results. 
 
 The construction of the rim of Fowler's " Clamp Pulley," re- 
 ferred to in Fig. 794 c, is shown in Fig. 898 a, the clamps being 
 pivoted to blocks by means of bolts with anchor-shaped heads. 
 The pressure upon the rope is the same as in the case of a wedge 
 groove of equal angle, and the pulley as made by Fowler, 
 has one clamp ring mounted upon a screw thread cut upon the 
 pulley, thus enabling adjustment to be made for wear upon the 
 clamps and for the reduction in the diameter of the rope. Fig. 
 898 b shows an American form of clamp pulley, somewhat sim- 
 pler in construction than Fowler's. The clamps are pivoted on 
 half-journals (see {, 95) and the angle is not so small as in the 
 preceding form. 
 
 The arms of rope pulleys are usually made of cast iron as well 
 as the rim, although the intermediate supporting pulleys are 
 sometimes made with wrought iron arms, as in Fig. 901. Large 
 pulleys, when of cast iron, are usually made in halves, for con- 
 venience of transportation. 
 
 The number of arms A, may be obtained from : 
 
 = 4 + - 
 
 R 
 
 Cast iron arms may be either oval or cruciform in cross sec- 
 tion, and the width of arm h, in the plane of the pulley, if pro- 
 longed to the centre is : 
 
 = 4^H 
 
 • (306) 
 
 Fig. S99 a, in order to avoid injurious stresses from shrinkage 
 in casting. The spaces are afterwards filled in with fitted pieces 
 of iron and a ring shrunk on each side to hold all together. 
 The proportions of hubs are the same as in | 283. 
 
 The distance between journals for the intermediate and sup- 
 porting pulleys varies from | 7? to \ R. The load upon the 
 bearings consists of the sum of the weight of the pulley and the 
 vertical component of the various foixes upon the rope, and 
 this can best be determined graphically as shown in Fig. 900. 
 
 • (305) 
 
 FiG. 9-0. 
 
 The weight G, of the pulley is so dependent upon slight 
 variations in the thickness and section of rim and arms that a 
 general formula of practical value cannot be given. The follow- 
 ing examples from practice are given : 
 
 Example!.— \u an executed transmission by Rieter &Co., at Oberursel, 
 near Frankfurt a. M., the pulleys are made with twelve straight arms of 
 oval section and are 12 ft. 3.6 in. diameter. The main driving pulleys at the 
 end of the transmission, with single groove, each weigh 2525 lbs. and the 
 intermediate supporting pulleys, with double groove, each weigh 2780 lbs. 
 The rope is made of 36 wires, each being 0.07" diameter. 
 
 Example 2.— The Berlin-Anhalt Machine Works Company iiakes a line of 
 rope pulleys with wrought iron arms as in Fig. 901, the weights being as 
 follows : 
 
 R = 20" 24" 28" 32'' 36" 40" so" 60'' 70" 
 
 G = 176 211 248-30S 281-343 316-387 316-506 528-570 748 968 
 
 In these instances the weight upon the bearings is not great. 
 The journals for these pulleys should be made long, in order to 
 reduce the superficial pressure, and swivel bearings with cast 
 iron boxes {\ 116) can be used, which with self-oiling devices 
 will give good service. In many cases the journals are made of 
 hardened steel in order to combine the greatest security with 
 the minimum size. 
 
 For arms of cruciform section, the thickness of the arms e 
 may be made \ h, and the rib thickness e' = % e. Arms of oval 
 section may be made of the same proportions as for belt pulleys, 
 the thickness being made one-half A at all points and the width 
 at the rim being % //. 
 
 Arms of cruciform section are usually made straight as at a, 
 Fig. 899, but arms of oval section are frequently made curved 
 as at b. 
 
 To draw the curved arm make the circle C ^ of a radius = 
 % R and divide it into spaces for the desired number of arms. 
 Make A E =% A B, and draw O (T normal to ^ C and (Twill 
 be the centre for half the arm, and the other centre will be at 
 D, the radius D E being equal to C E. 
 
 When straight arms are used the hub should be divided as in 
 
 ■.inple 3.— The intermediate pulleys in Fxample i, give a total pressure, 
 ling to Fig. 900 b, upon the bearings, of 3036 pounds, or 1518 pounds on 
 ournal. II we make / = 1.5 d according to the table in g 91 we get for 
 
 jiving a greatly reduced superficial pressure and thus insuring the 
 
 te lubrication. In this case we have the actua 
 
 'length/ = 4.7, 
 
 5 — 0/; iv.^ *-.«♦- f-« i*« Tf ;« r^-^A^-^ <-^ 
 
 ise formula (89) 
 
 . — — OD lub. jjcr sq. 111. 11, 111 oiuer lu 
 
 = A^andmake5= 8500 as before we have: 
 
 
 " si 8500. V'^^' '5""^^" 
 
 
 8". This gives: 
 
 
 P = "Y^y- = 95 lbs. per sq. in. 
 
 
204 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ■which is such a low value that even half boxes, similar 
 325 could be used. By using hard steel bearings even 
 lesistance could be reduced to 34 the amount due to the 
 
 The pulleys for rope transmission should be most carefully 
 balanced, as any vibration causes serious oscillation of the rope 
 
 ? 299. 
 Construction op the Pui<ley Stations. 
 The extraordiuarily high specific capacity of wire rope tranp- 
 ;, as already said, caused it to be used especially for 
 
 upou which the pulleys are carried. * The following are exam- 
 ples of well desipned and constructed stations. 
 
 Fig. 901 shows a design for an intermediate station of masonry. 
 The foundation is of rough stone-work and the superstructure 
 of brick-work. 
 
 Stations similar to this are used in the transmission at Ober- 
 ursel, referred to in the preceding section, and erected in 1858. 
 This installation is used to transmit 104 horse power over a dis- 
 
 particularly adapted for the transmission of the power of natural 
 falls of water to places where it can be utilized and has thus 
 
 Fig. 903. 
 
 tance of 3168 feet (966 meters) divided into eight stretches, giv- 
 ■ ,1 and seven intermediate stations. EacT 
 stretch = ^{^ — 396 feet long ; i? = 74 inches, « = 1 14.5, z/ - 
 
 4400 ft , (5 ■—. o.o-j", i = 36. The difference in level between the 
 two terminal stations in this case is 145 feet. 
 The transmission of the water power from Schaffhausen, con- 
 
 materially advanced the use of natural sources of power. In 
 such transmissions one of the most important and difficult por- 
 tions of the work consists in the construction of the stations 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 205 
 
 structed b}- J. J. Rieter & Co. and in operation since 1S66, is 
 used to transmit a total of 760 horse power developed by the 
 Falls of the Rhine. Of this 200 horse power is transmitted 
 direct to the left bank by means of shafting ; 560 horse power 
 is carried across the Rhine in one stretch, the distance a being 
 3S5 feet, using two similar ropes carrying 530 horse power. 
 (« =i8o, R^'i&lA" V — 4636 ft.) and a third single rope carrying 
 30 horse power (« = 180, R = 35.4''). Of this power there is 
 about 480 horse power transmitted over three principal stretches 
 of 378, 332, and 455 feet. The number of wires in the heavier cables 
 is / = 80, the thickness of wire 6 = 0.074'^, the rope being made in 
 § strands of 10 wires each. One of the intermediate pulley sta- 
 tions is shown in Fig. 902, antl this is an excellent example of 
 good style in construction. In this case there are two pulleys, 
 side by side. There is a guard shown over the pulleys, to pre- 
 
 ber of wires i = 90, the diameter of wire t' = 0.072'', the cable 
 being made in 10 strands of 9 wires each, R = 88. 6'^, n — 81, 
 V = 3743 ft. From this point the power is divided by an angle 
 station and one part is delivered to the saw mill and balance 
 transmitted to a number of minor establishments. 
 
 An angle station is shown is Fig. 904, and this form is also 
 used when a portion of the power is to be taken off. 
 
 A fourth large installation of turbines and rope transmission has 
 been executed by the firm of Rieter & Co., for the Compagnie 
 generale de Bellegarde, at the latter place, for the utilization of 
 the well-known Perte dii Rhone. The combined power of the 
 Rhone and the Valserine is exerted upon five turbines of 630 horse 
 power each, giving a total of 315° borse power which is trans- 
 mitted by cable to the Plateau of Bellegarde.* 
 
 At Zurich, the city has utilized the power of the Limmat by 
 means of turbines and rope transmission built by the firm of 
 Fischer, Wyss & Co. In this case the stations, which for various 
 reasons are quite high, are made of wrought iron, as shown in 
 Fig. 905. The entire installation develops 11 50 horse power, 
 of which 750 horse power is used for the city water works. 
 
 At St. Petersburg a rope , 
 
 transmission in ten stretches i 
 
 is used to drive the Imperial I 
 
 Powder Works, the power 
 being delivered into the 
 buildings by shafting from 
 each of the ten stations. 
 Amodification of Herland's 
 device for putting on belts, 
 has been made by Ziegler for 
 the purpose of putting the 
 wire cables upon the pulleys. 
 As shown in Fig. 906, it 
 consists of a curved piece of 
 angle iron, clamped tempo- 
 rarily to the arm of the 
 pulley in such a manner as 
 to lead the rope into the 
 groove of the pullc)'. The 
 short radius to which the 
 
 Fig 90S 
 
 vent possible jumping of the cables out of the grooves in the 
 pulleys, but this has been omitted in later instances as un- 
 necessary^ 
 
 Messrs. Rieter & Co. have also installed a system of turbines 
 and rope transmission at Freiburg, for the SocieU generale 
 Suisse des eaux forits, of which 300 horse power is in a long- 
 distance transmission. The power is carried in five stretches of 
 502 feet each, to a sawmill, the difference in level being 268 feet. 
 One of the stations with two supporting pulleys is shown in 
 Fig- 903, this one being quite high ; a similar station. No. II, is 
 placed in a tunnel, through which the rope passes. The num- 
 
 FiG. 906. 
 
 rope is thus once bent does not 
 appear to have an injurious effect. 
 
 When a transmission rope is car- 
 ried over a public or private road 
 =^ o "■ a guard should be used as a pro- 
 
 ^j •© — m) tectiou in case of breakage of the 
 
 ni ^,<[r rope. A simple form used by Rieter 
 
 ^^Sg;;; ^^___^___^^ ^^;-g;:;^ & Co. is shown in Fig. 907, and 
 consists of a sheet iron trough about 
 1 8 inches deep and ten feet wide, 
 carried by two stationary suspen- 
 
 FiG. 907. 
 
 sion cables is H H. 
 
 Efficiency of Rope Transmission. 
 The injurious resistances in wire rope transmission are mainly 
 those due to journal friction and stiffness of the rope ; the slip 
 and the atmospheric resistance of the pulley arms being in- 
 significant, t 
 
 a) Journal Friction. — We have from formula (100), 7^= — fO, 
 
 in which Q is the load upon the journal. For a circumferential 
 speed c, at the journal, we have a resistance in foot pounds : 
 
 3 
 
 (307) 
 
 Example /.-In the case of the transmissio 
 perimental determinations were made. For 
 d = 3.75" and n = H4.6. For a coefficient of fr 
 determined) we have : 
 
 a at Oberursel a number of ex- 
 1 pair of journals Q = 2948 lbs., 
 ction/= 09 (e.xperimentally 
 
 0.09 X 114-6 X 3-75 X 2948 
 
 = 37,658 foot lbs. 
 
 3 
 
 or "658 ,,, horse power. 
 
 
 r transmitted is 104 H. P. and the m 
 loss of about 9 per cent, of the maxin 
 , This shows the objection to the use 
 
206 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Using Weisbach's formula (253) given 
 
 Q 
 
 S ^ 1.07S 4- 0.093 ^ 
 we have, calling T' tlie tension on the rope : 
 ^. = 0.093. (n.6+^) 
 for the resistance in foot pounds. 
 
 mple 2.—\r\ the preceding case, v = 4400 ft., R 
 
 (7^+0 = 
 
 <-^^) = 
 
 his resistance com 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s of Ziegrler jfave '3-34i H. P , whic 
 
 rificationofthec 
 
 Iculatious. The total loss of effic 
 
 the lesser of thes 
 
 Reui<eux's System of Ropb Transmission. 
 
 In the preceding sections the utility and importance of wire 
 rope transmission has been shown. The various applications of 
 the methods already discussed exhibit much ingenuity and abil- 
 ity on the part of the designers. At the same time there ap- 
 pears to be a possibility of improvement, especially in the case 
 of the transmission of large powers over long distances involv- 
 ing a number of stretches. 
 
 The Ziegler system of intermediate pulleys has given excel- 
 lent results, but the following points may be enumerated as ob- 
 jections : 
 
 a. The great height of the supports usually necessary because 
 of the large size of the pulleys. 
 
 b- The large base required for the supports, not only for clear- 
 ance for the lower part of the rope, but also to resist the tension 
 of the rope. 
 
 c. The necessity of making the supports of great strength 
 when gearing is to be carried. 
 
 These three points are all well shown in the Zurich station, 
 Fig. 905- 
 
 d. The resistance due to stiffness of the rope. This has 
 usually been considered unimportant, until the recent investi- 
 gations have shown otherwise. (See the preceding section.) 
 
 e. The loss of power when the rope becomes slack. 
 
 f. The necessit}' of giving sufficient tension to the rope to in- 
 sure satisfactory action in warm weather and consequent exces- 
 sive tension in winter. 
 
 g. The unsightly soiling of the exterior of buildings caused 
 by the grease from the cable defacing the wall upon which the 
 receiving pulley is placed. 
 
 h. The necessity of making the intermediate pulleys strong 
 enough to carry the heavy stress of the cable, thus increasing 
 the weight and consequently the journal friction. 
 
 It therefore appears advisable to devise a system which should 
 permit the supports to be made low and light, to use a light 
 cable under moderate tension, also to reduce the number of 
 splices, and to place the terminal pulleys inside of the building, 
 the pulleys being made as light as practicable. 
 
 All these points have been attained to a great extent in the 
 following system. 
 
 In the first p?ace, the cable, whenever possible, is made in 
 one endless length from the driving to the driven pulley, thus 
 making the i.itermediate pulleys merely supports and permit- 
 ting them to be constructed very light. It is also desirable to 
 arrange the cable so that both parts shall be at the same height 
 from the ground and that this height should be as moderate as 
 possible. 
 
 lu Fig. 908 is shown the arrangement of the power house, the 
 first driving pulley Z", being directly upon the motor shaft and 
 lying in a horizontal plane. The driving part of the rope then 
 passes around a sta ionary pulley Zj and is carried off in the 
 desired direction. The driven part of the rope passes around a 
 pulley L' mounted on a carriage running on a track parallel to 
 the direction of the line of transmission and by means of 
 weights a pull somewhat greater than 2t is brought upon the 
 carriage. This tightener pulley L' is placed so as to bring the 
 driven part of the rope to the same height as the driving part. 
 The whole arrangement may be protected under roof as shown 
 and the rest of the building used for other purposes, but if 
 necessary the track and carriage may extend out of doors. 
 
 The intermediate stations may all be supporting stations 
 meiely, unless power is to be taken off at an intermediate point. 
 If the transmission is a normal one, not using the method of in- 
 creased tension (see § 293) the same deflection will be obtained 
 
 in both portions of the rope by making the stretches for the 
 driven part half as long as those of the driving part, so that 
 every other station may be provided with a double-grooved 
 pulley, Fig. 909. 
 
 Fig. 909. 
 
 If no change in direction is necessary the cable is thus carried 
 to the driven pulley, the two parts being separated by a distance 
 equal to the diameter of the driving pulley 7"j, and entering the 
 building where the power is to be received the cable passes over 
 guide pulleys Z,;, L-, and around the driven pulley T.^. 
 
 When the load is reduced by throwing off machinery in the 
 manufactory, the tightener carriage is drawn toward the turbine 
 (Fig. 908) by the driving part of the rope, since both parts give 
 a pull of yi {T-\- f). A spring buffer is provided to check the 
 motion of the carriage in that direction. A spring dynamometer 
 may be connected with the bearing of the other pulley L^ and 
 the tension thus measured experimeutallj'. When the trans- 
 mission is set in motion 
 from a state of rest the 
 tightener pulley Z moves 
 slowly back until the 
 tension in the driven 
 part of the rope becomes 
 equal to i. Should the 
 rope have much stretch, 
 carriage must have 
 
 ,uffici 
 
 e 1 pro- 
 
 vided, and when i 
 sary the rope must be 
 shortened. The stretch 
 of the cable is less in this 
 arrangement than with 
 intermediate driving 
 pulleys, because it is 
 bent less frequently 
 around the pulleys, and 
 the wear of the rope is 
 much reduced for the 
 
 If angle stations are 
 needed the arrangement 
 of Fig. 910 is used ; this 
 requiring only two pulleys to each part of rope, instead of three, 
 as formerly, and the use of gearwheels is avoided. 
 
 If the first driving pulley is in a vertical instead of a horizontal 
 plane, the arrangement shown in Fig. 911a is used, this requiring 
 one more guide puUej' than before. In this case the track for 
 the tightener carriage is inclined so that its weight is used to 
 produce the required tension. If it is desired to place the 
 tightener pulley horizontal the arrangement shown in Fig. 911 6 is 
 used. In the cable of the Brooklyn bridge the tightener car- 
 riage is provided with a brake in order to check the suddenne.ss 
 of motion due to variations of load. A friction device similar 
 
 Fig. 910. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 207 
 
 to o Fig. 709 will serve for this purpose if the angle & is made 
 somewhat greater than is given by formula (233). 
 
 If it is desired to place the driven pulley 1\ in the same plane 
 as one of the parts of the main line cable, the other part must 
 
 Fig. 912. 
 
 in which a is for a shaft at right angles to the cable, and b and 
 c for inclined shafts for either direction of revolution. 
 
 The very moderate force which this system brings upon the 
 supporting pulleys permits them to be made very light. This 
 has been difficult of accomplishment with a cast iron rim. A 
 light wheel can be made of wrought iron, using angle iron 
 riveted to a special shaped centre piece, as shown in Fig. 914. 
 
 Fig. 913. 
 
 Fig. 914. 
 
 latter being made in halves. Pulleys made in this manner are 
 very light. 
 
 The construction of the supports is also peculiar, as shown in 
 Fig. 913. The two posts are made of channel iron secured to a 
 block of stone in the ground by means of lead run in around 
 the holes in the stone. The whole is steadied by guy-rods, and 
 brackets are provided so that the bearings can be reached by a 
 ladder. In many cases these supports of iron are cheaper than 
 those built of stone. 
 
 Fig. 91 
 
 be led over another angle pulley. If power is to be taken off at 
 intermediate stations these may be constructed as the angle sta- 
 tions of Fig. 910. 
 
 Various other forms of intermediate power stations may be 
 used without involving the use of gearing, as shown in Fig. 912, 
 
 For the intermediate driving pulleys of cast iron, the form 
 shown in Fig. 915 is used. The hub is outside of both bearings, 
 but the plane of the pulley is midway between the journals. 
 The connection between the arms and the hub is made by 
 means of a hemispherical shaped device, somewhat resembling 
 the frame of an umbrella, and hence these have been called 
 " umbrella " pulleys. This construction enables the pulley to 
 be firmly secured and readily removed without disturbing either 
 bearing. 
 
 In Fig. 915 b, a modification of this form of pulley, the 
 umbrella-shaped hub being made separately, and a straight arm 
 pulley fitted upon it. This permits a single pattern to be used 
 for the centres of a number of sizes of pulleys, or wrought iron 
 pulleys may be used on cast iron hubs of this form. Instead of 
 two journals a single longer one may be used, two forms of 
 hangers being shown in dotted lines. 
 
 The use of the umbrella 
 pulley enables a very sim- a. V- 
 
 pie form of support to be 
 used, either for single or 
 double stations. 
 
 Fig. 916 rt, is a single 
 station composed of a 
 wooden post upon which 
 a projecting bearing is 
 bolted, and in which the 
 journal of the pulley runs. 
 At b, is a double station, 
 the post being made of 
 iron The dotted lines at 
 D indicate a small roof 
 
 comparison of these forms 
 with the older style, as 
 for example. Fig. 903, will 
 show that merely the use 
 of the continuous rope 
 and the umbrella pulley 
 will effect a great econ- 
 omy in construction. The 
 umbrella pulley is also 
 well adapted to be used 
 for rope sheaves for hoist- 
 ing machinery and for 
 
 These rims are bent by means of special rolls, and a tongue is 
 formed in the sides of the groove to hold the leather filling in 
 place. The arms are made of light flat iron and the hub of cast 
 iron ; the arms either being bolted fast or cast into the hub, the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Example. — The transmission at Obenirsel is made in eight equal stretches 
 and seven stations with two pulleys each, one driving pulley and one driven. 
 This gives i6 semi-circular wraps of the rope about the pulleys, causing a 
 loss of 5-13 H. P. from stiffness. By the adoption of the new system there 
 would be three semicircular wraps'at the power house (see Fig. 908), one on 
 the driven pulley and two quarter-wraps on the guide pulleys L^, L^ (see 
 Fig. 909) There are also 11 short arcs of con tact, about jV of a circle each, on the 
 supporting pulleys, which latter would be very light and on supports con- 
 structed as already described. The combined arcs of contact make practically 
 about 5 semi-circu lar wraps or {\ of the resistance of the old arrangement, that 
 is/i- s.isorabout 1.6 H. P. This isnottoofavorableanestimate.aswe havenot 
 included the effect of the excessive tension which often occurs by the con- 
 traction of the cable in cold weather, and which is entirely avoided by the 
 use of the tightener pulley and carriage. 
 
 The reduction of journal friction is also important, as the weight of the 
 pullevs and the effect of the rope tension are both much less. The total 
 weight of the pulleys will be only about =J that of the old system, although 
 more pulleys would be used, and the journal diameter may be reduced to "^ 
 of the previous value. This gives a loss of J- X 3 = if of the previous value of 
 9.36 H. P., which is 2.08 H. P. To this we must add a resistance of 0.40 H. P. for 
 the guide pulleys which have been added in the new svstem, giving a total loss 
 of .\'es = 1.60-1- 2.o8 -h 0.40 = 4.08 H. P. The loss in the first instance is with the 
 new system 4 per cent, and in the second 10 percent., as against 13 9 and 35.9 
 per cent, for the old system. 
 
 Ill this example there are no intermediate power stations, the 
 entire amount of power less only the hurtful resistance. In 
 considering the question of the stress in the driving part of the 
 cable it is important to know whether the entire power is to be 
 transmitted to the end of the line or if a portion is to be taken 
 off at intermediate stations. If the initial forces at successive 
 intermediate power stations be indicated by P-^, P.^, P3, P^, etc., 
 the successive tensions in the cable will be reduced, and hence 
 the deflection h should be determined for the stretches preced- 
 ing and following each station, and the tension in the cable will 
 vary according to the power taken off at intermediate points. 
 The sum of all the forces P, will in every case be determined by 
 taking the tension t, in the driven part at the first driven pulley, 
 from the initial tension T, so that we have T — t^^ Z P. From 
 this equation we can deduce important results. 
 
 As an illustration we can assume the entire power transmitted 
 to be divided up among a number of intermediate stations, all 
 being operated by one continuous cable, as shown in diagram 
 in Fig. 917. 
 
 Fig. 917. 
 
 In this case the rope passes the entire round of stations 7i, 
 T2, T^, T^ to 7"ii, returning to the main power house. The 
 rope returns to the power house at any angle with a tension t, 
 giving T= 2/^4- t. All stresses are regulated automatically 
 for each stretch of the rope, as the forces vary at each station. 
 If the work at any station is reduced or even becomes zero, the 
 tightener carriage responds and alters the deflection so that 
 T — / ^ 2 . /", in which t remains constant. A transmission of 
 this kind, in which the cable makes a complete circuit of a num- 
 ber of stations, maybe called a "ring" system. In Fig. 917, the 
 supporting stations are indicated by small rectangles or tri- 
 angles, according as the line is straight or makes an angle, and 
 
 the power stations as shown are circles. At T^ the rope passes 
 off into an auxiliary circuit, which may be called a "ring" 
 transmission of the second order (see \ 260). The stations may 
 all be constructed very simply. The supporting stations are 
 made with one pulley when the line is straight, and with two 
 at the angle stations ; the power stations can generally be made 
 with only two pulleys, providing the necessary arc of contact a, 
 is obtained, or three pulleys used if necessary, see Fig. 918. 
 
 Fig. 91S. 
 In many cases it is desirable to use the system for under- 
 
 ground transmission, as in Fig. 919.* 
 
 order to determine when an arc of contact 0( , of the 
 proper magnitude has been obtained, we have, from (239), if P 
 
 We will call the ratio ^, which is the reciprocal of the modu- 
 lus of stress, the modulus of transmission, and let it be repre- 
 sented by Q, whence : 
 
 I ^ /-'a _ I 
 
 (309) 
 
 . r e/'<^ 
 
 Neglecting the influence of centrifugal force, we have, from 
 \ 290, for f the values f = 0.22 and 0.25 to consider. Taking 
 these we get the following values for various angles : 
 Modulus of transmission 9. 
 
 a = 
 
 15° 
 
 30° 
 
 45° 
 
 60° 
 
 90° 
 
 .20° 
 
 150° 
 
 180° 
 
 270° 
 
 360° 
 
 450° 
 
 S4o» 
 
 /=0.22 
 = 0.25 
 
 0.06 
 0.07 
 
 O.II 
 
 0.12 
 
 0.16 
 0.18 
 
 0.24 
 
 0.29 
 0.33 
 
 0.38 
 0.41 
 
 0.44 
 0.48 
 
 0.50 
 0-S4 
 
 0.65 
 0.69 
 
 0.75 
 0.79 
 
 0.86 
 0.81 
 
 0.88 
 0.87 
 
 These values are shown graphically in the following diagram, 
 Fig. 920: 
 
 ,J5 3 
 
 04"i6O 9 
 
 »_1 
 
 S-' 
 
 OJ! 
 
 - — 1 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' — 
 
 — ' 
 
 
 — 
 
 0,9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 _-— 
 
 
 == 
 
 0.. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0^5- 
 
 ::^ 
 
 \^ 
 
 
 
 0,7 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl*. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — "- 
 
 0.6 
 
 
 
 
 ,R!S 
 
 ^ 
 
 .- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 '(A 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :± 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 shaft, at b, a simple headstock for a small lathe, and at c, is a head for a 
 boring machine, the loose pulley ruauinsr on a stationary sleeve, as already 
 shown in Fig. 862. 
 
 Fig. 920. 
 
 From this it will be seen that an arc of contact of 30° will per- 
 mit the transmission of -^ the power due to the tension T' , and 
 an arc of 90° gives about ^. 
 
 A convenient application of this principle is found in the 
 arrangement of a "ring " transmission when a large arc of con- 
 tact is obtained upon the first or main driving pulley by redu- 
 
 3 by Boone, using a conduit for the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 plication of the rope over a counter pulley, as in Fig. 795, and 
 also shown in the case of the double-acting belt transmission in 
 Fig. 860. By using a single-grooved counter pulley and double- 
 grooved driver we get a ^ 360°, so that (^ is at least equal to 0.75. 
 In this way the specific capacity of the rope can Ije materially 
 
 increased, practically about i^ times. If we give r 
 
 - the 
 
 value * in the first equation of ^ 290, we have for the specific 
 capacit)- of a cable transmission with a counter pulley : 
 
 • (310) 
 
 25000 
 
 The adaptation of the mechanism to receive the counter pulley 
 is usually not difficult. 
 
 The adaptability of the "ring" system of transmission to use 
 in distributing power in manufacturing establishments is appar- 
 ent, and for this purpose hemp rope is very suitable. This will 
 be shown by the following example : 
 
 in Fig. 8S1, 1 286, contained 16 hen 
 a specific capacity N^ — o. 
 iectiou of each rope is 3.14 
 360 = 15.57 H. P. for each rope, o 
 
 Fig. 92 
 
 ituting the arrangement shown in Fig. 921, we take a -...t,.^ 
 imposed of 60 steel wires, and use a stress of 17,000 pounds i; 
 
 side of the cable and ir " " ' '' ■ ' ' 
 
 ive from (278) : 
 
 :ss of 17.CX 
 to 3150 feet 
 
 le diameter 6 = a 
 
 jn the original hemp rope transmissior 
 radius of 71 inches, and as we have increas 
 pulley must be proportionally increased, a 
 This gives a stress due to bending, 
 
 this being not too great to 'give satisfactory results. We have, instead of a 
 wide face pullev made with 16 grooves, a single groove puUev made with 
 leather filling, as in Fig. 879 a, of 15 ft. 10" diameter. An important point 
 to be considered is the stress due to the bending of the rope over the pul- 
 leys n, Ta, etc. These pulleys were 36" radius for the hemp rope, and 
 hence 4. 36 = 48" radius for the wire rope, or 8 feet diameter. We then have 
 from (279) 
 
 — ^ — = 23,666, which added to the working si 
 
 ;sof 
 
 17,000 lbs. gives a total of 40,666 pounds, which is not too high for steel wire, 
 according to § 266. The idler pulley L, is made the same size as the driven 
 pulleys 7-3, Ti. etc., and the tightened pulley L' can be made a little larger. 
 The loss of efficiency will be somewhat less than in the case of hemp rope, 
 since for wire rope there is a smaller modulus of stress t, (;". e. 2 instead of 
 2|, see §287), and the initial force />, is smaller, because of the increase in 
 velocity and the loss from stiffness will be less. The loss from stoppage 
 and creep should also be considered as not unimportant (see I 287). 
 
 Fig. 922. 
 
 If it is desired to use a counter pulley with the 
 rangement in Fig. 922 may be adopted. In this 
 and tightened pulley L\ are both inclined so tha 
 
 guided for the double grooves in the main driving pxiUey. The arc contact 
 a. is in this case greater than 360°, and the specific capacity will be iJ4 times 
 greater. This will enable the cross section of the rope to be reduced to § the 
 previous value, or ? = §. 307 ^ 0.204 sq in. If we use wires instead of 60, 
 we have for the cross section of each wire 
 
 - = 0.0056 sq. 1 
 
 •r of the r 
 
 jpe v 
 
 11 be fro 
 
 3980 
 
 o r, I 
 
 
 The conditions of this example are hardly such as to demand 
 the introduction of the counter pulley, but when large powers 
 are to be transmitted its use is most advantageous. In some 
 instances the couater pulley may be arranged, as in Fig. 911, 
 ?o as to sustain a part of the weight of the fly wheel of the en- 
 gine, and hence materially reduce the journal friction. 
 
 In many instances the power in factories may be arranged so 
 as to use the "ring " system of transmission, and dispense with 
 the use of the spur or bevel gearing, and some examples are 
 here given. 
 
 In Fig. 923 a is shown the usual arrangement of the trans- 
 mission of power in a weaving establishment. 
 
 ..J ! ,! ^ 
 
 TTT^^TTr 
 
 In this instance the two shafts which extend each way from 
 K, drive the line shafting by seven pairs of bevel gears, while 
 in some factories as many as 12 to 18 pairs are used. 
 
 ^^^^Q^^Qf^^Qq^- 
 
 Fig. 923 b. 
 
 Fig- 923 b shows how a ring transmission can beusedto drive 
 the same shafting, there being seven guide pulleys and one 
 tightener L' , the guide pulleys being of the " umbrella " pat- 
 tern, as in Fig. 915. The tension weight for the tightener is 
 equal to 2 T' . 
 
 Fig. 923 c 
 
 Another arrangement is shown in Fig. 923 c, this being used 
 when the alternate shafts are to revolve in opposite directions. 
 This permits the rope to be used double acting, as described in 
 g 277 and shown in Fig. 860. Those portions of the rope 
 marked i in Fig. 923 c, are in one plane, and those marked 2 
 in a second plane, giving clearance to the parts of the rope, 
 and the rope is guided from one plane to the other by the 
 guide pulley Z, and tightener Z'. Five of the seven driven 
 pulleys are double acting, and hence are made double grooved. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Shafts which lie at right angles but in parallel planes, one 
 above the other, are also readily driven by use of a ring trans- 
 mission system. 
 
 Fig. 924. Fig. 925. 
 
 In the preceding cases it is desired to obtain a double wrap 
 of the rope about the driving pulley K, the arrangement in 
 Fig. 924 may be adopted. In this case two idler pulleys G^ and 
 <?., are used to guide the rope from one plane to the other. The 
 rest of the rope, when either of the planes shown in Fig. 923 b 
 or c is used, is guided in a third plane by suitable pulleys. In 
 Fig. 925 is shown an arrangement by means of which a series 
 of parallel vertical shafts, revolving alternately in opposite di- 
 rections, can be driven from a single horizontal shaft K. 
 
 The ring system is well adapted for driving a number of mill 
 stones, as arranged in Fig. 926, for example, in which all the 
 mill spindles revolve in the same direction. The direction of 
 the stones may be readily reversed by a corresponding change 
 in the cutting of the furrows, and hence the double-acting 
 arrangement as in Fig. 925 can be used if so desired. 
 
 The arrangement of the double-grooved pulley on the spin- 
 dle in this case is shown in Fig. 927. This is a modified form 
 of the umbrella pulley of Fig. 915, the hub being made in the 
 form of a hollow sleeve carrying a cone or other suitable clutch 
 K, K\ by which any pair of stones can be stopped without in- 
 terfering with the 
 ' others. An adjust- 
 
 able step for the 
 spindle is provided 
 
 at//; 
 
 In machine shop 
 transmissions it is 
 frequently required 
 to drive a series of 
 parallel counter 
 shafts, which re- 
 volve in one direc- 
 tion, sometimes in 
 the opposite, and 
 any of which may 
 need to be stopped. 
 Such an arrange- 
 ment is shown in 
 Fig. 928. The rope 
 is carried over the 
 various pulleys of 
 one series around 
 the tightener pulley 
 L', and back over 
 the other series At 
 K^ and K.^ are fric- 
 tion clutches which 
 are thrown into en- 
 gagement on one 
 side or the other, 
 Fig. 927. according to the di- 
 
 rection of revolution 
 required, or which may be left disengaged. If two adjacent 
 shafts are desired to revolve in the same direction, an inter- 
 
 greatly simplified by using the above system. In all these ar- 
 rangements the modulus of transmission is determined as al- 
 ready discussed in formula (309) and the proper arc of contact 
 determined. For example, if in an arrangement similar to 
 Fig. 925, each part of the rope is in contact 30° on the pulley, 
 and the coefficient of friction f, is 0.22, we have from the pre- 
 ceding table for the modulus of transmission y = o.ii. If the 
 tension on the respective sides of cable be T' and t' ^ acting 
 upon the pulle5'S, we have for the maximum force transmitted 
 by the rope P' =^o.i\ {'f ■\- t'). In this case we have always 
 T' -^ t = T -\- t, and hence T =2 2 P,t=^^ P (see ? 264). 
 Hence we have I"' = o.ii x 3 S Z', or about \ S P. If there 
 were but three driven pulleys, each offering the same resist- 
 ance, the system would operate well, and still belter with a 
 greater number of driven pulleys. For mills of 20, 30 or more 
 pairs of stones, this arrangement is especially applicable, since 
 it furnishes a far simpler transmission system than heretofore. 
 This system, however, should not be carried beyond its proper 
 limits, and for small, light running mills, such as are used for 
 grinding paints, graphite, etc., belts are generally more advan- 
 tageous, being easier thrown in and out ; the rope system 
 being better adapted for the transmission of greater powers. 
 
 In all the various classes of heavier inills, such as are used 
 for grinding plaster, cement, and the like, also for paper mill 
 machinery, the rope transmission is best adapted, replacing all 
 the heavy shafting, gearing and belting otherwise necessary. 
 
 An example, will illustrate the method of applying the fore- 
 going principles. 
 
 Example ■z.—\,^'i there be. two sets of wood pulp mills each requiring 60 
 H. i^. to be driven from a pair of turbines bv a " ring transmission " system, 
 the first moving shaft making 125 revolutions per minute. The main shaft 
 
 driving pulley of the rope .system, making also 125 revolutions. .We have 
 for the specific capacity of the rope, from (277) N^ = ^7^, and if we use steel 
 wire and take ^i = 21,300 we get N^ = 0.323. Also we make the velocity v of 
 the rope = 3150 leet per minute, and we get for the cross section of the rope 
 from {278) 
 
 e the cable of 36 wires we have for the cross section o 
 
 )3 and the diameter S = 0.073". 
 
 lumber of revolutions and the chosen speed of rope w 
 
 g this in (279) we get for the 
 
 which is satisfactory. The 
 •e 60 H. P. is used, 
 
 bending stress, .r = 14,200,000 — = 21,50c 
 
 entire 120 H. P. is carried by the rope to tl 
 
 and the balance is transmitted to the .second set, the necessary supporti-.g 
 
 pulleys being introduced between the two points, and the required tension 
 
 t being given by the tightener carriage. Following the course of the rope, 
 
 we have at the driving pulley the tensions Tand t, respectively equal to 
 
 riage with 2514^5. 
 
 In some instances it is found practicable to drive two pulp 
 mills with one pulley, the pulley being between the machines 
 on an intermediate shaft with a fraction coupling at each end. 
 
 Another case may be given where a number of machines with 
 horizontal shafts each requiring the same amount of power, are 
 arranged in a row and drawn by a ring transmission system, 
 Fig. 929. 
 
 he tension at the first set is reduced by /" = 6 
 
 8.5 lbs. 
 
 whence 
 
 628.5 = 1885.5 lbs. At the second point again 
 
 s taken 
 
 oflr/" = 
 
 id the tension becomes 18S5.5 — 628.5 = 1257 lbs 
 
 which 
 
 
 ; value of t, and which is obtained by loading t 
 
 lie tight 
 
 
 mediate guide pulley is introduced, as shown at Zj. The sub- 
 sequent belt transmission from these counter shafts can be 
 
 Fig. 929. 
 In this case friction clutches are placed at Ky K^ for stopping 
 and starting the machines, while the intermediate pulleys L L, 
 which may be of the umbrella pattern, are carried on hangers 
 from the ceiling. The rope and the driving pulleys are covered 
 by guards S S \.o protect the workmen. This arrangement is 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 especially convenient if there is a second series of machines on 
 the floor above, when the pulleys L L become the driving 
 pulleys of the upper set, and no guide pulleys are required at 
 all. It is sometimes desirable to make the driving pulleys of 
 umbrella form, supported on independent bearings, so that any 
 machine can be repaired or entirely removed without inter- 
 fering with the rest of the transmission. 
 
 It should not be forgotten that the ring system of rope trans- 
 mission generally involves an entire rearrangement of the 
 •establishment, and that it can rarely be substituted for a shaft- 
 ing transmission to much advantage. 
 
 A comparison of the last example with the older system in 
 which a separate rope is used for each portion of the transmis- 
 sion will be of interest. In the previous method the pulleys 
 could not be brought close together because the tension would 
 require to be too great, and slight variations in temperature 
 would produce excessive variations in tension. These difficul- 
 ties are overcome in the ring system by the use of the tightener 
 carriage, which may also be used to much advantage in those 
 systems of belt transmission which lie in one plane, such as 
 have been shown in Fig. 844. The construction is similar to 
 that for rope transmission, and the umbrella hub may be used 
 to advantage. In many cases the specific capacity may be much 
 increased in this way. 
 
 The new system is also highly advantageous for long distance 
 transmission, especially where power is to be taken off at 
 several points, or it may be used in combination with the old 
 system, retaining the latter and using the new system for pur- 
 pose of distribution. 
 
 The difiSculties of construction are much less for long dis- 
 tance transmission than with the old system, and the cost of 
 installation and supervision much smallei. 
 
 The application of the new system appears likely to increase 
 very greatly, since it involves less first cost than electrical 
 transmission plant, and also a higher eflSciency when the losses 
 from transformation of electrical currents are considered. 
 
 This subject will be further considered in Chapter XXIV. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 chain transmission. strap brakes. 
 
 Specific Capacity of Driving Chains. 
 
 The use of chain for purposes of power transmission is neces- 
 sarily more restricted than the use of rope, but for single trans- 
 missions in special cases it is well adapted, and its applications 
 are increasing. Chain is especially capable of resisting varia- 
 tions of temperature and exposure to the weather and to dust, 
 and hence is well adapted for driving revolving drums in 
 mining machinery, washing machinery, the machines in bake- 
 ries, etc. In mining machinery chains are very extensively 
 used, both above and below ground, not only for continuous 
 tramway driving, as in Fig. 802, but also for the transmission of 
 rotary motion over extended distances. 
 
 Chain sheaves are made either with smooth wedge shaped 
 grooves, or with pockets for the chain links as already indicated 
 in g 275. In the first case the driving is due to friction in the same 
 manner as with belting and ropes, while in the second case the 
 action is similar to that of toothed gearing. 
 
 Fig. 930. 
 
 The method of friction driving can be used with ordinary 
 link chain as at a, Fig. 930, and may also be used with the flat 
 link chain of Fig. 830 d, if so desired. The circumferential 
 friction F =■ T — t may be determined from the following rela- 
 tion (see I 264) : 
 
 (x+2/si 
 
 in which 7" and t are the tensions in the driving and driven 
 sides of the chain respectively, and f is the coefficient of fric- 
 tion. The angle ^ is that subtended by the pitch length of a 
 link of the chain at the centre of the chain sheave, and may be 
 obtained from r sin yi ^ =. yi I \ the exponent m is the number 
 
 of link contacts, hence ni = -5-. A sufficiently close approxi- 
 
 mation may be obtained by taking /3 = — , which gives for the 
 modulus of friction p : 
 
 '-T-0+/^)"- <-, 
 
 In chain transmission the modulus of friction is not indepen- 
 dent of r, as with rope transmission, but varies somewhat with 
 
 the ratio — . This latter ratio in practice seldom goes below 5. 
 
 Taking this limit, and also puttingy"= o.i, we have for practi- 
 cal values of p the following, in which ?( equals the number of 
 half wraps of the chain around the sheave : 
 
 C-i)' 
 
 The following table has been calculated for i to 8 half-wraps, 
 and gives the modulus of friction (> = — ■, the modulus of stress 
 
 T 
 T:= — and the modulus of transmission d (see (309)). 
 
 u = 
 
 . 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 p = 
 
 1-37 
 
 1.88 
 
 2.S7 
 
 3-53 
 
 4-8^ 
 
 6.61 
 
 9.06 
 
 12.41 
 
 r = 
 
 3-69 
 
 
 1.64 
 
 1-39 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.18 
 
 1. 12 
 
 1.09 
 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.61 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.79 
 
 0,85 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.92 
 
 These values for t> and r are similar to those obtained for ten- 
 sion organs generally, as indicated in the diagram already given 
 in Fig. 816. It will be noted that the transmitting capacity of 
 chain even with a single half-wrap about a smooth sheave is 
 good. 
 
 Since the specific capacity of a driving tension organ (see 
 (262)) is equal to 
 
 tVo =— — . — or — — se 
 
 33000 T 33000 
 
 we have for ordinary open link chains the following values for 
 various stresses S: 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 5000 
 7000 
 
 8500 
 
 
 0,042 
 0.057 
 
 0.070 
 
 0.071 
 
 0.099 
 
 O.I2I 
 
 0.092 
 0.129 
 
 0.157 
 
 0.109 
 O.IS3 
 0.185 
 
 0.120 
 0.168 
 0.203 
 
 0.129 
 0.180 
 
 0.230 
 
 0.140 
 0.197 
 0.237 
 
 (311) 
 
 The specific capacity is in all cases high, and for the generally 
 accepted stresses in the chain cross section it varies from 
 0.042 to 0.237. 'Various applications permit variations in 
 the value of S, the value being taken lower when it is desired 
 that the wear through friction shall be reduced. The cross sec- 
 tion of chain is determined from the ejuation N = 2 q v 7V_, 
 (see \. 280) in which N is the horse power to be transmitted at 
 a velocity v, and q is the sectional area of the iron of which the 
 chain links are made. We have : 
 
 ^ N . . 
 
 '=rv-N: (^^4) 
 
 The value of v is always low, and hence the influence of cen- 
 trifugal force upon p may be neglected. 
 
 Example i.— It is required to t 
 making a half wrap about a smooth sheave, the 
 minute and S = 8500 lbs. We then have for the • 
 
 which corresponds to a diameter of 0.3 ii 
 
 ., by means of a chain 
 )city jy being 1180 feet per 
 ;s section g of metal ; 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 q = ^-T~g- • ^^ 
 
 = 046 sq. in. 
 
 or a diameter of 0.27 in. ' 
 
 This gives a lighter chain and at the s 
 friction is materially reduced when ei 
 g303). 
 
 tering and leaving the s 
 
 are from executed examples in the chaiu tramway of the Decido 
 iron mines in Spain, built by Briill, of Paris. The dimensions 
 are given in millimetres, and the chain is operated under a 
 stress of about 5000 pounds per sq. in. 
 
 By using grooved and pocketed sheaves the specific capacity 
 may be greatly increased, the chain being held so securely that 
 
 ..Jl|.Q7.Q. 
 
 Fig. 931. 
 as many as eight half-wraps may be used, 
 arrangements for such sheaves are shown ir 
 
 Two very practical 
 illustrations, which 
 
 Fig. 932. 
 
 The sheave shown in Fig. 931 is for a 25 mm. {\" nearly) 
 chain, and is made with inserted teeth of steel, and the form of 
 Fig. 932 is similar, and is for an 18 mm. (0.7 in.) chain. In both 
 cases the teeth are radial, and formed to receive the chain links, 
 being secured by jam nuts in the second case, and by nuts 
 fitted with the Belleville elastic washers, which latter have 
 worked well in practice. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 213 
 
 In Pig. 933 is given an arrangement of chain sheave gearing, 
 including a solid massive form of bearing, as used in many 
 English collieries.* Here the sheave is made with eight semi- 
 circular ridges or ribs, similar to the old form of capstan shown 
 already in Fig. 794 a ; and both parts of the chain are carried 
 on supporting pulleys. In many instances this arrangement is 
 used, by widening the face of the sheave, to receive several 
 wraps of chain, as shown in the upper right corner of Fig. 933. 
 If we may safely assume that the ridges increase the coefficient 
 of friction at least three times, in the preceding formulas tS'i) 
 and (312), we have for the corresponding modulus of friction p' : 
 
 In this case the pitch length / of the links is taken = 3.5 d, 
 and making r = 5 /, we get Fx= {T -\- i) o.o36/j, and if we put 
 for the loss at both sheaves : 
 
 which gives for 
 
 = 2.5« , 
 
 (315) 
 
 u 
 
 'A 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 p' = 
 
 1.58 
 
 2.50 
 
 6.25 
 
 15.63 
 
 39.06 
 
 
 2.72 
 
 1.67 
 
 1. 19 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 
 0.37 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.97 
 
 from which the security against slippage and also the specific 
 transmitting capacity may be determined for any given case. 
 
 Within moderate limits chain transmission may be used as a 
 " ring" system, as for instance in driving; the rollers of carding 
 machines, also in wood pulp grinding mills a ring chain trans- 
 1 is used for driving the feed rolls. 
 
 ?303- 
 Efficiency of Chain Transmission. 
 The loss of efficiency in a chain transmission is due to jour- 
 nal friction, dependent upon the chain tensions T^and/; and 
 upon the friction of the links in entering and leaving the 
 sheaves. The journal friction is determined as already shown 
 in \ 300, and for high values of Q, it is not great. The loss from 
 chain friction is due to the rotation of each link about its 
 adjoining link as an axis through an angle /3. This gives, with 
 a coefficient of friction y"i, a circumferential resisting force F-^, 
 due to chain friction (see formula 100) 
 
 ^-■(-o(v)e/)- 
 
 Ek — o 072 /j - 
 
 . (3 '6) 
 
 * The illustration is from Newi 
 
 efficient of friction 7^2 = 
 ', as in the preceding sect 
 
 £. = 0.07. Xo.x5(^)= 0.0.5 
 or only 2}^ per cent. 
 Example 3.— By using carefully made pocketed teeth and making u = 8, 
 
 £* = o.o7.Xo..5(;-f;^)=o.ox=6 
 
 or only ij^ per cent., this reduction beingdue to the reduction in the tension 
 on the chain, showing the importance of considering the question of chain 
 tension iu this connection. 
 
 In the preceding examples the friction of the links upon each 
 other has been considered, but not that of the links upon the 
 sheave. This latter is a very variable quantity, being unimpor- 
 tant with a smooth sheave, as Fig. 930 a, and sometimes 
 becoming excessive, as shown already in Fig. 8386, \ 275. 
 
 In every case all possible care should be taken to produce as 
 little rubbing contact as possible. 
 
 I 304. 
 
 INTFRMEDIATK STATIONS FOR CHAIN TRANSMISSION. 
 
 The most important applications of chain transmission are in 
 mining work, both above and below ground ; and especially in 
 coal mines. In this branch of work England takes the lead, 
 followed by America, where, however, wire rope is more exten- 
 sively applied, while in Germany the most applications are 
 found in the Saarbruck district. 
 
 A very interesting application of endless long distance chain 
 transmission is shown in Fig. 934, which gives two views of the 
 
 
 «- 
 
 -ii8iru..«. llSni— J 
 
 T'. 
 
 % 
 
 ::-^^::^3:-.::'|| 
 
 
 f^lFf 
 
 ! 
 
 
 \ 
 
 132m 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ,i_ 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 
 i 
 
 Fig. 934- 
 
 (Dimensions in Metres.) 
 
214 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Gannow mine at Burnley in Lancashire. The driving pulley 
 is at T, and guide pulleys at L, while at L' \s, a tightener pullej' 
 hung between two idlers, a construction which is frequently used. 
 The rotation is modified in various ways in the English mines, 
 stations similar to those of rope transmission systems being used. 
 
 formulas (239) and (240) or from the graphical diagram of Fig-. 
 816. Such strap brakes are frequently made with straps of iron 
 or steel. It is generally desirable to so arrange the parts that 
 the motion of the pulley acts to draw the strap into closer 
 engagement, which may be done in various ways. Fig. 937 
 shows several such arrangements. 
 
 The various parts are indicated as follows : i is the axis of the 
 pulley ; 2, the point of application of the brake ; 3, the attach- 
 ment of the tight side of the strap ; 4, the attachment for the 
 slack side ; 5, the axis for the brake lever. In Fig. 937 rt, 3 and 
 5 are separate ; in Fig. 937 b they are combined in one, and in 
 F'g- 937 <^ both 3 and 5 are separate, but 3 and 5 are made mova- 
 ble, and 3 and 5 are so nearly in line with 3" that a very slight 
 effect is produced on the lever by T. 
 
 In Fig. 938 rt 3 and 4 are combined, and at the same time 3 
 and 5 are nearly in line with T. Fig. 9386 is the so-called 
 
 Fig. 935. 
 
 In Fig. 935 is shown an intermediate station at 7\ T.^, and 
 also on angle station at L. In many instances combinations of 
 bevel glaring and shafting are found in connection with chain 
 transmission, but the examples here given are confined to the 
 use of chain alone. 
 
 Fig. 936. 
 
 In Fig. 936 an intermediate station is shown at T^ 7^, and a 
 change station at Zj, T^. At T'j, Fig. 936, the chain makes an 
 entire wrap around the sheave, the latter being made with a 
 ■wide groove, and interference of the two parts of the chain pre- 
 vented by guide sheaves. The simple supporting stations are 
 made with small horizontal guide sheaves, with wide grooves. 
 The velocity of the chain varies from 200 to 500 feet per minute. 
 
 Strap Brakes. 
 
 If a driven pulley is embraced by a tension organ, either belt, 
 rope, strap or chain, the ends of which are subjected to tensions 
 7" and /, and also held from moving, the pulley is hindered from 
 moving toward t, so long as the fbrce acting to rotate it does 
 tiot exceed /*=■ T — t. The tension organ then forms, with the 
 pulley and stationary frame work, a friction ratchet system in 
 which the tension organ forms the pawl. If the tension 7 be 
 reduced until T — i <i P, the pulley will slip in the strap, over- 
 coming the frictional resistance due to T — t, and the motion 
 can be made slower, if 7 and t be made great enough, so long 
 as their difference is only slightly smaller than P. The mechan- 
 ism then becomes a form of checking ratchet (? 253) better 
 known as a friction brake, or simply as a brake. Such brakes, 
 when made with tension organs, are called strap brakes. 
 
 Strap brakes are made in various forms to suit the applica- 
 tion. 
 
 Fig. 93g- 
 
 " differential " brake of Napier, in which 3 and 4 are so placed 
 that perpendiculars to the directions of 7 and i? are inversely 
 proportional to those tensions, thus reducing the action of the 
 strap upon the brake lever to a small amount. Fig. 938 c shows 
 an arrangement adapted to permit the pulley to revolve in 
 either direction. The angle 3.5.4 can be so chosen that the 
 force upon the lever may be very small. 
 
 For heavy hoisting machinery, the braking power required 
 
 Fig. 939- 
 
 makes the arrangement shown in 939 suitable. In this case the 
 strap is filled with blocks of wood in order to obtain a higher 
 coefficie'nt of friction and at 6 is shown an application of the 
 globoid worm and worm wheel shown in Fig. 641. 
 
 ii-ra ;«/>/(?.— Required a brake for a shaft driven hva force of 2200 pounds at 
 a lever arm of 7.875 inches. The form chosen is that of Fig. 938 a- the arc of 
 contacted of the strap being- 0.7 of the circumference. The coefficient of 
 friction/= 0.1, the strap being lubricated. -W'ethen haveycx = o.t x 14 ■"■. 
 = 0.14 TT = 0.43. -We then have from the second table of § 264, the tension 
 
 
 ;arly, and the friction modulus 
 
 .5 (see 
 
 o the diagram. Fig. 816). This gives — = % . -^- = J^ X 2,88 = 1.92. 
 
 make the brake pune5' with a radius of 15.75 in., the braking force at t 
 
 cumference of the pulley must be . 2200 = iioo lbs., and t — 1.92 
 
 15-75 
 !.88 X -IIOO = 3168 poi 
 1 a force of 44 pounds 
 
 — = 48. The strap is und^ 
 
 permissible stress of 5 = ii 
 
 (a) Clamping Brakes. — When a strap brake is to be used to 
 act as a complete clamping brake, to check motion entirely, the 
 tensions 7" and must be determined. These are obtained from 
 
 is quite practicable. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The question of the pressure be 
 According to formula (241) -~ = - 
 
 ;n the braking surfaces is 
 we have for the tight t 
 
 t the slack end, s 
 
 - 48 lbs., both of which 
 
 such small v; 
 
 the wear must be very slight. 
 
 This example shows how, in a properly arranged construction, 
 a great ratio of force to resistance can be obtained. In large 
 winding engines the brake pulley can readily be cast in one with 
 the rim of the drum gear. 
 
 The method of securing the ends a b 
 
 of the metal strap is shown in Fig. 
 940. The form at a, is secured by 
 countersunk rivets, and that at d, 
 by an anchor head and a single 
 small rivet to prevent lateral slip- 
 page. 
 
 (d) Sliduig Brakes. — In using clamp brakes operated by hand 
 for lowering heavy loads in hoisting machinery, great care must 
 be taken, since the throwing out of the checking pawls puts the 
 entire resistance on the brake. With this arrangement there is 
 always more or less insecurit}^, the safety depending upon the 
 handling of the lever, and serious accidents have frequently 
 occurred. This danger can be avoided by the use of automatic 
 sliding brakes, the following form being designed by the author, 
 and shown in two forms in Fig. 941. The brake pulley a, is 
 loose on the shaft, but engages with it by means of a ratchet 
 system a' b' c' . The brake is subjected to a tension equal to 
 
 Fig. 940. 
 
 Fig. 941. 
 the greatest braking force desired ; i. e. so that the weight K 
 must be raised in order to permit the load to run down. If the 
 lever is let go, for any reason, the descent is checked. In form 
 a, the pawls are attached to the piilley, and the ratchet wheel 
 a' keyed to the shaft ; in b, the pawl is on a disk c' . When the 
 load is raised the combination forms an ordinary ratchet train. 
 A silent ratchet, Figs. 673, 674 may be used for this device. At 
 c, is shown a pendulum counterweight, which can be adjusted 
 so as to vary the braking power to suit various loads. 
 
 Another form of sliding brake, also designed by the author, 
 is shown in Fig. 942. In this design the strap b, is given such 
 
 Fig. 942. 
 
 tension t, by means of the screw e 7, and lever c, as to hold the 
 load from descending ; a rubber spring being introduced at 7. 
 If the load is to be lowered, the clamp e, is loosened, but is 
 again tightened on ceasing. When hoisting, the tension t at 2" 
 is readily overcome. This is in reality a form of running ratchet 
 gear, and as shown it is made with a strap of wedge section, the 
 angle being 45°. The wedge portion is made of wood on iron 
 
 at least 0.20') increased by -^ which when used to multi- 
 
 ? 306- 
 Chain Brakes. 
 
 orga 
 
 cause of the use of the wooden block, 
 arc of contact is less than 180°, we have 
 
 hi-akp construc- 
 tion, in which case 
 it is generallj' 
 lined with blocks 
 of wood, as in Fig. 
 943. The tensions 
 T and t, to be 
 given to the two 
 parts of the cha:u. 
 are readily oi^ 
 tained from for- 
 mula (312). The 
 ratio of chain 
 pitch length /, to 
 the pulley radius 
 r, is increased be- 
 Whan / = >< r and the 
 
 ^C-f)- 
 
 • (316) 
 
 For wood on iron we may take f = 0.3 (see section 193)- 
 This gives : 
 
 p=--- = I . i9= 2.3s ; also 
 
 
 and- 
 
 = 0.74, < 
 
 0.74 P. 
 
 These proportions should not be strictly followed for heavy 
 brakes such as in Fig. 939, as such should be determined for 
 each case. 
 
 I 307. 
 iNTERNAi, Strap Brakes. 
 
 Strap brakes may be used in internal pulleys, in a manner 
 similar to the internal ratchet gear of Fig. 711, for example. 
 The outside of the strap then acts upon the inner surface of the 
 pulley, the strap being subjected to compression instead of ten- 
 sion,* thus becoming a pressure organ, a subject treated more 
 fully in the following chapter. 
 
 Fig. 944- 
 
 The pressure of the internal strap brake is of the same mag- 
 nitude as with the external brake, but in the opposite direction, 
 so that the previously determined value of p from the forces T 
 and t, may be used. Fig. 944 shows three forms of such brakes, 
 these being used for friction couplings, and not in hoisting 
 machinery (see Fig. 449). Fig. 944 «, is Schurman's friction 
 coupling, t The brake lever c, acts by means of a wedge 4, 
 upon one end of the strap. The other end of the strap is. held 
 by a pin 3, to the member d, which is to be coupled to a by 
 means of the strap b. The lever c, is also pivoted to the mem- 
 ber d. For the forces T and /, we may use formula (239), and 
 since a is nearly ^ 2 -, or say = 6, we have for/ = o. i the 
 value/ o = 0.6, which from the table of \ 264 gives p ^^^^ 1.82, 
 and r = 2.22, whence t -^^ 1.22 P. The strap must be released 
 by the action of a spring. 
 
 Fig. 944 b, is Adyman's coupling.^ which is made with a 
 heavy cast iron ring. The ring h, is made in halves, b' and b", 
 fitted with projections 4' and 4'' which engage with an interme- 
 diate sheave keyed on the shaft. 
 
 * See Theoretical I 
 tZeitschrift des V« 
 X Made by Bagshav 
 
 matics, p. 167 ; p. 548. 
 
 s Deutscher Ingenuiere, Vol. V. p. 301, 
 
 3ons, Batley, Yorkshire. 
 
2l6 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The levers c' and c" have a common axis at 5, and when 
 separated by a wedge at 6, the}' press upon the ends of the ring 
 at z' aud 3". A piu at 7, keeps the levers from sliding in the 
 direction 7 . i, as well as the ring b' b" . 
 
 The coupling shown in Fig. 944 r, acts both ways, as an inter- 
 nal and external strap brake, and is used on a shaping machine 
 by Prentiss. * The steel strap b, is covered with leather. When 
 ihe arms c' c" are drawn together it acts as an external strap 
 on the pulley a" , and when they are forced apart it becomes an 
 internal strap in the pulley a' . The arms c' c" are carried on 
 sleeves and are rotated to or from each other by a screw action. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 PRESSURE ORGANS CONSIDERED AS MACHINE ELEMENTS. 
 
 force" of the pressure organ serving to retain it -within the 
 desired limits. Canals are merely conduits of larger dimen- 
 
 Various Kinds of Pressure Organs. 
 In distinction from the various kinds of tension organs which 
 have been considered in the four preceding chapters, there 
 exists another group of machine elements of which the sole or 
 principal characteristic is that they are capable only of resist- 
 ing forces acting in compression. This group includes fluids, 
 both liquid and gaseous, whether limpid or viscous, such as : 
 Water, oil, air, steam, all pasty substances, clay, molten metals; 
 also granular materials, all kinds ^f grain, meal, gravel, etc. 
 In all these materials the principal feature lies in the fact that 
 the particles are subdivided to such an extent that they can be 
 separated from each other by a very small force, while on the 
 other hand they are capable of opposing more or less resistance 
 to compression, this resistance in many instances, as, for exam- 
 ple, in the case of water, almost equalling that of metals. These 
 materials may be used as machine elements in a great variety of 
 ways, and in the following discussion they will be included 
 under the general title of Pressure Organs. Like their coun- 
 terparts the tension organs already discussed, they are used 
 largely for the transmission of motion in various manners, but 
 are of still greater importance on account of the great variety 
 of physical conditions in which they appear. 
 
 I 309- 
 Methods of Using Pressure Organs. 
 The distinction which has been made between tension and 
 pressure organs enables various points of contrast and compari- 
 son to be made as regards the methods of uiilizing them, and 
 pressure organs may be divided in the same manner as tension 
 organs (see \. 262) iuto standing and running organs. These 
 divisions have but little practical application in this instance, 
 but the three following subdivisions in \. 262, viz. : Guiding, 
 Supporting (i.e , raising or lowering), and Driving are here 
 applicable also. We may therefore distinguish pressure organs, 
 when considered as machine elements, into the following 
 classes : 
 
 1. For Guiding. 
 
 2. For Supporting (including raising and lowering). 
 
 3. For Driviug. 
 
 These various methods of action may be used either separately 
 or in combination, and are found in most varied forms in many 
 machine constructions. The great variety of possible combina- 
 tions makes it desirable for a general view of the entire subject 
 to be taken before discussing details. 
 
 ?3io. 
 Guiding by Pressure Organs. 
 In order to use a pressure organ for guiding, /. e., to compel a 
 more or less determinate succession of motions, it is necessary 
 to use also two other machine elements formed of rigid mate- 
 rials. These latter are for the purpose : 
 
 a, Of resisting the internal forces of the pressure organ 
 
 and keeping it within the desired limits. 
 
 b, Of connecting the pressure organ with the external forces 
 
 to be received and opposed. 
 Tubes, Conduits, Canals.— Th& tube a, Fig. 945, limits the 
 boundary of the particles of the pressure organ, and retains it 
 in the desired form and controls its direction. A bend in a 
 tube corresponds to a pulley around which the pressure organ 
 is bent, and thus has its direction changed. Even when no 
 change of direction is made, the tube is necessary to oppose re- 
 sistance to the particle of the pressure organ, and hence at 
 every section it must offer resistance to tension as well as com- 
 pression. Conduits, or channels, as at b, are tubes with one 
 side left open, the force of gravity or the so-called "living 
 
 Fig. 945- 
 sions, as at e, and natural streams of water often serve the pur- 
 pose. 
 
 Driving Organs, Pistons and Cylinders. — The bodies by 
 means of which the pressure organ is connected with the exter- 
 nal forces and resistances with which it is intended to act 
 mechanically may be called generically. Driving Organs, and 
 are very varied in character. Among these are movable recep- 
 tacles, also moving surfaces or moving conduits (as in turbines), 
 and also moving pistons in tubes or cylinders. A piston serves 
 to oppose the stress in the pressure organ in the direction of its 
 motion, while the walls of the tube oppose their resistance at 
 right angles to the direction of motion. The inclosure in which 
 a piston acts is called, in general terms, the cylinder, and details 
 of construction will be given hereafter. The principal types 
 will here be considered briefly. 
 
 A complete working contact between piston and cylinder can 
 only be obtained when both surfaces are alike, and this is only 
 geometrically possible with three forms of bodies ; i. e., prisma- 
 tic bodies, bodies of rotation, and spirally formed bodies. Of 
 these the prismatics are most useful, and among the prismatic 
 bodies the form most extensively used is the cylinder. 
 
 The fit of a piston in its cylinder, entirely free from leakage,- 
 is very difficult of attainment, and is rarely attempted in practice. 
 
 In steam indicators the piston is very accurately fitted directly 
 into the cylinder, but in most cases a practically satisfactory 
 result is obtained by the use of some intermediate packing 
 device. 
 
 ^B 
 
 Fig. 946. 
 
 In many cases a soft packing of hemp or leather is used, Fig. 
 946. At a is shown a piston with external packing, at d an 
 internal packing. In these cases one entire end of the cylinder 
 is open, the piston filling the entire cylinder and acting upon 
 the inclosed pressure organ on one side, this constituting a 
 single-acting position. At c and d are similar double acting 
 pistons. Pistons of the fornrs shown in a and b are sometimes 
 called plungers, and the shorter inclosed pistons, as c or d, are 
 also called piston-heads. At 1? is a double-acting piston used in 
 connection with a rod and stuffing box, the rod being connected 
 with external mechanism, and the stuffing box made either with 
 external or internal packing, as indicated at i and i'. In many 
 instances pistons are made with openings which are fitted with 
 valves, and hence may be called "valved" pistons, while those 
 here shown are termed closed or solid pistons. 
 
 The tightness of the packing is usually produced by the appli- 
 cation of some external force, but in the so-called forms of self- 
 acting packing the necessary pressure is supplied by the con- 
 fined fluid. This is shown in the following illustrations. 
 
 *See Mechani 
 
 Feb., 1884, p. J 
 
 Fig. 497- 
 Fig. 947 a and b, Cup packing for piston or stuffing box ; metal 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 217 
 
 packing, usually for pistons, but also used in stuffing boxes. 
 The fluid in all three cases enters behind the packing rings and 
 tightens the joint in proportion to the increased pressure. 
 
 In the class of self-acting packing may also be included the 
 various forms of liquid packing, some of which are given in 
 Fig. 948. The forms at a and b are practically plungers, while 
 
 in many cases an ordinary packing has its tightness increased 
 by a layer of water or oil upon the piston, as shown at c. 
 
 Another variety occurs when the connection between cylinder 
 and piston is made by means of a membrane or diaphragm, as 
 in Fig. 949. 
 
 Fig. 949. 
 
 These are among the oldest forms of transmission organs, 
 but are practically true pistons in principle and action. At a is 
 a single diaphragm, known as the monk's pump : i^ is the so- 
 called ' • bellows ' ' form ; ^ is a series of flexible metal diaphragms, 
 usually of steel, brass or copper, used for pressure gauges or 
 other similar purposes involviug but little movement. At d is 
 the so-called "bag" pump, in which the liquid does not come 
 in contact with either cylinder or piston, but is confined within 
 a flexible bag. 
 
 ?3"- 
 
 Guide Mechanism for Pressure Organs. 
 
 The combination of a pressure organ and its accompanying 
 
 guide mechanism forms a pressure transmission system. EJx- 
 
 FiG. 951. 
 
 amples of such systems are given in outline in Fig. 951. At a 
 is an arrangement for raising the load Q vertically. The 
 plungers b and d are of the same diameter ; the pressure on b 
 must be the same as Q, neglecting friction. The column of 
 water is the same diameter as the plungers, and the direction is 
 changed an angle of 120°. It is desirable that distinguishing 
 names should be given to the various arrangements. If we 
 compare these with the corresponding parts in tension organs, 
 Fig. 784 and Fig. 785 a, we may properly call such an angle 
 transmission a hydraulic pulley, or water pulley, but a still bet- 
 ter name is the "hydraulic-lever" or "water-lever," which will 
 be hereafter adopted. 
 
 At b is shown a free water-lever. The plungers b and d are 
 equal in diameter, the load O is supported on two columns of 
 water, hence, if friction is neglected, the force on each plunger 
 will be Yz Q, the angle of change of direction is 180°. 
 
 At ^ is a combination of case a with case b. The plungers 
 ^1, b^, b-i, are of the same diameter, and the load Q is supported 
 on these columns. These three cases correspond in principle 
 with the similar cases a b coi Fig. 784. Since the three plungers 
 bi, b.2, bg, of case c all exert the same force, they may also be 
 made to give the same result when made as shown at d, or if 
 the three plungers are combined in one, form e is obtained. 
 The latter form is well known in practice as the hydraulic 
 press. The principle involved in all these devices is the same 
 as appears in the various pulley systems of tension organs. 
 
 A comparison of Fig. 95 i a with e shows that the same prin- 
 ciple exists in both and case a may be considered as a water- 
 lever of equal arms and case ^ as a lever of unequal arms. 
 
 Fig. 950. 
 
 Another class of pistons is that in which a tight packing is 
 not attempted, these usually being used only for air. Fig. 950 a 
 shows a deep piston with grooves formed in it, the fluid endea- 
 voring to pass the piston in the opposite direction to the motion 
 of the latter, becomes entrapped in the grooves, and before it 
 can pass,^ the direction of motion is changed and this action 
 reversed.* At 6 is a piston with a brush packing, used for a 
 blowing cylinder at Sydenham. In this class of pistons we ma}^ 
 also include floats which rise and fall with the motion of the 
 liquid. Such floats are shown at .; and d, the former being open 
 and the latter closed. A solid block may also be used for this 
 purpose, if its weight is nearly counterbalanced by another 
 weight. 
 
 Details of piston and cylinder construction will be given in 
 Chapter XXVI. The corresponding machine elements to pis- 
 tons in tension organs will be found for ropes in Figs. S25-826, 
 and for chains in Figs. 831 to 834. The change of direction from 
 compression to tension dispenses with the necessity for a 
 cylinder. 
 
 * See Weisbach, Vol. III., Part 2, I 410. 
 
 The water-lever has been used in more or less complete de- 
 vices for balancing the weight of pump rods in deep mine 
 shafts. Fig. 952 shows Oeking's water counterbalance. f The 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 pump rod is carried on the two plungers d^ d.,. and its weight 
 counterbalanced b}' the weighted plunger and cylinder a~b. 
 
 In the Emery scales and testing machines water-levers of 
 unequal arms are used iu connection with metallic diaphragms. 
 
 
 Fig. 953. 
 
 Fig- 953 shows a combination of two hydraulic levers, each of 
 the form of Fig. 951 <?• The weight Q travels in a straight line, 
 being kept parallel by the four equal plungers b^b.,b^bi, and 
 crossed pipe connections. This coustruclion is similar to the 
 cord parallel motion of Fig. 7S4 d. 
 
 In all of the devices described tlie rigid body is guided by the 
 motion of the pressure-organ. It must be remembered that 
 motion is merely a relative term, and the rigid body may move 
 through the fluid. An example of the latter is the rudder of a 
 vessel, which acts in one plane ; or in the case of the Whitehead 
 torpedo several rudders are used, guiding the torpedo in any 
 direction. 
 
 I 312. 
 Reservoirs for Pressure Organs. 
 
 Reservoirs are used in connection with pressure organs in 
 order to enable a number of applications to be operated collec- 
 tively, and also to enable the pressure to be stored for subse- 
 quent service, and in this respect they correspond to the various 
 forms of winding drums used with tension organs, and shown 
 in Fig. 787. The following illustrations will show the use of 
 such reservoirs. 
 
 Fig- 954 shows a tank for use with petroleum distribution, as 
 
 Fig. 954. 
 
 used in the American oil fields, and more recently in the oil 
 district of Baku. The oil wells are at c,, a.^, a^, and the oil is 
 forced to the elevated reservoir at c by pumps. From the reser- 
 voir the oil flows to the point of shipment a, and the supply is 
 gauged by the fluctuations of level in the tank.* 
 
 The reservoirs used in connection with the water supply of 
 cities are similar in principle. Where the configuration of the 
 land demands it, the pipes are run in inverted siphons connect- 
 ing intermediate reservoirs. An illustration of this arrange- 
 ment is given iu Fig. 955, which shows the waterworks system 
 of Frankfnrtam-Main designed by Schmick. 
 
 in metres. The flow between the various reservoirs is controlled 
 by suitable valves. f 
 
 Small tanks are in very general use at railway stations ; and 
 the various ponds and mill dams used in connection with water- 
 wheels are other examples. In many cases the water ways are 
 large enough to serve as reservoirs also, as in the case of canals. 
 
 Natural reservoirs are found in the case of many mountain 
 lakes, the Swiss lakes affording many numerous instances.:}: 
 Such basins are also formed artificially by constructing dams 
 across narrow outlets, and so storing the water for use. Note- 
 worthy examples found in France, the basin at St. Etienne, 
 formed by damming the river Furens, beuig over 164 feet (50 
 metres) deep.^ 
 
 Water may also be stored iu accumulators at high pressures 
 from 20, 50, as high as 200 atmospheres, and can then be used 
 for operating hydraulic cranes, sluice gates, drawbridges, etc. 
 These accumulators may be considered as a form of releasing 
 ratchet mechanism (see ? 260). To this class of mechanical 
 action also belongs the system, used in the Black Forest, by 
 which the streams are temporarily dammed and then suddenly 
 released in order to float the logs down with the sudden rush of 
 the current. 
 
 In using high pressure water transmission it is sometimes 
 desirable to transform a portion to a lower pressure iu order to 
 operate a lower pressure mechanism, or by a reversal of the 
 same principle, to convert a lower to a higher pressure. This 
 can he done by means of the apparatus devised by the author, 
 and shown iu Fig. 956. j| 
 
 Fig. 956. 
 
 This is a form of hydraulic lever of unequal leverage, but 
 is different from those shown in Fig. 95 1- Referring to Fig- 
 956 a, the high pressure water is delivered at a, and connected 
 with the lower pressure water flj by means of the plungers b, (^j, 
 the latter being in one piece of two different diameters. The 
 difference in pressure, neglecting friction, will be inversely as 
 the areas of the two plungers, or if they are of circular section, 
 inversely as the squares of their diameters. In this case the 
 lower pressure then acts in the cylinder t upon the plunger d. 
 The action of this arrangement may be considered as if the 
 plungers b and bi were upon the same axis and rigidly con- 
 nected, and the leverage compounded in a manner similar to 
 that of the rope crane of Fig. 792(7; this comparison being 
 more clearly shown by referring to Fig. 956 b, This device may 
 also be used as a supporting hydraulic lever, similar to Fig. 951 e. 
 If a communication is made between the two different water 
 columns, as shown in Fig. 956 c, the pressure will be equalized. 
 This gives a differential hydraulic lever similar in principle to 
 the Chinese windlass of Fig. 790 a, or the Weston Diff'erential 
 Block of Fig. 796 e- 
 
 SeelV 
 
 and a tunnel of jo^A feet ir 
 rechanics, Nov., " ' 
 
 
 thrc 
 
 Fic. 955. 
 
 The highest spring is at «,, Vogelsberg, and the next at a.^, 
 Spessart. These both deliver into the reservoir r,, c^, at Aspen- 
 liainerkopf. The next reservoir is at ^3, Abtshecke, from which 
 the water flows through bi to the reservoir q and Tj, from which 
 the city is supplied. The elevations above sea level are given 
 
 * A syst 
 Black Sea 
 and the n 
 
 hied in detail in a memorial on the better 
 water, published at Munich in 1883 by the German Society of E 
 Architects. 
 
 g For further discussion of this subject the followin^? reft r< 
 consulted : Jaubert de Passa, Recherches sur les arrosages ->-' 
 
 gh the solid rock, 
 lization of 
 
 plici 
 
 , Pari: 
 
 n des ci 
 
 , Mer 
 
 ,r les c 
 Lult de ] 
 
 Tigati 
 
 n de I'ltalie 
 
 Buffon, Cours d'agriculture 
 Hydraulique agricoie, ap- 
 ntrionale. Paris. 1861-1862 ; 
 ■ -^ • e de 
 
 Baird-Smyth, Irrigation in Southern India, Londou, --^-,_„, 
 
 la conduite et de la distr. des eaux, Paris, 1865 ; Scott-Moncrieff, Irrigation in 
 Southern Europe, London, 1868; Linant de Bellefonds Bey, Memoire sur les 
 principau.>c travaux d'utilite publique en Eg\-pte etc., Paris, 1873; Krantz, 
 Etude sur les raurs de reservoirs, Paris, 1870 ; F. Kahn, TJeber die Thalsperre 
 der Gileppe bet Verviers, Civil ingenieur, 1870, p. i ; also an article by 
 Charles Grad in "la Nature," 1876, p. 55 ; also a brief article by the author 
 " Ueber das Wasser," Berlin, 1876. 
 II See Glaser's Anualen, 18S5, Vol. XVII., p. 234. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 219 
 
 The opposite extreme to a high pressure accumulator is found 
 in those pools or receptacles of water far below the natural sea 
 level, such as are found in mines, and in the polders or drainage 
 pools of Holland, Lombardy, and parts of Northern German}-. 
 
 Reservoirs are not confined to use with liquids. Examples of 
 Other fluids are found in the gasometers of gas works, in the 
 receivers for compressed air, so extensivelj' used in mining ami 
 tunneling, and in making the so-called pnetimalic foundations. 
 Smaller reservoirs are found in the air-chambers on pumping 
 machinery, and the like. 
 
 The sewage S3'Stem of Berlin, designed by vou Hobrect, con- 
 sists often drainage pits, with the water level below the natural 
 level, arranged on the so-called radial system. The sewage i-^ 
 pumped from these pits and delivered by means of pipes to 
 sewage farms at a distance from the city. 
 
 Negative receivers, so-called, may be used for air, as in the 
 case of the coining presses of the English mint, where a vacuum 
 chamber is used to receive the air already used for driving the 
 machines, and kept pumped out by steam power. The venti- 
 lating apparatus for mines also often contains such negative 
 reservoirs for air. 
 
 Reservoirs are also used for granular materials, such being 
 extensively used in connection with grain handling machiner}-. 
 
 A steam boiler may be considered as a physically supplied 
 reservoir, as well as a ph3'sical ratchet system (see | 260). A 
 combined physical and chemical reservoir is found in the elec- 
 trical accumulator, which may properly be called a current- 
 reservoir. A combined physically and mechanically operated 
 negative reservoir is found in the various forms of refrigerating 
 
 A modern application of pressure organs, and one which is 
 rapidly extending in use, is that of the distribution of power in 
 cities. Following the impulse given by the introduction of the 
 high pressure water system of Armstrong, the use of gas in 
 motive power engines by Otto followed, and many other methods 
 of meeting the problem have been applied. 
 
 In long distance transmissions of this sort, special reservoirs 
 are often used, in which force may be stored, so to speak, and 
 from thence distributed in a manner similar to the ring trans- 
 mission system for rope (see \ 301). In this method the pres- 
 sure organ after use is returned to the reservoir to be compressed 
 and used again, or it may be used as in the line transmission 
 and allowed to escape at the end of the line.* 
 
 The following cases are given as applications of pressure 
 organs in long distance transmission : 
 
 1. The London Hydraulic Power Company distributes 300 
 H. P. by means of water at a pressure of 46 atmospheres (675 
 pounds). A similar and earlier installation is in use at Hull. 
 
 2. The General Compressed Air Company distributes power 
 by means of air at a pressure of 3 atmospheres (45 pounds) in 
 Leeds and Birmingham. The system is an open line, and 1000 
 H. P. are used in Leeds, and 6000 H. P. in Birmingham.t In 
 Paris the Compagnie Parisienne de I'air comprime, procedes 
 Victor Popp, distributes power from three stations in quantities 
 varying from a few foot pounds up to 70 or 80 H. P., a total of 
 some 3000 H. P. The use of compressed air appears to be 
 destined to a widely extended use for this purpose. 
 
 3. The distribution of power in New York by means of steam 
 mains is extensive and well known. 
 
 4. The vacuum system is used also in Paris by the Societe 
 anonyme de distribution de force a domicile. This is an open 
 line transmission, operating in 1S85, about 200 H. P. 
 
 5. Transmission bj' highly superheated water has been used 
 in Washington, by the National Superheated Water Co., dis- 
 tributing heated water at pressures from 26 to 33 atmospheres 
 (400 to 600 pounds), the water being converted into steam at the 
 point of utilization. 
 
 6. The distribution of power by means of gas holders has 
 already been referred to, and the distribution by electric cur- 
 rents is rapidly being developed. 
 
 ? 313- 
 Motors for Pressure Organs. 
 
 The methods of applying pressure organs to the development 
 of motive power are even more varied as in the case of tension 
 organs. For this reason a general view of the subject will be 
 taken in order to obtain a classification which will simplify the 
 discussion. The main distinctions are those of the character of 
 the motion of the mechanism, and of the method of applying 
 the pressure organ to the motor. 
 
 The great difference in the character of the motion of the 
 
 mechanism lies in the fact that it may be either continuous or 
 intermittent, so that the motor may be either : 
 
 A running mechanism, or 
 
 A ratchet mechanism (compare \ 260). The ratchet pawls for 
 pressure organs are the various forms of valves (see Chapter 
 XXVI). 
 
 The various forms may also be classified according to the fol- 
 lowing important distinctions based on the method of driving. 
 
 The pressure organ may drive, or 
 
 It may be driven, or 
 
 The impelling mechanism may itself be propelled. 
 
 There is also a third distinction to be made, namely, whether 
 the pressure organ acts merely by its weight, or whether it acts 
 by its living force of impact. This last distinction cannot be 
 sharply observed in practice, but is especially to be considered 
 in discussing the theory of action of the various machines. 
 
 In the following pages the various applications will be shown 
 in a manner similar to that employed in I 262 for tension organs, 
 following the system of classification outlined above, and be- 
 ginning with running mechanism as the simpler of the two 
 great divisions. 
 
 A. RUNNIXG MECHANISM FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 \. 314- 
 
 Running Mechanism in which the Pressure Organ 
 Drives by its Weight. 
 
 With a few unimportant exceptions the motors of this class 
 are operated by liquids, which at moderate velocities practically 
 follow the laws of gravity. 
 
 In Fig. 957, a is an undershot -water-wheel, and 6 is a half- 
 
 FiG 957 
 
 breast water The water is guided m a carved channel and the 
 buckets are radial, or nearly so. The wheel is so placed that 
 the buckets pass with the least practicable amount of clearance 
 over the curved channel. At <: is shown a high -breast wheel, 
 and at d an overshot wheel (compare § 47)- In these latter 
 wheels the buckets are so shaped that they retain the water in 
 the circular path, being closed at the sides also, while on 
 account of the moderate pressure they are left open above. At 
 e is shown the side-fed wheel of Zuppinger. 
 
 Fig. 958, a is an endless ^ ,_ 
 
 chain of buckets, and b a 
 similar arrangement, using 
 disks running with slight 
 clearance in a vertical tube. 
 
 In the wheels shown in 
 Fig- 957 the water acts on 
 the wheel much in the same 
 manner as a rack acts when 
 driving a pinion, and in this 
 sense a water wheel may be 
 considered as a gear wheel. 
 
 When the water acts only 
 by gravity these construc- 
 tions are only practical when 
 the wheel can be made 
 larger in diameter than the 
 fall of water, and w'here 
 small diameters must be used the arrangements of Fig. 958 are 
 available. Very small wheels acting under high pressures may 
 be employed by making use of the so-called " chamber wheel 
 work," X of which some examples are here given. 
 
 ^^t 
 
 * See a paper by the author in Glaser's Annalen . 1005, v 01. ^ 
 
 t See Luptoii and Sturgeon, Compressed Air 7/s. Hydraulic P 
 
 1886: Sturgeon, Compressed Air Power Schemes, London, 
 
 Birmingham Compressed Air Company, Birmingham, 1886. 
 
 XVII., p. : 
 
 ^-V 
 
 Fig. 959 « is the Pappenheim chamber wheel train. In this 
 the tooth contact is continuous, the teeth being so formed that 
 the continuous contact of the teeth at the pitch circle prevents 
 
220 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the water from passing, while the points and sides of the teeth 
 make a close contact with the walls of the chamber. The 
 downward pressure of the water enters into the spaces between 
 the teeth and drives both wheels. The axes of the wheels are 
 also coupled by a pair of spur gear wheels outside the case, 
 thus insuring the smooth running of the inner wheels. This is 
 the oldest form of chamber train mechanism known, and can 
 also be used as a pump, operating equally well in either direc- 
 tion. Fig. 959 b is Payton's Water Meter, with evolute teeth. 
 The flow is intermittent, but one contact begins before the 
 action of the previous one ceases. 
 
 Fio- 959 ^ is Eve's chamber gear train. The ratio of teeth is 
 I to 3, and the flow is also intermittent. The theoretical volume 
 of delivery for all forms of chamber gear trains, whether con- 
 tinuous or intermittent in deliver}-, is practically equal to the 
 volume described by the cross section of a tooth of one of the 
 two wheels for each revolution. 
 
 Fig. 959 fl? is Behren's chamber train. In this case each wheel 
 has but one tooth, as is also the case with Repsold's train (de- 
 scribed herea:fter), and the gears belong to the class of disc 
 wheels or so-called " shield gears " (see ^211). This arrange- 
 ment possesses the great advantage of offering an extended sur- 
 face of contact at the place between the two wheels where, in 
 the previous forms, there is but a line contact. This permits a 
 sufficient degree of tightness to be obtained without requiring 
 the parts to press against each other. Behren's chamber gear 
 makes an excellent water motor if the impurities of the water 
 are not sufficient to injure the working parts. 
 
 The flow of water through chamber gear trains is not uni- 
 form, and the inequality of delivery increases as the number of 
 teeth in the wheels is diminished, hence they should be driven 
 only at moderate velocities when used as motors, in order to 
 avoid the shocks due to the impact of the water. 
 
 Fig. 960. 
 
 Fig. 960 a is a current wheel, or common paddle wheel. The 
 paddles are straight, and either radial, or slightly inclined 
 toward the current, as in the illustration. The working contact 
 in this case is of a very low order. 
 
 Fig. 960 b is Poncelet's wheel. The buckets run in a grooved 
 channel, and are so curved that the water drives upwards and 
 then falls downwards, thus giving a much higher order of con- 
 tact. At c is shown an externally driven tangent wheel. The 
 buckets are similar to the Poncelet wheel, but with a sharper 
 curve inward. The discharge of the water is inwards, its living 
 force being expended. At d is an internally driven tangent 
 wheel, similar to the preceding, but with outward discharge. 
 The form shown at e is the so-called Hurdy-Gurdy wheel. The 
 water is delivered through curved spouts, and this form is prac- 
 tically an externally driven tangent wheel of larger diameter 
 and smaller number of buckets. This wheel, from a crude 
 makeshift, has become one of the most efficient of motors * 
 
 Wheels with inclined delivery as made in the forms shown in 
 
 Fig. 961. 
 Fig. 961. At a is shown a crude form, used 01 
 
 1 rapid mountain 
 
 * This is the Pelton Water Wheel, built in sizes as gr 
 Mining and Scientific Press, 1884, p. 246, and 1885, p. 21. 
 in Zurich, by Escher, Wyss & Co., with a casing, a 
 
 eat as 300 H, p. See 
 This wheel is built 
 nd used for driving 
 
 streams as a simple expedient, but of low efficiency ; b is the 
 Borda turbine, consisting of a series of spiral buckets in a bar- 
 rel shaped vessel ; c is tne so-called Danaide, the spiral buckets 
 being in a conical vessel, this form being mostly used in France.f 
 
 In the wheels which have been shown in the preceding illus- 
 trations from Fig. 958, the living force of the water acts by 
 direct impact through a single delivery pipe. 
 
 The following forms differ from the preceding, in that the 
 water acts simultaneously through a number of passages around 
 the entire circumference of the wheel. This form gives the so- 
 called hydraulic reaction in each of the inclosed channels, and 
 hence wheels of this class are commonly called reaction wheels, 
 or reaction turbines.| 
 
 Fig. 962. 
 
 Fig. 962 a: is Segner's wheel, the water entering the vertical 
 axis and discharging through the curved arms ; b is the screw- 
 turbine, entirely filled with water ; c is Girard's current turbine, 
 with horizontal axis, and only partially submerged ; fi^is Cadiat's 
 turbine, with central delivery, and e is Thomson's turbine with 
 circumferential delivery and horizontal axis, the discharge being 
 about axis at both sides. In all five of these examples the 
 column of water is received as a whole, and enters the wheel 
 undivided until it enters the wheel ; in the following forms the 
 flow is divided into a number of separate streams. 
 
 In driving running mechanism by impact, fluid pressure 
 organs, both liquid and gaseous, may be used, as will be seen 
 from the following examples. 
 
 Fig. 963. 
 
 Ifig- 963 « is the Fourneyron turbine, acting with central 
 delivery ; the guide vanes are fixed and the discharge of the 
 water is at the circumference of the wheel ; ^ is a modification 
 of the Fourneyron turbine, the water being delivered upwards 
 from below, and sometimes called Nagel's turbine ; c is the 
 Jonval or Henschel turbine, the guide vanes c being above the 
 wheel, which is entirely filled by the water column ; af is Fran- 
 cis' turbine, with circumferential delivery through the guide 
 vanes c* \ e is the Schiele turbine, a double wheel with circum- 
 ferential delivery and axially directed discharge. In the latter 
 three forms a draft tube may be used below the wheel, to utilize 
 that portion of the fall, as indicated in forms c and d. 
 
 Fig. 964. 
 
 For gaseous pressure organs, of which wind is the principal 
 example, some forms are here given. Fig. 964 a is the German 
 windmill, with screw-shaped vanes ; b is the Greek and Anato- 
 lian windmill, with cup-shaped vanes. Both forms are similar 
 in action to the above described pressure wheels. At c is shown 
 the so-called Polish windmill, with stationary guide vanes ; || 
 rf is Halladay's windmill, made with many small vanes, which 
 place themselves more and more nearly parallel with the axis 
 as the force of the wind increases, the rudder c^ keeping the 
 wheel to the direction of the wind. The extreme position of the 
 vanes is shown at e- Anemometers and steam turbines are 
 examples of wheels in which other pressure organs than wind 
 are used. 
 
 tSee 
 
 eisbach-Hei 
 
 1, Mechanics 
 
 leering, Part II., Section 4, 
 
 s use of the term reaction is hardlv desirable for this construction, 
 the proposed name of "action turbine," and the name "pressure 
 ?s " is to be preferred. 
 
 s form is well made by J. M. Voith, of Heidenheim, WUrtemberg. 
 ;ueil des Machines avantageuses, Vol. I., No. 31, 1699, also from thence 
 in Henning's Sammlungvon Machinen und Instrumenten, Niirn- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Running Mechanism in which the Pressure Organ is 
 Driven against the Action of Gravity. 
 Running mechanism for the purpose of elevating liquids, and 
 especially for lifting water, are of very early origin, and the 
 various machines for this purpose form the very oldest of 
 machine inventions. 
 
 there is no necessity for distinguishing in classification between 
 them as pumps for liquids or for gaseous fluids. Fig. 967 c is 
 
 -—r-^ —-l 
 
 Fig. 965- 
 
 Fig. 965 a is a bucket wheel, the vessels on the circumference 
 lifting the water ; this is driven by the power of men or animals, 
 or in many instances by a current wheel (as in Fig. 960 «).* At 
 b is the Tympanon of Archimedes, used down to modern times, 
 the sections deliver the water through openings into the axis; 
 c is a paddle wheel, only adapted to raise the water a small 
 height, much used in the polders of Germany, Holland and 
 Italy. The paddles are made either straight, or curved, or 
 sometimes slightly crooked at the end.f At d is the Archime- 
 dian screw, which, when placed at an angle as shown, is well 
 adapted to elevate water. The Archiniedian screw is exten- 
 sively used in all positions for the granular and pulverized 
 materials, in which cases the outer cylinder is omitted and a 
 stationary channel substituted, as shown at c, in Fig. 965 e, and 
 if the transportation of material is in a vertical direction the 
 screw is entirely surrounded by a stationary tube. A still later 
 form is made with a wire spiral, by Kreiss of Hamburg. 
 
 
 * Large wheels of this sort have 1 
 
 ■es its water supply fror 
 J A rccenc installation ot such p£ 
 the Mahraudieh Canal, in Egypt. 
 driven by a separate steam engine 
 
 canal. The 
 Engineer, i8»7, p. 57. 
 
 J Such pumps, made by Klein, Schanzlin & Becker, at Frankenthal, deli- 
 ver water from 2 to 30 feet, the revolutions being from 15 to 22 per minute, 
 and diameters from ao to 70 inches. 
 
 ffl^ rf^ 
 
 ■"^::^ 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fabry's ventilating machine for mine ventilation, consisting of 
 a double-toothed combination chamber train, with unequal 
 duration of contact. Root has also used the form shown at d, 
 which has unequal contact duration, and which has since been 
 made by Greindl as a pump.^ 
 
 Fig 966 
 
 Fig. 966 a is the spiral pump, in which the screw of Archi- 
 medes is replaced by a channel formed in a plane spiral. In 
 this form the inclosed air becomes compressed by the speed of 
 revolution of the mass, and the water can be forced quite a con- 
 siderable height.! Fig. 966 6 is a conical spiral pump called 
 after its inventor, Cagniard Latour, a Cagniardelle. The Cag- 
 niardelle is usually placed entirely in a trough, but the illustra- 
 tion shows how the end of the spiral may be modified so as to 
 require no enlargement of the delivery channel. The diameter 
 of the cone is adapted to the height to which the water is to be 
 lifted. The Cagniardelle may also be used as a blower, the in- 
 closed water driving the entrapped air before it. 
 
 The chain and bucket devices already shown in Fig. 958 as 
 motors are also well adapted to drive the pressure organ, and 
 are in practical use in numerous modifications. Fig. 958 a is 
 extensively used in dredging machinery, grain elevators and 
 the like, and Fig. 958 b is much used for lifting water. 
 
 The various forms of chamber gear trains already described, 
 give by inversion corresponding forms of driving mechanism, 
 some examples of which are here given. 
 
 Fig. 967 a is Repsold's pump ; each wheel has one tooth, the 
 profiles being formed as described in \ 207 ; b is Root's blower, 
 the wheels having two teeth each, and the action being the 
 same as the Pappenheini machine. Fig. 959 «. This device has 
 been very extensively used as a blowing machine. Since the 
 action of these machines in drawing air against pressure is simi- 
 lar to that of lifting water agaiqst the resistance of gravity, 
 
 The town of Hamath, of 40,000 inhabi- 
 
 Idle wheels has been made at Atfeh, on 
 Eight wheels 32,8 feet diameter, each 
 fting water from the Nile 8>^ feet to the 
 15,000,000 cubic feet in 24 hours. See 
 
 Fig. 968. 
 
 Greindl also makes the form shown in Fig. 968 a, with gears 
 of one and two teeth, and rightly claims it to possess the advan- 
 tage of a greater freedom from leakage. The form shown at b 
 has been used by Evrard as a blower, but it does not differ in 
 principle from a. Baker's blower, shown at c, is a triple cham- 
 ber train, also used by Noel as a pump. 
 
 It has already been stated that Behren's pump. Fig. 959 d, has 
 also been used as a steam engine. As long ago as 1867 a steam 
 fire engine has been constructed by putting two of these 
 machines on the same axis, one being driven by steam, the other 
 forcing the water. 
 
 Chamber gear trains may also be used to be worked in con- 
 nection Fig 969 shows an arrangement in which the chamber 
 
 Fig. 969. 
 
 train A delivers water to a distant one B, driving the latter and 
 receiving the discharge water from B through a return pipe to 
 be used again. The combination forms a transmission system 
 of the second order (see ^ 26), and is similar to a belt or chain 
 transmission. The loss in efficiency in this device is not an un- 
 important consideration. 
 
 An important class of machines consists of those made with 
 tension organs for transporting grantdar materials. For this 
 purpose belts, chains, etc., are used, and when the transmission 
 is horizontal, or nearly so, grain is successfully transported on 
 wide belts.ll Another application is that of Marolles, using an 
 iron belt, 40 in. wide, 0.06 in. thick, for transporting mud. 
 Twelve such machines were used on the Panama Canal work, 
 the distance being 200 feet, and the speed of the band 12 to 40 
 feet, according to the nature of the material. Similar apparatus 
 at the Suez Canal handled material at a cost of 7.6 cents per 
 cubic yard. 
 
 Running Mechanism in which the Pressure Organ is 
 Driven by Transfer of Living Force.- 
 
 The tuethod of driving pressure organs by a transfer of living 
 force is one which admits of numerous applications, as the fol- 
 lowing examples show. 
 
 Fig. 970 fl is a centrifugal pump for moving liquids. The 
 driving mechanism consists of the curved blades, which in 
 
 g The firm of Klei: 
 
 inzlin & Becker, at Frankenthal, make a line of 
 
 ' cubic feet per minute, 
 
 .lo 10 ii.o uis. uiaraeter. These are driven 
 
 1, acids, paper pulp, syrup, etc., as well as 
 
 II An excellent transmission is in use at Cologne. See also Trans. Am. Soc. 
 Mech. Engrs., Vol. VI., 1884-S5, p. 400. At the Duluth elevator a rubber belt 
 50 inches wide, running 600 to 800 feet per minute, carries grain from 600 to 
 900 feet horizontally. A ^6" belt has carried 14,000 bushels per hour. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 many instances are made in one piece -with the wheel itself, this 
 adding to the efficieuc}-. These pumps have been most suc- 
 cessfull}' made by Gwyune, Schiele, Neut and Duniont among 
 
 Fig 970 
 
 others.* Centrifugal pumps have been successfully used as 
 dredging machines for lifting wet sand, gravel and mud, in- 
 stances among others being the North Sea Canal at Amsterdam, 
 and the harbor at Oakland, California. 
 
 Fig. 970 1^ is the well known fan blower used everywhere for 
 producing a blast of air, and acting by centrifugal force. When 
 used <is exhaust fan this is widely used in connection with 
 suitable exhaust pipes for removing foul air, sawdust, and other 
 impurities in workshops, as well as for the ventilation of mines.! 
 At c is shown a form of spiral ventilator, known as Steib's ven- 
 tilator; it is similar to some of the preceding forms, but is of 
 limited application, and is better adapted for lifting water, a 
 service to which it has been applied in the polders of Holland. 
 At a' is a centrifugal separator, a device of numerous applica- 
 tions for separating materials of different specific gravity by 
 centrifugal force. A notable example of this machine is the 
 centrifugal separator for removing cream from milk. 
 
 Another variety of machines for driving pressure organs by a 
 transfer of living force, is that in which another pressure organ, 
 either liquid or gaseous, is used instead of a wheel as the im- 
 pelling mechanism. To this class belong the various jet devices, 
 injectors, etc. 
 
 t^gj the regulation i 
 
 Fig. 97 
 
 Fig. 971 a is Gififard's injector in the improved and simplified 
 form made by the Delaware Steam Appliance Co. In this case 
 steam is used to drive a jet of water into a vessel already con- 
 taining water under pressure. The jet of steam rushing through 
 the nozzle b,^ draws the water in by the suction tube b.^, and both 
 pass through the mixing tube 63, and are discharged through 
 the outlet tube b^ ; the outflow at b^ provides for the relief of 
 the discharge at starting, before the jet action is fully estab- 
 lished. The regulation of the flow of steam is effected by a 
 steam valve attached above 6,. At 1^ is Gresham's automatic 
 injector, which is so made that should any interruption occur 
 in the supply of water at b.,, the suction action is automatically 
 started, and the entering column of water is lifted again. This 
 is done by the introduction of a movable nozzle b^ between b^ 
 and b^, which adjusts its position with regard to b^ according to 
 the variations in pressure above and below. 
 
 Fig. 972 is Friedmann's jet pump. The mixing tube b^ is 
 divided into a number of sections, which permits a very free 
 entrance to the water, and gives an excellent action ; b is 
 Nagel's jet pump, used for lifting water from foundations by 
 means of another jet of water. The entrance jet is at b-^, the 
 
 Fig. 972. 
 
 suction tube at b.^, and the mixing tube a 
 effected by a valve at the end of b^. 
 
 Steam jets are also used to produce a blast of air, or com- 
 pressed air may be used for the same purpose, as can also water 
 uuder pressure. A reversal of the last mentioned arrangement 
 occurs in Bunsen's air pump, in which a jet of water is used to 
 produce a vacuum. Recent devices for utilizing jet action are 
 numerous. Among others, a jet of air has been used to feed 
 petroleum into furnaces as fuel. Dr. W. Siemens proposed to 
 carry the petroleum in the hold of a vessel in bulk, and substi- 
 tute sea water, as it was consumed, in order to maintain the 
 ballasting of the ship undisturbed. Granular materials have 
 been handled by means of jet apparatus, usually impelled by 
 compressed air, sometimes by water jets. 
 
 An especial feature of jet pumps, and one which should not 
 be overlooked, is that they act either by guiding the pressure 
 organ stream, or that the driving action of the pressure organ 
 stream itself produces a guiding action, and that the existence 
 either of a reservoir or some external means 
 XJ^ f=^ of driving must be presupposed The use of a 
 pressure organ in motion for driving mechan- 
 ism, is in this respect similar to the so-called 
 inductive action of an electric current. 
 
 An example of pure guiding action is 
 found in the "Geyser Pump" of Dr. W. 
 Siemens, Fig. 973. The water is to be raised 
 from a depth //, and the tube b is prolonged 
 downward to a depth //, below the sump ^S. 
 The prolonged tube 6, is open at the lower 
 _____ end, and in the bottom opening 7" an air tube 
 ///'M/U c IS introduced, and air is admitted at a pres- 
 sure slightly under that of a column of water 
 of height equal to H^. The air mingles with 
 the water and forms a mixture in a-^ which is 
 lighter than water, and the air pressure is then 
 capable of forcing the light mixture up to the 
 surface. The lifting action is assisted by the 
 expansion of the ascending air. Siemens 
 found that it was possible to produce this 
 action when //"was equal to H^, that is, the 
 specific gravity of the mixture of air and 
 water =^ y,. 
 
 I 31S. 
 
 Fig. 973- 
 
 The third division, in which the motor itself is propelled in 
 the liquid pressure organ, contains fewer varieties than the pre- 
 ceding ones but is of the greatest importance since to it belongs 
 the entire subject of marine propulsion. 
 
 it installation of magnitude is that of five centrifugal pumps built 
 
 Thew _ 
 
 the lift varies from i to 12 feet, 
 
 t Fans for these purposes a 
 
 1 great variety by J. B. Sturtevant. 
 
 Fig. 974 « is the so-called " flying bridge," the current flow- 
 ing in the direction of the arrow, causing the boats to swing 
 across the stream, describing an arc about the anchor to which 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 223 
 
 they are held by a chain ; b, is a sail-boat, the sail being the 
 driving organ transferring to the boat a portion of the living 
 force of the current of wind. At r, is a steamboat with side pad- 
 dle-wheels, and d, a stern-wheel boat ; ^, is a screw propeller. 
 A screw driven by a steam engine pressing the water backward 
 and the reaction of the water impelling the boat. At/, is a 
 so-called jet propeller, the reaction being produced by jets of 
 water forced through tubes at the side of the boat, the water 
 being driven by centrifugal pumps.* At_^, is shown a current 
 wheel motor. The side paddle wheels are caused to revolve by 
 the action of the current, and by connection with a cable or 
 chain gearing (See Figs. 787 and 794) the boat is propelled up 
 the stream. 
 
 Direct acting reaction jets have been used for torpedo boats, 
 using carbonic acid gas, but this method has been superseded 
 by twin screw propellers driven by compressed air. Rockets 
 and rocket shells are examples of direct acting pressure organs. 
 
 B. RATCHET MECHANISM FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 Fluid Ruxxixg Ratchet Tr.\ins. 
 
 The pawls in a fluid ratchet train are the valves. They may 
 be divided into two great classes, t similar to those existing in 
 ratchets of rigid materials, viz. 
 
 Running Ratchets, or Lift Valves, and 
 
 Stationary Ratchets, or Slide Valves. 
 
 In the first class we have flap valves, also conical and spheri- 
 cal valves, and in the second, the various lorms of cocks, cylin- 
 drical and disc valves and flat slide valves. In both kinds of 
 valves there exists an analogy to toothed and to friction rat- 
 chet gearing, since by use of contracted openings the effect of 
 friction is produced, and with full openings it is obviated. 
 This gives a division which does not exist in the case of friction 
 and toothed ratchet gearing. 
 
 Viewed according to the preceding classification, piston- 
 pumps, and piston machines are properly ratchet trains.j 
 This idea does not seem to offer any practical difficulties, since it 
 can be made to include all the numerous variations without crea- 
 ting more confusion than the former methods of classification. 
 It is not practicable to distinguish between the devices acting 
 by gravity and those acting by transfer of living force, since 
 both are frequently combined. 
 
 The oldest devices are those using air, and the oldest piston 
 is the membrane piston, (Fig. 949) in the form of a bag of skin 
 used as a bellows. In this primitive, device the earliest valve 
 was the human thumb, and in the larger bellows the heel of 
 the operator, these being followed at a later date by valves of 
 leather. I The working part of the bag was next strengthened 
 by a plate, (See Fig. 949 ff.) and developed into the common 
 bellows, next followed the disc piston, a very early improve- 
 ment || and later the plunger, from which the numerous modern 
 forms have grown. The following examples will illustrate. 
 
 Fig. 975- 
 
 Fig. 975 a, is the ^common lift and suction pump, a ratchet 
 train similar to Fig. 749 ; a, is the pressure organ stream (cor- 
 responding to the ratchet wheel a) b.,_, the holding pawl in the 
 form of a valve, c.^, is the receiver or cylinder for the water and 
 piston, ^1, is a pawl-carrier in the form of the piston, b^, the 
 other pawl, or lift valve. The water here overflows at the top 
 
 * Used by Von Seydell in the Albert in 1S56 ; by Ruthven in the Water- 
 witch, 1866, and recently in torpedo boats by Thoruevcrofl. 
 
 t See the author's Theoretical Kinematics, p. 459, et seq. 
 
 JThis treatment of the subject was first published by the author in Ber- 
 liner Verhandlungen, in 1874, p. 228 et seq., but had previously been used in 
 his lectures since 1866. 
 
 I Contrary to Wilkinson and Ewbank, the bellows shown in the Eg^'ptian 
 wall paintings have not flap valves, but the inlet opening is closed by the 
 heel of the workman, and the bellows used to-day in India use the heel or 
 thumb of the operator as an inlet valve. 
 
 II See Belidor, Arch hydraulique, Paris 1739, II., p. 62. 
 
 of the cylinder, and if it is to be lifted to a greater height the 
 cylinder may be prolonged upward and the rod proportionately 
 lengthened. If the rod is to be kept short, the form shown at 
 b, is used. The top of the cylinder is closed and the rod 
 brought out through a stuffing box, and the discharge tube 
 only is prolonged. At c, is the so-called force pump with a 
 disc piston, and at d, the same form with plunger. In these 
 the discharge valve is in a separate chest. The water column a, 
 is divided into two divisions (7, and a.^, the lower being impelled 
 in the up-stroke, and the latter on the down-stroke of the pis- 
 ton. A blow or shock is produced at each stoppage of the 
 motion of the water column and to reduce this action the speed 
 of flow must be kept down, and also the shock cushioned by 
 means of air vessels. At d, air vessels are shown both on the 
 suction and force pipes. 
 
 The preceding pumps are all single acting, discharging one 
 cylinder of water for each complete double stroke of the piston. 
 By cylinder of water is here meant the product of the piston 
 area by the length of stroke. ^j The space between valves and 
 piston is not included, this being merely clearance or water space. 
 
 The piston may be so constructed that it remains stationar}' 
 and the cylinder slides upon it, this forming an inversion of the 
 common form and possessing many applications. 
 
 Fig. 976 « is Muschenbrceck's pump (1762J for moderate lifts, 
 b, is Donnadieu's pump for deep wells, especially adapted for 
 
 
 i_ 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 ' 
 
 Ji 
 
 ? 
 
 
 fcj 
 
 — 
 
 1 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 y 
 
 J 
 
 1 ^-y 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 Fig. 976- 
 
 artesian wells.** This latter form possesses the peculiaritj- that 
 cylinder and discharge pipe move, and the piston is stationary 
 while action is not changed. (See Fig. 749 ) At r, is Althaus 
 so-called telescope pump, which does not differ from Fig. 975 a, 
 except that the piston is longer and is operated by two side 
 rods instead of a .single central one.tt The form at d, is a mod- 
 ification of c, with external packing. 
 
 In the pumps shown in Fig. 975 a. b, and Fig. 976 «, the pis- 
 ton rod plunges into the water on the downward stroke and 
 hence acts as a piston, lifting water by its displacement. On 
 the upward stroke the water flows into the space again, 
 and so the volume of deliver3ns not altered but a slight portion 
 of the delivery takes place on the down stroke. This action 
 can be utilized, however, as was very early done in mine 
 pumps, by increasing the diameter of the rod, or forming it in- 
 to a plunger so as to cause the delivery to be divided equally 
 between the two parts of the stroke. This form may be called 
 a double delivery pump, or briefly a double pump, since it is 
 practically two pumps, using the same set of .valves. Some 
 examples follow. 
 
 Fig. 977 a, the plunger Cj, is connected to the piston c,, the 
 latter being twice the diameter of the former, this being the so- 
 called "differential " pump. In b, two plungers are used, both 
 valves being in separate chests jj At r, two telescopic pistons 
 are used, this being by Rittinger, and well adapted for a mine 
 pump. The form shown at d, has an auxiliary piston and cyl- 
 inder parallel to the main cylinder, (designed by Trevethick in 
 iSoa.^i? 
 
 at 27 to 40 strokes per n 
 
 of the theoretical capacity (Konig, Pumps, Jena, 1869). In very large pumps 
 the momentum of the water shows an increase over the theoretical capac- 
 ity; the pump in the Beryberg mine, i metre diameter giving 4 per cent, 
 excess. See Portfenille John Cocquerill. 
 
 **See Poillon, Traitc th. et prat, des pompes. Paris, 1885, Plate 27. 
 
 ttSee the design of the Spaniards, Barufet, Viciauain & Poillon, Plates 33 
 and 34, and p. 193. 
 
 11 See Poillon, Plate 7, Saigun Waterworks. 
 
 Msee Ewbank's Hydraulics, New York, 1870, p 280. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 977. 
 
 By making the suction valve also a moving piston, both the 
 
 water columns may be kept in motion for both movements of 
 
 the rod. This is a double acting ratchet mechanism (Fig. 750,) 
 
 and hence also a double acting pump. 
 
 By combining two complete fluid ratchet trains in such a 
 manner that they have a common cylinder and piston, a form 
 of pump is obtained which gives two full discharges for each 
 cycle, and which may hence properly be called a double acting 
 pump. 
 
 Fig. 981 « is a double-acting pump with disk piston, and Fig. 
 981 b, the same form with a plunger. In both cases the suction 
 pipe is at IV, and the discbarge pipe at I. In double-acting 
 pumps it is usually not convenient to put a valve in the piston ; 
 this is, however, done in Fig. 981 c, in which we see two single- 
 acting pumps combined in one. 
 
 In Fig. 982 a, is shown Stone's Pump, J which is much used 
 
 _ is a double acting pump with two opposing 
 valved pistons, described by Fourneyron, but much older ; this 
 corresponds to the ratchet work of Fig. 750 a. 
 
 The pumps shown in Fig. 978 b, ^nd c, are similar, the first 
 by Stolz, the second by Amos & Smyth.* 
 
 Fig. 979- 
 
 Fig- 979 ^^ is Vose's pump, in which the two pistons are 
 placed parallel to each other. This corresponds to the I^aga- 
 rousse ratchet, Fig. 750 b. Similar double acting pumps may 
 : be made with solid pistons, if it were 
 
 ' desirable ; the form of Fig. 979 b, de- 
 
 signed by the author, being an ex- 
 ample, and others might readily be 
 devised. t 
 
 Fig. 9791:, is Downton's pump. The 
 hree pistons Cj, c^, c^, keep the water 
 i in constant flow, which is further 
 I assisted by the air chamber. The foot 
 valve b^, may be omitted if desired. 
 The annexed sketch of a pump by 
 Lippold, (See Bach. Fire Engines, 
 Stuttgart, 1883, p. 41,) is not double 
 acting but contains practically one 
 piston split in two, and equivalent to 
 one of half the area and same stroke, 
 or two of the same area and half 
 stroke. This is also the case with 
 
 Fig. 980. 
 Franklin's Double Pump, (See Konig, p. 55). 
 
 for ships, as is also Downton's Pump. In this case there are 
 four pistons, operating in two cylinders, the latter being placed 
 one below the other on the same axis. The pistons c^ and c^ are 
 connected by one rod and connected by the same crank k 1.3, 
 and the other two pistons are, in like manner, connected and 
 operated by the crank k 2.4, which is set opposite the other 
 crank. The action may be more readily understood by examin- 
 ing Fig. 982 b, which is similar to the preceding one, if we sup- 
 pose the pistons c^ and q to be held stationary and the other 
 pair (fj, ^3 driven by a single crank of double the length of arm 
 of those shown. This will obviously not alter the volume of 
 delivery, and it will be evident that the lower pump is really a 
 double-acting force pump and the upper one a single-acting lift 
 pump, hence each revolution of the cranks will deliver three 
 cylinders of water, two on the up stroke and one on the down 
 stroke. In Stone's pump the pistons c^ and c^ are so disposed 
 that for each half revolution | cylinders of water are discharged, 
 and in other respects the pump is a double-ratchet tram. Fig. 
 982 c is Audemar's Pump^ In this form two double pumps 
 similar to Vose's Pump (Fig. 979 a) are combined to make a 
 double-acting pump. ? 
 
 • See Theoretical Kinematics, p. 462. 
 
 t See Poillon, Plate 29. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 225 
 
 I'ig- 983 is Norton's so-called V shaped pump. In this device 
 the pistons c^ and c^ form a single stationary piece, and the cyl- 
 inder and valves b-^ and b^ '" 
 
 will 
 
 (o) 
 
 part, 
 readily be seen how easily 
 the lift pump may be made 
 double-acting. 
 
 A double-acting lift pump 
 as used for a steam engine 
 air pump, by Watt, is shown 
 in Fig. 9S.4. This is practi- 
 cally a combination of two 
 different pumps. It has three 
 valves, the foot valve b.^, pis- 
 ton valve 61 and upper valve 
 by On the downward stroke 
 the mixed air, water and va- 
 por passes through the piston 
 from the lower to the upper 
 part of the cylinder, aud on 
 the up stroke this is dis- 
 charged through b^ and a 
 fresh cylinder full clrawn ir^ 
 through b.^. This pump is 
 double acting, since the pic- 
 ton valve acts both in the up 
 and down stroke. This works 
 the same whether pumping 
 liquid or gaseous fluids, the 
 action being the same as if 
 two valves only were used. 
 The upper valve is required 
 for other reasons, i. e. to con- 
 trol the discharge, as for 
 boiler feeding, etc. 
 
 The preceding examples will serve to illustrate the applica- 
 tion of fluid ratchet trains with running ratchets. It is impor- 
 tant in all cases, and especially with the higher velocities, that 
 provision should be made to have the valves close without 
 shock, or in other words, that the engagement of the pawls 
 should be quiet. This problem has already appeared in some 
 forms of ratchet mechanism (see \ 240) and here off"ers still 
 greater difficulties, especially when heavy moving masse; are to 
 be controlled. The question is daily being considered in prac- 
 tical problems of construction * and a great variety of valves 
 has been designed. The present indications appear to be lead- 
 ing toward the use of valves operated mechanically by the 
 pump, instead of those operated by the fluid itself, but a final 
 solution of this problem has not yet been reached. 
 
 I 320. 
 Fluid Ratchet Trains with Stationary Ratchets. 
 As already shown in ? 255, it is necessary, in ratchet trains 
 with locking teeth, to effect the engagement and disengagement 
 of the pawls by some additional mechanism. This is also the 
 case in those fluid ratchet trains which used stationary pawls, 
 i. e., sliding valves. An example is found in the case of the 
 sim pie single-acting air pump used in physical laboratories, which 
 since its invention by Otto von Gerike f has been made with 
 stationary pawls, and is shown iu a crude form in Fig. 985. 
 The "receiver" d' , 
 and its pipe connec- 
 tion forms 11 negative 
 reservoir, the pump 
 a c d b-^ b., a ratchet 
 train for the propul- 
 sion of the column 
 „ „ ofair«. The suction 
 
 •^^^•9»5- ^ ^ valve is at (5„ and the 
 
 discharge valve at /»,, both being in the form of stop cocks. 
 
 The suction valve b., is operated by hand when the piston is 
 drawn out, and when the end of the stroke is reached the valve 
 
 by, which had previously been closed, is opened, and the first 
 one closed, and the air expelled on the return stroke. A stop 
 cock, 1^3, is also placed close to the receiver. 
 
 There is but little difficulty iu apply- 3; 
 
 ing slide valves to single-acting pumps, 
 aud they are also readily arranged 
 for double-acting cylinders. By exam- 
 ining the arrangement of flap valves 
 in the compress double-acting pump. 
 Fig. 986, it will be seen that the valves 
 b^ aud b.^ open and close simultaneously, 
 aud that the same is true of b.^ and 4> 
 and that the two actions alternate with 
 each other. The operation of the valves 
 is such that the four spaces /to IV are 
 connected alternately in the order /-// 
 and III-IV, and /-/// and II-IV. 
 From this it will be seen that if sliding 
 valves are used they may all be con- 
 nected together, or united in the same 
 construction. This may be done as 
 shown in Fig. 987 a, which represents 
 the so-called ' ' four-way ' ' cock. As here 
 shown, all four of the passages are 
 closed, this position correspoudiug to 
 the end of the piston stroke. When 
 the plug is turned 45°, as shown by the dotted lines, /and /// 
 are connected, and also //and IV \ and if it is turned the same 
 amount in the other direction, /and //aud /// and IVaie 
 
 Fig. 986. 
 
 Fig. 987. 
 
 connected. The portions b^ and bi may be omitted, as in Fig 
 9S7 b, and the passages //, IV and ///brought closer together, 
 as shown at c. From this form it will readily be seen how the 
 passage /can be converted into a mere delivery pipe, and the 
 radius of curvature of the bearing surfaces, made of infinite 
 length, giving the well-known slide valve. Fig. 987 b. In like 
 manner other forms may be developed. It must not be forgot- 
 ten that this device really consists of four valves combined in 
 one, and in fact recent forms of steam engines contain the four 
 valves made separately, these often again being lift valves. 
 
 A noteworthy peculiarity in the forms shown in Fig. 987 a and 
 d must be considered. In both instances the valve overlaps 
 the port on both sides, this being technically known as "lap."' 
 It is also apparent that the lap on the two sides of one port may 
 diff"er, and that diff'ereut laps may be used for diff"erent ports. 
 By use of this expedient the opening and closing of'the ports 
 need not be simultaneous, but may occur successively. 
 
 From the preceding considerations the following propositions 
 may be laid down ; the latter applying to all, and the former to 
 nearly all, lift valves : 
 
 The application of slide valves in all fluid ratchet trains de- 
 pends upon two principles: 
 
 1. The combination of several valves into one piece. 
 
 2. The control of the time of action of these valves by means 
 of the lap. 
 
 * See Fink. " Konstruction der Kolben-und Zentrifugalpuinpen," Berlin, 
 1872; also Bach, "Konstruction der Feuerspritzen." 
 
 t This name is spelled as given above iu the earliest records, and not 
 " Guericke," as is often given. 
 
 Fig. 988. 
 
 The application of a slide valve to a pump is shown in Fig. 
 988 a. In this case /is the discharge outlet, aud IV the suction 
 connection. In such pumps it is necessary to provide some 
 mechanism to operate the valve, and such mechanism is termed 
 the " valve gear." This valve gear may be arranged in a great 
 variety of ways. 
 
 A simple form of gear is that shown in the figure, 988 a, in 
 which an arm 6, attached tn the piston rod, moves the valve by 
 striking against tappets 5' and 5^'' on the valve stem. This 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 -arrangement is similar to the locking ratchet of ]'"ig. 753. It 
 has the defect, however, of requiring the piston to move rapidly, 
 or else the valve will not be carried past the middle position, 
 and the pun:p will stop. This defect can be met by using a trip 
 gearing device such as shown in Figs. 742 and 743, to continue 
 the condition of the valve when started by the impulse of the 
 piston rod. 
 
 A somewhat simpler method is that in which the reciprocating 
 motion of the pump rod is used to revolve a shaft by means of 
 a crank, Fig. 988 b, from which the valve may be operated by 
 means of a return crank or eccentric. This arrangement is 
 •often used, especially for blowing engines, etc.* It will be 
 apparent that a four- way cock device, Fig. 987, ma}' be arranged 
 so as to be operated by continuous revolution, instead of a 
 reciprocating motion, and hence the eccentric may be omitted 
 and a rotary valve device substituted. 
 
 In Fig. 988 b the crank and crank shaft are used merely for 
 the purpose of actuating the valve gear. It is practicable, 
 Tiowever, when a crank is once admitted, to use it still further 
 as one of the parts of the pump, such as in chamber trains. 
 Many such devices haae been proposed, f although but few of 
 these have been put to practical use. The three following de- 
 vices will illustrate. 
 
 Fig. 989. 
 
 rig. 989^ is Pattison's pump, a form of chamber-crank train. 
 The crank a here assumes the form of an eccentric, the rod b 
 Lecomes a flat piston, the edges of which form a tight joint 
 -with the ends of the cylindrical chamber d. In the position 
 shown in the illustration the spaces //and /and I/I and IV 
 are in communication. In the dotted positions /// is connected 
 with /, followed again by // and / and /// and IV. This trans 
 fer of communication is produced by the action of the crank, 
 and hence no other valves are necessary. 
 
 The form shown at Fig. 989 b is made with an oscillating 
 •cylinder. The piece c, which plays an inconspicuous part in 
 Fig. 989^, is now used for the chamber, and its oscillating 
 motion with regard to b supplies the necessary valve action. 
 Oscillating pumps are used in a variety of forms. 
 
 Fig. 9891: is Beale's gas exhauster, made with a so-called 
 "sliding crank" c, which acts at the same time as crank and 
 piston. Without the use of special valves, the spaces // and 
 ///interchange with /and IVhy the revolution of d. Beale's 
 exhauster is in successful and extensive operation in various 
 ^as works. 
 
 In the examples cited and in the numerous modilications of 
 them, it will be noticed that the checking or ratchet action of 
 the liquid is invariably performed by slide valves. 
 
 One of the objections to the use of slide valves for ordinary 
 -water pumps is the wear upon the surfaces due to impurities 
 in the water. When the water is free from such objectionable 
 impurities, it is to be considered whether slide valves might not. 
 be much more generally employed than has hitherto been the 
 ■case. If this form of valve were given the benefit of practical 
 study and experience, it ought to be possible to avoid the 
 shocks due to concussion existing in pumps made with lift 
 valves when operated at high speeds.; 
 
 A great number of valve forms have been designed, ? using 
 combinations of single valves on the principle of the multiple 
 ratchet (see \ 242), the action of the valves being assisted by 
 weights, springs, etc, but these have not completely attained 
 the desired end. !| 
 
 , p. 929; 
 
 ) Herrmann' 
 
 *See Zeitschrift Deut 
 AVeisbach's Mechanics, ■' _ . 
 
 t See the author's "Theoretical Mechanics," in which over 90 chamber 
 •crank trains are described and analyzed. 
 
 \ Poillon refers to the fact that the automatic action of mechanically oper- 
 ated slide valves enables high speeds to be obtained -with less noise than 
 when lift valves are used, but also notes the -wear of the slide valves as an 
 " n to their 
 
 When the pump is used for pure water, as for drinking supply, 
 the question of wear upon slide valves is not so important as 
 with pressure pumps. A fair comparison can hardly be made, 
 however, between pumps with slide valves and those with lift 
 valves, as the former have been but little used and also not 
 practically designed. 
 
 It is a matter of surprise that when occasional applications of 
 slide valves aie made in pumping machinery, that such devices 
 should be considered as something new The difference be- 
 tween the action of water and air is well known, and yet even 
 with the slight weight of an air column the shock in blowing 
 machines is most apparent. It can hardly be supposed that the 
 other form would remain uninvestigated. 
 
 The pumps shown in Fig. 989 a and c are commonly known 
 as rotary pumps, which title is manifestly incorrect, since in 
 form a there is an oscillating piston which does not rotate, 
 while in form c, notwithstanding the rotary motion the action 
 is similar to form a. Other so-called rotary pumps have been 
 devised with curved piston action, some of these being as early 
 as the 17th century. In some designs a radial slide acts in the 
 pump case as a ratchet, and is drawn in and out by a cam of 
 appropriaely curved profile. A large number of rotary pumps 
 have been made on this principle, many of which will be found 
 in Poillon's treatise. These pumps are usually made with 
 metallic packing only, and are used in Italy and France for 
 pumping wine and olive oil ; they are also adapted for brewery 
 pumps. 
 
 The undeniable predilection in favor of rotary pumps on the 
 ratchet train principle is worthy of consideration. It is claimed 
 that they have a higher efficiency, but this remains to be estab- 
 lished ; also the rotary motion gives a continuous uniform motion 
 to the wat:r column, but this is equally accomplished by the 
 forms shown in Figs. 982 and 989. This uniform flow can only be 
 approximately attained, as must be the case from the nature of 
 the mechanism. The principle is that of a ratchet train which 
 is intermittent in principle, and hence differs from a continuous 
 running movement. The idea that such pumps give a continu- 
 ous and uniform discharge is due to the fact that the column of 
 water is operated directly from the part which is driven con- 
 tinuously, but this by no means follows. This combination of 
 a continuous running motion, with an intermittent ratchet 
 action which is not apparent to the eye, will be shown in other 
 cases hereafter. 
 
 §321- 
 Escapements for Pressure Organs. 
 
 Ratchet trains found with pressure organs also include 
 escapements as completely as is the case with the precedin§f 
 forms of rigid ratchet mechanism. The ratchet of ^ 258, shown 
 again in Fig. 990 may be considered as an escapement if we 
 assume the checking of a by 6 to be uniformly opened and 
 closed. 
 
 If now, in Fig. 991, the checked member a is made a pressure 
 organ, such as water, in communication at H with a pressure 
 reservoir, or with a negative reservoir at T, or both, the 
 regular lifting and closing of the valve b produces an escape- 
 
 FiG. 990. 
 
 Fig. 991. 
 
 objection to their use. 
 
 f See Riedler, Zeitschrift d. Deutscher Ingenieure, 1885, p. 5c 
 II See Bach, " Konstruktion der Feuerspritzen," also in 
 
 Deutscher lug., 1886, p. 421. 
 
 Zeits 
 
 tjeq. 
 
 ■ift d. 
 
 ment acting in a similar manner to Fig. 990. By means of 
 such a device the pressure organ a can be constrained in per- 
 forming mechanical work. The range of such an escapement 
 is not determined by the teeth of a wheel, but on the contrary, 
 is similar to a friction ratchet, and can be varied at will. 
 
 The applications of escapements wi:h fluids are in principle 
 the same as those formed of rigid bodies, but in practice their 
 nature is very different. We have already distinguished between 
 watch escapements and power escapements, and in the present 
 instance the power escapements are by far the most important. 
 For this reason the latter will be considered first. Unperiodical 
 escapements are shown in the simple form of Fig. 991, in which 
 the time of releasing and checking is regulated by hand ; a 
 form very seldom found in rigid escapements. Periodical 
 forms, similar to watch escapements, are used with pressure 
 organs for measurement, but not for measurement of time, but 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 of volume. To these we may add the adjustable escapements 
 on the principle of those described in ^ 259, and we have the 
 following classification ; 
 
 a. Unperiodical Power escapements. 
 
 b. Periodical Power escapements. 
 
 c. Adjustable Power escapements. 
 
 d. Escapements for measurements of volume. 
 
 §322. 
 
 Fluid Escapements for Transportation. 
 
 One of the simplest practical applications of the principle of 
 
 Fig. 991 is Felbiuger's Postal Tube, shown in diagram in Fig. 
 
 992. The line tube d is connected with a reservoir of compressed 
 
 reversal of 180°. This may be accomplished either by the use 
 of tension organs or pressure organs. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Fig. 992. 
 
 air at H, and at 7" with a similar negative reservoir. At 6 is a 
 sliding pawl, here shown open ; the piston, or carrier c, in the 
 form of a leather box containing letters, telegrams, etc., being 
 driven through the tube. A valve b' enables the end of the 
 tube to be thrown info communication with a second negative 
 reservoir, and this mechanism can be arranged at both ends of 
 the line so that the tube can be used for transmission in either 
 direction. Such postal pneumatic tubes are well known and 
 widely used.* 
 
 An atmospheric escapement operated by a negative reservoir 
 is found in the so-called "atmospheric railway," invented by 
 Pinkus in 1834, and put into practical operation somewhat later 
 in England by Clegg and Samuda. This was operated on the 
 Kingston-Dalby road with a vacuum of 54 atmosphere in the 
 exhausted receiver, but it is no longer in operation. 
 
 When an escapement is intended to control the back and 
 forth movement of a piston in the same path, the single valve 
 shown in Fig. 991 is not sufficient, but at least a second. must be 
 used, as is already indicated in Fig. 992. One of the most prac- 
 tical of all fluid escapements is found in the lock used on canals 
 and shown in diagram in Fig. 993. 
 
 
 \«j^m>>^~»^% 
 
 > 
 
 Fig. 993. 
 
 The canal is open on the upper side (see Fig. 945 b and c) ; 
 the valves b-^ and b.^ are of the running ratchet form, and are in 
 reality double gates. Smaller by-pass valves 6/ and b./ are used 
 in order to enable the inlet and outlet of the water to be started 
 gradually. The boat c forms the piston, and when the motion is 
 upward, b-^ is the escapement valve, and when downward, ^^ is 
 used. 
 
 The above canal lock device, while extremely useful, pos- 
 sesses a very low efficiency, since it not only uses a volume of 
 water equal to the displacement of the boat plus the necessary 
 clearance, but also discharges the whole lock chamber of water 
 each time it is used. Later devices have been made for the 
 same purpose, involving a less waste of water. If it is arranged 
 for the service to be doubled by making two lifts adjacent to 
 each other, it is eviderit that the descending boat can counter- 
 balance an ascending one of the same weight, the only require- 
 ment being that there must be some connecting mechanism in- 
 volving the overcoming an additional resistance, and capable of a 
 
 Fig. 994- 
 
 Fig. 994 shows a double canal lift constructed by Green ieac 
 the Grand Western Canal in England in 1840, the connecting 
 mechanism being tension organs in the form of chains. The 
 boats are carried in tanks c^ c,, the ends of which are closed by 
 valves or gates b-^ and b.^, and similar gates 6/ and b./ also close 
 the ends of the canal sections. A small addition to the weight 
 on the descending side is sufiScieut to raise the other tank t 
 
 Fig. 995. 
 
 The substitution of a pressure organ for the chain was first 
 made by Mr. Edwin Clark on the Mersey Canal in 1875, in the 
 form of a hydraulic lever, as shown in Fig. 995. This shows 
 clearly the equivalence of the cord or chain and pulley and the 
 water lever, already referred to in I 311. The tanks c^ and c^ 
 are carried on plungers 3 feet in diameter, and are 75 feet long 
 and 15>^ feet wide. A head of (>" of water is sufficient to over- 
 come the resistance of motion, and a lift of 50 feet is effected 
 in three miuutes.J Smaller installations have been made by 
 Clark and by Stanfield, and other large ones at the La Louviere 
 Canal in Belgium, and the Neufosse Canal at Les Fontinettes, 
 in France. The lifts are 43 ft. and 50 ft. respectively, and the 
 plunger diameters 6>^ feet. The loss of water with these lifts is 
 only about tj^ of the quantity used by common locks of the 
 same capacity. ^ 
 
 The preceding escapement devices are made for open canals, 
 but escapements may also be constructed with closed tube con- 
 nections. This latter type includes numerous hydraulic eleva- 
 tors for lifting burdens of all kinds. 
 
 An example of a direct-acting hydraulic elevator is given in 
 Fig. 996, The two valves ax-e combined in one cock. The water 
 under pressure enters at H, and the discharge against the 
 atmospheric pressure is at A. The weight of the plunger is 
 counterbalanced by two counterweights G with chains and 
 
 t See Weisbach-Hermann, Vol. III., Part 2, p. 6 
 
 ISeeDuerTr.--- ^--' " " ^"-^ ^^-^ 
 
 Spon., i88i, p. 1; 
 
 g'see Colyer; j: 
 
 
 7 the length of the postal pneumatic tubes ii 
 
 ; Robinson, p. 69 : 1 
 
 ,. „_, ., Schiffshebung in Frankreich ; a .. 
 
 and Hafenwerkzeuge in Frankreich und England, Wien, Ceroid, 18S2, 
 also Ernst, Hebezeuge, Berlin, Springer, 1883, p. 630. In Green's lif 
 loaded boats descended and the empty ones ascended, hence an exce 
 water was raised, which was permitted to overflow. These lifts enable 1 
 greater differences of level to be overcome than do the ordinar3' locks 
 make it practical to use long stretches of canal and make an entire 1 
 one operation. It may be here noted that pneumatic lifts for canals 
 designed in 1863 by the Swiss engineer. Seyler. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 pulleys, aud the plunger operates the valve automatically by 
 meaus of the rod b' , wheu the highest 
 position is attained. This form of lift has 
 been much used, sometimes of very large 
 dimensions. The great passenger elevator 
 of the Hamilton St. Station of the Mersey 
 Tunnel has a plunger i%" in diameter, 
 with a lift of 87;j feet, the car holding 50 
 
 A practical objection to direct-acting 
 lifts of this form lies in the heavy counter- 
 weights required, and also in the depth to 
 which the cylinder must be sunk. A 
 different form has therefore been designed 
 in which a piston travel of moderate length 
 is multiplied by use of a tension organ 
 system, such devices being extensively 
 used for passenger elevators, notably by 
 the Otis Elevator Company. 
 
 Hydraulic cranes are also forms of high 
 pressure escapements, first designed by 
 Armstrong, and since used by many others, 
 especially in connection with Bessemer 
 Steel plant, in which hydraulic cranes 
 have proved most valuable. 
 
 Fig. 997 shows the mechanism of a 
 hydraulic crane by Armstrong. The piston 
 is double acting, and there are four valves 
 b^, b^, b-i, bi, of the type shown in Fig. 986, 
 the external connections also being neces- 
 sary in order to complete the escapement. 
 The high pressure water enters at //, and 
 passes through the pipe /, and is discharged to the atmosphere 
 at /K The rod c^ is made of half the area of the piston ifj 
 
 ■bi Ijtsli 
 
 Fig. 996. 
 
 Fio. 997. 
 
 (compare Fig. 946 e). When b^ and b^^ are open, as in the illus- 
 tration, the forward stroke is made with one-half the full force ; 
 when b^ and b^ are open, the forward stroke is made with full 
 force. By opening b., and b^, the return stroke is made by the 
 pull of the load upon the chain. At b^ is a safety valve which 
 comes into action should the load descend too rapidly, by the 
 opening of b^ alone.* 
 
 i 323- 
 Hydraulic Tools. 
 
 Hydraulic escapements, similar to those used for lifting loads 
 are also applicable to machine tools. Among these may be 
 noted the devices of Tweddell, for riveting, punching, bending, 
 etc. (see ? 54). 
 
 Figs. 998 and 999 show the arrangement of Tweddell's rivet- 
 ing machine ; d is the piston, bi, b.^ the valves, one of which 
 connects with the pressure reservoir at //, and the other with 
 the atmosphere at A. When b^ is opened by the lever e, the 
 hydraulic pressure enters above the piston d, aud the stroke is 
 made. The return stroke is effected by means of the auxiliary 
 piston dy, which is fast to d, and under which the water pres- 
 sure is acting at all time.?. Cidving b^, and opening 62, enables 
 this to act and lift the main piston. This gives practically a 
 hydraulic lever of unequal arms, the shorter arm always being 
 loaded with //, and the load on the longer arm varying between 
 H and A. The lever mechanism d^, d" , d'", controls the 
 length of stroke of the die, by means of the tappets d" and 
 d"' , which are connected with the lever e. This is also used 
 on the lift of Fig. 996, and shows the complete escapement. 
 The arrangement of valves is shown in detail in Fig. 999.! 
 
 * See Robinson. 
 
 t See Weisbach-Herrnian, III., 2, p. -i/^o ; Colj'er, p. 11 ; Robinson, p. 52. 
 
 t For fuller de.scriptions of Tweddell's machine see : Proc. Inst. C. E). 
 LXXIU., 1883, p. 64 ; Kngiueer, July, 1885, p. 88 ; August, p. iii ; Revue Indus- 
 trielle, 1884, p. 5: 1S85, p. 493; Mechanics, 1885, p. 272; also Rohinson, as 
 above, and Zeitschr. Dtutschsr Ing., 1886, p. 452. 
 
 Fig. 998. Fig. 999. 
 
 The preceding apparatus resembles the hydraulic press. It is 
 in fact quite different, being a genuine ratchet train, capable of all 
 the modifications of such mechanisms as to speed, distance, and 
 arrangement. On account of these points theapplications of pres- 
 sure organ escapements are becoming rapidly more important. 
 
 ?324. 
 
 Pressure Escapements for Moving IvIquids. 
 
 The use of unperiodic pressure escapements . for moving 
 
 liquids in machine construction has 
 
 been practiced from an early period, 
 
 and at the present time improved de- 
 vices for this purpose are much used. 
 An almost forgotten device of this 
 
 kind is Brindley's boiler feeding ap- 
 paratus, Fig. 1000, this being based 
 
 upon the principles already given in 
 
 Fig. 991. 
 The necessary opening of the valve b 
 
 is made by the float c, and the closing 
 
 by the counterweight Cj (compare Fig. 
 
 950). This apparatus was first applied 
 
 to Watt's boilers, the feeding of the 
 
 boilers of Newcomen's engines being 
 
 effected by a cock operated by the 
 
 attendant. 
 
 Fig. lool is Kirchweger's steam trap 
 
 for the removal of water of condensa- 
 tion. The escape valve b is opened by 
 
 the float c, which, in this instance, is 
 
 open at the top, so that the water flows 
 
 over the rim until it sinks, and thus 
 
 opens the valve,- This valve motion is 
 
 in itself a ratchet train, checked and 
 
 released by the action of the float. 
 
 When the valve is opened the water in 
 
 the float is forced out by the pressure of 
 
 the steam. ^ 
 The slow moving float device, as in 
 
 Fig. 1000, has also been advantageously 
 
 used for operating steam traps, by 
 
 Tulpin, of Rouen ; Handrick, of 
 Buckau ; Piischel, of Dresden; 
 Dehne, of Halle, and others. 
 Similar escapements have been 
 designed to separate air from 
 steam, or air from water, as in 
 the devices of Andral, Kuhl- 
 mann, Klein and others. || 
 
 Other examples of escape- 
 ments of this kind are found iu 
 the so-called Montejus, used for" 
 elevating syrup in sugar refiner- 
 ies, in the return traps of steam 
 heating systems, aud in various 
 other f'orms of boiler feeders, 
 such as those of Cohnfeld. Rit- 
 ter & Mayhew, and others, f 
 
 Fig. : 
 
 Fig. iooi. 
 
 g This form of trap is mac 
 Losenhausen, of Dusseldorf. 
 England, and a feed pump on 
 German Patent No. 3^, yyi. 
 
 \ For illustrations of these devices .5ee Sclioll's FUhrer des Maschinisten, 
 10 ^it., p. 49J. V See Scholl, p. 235. 
 
 many varieties, the one shown being by 
 imilar one by MacDougal is much used in 
 principle is made by Korting in Hanover ; 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 229 
 
 B. PERIODICAL PRESSURE ESCAPEMENTS. 
 
 Pumping Machinery. 
 
 Periodical fluid escapement trains have a wider application 
 than unperiodical trains, since it is practicable, as already shown, 
 to use a fluid ratchet train to operate the valves in a simple 
 manner. This makes it possible to produce the opening and 
 closing of the valves in a periodical succession mechanically, 
 instead of by the fluid column. In this construction the fluid 
 column may therefore drive the piston, instead of being driven 
 by it. This idea seems ver)^ simple, and yet pumps had been 
 known for two thousand years, and had occupied the inventive 
 energy of the preceding centuries before the simplest forms of 
 the modern steam engine were devised. It is therefore all the 
 more important in the study of machine design to investigate 
 the fundamental principles involved. 
 
 It is impossible, in the limited space which can here be given, 
 to go into this subject in its entirety ; the arrangement of the 
 valve gear of the Newcomen engine with tumbling bob gear, is 
 an instructive example. 
 
 In Pig. 1002 is shown Belidor's single acting water pressure 
 engine.* 
 
 in communication with the discharge, and since ^j is larger than 
 ^1, the pressure between them moves them into the position 
 (5/ b./. This puts the main cylinder in communication with the 
 discharge, and the piston sinks by the weight of the load upon 
 it. At the close of the stroke the tappet 6 moves the arm c^' 
 into the position Cj again, and places the auxiliary valve in the 
 first position and a new stroke is made. J 
 
 This machine constitutes an escapement of the second order, 
 since the small and large escapements alternately release each 
 other ; the lever device S-6-c^ forms a third mechanism, so that 
 the machine, as a whole, is of the third order. 
 
 Fig. 1002. 
 In the cylinder a' is a piston ; a^ is the entrance of the water, 
 a.2 the discharge outlet. The valves d^ and d., are united in a 
 three-way cock (see Fig. 987). This valve is operated from the 
 piston rod c by a tumbling-bob gear (see Fig. 742). The tum- 
 bling lever £ e^ e.,, weighted at £, is connected with the piston 
 rod at ^1, and moves about its axis independently of the lever/". 
 When the end of the piston stroke is nearly reached, the lever 
 £ passes the middle point, and tips over, when the arm/"! strikes 
 the levery and carries it to the position /'', moving the lever of 
 the three-way cock from d to 6\ The arm c, is behind £. The 
 return stroke of the piston moves the arm e.2 of the tumbling 
 gear towards the right, and as the end of the stroke is reached, 
 the tumbling bob is again tripped, and the three-way cock 
 moved again into the position d. A cord secured at the ends to the 
 points <?3 and e^, and fastened to JS, limits the travel of the latter. 
 The piston rod is connected directly to the pump to be operated. f 
 It will be observed that this machine is a ratchet train of the 
 second order, the piston and valve forming an escapement, and 
 the valve gear a releasing ratchet train each operating the other. 
 I Fig. 1003 is the single 
 acting water pressure en- 
 gine of Reichenbach. In- 
 stead of using a tumbling 
 bob gear to operate the 
 valve, Reichenbach uses 
 a second water escape- 
 ment, operating the valve 
 by a piston, the valve 
 being itself a piston valve. 
 The double piston valve 
 ^3 d^ of the second escape- 
 ment is operated by the 
 main piston rod, the tap- 
 pets 5 and 6 striking the 
 lever r, as each end of the 
 stroke is reached. The 
 water under pressure en- 
 ters at ff J and is discharged 
 at«2. Thetappet 5 moves 
 the auxiliary valve into 
 Fig. 1003. the position b/ b/, which 
 " ' places the space above b^ 
 
 * Belidor, Architecture hydraulique, Paris, 1739, Vol. II., p. 238. 
 
 t The above described machine, designed bj' Belidor in 1737, for the water 
 works at the bridge of Notre Dame, does not appear to be altogether practi- 
 cable. It has been here given on account of the valve motion, which is his- 
 torically interesting and doubtless good, and has been reinvented several 
 times since. It was not new in 1737, having been in Newcomen's steam 
 engine, as was already known to Belidor, since it is described by him in the 
 same volume of his treatise. 
 
 Fig. 1004. 
 Fig. 1004 shows the double acting water pressure engine of Roux.^ 
 The double action is obtained by combining the four valves in one, 
 and by communicating the admission and discharge alternately 
 with both sides of the piston. In this case the lever connection 
 Tj is replaced by an escapement. The small pistons b./ b^' are 
 acted on at the outer ends by the pressure water through the 
 small passages k./ , k/. This gives an escapement of the third 
 order. The cup-shaped ends c.^, c-^. of the main piston c form 
 the pump plungers. This machine should operate satisfactorily. 
 It is readily apparent that the pistor steam engine may also 
 be considered as an escapement. The valve gears differ from 
 the preceding forms only on account of the conditions of ex- 
 pansion and condensation. These are reducible to a limited 
 number of simple cases. 
 
 Fig. 1005. 
 Fig. 1005 is a single acting high pressure engine. The steam 
 
 I See Weisbach-Herrman, II., 2, p. 536 ; also Ruhlmann, allgem Masch- 
 inen Chre., I., p 348 
 I See Revue Industrielle, 1S84, p, 114. Built by Crozet et Cie. 
 
230 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 euters at r?,, and the discharge to the atmosphere is at a,^. The 
 opening of the valve ^i permits the steam to enter, forcing the 
 piston c down, and raising the weight G. The valves b^ and b.^ 
 are operated by a ratchet train released by the tappets 5 and 6 
 on a rod moved by the main piston. The pawls are double- 
 acting, and are of the form shown in Fig. 671. When c reaches 
 the bottom of the cylinder the tappet 5 releases the ratchet 7, 
 and closes the valve b^ by means of the connections/, By The 
 release of 7 opens the valve b., by means of the connections e.,_f2, 
 and permits the escape of the steam from below the piston. 
 Thi^s equalizes the pressure above and below the piston, from 
 •wln'ch the valve b., is called the equalizing valve. The upward 
 stroke of the piston causes the tappet 6 to reverse the ratchet 7 
 and operate the levers e^f^, closing the equalizing valve and its 
 connections. 
 
 The device differs from the preceding in that the principal 
 escapement a byb.^c d changes in character with the stroke. 
 The two ratchet trains can be seen in principle in the double 
 acting tumbling gear of Fig. 1002. The mechanism, when lift- 
 ing the valve, is of the third order, and when closing, of the 
 second order. The gear as shown is Farcy's ; Fig. 779 shows 
 this principle in a rigid escapement train, the corresponding 
 form in single-acting train is the chronometer escapement, Fig. 
 769. 
 
 If the engine is a condensing one, a condenser valve b-^ is 
 added, this being opened by the closing of b.^, as is also a jet 
 valve in the condenser. When the steam is to be expanded, the 
 lever Cj is so arranged, the closing of 6, is produced earlier (see 
 the smaller diagram) by the position of the tappet 5, and the 
 corresponding counterweight lifted. This only operates the 
 ratchet 7, and f., is released by a second train 8, which is 
 effected by the tappet rod or by the so-called cataract K, 
 released by a tappet 9, see \ 260. 
 
 The condenser is a negative reservoir, and was the principal in- 
 vention of Watt. It involves the use of two fluid ratchet trains ; 
 the air pump, and the cold water pump, and also usually in- 
 cludes a boiler feed pump. The entire engine is composed of a 
 collection of ratchet trains. 
 
 Steam pumping engines are by no means always made with 
 lift valves, and a great number of more recent designs are made 
 with slide valves (see Fig. 987). Rittenger has applied slide 
 valves successfully to single-acting engines, and they are espe- 
 cially applicable to double-acting non-rotative engines. In the 
 last decade especially have valve motion for steam pumps with 
 slide valves been multiplied, and some illustrations are here 
 given. 
 
 Fig. 1006 is Tangye's direct-acting steam pump. The steam 
 
 the main piston to the left, as indicated by the arrow. Just 
 before the end of the stroke is reached the seat b^ is moved as 
 much to the left of the centre as it now stands to the right. In 
 
 Fig. 1006. 
 
 Fig. 1007. 
 
 the seat b^, as shown in the figure to the right, there are addi- 
 tional valves formed, Z?,, 183, 184, which act to operate the auxil- 
 iary pistons b-i, b-i, under which latter the small steam passages 
 can be partly seen. When b^ is moved to the left, a small post 
 is uncovered by (i.^, and live steam enters the cylinder L behind 
 b.^, while at the same time /?4 connects 7? with the exhaust. This 
 causes 6,, b, b^, to move to the right and reverses the pump. 
 The reverse action takes place at the other end of the stroke, 
 the whole forming a combination of the third order. 
 
 Fig. 1008. 
 
 Fig. 1008 shows the valve gear of Deane's steam pump, which has 
 also been extensively used. The main valve is moved by means 
 of auxiliary pistons, as in the preceding instance. The auxil- 
 iary pistons are controlled by a separate valve b' , which itself 
 is operated by lever connections with the main piston rod. 
 This combination b', b"^, b, forms again a mechanism of the third 
 order.* 
 
 If the last three devices described are compared with the 
 Reichenbach water-pressure engine, it will be seen that the 
 fundamental principle is the same in all. The constructive 
 arrangements which may be adopted are clearly shown in the 
 preceding examples, which may be modified in a variety of 
 ways. Among other widely used arrangements, that of Knowles 
 may also be mentioned ; in it the action of the auxiliary pistons 
 is controlled by a slight twisting motion given to the valve stem. 
 
 entrance is at /, and the exhaust at IV. The slide valve b is 
 the so-called E form, combining the four valves of Fig. 986 in 
 one ; b.^ and b^ are the auxiliary pistons to move the valve, and 
 form part of an escapement ol which the valves b" and b'^' are 
 operated by the mam piston c at each end of its stroke. The 
 latter valves communicate with the cylinder posts // and ///. 
 When b"' is lifted by the piston, the space R is in communica- 
 tion with the exhaust, and the pressure in L throws the valve 
 over, equilibrium being soon after established through the aper- 
 ture /i'j. The reverse action occurs on the return stroke. This 
 is a steam escapement of the second order, with an independent 
 starting lever, the whole forming a combination of the third 
 order. This has been much used by Taugye for steam pumps. 
 
 Fig. 1007 shows the valve motion of the Blake pump, which 
 is very extensively used in the United States. In this case there 
 is a movable seat b^ under the valve b, the opening through the 
 seat always being in communication with the posts //, ///, IV, 
 although ba is moved a short distance at each end of the stroke 
 by tappets on the piston rod. In the position of the parts 
 shown the steam entering at /will pass through ///and move 
 
 j,m\ i \-ms- ^ , ,,^ . 
 
 W///M////////////////////////////M 
 
 a. 
 
 Fig. 1009. 
 
 Fig. 1009 shows Pickering's steam pump.f In this design the 
 main piston c acts also as the valve for the auxiliary pistons 
 b.„ b,, so that the spaces J? and L are placed alternately in com- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 231 
 
 municatiou with / and IV. The whole forms a steam escape- 
 ment of the second order. 
 
 Fig. loio shows Harlow's valve gear, also used for pumping 
 machinery.* This is also a steam escapement of the second 
 order, similar to the preceding. The valve action for the 
 auxiliary pistons is formed in a prolongation of the piston rod, 
 the grooves c^ and c^ placing the spaces R and L alternately in 
 communication with IV. 
 
 Fig. ioi 
 
 Fig. loii shows the arraugement of Githeu's rock drill. t 
 
 The curved valve 6, is operated by the action of the curved 
 
 outline formed in the piston c. The middle position of the 
 
 valve is a dead point, but this is overcome by the momentum 
 
 of the heavy piston . 
 
 The devices of the third order are capable of a very import- 
 ant modification which can be considered by examining for in- 
 stance the Deaue gear. Fig. 1008, or either of the two preceding 
 it. An inspection will show that it is entirely practicable to 
 use the auxiliary piston to operate a pump cylinder, as indepen- 
 dently of that operated by tbe main piston d. It is only neces- 
 sary to make it larger in diameter and of proper length of 
 stroke ; and there is nothing to prevent making it of the same 
 diameter and stroke as the main piston. 
 
 The valve of each cylinder will then be operated by lever 
 mechanism connected to the rod of the other piston. This 
 arrangement involves the replacing of the E valve by the com- 
 mon D valve, which is not important, but is nevertheless an 
 advantage. The two escapements are conveniently placed side 
 by side for constructive reasons, and the double arrangement is 
 known as a "duplex" machine, this term being given to two 
 combined cylinders, of which the valve of each is operated by 
 the piston movement of the other. This type is now frequently 
 met, having been made for small apparatus very early, in 
 France by Mazellire and yet earlier, in 1859, in the United 
 States by Wortbingtoa. 
 
 Fig. 1012. 
 
 Fig. 1012 shows a duplex pump by Mazelline.f The illustra- 
 tion shows one piston Cj, at mid-stroke with its valve b^, at the 
 end of its travel, aud connected to the rod of the other cylinder 
 by the lever e.^_. 
 
 The work is divided into two portions which is provided for 
 by the doubling of the parts. If the two piston escapements 
 (cylinders, pistons, valves, steam, etc.) are indicated by [i] and 
 [3], and the valve movements by [2] and [4] the action will be 
 as shown in the following lines, 
 
 Fig. 1 010. 
 
 By comparing the preceding designs with the water pressure 
 engine of Roux, Fig. 1004, the similarity will be apparent. All 
 the examples given show the fundamental relation existing be- 
 tween these devices aud the mechanical escapements of watch 
 movements. The escape wheel is replaced by the fluid column ; 
 the anchor, by the valve ; the vibrating member, whether pen- 
 dulum or balance wheel has here not a free movement but a 
 determinate one against an external resistance. Similar 
 arrangements include steam hammers, also hammers and rock 
 drills, usually driven by compressed air, these latter consisting- 
 of mechanism of the second, rather than the third order. An 
 example will serve to illustrate the general arrangement of such 
 devices. 
 
 whence we have 
 
 [I] W [3] 
 
 and C3] [4] [I], 
 
 both being of the second order. 
 
 * See Engineering and Mining Journal, Oct., 1884, p. 2 
 tSee Eng. and Mining Journal. March, 1887, p. 107. 
 drill, Trans. A. S. M. E., 1884-5, P- 7i- 
 
 Fig. ioi 3. 
 
 Fig. 1013 shows a perspective view of Worthington's Duplex 
 Pump, the arrangement of which is apparent from inspection. 
 The duplex steam cylinders are at the right, and the double 
 acting pump cylinders on the left. 
 
 The advantages obtained by using this form of pumping 
 machine practically outweigh the objections which might be 
 made against the duplication of pa.rts. In double acting pumps 
 of the forms shown in Figs. 1006 to loio, the motion of the 
 water columns is interrupted, at low speeds, at each reversal of 
 
232 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the piston, while with the duplex pump the discharge is practi- 
 cally coutiuuous, because each cylinder begins its stroke just 
 before the other comes to re?t. 
 
 An objection to all the other forms of direct acting pumps 
 already described lies in the fact that to obtain uniform pump- 
 ing action it is necessary to carry the initial steam pressure for 
 the entire stroke of the piston, or in other words, the best action 
 of the water end is obtained by means of the least economical 
 action of the steam cylinders. 
 
 This defect was overcome in the earlier pumping engines, 
 such as the Coruish mine engines, by rising the steam to lift 
 heavy weights, pump rods, etc., the living force of the mass 
 permitting an earlj' cut-off and high expansion, and the uni- 
 form descent of the weight being used to force the water. By 
 this method the Cornish engines attained a high degree of 
 economy. This method being single acting, caused the entire 
 column of water to come to rest during the time required for 
 the up stroke of the pump rod, and hence the Cornish type of 
 pumpi'.ig eugine gives a most economical action of the steam at 
 the expense of a defective action of the pumps. 
 
 In the larger sizes of Wortbington pumping engines the ex- 
 pansion of the steam has been for a long time effected by using 
 compound cylinders, and excellent results attained in steam 
 economy. The efficiency, however, was by no means so high 
 as was desired. In iSS5 the so-called Worthington equalizer 
 was introduced with a view of enabling the desired high duty 
 to be attained. 
 
 or if we make Q the ordinate jc, of the desired curve : 
 _ 2Px_ 
 
 and substituting c for 2 P x 
 
 s^x"" -f U' 
 
 ■ (317] 
 
 which equation is readily expressed graphically. 
 
 If this curve is drawn upon the rectangle which represents 
 the resistance of the water, as in Fig. 1015 b, we get the actual 
 resistance curve^^ li, and this resembles closely the expansion 
 line for a high degree of expansion, or in other words, the im- 
 •pelling force and the resistance are practically made equal to 
 each other throughout the stroke. The dotted curve abode, 
 is that of an actual indicator diagram.J This shows that with 
 the M'orthington high duty pumping engine the most efficient 
 action of the steam is obtained at the same time as the best 
 action of the water end.^ 
 
 Fig. 1014. 
 
 This device, shown in Fig. 1014, is a ratchet train of the tumb- 
 ling type, similar to that shown in Fig. 743, the springs being 
 replaced by water pressure from a high pressure air cham- 
 ber.* The air chamber forms a periodical storage reservoir. 
 
 The plungers/, /, are attached to a cross-head connected to 
 the prolonged piston rod, and the cylinders are carried on 
 trunnions 7, 7. During the first half of the stroke the plungers 
 are forced into the cylinders the latter swinging about the cen- 
 tres 7, 7 ; and during the second half they are forced out by the 
 action of the stored energy .f 
 
 The resistance and assistance which the pistons /give to the 
 steam piston is shown hy a curve of the form of Fig. 1014 b, as 
 has also been obtained by the indicator. 
 
 Fig. 1015. 
 
 If in Fig. 1015 a, we make P equal the component on each 
 portion of the pressure Q on the main piston rod, we have : 
 
 vr+iau"^- 
 
 in which ^. 
 
 tan/3=- 
 
 Q = 
 
 This gives 
 
 T'TW 
 
 An halt Works 
 
 t In kinematic notation this a. 
 bj' d. See Theoretical Kinemati 
 
 of this t}-pe was patented in Germany, by the Berlin 
 .xpressed by CP tCP-i-), as shown 
 
 ^P 
 
 
 wmMWMWw//'/yM'm /m'/mMn, ^^^ 
 
 ^^^H" 
 
 
 H^^^W "v"^^^ 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 L _ T^C^ 
 
 
 
 ¥^§ 
 
 
 4/j[ ^^^ 
 
 Fig. 1016. 
 
 Fig. 1016 shows a longitudinal section of a Worthington high 
 duty pumping eugine. The equalizing cylinders and their air 
 chamber are .=een on the right ; the dotted lines e,^ show the rod 
 of the second cylinder, which operates the valve b^. 
 
 As it has already been seen that many forms of the third or- 
 der can be reduced to the second order, it may be inquired as to 
 the possibility of obtaining a pumping mechanism of the first 
 order. This has already been accomplished by uniting the 
 steam escapement with a water ratchet train. The device is the 
 Hall Pulsometer, shown in diagram in Fig- 1017. 
 
 The steam enters at a, at b, is the anchor shaped pawl, and d, 
 is the vessel corresponding to the frame- 
 work of a rigid' escapement, (compare 
 Fig- 775)- If the vessel d is closed as 
 shown by the dotted lines and a volume 
 of water c, included, we obtain an action 
 of the first order. The efficiency is very 
 low ; about ]i to Yi that of a piston 
 pump, but the simplicity and conven- 
 ience is so great that this ma}' often be 
 neglected. 
 
 Another escapement of the first order 
 is Montgolfier's hydraulic ram, which is 
 a water checking-ratchet train, the effi- 
 ciency of which is low. A more recent 
 device is the application of a water 
 ratchet train to drive a pneumatic r 
 chet train, first used on a large scale by | 
 Sommeillier in the construction of the ', 
 Mont. Cenis tunnel, and by means of 
 which the efficiency was brought up 
 nearly to 50 per cent.|| Pearsall has re- 
 cently improved the hydraulic ram and 
 raised its efficiency to nearly So per 
 cent., either for water or for air, but this 
 
 Fig. 1017. 
 
 ^^..^ ..„ „„.. equalizer accomplishes an end s. 
 
 steam pumps for the past 200 years, for since Papins i 
 
 driving medium, and a uniform, non-elastic resistance 
 II See the author's paper, Ueber die Durchbohn 
 Schweiz. polyt. Zeitschr, 1857, p. 147. 
 
 mp. Proc. Inst. C. E. 
 
 night by designers 01 
 irst machines in Cas- 
 n of a variable elastic 
 
 jng des Mont- Cenis. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^33 
 
 Fi^uiD Transmission at I^ong Distance. 
 
 When the motive power is intended to operate the piston of 
 a pump situated at a distance, some connecting mechanism 
 must be interposed between the two cylinders. Formerly this 
 was accomplished by using long rod connections ; instead of 
 this a pressure-organ transmission may be employed. When 
 water is used as the medium for transmission, this may be 
 termed a " water rod " connection. This is used in connection 
 with water levers (see ? 311). 
 
 Rotative Pressure Engines. 
 
 An effective method of obtaining an advantageous action of 
 the steam is to substitute for the reciprocating mass of the 
 Cornish engine a rotating mass. This is accomplished by 
 using the reciprocating motion of the piston to operate a crank 
 shaft upon which a fly-wheel is placed. Since it is practicable 
 to give the rim of the fly-wheel four to six times the velocity of 
 the crank pin, the magnitude of the moving mass can be much 
 smaller, and since the value varies as the square of the mean 
 velocity, the mass is reduced at least 16 times. It is therefore 
 possible by this means to give even small pumps an efficiency 
 equal to that of large pumping engines. f 
 
 It is not practicable to construct single-acting pumping 
 engines into fly-wheels, because the piston speed v is too varia- 
 ble. If we draw a curve representing v, the ordinates being 
 the positions of the piston, we have for a connecting rod of 
 infinite length a circular curve, as in Fig. 102x0;. When the 
 
 Fig. 10 1 8. 
 
 Fig. 1018 shov.'s three devices for this purpose. At a is shown 
 a closed system with pistons of equal diameter ; 6 is a similar 
 one with unequal pistons ; and f is a form with combined 
 pistons. Such water-rod connections are adapted for use in 
 mines, and the following example will illustrate. 
 
 The arrangement of transmission in the Sulzbach-Altenwald 
 is shown in Fig. 1019, which represents the engine above ground, 
 while Fig. 1020 shows the mechanism in the mine. 
 
 length of the rod is taken into account these curves are modi- 
 fied, as shown in Fig. 1021b, which is drawn for a rod four 
 times the length of the crank. This curve also shows the ratio 
 of the tangential force on the crank pin to the pressure on the 
 piston. ? 
 
 The variations in the value of v, which often differ widely 
 from the mean value Vm, must necessarily be communicated to 
 the mass of water, and hence great variations occur in the 
 stresses. For this reason the velocity of the column of water 
 must be kept within moderate limits, notwithstanding the use 
 of air vessels. These variations become much less serious 
 when two pumps are connected by cranks set at right angles 
 with each other. The corresponding velocity curve is shown in 
 Fig. 1021 c, and many pumping engines are now so made. More 
 recently triple cylinder engines are made with cranks 120° 
 apart. The velocity curves in this case are shown at d. It is 
 evident that both these forms involve complications in con- 
 struction which compare unfavorably with the direct-acting 
 pump with equalizing cylinders (see ^ 325). 
 
 Instead of uring a revolving fly-wheel, the mass of metal may 
 be arranged to swing in an arc of a circle of large radius. An 
 ingenious application of this principle has been made by Kley, 
 in his water works engine with auxiliary crank motion. The 
 proportion between the steam pressure and the vibrating mass . 
 is so arranged that the auxiliary crank comes to rest either a 
 little before, or a little beyond the dead point, so that the re- 
 turn stroke in each case can be eff'ected by the action of a 
 cataract. In the first ca5e, the fly-wbeel swings backward after 
 
 Fig. 1 02c 
 
 The arrangement is of the same form as Fig. 1018 b. The 
 steam piston c operates the two plungers b^ b.^, which in turn 
 operate the plungers c^ c/ , and c^ c./ in the mine, the pump 
 plungers e-^ e.^ being placed in the middle f 
 
 J The Gaskill pumping- engine is a duplex pump 
 cranks at risht angles, and has given excellent result; 
 port of the Gaskill Pumping Engine at Saratoga." 
 
 I Referring to the designations in Fig. 1022, we have 
 
 P' rdio and Pv = "p'c, 
 
 *See Engineering, Vol. XLI., 1886, p. 47, also H D. Pearsall, Principle ot 
 the hvdraulic ram applied to large machinery. London, 1886. 
 
 t See Zeitschriftfur Berg, Hutten und Salinenwesen, XXII. p. 179 ; XXIII., 
 p. 6; XXIV., p. 35. The depth is 820 feet, the speed from 6 to 16 double 
 strokes per minute, with a pause of one second, giving about 420 feet piston 
 speed per minute. This engine, built by the Bayenthal Machine Works at 
 Cologne in 1858. has operated regularly for 29 years without, any interrup- 
 
 the force in the path 
 of the crank-pin to 
 the pressure on the 
 
 In Fig. 1022 a and 6. Pand c are represe 
 in Fig. d, by 2' . 1' ; in c and d, the ratio of connecung rou to c 
 taken as inHnitely great. The curves are adapted 'or double- 
 When two single-acting pumps connected to right-angled c" 
 the second half of the — -<- i^:~ '■ 1- ..,,„. 
 
 ;s of Fig. i become the same form as the firs 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the pause, aud in the second case, forward.* The valve motion 
 of this form of engine is considered in the following section. 
 
 Valve Gears for Rotating Engines. 
 
 Rotative engines are distinguished from pure reciprocating 
 pressure organ escapements in that the}' deliver their effort in 
 the form of rotary motion adapted to be used for driving ruu- 
 niug machinery. Between the two forms there is also the 
 intermediate kind, with merely auxiliary rotative mechanism, 
 such as have been already referred to. The translation of 
 reciprocating aud rotary motion may be accomplished in a 
 variety of ways, but by far the most useful and best known is 
 that by which the rectilinear motion of a piston is transmitted 
 to the shaft by crank connection. 
 
 The variations in the tangential component of the pressure 
 P' on the crank pin, Fig. 1021, becomes still greater when the 
 pressure P, on the piston also varies by reason of the expan- 
 sion of the steam. For this reason some form of equalizer is 
 required in the form of a fly wheel. This latter becomes a 
 reservoir for the storage of living force. Extreme examples of 
 this action are found in rolling mill work in which within a 
 brief time a 1000 H. P. engine may be called upon to deliver 
 200H H. P., a demonstration of action of the flywheel as a 
 reservoir of power. 
 
 The valve gearing for rotative engines is an important and 
 extensive subject. In the preceding sections a series of valve 
 gears have already been described. These have all been based 
 upon the principle of operating the valves by a direct recipro- 
 cating motion, taken either from the piston or piston rod. 
 With rotative engines another method is used, the motion bein,!_^ 
 taken from the revolving portion of the machine, and this 
 method may also be adopted for pumps with auxiliary crank 
 action. We may then distinguish between : 
 
 Reciprocating valve gears, and 
 Rotative valve gears. 
 
 Rotative valve gears are desirable even for direct acting 
 pumps, but in a still greater degree are they desirable for rota- 
 tive engines. Watt's rotative engine was made with a recipro- 
 cating valve gear,t and this form has one advantage in that it 
 is adapted for rotation in either direction. 
 
 Hornblower, the inventor of the compound engine, also used 
 a reciprocating valve gear. The slide valve, invented by Mur- 
 dock, in 1799, led the way to the introduction of the rotative 
 valve gear in 1800, but the old reciprocating gear still continued 
 to be used, and is even re-invented at the present time. The 
 later direct acting steam pumps with auxiliary rotative mechan- 
 ism are almost always made with rotative valve gear. Kley's 
 pumping engine, referred to in the preceding section, is made 
 with reciprocating valve gear, since its motion is both before 
 aud behind the dead points of the crank. 
 
 The use of the slide valve, combining four valves in one mem- 
 ber, enables a very simple valve gear to be made for the ordinary 
 double acting escapement, as the diagram of a plain slide valve 
 engine, Fig. 1023, clearly shows. 
 
 -4^ 
 
 Gluckauf, 1877. No. 18, iSy'g, No. 98 ; Mon; 
 Compt. rend, de St. Etieiine, 1877 June ; 
 
 iure, 1879, p. 304, iS8i,p. 479, 18S3, p. 579. „ , 
 
 p. 349 ; Mascliinenbauer 18S1, p. 63 ; Oesterr. Ztg. f. Bera: u. Hutte: 
 
 It (Teplitz) 1882, No, 34 ; Revista metalurgica (Madrid) i! 
 
 Kohleni 
 No. 968. 
 
 tSee Farey, Treatise on the Steam Engine, London, 1827, p. 524. 
 with slide valves were only made -by Boultou and Watt, aftsr Jar 
 retired to private life. 
 
 X See Farey, p. 677. 
 
 tion of the crank is then governed by this angle, the arrange- 
 ment above giving rotation to the left, and the position i 2."' 
 for ^1, giving right-hand rotation. 
 
 The action of the slide valve may readily be represented 
 graphically. § The angle of advance and lap being given the 
 point of cut-oif can be determined by the following method. 
 
 Fig. 1024. 
 
 Fig. 1024. The circle i Q represents the circle of the eccen- 
 tric and may also be taken as the crank circle on a reduced 
 scale. C" and C" are two symmetrically placed positions ol 
 the piston at which it is desired that the cut-off" shall take place. 
 Through these points with a radius 1.3 = / describe arcs from 
 centres 1" and 3''" ; their intersections E^ and E,, with the cir- 
 cle give the angles at which the expansion Q C" and C C"^ 
 occurs, in this instance j'^ of the stroke. We now select the 
 point v.,_ of the crank circle at which the admission shall begin, 
 join F2 E^ and draw the equator 2.1.2'' parallel to it, and the 
 angle 2 . I . C'' will be the angle of advance S, and the distance 
 of 2 . I from .£"2 F,2, the outside lap <?,, for the port //. The 
 width of port a must also be chosen, and must be so taken that 
 it is less than i\ — e.^, and is represented by the parallel ^.2. 
 When the crank reaches /,, in this instance at -i%V of the stroke, 
 the exhaust begins, and the distance ?, i-i of the parallel /; /j 
 from the equator is the inside lap. 
 
 The construction is similar for the other half of the stroke. 
 The angle 6 is already known, and hence the parallel E^ V^ 
 from E-^ can be at once drawn, and the admission point V^ de- 
 termined. The outside lap e^ is somewhat less than e,^, thus 
 giving a correspondingly wider port opening. The inside lap 
 ij is made equal to u, and the bridges b,, and b.,_ are made equal, 
 thus giving a symmetrical valve seat. A certain amount of dis- 
 cretion is permissible in the selection of 62^= b-^; care being 
 taken that there is sufficient bearing at the extreme valve stroke 
 to insure tightness. The' points // and 1/ are also of impor- 
 tance, as they determine the closing of the exhaust. The cor- 
 responding piston po.sitions CiV&nA Cyare not symmetrical, 
 because ^3 = 4, but the inequality in the compression is not 
 
 Fig. 1023. 
 
 The use of an eccentric 7', and rod /j to operate the valve b< 
 is not the earliest form of gear, the first method being the use 
 of an irregularly shaped cam which brought the valve to rest 
 except at the time of opening or closing.J A feature of the 
 slide valve which was long overlooked was the fact that the 
 time of closing the steam ports //and ///could be regulated 
 so as to effect the proper expansion of the steam. In order to 
 accomplish this result without impeding the exhaust of the 
 steam, the eccentric r, nmst be given the so-called angle of 
 advance 2° i . 2' beyond the mid-position. The direction of rota- 
 
 * For a fuller account of this interesting engine (German Patent No, 2345), 
 of which more than fifty are in operation, see: Berg-u. Hiittenm. Zeitung 
 " " " ■>•-'-- = '- -^-- =' iels, 1877, No, 2 
 
 :879, No. 85;Z. D. Ingen- 
 
 The above method of considering the influence of the ratio 
 
 — is very simple. It is easy to substitute any desired ratio — ' , 
 
 but the variation is slight. It must be noted that the distance 
 I . 3 must be laid out to the actual scale of construction. 
 
 I The application of 
 
 Zeuner's diagram to 
 the same case is made 
 in the following man- 
 ner. Fig. 1025. The 
 circle I Co represents 
 as before, the eccentric 
 circle and the crank 
 pin path. The angle 
 Q . I . 2 = C^ . I . 2 ^ 
 90 — (5. With I as r. 
 centre, describe circles 
 with radii <?and i, here 
 made alike for both 
 ends of the valve, also 
 one of radius e -\- a. 
 Upon I . 2 and I . 2 as 
 'alve circles. 
 
 Fig. 1025. 
 diameters, describe circles, called the 
 
 I Formerly the so-called " valve ellipses " were used ; since i860 Zeuner'.s 
 diagram has superseded these, see Zeuner, Schiebersteuerungen, Freiburg^ 
 Englehardt, first published in Civil Ingenieure, Vol. 2, 1856. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 235 
 
 The intersection of radii from i, with these circles, give the 
 distance of the valve from its middle position for various crank 
 positions. For the position i K^, for instance, the admission 
 for the left stroke begins, at i E^ the expansion, at i / the ex- 
 haust, etc.* 
 
 The Zeuner diagram gives the valve position by means of 
 polar co-ordinates, while the writer's diagram is based on par- 
 allel co-ordinates. To be strictly correct, the valve circles i . 2 
 and I . 2' of the Zeuner diagram should fall upon each other. 
 The arrangement shown has been adopted by Zeuner as more 
 convenient in practice. 
 
 It will be seen from the preceding that the rate of expansion 
 can be varied by altering the eccentricity and the angle of ad- 
 vance. This may be carried so far that the direction of rotation 
 is changed, giving what is termed a reversing motion. A variety 
 of reversing motions have been devised, which accomplish the 
 desired relation of parts by shifting a reversing lever. Ot these 
 the most practical are the so-called link motions, of which a 
 number will here be briefly shown. f 
 
 Fig. 1027. 
 
 Fig. 1027 a, is the link motion of Pius Fink. In this form 
 the link is operated by a single eccentric instead of two, as in 
 the previous forms. This simple mechanism is not as widely 
 used as its merits deserve. 
 
 Fig. 1027 b, is the link motion of Allan, or Trick. In this 
 design the link 4, is straight, and both the link and th_ radius 
 rod are suspended and shifted by the lever connections 8' . 8, 
 and 9' . g.f 
 
 Fig. 1028. 
 
 Fig. 1028 a, is Heusinger's link motion . The link 4, vibrates 
 upon a fixed centre 9, and is operated by an eccentric i . 2. The 
 valve rod is moved from the main cross head by the connections 
 10 . II . 6 . 7, and also by the radius rod 5 . 6, which latter is 
 suspended from the bell crank 5 . 12'. 
 
 Fig. 102S b, is Klug's valve gear, known in England as Mar- 
 shall's. The curved link 4, is rigidly secured and does not 
 
 :rical, i 
 le cut-off to take place at diflfer« 
 
 t See also Zeuner, as above; Gustav Schmidt, Die Kulissensteurungen, 
 Zeitschr. d_. osten. Ing^. u. Arch.-Vereins, 1S66, Heft. II. ; also Fliegner, Ueber 
 
 move. The eccentric i . 2, moves the valve connection 6. 7, by 
 means of the lever 2.3.6, which vibrates about the point 3, on 
 the end of the radius rod, the other end of the rod being held 
 by the link block 5. Instead of the link 4, a radius arm 4^ 5, is 
 often used, the centre 4o corresponding to the centre of curva- 
 ture of the link, the action being the same in both cases.^ 
 
 Fig. 1026. 
 
 Fig. 1026 a, is an outline diagram of Stephenson's link 
 motion. The link 3' i" , of convex curvature towards the valve, 
 is given an oscillating motion by means of the two equal eccen 
 tries I . 2', I . 2" , and is suspended from its middle point 7, 
 from the bell crank lever Si'. The motion of the link is trans- 
 mitted to the valve by means of the sliding block 5, and rod 6. 
 Fig. 1026 b, is Gooch's link motion. The link 4 is driven by 
 two eccentrics as before, but is curved in the opposite direction 
 with a radius 5 . 6, and is suspended from its middle point 8 to 
 a fixed pivot 8', while the rod 5 . 6 is shifted Ijy means of the 
 lever connection 6" 10 . lo^ 
 
 Fig. 1029. 
 
 Fig. 1029 a, is Brown's valve gear, which differs from the pre- 
 ceding by the substitution of a straight link of adjustable angle, 
 for the curved guide link. 
 
 Fig. 1029 b, is Angstrom's valve gear. The point 3 of the pre- 
 ceding gear is guided by a parallel motion, and the point 6 is 
 between 2 and 3, instead of beyond. 
 
 The eight preceding valve gears operate the valve approxi- 
 mately in the same manner as if a single eccentric of variable 
 eccentricity and angular advance were used, the eccentric rod 
 being assumed of infinite length as compared with r. The path 
 of the successive positions of the middle po'nt of this imaginary 
 ecentric is called the central curve of the valve gear. 
 
 Fig. 1030. 
 
 Fig. 1030 shows the form of this curve for link motions in 
 general. Form a, is that for cases i, 4 and 5 ; form b, for case 
 I, when the eccentric rods are crossed, and form c, in which 
 the curve becomes a straight Ime, is for cases 2, 3, and 6 to 
 8. In the latter instance, the lead, or opening for admission of 
 steam at the beginning of the stroke is constant, a point con- 
 sidered by many to be of much importance. 
 
 It is possible to arrange the mechanism in such a manner that 
 the centre of the valve motion may move directly in the desired 
 central curve, as is shown in Fig. 1031. 
 
 This construction involves the rotation of the link about the 
 crank axis. The only point to be accomplished is to guide the 
 centre 2' in the path 2' . 2 . 2." . Fig. 1031 c, is a direct guide 
 for the eccentric with wedge adjustments ; b, is Sweet's valve 
 gear, in which the position of the eccentric is determined by a 
 centrifugal governor.|| This only uses the central curve from 
 
 g For a further account of this gear, see : Berliner Verhandl, 1877, p. 345, 
 1882, p. 52. Engineering, Aug. 13, Oct i, Dec. 3. 1880 ; Nov. 4, 1881 ; June 23, 
 1882; Feb. 6 and 27, 1885; Jan. 12, 18B6 ; Sept. 9, 1887. Engineer. May 26, 1887 ; 
 Feb. 23, Mar. 30, April 27, June 29, 18S3 ; June 5, 1S85. Marine Engineer, 
 1885, No. J., Civ. Ing. Heft, 7 and 8, 1882 ; Zeitschr, D. Ing.. 1885, p. 289, j886, 
 pp. 509-625 ; Revue universelle, 1S82, p 421; Busley, Schiffsraaschine, I , p. 
 454; Hartmann, Schiffsmaschinendienst, Hamburg, 1884, p. 53; Blaha, 
 Steuerfingen der Dampfmasch, Berlin, 1885, p. 65. 
 
 II See Rose, Mech. Drawing Self-taught, Philad. Baird ; for similar gears, 
 see Am. Machinist, Grist, Oct. 5, 1883 ; Ball, ditto Aug. 18, 1883 ; Harmon, 
 Gibbs & Co., ditto Nov. 24, 1S83. Also Sturtevant, The Engineer, New York, 
 Jan. 1888. 
 
20 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 z' to 20, and the path is a curve produced by a radial arm as in 
 Klug's valve gear. The valve is balanced, in order to reduce 
 friction to a minimum. 
 
 The last described valve gear possesses the advantage of great 
 simplicity but retains the disadvantage of all single valve gears 
 when used for a high expansion ratio, /. e., the admission and 
 exhaust of the steam do not remain uniform, and are often un- 
 satisfactory. For this reason many valve gears with indepen- 
 dent expansion valves have been designed. 
 
 Fig. 1032. 
 
 Three forms of gear with separate expansion valves are shown 
 in Fig. 1032. The form a, is known as Gonzenbach's ; that oib, 
 by various names; c, is the widel)' used Meyer valve gear.* 
 
 In France, Farcot's gear is used, having two loose cut-off 
 plates carried on the back of the main valve, and in America, 
 the excellent Porter- Allen engine with double valves operated 
 by two eccentrics, is much used. Rider's valve gear is a modi- 
 fication of Meyer's, Fig. 1032 c. The two cut-off plates form re- 
 verse spirals, and slide in a concave seat on the back of the 
 main valve, the admission parts being also spiral shaped and 
 cut-off varied b}' twisting the cut-off valve axialiy-t 
 
 Instead of using eccentrics to operate the valves, cams of 
 irregular outline may be adopted, these permitting a rapid 
 opening and closing of the parts. Noteworthy examples of 
 cam valve movements are to be found in the steamboats of the 
 western and southern States in America. In its original form 
 of a cock or cone a slide valve may be operated by an alternat- 
 ing motion as well as by continuous rotation. Such valves 
 have been used in steam engines by various builders, among 
 them the firm of Dingier in Zweibriicken, but the cost prevents 
 wide use. A most extensive use of oscillating cylindrical 
 valves has been developed by Corliss and his followers. 
 
 The forms of oscillating and rotating chamber gear trains 
 already described involve other means of operating the valve 
 than are used for recip- 
 rocating engines, and 
 shown in Fig. 1023. As 
 an example, the water 
 pressure engine of 
 Schmid, of Zurich, Fig. 
 1033 is given. ■ In this 
 instance the valve b, is 
 formed in the frame of 
 the machine, and is of 
 the type shown in Fig. 
 987 c. The regulation 
 of speed of rotative 
 water pressure engines 
 is a much more difficult 
 matter than is the case 
 with steam engines, 
 partly on account of 
 the lesser fluidity of 
 the water and also be- 
 cause of its slight elas- 
 ticity. An air chamber in the admission pipe as shown in Fig. 
 1033 is therefore desirable, and when extreme changes of load 
 are anticipated the valve gear should be modified. If it is 
 desired to cut off the admission of water before the end of the 
 stroke is reached, it is neces-ary to arrange a special valve to 
 permit the discharge to continue. Excellent engines with this 
 arrangement have been made by Hoppe, of Berlin, for the 
 Mansfeld mines, and for the Frankfurt railway station. 
 
 Another method is applicable to power driven pumps, an 
 illustration of which may be found in the design of Franz Hel- 
 fenberger, of Rorschach. J. This is made with a hydraulic 
 ratchet mechanism arranged in the crank disk in such a man- 
 ner as to move the crank pin to or from the centre, the ratchet 
 being operated by tappets which strike each time the crank 
 passes the dead centres. The throw of the crank is thus varied 
 to correct for variations of speed, the mechanism being con- 
 trolled by a regulator. The action is very satisfactory, giving 
 results varying from 90 to 82 per cent, for a change of power 
 
 Fig. 1033. 
 
 *An excellent gear with two valves operated hy a single eccentric, is 
 Bilgram's. See Bilgrara, Side Valve Gears. Philadelphia, 1878. 
 
 fThis is an e.vcellent problem in kinematics, the action of the valves 
 and spiral ports forming a kinematic chain. See Theor, Kinematics, p. 333. 
 
 t German Patent, No. la.oiS, Jan. 27, 1881. 
 
 L form of 
 
 from I to I, according to the investigations of Autenheimer, 
 Buss and Kuratli, in 1885. ? 
 
 A later device is that of Rigg, which also acts by varying the 
 stroke. The machine is a so-called "chamber crank train" 
 (described in Theoretical Kinematics, p. 359: English ed., p. 
 361), with four single acting cylinders carried on the revolving 
 wheel in the same manner as the machines of Ward, Schneider 
 and Moline. The length of stroke is controlled by a regulator, 
 similar to Sweet's governor, Fig. 1031 b, which operates a hy- 
 draulic escapement and adjusts the radius. This device is used 
 by Rigg for steam and air engines to control the degree of ex- 
 pansion. These latter machines are operated as high as 2000 
 revolutions without producing trembling. || 
 
 Besides the various forms of valve gear which have already 
 been described, there are also the numerous "trip" gears, of 
 which some examples have been given in \ 252. These gears 
 are made in many forms. The valve is made in four parts, as 
 indicated in Fig. 986, on account of the facility with which the 
 release can be controlled by the regulator. 
 
 The varieties of trip valve gears are most numerous, and 
 there can be little doubt that the subject has been overdone, 
 when it is considered that in many instances the entire mechan- 
 ism of the engine has no other aim than to determine the open- 
 ing and closing of the valves. In America, where this form 
 originated, the reaction has already set in, and there is a dis- 
 position to return to the single slide valve, especial care being 
 taken, however, to secure relief from pressure and to produce 
 correct motion. 
 
 There is to be found in some parts of Germa 
 valve gear which may be called an "inner " and " 
 This form does not pos- 
 sess sufficient merit to 
 meet general application, 
 but may be briefly no- 
 ticed. The mechanical 
 action of parts is not 
 different, whether the 
 "inner" or"outer " con- 
 struction is used, and 
 either arrangement may 
 be adopted, at the dis- 
 cretion of the designer. 
 
 The following exam- 
 ples will make the ar- 
 rangement apparent, as 
 well as the illustration 
 already given of Schmid's 
 water pressure engine. 
 Fig. 1033. Fig. 1033 a is 
 an "outer" valve gear 
 for a blowing cylinder, 
 and Fig. 1034 ^ is a valve 
 for a vacuum pump.^y 
 Another example is Cu- 
 velier's valve, which is 
 placed entirely outside of '\ 
 the steam cylinder, as is J 
 also the gear of Leclerq.** 
 The ordinary slide valve 
 is partly without and 
 partly within the ma- 
 chine, being outside the cylinder and within the steam chest. 
 
 C. ADJUSTABLE POWER ESCAPEMENTS 
 I 329. 
 
 Adjustabi^e Pump Gears. 
 
 The principles of adjustable escapements have already been 
 
 discussed in I 259, and examples of rigid construction given. 
 
 ? A third system is that devised by Hastie, of London (see Engineer, 
 August. 1878, and April, 1880, p. 304). Hastie controls the position of the> 
 crank pin bv means of a pair of curved cams which act against increasing 
 externalres'istance, aTid opposed by a spiral spring lor diminishing resis- 
 tance. Tliis device does not give complet- --'=--- '-- ..-- ^--^ >-...: 
 
 
 thee 
 
 s of the 
 
 1 shall 
 
 omplished by 
 e' outward 
 
 the s 
 
 • P/-"! ' 
 
 locity of a 
 
 ward. This can be approximatel> 
 of parts, but only approximately. 
 
 is a tendency for the pin al.so to mc - - 
 
 creases, instead of moving promptly inward as should 
 attempt to correct for this error, reverses it. 2. The an.s 
 
 motor is not a function of the impelling force, z. f.. the .,.„,.. ,...^ .^,. 
 
 fast or slow as the case may be, this fact also appearing in practice. This 
 is a common error into which inventors of " dvuamonietnc governors" 
 have fallen, even Poncelet, himself, having done so in his dynamometric 
 regulator. 
 
 II See Rigg. Obscure Influences of Recipro 
 Trans. Soc C. E., 1886; also Engineer, June 4. >-°°^- •■ "•^>c <: 
 on the compressed air systems of Birmingham and Leeds. 
 
 If See Oppermanii, Portfeuille econ., Feb. i8f' 
 
 ** See Genie ind. 1S64, also Schweiz. polyt. 2 
 
 ^igh Speed Engin 
 
 
 tung, 1864, 1 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 237 
 
 Their action consists of the two following operations : i. By 
 the adjustment of one part the release of another part to the 
 action of an impelling force is accomplished ; 2. By the attain- 
 ing of motion of the checked member, the checking is again 
 produced either directly or indirectly. 
 
 These principles also obtain for escapements for pressure 
 organs, and include a great number of important applications. 
 
 pressure being supplied from an accumulator. The valve b is 
 operated by the plunger b' against the pressure of the springs 
 b'" , and again reversed by the pistons Cj C^ and connection 5. 
 The piece at 6 is not a lever but is a cross head connected with 
 
 Fig. 1035. 
 
 The general scheme of such an adjustable gear for a steam 
 pump cylinder is shown in Fig. 10353. The valve chest fl?, is 
 made separate from the cylinder d, and is capable of movement 
 parallel to it, the connections a^ a.^ being made flexible. The 
 slide valve b is operated from above by the lever b\ When the 
 lever b' is lifted the pressure is admitted under the piston c 
 through the port ///, while the space above the piston is in 
 communication with the exhaust IV. This causes the piston to 
 move upwards and hence the lever c' moves the steam chest d-^ 
 also upwards, thus closing the valve ports and checking the 
 movement of the piston. If the lever b' is again lifted this 
 action will again take place, and so on until the upper limit is 
 reached. A reverse motion of the valve lever produces a cor- 
 responding reverse motion of the piston.* The same action 
 may be obtained by using the arrangement shown in Fig. 1035 b. 
 In this case the valve chest is fast to the steam cylinder, while 
 the valve is so arranged as to be moved bolh by the hand lever 
 b' and by the piston rod c. When the valve is moved by b' , the 
 •piston also moves and closes the valve by the lever c' , thus 
 iDringing itself to rest again. The piston c follows the motion 
 of the lever b' in either direction ; starting when the lever is 
 started, and stopping when it is stopped. Any resistance not 
 exceeding the force of the pressure at «,, can thus be overcome 
 while the resistance to the operator is only that due to the frac- 
 ture of the valve and connections. The practical value of this 
 device in many directions will be evident, and the examination 
 of the above simple forms will explain the action of the various 
 modifications. ' 
 
 Two constructions, designed by the author in 1866 for regula- 
 tors will be found described in the Civil Ingenieur.^ The 
 lever is connected with the valve by means of a double parallel 
 motion which is moved by the piston motion back into a posi- 
 tion parallel with the base line. 
 
 The operation was satisfactory but the apparatus was cum- 
 brous. In 1S68 Farcot constructed a similar device, using an 
 approximate parallel motion, but the apparatus was too com- 
 plicated to be practically satisfactory. J A somewhat simpler 
 construction was aftervv^ards made by Farcot, but this was also 
 too complicated for practical use.? Other designs have been 
 made by Farcot. Some recent constructions are here given. 
 
 Fig. 1036 shows the hydraulic steering gear of Bernier-Fon- 
 taine & Widmann,|| which is similar in principle to Fig. 1035 b. 
 
 In this case the controlling gear b' , consists of a small hy- 
 draulic piston. The water pressure is admitted to it through 
 the pipe a', and is opposed b}' the spring a". The two plun- 
 gers C\ and C,, act as a double acting piston, the hydraulic 
 
 Fig. 1036, 
 
 the valve. The admission and release of water pressure through 
 a' forms a long distance transmission involving the use of an- 
 other escapement ; the whole thus forming a.gear of the second 
 order. 
 
 Fig. 1037, is a neat regulator for steam engines by Guhrauer 
 & Wagner. If In this, as in , _ 
 
 Fig. 1035 a, the valve seat is 
 capable of movement in a 
 direction parallel to the pis- 
 ton c, and is made concen- 
 tric with the piston rod, the 
 valve b, being a piston valve 
 or rod moved by the gover- 
 nor. The piston c is subjec- 
 ted to full steam pressure 
 from flj on both sides through 
 the ports II and III, but as ^ 
 soon as the valve b is moved -^ 
 
 r dow 
 
 , the holes b^ : 
 
 * The escapements shown in § 259 are only single-acting, and do not admit 
 
 fCiv Ingenieur, 1879-1880, Prof. Rittershaus, Ueber Kraflvermittler. Also 
 the models at the Royal Technical High School in Berlin. 
 
 tSee Civ. Ingenieur, 1879, 1880, Rittershaus, Ueber Kraflvermittler. 
 (Intermediate Povper Mechanism.) A model of the design of 1866 is in the 
 cabinet of the Royal Technical High School at Berlin 
 
 Qo — A 1_. industiielles 1873, p. 518 ; also Oppern 
 
 lieve the pressure on one 
 side or the other, the equi- 
 librium is disturbed and the 
 wiredrawing of the steam 
 through the small ports II 
 or III prevents sudden action 
 and the piston moves until 
 the holes are closed. As 
 might be expected, this de- 
 vice is very satisfactory in 
 
 Devices of this type are 
 well adapted for steering 
 gears as well as for regula- 
 tors and a very delicate ap- 
 plication of the principle is 
 found in the Whitehead tor- 
 pedo, in which the steering FiG. 1037. 
 gear which determines the 
 
 depth of the torpedo beneath the water is thus controlled by a 
 barometric device. 
 
 Adjustable Gbars for Rotative; Motors. 
 
 The principles of the gears described in the preceding section, 
 are also applicable to rotative motors although' the arrangement 
 is not so simple as with direct reciprocating cylinders, since 
 the motion of the valve gear has also to be controlled. At the 
 same time it must be noted that the application of adjustable 
 gears to direct acting reciprocating motors is the more recent 
 of the two. The earliest rotative gear of this sort, so far as the 
 author has been able to ascertain, is that designed by F. F- 
 Sickles, of Providence, R. L, in i860 (See also |. 252}.** 
 
 H Built by Ganz & Co , of Budapesth, -wWa Meyer's and with Rider's valve 
 
 'tse^ 
 
 1, Portfeuille econ. phia 
 
 Revue IndustrieUe, if 86, p. 373; 18S7, p, i 
 
238 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Sickles' machine was made with two oscillating cylinders. 
 Both eccentrics were fastened together and were loose on the 
 crank shaft and operated by a hand wheel and spindle. The 
 steam chests oscillate with the cylinders. The crank shaft re- 
 volved in the same direction as the hand wheel is turned, but as 
 soon as the motion of the latter was stopped, the valve seat 
 moved under the valve and the ports were closed. 
 
 The more recent forms of adjustable valve gears for rotative 
 engines are made after two distinct and important principles. 
 The first form is that in which a double engine, without a fly 
 wheel and with ordinary slide valve gear without angular 
 advance is used, in order to permit rotation in either direction. 
 The ports I and IV are then made so as to be interchangeable 
 so that I can be connected either with the admission a^ or ex- 
 haust ffj ; and IV with the exhaust rtj or admission fl-j, at will. 
 This change of connection is effected by means of an auxiliary 
 valve sometimes known as a "hunting valve." This hunting 
 
 Fig. 1038. 
 
 valve can readily be controlled by hand for a steering en- 
 gine, for which it is well adapted, since the angular motion of 
 the rudder pin is limited, seldom exceeding 90°. The adjust- 
 ing valve can then be arranged according to either of the prin- 
 ciples of Fig. 1035 rt or b. The following designs will illustrate 
 the construction. 
 
 Fig. 1038 shows the steering gear of Dunning & Bossiere.* 
 The adjusting valve b rides upon a moveable valve seat bo. The 
 lower port A is always in communication with chests of the 
 two engine cylinders, while the upper port J is in communica- 
 tion with the central port under the valves. The lever b' is 
 connected with the spindle b" by an internal gear. This spindle 
 
 Fig. 1039. 
 
 Fig. 1040. 
 
 has a screw thread of steep pitch, and is connected to the ad- 
 justing valve b. The moveable valve seat bo is connected to a 
 spindle bo", which has on it a much slower screw thread, and 
 is also geared by bevel wheels to the axis c' of the drum of the 
 tiller chains. Whenever the engines are started by moving the 
 
 lever b' , the chain drum revolves and shifts the moveable seal 
 bo until the ports are again closed. The parts are so propor- 
 tioned that the angle through which the rudder is moved is 
 equal to the angle through which the lever b' has also been 
 moved. This enables the position of the rudder to be deter- 
 mined at once by noticing the position of the adjusting lever. 
 The moveable valve seat bo will be recognized as the same in 
 principle as the moveable steam chest of Fig. 1035^. The 
 spindle ^/ can be prolonged to operate an indicator on the 
 bridge for the inspection of the ofiScer in charge of the ship.| 
 
 • See Revue Industrielle, i? 
 
 Fig. 1041. 
 
 Fig. 1039 shows Britton's steeling gear.J The adjustment is 
 effected by a hand wheel and screw b' operating the lever b" at 
 6, and thus moving the valve b. At 7 this same lever is con- 
 nected to a nut on a screw thread cut on the axis c' of the chain 
 drum, so that the motion of the latter closes the valve after it 
 has been opened by b' . This corresponds in principle to Fig. 
 103S b. 
 
 Fig. 1040 shows the steering 1 
 
 gear of Douglas & Coulson.| ,''''^'~~^^ 
 
 This is another application of the /' ! ^\ 
 
 same principle as the preceding 
 device. When the adjusting screw 
 b' moves the nut, lever and rod b 
 out of the mid-position, the re- 
 volving axis c of the chain drum 
 turns the nut b^' by means of the 
 spur gearing until the dead posi- 
 tion is again reached. 
 
 F~ig. 1041 is a steering gear de- 
 signed b}' Davis & Co.|| This is a 
 simple application of the principle 
 of I<ig. 10351^. The hand whed 
 shaft b' has a screw thread at 6, 
 the nut being in the hub of the 
 worm wheel c' , the latter being 
 driven by a worm on the crank 
 shaft. Any adjustment of the 
 valve rod b by turning the hand 
 wheel results in a corresponding 
 readjustment by the motion cf 
 the worm wheel and nut derived 
 from the engine. 
 
 The second kind of adjustable 
 gear for rotative engines is much 
 less frequently used than the first 
 form. In this arrangement the 
 adjustable valve is not connected 
 with the main valve gear, but is i 
 operated independently, so that 
 the crank will make any desired 
 number of turns in either direc- 
 tion, according to the motion 
 which is given to the adjusting 
 valve. 
 
 Fig. 1042 shows Hastie's steer- 
 ing gear.T[ This is based on the 
 principle of Fig. 1035a. The mov- 
 able valve seat Tiq is operated by 
 the piston c, the eccentric c^ being 
 so placed that b^ has a reduced motion coincident with that of 
 the piston c. The valve b is operated by the eccentric b", which 
 
 t A steering gear of similar design, with moveable valve seat bo and ad- 
 justing valve, is" that of Hastie, English Patent No. 1742, 1875. Also that of 
 Holt; see Engineer, Sept , 1877, p. 221. 
 
 X See Revue Industrielle, 18S4, p. 435. 
 
 3 See Engineering. April, 1882, p. 281. 
 
 i See Engineering, April, 1882, p. 398. 
 
 IT See Rittershaus in Civil Ingenieur, already cited. 
 
 Fig. 1042. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 239 
 
 lias the same throw as Cy and is moved by a hand wheel on b' . 
 The action which follows is that the crank shaft follows the move- 
 ment which is given to the hand wheel both in direction and 
 iu revolutions. This action is similar to that of duplex pumps. 
 Any number of revolutions may be made in either directions, 
 atid the device is a genuine rotative gear, as was also the ear- 
 liest type, i. e. Sickles' gear, already described at the begin- 
 ning of this section. It would not be difficult to design a simi- 
 lar gear on the principle of Fig. 1035 b, but the author has no 
 knowledge that this has been attempted. 
 
 Adjustable valve gears for rotative engines have generally 
 been designed for steam steering engines, and in some of the 
 recent powerful marine engines they have also been used to 
 shift the link motion. There are rcany other applications 
 which might be made. The speed can also be controlled by the 
 adjusting wheel or lever b' , if desirable, by suitable connections 
 to the steam valve. As simplicity in construction is most im- 
 portant, steam economy is not considered iu designing ma- 
 chines of this kind. 
 
 D.-ESCAPEMENTS FOR MEASUREMENT OF VOLUME. 
 
 I 331. 
 Running Measuring Devices. 
 In the classification of running mechanisms operated by 
 pressure organs, it was noted that these devices could be used 
 for measurement of volume. As already shown in § 321, fluid 
 escapements are better adapted for measurements of volume 
 than for measurement of time ; but there is a close resemblance 
 between the two operations, and many fluid meters might 
 properly be classed as time-pieces. When the fluid to be meas- 
 ured is a homogeneous liquid, the quantity and volume are in 
 direct proportion. With fluids which are not homogeneous, 
 such as gases and the like, a knowledge of the density is neces- 
 sary in order to determine the quantity from the measured 
 volume ; if the density is also to be determined at the same 
 time as the measurement, the problem becomes much more 
 complicated, as will hereafter be seen. 
 
 Liquids are frequently measured by means of continuous 
 running devices ; but the choice of construction is very limited. 
 Among the open wheel devices there is available practically only 
 the form shown in Fig. 957 d, and that only when the liquid is 
 under moderate pressure. If, then, the liquid is slowly con- 
 veyed off below the horizontal plane of the axis so that the 
 acceleration of the wheel is uniform, then will the continuous 
 rotation of the wheel be proportioned to the volume of the 
 liquid passing through it. 
 
 An instance of this construction is the measuring drum in 
 Siemen's meter for spirits."* This is made with three buckets, 
 and has inward deliver}'. Since the question of the density is 
 in this case important, Siemens has devised a very ingenious 
 float arrangement by which the counting mechanism is regu- ' 
 lated to the volume of flow. 
 
 When liquids under high pressure are to be measured by 
 such a device, the wheel must be inclosed in a case in which 
 also a gaseous fluid must also be contained under a correspond- 
 ingly high pressure, which is usually inconvenient. For meas- 
 urements of high-pressure liquids, the chamber gear trains 
 already described are preferable, especially since it is practica- 
 ble to pack the working joints reasonably tight. f Wheels in 
 -which the living force of the water acts are also adapted for 
 this service, either as bucket wheels or in the form of reaction 
 wheels (see I 315). Siemens has constructed a meter of this 
 kind, iu which a reaction wheel is used, and the error of which 
 does not exceed 2 per cent., plus or minus. f 
 
 Another form, giving fair results for open channels, is based 
 on Woltmann's fan. 
 
 Gaseous fluids of small and only slightly varying density 
 can be well measured by modifications of bucket water wheels ; 
 the conditions being practically reversed from those already 
 considered, and the water now being the surrounding medium, 
 and the gas the one to be measured. 
 
 One of the best known and most widely used devices for this 
 purpose is the ''wet" gas meter of Clegg and Crosley, shown 
 in Fig. 1043 a. The revolving drum is a wheel with four 
 buckets, which is driven by the passage through it of the gas. 
 The gas is introduced just above the horizontal plane through 
 
 the axis, and the liquid used is water ; or, if there is danger of 
 freezing, glycerine may be substituted. If the level of the 
 water is lowered through evaporation or leakage, the volume 
 of gas passing through the meter at each revolution will be 
 increased, and to avoid this a float is so arranged that the gas 
 will be shut off' if the water level falls too much. 
 
 *See Zeitschr. D. Ing., 1874, p. loS, 
 Kussia, Sweden and Germany for me 
 very satisfactory. In Sweden, in 1F83, 
 careful hand measurement gave 15,365,1 
 
 This 
 
 ess of only 
 
 n showed that a m 
 per cent alcohol, £ 
 
 FiG. 1043. 
 
 For very accurate mef surements of gas, Sanderson's meter is 
 used. Fig. 1043 '^ i'l the water level remains unaltered so long 
 as the vessel is kept supplied. The serai-cylindrical float is 
 pivoted on the axis C, and is so constructed that the centre of 
 gravity of all the sectors is the same as if the sheet metal body 
 were homogeneous. If the float moves through an angle a 
 with a sector A CB, the thrust of the sector A' CD of an angle 
 :8o° — 2 a will pass through the axis, with force P' for the sector 
 A'CB. The weights P of the two equal sectors A CB and 
 A'C B act downward through their centres of gravity, and are 
 also equal to P' ■ In order that there may be equilibrium, if 
 for any chosen value of a, P' shall equal 2 P, the specific 
 gravity of the float (assumed to be homogeneous) must be 
 equal to one-half that of the liquid in the trough, i. <?., = Yz for 
 water, or ^0.63 for glycerine. 
 
 The preceding meters have heretofore been used only for 
 gases under low pressure, but are equally well adapted for 
 gases at high pressures, such as compressed air for power 
 transmission, simply by increasing the strength of the case. 
 This has been done at the author's suggestion in connection 
 with the compressed air system at Birmingham, as has also 
 been the case with the "dry" meter described in the next 
 section. 
 
 Anemometers, used for measuring the flow of air, generally 
 belong to that class of running devices which are driven by the 
 living force of the pressure organ (see I 315). They are usually 
 screw turbines, or some modification of them. It is always 
 necessary to take into account the stress of the gaseous me- 
 dium, in order to obtain the desired measurement, since the 
 apparatus only determines ihe volume.? 
 
 ? 332. 
 Escapements for Measurement of Fluids. 
 
 There exist certain defects in running devices when used as 
 fluid meters, such as the journal friction, and in chamber gear 
 trains the surface friction, which render the results inaccurate 
 for fluids of weak flow. For this reason piston meters have 
 been devised, these also utilizing the power of the fluid, and 
 for these the application of escapements is necessary. Meters 
 constructed on this principle have been used especially for 
 measuring water. Among these may be mentioned Kennedy's 
 water meter, a form which has been extensively used.|| This 
 is usually made with a vertical cylinder, the valve being a 
 fourway cock operated by a tumbling gear similar to that of 
 Belidor's water-pressure engine {\ 325). 
 
 Jopling's water meter ^f is a piston escapement of the second 
 
 tSee the >Jrown Water Meter in ! 
 p. 81 ; also Payton's Water Meter. 
 
 X The older form (1857, Z. D. Ing., p. 1(54) was on the principle of Segner's 
 wheel, Fig. 962 a ; the more recent design is made like the turbine of Fig 
 .963 d. At the end of 1886 Siemens & Halske had made 88,500 meters, and 
 the English house of Siemens Bros., 130,000 of the old and new patterns. 
 
 g Running devices mav also be used to n 
 and in fact the oldest con.structions for this purpose, the clepsydra, the 
 sand glass, etc., belong to this class. Escapement clocks were introduced 
 only in the middle ages. There have been numerous recent attempts to 
 make running time-pieces. (See Redtenbacher, Bewegungs-mechanismen, 
 Heidelberg, 1S61, p. 34, pi. 79; also Riihlmann, Allgemeine Maschinenlehre 
 I., Braunschweig, 1862, p. 62 ) The problem is a difficult one, since it in- 
 volves the construction of a running device which shall operate both with 
 a uniform and a determinate velocity. Examples are found in the driving 
 mechanism of astronomical instruments, in which the motion is transmit- 
 ted by friction, controlled by revolving fly-wheel devices. With these may 
 be included the fan regulators for the .striking mechanism of clocks, and 
 similar applications. 
 
 II See Revne Industrielle. 188 r, p. 205. 
 
 if See Z. D. Ing., 1S57, p. 164; Maschinenbauer, Vol. XVI., 1881, p. 324; 
 Technologiste, 1S82, Vol. 42, p. 95. 
 
240 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 order. There are two parallel horizontal double-acting cylin- 
 ders, each operating the valve of the other. 
 
 Fig. 1044 shows a section of Schmid's water meter. This is 
 made with two single-acting pistons, each also being the valve 
 of the other, and the whole forming with the crank connection 
 an escapement of the third order. 
 
 Fig. 1044. 
 
 Escapement meters are also used for gaseous fluids. A very 
 extensively used form is the so-called "dry" meter used for 
 measuring illuminating gas. These have, in many cases, super- 
 seded the "wet" meter, since the use of the liquid seal is 
 avoided. In order to prevent friction, these meters are con- 
 structed with flexiWe diaphragms instead of pistons, much like 
 the diaphragm pumps shown in g 317. A good example is 
 Glover's dry meter, which is an escapement of the second 
 order connected to a crank shaft which operates the counting 
 mechanism. The diaphragms are made of linen, made imper- 
 vious to gas by a gelatine sizing. These meters do not show a 
 higher degree of accuracy than the wet forms. 
 
 I 333- 
 Technologicai. Applications of Pressure Organs. 
 
 The applications of pressure organs for technological uses 
 are not so numerous or important as those in which they act 
 in connection with the help of various machines. These appli- 
 cations are not dissimilar from those of tension organs, which 
 have already been discussed in ^ 263. A general survey will 
 be of value for the better understanding of the whole sub- 
 ject. 
 
 The use of a pressure organ from a technological standpoint 
 consists in so using it that the result is a modification in form 
 or shape either of another body directly by the action of the 
 pressure organ or of the pressure organ itself by the other 
 body. This "forming" action adds a fourth manner of action 
 for pressure organs to those already classified in ^ 309, so that 
 we now have : 
 
 1. Guiding, 
 
 2. Supporting, 
 
 3. Driving, 
 
 4. Forming, 
 
 as the four methods of action or application. Of these the 
 first three belong to all classes of machine elements used 
 in construction ; the fourth falls within the domain of tech- 
 nology. 
 
 In order to speak comprehensive!}' of the action of pressure 
 organs, we will arrange them in five groups, according to the 
 method of action, viz.: by FilHnir, Discharging, Internal Flow, 
 Jet Action and Inclosing or Covering. 
 
 a. Filling. 
 
 I. The ease with which pressure organs can be led into de- 
 sired channels on account of their fluidity is applied in the 
 operations of casting. Metals which it is desired to make into 
 given forms are rendered fluid by heat, and thus converted 
 into pressure organs which can readily be run into moulds. 
 In similar manner wax, stearine, parafiin, etc, are cast, in 
 making candles and the like, the formed material resuming 
 its solid state on cooling. Plaster, cement, magnesia or similar 
 materials may also be made fluid by mixing with water, and 
 then cast into forms which afterwards become hard by com- 
 
 bination with water and carbonic acid. Other and similar 
 methods are adopted for other materials. 
 
 2. Glass, in a plastic state, is formed by pressure in moulds 
 or by passage between rollers. 
 
 3. In cases where complete fluidity is unnecessary, the mate- 
 rial may be softened by heat, and then shaped in suitable 
 presses, the slight fluidity of the material being overcome by 
 the mechanical piessure of the machines. 
 
 4. Lead is suSiciently soft to be readily formed by the action 
 of a plunger press, and is thus formed into bullets in arsenals, 
 and also made into pipe. 
 
 5. The forming of a pressure organ by cooling is shown in 
 the action of an ice machine, by means of which water may be 
 given the form of sheets, rods, blocks, etc. 
 
 6. Copper, tin, zinc, etc., and also gold and silver are formed 
 under the drop press in dies. Steel and wrought iron are 
 heated for this purpose ; but sheet steel is stamped cold. 
 
 7. Wire, already considered as a tension organ, may also be 
 treated as a pressure organ, having great similarity to a flowing 
 stream with its curves. Examples are found in the ingenious 
 machines for making hooks and eyes, and also wire chains, 
 made by William Prym, of vStolberg. Another illustration is 
 the machine of Hoff' & Vogt for rolling spiral springs. 
 
 8. Hydraulic or lever presses are used to press clay in a 
 plastic condition into various dies to make bricks. Bricks are 
 also forms of compressed turf, culm, etc Chocolate and cocoa 
 are also compressed in moulds. 
 
 9. The so-called art work in pressed wood is composed mix- 
 ture of sawdust formed into a solid mass by great pressure in 
 suitable moulds. 
 
 10. Papier mache is formed into shape from paper pulp re- 
 duced to a doughy consistency, and then subjected to heavy 
 pressure. 
 
 ir. In the use of moulding machines the pattern is first 
 pressed into the moist sand, this being a granular pressure 
 organ, this being followed by the casting of the liquid metal in 
 the mould thus formed. This gives two applications of form- 
 ing, — the first in moulding, the second in casting. 
 
 12. Compresses, such as are used for packing merchandise of 
 powdered or fibrous nature, are also examples in point. These 
 are used for baling hay, cotton, wool and similar materials 
 under very great pressure. 
 
 b. Discliarging ; Formation of Jets. 
 When a pressure organ is contained in a guiding inclosure, 
 and by properly directed pressure is forced out through a suit- 
 able mouthpiece, the jet which is emitted is formed with a 
 cross section corresponding to that of the mouthpiece used. 
 Jets may be formed in this way not only from materials which 
 flow readily, but also from those which are of a tough or 
 doughy consistency, so that even moderately dense substances 
 may be thus formed: 
 
 1. The clay presses made by Schlyckersen and others are 
 used to form tiles, drain pipes, etc., by this jet method of form- 
 ing, the issuing stream being cut off' at regular intervals by a 
 wire cutter. The clay in such machines is effectively forced 
 through the discharge opening by an arrangement of screw- 
 propelling blades. 
 
 2. In the model press the dough is forced by a piston up 
 through a die plate in which various shaped holes (such as 
 stars, circles and the like) are made, and the issuing streams 
 are sliced off by a wire cutter and dried. 
 
 3. The so-called artificial silk of De Chardonne is a jet forma- 
 tion of nitro-cellulose. This is made into a semi-fluid mass 
 with iron or tin chloride and alcohol, and forced through a 
 tube of glass or platinum of about a sixteenth of an inch bore 
 drawn to a fine aperture, whence it issues in a hair-like thread. 
 It is then toughened by passing through acidulated water, after 
 which it is wound on a reel. 
 
 4. In the manufacture of paper the liquid pulp is discharged 
 in a broad, flat sheet by its own pressure and the superfluous 
 water first removed by absorption, after which the paper is 
 dried and made into sheets. 
 
 5. Lead pipe is made by a process of jet formation in a pipe 
 press. The mass, which is only moderately heated, is forced 
 lay piston pressure through the die in a continuous stream. 
 
 6. The insulating covering of gutta percha is formed upon 
 wires used for electrical conductors by a jet action. 
 
 7. The common punching press, used for punching rivet holes 
 in plates, really works with a jet action, as has been shown by 
 the celebrated researches of Tresca upon the flow of metals. 
 
 8. The drawing press for forming various cups, pans and 
 other household articles, also cartridge shells, from sheet metal, 
 operates by a kind of jet action, one part of the mouthpiece 
 being forced against the other. The powerful presses built by 
 Erdmann Kircheis at Aue, and by the Oberhagener Machine 
 Works, operate by mcan^ of cranky and cams, while those of 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 241 
 
 Lorenz, of Carlsruhe, work by hydraulic pressure. Drawing 
 presses are much used in the United States.* 
 
 9. The drawing bench for the manufacture of wire as well as 
 rods is an example of jet action. The wire acts both as a ten- 
 sion and a pressure organ, since it is pulled through the die in 
 which it is formed. Drawn brass tubing is found in a similar 
 manner and of various shaped sections. 
 
 10. The manufacture of shot is a variety of jet action, the 
 melted alloy of lead and arsenic being poured through a sieve 
 and permitted to fall in streams from the top of a shot tower, 
 the drops assuming a spherical shape during the fall. 
 
 11. In gas lighting, the shape of the flame is formed by the 
 jet tip on the burner, the flat flame in one form being made by 
 two round inclined jets impinging against each other. 
 
 c. Internal Flow. 
 
 There are a number of pressure organs which are not homo- 
 geneous, being composed of granular and fluid materials, or of 
 fluid materials of different density. It is a frequent problem in 
 technology to separate such substances so as to divide the 
 liquid from the solid, the large from the small, the light from 
 the heavy, etc. In general, this can only be done by some 
 application of the method of internal flow in the mass of the 
 pressure organ. The methods include the use of artificially 
 produced high pressures, the natural gravity of the material, 
 or in some instances by vibratory or other motion, i. e., by the 
 action of the living force of the material, or rather by the un- 
 equal action of the various portions. The following examples 
 will illustrate the various methods : 
 
 1. Presses used for the extraction of liquids (such as wine 
 presses), presses for seed oil, olive oil, also for oil cake, stear- 
 ine, beet root, yeast, etc., all act to separate the liquid from the 
 solid portion by the action of internal flow. 
 
 2. Filter presses act to separate the fluid from the more slug- 
 gish portion of the mass, the liquid passing through the minute 
 openings of the filter under the action of the high pressure, 
 while the slimy mass remains behind. Filter presses are used 
 for separation of colors, stearine, yeast, starch, sugar, potters' 
 clay, etc. 
 
 3. The purification of water under natural pressure is effected 
 by conducting it through settling and filtering tanks ; also by 
 special devices (as that of G. Niemax, of Cologne, German 
 patent No. 30,032), by which the water is rendered harder or 
 softer, as may be required.! 
 
 4. In mining and machine shop operations, the separation of 
 mingled pressure organs by difference of internal flow is effected 
 in various ways, showing very effective applications of the laws 
 of hydraulics. t 
 
 5. Various applications of sieves are used to separate granular 
 materials of different sizes, as are also different devices which 
 act by shaking or jigging the material, the separation thus 
 being effected by differences of living force. 
 
 6. Centrifugal machines are used for drying yarn, wet clothes, 
 etc., although the action in this case might be more properly 
 termed external, rather than internal flow. 
 
 7. Another application of the centrifugal machine is for the 
 separation of materials by their difference in specific gravity, 
 as in the case of the machines for separating cream from 
 milk. 
 
 8. In the Bessemer process the molten fluid mass of iron is 
 penetrated by a gaseous pressure organ, i. <?., air, under high 
 pressure, producing a violent internal flow and agitatioti, and 
 burning out the carbon of the iron. 
 
 d. Jet Action. 
 A considerable amount of living force may be stored up in a 
 fluid jet. This may be utilized in a limited number of ways, a 
 few of which are here given : 
 
 1. The system of hydraulic gold mining used in California, 
 to a great extent, is an important application of the jet. § 
 
 2. Tilghman's sand blast acts by means of a jet of air which 
 sets a stream of sand particles in motion. This sand blast is 
 used to cut glass, surface metals, sharpen files, clean castings, 
 and has many other useful applications. 
 
 3. Machines for cleaning grain are made to throw the grain 
 against frictional intercepting surfaces, thus removing dust and 
 other impurities. 
 
 *See address by Oberlin Smith (Jour. Frank. Inst., Nov., 1S86, "Flow ot 
 Metals in the Drawing Press "). The American presses are made for rapid 
 duplicate work, the German for more general service with various special 
 attachments, which latter Mr. Smith commends. We may be permitted to 
 accept and return the compliment as regards the other side of the question. 
 
 t See Z. D. Ingenieure, April, 1888, p. 377. 
 
 *" ^ of the separation of pulverized minerals by means of 
 
 o portions of various fineness, see Z. D. Ing., April, 1888, 
 
 § See Appleton's Cyclopedia of Applied Mechanics, New York, 1880, Vol. 
 II., p. 434- 
 
 4- The impinging of a rapidly issuing jet of steam against the 
 bell of a whistle causes a series of rapid vibrations, producing 
 sound. 
 
 5. In the reed pipes of organs and similar musical instru- 
 ments, the notes are produced by the action of a jet of air 
 causing the reeds to vibrate. 
 
 6. The "Siren " used for fog signals acts by setting a column 
 of air in vibration by rapidly succeeding jets of steam, causing 
 a shrill note to be emitted. 
 
 7. In the simple organ pipe a column of air is set into musi- 
 cal vibration by a jet of air. The church organ is probably the 
 oldest type of pressure organ escapement, the release being 
 effected by the hand of the performer. The modern church 
 organ consists of a series of the fifth order, namely : a water 
 motor (hydraulic escapement), bellows (escapement) and regu- 
 lator (checking escapement), stops (escapements), and key- 
 board with pneumatic action (escapement). In an organ man- 
 ual of 10 octaves there are 120 escapements, each with n stops, 
 with n different pipe connections arranged together. In this 
 connection also may be mentioned barrel organs, in which the 
 closing and releasing of the escapements is effected mechan- 
 ically. 
 
 e. Inclosing or Covering. 
 As a counterpart to the inclosing of a pressure organ in a 
 pipe or vessel, we have the inclosing or covering of a solid 
 body by a pressure organ. This occurs when a body is sub- 
 merged in a liquid, when its surface at least is covered with 
 the liquid. A partial covering may also take place, as, for 
 instance, one side of a flat piece, or by distribution after any 
 particular plan. These conditions appear in a number of tech- 
 nical operations, as will be seen : 
 
 1. In the operations of dyeing, the articles are immersed in 
 a liquid containing the coloring matter, many machines having 
 been devised to assist in the operations. 
 
 2. In the various operations of finishing fabrics, heavy flow- 
 ing liquids are used, distributed by various brush devices, this 
 forming at least a combination of the second order, since the 
 liquid must first be distributed to the brushes, and then to the 
 fabric. 
 
 3. In coating paper with gum, the gum is distributed in the 
 form of a liquid solution. 
 
 4. In the manufacture of colored papers and leathers, the 
 color is distributed in liquid form over the desired surfaces. 
 
 5. The various operations of printing from surfaces of stone, 
 copper, zinc, steel, etc., involve devices of the third and fourth 
 order for the distribution of the printing material before it is 
 finally transferred to the paper. 
 
 6. In the operation of printing fabrics and paper hangings, 
 the printing surfaces are charged with color by a distributing 
 system usually of the third order, and then impressed upon the 
 
 printed fabric is dried, usually, by a current of 
 
 fabric. The 
 
 warm air, which is merely a gaseous pressure organ. In s 
 instances the printed surfaces are dusted with felt dust while 
 yet sticky, and then finally dried. 
 
 7. In printing woven fabrics, the processes of (5) and (6) are 
 used with a mordant liquid, and the material then immersed in 
 dye, and finally the color washed out of the unprinted portion 
 with water. 
 
 8. The operations of electro plating surfaces with gold, silver, 
 copper, brass, zinc, nickel, etc., involve the use of a physical 
 apparatus, i. e., the galvanic battery. The disposition of the 
 covering may be modified by covering portions with a non- 
 conducting material. Another operation in electrotechnics con- 
 sists in the decomposition and deposition of minerals by means 
 of electric currents generated mechanically. 
 
 9. In the use of illuminating gas, the method of making a 
 gas poor in carbon, and then enriching it either with a rich 
 hydrocarbon gas is a form of combination in the line of inclo- 
 sing. The incandescent gas lamps operate by the surrounding 
 of a network of magnesia or zircon with the flame of a weak 
 illuminating gas. 
 
 10. The jet condenser acts by surrounding the discharge ot 
 exhaust steam with cold water. 
 
 11. In the surface condenser the tubes are surrounded with 
 water and filled with the steam to be condensed, an arrange- 
 ment of the second order. 
 
 12. The apparatus for cooling beer consists of an arrange- 
 ment of parallel surfaces of sheet metal between which the 
 cooling water flows, thus forming an apparatus of the second 
 order. 
 
 The above outline of technological applications of pressure 
 organs is only an indication of the systematic treatment of 
 which the subject is capable, but cannot here be carried farther, 
 as it does not properly belong to the subject of machine de- 
 sign. The fifty examples given might each be made the sub- 
 
242 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ject of a chapter, man}' of entire books. Even these can lay 
 no claim to be a complete survey of the subject ; rather are 
 they merely a beginning. They will serve, however, to indi- 
 cate at least how great a number of machines and mechanical 
 appliances are involved in the use of pressure organs, and how 
 these may all be considered to rest upon the same founda- 
 tions. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 CONDUCTORS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 Empirical Formula for the Thickness of Cast Iron 
 Pipes. 
 
 Among the various forms of conductors for pressure organs 
 mentioned in | 310, the most important are the various kinds 
 of pipes. These are made of a great variety of materials, such 
 as cast iron, steel, copper, bronze, brass, lead, wood, clay, 
 paper, etc. For underground pipes for water, air and gas, cast 
 iron has been most extensively used, and it is yet a question 
 whether wrought iion or steel will successfully displace it. 
 
 Cylindrical cast iron pipes, which will first be considered, 
 are subjected to so many varying conditions in the course of 
 manufacture that the determination of the proper thickness to 
 resist moderate internal pressures cannot be made upon strict 
 theoretical principles, and recourse must be had to empirical 
 formulae. It is customary to subject cast iron pipes to a hy- 
 draulic test both at the foundry and a] so at the place where 
 they are to be used, to a pressure of i j^ to 2 times the working 
 pressure to which they are afterwards to be subjected. As a 
 protection against rust, the pipes are also coated with asphal- 
 tum, applied at a high temperature, or in special cases where 
 the expense is permissible, they may be enameled. 
 
 I,et the internal diameter be D, and the thickness d, we may 
 make : 
 
 For cast iron pipes for water, air or gas. 
 
 c5 =0.315-+. 
 
 D 
 
 (318) 
 
 For cast iron steam pipes and air pump cylinders, 
 <5 = 0.472'^ -f— (319) 
 
 For bored cast iron steam cylinders and pump barrels, 
 <5 = 0.787 + — (320) 
 
 Example i.— A pipe 12 inches bore, according to (318), should be of a 
 thickness fi = 0.315 + 5- = 0-465". or in practice say J^ in., while for a .steam 
 pipe, according to (319), we have : 6 = 0.472 + — = 0.7^2", say ^^ in. 
 
 Example 2.— The pipes used in sections ii and i-i of the Frankfort water 
 system, already shown in Fig. 955, and subjected to a pressure of 270 pounds 
 (18 atmospheres) are 15% inches (400 mm.) and 20 inches (508 mm.) diam- 
 eter, and according to, (318) the corresponding thicknesses should be: 
 
 0.315 + J, =0,56511 
 
 The pipes for the 
 
 Exc 
 
 •The p 
 
 „ oftheMontCeni ,,„ — , , 
 
 iressure of about 75 pounds, and were exposed in lengths of ovs 
 ig during winter and summer. The thickness of these pipes w 
 mm.), and by (318) the thickness would be 0.41 in. 
 
 Table of Weights of Cast Iron Pipe. 
 
 Diameter, 
 D. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Weight per Foot, for T/jic/cness 6. 
 
 % 
 
 y^ 
 
 'A 
 
 ys 
 
 )^ 
 
 r. 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 5-53 
 10.30 
 IS-40 
 20.3 
 
 li 
 
 23.50 
 30.9 
 38.3 
 
 45-7 
 53-1 
 60.4 
 67.8 
 75-2 
 82.6 
 89.9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 32.0 
 41.8 
 
 71.4 
 81.2 
 91.0 
 
 lOI 
 
 121 
 131 
 
 140 
 
 160 
 170 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 65-3 
 77.7 
 89.4 
 
 102 
 
 I'S 
 
 127 
 
 139 
 
 164 
 176 
 188 
 
 213 
 225 
 237 
 249 
 262 
 274 
 286 
 298 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 94.1 
 109 
 124 
 139 
 
 III 
 183 
 198 
 212 
 227 
 242 
 257 
 
 III 
 
 299 
 315 
 329 
 344 
 359 
 
 
 
 14 
 16 
 18 
 20 
 22 
 24 
 26 
 
 128 
 
 lil 
 
 180 
 196 
 214 
 231 
 249 
 266 
 283 
 300 
 3«8 
 336 
 353 
 370 
 387 
 405 
 422 
 
 "187' 
 207 
 227 
 246 
 266 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 305 
 325 
 345 
 364 
 384 
 403 
 423 
 443 
 462 
 482 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sockets and flanges should be calculated separately. 
 
 Pipes for High Pressures. 
 
 In determining the thickness of pipes which are to be sub- 
 jected to an unusually high pressure, Ivame's formula (see § 19) 
 may be applied to advantage, /. e. : 
 
 D 
 
 -<im-^^ 
 
 (321) 
 
 in which p is the internal pressure per unit of area, 6" the per- 
 missible stress in the material ; the external pressure being so 
 small as to be neglected. 
 
 If in the preceding formula we substitute the external diam- 
 eter, Z?o = -^ + 2c5, we get : 
 
 A, 
 D ~~ 
 
 
 (322) 
 
 This shows that the internal pressure p should in no case ex- 
 ceed the permissible stress .S" of the material. If we make .S 
 equal to the modulus of rupture for tension, and make p^ S, 
 the pipe will be burst according to either formula however 
 great the thickness 6 be made. 
 
 For given dimensions and pressures we have for the stress S 
 in the walls of a pipe : 
 
 Z?o=^ + n' 
 
 t 4- ^2 
 
 (323) 
 
 in which the ratio -, 
 
 = 0.787+- 
 
 - = 0.944", say 1 inch. 
 
 The use of cast iron pipes has greatly increased during the 
 past twenty years. Manufacturers have been disposed to make 
 them of excessive thickness, not only to obtain the increased 
 security, but to add to the cost, — a matter which public offi- 
 cials are sometimes not disposed to discourage, but which has 
 frequently caused such installations to be excessively expen- 
 sive. Hundreds of thousands of pounds of metal have thus 
 been uselessly buried in the earth, — a waste which the co-oper- 
 ation of hydraulic and gas engineers might join in reducing. 
 
 * The foundi-y of Roll, at Solothurt 
 pipes, using the formula S »^ 0.24" + 
 
 s indicated by ip, as already discussed ii 
 
 ^ 90. From this we have the following values : 
 
 high grade, make still lighter ■^ 
 
 
 '1' 
 
 s 
 
 p 
 
 41 
 s 
 
 p 
 
 A' 
 s 
 p 
 
 0.50 
 1.67 
 
 3-15 
 0.85 
 
 0.52 
 
 3-42 
 6,68 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.76 
 3-73 
 
 0.87 
 7.23 
 
 0.56 
 1.91 
 
 3-91 
 7,86 
 
 0.58 
 0.78 
 0,89 
 
 =■13 
 4-32 
 9-52 
 
 2.25 
 
 4.56 
 
 0.91 
 10.63 
 
 0,64 
 2.39 
 
 0,66 
 2.54 
 
 0,82 
 5-ix 
 
 0.93 
 
 2,72 
 
 —, 
 
 0.94 
 16.17 
 
 2,92 
 5.79 
 19.51 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ve have S = 0.39, D = 
 
 e J> = 72 pounds, we have from the ; 
 
 When/> is small, we may use instead of (321) for a sufficient 
 approximation (compare Case I., ? 19) 
 
 Example 2. — Applying these iormute to the data of the preceding exam- 
 ples, we have 5 = 0.5^ = o.s^^-^^^ = 710 lbs., as an approximate value. 
 
 h a single , 
 1 10 inches 
 
 Example 
 
 3 —A pipe 4 inches diameter 
 s. It is required that the str 
 
 — = 2.13, which from the 
 
 is subjected to a 
 ess .5- shall not ex 
 
 water pressure 
 ceed 3200 pound 
 
 This gives 
 
 above table 
 
 give 
 
 i^ = 0.60. Fro 
 
 this we ha 
 
 ve /)„ = ^ = ^ = 6.66 
 
 n. In some 
 
 insta 
 
 nces the pressu 
 
 may reach 
 3200 X 1.5 = 
 lbs. has an 
 
 as high as 2250 pounds, in 
 49CX) lbs. A 4 in. pipe at the 
 outside diameter of 6.4 ins. 
 
 which case 
 Frankfurt 
 
 the stress would reac 
 Railway Station at 15c 
 
 Example 
 
 4 -The Helfenberger AVat 
 
 er Pressure 
 
 Engi 
 
 ne at Hersbrug 
 
 r Rheineck, of 40 H. P., has a cast iron feed pipe under a head of 1312 
 leet giving a pressure of 569 pounds. The pipe is 14,760 feet long, and 4.£ 
 ins. diameter, and the thickness in the lower third of its length is 0.43 ins. 
 This gives D^ = 5-46 ins., D = 4.6, and from (333) : 
 
 ' 5.46^- 
 
 = 3357 lbs. 
 
 ■e for the follo\ 
 
 3176 
 
 The above values of .S are taken as acting upon the longitu- 
 dinal section of the cylinder, which is the case when a pipe is 
 open at both ends. When the ends are closed, there is also to 
 be considered the stress on a section at right angles to the axis, 
 which is equal to )4 S. This, combined with the previous 
 value, gives for the inclined resultant, \^S''-\- (0.5 S)' = 1.12 5" 
 as the minimum. These conditions exist in the case of a 
 cylinder for a hydraulic press. These are usually made of cast 
 iron, and the increased thickness 
 . ! , adds greatly to the weight. It is 
 
 r ^ "■ therefore important to use mate- 
 
 rial capable of withstanding a high 
 stress, and to take great care in 
 construction and in the disposition 
 of the material. Repeated melt- 
 ings of the iron give more homo- 
 geneous castings. Good results are 
 also obtained by adding wrought 
 iron in the cupola. By thus im- 
 proving the quality of the metal, 
 the permissible stress may be in- 
 creased. A stress as high as 10,000 
 lbs. may be permitted when the 
 casting is assuredly sound. Simi- 
 lar conditions obtain when bronze 
 is used. With good bronze, if no 
 alteration of form is to occur, the 
 stress should not be greater than 
 5000 lbs. If it is desired to go 
 higher, some harder composition, 
 such as manganese bronze, must 
 be used. 
 
 A few practical examples will be 
 given : 
 
 I 
 
 Fig. 1045. 
 
 eter of ram, A'= 18 inches; bore of cylin- 
 der, Z> = 20 inches ; thickness, S = S^/, in. 
 The load was 650 tons = 1,456,000 pounds. 
 The pressure in the cylinder being 5900 
 lbs. per square inch, we get from (323) 
 the stress 5 = 10,500 lbs. The cylinder is 
 shown in Fig. 1045. 
 Example 7.— In the construction of the 
 
 Britannia Tubular Bridge several forms of hydraulic presses were used. 
 
 One of these was a double press with cylinders of the same dimensions 
 " as in the preceding example. The load on each ram was only 460.5 tons, 
 
 and the cylinder pressure 4190 lbs., giving a stress on the metal 5= 7460 
 
 pounds. 
 Example 8. — The press which sustained the heaviest load on this great 
 
 •work was one which lifted 1144 tons, or 5,562,590 pounds. This was made 
 
 gle cylinder with a ram 20 inches diameter, cylinder 22 in. bore, 
 :hes thick. The water pressure was 8400, and the stress in the 
 metal, according to (323), was 14,500 lbs. ! When the tube of the bridge had 
 been raised 24 feet, the cylinder gave way, and the load dropped upon the 
 safety suppoits, but was seriously damaged. The fracture was not longitu- 
 dinal, but in the cross section near the bottom of the cylinder, as shown in 
 Fig. 1046. The fracture was doubtless due to the sharp angle at the bottom. 
 A new cylinder was made and successfully used, the bottom being altered 
 in shape as indicated by the dotted lines. The first cylinder which was 
 cast for this press was moulded with the bottom up, but was rejected as 
 being porous; the second was cast bottom down, and gave way in use, as 
 above described ; the third, for which the iron was melted twice, was suc- 
 cessfully used to the end, while a fourth, which was maue as a reserve, was 
 
 Example g. — A press designed for making compressed emery wheels has 
 the following dimensions: V = 28.35 in., Vq = 40.94 in. K = 27.56 in. 
 
 P= 2,640,000 lbs., from which p = 4425 pounds. We have ii = — ^ = 0.69, 
 
 whence 5 = 12,134 pounds, which must be considered a high stress. 
 
 More recently the cylinders for hydraulic presses have been 
 cast of steel, permitting stresses as high as 20,000 to 28,000 
 pounds. Modifications in the method of construction may 
 also be made to enable cast 
 iron to stand higher pressures. 
 
 The danger due to casting the 
 bottom in one with the cylinder 
 may be avoided. The method 
 used by Hummel, of Berlin, is 
 to make the cylinder as a ring, 
 and the bottom as a separate 
 plate (Fig. 1047). 
 
 IvOrenz, of Carlsruhe, makes 
 the bottom separately and screws 
 it in, as shown in Fig. 1048. 
 
 By increasing the diameter of 
 the ram to exert a given force, 
 
 the pressure of the water re- \ j /'' 
 
 quired will be reduced, and the \ j 
 
 stress 5" will be less. This is not '• — ]..-> 
 
 attended with a proportional in- j 
 
 crease in the amount of metal 
 required, but on the contrary 
 
 with a reduction. If the cross Fig. 1046. 
 
 section of the cylinder be F, we 
 
 have F ^ TT (^D -\- i) 6. Substituting the value of 6 from (321), 
 , ■1TD-2P 
 
 we get.F=X - 
 
 md introducing K, 
 
 '<§)' 
 
 
 which, for any chosen value of .S, diminishes as p is reduced. 
 
 Exaviple 10. — In a hydraulic pre.ss by Hummel, for making rollers o< 
 compressed paper, there are two cylinders of the form shown in Fig. 1047, 
 placed side by side. The diameter A' of the ram is 23 inches, and the cylin- 
 der diameter n 24 inches, the thickness S being 8"^ inches. The load E on 
 the ram is 2,200,000 pounds. The water pressure is 5174 pounds, and the 
 stress on the material about 10,000 pounds. If we increase K to 26 inches, 
 we have, since this is i the preceding value, the value oi p reduced to {§)2 = 
 0.79 of the previous amount, or 4087 lbs. ■"■--- '-- '^- — '--^^ — <-- 
 
 n the ir_ 
 ave the : 
 
 ide a: 
 
 r the 
 
 
 Xo79 = 
 
 quite practicable. By leaving the relation — unchanged, -n 
 sections of the 1 
 
 the relation between 
 79 to 1. Hence this alteration 
 I in the cylinder also causes a 
 >unt of material. 
 
 ^cylinders • 
 eduction of about 20 per c 
 
 Wrought Iron and Steel Pipes. 
 Wrought iron pipe is in very extensive use for conveying 
 gas, water, air, petroleum, as well as steam. These pipes are 
 made either by the process of welding during passage between 
 rollers or are riveted while cold. The former method produces 
 either a butt- or lap-welded joint, the seam being parallel to 
 the axis of the pipe, and more recently pipe has been made in 
 America with a spiral lap-welded seam.f After welding the 
 outside of wrought pipe is generally made smooth by passing 
 between another set of rolls after re-heating, whence it is 
 sometimes called "drawn" pipe. Pipe is also made of mild 
 steel in the same manner as if wrought iron. The Mannes- 
 mann system is also used for rolling tubing from the solid rod 
 of steel, copper, delta metal, etc., the product being without 
 
 Welded tubing possesses a great resistance to external pres- 
 sure and to tension, but a less resistance to internal pressure. 
 Butt welded pipe should not be subjected to a greater stress 
 than 6" = J 500 lbs. ; but for lap-welded pipe S may reach 8000 
 
 * See Clark, The 
 
 r Bridges. London, li 
 
 jrual, April 7 and 14, i 
 
244 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 to 1 2,000 pounds. Spiral lap-welded tubing has been tested 
 to pressures corresponding to stresses from 30,000 to 40,000 
 pounds, according to the quality of the material used ; but in 
 practical service lower values are used. The Mannesmann 
 tubes have been used without deformation almost to the elastic 
 limit of the material, which, with cast steel and with Siemeu's 
 open-hearth steel, reaches 25,000 to 50,000 pounds, and there- 
 fore possess a utility to which welded tubes have not attained. 
 
 - = 9600 lbs. From (323) -v 
 
 e accurately 5 = 1000 
 
 Example 3.— If a M 
 the high pressure wa 
 the moderate limit of 
 
 II tube of Siemens steel had been used for 
 ; of Example 3, g 356, and the stress put at 
 ids, we get from (324) D = 4",/ = 1500 lbs., 
 
 ind from (323) we get n: 
 
 As an example of the efficiency of this construction, Mr. 
 Hamilton Smyth cites an installation over two miles long and 
 under a head of 550 ft., the pipe lying on the surface of the" 
 ground and only protected from changes of temperature by a 
 roof of roughly nailed boards, and in which the total loss by 
 leakage was only 3 to 4 cubic feet per minute. 
 
 As a consequence of the successful use of these pipes for 
 mining purposes, they were next used for more permanent 
 service as for water supply of cities, and with excellent results. 
 Two such pipes were put in for the supply of drinking water 
 for San I'rancisco, and a third pipe, many miles long, was sub- 
 sequently added. For large diameters in permanent installa- 
 tions the sections should be riveted together, while for smaller 
 diameters the joint maybe made with lead, as hereafter de- 
 scribed. The following table will illustrate some important 
 constructions of this kind. 
 
 Name. 
 
 1 
 
 g 
 
 s 
 
 11 
 
 s 
 
 Description of Pipe. 
 
 Ckerokee . . . 
 Virginia City | 
 Texas Brook . 
 
 1870 
 1872 
 
 :ii 
 
 ft. 
 
 M94 
 
 3° 
 
 26 
 
 ft. 
 887 
 1722 
 
 '781 
 
 lb. 
 
 17,500 
 
 i7!ooo 
 
 Sheet Iron, double riveted. 
 
 Lap welded, screw connections. 
 Sheet Iron, double riveted. 
 ~h" sheet iron, single riveted. 
 
 Also may be noted the Kimberley water works in England, 
 14 inches diameter, X in. thick and eighteen miles long. The 
 superior economy of wrought pipe over that of cast iron is 
 worthy of greater attention. 
 
 In order to illustrate the arrangement more fully of an in- 
 stallation of such pipe the inverted siphon in the valley of the 
 Texas Brook, constructed by Mr. Hamilton Smyth, is given, 
 Fig. 1049. The difference in the level is 303.6 feet, and the total 
 length 4438.7 ft. The pipe is in lengths of 20 feet and the 
 figures in the diagram indicate the gauge thickness of the sheet 
 iron in the various portions. 
 
 The average diameter of the pipe is 17 inches and the highest 
 value of the stres >S was calculated as equal to 16,500 pounds ; 
 some of the plates were too thin and the stress in such 
 places reached 18,000 pounds. The inlet is so shapted that the 
 coeflScient of contraction reaches 0.92. The pipe is bedded in 
 gravel 12 to 18 inches deep, and passes entirely under the bed 
 
 h^- — 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 1j 
 
 [ '"^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^0„ 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 '^■^^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^^^v.^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -^^" .. 
 
 
 "-< 
 
 ^5^5-_- _ 
 
 r;:;: - 
 
 ..... 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ : 
 
 
 
 ''"■^^^^f'^r""" 
 
 , 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 ^^. 
 
 ^*-' 
 
 ; 
 
 
 "^■■^^ 
 
 .^- .r:::;;::' 
 
 — — - 
 
 j^TTii::"""-: -- 
 
 :::: 
 
 ~::~:^^' 
 
 10 
 
 r'- 
 
 
 
 "**'*^^^^^^^s;^l5^ 
 
 ^ --:::;i:-;--- 
 
 ;;;::::3 
 
 ct^*' 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 
 „ 
 
 '^^^^^sfe-. 1 . -^""-- h-^^^^^^^^iife^' 
 
 
 
 Riveted pipe of wrought iron have been successfully used in 
 America for conducting over long distances, and valuable in- 
 formation has been furnished by Mr. Hamilton Smyth, Jr., 
 upon this subject.* 
 
 Wrought iron riveted pipes were first used in California, 
 made steel metal jV ^^- thick, to take the place of the canvas 
 hose then extensively used in the operations of h3'draulic min- 
 ing. The pipes were made of ordinary sheet iron, there being a 
 single row of rivets, driven cold, and the joints made simply 
 by inserting the end of one section into the next, as in the case 
 of stove pipes. These first attempts succeeded beyond all ex- 
 pectations and were followed by numerous installations, in sizes 
 reaching as high as 22'' to 30'^ diameter and sections 18 to 25 
 feet long. A satisfactory protection against rust was obtained 
 by immersing the finished pipes for a few minutes in a boiling 
 mixture of asphaltum and tar. If the fit of the ends was too 
 loose to make a good joint the smaller pipe was wrapped with 
 tarred cord, leaky places being stopped w'th wedges of wood 
 and the small leaks being checked by sawdust admitted with 
 the water. 
 
 of the stream. During a large part of the year the siphon is 
 not full of water and hence entraps much air. In order to per- 
 mit this to escape, air valves of the construction shown in Fig. 
 1050, are attached at suitable points, fourteen in all being used^ 
 
 
 These are simply heavy cast iron flap valves with rubber ring 
 packing. When the chamber is filled with air the valve falls 
 open by its weight but is closed by the action of the water 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 245 
 
 ^hen the air has escaped. In case of a rupture in the lower 
 portion of the pipe, the air valves in the upper portion prevent 
 the collapse of the pipe from atmospheric pressure. 
 
 ?• 338. 
 Steam Pipes. 
 When steam is to be conducted to considerable distances, the 
 condensation which is due to loss of heat through the walls of 
 the pipes becomes so great that it is necessary to surround the 
 pipes with a non-conducting covering. Materials for covering 
 steam pipes play quite an important part in the science of 
 steam economy and their manufacture constitutes an extensive 
 industry. The importance of this subject has long been appre- 
 ciated, having been considered, among others by the Industrial 
 Society of Mulhouse more than sixty years ago. In these in- 
 vestigations the measure of effect is the amount of water con- 
 densed by a unit of surface, as one square metre per second. 
 The following table will indicate some of the results obtained.* 
 
 Material of Covaring. 
 
 Grammes 
 
 condensed 
 
 persq 
 
 Tec'o^ng^"' 
 
 material of Covering. 
 
 condensed 
 per sq. 
 
 Uncovered Pipe . . 
 Pimont's Mass. . . . 
 Straw 
 
 2.S4 gr. 
 1.56 " 
 0.9S " 
 
 Clay Pipe 
 
 Cotton Waste . . . 
 Felt . . 
 
 1-35 " 
 
 Air Space 
 
 Carded Cotton .... 
 
 Feathers 
 
 Wool 
 
 Calcined Magnesia . . 
 Cork Charcoal, coarse . 
 Calcined Magnesia . . 
 
 Wool 
 
 Lampblack 
 
 Carbonate of Magnesia 
 
 Fossil Meal 
 
 Wool 
 
 Asbestos 
 
 Zinc, White 
 
 Fossil Meal 
 
 Pine Charcoal 
 
 Carbonate of Magnesia 
 
 Hair Felt 
 
 Lampblack .... - . 
 
 Chalk 
 
 Graphite 
 
 Calcined Magnesia . . 
 Zinc, White ... . . . 
 
 Pumice Stone 
 
 301 
 
 335 
 
 466 
 426 
 376 
 416 
 
 1156 
 1 164 
 
 845 
 
 Material. 
 
 Per Cent. 
 Solid Material. 
 
 Kilo-Cent. 
 Heat Units. 
 
 
 36.8 
 48.0 
 50.6 
 51.4 
 52.9 
 
 839 
 1983 
 
 
 
 
 Coarse Sand 
 
 1684 
 
 The so-called Pimont's Mass, consists of loam and cows' hair, 
 60 mm. (2'/% in.) thick. The straw was first laid on longitudi- 
 nally 14 mm. (j\ in.) thick, and then wrapped with straw 15 
 mm. (j^ in.) thick. The cotton waste was 25 mm. (i in.) thick 
 covered with canvas. The felt was saturated with rubber. 
 Straw shows the best results, the condensation being only one- 
 third that given by the uncovered pipe. 
 
 These experiments have not great present value, partly be- 
 cause the comparison by condensation of water is not altogether 
 i-eliable, and partly because new material for covering pipes 
 have since come into use. The Society of German Engineers 
 ( Verein Deutsche)- Ijigeiiieure) has undertaken a series of ex- 
 periments from which results of value are to be auticipa'ted. 
 In the United States, Prof Ordway, of Boston, has made some 
 very beautiful investigations, the results being in two series, 
 the first by the method of measuring the condensed water, the 
 second by the calorimetric method.f The unsatisfactory char- 
 acter of the method of condensation is apparent, as it was 
 found, for example, that a portion of pipe 2 feet long condensed 
 328 grammes of water per square foot per hour, while 30 feet of 
 pipe gave only 140 grammes per square foot per hour. It is 
 also to be noted that Prof Ordway's first researches showed 
 much less condensation for the uncovered pipe than appeared 
 in the Mulhouse experiments, so that no definite conclusions 
 could be deduced. The calorimetric method appears to be 
 much more reliable, as the results appear to be more consistent. 
 From the great number of experiments the two following tables 
 have been selected. 
 
 Table I. 
 
 Temperature of steam 155° C. All coverings i inch thick 
 = 25.4 mm. 
 
 This table gives noteworthy, and in many cases unexpected 
 results. It is important to note that in all cases the trans- 
 mission of heat bears a definite relation to the percentage of 
 solid matter. For instance, calcined magnesia gives off 335 to 
 1 1 56 hesft units when the percentage of solid matter ranges 
 from 2.3 to 28.5. Asbestos makes an unfavorable showing, and 
 lampblack gives good results but is inconvenient to use ; wool, 
 is excellent. In practice the cost is of course an important 
 consideration. 
 
 Table II. 
 Temperature of steam 155° C. 
 
 Material. 
 
 Glazed Cotton Wadding . 
 
 Wool Wadding 
 
 Calcined Magnesia, loose . . . 
 " •" crowded . . 
 
 " " compressed 
 
 Carbonate of Magnesia, loose . 
 " " crowded 
 
 " " compressed 
 
 Fossil Meal, loose 
 
 " " crowded .... 
 
 X Cork ill Strips 
 
 I Silicated Cork Chips .... 
 
 Paste of Fossil Meal and Hair 
 Carded Cotton ........ 
 
 Rice Chaff, straw board . . . 
 
 Thickness. 
 
 Per Cent. 
 
 Milli- 
 
 Solid 
 
 
 Matter. 
 
 50 
 
 I-Oj 
 
 40 
 
 1-3 
 
 30 
 
 1.7 
 
 
 2.5 
 
 15 
 
 3-4 
 
 10 
 
 51 
 
 25 
 
 5.6 
 
 25 
 
 2.3 
 
 25 
 
 4.9 
 
 25 
 
 28.S 
 
 25 
 
 6.0 
 
 25 
 
 9-4 
 
 25 
 
 15 
 
 25 
 
 6.0 
 
 25 
 
 II. 2 
 
 15 
 
 ? 
 
 30 
 
 
 9 
 
 I.O 
 
 50 
 
 ? 
 
 12 
 
 ? 
 
 129.1 
 193-4 
 205.5 
 326.4 
 424.2 
 502.4 
 219.8 
 335-2 
 340. 1 
 "55-9 
 370.9 
 386.7 
 416.5 
 393-4 
 425.8 
 87.1 
 59-2 
 69.4 
 157-7 
 71.9 
 
 This table gives a comparison of fibrous and granular ma- 
 terials. In the first cases the same material was successfully 
 compressed, reducing the thickness and increasing the density, 
 showing and increasing loss of heat. Ordway recommends 
 cork as the best material, especially in the form of cemented 
 chips, which may be formed into semi-cylindrical sections, as 
 has already been done in Germany. I| 
 
 Ordway does not advise air space under the covering, but 
 rather recommends the filling such space with a light powder. 
 Of all the materials tried he recommends in the order given : 
 Hair Felt, Cork, Fossil Meal, Magnesia, Charcoal and Rice 
 ChaflF.][ Prof. Ordway remarks that " it is useless to make the 
 testing apparatus of cumbrous dimensions, for as in chemical 
 analysis we use a gramme or less of the sample, instead of kilo- 
 grammes, so in physical experiments increase of size does not 
 necessarily enhance the accuracy of the results." 
 
 In long stretches of steam pipe the expansion from the heat 
 demands the use of some compensatory device or expansion 
 ioint.** 
 
 Some of the forms in general use are shown in Fig. 105 1. 
 «, is a packed expansion joint; b, is a bent copper pipe; l 
 drum with flexible steel diaphragms. 
 
 * This table has been kept in the metric system, as it is onlv a- 
 comparison .— TVa/u. 
 t See Trans. Am Soc. Mechanical Engineers, Vol V. p. 73 ; Vol 
 
 I The cork was put on like barrel stave 
 § The cork was chopped into small ct 
 
 weight of water glass at 30° Beaume. 
 
 II See Z. D. Ingenieure, 1886, p. 38. 
 
 If A new, and efficient as well as cheap material made of ^- 
 paste and saw dust, is described in the Revue Industrielle, Sept. 
 
 ** This ' ' compensation ' ' does not neutralize the expai 
 lum, but only renders it harmless. 
 
24^ 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 1052 shows a U joint with packed connections. The 
 forms given in Fig. 1051 generally require one position of the 
 pipe to be held fast ; that in Fig. 1052 permits both lengths of 
 pipe to remain free. 
 
 mouth of the discharge pipe being h, v 
 Weisbach : 
 
 : have, according to 
 
 .(. + C.+ C4)|.. . ....(326) 
 
 in which / is the length and d the diameter of the tube in feet, 
 and V the velocity in feet per second. The volume of flow 
 will be : 
 
 Frictional Resistance. — When a flow of water takes place in a 
 vessel with flat walls, through a cylindrical tube, Fig. 1053, the 
 difference of level between the surface of the water and the 
 
 * Investigations made after the explosions on the Elbe and the Lahn ti 
 be found in Engineering for August, 1888, pp. 113, 116, 125. These gave : 
 the modulus of rupture A' for tension; for hard brazed pipes A'= 33,4( 
 for seamless electrically deposited pipes, A'= 50,000. The reduction 
 !ngth due to heat is given according to the old but reliable expenme 
 
 -(Pv . 
 
 ■ (327) 
 
 Fig. 1052. 
 
 In calculations the actual amount of expansion due to any 
 given temperature we may put the expansion, if t, be the dif- 
 ference of temperature in degrees for : 
 
 Materia!. Centigrade. Fahrenheit. 
 
 t t 
 
 ^^^^^-^^^ -9^:7^ T6v"85 
 
 Wrought Iron -g-^- --- 
 
 t t 
 
 Copper — -5 -r- 
 
 ^^ 58,200 104,760 
 
 t t 
 Brass 
 
 53,500 92,300 
 
 Example. A cast iron pipe 98.4 ft. long, (= iiSi.i inches). At a tempera- 
 ture of 50° F. is filled with steam at 63 pounds pressure, =310° F. The ex- 
 pansion will then be 
 
 I 339. 
 
 Pipes of Copper and other Metai,. 
 
 Brazed pipes of copper when used as conductors of steam, 
 should not be subjected to higher stresses than 1500 to 2000 
 pounds, since the brazed joint is not reliable and reduces the 
 strength of the cross section of the metal about one-third. The 
 heat due to the temperature of steam at pressures from 60 to 
 100 pounds also reduces the strength of the copper from 10 to 
 12 per cent.* 
 
 Seamless pipes made from the solid metal, or rolled by the 
 Mannesmanu process, can stand stresses from 8,000 to 10,000 
 pounds, and when made by forcing in the hydraulic press (see 
 ? 333. b. 5) only a stress of about 700 to 800 pounds. 
 
 Wooden pipes for water conductors, made water-tight with 
 cement, have been made by Herzog of Logelbach with excel- 
 lent results ; the most recent being 71 in. diameter, and 5900 
 feet long. 
 
 Pipes made of paper coated with asphalt have been used to 
 a limited extent, but do not stand the heat of the sun. 
 
 \ 340. 
 Resistance to Flow in Pipes. 
 The resistances which oppose the motion of a liquid in a pipe 
 are due either to changes in the direction of motion, to changes 
 in the rate of motion, or to the resistance of friction. We can 
 only here consider a few cases, and those will be limited to the 
 flow through pipes. 
 
 per second. 
 
 In (326) fg is the coefiicient of friction for the orifice of influx, 
 and f the coefficient of friction for the rest of the tube. 
 
 The coefficient Co, when the entrance is a sharp angle, be- 
 comes considerable, having a mean value of 0.505, but when the 
 entrance is carefully rounded it may fall as low as 0.08. In the 
 latter case, for long tubes, Cq may be neglected. f 
 
 I-'or the coefficient of friction C in the pipe various deductions 
 have been made. The conditions which affect the flow of water 
 in pipes are numerous and variable. In cylindrical pipes the 
 particles arrange themselves in such a manner that those in the 
 axis move with the greatest velocity, and each successive annu- 
 lar sheet moving slower, while the particles in contact with the 
 walls of the tube remain practically at rest, so that the velocity 
 of each annular film, from the wall to the axis is a function a 
 the distance from the wall to the centre, increasing from zei 
 to the maximum. 
 
 In the case of gases the velocity of adjacent rings appro*, 
 mates much more closely than with liquids. In both instances 
 the resistance is the sum of the friction of the successive annu- 
 lar layers upon each other. 
 
 In practice, the variation of the section of the pipe from the 
 circular form must be taken into account, and also the rough- 
 ness of the walls. The mathematical expression of these rela- 
 tions cannot be a simple one. In practice also many disturbing 
 influences exist, such, for instance, as ice, weeds, etc. In all 
 comparisons with calculated resistances it is therefore essential 
 that the walls of the pipe should be ascertained to be smooth 
 and clean. 
 
 The Society of German Architects and Engineers has in 
 progress modern investigations conducted by several of its 
 members with a view of determining the most useful formula 
 for finding the value of C for water. The value which such a 
 formula would possess is undoubted, but before it can be satis- 
 factorily determined the fundamental principles of the subject 
 must be determined.! We are at present obliged to use for- 
 mulas previously determined. Among these the formulas of 
 Weisbach and of Darcy are most available. If we express the 
 loss of head in the height h by friction h^, in feet, we have for 
 water, according to Weisbach : 
 
 • (32S) 
 
 
 all dimensions being expressed in feet, and g being the accelera- 
 tion of gravity. § We have for : 
 
 v= 0.6 
 C = 0.0365 
 
 According to Darcy we have for water : 
 
 d 2g V ■°' 
 
 
 of the Franklin 
 
 ititute. 
 
 t If the tube starts from anotl-er tube instead of from the side of a reser- 
 voir, the coefficient of resistance becomes.rauch greater and much care must 
 be given to the shape of the entrance. See Hertel, Zeitschr. D. Ingenieure. 
 1885, p. 660, also W. Roux, Jenaische Zeitschr. fur Naturwissenschaffen, 
 Vol. XII., 1878. 
 
 t See a Memoir of the D. Arch- u Ing.-Vereine, edited by Otto Iben, pub- 
 lished by Meissner, Hamburg, 1880. This must be used with caution on 
 account of numerous typog;raphical errors. 
 
 g This and the two following formulas may also be used when in addition 
 to the height /i, a second height hi' is to be added due to the contraction oJ 
 discharge. This is only of importance in the case of high pressure water 
 f^..«.-«,i.-^i^« ""d exoeriraental researches are to be def'*ed. 
 
 , 1857. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 247 
 
 If we insert 
 tion /zi = C ->s- 
 
 ti equation (327) the value for v from the equa- 
 — we get : 
 
 
 <i)'f-^= 
 
 = Cd^ 
 
 Dupuit makes f = 
 we have : 
 
 and hence for a 
 
 approximate formula 
 
 Q 
 
 = /t(^|7) 
 
 unple z 
 
 D = 17" 
 
 e get 
 
 from which we get : 
 ;8 ^ 10 20 30 40 
 
 C2 = 0.046 0.139 o.3'64 0.740 
 Example 5.— In a right angle bend ^ = 
 
 13025649, whence C becomes 13 13, and 
 
 • . . {-hz^) 
 
 These formulas can be applied so that first from the given 
 values of Q and / and the friction loss of head h^, the diameter 
 D may be determined, and then by making j9 somewhat larger, 
 and applying the formula of Weisbach or Darcy, the excess of 
 head over friction determined. This will be illustrated by a few 
 examples : 
 
 ', the loss is practically equal 
 
 By assuming C constant, as proposed by Dupuit, * we may 
 state the practical formula : 
 
 In the case of bends, Fig. 1054 b, the resistance is not so great, 
 but is too large to be neglected since' we have : 
 
 
 • (335) 
 
 The ratio of the radius of the tube to the radius of the curva- 
 ture of the bend affects the coefficient as below : 
 
 C, = 0.131 
 
 0.138 
 
 
 0.158 
 
 -^ — = 0.6 
 r 
 
 0.7 
 
 
 0.8 
 
 C2 = 0.440 
 
 0.661 
 
 
 0977 
 
 Example 6.— For a ri 
 
 ght angle 
 
 ■ bend 
 
 in which 
 
 md froi 
 
 \^Kh 
 
 V/2T 
 
 - - - .„ ) «1 = 395-0 It. 
 
 The actual difference of level is 303.6 feet, and hence the coefficient as de- 
 termined from Weisbach, is too high. The coefficient determined from the 
 given difference of level is f = 0.0155, and as a How takes place the actual 
 coefficient must be somewhat less. According to. Saint Venant's formula 
 (330) /2i = 293 feet, which is slightly under the actual difference of level. 
 
 Example 2.— In the work of Iben, already referred to, is given a case in 
 Stuttgart in which / = 3614 ft., D = 0.33 ft., v = 2.063 ft. From these data, 
 Weisbach's formula gives C, = 0.0263, and thence h\ =■ 19 ft. The actual value 
 is 23.2 ft, which corresponds to f = 0.0332. The difference is probably due 
 ... .., i_....... — », g being two stop valves and six elbows included in 
 
 the 
 
 1 Stuttga 
 3ed by observat 
 
 s follows : / = 
 
 2 ft.; 
 
 Example 3.— Another inst 
 Z> = 0,0843 ft. ; i>= 5.S97ft. 
 
 The friction head as determined by observation for / = 328 ft., was f 2.89 ft. 
 According to Darcy, the friction head would be 76.57, which is quite close to 
 the experimental results. In other instances, however, Darcy's formula 
 has not agreed so well with experiment. 
 
 When air is used instead of water, Weisbach gives for the 
 height of a column of water equal to the frictional resistance : 
 
 K = ?i 
 
 d 2g 
 
 = 0.025 -7- • --— 
 
 2^£ 
 
 • (333) 
 
 in which e is the ratio of the density of the air in the pipe to 
 that of the external atmosphere. Since is e always greater than 
 unity when the air in the pipe is under pressure, h^ is smaller 
 than is the case for water, especially when the pressure of the 
 air is great. Valuable experiments upon the transmission of 
 compressed air have been made by Engineer Stockalper at the 
 St. Gothard tunnel. f These showed that Darcy's formula (329) 
 served well for air when the results are multiplied by the ratio 
 of the density of the air to water. Professor Uuwin has given 
 some valuable researches upon the friction of air, in which he 
 shows the important influence which D exerts upon C-t 
 
 Example 4.— At the 
 
 n being tr 
 
 ruction of the Hoosac Tunnel it was observed t^ 
 1 air fell from 821 pounds per square inch to i 
 :d a distance of about 118,000 feet. 
 
 Resistance in Angles and Bends. — The resistance due to an 
 angle, such as Fig. 1054 a is important, and is dependent upon 
 what Weisbach calls the semi-angle of deviation, /3, according 
 to the following formula : 
 
 /%, = C, ■ 
 
 ^ (0.9457 sirJ^ (3 4- 2.047 sin* /5) ^ 
 
 • (334) 
 
 *See Dupuit, Trail 
 tribution des eaux. 
 t Stockalper, Expe: 
 
 theoretique 
 iris, Dunod, : 
 :nces, fates a 
 e. Geneve, 1879. 
 coefficient of friction of air flowing 
 
 pratique de 
 t ed. 1854; 211 
 runnel de Sa: 
 
 conduite e 
 ed. 1865. 
 Gothard, s 
 
 long pipes. Proc. 
 
 )r only a1 
 
 It I the r« 
 
 e of a sharp bend with any curvature. 
 
 Resistances due to Stidden Changes of Cross-Section. — When 
 water which is moving at a velocity v-^ suddenly changes to 
 another velocity v, see Fig. 1055 a, it experiences a loss of 
 pressure which, according to Weisbach, is equivalent to a height : 
 
 /; — ^ ~if — C^ _ i^ 'Z 
 ''' ~ ^g ~ V^i V 2^ 
 
 = ^3- 
 
 (336) 
 
 F and F^ being the respective cross sections ; also Fv= F^v^. 
 Doubling the cross section causes a loss of head equal to — . 
 
 For gate valves. Fig. 1055 b, or cocks. Fig. 1055 c, there is a 
 loss due to the amount of contraction. " 
 have from Weisbach : 
 
 C3 = 97.8 
 
 and for cocks : 
 
 Angle = 10° 
 
 F, 
 
 -p- =°-^5o c 
 
 C = 0.29 
 
 0.466 
 
 5-52 
 
 2.06 
 
 •56 
 
 30° 40° 50° 
 0.535 0-385 0.250 
 S-47 
 
 For gate valves -v 
 
 Y, Y. y, 
 0.740 0.856 0.948 
 0.81 0.26 0.07 
 
 60° 6:,° %2yi° 
 0.091 o 
 
 .137 
 
 52.6 206 486 00 
 From the above tables it will be seen how important an in- 
 fluence is exerted by valve chests, mud traps and the like upon 
 the flow of water. In all such cases it is important to modify 
 the suddenness of the change of velocity by rounding and curv- 
 ing all angles in the passages, and in this way a large part of 
 the loss may be obviated. For gaseous fluids the resistance is 
 less, but is at the same time sufficiently important to be care- 
 fully considered. For a fuller discussion of the resistances 
 offered to water in canals and streams the reader must be re- 
 ferred to special treatises on the subject. 
 
24« 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 «34i. 
 Methods op Connecting Cast Iron Pipes. 
 One of the most frequently used methods of connecting cast 
 pipes is by means of the common flange joint, Fig. 1056. 
 
 Example. — A steam cylinder 40 inches in diameter, 
 of 60 pounds, would have according to (320) a thickne 
 ij% in. This gives from Fig. 1056 for the bolts, d = %; 
 and these values in (338) give for the number of bolts 
 
 ;of6 = 
 
 >-787 -f . 
 1.58, say I, 
 
 •(5)" 
 
 (Compare close of Chapter XXVI). 
 
 D 
 
 ^ 1 ^V. 
 
 "'•\ 
 
 2% 
 
 
 3>^ 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 4>^ 
 
 5 
 
 s'A 
 
 6 
 
 A 
 
 \ 1 
 
 
 3K 
 
 2% 
 
 '^ 
 
 1 
 
 'il 
 
 5?'l 
 
 % 
 
 6H 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 1059 a shows a cast iron bend with flange. The bend 
 should not be too sharp, in order to avoid excessive resistance 
 to the flow of the water. (See Example 6, § 340.) Bends of 
 this sort require a separate pattern to be made for every different 
 
 angle. Brown's joint is more convenient in this respect, Fig. 
 1059 b. The bolt holes in this form should be drilled in only 
 one of the flanges first, and the other flange marked off in 
 
 Fig. 1056. 
 
 The proportions are given in the illustration. Formerly it 
 was customary to raise a small bearing surface inside the bolt 
 circle, but this is generally omitted now, and the entire surface 
 of the flanges finished, making a much better joint, although 
 a trifle more expensive. In many instances a ring of copper 
 wire, let into a groove, is used to make the joint. For pipes 
 which are not subjected to very high pressures the number of 
 bolts A, is determined from the following : 
 
 A =2 + ^ (337) 
 
 in which D is the diameter of the pipe inches. This would give 
 for a pipe 4 inches in diameter four bolts, and for one 3 inches 
 diameter 6 bolts. According to (337) an air pump cylinder 60 
 inches in diameter would have 2 -(- -%"- ^ 32 bolts. 
 
 When the pressure is known to be great, or for cylinder lids, 
 etc., the following formula is to be preferred : 
 
 ^-~^QP) <^''' 
 
 in which d is the diameter of the bolts, D the diameter of the 
 cylinder, and a the pressure in pounds per square inch. This 
 assumes the diameter of the bolt at the bottom of the thread to 
 be 0.8 d, and the stress in the bolts to be 3500 lbs. as in for- 
 mula (72). 
 
 bjected to a pressure 
 
 Fig. 1057. 
 
 Flanges with ears, as shown in Fig. 1057, are frequently used, 
 the thickness being made 2 to 2.5 6, instead of 1.6 6, on account 
 of the smaller flanges. 
 
 On the Prussian State railways flange joints are made with a 
 lenticular shaped ring inserted in the joint, as shown in Fig. 
 1058. 
 
 This permits a certain amount of motion and gives good re- 
 sults in practice. The following table of dimensions is based 
 on one used on the Prussian railways : 
 
 place. For any flange angle ca the pipes may be connected for 
 any angle between 2 a and 180°. In the illustration o< =^ 40°, 
 which answers for most practical purposes. 
 
 Fig. 1059. 
 
 Bell or socket connections are much used for gas and water 
 pipe. The joint is caulked with lead, which may conveniently 
 be made in half rings and driven in, or run in in place, a pack- 
 ing of oakum being flrst driven in. 
 
 Fig. 1060. 
 
 The large end of the pipe is called the bell, the other the 
 spigot. The dimensions of the various parts in Fig. 1060 may 
 be taken as follows, the thickness 6 being determined from for- 
 mula (318), i.e., 6 = 0.31S -f ~. 
 
 Thickness of bell, (5, — 0.375'^ -f 0.0135 D. 
 
 Thickness of bead, k = o.-]" -\- 0.0025 D. 
 
 Inside length of bell, /j = 2.625'' -f o.n D. 
 
 Length of bell reinforcement, 4 = ^'' + 0.09/?. 
 
 Outside length of bell. 
 Space for packing, 
 Depth of lead ring 
 Length of bead on spigot. 
 Thickness of bead, 
 
 = 4.625'' 4- 0.20 Z>. 
 b =0.1875" + 0.007 Z?. 
 h = 1. 1 25" -f 0.07 Z?. 
 a = 1.2 6. 
 c =. 6 -{- b — 0.0625". 
 
 Some makers put a bead around the inside edge of the bell 
 to assist in retaining the lead packing, but others consider this 
 but little use, owing to the softness of the metal. More recently 
 the bead has been altogether omitted from the spigot end, a 
 shoulder being cast on the inside of the bell instead. 
 
 In Belgium a joint is used in which a gum ring of globoid 
 form (see Fig. 637 a) is used instead of the lead packing, the 
 ring rolling in as the spigot is pushed into the bell. 
 
 Fig. 1061 is Petit's pipe joint. A gum ring is inserted in the 
 short bell, and one clamp being connected the pipe is used as a 
 lever to compress the gum ring, the second clamp can be 
 secured. This coupling, which was used in the extensive water 
 system of the camp at Chalons, is cheap and can be rapidly 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 connected, and possesses a certain flexibility -which permits it 
 to be used in running a line of pipe over uneven ground 
 
 Fig. 1063. 
 Fig. 1063 shows Normandy's pipe joint. The packing con- 
 sists of two rubber rings. This very simple joint is very useful 
 under certain circumstances, where the proper packing is avail- 
 able. It possesses the flexibility of Petit's joint and is easily 
 connected and disconnected. 
 
 A similar form of joint has been made for water pipes, using 
 packing rings of lead. The sleeve may be considered as a 
 double bell and the pipes are perfectly straight without any 
 bead at either end. The distance from the centre of one joint 
 to that of the next constitutes a "length." With cast iron 
 pipe this is made a minimum of about 4 to 7 feet, being made 
 as long as practicable for extensive lines of pipe. For gas and 
 water pipe with bell and spigot connections the following pro- 
 portions occur in practice : 
 
 Z? = 4 inches, I ^ 7 to 10 ft. 
 
 D=\2 " /= 10 to 12 ft. 
 
 /P = 24 " and over, I =z\iiX. 
 
 A form of joint used by Riedler for high 
 pressure water connections is shown in 
 Fig. 1064. t The flanges are faced in the 
 lathe and bolted together without any 
 packing in the joint. A leather ring is 
 placed in a channel turned ir. the pipe and 
 held in place by a spring ring in two parts, 
 or this latter ma}' sometimes be made in 
 one piece. 
 
 Joints with spherical contact surfaces 
 have been used by Hoppe for cast iron 
 high pressure pipes when they are to be 
 laid in yielding ground, j 
 
 Three forms of construction are shown 
 in Fig. 1065. At rt is a single ball joint. 
 
 Fig. 1064. 
 
 The bearing ring is held in position by a ring of bronze divided 
 at right angles to the axis ; this form permits a deflection of 5°. 
 At b is shown a double joint constructed in a similar manner 
 
 A form of screw connection for cast iron pipe is shown in 
 Fig 1062 The screw thread is cast on the pipe and a leaden 
 
 Fig. 1062. 
 
 gasket is placed so as to pack the joint outside of the screw 
 connection.* This may be considered as a flange joint with a 
 single central bolt, which latter is made large enough to permit 
 the pipe opening to pass through it (see I 86). Since the pipe 
 must be revolved in making the connection, it is necessary to 
 provide wrenches of suitable size for the purpose. 
 
 and permitting a deflection of 10°. The third form, which ia 
 the most recent, has no packing ring, and the bolts are made 
 with spherical heads to facilitate motion. 
 
 ? 342. 
 
 Connections for Pipes of Wrought Iron and Steel. 
 
 Riveted pipes are often connected by means of wrought or 
 
 cast iron flanges, as shown in Fig. io6b a and b. When no 
 
 
 
 Fig. 1066. 
 
 other data are at hand, the diameter and number of bolts may 
 be determined by assuming the pipe to be of cast iron, and 
 using the proportions given in the illustration. The actual 
 thickness 6 of the pipe may then be determined independently 
 according to the material, pressure, and other conditions. 
 
 Exa>nple.—A wrought iron pipe 3 ft. 4 in. in di 
 to a turbine, is to be fitted with flanges "*" —— 
 of this diameter would have a thicknes 
 
 « = 0.315" + -^ 
 
 whence from Fig. 1056 d=^y. o.8is = 
 according to (337), will be 2 + ^s" 
 
 ight: 
 
 er, for deliverii 
 D°(3i8) 
 
 Fig. 1067. 
 
 For thin pipes a very practical form is that shown in Fig. 
 1067 a. The ends of the pipes are flanged over, and the turned- 
 over ends countersunk into the cast flange rings, the bolt heads 
 also being countersunk. A similar form with wrought iron 
 flange rings is shown at b.^ For the thin pipes described in 
 I 337, when subjected to a high internal pressure, the joint 
 shown in Fig. 1067 c is adapted. In this form a short sleeve is 
 riveted into one of the pipe ends and a loose ring slipped over 
 the outside of the joint, forming a space into which lead is run 
 and afterwards caulked. This also serves as a sort of expan- 
 sion joint (compare | 338). 
 
 Many important constructions are made with wrought iron 
 pipe. The connections are usually made by screwing the parts 
 together, and for this purpose many special pieces are made, 
 known by the generic term of "pipe fittings." For straight 
 connections the ordinary "socket" is used, while for angles 
 the so-called ' ' elbows " and " tees " are made. 
 
 * This joint is used by the Lauchhai 
 
 :r Works for pipe up to 2% inches 
 
250 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The American practice of making the thread tapering is much 
 to be recommended, since by means of a little cementing mate- 
 rial a tight joint may be made. The American Mechanical En- 
 gineers have given careful attention to the proportions of pipe 
 fittings, and since 1887 the forms proposed by the late Mr. 
 Robert Briggs have been generally adopted.* 
 
 The system is as follows : The thread is of triangular section 
 with the angle 2 /5 = 60°, as in Sellers' system. The top and 
 bottom of the thread are flattened ^\ of the theoretical depth 
 /o, so that the actual depth / = 0.8^^, and hence equal to 0.69 of 
 the pitch s, Fig. 1068 a. 
 
 a 13 
 
 
 Diameter of Pipe. 
 
 
 Screwed Ends. 
 
 
 
 
 Thickness 
 
 of 
 
 Metal. 
 
 
 
 Nominal 
 Inside. 
 
 Actual 
 
 Inside. 
 
 D. 
 
 Outside. 
 Do- 
 
 Threads 
 Per Inch. 
 
 .en^th. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Inch. 
 
 No. 
 
 Inch. 
 
 y% 
 
 0.270 
 
 0.405 
 
 0.068 
 
 27 
 
 0.19 
 
 X 
 
 0.364 
 
 0.540 
 
 0.088 
 
 18 
 
 0.29 
 
 3/. 
 
 0.494 
 
 0.675 
 
 0.091 
 
 18 
 
 0.30 
 
 v.. 
 
 0.623 
 
 0.840 
 
 0.109 
 
 14 
 
 0.39 
 
 Yat 
 
 0.824 
 
 1.050 
 
 • 0.113 
 
 14 
 
 0.40 
 
 I 
 
 1.048 
 
 1-315 
 
 0.134 
 
 11;^ 
 
 0.51 
 
 iX 
 
 1380 
 
 1.660 
 
 0.140 
 
 IlK 
 
 0.54 
 
 
 I.610 
 
 1.900 
 
 0.145 
 
 11;^ 
 
 0.55 
 
 2 
 
 2.067 
 
 2.375 
 
 0.154 
 
 II>^ 
 
 0.58 
 
 2^ 
 
 2.468 
 
 . 2.875 
 
 0.204 
 
 8 
 
 0.89 
 
 3 
 
 3.067 
 
 3500 
 
 0.217 
 
 8 
 
 0.95 
 
 lYz 
 
 3-548 
 
 4.000 
 
 0.226 
 
 8 
 
 
 4 
 
 4.026 
 
 4.500 
 
 0.237 
 
 8 
 
 1-05 
 
 ^Yz 
 
 4.508 
 
 5.000 
 
 0.246 
 
 8 
 
 1. 10 
 
 
 5.045 
 
 5-563 
 
 0.259 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 6.065 
 
 6.625 
 
 0280 
 
 8 
 
 1.26 
 
 7 
 
 7023 ■ 
 
 7625 
 
 0.301 
 
 8 
 
 1.36 
 
 8 
 
 8.082 
 
 8.625 
 
 0.322 
 
 8 
 
 1.46 
 
 9 
 
 9.000 
 
 9.688 
 
 0-344 
 
 8 
 
 1-57 
 
 10 
 
 10.019 
 
 10.750 
 
 0.366 
 
 
 1.68 
 
 Taper of conical portion of tube i in 32 to axis of tube. 
 
 It will be observed in the table that the thickness 6 agrees 
 very well with the formula cS = o.i 1 1 ^/D^. This gives for the 
 diameters 0.405, 1.050, 4.000 and 10.750, the thicknesses 0.071, 
 0.114, 0.222, 0.364, which agree quite closely with the actual 
 values. The shape of the sockets is shown in Fig. 1069, the 
 thread being given a somewhat greater taper than 3V, so that 
 the greatest stress will come on the strongest part of the 
 socket. 
 
 The increasing use of such pipe in Germany makes it most 
 desirable that a standard of dimensions should be adopted. 
 The American system is manifestly unsuited for use with the 
 metric system. The general arrangement of the American 
 system may, however, be followed with some approximations 
 to adapt it to the metric measurements. 
 
 The angle of thread may be the same as in the American 
 system : 2 /? = 60°. The depth of thread may also be abbre- 
 viated jV top and bottom, making i ^= 0.81^ = o.6Ss, and the 
 
 ind 414 ; also Vol. 
 
 taper can also be made ^\ on a side. The length T of the 
 tapered portion may be made T = (5 + ^\ D^] s, which is 
 about the metrical equivalent of the former expression, the 
 nearest even value being taken. The lengths Ti = 2s and T^ 
 ^ 4s may be retained. 
 
 For the thicknessof pipe the American formula transformed 
 gives (5 = 0.555 ^£>o in millimetres. Finally for the pitch we 
 may take 
 
 s ^ I 1.4 1.8 2.2 3.2 mm. 
 
 (0.94) (1.41) (1.81) (2.21) (3.17) in. 
 the values in parentheses being the corresponding equivalents 
 of the American pitches. The following table gives the values 
 from 10 to 325 mm. This system has been submitted by the 
 author to the manufacturers of the Mannesmann tubes in 
 Remschied, Saarbriick and Komotau, and by them adopted. 
 
 Metric Pipe Thread System. 
 
 The end of the pipe is given a taper of 3V on each side, the 
 length of the tapered part being T= (4.8 -f o.8£>)s, D being 
 the outside diameter of the pipe and .s the pitch. Beyond the 
 taper portion comes a length 1\ = 25, which threads are full at 
 the root but imperfect at the top, beyond which there is a 
 length 7^2 = 4 .y, consisting of imperfect threads blending into 
 the full outside diameter. The thickness & of the pipe is such 
 that the thickness of metal below the thread at the end of the 
 pipe is = 0.0175 D ■\- 0.025''. The pitch s is finer than for 
 bolts of the same diameter, there being only five different 
 pitches used, and the various dimensions are given in the 
 following table : 
 
 Tabi,e op Standard Pipe Threads. 
 
 Outside 
 Diameter 
 
 Thickness 
 
 Inside 
 
 Pitch 
 
 Length 
 of Thread 
 
 Length 
 
 Length 
 
 Do- 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 T. 
 
 7-1-2.. 
 
 7-2-4.S-. 
 
 10 
 
 1-75 
 
 6.5 
 
 I.O 
 
 5-5 
 
 2.0 
 
 4 
 
 15 
 
 2.00 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 7.5 
 
 2.8 
 
 5-6 . 
 
 20 
 
 2.50 
 
 15-0 
 
 1-4 
 
 8 
 
 2.8 
 
 5.6 
 
 25 
 
 2.75 
 
 19-5 
 
 1.8 
 
 II 
 
 3-6 
 
 7.2 
 
 30 
 
 3.00 
 
 24. 
 
 1.8 
 
 12 
 
 3-6 
 
 7.2 
 
 35 
 
 3-25 
 
 28.5 
 
 2.2 
 
 14 
 
 4-4 
 
 8.8 
 
 40 
 
 3-50 
 
 33-0 
 
 2.2 
 
 15 
 
 4-4 
 
 8.8 
 
 50 
 
 4.CO 
 
 42.0 
 
 2.2 
 
 15 
 
 4-4 
 
 8.8 
 
 60 
 
 4.25 
 
 5'-5 
 
 2.2 
 
 16 
 
 4-4 
 
 8.8 
 
 70 
 
 4 75 
 
 60.5 
 
 
 25 
 
 6-4 
 
 12.8 
 
 80 
 
 5-00 
 
 70.0 
 
 3-2 
 
 26 
 
 6.4 
 
 12-8 
 
 90 
 
 5-25 
 
 79-5 
 
 3-2 
 
 28 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 100 
 
 5-50 
 
 89.0 
 
 3-2 
 
 29 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 no 
 
 5-75 
 
 98.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 30 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 120 
 
 6.00 
 
 108.0 
 
 3-2 
 
 31 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 130 
 
 6.25 
 
 117-5 
 
 3-2 
 
 Zl 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 140 
 
 6.50 
 
 1270 
 
 3-2 
 
 34 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 150 
 
 6-75 
 
 136-5 
 
 3-2 
 
 36 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 •75 
 
 7-25 
 
 160.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 38 
 
 64 
 
 12.8 
 
 200 
 
 7-75 
 
 184.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 42 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 225 
 
 8.25 
 
 208.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 45 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 250 
 
 8.75 
 
 232.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 48 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 27s 
 
 9-25 
 
 256.5 
 
 3-2 
 
 5i 
 
 64 
 
 12.8 
 
 300 
 
 9-50 
 
 
 3-2 
 
 54 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 325 
 
 10.00 
 
 305- 
 
 3-2 
 
 58 
 
 6.4 
 
 12.8 
 
 In the preceding table the pipe is classified according to its 
 outside diameter D^, but it is a question whether it would not 
 be better to follow the custom of designating the sizes by the 
 internal diameter D. The former, however, has an important 
 influence upon the dimensions of the fittings, which it is most 
 desirable to reduce to a standard system. It will be seen by 
 reference to the table of American pipe dimensions that the 
 actual internal diameter differs frequently from the nominal 
 size, the latter really being only a convenient name. By adopt- 
 ing a strict gradation for the sucessive sizes of D^ it would be 
 practicable to make the thickness & somewhat less than given 
 in the table, but in some cases it would be greater. When D^ 
 is greater than 325 mm., & may in ordinary cases be made 
 = lo mm. 
 
 The production of the screw threads both in pipe and fittings 
 must be carefully considered in order to insure the interchange- 
 ability which is necessary. Powerful and accurate machines 
 have been devised for cutting the threads, as well as devices for 
 producing the taps and dies, and also gauges to insure mainte- 
 nance of standards. This branch of the art has been carried to 
 a high degree of perfection in America. 
 
 Fittings for Wrought Pipe. 
 
 The simplest pipe fitting is the socket used for connecting 
 two pipes of equal diameter D^, and is made of wrought iron 
 
 Fig. io6g. 
 
 or of steel. It is made of sufficient length to give a thread in 
 each end of length equal to T, as given in the preceding tables, 
 together with a slight clearance between the ends of the pipes. 
 Fig. 1069 a;. In many cases the socket must be made with right 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 251 
 
 and left hand threads, as in Fig. 106915, this being necessary to 
 connect two pipes which cannot be turned axially. For other 
 connections a variety of fittings are made, examples of which 
 are shown in Fig. 1070. 
 
 Fic. 1070. 
 
 In Fig. 1070, « is a right angle ; b an elbow (abbreviated in 
 practice to " ell ") ; ^ is a T ; rf a cross ; and e a reducing socket. 
 These fittings are used as connections for all sorts of gaseous 
 pressure organs. They may also be used for liquids, as water, 
 brine, oil, etc., when the velocity of flow is not great. For im- 
 portant installations it is becoming more and more the practice 
 to design the fittings in such forms as to produce a minimum of 
 resistance. By making the fittings of cast iron, as is done iu 
 England and America, where pipe constructions are very ex- 
 tensively used, it is possible to adhere to accurately designed 
 standard forms. 
 
 The most important fitting is the elbow, for the right angle 
 bend. occasions far too much resistance to be used iu important 
 cases. In Fig. 107 1 three forms are shown, all of which are 
 
 Fig. 1071 
 
 designed to be used with the thread already described. Of 
 these, form b is the most popular, although form a is frequently 
 used because of the smoothness and neatness of external ap- 
 pearance. Form c is here proposed as an additional design. A 
 comparison between the three forms will show a difference in 
 resistance which may be calculated as follows : The resistance 
 may be divided into two portions ; one due to the curvature, the 
 radius of curvature being made equal to D^ ; and one due to 
 the enlargement and consequent contraction of the passage. 
 
 Example 2.— In the three forms shown in Fig. J071 let the radius of curva- 
 ture Dq = 1 inch, and let the velocity v be taken at 6.56 feet per second. 
 „,_ ,, _ _ ,__ , from (335) for the — '~^ "'" '" •"" ' 
 
 6.562 
 ■ 64.4 
 
 = 0.334 ?2, and for fj i 
 
 .the 
 
 sforn 
 
 -e from (336) for the loss due to enlargement a 
 
 hence !i« + A3 = 4 79 
 It will thus be seen that form i 
 for which the coefficient of loss 
 6 occasions quite a perceptible loss. Form 
 because it offers: the least resistance, and a 
 portion of metal in the curved portion of thi 
 
 be recommended, except for steam 
 
 i.s much to be preferred, both 
 o because it is lighter, the pro- 
 .hree forms being as 36 : 30 : 25. 
 
 The only dimension which is important in connection with a 
 standard system of fittings is the distance D^ + T, which 
 should be taken from the preceding table. The thickness Sy is 
 mainly dependent upon matters of casting, and is here made 
 := (5 + 0.04^' ((5+1 mm.) the thickness of the collar being 
 
 = 2(5i. 
 
 An indispensable condition for any standard system of fittings 
 is the constant length from end to centre for each size of elbow, 
 cross, or T, so that at any time one fitting may be substituted 
 
 for another without affecting the length of the pipes. This 
 principle can also be observed when the fittings are used to 
 connect pipes of different diameters. f Such fittings are always 
 known by the name of the largest opening, whether T, elbow, 
 or cross, this dimension governing the proportions. 
 
 Fig. 1072 a shows a T, which is proportioned to permit one- 
 half the flow of water to pass off the side opening. This is 
 based on the form b, of the preceding illustration, and, as is 
 usual, the direct discharge opening is made the same size as the 
 entrance. D' is made equal to 0.7 Z>, thus giving one-half the 
 area, and making the velocity the same as in the entrance pipe ; 
 if the side opening had been kept full the velocity would have 
 been reduced one-half. The side outlet is shaped like an elbow, 
 with a sharp internal partition to direct the flow. According to 
 Roux, these partitions are of much importance, acting as wedges ' 
 to split the flow of the water. At b is shown another form, in 
 which both discharge openings are reduced, and every precau- 
 tion taken to give a smooth flow to the water. At ^ is a reduc- 
 ing fitting which will double the velocity of flow, the reduction 
 in diameter being made by gradual curves. 
 
 Fig. 1073. 
 
 Fig. 1073 a shows a T with equal outlets, formed on the plan 
 of the elbow shown in Fig. 1071 b. This is made with a divid- 
 ing wedge, which is much better than the straight form shown 
 by the dotted lines. The latter form causes material loss by the 
 sudden reduction of velocity to one-half. The form shown at b 
 is intended still further to reduce this loss. At c is shown a 
 cioss with three equal outlets designed on the same principle. 
 
 The previously described fittings have been given on the as- 
 sumption that the velocity of flow is to be kept uniform from 
 the point of division both as regards the fittings and in the 
 pipes. In extensive installations, whether in residences, public 
 buildings or manufacturing establishments, this is not often the 
 case. Very often it is found that one portion of a system is 
 possessed of but little velocity of discharge, while a neighbor- 
 ing pipe has a flow of high velocity in it. The resistances in 
 such systems become quite material, but may be somewhat re- 
 duced by giving care to the shape of the fittings. 
 
 In adopting standard dimensions for pipe fittings, which may 
 be based either upon form b or r, especial precautions must be 
 taken to insure interchaugeability, this being the principal ad- 
 vantage to be obtained. This involves accurate tapping of the 
 threads both in the sockets and in the right-angle fittings, 
 which is accomplished by special devices which enable all these 
 operations to be performed without releasing the fitting, the 
 accuracy of angles and sizes then being readily controlled by 
 the machine. The sizes of the fittings are cast upon them in 
 distinct figures, so that they may readily be determined. 
 
 ?343. 
 
 CONNEC/IONS FOR PIPES OF LEAD AND OTHER METAI,S. 
 
 Lead pipes may be connected by means of separate flanges 
 of wrought iron which draw the expanded ends of the pipes 
 together. 
 
 11 clearance for the screw thread n 
 
 1. Soc. Mech. Engrs., IV, p. 273. 
 
252 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR- 
 
 A good flange connection for lead pipe is shown in Fig. 
 1074;* the pipes are expanded and a double cone socket of 
 brass inserted and drawn together by bolts. Fig. 1075 shows 
 
 ' i' ' '1 
 
 m 
 
 ._jiyL . . 
 
 71 
 
 III! IK i 
 
 71:1! 
 
 ^1";, 
 
 J ' 
 
 Fig. 1074. Fig. 1075. 
 
 another design, by Louch ; the pipes are drawn together by 
 means of screw flanges and a collar, the three pieces all being 
 made of cast iron. 
 
 ,.a'^f 
 
 Fig. 1076. 
 
 tightness. This idea may be still further carried out by making 
 the material which makes the pipe tight, also in the spiral form. 
 This is shown in the flexible metallic tubing of Ivcvasseur, of 
 
 Paris, shown in Fig. 1077 5. f This is composed of a spiral of 
 copper or similar metal, the section resembling somewhat the 
 figure 5. The spiral is wound upon a mandrel in a special 
 machine, a layer of rubber packing being wound in at the same 
 time, as shown in the illustration. This pipe has been found to 
 answer well for gas, water, steam, air, etc., and is adapted to 
 high internal or external pressures, being tested to 180 pounds 
 Flanges and other fittings are screwed on to the spiral and 
 soldered carefull}'. This pipe is used, among other purposes, 
 for connections for air and vacuum brakes. 
 
 Pistons. 
 
 Next to the various kinds of pipes, as already discussed in 
 I 310, the most important members in pressure organ mechan- 
 ism are the various forms of pistons, and with these the differ- 
 ent methods of packing will be considered. Pistons, properly 
 so called, are fitted with packing which presses outward against 
 the walls of the cylinder, while in the case of plungers the 
 packing presses inward. Both forms will be given considera- 
 tion. 
 
 The most important forms of pistons are those used in steam 
 engines. Some of the low-pressure engine pistons are yet 
 made with hemp packing ; but for higher pressures, metallic 
 packing is used, this consisting of metal rings pressed against 
 the walls of the cylinder by springs and by the steam pressure. 
 In some instances a combination packing is used, the metal 
 rings having a backing of hemp instead of springs. 
 
 The unit upon which the dimensions of the following pistons 
 are based is determined from the formula : 
 
 Fig. 1076 rt shows a connection for joining lead to cast iron 
 pipe, and Fig. 1076 b is for lead to wrought iron pipe ; the loose 
 collars in both forms are made hexagonal or octagonal exter- 
 nally, so as to be operated by wrenches. 
 
 I 344- 
 Fi,ExiBivE Pipes. 
 
 For many purposes it is desirable to have a pipe which shall 
 be yielding or flexible, so that, for example, it may follow the 
 inequalities of the ground, or may accommodate itself to yield- 
 ing supports. In such cases the flange connections may be 
 constructed to permit motion by means of ball and socket 
 bearings, as shown in Fig. 1065, such joints being especially 
 adapted for pipes to be laid under water. An example of such 
 construction is found in the water main built by G. Schmidt, of 
 Carouge, for the water supply of Geneva, laid on the bed of the 
 Lake of Geneva. The pipe is 47^ inches (1.2 metre) diameter, 
 and is made in lengths of 29^ feet of riveted wrought iron, 
 0.197 in. thick (5 mm.). The connections are ball and socket 
 flanges, riveted to the pipes. 
 
 Instead of making the pipe rigid and the joints flexible, the 
 joints may be made rigid and the pipe flexible. Familiar ex- 
 amples of flexible pipe are various kinds of hose, made of 
 leather, canvas or rubber. Special forms of couplings are made 
 for fire hose. If the hose is to be subjected to heavy pressure, 
 either internally or externally, special methods of increasing 
 its strength are used. This may be done by means of a spiral 
 of wire, or better by two separate spirals, one to resist internal 
 pressure and one to resist external pressure, as shown in Fig. 
 1077 a. The wire spirals furnish the strength and the hose the 
 
 5 S^D- 
 
 004 — o.irS 
 
 • (339) 
 
 in which D is the piston diameter in inches. 
 
 The following table will aid by giving a series of values for 
 J and D : 
 
 s 
 
 D 
 
 ^ 
 
 D 
 
 i ' 
 
 D 
 
 0.4 
 
 4 
 
 0.65 
 
 20 
 
 0.90 
 
 58 
 
 0.45 
 
 5-7 
 
 0.7 
 
 24 
 
 0-9S 
 
 1° 
 
 0-5 
 
 8 
 
 0.75 
 
 30 
 
 1. 00 
 
 85 
 
 0.55 
 
 
 0.8 
 
 40 
 
 1.05 
 
 100 
 
 0.6 
 
 14 
 
 0.S5 
 
 48 
 
 1. 10 
 
 120 
 
 
 1^ Ullf'iri" \ 
 
 !.. , 
 
 1^'^ ' ' ^M< 
 
 
 - — - — 
 
 
 
 &.0.9 
 
 Fig. I 
 
 Fig. 1078 shows a hemp packed piston by Pen?^, This is 
 made of a cored casting with a ring follower secured by bolts, 
 screwing into bronze nuts recessed into the piston. For pistons 
 of large diameter an increased depth is given at the centre ; 
 this increase may be made by making the depth in the middle 
 equal to 65 -}- yV A the depth at the edge being 7.Ss, and the 
 piston being made flat — when the latter value exceeds the 
 former. 
 
 Example.— 'Lei Z* = 24 inches— for a hemp packed piston, as Fig. 1078, we 
 then have i = 0.7. This gives for the thickness of the packing 0.7 X 1.8 = 
 1.26, say iV in. ; the depth of packing = 0.7 X 6 = 4.2 In. ; the depth of piston 
 at the edge = o 7 X 7.8 = 5.36 = say 55/3 in. The depth in the middle will be 
 equal to 6 X 0.7 X ii = 6.6, say 6=4 ins. 
 
 Fig. 1079 shows a good form of piston with metallic packing, 
 by Krauss. The packing consists of two steel rings, each cut 
 at an angle, a ring of white metal being cast on each steel ring. 
 If it is desired to make the cut in each ring tight, some one of 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 the methods shown in Fig. loSo may be used. In the first one 
 the overlap makes a tight joint, while in the others the inserted 
 piece is fitted steam tight. By filling the packing rings with 
 white metal the wear comes mainly upon the softer material 
 instead of on the cylinder, a most desirable feature, since the 
 rings are easily and cheaply renewed. For the same reason 
 
 A piston for a single acting engine, with combination pack- 
 ing, is shown in Fig. 1083. The metallic packing rings are 
 backed with hemp, this combination presenting the advantage 
 
 Fig. 1079. 
 
 bronze rings are used, while iron or steel are not to be 
 mended, with the exception of soft cast iron, which works well, 
 the cylinder being made quite hard. 
 
 In Fig. 1081 is shown the so-called "Swedish" piston, as 
 used in a large blowing engine by Egestorff. This piston is 
 
 Fig. 1080. 
 
 made with increased depth in the centre, similar to that in 
 Fig. 1078, and the holes shown in the sectional plan view are 
 for the purpose of removing the core from the casting. The 
 packing rings are made of cast iron, with the joint made as 
 
 Fig. 1082. 
 
 of elasticity together with durability. This style of packing is 
 well suited also for marine engines, as its elasticity renders it 
 less likely to be injured by the pitching and rolling of the vessel 
 than an entire metallic packing. 
 
 Pistons for pump cylinders may be packed with leather so 
 long as the temperature of the liquid to be pumped does not 
 exceed 88° F. (30° C). 
 
 Fig. 1 08 1. 
 
 shown in Fig. loSoa. The rings are kept in their proper posi- 
 tion by small pins. The method of securing the piston to the 
 rod is worthy of notice. The large key is secured and tightened 
 by a smaller key, the latter being held by a bolt, thus forming 
 a fastening of the third order. 
 
 Fig. 1082 shows a metallic piston in which the packing rings 
 are pressed out by an inner spring ring of steel.* 
 
 The double cone shape of the inner ring enables the piston 
 to be closely fitted to the cylinder by tightening the bolts when 
 the engine is built. The nuts for the bolts are made of bronze, 
 as in Penn's piston, the thread in this case being carried entirely 
 through the nut and the hole closed by a plug. 
 
 , Westphalia. This firm 
 
 < r & * 
 
 Fig. 1084. 
 
 A form of packing for this purpose is shown in Fig. 1084, the 
 principle being the same as the forms shown in the following 
 section. The units for the dimensions are the same as already 
 given. 
 
 l 346. 
 Pi,UNGERS AND Stuffing Boxfs. 
 
 As already observed, the packing for plungers and rods acts 
 from the circumference inward, and such packings, in connec- 
 tion with the necessary parts, are known as stufiing boxes. 
 
 Two stuffing boxes for leather cup packing, especially ai' 
 for hydraulic presses and for pumps, are shown in Figs, i-^^ 
 and 1086, the former being for small and the latter for large 
 plungers. The double cup in Fig. 1085 is made with a spring 
 ring of iron between the cups to hold them in position before 
 the water pressure is applied. When the form shown in Fig. 
 1086 is used in the horizontal position, a ring of bronze made 
 in several parts is introduced below the packing, as shown in 
 dotted lines. This is intended to support the plunger and pre- 
 vent it from rubbing against the cast iron cylinder. The propor- 
 tions given in the illustrations are all based on the unit s, given 
 by formula (339). 
 
254 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The friction existing between a plunger or piston rod in the 
 ordiuar}- stuffing box in which the packing is tightened by 
 screws, cannot well be calculated, as it depends upon the pres- 
 sure which is put upon the packing. In those forms of stuffing 
 box in which the pressure in the cylinder tightens the packing 
 the friction may be calculated. According to the very elaborate 
 
 Fig. 1086. 
 
 researches of Hick,* the friction of a well-lubricated cup leather 
 packing is independent of the depth of the packing, and is 
 directly proportioned to the water pressure and to the diameter 
 of the plunger. If P is the total pressure, D the diameter of 
 plunger, and Fthe fractional resistance, we have : 
 
 -p=-D- ^^40) 
 
 For a new leather packing the friction is about i}4 times 
 greater. If instead of the total pressure P we use the pressure 
 p, in pounds per scLuare inch we have : 
 
 - = 0.0393 — n 
 
 Example.— For a piston rod 0.4 in. diameter, according to (340) the loss by 
 friction would be y'^, or 10 per cent., while for a plunger 24 in. diameter it 
 would be 0.0016, or '/i of i per cent. If, for example, the pressure is 4000 
 pounds per square inch, the' friction according to (341) would be 
 
 F= 4000 X 0.0393 X 0.7854 X 24 = 2963 pounds. 
 The total pressure on the plunger would be 
 
 P= 4000 X 0.7854 X 24- = 1,810,000 pounds. 
 
 Stuffing boxes for the piston rods of steam engines must be 
 capable of resisting the action of heat. Hemp packing is still 
 much used for this purpose. The following illustrations show 
 two excellent forms of stuffing boxes to be used with hempen 
 packing. 
 
 ' 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
 ik£: 
 
 % 
 
 ^ 
 
 '.67151 1 PJIJ. , 1 
 
 
 1(1 
 
 Fig. 1087. 
 
 Fig. 1087 is intended to be used on the top of a cylinder; 
 Fig. 1088 is for an inverted cylinder. Both gland and box are 
 fitted with bronze rings, in order to reduce the wear upon the 
 rod. The wedge-shaped edge which is given to these rings was 
 introduced by Farcot, and is an improvement on the older style 
 of beveling the edge in one direction only, the latter method 
 often drawing the packing away from the sides of the box and 
 permitting leakage. In some designs the edge is left square, as 
 in Fig. 1090, or slightly rounded, as in Fig. 1089. 
 
 Fig. 1090. 
 
 Fig. 1089 shows a form especially adapted to inverted cylin- 
 ders. The construction will be apparent on examination, and 
 it will be seen that the ordinary arrangement is reversed, and 
 the gland is cast upon the cylinder and the box containing the 
 packing is made separate. This prevents water from the cylin- 
 der from readily getting into the box. 
 
 In order to prevent the gland from binding on the rod it is 
 important that care should be taken to tighten both nuts 
 equally. In large marine engines, for example, the nuts are 
 made with worm wheels upon a common shaft. For small 
 stuffing boxes this is accomplished by having the screw thread 
 cut upon the outside of the box, as shown in Fig. 1090. This 
 box is intended to be made entirely of bronze. The nut is 
 made with six or eight notches in its circumference, to enable 
 it to be turned by a spanner wrench. 
 
 The dimensions of all the preceding figures are based upon 
 the unit .J given by the empirical formula (339). 
 
 Example. — For a rod 3 ins. diameter, according to (339) we get j = 0.36. 
 The thickness of packing will then be 0.36 X 1.8 = 0.648, say Yt. in. The 
 height of box lor Fig. 1087 will be 0.36 X 12 = 4.32 ins., and for Fig. 1088 0.36 
 X 21 = 7 56 ins., and so for the other dimensions. 
 
 In horizontal stuffing boxes the length of the bronze collars 
 should be made not less than 8 to 12 .s, in order to reduce the 
 wear. The dimensions given in the illustrations may some- 
 times be modified in order to conform to the thickness of ad- 
 joining parts, so as to avoid difficulties in casting and shrinkage. 
 
 In some instances the stuffing boxes for valve rods for steam 
 engines are made in two parts, divided in a plane passing 
 through the axis of the rod. The flange of the steam chest is 
 then made in the same plane, so that with this construction the 
 chest can be opened and valve and rod very conveniently re- 
 moved and replaced. 
 
 The large plungers for mine pumps are packed with hemp, 
 the stuffing boxes having 4 to 8 bolts. 
 
 More recently metallic packing has been introduced for 
 stuffing boxes of steam engines. An excellent example is 
 
 shown iu Fig. 1091, which is made by Howaldt Brothers, of 
 Kiel.f The rings are made of white metal, in double cone 
 
 * See Verhandl. des Vcreins K. Gewerbfleiss, 1866, p. 159. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^55 
 
 pairs as shown, thus causing the pressure to be exerted alter- 
 nately against the rod and the walls of the stuffing box. An 
 elastic washer is placed between the gland and the iirst ring to 
 equalize the pressure. Fig. 1092 shows the standard metallic 
 packing introduced on the Prussian State Railways by Super- 
 intendent Neumann. This uses a single ring of white metal 
 made in two parts. The pressure is obtained from a steel spiral 
 spring placed in the bottom of the stuffing box, and acting 
 against a bronze pressure ring. The whole is enclosed in a 
 steel cylinder which, together with its contents, can be drawn 
 out by inserting a hook into a T-shaped recess. The form 
 shown in the illustration is intended for a valve rod, but a 
 similar pattern is used for the piston rod. 
 
 ?347. 
 Pistons with Valves. 
 Pistons with valves are used in lift pumps and in steam en- 
 gine air pumps. An example of such a pistou, with leather 
 packing, intended for a mine pump, is shown in Fig. 1093. 
 
 Fig. 1093. 
 
 The packing is composed of conical rings of leather and 
 canvas, each three adjoining layers being sewed together. The 
 pressure of the water acts to tighten the packing. The acid 
 mine water often acts injuriously upon the leather packing of 
 the pump pistons, and in such cases metallic packing, with 
 rings of soft cast iron, is used. At Fahlun, in Sweden, after 
 many experiments the best material for packing was decided to 
 be birch wood. The proportions for Fig. 1093 are based upon 
 the unit s. A valved piston for steam engine air pump is shown 
 in Fig. 984. 
 
 I 348. 
 Piston Rods. 
 
 Piston rods for steam engines are usually made of wrought 
 iron or steel, and recently compound rods of wrought iron sur- 
 rounded with hard steel have been used. The rod i.: either sub- 
 jected to tension only, as in single acting engines, or is alter- 
 nately subjected to tension and compression, in which case the 
 length and resistance to buckling must be taken into account. 
 For short rods the same results are obtained for both condi- 
 tions, but in no case should a rod subjected to alternate tension 
 and compression be made lighter than a rod under tension 
 only. 
 
 a. Dimensions of Piston Rods, Tension only. 
 
 D = diameter of cylinder in inches. 
 
 j> = pressure in pounds per square inch. 
 
 The total pressure P on the piston will he P= — p D"^. In 
 
 order that the stress on the rod should not exceed 8500 pounds 
 we have for the diameter d of the piston rod when made of 
 wrought iron, and is subjected to tension only : 
 
 ^ = o.oios ^y (342) 
 
 or for a close approximation : 
 
 Steel rods subjected to tension only may be made 0.8 times 
 the diameter of wrought iron rods. 
 
 If a piston rod is weakened by having a keyway cut through 
 it, or by a screw thread, the reduction in cross section should 
 be provided for by a proper increase in diameter. For this 
 reason the diameter of the rod is sometimes increased in the 
 cross head, an example of which will be seen in the locomotive 
 cross head, Fig. 539. This construction involves the necessity 
 of making the stuffing box gland in halves, as it could not be 
 slipped over the enlarged end of the rod. 
 
 b. Dimensions of Piston Rods for Buckling Stresses. 
 Using the preceding nomenclature and indicating the length 
 of stroke by Z,, we 1 
 
 ^/^sf^ 
 
 from which th« 
 
 following table has been calculated : 
 
 
 L 
 
 '■^r" 
 
 = .0 
 
 = 80 
 
 = 90 
 
 "°l '" 
 
 = 140 ! = 160 
 
 ..80 
 
 1.5 
 
 2-5 
 
 1 
 
 0.0967 O.IOO 
 o.lii 0.116 
 
 0.135 
 
 0.108 
 
 0.128 
 
 1 
 0.114 j 0119 
 
 0.132 0.138 
 
 0.143 o-m8 
 0.161 1 0.166 
 
 0.153 
 
 These values will serve both for wrought iron and for steel 
 (compare \ 182, and table in \ 2). 
 
 Example. — For a steam cylinder 16 in. bore, 4 in. stroke, with a pressure 
 of 60 pounds, we have -_ = 25, and d = 0.130 X 16 = 2.08, say 2 inches dia- 
 meter, either for steel or wrought iron. 
 
 The dimensions of steel keys to secure the piston to the rod 
 are so taken as to give shearing stresses from 5600 to 7500 
 pounds in the key. Care should be taken that the key be not 
 made too narrow, and the consequent superficial pressure be- 
 come too great. Pressures of 6000 to 7000 pounds per square 
 inch are found in stationary engines, and ^0,000 to 15,00(7 
 pounds in locomotive engines. 
 
 ? 349- 
 Specific Capacity of Pressure Transmission Systems. 
 
 Having discussed the subject of conductors for pressure 
 organs, we return to the consideration of the various mechani- 
 cal devices which maybe operated by pressure organs, although 
 these have already been described in Chapter XXIII. We are 
 now prepared to consider these in connection v/ith the subject 
 of long-distance transmission of power, in a manner similar to 
 that in which tension organs are used in Chapter XXI. For 
 this purpose we may use to advantage the conception of specific 
 capacity. This method is especially desirable because its sim- 
 plicity and general character enables comparison to be made 
 between widely ditfering systems. 
 
 The conception of specific capacity can be extended without 
 difficulty to motors operated by water, air, steam, etc, since for 
 all these we may put the general equation : 
 
 qv 
 deduced in \ 280. In this equation q represents the cross sec- 
 tion of the pipe or other conductor in square inches ; the mean 
 velocity in feet per viimite =^ z', and TV being the horse power. . 
 If, for example, in a water pressure engine, h is the available 
 head of W'ater. Q the weight of water delivered per minute, and 
 /;' the head equivalent to the resistance against which the water 
 leaves the engine, we have for the work delivered : 
 
 33000 
 
 r.ut O =0.0361 X 12 ^2^ = 0.434 qv, the coefficient 0.0361 being 
 the weight of a cubic inch of water, and the pressure p with 
 which the water acts = 0.434 /i, whence h -— 2.3/. Substituting 
 these values we get : 
 
 2.3 (P-P') , 
 
 JV^ 
 
 JV = 
 
 -qvip-p^) 
 
 Example. — If / = 60 pounds we have from (342), — ^ = 00836, and hence 
 for a 20 inch cylinder (i = 20 X 0.0836 = 1.67 in. The approximate formula 
 {343) gives ^^ "t ^° = 0.087, which for D = ia gives rf = 1.74 in. 
 
 33000 33000 ' 
 
 and the specific capacity becomes : 
 
 ° qv 33000 ^^ ^ ' ^^^^' 
 
 a value of the same form as that previous^' deduced in I 280 
 [see formula (:62)]. 
 
2j6 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Example.— li the effective pre 
 pacity will be N^, = 0.0097. If the 
 a velocity of 236 feet per miaute, 
 
 This is only the capacity of the pipe. The effective capacity will 
 be considered later. , 
 
 Formula (345) can also be used for air pressure or for vacuum, 
 for steam or gas, by expressing the effective pressure in terms 
 of an equivalent head of water. For steam and air it may be 
 considered as an expression of the following form : 
 
 iron and steel, especially in the Maanesmann rolled tubes, per- 
 mit the use of high stresses; for wrought iron ►S := 17,000 lbs. 
 and for steel 35,000 to 40,000 lbs., or even higher, if necessary, 
 may be used. JBy neglecting the value oi p in formula (347) we 
 have for : 
 
 Cast Iron, 5— 6,500, tVq = 0.197 
 
 Wrought Iron .S = 17,000, N^ = 0.515 
 Steel 5=35,000, iVo = 1.060 
 
 This gives an indication of the efficiency of the pipe system of 
 power transmission and enables comparisons to be made with 
 other systems. 
 
 ^V„^ 
 
 33000 
 
 [P -P') ^ 
 
 • (346) 
 
 The coefficient n is very comprehensive ; it increases with p 
 and with the rate of expansion f, and can be calculated from 
 these data, and also confirmed by observation. For £ = 2, it 
 ranges from xyi to 1%, and increases to 3 to 4 for £ ^ 20 to 30, 
 results which conform to the higher pressures and greater effi- 
 ciency of compound engines in which such high expansion 
 ratios are used. 
 
 With some transformations the equation for specific capacit)* 
 may also be used to solve another important problem, that is 
 the question of the best material to be used for the conducting 
 pipe. 
 
 If we assume the diameter of the pipe, the horse-power TV 
 will be : 
 
 AIL 
 
 The Ring System of Power Distribution with Pipe 
 Conductors. 
 Before proceeding with the further discussion of the preced- 
 ing equations it is advisable to investigate further the subject of 
 power transmission by means of pipe conductors, as already in- 
 dicated in I 312. It was there remarked that pressure organs 
 might be used in connection with pipe conductors so as to form 
 "ring" transmission systems in a manner similar to those 
 already described for rope. Taking into consideration first, 
 hydraulic systems, especially high pressure hydraulic systems, 
 we find two distinct kinds of "ring" systems which may be 
 used. 
 
 ». + « = ., f|±f 
 
 And since 2 6 -\- D \s the external diameter D^, we have for 
 the cross section q^ of the pipe. 
 
 Substituting the value of — D' from its equation in the above 
 
 4 
 expression for N, we have 
 
 
 Fig. 1094. 
 
 In the first method, Fig. 1094, the flow of water under pres- 
 sure starts from the power station T^, with a pressure />o, and 
 proceeds to the first station T^, where it operates a water pres- 
 sure engine, and passes on with a reduced pressure py It has 
 therefore operated at the station 7j with a pressure p^ — p^ 
 With the pressure />! it passes on to the eecond, third, fourth — 
 — nth station Tn, each time losing pressure until it returns to 
 the power station with a final pressure p n, where it is again 
 raised to the initial pressure of p^. This is practically a coun- 
 ter part of the rope transmission system of Fig. 917. It is 
 apparent that the water pressure engines (escapements) at T^, 
 T., 7^3, T,i, should all be of equal size in order to uti- 
 lize the entire flow without excessive resistance. Automatic 
 regulation, such as Helfenberger's, described in ? 328, is also 
 desirable.* 
 
 a form similar to the preceding expressions for N^. 
 
 This expression is very instructive. It is applicable to all 
 forms of conducting pipes for power transmission. It shows 
 clearly the importance and value of a high value of .S". A high 
 value of 5 reduces the proportional influence of p, to a degree 
 which practically makes N^ dependent mainly upon 5. It fol- 
 lows that we may consider that the specific capacity of the pipe 
 in a pipe transmission system, is practically independent of the 
 pressure of the fluid used in it. In other words, the capacity of 
 a given pipe in horse-power is the same, whether the medium 
 be liquid or gaseous, high or low pressure, provided the stress 
 in the material of the cross section of the pipe is constant. 
 
 It is therefore desirable to use pipes of small diameter and 
 fluids at moderately high pressures. The friction in the pipe 
 need not prevent this, as care in avoiding sharp bends and 
 angles can be taken ; and as already shown in ^ 340 the friction 
 is independent of the pressure of the medium, at least so it 
 appears from such experiments as have yet been made. 
 
 The value of the stress in the material of the pipe cannot be 
 taken very high ; S = 7000 lbs. being about the upper limit, 
 jind S = 6500 lbs. appears to be quite high enough. Wrought 
 
 Fig. 1095 • 
 
 The second system is shown in diagram in Fig. 1095. It will 
 be seen that at each station there is a branch or shunt tube, 
 leading through the motor (or escapement) T^, and then re- 
 uniting with the main pipe. The main pipe A, forks at the 
 station into the two branches B and C, of which the first diverts 
 any required fraction of the power of the main flow, as ^, i |, 
 as the case may be. At the fork is a swing valve O, operated 
 by a speed governor 7?, driven by the motor. This governor 
 requires the assistance of some form of power reinforcement, 
 such, for example, as shown in Fig. 1037. The discharge pipe 
 D of the motor unites with the by-pass C, to form again the 
 main conductor E. At the entrance in the main pipe A, we 
 have the pressure /i of the original flow ; the motor 'J\_ is now 
 supposed to be stationary, the stop valve at B' having been 
 closed by hand. The flap valve C which has been disconnected 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^S7 
 
 from the regulator before stopping the motor, is also closed. 
 The flow of water then passes through C to ^ with the pres- 
 sure/,- 
 
 When the motor T^ is to be started, the valve B' is opened 
 and the flap valve C gradually opened uutil the motor begins 
 to move, when it is connected to the governor, which regulates 
 it thereafter so as to keep the motor at its normal speed. When 
 a heavy load is thrown on, the valve is opened so that the pres- 
 sure /^ ii -^. becomes a greater fraction of p^, and when the 
 work is less it is reduced. The pressure of discharge p^ acts as 
 a back pressure so that the motor works with an effective pres- 
 sure fi.2 — p3. The flow of water in the by-pass pipe C, also 
 passes the valve C^ with a pressure ^3, and unites with the dis- 
 charge at £ to be further utilized at subsequent stations until 
 it returns to the power station, where if it has reached the min- 
 imum pressure, it is permitted to flow into a tank, from which 
 it is again drawn by the pressure pumps. If the return water is 
 delivered under pressure it may be allowed to enter the suction 
 pipe of the pressure pumps direct and so form a closed ring 
 system to start anew on the circuit. 
 
 This system has not yet to the Author's knowledge been put 
 into practical operation.* 
 
 The ring system of hydraulic power transmission is to be 
 recommended when the various stations are distributed over a 
 wide area and are readily connected by a continuous line of 
 pipe. The pipe can be kept from freezing in winter by occa 
 sional gas flames, as has already been demonstrated by exper- 
 ience with Armstrong's hydraulic cranes. The ring system 
 should be carefully distinguished from those forms in which 
 the flow of water passes through the motor and is allowed to 
 flow off at lowest pressure of discharge. A corresponding dis- 
 tinction is to be made with other forms of power transmission. 
 
 The author distinguishes as " line " transmissions, those forms 
 in which the transmitting medium does not return to itself in a 
 complete circuit, in contradistinction with the "ring" systems. 
 The older form of rope transmission (§ 297) is therefore a " line" 
 system, while the system devised by the author and discussed 
 in ^ 30t is a "ring" system. A hydraulic system in which 
 there is a free discharge of water from the motors is in like 
 manner a hydraulic "line"' transmission system. 
 
 There is, however, an intermediate form possible, namely, 
 that in which water after passing through a series of motors as 
 in a ring system, is discharged freely from the last motor Tn. 
 A similar arrangement is possible with other systems of trans- 
 mission. We may therefore extend the definition of a "ring " 
 system to include those forms in which the medium of trans- 
 mission returns to the place of starting. The distinction can 
 then be made between "open" and "closed" ring systems, 
 the latter being shown in diagram in Fig. 917. 
 
 High pressure hydraulic systems are well adapted for large 
 railway stations where numerous elevators as well as winding 
 hoists and other rotative machines are to be operated. For 
 such installations a combination of '"ring" and "line" systems 
 is best suited. The hydraulic elevators are more conveniently 
 arranged on a line system than in a ring circuit. An apparent 
 objection to the use of high pressure water to direct acting ele- 
 vators lies in the fact that the diameter of the plunger becomes 
 so small as to be hardly stiff enough to support the load on the 
 platform without buckling. This diflBculty is readily overcome 
 by use of the hydraulic lever, as shown in Fig. 956 a, the con- 
 struction of which offers no diflBculties, and it is unnecessary to 
 go into details. 
 
 Up to the present time air has only been used upon line sys- 
 tems, either with direct pressure or with vaacum. Gas engines 
 can only be operated on a line system since the gas is burned 
 in the engine. Steam has been used in a ring system in New 
 York for some time, on a long distance transmission, and short 
 ring systems exist in most cases of compound or triple expan- 
 sion steam engines as used in marine and stationary practice. 
 
 Fig. 1096. 
 
 Steam at a high initial pressure is expanded successively in one 
 cylinder after anether, and between the last cylinder or station 
 Tn and the first, or boiler T^, is placed the surface condenser 
 
 7 m, where the medium reaches the minimum pressure and is 
 converted into water to be returned to the boiler and start anew 
 on the circuit. In order that the velocity of flow shall be uni- 
 form the successive passages for the expanding steam should 
 be made with continually increasing cross section as shown in 
 diagram in Fig. 1096. If a jet condenser is used instead of a 
 surface condenser the circuit becomes an open ring. The high 
 economy which has been attained by the application of the 
 " ring " system with steam in the form of multiple expansion 
 engines, points to the possibility of a similar economy in the 
 application of the ring system to wire rope transmission. 
 
 Lehmann's hot air engine, which is a true closed circuit, is 
 an example of the ring system confined within the limits of a 
 single machine. 
 
 Specific Capacity of Transmission by Shafting. 
 
 The subject of the specific capacity of shafting was not con" 
 sidered in Chapter IX, and it is introduced in this place in 
 order to obtain a basis for comparison with the other systems 
 of transmission. 
 
 If we have the moment PJ? and shaft diameter d, we have, if 
 5* is the fibre stress at the circumference 
 
 PJ?=:S^ d^ 
 
 1. J? ^ n d, -we have /* = the force at 
 
 the circumference of the shaft and hence P^ S-^ d^. Takin 
 
 V = the velocity at the circumference of the shaft and JV the 
 number of horse-power transmitted, we have : 
 
 - d^ ^q, the cross sectional area of the shaft, whence 
 
 S q V 
 33000 
 
 . (348) 
 
 ,nd hence the specific capacity of the shaft is : 
 qv 2 33,000 
 
 (349) 
 
 This expression, which is of the same form as those already ob- 
 tained, does not give values numerically great, because S must 
 be taken low enough to avoid excessive torsion of the shaft. If 
 we require, as in § 144, that the torsion shall not exceed 0.075° 
 per foot of length we must have S ^ 630 d which gives for 
 shafting from 2 to 6 inches diameter 6" = about 1200 to 3700 
 pounds and the specific capacity 
 
 No= 0.018 to 0.056 . 
 
 • (35o> 
 
 In other words, such a shaft will transmit, at one foot per min- 
 ute circumferential velocity, 0.018 to 0.056 horse-power for each 
 square inch cross section. 
 
 In the application of shafting to long distance transmission 
 the friction of the journal bearings is a very important consid- 
 eration. The influence of friction may be determined in the 
 form of a general expression in a similar manner to that of the 
 friction of water in a pipe (§ 340). According to formula (100) 
 we have for the force P', exerted at the circumference to over- 
 come the journal friction i^= — y times the weight of the 
 
 v/(tO 
 
 2 Z X 0.28 in which L is the 
 
 length of the shaft in feet, and 0.28 is the weight of a cubic 
 inch of wrought iron. It follows that the horse power A'i re- 
 quired to overcome the friction will be : 
 
 iVi = 
 
 - X ? X 12 Z X < 
 
 33000 33000 
 
 and if we take the coefllicient of friction/ = 0.08 we have 
 
S;S8 
 
 N, = ~ 
 
 ? X 4 X 0.28 X 12 L y V 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR 
 
 L q V 
 
 96,422 
 
 • (351) 
 
 and if we wish the specific frictional resistance, we have: 
 
 \^' ^Jo q V 96,422 U5^; ratio "'- = i/'- Making i/j = 0.9 as is usual in practice with such 
 
 This resistance is bv no means inconsiderable. Expressed as a tubing, the diameter for resistance to torsion, (compare formula 
 
 • (352) 
 
 SO that in both instances it is less than one-fourth the resistance 
 of the corresponding solid shafts, as given in (354). Hollow shaft- 
 ing thus greatly extends the capacity of shafting for long dis- 
 tance transmission and also permits an important economy in 
 material. 
 
 The subject of shafting made of steel tubing was not consid- 
 ered in Chapttr IX, and a brief discussion will therefore be 
 
 Let fl'o be the outside diameter, d^ the inside diameter, let the 
 
 . d 
 
 percentage it will be : 
 
 1,133) ) will be: 
 
 96,422 ■ N 96,442 ' A'o 
 
 • ■ (353) 
 
 = 0.39^ ^^ = 6.18^^ 
 
 The value *,-, it will be seen, is inversely proportional to the This requires that the number of revolutions be known 
 
 assumed. If instead of n, th( 
 given, we have for the same shaft 
 
 ferential velocity v, be 
 
 o = 7.25<f^. 
 
 and for a 6 inch shaft 
 
 - (354) 
 
 0.056 X 96,422 5400 I 
 
 lience 1735 feet and 5400 feet are the limits of length respec- 
 tively for the two diameters given, at which the frictional resis- 
 tance will equal the total transmitting capacity. Much higher 
 efficiency is obtained by using hollow steel shafting such as is 
 now produced by the Mannesmann process of rolling weldless 
 tubing. This furuishes a seamless tube, of sufficient truth as to 
 cylindrical shape, the journals of which may be made either 
 entirely of steel or of so-called " compound steel." * 
 
 . (360) 
 
 If we take the ratio of outer to ii 
 
 r diameter ip = —~ - 
 
 The diameterYor strength (compare (131)) will be : 
 
 d^=...^Z^^5.3sM (362) 
 
 If f is not assumed as above, it may be taken at will and the 
 following formula used : 
 
 (compare § 90) and the thickness of the journal d^ = 0.4 d^ we 
 have for IV^ : 
 
 • (355) 
 
 
 „(.-■) • 
 
 -which for V = 0.9 gives 
 
 in which, when : 
 
 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 
 I 1.02 1.05 1. 10 1. 14 1. 19 1.242 1.427 
 
 -which is decidedly higher than for the solid shaft. (The value 
 
 •S" < 630 d^ must be retained to avoid too great torsion). For The weights of tubular and solid shafting are to each other as 
 
 the frictional resistance at the circumference of the shaft we ^j 2X /^ x 
 
 GO (-*")■ 
 
 ^=v/[i''<-*0"^'<°-^'l] 
 
 -and if d^ =■ o.a^ d^ we have : 
 
 E!±:f_liL 
 
 
 or dividing again by N : 
 
 "'^ N 241,000 N^ ' 
 
 With the values for N^ as given in the two preceding instances, 
 -we have for the 2 inch shaft : 
 
 -and for the 6 inch shaft : 
 
 circumferential velocity v = 5 — 
 
 chosen, as may readily be done, on 1 
 d', we have from (360), making v = 
 
 [shaft. The hollow shaft, however, weighs 
 the weight of the solid shaft. The 
 
 163 feet. If a higher speed be 
 
 and these give in (357) : 
 for the 2 inch shaft — 
 
 0.0326 X 241,000 7856 
 and for the 6 inch shaft — 
 
 o.ioi X 241,000 24,341 
 
 The weight olIshaft>ill be 
 
 (s)'(— )= 
 
 The loss from friction will be 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 259 
 
 Spfcific Vai<ub of IvOng Distance; Transmissions. 
 
 In the two preceding sections, equations have been given 
 shovcing comparative relations between various methods of 
 transmissions but at the pame time the general equation by 
 which all the various methods of long distance transmission 
 may at once be compared, has not yet been given. The point 
 •which yet remains to be determined is the amount of material 
 which the tranimitted force carries in the shape of the trans- 
 mitting medium. Investigation reveals certain fundamental 
 points which may be applied either to a special case or to a 
 comparative judgment as to the value of different systems. 
 
 The amount of -material required for the priftcipal transmit- 
 ting nieditini of a long distance traiismission system, may be 
 considered as a function of the number of horse-power required 
 to transport one pound of the -material of which the conductor 
 is composed over the distance between the origin of power and 
 the point of application. 
 
 The name ' Specific Long Distance Value " may properly be 
 given to this quantity. If it is high, the method is efi&cieut, if 
 low it is less efficient for applications in which the distance 
 plays an important part. 
 
 In all the cases considered the medium of transmission may 
 be taken as a form of prism of constant cross section q, having 
 an endlong motion and the length of which is equal to the dis- 
 tance A from the point of origin to the point of application. A 
 chosen length A^ may be selected as a unit. The weight G of 
 such unit will then be : 
 
 G=\2 A^q a (364) 
 
 in which c is the weight of a cubic inch of the material of which 
 the conductor is made. The work in horse power exerted dur- 
 ing the passage over the distance A^, is expressed by : 
 
 N =^ N^q V 
 Dividing this value by the preceding we obtained the desired 
 result. It is desirable to select a standard unit for A^ which 
 shall be generally applicable. Making A^ ^= i inch = -^^ ft, 
 
 N 
 and letting the quotient — be represented by Ns, we have for 
 
 the general equation of " specific long distance value : " 
 
 N,=N^ — and also = C- 
 
 ^ (36s) 
 
 These values hold good for all the systems which have been 
 considered with the exception of rope and belt transmissions. 
 In these the tension organ moves not only forward, but must 
 be returned back on the slack side, and hence for these cases 
 we must put : 
 
 
 . (366) 
 
 When rope is used on the "ring" transmission system, how- 
 ever, the preceding formula (365) is properly used, since a 
 single rope makes the entire circuit back to the origin of power 
 and the last point of application usually lies near the starting 
 point. 
 
 The formula for Ns is especially noteworthy because its 
 application reveals great and unexpected differences between 
 the various systems of long distance transmission. 
 
 When the conducting medium is operated at a high velocity 
 and also at a high working stress the specific value is very 
 high ; when they are both small the specific value becomes 
 lower, since they are both multiplied together. The following 
 table shows both numerically and graphically the "specific 
 long distance value " for the several methods named : 
 
 The stresses in the table are taiien at the maximum values 
 given in the preceding pages of this work, without approaching 
 too close to the upper limit. The high value of steel cable trans- 
 mission is most noteworthy, and explains its frequent use. 
 The table does not even give as good a standing for wire rope 
 as might have been done, as when used with a tightening pul- 
 ley its specific capacity is increased \\ times, see formula (310). 
 
 Equally noteworthy with the value of wire rope is the poor 
 showing made by shafting, especially solid shafting ; as it occu- 
 pies the lowest position of all. The newer system of hollow- 
 steel shafting stands somevv'hat better, but still very low. 
 
 Welded iron and steel tubing when used for conductors give 
 fairly good results. To avoid misunderstanding, it must be 
 noted that where pipes are referred to in the table, v is the 
 velocity of the fluid passing through them. No distinction is 
 made between pipes for steam, compressed air or water, since it 
 is only the weight of the tube which is here considered. A cir- 
 cumstance worthy of note is that the reciprocal of Ns is pro- 
 portional to the weight of the transmitting material, omitting 
 
 connections, flanges, couplings, etc., so that Gs 
 
 If, for 
 
 weight of the bare steel pipe will be - 
 
 example, 200 horse-power is to be transmitted by hydraulic 
 pressure over a distance A, of 984 feet ^ 11,808 inches; the 
 
 11,808-1-200 
 
 —.T^^~ = ''^' 
 
 pounds, the thickness of the pipe being so made that the stress 
 on the material shall be 34,000 pounds, and the diameter such 
 that the velocity shall be 787 feet per minute. Such calcula- 
 tions are very useful for a general and preliminary investiga- 
 tion. The designer must be careful not to lose sight of the fact 
 that the stress in the material, and the velocity bear a very im- 
 portant relation to each other. 
 
 The values of Ns, given above, are the gross values including 
 the entire work transmitted by the system. The net value 
 (^"2)-' ^od its relation to the gross value, that is, the quotient 
 
 AT 
 
 — - is the next question to be answered. This question is by no 
 
 means so simple as the preceding. The actual efiiciency of a 
 long distance transmission depends so much upon the resis- 
 tances of friction, stiffness, centrifugal force, heat, etc., all of 
 which differ for the different constructions, that only a very 
 general allowance can be made to include them. A brief glance 
 can only here be given to the method of determining this 
 point. 
 
 The greater the number of horse-power which can be trans- 
 mitted for each pound of material, the less, proportionally will 
 be the load upon the bearings and other points of loss, and 
 lifence the smaller, proportionally, will be the loss of friction and 
 other hurtful resistances. In other words : The greater the 
 specific value of the system, the less, in general, will be the pro- 
 portion of hurtful resistance. 
 
 The values already given in the table for the gross specific 
 value, give also, therefore a measure of the net efficiency as 
 well. 
 
 While it can hardly be asserted that the above values for Ns 
 are inversely proportional to the losses from hurtful resistan- 
 ces, yet there is a relation existing between them, so that it 
 may be said that the net value (iVj)^ is in all cases higher than 
 the gross value N s ; higher in the sense, that, the greater gross 
 values are accompanied also with a higher net efficiency. 
 
 The difference will appear most distinctly by comparing wire 
 cable transmission with solid shafting. Such a comparison is 
 the more readily made because in both instances the resis- 
 tances can be closely determined. 
 
 SPECIFIC VALUE FOR LONG DISTANCE TRANSMISSIONS. 
 
 Steel Cable, Ring System . . 
 Steel Cable, Line System . . 
 Iron Cable, Ring System . . 
 Steel Conducting Pipe . . . 
 Iron Cable, Line System . . 
 Leather Belting, Line System 
 
 Wrought Iron Pipe 
 
 Hemp Rope, Line System . . 
 
 Cast Iron Pipe 
 
 Hollow Steel Shafting . . . 
 Solid Shafting, Iron or Steel 
 
 1 ■' 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 ^'o 
 
 i^s 
 
 5900 
 
 21,000 
 
 0.32 
 
 0.318 
 
 ,S683 
 
 5900 
 
 21,000 
 
 
 32 
 
 0.318 
 
 2631 
 
 5900 
 
 8,500 
 
 
 
 0.129 
 
 2380 
 
 787 
 
 34,000 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 0.515 
 
 1448 
 
 5900 
 
 8,500 
 
 
 32 
 
 0.129 
 
 1190 
 
 5900 
 
 540 
 
 
 
 
 0.0068 
 
 rii4 
 
 787 
 
 17,000 
 
 
 
 0.257 
 
 722 
 
 5900 
 
 240 
 
 
 
 o^b 
 
 00036 
 
 295 
 
 787 
 
 6,400 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 0.097 
 
 272 
 
 394 
 
 5,200 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 0.II4 
 
 160 
 
 197 
 
 4,200 
 
 ° 
 
 28 
 
 O.C63 
 
 45 
 
 percentage; op efficiency. 
 
 40.6 
 24.7 
 20.3 
 
26o 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The iron wire cable transmission at Oberursel, discussed in 
 \ 300, showed a loss of about 14 per cent, iu a transmission of 
 104 H. P., over a distance of 3168 feet. To transmit the same 
 power over this distance with solid shafting, we get from (353) 
 the frictiooal resistance : 
 
 ^ 95,422 N^ 
 
 Taking A^ = 0.063, which is amply high enough, we have pr = 
 0.52 or about J. The net specific value for long distance will 
 then be for iron cable, (i — 0.14) 1190 ;=^ 1023 ; for solid shaft- 
 ing, (I —0.5)45 = 22.5. 
 
 It will be seen that about 52 H. P. is absorbed in the friction 
 of the shaft ; so that at periods of low water, when the turbine 
 3-ields only 40.3 H. P. it would not be able to overcome the 
 friction of the shaft alone. 
 
 The correctness of these considerations will be confirmed 
 when it is remembered that a wire cable runs at a very high 
 velocity and operates at a high stress which the journals of the 
 rope pulleys move at a very low velocity (scarcely -^V v) ; while 
 on the other hand the shaft can only be subjected to a low 
 stress, and the velocity at its circumference is not only low, but 
 it has to overcome the resistance of friction at the same veloc- 
 it3^ This also explains clearly the reason why rope transmis- 
 sion has so frequently superseded shafting in actual practice. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 RESERVOIRS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS. 
 
 ?353. 
 
 Various Kinds oe 
 
 Reservoirs. 
 
 Fig. 1097 shows a tank of this sort. The water is delivered 
 at E ; A, is the discharge, and 6'' the overflow. The thickness 
 of the walls is made about X-inch ; the flat bottom rests on a 
 strong floor of wood carried by heavy beams. The flange 
 joints are made as in Fig. 268, 269. If A, is the greates head of 
 water in the tank, the pressure per square inch on the bottom 
 will be/> = 0.434 h, h being taken in feet, and we have for the 
 thickness g, when D is the inside diameter according to (324) : 
 
 & I p 0.434 h h ^ ^ . 
 
 which is such a moderate value that the tank is 
 
 half-way between the top and bottom of the tank the pressure would be but 
 half that at the bottom and the bolts may be spaced proportionately wider, 
 say about 2 inches apart. The total contents of the tank will be = 742 cubic 
 feet = 5550 gallons. 
 
 In using cast iron tanks of this sort care must be taken tc^ 
 avoid filling them with liquids which have an injurious action 
 upon the rubber packing of the joints. 
 
 Reservoirs form a most important feature in connection with 
 the use of pressure organs, and are divided into tanks, receivers, 
 chambers of various kinds, in which the pressure organs may 
 be stored in greater or less quantity and drawn upon for use as 
 may be required. Such reservoirs may be used either for posi- 
 tive or negative pressure according to the system with which 
 they are used. Both kinds are shown in Fig. 993, in the case 
 of a canal lock. As already indicated in \ 312, the various 
 forms of reservoirs are very numerous. From the nature of the 
 subject we can only here discuss that branch of the subject 
 which relates to machine construction, including reservoirs of 
 cast and wrought iron, copper and steel. These are applicable 
 both to gaseous and liquid organs and in most cases are of 
 spscial' construction to meet the circumstances of use. 
 
 A reservoir wheu considered in connection with the appar- 
 atus for filling and emptying, as well as for controlling the 
 pressure, whether positive or negative, forms a storage system 
 which may properly be considered as a ratchet train (see Chap. 
 XVIII). 
 
 For the present, however, it is here only the intention to 
 discuss the constructive features of the reservoir itself consid- 
 ered as a machine element. 
 
 ?354. 
 
 Cast Iron Tanks. 
 
 Cast iron tanks with flat sides are used only for very small 
 
 reservoirs and need not be discussed here ; for larger sizes the 
 
 walls are made cylindrical in order better to resist the internal 
 
 pressure. Cylindrical cast iron tanks can be advantageously 
 
 I 355. 
 Riveted Tanks. ^ 
 
 When tanks of large capacity are required, wrought iron or 
 steel must be used in their construction and these involve the 
 use of riveted joints. With tanks of large diameter construc- 
 tive difficulties arise in connection with the flat bottoms. 
 
 In the United States, oil tanks are made with flat bottoms, 
 carefully bedded in cement, and similar tanks are used in Ger- 
 many for water. It is, however, found that greater facility of 
 construction, as well as economy of material, is obtained by 
 making the bottom convex, as will be shown. 
 
 A very frequent and useful form is that in which the bottom 
 
 ;Fig. 1098.; 
 
 is made in the shape of a spherical segment, Fig. 1098 a, the 
 tank being supported on a flanged ring riveted to its circumfer- 
 ence and the ring standing on a support of masonry. 
 
 The construction of the supporting ring is shown in Fig. 
 1098 b, from the design of Prof. Intze. 
 
 The tension in the inclined direction of the bottom of the 
 tank is carried by the lower half of the supporting ring, while 
 the upper portion is subjected to the pressure of the tank at 
 right angles to the vertical. This latter force is well resisted 
 by a ring of angle iron running entirely around the tank. 
 
 The calculation of the bottom of spherical segment shape is 
 as follows : 
 
 If R is the radius of the sphere of which the segment is a 
 part, we have from \ 19, Case II. : 
 
 used for water up to looo cubic feet capacity. A good construc- 
 tion has already been shown in Chapter IV, as made by Lauch- 
 hammer's Iron Works, of Groditz, and used in many places. 
 
 in which (Jj is the thickness and S^ the stress therein due to the 
 pressure p. The pressure is the greatest at the lowest point of 
 the bottom where the height in feet of the column of liquid is 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 equal to h, so that if a, is the weight of a cubic inch of the 
 liquid p = \2 h a. We then have : 
 
 R ~ 2S^ 
 which for water gives, a = 0.0361 
 
 • (368) 
 
 At each higher point of the bottom the pressure is less, until 
 at the edge of the bottom the height k, is diminished by the 
 depth/", of the bottom. For simplicity, however, it is custom- 
 ary to make the entire bottom of the same thickness 6, which 
 is required for the lowest point. 
 
 For the thickness of the cylindrical walls of the tank at the 
 bottom we have the pressure/ = 0.036 [k — /) both h andy, 
 being in inches, and from (367) 
 
 m(k- 
 
 ■ this gives S in feet, hence we have for 3 
 
 -n 
 
 1 inches : 
 
 J = 12 X 0.217 Z? ii_^ = 2.604/?^^^ .(369) 
 
 In order to obtain good proportions it should be considered 
 
 6 
 that as h diminishes, the ratio of — becomes smaller, while as 
 
 D increases the size and thickness of the bottom increases. 
 
 An approximate formula by which the minimum amount of 
 material will be required is : 
 
 Z? = 
 
 of the material i 
 
 (370) 
 
 cubic feet to be 
 
 in which Q is the voh 
 contained in the tank. 
 
 For the height // of the wetted portion of _the surface 
 have : 
 
 H - 
 
 f 
 
 
 f _ 
 
 ■ (371) 
 
 if we assume, as we may with sufficiently close approximation, 
 the segment of the sphere to be practically that of a paraboloid. 
 The same remark about the most economical ratio of depth 
 to diameter applies here as in the note to \ 354. 
 
 Example /.—For Q = 47,000 cubic feet we have from (370); 
 D = 1.366 -^ 42,000 = 47.36. 
 ,lated tank at Halle, of this capacity (1200 cu. metres) was 
 
 If = 65,601 
 
 I. ft. we have D = 1.3 
 y at Essen is 58 feet i 
 •;r at Neustassfurt t! 
 
 J' 70,000 = 56.3 ft., while a^tankof 
 a capacity Q = 21,160 cu. ft., and is 
 ''21,160 = 37,79 ft. 
 
 For the depth j^ of the 
 radius i?, the expression 
 
 bottom, 1 
 2Rf-p = \D\ 
 
 i have for any given 
 
 from which we get 
 
 It is found convenient, but not essential, to choose .such a 
 value for R, that 6^ = (J, when S = S^. To accomplish this re- 
 sult, the conditions which obtain for the equations both for 6^ 
 and 6 must be fulfilled. These are : 
 
 / 
 
 The following table gives a series of numerical values for 
 these relations : 
 
 D 
 
 ^ 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.625 
 
 0.65 
 
 o.,o 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.80 
 
 ... 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.93 
 
 X.O 
 
 . f 
 D 
 
 05 
 
 0.32 
 
 
 0.25 
 
 0.33 
 
 0..: 
 
 0.19 
 
 0..8 
 
 0.16 
 
 o-:5 
 
 0.14 
 
 0.134 
 
 h 
 D 
 
 X.O 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.66 
 
 0,70 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.88 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.52 
 
 2.84 
 
 » 
 
 h-o.sf 
 D 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.99 
 
 1-45 
 
 2.77 
 
 03 
 
 T-(^)" = 
 
 0.. 
 
 0.07 
 
 0.0s 
 
 0.04 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.0. 
 
 ,^ 
 
 0.0. 
 
 0.0. 
 
 0.0: 
 
 O.OX 
 
 These relations are also shown graphically in Fig. 1099, and 
 the results are interesting. It will be seen that in order to have 
 (5j = d when ^'j = ^S we must always make R <:. D. It also 
 appears that the best ratio of depth to diameter occurs when 
 
 ~ is about equal to 0.60, for then h — 0.5 /"nearly approaches 
 
 0.5 D ; this, however, is only approximate. It thus appears 
 that the two conditions of greatest economy of material and 
 equality of value 6^ and d, cannot be attained at the same time 
 
 Fig. 1099. 
 
 exactly. The most useful ratio in practice will be obtained by 
 selecting a value for /?, according to (370). 
 
 The value R = 0.5 D, which corresponds to a hemispherical 
 bottom, is useful to the extent that when the supporting ring 
 is placed at its upper edge there is no lateral pressure produced 
 tending to compress the ring, as there is iu all of the other 
 cases. The hemispherical bottom, however, offers too many 
 constructive difiBculties to be much used. 
 
 Example s.— Let Q = s, 
 
 D = i.336^"1J:55^= 50-: 
 
 25.14 ft., and combining these again we get : Q 
 ia.i.'io cu. ft., which is a little under the required C( 
 s of the proportions. 
 
 Doo cubic feet. We have from (370) : 
 ; feet and according to (371), h — 
 
 -.3/= 0.5^ = 
 i.7854 (50.28)2 = 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 If we now make /= 021/5 = o 21 X 50.28 = 10.56 v 
 
 table, J? = 0.7/? = 0.7 X 50-28 = 35.2 ft. We have ,,, , 
 
 0.5/= 0.605 D = 30.42 It. The height of the wetted perimeter win oe .« = 
 h —/= (0.605 — 0.2X) D = 0.395 D = 19.86 ft. 
 
 Taking for the stress in the metal at the lowest part of the walls of the 
 tank we have from (369) ; 
 
 IT- 
 
 5 = 
 
 .604/; _^.- = 
 
 .604 X 0.395 -^ = 0.372 in 
 
 
 For the bottom w 
 
 e have 
 
 
 
 fl2.6 
 
 ..4=- 
 
 X 2.604 X 0.605 ^ = 0.4 in 
 
 
 and -|- I.07 ; tha 
 
 is, the thickne 
 
 ss of the bottom is 7 per cent 
 
 greater than 
 
 that of the lowest 
 
 Ifwe make the 
 
 the thicknesses : 
 
 row of plates i 
 tank with six r 
 
 1 the walls of the tank, 
 ings of 3 ft. width and one of 
 
 ft. we get for 
 
 ■xcess over the theoretical thickness, but the 
 and for constructive reasons. The thickness 
 .Iculated is 0.4 in., but in practice would prob- 
 
 riveting;ai 
 ingle rivet 
 
 The latter figures show an 
 e.xcess is needed for stiffne: 
 of the bottom, as already 
 ably be made iV'. 
 
 The riveting may be made the 
 the table in § 59, we find for 5 -■ 
 
 modulus of efficiency is 0.47. Th 
 
 which seems rather too high. For this reason the two lower 
 
 should be made with double riveting : which gives a stress of = 11,800 
 
 0-59 
 pounds. The seams of the bottom should always be made double riveted. 
 
 V proportion 
 
 7COO 
 
 pounds, 
 ; at least 
 
 thei 
 
 ufs 
 
 i-^l 
 
 et Q again be taken £ 
 «i = a, and take D = 
 
 ^ifr 
 
 lbs. We will nc 
 
 
 rder 
 
 that 
 
 5i shall 
 
 at least equal 
 
 5,wew 
 
 ill take 
 
 D ° 
 
 62 
 
 D = 
 
 = 12.5 
 
 ft. We then have h 
 
 = 0.67 
 
 ^ = 33. 
 
 ft., and 
 
 h 
 
 -0.1 
 
 25)^ 
 
 = 0.545 
 
 D = 27.25 ft. 
 
 We therefore have 
 
 
 
 
 £? = 
 
 .7854 X 27.25 > 
 
 < (50)2 . 
 
 = 53,500 
 
 u.ft. 
 
 
 e/ 
 
 Tphich agrees quite closely enough with the original assumed capacity, 
 //will be = to h — /=(o.67 — 0.25) D = 0.42 /? = 21 ft. 
 We therefore have for the lowest cylindrical portion of the tank : 
 
 0.625 X 0.67 rr- _ 
 
 thus giving practically & = Si. 
 
 The tank will be heavier than the 
 be expected, but the excess weight w 
 
 ? 356. 
 
 Tanks with Concave Bottoms. 
 
 The question of the action of the forces upon the bottom of 
 a tank as discussed in the preceding sectioi:, -was first 
 thoroughly investigated by Prof. Intze, whose valuable re- 
 searches have practically revolutionized the construction of 
 riveted tanks.* The following discussion is based on Intze's, 
 but the calculations are simplified and abridged. 
 
 Fig. 1 100 shows two forms in which the spherical segment 
 may be used, a, with convex or hanging bottom, as already dis- 
 cussed, and d, with concave or reversed bottom. In both forms 
 the pressure of water on the bottom produces a stress at the 
 base of the cylindrical portion of the tank in the direction of 
 the tangent to the curve of the bottom, the stress acting in- 
 wards in case a, and outward in case d. It is desirable to make 
 the construction such that this force is received by the base 
 ring and not by the shell of the tank. In every case, however, 
 an increase is required in the thickness of the bottom of the 
 tank. 
 
 There is also a force (, acting at right angles to the tangent 
 or normal to the curve of the bottom of the tank, and the deter- 
 mination of both of these forces is a matter of importance. 
 
 If G be the weight of the liquid, and a the angle which the 
 tangents make with the axis we have for case a, for the two 
 
 * See the article by Dr. Forchheimer : " On the Construction of Iron 
 Tanks, for Water, Oil and Gas, according to the Calculations and System of 
 Prof Intze, of -Aachen." Schilling's Journal iiir Gas-beleuchtung, 1884, p. 
 
 lateral forces which act, each on one half the circumfe 
 the base ring of the tank : 
 
 
 1 . 
 
 
 /^f\ 
 
 if 
 
 
 -D--V * 
 
 .Li_ 
 
 
 L--<^ 
 
 ■•-./< 
 
 y 
 
 
 < 
 
 >■ 
 
 w / 
 
 / 
 
 2 cos a 
 producing a load Si per running foot : 
 
 2 
 
 Substituting for G, its value 
 
 y [f ^^ (/' -/) + if (I n^ +/')] 
 
 in which y is the weight of a cubic foot of the liquid, we get : 
 
 4[/^ 
 
 ^/ 
 
 C^)'] 
 
 In this A is the distance from the level of the surface of the 
 liquid to the crown of the curve of the bottom, and for the case 
 d, we have : 
 
 The last member in the brackets is always very small in value 
 as will be seen by reference to the table in the preceding sec- 
 tion. It can therefore generally be neglected, when we have 
 for both cases : 
 
 . = 4(, 
 
 -^) 
 
 ■ (374) 
 
 The detailed determination of the forces i^ and /21 need not 
 be gone into here, we have for both cases : 
 
 i = y7?ik^/)-s = y^ik^±/) . . . (375) 
 
 There is also a third force 7/, acting upon the rim of the 
 spherical bottom in the direction of a great circle at right 
 angles to the pl^ne of the drawing, for which we have per run- 
 ning foot : 
 
 and finally for the crown of the curve, where the force ?Co 
 great circle is : 
 
 "o = y~/i (377) 
 
 These formulse will be somewhat simplified if we take the 
 height //, of the wetted portion of the cylinder, whence 
 h = H±f. This gives: 
 
 • (378) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 265 
 
 These are the necessary formiite for the calculations of 
 spherical bottoms. The following points are to be noted : 
 
 I. For the convex bottom (Form, a) u^ has the greatest value, 
 that is, the stress must be calculated for the deepest point if 6-^, 
 is to remain constant; 2. For the concave bottom (Form. 3) t 
 has the greatest value, and must be used to determine S^ ; 3. 
 The supporting rim should be capable of sustaining s, if the 
 shell is to be free from any stress due to the bottom of the 
 tank. 
 
 The determination of (5j is the same as before. 
 
 If we divide the values for u^ and t, by 12, we get the stress 
 per running inch, and by using the weight <? of a cubic inch of 
 the liquid and taking R in inches, we have for the convex 
 bottom : 
 
 R 2S^ 26", ■ ' 
 
 and for the concave bottom : 
 
 • (379) 
 
 [Fig. iioi. 
 
 If the bottom is made conical, projecting either within or 
 without as in Fig. iioi, the height of the cone being/, we have 
 for the weight of the body of liquid • 
 
 (i- 
 
 and taking the component as before i 
 angle of the cone, we have : 
 
 the direction of the 
 
 S=—Ds=.- 
 
 <^--i) 
 
 2 2 COS a \^ 3jy 
 
 - is equal to the radius ./? of a sphei 
 i ; whence we have : 
 
 inscribed within 
 
 (--i) 
 
 . (381) 
 
 We also have for i the same value as for u, and 
 
 -// 
 
 . (382) 
 
 For the inverted hanging cone bottom, form c, the greatest 
 of the three forces is s, while for form d, in which the cone pro- 
 jects into the tank ( := u, is the greatest, and we use in practice 
 for form c: 
 
 • (383) 
 
 and for form d : 
 
 R 
 
 . (384) 
 
 The conical form of bottom, as will be found upon compari- 
 son, requires about 40 per cent, more material than the spheri- 
 cal, but as will be seen, its use under some circumstances is 
 advisable. 
 
 Instead of using a complete tone, the bottom may be made a 
 truncated cone, the tank being formed of two concentric cylin- 
 ders connected by a ring-shaped bottom, as in Fig. 1102. 
 
 These may be made either projecting inward or outward. 
 Following the same line of investigation as in the previous 
 cases we have for case e : 
 
 G = y - 
 
 -{Do' 
 
 -D-') H — y f— (Z?o — D) H{D-\- 
 
 — {D^-D)) 
 
 and for case/.- 
 
 G = Y^[Do^ — D-')H- 
 4 
 This gives for case e : 
 R I 
 
 .yf-.{D,-D){D- 
 
 -(/?,-/?)) 
 
 my-y 
 
 id for case/.- 
 
 ]} 
 
 
 • (386) 
 
 D 
 
 in which R is the radius of the sphere inscribed within the 
 truncated cone.* The forces t and u are obtained in a similar 
 manner as before. 
 
 The subject of truncated conical bottoms will be discussed 
 
 We have for the weight (y, of a cubic inch of various liquids : 
 
 Water 0.0361 lbs. 
 
 Petroleum 0.0289 lbs. 
 
 Linseed Oil, at 12° C. = 54° F 0.0339 lbs. 
 
 Bisulphide of Carbon, at 0° C. = 32° F. 0.0459 lbs. 
 
 Glycerine, at 0° C. = 32° F 0.0455 lbs. 
 
 Beer, at 0° C. = 32° F 0.0372 lbs. 
 
 Alcohol (absolute), at 20° C. = 68° F. . 0.0286 lbs. 
 
 In the construction of tanks, it is necessary also to consider 
 the peculiar properties of the various liquids. For alcohol no 
 packing should be used in the joints, the tightness only being 
 secured by caulking the riveted seams 
 
 *If ZIq be made o, the formulae will become those for complete cones, as 
 indicated in the dotted lines. The formulae for the weight might also be 
 symmetrically expressed: the form used has been selected because it makes 
 H the higher of the two walls, which is more convenient in numerical cal- 
 culation. 
 
264 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 I 357- 
 
 Combination Forms for Tanks. 
 
 In the forms of tanks already described the force s sin a 
 acts either to press the supporting ring inward or outward in a 
 direction radical to the axis, according as the forms a, c, e, or 
 b, d, f, are used. This circumstance lends itself very fortu- 
 nately to Prof. Intze's method of construction, since by com- 
 bining both forms in one bottom the forces may be made to 
 equilibrate each other and thus relieve the supporting ring from 
 all radial stresses. 
 
 Fig. II 03. 
 
 must be satisfied. This simple equation cannot be briefly 
 solved numerically, hence an example is here given of its 
 application. 
 
 r portion of the tank 
 
 Fig. 1 104. 
 
 For the first member we ;have for s', from (385) ; Dq = 
 2.4, whence tan a = ~ — =1.667 = tan 59°. This give 
 
 f4-{?-°)'-(^°)--]l=-'"x-« 
 
 ('-H>),.x.-...XM>- 
 
 IS of this SOI 
 
 .. 87, 24,951 an. 
 
 L.. Neumann, at \achen. . 
 
 [y X 0.5 D) 0.8572 X 0.323 (48- 11,., =, 
 (V X 0.5 D) 0.2769 X 36.8 = 10.19 (V X 0.5 D). 
 For the second member we have from formula (378) : 
 
 s" sin a' ^ sin a" y 0.5 J!" {H - 0.5/") 
 in which both R" z.t\A a" are unknown, hence we introduce /3" and have: 
 
 .r" sin a" = y cos p" R" (3 - 0.25 R" (i _ cos 3") ). 
 Introducing these into the equation of condition, we get : 
 
 10.19 X 0.5 ^v- cos ^" R" (3 - 0.25 R" (I - cos |3") ) Y = o 
 
 But 
 
 '^R" 
 
 
 We may obtain a first approximation for 3" by neglecting the second 
 member of the numerator. This gives tan (3" = ~^— = 0.2954 = tan 16° 25'. 
 
 —a tangent = 
 
 I ft. and ic 
 
 5.2930 
 
 -(3- 
 
 ..0404) = 
 
 This idea may be carried out in many ways, as by combining 
 forms d andy; Fig. 1103 a, or forms e and b, Fig. 1103 (5. or using 
 all three forms as in Fig. 1103 c, the inner vertical walls being, 
 in these combination forms omitted.* 
 
 The forms shown in the illustration also have the advantage 
 of reducing the diameter of the supporting ring and hence re- 
 quiring less extensive foundation walls. 
 
 In order that the supporting ring may be free from radial 
 stresses, the condition : 
 
 s' sin a' — s" s\y\a" ^= O (387) 
 
 early. Numerically this gives ; 
 
 r, since the weight of a cubic foot of wa 
 
 idial force upon the ring is 62.4 x 0.058 = 3 
 
 i so small as to be unimportant. 
 
 The question may properly be asked, as to the stresses upon the suooort- 
 
 „ --„ n the tank is not full, that .„, ...,,...,, .<...^= .^^ buswc 
 
 truethatthepressure on the ring necessarily changes. Suppose A^ 
 We then have for the first member of the equation : 
 
 '^his gives a pressure of 
 
 = 3ft. 
 
 °V--l55- ^ ^°-* "" '^^■1'' ^"^l- P^'' '■"""'"? foot acting from without inwards, 
 which IS large enough to be worth considering. ]t is therefore important to 
 base the calculation upon a depth of water which will be usually main- 
 tained m the tank. The proportions may also be so made that the forces 
 tvill be in equilibrium when the tank is half full, when a greater depth will 
 ward pressure. 
 
 n outward pressure and a lesser depth a: 
 
 Tanks constructed on the combination are well adapted for 
 use with gasholders, the level of the water remaining so nearly 
 uniform that the supporting ring may be kept free from any 
 lateral pressure. 
 
 § 358. 
 High Pressure Reservoirs or Accumui^ators. 
 
 The forms of tanks already described are intended to be 
 placed at such elevation either in buildings, or towers or on 
 natural elevations that the liquid is delivered through pipes at 
 the desired pressure. 
 
 In this way a w^ater tank with a pump and the necessary pip- 
 ing forms a storage system, an overflow being provided as a 
 security against flooding the tank. Systems of oil storage are 
 constructed also in this manner ; and on a small scale the water 
 tank stations for railway service come under the same classifi- 
 cation. These water stations are usually provided with steam 
 pumps, although windmills are often used, especially in the 
 United States. 
 
 It is a question whether the required pressure might not be 
 obtained by the use of compressed air, the tank being closed at 
 the top and the confined air exerting by its elasticity sufficient 
 pressure to obviate the necessity of elevating the tank upon a 
 tower to obtain the necessary pressure. 
 
 For high pressure water systems for operating hydraulic 
 machinery the use of weighted devices, as suggested long since 
 by Armstrong, has superseded the open water column, such 
 devices being generally known as Accumulators. 
 
 The volume of such accumulators is generally quite small, 
 but the pumping mechanism is so efficiently devised as to ena- 
 ble them to possess a very extensive capacity. The pressure is 
 obtained by means of a weighted plunger, the overflow being 
 replaced by a safety valve. 
 
 Fig. 1105 shows an accumulator built by C. Hoppe, Berlin.* 
 This is weighted to a pressure of 20 atmospheres, or nearly 300 
 pounds per square inch. The plunger is 1"]% in. diameter (450 
 mm.) weighted with shot which is enclosed in a cylinder. The 
 plunger is shown in the highest position. When it reaches the 
 position the lever and connections M M' act to shut off the 
 steam from the duplex pump, and at the same time the rod s 
 
 * All dimensions in the illustration are in millimetres. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 265 
 
 relieves the safety valve. When the use of the water causes the the efforts to attain compactness, having led to a vast number 
 
 plunger to sink, the steam is turned on and the pump starts. 
 If the pressure should be suddenly released by the bursting of 
 
 Fig. I ids. 
 
 a pipe, the sudden drop is received by heavy beams, and at the 
 same time the stop P' strikes the lever Paud checks the water 
 flow in time to moderate the shock. 
 
 An accumulator for very high pressures is shown in Fig. 
 1 106.* This is designed by Tweddell for use for operating riv- 
 eting machines, punches and similar tools. The plunger c, is 
 stationary ; the cylinder d, sliding upon it, weighted with rings 
 a'l of cast iron. In the lowest position the cylinder rests upon 
 vertical biiffers of oak. The water is delivered under high pres- 
 sure at H, while the water is taken off for use through suitable 
 valve gear at ^ / the safety valve is aXb'. The plunger is of 
 the differential variety similar to those shown in Fig. 977^, and 
 Fig. 9S1 b. The difference in diameter between the two por- 
 tions of the plunger is the space to be filled by the entering 
 water, the small annular area bearing the total weight, thus 
 giving a very high pressure per square inch. The pressure at- 
 tained when the cylinder is stationary is about 100 atmospheres 
 (1420 pounds), but experimental investigation has shown that 
 when the weighted cylinder is permitted to descend rapidly the 
 pressure reaches as high as 193 atmospheres, (2740 pounds), so 
 that it is worthy of note that the attainable water pressure in 
 such devices may reach double the statical pressure. 
 
 Ste;am Boii:<krs, Various Forms. 
 
 Steam boilers may properly bejconsidered as reservoirs for 
 vapor of water, while at the same time they serve as generatois 
 of force by the application of heat. The pressure is produced 
 by the heat, the feed is effected either by a pump, as Fig. 975 d, 
 or injector. Fig. 971. The overflow is represented by the safety 
 valve, and the observation of the water level is provided for in 
 a variety of ways. 
 
 The forms used for steam boilers are very numerous ; the 
 great variations of size, the varying conditions of locality, and 
 
 of modifications of the original simple forms. 
 The various boilers used in Germany may be reduced to 
 
 eight principal classes, examples of which will here be 
 given. 
 
 I.. Plain cylinder boiler. Fig. 1107, usually placed in the hori- 
 
 zontal position, and now principally used in iron works where 
 the waste gases from the furnaces are used. 
 
 * See Proc. Inst. C. E. Vol. LXXIII. 1883, p. 92. 
 
 2. Cylinder Boiler with Heater, Fig, 1 108. The cylinder has 
 
266 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 added to it a "heater " or auxiliary cylinder placed beneath and 
 forming a part of the boiler, being entirely filled with water 
 and surrounded by heated gases. Besides the usual form, there 
 are Henschel's in which the heater is placed at right angles to 
 the main boiler, and the vertical form. 
 
 tube to produce a circulation by the difference of temperature 
 between the inner and outer tubes. Boilers with large and 
 small cross water tubes are shown at b and c. 
 
 A ninth group might be formed of special combinations of 
 the eight groups above shown. 
 
 3. Tubulous Boilers, Fig. 1109. This class includes boilers 
 made of tubes 6 inches in diameter and under. Of the arrange- 
 ment shown, a, is Belleville's ; b, Root's ; and c, Howard's. 
 
 Fig. mo. 
 
 4. Flue Boilers, Fig. mo. Flue boilers are constructed with 
 internal f "es entirely surrounded by water and containing the 
 furnaces, fire and heated gases. The Cornish 
 boiler, a, is made with a single flue, and the 
 L,ancashire boiler, b, with two flues. 
 
 5. Flue Boilers with Cross Tubes, Fig. mi. 
 This form, also known as the Galloway boiler 
 is constructed with water tubes crossing the 
 flue at various points. 
 
 6. Plain Tubular Boilers, Fig. 1112. These 
 are made with tubes of 6 inches or less in 
 diameter, through which the heated gases 
 
 pass. The tubes are lap-welded or seamless, and a distinction 
 is made between direct and return tubes. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 7. Fire Box Tubular Boilers, Fig. 1113. A fire box consists 
 of a box forming a part of the boiler containing the furnace and 
 
 Fig. 1113. 
 
 surrounded with water. These boilers are also made with 
 direct and return tubes. These are made either with vertical 
 tubes as at a, or horizontal tubes b, and are much used for loco- 
 motives and portable boilers. 
 
 8. Fire Box Boilers with Water Tubes. Fig. 11 14. Of the 
 forms shown, a, is a boiler fitted with Field's tubes. These 
 tubes are closed at the lower end, each containing a small inner 
 
 j 
 
 ! 
 
 \ 
 
 i i H 
 
 In England and America a different classification is made, 
 the boilers being divided into two great classes, those which 
 consist of a large shell, with the necessary auxiliary parts, and 
 those composed of numerous small elements, the number of 
 elements being governed by the size of the boiler. These two 
 classes are known as '•shell" boilers, and "sectional" boilers. 
 The third group shown above, consists of sectional boilers. A 
 popular form in many countries is the Harrison boiler, com- 
 posed of small spherical elements of cast iron. The relative 
 value between shell and sectional boilers is a question not yet 
 entirely settled. The latter form, is incapable of destructive ex- 
 plosions, such as may occur with shell boilers containing large 
 volumes of water. Sectional boilers are also adapted for very 
 high steam pressures, but have the defect in many cases of pro- 
 ducing moist steam. 
 
 The latest police ordinances in Prussia, which are similar 
 to those of Austria, distinguish between "dwarf" boilers 
 and ordinary boilers. The former are boilers of small volume, 
 less than 18 cubic feet (>< cubic meter) capacity, these together 
 with sectional boilers being permitted for small private indus- 
 tries. 
 
 « 360. 
 
 Boiler Details Subjected to Internal Pressure. 
 
 The walls of steam boilers are subjected to varied and some- 
 times complicated stresses greatly dependent upon the method 
 of construction. It will only be practicable here to discuss the 
 ordinary forms, first taking the parts which have to resist the 
 internal pressure. 
 
 a. Cylindrical Details. 
 
 The Prussian ordinance relating to steam boilers, used the 
 formula of Brix, for cylinder boilers subjected to internal pres- 
 
 ^ / ooc.sa X, 
 
 • (388) 
 
 in which 6 and D are in inches and e is the logarithmic base =: 
 2.71828, a being the pressure in atmospheres. This is closely 
 approximated by the simpler formula : 
 
 The French formuL 
 greater thickness : 
 
 <5 == 0.03I7 a Z) + o. 
 
 ich the same but gives a slightly 
 
 • (390) 
 
 only Yi of this value being used in locomotive practice. On 
 account of the large constant added to provide for deterioration 
 all three formulae must be considered as empirical. At present 
 there are nearly everywhere government enactments which 
 prescribe the method of determining the thickness of steam 
 boilers and regulate by law the limits of construction. 
 
 In most cases the boilers must be subjected to a test pressure 
 which may reach double the working pressure. 
 
 The stress existing in the longitudinal seams of a cylindrical 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 boiler shell may be obtained with sufificient accuracy from either by furuace heat or by water-gas burners, or aS more 
 
 (324), 
 
 cently by electric welding by the Bernados' method. 
 
 p being the pressure in pounds per square inch, and D and & 
 being in inches. If we calculate J from (3S9) and determine >S" 
 from (391) we have the following results 
 
 a = 
 
 4 = 60 lbs. 
 
 7 = 105 lbs. 
 
 10= 150 lbs. 
 
 13 =175 lbs. 
 
 D 
 
 8 
 
 ^ 
 
 & 
 
 5- 
 
 rJ 
 
 s 
 
 ' 
 
 5 
 
 24 
 
 0.24 
 
 3000 
 
 0.35 
 
 3600 
 
 0.48 
 
 3750 
 
 0.58 
 
 3700 
 
 36 
 
 0.31 
 
 3500 
 
 0.48 
 
 3900 
 
 0.64 
 
 4000 
 
 0.80 
 
 4000 
 
 42 
 
 0.3s 
 
 3600 
 
 0.54 
 
 4000 
 
 0.73 
 
 4300 
 
 0.92 
 
 4000 
 
 72 
 
 043 
 
 5000 
 
 0.8s 
 
 4400 
 
 I.18 
 
 4600 
 
 1-50 
 
 4200 
 
 Lo?igiludinal Seams. 
 
 For all large steam boilers the longitudinal seams are double 
 riveted. For plates -f^'^ thick and over a modulus a./ = 0.76 to 
 0.73 is obtained which corresponds to a ratio of S'.^ : 5* of 1.32 to 
 1.37. It is more and more made a point of importance that 
 these joints shall not be exposed to the direct action of the 
 iire. 
 
 A construction especially intended to meet this point is 
 shown in Fig. 11 15 in which the entire shell is made of two 
 sheets, the lower sheet comprising obout | of the entire cir- 
 cumference.* 
 
 Another method which bids fair to become very important, 
 is to weld the longitudinal seams, this being more and more 
 and more used for large boilers. The welding is accomplished 
 
 * Boilers of this sort have been made at the Erie City Iron Works, Erie, 
 Pa. See Trans. Am. Soc. Mech. Engrs. Vol. VI., 1884-5, p. no. Scheffler, A 
 New Method of Constructing Horizontal Tubular Boilers. The first boiler 
 was 16 ft. by 60 in.. Ye thick, of mild steel, 60,000 lbs. ultimate strength, 
 30,000 lbs. proof strength. 
 
 This table shows that the formula gives for large diameters 
 and heavy pressures, thicknesses which are excessive, and with 
 quite moderate stresses. The stress at the riveted seam will be 
 greater, and from I 59 we have for the stress in the perforated 
 plate : 
 
 s] 
 
 for single riveting S' ^= — - \ 
 
 '^ 'c (392) 
 
 for double riveting S'.2 = -7- 
 
 <> -1 J 
 
 in which, if d, is the diameter of rivets and a, the pitch, 
 a — d , , a, — d 
 
 Even with this increase the stresses fall below the values 
 which good boiler plate should properly bear. lu practice, 
 smaller values are often used for 6 than are given by (389) 
 especially since mild steel came into use for boiler plate. 
 
 The stress which comes upon the rivets, according to § 59, is 
 greater than that upon the perforated portion of the plate. 
 This, however, should be considered in connection with the 
 fact that rivets are generally made of a still better grade of iron 
 than the plates. 
 
 At the present time the disposition is apparent to break loose 
 from set rules for the thickness of boiler shells. Careful 
 designers aim more and more to investigate each case for itself 
 and endeavor to adapt both design and material so as to obtain 
 at the same time the greatest strength and economy. The more 
 recently designed ocean steamers are fitted with boilers as 
 large as 16 feet in diameter, operated at pressure from 160 to 
 250 pounds pressure. The older formulae cannot be used for 
 such e-ttreme values, and every resource of the art must be used 
 to reinforce the strength of the plates and the riveting. The 
 method of group riveting, (^ 57) is here found of value and is 
 already used to some extent. 
 
 Fig. 1115. 
 
 In Fig. 1 116 is shown the cross section of a marine boiler, 
 constructed by H. C. Stulkeu, of Hamburg, the two longitudi- 
 nal seams being welded.* Both seams are reinforced by double 
 riveted flaps the strength of the plates being reduced by the 
 rivet holes. 
 
 The joint, however, is preferable to a lap joint and needs no 
 strengthening. The pressure in this boiler is 180 pounds. The 
 
 strength may be calculated as follows ; the diameter being 76.5 
 ins. and the plates % in. thick. From (391) we have : .S" = 
 
 i_8o_Xj6^? = -. 
 "2 X 0.87s '' 
 
 flaps the pitch a 
 
 S pounds. For the double riveting i 
 
 md rivet diameter d = 
 
 This 
 
 -o.S75_ 
 
 gives for the modulus of efficiency <p'.^ 
 
 the stress in the perforated plate in the longitudinal seams is 
 
 7868 
 = 11,240 lbs. The thickness of plates according to for- 
 
 [2 X 76.5 + 0.1 = 1.5 ins., iu- 
 
 mula (389) would be o.oo] 
 stead of ^ ins. 
 
 A third method of construction which may become impor- 
 tant is to construct the shell in a single piece of mild steel by 
 the Maunesmanu process of rolling. This method would be best 
 of all, since the question of the strength of the riveted seam 
 would be entirely eliminated, and the high elastic limit of the 
 material would permit correspondingly high working stresses. 
 At the present time, however, the Mannesmann rolling mills 
 cannot make tubes over 24 inches in diameter. 
 
 * See Zeitschr, D. Ing., li 
 
268 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Circumferential Seams. 
 
 The cross section of the boiler shell, when the head is fast to 
 
 it, is subjected to a force — £>^ p ^ S-^^^ D 6, in which S.^ = 
 
 .1 J that is half as great as the stress 5', in the longitudinal 
 
 seams. For this reason it is deemed necessary to use only 
 single riveting for the circumferential seams. It will also be 
 shown hereafter, that the cross section of the shell can be re- 
 lieved of this load. 
 
 Openings in the Shell. 
 
 The openings for the steam dome and manholes weaken the 
 boiler, and in some instances explosions have been caused by 
 cracks radiating from such openings. All such openings should 
 be carefully reinforced by riveting on rings of wrought iron or 
 preferably steel, as shown hereafter in Fig. iii8. The size of a 
 manhole opening should be about 12 by 18 inches, and when 
 practicable the short axis of the oval should be placed length- 
 wise of the boilers. 
 
 b. Spherical Details. 
 
 A sphere of the diameter D-^ with an internal pressure/, will 
 
 be subjected to a force — ■ D^ p, which is the same as already 
 
 found for the cross section of a cylinder, and one-half that on 
 the longitudinal seams. The thickness, therefore, need be only 
 half so great as that of a cylindrical shell of the same diameter, 
 i, e., D = D.^ If, however, both vessels arc to have the same 
 content we must have D-^ > D. If the cylindrical shell is made 
 
 (^). 
 
 with flat heads its content will be — D'^ L - 
 4 
 
 and the spherical vessel will have a content = — D^ ; hence 
 
 ©• 
 
 we must have Z>'i = 
 
 For the thickness of metal we have : 
 
 — Dp —D,P 
 
 and for the respective surfaces : 
 
 7^ = TT Z> Z + — Z>', and >Fi = TT ZiV 
 
 Assuming the heads of the cylindrical vessel to be made the 
 same strength as the shell, we have for the material required 
 for each case : 
 
 a + i)^ 
 
 ' ' 4 " ^1 ■ 
 
 Making 5"=^ 5'i and putting for Z)'i its value — D'^ \~n 1 
 get: 
 
 F& 
 
 4 L 
 
 • (393) 
 
 for the ratio between the amount of material required for 
 Spherical and cylindrical vessels. We have for : 
 
 showing that the spherical vessel is in all cases the lighter 
 form. 
 
 The earliest boilers were made in the spherical form, but 
 
 soon abandoned on account of the demand for increased heat" 
 ing surface and small content. The spherical form is, however, 
 well adapted for units for sectional boilers.* 
 
 For Spherical ends of cylinder boilers, as in Fig. 1 107, and for 
 the heads of domes, and auxiliary drums, we have for the thick- 
 ness, i?i being the radius of the sphere : 
 
 . ^1 P 
 
 • (394) 
 
 which gives, when Si = 5" the same value for the thickness (5, 
 as in the shell when J?^ = D. This latter condition cannot 
 always be fulfilled since the curvature of the boiler head is 
 usually controlled by the dies with which the press is provided. 
 
 The head is usually joined to the shell by being flanged or 
 turned over around the edge in the flanging press, thus enab- 
 ling a joint to be made as at a, Fig. 1117 ; or it may be made 
 with a ring of angle irou, as at d. Here the circumferential 
 force, as considered in ^ 355, may be taken into consideration, 
 especially the radial component .r sin a, since this acts to draw 
 the shell inward. It is, however, hardly necessary to take this 
 into account as the flauge of the head reinforces the shell amply 
 at this point. 
 
 c. Flat Surfaces. 
 
 Unstayed flat surfaces can only be used in boilers of small 
 dimensions, as already shown in ^ 19, and should only be used 
 for beads of steam domes, auxiliarj' heaters, and the like. 
 Where extended flat surfaces are used, it is necessary to adopt 
 some method of staying ; or in other words to subdivide the ex- 
 tended surface into supported portions small enough to be of 
 ample strength and at the same time of moderate thickness. 
 
 A number of methods of staying flat surfaces are in practical 
 use, those most generally employed being shown in Fig. 11 18. 
 
 Stay bolts, such as shown in Fig. 11 18 a, (see also \ 61) are 
 used for parallel surfaces which are near to each other. Those 
 shown at a are made with nuts instead of riveting the heads 
 as is sometimes done. Flat surfaces which are farther apart 
 are secured by anchor bolts, as shown at b ; these are practi- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 269 
 
 cally long stay bolts. These are shown reinforced by large 
 riveted washers under the nuts. 
 
 Stay bars, as shown at c, are used for staying crown sheets of 
 fire boxes in marine and locomotive boilers. Stay tubes, such 
 as shown at d, are used to strengthen tube sheets. These are 
 heating tubes about %. to x\ in. thick reinforced at the ends and 
 screwed into the tube sheets. Gusset plates e, Fig. 6, are used 
 to stay flat heads to the shell, and are used both in land and 
 marine boilers.* 
 
 Boiler Flues Subjected to External Pressure. 
 
 The stresses which appear in the case of a boiler flue subject- 
 ed to external pressure are similar to buckling stresses upon 
 columns, rods, etc., since beyond a certain increase in pressure 
 when a slight departure from the true cylindrical form occurs 
 a sudden collapse follows. The smaller sizes of flues used in 
 the ordinary tubular boiler possess ample strength against col- 
 lapsing, but for larger flues such as are used in Cornish and 
 Lancashire boilers the question of strength to resist collapsing 
 must be considered. The experiments of Fairbairn have demon- 
 strated that the length of the flue has an important influence 
 upon the resistance to collapsing, practically being inversely as 
 the length of the flue, or rather as the distance between the 
 points at which the flue is reinforced against external pressure. 
 
 stituting these in the formula it will be found if the flue is safe 
 against collapsing. 
 
 Example.— Va a Cornish boiler intended to work a 
 the dimensions are / = 25 ft., X> = 23 ins., & = 0.25 in; 
 with lap joints. 
 
 From (397) we have : 
 
 '-r^-^.- 
 
 which pressi 
 ckness of th 
 n might readily follow. 
 
 :xplo- 
 
 A method of increasing the safety without using a greater 
 thickness of metal in the walls of the flue, is to reinforce it by 
 stiff'ening rings, thus practically reducing the length /, as noted 
 by Fairbairn. 
 
 Two forms of stiffening rings are shown i: 
 's and b, Hick's. The first form i; 
 
 Fairbairn deduced from his experiments for the collapsing 
 pressure of such flues : 
 
 // = 8 
 
 Ud 
 
 • (395) 
 
 in which p' is the pressure in pounds per square inch, D and 6 
 are in inches, and / is the length of the flue in feet. 
 
 If the dimensions are given in millimetres and p' is the pres- 
 sure in kilogrammes per square millimetres, this becomes : 
 
 
 ID 
 
 Fairbairn's experiments have been discussed more recently, 
 with a view of deducing a formula which should be more con- 
 venient to use-t The results of Dr. Wehage in connection with 
 later experiments, f give the following formula : 
 
 ( 368,000 1 
 1 490,000 j 
 
 D ^ ID 
 
 ■ (397) 
 
 in which the upper coefiicient is to be used for flues made with 
 lap joints, riveted ; and the lower coefficient for flues in which 
 the joints are made with flap plates riveted on. 
 
 This formula gives results approximating very closely to 
 Fairbairn's most important experiments. It is best used by 
 selecting the desired dimensions for D, I and <? and then by sub- 
 
 * The questioi 
 
 aised a 
 
 lether 
 
 it is not best to stay only 
 ;o the shell and then tie the other head to the first by means 
 ot a number of parallel anchor bolts, thus closing- one end of the shell in a 
 manner similar to the cylinder of a hydraulic press, and relieving the shell 
 of any stress due to the pressure on the heads, and permitting the use of 
 packing to make the joint tight. The author recollects such a construction 
 having been used in a portable engine and boiler but without knowledge of 
 any further attempts of the sort. 
 
 t See Grashof, Zeitschr. D. Ing. 1S59, P- 234, Vol. III. ; also Love, Civilin- 
 genieur, 1861, p. 238, Vol. VII., discussed by the author for the Hutte Society 
 in the Berliner Verhaudlungen, 1870, p. 115. 
 
 I See Engineer, Vol. 51, i88i, p. 426, also Dingler's Journal, VoL 242, 1881, 
 
 of construction, but possesses the advantage of removing the 
 rivet heads entirely from the action of the fire. This form of 
 joint and stiffening plate is also frequently used in other parts 
 of boilers for the sole purpose of avoiding the action of the fire 
 on the heads of the rivets. 
 
 The use of corrugated iron for boiler flues enables great 
 strength against collapsing to be obtained. Fig. n 20 shows a 
 boiler with corrugated flue, the lengths being welded together. 
 This boiler is made by Schulz, Knaudt & Co., of Essen, and is 
 86.6 inches in diameter (2.2 metre). Notwithstanding the con- 
 structive difficulties the use of the corrugated flues is constantly 
 increasing. In England corrugated flues are made by the in- 
 ventor, Sampson Fox & Co., of Leeds. The depth of corruga- 
 tions is usually about 4 inches. 
 
 Corrugated fire boxes have been used in locomotive boilers, 
 Fig. 1121, showing Kaselowsky's fire box. In this form the 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 /f^ 
 
 
 
 [ly^ 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 ¥ 
 
 
 
 \^-- 
 
 -"~^J/ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 %f 
 
 
 .1 
 
 
 Fig. 1121. 
 
 stay bars to support the crown sheet, and the stay bolts at the 
 sides are entirely omitted. The cross section shows the method 
 of supporting the boiler by a cross beam below the grate bars. 
 The corrugated flue is attached to the boiler by a riveted joint, 
 either by flanging as in Fig. 11 21, or by the use of angle iron, 
 as Fig. II 20. 
 
 Tubes of small diameter are treated practically as single hol- 
 low rivets, the ends being inserted into holes in the tube sheets 
 
270 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 and expanded by an expanding tool, the ends being riveted over> 
 as shown in Fig. 1x7.2 a. 
 
 Fig. 1122. 
 
 In many establishments, as for example, the Esslingen loco- 
 motive works, the tubes are fitted with hard copper ferules 
 which stand the expanding and riveting better than tubes of 
 steel or iron. The form of tube shown in Fig. 1122 b, is rein- 
 forced at the ends, and one end made conical, thus enabling 
 old tubes to be more readily removed and replaced. This con- 
 struction is used by Pauksch & Freund, of Landsberg, in Ger- 
 many, and by various French builders since 1867. 
 
 § 362. 
 
 Future Possibilities in Steam Boiler Construction. 
 
 The discussion of the preceding sections has necessarily been 
 limited to a few constructive details, since a complete treatment 
 of such an extensive subject requires a special treatise. It is 
 proposed here to give only a broad general view of the subject 
 of boiler construction in its present and prospective condition. 
 
 The descriptions in the preceding sections and in the previous 
 chapter on riveting show that the art of boiler construction has 
 made little or no advance during the past twenty or thirt}^ years, 
 although there is reason to believe that there is ample room for 
 improvement, especially in the matter of greater economy of 
 fuel. In the author's opinion there are four points in construc- 
 tion which deserve the closest attention and to which efforts at 
 improvement should be directed, while in other directions also 
 serious wastes of force appear. 
 
 1. Expenditure of Material. — As already shown in \ 359, the 
 expenditure of material is considerably greater in the present 
 forms of steam boilers than if the spherical form were more 
 generally used. It is questionable to what extent the spherical 
 form may be made practicable, but the possibilities in this direc- 
 tion have not been exhausted, at least for certain purposes, for 
 example, for boilers used solely for heating purposes. The 
 spherical vacuum pans only serve as reminders that this oldest 
 form of boiler (i. e., that used with Newcomen's engine), is no 
 longer used ; but it may be only a question of the increase in 
 the capacity of the flanging press ; or, in other words, of the 
 increased command over the working of iron and steel, when 
 the spherical form shall again be used. 
 
 Another point in the question of material, is the subject of 
 riveting. One of the greatest sources of weakness in steam 
 boilers is the reduction in strength due to the presence of riveted 
 seams. Even if the very best material obtainable is used for the 
 rivets, the reduction in strength for single riveting is about 40 
 per cent., and for double riveting, 25 per cent.* This weaken- 
 ing is unimportant so far as the circumferential seams of cylin- 
 drical shells are considered, but is well worthy of consideration 
 in connection with the longitudinal seams, especially since it 
 concerns the largest and heaviest part of the boiler, i. e., the 
 main shell. It is for this reason that attempts have been made 
 to weld the longitudinal seams. 
 
 The meagre results which have been obtained for welded shells 
 subjected to internal pressure, as compared with welded flues 
 for external pressure, may be seen from the case shown in Fig. 
 II 16. The welded seam is there reinforced by a riveted flap, 
 thus reducing the strength practically to that of an unwelded 
 seam. Experimental results with welded joints in the testing 
 machine, justify this distrust of welded seams, and do not war- 
 rant the idea that the weld is equal to the full strength of the 
 plate. 
 
 This leads to the remark that the coming boiler shell mxast be 
 without longitudinal seams of any kind, either riveted or welded. 
 Heating flues for external pressure are already made seamless, 
 and the Mannesmann process pi-oduces seamless tubes adapted 
 for internal pressure, and of a grade of material far superior to 
 that heretofore used, as experimental researches have demon- 
 strated. If this process can be .so extended as to be made avail- 
 able for boiler shells, an economy of at least one-third of the 
 material can be obtained. 
 
 2. Combustion. — The subject of economy of combustion of 
 the fuel is even more important than that of material. In the 
 
 ♦When the rivets are made of no better material than the plates, the re- 
 duction for single riveting is about 53 per cent., and for double riveting 
 about 41 per cent. Triple riveting, as shown in Fig. 155, is too expensive to 
 
 general description given in the preceding sections it will be 
 seen that the present methods of firing are all based upon the 
 principle of exposing portions of the boiler to the direct action 
 of the fire and of conducting the products of combustion into 
 contact with various portions of the boiler, arranged to act as 
 heating surface. This means that in nearly all cases boilers are 
 independently fired. For a long time the advantages of this 
 system have been doubted. It is manifestly impossible for a 
 complete combustion of the gases to be efi"ected when they are 
 almost immediately brought into contact with surfaces which 
 have a temperature of 1200 to 1 800 degrees lower than the flame. 
 The production of smoke and soot, that is, of unconsumed fuel, 
 is the necessary result of these conditions, and hence a great re- 
 duction in efliciency. This subject has been actively worked 
 over, and an almost endless variety of furnaces and systems 
 has been proposed. The true method of solving the problem 
 appears to have been first discovered by Frederick Siemens 
 (Dresden), and for a number of years he has been engaged in 
 developing the practical applications of his researches.! 
 
 The previous methods of firing were based upon the idea of 
 bringing the flame into direct contact with the surface to be 
 heated, but since about 1879 the method of construction, espe- 
 cially in glass furnaces, open hearth steel furnaces, smelting 
 furnaces, etc^, has been to utilize the radiant heat from the 
 arched roof of the furnace, and to economize the heat of the 
 escaping gases in the regenerator. An economy in the use of 
 the heat of as much as 80 to 90 per cent, has resulted. This has 
 been followed by a still more marked separation between the 
 two principal periods of combustion, and by the application to 
 steam generators where such a high economy cannot be expected, 
 although a saving of about 25 per cent, has been shown in actual 
 practice, t 
 
 It is therefore strongly recommended to use such furnace con- 
 structions as shall not bring the direct flame of the fire in con- 
 tact with the heating surface of the boiler, but to use radiating 
 surfaces and also to conduct the highly heated but fully burned 
 gases through the flues, both of which can be accomplished in 
 various ^a.ys.1 
 
 _ The application of the principle to stationary boilers is not 
 difficult, and experiments have shown that it may also be suc- 
 cessfully applied both to marine and locomotive boilers. In all 
 cases it has been demonstrated that the fuel should be burned in 
 a combustion chamber lined with refractory material, and the 
 discharge of the heated gases retarded by a fire brick bridge or 
 screen before coming in contact with the boiler. It will be seen 
 from the preceding, that by using the Siemens' method instead 
 of the older method of burning the fuel directly in the boiler, 
 an economy of about 25 per cent, can be obtained, and this fact 
 should always be kept in mind in future designs. 
 
 3. Heating Surface. — The third point concerns not so much 
 a variation in construction, as it does the lack of knowledge of 
 the fundamental principles, this subject having been much less 
 fully investigated than other portions. Recent investigations 
 show conclusively that the axiom that the heating surface is a 
 magnitude proportional to the desired efficiency of the boiler, 
 cannot be sustained. It is evident that there must be a very 
 considerable difference in the heating value of portions of the 
 surface which are at greatly different distances from the fire. A 
 very high temperature of the gases at the beginning, and a 
 comparatively low temperature near the end, must mean a rapid 
 formation of steam near the fire and a weak production over 
 
 fThe following list will serve for those who aesire to refer to the original 
 and fundamental publications upon this subject : — Friedrich Siemens, Heiz- 
 ver fohren mit freier Flamment faltung, Berlin, Springer, 1882; Siemens' 
 Regenerativofen, Dresden, Ramming, 1854 ; Vortrag von Friedrich Siemens 
 liber Ofenbetrieb mit ausschliesslicher Benutzung der strahlenden Warme 
 der Flamnie, Gesundheitsingenieur, 1884 ; Vortrag von demselben uber ein 
 neues Verbrennungs-und Heiz-system, Busch, Journ. f. Gasbeleuchtung, 
 etc., 1885; Vortrag von demselben in der Ges. Isis in Dresden iiber die Dis- 
 ition der Verbrennungsprodukte, Dresden, Blochmann, 1886; Vortrag 
 demselben im Sachs. Ing. u. Archit Verein iiber die Verhutung des 
 irnsteinrauches. Civ. Ing. Bd., 32, Heft 5, j886; Vortrag vom demselben 
 im Bez Ver. D. Ing. in Leipzig am 8 Dez. 1886 uber den Verbrennungsprozess, 
 2 Aufl , Berlin, Springer, 1887; Vortrag von demselben, gehalten in Ham- 
 burg im Ver. D. Gas-und Wasser fachmanner uber Regenerativ— Gasbrenner, 
 etc., Dresden, Ramming, 1887; Ueber die Vortheile der Anwendung hocher- 
 hitzter Luft fur die Verbrennung, etc. 2 Aufl., Berlin, Springer, 1887. 
 
 I For example, a test by K. H. Kiihne & Co., of Dresden Lobtau on Feb. 
 16, 1884, showed a gain of 26 per cent, due to the substitution of a Siemens 
 furnace for one of the usual kind ; the conditions of draft and cleanness of 
 flues being alike in both cases. 
 
 § Two methods have been described by Dr. Siemens, both of which have 
 been applied by him to flue boilers. In the first, the combustion of the fuel 
 takes place upon a grate in a combustion chamber which is directly over 
 the grate, A bridge wall of fire brick is placed about half the length of the 
 grate further back, and bej-ond this are two ring shaped screens of fire brick, 
 which are so placed as to direct the products of combustion toward the axis 
 of the boiler flue ; after passing through the flue the gases return about the 
 outside of the shell and are then suflScieutly cooled to be permitted to pass 
 over the portions of the shell unprotected by water on the way to the chim- 
 ney. In the second method the fuel is burned to gas in a gas producer 
 separately constructed from the boiler, and the gas mixed with heated air 
 and thus delivered to the boiler flue, where it follows the same course as in 
 the first case. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 distant portions of the surface. It has been shown that in some 
 instances the heating surface of oneaud the same boiler may be 
 reduced one-half without causing any reduction in the steam 
 production. The usual method of proportioning the heating 
 surface in all kinds of boilers appears to be based upon previous 
 results with similar forms, and hence is often one-sided and 
 unsuited for systematic investigation. A new departure in the 
 discussion of this important subject has been made by the chief 
 director and engineer of the Swedish railways, Mr. F. Almgren. 
 He has made the subject of the proportioning of heating sur- 
 face the object of a series of experiments extending over a 
 number of years, and has placed the matter upon a much higher 
 plane of investigation than heretofore. The practical results 
 are of much importance, and in advance of the publication of 
 the whole the following general discussion has kindly been 
 placed in the author's hands by Mr. Almgren, and is here given 
 in his own words.* 
 
 "According to the investigations of Geoffroy, as given by 
 Couche,t the amount of steam produced by tubular heating sur- 
 face depends upon the volume of heated gases passing through 
 the tubes per hour. The heating surface under experiment con- 
 sisted of portions 0.9 metre long of tubes, the total length of 
 which was 3.6 metres long each. 
 
 " I have found that the volume of gases may be considered as 
 a function of the length / of the tubes, the latter being con- 
 sidered as a variable, according to the following general expres- 
 sion ; in which i is the number of tubes, and L the number of 
 heat units given off by each tube per second. 
 
 ' ' In this formula a and b are constants which depend upon 
 the mean temperature Te of the gases, upon the temperature (5 
 of the water, and upon the weight i G of the gases passing 
 through the tubes per second. 
 
 ' ' As the result of a series of experiments I have found these 
 constants as follows : 
 
 (399) 
 
 in which G is the mean weight of gases or products of combus- 
 tion for one tube. For the number of heat units L given off by 
 a single tube of a set, the following expression is given : 
 
 ^=a_357^_(7^-i) ,,^, 
 
 "In order to show the utility of these formula, a table is 
 here given of the results of twenty-one experiments upon a 
 locomotive boiler, the walls of the fire box having been made 
 non-conducting by means of brick-work. A second table is also 
 given to show the great advantages resulting from these experi- 
 ments. The quantities given in the table are as follows : 
 
 i ^=-~ the number of tubes. 
 G = the weight in kilogrammes of the pi-oducts of com- 
 bustion passing through each tube per second. 
 TV — <J = the difference between the temperature of the smoke 
 and the water, the former being measured in the 
 smoke box. 
 Te — (5 = the difference between the mean temperature of the 
 
 gases in the tubes and the water = 
 
 -d+- 
 
 0.24 G. 
 
 Le = the mean value of L determined by experiment. 
 Lb = the value of L determined by formula (400). 
 
 Locomotive 
 
 boiler: p 
 
 ressure 4 
 
 Umospher 
 
 Js, tubes of brass, 2.5 
 
 34 metres 
 
 long, 42 mm. diameter, somewhat scaled 
 
 
 
 
 No. 
 
 ^ 
 
 G 
 
 TV — (5 
 
 Te — S 
 
 Le 
 
 ., 
 
 I 1 
 
 
 0.00713 
 
 210° c 
 
 901° c 
 
 1. 184 
 
 1.248 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 0.00601 
 
 III " 
 
 916 " 
 
 1-035 
 
 1.090 
 
 3 
 
 no 
 
 0.00733 
 
 
 969 " 
 
 1.304 
 
 1.370 
 
 4 
 
 
 0.00827 
 
 230 " 
 
 1009 
 
 I-53I 
 
 1-570 
 
 5 J 
 
 
 0.00900 
 
 235 " 
 
 1000 " 
 
 1.648 
 
 1.700 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 0.01795 
 
 275 " 
 
 1067 " 
 
 3-360 
 
 3-330 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 0.01871 
 
 285 " 
 
 I09I " 
 
 3.600 
 
 3-520 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 0.01832 
 
 278 " 
 
 III5 '• 
 
 3.660 
 
 3-530 
 
 9 
 
 
 55 
 
 0.01479 
 
 290 " 
 
 I42I? 
 
 4.000? 
 
 3-750 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 0.01514 
 
 240 " 
 
 1221° C 
 
 3-5IO 
 
 3.290 
 
 
 
 
 0.01303 
 
 255 " 
 
 I3I2 " 
 
 3-300 
 
 3.080 
 
 12 . 
 
 
 
 0.01091 
 
 235 " 
 
 1328 " 
 
 2.860 
 
 2.700 
 
 13 "1 
 
 
 0.00466 
 
 90 " 
 
 682 " 
 
 0.650 
 
 0.646 
 
 14 1 
 
 88 
 
 0.00448 
 
 95 " 
 
 724 " 
 
 0.670 
 
 0.660 
 
 ^5 1 
 
 0.00405 
 
 95 " 
 
 781 " 
 
 0.660 
 
 0.652 
 
 16 J 
 
 
 0.00360 
 
 95 " 
 
 709 " 
 
 0.530 
 
 0-530 
 
 17] 
 
 
 
 0.00586 
 
 75 " 
 
 462 " 
 
 0.542 
 
 0.534 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 0.00529 
 
 70 " 
 
 368 " 
 
 0.376 
 
 0.388 
 
 19 
 
 
 no 
 
 0.00640 
 
 83 " 
 
 466 " 
 
 0.591 
 
 0.586 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 0.00715 
 
 95 " 
 
 522 " 
 
 0.734 
 
 0.721 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 0.00668 
 
 90 " 
 
 529 " 
 
 0.695 
 
 0.686 
 
 French thermal units, and thi 
 
 own figures, as the principles are equally" 
 
 preliminary presentation thereby retainec. _ 
 
 t Voie, materiel et exploitation des Chemins de fer. Tome 
 
 id the unity of this 
 
 ''Remarks. — Between each set of experiments the boiler was 
 blown off and both boiler and tubes cleaned. The no tubes of 
 the fourth set were only partially the same as those of the first 
 set. In the ninth experiment one of the cast iron plugs which 
 were used to close the tubes not in use was melted out. 
 
 "The correspondence between the experimental value Le and 
 the calculated value Z* is very striking. A formula for special 
 practical cases has also been deduced, being adapted for the 
 special number of tubes as given in the preceding table, and 
 without the variation in G and Te which occur in single experi- 
 mental cases. 
 
 ' ' Equation (400) shows that for a given length / for the tubes, 
 the production of steam is nearly proportional to the weight of 
 gases flowing through them, and that it also increases nearly in 
 direct proportion to the quantity of heat 0.24 G [Te — 6). 
 This indicates that for a constant blast opening, the amount of 
 steam produced by the heating surface of the tubes will almost 
 exactly equal the amount of steam passing through the blast 
 nozzle, that is the amount of steam used by the engine. If it is 
 also remembered that an increase of draft also increases the 
 temperature of combustion, it will be seen that the tubes and 
 the blast nozzle of a locomotive boiler bear a most intimate 
 relation to each other, and that great and sudden variations in 
 the production of steam occur almost hourly. 
 
 " Now the researches of Geoffroy show that the walls of the fire 
 box have a much less favorable action. In this portion of the 
 heating surface the production of steam responds much more 
 slowly to variations in the draft. The larger the fire box, the 
 more marked is its action in this respect, and consequently the 
 less effective will be the blast. Equation (400) shows that for a 
 given tube length, the production of steam of each tube in- 
 creases with the increase of the draft, and hence the number of 
 tubes and consequently the weight of the boiler may be kept at 
 a determinate minimum, which depends upon the permissible 
 force of blast and limit of size of grate. The formula also shows 
 that with a strong draft and high temperature even the latter 
 portion of long tubes is of excellent steaming value. 
 
 " Since also a given amount of tube heating surface is lighter 
 and cheaper than the same amount of fire box surface, and since 
 by the reduction of the latter the products of combustion will 
 be cooled less and so enter the tubes at a higher tempera- 
 ture, it will readily be seen that a material advantage can be 
 gained by removing that portion of the fire box surface which 
 is of the least value (that is, the side walls), and adding an 
 equivalent proportion by lengthening the tubes. As an exam- 
 ple may be cited the case of a locomotive boiler with 125 tubes, 
 3 metres long and 45 millimeters inside diameter in which a re- 
 duction of 7 square metres of fire box surface was made up by 
 an increase in length of tubes which gave 14 square metres of 
 surface, the force of draft being 40 millimetres water pressure. 
 This change removed the expensive stayed fire box walls, which 
 were replaced b}' a fire brick lining, and the reduction in weight 
 and cost amounted to about 700 kilogrammes and 1500 marks. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ' ' The latest boilers for the Swedish State Railways have been 
 constructed with the preceding principles in view as shown in 
 Fig. 1123. The fire brick lining of the fire box is shown at a, a, 
 
 Fig. 1 123. 
 
 while at b, b, are openings for the admission of air, which can 
 be closed by sliding dampers c. A year's experience with this 
 construction has given satisfaction, as the following table shows. 
 It will be seen that the new form of boiler produced the same 
 amount of steam per unit of heating surface as the old form, the 
 force of the draft and the temperature in the smoke box being 
 nearly the same in both instances. 
 
 " The external length of this fire box is 1.485 metres, and the 
 internal width is i metre. The diameter of the shell is 1. 103 
 metres, with 144 tubes, 45 millimetres inside diameter, and the 
 fire brick lining is 74 millimetres thick. 
 
 "TABLE II. 
 
 A. Din 
 
 
 Tubes. 
 
 Heating Surface. 
 
 Boiler. 
 
 Length. 
 
 Diame- 
 ter. 
 
 No. 
 
 Tubes. 
 
 Fire Box. 
 
 Ratio. 
 
 Old Style. 3.111m. ^Smm. 
 New " .3.305 m. 46 mm. 
 
 184 
 102 
 
 77.28 sq.m. 
 50.83 " " 
 
 7.82 sq.m. 
 2.19 " " 
 
 9.9 
 23.1 
 
 B Performance. 
 
 Evaporation 
 
 Draft Pressure 
 ofw 
 
 in millimetres 
 
 Temperature i 
 
 nS.o.eBox. 
 
 per hour 
 
 Old Style 
 
 New style 
 
 Old Style. 
 
 New Style. 
 
 24,^^. 
 
 30 " 
 
 37-45 " 
 
 55 " 
 
 30 " 
 
 40-50 " 
 
 80 " 
 
 24 mm. 
 35 " 
 50-60 ' ' 
 90 " 
 
 310° C 
 340° 
 410° 
 470° 
 
 315° c 
 340° 
 
 395° 
 470° 
 
 " A x^atent has been applied for by Ilerm. Von Storckenfeldt 
 for the construction shown in Fig. 1123, and made from my cal- 
 culations and directions." 
 
 The preceding brief description shows the nature and import- 
 ance of Almgren's researches and appears to form a starting 
 point for a change in methods of locomotive boiler construction. 
 Further investigations may develop a theoretical foundation 
 for this empirical formula. Especially interesting is the con- 
 formity of Almgren's observations with the above described 
 results of Siemen's. We also see the previous remarks upon 
 the subject of economy of material confirmed in the advantages 
 resulting from the replacing of flat stayed and riveted surfaces 
 by cylindrical welded tubes. A corresponding gain would be 
 attained were it possible to produce a shell free frona riveted 
 
 4. Artificial Draft. — The use of forced draft has been com- 
 mon for many years in locomotives and portable engines, and 
 b}' this means a much greater quantity of steam produced from 
 a unit of heating surface than with natural draft. More recent- 
 ly forced draft has been applied to marine boilers, the blast 
 generally being produced by fan blowers. Especially has this 
 been necessary in the case of torpedo boats, in which the high- 
 est speed is demanded. By the use of multiple expansion en- 
 gines operated by greatly increased steam pressure speeds of 18 
 to 20 knots are attained without an excessive increase in the con- 
 sumption of fuel. This, however, involves a much greater in- 
 crease in the steaming capacity of the boilers in proportion to 
 their weight, and this result is accomplished by the use of arti- 
 ficial draft. 
 
 This has been discussed very completely in a paper presented 
 before the Royal United Service Institution, by Naval Engineer 
 H. J. Oram, upon the subject of the motive power of modern 
 war ships. The large boilers of the English war ships " Blen- 
 heim " and " Blake " are 15 feet in diameter and 18 feet long, 
 with four furnaces at each end These are worked with closed 
 ash pit, and an air pressure of two inches of water, and at a 
 steam pressure of 150 to 165 pounds, the engines indicating 
 3,350 horse power. The air pressure of two inches is ample for 
 the desired rate of combustion, and by reference to the prece- 
 ding table it will be seen that it is no greater than has long 
 been common in locomotive practice. The combustion is more 
 complete under this pressure than with natural draft, being 
 more uniform and producing less smoke. It may be remarked 
 that the efficiency of the boilers may also be increased by pro- 
 per heating of the feed water and by use of the double distilling 
 apparatus. The use of forced draft also makes it practicable to 
 cool and ventilate the stokeholds. 
 
 The latest examples of construction, of American design, are 
 made to work at pressures as high as 250 pounds per square 
 inch, with boiler shells 16 to 17 feet in diameter. Mr. Oram 
 considers that there is a limit to increase in this respect due to 
 the increase in weight beyond practical limits, both of the boil- 
 ers and of the engines. 
 
 It is worthy of note that in the recent express steamers of the 
 French " Society des Messageries Mari times " the use of shell 
 boilers has been abandoned, and sectional boilers of the Belle- 
 ville type introduced. The increase in speed also appears to 
 have its limits, but the advantages of forced draft, however, as 
 regards the reduction in size and weight of the boiler, should at 
 least lead to its introduction in the future for stationary prac- 
 tice. 
 
 Taking into consideration all the points of the preceding dis- 
 cussion, it appears that an application of them to practical boil- 
 er construction should result in an economy both of construc- 
 tion and of operation of 25 to 33 per cent, with entire safet'% 
 
 RESERVOIRS ] 
 
 L Air and Gas. 
 
 In the use of compressed air now so general in mining and 
 tunneling operations, cylindrical reservoirs similar to steam 
 boilers are used In tunnel construction, portable reservoirs are 
 sometimes found mounted upon tram locomotives, the engines 
 of which are operated by the compressed air instead of steam. 
 Compressed air locomotives have only been used to a small ex- 
 tent, however, for general tram service. The so-called pneu- 
 matic method of sinking shafts and construction piers involves 
 the vise of air reservoirs. In this case the air reservoir is the 
 caisson within which the work is carried on, the water being 
 kept out by the air pressure, and the workmen entering and 
 leaving by an air lock chamber with a double system of doors. 
 
 In the case of power transmission in cities by means of com- 
 pressed air, the entire system of piping is included in the reser- 
 voir capacity. Negative reservoirs for mingled air and steam 
 are found in the case of condensers for .steam engines. These 
 are usually made of cast iron and are from one to two times the 
 capacity of the steam cj'linder. The regular removal of the 
 contents by the air pump at each stroke of the engine renders a 
 larger capacity unnecessar5^ In some cases the flow of spring 
 has been increased by fittiug a tight cover over the well above 
 the water level when the exhaustion of the air causes an in- 
 creased flow from the underground Sources. The vacuum sj'S- 
 tem of power distribution, as itsed in Paris and London, in- 
 volves the use of negative reservoirs similar to cylindrical 
 boilers. An important application of vacuum for air and vapor 
 of water is found in the vacuum pans used in sugar refineries. 
 These pans are made in the spherical form, already referred to 
 as most economical of material, the motive in this instance 
 being the high price of copper, of which they are constructed. 
 Gas holders for illuminating gas are reservoirs intended only 
 for very low pressures, the strength of the walls being most 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 important in the matter of tightness against leakage. These 
 holders are composed of two principal parts, the holder proper, 
 or so-called "bell," often made telescopic, and the tank or res- 
 ervoir filled with water which acts as a liquid packing ; the bell 
 in this case acts as a piston (compare Fig. 948). Similar reser- 
 voirs are used in laboratories and chemical works for many 
 kinds of gases. For very large gas holders, in which the inter- 
 nal pressure of the gas is insufficient to sustain the weight, the 
 roof of the holder must be strengthened by internal trussing. 
 Until now the gas holder has had no definite place in construc- 
 tion, but it will be seen from what has already been said, that 
 it, together with various other kinds of reservoirs, belong pro- 
 perly to machine construction, not onl}' because of their char- 
 acter but also because of their intimate connection with the 
 entire subject of mechanical engineering. 
 
 \ 364. 
 Other Forms of Storage Reservoirs. 
 
 The construction of reservoirs for water has been a most im- 
 portant subject from the earliest times down to the present, 
 many of these being of great extent, although, as has already 
 been said, these have until now been considered rather as be- 
 longing to the domain of building construction than to machine 
 construction. To these must also be added the subterranean 
 reservoirs in mines, from the small pump to those of large 
 extent and capacity. Other examples are found in the negative 
 reservoirs which exist in low-lying tracts of land, such as are 
 found in Northern Germany and Holland, intersected by canals. 
 A notable example in Holland is the valley formed by the 
 drainage of the Harlem Lake, the water having been pumped 
 by steam engines out to the level of the sea and the latter kept 
 out by dykes. 
 
 Reservoirs for agricultural purposes are often formed by sys- 
 tems of canals, as in Lombardy and in the south of France, 
 where this important subject of irrigation has proved of the 
 greatest benefit to the country. The nature of such systems, 
 considered as reservoirs, is more apparent when the magnitude 
 of the work involves the construction of artificial lakes for 
 water storage. Ancient examples of such storage reservoirs 
 are found in Lake Moeris, of ancient Egypt, and Lake Nitocris, 
 of Bab3'lon, as well as the existing Lake Maineri, in Ceylon, 
 and many others. The mechanical nature of such constructions 
 is more apparent when the reservoir is made by building a dam 
 across a gorge or valley, with weirs to permit the periodical 
 release of the water, the analogy to ratchet action being quite 
 clear. 
 
 Finally, another natural form of stored power may be men- 
 tioned, one which has not to the writer's knowledge been con- 
 sidered in this light before, yet which possesses the greatest 
 significance in the climatic economy of nature. This is the 
 glacier. The vapor of water, raised from the level of the sea 
 by the heat of the sun, collects in the form of snow about the 
 highest mountain peaks. In the upper valleys the snow packs 
 together, and under gradual pressure forms the glacier ice, and 
 slowly the glacier flows down into the lower and warmer val- 
 le}-s and melts away. The mass of ice, consisting of hundreds 
 of millions of cubic feet, forms a reservoir of stored power, 
 flowing in an irresistible stream of almost uniform strength 
 from the highest snow field to the lower valley. All the actions 
 involved are of a -ohysical and mechanical nature. Taken as a 
 whole the glacier forms a reservoir system of the fifth order : 
 evaporation of the water from the sea by the heat of the sun, 
 transformation of vapor into snow, fusion of the snow into a 
 mass, conversion by pressure into glacier ice, and melting of 
 the ice partly by the friction on its bed and partly by the heat 
 of the sun. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 RATCHETS FOR PRESSURE ORGANS, OR VALVES. 
 
 The Tvi^o Divisions of Vai<ves. 
 
 The application of the ratchet principle to pressure organs, 
 that is, the periodical interruption of its motion, closely resem- 
 bles the same principle applied to constructions formed of rigid 
 elements ; the principal difference being that the pressure organ 
 is very easily separable into small portions. It might also be 
 remarked that the pressure organ is always confined in a con- 
 ductor of some kind, but this feature also belongs to some forms 
 of rigid constructions, such as bearings, guides and the like. 
 
 Ratchets for pressure organs may be divided into two princi- 
 pal classes, namely, those intended to check the motion in only 
 one direction, and those which check in both directions. The 
 name given to ratchets for pressure organs is valves.* 
 
 The difference between the two classes is shown in Fig. 1124. 
 In the form shown at a, the pressure organ is checked by the 
 flap valve b, from moving in the direction of the arrow at /, 
 
 Fig. 1 124. 
 
 but not against motion in the direction of the arrow at //. In 
 the form shown at b, the flow is checked in both directions. 
 There is here a close analogy to the two kinds of rigid ratchets, 
 as will be seen in Fig. 11 25, which is here reproduced from 
 ? 235. The valve b, in Fig. 1124 a, corresponds to the pawl in a 
 
 and the valve ii 
 
 Running Ratchet, 
 e (5, to a 
 
 Standing Ratchet 
 for the pressure organ a. The difference in construction will 
 also be seen to depend upon the fact that in form a, the valve 
 lifts from its seat during the passage of the pressure organ, 
 form (5, the valve slides upon the seat. This permits 
 
 
 another classification into: 
 
 The variety of forms in which valves are constructed is fully- 
 equal to that of rachets for rigid elements, as shown in Chapter 
 XVIII. , and there is a close analogy existing between the two 
 groups, with one important exception, namely, that the form 
 of rigid rachet which has a tension pawl, has no counterpart 
 among the valves. This exception naturally follows from the 
 fact that the member to be checked is always subject only to 
 compression. 
 
 There is also an analogy between the numerous forms of 
 valves and the two classes of toothed and friction rachets, as 
 has already been mentioned in § 319, valves which have but a 
 slight opening, acting like friction rachets (compare § 340), and 
 those with full opening and entire closing like toothed rachets. 
 This circumstance, however, reduces the number of sub-divi- 
 sions into which valves may be classified, so that the principal 
 basis upon which a classification is made depends upon the 
 character of the motion of the valve, and thence upon the 
 necessary variation in form. This basis of classification has not 
 been used in the case of rigid rachets, the divisions there 
 having been made upon the more practical idea of the variation 
 in form only. We have in rigid ratchets the two forms of 
 pawls, one of which moves about an axis 3 within a finite dis- 
 tance, as in Fig. 1124 ; and the other in which the axis is re- 
 moved to an infinite distance. In the first case, every point of 
 the pawl (or valve) moves in circular arc about the axis, while 
 in the second, all points move in straight lines and equally far. 
 In rigid systems these correspond to link pawls and bolt pawls. 
 
274 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Ill addition to the circular and rectilinear motion of valves, 
 there is a third variety possible, although but little used in 
 practice, viz. : those having a spiral motion. We therefore 
 tiave three sub-divisions of the two main classes of valves, 
 according as the movement is circular, rectilinear, or spiral. 
 
 Lift valves may be 
 
 1. Hinged oi Flap Valves. 
 
 2. Disk, Cone, or Ball Valves. 
 
 3. .Spiral Lift Valves. 
 Slide valves ma}' be 
 
 1. Rotary Valves or Cocks. 
 
 2. Rectilinear_ Slide Valves. 
 
 3. Spiral Moving Slide Valves. 
 
 Although this sub-classification is not exhaustive, yet it gives 
 a convenient and practical arrangement, the few special forms 
 being placed in the group they most nearly resemble. 
 
 ? 366. 
 
 HINGED OR FI,.\P VALVES. 
 
 Flap valves are most generally applicable to piston pumps, 
 which, as we have already seen, form fluid escapements, see 
 ^319. Their tightness is often attained by the use of some 
 elastic material, such as leather, rubber, etc., but very generally 
 the joint is made between metallic surfaces, especially when no 
 small hard particles are likely to be found in the passing fluid. 
 It is always difficult to keep the loss due to shock within small 
 limits, this loss being especially marked with flap valves, and 
 indeed in all liquid ratchet systems the loss from this cause is 
 by no means unimportant. 
 
 The width of bearing s of the valve on its seat is given by the 
 following formula, in which D is the clear opening through the 
 
 s = \/ D -^ 0.16" 
 
 • (401) 
 
 For round valves D is the diameter of the opening ; for rec- 
 tangular openings it is taken as the smaller side of the rec- 
 tangle. 
 
 The blow with which a valve strikes the seat increases in force 
 with the amount of lift (compare \ 368), and as the lift depends 
 upon the actual size of the valve, this objectionable feature is 
 reduced by using several valves of smaller size instead of a 
 .'■\ugle large one. 
 
 A flap valve with metal seat, which is so constructed as to 
 <offer as little obstruction as possible to the flow of liquid, is 
 •shown in Fig. 1126*. This is tapped out for the standard pipe 
 "thread system described in \ 342, the cap gives access to the 
 "valve, the screw plug limits the amount of lift, and a flexible 
 •connection between the disk and the hinge enables the former 
 to obtain a fair bearing on its seat. The freedom from shock 
 would be somewhat less if the bottom of the case conformed to 
 the shape indicated by the dotted lines. 
 
 ^f 
 
 Fig. 1 127. 
 
 Another form of straight-way flap valve is shown in Fig. 1 1 27. 
 Both valve and seat are made of bronze, the seat being secured 
 in place by two wrought iron keys. The case is closed by a lid 
 shown removed in the illustration. The axis of the valve is 
 made to permit a slight degree of lateral play in order to permit 
 the best bearing on the seat to be obtained. Valves of this sort 
 are used on air pumps for steam engines and for vacuum pans. 
 
 * Pratt's Straight-way Check Valve. 
 
 A double flap valve and valve chamber designed for a mine shaft 
 pump, is shown in Fig. 1128a. The flaps are formed of pieces 
 of leather between plates of iron, secured either hy screws or 
 by rivets. The door by which access is obtained is curved to 
 the shape of the valve chamber in order to avoid excessive dead 
 space, and .so reduce the .shock, and is supported upon hinges. 
 The stops are so placed that the valves open to an angle of 
 60°. 
 
 Another design for a double flap valve is shown in Fig. 1128^, 
 this also being for a shaft pump.f In this instance the valves 
 are formed of three thicknesses of leather. At c is shown a 
 quadruple a aive. The proportions given are all based upon the 
 unit J, as given by formula (401). 
 
 , Fig. 1 1 29 shows a circular valve of 
 
 rubber, this form being much used 
 for air pumps for steam engines. The 
 valve lifts approximately in a circular 
 path, forming a cup, the limit of 
 which is the shape of the guard. On 
 account of the flexibility of the rub- 
 ber, the bearing of the seat is rein- 
 forced by a grating, and the rubber is 
 from % to 1% inch in thickness. 
 These values are now made also of 
 liich case the thickness need be only about 
 one-third that of rubber disks of the same diameter. J 
 
 Quite similar in principle to the above disk valve, is the 
 leather rolling valve. Fig. 1 1300:, used for water wheel gates, the 
 principal difference being that the bending of the valve takes 
 place at the edge of the valve, as shown in the illustration. 
 
 tSee Riebler, Indikator versuche an Purapen und Wasserhaltungs n 
 :h'iien, p. 34. Munich, 1881. 
 I Made by the Vulcanized Fibre Company of New York. 
 
 ized fibre, i 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 275 
 
 The same principle is ingeniously used iu the hanging weir 
 of Camere,* Fig. 11306. The valve consists of a series of strips 
 of wood, each really forming a separate valve, these being con- 
 nected and operated by chain links of bronze as indicated in 
 the sketch. 
 
 At a is shown a pair of conical valves. The upper valve and 
 seat are made of bronze to avoid rust. The lower one, which is 
 the suction valve, has an iron seat. If it is desired to provide a 
 bronze seat for both valves they may both be made the same 
 size and bevel. The width of bearing, s, may be made as in 
 formula (401). If the horizontal projection of the seat is made 
 
 .i6" = >/D . 
 
 (402) 
 
 the smaller valve will have a sharper bevel than the larger one. 
 In designing the valve chamber, it is important to proportion 
 the space over the valves so that the return flow of water shall 
 be high enough over the valves to insure their closing, as it is 
 possible for the return flow to get under the valves and hold 
 them up from closing.f The valves here shown are made with- 
 out any packing material. 
 
 At Fig. 11316 is shown a ball valve. In this the width 5 of 
 the seat, and also its projection 5, are the same as in the pre- 
 ceding. The diameter of the ball is found by drawing lines at 
 right angles to the bevel of the seat from the middle of its 
 width, the intersection of the lines giving the centre of the 
 ball. J The high position of the outlet opening is necessary in 
 order to maintain a proper lift to the valve and keep the seat 
 in good condition. 
 
 In order that the opening through the valve shall be equal to 
 that of the pipe the lift, /i, of the valve must equal X ^- (S^^ 
 ? 369). 
 
 Fig. 1 130. • 
 
 An excellent installation is seen at the sluice gates at Geneva 
 (Passerelle de la machine), where forty such gates are used to 
 dam the right arm of the Rhone. The gates are rolled up by 
 the chains shown, these being connected to suitable windlasses. 
 When a whole section is to be thrown entirely open the support- 
 ing posts are also tipped back into the horizontal position, 
 these being jointed at the bottom as shown, and this operation 
 being eflfected by another chain gearing. Each gate is 3 ft. 8 
 inches wide ; the sets of connecting links are 2yj4 inches apart, 
 the number of strips is 39, each being about 3 inches wide, the 
 uppermost being 2^ inches thick, and bottom one 3}4 inches. 
 
 The weir system at Geneva, of which the above forms only a 
 small portion of the entire work, was completed in 1889, as an 
 intercantonal system to control the level of the lake of Geneva 
 and maintain it between the limits of 1.30 and 1.90 metres (4 ft. 
 3^ in. and 6 ft. 2}{ in.) of that of the Rhone. During the year 
 1888, when the system was not entirely completed, the differ- 
 ence fell to 1.95 metres (6 ft. 43j/ in.) in the drought of June 
 of that year. Between October and May the entire series of 
 gates was kept closed. 
 
 ?367. 
 Round Self acting Valves. 
 
 Lift valves for small openings are frequently made of con- 
 ical or spherical form, and in Fig. 1131 two forms are shown 
 which are intended for feed pumps. 
 
 Disk valves are often made with soft packing upon the seat, 
 two examples being given in Fig. 113 2. That shown at a is a 
 valve for a mine pump, packed with leather. The ribs are 
 shaped so as to form a cylindrical guide for the valve, this con- 
 struction being also frequently adopted for conical valves. At 
 (5 is a disk valve with rubber packing, similar valves being used 
 on many of the Gaskill pumping engines; all the metallic parts 
 are made of bronze.? In many instances disk valves are made 
 in the form of a ring, the seat being in two positions, the bear- 
 ing being on both the inner and the outer edge of the ring. 
 
 Fig- ^'^33^ shows the valve for the air pump of a Corliss 
 engine at Creuzot. In this ease the valve is made of a hard 
 material instead of a soft one. The seat is made as usual, and 
 the valve is a ring of phosphor bronze, held down to the seat 
 by a strong flat helical spring. The form shown at d is another 
 style of ring valve much used in the air pumps of English 
 marine engines. 
 
 ;f Engineer of " Fonts ei Chaussees," of France. The subject of 
 ind movable dams has been very skillfully worked out by French 
 
 tSee Zeitschr. Deutscher Ingenieure, 1886, p. 97. 
 
 i See Uhland, Prakt. Maschinen Konstrukteur, 1870, p, 83. 
 
 I See Engineering and Mining Journal, April, 1886, p. 285. 
 
276 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Fig. 1 1 34 is a so-called 
 "bell" valve, used in 
 mine pumps. Here the 
 two seats for the ring of 
 the valve are in different 
 planes. The seats are 
 packed with oak with 
 the end grain up. The 
 outlet in this form is 
 around both the inner 
 and outer bearings, in 
 which respect it differs 
 from Fig. 11336. The 
 lift p, which is required 
 
 to give an area of — D^ 
 
 4 
 is somewhat less than 
 before, being equal to 
 
 J D^ 
 
 4 D^-V D^ 
 
 The necessity for lim- 
 iting the lift of valves in . 
 Fig. 1134. pumping machinery has 
 
 led to the use of a large 
 number of small valves in the same valve chamber in order to 
 obtain the required area with small lift. 
 
 A distinction may be made between two methods of arrang- 
 ing such valves. The first method consists in arranging a 
 number of similar round disk valves each over its own opening 
 in a plate. An example of this is seen in Fig. 1016, in which 
 rubber valves similar to Fig. 113 26 are arranged in rows. The 
 phosphor bronze valve, Fig. ii33«, is also used in this manner, 
 38 being placed on the suction side, and 27 on the discharge 
 side of the air pump. 
 
 In a round valve chamber the arrangement of the valves is 
 more difficult, both as to the placing of the valves and to pro- 
 vide guides to control their lifting and seating. 
 
 Fig. 1 135. 
 
 Fig. 1135a shows a set of 19 valves as used in the Heidt shaft 
 at Hermsdorf, and Fig. 11356 a set of 21 ball valves in the 
 Joseph's shaft at Frohnsdorf- These are both shown inde- 
 pendently of the casing. This system has shown itself so 
 advantageous that it has been extended until sets of several 
 hundreds of ball valves, acting as a single valve, have been put 
 into use. Fig. 11356 shows one feature which must always be 
 taken into account, namely, the relation which the size of the 
 valves and valve casing bear to the water pipe. In this instance 
 the diameters of the casing and pipe are 19)^ in. and 7X in-i 
 and the areas as 7.4 to i. 
 
 The second method of arranging a number of valves is sug- 
 gested by the bell shaped valve of Fig. 1134. In this case the 
 stream which flows toward the centre is above the one which 
 flows outward, thus providing sufficient room for the flow of 
 the upper stream. This idea is also used in the arrangement 
 
 *See Riedler, Indikator versuche, etc., p. 27, and plate 11. 
 
 shown in Fig. Ii35<5, the inner circle of balls being placed 
 higher than the outer circle. By extending this idea of super- 
 posing the discharge openings of a number of valves we obtain 
 a construction consisting of a number of ring valves, forming 
 what may be called a set or cone of valves, f of which three dif- 
 ferent forms are shown in Fig. 11^6. The form shown at a is 
 used in the large pumping engine of the Scharley-Tiefban 
 mine, t the pumps being i metre diameter (39.37 in.). This 
 consists of a number of ring shaped valves of constantly dimin- 
 ishing diameter, constructed on the bell principle, the seat of 
 each valve being on the one next below. 
 
 Fig. 1136. 
 
 The form at b is the design of Thometzek,§ and is very prac- 
 tical. The ring valves are all alike in size and form, each hav- 
 ing its own seat, these being built up as high as maybe required 
 aud held in place by a screw bolt through the lid of the valve 
 casing. 
 
 The design c is that of the Humboldt Machine Work at 
 Kalk. II The ring shaped valves of bronze are slipped over the 
 succession of seats which form a cone of stepped shape, also of 
 bronze. These seats, as in the system of Thometzek, are sep- 
 arate, and are held together by a screw bolt on top, with the 
 difference, however, that each valve in lifting strikes against 
 the next, the amount of lift increasing in an arithmetical ratio 
 from above downward, the uppermost valve being held down 
 by a spring. In this last construction the ratio to D is some- 
 what smaller than in form b. All of these designs are intended 
 
 erman " Siufenveniii;' French " Etagenventile." 
 :e Riedler, Indikator versuche, p. 21. 
 
 ) the best of the author's knowledge Director Thometzek, of Bonn, 
 inged^ in steps (1875), and his desig:ns 
 
 mpen und Geblase," 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 for water pumps, br': an excellent form is designed by the 
 Humboldt Machine Works for blowing engines also, the suc- 
 tion and discharge valves being concentrically arranged* 
 
 Unbalanced Pressure on Lift Vai^ves. 
 If we assume the joint of contact of a lift valve to be entireiy 
 tight and represent the projected area subjected to the pressure of 
 the discharge column by F^, the area exposed on the under- 
 side being called F, we have at the instant of equilibrium of 
 the two columns as the valve is about to lift, p F = p^ F^, in 
 which fi and p^ are the pressures per unit of area on each side, 
 and the weight of the valve is neglected or counterbalanced. 
 From this we have 
 
 Pi 
 
 F,—F 
 
 P'=Pi + -, 
 
 .nd p" =- p,+ 
 
 ~f^~f7 
 
 • (404) 
 
 entile." 
 I In the a 
 
 jl See Trans. Am. Soc. M. E , Vol. IV, 1 
 
 .0 of weight 
 
 • (403) 
 
 or of the ratio -^ is put == a : 
 
 p_-p^ 
 Pi 
 
 The pressure/ — p^ is the unbalanced pressure on the valve, 
 'P-Pi 
 
 Upon this question of unbalanced pressure much depends, 
 and many calculations have been made for various sorts of 
 valves, the pressure tending to close the valve being much 
 reduced in bell shaped valves, such as shown in Fig. 1134. 
 Experimental researches, made upon pumps of various sizes, 
 however, have shown that only a small excess of pressure is 
 actually required, f At the same time the preceding formula 
 shows that the question of the unbalanced pressure is by no 
 means a subject to be neglected, j 
 
 As an instance of the effect of unbalanced pressure may be 
 cited a bell shaped valve, i metre clear opening, in the shaft of 
 the Bleyberg mine, of which the seats could not be kept down 
 by their own weight, but would adhere to the valve, rising and 
 falling with it until secured by some other means. 
 
 Riedler has observed the fact that in arranging valves in a 
 series in a cone as in Fig. 1136a, the uppermost valve which is 
 subjected to the greatest excess of pressure according to (403J, 
 lifts first, and is followed by the others, the lowest rising last. 
 
 It appears that a thin film of water is retained between the 
 bearing faces of valve and seat, which responds rapidly to the 
 pressure of the lower column />^ ,and thus tends to reduce the 
 value given by the above equation. If we first make the 
 assumption that such a film exists and acts in the manner indi- 
 cated, we have for two successive ring valves, arranged for 
 example as in Fig. 113612, the following stresses in the liquid. 
 The weight of the valves, beginning from the top, is indicated 
 by Gi and G",, and their projected areas by F^^ and F.^. 
 
 The experimental valve, shown in Fig. 1137, had an annular 
 seat of 6 in. outside and 2)^ inside diameter, and was subjected 
 to a steam pressure py above, 
 
 and to the atmospheric pres- i< .-O- >i 
 
 sure/ below. In the follow- j ^ ■ " „ | 
 
 ing table p' indicates the ■ \ ~^ i Jj j 
 
 pressure per square inch 
 which would give the equiv- 
 alent of the actual pressure 
 P required to lift the valve, 
 while a is the area and d the 
 diameter of a circle for which 
 a (/>, -^ p) = P. This circle 
 Robinson calls the circle of 
 equilibrium, and it is always 
 smaller than the upper pro- 
 jection of the valve. 
 
 The valves under a and d 
 are taken approximately at 
 the nearest values. The un- 
 balanced pressure can readily 
 be determined from the table. 
 
 p\—p 
 
 P' 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 
 d' 
 
 
 Pounds per 
 
 Square 
 
 
 
 Square Inch. 
 
 Square Inch. 
 
 
 Inches. 
 
 Inches. 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 ^i 
 
 26 
 
 2.53 
 
 
 17 
 
 5-8 
 
 
 2.85 
 
 15 
 
 26 
 
 6.0 
 
 2.8 
 
 2.92 
 
 20 
 
 36 
 
 6.2 
 
 2.8 
 
 3.02 
 
 25 
 
 46 
 
 6.4 
 
 2.9 
 
 309 
 
 30 
 
 57 
 
 
 2.9 
 
 3.14 
 
 35 
 
 69 
 
 6.8 
 
 2.9 
 
 319 
 
 40 
 
 81 
 
 7.0 
 
 30 
 
 3.22 
 
 45 
 
 95 
 
 
 3-0 
 
 325 
 
 50 
 
 112 
 
 7-8 
 
 3.1 
 
 3-27 
 
 55 
 
 129 
 
 8.2 
 
 3-2 
 
 3-29 
 
 60 
 
 150 
 
 8.7 
 
 3-3 
 
 3-31 
 
 65 
 
 172 
 
 9-2 
 
 3-4 
 
 3-33 
 
 70 
 
 19S 
 
 9.8 
 
 3-5 
 
 3-34 
 
 75 
 
 230 
 
 10.5 
 
 3-7 
 
 3-35 
 
 If /i — / = 45 lbs. we have, since <^ = 3 in. == ^ 6 in. for the 
 excess pressure, one-fourth p^ — p ; for p^ — / = 75 lbs. it is 
 equal to 0.38 (p^ — p). The law of reduction of pressure 
 between the surfaces from p^ to p is not simple. The corres- 
 ponding curve is convex towards the axis of abscissas, as shown 
 in Fig. 1137. If it is desired to determine the mean pressure 
 pm we have from the table for p^ — / =: 5 the value 
 
 4-43 
 
 75 it is/,„ = 
 
 'l~P^ 
 2.36 • 
 
 For a rough 
 
 Now it appears by examination of the weights and areas that 
 
 under the circumstances '■' is greater than -=;5 which is then 
 F.^ ° F^ 
 
 also true for the entire second member of the value of p" §, so 
 that/' is the resistance which is overcome first. In the case of 
 the Bleyberg mine F^ is very much greater than F^, and p" 
 becomes less than /' which explains tne action of the valve 
 
 The actual behavior of the film of liquid between the surfaces 
 of contact may not be so definite as indicated above, but it ap- 
 proaches to it as an approximation. This is shown by the 
 very valuable researches made by Prof Robinson upon a valve 
 acting under steam pressure. || In two extensive series of ex- 
 periments he investigated the actual weight required to lift a 
 valve under pressure. The results showed that the unbalanced 
 pressure was much less than p^ — /. 
 
 * German Patent, No. 33,103, 
 
 t Reference is especia'iy made to the numerous and valuable investiga- 
 tions of Prof. Ried'er. 
 
 X See the comprehensive papers of Prof. C. Bach, in Zeitschr. D. Ing. for 
 -""' " Versuche zur Klarstellung der Bewegung Selbstthatiger Pumpen- 
 
 approximation we may put/™ = ^ (/^ — /). Prof Robinson 
 has deduced a theory from these experiments. He assumes 
 that between the surfaces there exists between the pressure p^ 
 at the outer circumference to the pressure /, at the inner cir- 
 cumference, a gradual increase of pressure from/ to/j. Under 
 the assumption that the fluid under consideration is incom- 
 pressible he obtained by pure analysis the following equation 
 for the value of d : 
 
 --v^-K- 
 
 R 
 
 • (405) 
 
 in which R and r are the inner and outer radii of the ring of 
 the seat. The values of d' as obtained from this equation are 
 given in the fifth column of the table. They increase nearly 
 as the experimental determinations of d, but with Robinson's 
 assumption of an entirely elastic fluid they are 10 to 15 per 
 cent, too great. Probably steam should be considered as mid- 
 way between an elastic and a non-elastic fluid. 
 
 The deductions from Robinson's experiments are hardly ap- 
 plicable to pump valves because the lifting of the valve by the 
 action of the lower column is effected by a varying pressure, 
 while in the experiments / was uniform. If we accept Robin- 
 son's theory we arrive in fact to what has been already stated, 
 namely, that when the value of/ increases between the surfaces 
 until it reaches /j, the pressure p., will be balanced, since in 
 equation (405) for p — pi the value oi d' = 2 r, that is, the 
 unbalanced pressure becomes zero. This also agrees with 
 Riedler's indicator tests, since experiments with the indicator 
 failed to show appreciable unbalanced pressure. 
 
278 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 These experiments appear to indicate that practically the 
 unbalanced pressure cannot be great, and in most cases for self- 
 acting valves it may be neglected. Prof. Robinson's experi- 
 ments and theory may serve to determine with considerable 
 accuracy the pressures at which a safety valve begins to lift. 
 
 ? 369- 
 Closing Pressure of Self-acting Valves. 
 As already shown, a self-acting valve opens whenever the 
 pressure in the under column exceeds that above the valve. As 
 soon as the direction of pressure is reversed the valve should 
 close quickly. This is especially important, as Riedler has 
 shown in the case of suction valves, since when the closing is 
 delayed appreciably after the reversal of the pump piston, the 
 moving column of water is checked with a sudden shock. For 
 this reason the suction valves are given especial attention, as 
 shown in the example already cited from Creuzot, in which 
 there are 38 suction valves and only 27 discharge valves. 
 
 In order that the lift 
 shall not be too great and 
 to insure prompt closing, 
 the valve may be loaded 
 with a definite pressure, 
 K, obtained either from 
 the weight of the valve, 
 or by means of a spring, 
 or by both. This ques- 
 tion will here be exam- 
 ined. Referring to Fig. 
 1138, we have for the 
 lifting pressure due to 
 the under column : 
 
 (406) 
 
 in which/) — p\^ q the closing pressure per unit of area. For 
 a height h, and putting u = the circumference of the cylindri- 
 cal space inclosing the valve, we have : 
 
 2£/i being the velocity of flow at the outer edge of the valve, 
 and V the velocity of flow in the under column, h being in feet. 
 Now if w is the velocity at the inner edge of the valve we have 
 
 w 
 
 But we also have 
 
 ■w= ^2.gh' = aJ 2g- X 2.2q 
 (since the pressure per square inch is equal to — ) and hence : 
 
 in which v is at its maximum value when it equals the velocity 
 of the pump piston. For purposes of numerical calculation we 
 still require the value of a. Taking the width of bearing s, and 
 projection in the case of conical valves s^ from (401) and (402) 
 we have : 
 
 Dia. D = 
 
 .in. 
 
 4 in. 
 
 6 in. 
 
 8 in. 
 
 10 in. 
 
 ..in. 
 
 16 in. 
 
 Width of seat ^ = 
 Projection Ji= . . 
 Cone valve o = . 
 Flat Valve a = . . 
 
 i.'65 
 
 0.56 
 0.40 
 
 1.36 
 
 0.56 
 '•31 
 1-39 
 
 1-35 
 
 0.84 
 1.30 
 
 o.iJ 
 1.25 
 
 Substituting, we get : 
 
 Now it is desirable that ay and Wi should not be too great ; 
 that is, the ratio of k ji to /^should be equal to, or less than, 
 unity. If we put h u — /3 F, we have : 
 
 and, putting for^ its value = 32.2, we get : 
 
 ^ = -li-iT^°'-=^y=-J--l5V- • • 
 
 from this formula we get for : 
 
 ^=1 A i_ 
 
 424 
 
 g = .006667 a v^ .01185 a "ip- .02666 a v^ .1066 a v 
 
 Example i. — For a conical valve whose smallest diameter iJ = 4 inches, 
 and the greatest velocity v of the lower column is 6J^ feet per second the 
 area of inlet of valve hu = F^ and ^ = 1, we have a pressure of 7 = .006667 X 
 1.44 X (6.5)2 = 0.4 lbs. per sq, in. For the total pressure we have 
 
 A'= -^ (4 -t- 2 X 0.40)2 X 0.4 = 7.=4 lbs. 
 Example 2. — For a flat valve of the sam 
 
 The method of calculation is similar for ring shaped valves 
 and can readily be applied. The formula (407) can only be 
 considered as an approximation as the variations in the jet of 
 water aflfect the pressure. It is evident, however, that K is- 
 often quite large. 
 
 In the preceding calculation the momentum of the water 
 column has not been taken into account. In some cases this is 
 sufficient to hold the valve open until the piston has made a 
 great portion of its return stroke. This is well shown in the 
 case of the pump at the Bleyberg mine (? 319, note) which ap- 
 parently showed a discharge of 104 per cent. If this action can 
 be made to exist during the entire stroke by giving the water 
 a sufficient velocity by contracting the tube that the discharge 
 valve does not close at all, this valve may be entirely omitted. 
 This is the case with the single valved pump of Edmond 
 Henry,* which has only a suction valve and no discharge 
 valve. An analogy to this form of fluid ratchet is found in 
 Langen's fly wheel ratchet train. Fig. 730 and 731. In this case 
 the momentum of the fly wheel is sufficiently great for it to 
 suflfer no perceptible loss of velocity during the return stroke 
 of the pawl. 
 
 §370. 
 Mechanically Actuated Pump Valves. 
 
 The numerous investigations of recent years have show, ' 
 that by proper loading of the valves, combined with a reduc- 
 tion of lift, the shock of the water in a pump can be very ma- 
 terially reduced and kept within practical limits, even for high 
 piston speeds. The reduction of lift involves a great multipli- 
 cation in the number of the valves and a great increase in 
 dimensions. For this reason another solution of the problem 
 has been attempted, namely, that of abandoning the self-acting 
 feature, and actuating the valves by mechanical means. The 
 best arrangement seems to be that in which the valves are 
 opened by the action of the water, but closed by a positive 
 gear in advance of the shock. The application of this method 
 enables the size of the valves to be reduced, and as it is princi- 
 pally used for large pumping engines the valves can be oper- 
 ated by connection to the fly wheel shaft. Professor Riedler 
 has recently made very valuable investigations upon this 
 system.f 
 
 Fig. 1 139 shows the valve gear for the Riedler pumping 
 engine at the Wartinberg mine. The revolving cam d, closes 
 
 * See Revue Industrielle, p. 342, Septen 
 theory of this form of pump is given. 
 t See Riedler, Mine Pumps with Positive 
 
 ir, Zeitschr. D. Ingen- 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 279 
 
 the valve b, just as the plunger is at the end of the stroke, and 
 permits it to open by the action of the water. The valve is 
 held to its seat by " 
 
 operate very smooth- 
 ly. Further details 
 of this construction 
 are given in the arti- 
 cles already cited. For 
 blowing engines, and 
 — especially for air com- 
 pressors, positively 
 actuated valve gears 
 are much used. A 
 very simple action for 
 the inlet valves is 
 shown in Fig. 1140. 
 The piston rod c 
 moves the valve 6, 
 by means of the fric- 
 tion of the rod in the 
 stuffing box, the ac- 
 tion taking place just at the reversal of the stroke. Examples 
 of this construction are to be found in the air pumps for use in 
 physical laboratories. 
 
 Vai^vbs with Spiral Movement. 
 
 It is not so convenient to construct a valve so that its ; 
 shall be both rotary and rectilinear axially, and this construction 
 is mainly limited to valves which are operated by hand. 
 
 This is the counterpart of the throttle ratchet shown in \ 250, 
 and valves of this sort have been much used with throttling- 
 governors for steam engines. The closing of such valves is im- 
 perfect, as the edge must be rounded near the hub of the valve, 
 thus giving only a line of contact.* 
 
 If it is desired to use throttle valves for regulation of water 
 pressure, as the case of turbines, etc. , it must not be forgotten 
 that the resistance of the valve will materially affect the effi- 
 ciency. 
 
 For self-acting valves a variety of throttle valve may be used, 
 in which the area of one wing is only about ^ to ^ that of the 
 other wing, thus partially balancing the valve. This form, 
 which is old, appears to be again coming into use. f 
 
 Lift valves which are situated in vessels which are not closed 
 at the top may be balanced in a simple manner by making the 
 valve with a tubular continuation which extends above the sur- 
 
 FiG. 1 141. 
 
 Fig. 1141a shows a conical valve with spiral motion, as used 
 on the Giffard injector. This arrangement enables a very iine 
 adjustment of the opening to be obtained ; a similar form is also 
 used in the so-called " cataract " for steam engines. The sharp 
 point of the cone has caused valves of this sort to be called 
 "needle" valves, and similar forms, without the spiral action, 
 are found in gas regulators. Stop valves for steam and for 
 water are frequently made with spiral motion. An example is 
 shown in Fig. 1141A. When the valve is not in contact with its 
 seat it has both a vertical and a rotary motion. In the parti- 
 cular form shown the valve has a disk of asbestos which forms 
 the surface of contact with the seat. This general form is 
 known as a "globe " valve on account of the form of the body, 
 and such valves are very extensively used for steam and water. 
 
 Balanced Valves. 
 
 Valves which are to be operated by other means than by the 
 action of the fluid, are advantageously made so as to be relieved 
 from fluid pressure, and thus offer less resistance to operation. 
 
 Valves of the wing or flap construction are conveniently bal- 
 anced by combining two valves moving in opposite directions 
 into one valve of the form commonly called ' ' throttle ' ' valve. 
 Fig. 1 142. 
 
 face of the water. A balanced valve upon this principle, as 
 used for an outlet valve in a canal lock, as at b^' and b^' , 
 
 recommended in Revue Industrielle, p. 205, May 
 ter balance, but from Robinson's experiments, 
 )uld offer too much resistance to opening. 
 
 ; Hydraulique, Paris, 1739, Vol. II. These 
 
 •e of brass with metallic packing. 
 
28o 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^"ig- 993. is shown in Fig. 1143. This valve, designed by 
 Constructor Cramer, is made with a cylindrical shell of sheet 
 iron extending to the surface of the water. The diameter of 
 this shell is the same as that of the valve, and the weight of 
 the valve, which is b}' no means small, is partially counter- 
 balanced, leaving only sufficient to insure proper closing and 
 seating. * If it is desired to apply Cramer's construction to 
 valves which are subjected to high pressure, this may be done 
 by using two stuffing boxes, one external and one internal, 
 
 as shown in Fig. 1144, which, however, adds to the complica- 
 tion. For lift valves which are to act under high pressure a 
 better construction is the so-called ' ' double-beat ' ' valve, 
 which, like the throttle valve, consists of two similar valves in 
 which the pressures oppose and neutralize each other. Three 
 forms are shown in the accompanying illustrations. Fig. 1 145a 
 
 4 Fig. 1145a. 
 
 being a double disk valve, and Fig. 11455 a tubular valve. Both 
 of these were invented by Horublower in the latter part of the 
 last century. Fig. 1145^ is a bell or Cornish valve. These 
 
 Fig. 1145^- 
 valves each consist of a pair of conical lift valves, the varia- 
 tions appearing in the details of the connections and passages. 
 
 When the projection of one seat falls within that of the other, 
 as in forms b and c, the unbalanced pressure is that due to the 
 projections of both seats. If so desired, however, these may be 
 
 made as Fig. ii45«, with one seat directly over the other, in 
 which case the pressure^, — p need only be calculated for one 
 seat. For the preceding double seated valves we may make : 
 
 for the width of seat s = yi ( 0.2 aJ D + 0.137 ) 
 
 andfortheprojection.yi = ^ f 0.2 z^^' ) 
 
 In form a the mean diameter D' of the valve is = 0.8 times 
 the diameter D of the pipe, while in forms b and c the diame- 
 ters of valve and pipe are the same. For the force required to 
 lift the valve, taking the projection s^ into account and assum- 
 ing the pressure between the surfaces to be as in § 368, equal to 
 y^ {pi—p), we have, ueglecting the weight of the valve : 
 
 p^ = iT.D's,^y,{p,-p) (409) 
 
 while for a single conical valve of the same diameter D it would 
 be: 
 
 ^Ct 
 
 D^-+- 
 
 HD^s, 
 
 )](A- 
 
 ■p). . . (410) 
 
 P is proportionally verj- great, while F' is not always unim- 
 portant. 
 
 Exatnple.—VoT D' = 12, we have for form a, 5i' = H (0 = \/^ ) = 0-346". 
 If now p^ — f = 60 pounds per square inch we have : 
 
 P' = -^ X 12 X 0.346 X % X 60 = 521 pounds. 
 
 For a single valve the diameter would be i> = — 5- = 15 inches, and from 
 [402) ji = 0.2 -v/ 15 = 0.77, whence 
 
 />= \-^ J52 + ^ X 0.77 TT ( 15 -t- 0.77) J 60 = 12,126 lbs. 
 so that P is nearly 24 times P'. 
 
 It is very desirable for double seated valves which are to be 
 used for steam, that both valve and seat be made of the same 
 material, in order to avoid unequal expansion. 
 
 Double seated valves are also used for water, 
 shows such a valve arranged for a sluice. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 This valve is made with flat seats, the lower seat being faced 
 with rubber, and the upper one packed with leather secured to 
 the housing which is shown over the valve. The valve red runs 
 through this housing and through a tube above the surface of 
 the water. The diameter D is 1400 mm. = 4 ft. 7 in. This is 
 practically a tubular valve, similar to Fig. 1 1451?', except that 
 the direction of flow is reversed ; this arrangement has also 
 been used by Hornblower. The leather packing at 1" is made 
 flexible, since the projections of the valve seats lie one within 
 the other so as to make a slight tendency for the valve to lift, 
 without entirely overcoming the weight of the valve. Balanced 
 valves of the kind described above are also adapted to large 
 steam engines. In some instances a small balanced valve is 
 arranged so that it is lifted first and admits steam under the 
 main valve before the latter is lifted. 
 
 Another device is that shown in Fig. 1 147, known as Ait- 
 ken's automatic steam stop. The main valve b, is closed by 
 being screwed up against its seat by the spindle and hand 
 wheel. Before opening, it is balanced by admitting steam 
 through the b3'-pass valve b' . The valve itself is loose on the 
 spindle, and if through any breakage in the pipe beyond the 
 valve a sudden or rapid flow of steam should take place, it will 
 be automatically closed by the force of the current. 
 
 plug and one for the spindle. The i 
 and jam nut enables a fine adjustment to t 
 
 Fig. 1 147. 
 
 Lift valves may also be balanced by making a balance piston 
 connected with the valve, the pressure of the steam acting upon 
 the piston in the opposite direction to the action on the valve. 
 This construction has also been applied to reducing valves in 
 the place of weighted levers or springs in various ways, but 
 space cannot here be given to the subject. 
 
 B.— SLIDING VALVES. 
 
 Fig. 1 149 shows two forms with hollow plugs, these being 
 much used for injection cocks for jet steam condensers. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 149- 
 
 When the angle of the apex of the cone becomes 180° the 
 plug becomes a flat disk, and this form is often found in the 
 throttle valves of locomotives, and less frequently in the valve 
 gear of engines. True cylindrical plugs, i. e., those in which 
 the angle of taper is equal to zero, are rarely used, although 
 recommended by some. This form is better made in a portion of 
 a cylinder, and operated by an oscillating motion, as in the 
 Corliss and similar valves. A starting valve of this type, used 
 as the steam admission valve for a triple expansion engine is 
 shown in Fig. 1150. 
 
 Rotary Valvbs and Cocks. 
 
 For rotary valves the bearing surfaces are conveniently made 
 conical, so that a simple endlong pressure on the valve will 
 hold it firmly to its seat. Valves of this construction are 
 known as cocks. 
 
 Fig. 1 1 48 shows two forms of such cocks which are in general 
 use. The opening through the plug of the cock increased in 
 height in order to obtain a full area without requiring the 
 diameter of the plug to be too great ; the area of the opening 
 through the plug being made equal to the area of the pipe, /. e., 
 
 = — D\ 
 4 
 According to the experiments of Edwards, a good taper for 
 the plug is \ on each side. For the thickness & of the metal in 
 the body of the cock formula (319) may be used when the 
 
 material is of cast iron , which gives & = o. 472^^ -| ; for bronze 
 
 the thickness may be made one-half to two-thirds this value. 
 The design shown in Fig. 1 1486 has the plug entirely inclosed 
 in the body, and is made with two stufiing boxes, one for the 
 
 Fig. 1 150. 
 
 At « is a longitudinal section, b a cross section, and at c is 
 shown the seat looked at. from above. In the one seat three 
 passages are controlled at /', I" and I'". All three are closed 
 when the valve is in the position shown at b, but open at the 
 same time when the valve is moved to the left. The trapezoidal 
 opening in /' admits a small amount of steam to the high pres- 
 sure cylinder at the same time that a little live steam is admit- 
 ted through I" and I" to the intermediate and low pressure 
 cylinders, so that the engine is sure to start. The valve is then 
 thrown all the way over, closing I" and I'" and throwing I' 
 wide open.f 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Gate Valves for Open and Closed Conductors. 
 
 A great variety- of valves has been devised for open water con- 
 ductors in the form of gates bj- which the flow can be regulated. 
 Such gates have been preferably made of wood with the excep- 
 tion of the operating mechanism. At the present time iron is be- 
 ginning also to be used for the gates, and as in the case of other 
 branches of work, wood is likely to be less and less used, being 
 limited to a few special cases. For very broad streams the con- 
 struction of such gates is now sometimes made upon the princi- 
 ple of subdivision. In such cases the breadth of the stream is 
 subdivided into a number of smaller streams, each with a sep- 
 arate gate, thus keeping the gates small enough to be movable 
 b}- hand. 
 
 A weir which is placed in a stream is both in principle and in 
 construction a valve. When the water in the stream is low the 
 flow is entirely checked ; for the mean flow the stream passes 
 through the reduced opening with a velocity due to the reduc- 
 tion in section, while for high water the entire width of the 
 dam is overflowed. Movable weirs are plainly examples of 
 regulating valves. French engineers have given much atten- 
 tion to moveable dams with excellent results. A new design 
 for a moveable dam by Schmick is shown in Fig. 1151.*. This 
 dam consists of a number of pontoons, each three of which are 
 
 ings of the valves the pontoons can be caused to regulate the 
 diff'erence of water level above and below the pontoons, while 
 if all three valves are closed the pontoons will rise and fall with 
 the variations in the level of the stream. 
 
 Gate valves are much used for water mains, and an example 
 of the many varieties used for the purpose is shown in Fig. 
 1152a. The gate or disk of the valve is made of bronze, and is 
 wedge shaped, in order that it may be firmly pressed against its 
 seat when the screw is tightened (this forms a pressure of the 
 second order) while the pressure is immediately relieved at the 
 commencement of opening. The screw is in this case made of 
 ' ' sterro-metal ' ' to avoid rusting. 
 
 Fig. 1 15 1. 
 
 secured together by a j'oke and anchored \>y a chain to a point 
 up the stream. All three pontoons of each set are arranged 
 with variable water ballast in two or more compartments, a/ 
 and a^' . An adjustable valve b-^ enables communication to be 
 made with the upper water level, and the compartment a/, and 
 a similar valve b^ connecting the compartment a/ with the 
 lower level, while a third valve b.^^ enables communication to be 
 made between the two compartments. By varying the open- 
 
 Gate valves are also used for gas mains, and a valve for this 
 service is shown in Fig. 11526. In this instance the valve is 
 operated by means of a rack and pinion. The motion is made 
 in the horizontal direction so that the valve will remain in any 
 position, the only resistance being that of friction. 
 
 I 375- 
 Slide Valves. 
 Slide valves are mainly used for the purpose of effecting the 
 distribution of steam in steam engines. This is such an im- 
 portant subject that all the forms in general use will here be 
 noticed. 
 
 If, ,an-— >i<-lj-«-a >1<V 
 
 [153- 
 
 I. Plain D valve, Fig. 1153. This is the most important 
 form of all. The action of this valve has already been discussed 
 in I 328, and hence the dimensions will only be considered 
 here. The width a of the steam ports is kept as small as is 
 practicable, while the length at right angles to the plane of the 
 drawing is made quite large. When a is given, the dimensions 
 to be determined are the outside and inside lap e and t, the 
 bridges b, the width of face bo beyond the ports, the width ao of 
 the exhaust port IV, the travel r, the length of the valve /, and 
 of the valve seat h. The laps e and z, and under some circum- 
 stances two valves e^, and e^ for e are determined according to the 
 method given in Figs. 3024 and 1025. In the same manner also 
 .is found the greatest distance j. Fig. ii53'^, i" which the edge 
 of the valves passes the edge of the port. This gives the width 
 of bearing t of the valve upon the bridge, since b = s -\- t. The 
 
 value of t varies greatly, the least permissible value is if = jg > 
 
 and it is more frequently made y%" to Y^" . Approximately, for 
 we have, after assuming t as just given, ao -|- ^ — (■? -j- « + 
 — a, in which e is taken as a mean between e^ and e^. We then 
 have : 
 
 whence ;- = a -f ^ + ■? \ ^^'U 
 
 and /=4a4-3/-f-z + 2.f4-0 
 
 The valve face must have an inner width of bearing to Fig. b 
 at least equal to /, whence for the total width of the valve face 
 we have the value 
 
 The thickness of metal in the valve itself, when made of cast 
 
 , Zeitschrift fur Bankunde, 
 
 iron should be about = 
 
 D 
 
 4- 0.4'^, which is about half the 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 283 
 
 thickness of the metal of the steam cylinder as given by formula 
 (3^0). If the valve is faced with white metal the body of the 
 valve should be of bronze, the white metal itself not being strong 
 enough. 
 
 i.«^a-«iA-'-s+uatF-*t< 2. Double D valve, Fig. 
 
 ■ ' ' ' ' ^ 1 1 54. In this form the four 
 
 valves which in the plain 
 D valve are united in one 
 piece, are separated into 
 two portions, connected 
 by a rod. This construc- 
 tion is adopted to shorten 
 
 I the steam passages / and 
 
 -»i y^y^ ^^^ width of each 
 
 valve is = 3 a -\- 2e -\- 2 s 
 
 ■\- t -\- to or oi both to- 
 
 -f 4 ^ + 2 / + 2 /^. 
 
 This form is also intended to re- 
 
 id ///, which is often an im- 
 
 !*1ro-^!>-a-*.l-*-a-*- 'bi- 
 
 FiG. 1 154. 
 
 gether = / = 6 a + 4 
 
 3. Pipe Valve, Fig. ii^_ 
 duce the length of the ports // 
 
 portant consideration in engines of long stroke. The total 
 length of valve bearing surface is/= 6 a +5 e -{- j, s ■\- i -\- 
 
 2 to. 
 
 Example i.— If a = %", ^ = J^, ; = \l'\ s = %", t= 1^ = i^ we have for a 
 plain D valve the width / = 4 X 0.75 + 3 X 0.75 + 0.6875 + 2 x 0.375 + 0.1875 
 - 6.875". 
 
 For the double D valve we have / = 6 X 0.75 + 4 X 0.75 + 4 X 0.375 + 4 X 
 0.1875 = 8.75" and for a pipe slide valve as Fig. 1155, /= 6 X 0.75 + 5 X 
 0-75 + 3 X 0.375 + 0.6875 + 2 X 0.1S75 = 10.4375". The work of friction in 
 moving the valves is directly in proportion to the above widths, since the 
 travel is the same in all three cases, being : 2r = 2e + 2rt + 2.r = 2X 0.75 
 + 2 X 0.75 + 2 X 0.375 = 3-75"- 
 
 In order to reduce the work of friction in slide valves the 
 multiplication of valves has been resorted to, much as has 
 already been shown in the case of lift valves. A division of the 
 valve system into two parts has also been made for marine 
 engines with oscillating cylinders, the object being to place one 
 portion on each side of the cylinder and thus keep the entire 
 mass symmetrical with regard to the axis of oscillation. In 
 this arrangement the two slide valves correspond to eight sepa- 
 rate valves. In these as also in engines, with stationary cylin- 
 ders, the valves may be combined into one. This may be ac- 
 complished by using two or more sets of steam passages which 
 unite at one point and by making corresponding divisions in 
 valve and valve seat. The combination of several valves so as 
 to act as one is not limited to lift valves, as many useful forms 
 of slide valves are made on this principle, some of the best 
 forms being here shown. 
 
 4. Penn's Gridiron Valve, Fig. 1156. In this the steam port 
 
 a is divided into two ports, each having a width = — . To de- 
 
 termine the total width of valve as in the previous cases, we 
 have : / = 5-5 « + 3-5 ^ + 3 ^ + ^^ + 2 io -{- yi i, and for the 
 travel : 2 r-:= a -\- e -\- s, that is half as much as before. It is 
 
 evident that the laps — and — must bear the same relation to 
 ^2 2 
 
 — as the diagram gives for a: e: i, in the preceding forms. 
 
 
 
 we 
 
 have/= 5.5 
 
 X 
 
 0. 
 
 75 + 3-5 
 
 X 0.75 + 
 
 X 
 
 0.375 
 
 -1-0.31 
 
 25 = 
 
 875" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 = 
 
 0.75 -t- 
 
 =•75 +0.37 
 
 = 
 
 1.875. 
 
 e uivilln 
 
 es for the ^ 
 t plain slide 
 
 va 
 
 k 
 ve 
 
 of frict 
 
 on of such a 
 
 valve 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6.S75 
 ^5~X 
 
 X 375 
 1.875 
 
 57- 
 
 
 which is an important gain. 
 
 5. Borsig's Gridiron Valve, Fig. 1157. This is the same in 
 principle as the preceding, and differs only in construction, the 
 
 ;• 
 
 Li. 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 a^p 
 
 or 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^11" 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^_^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 T 
 
 ^' ^ 
 
 
 « 
 
 i 
 
 exhaust passages being carried on each side of the valve instead 
 of above, as in Penn's construction. 
 6. Hick's Double 
 
 compound engines 
 with parallel cylinders 
 (Hornblower and 
 Woolf), the ports IF 
 and Iir are for the 
 high pressure cylinder, 
 and /I" and III" for 
 the low pressure cj'lin- 
 der. The width / of 
 the valve is : 
 / = 5«-f 3al+6^ + 
 4 ^ -I- ^1 4- ^1 X to. 
 
 Usually fl, is made 
 equal to a, which reduces the value of / somewhat. 
 
 7. Allan's Double Valve, Fig. 1159, is a valve for compound 
 
 .a-f2i, ,.a-I-_2i-_ 
 
 bj ' a ' bo ■ ao ' bo ' 
 
 Fig. 1159. 
 engines with tandem cylinders. The value of I is 
 
 l=ioa-{--j e-\- ei+6s-\-i-\- i^-\-2,io. 
 This construction not only economizes the work required to 
 operate the valve, but also gives a very simple arrangement of 
 steam passages. 
 
 8. The E Valve, 
 Fig. II 60, is used to 
 advantage in place of 
 the plain Z? valve-when 
 the use of a valve gear 
 actuated directly from '■ 
 the piston rod requires 
 that the valve shall 
 move in the same di- 
 rection as the piston. 
 (See Fig. 1006 and 
 1008). This valve con- 
 sists of two D valves cast together, and the over travel beyond 
 the valve seat gives the admission. 
 
 We have as before : r = a -\- e -\- s, and 
 
 b = i-\-r=a + e + i-[-s^ 
 
 l, = e+ r=a+ 2e+ s \ (413) 
 
284 
 
 THE CO INSTRUCTOR. 
 
 This gives for the width of the valve .- 
 l=i:ia-{-2b-\-2bi,-\-2tor: 
 1=-] a -^ee + i-\- AS -\- 2 t 
 
 which is considerably greater than for i 
 
 valve. 
 
 (414) 
 
 . ordinary D slide 
 
 •.mph ; 
 
 mple: 
 
 
 en have / = 13 X 0.75 + 0.6875 - 
 6.875" for the plain D slide valve, 
 available for small port widths a 
 
 will also be seen in Figs. : 
 
 lies in the use of the outer edge of the valve s 
 
 which principle also has a valuable applicatiot 
 
 4 X 0.375 + 2 X 
 It will be evident 
 id small laps, a 
 
 _cipal value of this valve 
 t as the edge of opening, 
 Q the following valve. 
 
 9. Trick's Valve, 
 Fig. 1 161.* This is a 
 double valve and con- 
 sists of one D valve 
 over another, with a 
 steam passage be- 
 tween. As before, 
 we have r -= a -\- e 
 -\- s, and also make 
 bo-—2e — t, i. e. , the 
 inner edge of the 
 Fig. 1161. outer valve when the 
 
 valve is in mid-posi- 
 tion, is at a distance -= <? from the edge of the valve seat. The 
 consequence is that when the valve is moved a distance equal to 
 e, say to the right, the passage through the valve opens to ad- 
 mit steam at the same instant as does the edge of the valve on 
 the left. This gives a steam admission twice as quickly and an 
 opening twice as great as would otherwise be the case. The 
 following positions from a to /, Fig. 1 162, will show the succes- 
 sive actions, the exhaust ports being omitted for simplicity. 
 
 Fig. 1 163, we must from the point y?, which indicates the port 
 opening, double the width given by the Zeuner circle until the 
 
 Trick's valve. 
 
 entrance to the passage in the valve is wide open, as at d. By thus 
 doubling the opening in the diagram we obtain the curve A .5,. 
 d. From this position on, the opening at the left continues to 
 grow wider, but that through the valve on the right does not, 
 hence on the Zeuner diagram from this point we return to the 
 opening which the regular valve circle gives, to which is added 
 the constant opening c = B B^ ^= C C^ indicated by the curve 
 B^ Cy This continues until the inner edge of the opening of 
 the valve passage on the left reaches the edge of the bridge as 
 ate. 
 
 c. As the valve continues to move the passage through it is 
 gradually closed, but the steam tort is opened to the same 
 amount, and hence the actual port opening remains constant. 
 T.his continues until the position d is reached, when the passage 
 through the valve is entirely shut off. This is indicated in the 
 diagram by the arc C, D, struck from the centre at i. 
 
 d. The valve continues to move to the right until it is en- 
 tirely upon the bridge, the corresponding portion of the dia- 
 gram being the arc D E of the valve circle. 
 
 e. The valve from this position moves on the bridge beyond 
 the port until it has traveled a distance equal to 5, as shown at 
 f, during which time the port opening remains constant, as in- 
 dicated in the diagram by the arc E E' struck from the centre 
 I. From this point the same actions take place successively in 
 the reversed order. 
 
 It will be seen that Trick's valve gives a much quicker opening 
 and also a much longer duration of the full opening than does 
 the plain slide valve. It remains to be seen how these features 
 can be used to the best advantage. According to Trick's prac- 
 tice this is best done by making the value of j negative, and 
 
 also ^ t. This makes the port opening from C\ to (7/ in the 
 
 diagram constant, as shown in the diagram. 
 
 In order that the apparent contraction of the ports by the 
 change in the sign oZ s shall not occur, the value of a is made 
 greater than would otherwise be the case. Under these condi- 
 tions we have for the exhaust port Uo, the equation : 
 
 tto -\' t — ^1 — a. — i = a — s, 
 in which .? is given the magnitude equal to the distance which 
 the edge of the valve is moved beyond the edge of the bridges. 
 (See Fig. II 62 /) . We then have : 
 
 a. The admission is just about to take place both from the 
 edge of the valve on the left and through the passage in the 
 -'alve. If we apply Zeuner' s diagram (compare Fig. 1025) see 
 
 For the exhaust port, Uo ^ 2 a -\- e-^ -\- i — s— 
 
 For the bridge, b =^ e — e-^-{- s — t 
 
 For the passage through valve c ^ e — i — e^ 
 For the total valve, /=4a-f 4,?— ^j-f / — T,s-\-t 
 
 Example 4.— Making s = —5- — and negative also t = — ^ 
 
 other data the same as the plain slide valve of Example i, and we 
 
 a = 0.75 -h 0.1875 = 0.9375"; ^ = 0.75; 2 = 0.6875^1 = 0.078", wl 
 
 ■n 
 
 1(415) 
 
 = 0.9375 -t- 0.75- 
 
 ..1875 = 
 
 + i — s — i = 2 X 0.9375 -1-0.078 + 0.6875 — 0.1875 — 0.187s = 
 b=e — ei + s — i = o.7s— 0.078 -|- 0.1875 - o 1875. 
 
 c = e-i-e^ = 0.4845" 
 .e — ei+i—3s-i-i^3.75 + 3 — 0.078 -f 0.6875 — 0.5625 -1- 0.1875 
 6.875" for the plain slide valve, which compares very favorably. 
 
 Fig. 1 164 shows the application of the author's valve diagram, 
 already shown in Fig. 1024. The action of the inner portion of 
 the valve is the same as with the ordinary slide valve. 
 
 For comparison the following dimensions of an executed 
 valve by Trick, are given : 
 
 a = 1.77' 
 (5-5 mm.). 
 
 (451 
 
 0.078'' (2 mm.), i = 0.216" 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 235 
 
 : 0.846'' (21.5 n 
 r = 2.24'' (57 1 
 
 I.), c = 0.55'/ 
 1.), I = S-^l" 
 
 b = I" (25.S mm.), e = 
 (14 mm.). 
 
 s = — 0.374 (9.5 mm.), 
 (134 mm.). 
 
 do = 145'' {37 mm.), /. = 5.83'' (148 mm.), <! = 30°. 
 
 Trick's valve is especially well adapted for use on compound 
 marine engines, and has recently been used in the forms of 
 double and gridiron valves, as in Nos. 4 to 7 preceding.* 
 
 § 376. 
 Bai<anced Slide Valves. 
 
 The resistance to motion due to the pressure is not so great 
 with a slide valve as with a lift valve of the same area, because 
 in the former case it is only necessary to overcome the friction 
 between the valve and its seat. For large valves, however, it 
 becomes so great as to render some method of balancing neces- 
 sary. It is desirable that even small slide valves should be 
 balanced, as by this means the wear upon valve face and seat 
 can be greatly reduced. Balancing is most important for steam 
 engine valves, and the following examples belong to this class ; 
 for other kinds of service it is unimportant. 
 
 But few researches have been made upon the subject of valve 
 friction, but from such as have been made, and for such good 
 bearing surfaces as are used, the coefficient of friction may be 
 taken at 0.05 to 0.04. 
 
 American engineers, as we have already seen, enter into very 
 practical investigations and prosecuie them with patience and 
 success, and to one of these, Mr. C M. Giddings, we owe the 
 following results.f 
 
 Balanced Valve. — Cylinder 6^" X 10". 
 
 P' = ^ 
 
 - whence a P' ■■ 
 
 The value a P' shows the 
 
 Revolutions 
 
 Pressure 
 
 H. P. of 
 
 H. P. .V 
 
 Ratio of 
 
 Ratio 
 
 per Minute. 
 
 Pounds. 
 
 EIngine— TV. 
 
 for Valve. 
 
 preceding. 
 
 al" 
 
 125 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 ■^ 
 
 2 per ct. 
 
 48 
 
 175 
 
 30 
 
 9 
 
 i 
 
 1.2 " 
 
 61 
 
 200 
 
 40 
 
 13-5 
 
 i 
 
 1.4 " 
 
 91 
 
 Unbalanced Valve. — Cylinder 9" x 12". n = 
 
 
 Ratio 
 
 
 H. P. by Brake. 
 
 *=^ 
 
 K..,„.. 
 
 4-5 
 
 4.5 per cent. 
 
 247 
 
 7.0 
 
 3-5 
 
 245 
 
 8.25 
 
 4.0 
 
 330 
 
 8.9 
 
 6.0 
 
 534 
 
 II. I 
 
 7-3 
 
 
 Balanced Valve.— Cylinder ()" x 14"- 
 
 
 Ratio 
 
 
 H. P. by Brake. 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 Ratio I" 
 
 II. 4 
 
 1.2 per cent. 
 
 137 
 
 13-5 
 
 II 
 
 149 
 
 14.0 
 
 I.O " 
 
 140 
 
 15.6 
 
 I.O 
 
 156 
 
 The last column in each of the three tables has been added 
 by the author of this work, and is obtained as follows : If TV 
 and N' are the values in horse power of the engine and of the 
 resistance of the valve, v and V, the corresponding mean 
 velocities of piston and valve, and P and P' the force upon 
 
 N' 
 each, the experiments give the relation — ^i/<or P'v' =i/<Pz/. 
 
 Hence^it follows for the force required to move the valve: 
 
 ip P V 
 P = 7 — . Now for a given engine v' bears a constant re- 
 lation to the number of revolutions n, so that we may put 
 
 *See Zeitschr. D. Ing. 1888, p. 509, Triple Expansion Engine by;G. L. C. 
 Meyer, of Hamburg. 
 
 t See Trans. Am. Soc. Mec. Engrs., Vol. VII, p. 631 : C. M Giddings, Descrip- 
 tion of a Valve Dynamometer for measuring the power required to move a 
 slide valve at different speeds and pressures. 
 
 increase in power required to operate the valve. It is evident 
 that P^ increases more slowly than the increase in steam pres- 
 sure, but the resistance becomes quite great for unbalanced 
 valves. The present difficulty lies in the limi'ed number of 
 engines upon which 
 shows the character 
 of diagram made by 
 Gidding's apparatus, 
 and it will be seen 
 that the greatest re- 
 sistance occurs at the 
 beginning of the 
 stroke, diminishing 
 toward the end to 
 nearly zero. The 
 inequality between 
 the resistance of the 
 back and forward 
 strokes is due to the action of the steam pressure upon the 
 area of the valve rod. 
 
 In considering the pressure upon unbalanced slide valves the 
 consideration mentioned already in connection with Rijbin- 
 son's experiments on lift valves is that there exists a counter 
 pressure between the valve and seat which overcomes an im- 
 portant portion of the pressure on the valve. As a rough ap- 
 proximation we may take this pressure between the surfaces as 
 ^ (^1 — p). Gidding's experiments show that the coefficient 
 of friction is not constant, but diminishes with increased speed. 
 More extensive experiments are much to be desired. 
 
 The method of balancing slide valves may be divided into 
 three classes : 
 
 a. Removal of pressure from the back of the valve. 
 
 b. Opposing the pressure on the valve by counter-pressure. 
 
 c. Equalization of pressure on all sides. 
 
 Typical examples of these three systems will here be given : 
 
 a. Removal of pressure from back of valve. 
 
 I. The so-called long /?-valve, invented by Murray, and used 
 on engines built by Watt, the pressure was relieved from the 
 back by a form of stuffing box, which answered well, but was. 
 not adapted for high pressures. 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 Fig. 1 166. 
 
 2. Fig. Ii66a shows the balance ring of Boulton & Watt. 
 The under side of the steam chest lid is finished parallel to the 
 valve face. Against this surface a ring of soft cast iron or 
 bronze is fitted steam tight, this ring being fitted to the valve 
 by an elastic packing and moving back and forth with it. The 
 space within the ring is subject only to the exhaust pressure. 
 This form was used on the Great Eastern. 
 
 Fig. 11665 shows the balance ritig of Kirchweger, much used 
 for locomotive engines. In this form the ring is pressed 
 against the lid by steam pressure instead of spring packing. 
 Both of these devices, as well as the similar ones of Penn, 
 Borsig and others, leave too great a portion of the steam pres- 
 sure unbalanced (at least 30 per cent, being left), and also pre- 
 vent the valve from leaving its seat should water be carried 
 into the cylinder J 
 
 b. Balancing by counter-pressure. 
 
 3. Cave's Valve with Balance Piston. 
 
 The valve in this form, Fig. 1 167, is connected by a link to a 
 piston, which works in a cylinder formed in the steam chest 
 lid, and is subjected on the outside only to atmospheric 
 pressure. Bourne's method of balancing is similar, except 
 that the other side of the balance piston is in communica- 
 tion with the exhaust. 
 
 4. Valves with Rolling Support, Fig. 1168. 
 
 At a is shown Lindner's valve. The top of the valve 
 itself is formed into a piston, sliding up and down in the 
 valve and supported by two segmental rollers. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 The degree of balancing is dependent upon the size of the 
 piston. At b is shown Armstrong's roller supported valve. In 
 this case the valve is closed at top as usual, and the construc- 
 tion is very simple and practical. At c is Bristol's valve, in 
 
 valve of Gros, Fig. 1145c. In neither form is the degree of bal- 
 ancing so complete as is desirable. 
 c. Equalization of Pressure on all Sides. 
 
 which the valve is supported on a system of friction rollers. 
 This has been used by the works at Seraing for large marine 
 engines. To this class of methods of balancing belongs also 
 that used by Worthiugton, in which a cylinder is formed in the 
 top of the valve, as shov.-u in Fig. 1016. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 5. Cuvelier's Valve, with pressure beneath,* Fig. 1169a. The 
 ordinary slide valve is here combined with another, both being 
 made in one piece, and the combined valve held down to its 
 seat by pressure rollers. L,ive steam is admitted through the 
 passage / into the space between the two valves. At b is 
 Fitch's valve, also with pressure beneath. In this form the 
 
 Fig. 1 169. 
 
 pressure rollers are omitted, and the valve is held down by live 
 steam pressure in the steam chest. The steam is admitted 
 through very small holes B B, and escapes to the exhaust 
 through similar holes B' B' , so that the supply is about equal 
 to the loss by condensation. An objection to the use of valves 
 with pressure beneath is the large area of valve seat which is 
 required. 
 
 6. Double Seated Valves, Fig. 1170. At a is Brandau's valve, 
 and at b is Schaltenbrand's valve ; the former is analogous to 
 Hornblower's lift valve, Fig. 1145a, and the latter to the bell 
 
 7. h very complete equalization of pressure is obtained by 
 making the valve in the form of a piston. Fig. 11 71 shows a 
 recently designed piston valve with its steam cylinder. The 
 flat valve seat here becomes a cylinder, and the valve a double 
 piston, the flat sides of the valve disappearing. The valve pis- 
 tons are each fitted with a single ring behind which steam is 
 admitted through a small hole, thus rendering springs unneces- 
 sary. The principal defect in piston valves is the question of 
 wear. The best results appear to be obtained by making the 
 piston valve solid, and very accurately turned and polished, and 
 made about yjjj" smaller in diameter than the bore of the valve 
 cylinder, both valve and valve cylinder being made of the same 
 material. Piston valves fitted in this manner last a lung time. 
 
 8. Rotary Valves : For steam hammers, in which valve gear 
 operated by hand has been found preferable to automatic 
 movements, valves with rotary movement, formed like cocks, 
 are used to advantage. These have been well designed by 
 Wilson, the superintendent of Nasmyth's works. 
 
 Fig. II 72. 
 
 Fig. 1172a shows an oscillating valve by Wilson. Opposite 
 to the ports //, ///, IV, are false ports or recesses of shallow 
 depth. The steam enters at the end of the valve into the sym- 
 metrical spaces /, /. The unbalanced area of the steam of the 
 valve causes a corresponding endlong pressure which is received 
 by a thrust bearing. If we neglect the slight pressure due to 
 the steam in the false ports when expansion takes place in // 
 and ///, the valve is balanced on all sides. Very large oscil- 
 lating valves of this sort are easily moved by hand.f 
 
 A modification of this valve enables it to be operated by rota- 
 tion instead of oscillation, as shown in Fig. 11726. Here the 
 parts are sj'mmetrically arranged, as was not the case with the 
 old four way cock of Fig. 987. The exhaust passages IV con- 
 nect with one end of the valve, and the admission /, with the 
 other end. There remains here also an unbalanced end-long 
 pressure which is received by a thrust bearing. With this ex- 
 ception the valve is entirely balanced, and when well made the 
 thrust bearing offers but little resistance. The construction of 
 such valves demands a high degree of accuracy, and a specialty 
 of this form is made by the establishments of Dingier of Zwei- 
 briicken and of PfafF in Vienna. 
 
 The brief examination which we have given to the preceding 
 methods of balancing does not include a method which, while 
 offering great difficulties of construction, appears to be gradu- 
 ally coming into use. This method consists in surrounding the 
 ordinary flat side valve with equalizing pressure plates. Several 
 practical illustrations of this method will be given. 
 
 tSee Zeitschr. D. Ing., 1868, Vol. II, p. 207. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 287 
 
 9. Wilson's Balanced Valvc. Fig. 1 
 London Exhibition of 1862.) 
 
 [73. (First shown at the 
 
 The valve is symmetrical, and slides between two parallel 
 and similar faces, the lower face having openings correspond- 
 ing to the ports, the upper face having similar false ports. The 
 close fitting and accurate parallelism of the surfaces was de 
 pended upon to obtain the balancing. In practice it was found 
 that the balance ])lates would spring under the pressure of the 
 steam unless made very stiff and strong, and that the weight of 
 the valve caused much friction and wear. 
 
 Both of these difiSculties have been met in more recent 
 designs, as will be seen below. 
 
 Fig. 1 1 74. 
 
 10. Fig. 1174a shows the balancing, of the valves of the Por- 
 ter-Allen engine.* The pressure plate is made very deep and 
 stiff and formed with inclined plane bearings and set screws, by 
 which the pressure can be very closely regulated. 
 
 Fig. 1 174*^ is Sweet's balanced valve. The pressure plate is 
 here also made heavy and stiff, and is supported on longitu- 
 dinal wedge bearings on each side, adjustable at the ends by 
 screws. In both forms the pressure plate is fitted with springs 
 to allow the plate to yield in case of water getting in the cylin- 
 der. These forms of balanced valve have the objection that 
 the ignorant mechanic may render the balancing ineffective by 
 improper adjustment of the screws, permitting the full pressure 
 of the live steam to act upon the valve. 
 
 ? 377- 
 FivUiD Valves. 
 Valves may be formed of fluids, or, more generally speaking, 
 may be constructed of pressure organs. Ratchets adapted to 
 pressure organs, as fluid valves are properly called, are in ex- 
 tensive use, but have not generally beeu recognized as valves. 
 
 They are all reducible to one of two principal forms, either the 
 direct or inverted siphon. Fig. 1175a and b (compare ? 312). 
 
 A direct siphon connects two quantities of the same fluid 
 above the level of both portions, these levels differing, for ex- 
 ample by a height h ; an inverted siphon is similar, but con- 
 nects them below the surface levels. Let a^ and a^ be liquids, 
 
 /TN 
 
 which do not combine with rt.f If the pressures of rtj and a^ are 
 equal, the fluid a will flow from the higher to the lower level 
 under a pressure due to the height //. In the inverted siphon 
 the flow is constant, but with the direct siphon the flow is 
 stopped, and the .siphon empties as soon as the level falls below 
 the short end of the siphon. % If the upper vessel is again 
 filled, the flow will begin as soon as the fluid attains the height 
 h' of the bend in the siphon. The fluid in the siphon there- 
 fore forms a valve, which converts a continuous flow into the 
 upper vessel into a periodical flow into the lower one (see the 
 example in ^ 324, where a similar action takes place with a 
 rigid valve). This action of the siphon has recently been ap- 
 plied to excellent advantage. 
 
 When the pressures in a^ and rt^ are different, as represented 
 by the heights /zj and h.^, as is frequently the case, we have for 
 both forms for the height to which the flow is due, /l■^ -\- h — h.^ 
 for the height in an equivalent column of the fluid a. 
 
 If this valve is positive, there will be an outflow, if it is zero, 
 the fluid will be stationary, and if it is negative, there will be a 
 reverse flow. In cases in which h^ -\- h — ■ h^ = O, h represents 
 the measure of the difference between h^ and h^. It therefore 
 follows that by means of fluid valves the relation between the 
 fluids a^ and aj can be checked or controlled as may be desired. 
 
 Applications of fluid valves are very numerous, as the fol- 
 lowing examples will indicate : ■ 
 
 Fig. 1176a shows a 
 water trap in a pipe. This a b> 
 
 is a fluid valve (inverted 
 siphon) which checks a 
 gas a^_ from mingling 
 with a gas ^i so long as 
 ^1 — //j is less than twice 
 the height jr of the 
 branches of the siphon. 
 If the pressure from above 
 upon a increases the over- . 
 flow runs off through a.^. 
 This latter pipe must not 
 be too small, however, or ' 
 a siphon action will oc- 
 cur, and all the water 
 will be drawn off. This • 
 device is much used in 
 gas works, chemical 
 works, laboratories, etc. 
 
 Fig. 1 1763 shows the 
 same arrangement used 
 as a barometer, mano- 
 meter, vacuum gauge, 
 etc., the difference of 
 level indicating differ- Fig. 1176. 
 
 ences of pressure h.^^ — h^ 
 
 for valves below 2 s. Applications of this principle are very 
 numerous, from the largest forms to the most delicate physical 
 instruments. 
 
 Fig. 1177a is an open stand-pipe, used on certain forms of 
 low pressure boilers. This is practically an inverted siphon, of 
 which the boiler shell forms one branch. The fluid valve 
 checks the steam aj against the atmosphere a^. If the pressure 
 becomes so great that h.^ > h^ + A' the fluid valve will be 
 thrown out at the top of the pipe, the arrangement thus form- 
 ing a safety valve against an excess of pressure in a.^. This 
 device was for a long time in use for low pressure boilers, 
 Brindley's feeding device. Fig. 1000, being constructed on this 
 principle. Natural stand-pipes with periodical discharge exist 
 as geysers. 
 
 Fig. 1 1775 is a closed stand pipe for steam boilers. The pipe 
 which has first been filled with steam gradually fills with water 
 as the steam condenses. If the water level in a sinks below 
 the end of the pipe the water runs out and live steam fills the 
 pipe again. This action is utilized in safety devices by Black 
 and Warner, and by Schwartzkopf 
 
 In the blast furnace the fluid iron with the slag floating upon 
 it forms an inverted siphon which checks the blast. In the 
 Bessemer converter the air pressure is so great that the iron is 
 kept in agitation by the air bubbling through it. 
 
 of the: 
 
 m. Soc. Mech. Engrs , Vol. IV, p. 2 
 
 C. C. Collins, I 
 
 s statement is included such fluids as do not mingle by simple 
 In this sense steam and water will not mingle, and it they are not 
 lie temperature the warmer will be transferred to the other. Air 
 ana water will not mingle because the waterlias become saturated with air. 
 According to the researches of Colladon & .Sturm (Memoire sur la compres- 
 sion des liquides, 1827, reprinted by Schuchart, Geneva, 1S87), the saturation 
 of water with air appears to partake of the nature of an internal, chemical 
 combination. As m'ght be expected, water which is saturated with air 
 shows a smaller compressibility in the Piezometer than water which is free 
 from air, being 48.65 railhonths to 49.65 millionths. The combination of air 
 
 ....■4.1 » — ceases upon heating to the boiling n^-'-' 
 
 inverted siphor" - '"- '- '-- -^ 
 
 \ Natural ii 
 iseof 
 
 
 vith branches of varying levels exist ii 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 In gas holders the water in the tank forming the seal is a 
 fluid valve of tlie inverted siphon type (compare Fig. 948^^), 
 
 and a similar device is used with sand instead of water in Hoff- 
 man's furnace, Fig. 1178, in which a^ is air, and a^ smoke, the 
 the bell-shaped lid being sealed with an annular valve of sand. 
 
 Fig. 1 1 79. 
 
 Hero's Fountain, Fig. 1180, consists of two inverted siphon 
 valves, in which a-^ and «., have air at the atmospheric pressure, 
 a^ is air under pressure, and a is water (often Cologne water). 
 The action continues until the column h\ ^ h^. 
 
 urnal of Soc. of Chem- 
 
 A practical application of the principle of Hero's fountain is 
 the water trap of Morrison, Ingram & Co., Fig. iiSi.f In this 
 device there is a periodical action of fluid valves as follows : a 
 stream of water flows into the tank F aX E, gradually filling it, 
 Fig. iiSia. The inner tube C, and fixed bell D, form an in- 
 verted siphon, the shorter branch of which is the space between 
 
 Fjg. I 
 
 Cand D. As soon as the level of the water in the tank i^ rises 
 above the top of C an overflow begins, filling the cup B, at the 
 foot of the pipe C, and forming there a second siphon and 
 making a seal between a^ and a^. Fig. iiSid. The two siphons 
 now form a Hero's fountain, in which the continuing flow at E 
 
 Fig. 1 179 is Wilson's water gas furnace.* In this a mixture of 
 waste-slack and water forms a fluid valve. The mixture is 
 propelled by an endless screw and discharged at the end. The 
 atmosphere is at a-^ and the gas at a.,, the latter being kept 
 under pres?;ure by a steam jet. 
 
 Fig. 118: 
 
 causes au outflow into the discharge pipe A. As the level con- 
 tinues to rise in F, the air in rt, becomes more and more com- 
 pressed, until finally the pressure column h becomes greater 
 than the diff'erence in level of the lower siphon, causing its dis- 
 charge and consequent opening of the fluid valve into flj. This 
 relieves the pressure on the air in a.,, thus permitting the upper 
 siphon to act, and causing au immediate and rapid discharge 
 of the contents of F. By adjusting the rate of flow at E this 
 action can be regulated so as to take place periodically at any 
 desired intervals of time. 
 
 Richard's manometer. Fig. 11S2, consists of alternate direct 
 and inverted siphons ; a is quicksilver, a, steam, a^ water and 
 rtj atmospheric air. 
 
 The spiral pump and the Cagniardelle shown in Fig. 966a 
 and b contain successive fluid valves in the same pipe, alter- 
 nately direct and inverted. 
 
 Langen's device for discharging bone furnaces of the hot 
 granular burnt bone, is a ratchet system involving valves con- 
 
 + See Revue Industrielle, Jui 
 
 3, p. 226. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 289 
 
 sisting of a granular pressure organ, Fig. 1183. The discharge 
 pipe d of the furnace is closed at the bottom by the sliding 
 plate c which is given a reciprocating movement (in this in- 
 stance operated by a small hydraulic motor). This plate c is 
 made with a step as shown in the figure at c, which receives a 
 layer of the material, and on the return stroke, as shown at b, 
 
 
 this layer is discharged on the plate. This layer forms a suc- 
 tion valve when acting as at a, and a discharge valve, as at b, 
 while the plate c corresponds to a single acting piston, con- 
 sidering the whole as a pump. If the plate c is made with 
 a middle rib, as shown in Fig. 1190^, it works both ways and 
 a. b. c. 
 
 becomes a double-acting pump. This is an illustration of the 
 fluid valve in its most general form as applied to a pump. 
 
 In many instances fluid valves are as good and sometimes 
 even better than valves composed of rigid materials. Especially 
 is this the case when they act continuously in one direction in 
 in a free, open pipe, for which purpose they excel all other 
 forms of valves, as in jet pumps and the like (see Fig. 972). 
 
 ?378. 
 Stationary Valves. 
 
 We have thus far considered valves as ratchets for pressure 
 organs, when they operate so as to check the motion of the 
 fluid at the intervals of time (see § 365). If we consider this 
 definition in its most general sense we may take it to include 
 certain kinds of fasteniugs for closing apertures, and call these 
 also valves. These we may distinguish from ordinary valves 
 by the fact that they are not operated by the motion of the 
 machine, and hence to them may be given the name of 
 " stationary valves." 
 
 Stationary lift valves are found in the lids of steam cylinders, 
 these belonging to the class of disk valves. These are required 
 to resist internal pressure, and must therefore be securely 
 bolted in place, the pressure being generally great, and resisted 
 by the bolts. Steam chest covers are generally rectangular, 
 flat, stationary valves, and an example of a stationary flap 
 valve is seen in the valve chest door shown in Fig. 1128, this 
 also being secured by means of bolts. Furnace doors, such as 
 shown in Fig. 763, also belong to this class. The more readily 
 such a valve is opened and closed the more nearly it approaches 
 in construction to the movable valves, and packing is sometimes 
 omitted in order to facilitate opening and closing. The valve 
 chest lids, shown in Fig. 1131, are readily recognized, these 
 being readily slipped into place and held by a yoke, or so- 
 called "gallows screw." Numerous forms of stationary valves 
 are also found in various kinds of bottle stoppers, these being 
 effective substitutes for the older cork stoppers which often 
 were held in place only by friction. Stationary fluid valves are 
 also occasionally still found in use for bottle stoppers in parts 
 of Italy and Greece. 
 
 Fig. II 84. 
 
 In all the cases thus far mentioned the fastening by which 
 the stationary valve is held in 
 place must be at least slightly I 
 
 stronger than the pressure beneath 
 the valve. 
 
 As a stationary valve in which 
 this is not the case, we have t 
 ordinary manhole plate as used 
 in steam boilers. Fig. 11 84. 
 this the pressure acts to hold the ' 
 plate to its seat. Other examples 
 are found in the spring valves 
 used in the so-called siphons of 
 soda water, and the particular 
 form of bottle stopper which con- 
 sists of a small ball valve held up 
 to the mouth of the bottle by the 
 pressure within. Stationary 
 slide valves are less frequently 
 used than lift valves, as the con- 
 ditions are less favorable for 
 proper packing, but examples are 
 to be found. It will be seen by 
 the instances already given how 
 far reaching into all blanches of 
 machine design the use of ratchets 
 for pressure organs extends. 
 
 I 379- 
 Stationary Machine Elements in General. 
 It is not a peculiarity of valves alone to be used conveniently 
 in the " stationary " form in the sense discussed in the preced- 
 ing section. Here, as we have arrived at the close of the book, 
 it is desirable to review the preceding pages in this respect. In 
 the first four chapters of Section III the subjects considered are 
 nearlj' always used as stationary elements. 
 
 Rivets do not differ in form from cylindrical journals, but 
 they are generally stationary because of two conditions ; be- 
 cause of the firm bindingof the surrounding metal, and because 
 there are generally two or more rivets placed side by side. If 
 only single rivet is used and no impediment to movement in- 
 troduced, the binding of the metal would soon give way to any 
 forces tending to cause rotation. 
 
 Forced connections resemble journals and their bearings in 
 form. The force by which the external piece grasps the inter- 
 nal one effectively resists all forces acting to produce rotation. 
 Keyed connections are especially adapted for stationary service. 
 The particular examples shown in Figs. 618 and 619 are in fact 
 stationary keys in form, although really special cases of spiral 
 gear wheels. Screws, in by far the greater number of cases, are 
 used as stationary elements, probably in a greater variety of 
 applications, broadly considered, than any other machine ele- 
 ment. In ^ 86 a glance is given at the use of the screw as an 
 active machine element. 
 
 Journals are frequently conveniently used as stationary ele- 
 ments, as in the examples illustrated in Figs. 251, 252, 253, 256, 
 257 and 258. In I 90 we have already distinguished between 
 "journals at rest" and "running journals," the former corres- 
 ponding to the definition of stationary elements. Roller bear- 
 ings for bridge truss supports, I 198, are also stationary ele- 
 ments. 
 
 Crank connections are found in the bottle stoppers already 
 mentioned, and in numerous other applications such connec- 
 tions are properly considered as stationary elements, Here 
 wheels are rarely used as stationary elements, but such applica- 
 tions are frequently found of ratchet wheels. Longitudinal 
 keys used to secure hubs upon their axles are almost invariably 
 stationary elements, practically corresponding to "stationary 
 ratchets," as a comparison between Figs. 188 and 654 will show. 
 Ratchets also find numerous applications in stationary mechan- 
 ism for securing bolts, keys and the like. An examination of 
 Figs. 237 to 243 and 246 to 248 will illustrate this point. In the 
 couplings shown in Figs. 423 to 430 we also have a number of 
 stationary ratchets (see also Fig. 678). 
 
 In ^ 309 I have referred to the possibility of using pressure 
 organs as standing or "stationary " elements, buttheseare as yet 
 unimportant. The pipes used as conductors for pressure organs, 
 however, furnish numerous instances of pressure organs. 
 
 The above distinctions are by no means merely theoretical, 
 but are of a highly practical nature. Every means which will 
 enable us to obtain a clearer and better comprehension of the 
 use of machine elements should be most welcome. 
 
 In the preceding arrangement the stationary elements have 
 therefore been grouped together for this end. It follows that 
 those forms which as "stationary " or "passive " e'ements are 
 extensively used io building and civil works, as well as in ma- 
 chine design, forming the connecting links between the works 
 of the civil and the mechanical engineer. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 MATHEMATICAL TABLES. 
 
 ?38o. 
 Tabi<e;s op Curves, Areas and Voi^umes. 
 
 The following tables give in convenient form the most im- 
 portant geometrical and mechanical properties of the more 
 useful curves, areas and volumes. The significance of the let- 
 ters used in the formulae will be found indicated on the dia- 
 grams. The following remarks are also to be noted. 
 
 By the rectification of a curve is meant the length .f of that 
 portion of the curve from the origin to the point x y, corres- 
 ponding to the angle f ; and by 5 is meant the entire length of 
 the curve. 
 
 In the moment of inertia the mass of the body is assumed 
 ^ I, in order to reduce the number of letters. In view of the 
 importance of this subject a few points are here given. The mo- 
 ments of inertia for surfaces are both equatorial and polar, each 
 referred an axis of moments. This latter is called an equatorial 
 axis when it lies in the plane of the surface, and a polar axis 
 when it is at right angles to the surface. Each equatorial 
 which passes through the centre of gravity is especially termed 
 an equator-axis, and a polar axis which passes through the cen- 
 tre of gravity is called a pole axis. Every surface, therefore, 
 has but one pole-axis, and an infinite number of equator axes. 
 The moment of inertia is called equatorial or polar, according 
 to the axis to which it is referred. 
 
 The moment of inertia Jp for any surface referred to the 
 polar axis is found by adding together the two equatorial mo- 
 ments of inertia Jg^ and J^o , the axes of which intersect each 
 other at right angles in the polar axis : 
 
 from the moment of inertia y referred to a parallel axis through 
 S, by the following relation : 
 
 // = /?! + . 
 
 ■ (416) 
 
 The moment of inertia J^ of a surface, referred to any axis 
 situated at a distance a, from the centre of gravity S, is found 
 
 T=J+a^-F. 
 
 • (417) 
 
 in which j ^is the area of the surface. This relation also holds 
 good for solids, if the mass of the body is substituted for K 
 
 For solids one of the preceding conditions does not hold. 
 For each different shape one of the axes which passes through 
 the centre of gravity, is taken as the pole-axis for all sections 
 normal to it, and the section at right angles to this axis which 
 passes through the centre of gravity is called the Equatorial 
 Section, whence the equatorial and polar moments of inertia 
 are in these cases distinguished according to their position with 
 regard to this equatorial section. In all the examples of solids 
 here given, the actual equatorial and polar axes are meant. 
 
 For a right prism, of any given base having as the polar mo- 
 ment of inertia tp and the half-height = I, the polar moment 
 of inertia is : 
 
 // = 
 
 . (418) 
 
 and the moment of inertia referred to an equatorial a 
 
 Jp=%/P+2li 
 
 in whichyis the area of the cross section, and ?V the equatorial 
 moment of inertia of the cross section referred to the same 
 axis as/y. 
 
 The centre of gravity and the moment of inertia for a surface 
 of irregular form is often readily obtained by grapho-static 
 methods, with sufiBcient numerical accuracy. For this purpose 
 the force and cord polygons are applicable according to the 
 methods already described in Section II. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 II II 
 
 + ^ H I ^ 
 
 •> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ a ?^ 
 
 11 
 
 + 
 
 It 
 
 
 Oj CO II 
 
 
 H- It 
 
 LA_ri 
 
 II 
 
 i+r" 
 
 X 
 
 1-^1 
 
 
 ~> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^h 
 
 Q 
 
 II 
 
 <1 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 ^ "^ ^ I ^ 
 
 1 5 Q 8 :: 
 
 w S 8 -^ 
 
 
 •2 .2 >. S' ^ 
 
 ^ 15 -^ „ -S 
 
 g 
 
 II 15 
 
 2 "; s 2 I 
 
 ilj 
 
 III 
 
 I 7h 
 ■•^ — ^ k 
 
 1"!=^ 1 
 
 i+k +k 1 1 1^ I h^ 
 
 slft^l =^l !c=;l c-l 
 
 ^|s^ v|Q^ 
 
 I ll' 
 
 I I 
 
 1^ |,«^ 
 
 I I 
 
 .0 _o .0 
 
 S 9 g 
 
 + I 
 
 
 2^i;r 
 
 
 it i 
 
 + i 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Sector. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Semicircle. 
 
 XV. 
 
 Circle. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Portion of Ring. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 Segment. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 Paranoia. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 Ellipse. 
 
 XX. 
 
 Triangle. 
 
 F={r,'—r.,^)—=^br(i\ 
 
 Centre of Gravity. 
 
 /H''{-"-^-)=i>--f-] 
 
 Moment oe Inertia. 
 
 For polar axis through C : 
 
 For Pole 
 gravity 5 : 
 
 through centre of 
 
 For polar axis through C : 
 For polar axis through 6" : 
 
 For the equatorial axes XX, Y V : 
 
 T - / - ii'-l = -^- ;■* 
 Jx —Jy — , o ' • 
 
 For Pole axis through C : 
 
 '■2 2 
 
 For Equator axis XX: 
 
 /^ = — r^ = — ;-* 
 
 For polar axis through C : 
 
 L": i,.(.+;^)! = f(''.'-'-.')=|(4«^+-*') 
 
 For polar axis through C : 
 
 r '"'/^ If H , g , rs^cosp- 
 
 J=~— \si^cos^i3-\ ~ 
 
 I -"^ 4 4 ^- 12 - 
 
 j = — f/S — 2 sin ft cos^ ft — ? cos ft sin^ ft\ 
 
 ■ eauatorial axes XX and Y Y : 
 
 For Equator axis XX:J ^ =— a b^ 
 For Pole axis C : 
 
 
 Ji" b K» 
 
 /■!' 
 
 A//3 
 
 Jx = 
 
 " 6" ~^ ~l2" 
 
 = -^-='"r8- 
 
 36 
 
 
 /;2 ^ /;3 
 
 6/;' /! 
 
 
 36 12 lb 
 
772^^ CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Triaugnlar 
 Prism. 
 
 RectaMiilar 
 Prism. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 RliomDic Prism. 
 
 HeiaiODal 
 Prism. 
 
 Cylimler. 
 
 Hollow 
 Cylinder. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 ParaUolic Prism. 
 
 Sides : F, = 2l{a-[-b-^c) 
 One end : F« = 
 
 MLiiiia. 
 
 IS& 
 
 
 L, 
 
 Hq 
 
 Sides: ^,=4/ {f> + /i) 
 One end : F.^=i b h 
 
 Sides:/^,=8/V/2'+- 
 Oneend: F.,= b h 
 
 Sides: F^ = i2 Ir 
 
 One end: F,= ^-r'^2,-- 
 = 2.598 r' 
 
 Vertical surface : 
 7^, = 4-/r 
 
 One end: F^^TTr" 
 
 = 5.196/^^ 
 
 For Equator axis O Q : 
 
 /y - - |_y + - S J — 3-+ -87" 
 For Pole axis/'P: 
 
 Centre of 
 Figure. 
 
 Moment ok Inertia. 
 
 W-Vv^-\-b-'--^ 
 
 For Equator axis O O : 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 Centre of 
 Figure. 
 
 For Equato; 
 
 J PP: 
 
 For Pole axis P P: 
 
 For Equator 
 
 Centre of 
 Figure. For Pole axis P Z' : 
 
 (y-i'-O 
 
 Centre of 
 Figure. 
 
 For Equator axis O Q : 
 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 Vertical surface : I [ 
 
 F,^^-.l[,r,^-r.^==%^l,\y^^^l^^■^_ ^., , ^^^^^^ ^^ 
 One end: ' ^4-'*^ ! F^S-- 
 
 \--^^{y;'-r.n^2^rb I 
 
 For Equator axis O O : 
 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 For Equator axis O O : 
 
 For Pole axis PP 
 
 L 5 35 "* J 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Centre OF Gravity, Moment of Inertia. 
 
 XXVIII 
 
 SlOllOKl RlM. 
 
 Rectangular 
 Pyramid. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 RiiM Cone. 
 
 Centre of Figure. 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q : 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 4 
 
 + d '^h'+-- 
 
 4 
 
 Bottom : F^^ab. 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q : 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 Trnncated Cone. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 Sphere. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 Sector of SDkre. 
 
 Inclined surface : 
 Bottom : F.^-rr r'' 
 
 For the surface only 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q : 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 Sides : 
 
 Ends: 
 
 F/=r,''TT, F/' = r^^n 
 
 Jp-\o' 
 
 .-^^[.^+...+.^].=^(^t^^) 
 
 For Pole axis PP: 
 
 SDlere. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 SDlieroid. 
 
 ParatioloU ol 
 Revolntion. 
 
 Conical surface : 
 F,= airr—rr rv^s rh — Ji^ 
 
 F=: TT r^ k 
 
 Centre of Figure. 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q : 
 
 '-K'-r) 
 
 For Pole axis/'/': 
 
 Curs'ed surface : 
 /^j=r2rrr-% = 7r(a2 4-^2) 
 
 Bottom : 
 
 ^ 2 h 
 
 
 For the surface only 
 
 Bottom : /^, = 7ry 
 
 For Pole axis P P : 
 
 2o J3'' — 
 
 Centre of Figure. 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q, 
 coincident with a : 
 
 Ja = -r^^" + '^") 
 
 For Equator axis Q Q 
 
 -^^ V 6 ^ i8 y 
 
 For Pole axis PP: 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Trigonometrical Table. 
 
 The following table contains, in convenient form, the sines, cosines, tangents and cotangents for angles from o° to 90° 
 lor every ten minutes, and also the corresponding arcs to a radius of unity. At the foot of the table arcs are also given for 
 small angles and also for some of the more frequently used angles greater than 90°. 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 arc. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 arc. 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 arc. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 arc. 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 deg.min. 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 ~~ 
 
 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 
 
 i.oooo 
 
 0.0000 
 
 O) 
 
 1.5708 
 
 90 
 
 
 10 
 
 ~7 
 
 0.1745 
 
 0.1736 
 
 0.9848 
 
 0.1763 
 
 5-6713 
 
 1-3963 
 
 80 
 
 ~ 
 
 i ID 
 
 0.0029 
 
 0.0029 
 
 
 0.0029 
 
 343-77 
 
 1-5679 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.1774 
 
 0.1765 
 
 
 9843 
 
 0.1793 
 
 5-5764 
 
 1-3934 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.0058 
 
 0.0058 
 
 1. 0000 
 
 0.0058 
 
 171.89 
 
 1-5650 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1804 
 
 0.1794 
 
 
 
 9838 
 
 0.1823 
 
 5-4845 
 
 1-3904 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.0087 
 
 0.0087 
 
 I.oooo 
 
 0.0087 
 
 114-59 
 
 I-5621 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.1833 
 
 0.1822 
 
 
 
 9833 
 
 0.1853 
 
 5-3955 
 
 1-3875 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0116 
 
 0.0116 
 
 0.9999 
 
 0.0116 
 
 85.940 
 
 1-5592 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.1862 
 
 0.1851 
 
 
 
 9827 
 
 0.1883 
 
 5-3093 
 
 1-3846 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 0.0145 
 
 0.0145 
 
 0.9999 
 
 0.0145 
 
 68.750 
 
 1-5563 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.1891 
 
 0.1880 
 
 
 
 9822 
 
 0.1914 
 
 5-2257 
 
 1-3817 
 
 
 10 
 
 I 
 
 0.0175 
 
 0.0175 
 
 0.9998 
 
 0.0175 
 
 57-290 
 
 1-5533 
 
 89 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 0.1920 
 
 0.1908 
 
 
 
 9816 
 
 0.1944 
 
 5-1446 
 
 1-3788 
 
 79 
 
 
 
 
 ID 
 
 0.0204 : 0.0204 
 
 0.9998 
 
 0.0204 
 
 49- 104 
 
 1-5504 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0-1949 
 
 0.1937 
 
 
 
 981 1 
 
 0.1974 
 
 5-0658 
 
 1-3759 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 00233 
 
 0.0233 
 
 0.9997 
 
 0.0233 
 
 42.964 
 
 1-5475 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1978 
 
 0.1965 
 
 
 
 9805 
 
 0.2004 
 
 4-9894 
 
 1-3730 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 0.0262 
 
 0.9997 
 
 0.0262 
 
 38.188 
 
 1.5446 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2007 
 
 0.1994 
 
 
 9799 
 
 0.2035 
 
 4-9152 
 
 1-3701 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0291 
 
 0.0291 
 
 0.9996 
 
 0.0291 
 
 34-368 
 
 1-5417 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.2036 
 
 0.2022 
 
 
 
 9793 
 
 0.2065 
 
 4-8430 
 
 1-3672 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.0320 
 
 0.0320 
 
 0.9995 
 
 0.0320 
 
 31.242 
 
 1-5388 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2065 
 
 0.2051 
 
 9787 
 
 0.2095 
 
 4.7729 
 
 1-3643 
 
 
 10 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 0.0349 
 
 0.0349 
 
 0.9994 
 
 0.0349 
 
 28.636 
 
 1-5359 
 
 88 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 0.2094 
 
 0.2079 i 
 
 9781 
 
 0.2126 
 
 4.7046 
 
 1-3614 
 
 78 
 
 
 
 
 ID 
 
 0.0378 
 
 0.0378 
 
 0.9993 
 
 0.0378 
 
 26.432 
 
 1-5330 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.2123 
 
 0.2108 1 
 
 9775 
 
 0.2156 
 
 4.6382 
 
 1-3584 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.0407 
 
 0.0407 
 
 0.9992 
 
 0.0407 
 
 24-542 
 
 I -5301 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.2153 
 
 0.2136 
 
 
 
 9769 
 
 0.2186 
 
 4-5736 
 
 1-3555 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.0436 
 
 0.0436 
 
 0.9990 
 
 0.0437 
 
 22.904 
 
 1.5271 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2182 
 
 0.2164 
 
 
 
 9763 
 
 0.2217 
 
 4-5 107 
 
 1.3526 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0465 
 
 0.0465 
 
 0.9989 
 
 0.0466 
 
 21.470 
 
 1-5243 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.2211 
 
 0.2193 
 
 
 
 9757 
 
 0.2247 
 
 4.4494 
 
 1.3497 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.0495 
 
 0.0494 
 
 0.9988 
 
 0.0495 
 
 20.206 
 
 1-5213 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2240 
 
 
 
 
 9750 
 
 0.2278 
 
 4-3897 
 
 1.3468 
 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 
 0.0524 
 
 0.0523 
 
 0.9986 
 
 0.0524 
 
 19.081 
 
 1. 5 184 
 
 87 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 0.2269 
 
 0.2250 
 
 
 
 9744 
 
 0.2309 
 
 4-3315 
 
 1.3439 
 
 77 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.0553 
 
 0.0552 
 
 0.9985 
 
 0.0553 
 
 18.075 
 
 1-5155 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.2298 
 
 
 
 9737 
 
 0.2339 
 
 4-2747 
 
 1.3410 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.0582 
 
 0.0581 
 
 0.9983 
 
 0.0582 
 
 17.169 
 
 1.5126 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 2D 
 
 0.2327 
 
 0.2306 
 
 
 
 9730 
 
 0.2370 
 
 4-2193 
 
 1.3381 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.0611 
 
 0.0610 
 
 0.9981 
 
 0.0612 
 
 16.350 
 
 1-5097 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2356 
 
 0.2334 
 
 
 
 9724 
 
 0.2401 
 
 4.1653 
 
 I -3352 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0640 
 
 0.0640 
 
 0.9980 
 
 0.0641 
 
 15-605 
 
 1.5068 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.2385 
 
 0.2363 
 
 
 
 9717 
 
 0.2432 
 
 4-1126 
 
 1.3323 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.0669 
 
 0.0669 
 
 0.9978 
 
 0.0670 
 
 14.924 
 
 1-5039 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2414 
 
 0.2391 
 
 ° 
 
 9710 0.2462 
 
 4.061 1 
 
 1.3294 
 
 
 10 
 
 4 
 
 0.0698 0.0698 
 
 0.9976 
 
 0.0699 
 
 14.301 
 
 1.5010 
 
 86 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 0.2443 
 
 0.2419 
 
 
 
 9703 , 0.2493 
 
 4.0108 
 
 1.3264 
 
 76 
 
 
 
 
 0.0727 ! 0.0727 
 
 0.9974 
 
 0.0729 
 
 13.727 
 
 1. 498 1 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 0.2473 
 
 0.2447 
 
 
 
 0.2524 
 
 3-9617 
 
 1.3235 
 
 
 50 
 
 20 
 
 0.0756 i 0.0756 
 
 0.9971 
 
 0.0758 
 
 13-197 
 
 I -495 1 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.2502 
 
 0.2476 
 
 
 
 9689 
 
 0.2S55 
 
 3-9136 
 
 1.3206 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.0785 0.0785 
 
 0.9969 
 
 0.0787 
 
 12.706 
 
 1-4923 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2531 
 
 0.2504 
 
 
 9681 
 
 0.2586 
 
 3-8667 
 
 1.3177 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0814 
 
 0.0814 
 
 0.9967 
 
 0.0816 
 
 12.251 
 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.2560 
 
 0.2532 
 
 
 
 9674 
 
 0.2617 
 
 3.8208 
 
 1.3148 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.0844 
 
 0.0843 
 
 0.9964 
 
 0.0846 
 
 11.826 
 
 1.4864 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2589 
 
 0.2560 
 
 
 
 9667 
 
 0.2648 
 
 3-7760 
 
 1.3119 
 
 
 10 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 0.0873 
 
 0.0872 
 
 0.9962 
 
 0.0875 
 
 11.430 
 
 1-4835 
 
 85 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 0.2618 
 
 0.2588 
 
 
 
 9659 
 
 0.2679 
 
 3-7321 
 
 1.3090 
 
 75 
 
 
 
 
 
 0.0902 
 
 0.0901 
 
 0-9959 
 
 0.0904 
 
 11.059 
 
 1.4806 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 0.2647 
 
 0.2616 
 
 
 9652 
 
 0.2711 
 
 3.6891 
 
 1. 3061 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.0931 
 
 0.0929 
 
 0.9957 
 
 0.0934 
 
 10.712 
 
 1-4777 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.2667 
 
 0.2644 
 
 
 
 9644 
 
 0.2742 
 
 3-6470 
 
 1.3032 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 33 
 
 0.0960 
 
 0.0958 
 
 0.9954 
 
 0.0963 
 
 10.385 
 
 1.4748 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2705 
 
 0.2672 
 
 
 
 9636 
 
 0.2773 
 
 3-6059 
 
 1.3003 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0989 
 
 0.0987 
 
 0.9951 
 
 0.0992 
 
 10.078 
 
 1. 4719 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0-2734 
 
 0.2700 
 
 
 
 9628 
 
 0.2805 
 
 3-5656 
 
 1.2974 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.1018 
 
 0.1016 
 
 0.9948 
 
 0.1022 
 
 9.7882 
 
 1.4690 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2763 
 
 0.2728 
 
 
 
 9621 
 
 0.2836 
 
 3-5261 
 
 1.2945 
 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 0.1047 
 
 0.1045 
 
 0.9945 
 
 0.1051 
 
 9-5144 
 
 I. 4661 
 
 84 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 0.2793 
 
 0.2756 
 
 
 
 9613 
 
 0.2867 
 
 3-4874 
 
 1.29IS 
 
 74 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.1076 
 
 0.1074 
 
 0.9942 
 
 0.1080 
 
 9.2553 
 
 1.4632 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.2822 
 
 0.2784 
 
 
 
 9605 
 
 0.2899 
 
 3-4495 
 
 1.2886 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1 105 
 
 0.1103 
 
 0.9939 
 
 
 
 1.4603 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.2851 10.2812 
 
 
 9596 
 
 0.2931 
 
 3-4124 
 
 1.2857 
 
 
 4.1 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.1134 
 
 0.1132 
 
 0.9936 
 
 0.1139 
 
 8.7769 
 
 1-4573 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.2880 ' 0.2840 
 
 
 
 9588 
 
 0.2962 
 
 3-3759 
 
 1.2828 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.1 164 
 
 0.1161 
 
 0.9932 
 
 0.1169 
 
 8.5555 
 
 1-4544 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.2909 
 
 0.2868 
 
 
 9580 
 
 0.2994 
 
 3-3402 
 
 1.2799 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.1193 
 
 0.1190 
 
 0.9929 
 
 0.1198 
 
 8.3450 
 
 I -45 15 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.2938 
 
 0.2896 
 
 
 
 9572 
 
 0.3026 
 
 3-3052 
 
 1.2770 
 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 0.1222 
 
 0.1219 
 
 0.9925 
 
 0.1228 
 
 8.1443 
 
 1.4486 
 
 83 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 0.2967 
 
 0.2924 
 
 
 
 9563 
 
 0.3057 
 
 3.2709 
 
 I. 2741 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 
 
 0.1251 
 
 0.1248 
 
 0.9922 
 
 0.1257 
 
 7-9530 
 
 1-4457 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.2996 
 
 0.2952 
 
 
 9555 
 
 0.3089 
 
 3.2371 
 
 1.2712 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1280 
 
 0.1276 
 
 0.9918 
 
 0,1287 
 
 7-7704 
 
 1.4428 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.3025 
 
 0.2979 
 
 
 
 9546 '0.3121 
 
 3.2041 
 
 1.2683 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.1309 
 
 0.1305 
 
 0.9914 
 
 0.1317 
 
 7-5958 
 
 1.4399 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.3054 
 
 0.3007 
 
 
 
 9537 
 
 0.3153 
 
 3.1716 
 
 1.2654 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 0.1334 
 
 0.991 1 
 
 0.1346 
 
 7.4287 
 
 1-4370 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.3083 
 
 0.3035 
 
 
 9528 
 
 0.3185 
 
 3-1397 
 
 1.2625 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.1367 
 
 0.1363 
 
 0.9907 
 
 0.1376 
 
 7.2687 
 
 1. 4341 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.3113 
 
 0.3062 
 
 
 
 9520 
 
 0.3217 
 
 3.1084 
 
 1.2595 
 
 
 10 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 0.1396 
 
 0.1392 
 
 0.9903 
 
 0.1405 
 
 7-1154 
 
 1. 4312 
 
 82 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 0.3142 
 
 0.3090 
 
 
 
 95'i 
 
 0.3249 
 
 3-0777 
 
 1.2566 
 
 72 
 
 Q 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.1425 
 
 0.1421 
 
 0.9899 
 
 0.1435 
 
 
 1.4283 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.3171 
 
 0.3118 
 
 
 
 9502 
 
 0.3281 
 
 3-0475 
 
 1.2537 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1454 
 
 0.1449 
 
 0.9894 
 
 0.1465 
 
 6.'8269 
 
 1-4254 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.3200 
 
 0.3145 
 
 
 
 9492 
 
 0.3314 
 
 3.0178 
 
 1.2508 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.1484 
 
 0.1478 
 
 0.9890 
 
 0-1495 
 
 6.6912 
 
 1.4224 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.3229 
 
 0.3173 
 
 
 
 9483 
 
 0.3346 
 
 2.9887 
 
 1.2479 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 4-3 
 
 0.1526 
 
 0.1507 
 
 
 0.1524 
 
 6.5606 
 
 1-4195 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.3258 
 
 0.3201 
 
 
 9474 
 
 0.3378 
 
 2.9600 
 
 1.2450 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 53 
 
 0.1542 
 
 0-1536 
 
 0:9881 
 
 0.1554 
 
 6.4348 
 
 1. 4166 
 
 
 
 |5o 
 
 
 0.3228 
 
 9465 
 
 0.3411 
 
 2.9319 
 
 1.2421 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 0.1571 
 
 0.1564 
 
 0.9877 
 
 0.1584 
 
 6.3138 
 
 1.4137 
 
 81 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 0.3316 
 
 0.3256 
 
 
 
 9455 
 
 0.3443 
 
 2.9042 
 
 1.2392 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 
 
 0.1600 
 
 0.1593 
 
 0.9872 
 
 
 6.1970 
 
 1. 4108 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 0.3345 
 
 0.3283 
 
 
 9446 
 
 0.3476 
 
 2.8770 
 
 1.2363 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.1629 
 
 0.1622 
 
 C.9868 
 
 0.1644 
 
 6.0844 
 
 1.4079 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.3374 
 
 0-3311 
 
 
 
 9436 
 
 0.3508 
 
 2.8502 
 
 1-2334 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 33 
 
 0.1658 
 
 0.1650 
 
 0.9863 
 
 0.1673 
 
 5-9758 
 
 1 .4050 
 
 
 30 ;: 
 
 30 
 
 0.3403 
 
 0-3338 
 
 
 
 9426 
 
 0.3541 
 
 2.8239 
 
 1.2305 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.1687 
 
 0.1679 
 
 0.9858 
 
 0.1703 
 
 5.8708 
 
 1. 402 1 
 
 
 20 !■ 
 
 40 
 
 0.3432 
 
 0-3365 
 
 
 
 9417 
 
 0.3574 
 
 2.7980 
 
 1.2275 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.1716 
 
 0.1708 
 
 0.9853 
 
 0.1733 
 
 5-7694 
 
 1.3992 
 
 
 10 j: 
 
 50 
 
 0.3462 
 
 0-3393 
 
 
 
 9407 
 
 0.3607 
 
 2.772s 
 
 1.2246 
 
 i '° 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 Angle. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ANGLE. 
 
 
 
 sine, cosine. 
 
 tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 arc. 
 
 
 
 arc. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 a„. 
 
 
 deg. 
 
 ■nin 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 des. 
 
 
 5 
 
 min. 
 
 :o 
 
 
 0.349' 
 
 0.3420 
 
 0.9397 
 
 0.3640 
 
 2.7475 
 
 1.2217 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 3' 
 
 
 
 0.5411 
 
 0.5150 
 
 0.8572 
 
 0.6009 
 
 1.6643 
 
 1.0297 
 
 59 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 3520 
 
 0.3448 
 
 
 
 9387 
 
 
 
 3673 
 
 2.7228 
 
 1.2188 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.5440 
 
 0.5175 
 
 0.8557 
 
 0.6048 
 
 1-6534 
 
 1.0268 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 3549 
 
 0.347S 
 
 
 
 9377 
 
 
 
 3706 
 
 2.6985 
 
 1.2159 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.5469 
 
 0.5200 
 
 0.8542 
 
 0.6088 
 
 1.6426 
 
 1.0239 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 357S 
 
 0.3502 
 
 
 
 9367 
 
 
 
 3739 
 
 2.6746 
 
 I-2130 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.5498 
 
 0.5225 
 
 0.8526 
 
 '0.6128 
 
 1.6319 
 
 I. 0210 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 3607 
 
 0.3529 
 
 
 93S6 
 
 
 3772 
 
 2.6511 
 
 1.2101 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.5527 
 
 0.5250 
 
 0.8511 
 
 0.616S 
 
 1.6212 
 
 I.OI8I 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 3636 
 
 0.3SS7 
 
 
 
 9346 
 
 
 
 3805 
 
 2.6279 
 
 1.2072 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.5556 
 
 0.5275 
 
 0.8496 
 
 0.6208 
 
 1.6107 
 
 1.0152 
 
 
 10 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 
 
 3665 
 
 0.3584 
 
 
 
 9336 
 
 
 
 3839 
 
 2.6051 
 
 1 .2043 
 
 69 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 0.5585 
 
 0.5299 
 
 0.8480 
 
 0.6249 
 
 1.6003 
 
 I.OI23 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 3694 
 
 0.3611 
 
 
 
 9325 
 
 
 
 3872 
 
 2.5826 
 
 1.2014 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.5614 
 
 0.5324 
 
 0.8465 
 
 0.6289 
 
 1.5900 
 
 I .0094 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 3723 
 
 0.3638 
 
 
 
 9315 
 
 
 
 3906 
 
 2.5605 
 
 1. 1985 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.5643 
 
 0.5348 
 
 0.8450 
 
 0.6330 
 
 1.5798 
 
 1 .0065 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 3752 
 
 0.3665 
 
 
 
 9304 
 
 
 
 3939 
 
 2.5386 
 
 I.I9S5 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.5672 
 
 O.S373 
 
 0.8434 
 
 0.6371 
 
 1.5697 
 
 I .0036 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 3782 
 
 0.3692 
 
 
 
 9293 
 
 
 
 3973 
 
 2.5172 
 
 1.1926 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.5701 
 
 0.5398 
 
 0.8418 
 
 0.6412 
 
 1-5597 
 
 1.0007 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 ° 
 
 381 1 
 
 0.3719 
 
 
 
 9283 
 
 
 
 4006 
 
 2.4960 
 
 1.1897 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.5730 
 
 0.5422 
 
 0.8403 
 
 0.6453 
 
 1-5497 
 
 0.9977 
 
 
 10 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 
 3840 
 
 0.3746 
 
 
 
 9272 
 
 
 
 4040 
 
 2.4751 
 
 1.1868 
 
 68 
 
 
 
 Z7> 
 
 
 
 0.5760 
 
 0.5446 
 
 0.8387 
 
 0.6494 
 
 1.5399 
 
 0.9948 
 
 57 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 3869 
 
 0.3773 
 
 
 
 9261 
 
 
 
 4074 
 
 2.4545 
 
 1.1839 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.5787 
 
 0.5471 
 
 0.8371 
 
 0.6536 
 
 1.5301 
 
 0.9919 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 3S98 
 
 0.3800 
 
 
 
 9250 
 
 
 
 4108 
 
 2.4342 
 
 1.1810 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.5818 
 
 O.S495 
 
 0.8355 
 
 0.6577 
 
 1.5204 
 
 0.9890 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 3927 
 
 0.3827 
 
 
 
 9239 
 
 
 
 4142 
 
 2.4142 
 
 1. 1781 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.5847 
 
 0.5519 
 
 0.8339 
 
 0.6619 
 
 1.5108 
 
 0.9861 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 3956 
 
 0.3854 
 
 
 
 9228 
 
 
 
 4176 
 
 2.3945 
 
 1.1752 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.5876 
 
 0.5S44 
 
 0.8323 
 
 0.6661 
 
 1-S013 
 
 0.9832 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 ° 
 
 398S 
 
 0.3881 
 
 ° 
 
 9216 
 
 ° 
 
 4210 
 
 2.3750 
 
 1.1723 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.5905 
 
 0.5568 
 
 0.8307 
 
 0.6703 
 
 1.4919 
 
 0.9803 
 
 
 10 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 
 
 4014 
 
 0.3907 
 
 
 
 9205 
 
 
 
 4245 
 
 2-3559 
 
 1.1694 
 
 67 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 O.S934 
 
 0.5592 ' 0.8290 
 
 0.674s 
 
 1.4826 
 
 0.9774 
 
 56 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4043 
 
 0.3934 
 
 
 
 9194 
 
 
 
 4279 
 
 2.3369 
 
 1. 1664 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.5963 
 
 0.5616 
 
 0.8274 
 
 0.6787 
 
 1.4733 
 
 0.9745 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4072 
 
 0.3961 
 
 
 
 9182 
 
 
 
 4314 
 
 2.3183 
 
 1. 1636 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.5992 
 
 0.5640 
 
 0.S258 
 
 0.6830 
 
 1.4641 
 
 0.9716 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4102 
 
 0.3987 
 
 
 
 9171 
 
 
 
 4348 
 
 2.2998 
 
 1.1606 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 O.602I 
 
 0.5664 
 
 0.8241 
 
 0.6873 
 
 1.4550 
 
 0.9687 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 4131 
 
 0.4014 
 
 
 
 9159 
 
 
 
 4383 
 
 2.2817 
 
 i.'S77 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.6050 
 
 0.5688 
 
 0.8225 
 
 0.6916 
 
 1.4460 
 
 0.9657 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 4160 
 
 0.4041 
 
 
 
 9147 
 
 
 
 4417 
 
 2.2637 
 
 1.1548 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.6080 
 
 0.5712 
 
 0.8208 
 
 0.6959 
 
 1.4370 
 
 0.9628 
 
 
 10 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 
 
 4189 
 
 0.4067 
 
 
 
 9135 
 
 
 
 4452 
 
 2.2460 
 
 1.1519 
 
 66 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 0.6109 
 
 0.5736 
 
 0.8192 
 
 0.7002 
 
 1.4281 
 
 0.9599 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4218 
 
 0.4094 
 
 
 
 9124 
 
 
 
 4487 
 
 2.2286 
 
 1.1490 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.6138 
 
 0.5760 
 
 0.8175 
 
 0. 7046 
 
 1-4173 
 
 0.9570 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4247 
 
 0.4120 
 
 
 
 9112 
 
 
 
 4522 
 
 2.2113 
 
 1.1461 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 00167 
 
 0.5783 
 
 0.8158 
 
 0.7089 
 
 1.4106 
 
 0.9541 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4^76 
 
 0.4147 
 
 
 
 9100 
 
 
 
 4557 
 
 2.1943 
 
 1-1432 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.6 96 
 
 0.5807 
 
 0.8141 
 
 0.7133 
 
 1. 4019 
 
 0.9512 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 4305 
 
 0.4173 
 
 
 
 9088 
 
 
 
 4592 
 
 2.1775 
 
 1.1^03 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.0225 
 
 0.5831 
 
 0.8124 
 
 0.7177 
 
 1-3934 
 
 0.9483 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 4334 
 
 0.4200 
 
 ° 
 
 9075 
 
 "-' 
 
 4628 
 
 2.1609 
 
 1. 1374 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.6254 
 
 0.5854 
 
 0.8107 
 
 0.7221 
 
 1.3848 
 
 0.945 5 
 
 
 10 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 
 
 4363 
 
 0.4226 
 
 
 
 9063 
 
 
 
 4663 
 
 2.1445 
 
 1.1345 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 0.6283 
 
 0.5878 
 
 0.8090 
 
 0.7265 
 
 1-3764 
 
 0.9425 
 
 54 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4392 
 
 0.4253 
 
 
 
 9051 
 
 
 4699 
 
 2.1283 
 
 1. 1310 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.6312 
 
 0.5901 
 
 0.S073 
 
 0.7310 
 
 1.3680 
 
 0.9306 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4421 
 
 0.4279 
 
 
 
 9038 
 
 
 
 4734 
 
 2.1123 
 
 1.1280 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.6341 
 
 0.5925 
 
 0.8056 
 
 0.7355 
 
 '-3597 
 
 0.9367 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 44SI 
 
 0.4305 
 
 
 
 9026 
 
 
 
 4770 
 
 2.0965 
 
 1. 1257 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.6370 
 
 0.5948 
 
 0.8039 
 
 0.7400 
 
 1-3514 
 
 0.9338 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 4480 
 
 0.4331 
 
 
 
 9013 
 
 
 
 4806 
 
 2.0809 
 
 1. 1228 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.6400 
 
 0.5972 
 
 0.8021 
 
 0.7445 
 
 1.3432 
 
 0.9308 
 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 4509 
 
 0-4358 
 
 
 
 9001 
 
 
 
 4841 
 
 2.0655 
 
 1.1199 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.6429 
 
 O.S995 
 
 0.8004 
 
 0.7490 
 
 I-3351 
 
 0.9279 
 
 
 10 
 
 26 
 
 
 
 
 
 4538 
 
 0.4384 
 
 
 
 8988 
 
 
 
 4877 
 
 2.0503 
 
 1.1170 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 0.6458 
 
 0.6018 
 
 0.7086 
 
 0.7536 
 
 1.3270 
 
 0.9250 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4567 
 
 0.4410 
 
 
 
 8975 
 
 
 
 4913 
 
 2.0353 
 
 1.1141 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.6487 
 
 0.6041 
 
 0.7069 
 
 0.7581 
 
 1.3190 
 
 0.9221 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4596 
 
 0.4436 
 
 
 
 8962 
 
 
 
 4950 
 
 2.0204 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.6516 
 
 0.6065 
 
 0.7951 
 
 0.7627 
 
 1.3111 
 
 0.9192 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4625 
 
 0.4462 
 
 
 
 8949 
 
 
 
 4986 
 
 2.0057 
 
 i;io82 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.6545 
 
 0.6088 
 
 0.7934 
 
 0.7673 
 
 1.3032 
 
 0.9163 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 465^ 
 
 0.4488 
 
 
 
 8936 
 
 
 
 5022 
 
 1.9912 
 
 1.1054 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.6574 
 
 0.6111 
 
 0.7916 
 
 0.7720 
 
 1-2954 
 
 0.9134 
 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 4683 
 
 0.4514 
 
 
 
 8923 
 
 
 
 5059 
 
 1.9768 
 
 I. 1025 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.6603 
 
 0.6134 
 
 0.7898 
 
 0.7766 
 
 1.2876 
 
 0.9105 
 
 
 10 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 
 
 4712 
 
 0.4540 
 
 
 
 S9.0 
 
 
 
 5095 
 
 1.9626 
 
 1.0996 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 0.6632 
 
 0.6157 
 
 0.7880 
 
 0.7813 
 
 1.2799 
 
 0.9076 
 
 52 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4741 
 
 0.4566 
 
 
 
 8897 
 
 
 
 5132 
 
 1.9486 
 
 1.0966 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 0.6661 
 
 0.6180 
 
 0.7862 
 
 0.7860 
 
 1.2723 
 
 0.9947 
 
 
 So 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4771 
 
 0.4592 
 
 
 
 8884 
 
 
 
 5169 
 
 1-9347 
 
 1.0937 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.6690 
 
 0.6202 
 
 0.7844 
 
 0.7907 
 
 1.2647 
 
 "•foo 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4800 
 
 0.4617 
 
 
 
 8870 
 
 
 
 5206 
 
 1.9210 
 
 1.0908 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.6720 
 
 0.'6225 
 
 0.7826 
 
 0.79S4 
 
 1.2572 
 
 0.8988 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 4829 
 
 0.4643 
 
 
 8857 
 
 
 5243 
 
 1.9074 
 
 1.0879 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.6749 
 
 0.6248 
 
 0.7S08 
 
 0.8002 
 
 1.2497 
 
 0.8959 
 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 4858 
 
 0.4669 
 
 
 
 8843 
 
 
 
 5280 
 
 1.8940 
 
 1.0850 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.6778 
 
 0.6271 
 
 0.7790 
 
 0.8050 
 
 1.2423 
 
 0.8930 
 
 
 10 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 
 
 4887 
 
 0.4695 
 
 
 
 S820 
 
 
 5317 
 
 1.8807 
 
 1.0821 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 
 
 0.6807 
 
 0.6293 
 
 0.7771 
 
 0.8098 
 
 1-2349 
 
 0.8901 
 
 51 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 4916 
 
 0.4720 
 
 
 
 8816 
 
 
 
 S3S4 
 
 1.8676 
 
 1.0792 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.6836 
 
 0.6316 
 
 0.7753 
 
 0.8146 
 
 1.2276 
 
 0.8872 
 
 
 so 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 4945 
 
 0.4746 
 
 
 
 8802 
 
 
 
 5392 
 
 1.8546 
 
 1.0763 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.6865 
 
 0.6338 
 
 0.7735 
 
 0.8195 
 
 1.2203 
 
 0.8843 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4974 
 
 0.4772 
 
 
 
 8788 
 
 
 
 5430 
 
 1. 8418 
 
 1.0734 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.6894 
 
 0.6361 
 
 0.7716 
 
 0.8243 
 
 1.2131 
 
 0.8814 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 5003 
 
 0.4797 
 
 
 8774 
 
 
 5467 
 
 1.8291 
 
 1.0705 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.6923 
 
 0.6383 
 
 0.7698 
 
 0.8292 
 
 1.2059 
 
 0.8785 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 5032 
 
 0.4823 
 
 
 
 8760 
 
 
 
 5505 
 
 1.8165 
 
 1.0676 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 0.6952 
 
 0.6406 0.7679 
 
 0.8342 
 
 1.1988 
 
 0.8756 
 
 
 10 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 
 
 5061 
 
 0.4848 
 
 
 
 8746 
 
 5543 
 
 1 .8040 
 
 1 .0647 
 
 61 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 0.6981 
 
 0.6428 0.7660 
 
 0.8391 
 
 1. 1918 
 
 0.8727 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 5091 
 
 0.4874 
 
 
 
 8732 
 
 5581 
 
 1. 7917 
 
 1.0617 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.7010 
 
 o.h45o 
 
 0.7642 
 
 0.8441 
 
 1.1847 
 
 0.8698 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 5120 
 
 0.4899 
 
 
 8718 I 
 
 5619 
 
 1.7796 
 
 1.0588 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 0.7039 
 
 0.6472 
 
 0.7623 
 
 0.8491 
 
 1-1778 
 
 0.8668 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 S149 
 
 0.4924 
 
 
 
 8704 
 
 
 
 5658 
 
 I -767s 
 
 1.0559 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.7069 
 
 0.6494 
 
 0.7604 
 
 0.8541 
 
 1.1708 
 
 0.8639 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 5178 
 
 0.4950 
 
 
 
 8689 
 
 
 
 6696 
 
 1.7556 
 
 1.0530 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.7098 
 
 0.6517 
 
 0.758s 
 
 0.8591 
 
 1.1640 
 
 0.8610 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 5207 
 
 0.4975 
 
 
 
 8675 
 
 
 
 5735 
 
 1.7437 
 
 1. 0501 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.7127 
 
 0.6539 
 
 0.7566 
 
 0.8642 
 
 1.1571 
 
 0.8581 
 
 
 10 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 
 
 5236 
 
 0.5000' 
 
 
 
 8660 
 
 
 
 5774 
 
 I-732I 
 
 1.0472 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 0.7156 
 
 0.6561 
 
 0.7S47 
 
 0.8693 
 
 1.1504 
 
 0.8552 
 
 49 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 S265 
 
 0.5025 
 
 
 
 8646 . 
 
 5812 
 
 1.7205 
 
 1.0443 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 0.7185 
 
 0.6583 
 
 0.7528 
 
 0.8744 
 
 1.1436 
 
 0.8523 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 S294 
 
 0.5050 i 
 
 8631 io 
 
 585' 
 
 1.7090 
 
 1.0414 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.7214 
 
 0.6604 
 
 0.7509 
 
 0.8796 
 
 1. 1 369 
 
 0.8494 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 S3?3 
 
 0.5075 
 
 
 
 8616 
 
 
 
 5890 
 
 1.6977 
 
 1.0385 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 0.7243 
 
 0.6626 
 
 0.7490 
 
 0.8847 
 
 1. 1303 
 
 0.8465 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 5352 
 
 0.5100 
 
 
 
 8601 
 
 
 
 5930 
 
 1.6864 
 
 1.0356 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.7272 
 
 0.6648 
 
 0.7470 
 
 0.8899 
 
 1.1237 
 
 0.8436 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 5381 
 
 0.5 '25 
 
 
 
 85S7 
 
 
 
 5969 
 
 1-6753 
 
 1.0326 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.7301 
 
 0.6670 
 
 0.7451 
 
 0.8952 
 
 1. 1171 
 
 0.8407 
 
 
 10 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 sine. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 299 
 
 ANGtE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ANGtE. 
 
 ANGI,E. 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 ANGI^E. 
 
 
 "'■■ 
 
 ...e. 
 
 co.,.e. 
 
 tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 arc. 
 
 
 
 arc. 
 
 sine, cosine.! tan. 
 
 cot. 
 
 arc. 
 
 
 deg 
 
 min 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 deg. 
 
 min 
 
 
 
 
 deg. 
 
 min. 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 0.7330 
 
 0.6691 
 
 0.7431 
 
 0.9004 
 
 1. 1 106 
 
 0.8378 
 
 48 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 0.7679 
 
 0.6947 
 
 0.7193 
 
 0.9657 
 
 1. 035 5 
 
 0.8029 
 
 46 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.73S9 
 
 
 
 b7n 
 
 
 
 7412 
 
 
 
 9057 
 
 I.I04I 
 
 
 
 «34« 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 ID 
 
 
 
 7709 
 
 0.6967 
 
 0.7173 
 
 0.9713 
 
 1.0295 
 
 
 
 7999 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.7389 
 
 
 67^4 
 
 
 7392 
 
 
 9110 
 
 1.0977 
 
 
 8319 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 7738 
 
 0.6988 
 
 0.7153 
 
 0.9770 
 
 1.0235 
 
 
 
 7970 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.7418 
 
 
 
 6756 
 
 
 
 7373 
 
 
 
 9it)3 
 
 1. 0913 
 
 
 
 8290 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 7757 
 
 0.7009 
 
 0.7133 
 
 0.9827 
 
 1. 0176 
 
 
 
 7941 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 40 
 
 0.7447 
 
 
 
 6777 
 
 
 
 7353 
 
 
 
 9217 
 
 1.0850 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 7795 
 
 0.7030 
 
 0.7112 
 
 0.9884 
 
 1.0117 
 
 
 
 7912 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.7476 
 
 
 
 6799 
 
 ° 
 
 7333 
 
 ° 
 
 9271 
 
 1.0786 
 
 ° 
 
 8232 
 
 
 lO 
 
 
 50 
 
 ° 
 
 7824 
 
 0.7050 
 
 0.7092 
 
 0.9942 
 
 1.0058 
 
 
 
 7883 
 
 
 10 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 
 0.7505 
 
 
 
 6820 
 
 
 
 7314 
 
 
 
 932s 
 
 1.0724 
 
 
 
 8203 
 
 47 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 0.7854 
 
 0.7071 
 
 0.7071 
 
 1. 0000 
 
 1. 0000 
 
 0.7854 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.7S34 
 
 
 
 6841 
 
 
 
 7294 
 
 
 
 9380 
 
 
 
 
 8174 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 0.7563 
 
 
 
 6862 
 
 
 
 7274 
 
 
 
 9435 
 
 1.0599 
 
 
 
 8145 
 
 
 40 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 sme. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. 
 
 
 30 
 40 
 
 0.7592 
 0.7621 
 
 
 
 6884 
 6qoS 
 
 
 
 7254 
 7234 
 
 
 
 9490 
 954S 
 
 1.0538 
 
 1.0477 
 
 
 
 
 8116 
 8087 
 
 
 30 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 0.7650 
 
 
 6926 
 
 0.7214 
 
 0.9601 
 
 1. 0416 
 
 08058 
 
 
 10 
 
 ang.^o° \' 
 
 o°5' 
 
 135° 
 
 180° 
 3.1416 
 
 225° 
 3.9270 
 
 270° 
 4.7124 
 
 315° 
 
 360° 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 cosine. 
 
 Sine. 
 
 cot. 
 
 tan. 
 
 arc. 
 
 Angle. 
 
 arc. 
 
 = 0. 
 
 3003 
 
 0.0015 
 
 2.35^ 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 4978 
 
 6.2 
 
 S32 
 
 TRIGONOMETRICAL FORMULA. 
 
 sin (a ± /?) = sin a cos /3 d= cos a sin (S 
 
 cos (a ± /3) ^ cos a cos ;3 =F sin a sin /? 
 
 sin 2 a = 2 sin a cos a 
 
 sin 3 a = 3 sin a — 4. sin a^ = sin a (4 cos a^ — l) 
 
 cos 2 a = cos a^ — sin a' = 2 cos a'^ — i = 1 — 2 sin 
 
 cos 3 a = 4 COS a^ — 3 COS a = COS a (l — 4 sin a^) 
 
 sin a — sin /3 = 2 cos - 
 cos a -\- cos /? ^ 2 cos - 
 cos a — cos (3 = 2 sin 
 
 - cos - 
 
 a + P 
 
 Sin a^ = y^{l- COS 2 a) 
 cos a^ ^ )4 {1 + COS 2 a) 
 sin a^ = % (3 sin a — sin 3 a) 
 
 COS a? = X (3 COS a ^ COST, «) 
 tang (a ± /?) = ^^-- ----- 
 
 16. cotang (n =h /5) ^ 
 
 2 in 
 
 17. tang 2 a- 
 
 18. cotang 2 ( 
 
 19. tang a = 
 
 20. cotang a ■■ 
 
 cotang a cotang /3 =F i 
 =: cota7ig a -\- cotang ,3 
 
 : — tang n? 
 cotang a^ - 
 
 2 cotang a 
 ^l — cos 2 a 
 
 -\- COS 2 a 1+2 COS a I — (ang )4 
 
 ^ I + cos 2 a sin 2 a cotang )4 a'' — 
 
 - cos 2 a 2 cotafig } 
 
 cota7tg a dr cotang fi 
 
 cos a COS p 
 
 _(/5 ± a) 
 
 sin a 4- sin (3 tafig )4 (« + /5) 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 
 TABL'E OF NTJMBERS.-I. ] 
 
 « 
 
 V 
 
 ., 
 
 «3 
 
 ^n 
 
 s/n 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^n 
 
 ^r 
 
 -^n 
 
 0.30 
 0-375 
 0.60 
 0.625 
 0.70 
 
 3-333 
 2.667 
 1.667 
 1.600 
 1.429 
 
 0.090 
 0.I4I 
 0.360 
 0.391 
 0.490 
 
 0.027 
 
 0-053 
 
 0.244 
 0.343 
 
 lit 
 
 0.775 
 0^837 
 
 1.826 
 1.633 
 1.291 
 1.265 
 1.195 
 
 0.669 
 0.721 
 0.843 
 
 1.495 
 1.387 
 1.186 
 1. 170 
 1.126 
 
 0.740 
 
 0.880 
 0.889 
 0.915 
 
 1.351 
 1.278 
 1.136 
 1.125 
 1.093 
 
 0.7S 
 0.875 
 0.90 
 1. 10 
 
 1.333 
 1.143 
 
 si 
 
 0.766 
 
 0.810 
 
 1.210 
 1.440 
 
 0.422 
 0.670 
 0.729 
 I.33I 
 
 1.728 
 
 0.866 
 0.93s 
 0.949 
 1.049 
 1.095 
 
 1.155 
 1.069 
 1.054 
 0.953 
 0.913 
 
 0.909 
 
 0.956 
 0.965 
 
 1.046 
 1.036 
 0.969 
 0.941 
 
 0.931 
 0.974 
 0.987 
 1.024 
 1.047 
 
 1.075 
 1.024 
 1.013 
 0.976 
 0.955 
 
 1.25 
 1.50 
 1.75 
 2.0 
 2.25 
 
 0.800 
 0.667 
 0.571 
 0.500 
 
 0.444 
 
 1.563 
 
 2.250 
 
 3.063 
 
 4.0 
 
 5.063 
 
 1.953 
 3.375 
 
 1.1" 
 
 11.391 
 
 1.118 
 1.225 
 1.323 
 1.414 
 1.500 
 
 0.894 
 0.816 
 0.756 
 0.707 
 0.667 
 
 1.077. 
 I.I45 
 
 1.205 
 1.260 
 
 1.310 
 
 o'.874 
 0.830 
 0.794 
 0.763 
 
 1.057 
 1.107 
 1.150 
 1.189 
 
 I.22S 
 
 0.946 
 0.904 
 0.869 
 0.841 
 0.816 
 
 2.50 
 2.75 
 
 3-25 
 3.50 
 
 0.400 
 0.364 
 
 0.286 
 
 6.250 
 
 7.563 
 
 9.0 
 
 10.563 
 
 12.250 
 
 15.625 
 
 20.797 
 
 27.0 
 
 34.328 
 
 42.875 
 
 1.581 
 1.658 
 1.732 
 1.803 
 1.871 
 
 0.632 
 0.603 
 0.577 
 0.5S5 
 0.535 
 
 1-357 
 1.401 
 1.442 
 1.481 
 1.518 
 
 0.737 
 0.714 
 0.693 
 0.675 
 0.659 
 
 1:1 
 1.318 
 1.342 
 1.368 
 
 0.795 
 0.777 
 0.759 
 0.745 
 0.731 
 
 3-75 
 4.0 
 4-5 
 5-0 
 5.5 
 
 0.267 
 0.250 
 0.222 
 
 o!i82 
 
 14.063 
 16.0 
 
 25^0 
 
 30.250 
 
 52.734 
 
 64.0 
 91.125 
 
 125.0 
 
 166.37s 
 
 1-936 
 
 2.121 
 2.236 
 2.345 
 
 0.516 
 0.500 
 0.471 
 0.447 
 0.426 
 
 I.SS4 
 1.587 
 1.651 
 1.710 
 1.765 
 
 0,644 
 0.630 
 0.606 
 0.585 
 0.567 
 
 1.392 
 1.414 
 1.457 
 1.495 
 1.531 
 
 0.719 
 0.707 
 0.687 
 0.669 
 0.653 
 
 6.0 
 6.5 
 7.0 
 7.5 
 8.0 
 
 0.167 
 0.154 
 0.143 
 
 0-I33 
 0.1 25 
 
 36.0 
 42.25 
 49.0 
 56.250 
 
 64.0 
 
 216.0 
 
 274.625 
 
 243.0 
 
 421.875 
 
 512.0 
 
 2.449 
 2.550 
 2.646 
 2.739 
 2.828 
 
 0.408 
 0.392 
 0.378 
 0.365 
 0.354 
 
 1.817 
 1.866 
 1.913 
 1.957 
 
 0.550 
 0.536 
 0.523 
 0.510 
 0.500 
 
 1.565 
 1.597 
 1.627 
 
 nil 
 
 0.639 
 0.626 
 0.61S 
 0.604 
 059s 
 
 8.5 
 9.0 
 9-5 
 
 0.118 
 0.1 1 1 
 0.105 
 
 0.091 
 
 72.250 
 
 90.250 
 1 00.0 
 121.0 
 
 614.125 
 729.0 
 
 857.375 
 
 1000.0 
 
 I33I.O 
 
 2.915 
 3.000 
 3.082 
 3.162 
 3.317 
 
 0.343 
 0.333 
 0.324 
 0.316 
 0302 
 
 2.041 
 2.080 
 2.118 
 2.154 
 2.224 
 
 0.490 
 0.481 
 0.472 
 0.464 
 0.450 
 
 1.707 
 1.732 
 
 1.756 
 1.778 
 
 1.821 
 
 0.586 
 0.577 
 0.570 
 0.562 
 0.549 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 0.083 
 0.077 
 0.071 
 0.067 
 0.063 
 
 144 
 169 
 196 
 
 225 
 
 256 
 
 1728 
 
 2197 
 2744 
 
 3375 
 4096 
 
 3.464 
 3.606 
 3.742 
 3.873 
 4.000 
 
 0.289 
 0.277 
 0.267 
 0.258 
 0.250 
 
 2.289 
 2.351 
 2.410 
 2.466 
 2.520 
 
 0.431 
 0.425 
 0.415 
 0.405 
 0.397 
 
 1.861 
 1.899 
 1.934 
 1.968 
 
 0.537 
 0.527 
 0.517 
 0.508 
 0.500 
 
 17 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 SO 
 
 0.059 
 0.056 
 0.053 
 0.050 
 0.020 
 
 289 
 
 324 
 
 361 
 
 400 
 2500 
 
 4913 
 5832 
 6859 
 8000 
 125000 
 
 4.123 
 4.243 
 4.359 
 4.472 
 7.071 
 
 0.243 
 0.236 
 0.229 
 0.224 
 0.141 
 
 2.571 
 2.621 
 2.668 
 2.714 
 3.684 
 
 0.389 
 0.381 
 
 a368 
 0.271 
 
 IZ 
 
 2.088 
 2.115 
 2.659 
 
 0.492 
 0.485 
 0.479 
 0-473 
 0-376 
 
 1000 
 
 n = 3.142 
 2 77 = 6.283 
 
 O.OIO 
 
 0.00 1 
 0.318 
 
 0.159 
 
 10000 
 1000000 
 
 9.870 
 39478 
 
 I 000000000 
 31.006 
 248.050 
 
 lO.O 
 
 31.623 
 1.772 
 2.507 
 
 0.10 
 0.032 
 0.564 
 0.399 
 
 4.642 
 10.0 
 1.465 
 
 1845 
 
 0.215 
 o.ioo 
 0.683 
 0.542 
 
 3.162 
 5.623 
 1.331 
 1.583 
 
 0.316 
 0.178 
 0.751 
 0.632 
 
 ^=1.571 
 
 0.637 
 
 2.467 
 
 3.878 
 
 1.253 
 
 0.798 
 
 1.162 
 
 0.860 
 
 1.120 
 
 0-893 
 
 ^=1.047 
 
 0.95s 
 
 1.097 
 
 1. 148 
 
 1.023 
 
 0.977 
 
 i 
 
 1.016 
 
 0.985 
 
 1.012 
 
 0.989 
 
 l.=4.S9 
 
 0.239 
 
 17.546 
 
 73.496 
 
 2.047 
 
 0.489 
 
 1.612 
 
 0.622 
 
 1. 43 1 
 
 0.699 
 
 1=0.785 
 
 1.274 
 
 ; 0.617 
 
 0.484 
 
 0.886 
 
 1. 128 
 
 0.923 
 
 1.084 
 
 0.941 
 
 1.062 
 
 ^ = 0.524 
 
 1.910 
 
 0.274 
 
 0.144 
 
 0.724 
 
 1.382 
 
 0.806 
 
 1.241 
 
 0.851 
 
 1.176 
 
 .■^ = 9.870 
 
 O.IOI 
 
 97.409 
 
 961.390 
 
 3.142 
 
 0.318 
 
 2.145 
 
 0.466 
 
 1.772 
 
 0.564 
 
 ;r' = 31.006 
 
 0.032 
 
 961.390 
 
 29809.910 
 
 5.568 
 
 1.796 
 
 3.142 
 
 0.318 
 
 2.360 
 
 0.424 
 
 ^= 0-098 
 
 10.186 
 
 0.0095 
 
 O.OOI 
 
 0.313 
 
 3.192 
 
 0.461 
 
 2.168 
 
 0.560 
 
 1.782 
 
 r6= °-5«9 
 
 1.698 
 
 0.347 
 
 0.204 
 
 0.768 
 
 1.303 
 
 0.838 
 
 1. 194 
 
 0.876 
 
 1.142 
 
 g ■■= 32-2 
 
 2g = 64.4 
 
 0.031 
 0.015 
 
 1036.84 
 I 4147.36 
 
 33386.24 
 267090 
 
 5.674 
 8.025 
 
 0.176 
 0.125 
 
 3.181 
 4.007 
 
 0.314 
 0.249 
 
 2.381 
 2.833 
 
 0.419 
 0.337 
 
 
THE CONSTRUCTOR. 
 
 TABLE OF NUMBERS. -I I. 
 
 • 
 
 
 ).23 
 
 O.^ 
 
 X24 
 
 Oy 
 
 ).25 
 
 o- 
 
 7321 
 
 20000 
 
 22361 
 
 0.2449s 
 0.26458 
 0.28284 
 
 0.30000 
 
 0.31623 
 
 0.33166 
 0.34641 
 
 0.36056 
 
 0.37417 
 
 0-38730 
 
 0.40000 
 
 0.41231 
 
 0.42426 
 
 0.43589 
 0.44721 
 
 0.45826 
 0.46904 
 
 0.47958 
 
 0.48990 
 0.50000 
 
 ^Ti 
 
 n 
 
 0.21544 
 
 0.26 
 
 0.27144 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.31072 
 
 0.28 
 
 0.34200 
 
 0.29 
 
 0.36840 
 
 0.30 
 
 0.39149 
 
 0.31 
 
 0.41213 
 
 0.32 
 
 0.43089 
 
 0.33 
 
 0.44814 
 
 0.34 
 
 0.46416 
 
 0.35 
 
 0.47914 
 
 0.36 
 
 0.49324 
 
 0.37 
 
 0.50658 
 
 0.38 
 
 0.51925 
 
 0.39 
 
 o.53'33 
 
 0.40 
 
 0.54288 
 
 0.41 
 
 0.55397 
 
 0.42 
 
 0.56462 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.57489 
 
 0.44 
 
 0.58480 
 
 0.45 
 
 0.59439 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.60368 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.61269 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.62145 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.62996 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.50990 
 0.51962 
 0.52915 
 0.53852 
 0.54772 
 
 0.55678 
 0.56569 
 0.57446 
 0.58310 
 0.59I6I 
 
 0.60000 
 0.60828 
 0.61644 
 0.62450 
 0.63246 
 
 0.64031 
 
 0.64807 
 
 0.65574 
 
 0.66332 
 0.67082 
 
 0.67823 
 0.68557 
 
 ^^ 
 
 M 
 
 0.63825 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.64633 
 
 0.52 
 
 0.65421 
 
 0.53 
 
 0.6619 1 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.66943 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.67679 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.68399 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.69104 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.69795 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.70473 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.71138 
 
 0.61 
 
 0.7I79I 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.72432 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.73061 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.73681 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.74290 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.74889 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.75478 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.76059 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.76631 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.77194 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.77750 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.78297 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.78837 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.79370 
 
 0.7S 
 
 ^'n ^m 
 
 ,72801 
 73485 
 .74162 
 
 0.74833 
 0.75498 
 0.76158 
 
 0.7681 1 
 
 0.77460 
 
 ,78102 
 
 .78740 
 
 79373 
 ,80000 
 ,80623 
 
 .81240 
 .81854 
 
 79896 
 ,80415 
 .80927 
 81433 
 81932 
 
 0.82426 
 0.82913 
 0.83396 
 0.83872 
 0.84343 
 
 0.84809 
 0.85270 
 0.85726 
 0.86177 
 0.86624 
 
 0.87066 
 0.87503 
 0.87937 
 
 « 
 
 s/Tt 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.87178 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.87750 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.88318 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.88882 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.89443 
 
 0.8 1 
 
 0.90000 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.90554 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.91 104 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.91652 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.92195 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.92736 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.93274 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.93808 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.94340 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.94868 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.9S394 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.95917 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.96437 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.97954 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.97468 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.97980 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.98489 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.98995 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.99499 
 
 1. 00 
 
 1. 00000 
 
 0.9125? 
 0.91657 
 0.92052 
 0.92443 
 0.92832 
 
 0.93217 
 0.93599 
 0.93978 
 0.94354 
 0.94727 
 
 0.95097 
 
 0.95464 
 0.95S28 
 0.96190 
 0.96549 
 
 0.96905 
 0.97259 
 
 0.97610 
 
 0.97959 
 0.98305 
 
 0.98990 
 
 sin 75' 
 cos 75' 
 
 = cos 60° ^ % ; 
 = cos 15° = 0.9659; 
 = shi 15° = 0.2588 ; 
 = 0.4971499- 
 
 cos 30° = sin 60° = ^ %/ 3 ^ 0.8660. 
 tan 30° = cot 60° = % ^y^= 0.5774 ; 
 cota7i 30° = tan 60° = n/ 3 = 1.7321.' 
 log g= 1.507856. 
 
^LF^H^BETIC^L IISTDEX. 
 
 ACCUMULATORS 264 
 
 Hoppe's 264 
 
 Hydraulic 218 
 
 " Tweddells' . ■ . • 265 
 
 Action of Gear Teeth 129 
 
 Adamson's Stiffening Ring 269 
 
 Addition and Subtraction of Forces 26 
 
 Addition, Graphical 26 
 
 Adjustable Escapements 170 
 
 Gears for Rotative Mot- 
 ors 237 
 
 ' ' Hangers 74 
 
 Power Escapements ... 236 
 
 " Pump Gears 236 
 
 Admiralty Chain 182 
 
 Adyman's Coupling 215 
 
 Agudio's Cable Locomotive 176 
 
 Air Compressors, Riedler's 279 
 
 Air Pump, Bunsen's 222 
 
 " Von Gerike's 225 
 
 " Watt's 225 
 
 Air, Reservoir for Compressed 272 
 
 Allan's Link Motion 235 
 
 Almgren's Researches on Steam 
 
 Boilers 271 
 
 Althaus' Furnace Hoist 173 
 
 Althaus' Pump 223 
 
 Americaa Standard Car Bearing. ... 75 
 
 Amos & Smyth's Pump 224 
 
 Anchor Escapement, Free 168 
 
 Bolts 56 
 
 Ratchet.. i55 
 
 Anemometers 239 
 
 Angle and T Iron Columns 83 
 
 Angle of Torsion, Determination of 93 
 
 Angle of Rotation in Torsion 11 
 
 Angstrom's Valve Gear 233 
 
 Anti-Friction Wheels 123 
 
 Anti-parallel 22 
 
 Anti-projection 23 
 
 Application of Tension Organs 172 
 
 Archimedes, Tympanon of 221 
 
 Archimedian Screw 221 
 
 Area of Polygons 23 
 
 " Quadrilaterals 24 
 
 Triangles 23 
 
 Arithmography 22 
 
 Arm Sections, Table for Transform- 
 ing 103 
 
 Arms of Gear Wheels 149 
 
 Armstrong Hydraulic Crane 228 
 
 Artificial Draft 272 
 
 Atmospheric Railway 227 
 
 Attachment of Journals 67 
 
 Audemar's Pump 224 
 
 Automatic Coupling loi 
 
 " Friction Brake 170 
 
 Steam Stop . 2S1 
 
 Axis, Neutral 3 
 
 Axle, American Railway Standard . . 89 
 " Prussian Railway Standard. . . 89 
 
 " Simnle Crank 106 
 
 Axles.....". 85 
 
 " for Water Wheels 91 
 
 " Graphical Calculation of 86 
 
 " Loaded at Two Points 87 
 
 ' - Axles 107 
 
 " Non-Symmetrical 86 
 
 " Proof Diagrams of 87 
 
 " Proportions of 86 
 
 " Railway 88 
 
 " Symmetrical 85 
 
 " with Circular Section 85 
 
 " with Cruciform Section 90 
 
 " with Inclined Loads 90 
 
 Axles with Three or more Bearings. 89 
 ' ' Wooden 92 
 
 BAG PUMP 217 
 
 Baker's Blower 221 
 
 Balanced Valves 279 
 
 Balance Wheel 167 
 
 Balancing of Pulleys 194 
 
 Balanced Slide Valves 285 
 
 Balanced Valve, Cramer's 280 
 
 Ball Bearings 127 
 
 Ball Joints for Pipes 249 
 
 Band Saws 177 
 
 Base Figures for Hyperboloidal 
 
 Wheels 136 
 
 Bastard Gears i35 
 
 Beale's Gas Exhauster 226 
 
 Beams 3 
 
 ' ' Double Trussed 35 
 
 " Sections, Table of 5-7 
 
 Force Plans for Framed 38 
 
 '■ Multiple Trussed 35 
 
 Scale Ill 
 
 Simple Trussed 35 
 
 " Triple Trussed 35 
 
 Walking 110 
 
 " with Common Load 11 
 
 Bearings, Ball 127 
 
 Design and Proportion of 68 
 
 " Independent Step 75 
 
 Lateral 68 
 
 Metaline 179 
 
 Multiple Collar 77 
 
 Multiple Supports for 80 
 
 Pedestal 71 
 
 Roller 126 
 
 Roller for Bridges 126 
 
 " Simple Supports for 79 
 
 Standard American Car. . . 75 
 Standard Prussian Car. ... 75 
 
 " Special Forms of 74 
 
 Step 75 
 
 Bearing Supports, General Principles 82 
 
 Bearings, Thrust 65, 68, 75 
 
 Thrust with Wooden Sur- 
 face 76 
 
 Supports for 79 
 
 Wall 68, 71 
 
 Wall Step 75 
 
 with Three-part Boxes 70 
 
 Yoke 72 
 
 Becker's Clutch loi 
 
 Behren's Chamber Gear Train 220 
 
 Belidor's Water Pressure Engine . 229 
 
 Bell Crank no 
 
 Bellegarde, Rope Transmission at . . 205 
 
 Belleville Elastic Washers 212 
 
 Bellows Pump 217 
 
 Bell Pipe Connections 24S 
 
 Bell Valve 276 
 
 Belt Connections 191 
 
 " Fastening, Better's 193 
 
 " Fastening, Moxon's 193 
 
 Belting 186 
 
 Cement for 193 
 
 " Efficiency of 194 
 
 Specific Capacity of igo 
 
 Stress on 191 
 
 " Various Examples of 1S7 
 
 Table of Examples 192 
 
 Belt Lacing 191 
 
 Belts, Capacity of 190 
 
 " Creep of 194 
 
 " Cross Section of 190 
 
 " Path of 186 
 
 Belts, Polishing 177 
 
 Quarter Twist 186 
 
 Belt Shifters 188 
 
 Belt Shifter, Zimmerman's 189 
 
 Belts, Stiffness of 194 
 
 Belt Transmission, Examples of.... 191 
 
 Belts, Transporting 221 
 
 Bending, Bodies of Uniform Resist- 
 ance to 8 
 
 " Load 3 
 
 Moment 3 
 
 Resistance to 2 
 
 Bergner's Drawing Board 172 
 
 Berlin, Sewerage System of 219 
 
 Bevel Friction Wheels 124 
 
 " Friction Wheels, Minotto's... 125 
 
 " Gears 135 
 
 " " Construction Circles for. 135 
 
 " " Spiral 141 
 
 '■ " Stepped 141 
 
 Beylich's Universal Gears 136 
 
 Biquadratic Parabola 10 
 
 Blake's Steam Pump 230 
 
 Bleichert's Cable Tramway System . . 175. 
 
 Blower, Baker's 221 
 
 Blower. Root's 221 
 
 Blowers, Fan 222 
 
 Bloxam's Gravity Escapement 168 
 
 Boat, Sail 223 
 
 Boat, Chain Propulsion of 183 
 
 Bodies of Uniform Strength 2 
 
 Bogardus Mill 126 
 
 Boiler Construction, Economy in 
 
 Combustion. 270 
 " " Economy of 
 
 Material in 270 
 " Improvements 
 in Heating 
 
 Surface . . . 270 
 
 Boiler Details 266 
 
 Feeder, Brindley's 228 
 
 Feeders 228 
 
 " Flues 269 
 
 Flues, Corrugated 269 
 
 Riveting 42 
 
 Boilers, Almgren's Researches on.. 271 
 
 Circumferential Seams of . . 268 
 
 ' ' Classified 265-266 
 
 Flat Surf aces of 268 
 
 for Swedish State Railway. 272 
 
 Longitudinal Seams of 267 
 
 ' ' Thickness of 266 
 
 Spherical Details 268 
 
 Steam 265 
 
 Boiler Tubes 270 
 
 Boiling Water, used for Shrinking . . 47 
 
 Bolt Connections, Unloaded 60 
 
 " Dead 166 
 
 " Gerber's 57 
 
 " Heads 54 
 
 " Latch 166 
 
 Bolts, Anchor 56 
 
 " and Nuts, Metric 55 
 
 " and Screws 50 
 
 Maudslay's Method of Secur- 
 
 J^S-- 58 
 
 " Parsons 57 
 
 Penn's Method of Securing.. 57 
 
 " Special Forms of 55 
 
 Borda Turbine . 220 
 
 Bored Guides 122 
 
 Better's Belt Fastening 193 
 
 Boxes, Various Forms of Journal ... 6g 
 
 Brace, Weston's Ratchet 154 
 
 Bracket Support for Bearings 7q 
 
304 
 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 Brackets, Wall 72 
 
 Brake, Automatic Friction 170 
 
 Brake, Napier's Differential 214 
 
 Brakes, Chain 215 
 
 Clamping 214 
 
 " Internal Strap 215 
 
 Sliding 215 
 
 " Strap 211-214 
 
 Brake, Toggle Friction 162 
 
 Bramah Lock 166 
 
 Brasses for Connecting Rod 112 
 
 Brauer's Intermittent Gearing 165 
 
 Breaking Load i 
 
 Bridge Bolts 59 
 
 " Flying 222 
 
 Roller Bearings 126 
 
 St. Louis 60 
 
 Briggs' System of Pipe Threads. . . . 250 
 
 Brindley's Boiler Feeder 228 
 
 Britton's Steering Gear 238 
 
 Brown's Valve Gear 235 
 
 Brown's Windlass 173 
 
 Buckling, Resistance to 13 
 
 Buckling Strains, Table of 14 
 
 Baffier Couplings 181 
 
 Built up Screw Propellers 57 
 
 Bnnsen's Air Pump 222 
 
 Butler's Coup ling '■ • . 96 
 
 CABLE, Arrangement of Pulleys for 202 
 
 Drum, Fowler 's 173 
 
 " Ferry Sy.-;tetn, Hartwich's. 175 
 
 Grip Pawl 185 
 
 " Haalaj3 Sy.stjms 174 
 
 " Incline at Lucerne 173 
 
 " Locomotivj, Agudio's 176 
 
 " R-iilways ' 173 
 
 Rhenish Railway 174 
 
 " Road, Kahlenberg 173 
 
 Cables, Table for Tightened 200 
 
 Cable System for Canals, Schmick's. 175 
 
 " System, Riggenbach's 174 
 
 " Tramway, Chicago ■ 175 
 
 " Tra-nway, Overhead 175 
 
 " Tramways, San Francisco. ... 174 
 
 " Transmission, Ring System 208-211 
 
 Transmissions, Short Span... 200 
 
 " Transmission with Inclined. . . 200 
 
 Cadiat Turbine 220 
 
 Cagaiardelle 221 
 
 Call & Co., Valve Gear 162 
 
 Calculating Machine, Thomas'. . .153, 156 
 
 Calculation of Springs 18 
 
 Calculations for Chains 183 
 
 Cambon's Roller Bearing 127 
 
 Cam Valve gears 236 
 
 Canal Cable System, Schmick's 175 
 
 Lift at Les Fontinettes 227 
 
 •' " Green's 227 
 
 " La Louviere 227 
 
 " Mersey 227 
 
 Locks 227 
 
 Cannon, Thickness of 15 
 
 Capacity of Belts 190 
 
 Capstan, David's I73 
 
 Car Bearing, American Standard... 75 
 Car Bearings, Prussian Standard... 75 
 
 Cardan's Coupling 97 
 
 Cardioide 92 
 
 Casting 240 
 
 Cast Iron Cranks 105 
 
 Central Curve of Valve Gear 235 
 
 Centre of Gravity Graphically De- 
 termined 33 
 
 Centrifugal Force 177 
 
 " Force of Wire Rope.... 197 
 
 " Pumps 222 
 
 Chain, Admiralty 182 
 
 " Brakes 215 
 
 " Couplings 184 
 
 Drums 185 
 
 Flat Link 183 
 
 " Gemorsch » 182 
 
 " Madgeburg-Bodenbacher. . . . 183 
 
 Open Link 182 
 
 Pawls for 185 
 
 " Pitch 183 
 
 Chain Propeller, Heuberger's 176 
 
 Propelling Gear 187 
 
 " Proportions of iga 
 
 Propulsion of Boats 183 
 
 Chains, Calculations for 183 
 
 Chain Sheaves 185, 211 
 
 Chain, Specific Capacity of ' 211 
 
 Chains, Running 182 
 
 Stationary 182 
 
 Tests for 183 
 
 Chain Strippers 185 
 
 Swivels 184 
 
 Transmission 211 
 
 Transmission, Efficiency of... 213 
 
 in Mines 213 
 
 " " Decide Mines. 212 
 
 " Weight of 183 
 
 Chamber Gear Train, Behren's 220 
 
 " Eve's 220 
 
 " " " Repsold's. . . . 220 
 
 Wheel Trains 219 
 
 Channeled Connecting Rods 117 
 
 Checking Ratchets 150, 163 
 
 Check Valves 274 
 
 Cheese Coupling 99, 151 
 
 Chemical Ratchet. Trains 171 
 
 Cheret's Press, Friction Gear of . . . . 125 
 
 Chicago Cable Tramway 175 
 
 Chronometer Escapement r67 
 
 Chubb Lock 166 
 
 Circular Plate, Deflection of 15 
 
 Circumference Scale 128 
 
 Clamp Coupling 95 
 
 Clamping Brakes 214 
 
 Clamp Pulley, Fowler's 203 
 
 Clamp Ratchet i 160 
 
 Clark's Canal Lift. .., 227 
 
 Clerk, Method of Shrinking Rings. 45 
 Clocks, Striking Mechanism for ... . 169 
 
 Close Link Chain 182 
 
 Clutch, Becker's loi 
 
 Cone 99 
 
 " Couplings 95, 98 
 
 Coupling, Fossey's 100 
 
 Dohmen-Leblanc's loi 
 
 Forks 99 
 
 Clutches, Friction 99 
 
 Clutch, Garand's loi 
 
 ' ' Jackson's loi 
 
 Koechlin's Friction 100 
 
 ' ' Napier's loi 
 
 Reuleaux's Friction 100 
 
 Schurmann's loi 
 
 Toothed 98 
 
 Weston's Friction loi 
 
 Coating Operations 241 
 
 Cock, Four Way 225 
 
 Cocks 281 
 
 Coefficients of Resistance i 
 
 Coefficients of Safety i 
 
 Cold Forcing 17 
 
 " Forcing, Dimensions for 47 
 
 ' ' Hooping 45 
 
 Collar Thrust Bearings 66 
 
 Columns, Calculations for Iron 82 
 
 Fluted 83 
 
 Forms for Iron 84 
 
 Grouped 84 
 
 Hollow 83 
 
 " of Angle and T Iron 83 
 
 of Uniform Resistance. ... 13 
 
 Strength of Cast Iron 83 
 
 Stresses in 82 
 
 Combined Levers no 
 
 Compound Escapements 168 
 
 Link as Thrust Bearing. 67 
 
 Strains, Table of 15 
 
 " Stresses 13 
 
 Compressed Air for Power Distribu- 
 tion 219 
 
 Compression, Resistance to 2 
 
 Condenser, Watt's 230 
 
 Conditions of Equilibrium 29 
 
 Conductors for Pressure Organs 242 
 
 Conduits for Pressure Organs 216 
 
 Cone Clutch Coupling 99 
 
 Cone Coupling, Reuleaux's 96 
 
 " Pulleys 189 
 
 Diagram fqr 190 
 
 " " for Crossed Belts 189 
 
 for Open Belts 189 
 
 Conical Gear Wheels 135 
 
 Connecting Rod Brasses. 112 
 
 " End, Cast Iron.... 113 
 
 '■ " Krauss' 113 
 
 " " Penn's 113 
 
 " " Polonceau's. . 114 
 
 " Porter-Allen 117 
 
 Rods 112 
 
 " Channeled 117 
 
 " Forms of 118 
 
 " Locomotive 116 
 
 " Rectangular Section 117 
 
 Rod, Solid End for 113 
 
 Rod, Solid End for Lo- 
 
 motive 113 
 
 Rods, Ribbed 117 
 
 Rods, Round 116 
 
 Red, Strap End for 112 
 
 Rod, Whip Action of 116 
 
 Connections for Belting igi 
 
 " Cast Iron Pipes 248 
 
 " Crank Axles 115 
 
 " Lead Pipe 251 
 
 ■' Neck Journals 114 
 
 " Wrought Iron Pipes 249 
 Construction Circles for Bevel Gears 135 
 Construction of Machine Elem'nts. 39-289 
 
 Pulley Stations 204 
 
 Rope Curve 202 
 
 Rope Pulleys 202 
 
 Screw Thread 50 
 
 Continuous Ratchets 150 
 
 Ratchets with Locking 
 
 Teeth 165 
 
 Running Ratchets 164 
 
 Copper Pipes 246 
 
 Cord Friction 177 
 
 Cord Polygon 26 
 
 Corliss Valve 236 
 
 Corliss Valve Gear 162 
 
 Cornish Valve 280 
 
 Cornish Valve Gear 153, 163 
 
 Corrugated Boiler Flues 269 
 
 Corrugated Fire Box 269^ 
 
 Cotton Rope 179 
 
 Cotton Rope Transmission 196 
 
 Counterbalance, Oeking's 217 
 
 Countershaft Hanger, Sellers' 74 
 
 Counting Gear for Gas Meter 165 
 
 Couples, Force 29 
 
 Coupling, Adyman's 215 
 
 ' ' Butler's 96 
 
 ' ' Cardan's 97 
 
 " Cheese 99, 151 
 
 " Clamp 95 
 
 " Cresson's 96 
 
 " Drag Link 97 
 
 ' ' Hooke's 97 
 
 " . Muff 95 
 
 " Oldham's 96 
 
 Plate... . 95 
 
 " Pouyer's loi 
 
 ' ' Prentiss 216 
 
 " Ramsbottom's Friction... 99 
 
 " Reuleaux's Cone 96 
 
 Couplings 95 
 
 Automatic loi 
 
 Buffer 181 
 
 " Schurman's Friction 215 
 
 Clutch 98 
 
 Coupling, Sellers' 96 
 
 Couplings, Flexible 96 
 
 for Chain 184 
 
 " for Propeller Shafts 95 
 
 " Sharp's 96 
 
 " Link 98 
 
 Coupling, Uhlhorn's loi 
 
 Cramer's Balanced Valve 280 
 
 Crane Hook, Proportions for 184 
 
 " Pillars 89 
 
 ' ' Ramsbottom's 176. 
 
Cranes, Cotton Rope Driven 196 
 
 Graphical Calculation 27 
 
 Hydraulic 228 
 
 Squaring Device for 172 
 
 Varieties of 173 
 
 Crane, Tangye's 176 
 
 Crane, Towne's 176 
 
 Crank Axle, Graphostatic Calcula- 
 tion of 106 
 
 " Axles, Connections for 115 
 
 Axle, Simple 106 
 
 Graphostatic Calculation for 
 
 Return 105 
 
 Graphostatic Calculation for 
 
 Single 104 
 
 Pin, Tangential Pressure on . 233 
 
 " Pins 61 
 
 Pins, Connections for 112 
 
 Return 105 
 
 Cranks, Cast Iron 105 
 
 Cranks, Classified 104 
 
 Crank Shaft, Graphostatic Calcula- 
 tion of 107 
 
 Cranks, Hand 109 
 
 Crank, Sliding 226 
 
 Cranks, Single Wrought Iron 104 
 
 Creep of Ropes 196 
 
 Creep of Belts i94 
 
 Cresson's Coupling 96 
 
 Crossed Belts, Cone Pulleys for 189 
 
 Cross Heads 118 
 
 " " for Guides 119 
 
 " for Link Connections. . . 119 
 
 " " for Locomotives 121 
 
 " " for Marine Engines 120 
 
 " Head, SUpper 121 
 
 " Head, Superficial Pressure on . 120 
 
 '• Keyed Connections 48 
 
 " Section of Belts 190 
 
 " " Hemp Rope 195 
 
 " " Wire Rope 196 
 
 Crown of Pulleys 186 
 
 Ratchet i54 
 
 Wheel Escapement 169 
 
 Cup Packing 253 
 
 Current Motor 223 
 
 Curve, Elastic 3 
 
 Curves, Velocity 233 
 
 Cycloidal Curves 130 
 
 Curves, Generation of 130 
 
 Sinoide 13 
 
 Cycloid, Spherical i35 
 
 Cylinder Espapement 169 
 
 Ratchet 156 
 
 Ratchet Gearing 165 
 
 Cylinders 216 
 
 Cylinders for Hydraulic Presses 243 
 
 Cylindrical Spiral Gears 138 
 
 Cylindrical Vessels 15 
 
 DAN AIDE 
 
 Darcy, Formula for Friction 
 
 Water 
 
 David's Capstan 
 
 Davis & Co., Steering Gear 
 
 Dead Bolt 
 
 Dead Ratchet Tooth 
 
 e's Steam Pump 
 Decido Mines, Chain Transmission of 
 Decomposition into Parallel Forces . 
 
 Deflection 
 
 in Bodies of Uniform Re- 
 sistance 
 
 of Circular Plate 
 
 of Shafting 
 
 of Shafting, Torsional. . . . 
 
 of Wire Ropes 
 
 Delisle's Screw Thread Systems ... 
 
 Dennison's Escapement 
 
 Design and Proportion of Bearings . 
 
 Diagram for Cone Pulleys 
 
 Diametral Pitch 
 
 Diaphragm Pump 
 
 Differential Brake, Napier's 
 
 " Hydraulic Lever 
 
 Pulley Block, Weston's. 
 
 ALPHABETICAL IXDEX. 
 
 Differential Windlass 173 
 
 Dimensions of Gear Wheels 147 
 
 Disk Friction Wheels .... 124 
 
 " Valves, Flat 275 
 
 " Wheels with Pin Teeth 133 
 
 Distribution of Weight 3 
 
 Division by Lines 23 
 
 Division of Gear Wheels, Circumfer- 
 ential 128 
 
 Dobo's Ratchet. 160 
 
 Dohmen-Leblanc's Clutch 101 
 
 Donnadieu's Pump. 223 
 
 Door Locks 166 
 
 Double Acting Pumps 224 
 
 Arm Pulleys 193 
 
 " Beat Valve 280 
 
 " Friction Ratchets 160 
 
 " Spiral Gears 141 
 
 Douglas & Coulson's Steering Gear . 238 
 
 Downton's Pump 224 
 
 Draft, Artificial 272 
 
 Draft Keys 48 
 
 Drag Link Coupling 97 
 
 Drawing Board, Bergner's 172 
 
 Driving by Tension Organs 173 
 
 Drop Hammer, Friction 176 
 
 Drop Hammer, Merrill's 123 
 
 Drums for Chain 185 
 
 Dry Gas Meter 240 
 
 Ducommun & Dubied's Planing Ma- 
 chine 176 
 
 Dunning & Boissiere's Steering Gear 238 
 
 Duplex Escapement 167 
 
 Pump, Mazelline's 231 
 
 Pump, Worthington's 231 
 
 ECCENTRICS 109 
 
 Eccentric Straps 115 
 
 Edge Keys 49 
 
 Efficiency of Belting 194 
 
 of Chain Transmission... . 213 
 " of Rope Transmission... 205 
 
 Equalizing Levers 32, iii 
 
 Equalizer Worthington's 232 
 
 Equation of Elastic Curve 3 
 
 Equatorial Section Modulus 5 
 
 Equilibrium, Conditions of 29 
 
 of External Forces. ... 27 
 
 of Forces 22 
 
 of Internal Forces. ... 28 
 of Three Parallel For- 
 ces 30 
 
 Elastic Curve 3 
 
 Elastic Curve, Equation of 3 
 
 Elasticity and Strength of Flexure . 2 
 
 Elasticity, Modulus of i, 13 
 
 Elastic Limit i, 3 
 
 ' ' Limit in Beams 8 
 
 Line 92 
 
 Washers, Belleville 212 
 
 Elbe, Chain Propelling Gear on. . . . 185 
 
 Elbow Fittings 251 
 
 Elbow Fittings, Friction in 251 
 
 Electric Signals, Siemens & Halske. 166 
 
 Elements of Graphostatics 22 38 
 
 Elevator, Hydraulic, 227 
 
 Elevator Safety Devices 164 
 
 Emery Weighing Machine 173 
 
 Enderlein's Escapement 168 
 
 Engine, Porter-Allen 236 
 
 Engines, Rotative Pressure 233 
 
 Engines, Valve Gear for Rotative. . . 234 
 
 Enlarged Screws 58 
 
 Epicycloidal and Evolute Teeth 
 
 Compared 135 
 
 Erhardt's Flange Joint 47 
 
 Escapement, Bloxam's Gravity 168 
 
 Chronometer 467 
 
 Crownwheel 169 
 
 Cylinder 169 
 
 Dennison's 168 
 
 Duplex 167 
 
 Enderlein's 168 
 
 " Free Anchor 168 
 
 Hipp 168 
 
 " Graham's 169 
 
 3o5 
 
 Escapement, Lamb's 168 
 
 Lepaute's 169 
 
 Mudge's 168 
 
 Reuleaux's i68 
 
 Escapements 150, 167 
 
 Adjustable 170 
 
 Compound 168 
 
 for Measurements of 
 
 Fluids 239 
 
 for Measurements of 
 
 Volume 239 
 
 " for Moving Liquids, 
 
 Pressure 228 
 
 for Pressure Organs. . 226 
 
 " Isochronous 167 
 
 " Periodical. 169 
 
 Periodical Pressure. . . 229 
 
 Period of 167 
 
 Power 169 
 
 " Power Adjustable 237 
 
 Range of 167 
 
 Simple 167 
 
 Time of Oscillation.... 167 
 
 " Uniform 167 
 
 Escapement, Tiede's 168 
 
 Eve's Chamber Gear Train 220 
 
 Evolute Rack Teeth 132 
 
 Evolute Teeth for Interchangeable 
 
 Gears 131 
 
 Examples of Belting, Table 192 
 
 of Belt Transmission 191 
 
 of Gearing 147 
 
 of Journals 62 
 
 Thrust Bearings 78 
 
 Expansion Gear, Farcot's 236 
 
 " '■ Gonzenbach's 236 
 
 " Meyer's 236 
 
 Joints 245 
 
 Valves 236 
 
 External Forces, Equilibrium of - . . 27 
 
 Extraction of Roots 26 
 
 Eytelwein's Formula for Stiffness of 
 
 Ropes 181, 196 
 
 FABRY'S VENTILATOR 221 
 
 Factor of Safety : i 
 
 Fairbairn, Experiments on Boiler 
 
 Flues 269 
 
 Fan Blowers 222 
 
 Farcot's Stuffing Box 254 
 
 Farcot's Valve Gear 236 
 
 Fast and Loose Pulleys 188 
 
 Felbinger's Postal Tube 227 
 
 Ferules for Boiler Tubes 270 
 
 Fink's Link Motion 235 
 
 Fire Box, Corrugated 269 
 
 Fire Box, Kaselowsky's 269 
 
 Fish Torpedo 171 
 
 Flange Connections for Lead Pipe. 252 
 
 Joints 58 
 
 Joint, Erhardt's 47 
 
 Joints for Pipes 248 
 
 Flanges for Riveted Pipes 249 
 
 Flap Riveted Joints 40 
 
 Flap Valves 274 
 
 Flat Hemp Rope 178 
 
 " Link Chain, Neustadt's 183 
 
 " Link Chain, Table of 183 
 
 ' ' Pivot Bearings 66 
 
 " Ropes 181 
 
 Flexible Couplings 95, 96 
 
 Pipes 252 
 
 Rod Connection 114 
 
 Flexure, Elasticity and Strength of. 2 
 
 Flexure, Strains of 3 
 
 Flow of Metals 240 
 
 Fluid Escapements for Transporta- 
 tion 227 
 
 " Running Ratchet Trains 223 
 
 " Valves 287 
 
 Fluted Columns 83 
 
 Flying Bridge 222 
 
 Fly Wheel, Oscillating '. . . 233 
 
 Fly Wheels 233 
 
 Force, Centrifugal 177 
 
 Force Couples 29 
 
3o6 
 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 Forced Connections, Examjilcs of. . . 46 
 
 Forced Draft 272 
 
 Force Plans for Framed Structures . 34 
 
 Plans for Roof Trusses 36 
 
 " Polyg;on 26 
 
 Forcing Fit 17 
 
 Forces, Addition and Subtraction of 26 
 
 Equilibrium of 22 
 
 Resultant of Several 26 
 
 F'orcing 45 
 
 Forks, Clutch 99 
 
 Fork Journals 63 
 
 Fork Journal, Stub End for 114 
 
 Forms for Iron Columns 84 
 
 Fossey's Coupling 100 
 
 Foundation Bolts, Keying for 48 
 
 Fourneyron Turbine 220 
 
 Four Way Cock 225 
 
 Fowler's Cable Drum I73 
 
 Fowler's Clamp Pulley 203 
 
 Friction Brake, Automatic 170 
 
 Brake, Toggle 162 
 
 Clutches 99 
 
 Clutch, Koechlin's 100 
 
 Ramsbottom's 99 
 
 " Reuleaux's 100 
 
 Westons 101 
 
 Cord 177 
 
 Coupling, Schurman's 215 
 
 Drop Hammer 176 
 
 Feed, Sellers' 126 
 
 Gear of Cheret's Press 125 
 
 Gear, Robertson's 125 
 
 in Elbow Fittings 251 
 
 in Spur Gearing 134 
 
 in Stuffing Box 254 
 
 of Chain Transmission 213 
 
 of Journals 64 
 
 of Pivot Bearings 66 
 
 of Screw Thread 50 
 
 of Spiral Gear Teeth 140 
 
 of Water in Pipes 246 
 
 Friedmann's Jet Pump 222 
 
 Friction Pawls i59 
 
 Pawl, Saladin's 161 
 
 " Pawls, Release of 161 
 
 Ratchets 158 
 
 " " Double 160 
 
 Rod 163 
 
 " " Running 160 
 
 " '■ Stationary 161 
 
 " Rollers, Mechwart's 127 
 
 " Trains, Special 126 
 
 Wheels 122 
 
 " Bevel 124 
 
 " " Construction of 123 
 
 " Disk 124 
 
 " " for Inclined Axes. . . 124 
 
 " " for Parallel Axes... 123 
 
 " " Material for 123 
 
 " " Minotto's 125 
 
 " " Robertson's 125 
 
 " " Sellers' 126 
 
 " " Two Applications of 123 
 
 " " Wedge 125, i6a^ 
 
 Francis' Turbine 220 
 
 Framed Beams, Force Plans for. ... 38 
 
 Framed Structures, P'orce Plans for 34 
 
 Frankfurt on Main, Water Supply of 218 
 
 Free Anchor Escapement 168 
 
 Free Cross Heads 119 
 
 Freiburg, Rope Transmission at. . . . 205 
 
 French Lock 166 
 
 Front Bearings 68 
 
 Furnace Hoist, Althaus' 173 
 
 Furnace, Wilson's Water Gas 288 
 
 Future Possibilities of Boiler Con- 
 struction 270 
 
 GANNOW MINE 214 
 
 Garand's Clutch 101 
 
 Gases, Reservoirs for 219 
 
 Gas Exhauster, Beale's 226 
 
 " Holders 272 
 
 " Meter, Counting Gear for 165 
 
 Dry 240 
 
 Sanderson's •■• 239 
 
 Gas Meter, Wet 
 
 Gate Valves 
 
 Gearing, Brauer's Intermittent . .'. . 
 Calculation of Pitch and 
 
 Face 
 
 Cylinder Ratchet 
 
 Double Pin 
 
 Examples of 
 
 Friction in Spur Tooth. . . . 
 Fundamental Formula for. 
 
 Globoid Worm 
 
 Hawkin's Worm: 
 
 Jensen's Worm 
 
 Ratchet 
 
 Shield 
 
 Gearing, Step 
 
 Toothed 
 
 Worm 
 
 Gears, Bastard 
 
 " Bevel. 
 
 Bevel Spiral 
 
 Beylich's Universal 
 
 Cylindrical Spiral 
 
 '■ Double Spiral, 
 
 Examples of Spiral 
 
 Globoid Spiral 
 
 " Hoisting 
 
 " Parallel 
 
 " Precision 
 
 " Single Tooth 
 
 " Spiral 
 
 " Stepped Bevel 
 
 '• Table of Cast Iron 
 
 " Teeth for Hyperboloidal 
 
 " Transmission 
 
 Gear Teeth, Action of 
 
 Construction of Spur . . 
 Epicycloidal and Evo- 
 
 lute Compared 
 
 Evolute Interchange- 
 
 able. 
 
 Friction of Spiral i 
 
 Interchangeable i 
 
 Internal i 
 
 Line of Action of i 
 
 Loss in Determined 
 
 Geometrically i 
 
 of Circular Arcs i 
 
 Pin I 
 
 Pressure on 1 
 
 Section of i 
 
 Stress in 1 
 
 Thumb Shaped i 
 
 Wear on •. . a 
 
 " Tooth Outlines, General Solu- 
 tion ] 
 
 ' ' Wheel Arms, Table of i 
 
 " Hubs 3 
 
 " Plane n 
 
 ' ' Wheels, Arms of \ 
 
 Circumferential Divis- 
 ion of 1 
 
 Classified i 
 
 " Conical i 
 
 " Dimensions of i 
 
 " Diametral Pitch of... i 
 
 " Hyper'ooloidal i 
 
 " Interchangeable 1 
 
 Pitch of I 
 
 Pitch Radius of ] 
 
 " " Rim of ] 
 
 " " Weight of ] 
 
 Gemorsch Chain j 
 
 General Form of Toothed Ratchets. J 
 General Remarks upon Ratchet Me- 
 chanism ] 
 
 Generation of Cycloidal Curves.... ] 
 
 Geneva, Sluice Gates at ; 
 
 Geneva Stop i 
 
 Gerber's Bolt 
 
 Geyser Pump, Siemens' : 
 
 Gidding's Slide Valve Experiments . ; 
 
 Giffard's Injector : 
 
 Girard Turbine ; 
 
 Githen's Rock Drill , ; 
 
 Globe Valve : 
 
 Globoids , . . . . 
 
 Globoid Spiral Gears 142 
 
 Globoid Worm Gearing 143 
 
 Gooch's Link Motion 235 
 
 Goodwin's Split Pulley 194 
 
 Gonzenbach's Expansion Gear 236 
 
 Graham's Escapement 169 
 
 Graphical Addition 26 
 
 Calculation of Axle 86 
 
 " of Powers ... 24 
 
 " " of Shafting. . . 95 
 
 of Crank Axle 106 
 
 of M\iltiple 
 
 Crank Shaft 107 
 
 " " Return Crank 105 
 
 Single Crank. 104 
 
 Graphostatics, Elements of 22-38 
 
 Green's Canal Lift 227 
 
 Greindl's Pump 221 
 
 Gresham's Injector 222 
 
 Grip Pawl for Cables 185 
 
 Grooves for Rope Transmission .... 195 
 
 Grooved Fly Wheels 195 
 
 Grouped Columns 84 
 
 Group Riveting ., 41 
 
 Guide Mechanism for Pressure Or- 
 gans 217 
 
 Guide Pulleys for Belting 186 
 
 Guides and Guide Bars 121 
 
 " Bored 122 
 
 for Marine Engines ... 122 
 
 Guide Sheaves 185 
 
 Guides, Locomotive 122 
 
 Guiding by Pressure Organs 216 
 
 Guiding, Tension Organs for 172 
 
 Gun Lock Mechanism 166 
 
 Gun Locks 163 
 
 Guns, Hooping of 16 
 
 HAIR SPRING 169 
 
 Hair Trigger 168 
 
 Half Journals 64 
 
 Hammer, Merrill's Drop 123 
 
 Hand Cranks 109 
 
 Hanger Boxes, Sturtevant's 74 
 
 Hangers 68 
 
 Hangers, Adjustable 74 
 
 Hanger, Sellers' 74 
 
 Hanger, Sellers' Countershaft 74 
 
 Hangers for Rope 181 
 
 Post 73 
 
 Proportion of 73 
 
 Ribbed 73 
 
 Harlow's Valve Gear 231 
 
 Hartwich's Cable Ferry System 175 
 
 Hastie's Steering Gear 238 
 
 Hauling System, Riggenbach's 172 
 
 Haulage Systems, Pennsylvania. ... 174 
 
 Hawkin's Worm Gearing .... 143 
 
 Helfenberger's Regulator 236 
 
 Hemp Rope 17S 
 
 " Transmission, Specific 
 
 Capacity of 195 
 
 " Wear on 196 
 
 " Weight of 178 
 
 Hero's Fountain 2S8 
 
 Heusinger's Link Motion 235 
 
 Heuberger's Chain Propeller 176 
 
 Hick, Experiments on Stuffing Box 
 
 Friction 254 
 
 Hick's Stiffening Ring 269 
 
 High Duty Pumping Engine, Wortli- 
 
 ington 232 
 
 Hipp Escapement 168 
 
 Hirn's Experiments on Journals. ... 64 
 
 Hodgkinson's Experiments 13 
 
 Hofmann's Valve Gear 163 
 
 Hoist, Althaus' 173 
 
 Hoisting Devices 172 
 
 Hoisting Gears .- 144 
 
 Hollow Columns 83 
 
 Hollow Journals 62 
 
 Hooke's Coupling 97 
 
 Hooks 184 
 
 Hooping 45 
 
 "" by Shrinkage .45 
 
 " of Guns 16 
 
 Hoppe's Accumulator. 264 
 
ALPHABETICAL /XDEX. 
 
 307 
 
 Hose i 252 
 
 Ho waldt's Metallic Packing 254 
 
 Hubs for Rock Arms 102 
 
 Hubs of Gear Wheels 150 
 
 Hunting Valve 238 
 
 Hurdy Gurdy Wheel 220 
 
 Hydraulic Accumulators 218, 264 
 
 Cranes 228 
 
 " Elevator 227 
 
 " Lever 217 
 
 Lever, Differential 218 
 
 " Parallel Motion 2r8 
 
 " Power Distribution 219 
 
 " Power Distribution, Ring 
 
 System •■ • 256 
 
 " Presses, Cylinders for .. . 243 
 " Press, Thickness of Cyl- 
 inder 16 
 
 " Hydraulic Ram, Montgol- 
 
 fier's 232 
 
 " Riveting Machine, Twed- 
 
 dell's 228 
 
 " Steering Gear 237 
 
 Tools 228 
 
 '• Transformer 218 
 
 Hjqierboloidal Gear Wheels 136 
 
 Gears, Teeth for 138 
 
 " Wheels, Base Figures 
 
 for 136 
 
 IDEAL BENDING MOMENT. ... 13 
 
 Ideal Twisting Moment 13 
 
 Impact Water Wheels 220 
 
 Inclined Cable, Transmission with.. 200 
 
 Independent Step Bearings 76 
 
 Inertia, Moment of 5-7 
 
 Influence of Pulley Diameter on 
 
 Wire Rope i97 
 
 Influence of Weight of Wire Rope. 180 
 
 Injector, Giffard's 222 
 
 Injector, Gresham's 222 
 
 Interchangeable Gear Teeth 130 
 
 Interchangeabe Gear Wheels 128 
 
 Intermittent Gearing, Brauer's 165 
 
 Internal Flow 240 
 
 " Forces, Equilibrium of 28 
 
 Gear Teeth 131 
 
 Ratchet Wheels 151 
 
 Strap Brakes 215 
 
 Intze's Discussion of Tanks 261 
 
 Inverted Siphon 244 
 
 Iron Columns, Calculations for 82 
 
 Iron, Weight of Round 55 
 
 Isochronous Escapements 167 
 
 Isolated Forces in One Plane 26 
 
 Isolated Forces, Resultant of 29 
 
 JACKSON'S CLUTCH loi 
 
 Jacquard Loom 163 
 
 James Watt & Co., Thrust Bearing 77 
 
 jam Nut 56 
 
 Jaw Clutch 98 
 
 Jensen's Worm Gearing 143 
 
 Jet Action 241 
 
 ' ' Mechanism 240 
 
 " Propeller 223 
 
 " Pump, Friedmann's 222 
 
 Joints, Expansion 245 
 
 Flange - 58 
 
 Strength of Riveted - 40 
 
 Joint, Universal 97 
 
 Jopling's Water Meter 239 
 
 Journal Boxes, Various forms 69 
 
 " Friction in Rope Transmis- 
 sion 195, 205 
 
 "of Chain Transmis- 
 sion 213 
 
 Journals, Attachments of 67 
 
 " Dimensions •. 61 
 
 Examples of 62 
 
 Fork 63 
 
 " for Levers loi 
 
 for Shafting 94 
 
 " Friction of 64 
 
 Half 64 
 
 Hollpw , 62 
 
 Journals, Lateral 61 
 
 Lubrication of 61 
 
 Multiple 63 
 
 Neck 62 
 
 Overhung 61 
 
 " Pressure on 61 
 
 " Proportions of 61 
 
 Stress on 61 
 
 — Various Kinds 60 
 
 KAHLENBERG CABLE ROAD . . 173 
 
 Kaselowsky's Fire Box 269 
 
 Kennedy's Water Meter 239 
 
 Kernaul's Key 49 
 
 Keyed Connections 47 
 
 Keying 47 
 
 " Foundation Bolts 48 
 
 Peters' Method 102 
 
 ' ' Screw Propellers 49 
 
 Key, Kernaul's 49 
 
 Keys, Concave 48 
 
 " Draft 48 
 
 " Edge 49 
 
 " Flat 48 
 
 for Rock Arms 102 
 
 Longitudinal 48 
 
 " Methods of Securing - 50 
 
 " Recessed 48 
 
 " Stresses on 48 
 
 ' ' Taper of 47 
 
 " Unloaded ■ - 49 
 
 Kirchweger's Steam Trap 228 
 
 Kirkstall Forge Rolling Mill 126 
 
 Kirkstall Forge, The 94 
 
 Kley's Pumping Engine 233 
 
 King's Valve Gear 235 
 
 "Knot " in Cord Polygon _. 27 
 
 Koechlin's Friction Clutch ". 100 
 
 Krauss' Connecting Rod End 113 
 
 Krauss' Piston 252 
 
 Kriiger, Investigation of Rivets ... 39 
 
 LACING, BELT 191 
 
 Lagarousse Ratchet 164 
 
 La Louviere Canal Lift 227 
 
 Lamb's Escapement 168 
 
 Langen Gas Engine 161 
 
 Lap Joints, Riveted 40 
 
 Lap of Slide Valve 225 
 
 Latch Bolt 166 
 
 Lateral Bearings 68 
 
 Lateral Journals 61 
 
 Lead Pipe' Connections 251 
 
 Lemielle's Ventilator 82 
 
 Lepaute's Escapement. . . _ 169 
 
 Levasseur's Metallic Tubing 252 
 
 Lever Arms, Calculation of . . . . .... 103 
 
 Arms of Combined Section. . . 103 
 
 Differential Hydraulic 218 
 
 " Hydraulic 217 
 
 Levers, Combined no 
 
 Equalizing ... 32 
 
 Journals for loi 
 
 Simple 101 
 
 Lifting Frame for Screw Propeller. 151 
 
 Lift Valves 223, 273 
 
 Liquids, Pressure Escapement for 
 
 Moving 228 
 
 Limit of Elasticity i 
 
 Limit of Elasticity in Beams 8 
 
 Line of Action of Gear Teeth 129 
 
 Line Shafting 93 
 
 Link Couplings 98 
 
 " Motion, Allan's 235 
 
 " " Fink's 235 
 
 " " Gooch's 235 
 
 " " Heusinger's 235 
 
 " " Stephenson's.... 234 
 
 Load, Breaking i 
 
 Load Length of Wire Rope 180 
 
 Lock, Bramah 166 
 
 " Chubb 166 
 
 French 166 
 
 Locking Ratchets 150 
 
 Locomotive Axles 107 
 
 " Connecting Rods 116 
 
 Locomotive Connecting Rod, Solid 
 
 End for 113 
 
 " Cross Heads 120 
 
 Guides 122 
 
 Springs, Screws for. .. . 58 
 
 Locks, Canal 227 
 
 Door 166 
 
 Gun 162 
 
 Lock, Yale 166 
 
 Logarithmic Spiral 26 
 
 Long Distance Fluid Transmission . 233 
 Long Distance Power Transmission 259 
 
 Longitudinal Keys 48 
 
 Loom, Jacquard 163 
 
 Loss in Gear Teeth Determined 
 
 Geometrically 135 
 
 Loss in Hemp Rope Transmission. . 195 
 
 Lubrication of Journals ; 61 
 
 Lucerne, Cable Incline at 173 
 
 MACHINE ELEMENTS, CON- 
 
 struction of 39-2 89 
 
 Machine Riveting 39 
 
 Mackay & McGeorge, Riveting Ma- 
 chine Ill 
 
 Magdeburg-Bodenbacher Chain.... 183 
 
 Maltese Cross Gear 165 
 
 Manholes 289 
 
 Mannesmann Tubing 243 
 
 Marine Cross Heads 121 
 
 " Engine Guides 122 
 
 Propulsion 222 
 
 Marshall's Valve Gear 235 
 
 Materials — Strength of 1-2 1 
 
 Mathematical Tables 291 . 
 
 Maudslay, Method of Securing Bolts 58 
 
 Maudslay, Thrust Bearing by 77 
 
 Mauser's Revolver 165 
 
 Mazelline's Duplex Pump 231 
 
 Measurement of Fluids, Escape- 
 ments for 239 
 
 Measuring Devices, Running 239 
 
 Mech wart's Friction Rollers 127 
 
 Medart Pulley 193 
 
 Merrill's Drop Hammer 123 
 
 Metaline Bearings 179 
 
 Metallic Piston Packing 253 
 
 Metallic Tubing 252 
 
 Metals, Weight of Sheet 43 
 
 Meter for Alcohol, Siemen's 239 
 
 Methods of Securing Bolts 57 
 
 Methods of Securing Pawls 153 
 
 Metrical Screw Systems 52 
 
 Metric Bolts and Nuts 55 
 
 Metric Pipe Thread System 250 
 
 Meyer's Valve Gear 236 
 
 Mill, Bogardus. 126 
 
 Minotto's Bevel Friction Wheels... 125 
 
 Mixed Tooth Outlines 133 
 
 Mines, Chain Transmission in 213 
 
 Modulus of Elasticity 1,13 
 
 ' ' Resistance i 
 
 Rupture i, 2 
 
 Transmission 208 
 
 Molinos & Pronnier, Speed of Rivet- 
 ing 39 
 
 Moment of Inertia 3, 5, 7 
 
 Moment of Inertia, Polar 11 
 
 Mont Cenis Air Compressors 232 
 
 Montejus 228 
 
 Montgolfier's Hydraulic Ram 232 
 
 Morin's Experiments on Journals. . . 64 
 
 Motors for Pressure Organs 219 
 
 Moulding 240 
 
 Moxon's Belt Fastening 193 
 
 Mudge's Escapement 168 
 
 Muff Coupling 95 
 
 Mule Post 188 
 
 Mule, Spinning 169 
 
 Multiple Collar Bearings 77 
 
 Collar Thrust Bearings. .. . 66 
 
 ' ' Crank Shafts 107 
 
 Journals . 63 
 
 Ratchets 154 
 
 Supports for Bearings 80 
 
 Trussed Beams 35 
 
ALPHABETICAL IXDEX. 
 
 M\iltiple Valves 276 
 
 Multiplication and Division Com- 
 bined 23 
 
 Multiplication by Lines 22 
 
 Murdock's Slide Valve 234 
 
 Muschenbroeck's Pump 223 
 
 NAGEL TURBINE 220 
 
 Napier's Clutch loi 
 
 Napier's Differential Brake 214 
 
 Natural Reservoirs 218 
 
 Neck Journals 62 
 
 Neck Journals, Connections for 114 
 
 Negative Reservoirs 219 
 
 Neutral Axis 3 
 
 Neutral Plane ......■■ 10 
 
 Neustadt's Chain 183 
 
 Newcomen Engine 163 
 
 Normandy's Pipe Joint 249 
 
 Norton's Pump 225 
 
 Nut, Jam 59 
 
 Nut Locks 56 
 
 Nuts, Washers and Bolt Heads 54 
 
 OBELISK, FORCES IN RAISING 28 
 Oberursel, Rope Transmission at. 203,205 
 Oeking's Water Counter-balance... 217 
 
 Oil Tanks 218 
 
 Oldham's Coupling 96 
 
 Open Belts, Cone Pulleys for 189 
 
 Open Link Chain 182 
 
 Ordway, Experiments on Pipe Cov- 
 ering 245 
 
 Oscillating Fly Wheel 233 
 
 Oscillating Pumps 226 
 
 Oscillation of Escapements, Time of 167 
 
 Osterkamp's Rope Hanger. ... 181 
 
 Otis Elevator 228 
 
 Overhead Cable Tramway 175 
 
 Overhung Journ als 61 
 
 PACKING FOR HYDRAULIC 
 
 Press 253 
 
 " for Pump Pistons 255 
 
 " Howaldt's Metallic 254 
 
 *' Piston 216 
 
 " Standard Prussian Rail- 
 way . . - 255 
 
 Pagel's Elastic Washer 57 
 
 Pallets 168 
 
 Pappenheira Chamber Wheel Train. 219 
 
 Parabola, Biquadratic 10 
 
 Parallel Forces — Equilibrium of. .30, 31 
 
 Gears 133 
 
 " Motion, Hydraulic 218 
 
 " Rods for Locomotive En- 
 gines 117 
 
 Parson's Bolts 57 
 
 Pattison's Pump 226 
 
 Pawl, Cable Grip 185 
 
 Pawl, Saladin's Friction 161 
 
 Pawls for Chains 185 
 
 Friction 159 
 
 Methods of Securing 153 
 
 Pawl, Spring 153 
 
 Pawls, Release of Friction 161 
 
 Pawl, Thrust upon 152 
 
 Pawl, Thumb Shaped 160 
 
 Pay ton's Water Meter 220 
 
 Pedestal Bearings 71 
 
 Penn's Connecting Rod End 113 
 
 Method of Securing Bolts. . 57 
 
 Piston 252 
 
 Pennsylvania Haulage Systems. . . . 174 
 
 Periodical Escapements 169 
 
 Periodical Pressure Escapements... 229 
 
 Peters' Method of Keying 102 
 
 Petit's Pipe Joint 248 
 
 Pfalz-Saarbruck Screw Thread Sys- 
 tem 53 
 
 Phoenix Column 59. 83 
 
 Physical Ratchet Tram 171 
 
 Pickering's Steam Pump 230 
 
 Pillow Blocks 68 
 
 Blocks, Adjustable 69, 70 
 
 " Block, Sellers' 70 
 
 Pillow Blocks, Large 6g 
 
 Blocks, Proportional Scale for 68 
 
 Block, Sturtevant's 70 
 
 Pin Gearing, Double 132 
 
 " Gear Teeth 132 
 
 ■' Ratchet Wheel 152 
 
 Pins, Crank. 61 
 
 Pin, Split 56 
 
 Pipe Connections, Socket 248 
 
 ' ' Coverings 243 
 
 ' ' Fittings 249 
 
 " Joint, Normandy's 249 
 
 " Petit's 248 
 
 Riedler's 249 
 
 ' ' Riveted 244 
 
 Pipes, Ball Joints for 249 
 
 Pipes, Connections for Cast Iron . . . 248 
 Connections for Wrought Iron 249 
 
 Copper 246 
 
 Flange Joints for 248 
 
 Flexible 252 
 
 for High Pressures 242 
 
 Resistance of Bends in 247 
 
 Resistance to Flow in 246 
 
 Pipe Sockets 250 
 
 Pipes, Steam 245 
 
 Pipe, Steel 243 
 
 Pipes, Thickness of Cast Iron 242 
 
 Pipe Threads, Briggs' System 250 
 
 J" Thread System, Metric 250 
 
 ' ' Weight of Cast Iron 242 
 
 ' ' Wrought Iron 243 
 
 Piston, Krauss' 252 
 
 " Packing .216, 253 
 
 " Packing, Metallic 253 
 
 " Penn's 252 
 
 Pumps 223 
 
 Rods 255 
 
 Pistons 216, 252 
 
 Piston, Swedish 253 
 
 Pistons with Valves 286 
 
 Piston Valves 286 
 
 Pitch and Face of Gearmg, Calcula- 
 tion of 144 
 
 Hoisting Gears. . 144 
 Transmission 
 
 Gears 144 
 
 Chain 183 
 
 " Circles, Table of 128 
 
 of Gear Wheels 144 
 
 Radius of Gear Wheels 128 
 
 Pivot Bearings, Flat 66 
 
 Pivots, Formula for 65 
 
 Pressure on 65 
 
 Proportions of 65 
 
 Plain Slide Valve 282 
 
 Plain Slide Valve Gear 234 
 
 Plane Gear Wheel 136 
 
 Planing Machine, Ducommun & Du- 
 
 bied's 176 
 
 Sellers 176 
 
 " Shanks' 163 
 
 Plate Coupling 95 
 
 Plungers 216, 253 
 
 Plunger Pumps 223 
 
 Pneumatic Power Distribution 257 
 
 Pneumatic Tube 227 
 
 Polar Moment of Inertia n 
 
 Polishing Belts 177 
 
 Polonceau's Connecting Rod End.. 114 
 
 Polygons, Area of 24 
 
 Poncelet's Chain 173 
 
 Poncelet's Water Wheel 220 
 
 Porter- Allen Connecting Rod 117 
 
 Porter- Allen Engine 236 
 
 Post Hangers 73 
 
 Pouyer's Coupling loi, 152, 153 
 
 Powel Valve Gear 163 
 
 Power Distribution, Compressed Air 219 
 
 " Hydraulic 219 
 
 " " Hydraulic Ring 
 
 System 256 
 
 " " Pneumatic 257 
 
 " " Steam 219 
 
 " " Systems. ■ 219 
 
 " " Vacuum 219 
 
 Power Escapements 169 
 
 Powers, (iraphical Calculation of . . . 24 
 Powers of Trigonometrical Func- 
 tions 25 
 
 Power Transmission by Superheated 
 
 Water 219 
 
 Practical Resistance. i 
 
 Precision Gears 139 
 
 Precision Ratchets 157 
 
 Prentiss' Coupling 216 
 
 Pressure Escapements for Moving 
 
 Liquids 228 
 
 on Gear Teeth 146 
 
 " Journals 61 
 
 '■ Lift Valves 277 
 
 Pivots 65 
 
 Screw Threads 58 
 
 ^^ Organs 216 
 
 Conductors for 242 
 
 " Conduits for 216 
 
 " Escapements for... 226 
 
 " Guiding by 216 
 
 " Guide Mechanism 
 
 for 217 
 
 " Motors for 219 
 
 " Ratchet Mechanism 
 
 for 223 
 
 " Reservoirs for. .218, 260 
 ■' Running Mechanism 
 
 for 219 
 
 ' ■ Technological Appli- 
 cations of 250 
 
 Superficial i 
 
 Transmission, Specific Ca- 
 pacity of 255 
 
 Proof Diagrams of Axles 87 
 
 Propeller Bearing, Raven hill & 
 
 Hodgson's 74 
 
 Jet.. 223 
 
 Lifting Frame for 151 
 
 ' ' Screw 223 
 
 " Shafts, Couplings for 95 
 
 Propelling Chain ; 185 
 
 Proportions of Axles 85 
 
 Chain. 183 
 
 " Flange Joints 59 
 
 Hooks 184 
 
 " Journals 61 
 
 Pivots 65 
 
 Pulleys 193 
 
 Propulsion, Marine 222 
 
 Prussian Standard Car Bearing 75 
 
 Pulley Block, Weston's Differential. 174 
 
 " by Walker Mfg. Co 193 
 
 Diameter, Influence on Wire 
 
 Rope 197 
 
 ' ' Fowler's Clamp 203 
 
 Medart 193 
 
 Pulleys, Balancing of 194 
 
 " Cone. 189 
 
 " Construction of Rope 202 
 
 Crown of Face 186 
 
 " Double Arm 193 
 
 Guide 186 
 
 " Fast and Loose 188 
 
 for Cable, Arrangement of . 202 
 
 Proportions of 193 
 
 " Split 193 
 
 Pulley Stations, Construction of . . 204 
 
 Pulleys, Tightening 186 
 
 Pulley, Sturtevant's 194 
 
 Pulleys, Umbrella 207 
 
 Pulleys, Vertical Supporting 188 
 
 Pulsometer 232 
 
 Pump, Althaus' 223 
 
 Amos & Smyth's 224 
 
 " Bag 217 
 
 Bellows 217 
 
 Diaphragm 217 
 
 Donnadieu's 223 
 
 Downton's 224 
 
 Friedmann's Jet 222 
 
 Gears, Adjustable 236 
 
 Greindl's 221 
 
 Engine, Kley's . . , 223 
 
ALPHABETICAL IXDEX. 
 
 309 
 
 Ptimping Engine, Worthington's 
 
 High Duty 232 
 
 Pumping Machinery 229 
 
 Pump, Mazelline's Duplex 231 
 
 Muschenbroeck's 233 
 
 Norton's 225 
 
 " Pattison's 226 
 
 " Pistons 253 
 
 Pistons, Packing for 255 
 
 Regulator, Helfenberger's . 236 
 
 Repsold's 221 
 
 Rittinger's 223 
 
 Pumps, Centrifugal 222 
 
 Considered as Ratchet 
 
 Trains 223 
 
 Double Acting ... . 224 
 
 Pump, Siemen's Geyser. 222 
 
 Pumps, Oscillating 226 
 
 Pump, Spiral 221 
 
 Pumps, Piston 223 
 
 Plunger 223 
 
 Rotary 226 
 
 Stolz's 224 
 
 Pump, Stone's 224 
 
 " Valve Gear 225 
 
 Valves, Riedler's 278 
 
 Vose's 224 
 
 Worthington's Duplex 231 
 
 QUADRANTS i53 
 
 Quadrilateral Figures, Area of 25 
 
 Quarter Twist Belts 186 
 
 Quarter Twist Belt, Shifter for 189 
 
 RACK, RATCHET . 151 
 
 Rack Teeth, Evolute. . . 132 
 
 Railway Axles 88 
 
 Ramsbottom's Crane 176 
 
 Ramsbottom's Friction Clutch, 99 
 
 Ratchet, Anchor ■ i55 
 
 Brace, Weston's i54 
 
 Clamp 160 
 
 " Crown 154 
 
 Cylinder 156 
 
 Dobo's 160 
 
 Gearing 150 
 
 Cylinder 156 
 
 " " Dimensions of Parts 
 
 of 158 
 
 Gears, Toothed Running. . 150 
 
 " Lagarousse 164 
 
 " Mechanism for Pressure 
 
 Organs. ..... 223 
 
 " " General Re- 
 
 marks upon 171 
 Kinematically 
 Discussed.. 171 
 
 Rack 151 
 
 Rod Friction 163 
 
 Ratchets, Checking 150 
 
 Continuous 150 
 
 " Continuous Running 164 
 
 " Double Friction 160 
 
 Friction 158 
 
 General Form of Toothed 158 
 
 " Locking 150, 166 
 
 Multiple 154 
 
 " of Precision 157 
 
 Releasing 150, 162 
 
 " Running 150 
 
 " Running Friction 158 
 
 Silent 153 
 
 Spring 153 
 
 " Stationary i 50, 156 
 
 Stationary Friction 161 
 
 Step 155 
 
 Step Anchor 157 
 
 Throttle 161 
 
 " with Locking Teeth, Con- 
 tinuous 165 
 
 Teeth, Flanks of 153 
 
 " Teeth, Form of 150 
 
 •' Tension Organs 185 
 
 Tooth, Dead 152 
 
 Train, Physical 171 
 
 Ratchets, Trains, Chemical 171 
 
 Wheels, Internal 151 
 
 Wheels, Special Forms... 154 
 
 Wilber's 153 
 
 Ravenhill & Hodgson, Propeller 
 
 Bearing 74 
 
 Ravenhill & Hodgson, Thrust Bear- 
 ing by 77 
 
 Reciprocating Valve Gears 234 
 
 Regulator, Guhrauer & Wagner's.. 237 
 
 Regulator, Rigg's 236 
 
 Reichenbach's Water Pressure En- 
 gine 229 
 
 Releasing Ratchets 150, 162 
 
 Releasing Valve Gears 162 
 
 Release of Friction Pawls 161 
 
 Rennie, Experiments on Journals. . . 64 
 
 Repeating Watches 169 
 
 Repsold's Chamber Gear Train 220 
 
 Repsold's Pump 221 
 
 Reservoirs for Air and Gas 272 
 
 for Gases 219 
 
 for Pressure Organs. 218, 260 
 
 Natural 218 
 
 " Negative 219 
 
 Resistance, Coefficients of i 
 
 ' ' Modulus of I 
 
 of Bends in Pipes 247 
 
 " of Valves in Pipes 247 
 
 " Practical i 
 
 Theoretical i 
 
 " to Bending 2 
 
 " Buckling 13 
 
 Flow in Pipes 246 
 
 Shearing 2 
 
 Torsion 11 
 
 Resultant of Isolated Forces 29 
 
 Load on Water Wheel 
 determ'd Graphically. 34 
 
 Several Forces 26 
 
 Return Crank 105 
 
 Return Crank, Graphostatic Calcu- 
 lation for 105 
 
 Reuleaux's Coupling 96 
 
 Escapement 168 
 
 Friction Clutch 100 
 
 System of Rope 'Trans- 
 mission 206 
 
 " Valve Diagram 234 
 
 " Winding Drum 173 
 
 Reversing Gear, Globoid 143 
 
 Revolver, Mauser 1 65, 166 
 
 Rhenish Railway Cable 174 
 
 Ribbed Axles 91 
 
 Rib Profiles, Construction of gi 
 
 Richard's Manometer 288 
 
 Rider's Valve Gear. 236 
 
 Riedler's Air Compressors 279 
 
 Pipe Joint 249 
 
 Valve Gear 278 
 
 Riggenbach's Cable System 174 
 
 Riggenbach's Hauling System 172 
 
 Rigg's Regulator 236 
 
 Rigid Couplings 95 
 
 Rim of Gear Wheel 149 
 
 Ring System of Cable Transmis- 
 sion 208-211 
 
 Rittinger's Pump 223 
 
 Riveted Joints, Construction of An- 
 gles 44 
 
 " Junction of Plates . . 43 
 " Proportional Scale 
 
 for 41 
 
 Reinforcement of 
 
 Plates 44 
 
 Special Forms 43 
 
 " Strength of 40 
 
 Table of 40 
 
 Pipe 244 
 
 " Pipes, Flanges for 249 
 
 Rivet Heads, Proportions of 39 
 
 Riveting 39 
 
 Boiler 42 
 
 Group 41 
 
 Machine 39 
 
 Mackay & McGeorge iii 
 
 Riveting Machine, Tweddell's Hy- 
 
 draulic 
 
 Riveting, Speed of 
 
 Rivets 
 
 Robinson's Experiments on L 
 
 Valves. 
 
 Robertson's Friction Wheels 
 
 Rock Arms 
 
 Rock Drill, Githen's 
 
 Rod Connection, Wiedenbruck's. . 
 
 Rod, Friction Ratchet 
 
 Rods, Connecting 
 
 Rolled Shafting 
 
 Roller Bearing, Cambon's 
 
 " Bearings for Sheaves 
 
 Roof Trusses, Force Plans for 
 
 " Truss, Polygonal 
 
 " with Simple Principals 
 
 " with Trussed Principals 
 
 Root's Blower 
 
 Roots, Extraction of 
 
 Rope, Centrifugal Force of Wire 
 
 Connections 
 
 " Cotton 
 
 Cross Section of Wire 
 
 Curve, Construction of 
 
 Hanger, Osterkamp's 
 
 ' ' Hangers 
 
 Hemp 
 
 Influence of Pulley Diameter 
 
 Ropes of Organic Fibres 
 
 Rope Pulleys, Construction of 
 
 Ropes, Creep of 
 
 " Deflection of Wire 
 
 " Flat ....178, 
 
 Loss from StifEness 
 
 Rope, Specific Capacity of Wire .... 
 
 Rope Splice.... 
 
 Ropes, Stiffness of.' 
 
 Tightened Driving 
 
 Ziegler's Experiments on. . . 
 
 Rope Transmission 
 
 at Bellegarde. . . . 
 
 " at Freiburg 
 
 " at St. Petersburg 
 
 at Schaffhausen. 
 
 at Zurich 
 
 Cotton 
 
 " " Cross Section for 
 
 Hemp 
 
 " " Efficiency of.... 
 
 " " Loss in Hemp. . . 
 
 Reuleaux's Sys- 
 
 1 of.. 
 
 " Specific Capacity 
 
 of Hemp '. ] 
 
 Wire ] 
 
 Weight of Hemp : 
 
 " Wire ] 
 
 Rotary Pumps : 
 
 Valves. 2 
 
 Valve, Wilson's ; 
 
 Rotative Motors, Adjustable Gears 
 
 for.. 
 
 Pressure Engines j 
 
 ' ' Valve Gears 2 
 
 Round Connecting Rods i 
 
 Round Valves 2 
 
 Roux's Water Pressure Engine 2 
 
 Rubber Springs 
 
 Rubber Springs, Werder's Experi- 
 ments 
 
 Running Chains i 
 
 Friction Ratchets 158,1 
 
 *' Mechanism for Lifting 
 
 Water 2 
 
 " Mechanism for Pressure 
 
 Organs 2 
 
 Ratchet Gears, Toothed. . i 
 
 Ratchets i 
 
 Ratchet Trains, Fluid 2 
 
 Tension Organs i 
 
 Rupp's Variable Speed Gear \ 
 
 Rupture, Modulus of 
 
31C 
 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 SAFETY, COEFFICIENT OF.. .. i 
 
 Safety Devices lor Elevators 164 
 
 Safety, Factor of i 
 
 Sail Boat 223 
 
 St. Petersburg, Rope Transmission at 205 
 
 St. Louis Bridge 60 
 
 Saint Venant, Friction of Water.... 247 
 
 Saladin's Friction Pawl 161 
 
 Sanderson's Gas Meter 239 
 
 San Francisco Cable Tramways. ... 174 
 Saxby & Farmer, Signal Apparatus. 166 
 
 Saw, Zervas" Wire 177 
 
 Saws, Band ■ i77 
 
 Scale Beams 1 1 1 
 
 Schaffhausen, Rope Transmission at 204 
 
 Schiele Turbine 220 
 
 Schmick's Canal Cable System 175 
 
 Schmid's Water Meter 240 
 
 Schmid's Water Pressure Engine. . 236 
 
 Schurman's Clutch loi 
 
 Schurman's Friction Coupling 215 
 
 Screw, Archimedian 221 
 
 Connections 58 
 
 " Propeller 223 
 
 " Propeller, Lifting Frame for 151 
 
 Propellers, Built up 57 
 
 ". Propellers, Method of Keying 49 
 
 Screws, Enlarged 58 
 
 Screw Thread, Construction of . . ... 50 
 
 " " Dimensions of V 50 
 
 Friction of 51 
 
 " Pressure on 58 
 
 " Threads, Special Forms of . .. 57 
 
 " Threads, Trapezoidal 58 
 
 Section of Gear Teeth 144 
 
 Section Modulus 5. 7. n 
 
 Sections of Uniform Resistance. ... 8 
 
 Secured Bolts 57 
 
 Securing Keys, Methods of 50 
 
 Segner s Water Wheel 220 
 
 Self Guiding Belting 186 
 
 Seller's Coupling 96 
 
 " Friction Feed 126 
 
 ' ' Hanger 74 
 
 " Pillow Block 70 
 
 Planing Machine 176 
 
 Screw Thread System 52 
 
 " AVall Bearing 71 
 
 Sewage System of Berlin • 219 
 
 Sewing Machine Check 151 
 
 Shafting 92 
 
 Deflection of 94 
 
 " Dimensions of 92 
 
 Examples of Torsion in 94 
 
 " Graphical Calculation of . . . 94 
 
 Journals for 94 
 
 " Line 93 
 
 Rolled 94 
 
 Specific Capacity of 257 
 
 " Torsional Deflection of 92 
 
 Wooden. 94 
 
 Wrought Iron 93 
 
 Shank's Planing Machine 163 
 
 Sharp's Coupling 96 
 
 Sharp's Strap End 112 
 
 Shearing, Resistance to 2, 10 
 
 Shearing Strain 2 
 
 Sheaves, Chain 1S5, 211 
 
 Sheaves, Roller Bearings for 179 
 
 Shield Gearing 133 
 
 Shifter for Quarter Twist Belt 189 
 
 Shifters, Belt.... 188 
 
 Shifting Eccentrics 235 
 
 Short Spaa Cable Transmissions. . . . 200 
 
 Shrinkage, Hooping by 45 
 
 Shrinking Fit 17 
 
 Fits, made with Boiling 
 
 Water 47 
 
 Rings, Clerk's Method. . . 45 
 
 " Temperatures 45 
 
 Sickles' Adjustable Valve Gear 237 
 
 Sickles' Valve Gear 162 
 
 Side Wheel Steam Boat 223 
 
 Siemens & Halske, Electric Signals. 166 
 
 Siemens' Alcohol Meter 239 
 
 Siemens' Geyser Pump 222 
 
 Signal Apparatus, Saxby & Farmer. 166 
 
 Silent Ratchets 153 
 
 Simple Crank Axle 106 
 
 Simple Escapements 167 
 
 Single Acting Steam Engine 229 
 
 Single Tooth Gears 165 
 
 Sinoide gi 
 
 Sinoide, Cycloidal 13 
 
 Siphon, Direct 2S7 
 
 Siphon, Inverted ... .244, 2S7 
 
 Slide Valve, Common 225 
 
 Gear, Plain 234 
 
 Lap of 225 
 
 " Murdock's 234 
 
 " Valves 223,273,281,282 
 
 Valves, Balanced 285 
 
 Sliding Brakes 215 
 
 Sliding Crank 226 
 
 Slipper Cross Head 121 
 
 Sluice Gates at Geneva 275 
 
 Sluice Valve 281 
 
 Snail 169 
 
 Solid End for Connecting Rod . 113 
 
 Special Forms of Bearings 74 
 
 of Bolts . 55 
 
 " of Ratchet Wheels. . . 154 
 of Screw Threads. . . 58 
 
 Specific Cajjacity of Belting 190 
 
 " of Driving Chains. 211 
 " " of Hemp Rope 
 
 Transmission.. . 195 
 " " of Pressure Trans- 
 missions 255 
 
 of Shafting 257 
 
 " " of Wire Rope 196 
 
 Speed Gear, Variable 124 
 
 Spencer & Inglis Valve Gear 262 
 
 Spherical Cycloid 135 
 
 " Journal, Connection for . . 115 
 
 " Spiral 142 
 
 Valves 275 
 
 Spiral Bevel Gears 141 
 
 Gears 138 
 
 " " Double, 141 
 
 " Examples of 140 
 
 " Teeth, Friction of 140 
 
 Gears, Globoid 142 
 
 " Pump _ 221 
 
 Spherical ". 142 
 
 Winding Drums 181 
 
 Wire Pipe 252 
 
 Spinning Mule 369, 196 
 
 Splice for Ropes 181 
 
 Split Pin _ 56 
 
 " Pulley, Goodwin's 194 
 
 " Pulleys 193 
 
 Spring, Dudley's 20 
 
 Pawl 153 
 
 " Ratchets 153 
 
 Springs, Best Material for 20 
 
 " Calculation of 18 
 
 Table of ... .18-19 
 
 Vulcanized Rubber 21 
 
 Spur Gear Teeth, Construction of . . 128 
 
 Squaring Device for Cranes 172 
 
 Square Thread 40 
 
 Standing Tension Organs 172 
 
 Stand Pipes 287 
 
 Statical Moment 3 
 
 Statical Moment, Graphically Con- 
 sidered 33 
 
 Starting Valve 281 
 
 Star Pin 153 
 
 Stationary Chains 182 
 
 " Friction Ratchets 161 
 
 Machine Elements 289 
 
 Ratchets 150, 156 
 
 Valves 289 
 
 vSteam Boat, Side Wheel 223 
 
 Boilers 265 
 
 Distribution of Power 257 
 
 Engine, Single Acting Steam 229 
 
 Pipes 245 
 
 " Power Distribution 219 
 
 Pump, Blakes 240. 
 
 " Deane's 230 
 
 Steam Pump, Pickering's 230 
 
 Tangye's 230 
 
 Steering Gear 238 
 
 " Trap, Kirchweger's 228 
 
 Steel Pipe 243 
 
 Steering Gear 171 
 
 " Britton's. 238 
 
 " Davis & Co.'s 238 
 
 " Douglas & Coulson's. 238 
 " Dunning & Bossiere's 238 
 
 " Hastie's 23S 
 
 " " Hydraulic 237 
 
 " Steam 238 
 
 Steib's Ventilator. 222 
 
 Step Anchor Ratchet 156 
 
 ' ' Bearings 75 
 
 " Bearing, Support for 80 
 
 " Bearings, Wall 75 
 
 " Gearing 141 
 
 Stephenson's Link Motion 235 
 
 Stepped Bevel Gears ; 141 
 
 Step Ratchets ' 155 
 
 Step Valves 276 
 
 Stovart, Experiments on Springs. . . 21 
 
 Stiffness of Belts 194 
 
 of Ropes iSi 
 
 " " Eytelwein's For- 
 mula 181 
 
 " " Loss from 196 
 
 Weisbach's For- 
 mula 181 
 
 " Wire Rope 206 
 
 Stolz"s Pump 224 
 
 Stone's Pump 224 
 
 Stop, Geneva 165 
 
 Storage Reservoirs, General 273 
 
 Strain, Shearing 2 
 
 Strains of Flexure 3 
 
 vStrap Brakes '211, 215 
 
 Brakes, Internal 215 
 
 End for Connecting Rod 112 
 
 " End, Sharp's 112 
 
 Straps, Eccentric 115 
 
 Strength of Cast Iron Columns 83 
 
 of Materials 1-21 
 
 of Wire Rope 179 
 
 Tensile i 
 
 Stress Curve 87 
 
 Stresses, Compound 13 
 
 " in Columns 82 
 
 ' ' on Keys 48 
 
 Stress on Belting 191 
 
 on Gear Teeth 145 
 
 " on Journals 61 
 
 " S, Value of 8 
 
 Striking Mechanism for Clocks 169 
 
 Stub End, for Fork Journal 114 
 
 Stuffing Boxes 253 
 
 Box, Farcot's 254 
 
 Box, Friction in 254 
 
 Sturtevant's Hanger Boxes 74 
 
 Pillow Block 70 
 
 Pulley 194 
 
 Superficial Pressure i 
 
 Superheated Water Transmission ... 219 
 
 Supporting Pulleys, Vertical 188 
 
 Supports for Bearings 79 
 
 General Prin- 
 ciples 82 
 
 " Simple 79 
 
 Supporting Power of Beams 5 
 
 Swedish Piston 253 
 
 Swedish Railway, Boilers for 272 
 
 Sweet's Valve Gear 235 
 
 Swivels. 182 
 
 Swivels for Chain 184 
 
 Symmetrical Simple Axles 83 
 
 TABLE OF BEAM SECTIONS. 5, 6, 7 
 Tables of Curves, Areas and Vol- 
 umes 291-296 
 
 Table of Numbers 300-301 
 
 Tackle Block 172 
 
 Tangential Pressure on Crank Pin . . 233 
 
 Tangye's Crane 176 
 
 Tangye's Steam Pump 230 
 
Tanks, Cast Iron 260 
 
 Combination Forms for 264 
 
 " Intze's Discussion of 260-264 
 
 " Oil 218 
 
 With Concave Bottoms 262 
 
 " Wrought Iron 260 
 
 Taper of Keys 47 
 
 Technological Applications of Pres- 
 sure Organs 240 
 
 Technological Applications of Ten- 
 sion Organs i77 
 
 Tenacity. ■ i 
 
 Tensile Strength i 
 
 Tension Organs 172 
 
 for Driving 173 
 
 for Guiding 172 
 
 " " for Winding 172 
 
 " Ratchet 185 
 
 " " Running 172 
 
 Technological Appli- 
 cations of 177 
 
 ' ' Resistance to 2 
 
 Tests for Chain 183 
 
 T Fittings 251 
 
 Theoretical Resistance i 
 
 Thickness of Cast Iron Pipes 242 
 
 Thick Vessels, Walls of 16 
 
 Thomas' Calculating Machine. .153, 146 
 
 Thometzek's Valve 276 
 
 Thomson's Turbine 220 
 
 Three-part Bearings 70 
 
 Throttle Valves 161 
 
 Throttle Vaves 279 
 
 Thrust Bearing by James Watt & Co. 77 
 
 " by Maudslay 77 
 
 " " by Penn 77 
 
 " " by Ravenhill & 
 
 Hodgspn 77 
 
 " Compound Link as 67 
 
 " Bearings 65, 68, 75 
 
 Collar 66 
 
 Examples of 78 
 
 " Multiple Collar 66 
 
 with Wooden Sur- 
 face 76 
 
 upon the Pawl 152 
 
 Thumb Shaped Pawl 160 
 
 Thumb Shaped Teeth 134 
 
 Tiede's Escapement 168 
 
 Tightened Cables, Table for 200 
 
 Tightened Driving Ropes 200 
 
 Tightening Pulleys 186 
 
 Tightening Pulley, Weaver's . . .... 186 
 
 Toggle Friction Brake . 162 
 
 Tools, Hydraulic 218 
 
 Toothed Gearing 127 
 
 Tooth Friction in Spur Gearing. . . . 134 
 " Outlines, General Solution of 129 
 
 Mixed . 133 
 
 of Circular Arcs. . . 131 
 
 Torpedo, Fish 171 
 
 Torsional Deflection of Shafting. . . 92 
 Torsion, Determination of Angle of 93 
 
 Resistance to 11 
 
 Table 12 
 
 Uniform Resistance to. .. . 13 
 
 Towne Crane 176 
 
 Transformer, Hydraulic 218 
 
 Tranforming Arm Sections, Table for 103 
 Transmission at Long Distance, 
 
 Fluid 233 
 
 " Chain 211 
 
 Gears 144 
 
 Long Distance Power. 259 
 
 Modulus of 208 
 
 Rope 194 
 
 With Inclined Cable. . . 200 
 Transportation, Fluid Escapement 
 
 ment for 227 
 
 Transporting Belts 221 
 
 Trapezoidal Screw Threads 51, 58 
 
 Trap, Water 287 
 
 Triangles, Area of 23 
 
 Trick's Valve 284 
 
 Trigger, Hair 153 
 
 Trigonometrical Forraulee 299 
 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 Trgionometrical Functions, Powers 
 
 of 25 
 
 Table ... .297-299 
 
 Trussed Beams, Double 35 
 
 Simple 35 
 
 Triple 35 
 
 Tubing, Levasseur's Metallic 252 
 
 Tumbling Gears 163 
 
 Turbine, Borda's 220 
 
 Cadiat 220 
 
 Fourneyron . 220 
 
 Francis 220 
 
 Girard 220 
 
 Nagel 220 
 
 Schiele . . 220 
 
 Thomson's 220 
 
 Tweddell's Accumulator 265 
 
 Tweddell's Hydraulic Riveter 228 
 
 Twin Link 184 
 
 Twisting Moments, Graphically Con- 
 sidered 33 
 
 Tympanon of Archimedes 221 
 
 UHLHORN'S COUPLING. . . .101, 153 
 
 Umbrella Pulley 207 
 
 Uniform Escapements 167 
 
 Uniformly Distributed Forces 32 
 
 Uniform Resistance, Columns of . .. 13 
 Sections of . . . . 8 
 to Bending. .. . 8 
 to Torsion. ... 13 
 
 Strength, Bodies of 2 
 
 Universal Gears, Beylich's. 136 
 
 Universal Joint 97 
 
 Unloaded Bolt Connections 60 
 
 Unloaded Keys 49 
 
 Unperiodic Power Escapements for 
 Pressure organs 227 
 
 VALVE, ALLAN'S DOUBLE.... 283 
 Armstrong's Supported. . 286 
 
 Bell ■ .. 276 
 
 Boulton & Watt's Bal- 
 anced 285 
 
 Brandau's Double Seated. 286 
 
 Cave's Balanced 285 
 
 Corliss 236' 
 
 Cornish 280 
 
 Cramer's Balanced . 
 Cuvelier's Underpi 
 
 Double Beat 280 
 
 " D 283 
 
 Flap 274 
 
 Diagram, Reuleaux's. ... . 234 
 
 Zeuner's. 234 
 
 Gear, Angstrom's 235 
 
 Brown's. ... 235 
 
 " Call & Co 162 
 
 Cam 236 
 
 Corliss. ... 162 
 
 Cornish 163 
 
 " " for Pumps 225 
 
 " Harlow's 231 
 
 Hofmann's. 163 
 
 " King's 235 
 
 Marshall's. 235 
 
 Plain Slide 234 
 
 " " Powel 163 
 
 Rider's 236 
 
 " Gears for Rotative En- 
 gines 234 
 
 " " Reciprocating 234 
 
 Releasing 162 
 
 Rotative 234 
 
 Gear, Sweet's 235 
 
 Gear, Wannich 162 
 
 Globe 279 
 
 Gridiron 283 
 
 Hick's Double 283 
 
 Injector 279 
 
 Kirchweger's Balanced .. . 285 
 
 Lindner's Balanced 285 
 
 Plain Slide 225, 282 
 
 Porter-Allen 2S7 
 
 Rubber Disk 274 
 
 Valves 279 
 
 3ii 
 
 Valves, Balanced 279 
 
 Valves, Balanced Slide 285 
 
 Valve, Schaltenbrand's Double Seat- 
 ed 286 
 
 Valves, Check 274 
 
 Closing Pressure of 278 
 
 Conical 275 
 
 " Considered as Pawls. . . .223, 273 
 
 Flap 274 
 
 Flat Disk 275 
 
 Fluid 287 
 
 Gate 282 
 
 Gidding's Experiments on . . 285 
 
 Lift 223, 273 
 
 Mechanically Actuated 278 
 
 Multiple 276 
 
 Piston 286 
 
 " Resistance of 247 
 
 Robinson's Experiments on. 277 
 
 Rotary 281 
 
 Round 275 
 
 Slide 225, 273, 281 
 
 " Spherical 275 
 
 Valve, Starting 282 
 
 Valves, Stationary 289 
 
 Step 276 
 
 Throttle 279 
 
 Unbalanced Pressure on Lift 277 
 
 Valve, Sweet's Balanced 287 
 
 Valves, Width of Seat 274 
 
 Valve, Thometzek's 276 
 
 " Trick's ■ 274 
 
 " Wilson's Balanced 287 
 
 Wilson's Rotary 286 
 
 Value of Stress S 8 
 
 Vacuum Power Distribution 219 
 
 Variable Speed Gear 124 
 
 Variable Speed Gear, Rupp's 124 
 
 Velocity Curves 233 
 
 Ventilator, Fabry's 221 ' 
 
 Lemielle's 82 
 
 Steib's .... 222 
 
 Verge Escapement 168 
 
 Volume, Escapements for Measure- 
 ment of 239 
 
 Von Gerike's Air Pump 225 
 
 Vose's Pump 224 
 
 V Screw Thread 50 
 
 WALKER MFG. CO., PULLEY 
 
 by •••■■ 194 
 
 Walking Beams no 
 
 Wall Bearings 68, 71 
 
 " Bearing, Support for 79 
 
 ' ' Bearing, Sellers' 71 
 
 ' ' Brackets 72 
 
 Walls of Vessels, Resistance of 15 
 
 Wall Step Bearings 75 
 
 Wannich Valve Gear 162 
 
 Washers 54 
 
 Watches, Repeating 169 
 
 Water Counterbalance, Oeking's. .. 217 
 
 " Meter, Jopling's 239 
 
 Kennedy's 239 
 
 " " Payton's 220 
 
 Schmid's 240 
 
 Pressure Engine, Belidor's.. 229 
 Reichen- 
 
 bach's. . 229 
 Roux's. . . . 229 
 Schmid's.. 236 
 Reservoir, of Frankfurt on 
 
 Main 218 
 
 Rod Connection 233 
 
 Running Mechanism for Lift- 
 ing 222 
 
 " Trap 287 
 
 Trap, Morrison, Ingram & Co. 288 
 
 " Wheel, Poncelet's 220 
 
 Wheel, Resultant of Load on 34 
 
 Wheels, Axles for 91 
 
 Wheel, Segner's 220 
 
 Wheels, Gravity 219 
 
 " Wheels, Impact. 220 
 
 Watt's Condenser 230 
 
 Wear on Gear Teeth 134 
 
312 
 
 A LP HA BE TIC A L INDEX. 
 
 Wear on Hemp Rope ig6 
 
 Weaver's Tightening Pulley iS6 
 
 Wedge Friction Wheels. 125, 160 
 
 Weighing Machine, Emery's 173 
 
 Weight of Cast Iron Pipe 242 
 
 of Chain 1S3 
 
 of Gear Wheels 150 
 
 of Hemp Rope 17S 
 
 of Round Iron 55 
 
 Sheet Metal 43 
 
 of Wire Rope iSo 
 
 Weir, Camere's 275 
 
 Weisbach, Formula for Friction of 
 
 Water 246 
 
 Weisbach's Formula for Stiffness of 
 
 Ropes iSi 
 
 Werder, Experiments on Springs. . . 21 
 Weston's Differential Pulley Block. 173 
 
 Friction Clutch loi 
 
 Ratchet Brace 154 
 
 Wet Gas Meter 239 
 
 Wheels, Classification of 122 
 
 Whip Action of Connecting Rod. . . 116 
 Whitehead Torpedo 237 
 
 Whitworth's Screw System 
 
 Whitworth's Pipe Thread Scale 
 
 Wiedenbruck's Rod Connection 
 
 Wilber's Ratchet 
 
 Wilson's Rotary Valve 
 
 Wilson's Water Gas Furnace 
 
 Winding Drum, Reuleaux's 
 
 Drums, Spiral 
 
 Tension Organs for 
 
 Windlass 
 
 Brown's 
 
 Differential 
 
 Windmills 
 
 Wind Stresses, Graphically Deter- 
 mined 
 
 Wire Rope 
 
 " Influence of Weight. . . . 
 
 " Load Length of 
 
 " Strength of 
 
 " Transmission 
 
 " Weight of 
 
 " Saw, Zervas' 
 
 Wooden Axles, Proportions of 
 
 Wooden Shafting 
 
 Worm and Worm Wheel j-g 
 
 Gearing, Globoid i^j 
 
 Hawkins j,, 
 
 Jensen's j ,, 
 
 Worthington High Duty Pumping 
 
 Engine ^ 
 
 Worthmgton's Duplex Pump 231 
 
 Worthington's Equalizer 232 
 
 Wrapping Connections 173 
 
 Wrenches 50 
 
 Wrought Iron Cranks, Single .' .' .... 104 
 
 Pipe 243 
 
 " " Shafting 93 
 
 Walking Beams u i 
 
 YALE LOCK 167 
 
 Yoke Bearings 72 
 
 ZERVAS' WIRE SAW 177 
 
 Zeuner's Valve Diagram 234 
 
 Zimmermann's Belt Shifter 189 
 
 Zuppinger's Water Wheel 219 
 
 Zurich, Rope Transmission at 205 
 
 ^^^r'2l